6-K

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, DC 20549

FORM 6-K

REPORT OF FOREIGN PRIVATE ISSUER

PURSUANT TO RULE 13A-16 OR 15D-16

UNDER THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

March 18, 2016

Barclays PLC  

(Names of Registrant)

1 Churchill Place

London E14 5HP

England

(Address of Principal Executive Offices)

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant files or will file annual reports

under cover of Form 20-F or Form 40-F.

Form 20-F x            Form 40-F

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is submitting the Form 6-K

in paper as permitted by Regulation S-T Rule 101(b)(1):____

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is submitting the Form 6-K

in paper as permitted by Regulation S-T Rule 101(b)(7):____


EXHIBIT INDEX

 

Exhibit
No.
    Description
  1        Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015
  2        Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015
  3        Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015
  4        Barclays PLC Notice of Annual General Meeting 2016
  5        Barclays PLC Proxy Cards

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, each of the registrants has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.

 

   BARCLAYS PLC
   (Registrant)  
Date: March 18, 2016     
  

By: /s/ Patrick Gonsalves

 

    

 

 

Patrick Gonsalves

  

Deputy Company Secretary of             Barclays PLC

 


 

 

LOGO

   Return to stability

 

 

         

Barclays PLC

Annual Report 2015


How do I use this document?

The diagram below maps the structure

and flow of the Annual Report.

 

 

    

 

 

LOGO

 

Notes

The term Barclays or Group refers to Barclays PLC together with its subsidiaries. Unless otherwise stated, the income statement analysis compares the year ended 31 December 2015 to the corresponding 12 months of 2014 and balance sheet analysis as at 31 December 2015 with comparatives relating to 31 December 2014. The abbreviations ‘£m’ and ‘£bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of Pounds Sterling respectively; the abbreviations ‘$m’ and ‘$bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of US Dollars respectively; and the abbreviations ‘m’ and ‘bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of Euros respectively.

Comparatives pre Q214 have been restated to reflect the implementation of the Group structure changes and the reallocation of elements of the Head Office results under the revised business structure. These restatements were detailed in our announcement on 10 July 2014, accessible at home.barclays/barclays-investor-relations/results-and-reports

References throughout this document to ‘provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange’ mean ‘provisions held for certain aspects of ongoing investigations involving certain authorities and litigation including Foreign Exchange.’

Adjusted profit before tax, adjusted attributable profit and adjusted performance metrics have been presented to provide a more consistent basis for comparing business performance between periods. Adjusting items are considered to be significant but not representative of the underlying business performance. Items excluded from the adjusted measures are: the impact of own credit; provisions for UK customer redress; gain on US Lehman acquisition assets; provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange; losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses; impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed; revision of Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) valuation methodology; and gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability. As management reviews adjusting items at a Group level, results by business, Core and Non-Core are presented excluding these items. The reconciliation of adjusted to statutory performance is done at a Group level only.

Relevant terms that are used in this document but are not defined under applicable regulatory guidance or International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) are explained in the Results glossary that can be accessed at home.barclays/results

The information in this announcement, which was approved by the Board of Directors on 29 February 2016, does not comprise statutory accounts within the meaning of Section 434 of the Companies Act 2006. Statutory accounts for the year ended 31 December 2015, which included certain information required for the Joint Annual Report on Form 20-F of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC to the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) and which contained an unqualified audit report under Section 495 of the Companies Act 2006 (which did not make any statements under Section 498 of the Companies Act 2006) have been delivered to the Registrar of Companies in accordance with Section 441 of the Companies Act 2006.

These results will be furnished as a Form 20-F to the SEC as soon as practicable following their publication. Once furnished with the SEC, copies of the Form 20-F will also be available from the Barclays Investor Relations website at home.barclays/investorrelations and from the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov

Barclays is a frequent issuer in the debt capital markets and regularly meets with investors via formal road-shows and other ad hoc meetings. Consistent with its usual practice, Barclays expects that from time to time over the coming quarter it will meet with investors globally to discuss these results and other matters relating to the Group.

Forward-looking statements

This document contains certain forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 21E of the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and Section 27A of the US Securities Act of 1933, as amended, with respect to the Group. Barclays cautions readers that no forward-looking statement is a guarantee of future performance and that actual results or other financial condition or performance measures could differ materially from those contained in the forward-looking statements. These forward-looking statements can be identified by the fact that they do not relate only to historical or current facts. Forward-looking statements sometimes use words such as ‘may’, ‘will’, ‘seek’, ‘continue’, ‘aim’, ‘anticipate’, ‘target’, ‘projected’, ‘expect’, ‘estimate’, ‘intend’, ‘plan’, ‘goal’, ‘believe’, ‘achieve’ or other words of similar meaning. Examples of forward-looking statements include, among others, statements regarding the Group’s future financial position, income growth, assets, impairment charges and provisions, business strategy, capital, leverage and other regulatory ratios, payment of dividends (including dividend pay-out ratios), projected levels of growth in the banking and financial markets, projected costs or savings,

original and revised commitments and targets in connection with the strategic cost programme and the Group Strategy Update, rundown of assets and businesses within Barclays Non-Core, estimates of capital expenditures and plans and objectives for future operations, projected employee numbers and other statements that are not historical fact. By their nature, forward-looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to future events and circumstances. These may be affected by changes in legislation, the development of standards and interpretations under IFRS, evolving practices with regard to the interpretation and application of accounting and regulatory standards, the outcome of current and future legal proceedings and regulatory investigations, future levels of conduct provisions, the policies and actions of governmental and regulatory authorities, geopolitical risks and the impact of competition. In addition, factors including (but not limited to) the following may have an effect: capital, leverage and other regulatory rules (including with regard to the future structure of the Group) applicable to past, current and future periods; United Kingdom (UK), United States (US), Africa, Eurozone and global macroeconomic and business conditions; the effects of continued volatility in credit markets; market related risks such as changes in interest rates and foreign exchange rates; effects of changes in valuation of credit market exposures; changes in valuation of issued securities; volatility in capital markets; changes in credit ratings of any entities within the Group or any securities issued by such entities; the potential for one or more countries exiting the Eurozone; the implementation of the strategic cost programme; and the success of future acquisitions, disposals and other strategic transactions. A number of these influences and factors are beyond the Group’s control. As a result, the Group’s actual future results, dividend payments, and capital and leverage ratios may differ materially from the plans, goals, and expectations set forth in the Group’s forward-looking statements. Additional risks and factors which may impact the Group’s future financial condition and performance are identified in our filings with the SEC (including, without limitation, our Annual Report on Form 20-F for the fiscal year ended 31 December 2015), which are available on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov

Subject to our obligations under the applicable laws and regulations of the UK and the US in relation to disclosure and ongoing information, we undertake no obligation to update publicly or revise any forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.

 

 

Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015      home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

    

 

LOGO

 

 

 

The detailed report

These parts of the annual report Disclose detailed information on Barclays and its 2015 performance. Contents meet, and where Insightful, go beyond minimal Regulatory reporting standards.

Corporate governance

Our corporate governance report details the governance processes of Barclays, the reports from each Board committee and presents how the Board support the delivery of our strategy.

 

Governance contents    35
Who we are    36
What we did    39
How we comply    68
Other statutory information    75
People    79
Remuneration report    83

 

Risk report

Our risk report gives insight into the level of risk across Barclays’ businesses and portfolios, the material risks and uncertainties faced and the key areas of management focus.

 

Risk review contents    117
Material existing and emerging risks    119
Risk management    127
Risk performance    143

Financial review

Our financial review details the performance of Barclays, including key performance indicators, and our businesses’ contribution to the overall performance of the Group.

 

Financial review contents    217
Key performance indicators    218
Consolidated summary     
income statement    220
Income statement commentary    221
Consolidated summary balance sheet    223
Balance sheet commentary    224
Analysis of results by business    225

 

 

Financial statements

Our financial statements gives detailed analysis of our statutory accounts, independently audited and providing in-depth disclosure and transparency on the financial performance of the business.

 

Financial statements contents    243
Consolidated financial statements    253
Notes to the financial statements    260

Where can I find out more?

You can learn about Barclays’ strategy, our businesses and performance, approach to governance and risk online, where latest and archived annual and strategic reports are available to view or download.

 

 

LOGO

 

 

Annual Report

 

home.barclays/annualreport

  
 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  01


Chairman’s letter

Addressing the issues facing Barclays today…

    

 

 

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

“Banking is in the eye of a perfect storm. It was in full consciousness of this, that I undertook the role as your Chairman at the end of April, with the strong conviction that we could not only stabilise the situation relatively quickly, but also return the Group to prosperity during my tenure.”

In such an environment it is so easy to become consumed by challenges, market volatility and the short-termism of the financial markets, but this tends to obscure the underlying quality of the Barclays brand and franchise, the genuine and substantive progress that the Group has made in recent years and the potential for the organisation arising from the decisions and actions we are now taking for the future.

Today the Group is smaller, safer, more focused, less leveraged, better capitalised and highly liquid. Comparing 2015 with 2008, we find:

 

§   £2.1trn in assets historically against £1.1trn and declining

 

§   shareholders’ equity was £36.6bn, and is now £54.5bn

 

§   balance sheet leverage (total assets to ordinary shareholders’ funds) was 56 times and is now 20 times and comparable to more highly-rated peers

 

§   shareholders’ equity as a percentage of risk weighted assets (RWAs) was 8.5% and is now 15.2%.

While we will continue this journey towards greater financial strength, the main issue for the Group is no longer capital as some remark, but earnings and returns. Put simply, for the past few years and including last year, we have produced either negligible retained profits or losses before dividends. Going forward, we need to reverse this and generate superior returns out of our franchise. This said, we also needed to take action to preserve and enhance our capital in unpredictable times. To this end, while we declared the full year 2015 dividend in line with guidance, we also decided it would be prudent to scale back dividends in 2016 and 2017, until such time as we can cover them from earnings.

Barclays has a number of industry leading businesses that produce excellent returns, but this is not universal across the portfolio. Personal and Corporate Banking and Barclaycard together produce profits after tax of £3.3bn and a combined return on equity of 13.4%. The other segments however fared less well and produced returns below the Group’s hurdle rate. Barclays Africa profits, although strong in local currency, were significantly impacted by the decline in the Rand and by the UK bank levy, bringing sterling returns down to an after-tax profit of £0.3bn and a return on equity of 8.7%. Also, while doubling over the prior year, the Investment Bank’s profit of £0.8bn generated an improved, but still substandard, return on equity of 5.6%, up from 2.7%.

Our core businesses overall produced a profit before tax of £6.9bn and a return on equity of 9%. While respectable, this of course is below our required return and needs to be improved. On the other hand, this profit was fully eroded by the £1.5bn drag of the non-core portfolio, £4.0bn in litigation and conduct charges relating to historical matters (in addition to the £0.4bn included in the core and non-core business results), and £1.5bn in corporate income taxes contributing to an overall loss for our ordinary shareholders of £0.4bn. Since conduct and related charges are no longer tax deductible, Barclays tax rate for last year was effectively 70%. If the £0.5bn cost of the UK bank levy is added to corporate income taxes, the effective ‘tax’ rate rises to 76%. The extent of the UK tax we bear was reflected in the results of PwC’s 2015 survey of the One Hundred Group, which represents most of the UK’s largest groups and concluded that Barclays paid the greatest amount of UK tax.

Of course with respect to our underlying profitability and the scale of the charges against this, things cannot stay the same. Tough situations like this demand effective action.

New Leadership

As an important starting point, the Board decided that new leadership was required. In July, we announced the departure of Antony Jenkins as Chief Executive and in October the appointment of Jes Staley, like me, a banking veteran. While I was able to exercise executive responsibility in an interim capacity immediately following Antony’s departure, and was able to set a number of initiatives in train, we were particularly fortunate that Jes was able to be active so quickly.

Jes has made good progress in building his new management team. In short order, he has appointed Ashok Vaswani as head of Barclays UK with responsibility for the establishment of the new Ring-Fenced Bank. Jes has also recruited Paul Compton as Chief Operating Officer and C.S. Venkatakrishnan as Chief Risk Officer.

Back to Core

The Board recently reflected on the strategy and situation of the Group and decided that our strategic core was our UK retail and small business franchise, our international Corporate and Investment Banking business largely centred around our trading hubs in London, New York and Asia, and our international credit card businesses. The remainder of the Group was therefore designated non-core, and to be exited, in addition to the continued rundown of the heritage non-core portfolio.

We therefore decided, subject to shareholder and regulatory approval, to take our ownership of Barclays Africa Group Limited to a level where we can achieve accounting and regulatory deconsolidation as soon as this can be executed. We have sold, or are in the process of exiting, the balance of retail banking operations outside the UK. We have also sold, or put up for sale, our international Private Banking businesses other than the UK region, Monaco and Geneva. In the Investment Bank, we withdrew from nine countries, cash equities trading other than in New York and London, all local currency trading outside our major hubs, and certain securitised products trading in the US. The capital released will be used to underpin our capital strength going forward.

 

 

02  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

            

 

 

LOGO

 

 

A New Corporate Structure

Following the statutory decision in the UK to ring-fence UK retail and small business banking by 2019, we decided to bring forward the establishment of the new bank and an application will be made for regulatory approval. When implemented, it will result (pending sell-down of our stake in Barclays Africa Group Limited) in three separate banks that we currently refer to as ‘Barclays UK’, ‘Barclays Corporate & International’ and ‘Barclays Africa’, each of which will have its own board, chief executive, management team and certain operational services. So as to prepare ourselves for this new structure, we are reorganising the divisional structure along these lines. This has the additional benefit of decentralising the very large corporate centre and results in a more streamlined, accountable and lower cost organisation. It also enhances the Group’s strategic flexibility and options going forward.

Underpinning Future Earnings Performance

The decisions to change leadership, to reduce our exposure to non-strategic businesses, as well as implementing our leaner corporate structure should have significant positive earnings and capital outcomes. These are necessary but not sufficient. We are investing in our segments with the highest growth and return prospects, including UK retail banking and Barclaycard. The Investment Bank, even in its more focused form, faces unpredictable market prospects. The Board has agreed a medium-term plan that is designed to produce increased returns in the future, that we will continue to monitor closely. Additionally, Barclays has a heavy overhead structure that needs streamlining. To this end, we have initiated a Group-wide overhead reduction programme, hiring restrictions, and a very limited number of senior salary increases. These should begin to deal with those matters within our control.

Historical Regulatory and Conduct Matters

We continue to be subject to very significant capital and conduct charges by regulators and governments that frankly are not sustainable. They arise understandably from the position that banks engendered in the Global Financial Crisis and from conduct issues that we have been working hard to address. While justified in principle, in practice they have achieved a level that is undermining our transformational efforts, and those of the regulators, to build capital and support economic growth. Banks are seen by many as unpopular and having deep pockets. But those pockets belong to our shareholders, who pay penalties out of current and future earnings that would otherwise build capital.

We are half the size we were a few years ago and the narrowing of our focus as a result of current decisions will make Barclays better capitalized and less globally systemic. But as we shrink the bank, we reduce our ability to pay outsized conduct charges. The charges are not proportionate to our smaller size and ability to pay relative to many of our peers. Our FX fines are an example. We paid one of the highest amounts in penalties of the banks who settled with the government, even though the offense was the same, even though we are by some measures one half the size of other banks that settled, and even though we received acknowledgement for our cultural changes and remediation after our LIBOR settlement. When conduct charges consume our profits, as they have for the past three years, we have no choice but to meet them by shrinking our franchise – selling or closing businesses – which reduces our capacity to support the real economy. A £50m fine or penalty is the equivalent of employing 1,000 fewer employees, closing 100 small regional branches, or foregoing the capacity to lend over £500m to small businesses or consumers. The societal costs of excessive penalties is very real.

EU Referendum

On balance we think it is in the interests of our customers and clients for the UK to remain in the EU. We have modest interests domestically on the continent, but provide significant services to European companies from London. More importantly, we are heavily reliant on a successful UK domestic and international economy and feel this is enhanced through the UK’s membership.

Thank You

Being on a bank board today is not for the faint-hearted. I would therefore like to thank our Board for their contribution to our company. Fortunately, the Barclays name is able to attract people with the finest credentials. I would particularly like to thank Sir David Walker, my predecessor, who retired at our AGM in April. He did an incredible job by providing wise oversight and a stable hand and we are grateful to him. I would once again like to thank Antony Jenkins, our former Chief Executive for all that he did for Barclays. He took over as Chief Executive at an extremely difficult time for the organisation and was able to provide the stability that was necessary and to advance significantly the culture and values of the organisation, much of which had been eroded. Sir Michael Rake, our Senior Independent Director retired at the end of last year after eight years, and Sir John Sunderland at our last AGM after a similar tenure and we are grateful to both for their enormous contribution.

I would particularly like to thank our staff across the organisation for coming every day to serve our customers, without whom we would not have an enterprise. I would also pay respect to our shareholders who have had a pretty miserable time, but who have supported us throughout. Your patience will be rewarded.

A New Beginning

In the eye of the storm it is difficult to sustain or engender faith in the organisation and in its future. For my part, while we continue to be buffeted by historical matters and the political and regulatory environment, I have never lost sight on the end game, the way forward and our eventual success. It has been a very active and decisive year for our company as will be the year ahead. Through decisions already taken, we will quickly reach a more stable and productive foundation.

We are though not without residual challenges, including an uncertain economic environment, as well as further historical regulatory penalties and remedies that will haunt us for some years. We are nevertheless working hard to put these behind us. This will ultimately be achieved although in the interim we would hope for a more proportional attitude from governments and conduct regulators towards banks. However, the conservative assumption, based on our experience, is that any success we do achieve is more likely to arise from our own efforts.

Priorities for the Future

Now that we are getting back to core, our priorities going forward are to:

 

§   generate greater value from our portfolio, including bringing the Investment Bank to returns above the cost of equity and the Group cost-income ratio below 60%

 

§   execute in the least value-destructive way the rundown of our historical and newly designated non-core businesses and assets

 

§   implement the structural reform programme, the creation of the ring-fenced bank and the effective operation of the new decentralised divisional structure

 

§   put historical conduct matters finally behind us

 

§   become a more externally and customer focused company, with a strong performance ethic and underpinned by strong customer, people and community values.

John McFarlane

Chairman

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  03


Chief Executive’s review

…with a strategy that answers

the business challenges ahead…

   LOGO

 

 

 

LOGO

“I am honoured to have been chosen to lead Barclays. It is a huge responsibility, which I do not take lightly. In every part of the Group, I have been impressed and inspired by our colleagues and the work that they do for our customers and clients.”

Our 2015 results show a core business that is fundamentally strong, with franchises that position us well, generating attractive earnings, with excellent prospects for growth, and collectively they already deliver a Return on Tangible Equity which is above our cost of equity. Our principal task is therefore to liberate those businesses from the two major factors which drag them down today.

The first is legacy products and businesses that are neither sufficiently profitable nor strategic for Barclays – our Non-Core Unit. And the second is the continued impact of billions of pounds of litigation and conduct expenses that are largely the product of past failures in culture.

We are going to address both of these matters head on, with the objective of putting most of these issues behind us in 2016. This will be achieved through simplifying our core business, aggressively running down our Non-Core operations, and resolving as soon as practicable our remaining legacy conduct issues, while at the same time promoting a strong values driven culture across the bank that helps to prevent the creation of new ones.

We have made great progress in simplifying Barclays over the last few years by reshaping our balance sheet, strengthening our capital base, and reducing costs.

All of this has been done to move us towards becoming a Group which can generate the returns our shareholders deserve.

But in order to complete our restructuring and deliver for shareholders in a reasonable timeframe, we must take action today.

It is our intention, subject to regulatory and shareholder approvals if and as required, to reduce our interest in Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL) to a non-controlling, non-consolidated position over the next two to three years.

This has been a very difficult decision to make. Barclays has been in Africa for over 100 years. We have some excellent franchises across the continent, with a great management team and dedicated colleagues.

But we face a regulatory environment where we carry 100% of the financial responsibility for Barclays Africa, and receive only 62% of the benefits. The international reach of the UK bank levy, the Global

 

What we do

Barclays is a transatlantic Consumer,

Corporate and Investment bank…

Our Goal

…that will become the bank of choice

for our stakeholders…

Our focus

…by providing superior services

and supporting our stakeholders*…

Our strategy

…via a commercially successful

business that generates long-term

sustainable returns.

 

 

*Our strategic performance is measured by our Balanced Scorecard (see page 11)

 

 

Systemically Important Bank (GSIB) buffer, minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL) and Total Loss Absorbing Capital (TLAC), and other regulatory requirements, present specific challenges to Barclays as owners. The returns Barclays realises from its controlling interest in BAGL are significantly below the 17% Return on Equity reported locally.

Because of these specific challenges, we believe that it is in the best interest of shareholders to reduce our position. Given what is driving this decision, we have flexibility with respect to the pace at which we reduce our ownership and as a result, we will execute this change in our investment opportunistically over the next two to three years.

Reducing our interest to a non-controlling, non-consolidated position will also improve our Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio, though not until we deconsolidate BAGL as a regulatory matter. In the medium term, that will allow us to invest in the core franchises of Barclays. It also has the positive effect of shrinking our cost base by approximately £2bn, our headcount by around 40,000 and, of course significantly reduces our organisational complexity.

Besides simplifying our business further, we also need to accelerate the separation of our profitable Core businesses from the drag of our Non-Core businesses.

Our Non-Core RWAs started at £110bn two years ago. By the end of 2015 we reduced that to £47bn. As we conclude our restructuring, we are taking the opportunity to exit other marginal businesses and regions, including elements of the Investment Bank in nine countries, our Egyptian and Zimbabwean businesses, Southern European cards and wealth management in Asia. As a result, our Non-Core RWAs rise to

 

 

04  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

            

            

 

 

LOGO

 

 

LOGO

 

approximately £55bn as at the end of 2015. We anticipate those one-time additions will add approximately £600m to underlying Non-Core costs, but we expect to exit the majority of these in the course of 2016.

Our Non-Core businesses act as a significant drag on our Group profitability that must be eliminated as soon as possible.

The Board has therefore decided to adjust our near-term dividend to give us the flexibility to accelerate our exit of Non-Core activities. It is our intention to reduce our dividend to 3 pence, in 2016 and 2017. This will help us accelerate the imperative rundown of Non-Core.

I recognise the importance of paying a meaningful dividend as part of total shareholder returns and am committed to doing so in the future.

But for now, the reduction of the dividend is the right choice. These are hard decisions, but we believe the shareholder value created by getting Non-Core closed will greatly exceed the downside of cutting the dividend for the next two years.

These strategic actions will bring forward the completion of our restructuring and the emergence of a simpler and very profitable Barclays.

We are also changing the way in which we structure Barclays to further simplify the Group and prepare early for UK ring-fencing requirements.

At the heart of Barclays’ strategy is to build on our strength as a Transatlantic Consumer, Corporate and Investment bank, anchored in the two financial centres of the world, London and New York.

Barclays will operate as two clearly defined divisions, Barclays UK and Barclays Corporate & International. Barclays UK will include our leading

 

UK retail bank, our UK consumer credit card business, and play its traditional role as a committed provider of lending and financial services for small businesses up and down the UK.

The business has 22 million retail customers, and almost one million business banking clients. We are one of the country’s leading business banks. We are the second largest wealth manager in the UK, and Barclaycard is the number one card issuer in Britain with close to 11 million UK card customers. Barclays UK will also continue to pioneer innovation in the provision of consumer financial services.

This represents formidable strength. It will ultimately become our UK ring-fenced bank, a resilient British bank, compliant with all regulatory requirements.

Second, Barclays Corporate & International will comprise our market leading Corporate banking business, our Barclaycard operations in Europe and the US, our bulge bracket Investment Bank, and our International Wealth offering.

Barclays Corporate & International has scale in wholesale banking and consumer lending, strength in our key geographies, and good balance in its revenue streams, delivering further resilience.

Barclays Corporate & International will ultimately become our non-ringfenced bank. It will operate as a strong unit within the Barclays Group, and is wholly complementary to Barclays UK. It is a strategically coherent collection of franchises across corporate, investment, and consumer banking, creating a robust and diversified business for us.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  05


Our approach

...delivered through a simpler

and better structured business...

  LOGO

 

LOGO

 

We are confident that Barclays Corporate & International will continue to be well capitalised with a balanced funding profile, supporting solid investment grade credit ratings.

In summary then, the future is bright. Both Barclays UK and Barclays Corporate & International already generate double digit Returns on Tangible Equity (RoTE). They are strong financially, and will be as sibling businesses, and shareholders and debt investors in Barclays will benefit from the diversified revenue streams they produce.

We are also simplifying our financial targets for the Group going forward to focus on three key metrics, and will be aiming to achieve these targets in a reasonable timeframe, in order to deliver shareholder value:

 

§   RoTE: As we reduce the Non-Core drag on Group returns, the Group’s RoTE will converge towards the Core RoTE, and achieve attractive returns for shareholders

 

§   CET 1 ratio: We wil run the Group’s CET 1 ratio at 100-150 basis points above our regulatory minimum level

 

§   Cost:Income ratio: We will reduce the Group’s Cost:Income Ratio to below 60%

Going forward, we will also return to normalised financial metrics. Barclays is in the process of emerging from restructuring and our future disclosures will be based on our business divisions – Barclays UK and Barclays Corporate & International. They will no longer include things like ‘cost to achieve’ or ‘Structural Reform Programme charges’. Instead, you will get a simple and clear statutory presentation of our Group’s performance.

Achieving our goals must be realised at the same time as we complete the critically important cultural transformation of the Group.

More than 300 years ago, Barclays was founded by a group of Quakers. Those first Barclays bankers earned the trust of English merchants, and those bankers felt responsible as stewards of that trust. The Bank, early on, built an exceptional reputation for integrity. Barclays became renowned for the principled way it did business.

I joined banking back in 1979, because I was excited to be a part of a respected profession. Being a banker back then was like being a lawyer or a doctor. The practitioners of the profession of banking were skilled at understanding the complex topics of capital, credit, savings and investor returns; and they were highly regarded as they used that knowledge to help consumers, corporations, investors and governments, to navigate, with transparency and clarity, the world of finance. It was a profession because it was moored to a commitment for integrity.

A company that retains the loyalty of its employees solely based on compensation is a company that gambles with its institutional culture. I want Barclays to be a bank where our employees choose to work here because they believe in the institution, and its intrinsically valuable role in society.

This is a mind-set I want to reinvigorate in everyone at Barclays, from branch colleagues working on the high street in Manchester, to the M&A banker in New York.

Banking, at Barclays, will again be a ‘profession’ and it will be up to all of our employees to promote that goal internally, and to find the people

 

 

06  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Our approach

…that is best suited to our

business environment…

 

LOGO

 

 

LOGO

 

that want to join Barclays because they want to be part of a great profession. The profession of banking.

I look forward to meeting investors at our AGM, and in the course of the next year, and thank you for your support as we continue the work of restoring Barclays to where it should be.

James E. Staley

Group Chief Executive

Barclays is a transatlantic Consumer, Corporate and Investment bank, governed by global and local regulatory standards.

Global economic growth has been modest in recent years, and unprecedented monetary policies, such as Quantitative Easing and near zero and negative interest rates, have been implemented by many Central Banks to stimulate growth. During the second half of 2015 and into 2016, the macroeconomic environment has deteriorated, driven by commodities weakness, particularly oil prices, along with economic uncertainty in China. In the UK, the referendum on EU membership gives rise to political uncertainty. We remain alert to these changes and more, and monitor and manage our risks accordingly.

Regulation continues to direct attention towards capital, liquidity and funding, in order to create a safer banking environment. In 2015, the Financial Policy Committee of the Bank of England clarified the overall capital framework for banks. This has provided greater certainty and allowed us to progress our strategy. Reforms requiring banks to separate certain activities, such as structural reform in the UK and US, continue to be a big focus and have been accounted for in the structure of our revised strategy, as described on page 4.

Conduct issues have hurt Barclays, causing loss of trust among stakeholders. We continue to embed cultural change and improve governance to work to rebuild customer and client trust and market confidence.

Digitalisation trends continue to grow and the power of technology has raised customer and client expectations, resulted in new competitors in the digital space, and increased the challenge of defeating cybercriminals. It has also reduced the cost-to-serve through automation, process improvement and innovation, while making customer experiences faster, more personalised and lower risk.

Without active risk management to address these external factors, our long-term goals could be adversely impacted. Our approach to risk management is outlined on page 127, and material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance are outlined on page 119.

Our strategy continues to evolve to respond effectively to the external environment. Please refer to page 4 for an update on our strategy.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  07


Our approach

…and underpinned by our robust

approach to risk management…

 

LOGO

 

 

LOGO

 

To protect Barclays from a volatile and weak external environment, a strong risk capability is needed. At Barclays the Risk teams:

 

§   provide critical risk capabilities, including directing risk appetite and the risk profile
§   set frameworks, policies and standards
§   provide strong and independent second line challenge on a business by business basis
§   lead implementation of critical regulatory risk initiatives.

In the execution of our strategy, some of the risks we face arise as a result of our decisions, and some result from operational processes, or the external environment. We classify risks under five types:

 

§   Credit risk: Financial loss should customers not fulfil contractual obligations
§   Market risk: Earnings or capital impact due to volatility of trading book positions or as the consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity funding pool
§   Funding risk: Failure to maintain adequate capital and liquidity
§   Operational risk: Cost from human factors, inadequate processes and systems or external events
§   Conduct risk: Detriment through inappropriate judgement in execution of business activities.

In the course of business we identify and assess these risks, determine the appropriate risk response, and monitor the effectiveness of these actions and changes to the risk profile:

 

§   Evaluate: Individuals and teams who manage processes identify and assess the proposed risks
§   Respond: Ensures risks are kept within appetite, the level of risk the Group is prepared to accept while pursuing its business strategy, and where appropriate taking necessary mitigation actions
§   Monitor: Monitoring the risks identified is on-going and proactive, and can often mean re-evaluating risks as well as changing our response.

In 2015, the Risk function and the businesses carried out detailed evaluations of the risks Barclays faces using tools such as stress testing. These risks included lower global energy and commodity prices, a slow down in China’s economic growth, or of any risks from the EU referendum in the UK. We have responded to changing market conditions by tightening lending criteria in riskier areas and re-deploying risk capacity toward sectors offering better returns on risk. Senior management and the Board are actively engaged in monitoring these risks, and provide high-level direction.

Responsibilities for the management of risk and control are aligned to a 3 lines of defence activity-based model:

§   first line of defence responsibilities rest with the colleagues who manage operational or business processes. They are responsible for identifying the related risks, and designing, operating, testing and remediating appropriate controls to manage those risks
§   designing frameworks and policies and providing independent oversight and challenge to ensure compliance constitute the second line of defence role
§   Barclays Internal Audit, the third line, provides independent assurance.

When performed appropriately by all colleagues, these responsibilities ensure that there is a strong risk and control environment at Barclays.

 

 

08  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Our approach

…to better drive value creation

and sustainable stakeholder return…

 

 

LOGO

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

As a transatlantic Consumer, Corporate and Investment bank Barclays offers a well-balanced and integrated set of products and services across personal, corporate and investment banking, credit cards and wealth management. We serve individuals, small and large businesses, local authorities, corporations, institutions and governments.

Barclays seeks to satisfy the needs of our customers and clients by offering a well-rounded value proposition, focused on our core strengths, particularly in our UK and US home markets, and thereby deliver a diversified income stream and long-term sustainable returns.

Our business model has been simplified through actions taken over the past two years. It provides us with a stable platform from which to capitalise on the scale and diversity of our businesses and the quality, character and relationships of our people.

The creation of Barclays UK and Barclays Corporate & International further strengthens our value proposition and reinforces the resilient business mix that we enjoy from having an appropriate balance across consumer and wholesale revenue streams.

For example, the scale of our Corporate Banking and Investment Bank franchises serving large, multi-national companies and financial institutions complements that of our market leading consumer businesses across personal banking, wealth management and credit cards. Similarly, our payments solutions offering to businesses and consumers combines our Corporate Banking payments knowledge with our Barclaycard merchant acquiring expertise.

Our international reach and scale mean we have the responsibility – indeed the obligation – following our designation as a GSIB, to work together with our regulators to help reduce risk in the industry and provide a more sustainable banking landscape over the long term.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  09


Our approach

…through our broad service offer.

 

 

LOGO

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

Our integrated products and services offer expertise across the customer and client spectrum

Our diverse business model enables us to provide continuing and relevant support across all our businesses to our customers and clients, whatever their stage of life.

For example, for individuals, Barclays offers a safe place to store savings, can help a first-time buyer take their first steps onto the property ladder, give people from a variety of backgrounds the opportunity to grow and manage their wealth, or provide cross-border advice for the affluent for example, helping family members abroad. For businesses it means being ready to help entrepreneurs launch a business, fund its growth, manage payments securely, expand internationally, manage risk effectively, and issue bonds and listed equity shares.

Technology is a critical component of this service offering that benefits customers and clients across the spectrum, regardless of which part of our business they engage with first. Digitalisation and automation of simple banking processes deepens relationships with our customers. For example, automation of account opening and unsecured lending provides increased convenience to personal and corporate customers alike. Similarly, the digitisation of FX transfers and innovative payments solutions enable businesses to achieve their ambitions in the same way that our multi-asset trading platform enables institutional clients to

achieve theirs. These are all examples of the way Barclays adds value and provides benefit to all of our customers and clients through our approach to banking.

 

 

10  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


How we are doing

Our Balanced Scorecard measures progress

and performance against our goal…

 

 

LOGO

 

We have agreed eight key measures categorised into the 5Cs against which our stakeholders can hold us to account.

 

         

Metric

 

   Actual 2014            Actual 2015            Target 2018        
     
LOGO   

Customer and Client

Page 12

  

Personal and Corporate Banking (PCB), Barclaycard and Africa Banking weighted average ranking of Relationship Net Promoter Score® (NPS) vs. peer sets

 

   4th    4th    1st
     

 

Client Franchise Rank: Weighted average ranking of wallet share or customer satisfaction with priority clients in the Investment Bank

 

  

 

5th

  

 

5th

  

 

Top 3

     

LOGO

 

   Colleague Page 13    Sustained engagement of colleagues score    72%    75%    87-91%
     

% women in senior leadership

 

   22%    23%    26%
     

LOGO

 

  

Citizenship 

Page 14

  

Citizenship Plan – initiatives on track or ahead

 

   11/11    10/11    Plan targets
     

LOGO

 

   Conduct Page 15   

Conduct Reputation (YouGov survey)

 

   5.3/10    5.4/10    6.5/10
     

LOGO

 

   Company Page 16   

Adjusted Return on Equity (RoE)

 

   5.1%    4.9%    N/Aa
     

 

Fully Loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio (Capital Requirements Directive IV Common Equity Tier 1)

 

  

 

10.3%

  

 

11.4%

  

 

N/Aa

 

Note
a Please refer to the new financial targets set out in the Chief Executive’s review on page 4.

Gender Barclays Board membership includes four women and ten men, and one woman and nine men on the Group Executive Committee. During 2015 we had a maximum of three women on the Group Executive Committee. Under the Companies Act 2006, Barclays are also required to report on the gender breakdown of our employees and ‘senior managers’. Of our global workforce of 129,400 (66,100 male, 63,300 female), 796 were senior managers (574 male, 222 female), which include Officers of the Group, certain direct reports of the Chief Executive, heads of major business units, certain senior Managing Directors, and directors on the boards of undertakings of the Group, but exclude individuals who sit as directors on the board of the Company.

 

LOGO

In 2015 the Balanced Scorecard was used throughout the organisation and formed part of the framework by which our staff were assessed, with individual performance objectives aligned to the 5Cs.

This year has seen improvement across a number of our metrics, especially our capital strengthening, as measured by the CET1 ratio, and within Colleague. Further work is required in some areas, including RoE.

The Customer and Client Relationship metrics remained stable as a strong performance in corporate banking, combined with improvements in Barclays current accounts, was partially offset by the impact of reshaping our wealth business. Our Client Franchise Rank remained stable in challenging market conditions.

Under Colleague, we have seen an improvement in both the colleague engagement and the gender-diversity in our leadership, with numerous initiatives to promote equality and support our workforce proving successful.

In our Citizenship plan, 10 out of 11 metrics on target shows that we are having a positive impact on the communities in which we operate, with lending to households the only initiative to lose momentum primarily as a result of market and trading conditions.

Conduct also showed a slight improvement on 2014 following a number of actions being taken to improve customer outcomes, although we are below where we would like to be.

Within Company there has been a significant strengthening in the CET1 ratio, however we have plenty of work to do to deliver an acceptable return to shareholders, with RoE slightly down on 2014.

There is still plenty of work to do and we remain focused on improving our balanced performance for colleagues, customers and clients, the wider community and shareholders.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  11

 


How we are doing

…for our Customers and Clients

we aim to be the bank of choice…

 

 

 

LOGO

 

What we are doing

In building customer advocacy we will continue to:

 

§   further invest in our brand and the attractiveness of customer and client propositions

 

§   bring increased accountability to those closer to customers

 

§   innovate through customer relevant technology and the transformation of the branch network

 

§   develop service models tailored to the changing needs of our global customer and client base.

The 2018 target is to be 1st in NPS, and Top 3 in Client Franchise Rank.

 

 

Balanced Scorecard metric

 

   LOGO
      
 
Actual
2015
  
  
    
 
Actual
2014
  
  
   Actual   2013     
PCB, Barclaycard and Africa Banking weighted average ranking of Relationship Net Promoter Score® vs. peer sets      4th         4th       3rda     
Client Franchise Rank: Weighted average ranking of wallet share or customer satisfaction with priority clients in the Investment Bank      5th         5th       N/A     

 

a   Revised due to the creation of PCB as part of the May 2014 Strategy Update. Corporate clients now contribute to the NPS metric, and no longer contribute to the Client Franchise Rank

  

 

How we measure success

 

  

 

§  Commercial success across our businesses depends on the continued endorsement by our customers

  

 

§  Competition for customers and clients has never been stronger. 2015 saw unprecedented levels of switching in our key UK retail markets and intense competition in corporate markets

  

 

§  Relationship NPS ranking provides a simple customer advocacy measure and indicates growth potential across our franchise

  

 

§  A ranking widely used in banking and other industries, it facilitates comprehensive benchmarking, simplifies target setting and identifies best practice, bringing the customer’s voice to the heart of Barclays. It is income-weighted using divisional customer satisfaction

  

 

§  For the investment banking industry, NPS is not as widely measured. Therefore, a ‘Client Franchise Rank’ is calculated by measuring use of our products and services by target clients. It is a revenue-weighted ranking of our global client share across the Investment Bank

  

 

§  Improving our rank with these clients is a key indicator of effectiveness in meeting their needs, supporting delivery of improved returns for Barclays

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

How we are doing

Relationship NPS

2015 saw improved performance in UK retail markets with increased NPS scores for both Barclaycard UK credit cards and Barclays current accounts. In 2015 we’ve focused on improving key customer experience touch points for our retail customers whether they contact us in branch, over the phone or by online channels. We’ve also launched our Barclays Blue Rewards proposition to UK retail customers and have measured improved perceptions of value as a result. In the UK, Barclaycard has continued to introduce industry leading balance transfer offers and innovative payment plan products.

Elsewhere across our customer franchises we’ve maintained a very strong performance in the corporate banking market where we’ve vied for leadership position among our peers throughout the year. Our NPS ranks for our Wealth business slipped as we exited the US market.

While we have recorded improvement in NPS scores in key markets, acceptable progress towards our 2018 Group target will require us to ultimately outperform our peers – in addition to improving our own scores. We believe we are well placed to achieve this by leveraging technology to accelerate the transformation of customer and client interaction. Transforming the nature of banking globally through innovations such as Barclays Mobile Banking, Pingit, Mobile Cheque Imaging and Video Banking will be fundamental to our success.

Client Franchise Rank

Our ranking of 5th for 2015 provides a strong platform from which to build as we aspire to our goal of being ‘top 3’ with our target clients. We will seek to achieve this goal by focusing on the following key areas:

 

§   further aligning our structure to client needs: As part of the Strategic Review in 2014 we brought Equities and Credit teams together under the same management to provide a more integrated approach. In 2015 we have taken steps to further align teams across Banking and Markets to provide a complete service to clients encompassing primary issuance and secondary trading

 

§   improving client management information: We have invested technology and resources in our management information and analytics that enable us to provide more finely targeted solutions for our clients

 

§   investing in people and conduct: The quality of our people and the way they do business is fundamental to building and maintaining strong relationships with our clients. We are committed to attract and retain the best talent to serve our clients and help them achieve their ambitions. The Investment Bank remains focused on strengthening the Conduct framework, and Conduct Risk training for colleagues is delivered throughout the year.

 

Case study

Barclays has piloted a ground-breaking new service at our branches. Customers with a disability or impairment can now enter their accessibility needs and preferences into an optional free-to-download app, along with their name and a photo of themselves. The data is ‘awoken’ and passed discretely to any participating branch when the customer comes into range of its Bluetooth beacon. A staff member is alerted to the customer’s arrival and can proactively tailor the service they provide, according to the stated wishes, making communication and interaction both easier and more empathetic to both parties. We know how tiresome it can be for some customers to re-articulate their access needs every time they visit the branch, so we used their feedback to drive direction of the design. For further information, please visit www.barclays.co.uk/ beacons

 

 

 

12  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


How we are doing

…creating an environment where our

Colleagues can fulfil their potential…

   LOGO

 

 

 

 

 

What we are doing

 

Our colleagues remain core to success at Barclays, and we remain committed to investing in them and ensuring they are enabled to consistently deliver strong performance over time.

 

Fostering an inclusive and diverse culture where all colleagues can achieve their potential remains a core business focus:

 

§   through diversity, we gain a greater breadth of perspectives

 

§   through inclusion these perspectives feed innovation.

 

In turn, this ensures we deliver services and innovative products that are market leading, enabling our diverse customers to achieve their goals.

 

The 2018 target is for a score of 87-91% in Sustained Engagement of colleagues, and 26% women in senior leadership.

 

 

 

 

Balanced Scorecard metric

     LOGO
        
 
Actual
2015
  
  
    
 
Actual
2014
  
  
  Actual 2013     
  Sustainable Engagement of colleagues score      75%         72%      74%     
  % women in senior leadership      23%         22%      21%     
 

 

To drive our own progress towards gender parity, we continue to measure the number and percentage of women at each level of the organisation. We have seen continued advancement towards our 2018 gender goal of 26% women in senior leadership roles; at 23% by the end of 2015. Female representation across the firm has again increased, sustaining a 1% year on year upward trend since 2012. Sustained Engagement at Barclays is currently 75%, a positive result in light of the ongoing change our organisation experienced in 2015. For further details see the People section on pages 79 to 82.

 

How we measure success

 

Increasing the representation of women in senior roles, and building a robust pipeline of diverse talent remain priorities. Practical talent management tools are in place to deliver tangible change, ranging from our global unconscious bias training programme, to ensuring diversity is reflected in candidate shortlists and hiring panels. Targeted sponsorship and mentoring programmes connect leaders with rising talent, with networks and forums all actively supporting our people to achieve their potential. Collectively our approach aims to contribute to the culture and commitment needed to build greater gender parity.

 

We place emphasis on how committed our colleagues are to working at Barclays, the environment we create to enable our colleagues to do their best work, and our colleagues’ overall well-being within the workplace. These aspects form what we call Sustainable Engagement. We measure progress by asking colleagues how engaged they feel working at Barclays.

    

How we are doing

Women in senior leadership

Achieving gender parity requires a cultural shift so we continue to enable and amplify dialogue with internal and external stakeholders to promote equality. Our Shattering Stereotypes research in 2015 has highlighted key opportunities and barriers to unlocking the economic power of female entrepreneurship. Our Women in Leadership Index continues to enable investors to show their interest in companies with gender-diverse leadership. Internally, we have continued to embed gender parity principles into our core people processes and practices. We have established alumni and returnership programmes to enable women to restart paused careers, while our Women on Boards programme prepares our senior leaders for external non-executive director roles. The diversity of our own Board continues to be a focus, with our recently revised Board Diversity Policy setting out our intention to see female Board representation rise to a 33% minimum by the end of 2020.

Sustainable Engagement

Now in its second year, the global employee opinion survey (Your View) was deployed across the Group in October 2015, with over 100,000 colleagues participating. The survey is in line with our Group-wide approach to measuring employee feedback, and allows us to consistently track progress, measure success and highlight areas for improvement. The survey was more concise and focused this year and provides insight on Sustainable Engagement, colleague alignment to our Values, the working environment and perceptions of Leadership.

With a Sustainable Engagement score of 75%, a 3% increase on the prior year, our colleagues strongly believe in the goals and objectives of Barclays, and would recommend our organisation as a place to work. We remain committed to building on the positive trend we have seen in Sustainable Engagement in 2015, and will use the insights from this year’s survey to sharpen aspects of our people strategy. This includes focusing on how we collectively make the best use of our resources, supporting colleagues with an effective technology infrastructure. In doing so we are creating an environment that both allows our colleagues to thrive professionally, and deliver for Barclays customers.

 

Case study

Working with the United Nations (UN) as one of ten Impact Champion organisations highlights our commitment to achieving greater equality for women. To advance the cultural shift towards gender parity, we became a founding supporter of the UN led ‘HeForShe’ movement. This important campaign unifies efforts, and significantly is enabling men to demonstrate why equality matters to them. Male and female colleagues, including members of the Group Executive Committee, have signed a Barclays ‘HeForShe’ pledge, channelling leadership commitment towards key gender initiatives such as mentoring. Membership of our gender network the Women’s Initiative Network (WiN) has also increased significantly as leaders see the importance of being vocal and visible advocates for gender equality. Since launching the ‘HeForShe’ campaign, 60% of new WiN members have been male. ‘HeForShe’ is an integral aspect of our strategy in enabling women to achieve their full potential at Barclays, and ensuring our communities benefit fully from their talent.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  13


How we are doing

…we have a positive impact on the

communities in which we operate…

   LOGO

 

 

 

 

 

What we are doing

 

§  Ensuring that the way we do business is responsible, sustainable, and takes account of wider stakeholder needs

 

§  Contributing to growth by supporting households and businesses

 

§  Supporting our communities by building the skills of young people

 

We met or exceeded 10 of 11 targets set out in the 2012-2015 Citizenship Plan and are developing a new strategy to launch in 2016.

 

 

 

 

Balanced Scorecard metric

     LOGO
        
 
Actual
2015
  
  
    
 
Actual
2014
  
  
  Actual   2013       
  Citizenship Plan –      10/11         11/11      10/11       
  initiatives on track or ahead                           
 

 

Barclays achieved 10 of 11 targets set out in the 2012-2015 Citizenship Plan. For detailed performance on the underlying 2015 Citizenship Plan metrics, please see the Citizenship Data Supplement 2015.

 

We provide further detail on our programmes and a range of case studies on our website at home.barclays/citizenship In addition, we also provide further disclosures aligned to the Global Reporting Initiative G4 guidelines, in the Citizenship Data Supplement 2015 available at home.barclays/annualreport

 

How we measure success

 

Fully integrated with the Balanced Scorecard, the Citizenship Plan included 11 targets to deliver by the end of 2015. A performance summary is available below with more detailed information in the Citizenship Data Supplement 2015.

 

We are now preparing to launch the next chapter in our Citizenship ambitions, which will be even more integrated and with a sharper focus on accelerating shared growth for our business and for society. This next evolution is deeply aligned with our strategy, geographical footprint and strengths.

 

Each of the business units will contribute to our Citizenship commitments with a focus on where they can deliver positive societal impact. We see exciting opportunities to partner across customers, clients, government, suppliers and NGOs to create new solutions that will deliver the greatest social impact and return for our business. The new strategy will be launched in 2016.

 

*Cumulative performance 2012 to 2015, unless otherwise indicated

 

    

How we are doing

The way we do business

Attestation to the Barclays Way code of conduct met target with 99% of employees attesting. We exceeded our target to reduce carbon emissions by 10%, achieving a total reduction of 37.3% against a 2012 baseline, driven by operational energy efficiency initiatives and travel management.

We have continued to see moderate improvement in stakeholder perceptions, based on the results of the Citizenship Reputation (YouGov survey), with our overall score increasing to 5.24/10 (2014: 5.11/10). Supplier payment performance hit 86% on time, ahead of our target of 85%. We have evaluated our reporting requirements under the UK Modern Slavery Act and continue to embed and refine necessary changes to our supplier screening and human rights related policies and practices, prior to reporting in our 2016 disclosures.

Contributing to growth*

As a result of market and trading conditions, we missed our target to deliver £150bn of new and renewed lending to households, providing a total of £141.8bn by the end of 2015 (2014: £107.7bn). We met our target to deliver £50bn of new and renewed lending to SMEs, providing a total of £50.7bn on a cumulative basis (2014: £38.5bn). We assisted in raising £3,366bn of financing for businesses and governments on a cumulative basis (2014: £2,487bn).

We reached over 190,000 participants at SME support events, exceeding our target of 120,000. We also exceeded our target to recruit 2,000 apprentices with a total of 2,263 apprentices at Barclays in the UK (2014: 1,734).

Supporting our communities*

2015 marks the conclusion of Barclays’ 5 Million Young Futures commitment. Between 2012 and 2015, we have invested in programmes to support young people around the world develop vital skills they need to achieve their ambitions. Over this period we have reached more than 5.7 million young people and invested nearly £262m in the community against our cumulative target of £250m. In 2015 alone, we helped to build the enterprise, employability or financial skills of more than 1.5 million young people and invested £63m in the community.

 

 

Case study

 

As Green Bonds continue to mature as a way of financing environmentally beneficial activities, Barclays remains committed to the development of the space.

 

Barclays made a public commitment in 2014 to invest £1bn in Green Bonds within the Group liquidity pool by November 2015. After meeting that goal, we committed to an additional £1bn investment in Green Bonds in December 2015, representing one of the largest investments into this sector to date.

 

We are a signatory to the Green Bond Principles and have been an active underwriter on a variety of Green Bond transactions for corporate, supranational and municipal issuers, raising a total of £1.3bn in 2015.

 

 

 

14  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


How we are doing

…acting with integrity in everything we do…

    

 

 

LOGO

 

 

What we are doing

 

The Group continued to incur the significant costs of conduct matters

 

§  Additional charges were recognised for customer redress including £2.2bn for the cost of PPI remediation

 

§  Resolution of these matters remains a necessary and important part of delivering the Group’s strategy

 

§  There are early signs that we are driving better outcomes for customers from a more thoughtful consideration of our customers’ needs.

 

The 2018 target is for a Conduct Reputation (YouGov survey) score of 6.5/10.

 

 

 

 

Balanced Scorecard metric

    

LOGO

        
 
Actual
2015
  
  
    
 
Actual
2014
  
  
  Actual   2013       
 

Conduct Reputation

(YouGov survey)

     5.4/10         5.3/10      5.2/10       
 

 

We are below where we would like to be for 2015, although overall progress on the measure is in line with our expectations and puts our 2018 targets within reach.

 

How we measure success

 

§  The Conduct measure is developed through a Conduct reputation survey, undertaken by YouGov, across a range of respondents including business and political stakeholders, the media, NGOs, charities and other opinion formers

 

§  The 2015 Conduct score, taken from two surveys, each of 2,000 respondents, comprises questions relating to transparency, employee welfare, quality and customer value as well as trust

    
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      

How we are doing

In 2015 Barclays made progress on its Conduct measure recording a score of 5.4 (2014: 5.3). ‘Operates openly and transparently’, ‘Has high quality products and services’ and ‘Delivers value for money for customers and clients’ have all improved according to audience perception. Performance on two components, ‘Treats staff well at all levels of the business’ and ‘It can be trusted’ have declined slightly.

As a result of increased awareness and early consideration of conduct risk in the business, a number of actions have been taken to improve customer outcomes including:

§  proactive consideration and management of potential customer detriment associated with Barclays’ strategy to simplify its business and products. For example, change programmes monitoring customers subject to multiple changes including platform and online migrations

§  application of more stringent residential mortgage requirements to buy-to-let mortgage applicants, ensuring better lending decisions

§  improvements in key areas such as bereavement and power of attorney and ongoing training to equip staff to support customers in vulnerable circumstances

§  enhanced surveillance monitoring in the Investment Bank identifying and proactively managing activity which appeared to cause unusual market impact

§  separation plans of non-core businesses consider customer outcomes.

In 2016 there will be continued improvements of conduct risk management across governance structures, MI, culture change initiatives, risk management processes and enterprise-wide risk management. There will also be further enhancements to how conduct risk is considered in strategy setting.

 

 

 

 

Case study

 

An Investment Bank client inadvertently elected to earn a lower interest rate of 0.13% (instead of the correct interest rate of 0.30%) on a $100m deposit cash trade. Operations staff identified the mismatch and despite being legally entitled to proceed with the lower interest rate, agreed that the right thing to do was to amend the rate in favour of the client.

 

Barclays have teams in place that constantly monitor such transactions in order to spot operational or system errors. Although Barclays had the right to go ahead and apply the lower interest rate (which would have cost the client £130,000) we instead amended the trade in favour of the client.

 

By putting ourselves in our clients’ shoes, we have elected to achieve our ambitions in the right way. We believe that our customers should be able to trust us to have their best interest at heart as this ensures long term profits through customer loyalty.

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  15


How we are doing

…effectively managing risk to create

sustainable returns for our Company.

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

 What we are doing

 

We are committed to delivering long-term acceptable returns to shareholders in a sustainable way, while maintaining adequate levels of capital to enable the Bank to operate safely through challenging economic conditions.

 

We will achieve this by prudently optimising the level, mix and distribution to businesses of our capital resources whilst maintaining sufficient capital resources in order to:

 

§   ensure the Group is well capitalised relative to its minimum  regulatory capital requirements set by the PRA and other regulatory  authorities

 

§   support its credit rating

 

§   support its growth and strategic objectives.

 

 

 

 

 

Balanced Scorecard metric

 

   LOGO
        
 
Actual
2015
  
  
    
 
Actual
2014
  
  
   Actual  2013a   
  Fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio      11.4%         10.3%       9.1%    
  Return on Equity (Adjusted)      4.9%         5.1%       4.3%    
 

 

Note

a   2013 Return on Equity (Adjusted) has been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.

  
 

 

How we measure success

 

Fully Loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio

  
 

§  The Fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio demonstrates the capital strength and resilience of Barclays. By ensuring we are well capitalised relative to minimum capital requirements of regulatory authorities, we create a safer bank for customers and clients, and all stakeholders through challenging economic conditions.

  
 

 

§  The ratio expresses Barclays’ capital as a percentage of risk weighted assets (RWAs), as defined by the PRA, in the context of CRD IV (an EU Directive prescribing capital adequacy and liquidity requirements), and is part of the regulatory framework governing how banks and depository institutions are supervised.

  
 

 

Adjusted Return on Equity (RoE)

  
 

§  Adjusted RoE measures the organisation’s ability to generate acceptable returns for shareholders.

  
 

 

§  Adjusted RoE is calculated as adjusted profit for the year attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent divided by average shareholders’ equity for the year excluding non-controlling and other equity interests. It excludes certain items, including those that are significant but not representative of the underlying business performance.

  
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    

How we are doing

Fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio

In 2015 the Group’s CET1 ratio increased by 110 basis points to 11.4%. The main driver was a £44bn reduction in RWAs to £358bn, demonstrating continued progress on the Non-Core rundown together with reductions in the Investment Bank. This was partially offset by a decrease in CET1 capital to £40.7bn (2014: £41.5bn). We will continue to reduce RWAs within Non-Core, while looking to allocate capital to RoE enhancing growth opportunities in our Core businesses.

Adjusted Return on Equity

Adjusted RoE in 2015 decreased to 4.9% (2015: 5.1%) as adjusted PBT fell by 2% to £5,403m, driven by a 24% increase in the Non-Core loss before tax to £1,459m as a result of the continued rundown, partially offset by a 3% increase in Core profit before tax to £6,862m. Adjusted RoE for Core was 9.0% (2014: 9.2%).

The Group estimates its cost of equity for 2016 at 10.5%.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Case study

 

Our Non-Core division is responsible for the divestment of Barclays non-strategic assets and businesses, and is run by a dedicated management team operating within a clear governance framework to rundown the unit while optimising shareholder value.

 

When the Non-Core division was created in May 2014, RWAs were £110bn. By the end of 2015, this had reduced to £47bn as a result of the disposal of Businesses, the rundown and exit of Securities and Loans, and Derivative risk reductions. Key drivers of the decrease in RWAs of £29bn in 2015 were a £10bn reduction in the Derivative portfolio, £9bn reduction in Securities and Loans, and reductions as a result of the sale of the Spanish and UK Secured Lending businesses. The announced sale of the Portuguese and Italian retail businesses in H215, due to be completed in H116, are expected to result in a further £2.5bn reduction in Non-Core RWAs.

 

 

 

16  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

How we are doing

The activity in our business units reflects our

progress in becoming the partner of choice…

 

 

 

 

  LOGO

 

Barclays Group: our 2015 structure, markets and customer type

 

Group structure

 

  

Markets

 

  

   Customer type

 

Personal and Corporate Banking    

§   UK Retail

  

 

   LOGO

  

§   Corporate Banking

  

See pages 18-19

 

 

  

§   Wealth

 

  

Barclaycard

 

  

§   UK cards

 

  

 

   LOGO

  

§   US cards

  

See pages 19-20

 

  

§   Card businesses in Europe

  
    

§   Business Solutions

 

  

Africa Banking

 

  

§   Retail and business banking, cards

 

  

   LOGO

 

  

§   Corporate and investment banking

  

See pages 21-22

 

 

  

§   Wealth and Investment Management, and Insurance

 

  

Investment Bank

 

  

§   Markets

 

  

 

   LOGO

  

§   Banking

  

See pages 22-23

 

 

  

§   Research

 

  

Barclays Non-Core

 

See pages 24

  

§   Principal non-strategic businesses

  

 

   LOGO

  

§   Securities and loans, such as non-strategic long dated  corporate loans

  
  

§   Derivatives impacted by regulation

 

  

 

The 2015 performance has been reported in the business units that operated during the year. With a change in structure for 2016, an upcoming restatement document will detail 2015 performance under the new business units.

The following pages provide an insight into what each of the businesses do, the products they provide and markets they serve, and how they look to add value to Barclays’ business model.

How each of our businesses deliver the strategy will differ. For instance, the majority of our colleagues in Personal and Corporate Banking work in our distribution network whereas Africa Banking provides fundamental banking infrastructure to a developing continent. Hence the contribution of each of our businesses will differ to the overall Balanced Scorecard for the Group, as seen on page 11. Therefore the metrics on the following pages demonstrate how each of our businesses contribute in their own individual way. Africa Banking contributes to the Balanced Scorecard of the South African listed entity, Barclays Africa Group Limited.

 

 

LOGO

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  17

 


The activity in our business units reflects our progress

in becoming the partner of choice… continued

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

 

  Personal and Corporate Banking

 

“We are succeeding by putting our

  customers and clients at the heart of

  everything we do and by continuing to

  do this we will become the partner of

  choice for the UK Ecosystem.”

 

    Ashok Vaswani

    Chief Executive,

    Personal and Corporate Banking

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

Personal and Corporate Banking

 

  

          
      Contribution to the Group      2015         2014     
  Income (£m)      8,726         8,828     
  Profit before tax (£m)      3,040         2,885     
  Adjusted RoE (%)      12.1%         11.9%     
  Risk Weighted Assets (£bn)      120.4         120.2     
         

 

LOGO

 

Salford City Council partnership

Our ability and enthusiasm for supporting the wider, non-banking needs of the Council, has led us to become the chosen financial services partner for the Local Authority Sector in the Greater Manchester area.

We worked closely with Salford City Council to understand their specific needs and devised a strategic plan in conjunction with the Council and its partners, focusing on digital skills and driving efficiency by:

 

  §   utilising Barclays Digital Eagles to provide free ‘Code Playground’ and ‘Tea and Teach’ sessions across the City, supporting residents of all ages with building confidence in digital skills

 

  §   providing an easier and more convenient way for residents to pay for Council services by signing Salford City Council up to Pingit, our innovative payment solution

 

  §   collaborating with the Council to develop a secure communication portal, enabling the Council to share information with colleagues in a safe and secure way.

    

Our purpose

Society is facing a digital revolution which is transforming the lives and businesses of our customers and clients. We firmly believe that Barclays has a social and commercial responsibility to help customers and non-customers to embrace the new and ensure that no one is left behind on the digital journey.

How the business is structured and what we provide to the Group

PCB is a powerhouse with the potential to challenge the traditional UK banking landscape.

 

§   Personal Banking: provision of simple and transparent banking products to c.14 million customers, with a focus on transforming customer interactions through automating routine transactions and humanising important moments

 

§   Mortgages: a single, highly automated, industrial strength engine to provide mortgage services to over 1.5 million individuals

 

§   Corporate Banking: an end-to-end proposition and service continuum that supports nearly one million clients, from start-ups and small businesses, through FTSE 100 companies, to partnering with the largest global corporations

 

§   Wealth: a differentiated wealth and investment management business for 35,000 high net worth and ultra-high net worth clients focused on the UK Ecosystem

Using our structure and leveraging advances in technology we can innovate to deliver relevant and differentiated client and customer experiences while driving down costs and improving control.

Environment in which the business operates

We’re in the midst of a digital revolution where everyone now expects and demands services that are easy to access, fast and reliable. Customers expect us to be with them, whenever, wherever and however they choose to transact. That’s why we’re investing in building the capacity to deliver our services digitally and finding ways to redefine how we meet customer expectations. We are restless in the pursuit of finding innovative ways to solve the routine everyday money moments while empowering and training our colleagues to help customers when they need us the most.

Risks to this business model

While executing our strategy we are cognisant that the external market and environment in which PCB operates is constantly changing, with emerging regulation, rapidly evolving competitive landscape and increasing customer expectations.

We are making good progress to adapt and evolve with the changing environment to mitigate against these risks. For example:

 

§   focusing on ensuring operational and business risks are totally understood and appropriately addressed

 

§   reshaping the way we interact with our customers in a way that will drive customer satisfaction and deepen customer engagement

 

§   automating and simplifying processes, controls, systems and products

 

§   driving technological innovation to enable our existing customers to do more with us.

We continue to focus on embedding Conduct Risk awareness across PCB to build on our values-led culture and keep customers and clients at the centre of everything we do, by empowering colleagues to ensure the right outcomes for our customers.

 

 


 

18  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

LOGO

 

Review of the year

2015 was a transformational year for PCB. We continued to support growth in the communities in which we operate, helping 17,600 people take their first steps onto the property ladder, lending £3.6bn in Barclayloans and launching a £150m fund to support fast growing technology businesses in the UK.

By innovating and harnessing technology, we are able to provide simple and relevant solutions for our customers and clients. We launched Barclays Blue Rewards providing customers with a simple and inclusive digital rewards proposition, paying cash every month, to recognise and reward their relationship with us. We also created the FX powered by Barclays app, giving users an information-only tool to compare up to the second FX rates and margins.

We continued to use technology to make customers’ lives easier in a number of UK banking firsts. Over 60,000 cheques, totalling over £55m, were processed as digital images through our Mobile Cheque Imaging pilot and through the partnership between Pingit and Camelot, we were able to create the first new payment option for the National Lottery in over a decade.

We were the first UK bank to launch Video Banking, allowing customers to securely carry out their banking through a digital face to face service with our expert colleagues. Our Serve Anywhere iPad technology enabled colleagues to access customer systems remotely in an industry first for any UK retail bank.

We made significant progress in de-risking the business and made a strategic decision to sell Barclays Wealth Americas and transformed the Wealth business with a focus on simplification and innovation in markets where we can compete at scale. In 2015, we were awarded Wealth Manager of the Year at the Global Investor Awards.

We continued to work towards our ambition to become the most inclusive and accessible bank in 2015, reaching over 4,000 Talking ATMs, being the first bank to launch a Sign Video service and launching the Community Driving Licence – a modularised colleague training app to better understand the needs of different customer circumstances.

We are firmly committed to leaving no-one behind as we enter into the digital revolution, with our network of over 15,000 UK Digital Eagles supporting customers and non-customers to build their confidence in digital skills. In 2015 alone, they hosted almost 5,000 Tea and Teach sessions helping those taking their first steps to get online, more than 1,000 Code Playgrounds teaching young people and their parents to code and over 250 Digital Business Clubs supporting small businesses in taking advantage of the opportunities new technology brings. We also continued to help the next generation secure employment and manage their finances more effectively, with the number of young people participating in our LifeSkills programme since 2013 reaching over 1.8 million and almost 3,000 colleagues volunteering to run LifeSkills sessions last year.

 

Barclaycard

 

“We continue to build on our heritage of   innovation, offering a range of market   leading solutions to help consumers make   and retailers take payments.”

 

Amer Sajed

Interim Chief Executive,

Barclaycard

  LOGO

 

LOGO

 

Barclaycard

 

       
  Contribution to the Group      2015         2014     
  Income (£m)      4,927         4,356     
  Profit before tax (£m)      1,634         1,339     
  Adjusted RoE (%)      17.7%         16.0%     
  Risk Weighted Assets (£bn)      41.3         39.9     
         

 

LOGO

 

Delighting our customers with free access to credit scores and education

 

When Barclaycard US discovered that more than 60% of the US population does not check their credit score regularly, they realised just how far this was impacting their everyday decisions from renting an apartment to getting a new mobile phone contract. The team made enhancements to their mobile app and servicing website to give customers their FICO® Credit Score; top two key factors affecting it; along with related information for customers to keep in mind.

 

Over three million cardholders in the US are now proactively viewing their FICO® scores with about 60% accessing it monthly and around 35% using our mobile app. Lower rates of delinquency have been observed in customers taking advantage of the service.

 

Based on the positive feedback and engagement from our customers in the US, a similar initiative with a local partner has since been taken up in the UK with free credit score checks for all our UK customers too.

 

®FICO is a registered trademark of Fair Isaac Corporation in the US and other countries.

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  19


The activity in our business units reflects our progress

in becoming the partner of choice… continued

    

 

 

 

LOGO

 

Our purpose

Barclaycard aspires to be the most recommended brand to help consumers buy and clients sell, every day. We provide funding to facilitate payments and lend responsibly to customers and clients based on their needs and our risk appetite. We also enable retailers to accept payments through a range of innovative point of sale solutions.

How the business is structured and what we provide to the Group

Barclaycard serves consumers in both of Barclays’ core geographies, the UK and the US, as well as in Germany and Southern Europe. We also operate in Norway, Sweden and Denmark via our EnterCard joint venture. We provide branded and co-branded consumer cards to our customers, and business solutions to our clients, including commercial cards, payment acceptance and point of sale finance. Our business model is diversified by geography and product line and our scale helps us deliver a strong financial performance through the economic cycle.

Environment in which the business operates

The consumer payments and lending environment is experiencing considerable change, driven by new competitors and technology, consumer behaviour and regulation. Competition from traditional and non-traditional players is intensifying, adding further pressure to an already crowded payments environment. Electronic and mobile commerce are changing consumer expectations, driving a need for a fast and seamless payments experience. Across the payments landscape regulation is challenging existing business models but also enabling increased card acceptance, as cash is replaced by electronic payments.

Many of the trends above provide opportunities for Barclaycard to help its customers and clients achieve their goals. Our future business strategy is focused on opportunities that represent the best interests of our customers and clients and that help us deliver sustainable growth.

Risks to this business model

Managing risk is a critical element of our culture. Barclaycard faces risks every day which, if they crystallise, could negatively impact our business, our customers and clients and our colleagues.

Barclaycard is exposed to a series of risks and threats, including: macroeconomic fluctuations, potential economic shocks, further regulatory changes, fraud, increasingly sophisticated cyber crime and the resilience of our core infrastructure.

We address risk by rigorous consideration of customer outcomes in the way we define and execute our strategy and make decisions. We operate within agreed risk appetites to ensure we maintain the planned risk profile. Our lending strategy is supported by clear target market criteria, ensuring we lend to those for whom credit is suitable.

We also address risk through our diversified business model; by innovating to create new opportunities; by identifying ways to meet changing customer demands in a more efficient way; and by continuing to invest in technology, people and processes.

Examples of innovations/deals this year

Barclaycard achieved numerous industry accolades in 2015.

Our proprietary bPay wearable payments solution secured eight industry awards, including “Best Alternative Payments” at the Card and Payments Awards for UK and Ireland.

Since our deployment of contactless payment across London’s transport network in 2014, over 250 million journeys have been completed using over 8.7m unique cards from 80 countries.

Finally, our US business announced a partnership with JetBlue to launch a new co-brand credit card program in early 2016, adding to our list of prestigious partnerships.

Review of the year

Barclaycard delivered a record performance in 2015. Profit before tax increased 22% to £1,634m. Strong growth was delivered through the diversified consumer and merchant business model with asset growth across all geographies. Cost to income ratio improved to 42% (2014: 43%), while investment in business growth continued. The business focus on risk management was reflected in stable 30-day delinquency rates and improved loan loss rates. This resulted in a return on average equity of 17.7% (2014: 16.0%) and a return on average tangible equity of 22.3% (2014: 19.9%).

Total income increased 13% to £4,927m, driven primarily by growth in US cards and the appreciation of the average USD rate against GBP.

Loans and advances to customers increased 9% to £39.8bn reflecting growth across all geographies.

Customer deposits increased 40% to £10.2bn driven by the deposits funding strategy in the US.

In 2015, the value of transactions increased by 14%, to reach £293bn. We have also maintained the strong customer acquisition trend from previous years, as we welcomed over 4 million new customers and 32,000 new clients in 2015, while reaching an important milestone in Germany of over 1 million customers. We have also continued to improve customer satisfaction by delivering products and services important to our customers, enabling simplification of our proposition and driving digital customer engagement.

We have made further progress in embedding Conduct Risk into our business, by strengthening areas around governance and culture, product design and customer servicing, and embedding a Conduct focused culture throughout our business, thus striving to deliver the right outcomes for our customers and clients.

Building on our commitment to make a positive difference to the communities in which we live and work, 69% of colleagues used Barclays support to volunteer, fundraise or donate. We are also making Barclaycard an even better place to work, with over 93% of our high performing employees retained, 56% of hires internal appointments and 34% of our senior leaders women.

In 2016, we are very excited to mark two significant milestones in our history, celebrating Barclaycard’s 50th anniversary and the 25th year of activity for our German operations. Since launching the UK’s first credit card in 1966, Barclaycard has continued to push the boundaries and challenge the status quo – creating the payment innovations of today and defining the possibilities of how people will pay tomorrow.

 

 

20  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

LOGO

 

 

 Africa Banking

 

“In the third year since the formation of Barclays Africa Group Limited, our strategy execution is on track. We are well positioned to address the Africa growth opportunity, make a positive economic contribution to our communities, and deliver sustainable returns for our shareholders.”

 

 Maria Ramos

 Chief Executive,

 Africa Banking

  LOGO

 

LOGO

  Africa Banking         
  Contribution to the Group      2015         2014      
  Income (£m)      3,574         3,664      
  Profit before tax (£m)      979         984      
  Adjusted RoE (%)      11.7%         12.9%      
  Risk Weighted Assets (£bn)      33.9         38.5      
          

 

LOGO

 

Delivering Shared Growth:

ReadytoWork Initiative

 

In October 2015, we launched ReadytoWork, a pan-Africa employability initiative aimed at empowering young people with the skills they need to successfully transition from basic education into the world of work. ReadytoWork aims at addressing youth unemployment by providing work readiness skills through a free interactive e-learning platform. We rolled out ReadytoWork in Zambia, Seychelles, Botswana, Kenya, Mauritius, Zimbabwe and South Africa, in partnership with several institutions of higher learning.

 

Over 4,500 users have independently registered on the portal, with an additional 64,000 learners across 325 secondary schools in South Africa accessing the curriculum through our partnership with the Gauteng Department of Basic Education.

 

 

 

Our purpose

We are focused on our goal to be the bank of choice in Africa. Our growth strategy is based on a unique competitive advantage – we are an African bank that is fully local, fully regional and fully international.

How the business is structured and what we provide to the Group

Africa Banking is a diversified financial services provider offering an integrated range of products and services across retail and business banking (RBB), credit cards, corporate and investment banking, wealth and investment management and insurance (WIMI). We serve nearly 12 million customers across Africa and have a long-standing presence in 12 countries, including in our largest market South Africa.

Africa Banking is a combination of the results of Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL), and Barclays Egypt and Barclays Zimbabwe.

BAGL strategy

BAGL’s strategy is underpinned by four clear themes. First, as an African bank, we invest in growth opportunities on the continent and provide access to the African and global capital markets. Second, as a customer-focused organisation, we aim to ensure customer experience remains our primary focus to make customers’ lives easier and help them prosper. Third, we are simplifying our business to reduce costs and improve efficiency. Finally, we continue to make significant investments in technology and automation.

Our Retail and Business Bank strategy is to transform our leading retail franchise in South Africa, and in our other African markets. We made strong progress on new customer acquisition, improved customer experience, and are investing heavily in mobile and other technologies. In our Business bank, we are improving channel efficiency to serve small businesses and medium corporates. In our Corporate and Investment bank, we completed the roll out of a best-in-class integrated product platform for corporates in all our markets, and are repositioning our Markets business. In our Wealth, Investment Management and Insurance business, we expanded into East Africa, improved performance in our short-term insurance business, and transformed our Wealth and Investment Management business to an advisory-led model.

Environment in which the business operates

Against the backdrop of a slowing global economy, Africa economies are experiencing lower growth rates in part driven by lower commodity prices. In South Africa, our largest market, persistent power shortages and drought have had a significant economic impact. In many African countries, the challenges of job creation and access to quality affordable education, and the need for a more equitable society free of race and gender discrimination, have become more critical. As a major financial services group in Africa, we aim to have positive economic impact and invest in our communities, while delivering sustainable shareholder returns.

The industry in which we operate is highly competitive and dynamic. Mobile and other technologies enable new market entrants and disrupt traditional models, while at the same time the complexity in the operations and technology environments has increased. BAGL continues to make sizeable investments in innovation, data and automation to improve customer experience and increase efficiency. Mobile technology in particular is transforming our distribution channels in line with industry and competitor trends.

Review of the year

Africa Banking 2015 performance was solid and we made further progress on the financial commitments that we set out to the market. Our Cost-to-Income ratio was lower than 2014 as income growth

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  21


The activity in our business units reflects our progress

in becoming the partner of choice… continued

    

 

 

LOGO

 

exceeded sub-inflationary cost growth. Africa Banking RoE of 8.7% and RoTE of 11.7% was lower than 2014, although underlying returns in BAGL increased further. Contribution from the markets outside of South Africa increased, and is now above 20% as these markets grew faster than South Africa. We are currently top 3 by income in four of our largest five markets.

On a reported basis, profit before tax decreased 1% to £979m and total income net of insurance claims decreased 2% to £3,574m. The ZAR depreciated against GBP by 10% based on average rates and by 28% based on the closing exchange rate in 2015 and was again a significant contributor to the movement in the reported results of Africa Banking.

The discussion of business performance that follows is based on results on a constant currency basis unless otherwise stated.

Profit before tax increased 11% reflecting growth in rest of Africa operations of 18% and growth in South Africa of 9%. Good growth was achieved in the identified strategic areas of RBB and Corporate Bank in South Africa, and WIMI, while the corporate business outside South Africa was negatively impacted by higher impairments. Investment Bank trading performance in South Africa was lower as Fixed Income, Currencies and Commodities (FICC) income was impacted by a volatile environment.

Total operating expenses for Africa Banking increased 5% with inflationary pressure, partially offset by savings from strategic cost programmes including restructure of the branch network, increased automation, and property rationalisation.

Loans and advances to customers increased 8% to £29.9bn (reported) driven by strong Corporate and Investment Bank growth, resulting in increased net interest income for African Banking. Customer deposits increased 11% to £30.6bn (reported) reflecting RBB growth.

 Investment Bank

 

 “From our unique position with dual home markets and global reach, we continue to transform the Investment Bank so that we can help our target clients achieve their ambitions.”

 

 Tom King

 Chief Executive,

 Investment Bank

  LOGO

 

LOGO

 

Investment Bank

 

       
 

 

Contribution to the Group

  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014

 

  

 
  Income (£m)      7,572         7,588     
  Profit before tax (£m)      1,611         1,377     
  Adjusted RoE (%)      5.6%         2.7%     
  Risk Weighted Assets (£bn)      108.3         122.4     
         

 

LOGO

Long-standing relationships with our clients

 

Barclays has had a long-standing relationship with Dell, having advised the Company on a number of capital markets transactions as well as its acquisition of Wyse Technology in 2012. When Dell, together with its owners, Michael Dell, MSD Partners and Silver Lake Partners agreed to acquire EMC Corporation in 2015 for $67 billion, Barclays acted as a financial adviser to Dell and provided financing for the transaction.

 

This landmark transaction, which represents the largest technology M&A transaction to date, will create the world’s largest privately- controlled technology company with an integrated portfolio positioned to address customers’ rapidly changing critical IT needs.

 

Barclays is committed to delivering innovative financial solutions to empower our clients to seize opportunities for growth and tackle the big challenges of the future.

 

 

 

 

22  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

LOGO

 

 

Our purpose

We enable the movement of capital between those who need it, for example to grow their company or build new infrastructure, and those looking to generate a return on investment. In doing so we fund and facilitate global economic growth, helping people to achieve their ambitions.

How the business is structured and what we provide to the Group

Our business is split into three core areas:

 

§   Markets: provides execution, prime brokerage and risk management services across the full range of asset classes including equity and fixed income, currency and select commodity products

 

§   Banking: provides long-term strategic advice on mergers and acquisitions, corporate finance and strategic risk management solutions, and equity and credit origination capabilities

 

§   Research: provides multi-asset class and macro-economic research delivering practical ideas to help our clients make informed investment decisions

Through this range of business activities we can provide Barclays with a diversity of income and risk, while delivering a full spectrum of advisory, financing and market execution services for our corporate, government and institutional clients.

Environment in which the business operates

The investment banking sector continues to change, driven by regulatory evolution, higher capital requirements and changing client demands. This has resulted in significant differences in the strategic responses from industry peers.

The changes we have made following our strategy update in May 2014 have rebalanced our business mix towards core business lines in which we have competitive strengths and can drive higher returns, while ensuring that we continue to provide a holistic service to our target clients. In January 2016 we announced several complementary initiatives to further support the execution of this strategy (e.g. through certain product and country exits). The Investment Bank continues to make progress on earnings, capital and leverage as set out in the strategy update.

Risks to this business model

The market environment remains challenging, marked by uncertain macro conditions and resource constraints. Alongside structural regulatory change, including new capital and leverage requirements, this has put increasing pressure on the Investment Bank’s ability to deliver returns.

Changes resulting from new and impending regulation will continue to impact our business model. In particular, adapting our business framework in response to structural reform will be a key focus over the coming years as we seek to comply with global structural reform plans.

In addition the business continues to face conduct and litigation risk. We continue to strengthen our control environment, evolve our culture and simplify our products in order to minimise these risks.

Examples of innovations/deals this year

During 2015, the Investment Bank executed several transactions that demonstrate its execution capabilities, connectivity to clients and the strength of the franchise. A few notable examples are listed below.

 

§   Barclays acted as a financial adviser to long-term client Teva Pharmaceutical on its $40.5bn definitive agreement to acquire the Actavis generics business from Allergan

 

§   Barclays executed BHP Billiton’s $6.45bn equivalent five tranche, three currency hybrid capital security
§   Barclays executed large strategic trades for clients including a large FX trade off the back of Tesco’s Korean business disposal and the structuring and issue of the largest MXN Development equity certificate acquired by the Mexican Pension Funds

Review of the year

The Investment Bank continues to make progress on its origination led strategy, building on leading positions in its home markets of the UK and US, while driving cost savings and RWA efficiencies. Annual revenues remained resilient at £7.6bn (2014: £7.6bn) and disciplined capital deployment resulted in lower RWAs of £108bn (2014: £122bn). The PBT for the year improved to £1.6bn (2014: £1.4bn).

We have continued to deliver for our clients by advising on some of the most noteworthy transactions of the year and helping institutional clients navigate the evolving markets landscape:

 

§   Maintained number one position in Greenwich Associates’ annual survey of European fixed income investors for the ninth year in a row

 

§   Advised on several prominent deals of the year, including some of the largest transactions in Consumer, Technology and Pharmaceutical sectors

 

§   Named ‘Bond House of the Year’ by IFR magazine in 2015

Through our business activities, we aim to have a positive impact on our colleagues and the broader communities in which we operate. A few notable results in 2015 are listed below:

 

§   Barclays facilitates the flow of capital towards environmentally and socially beneficial activity, with a range of business lines actively involved in delivering solutions across product groups, geographies and industry sectors. For example, the Investment Bank issued more than £5.6bn (at share) of environmental financings that positively contribute to the low carbon economy

 

§   The Investment Bank participates in a three-year rotational apprenticeship programme which runs across a number of areas of Barclays in the UK. Apprentices will receive a degree-level qualification and a permanent role upon completing the programme

 

§   The internal Employee Survey demonstrates the progress we continue to make in transforming the business and culture. The survey results point to significant improvement in sense of personal accomplishment, belief in Barclays’ goals and strategy, and the likelihood of recommending Barclays as a good place to work

The Investment Bank remains focused on strengthening the Conduct framework. The Conduct Risk committee and the relevant sub-committees ensure conduct considerations are firmly embedded in all business and strategic decisions. In-person and online Conduct Risk training for colleagues is delivered throughout the year.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  23


The activity in our business units reflects our progress

in becoming the partner of choice… continued

 

 

LOGO

 

 

 

   Barclays Non-Core

 

 “Barclays Non-Core is responsible for the divestment of Barclays’  non-strategic assets and businesses.”

 

 

 

LOGO

  Non-Core                
  Contribution to the Group     2015         2014    
  Income (£m)     (164)        1,050    
  Loss before tax (£m)     (1,459)        (1,180)   
  Adjusted RoE drag (%)     (5.1%)        (5.4%)   
  Risk Weighted Assets (£bn)     46.6         75.3    

How the business is structured and what we provide to the Group

Barclays Non-Core (BNC) was formed to oversee the divestment of Barclays’ non-strategic assets and businesses, releasing capital to support strategic growth in our Core business.

BNC brings together businesses and assets that do not fit our client strategy, remain sub-scale with limited growth opportunities, or are challenged by the regulatory capital environment. Non-Core assets have been grouped together in BNC, comprising three main elements: Principal Businesses, Securities and Loans, and Derivatives. Several of the businesses managed within BNC are profitable and will be attractive to other owners.

BNC will be reduced over time, through sale or run-off. Reducing the capital and cost base will help improve Group returns and deliver shareholder value.

Criteria for BNC

Two criteria were used to determine which businesses should be placed in BNC:

 

§   Strategic fit: businesses either not client-driven or operate in areas where we do not have competitive advantage

 

§   Returns on both a CRD IV capital and leverage exposure: capital and/ or leverage-intensive businesses, unlikely to meet our target returns over the medium term

At the creation of BNC, almost 80% of BNC RWAs related to the non-core Investment Bank. It included the majority of our commodities and emerging markets businesses, elements of other trading businesses including legacy derivative transactions, and non-strategic businesses. The key non-core portfolios outside the Investment Bank comprised the whole of our European retail business, some European corporate exposures and a small number of Barclaycard and Wealth portfolios.

BNC is run by a dedicated management team operating within a clear governance framework to optimise shareholder value and preserve maximum book value as businesses and assets are divested.

Market environment and risks

To divest BNC successfully we are partly dependent on external market factors. The income from our businesses and assets, the quantum of associated RWAs and finally market appetite for BNC components are all influenced by market environment. In addition, regulatory changes in the treatment of RWAs can significantly impact the ‘stock’ of RWAs.

These factors mean the market environment in which BNC operates can have positive or negative consequences for our planned rundown profile.

BNC maintains a robust risk management framework to mitigate the risks inherent in our businesses and assets. However we may need to take further, currently unforeseen, actions to achieve our rundown objectives which may include incurring additional costs of exit, or a change in direction to our planned rundown trajectory.

Although the emphasis is on bringing down RWAs, reducing costs in BNC is also critical. We are strongly focused on ensuring we reduce both, although this may not always happen simultaneously.

Review of the year

Loss before tax increased 24% to £1,459m driven by continued progress in the exit of businesses, securities and loans, and derivative assets. RWAs reduced £29bn to £47bn including a £10bn reduction in Derivatives, £9bn reduction in Securities and Loans, and Business reductions from the completion of the sales of the Spanish and UK Secured Lending businesses. The announced sales of the Portuguese and Italian retail businesses, which are due to be completed in H116, are expected to result in a further £2.5bn reduction in RWAs.

Total income net of insurance claims reduced to an expense of £164m:

 

§   Businesses income reduced 44% to £613m due to the impact of the sale of the Spanish business and the sale and rundown of legacy portfolio assets

 

§   Securities and Loans income reduced to an expense of £481m primarily driven by fair value losses and funding costs on the ESHLA portfolio, the active rundown of securities, exit of historical investment bank businesses and the non-recurring gain on the sale of the UAE retail banking portfolio in 2014

 

§   Derivatives income reduced 76% to an expense of £296m reflecting active rundown of the portfolios and funding costs

Credit impairment charges improved 54% to £78m due higher recoveries in Europe and the sale of the Spanish business.

Total operating expenses improved 40% to £1,199m reflecting savings from the sale of the Spanish, UAE retail, commodities, and several principal investment businesses, as well as a reduction in costs to achieve, and conduct and litigation charges.

Total assets decreased 36% to £303.1bn with reduced reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending, and lower derivative financial instrument assets.

 

 

24  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Running the company well

Your Board sets strategic direction and

provides oversight and control…

 

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

John McFarlane

Chairman

Chairman’s governance overview

“The oversight and constructive challenge provided by the Board is essential to strategic success.”

The Board is responsible to shareholders for creating and delivering sustainable shareholder value by approving the strategic direction of the Group’s businesses. In our pursuit of greater long-term shareholder value, we must maintain the highest standards of corporate governance, which are the foundation on which we manage risk and build the trust of all our stakeholders. The way in which we govern the Group to achieve these standards is set out in our governance framework, described below.

On becoming Chairman in April 2015, I wrote to shareholders setting out the three strategic priorities for the Group: to evolve the strategy to focus on our core segments and markets; to wind down non-core exposures and assets and achieve our target capital levels; and to instil a high performance culture with strong ethical values. To meet these commitments and build a business for the future, your Board has taken decisive action to increase focus, discipline and accountability, as briefly highlighted below.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  25


Your Board sets strategic direction and provides oversight and control…

continued

    

 

 

 

LOGO

 

Focus on core segments and markets

During 2015, your Board emphasised the need to focus resources on areas that matter to the Group and to exit those that do not provide an appropriate return. We approved the revised strategy to unlock greater value from the Investment Bank. We discussed increasing the pace of exit from Non-Core and during 2015 Barclays shrank non-core assets, disposing of a number of businesses or asset portfolios, with a resulting reduction in RWAs. These disposals included the sales of the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian banking networks, the Index business, FirstPlus mortgages, the Wealth business in the US and UK Secured Lending.

Generate shareholder value

While we recognise the importance of dividends in delivering returns to shareholders, we have decided it would be prudent to scale back dividends in 2016 and 2017. We are focused on improving returns to enable future increases in the dividend and to fund growth. We also progressed a number of options for increasing capital accretion over the level achieved in recent years, including the release of capital from underperforming business areas and a reduction in expenses driven by savings from strategic cost programmes. The benefit from the latter, however, was impacted by the costs of legacy conduct issues. In addition, we explored a number of new ways to improve the cost:income ratio, such as the increased deployment of technology in our core businesses.

Instil a high performance culture with strong ethical values

To ensure we have the right balance of skills and experience to drive the Group’s strategy to completion, we appointed new non-executive Directors during 2015, in addition to the appointment of Jes Staley as the new Group Chief Executive. As Chairman, I strive to instil a performance culture with increased personal accountability to enable the organisation to become more efficient and agile. Progress reports on our cultural transformation during the year revealed that the factors contributing to execution risk mainly derive from fairly simple cultural issues. As a result your Board recommended a high-level single view of the portfolio of key strategic initiatives to manage dependencies, harness potential synergies and increase the speed of completion.

 

LOGO

John McFarlane

Chairman

29 February 2016

 

LOGO   

You can read more about the work of your Board and its Committees in the Governance section on home.barclays/annualreport

Our corporate governance framework

What your Board does and how it does it underpins the delivery of long-term sustainable success. This creates the framework within which the Executive can lead the business and deliver the agreed strategy.

Leadership

Your Board provides challenge, oversight and advice to ensure that Barclays is doing the right things in the right way. Your Board is also attentive to the need to cultivate future leaders and ensure that robust succession plans are in place.

Effectiveness

Your Board requires the right balance of expertise, skills, experience and perspectives to be effective. It also needs to have the right information, at the right time, so that it can engage deeply on how the business is operating, how the Executive is performing and fully understand the risks and major challenges the business is facing. The performance of your Board, its Committees and each of the Directors is scrutinised each year in the Board Effectiveness Review.

Risk management and control

Understanding and managing our risks and continuously improving our controls are central to the delivery of our strategic aims. Your Board’s risk committees play an active role in ensuring that Barclays undertakes well-measured, profitable risk-taking activity that supports long-term sustainable growth. During 2015, we simplified and streamlined the structure of the Board’s risk committees. We disbanded the Board Enterprise Wide Risk Committee and your Board assumed responsibility for oversight of enterprise wide risk. We also revised the responsibilities of the other Board-level risk committees so that the Board Risk Committee took on responsibility for oversight of the capital and financial implications of operational risk.

Remuneration

Your Board seeks to ensure that remuneration decisions are aligned with and support the achievement of long-term value creation.

Engagement

Barclays’ wider societal responsibilities means it is attentive to a broad set of stakeholders. Your Board undertakes regular engagement with shareholders, investors and other stakeholders to maintain strong relationships.

Your Board

John McFarlane (68) Group Chairman

Jes Staley (59) Group Chief Executive; Executive Director

Sir Gerry Grimstone (66) Deputy Chairman and

Senior Independent Director

Mike Ashley (61) Non-executive Director

Tim Breedon (58) Non-executive Director

Crawford Gillies (59) Non-executive Director

Reuben Jeffery III (62) Non-executive Director

Wendy Lucas-Bull (62) Non-executive Director

Tushar Morzaria (47) Group Finance Director; Executive Director

Dambisa Moyo (47) Non-executive Director

Frits van Paasschen (54) Non-executive Director

Diane de Saint Victor (61) Non-executive Director

Diane Schueneman (63) Non-executive Director

Steve Thieke (69) Non-executive Director

 

 

26  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

                

                        

 

 

LOGO

 

 

Board diversity

Your Board’s overriding duty is to ensure it is strong and effective, with strong and effective Directors. All appointments to your Board are therefore made on merit, taking into account the collective balance of skills, experience and diversity that the Board requires. Our Board Diversity Policy, which is available at home.barclays, sets out our policy and objectives for achieving diversity on your Board. At the end of 2015, there were four women on your Board (29%), compared to our target of 25% by the end of 2015.

Noting that the latest progress report on women on boards from the Davies Review has suggested a target of at least 33% by 2020, your Board has adopted this new target in its Board Diversity Policy.

 

LOGO    Gender balance

 

   31.12.15       4 Female Directors (29%)
         10 Male Directors (71%)
  

 

31.12.14

  

 

   3 Female Directors (21%)

         11 Male Directors (79%)
  

 

31.12.13

  

 

   3 Female Directors (20%)

         12 Male Directors (80%)
  

 

31.12.12

  

 

   1 Female Director (8%)

         11 Male Directors (92%)

Viability statement

While the financial statements and accounts have been prepared on a going concern basis, the UK Corporate Governance Code requires the Directors to make a statement in the Annual Report with regard to the viability of the Group, including explaining how they have assessed the prospects of the Group, the period of time for which they have made the assessment and why they consider that period to be appropriate.

In considering the viability of the Group, the Board has carried out a regular and robust assessment of the Group’s risk profile across the five principal risks and the material existing and emerging risks. The material existing and emerging risks considered include those risks that senior management believe could cause the Group’s future results of operations, financial condition and prospects to differ materially from current expectations, including the ability to meet dividend expectations, ability to maintain appropriate levels of capital and meet capital and leverage ratio targets, and achieve stated targets and commitments as outlined in the Strategy section. The assessment also considered the Group’s resilience to the threats to its viability posed by those risks in certain stress scenarios.

In addition to the robust assessment described above, the Board considered management’s working capital and viability report dated 15 February 2016. As part of this report, the Board considered a forecast of Barclays’ Group CET1 ratio trajectory to December 2018, a forecast of the leverage ratio trajectory, the Tier 1 and total capital ratio and the build-up of loss absorbing capacity. The Board also considered the liquidity and funding profile of the Group as expressed by Barclays’ internal liquidity risk appetite (LRA) and regulatory liquidity coverage and stable funding ratios. In addition, the review included an up-to-date assessment of financial risks, including market and credit risk, and a review of operational and conduct risk. The latest internal stress test conducted in February 2016 was also reviewed, including consideration of the potential for management and strategic actions in the event stresses were to materialise. The spot position and forecast trajectory of solvency and liquidity ratios, as well as financial and non-financial risks, were considered in line with risk appetite. The report also included solvency and liquidity forecasts of key legal entities, on a post structural reform basis. The Board and Board Risk Committee frequently review and monitor solvency ratios and the risk profile.

Information relevant to the Board’s assessment of the Group’s viability can be found in the following sections of the Annual Report:

§   pages 119 to 126, which provide details of the material existing and emerging risks that the Board believes could threaten the Group’s business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity;

 

§   pages 143 to 215, which provide a review of the performance of the Group against each of the five principal risks;

 

§   pages 127 to 142, which provide an overview of the Group’s approach to risk management, its control and governance systems and how such risks may be mitigated;

 

§   pages 217 to 241, which review the performance of Barclays, including key performance indicators and the contributions made by each of its businesses to the overall performance of the Group;

 

§   pages 243 to 347, which give a detailed analysis of the statutory accounts and in-depth disclosure of the financial performance of the Group.

In its review of the information outlined above, the Board has been particularly focused on the implementation of structural reform, legacy conduct matters and the impact of a Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL). The potential impacts of these risks have been estimated and included within the Medium-Term Plans, and working capital report. The review and analysis of this information enables the Directors to confirm they have a reasonable expectation of the Group’s viability over the next three years. This period covers the period used for the Group’s medium-term capital plans and projections and has been selected as it provides management and the Board sufficient and realistic visibility of the future industry environment. During this projected three year period, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that Barclays will continue to operate and meet its liabilities as they fall due.

In assessing the Group’s viability over the next three years, it is recognised that all future assessments are subject to a level of uncertainty that increases with time and that future outcomes cannot be guaranteed or predicted with any certainty. The Board’s assessment of the Group’s viability over the next three years is also subject to the risk factors highlighted on pages 119 to 126 and in particular those items of focus referenced above, all of which could have an impact on the future performance of Barclays.

 

LOGO  

Read more in the Governance section at home.barclays/corporategovernance

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  27


Running the Company well

…with a relevant and balanced

remuneration framework…

 

 

LOGO

 

 

LOGO

 

2015 incentives

The Board Remuneration Committee’s priorities are to ensure that Barclays pays for sustainable performance, aligns remuneration with risk and delivers a greater proportion of the income we generate to our shareholders.

Performance and pay

The Committee’s 2015 pay decisions took full consideration of financial performance, both on an adjusted and a statutory basis, and non-financial performance including progress towards the 2018 targets within the Balanced Scorecard. The Committee also recognised the need to improve returns to shareholders and to accelerate delivery. We are committed to moving this forward in a manner that is consistent with Barclays’ Values to ensure that legacy events are not repeated.

Although there were improvements in the Core operating businesses with Core adjusted profit before tax up 3%, Group adjusted profit before tax was down 2% to £5,403m for 2015. Group statutory profit before tax was down 8% at £2,073m. The Group’s capital position has continued to strengthen with a CRD IV fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio of 11.4% and a leverage ratio of 4.5% at the end of the year. Cost targets have been met and Barclays Non-Core has made significant progress in reducing its risk weighted assets.

Against this background, the Group incentive pool for 2015 is again significantly lower than in prior years, down by £191m or 10% in absolute terms at £1,669m compared to the incentive pool of £1,860m for 2014.

 

Similarly, the 2015 Investment Bank incentive pool is down 7%, despite the Investment Bank’s adjusted profit before tax increasing by 17%.

Total compensation costs are down 6%, and the compensation to adjusted net income ratio is 37.2%, down from 37.7% in 2014. The Core compensation to adjusted net income ratio is also down at 34.7% (2014: 35.7%).

Risk and conduct

A central feature of our remuneration philosophy is that remuneration must be aligned with risk, and with the conduct expectations of Barclays, our regulators and stakeholders. The Group incentive pool outlined above is after adjustments the Committee has made for both risk and conduct events. In addition to specific risk and conduct events, we also adjusted the incentive pool to take account of an overall assessment of a wide range of future risks, non-financial factors that can support the delivery of a strong conduct culture and other factors including reputation, impact on customers, markets and other stakeholders.

We have a robust process for considering risk and conduct issues as part of individual performance management reviews with outcomes reflected in individual incentive decisions. Individuals who are directly or indirectly accountable for risk and conduct events have had their remuneration adjusted as appropriate. This includes reductions in current year bonus levels and reductions in vesting amounts of deferred awards through the application of malus. Further details can be found on page 89.

 

 

28  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

LOGO

 

Summary Remuneration report

The full Remuneration Report can be found on pages 83 to 116. The Remuneration report (other than the part containing the Directors’ Remuneration Policy) will be subject to an advisory vote by shareholders at the 2016 AGM.

Executive team

2015 saw a change in Group Chief Executive. The Company announced on 28 October 2015 that Jes Staley was to become Group Chief Executive with effect from 1 December 2015. He was appointed on a salary of £1,200,000 and Role Based Pay of £1,150,000 commensurate with market pay levels. The Committee approved the grant of a share ‘buy-out’ award to compensate him for an unvested share award granted to him by a previous employer which was forfeited as a result of him joining Barclays. The award was made on terms aligned to the forfeited award. Jes Staley satisfied, at the date of joining, the executive Directors’ shareholding requirement of four times salary through his personal purchase of 2,790,000 Barclays shares.

During the four month period between Antony Jenkins’ departure as Group Chief Executive and Jes Staley starting in the role, John McFarlane served as Executive Chairman. John McFarlane indicated to the Committee that he did not wish his remuneration to be increased during that time and therefore his fee remained unchanged for the period during which he served as Executive Chairman.

The Committee also approved compensation arrangements on Antony Jenkins’ departure as Group Chief Executive during the year. Further details can be found on page 101.

2015 remuneration

The following tables show a single total figure for 2015 remuneration in respect of qualifying service for each executive and non-executive Director together with comparative figures for 2014.

Executive Directors: Single total figure for 2015 remuneration (audited)

 

      

 

Salary

£000

  

  

    

 

Role Based Pay

£000

  

  

    

 

Taxable benefits

£000

  

  

     

Annual bonus

£000

  

  

    

 

LTIP

£000

  

  

    

 

Pension

£000

  

  

 

Total

£000

  

  

           2015         2014             2015             2014           2015         2014              2015           2014         2015         2014             2015             2014            2015          2014   

Antony Jenkinsa

     598         1,100         516         950         89         100          505         1,100         1,494         1,854         197         363         3,399        5,467   

Tushar Morzaria

     800         800         750         750         82         95          701         900                         200         200         2,533        2,745   

Jes Staleyb

     100                 96                 48                                                        33                   277            

Notes

a The 2015 figures for Antony Jenkins relate to the period to 16 July 2015 when he ceased to be a Director, save in the case of the LTIP which relates to the whole performance period.
b The 2015 figures for Jes Staley relate to the period from 1 December 2015 when he joined the Board as Group Chief Executive.

John McFarlane was appointed Executive Chairman from 17 July 2015 to 30 November 2015. Details of his fees are provided on page 31.

Additional information in respect of 2015 remuneration for the executive Directors (audited)

Role Based Pay (RBP)

Executive Directors receive RBP which is delivered quarterly in shares, subject to a holding period with restrictions lifting over five years (20% each year). The value shown in the above table is of shares at the date awarded.

Taxable benefits

Taxable benefits include private medical cover, life and ill health income protection, tax advice, relocation, home leave related costs, car allowance and the use of a company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes and other benefits that are considered minor in nature.

Annual bonus

Annual bonuses are discretionary and are typically awarded in Q1 following the financial year to which they relate. The 2015 bonus awards reflect the Committee’s assessment of the extent to which the executive Directors achieved their Financial (50% weighting) and Balanced Scorecard (35% weighting) performance measures, and their personal objectives (15% weighting). A summary of the assessment against the performance measures is provided below. For more information please see pages 93 and 94. Jes Staley was not eligible for a 2015 bonus.

Financial (50% weighting)

 

Performance measure

     Weighting          

 

Threshold

25%

 

  

      

 

Maximum

100%

 

  

      

 

2015

Actual

  

  

      

 

2015

Outcome

  

  

Financial

                      

Adjusted profit before tax

     20%           £5,801m           £7,022m           £5,403m           0.0%   

Adjusted costs (ex CTA)

     10%           £16,780m           £15,182m           £16,205m           5.2%   

CET1 ratio

     10%           10.47%           11.34%           11.4%           10.0%   

Leverage ratio

     10%           4.17%           4.72%           4.5%           6.9%   

Total Financial

     50%                                            22.1%   

The approach taken to assessing financial performance against each of the financial measures is based on a straight line outcome between 25% for threshold performance and 100% applicable to each measure for achievement of maximum performance.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  29


…with a relevant and balanced remuneration framework… continued

 

 

LOGO

 

Balanced Scorecard (35% weighting)

Progress in relation to each of the five ‘Cs’ of the Balanced Scorecard was assessed by the Committee. The Committee took an approach based on a three-point scale in relation to each measure, with 0% to 3% for ‘below’ target, 4% or 5% for ‘met’ target, and 6% or 7% for ‘above’ target progress against a particular Balanced Scorecard component.

 

Balanced Scorecard – 5Cs

     Weighting         Metric     
 
2015
Target
  
  
    
 
2015
Actual
  
  
  

2015

Assessment

  

2015  

Outcome out  

of maximum  

7% for each ‘C’  

Customer and Client

     7%        

PCB, Barclaycard and Africa Banking weighted average ranking of Relationship Net Promoter Score v peer sets

Client Franchise Risk

     4th         4th       Met target   
                    4.0%  
                     5th         5th       Met target     

Colleague

     7%         Sustained engagement of colleagues’ score      82-88%         75%       Below target    2.0%  
                % women in senior leadership      23%         23%       Met target   

Citizenship

     7%         Citizenship Plan – initiatives      11/11         10/11       Below target    3.0%  

Conduct

     7%         Conduct Reputation (YouGov Survey)      5.6/10             5.4/10       Below target    3.0%  

Company

     7%         Adjusted return on equity      5.9%         4.9%       Below target    3.0%  
                CET1 ratio      11.0%         11.4%           Above target   

Total Balanced Scorecard

     35%                                     15.0%  

Personal objectives (15% weighting)

(i) Antony Jenkins: The Committee recognised that during the first half of the year Antony Jenkins showed full commitment to continuing to embed a customer and client focused culture backed by the Barclays Values and to delivering on financial commitments with particular focus on capital accretion, reducing costs and continuing the rundown of Non-Core. The Committee judged that 11% of a maximum of 15% was appropriate.

 

(ii) Tushar Morzaria: The Committee concluded that Tushar Morzaria had delivered a strong personal performance throughout the year, and noted that during the second half of the year (pending Jes Staley’s arrival) this was achieved while discharging considerably increased executive responsibilities. During 2015, Tushar Morzaria continued to drive transformational change, played a significant role in the improvement in the Bank’s capital position and in driving further focus on close and effective cost management. The Committee judged that 13% of a maximum of 15% was appropriate.

Overall summary

The performance assessment for Antony Jenkins resulted in an overall formulaic outcome of 48.1% of maximum bonus opportunity being achieved. Antony Jenkins’ resulting 2015 bonus, pro-rated for service, is £505,000. The formulaic outcome for Tushar Morzaria was 50.1% of maximum bonus opportunity. Tushar Morzaria’s resulting 2015 bonus is £701,000.

60% of each executive Director’s 2015 bonus will be deferred in the form of a share award under the Share Value Plan vesting over three years with one third vesting each year. 20% will be paid in cash and 20% delivered in shares. All shares (whether deferred or not deferred) are subject to a further six month holding period from the point of release. 2015 bonuses are subject to clawback provisions and, additionally, unvested deferred 2015 bonuses are subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of deferred bonuses (including to nil).

LTIP

The LTIP amount included in Antony Jenkins’ 2015 single total figure is the value of the amount scheduled to be released in relation to the LTIP award granted in 2013 in respect of performance period 2013-2015. Tushar Morzaria and Jes Staley were not participants in this cycle. The performance achieved against the performance targets is as follows.

 

Performance measure

   Weighting        Threshold   

Maximum vesting

   Actual      % of award vesting

Return on risk weighted assets (RoRWA)

   50%    13% of award vests for average annual RoRWA of 1.1%   

Average annual RoRWA of 1.6%

   0.21%      0%

Loan loss rate

   30%    10% of award vests for average annual loan loss rate of 75bps   

Average annual loan loss rate of 60bps or below

   53bps      30%

Balanced Scorecard

   20%    Performance was assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting.    See page 93      9%

The Committee was also satisfied that the discretionary underpin in respect of the underlying financial health of the Group based on profit before tax was met, and accordingly determined that 39% of the maximum number of shares under the total award should be considered for release in March 2016. After release, the shares are subject to an additional two year holding period.

Pension

Executive Directors are paid cash in lieu of pension contributions. This is market practice for senior executives in comparable roles.

 

30  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

LOGO

 

 

    

 

2016 remuneration

The introduction of new deferral and LTIP requirements in the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook and EBA Guidelines will require some structural changes as to how the approved Directors’ remuneration policy will be implemented in 2016. It is therefore our intent to consult with shareholders over proposed changes once formulated. The following summarises how the approved Directors’ remuneration policy would be implemented in 2016 under the current framework.

 

       Fixed pay         Annual Bonus         Long term incentive plan   
             Salary             Role Based Pay                 Pension         
       £000         £000         £000                     

Jes Staley

     1,200         1,150         396                 Maximum 80% of fixed pay                 Maximum 120% of fixed pay     

 

Tushar Morzaria

     800         750         200             Maximum 80% of fixed pay                 Maximum 120% of fixed pay     

Salary, Role Based Pay, pension and benefits are unchanged from 2015.

Chairman and non-executive Directors: Single total figure for 2015 fees (audited)

 

       Fees         Benefits         Total
     2015         2014         2015         2014         2015       2014  
                   £000                     £000                     £000                     £000                     £000                   £000  

Chairman

                 

John McFarlanea

     628                 11                 639       –  

Sir David Walkerb

     285         750         6         19         291       769  

Non-executive Directors

                 

Mike Ashley

     207         213                         207       213  

Tim Breedon

     232         240                         232       240  

Crawford Gilliesc

     178         91                         178       91  

Reuben Jeffery III

     135         160                         135       160  

Wendy Lucas-Bulld

     358         367                         358       367  

Dambisa Moyo

     152         151                         152       151  

Frits van Paasschen

     88         80                         88       80  

Sir Michael Rakee

     250         250                         250       250  

Diane de Saint Victor

     135         135                         135       135  

Diane Schuenemanf,k

     74                                 74       –  

Sir John Sunderlandg

     60         190                         60       190  

Steve Thiekeh,k

     184         131                         184       131  

Fulvio Contii

             37                               37  

Simon Fraserj

             47                               47  

Total

     2,966         2,842         17         19         2,983       2,861  

Non-executive Directors are reimbursed expenses that are incurred for business reasons. Any tax that arises on these reimbursed expenses is paid by Barclays. The Chairman is provided with private medical cover and the use of a company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes.

Notes

a John McFarlane joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 1 January 2015 and as Chairman from 24 April 2015. The total includes non-executive Director fees of £78,000 for the period from 1 January 2015 to 24 April 2015.
b Sir David Walker retired from the Board with effect from 23 April 2015.
c Crawford Gillies joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 1 May 2014.
d The 2014 figure has been updated to include fees received by Wendy Lucas-Bull for her role as Chairman of Barclays Africa Group Limited. The 2015 figure includes fees received by her in 2015 for that role.
e Sir Michael Rake retired from the Board with effect from 31 December 2015.
f Diane Schueneman joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 25 June 2015.
g Sir John Sunderland retired from the Board with effect from 23 April 2015.
h Steve Thieke joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 7 January 2014.
i Fulvio Conti retired from the Board with effect from 24 April 2014.
j Simon Fraser retired from the Board with effect from 24 April 2014.
k Diane Schueneman and Steve Thieke both served in 2015 on the US Governance Review Board, which is an advisory board set up as the forerunner of the board of our US intermediate holding company which will be implemented during 2016. The 2015 figures for Diane Schueneman and Steve Thieke include fees of $37,500 and $75,000 for these roles respectively.

Regulatory developments

The PRA made revisions to the Remuneration part of its Rulebook (formerly the UK Remuneration Code) during 2015 which apply from 1 January 2016. These include the seven, five and three year ‘tiered’ deferral requirements for Senior Managers and different categories of Material Risk Taker (MRT) respectively, and the potential extension of the clawback period to ten years for Senior Managers (under certain circumstances). These changes, which apply globally to Barclays as a UK headquartered bank, further emphasise the competitive disadvantages attributable to the lack of a global level regulatory ‘playing field’.

Further revisions to the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook are required during 2016 for the European Banking Authority’s (EBA) final Guidelines on sound remuneration policies. The most significant changes include a prohibition on the payment of dividends on deferred shares and an increase to a one year (from six months) holding period for incentive awards delivered in shares to the large majority of MRTs. The Guidelines apply from 1 January 2017. The application of the Guidelines to UK firms, once confirmed by the PRA and FCA, will contribute to changes to our Directors’ remuneration policy in 2017.

Agenda for 2016

In line with legal requirements, we will be seeking shareholder approval for our Directors’ remuneration policy at the 2017 AGM. As a Committee, we will review our remuneration policy to ensure that future arrangements are fully aligned to our strategy to accelerate delivery to shareholders in a manner consistent with Barclays’ Values and also to meet new regulatory requirements. This will be developed over the coming months and we will engage constructively with shareholders and regulators as we do so.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  31


Running the company well

…underpinned by solid capital footings.

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

    

LOGO

 

The financial statements of the business not only allow analysis of the key financial information in a standardised format, but are important to help understand the performance and management of the business.

The key performance indicators (KPIs) used by management to measure our progress are set out on pages 4 to 7 and summarised below. These KPIs focus on the Group’s financial strength, the delivery of sustainable returns and cost management.

    2015   2014  
 Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio   11.40%   10.30%  
 Leverage ratio   4.50%   3.70%  

 Return on average shareholders’ equity (RoE)

  4.90%   5.10%  

 Operating expenses excluding costs to achieve

  £16,205m       £16,904m  
 Non-Core RWAs   £47bn   £75bn  
 

 

32  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

LOGO

 

 

Performance commentary:

2015 results were characterised by further the continued execution of the strategy.

Group capital and leverage ratios continued to strengthen. The fully loaded common equity tier 1 (CET1) ratio increased 110 basis points to 11.4% driven by a reduction in risk weighted assets of £44bn to £358bn. The leverage ratio increased 80 basis points to 4.5% driven by a reduction in leverage exposure of £205bn to £1,028bn.

Strong progress on the rundown of the Non-Core business continued, with a further reduction in risk weighted assets of £29bn to £47bn contributing to the increase in the CET1 ratio. Non-Core leverage exposure decreased to £121bn (2014: £277bn). The announced sales of the Portuguese and Italian retail businesses in H215, due to be completed in H116, are expected to result in a further £2.5bn reduction in Non-Core risk weighted assets. Non-Core period end allocated equity reduced to £7bn (2014: £11bn).

The accelerated rundown of the Non-Core business resulted in a 2% reduction in Group adjusted profit before tax to £5,403m due to a 24% increase in the Non-Core loss before tax to £1,459m.

The Core business performed well reflecting continued strategic progress. This resulted in a 3% increase in profit before tax to £6,862m, with improvements in all Core operating businesses, including Africa Banking on a constant currency basis.

The improved profit before tax in the Core business was driven by positive cost to income jaws across all Core operating businesses. Combined with the increase in average allocated equity of £5bn to £47bn, this resulted in a return on average equity for the Core business of 9.0% (2014: 9.2%) and a the return on average tangible equity of 10.9% (2014: 11.3%). Group adjusted return on average equity was 4.9% (2014: 5.1%).

Driving efficiency remains a significant focus for the Group, with total adjusted operating expenses reducing 6% to £16,998m. Adjusted operating expenses excluding costs to achieve reduced 4% to £16,205m, driven by savings from strategic cost programmes.

Statutory profit before tax reduced 8% to £2,073m after absorbing net losses on adjusting items of £3,330m (2014: £3,246m).

A final dividend for 2015 of 3.5p per share will be paid, resulting in a total 6.5p dividend per share for the year

2015 Adjusting items to income statement

In order to provide a more consistent basis for comparing business performance between periods, management assess performance on both an adjusted and statutory basis. Adjusted measures exclude items considered to be significant but not representative of the underlying business performance and are detailed below.

 

Adjusted profit reconciliation

 

2015 

£m 

 

2014  

£m  

Adjusted profit before tax

  5,403    5,502  

Provisions for UK customer redress

  (2,772)   (1,110) 

Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

  (1,237)   (1,250) 

Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses

  (580)   (446) 

Gain on US Lehman acquisition assets

  496    461  

Own credit

  430    34  

Gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability

  429    –  

Impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed

  (96)   –  

Revision of ESHLA valuation methodology

  –    (935) 

Statutory profit before tax

  2,073    2,256  

 

 

 

 

LOGO

   These financial highlights provide an overview of 2015 performance. For further information on the results of the Group, please see our Financial review on page 217 of the Annual Report 2015 at home.barclays/annualreport

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  33


 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

34  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Governance

Contents

 

 

Our corporate governance processes and the role they play in supporting the delivery of our strategy, including reports from the Chairman and each of the Board Committee Chairmen.

 

 

              

Page  

 

Governance: Directors’ report

 

Who we are

    

§   Board of Directors

  36  
    

§   Group Executive Committee

  38  
    

§   Board diversity

  38  
               

 

What we did in 2015

    

§    Chairman’s introduction

  39  
    

§   Deputy Chairman’s statement

  41  
    

§   Board Audit Committee Report

  42  
    

§   Board Risk Committee Report

  52  
    

§   Board Reputation Committee Report

  57  
    

§   Board Nominations Committee Report

  60  
How we comply   68  
Other statutory information   75  
People   79  
Remuneration report   83  

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  35


Governance: Directors’ report

Who we are

Board of Directors1

 

 

Board of Directors

Barclays understands the importance of having a Board containing the right balance of skills, experience and diversity and the composition of the Board is regularly reviewed by the Board Nominations Committee. The skills and experience of the current Directors and the value they bring to the Board is described below. Full biographies can be accessed online via home.barclays/investorrelations

 

 

LOGO

 

John McFarlane

Chairman

 

Age: 68

Appointed:

1 January 2015

 

     

 

Relevant skills and experience

John is a former CEO of Australia and New Zealand Banking Group Limited with extensive financial services experience across retail, commercial and investment banking, gained both globally and in the UK. John has a proven track record of implementing cost reduction, cultural transformation and driving through strategic change; most recently demonstrated during his time as chairman of Aviva plc. He is also an experienced non-executive director and chairman. John became Chairman at the conclusion of the April 2015 AGM. He became Executive Chairman in July 2015 and held this position until 1 December 2015, when he resumed the role of Chairman.

 

Other principal appointments

Old Oak Holdings Limited; Westfield Corporation;

Chairman, The CityUK

 

Committees

Nom*

 

 

LOGO

 

Jes Staley

Group Chief Executive

 

Age: 59

Appointed:

1 December 2015

 

     

 

Relevant skills and experience

Jes has nearly four decades of extensive experience in banking and financial services. He worked for more than 30 years at JP Morgan, initially training as a commercial banker, and later advancing to the leadership of major businesses involving equities, private banking and asset management, and ultimately heading the company’s global investment bank. Most recently, Jes served as managing partner at BlueMountain Capital. These roles have provided him with a vast experience in leadership and he brings a wealth of investment banking knowledge to the Board. Jes joined Barclays as Group Chief Executive on 1 December 2015.

 

Other principal appointments

None

 

Committees

None

 

 

LOGO

 

Sir Gerry Grimstone

Deputy Chairman and

Senior Independent Director

 

Age: 66

Appointed:

1 January 2016

 

   

 

Relevant skills and experience

Sir Gerry brings to the Board a wealth of investment banking, financial services and commercial experience gained through his senior roles at Schroders and his various former board positions. Sir Gerry has global business experience across the UK, Hong Kong, the Middle East and the US.

 

Sir Gerry has significant experience as a non- executive director and chairman. He is currently the chairman of Standard Life plc, independent non-executive board member of Deloitte LLP and the lead non-executive at the Ministry of Defence.

 

Other principal appointments

Financial Services Trade and Investment Board; The Shareholder Executive

 

Committees

Nom, Rep*

 

LOGO

 

Mike Ashley

Non-executive

 

Age: 61

Appointed:

18 September 2013

 

     

 

Relevant skills and experience

Mike has deep knowledge of auditing and associated regulatory issues, having worked at KPMG for over 20 years, where he was a partner. Mike was the lead engagement partner on the audits of large financial services groups including HSBC, Standard Chartered and the Bank of England. While at KPMG, Mike was Head of Quality and Risk Management for KPMG Europe LLP, responsible for the management of professional risks and quality control. He also held the role of KPMG UK’s Ethics Partner.

 

Other principal appointments

ICAEW Ethics Standards Committee; European Financial Reporting Advisory Group’s Technical Expert Group; Chairman, Government Internal Audit Agency; Charity Commission; International Ethics Standards Board for Accountants

 

Committees

Aud*, Nom, Ris

 

 

LOGO

 

Tim Breedon

Non-executive

 

Age: 58

Appointed:

1 November 2012

 

     

 

Relevant skills and experience

Tim joined Barclays after a distinguished career with Legal & General, where, among other roles, he was the group chief executive until June 2012. Tim’s experience as a CEO enables him to provide challenge, advice and support to the Executive on performance and decision-making.

 

Tim brings to the Board extensive financial services experience, knowledge of risk management and UK and EU regulation, as well as an understanding of the key issues for investors.

 

Other principal appointments

Marie Curie Cancer Care; Chairman, Apax Global Alpha Limited

 

Committees

Aud, Nom, Rem, Ris*

 

 

LOGO

 

Crawford Gillies

Non-executive

 

Age: 59

Appointed:

1 May 2014

 

     

 

Relevant skills and experience

Crawford has extensive business and management experience, gained with Bain & Company and Standard Life plc. These roles have provided him with experience in strategic decision-making and knowledge of company strategy across various sectors and geographical locations.

 

Crawford has also held board and committee chairman positions during his career, notably as chairman of the remuneration committees of Standard Life plc and MITIE Group PLC.

 

Crawford intends to retire from his position at Standard Life plc in 2016.

 

Other principal appointments

SSE plc; Control Risks Group Holdings Limited

 

Committees

Aud, Nom, Rem*

 

 

LOGO

 

Reuben Jeffery III

Non-executive

 

Age: 62

Appointed:

16 July 2009

 

   

 

Relevant skills and experience

Reuben has extensive financial services experience, particularly within investment banking and wealth management, through his role as CEO and president of Rockefeller & Co. Inc. and Rockefeller Financial Services Inc. and his former senior roles with Goldman Sachs, including as the managing partner of the Paris office.

 

His various government roles in the US, including as chairman of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission, provides the Board with insight into the US political and regulatory environment.

 

Other principal appointments

International Advisory Council of the China Securities Regulatory Commission; Advisory Board of Towerbrook Capital Partners LP; Advisory Board of J. Rothschild Capital Management Limited; Financial Services Volunteer Corps; The Asia Foundation

 

Committees

Nom, Ris

 

 

 

1 The composition of the Board is correct as at 29 February 2016.

 

36  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                    

            

                

 

 

 

LOGO

 

Wendy Lucas-Bull

Non-executive

 

Age: 62

Appointed:

19 September 2013

 

     

 

Relevant skills and experience

Wendy has significant financial services and African banking experience gained through CEO and senior executive roles on the boards of large South African banks, including Barclays Africa Group Limited. As a CEO she has a track record of successful financial turnaround and cultural transformation of a major South African bank. Her expertise in asset management, investment, commercial and retail banking on the continent is invaluable to the Board given its operations in the region.

 

Wendy’s previous experience of leading on a number of conduct-related consultations also provides Barclays with valuable insight into conduct risk issues.

 

Other principal appointments

Chairman, Barclays Africa Group Limited; Chairman, Absa Bank Limited; Chairman, Absa Financial Services; Afrika Tikkun NPC (non-profit); Peotona Group Holdings

 

Committees

Rep

 

 

LOGO

 

Tushar Morzaria

Group Finance Director

 

Age: 47

Appointed:

15 October 2013

 

     

 

Relevant skills and experience

Tushar joined Barclays in 2013 having spent the previous four years in senior management roles with JP Morgan, most recently as the CFO of its Corporate & Investment Bank.

 

Throughout his time with JP Morgan he gained strategic financial management and regulatory relations experience. Since joining the Board he has been a driving influence on the Group’s strategic cost programme and managing the Group’s capital plan, particularly in response to structural reform.

 

Other principal appointments

None

 

Committees

None

 

 

LOGO

 

Dambisa Moyo

Non-executive

 

Age: 47

Appointed:

1 May 2010

 

     

 

Relevant skills and experience

Dambisa is an international economist and commentator on the global economy, having completed a PhD in economics. Dambisa has a background in financial services and a wide knowledge and understanding of African economic, political and social issues, in addition to her experience as a director of companies with complex, global operations.

 

Other principal appointments

SABMiller Plc; Barrick Gold Corporation; Seagate Technology plc

 

Committees

Rem, Rep

 

 

LOGO

 

Frits van Paasschen

Non-executive

 

Age: 54

Appointed:

1 August 2013

 

   

 

Relevant skills and experience

Frits is an experienced director, having held the position of CEO and non-executive director in a number of leading global organisations, most recently as CEO of Starwood Hotels and Resorts Worldwide, Inc. These roles have provided him with both a global business perspective and a clear understanding of key management issues, as well as experience of enhancing customer experience in a retail environment.

 

Other principal appointments

None

 

Committees

Rep

 

 

LOGO

 

Diane de Saint Victor

Non-executive

 

Age: 61

Appointed:

1 March 2013

 

     

 

Relevant skills and experience

Diane holds the roles of executive director, general counsel and company secretary of ABB Limited, a listed international power and automation technologies company. Diane’s legal background, combined with her knowledge of regulatory and compliance requirements, bring a unique perspective to the discussions of the Board and its Committees.

 

Other principal appointments

None

 

Committees

Aud, Rep

 

 

LOGO

 

Diane Schueneman

Non-executive

 

Age: 63

Appointed:

25 June 2015

 

     

 

Relevant skills and experience

Diane joined Barclays after an extensive career at Merrill Lynch, holding a variety of senior roles. Diane brings a wealth of experience in managing global, cross-discipline business operations, client services and technology in the financial services industry. Diane’s experience is a good addition to discussions of the Board and the Board Risk Committee. Diane will also join the Board Audit Committee with effect from 1 March 2016.

 

Other principal appointments

None

 

Committees

Ris

 

 

LOGO

 

Steve Thieke

Non-executive

 

Age: 69

Appointed:

7 January 2014

 

     

 

Relevant skills and experience

Steve has significant experience in financial services, in both investment banking with JP Morgan, where among other roles he served as the chairman of the risk management committee, and in regulation, through roles with the Federal Reserve Bank of New York and the Financial Services Authority. Steve also has significant board experience, having served in both executive and non-executive director roles in his career.

 

Other principal appointments

None

 

Committees

Rem, Ris

 

 

Company Secretary

 

       

 

LOGO

 

Lawrence Dickinson

Age: 58

Appointed:

19 September 2002

 

     

 

Relevant skills and experience

Since joining Barclays as a graduate in 1979, Lawrence has worked in a number of roles, including as Chief of Staff to the CEO and as the Private Bank’s Chief Operating Officer. Lawrence is a member and Treasurer of the GC100, the Association of General Counsels and Company Secretaries of the FTSE100. In August 2015 Lawrence also became Group Chief of Staff to the Chairman.

 

 

Committee membership key
Aud   Board Audit Committee
Nom   Board Nominations Committee
Rem   Board Remuneration Committee
Rep   Board Reputation Committee
Ris   Board Risk Committee
*   Committee Chairman

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  37


Governance: Directors’ report

Who we are

Group Executive Committee1

 

 

Group Executive Committee

Biographies for Jes Staley, Group Chief Executive, and Tushar Morzaria, Group Finance Director, who are members of the Group Executive Committee, which is chaired by Jes Staley, can be found on pages 36 and 37.

 

         
LOGO     LOGO     LOGO

 

Michael Harte

   

 

Bob Hoyt

   

 

Thomas King

Chief Operations and     Group General     Chief Executive,

Technology Officer

 

     

Counsel

 

     

Investment Bank

 

LOGO

 

   

LOGO

 

   

LOGO

 

Robert Le Blanc     Jonathan Moulds     Maria Ramos
Chief Risk Officer     Group Chief     Chief Executive,
       

Operating Officer

 

     

Barclays Africa Group

 

         

LOGO

 

   

LOGO

 

   

LOGO

 

Tristram Roberts     Michael Roemer     Amer Sajed
Group Human     Group Head of     Interim Chief
Resources Director     Compliance     Executive,
       

Barclaycard

 

         

LOGO

 

       
Ashok Vaswani        
Chief Executive,        
Personal and        
Corporate Banking        

 

 

1 The composition of the Group Executive Committee is correct as at 29 February 2016.

Board diversity

The Board has a balanced and diverse range of skills and experience. All Board appointments are made on merit, in the context of the diversity of skills, experience, background and gender required to be effective.

Balance of non-executive Directors: executive Directors

 

 

LOGO

     1      Chairman    1
     2      Executive Directors    2
     3      Non-executive Directors    11
       
       
       
       
       
                 

 

  

Gender balance

 

 

Male: Female

  
10:4     

Length of tenure

(Chairman and non-executive Directors)

 

 

0-3 years

  

9

 

  

LOGO

 

 

3-6 years

  

2

 

  

LOGO

 

 

>6 years

  

1

 

  

LOGO

 

Geographical mix

(Chairman and non-executive Directors)

 

 

UK

5

 

  

LOGO

 

 

Continental Europe

1

 

  

LOGO

 

 

US

4

 

  

LOGO

 

 

Other

  
2   

LOGO

 

 

Industry/background experience

(Chairman and non-executive Directors)a

 

     

 

Financial Services

   10

Political/regulatory contacts

   9

Current/recent Chair/CEO

   8

Accountancy/financial

   2

International (US)

   4

International (Europe)

   4

International (Rest of the World)

   4

Operations and Technology

   1

Retail/marketing

   1

 

Note

a  Individual Directors may fall into one or more categories

  
 

 

38  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


What we did in 2015

Chairman’s introduction

 

 

LOGO

 

The role of any board, and one in which I passionately believe, is to create and deliver long-term, sustainable value.”

Dear Fellow Shareholders

I joined Barclays in January 2015 as a non-executive Director and succeeded Sir David Walker as Chairman following the April 2015 Annual General Meeting (AGM). I would like to extend my thanks and appreciation to Sir David for all that he did for Barclays during his tenure.

This is my first report to you as Chairman and is perhaps not quite the report I anticipated writing when I first took up this role. From 17 July to 30 November 2015, I served as Executive Chairman, the Board having asked me to take on this role on an interim basis following its decision to search for a new Group Chief Executive to succeed Antony Jenkins. I welcome the flexibility afforded to us by the UK Corporate Governance Code that allowed us to operate under these revised governance arrangements for a short period of time and ensure continuity of focus and leadership. I was ably supported by my fellow Directors and by the Group Executive Committee during my period as Executive Chairman and thank them for their individual and collective guidance and input. I was delighted that, under the leadership of Sir Michael Rake, we were able to progress the search for a new Group Chief Executive quickly and welcome Jes Staley to the Board in December 2015, at which point I reverted to my role of non-executive Chairman. Jes has a track record as an outstanding leader and I believe he has the skills and experience to take Barclays forward to deliver improved shareholder returns and reclaim its position as the UK’s pre-eminent bank. Jes and I are already enjoying a constructive and positive time working together.

The role of the Board

The role of any board, and one in which I passionately believe, is to create and deliver long-term, sustainable value. Barclays is a standout brand and has first-class retail, cards, commercial and investment banking businesses, but this has not translated into shareholder value in recent years. To deliver that value sustainably, we need to be much more focused on what is attractive, what we are good at, and where we are good at it. Put simply, we need to create a tangible and compelling reason for our shareholders to invest in us. This has driven the Board’s focus on three priorities during 2015: focus on our core segments and markets; generate shareholder value; and instil a high performance and customer culture, with strong ethical values. You can read more about the Board’s activity in support of these three priorities in the Strategic Report on pages 25 to 27.

Board appointments, performance and succession planning

One of the key aspects of my role as Chairman, and one which was especially important during my tenure as Executive Chairman, is to ensure that Barclays has an effective and cohesive, yet challenging Board, with the optimum balance of experience, skills, expertise and personal attributes. I have sought to promote a culture of integrity and transparency, enabling Board debate that allows diverse perspectives and constructive challenge. Certainly, the Board did not shy away from difficult conversations and decisions during 2015, always with a focus on what was needed to drive forward execution of the strategy to generate sustainable value for Barclays and its shareholders.

The Barclays Board has undergone a significant amount of change in recent years and saw further changes during 2015. In addition to my own appointment, we welcomed Diane Schueneman to the Board in June 2015 and Jes Staley in December 2015. Diane brings valuable operations and technology experience to the Board. Sir David Walker and Sir John Sunderland left the Board in April 2015, following the AGM, with Antony Jenkins leaving the Board in July 2015. Finally, in October 2015, we announced that Sir Gerry Grimstone would succeed Sir Michael Rake as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director with effect from 1 January 2016. Sir Michael retired from the Board at the end of 2015 and I would like to thank him for his dedicated service and commitment over his eight years as a non-executive Director, including being Senior Independent Director since October 2011 and Deputy Chairman since July 2012. Sir Michael offers his own perspective on governance during 2015 on page 41.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  39


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Chairman’s introduction

 

 

I am also delighted to report that we have met the Board diversity target we set back in 2012, which was that 25% of the Board by the end of 2015 should be women. We have now agreed a new diversity target, which is that 33% of the Board by the end of 2020 should be women, although our overriding principle is that all appointments to the Board are made on merit, taking into account the skills and experience that the Board needs now and may need in the future to support delivery of our strategy.

I am on record as saying that Barclays needs to reduce its internal bureaucracy by becoming leaner and more agile and consequently more effective and the Board and its processes are no exception to this. One of the steps I took on becoming Chairman was to review the Board’s governance structure, with assistance from the Company Secretary, in order to simplify and streamline the principal Board Committees, in particular those Board Committees with responsibility for oversight of risk. As a result, the Board decided to disband the Board Enterprise Wide Risk Committee, with its responsibilities for oversight of enterprise-wide risk being assumed by the Board as a whole. We also concluded that the Board Financial Risk Committee should assume responsibility for oversight of the capital and financial aspects of operational risk, in addition to financial risk, leaving the Board Conduct, Operational and Reputational Risk Committee to focus on conduct and culture, reputational risk and citizenship. The Board Audit Committee continued to focus on the control aspects of operational risk. The Board Committees have subsequently been renamed to more accurately reflect their responsibilities.

As part of our discussions on Board and Board Committee succession planning, membership of each Committee was also reviewed to ensure that it had the right balance of skills, experience and perspectives and also to ensure that individual Directors were not being over-burdened by Committee responsibilities. Board Committees play a vital role in supporting the Board in its oversight of internal control and financial reporting, risk and risk management and reward and remuneration. Each of the Board Committee Chairmen report below on how their committees discharged their responsibilities during 2015 and the material matters each considered. The Board Nominations Committee has continued to play a role in succession planning for Group Executive Committee and senior leadership roles and, having had the opportunity during 2015, as Executive Chairman, to work even more closely with Group Executive Committee members, I was able to bring some fresh perspectives on the talent pipeline and talent management processes. More detail on the Board Nominations Committee’s work on succession planning can be found on page 61.

It is important to periodically obtain an independent perspective on the effectiveness of the Board and particularly so in a year when our conventional Board governance processes were temporarily revised. We have conducted an externally facilitated review of the effectiveness of the Board each year since 2004 and for 2015 we asked Independent Board Evaluation to facilitate that review. I am pleased to advise that the overall outcome of the review was that the Board is operating effectively, although there are some areas that could be enhanced. A report on the evaluation process and the outcomes may be found on pages 64, 66 and 67.

Culture and values

People matter more than anything else in any business: it is a company’s people that make it great, help it stand out from its competitors, and make it an attractive proposition for customers and investors. As a Board, we are responsible for ensuring that Barclays’ people do things – the right things – in the right way by setting the tone from the top, by living Barclays’ culture and values in everything that we do and in the decisions we make, by holding the Group Executive Committee to account for the integrity of our Purpose and Values and by creating a culture in which doing the right thing is integral to the way we operate, globally. In an organisation as large and as complex as Barclays, that can be, and is, a challenge, but we are only too alive to the consequence of getting this wrong. I have personally endorsed our Code of Conduct, The Barclays Way, and the Board Reputation Committee has been monitoring, on behalf of the Board, the progress we are making to embed cultural change.

Shareholder and regulatory engagement

Meaningful engagement with our shareholders and regulators is a key pillar of our approach to corporate governance. We welcome open and constructive discussion with our stakeholders, particularly with regard to governance and succession planning, strategy and remuneration. You can read more about how we have engaged with key stakeholders during 2015 in this report. I also hope to meet with many of our private shareholders at our AGM, which will be held on 28 April 2016. A significant activity during 2015 was our external audit tender, on which we engaged with a number of our major shareholders, and you can read a report from Tim Breedon, who chaired our Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee, on page 51.

Looking ahead

2015 has not been without its challenges, but I believe that we now have the leadership in place to take forward execution of our strategy at pace, to deliver on our priorities and generate the long-term sustainable value that will benefit not only Barclays’ shareholders, but society at large.

 

LOGO

John McFarlane

Chairman

29 February 2016

 

 

40  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


What we did in 2015

Statement from Sir Michael Rake

Deputy Chairman until 31 December 2015

 

 

LOGO

 

In asking the Chairman to take on executive responsibilities…we were mindful of the need to ensure that our Board governance arrangements remained effective.”

 

 

 

Board allocation of time (%)

 

               2015       2014
LOGO   1   Strategy formulation and implementation monitoring      56       47
  2   Finance (incl. capital and liquidity)      11       17
  3   Governance and Risk (incl. regulatory issues)      29       32
  4   Other (incl. compensation)      4       4
         
         
         
         
         

Dear Fellow Shareholders

In early July 2015, we announced the departure of Antony Jenkins as Group Chief Executive and the appointment of John McFarlane as Executive Chairman, pending the appointment of a new Group Chief Executive. The non-executive Directors had reflected long and hard on the issue of Group leadership and had concluded that new leadership, bringing a new set of skills, was required to accelerate the pace of execution going forward. These events were extensively reported at the time and, rather than revisit them, I would simply like to reiterate here the Board’s appreciation of Antony’s contribution at what was a critical period for Barclays.

In asking the Chairman to take on executive responsibilities, albeit for an interim period, we were mindful of the need to ensure that our Board governance arrangements remained effective and to maintain an appropriate balance of responsibilities on the Board and in the running of the Company until such time as a new Group Chief Executive was appointed. I wanted to give you my perspective on how we approached that and, in particular, how my role as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director evolved during this time.

First, as Executive Chairman, John McFarlane relinquished his membership of the principal Board Committees on which he served, to ensure they continued to be composed solely of non-executive Directors and without any impediment to their ability to provide independent and constructive challenge to executive management. Specifically, John stood down as Chairman of both the Board Nominations Committee and the Board Reputation Committee and I became Chairman of both committees in his place.

Secondly, I took primary responsibility for the search for a new Group Chief Executive, leading the Board Nominations Committee through this process. As the relationship between the Chairman and Group Chief Executive is pivotal to the effectiveness of the Board, John worked closely with me during this process and his insight and guidance on the skills and qualities we needed in the new Group Chief Executive was invaluable. During the search process, I reported regularly to my non-executive colleagues on the Board on progress and on potential candidates, ensuring that they had the opportunity to provide their views and feedback. You can read more about the search for our new Group Chief Executive on page 65. We announced in late October 2015 that Jes Staley would join the Board as Group Chief Executive with effect from 1 December 2015. John subsequently resumed his chairmanship of the Board Nominations Committee, however, I continued to chair the Board Reputation Committee for the remainder of 2015.

Thirdly, my general interaction with our main stakeholders – our major shareholders and our regulators in the UK and US – increased during the period that John served as Executive Chairman.

Finally, I also maintained close contact with both John and members of senior management to ensure there were no significant issues arising from a governance perspective during this period.

2015 was my last year on the Barclays Board. I joined the Board in January 2008 and served through an eventful and difficult period for both Barclays and the financial services industry as a whole. Barclays announced in October 2015 that I would retire from the Board with effect from 31 December 2015 and I have spent time with my successor as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director, Sir Gerry Grimstone, to ensure a smooth handover. I have been proud to serve on the Barclays Board and wish my fellow Directors continuing success for the future.

 

LOGO

Sir Michael Rake

Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director until

31 December 2015

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  41


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Audit Committee report

 

 

 

LOGO

 

“We have continued to play a role in changing the culture and building a greater sense of personal accountability, not just at a senior level within the Group but throughout the organisation, for maintaining the control environment.”

 

Dear Fellow Shareholders

My report for 2014 emphasised the role the Committee has in ensuring that Barclays operates with a strong control environment and, in particular, the role it is playing in changing the culture and building a greater sense of personal accountability, not just at a senior level within the Group but throughout the organisation, for maintaining that control environment. During 2015, with the agreement of the Board and the Board Risk Committee, the Committee assumed primary responsibility for assessing and tracking the progress of embedding the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF), which is the way in which Barclays approaches enterprise risk management and is the bedrock of our management of internal risk and control. In particular, the Committee was keen to find ways in which the ERMF could be linked to the Group’s assessment of Management’s Control Approach (MCA), both to drive the right behaviours and provide a more objective method of assessing MCA. In terms of specific control issues, an area of focus for the Committee during 2015 was operations and technology, where there are a number of material control issues the Group is addressing. In assessing control issues for disclosure, the Committee has applied similar definitions to those used for assessing internal financial controls for the purposes of Sarbanes-Oxley and has concluded that there are no control issues that are considered to be a material weakness, which would therefore merit specific disclosure. Further details may be found in the Risk Management and Internal Control section on page 72. The Committee also continued to address the significant judgements that need to be made in connection with the Group’s financial statements, primarily those relating to conduct and litigation provisions and the valuations of specific financial instruments, derivative assets and portfolios, particularly those where there is a lack of observable market data. More details of the material matters addressed by the Committee are given in the report below. The Committee also spent time carefully considering the requirements of the new viability statement and confirmed that, as indicated in last year’s report, three years was the appropriate period, as it accorded with the Group’s Medium Term Plan.

 

A significant activity for the Committee during 2015 was the external audit tender, which was conducted by an Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee, chaired by Tim Breedon. As I was until 2013 a partner of KPMG, one of the bidding audit firms, I took no part in the external audit tender process, other than providing input to its initial design. Tim Breedon reports separately on the external audit tender process below.

 

  

 

The role of Board Audit Committee Chairman continues to be a full and busy one. During 2015, I had significant interaction with our regulators, meeting with representatives from our UK and US regulators and also participating in trilateral meetings with our auditors and UK regulators. I also took the opportunity to liaise with my fellow audit committee chairmen in other financial services companies, to discuss common issues and share practice, and I met with a group of investors to discuss disclosure issues, in particular with regard to realised profits. I carried on with my practice of meeting with representatives from senior management to discuss specific issues, such as customer complaints or cyber risk, in addition to my regular meetings with the Group Finance Director and Chief Internal Auditor. I also visited Barclays Africa, attending the African chairmen’s conference. I held regular private meetings with my fellow Committee members ahead of Committee meetings to ensure I had a good sense of the matters that concerned them most and likewise met regularly with the lead audit partner of the external auditor.

 

Committee performance

The Committee’s performance during 2015 was evaluated as part of the independently facilitated Board effectiveness review and I am pleased to report that the outcomes were positive. The Committee was regarded as effective and considered to be very thorough and detailed. The review commented on the continuing need to balance the demands of a busy agenda and programme of work with the need to cover issues in appropriate detail. We will also be seeking to strengthen the level of technical accounting experience on the Committee. You can read more about the outcomes of the Board effectiveness review on pages 66 and 67.

 

Looking ahead

Barclays continues to face an unprecedented level of change, driven by both internal and external factors and it will be critical to ensure that a culture of strong control is maintained as the Group implements its strategy and also as it positions itself for structural reform. The Committee will continue to seek to ensure that management maintains its focus on building personal accountability for upholding a strong and effective control environment and is supportive of the pilot programme being implemented in 2016 that will require certain business personnel to spend time working in a control function before being promoted. 2016 will also see the Committee focus on the transition to a new auditor, KPMG, who will become Barclays auditor with effect from the 2017 financial year. We will be seeking to ensure that the quality of the audit performed by the existing auditor, PwC, is maintained until the end of its tenure and that KPMG has completed the steps it needs to undertake to ensure it is fully independent of Barclays and has a strong understanding of the business before it takes up office.

 

LOGO

 

Mike Ashley

Chairman, Board Audit Committee

29 February 2016

 

42  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

 

Committee composition and meetings

The Committee is composed solely of independent non-executive Directors. Dambisa Moyo retired from the Committee at the end of August 2015 following a review of Board Committee composition and size by the Board, which resulted in the membership of each Board Committee being refreshed. Diane Schueneman was appointed to the Committee with effect from 1 March 2016. Mike Ashley is the designated financial expert on the Committee for the purposes of the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act. Although each member of the Committee has financial and/or financial services experience, the Board has determined that the Committee would benefit from additional direct accounting and auditing experience and consideration is being given to further appointments to the Committee in order to deepen its expertise in these areas. You can find more details of the experience of Committee members in their biographies on pages 36 and 37.

The Committee met 10 times in 2015 and the chart on page 50 shows how it allocated its time. One meeting was held purely to consider presentations from the three audit firms bidding for the external audit tender and was not attended by Mike Ashley. Committee meetings were attended by management, including the Group Chief Executive, Group Finance Director, Chief Internal Auditor, Chief Risk Officer, General Counsel and Head of Compliance, as well as representatives from the businesses and other functions. The lead audit partner of the external auditor attended all Committee meetings, except the meeting to evaluate the external audit tender proposals, and the Committee held a number of private sessions with each of the Chief Internal Auditor or the lead audit partner, which were not attended by management.

 

Member    Meetings attended/eligible to attend
Mike Ashley*    9/10
Tim Breedon    10/10
Crawford Gillies    10/10
Dambisa Moyo (to 31 August 2015)    6/7
Diane de Saint Victor    7/10

 

* Did not attend the meeting that considered the appointment of a new statutory auditor given that KPMG, where until 2013 he was a partner, was one of the bidding audit firms.
Unable to attend certain meetings owing to prior business commitments. Input was provided to the Committee Chairman prior to the meeting.

Committee role and responsibilities

The Committee is responsible for:

 

§   assessing the integrity of the Group’s financial reporting and satisfying itself that any significant financial judgements made by management are sound

 

§   evaluating the effectiveness of the Group’s internal controls, including internal financial controls and

 

§   scrutinising the activities and performance of the internal and external auditors, including monitoring their independence and objectivity.

 

 

LOGO

 

The Committee’s terms of reference are available at

home.barclays/corporategovernance

 

 

    

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  43


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Audit Committee report

 

 

 

 

The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 2015 are described below.

Significant financial statement reporting issues

Assumptions and estimates or judgements are an unavoidable and significant part of the financial reporting process and are evaluated carefully by the Committee ahead of the publication of Barclays’ results announcements. The Committee examined in detail the main judgements and assumptions made by management, any sensitivity analyses performed and the conclusions drawn from the available information and evidence, with the main areas of focus during the year set out below. Where appropriate, the Committee sought input and guidance from the external auditor and welcomed its challenge on specific matters. In addition to these main areas of focus, the Committee also covered matters relating to Barclays’ pension scheme, taxation and accounting policy choices.

    

 
Area of focus    Reporting issue    Role of the Committee    Conclusion/action taken

Conduct provisions

(see Note 27 to the financial statements).

   Barclays makes certain assumptions and estimates, analysis of which underpins provisions made for the costs of customer redress, such as for Payment Protection Insurance (PPI), Packaged Bank Accounts (PBA) and rates provided to certain customers on foreign exchange transactions.   

In debating Barclays’ financial results statements, the Committee examined the provisions held for the costs of customer redress.

 

In respect of PPI, the Committee:

§  analysed the judgements and estimates with regard to the PPI provision, taking into account estimated overturn rates, the estimation policy on missing data, and complaints trend data

§  evaluated Financial Ombudsman Service overturn rates and trends, provisions utilisation, latest flow forecasts and how reasonable high and low end scenarios had been determined in order to assess the range of reasonable possible future costs

§  debated proposed additional provisions and whether the analysis performed by management was consistent with prior periods

§  assessed the Group’s ability to forecast trends in PPI complaints, discussing the levels of uncertainty in the projections

§  debated the potential range of outcomes that might arise from the Plevin case (the 2014 UK Supreme Court ruling in Plevin v Paragon Personal Finance Ltd) and the potential impact on the future range of provisions arising from the proposed timebar on claims.

   The Committee agreed that an additional provision of £150m should be taken at the first quarter but requested a full review of forecasts for PPI redress for the second quarter 2015. Having assessed the outputs of that review, it agreed to increase the provision at the half year by £600m. Following the review at the third quarter, the Committee concluded that no additional provisions were required but asked management to conduct further review and analysis for the 2015 year end to ensure that provisions were within an acceptable range. In deliberating the analyses presented by management in connection with the 2015 full year results, and considering in particular the potential impact resulting from the FCA’s consultation on introducing a time limit for claims and addressing the Plevin case, the Committee agreed with management’s proposal to increase the provision at the year end by £1,450m. The Committee and management will continue to monitor closely any changes in customer or claims management companies’ behaviour in light of the Plevin case and the proposed timebar.
      With regard to PBA redress, the Committee:   

The Committee endorsed management’s recommendation that an expense of £282m for PBA should be provided for in the first half and agreed it should be disclosed as a separate item in the interim results. Having examined claims trend data, it concluded that no further provisions were required during 2015.

 

     

§  debated the practice of providing for future costs where persistent levels of complaints are received

§  assessed PBA claims experience throughout 2015, examining the level of provisions against forecast volumes and actual claims experience

§  evaluated management’s analysis of complaint levels and trends and the outputs of product reviews.

  
         

 

In relation to redress to certain customers regarding rates provided on foreign exchange transactions, the Committee:

§  examined the results of the internal review conducted by management on foreign exchange transactions

§  evaluated the Group’s proposal for calculating remediation for the customers affected.

 

  

 

The Committee agreed with the proposal to make a provision of £290m in the third quarter and that this provision should be separately disclosed. The remediation is still at an early stage and the Committee noted that there were no significant developments in the fourth quarter. The Committee therefore agreed that no adjustment was required in the provision at the end of 2015.

 

 

 

 

44  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

 

 

 

Area of focus    Reporting issue    Role of the Committee    Conclusion/action taken

Legal, competition and regulatory provisions

(see Notes 27 to 29 to the financial statements).

   Barclays makes judgements in respect of provisions for legal, competition and regulatory matters.   

§  Evaluated advice on the status of current legal, competition and regulatory matters.

§  Assessed management’s judgements and estimates of the levels of provisions to be taken and the adequacy of those provisions, based on available information and evidence.

  

The Committee discussed provisions and utilisation for Foreign Exchange and ISDAFix litigation and agreed that any residual provision should be retained and not released in the first half.

 

Having reviewed the information available to determine what could be reliably estimated, the Committee agreed that the provision at the full year should be set at £1,237m for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange.

 

Further information may be found on pages 303 to 313.

 

Valuations

(see Notes 14 to 18 to the financial statements).

   Barclays exercises judgement in the valuation and disclosure of financial instruments, derivative assets and certain portfolios, particularly where quoted market prices are not available, in particular the Group’s Education, Social Housing and Local Authority (ESHLA) portfolio, which during 2015 represented the most material judgement in view of widening credit spreads on social housing bonds and budget changes impacting social housing portfolios.   

§  Debated fair value balance sheet items. This included evaluating a report from the Valuations Committee, analysing social housing bonds credit spread performance and debating the appropriateness of the valuation model.

§  Assessed how the ESHLA portfolio might be accounted for under IFRS 9.

§  Debated uncollateralised derivatives and differences in pricing ranges and the potential impact on the Group’s financial statements.

§  Examined the significant valuation disparity between the Group and a counterparty in relation to a specific long-dated derivative portfolio.

 

  

The Committee concluded that there should be no change to the fair value approach. It also agreed with management’s recommendation that an additional prudential valuation adjustment of £300m should be made in respect of the ESHLA portfolio, reflecting an increase in credit uncertainty for social housing sector loans arising from some widening of social housing bond credit spreads.

 

The Committee noted that despite attempts by the front office trading team, the Group Finance Director and the Chairman of the Committee, it had not proved possible to gain a complete understanding of the causes of the valuation disparity from the relevant counterparty. Nonetheless, a significant element was understandable in light of the different underlying positions held and the Committee took further comfort from a third party valuation provided in relation to ongoing consideration of restructuring the trades. The Committee concluded that the Group’s valuation methodology was appropriate and also noted that the Group was protected against counterparty credit risk through a collateral escrow arrangement.

 

Impairment

(see Note 7 to the financial statements).

   Where appropriate, Barclays models potential impairment performance, allowing for certain assumptions and sensitivities, to agree allowances for credit impairment, including agreeing the timing of the recognition of any impairment and estimating the size, particularly where forbearance has been granted.   

§  Assessed impairment experience against forecast and whether impairment provisions were appropriate.

§  Evaluated the results of the review and stress tests conducted by management of the Group’s exposures to the oil and gas sector in light of the reduction in oil prices.

§  Debated management’s analysis of the emergence and outturn periods for the Barclaycard portfolios.

  

The Committee agreed with the proposed adjustments to emergence and outcome periods and determined that the allowances for credit impairment on loans and advances were appropriate and adequately supported by model outputs.

 

In relation to the oil and gas sector, the Committee determined that the proposed provisions were appropriate but noted that further stress was possible in the event of a prolonged period of lower oil prices.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  45


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Audit Committee report

 

 

 

 

 

Area of focus    Reporting issue    Role of the Committee    Conclusion/action taken

Going concern

(see page 78 for further information).

   Barclays is required to confirm that the going concern basis of accounting is appropriate.   

§  Assessed a working capital report prepared by Barclays Treasury, covering forecast and stress tested forecasts for liquidity and capital compared to current and future regulatory requirements, while taking into account levels of conduct and litigation provisioning and possible further provisions that may be required.

 

   After examining forecast working capital, along with Barclays’ ability to generate capital and raise funding in current market conditions, the Committee concluded that Barclays’ liquidity and capital position remained appropriate, that there were no material uncertainties and that the going concern basis of accounting remained appropriate.

Viability

(see page 27 for further information).

   For the 2015 reporting year onwards, the Directors are required to make a statement in the Annual Report as to the longer-term viability of Barclays.   

§  At the request of the Board, evaluated at the year end a report from management that set out the view of Barclays’ longer-term viability. This report was based on Barclays Medium Term Plan (MTP) and covered forecasts for capital, liquidity and leverage, including forecast performance against regulatory targets, outcomes of the stress test of the MTP and forecast capital and liquidity performance against stress hurdle rates, funding and liquidity forecasts and an assessment of global risk themes and the Group’s risk profile.

 

   Taking into account the assessment by the Board Risk Committee of stress testing results and risk appetite, the Committee agreed to recommend the viability statement to the Board for approval, although it emphasised the need for the statement to refer specifically to the key risks to viability, in particular those outside the Group’s direct control.

Fair, balanced and understandable reporting

(including Country by Country reporting and Pillar 3 reporting).

   Barclays is required to ensure that its external reporting is fair, balanced and understandable.   

§  At the request of the Board, assessed, via discussion with and challenge of management, whether disclosures in Barclays’ published financial statements were fair, balanced and understandable, taking into account comments received from investors and others.

§  Evaluated reports from the Disclosure Committee on its assessment of the content, accuracy and tone of the disclosures.

§  Sought and obtained confirmation from the Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director that they considered the disclosures to be fair, balanced and understandable.

§  Evaluated the outputs of Barclays’ Turnbull assessments and Sarbanes- Oxley s404 internal control process.

§  Established via reports from management that there were no indications of fraud relating to financial reporting matters.

§  Assessed disclosure controls and procedures.

§  Requested that management report on and evidence the basis on which representations to the external auditors were made.

 

  

Having assessed all of the available information and the assurances provided by management, the Committee concluded that the processes underlying the preparation of Barclays’ published financial statements were appropriate in ensuring that those statements were fair, balanced and understandable.

 

In assessing Barclays’ financial results statements, the Committee requested that certain amendments were made to disclosures on litigation and also provided input on other key disclosure items, including the US Wealth disposal, guidance on Barclays Non-Core, adjusting items, dividends and outlook statements. It also debated the proposed statements to be made by the Chairman and Group Chief Executive, suggesting amendments.

 

The Committee concluded that the disclosures and process underlying the production of the 2015 Annual Report and Financial Statements were appropriate and recommended to the Board that the 2015 Annual Report and Financial Statements are fair, balanced and understandable.

 

 

 

 

 

46  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

 

Other significant matters

Other matters addressed by the Committee focused on the effectiveness of Barclays’ internal controls, the performance and effectiveness of the internal audit function, the performance, objectivity and independence of the external auditor, PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) and the arrangements being made to ensure that the incoming auditor, KPMG LLP (KPMG), achieves full independence prior to commencing the Barclays’ audit. The most significant matters are described below.

    

 
Area of focus    Matter addressed    Role of the Committee    Conclusion/action taken

Internal control

Read more about the Barclays’ Internal control and risk management processes on pages 72 and 73.

   The effectiveness of the control environment in operations and technology (O&T) and the status and remediation of any material control issues.   

§  Evaluated on a regular basis, the O&T control environment, including the status of any open material control issues, emerging risks and closed control issues, taking the opportunity to directly challenge and question functional leaders.

§  Scrutinised the status of specific material control issues and their associated remediation plans, including in particular those relating to access management, security of secret and confidential data, cyber risk, IT infrastructure and application issues and third party supplier management.

§  Debated any slippage to remediation programmes and whether this was a cultural indicator of the Group’s approach.

§  Conducted a deep dive on security of secure and confidential data control issues, discussing in particular the cultural changes that the businesses needed to make.

§  Assessed the threat presented by cyber risk, including the impact of any confirmed cyber attacks.

§  Debated the progress of remediation of third party supplier management control issues, including the potential impacts of the Group’s focus on cost management and of decentralisation.

 

  

Having assessed the status of material control issues and their remediation, the Committee suggested that resilience should be elevated as a material control issue and requested a deep dive. The deep dive has been scheduled for early 2016. The Committee also requested further updates on cyber risk and third party supplier management, both of which are scheduled to take place in early 2016.

 

The Committee requested a deep dive on access management control issues, which took place during 2015.

     The effectiveness of the business control environment, including the status of any material control issues and the progress of specific remediation plans.   

§  Assessed individual reports on the control environment in PCB, Barclaycard, Barclays Africa and US Investment Banking operations, including questioning directly the heads of those businesses.

§  Debated the importance of maintaining an effective control environment as the Group decentralises certain functional activities.

 

   The Committee requested, and received, an update on decentralisation and its potential impact on the Group’s control environment.
     The progress being made on embedding the ERMF to support a strong and effective internal control environment.   

§  Assessed the results of a self-assessment pilot exercise conducted by the principal business units, as the first line of defence.

§  Evaluated a proposal for a revised approach to the internal control attestation process to link it to the ERMF.

§  Deliberated on the challenge of embedding conduct risk management as part of the ERMF.

§  Debated the effectiveness of the systems being used to support risk and control assessments by the first line of defence.

§  Focused on the need for effective challenge by the second line of defence.

§  Debated what metrics could be used to provide line of sight to control issues and whether a more objective approach to MCA ratings could be developed.

 

   The Committee suggested to management that the assessment of MCA ratings could be more closely aligned to the ERMF. It subsequently considered and approved a proposal to align the MCA and ERMF, recommending that this be implemented with effect from 1 January 2016. The Committee requested further work on the revised approach to the internal control attestation process, so that the revised approach could be implemented for the 2015 year end attestation. The Committee asked for a further update on the effectiveness of the challenge by the second line of defence once all risk and control assessments had been completed. This update is scheduled to be provided in early 2016.

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  47


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Audit Committee report

 

 

 

 

 

Area of focus    Matter addressed    Role of the Committee    Conclusion/action taken
     The adequacy of the Group’s arrangements to allow employees to raise concerns in confidence without fear of retaliation and the outcomes of any substantiated cases.   

§  Debated the enhancements made to the Group’s whistleblowing framework, including changes in the team, communications to employees and re-publication of the Raising Concerns Policy.

§  Evaluated the level of substantiated cases and trends in reporting.

  

The Committee welcomed the steps that had been taken to strengthen the Group whistleblowing team and to enhance awareness and visibility across the Group of whistleblowing processes and the Raising Concerns Policy. It asked for more granular reporting to be made to the Committee, including ensuring that any cases of retaliation were clearly highlighted and that Barclays Africa incidents were reported to the Committee on the same basis as the rest of the Group. This information is now being received.

 

To enable an assessment of effectiveness, the Committee asked for Barclays’ processes to be benchmarked against its peers. It was subsequently presented with the results of the benchmarking exercise and concluded that Barclays’ processes were appropriate.

 

Internal audit    The performance of internal audit and delivery of the internal audit plan, including scope of work performed, the level of resources and the methodology and coverage of the internal audit plan.   

§  Focused on how to accelerate the remediation of any control weaknesses and the importance of having a culture of closing issues effectively, including debating a new approach to audit issues management, which requires issues to be remediated within six months of identification, with any extension to that time period requiring the approval of a member of the Group Executive Committee.

§  Evaluated progress of the internal audit plan for 2015 and debated the plan for 2016, including assessing the proposed internal audit coverage and key control themes identified.

§  Assessed internal audit resources and attrition levels.

§  Debated the outcomes from Barclays Internal Audit’s annual self-assessment.

  

The Committee supported the approach to enforcing even greater accountability and ensuring greater visibility at Group Executive Committee and senior management level of the remediation of control issues and audit issues management. It confirmed its agreement to the key control themes identified by internal audit, although it asked for execution risk to be covered specifically. The Committee approved changes to internal audit’s methodology and the approach to audit coverage and issues validation, which has been implemented from 1 January 2016. The Committee asked for internal audit reports to comment as a matter of course on the effectiveness of both first and second lines of defence when evaluating their audit findings. Having assessed internal audit’s reports on a regular basis, the Committee confirmed completion of the internal audit plan for the first half of 2015 and approved the plan for the second half of the year, including approving the resources requested. It also approved the plan for the first half of 2016. In view of the Group’s focus on cost management, the Committee asked for an assessment of the impact on the internal audit plan of any proposed headcount reductions and for this to be reported to the Committee along with any revised plan. The Committee was content with the outcomes of the self-assessment of internal audit performance, although requested an update on the quality assurance programme, which will be provided in 2016.

 

 

 

 

48  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

 

 

Area of focus    Matter addressed    Role of the Committee    Conclusion/action taken
External audit    The work and performance of PwC, including the maintenance of audit quality during the period of transition to a new auditor.   

§  Convened a separate session with the key members of the PwC audit team to discuss the 2015 audit plan and agree areas of focus.

§  Assessed regular reports from PwC on the progress of the 2015 audit and any material issues identified.

§  Debated the draft audit opinion ahead of 2015 year end.

 

The Committee was also briefed by PwC on critical accounting estimates, where significant judgement is needed.

  

The Committee approved the audit plan and the main areas of focus, including impairment, valuations, conduct redress provisions, litigation and regulation and IT systems and controls. The Committee asked PwC to comment on the Group’s reconciliations processes and how they compared to other financial institutions.

 

Read more about the Committee’s role in assessing the performance, effectiveness and independence of the external auditor and the quality of the external audit below.

 

     The external audit tender, which was conducted during 2015, and the arrangements for the transition to a new auditor.   

§  Received regular updates from the Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee on the progress of the audit tender.

§  Convened a special meeting to evaluate final presentations from the three audit firms who responded to the request for proposal.

§  Assessed and endorsed the proposed process to ensure that KPMG was independent by 1 July 2016.

  

The Committee decided to look further at potential reputation risk before making a recommendation to the Board. Having done so, it concluded on two firms for recommendation to the Board for consideration, indicating its preferred option of KPMG. In July 2015, Barclays announced the appointment of KPMG as its statutory auditor with effect from the 2017 financial year.

 

Read more about the external audit tender and the processes in place to ensure KPMG’s independence below.

 

 

The Committee also covered the following matters:

§  ensured it was updated on the implementation of IFRS 9, including the work under way to develop the Group’s approach, project status, resourcing and employee training. The Committee requested, and received, a specific briefing session on IFRS 9, covering the key assumptions and judgements that will be required

§  debated the Group’s plan for recovery and resolution and the process by which it was developed, including assessing the forward-looking trigger indicators

§  tracked progress of plans to ensure an attestation could be made to the Group’s regulators with regard to financial crime controls

§  assessed status reports on the Group’s controls around client assets and encouraged management to ensure that complexity, and the associated compliance costs, was taken into account when deciding which products to be offered

§  evaluated regular reports on regulatory issues

§  approved revisions to its terms of reference and recommended them to the Board for approval

§  approved a revised Group Retail Impairment Policy.

Assessing external auditor effectiveness, auditor objectivity and independence and non-audit services

The Committee is responsible for assessing the effectiveness, objectivity and independence of the Group’s auditor, PwC. This responsibility was discharged throughout the year at formal committee meetings, during private meetings with PwC and via discussions with key executive stakeholders. In addition to the matters noted above, during 2015, the Committee:

§  approved the terms of the audit engagement letter and associated fees, on behalf of the Board, having scrutinised the results of Barclays’ formal evaluation of PwC. More information on the formal evaluation is provided below

§  appraised PwC’s approach to key accounting judgements and how they were communicated and agreed with management and the Committee

§  recognising that PwC, and its predecessor firms, has been Barclays’ external auditor since 1896 and that it had been more than 10 years since the external audit was last tendered, conducted an external audit tender, identified KPMG as the preferred candidate for appointment as Barclays’ new auditor and made a recommendation to the Board. Details of the audit tender process, which was overseen by the Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee, can be found on page 51

§  discussed and agreed revisions to the Group Policy on the Provision of Services by the Group Statutory Auditor and regularly analysed reports from management on the services that PwC provided to Barclays. Following the appointment of KPMG as auditor from 1 January 2017, the Committee also commenced oversight of new non-audit service engagements with KPMG in recognition of the potential threats to independence. Read more about non-audit services below

§  instructed Barclays Internal Audit to undertake a review of a sample of non-audit services provided by PwC to ensure that the final deliverables aligned to the scope of work approved by the Committee. No concerns were identified by this review

§  evaluated and approved revisions to the Group Policy on Employment of Employees from the Statutory Auditor and ensured compliance with the policy by regularly assessing reports from management detailing any appointments made

§  analysed the results of the inspection of PwC by the Financial Reporting Council’s Audit Quality Review Team and confirmed support for the actions PwC proposed to take to address areas identified for improvement

§  assessed the draft report to the PRA prepared by PwC regarding its detailed audit work on specific topics, in particular, impairment.

PwC’s performance, independence and objectivity during 2015 were formally assessed at the beginning of 2016. A questionnaire incorporating best practice recommendations from a number of professional and governance bodies, and taking account of key findings from the 2014 review, was completed by key stakeholders across the Group. The questionnaire was designed to evaluate PwC’s audit process in its entirety and addressed matters including the quality of planning and communication, technical knowledge, the level of scrutiny and challenge applied and PwC’s understanding of the business. The subsequent report provided empirical data on which the Committee assessed PwC. It also reflected specific comments made by respondents, giving the Committee a valuable insight into management’s views. The Committee was particularly interested in assessing whether audit quality was being maintained throughout the period of transition to a new auditor. The results of the evaluation confirmed that both PwC and the audit process were effective. Having considered the results of the evaluation, the Committee recommended to the Board and to shareholders that PwC should be reappointed as the Group’s auditors at the AGM on 28 April 2016, noting that this would be PwC’s final year as Group auditor.

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  49


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Audit Committee report

 

 

 

Non-audit services

In order to safeguard the auditor’s independence and objectivity, Barclays has in place a policy setting out the circumstances in which the auditor may be engaged to provide services other than those covered by the Group audit. The Group Policy on the Provision of Services by the Group Statutory Auditor (the Policy) applies to all Barclays’ subsidiaries and other material entities over which Barclays has significant influence. The core principle of the Policy is that non-audit services (other than those legally required to be carried out by the Group’s auditor) should only be performed by the auditor in certain, controlled circumstances. The Policy sets out those types of services that are strictly prohibited and those that are allowable in principle. Any service types that do not fall within either list are considered by the Committee Chairman on a case by case basis, supported by a risk assessment provided by management.

The Committee has pre-approved all allowable services up to £100,000, or £25,000 for tax advisory services, however, all proposed work, regardless of the fees, must be sponsored by a senior executive and recorded on a centralised online system, with a detailed explanation of the clear commercial benefit arising from engaging the auditor over other potential service providers. The audit firm engagement partner must also confirm that the engagement has been approved in accordance with the auditor’s own internal ethical standards and does not pose any threat to the auditor’s independence or objectivity.

All requests to engage the auditor are assessed by independent management before work can commence. Requests for allowable service types in respect of which the fees are expected to meet or exceed the above thresholds must be approved by the Chairman of the Committee before work is permitted to begin. Services where the fees are expected to be £250,000 or higher must be approved by the Committee as a whole. All expenses and disbursements must be included in the fees calculation.

During 2015, all engagements where expected fees met or exceeded the above thresholds were evaluated by either the Committee Chairman or the Committee as a whole who, before confirming any approval, assured themselves that there was justifiable reason for engaging the auditor and that its independence and objectivity would not be threatened. Two requests were declined in 2015 (2014: two). On a quarterly basis, the Committee scrutinised details of individually approved and pre-approved services undertaken by the auditor in order to satisfy itself that they posed no risk to the auditor’s independence, either in isolation or on an aggregated basis. A breakdown of the fees paid to the auditor for non-audit work can be found in Note 42 on page 338, with non-audit fees representing 23.5% (2014: 25.7%) of the audit fee. Significant categories of engagement undertaken in 2015 included:

 

§   attest and assurance services required by regulators in connection with reviews of internal controls including reviews of the suitability of design and operating effectiveness of controls related to custody of securities and funds within Barclays Wealth Americas

 

§   tax compliance services in respect of assignments initiated pre-January 2011 in connection with Barclays international and expatriate employees, involving co-ordination and filing of statutory tax returns, social security applications and additional compliance filings

 

§   transaction support on secured funding transactions, including the provision of audits required by the Bank of England and the issue of comfort letters

 

§   provision of advice and market insight in respect of regulatory requirements relating to remuneration structure, incentive funding and risk adjustment and remuneration reporting.

Independence of KPMG

Following the appointment of KPMG as Barclays’ auditor with effect from 1 January 2017, the Committee was concerned to ensure that KPMG obtained independence from Barclays during 2016, enabling it to familiarise itself with Barclays and receive a structured, formal handover from PwC. In order to ensure KPMG’s independence, and to allow the Committee to assess whether any non-audit work being conducted by KPMG in the meantime is appropriate, both in terms of type and scale, Barclays is in the process of exiting any current relationships or assignments that may prevent KPMG obtaining independent status and

has implemented procedures to manage the types of relationships and assignments that KPMG provides going forward. In particular, KPMG is not permitted to provide any service that may continue beyond mid-2016 if it has potential to cause independence issues. Since October 2015, the Committee has required all new engagements to be considered in light of the Policy and is maintaining oversight of them on the same basis as for the current auditor. The Committee has reserved the right to decline any proposed engagement with KPMG.

The fees paid to KPMG for non-audit work during 2015 were £38m. Significant categories of engagement undertaken in 2015 included:

 

§   international tax compliance services for expatriate employees of Barclays, including expatriate tax returns, tax counselling, tax equalisation, international social security and other employment tax issues

 

§   independent approved person review (s.166) of interest rate swaps to small businesses, covering the sale of interest rate hedging products to retail customers

 

§   the building of an internal lean self-sufficiency capability to support end-to-end value stream improvements of core business processes within Group Operations and Technology

 

§   assistance in the establishment and running of the programme management office associated with the African brand migration project

 

§   support in the implementation of the Group conduct risk programme

 

§   support with the development of the anti-money laundering programme and the provision of related advice

 

§   support for Barclaycard in the assessment and restructuring of its pricing model

 

§   review and remediation of know your customer documentation requirements for Barclays politically exposed persons and special focus clients in the US, UK, Switzerland, Monaco, India, Singapore and Hong Kong

 

§   support for the development and embedding of the Basel II-compliant models in Spain.

The Statutory Audit Services for Large Companies Market Investigation (Mandatory Use of Competitive Tender Processes and Audit Committee Responsibilities) Order 2014

Barclays intends to comply with the requirements of The Statutory Audit Services for Large Companies Market Investigation (Mandatory Use of Competitive Tender Processes and Audit Committee Responsibilities) Order 2014, which relates to the frequency and governance of tenders for the appointment of the external auditor and the setting of a policy on the provision of non-audit services.

Board Audit Committee allocation of time (%)

 

                   2015         2014   

 

LOGO

 

 

 

 

1

 

  

 

 

Control Issues

  

 

 

 

18

 

  

  

 

 

 

24

 

  

    2      Business control environment      16         10   
    3      Financial results      27         42   
    4      Internal audit matters      7         8   
    5      External audit matters (including external audit tender)      26         11   
    6      Other (including governance and compliance)      6         5   
         
         
         

 

 

 

 

 

 

50  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

                          
 

Governance in Action – external audit tender

 

As indicated in last year’s Annual Report, Barclays decided to undertake an external audit tender in 2015, with a view to replacing our external audit firm from the 2017 financial year onwards. This was done to conform with the auditor rotation requirements of the final statutory audit services order published in October 2014 by the UK’s Competition and Markets Authority, which took effect in January 2015.

 

In December 2014, we established an Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee, to oversee the external audit. I was asked to chair the Sub-Committee and Crawford Gillies and Colin Beggs, Chairman of the BAGL Audit Committee, were the other members. The tender process completed in summer 2015 and the Board announced in July 2015 that it had appointed KPMG as Barclays Auditor with effect from the 2017 financial year.

 

One of the Sub-Committee’s key objectives was to ensure that the selection process was efficient, fair, effective, open and transparent. It established and published the following weighted key assessment criteria: Audit Quality (50%), Cultural Fit (20%), Corporate Fit (15%) and Experience (15%). No fee information was available to the Board Audit Committee before the recommendation was finalised. Three levels of governance were implemented to manage and support the process.

 

     

Timeline and key activities

 

LOGO

 

   
 

Governance body

 

  

Purpose

 

         
 

 

Core Audit Tender

Team

  

 

§  Assist the audit firms to put the best solution forward for consideration.

§  Conduct a detailed assessment of the audit firms following the design approved by the Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee.

 

         
 

 

Audit Tender Oversight

Sub-Committee

  

 

§  Agree objectives and desired outcomes for the audit tender.

§  Approve the design of the audit tender process.

§  Construct and agree a shortlist of firms to be asked to participate.

§  Oversee the implementation of the audit tender process.

 

         
 

 

Board Audit Committee

  

 

§  Recommend to the Board, from at least two potential candidates, the preferred firm to be appointed.

 

         
 

 

A number of firms were invited to participate in the audit tender, including firms outside the ‘Big 4’ auditors. We published key information on the tender in a timely manner, including making the request for proposal available on Barclays’ website. We also wrote to our major shareholders, setting out the process and details of the tendering audit firms, which we considered essential to transparency. Enhanced compliance procedures were established. We then undertook a broad and structured evaluation of each firm through site visits and workshops with the tendering firms, covering all the major businesses of the Group, the control functions and specific audit exercises, which were also attended by members of the Board Audit Committee. Ongoing feedback was provided to the tendering audit firms through a single point of contact in order to ensure that each was given the best chance possible of putting forward a credible proposal to the Board Audit Committee.

 

At the conclusion of the audit tender process, the Board Audit Committee was able to recommend to the Board the preferred firm to be appointed, from two shortlisted firms. All tendering firms met the minimum thresholds set by the Audit Tender Oversight Sub- Committee and, following a full assessment of the proposals and detailed questioning of the audit firms, KPMG was identified as the preferred firm, based on audit quality, evaluation scores and its extensive experience of auditing banks. Mike Ashley and Sir Michael Rake, both former partners of KPMG, took no part in the evaluation process or the Board Audit Committee’s recommendation and both recused themselves when the Board discussed and approved the appointment.

 

Tim Breedon

Chairman, Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee

 

         
                        

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  51


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Risk Committee reporta

 

 

 

      

LOGO

 

“In 2016 the Committee will continue to supervise the level and deployment of risk appetite, as well as the Group’s funding and capital position, as we respond to regulatory requirements and our expectations of continued volatility in external conditions.”

 

Dear Fellow Shareholders

 

Over the past year, the Board Risk Committee reviewed management’s responses to a range of external challenges. These included a slowdown in China and other emerging markets, falling oil and commodity prices, as well as some industry trends toward more aggressive lending terms in certain core markets, including UK property and international leveraged finance. Risk appetite, as well as country, sector and individual exposures, were carefully monitored to ensure that business activity and limits appropriately reflected external risks. We were pleased to see impairment remain broadly flat on 2014 levels and within planning expectations, despite increasingly challenging conditions in some markets.

 

A key activity for the Committee is recommending risk appetite to the Board and monitoring performance against the agreed appetite on its behalf. The context in which we set our Medium Term Plan (MTP) and risk appetite for 2015 was based on our assessment of our key markets, including risk factors arising from the near term geopolitical, macroeconomic and market environment and the potential for further conduct and litigation charges. Matters for particular focus were the UK housing market, where new mortgage regulations, a potential rise in interest rates, the growth in the buy-to-let market and ongoing high levels of household debt were expected to have an impact; continuing economic and political uncertainty in Europe; weak economic prospects for South Africa; and the potential effects of ongoing weakness in oil prices. 2015 risk appetite and risk triggers were set to position Barclays conservatively given this environment. During 2015, significant stress in emerging markets and economies became evident, underpinned by a slowing in the Chinese economy and resultant market volatility. Consequently, Barclays took early action to reduce its risk appetite to emerging markets, particularly Africa, and also remained vigilant to the potential impacts arising from a downturn in economic growth, indebtedness generally and further weakness in capital markets.

 

At the end of 2014, the Committee asked for a review of the Group’s process for setting risk appetite and during 2015 approved a revised methodology that takes a scenario-based approach, with stress testing as the basis of the risk appetite framework. This revised methodology was used to set risk appetite for 2016, with the Committee also approving the stress testing themes, the severity of the proposed stress and the financial constraints.

 

Note

a   The name of the Committee changed from the Board Financial Risk Committee in June 2015

  

Another key area of focus during 2015 was the structural reform programme, where the Committee was asked by the Group Chairman to oversee progress of the planning process, particularly with regard to structural options, their capital and liquidity implications and the potential risks for the Group, its customers and for the financial system. Now that the programme has moved into its implementation phase, the Board will directly oversee programme execution, although the Committee will continue to exercise oversight of capital and liquidity aspects, including assessing capital on a legal entity basis. From July 2015, the Committee also assumed oversight responsibility for operational risk, agreeing to focus on the financial and capital aspects of operational risk, while the Board Audit Committee oversees the control aspects.

 

The role of Board Risk Committee Chairman is not confined to the Committee’s regular meetings. During 2015, I continued to have significant interaction with our regulators, meeting regularly with representatives from our UK and US regulators. I held regular meetings with the Chief Risk Officer and members of his senior management team, with Barclays Treasurer and the Chief Operating Officer. I also liaised closely with the Chairman of Board Audit Committee, particularly on those matters where the remit of the two committees might overlap, including with regard to the implementation of the Enterprise Risk Management Framework and operational risk issues.

 

Committee performance

 

The Committee’s performance during 2015 was evaluated as part of the independently facilitated annual Board effectiveness review and I am happy to report that the outcomes were positive. The Committee was regarded as effective and as taking a thorough and detailed approach to its responsibilities. The main area identified for improvement was ensuring that the papers presented to the Committee strike the right balance between providing data for information and providing insight and analysis to encourage greater debate and I will be working with the Chief Risk Officer and Barclays Treasurer to address this during 2016. You can read more about the outcomes of the Board effectiveness review on pages 66 and 67.

 

Looking ahead

 

The Committee expects its areas of focus for 2016 to be guided by the ongoing level of change faced by the Group as it implements its strategy and executes the structural reform programme, with a particular focus on capital and liquidity management across legal entities. We will also continue to monitor and react to any emerging risks arising in our key markets in the UK, US and South Africa as a consequence of any macroeconomic deterioration or disruption in financial market conditions.

 

 

LOGO

 

Tim Breedon

Chairman, Board Risk Committee

29 February 2016

      

 

52  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

 

Committee composition and meetings

The Committee is comprised solely of independent non-executive Directors. Following a review by the Board during 2015 of Board Committee composition, Dambisa Moyo stepped down from the Committee with effect from 31 August 2015 and Diane Schueneman joined the Committee with effect from 1 September 2015. Details of the skills and experience of the Committee members can be found in their biographies on pages 36 and 37.

The Committee met seven times in 2015, with two of the meetings held in New York. Two additional meetings were held at short notice for the sole purpose of considering and approving revised risk limits in connection with specific transactions and, with the consent of the Committee Chairman, were not attended by all Committee members. The chart on page 56 shows how the Committee allocated its time during 2015. Committee meetings were attended by management, including the Group Chief Executive, Group Finance Director, Chief Internal Auditor, Chief Risk Officer, Barclays Treasurer and General Counsel, as well as representatives from the businesses. Representatives from the external auditor also attended meetings.

Member      Meetings attended/eligible to attend   
Tim Breedon      7/7   
Mike Ashley      7/7   
Reuben Jeffery III*      5/7   
Dambisa Moyo (to 31 August 2015)*      3/5   
Diane Schueneman (from 1 Sept 2015)      2/2   
Steve Thieke*      5/7   
* with the consent of the Chairman did not attend the two meetings held at short notice to consider specific transaction limits

Committee role and responsibilities

The Committee’s responsibilities include:

 

§   recommending to the Board the total level of financial and operational risk the Group is prepared to take (risk appetite) to create long-term shareholder value

 

§   monitoring financial and operational risk appetite, including setting limits for individual types of risk, e.g., credit, market and funding risk

 

§   monitoring the Group’s financial and operational risk profile

 

§   ensuring that financial and operational risk is taken into account during the due diligence phase of any strategic transaction and

 

§   providing input from a financial and operational risk perspective into the deliberations of the Board Remuneration Committee.

 

LOGO  

The Committee’s terms of reference are available at

home.barclays/corporategovernance

 

 

The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 2015 are described below:

 

Area of focus    Matter addressed    Role of the Committee    Conclusion/action taken
Risk appetite, i.e. the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives.    The methodology for calculating the level of risk appetite.   

§  Requested a review of the Group’s risk appetite process and methodology and debated proposals from management to move to a scenario-based stress testing approach.

§  Evaluated the proposed MTP stress test, agreeing on a scenario involving a global recession from an economic slowdown in China.

§  Debated the severity of the scenario and how it would apply across the Group’s main markets of the UK, US and South Africa and how it aligned to regulatory stress tests.

  

The Committee challenged the parameters proposed by management and asked for a parameter to be linked to PBT. It also asked for early consideration to be given to the impact of IFRS 9 on the Group’s risk appetite and stress testing assumptions. This work is under way and will be reported to the Committee in the first half of 2016. Given the change in methodology, the Committee requested early sight of the design and outputs as the new risk appetite process was implemented, resulting in a workshop being held in December 2015. All non-executive Directors were invited to attend the workshop.

 

Stress testing, i.e. testing whether the Group’s financial position and risk profile provide sufficient resilience to withstand the impact of severe economic stress.

 

   The Group’s stress testing exercises, including scenario selection and constraints, the results and implications of stress tests, including stress tests run by the Bank of England (BoE), and regulatory feedback on the methodology and results.   

§  Debated proposals from management to move to a scenario-based risk appetite setting approach and approved a change to the Group’s methodology.

§  Assessed the progress of the BoE stress test and evaluated the preliminary results, including discussing any potential areas of sensitivity.

 

   The Committee approved the stress test results for submission to the BoE. It subsequently evaluated the BoE stress testing results and feedback from the BoE on the stress test.

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  53


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Risk Committee report

 

 

 

 

Area of focus    Matter addressed    Role of the Committee    Conclusion/action taken
Structural reform, i.e. the progress of structural reform, including the challenges to execution.    The impact of structural reform on the Group’s principal risks, including the impact on capital and liquidity for individual Group legal entities and the potential overall impact on the safety and soundness of the UK financial system.   

§  Debated structural reform and the impact on the capital and liquidity flightpaths for individual legal entities, in particular, the prospective credit rating of Barclays Bank PLC in the structural reform structure.

§  Evaluated the respective impacts on capital, liquidity and on the general safeness and soundness of the Group of different ring fence bank (RFB) structures.

  

The Committee recognised the design and implementation challenges of the programme and supported management in proposing structures and perimeters that best ensured the safety and soundness of all elements of the Group. It requested a workshop on structural reform to provide the Committee with an in-depth view of the key challenges. The workshop was held in December 2015 and all non-executive Directors were invited to attend.

 

Liquidity and funding, i.e. having sufficient financial resources available to enable the Group to meet its obligations as they fall due.    Compliance with regulatory requirements and internal liquidity risk appetite (LRA).   

§  Assessed on a regular basis liquidity performance against requirements.

§  Debated the credit ratings of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC and potential market reaction to a ratings downgrade following removal of sovereign support notching.

§  Questioned the cost of additional liquidity and asked for options to reduce the cost to be considered.

 

   The Committee ensured that management had in place options to manage any impact on liquidity of a ratings downgrade. It agreed that the cost of maintaining surplus liquidity was appropriate.

Capital and leverage,

i.e., having sufficient capital resources to meet the Group’s regulatory requirements, maintain its credit rating and support growth and strategic options.

 

   The flightpath to achieving required regulatory and internal targets and capital and leverage ratios.   

§  Debated on a regular basis, capital performance against plan, tracking the capital flightpath, any challenges/headwinds and regulatory developments.

§  Evaluated options to maximise capital and capital ratios in order to meet regulatory and market expectations.

 

   The Committee supported the forecast trajectory and the actions identified by management to manage the Group’s capital position.
Country risk, i.e. the levels of risk the Group is prepared to take in specific countries.    The potential impact on the Group’s risk profile of political instability and economic weakness in South Africa, one of its main markets.   

§  Debated economic conditions in South Africa and the future outlook.

§  Examined the actions already taken to manage risks, improve controls and asset quality and develop triggers for additional action in the event of further macro deterioration.

§  Monitored the impact on South Africa of the slowdown in China and the fall in commodity prices.

  

The Committee sought additional information around the actions that had been taken to manage the risk profile in South Africa, including the impact of the actions taken to date. It requested a deep dive on the risk profile of the South African business, inviting the South African business heads to present on the actions that had been taken and how the business was positioned for a further economic downturn, including the impact of a further country rating downgrade.

 

 

 

 

 

 

54  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

 

 

Area of focus    Matter addressed    Role of the Committee    Conclusion/action taken
Political and economic risk, i.e. the impact on the Group’s risk profile of political and economic developments and macroeconomic conditions.    The potential impact on the Group’s risk profile of political developments, such as the UK general election and budget statement, the potential exit of countries from the Eurozone, and weakening macroeconomic conditions, such as disruption and volatility in financial markets.   

§  Assessed the potential impact of the UK general election and steps that could be taken to manage any market volatility.

§  Evaluated the potential risks arising from a general macroeconomic slowdown and from financial markets disruption, including the global impact of the economic slowdown in China.

§  Assessed global consumer indebtedness indicators and the potential impact of rising consumer debt on the Group’s risk profile.

§  Debated the Group’s Eurozone exposures in the context of the potential break-up of the Eurozone in the event of a Greek exit and assessed the Group’s levels of redenomination risk in the Eurozone.

 

   The Committee asked management to evaluate macroeconomic conditions and market indicators to inform the strategic plan and risk appetite proposals for 2016, so that the Group is positioned appropriately.

Retail credit risk,

i.e. UK property market, interest rate risk.

   The potential overheating of the UK housing market, particularly in London and the South East and the Group’s risk appetite for and management of sectors such as the buy-to-let sector.   

§  Debated UK property market indicators and conditions, particularly in the high loan to value (LTV) and the buy-to-let markets and potential economic and political risks to that market.

§  Evaluated the Group’s lending criteria and its approach to assessing customers on affordability.

§  Assessed the potential impact of an increase in interest rates on customers, including how customers had been stress tested and assessed against affordability criteria.

 

   The Committee encouraged management to continue to take a conservative approach to UK mortgage lending in the buy-to-let market and emphasised the need to keep risks and exposures within agreed appetite.

Specific sector risk,

i.e. the Group’s risk profile in sectors showing signs of stress, such as the oil sector.

   The Group’s exposures to the oil and commodities sectors in light of the price weakness and volatility in these sectors during 2015.   

§  Regularly assessed the Group’s exposures to the oil sector, including assessing steps taken with regard to the credit strategy for the sector, how the portfolio was performing and whether this was in line with expectations.

§  Evaluated the Group’s exposures to the commodities sector and actions taken to identify any names at risk and reduce exposures.

 

   The Committee supported the actions that had been taken by management to manage the Group’s risks and exposures to the oil and commodities sectors. It requested a stress test to assess the impact of further (and longer) oil price weakness on the Group’s lending portfolio, including indirect exposure.

Operational Risk

From 1 July 2015, the Committee took responsibility for oversight of the capital and financial aspects of operational risk.

   The Group’s operational risk capital requirements and any material changes to the Group’s operational risk profile and performance versus risk appetite.   

§  Evaluated operational risk capital and debated the potential for an increase in regulatory operational capital requirements.

§  Debated whether Barclays advanced status for calculating operational risk capital should be retained.

§  Tracked operational risk key indicators via regular reports from the Head of Operational Risk.

 

   The Committee focused its oversight of operational risk on the financial and capital implications, debating in particular the potential impact of regulatory operational risk requirements.

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  55


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Risk Committee report

 

 

                    
Area of focus    Matter addressed    Role of the Committee    Conclusion/action taken    
 

Risk governance,

i.e. the capability, governance and controls that the Group has over the management of risk.

   The development of a scorecard to assist the Committee in assessing risk capability across the Group; further enhancement to the limit framework and governance of leveraged finance; the actions being taken to enhance controls and governance around risk models.   

§  Requested development of a risk capability scorecard.

§  Regularly debated conditions in the leveraged finance market, tracking market indicators and the Group’s risk exposures and assessing the limit framework for leveraged finance and underwriting, including proposed changes to the framework to strengthen controls.

§  Assessed the progress of enhancements to risk models controls and governance, including the role of the Group’s Independent Validation Unit.

§  Evaluated revisions proposed to the ERMF.

 

  

The Committee approved the approach to the risk capability scorecard and requested a formal annual assessment of capability, with the option of an external assessment every three years. The Committee approved a revised limit framework for leveraged finance transactions and approved underwriting limits in general. The Committee concluded that good progress had been made on enhancing the controls and governance around risk models and asked management to focus on improving the quality of models and data quality further. The Committee also recommended the revised ERMF to the Board for approval.

 

   
 
Remuneration    The scope of any risk adjustments to be taken into account by the Board Remuneration Committee when making remuneration decisions for 2015.   

§   Evaluated the Risk function’s view of performance, which informed remuneration decisions for 2015.

  

The Committee supported the Risk function’s view of 2015 risk performance and endorsed the report that had been submitted to the Board Remuneration Committee.

 

The Remuneration Report on pages 83 to 116 includes more detail on how risk is taken into account in remuneration decisions.

 

   

 

 

In addition, the Committee also covered the following matters in 2015:

 

§  regularly tracked the utilisation of risk appetite and evaluated the Group’s risk profile

 

§  evaluated the impact of the Swiss franc revaluation on the Group’s electronic trading systems and asked for any lessons learned to be applied to other electronic platforms

 

§  debated risk related matters arising from regulatory assessments and the actions needed to address any specific issues raised

 

§  approved regulatory submissions, including the Individual Capital Adequacy Assessment Process and the Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment

 

§  assessed and debated a report on its own performance during 2014, including considering whether its remit should be revised to cover operational risk and assessing the degree of challenge and support and value it provided to the Risk function

 

§  discussed and agreed on its own training needs, resulting in two workshops being held in 2015, one on risk appetite and one on structural reform, with a further briefing session on the impact of IFRS 9 planned for 2016

 

§  approved amendments to its terms of reference to reflect its revised remit and to ensure they remained in line with best practice and

 

§  discussed and agreed its specific responsibilities for the oversight of operational risk, focusing on the capital and financial impacts, leaving the Board Audit Committee to oversee operational risk control issues.

    Board Risk Committee allocation of time (%)    
                      2015    2014    
   

 

LOGO

  1   Risk profile/risk appetite    43    57  
        (including capital and liquidity management)        
      2   Key risk issues    31    19  
      3   Internal control/risk policies    11    11  
      4   Other (including remuneration and    15    13  
        governance issues)        
               
               
               
   

LOGO

   Read more about Barclays’ risk management on pages 127 to    
       142 and in our Pillar 3 Report, which is available online at home.barclays/annualreport    
          
                    
                    
                    
                    
                    
                    
                    
                    
                    
 

    

 

 

                                  

 

56  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

What we did in 2015

Board Reputation Committee reporta

 

 

 

LOGO

 

‘The Committee’s responsibilities were reshaped during 2015 to focus on three main pillars: conduct and compliance; reputation; and citizenship.’

 

 

Dear Fellow Shareholders

The Board Reputation Committee underwent a period of change during 2015, in terms of both a reassessment of Board Committee responsibilities and membership. John McFarlane succeeded Reuben Jeffery III as Chairman of the Committee in March 2015 and, following John’s appointment as Executive Chairman in July 2015, the Board asked me to assume the role of Committee Chairman, a position I held until my retirement from the Board at the end of December 2015.

 

The Committee’s responsibilities were reshaped during 2015 to focus on three main pillars: conduct and compliance; reputation; and citizenship. Culture and conduct are the bedrock of the organisation and, with the right culture, much of Barclays’ exposure to conduct risk can be reduced. To this end, the Committee has continued to focus on these issues, assessing progress against plans for embedding our conduct risk programme and implementing cultural change throughout the Group. We assessed deep-dive reports into conduct risk within key businesses, such as Barclays Africa and the Cards business, and evaluated the findings of a report by Air Marshal Sir David Walker, commissioned by management to give an independent view on whether we are making progress with cultural change. I am pleased to report that, although there is more to be done, progress on both has been good and there is strong commitment throughout the Group to embedding the necessary changes.

 

The Committee also tracked the exposure of Barclays, and the financial sector generally, to reputational risks. Reputational risk is a risk type that is constantly evolving, with potential new risks emerging while we are implementing controls to manage identified risks. Consequently, we have taken a thematic approach to identifying our key reputational risks and have ensured that we look ahead to identify emerging risks enabling us to mitigate them early. You can read more on pages 61 and 62 about the significant matters addressed during the year.

      

 

Committee performance

As part of the annual Board effectiveness review the performance of the Board’s committees was considered and I am pleased to report that the Committee is considered to be effective. The Committee is relatively new and areas for improvement included continuing to refine its agenda, particularly with regard to compliance and conduct risk, and ensuring that it does not duplicate the work of other Board Committees. Please turn to the report of the Board effectiveness review on pages 66 and 67 for more details.

 

Looking ahead

My successor, Sir Gerry Grimstone, will be assessing the areas of focus for the Committee in 2016 and I wish him and the Committee well for the future.

 

LOGO

 

Sir Michael Rake

Chairman, Board Reputation Committee until 31 December 2015

 

Committee composition and meetings

The Committee comprises independent non-executive Directors, with the exception of Wendy Lucas-Bull, who the Board has decided to deem as non-independent for the purposes of the UK Corporate Governance Code, owing to her position as Chairman of Barclays Africa Group Limited. During 2015, there were a number of changes to the membership of the Committee, which are set out in the table below.

 

The Committee met four times during 2015 and the chart on page 59 shows how it allocated its time. Committee meetings were attended by management, including the Group Chief Executive, Chief Internal Auditor, Chief Risk Officer, General Counsel, Group Corporate Relations Director and the Heads of Compliance, Conduct Risk and Operational Risk, as well as representatives from the businesses and other functions.

 

     Member    Meetings attended/eligible to attend
     Reuben Jeffery III (Chairman and member to 31 March 2015)    1/1
     John McFarlane (Chairman from 1 April 2015 – 16 July 2015)    2/2
     Sir Michael Rake (Chairman and member from 17 July 2015 – 31 December 2015)    2/2
     Mike Ashley (to 31 August 2015)    2/2
     Tim Breedon (to 31 August 2015)    2/2
     Wendy Lucas-Bull    4/4
     Dambisa Moyo    4/4
     Diane de Saint Victor    4/4
     Sir John Sunderland (to 23 April 2015)    1/1
     Frits van Paasschen (from 1 September 2015)    2/2
    

 

Committee role and responsibilities

The principal purpose of the Committee is to:

 

§  ensure, on behalf of the Board, the efficiency of the processes for identification and management of conduct and reputational risk and

 

§  oversee Barclays’ Citizenship Strategy, including the management of Barclays’ economic, social and environmental contribution.

 

Until the end of June 2015, the Committee also had responsibility for oversight of operational risk. Following a review by the Board of its governance arrangements, responsibility for the oversight of the capital and financial aspects of operational risk was reallocated to the Board Financial Risk Committee, which was renamed the Board Risk Committee. The Board Audit Committee oversees the control aspects of operational risk.

 

     LOGO  

The Committee’s terms of reference are available at

home.barclays

 

Note

a   Formerly called the Board Conduct, Operational and Reputational Risk Committee

 

        

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  57


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Reputation Committee report

 

 

 

The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 2015 are described below:

 

Area of focus    Matter addressed    Role of the Committee    Conclusion/action taken
Conduct risk    Progress on embedding the conduct risk management framework, focus on specific conduct risks and continued reduction of customer complaint levels.   

§  Continued its monitoring of the conduct risk programme via quarterly reports from management.

§  Specifically assessed the status of the conduct risk programmes in Barclays Africa and across the Cards business.

§  Monitored regulators’ views of Barclays’ conduct risk management and reporting via updates from management.

§  Assessed progress made in reducing numbers of complaints, including those escalated to the Financial Ombudsman Service.

 

   The Committee welcomed the progress made in embedding the conduct risk programme and requested more visibility of the status of specific conduct risks. It encouraged management to continue to apply lessons learned from past events to prevent similar events occurring now or in the future. It was content with the progress made in embedding conduct risk in Barclays Africa, but encouraged greater simplification of the governance structures and communication. It also encouraged management to do more to reduce the number of complaints.

Operational risk

(to July 2015)

   The management of Barclays’ operational risk profile and exposure to significant operational risks.   

§  Monitored Barclays’ operational risk profile via quarterly reports from management.

 

§  Evaluated management’s strategy for addressing cyber risk and monitored its progress.

 

§  Assessed Barclays’ exposure to technology risk and examined plans to resolve identified control issues by the end of the year.

  

The Committee focused its attention on emerging risks and those to which the Group’s exposure was increasing. It supported tactical and strategic actions proposed by management to mitigate the Group’s risks, including endorsing management’s strategy for addressing cyber risk. The Committee also satisfied itself that progress in managing technology risk was good and there was a healthy focus on embedding the right culture.

 

Reputational issues    Ensuring that Barclays anticipates, identifies and manages reputational issues that may impact it or the industry now or in the future.   

§  Tracked Barclays’ exposure to reputational risks via twice-yearly management reports.

§  Examined the effectiveness of the current reputation risk framework, including assessing case studies on specific reputational matters.

 

   The Committee took a thematic approach to its assessment of reputational risks and guided management in its approach to managing them. It satisfied itself as to the effectiveness of the reputation risk framework.

 

 

 

 

 

58  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

 

 

 

 

                    
Area of focus    Matter addressed    Role of the Committee    Conclusion/action taken    
 
Cultural change    The progress being made on embedding of cultural change.   

§  Evaluated the outputs of an independent review by Air Marshal Sir David Walker.

§  Assessed an industry-wide report by the Group of Thirty (G30) into banking conduct and culture and how Barclays’ practices benchmarked against the best practices and suggestions outlined in that report.

  

The Committee endorsed Air Marshal Sir David Walker’s report, which confirmed its view that progress had been good but that there was more to do to achieve the cultural change required. It encouraged management to continue to prioritise progress on cultural change. The Committee also concluded that many of the actions Barclays had taken in response to the Salz Review recommendations had aligned its practices with those proposed in the G30 report.

 

   
 
Citizenship    The delivery of the 2015 Citizenship Plan and development of a Shared Growth Plan for 2016-2018.   

§  Tracked progress against the current 2015 Citizenship plan via six-monthly reports from management.

§  With the current Citizenship Plan coming to completion, evaluated the proposed Shared Growth Plan for 2016-2018.

  

The Committee noted that all targets in the 2015 Citizenship Plan had been met or exceeded, with the exception of our new and renewed household lending target, which had not been possible to achieve owing to market and trading conditions. It endorsed the 2016-2018 Shared Growth Plan, particularly the proposal to link the plan to Barclays’ core purpose and values and to focus on employability skills.

 

Read more about Barclays’ approach to citizenship on page 14.

 

   
 

The Committee also covered the following matters:

 

§  assessed progress of the programme to implement enhanced controls in the Investment Bank over conflicts of interest between Barclays and third parties

 

§   evaluated outcomes of regulatory thematic reviews of conduct issues and controls

 

§   evaluated the levels of attestation by colleagues globally to The Barclays Way, the Group’s code of conduct

 

§  assessed the status of specific remediation programmes being implemented by the business

 

§  provided input to the Board Remuneration Committee on conduct and reputation issues to be taken into consideration for 2015 remuneration decisions

    Board Reputation Committee allocation of time (%)    
                   2015       2014    
   

 

LOGO

 

  1   Citizenship      6       2    
      2   Reputational issues      13       7    
      3   Culture, conduct and compliance      57       52    
      4   Operational risk      19       33    
      5   Other      6       6    
                 
                 
                 
                 

 

§  tracked progress against the Compliance function’s business plan, including updates on resourcing and attrition levels

 

§  monitored progress of Barclays’ plans for compliance with the Volcker Rule (restrictions on proprietary trading and certain fund investments by banks operating in the US)

 

§   assessed and discussed a report on the Committee’s performance during 2014

 

§   approved revisions to its terms of reference and recommended them to the Board for approval and

 

§   considered and approved Group Compliance Policies.

                      LOGO      Read more about Barclays’ risk management on pages 127 to 142 and in our Pillar 3 Report, which is available online at home.barclays/annualreport    
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   

    

 

                                 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  59


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Nominations Committee reporta

 

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

“The importance of people as a driving force in sustaining a business over the long term.”

 

Dear Fellow Shareholders

I have often stressed the importance of people as a driving force in sustaining a business over the long term through their expertise, innovation and commitment. This is equally true of your Board, where it is crucially important that we have strong leaders able to make tough, strategic decisions while energising colleagues and galvanising them into action. It is with this in mind that the Committee approached appointments.

 

During 2015 we announced the appointment of two new non-executive Directors and a new Group Chief Executive. Board Committee membership was refreshed and we also took the opportunity to review the composition and roles of the Board Committees. In addition, we considered the requirements for independent non-executive directors for the boards of our strategically significant subsidiaries, including those that will be formed as the Group implements structural reform. We continued to foster executive succession by supporting new initiatives and by directly engaging with senior executives, for example, by mentoring individual senior executives, in order to nurture high potential individuals and help build a stronger succession pipeline.

 

The Committee was pleased that the Board achieved its target of having 25% female representation on the Board by the end of 2015. The target has subsequently been increased to 33% by 2020. While we also achieved our aspiration to reach 23% female representation within our senior leadership population by the end of 2015, we recognise that we need to sustain our focus to attract more senior women to Barclays and to enable women to grow their careers with us. That will ensure we reach our 2018 goal of 26% women in senior leadership roles. We remain committed to maintaining the momentum of our gender diversity programme.

 

Committee performance

As part of the annual Board effectiveness review, a separate exercise was conducted to assess the Committee’s performance. The assessment found that the Committee is performing effectively. Please see the report on the Board effectiveness review on pages 66 and 67 for more details. I would like to thank my fellow Committee members for their hard work and support during 2015, particularly Sir Michael Rake, who chaired the Committee during the period that I was Executive Chairman, and led the search for a new Group Chief Executive.

 

     

 

Looking ahead

We are preparing to implement a new structure in 2016 which will enable us to prepare for structural reform, simplify the organisation and speed up execution of the individual business strategies. These changes give us the opportunity to make sure that we have the right people in senior roles and that we also take action to build strength in each of the business executive teams for the longer term.

 

LOGO

 

John McFarlane

Chairman, Board Nominations Committee

29 February 2016

 

Committee composition and meetings

The Committee is composed solely of independent non-executive Directors. John McFarlane, as Chairman of the Board, is also Chairman of the Committee. Mike Ashley, Tim Breedon, Crawford Gillies, being the Chairmen of each of the other Board Committees, Reuben Jeffery III and Sir Gerry Grimstone, the Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director, are also members of the Committee. Details of the skills and experience of the Committee members can be found in their biographies on pages 36 and 37.

 

During 2015, there were eight meetings of the Committee, including four additional meetings on Group Chief Executive succession. Attendance by members at Committee meetings is shown below. The chart on page 63 shows how the Committee allocated its time during 2015. Committee meetings were attended by the Group Chief Executive or Executive Chairman, with the HR Director, the Global Head of Leadership, Learning & Talent, the Global Head of Diversity and Inclusion and representatives from Spencer Stuart presenting on specific items.

 

    Member    Meetings attended/eligible to attend
    Sir David Walker (Chairman until 23 April 2015)    2/2
    John McFarlane (Chairman from 24 April 2015 –
16 July 2015 and from 1 December 2015)*
   4/4
    Sir Michael Rake (Chairman from 17 July 2015 to
1 December 2015)
   8/8
    Mike Ashley    8/8
    Tim Breedon    7/8
    Crawford Gillies (from 24 April 2015)    7/7
    Reuben Jeffery III    6/7
    Sir John Sunderland (until 23 April 2015)    2/2
   

 

*   John McFarlane stood down as a member of the Committee during the period 17 July – 30 November 2015, when he was Executive Chairman. No Director with executive responsibilities may be a member of the Committee

†  did not attend one meeting owing to prior business commitments

 

Note

The Chairman and the Group Chief Executive excuse themselves from meetings when the Committee focuses on the matter of succession to their roles.

 

Committee role and responsibilities

The principal purpose of the Committee is to:

 

§  support and advise the Board in ensuring that the composition of the Board and its Committees is appropriate and enables them to function effectively

 

§  examine the skills, experience and diversity on the Board and plan succession for key Board appointments, planning ahead to deal with upcoming retirements and to fill any expected skills gaps

 

§  provide oversight, at Board level, of the Group’s talent management programme and diversity and inclusion initiatives

 

§  agree the annual Board effectiveness review process and monitor the progress of any actions arising, and

 

§  keep the Board’s governance arrangements under review and make appropriate recommendations to the Board to ensure that they are consistent with best practice corporate governance standards.

 

    LOGO  

You can find the Committee’s terms of reference at

home.barclays/corporategovernance

Note

a  The name of the Committee changed from the Board Corporate Governance and Nominations Committee in June 2015

 

   
         

 

60  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

 

 

The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 2015 are described below:

 

Area of focus    Matter addressed    Role of the Committee    Conclusion/action taken
Board appointments    The refreshment of Board and Board Committee membership to secure individuals with the desired skills and experience needed on the Board in light of future strategic direction.   

§  Conducted a search for successors to Sir Michael Rake and Antony Jenkins.

§  Evaluated a gap analysis of the skills and experience on the Board and identified the requirement for new non-executive Directors with financial services experience and the preference to appoint more UK-based Directors given the time commitments associated with Board Committee appointments.

 

  

The Committee recommended the appointments of Sir Gerry Grimstone as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director, Jes Staley as Group Chief Executive and Diane Schueneman as a non-executive Director.

 

Please refer to pages 63 to 65 for details of the Board’s approach to recruitment of new Directors and the case study of the recruitment of Jes Staley in particular.

 

Board and Board Committee structure, size and composition    The restructure of the Board and Board Committees to allow the Board to focus on the Group’s commercial and strategic performance. The optimum size of the Board, the potential impact of structural reform and the need to constitute subsidiary boards.   

§  Reassessed the structure, size and composition of the Board and Board Committees, as well as the current roles and responsibilities of the Board Committees, and recommended a number of changes to the Board.

§  Requested a working plan for Board succession over the next three years.

  

The Committee agreed that the size of the Board should be reduced over time and more matters should be delegated to the principal Board Committees. The Committee agreed that non-executive Directors should normally not serve on more than two Board Committees, to avoid being over-stretched, and to reduce the Committees in size over time to a maximum of four members, while taking care to ensure appropriate cross-membership. The Committee recommended revised Board-level responsibilities for oversight of risk, including the Board re-taking overall responsibility for enterprise-wide risk, disbanding the Board Enterprise Wide Risk Committee and reallocating responsibility for oversight of the capital and financial aspects of operational risk to the Board Risk Committee.

 

Succession planning and talent management    The management of Board succession and oversight of the leadership needs of the Group to enable it to meet its strategic aims and its changing make-up resulting from the effects of structural reform.   

§  Examined regular reports on succession plans and talent management of the leadership of the Group to address succession planning in the short-term and internal talent development.

 

§  Debated options for Directors to engage with members of the Group Executive Committee and senior management to help in nurturing high potential individuals and to support building a stronger succession pipeline.

  

The Committee agreed a proposal for Committee members to partner high potential senior management. The Committee endorsed the Group’s rapid development programme for high potential talent and agreed to support the programme by providing an insight into the role of the Board and its priorities. The Committee also endorsed the introduction of an improved talent assessment process and assessed the efficacy of the Group’s external talent acquisition process. The Committee examined the results of internal and external benchmarking exercises, including external benchmarking of senior management roles against similar roles in equivalent companies as part of the work on Group Executive Committee succession.

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  61


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Nominations Committee report

 

 

 

 

Area of focus    Matter addressed    Role of the Committee    Conclusion/action taken
Board effectiveness    The 2015 Board effectiveness review of the Board and its Committees. The progress made against the actions identified in the 2014 Board effectiveness review.   

§  Considered the effectiveness of the 2014 Board effectiveness review process and agreed the approach to be taken to the 2015 Board effectiveness review.

§  Regularly examined progress of the action plan arising from the outcomes of the 2014 Board effectiveness review.

  

The Committee set the criteria for conduct of the 2015 Board effectiveness review, including the appointment of a new external facilitator, Independent Board Evaluation, and agreed an action plan to address the matters arising from the 2014 Board effectiveness review.

 

See pages 64 and 66 to 67 for a full description of the process and outputs from the 2014 and 2015 effectiveness reviews.

 

Governance implications of structural reform    The establishment of governance principles for the Group under structural reform.   

§  Scrutinised proposed governance guiding principles for the Group post-structural reform, which set out ultimate decision-making powers, while respecting the rights and responsibilities of the boards of the strategically significant subsidiaries: the ring-fence bank (RFB), Barclays Bank PLC, the US Intermediate Holding Company (IHC) and Barclays Africa Group (BAGL).

§  Discussed the potential composition of the RFB and Barclays Bank PLC boards in light of regulatory requirements.

 

   The Committee endorsed and supported the governance guiding principles. The Committee provided views on the outline board and committee composition of the RFB and Barclays Bank PLC for the Board’s consideration.
Significant subsidiary board composition    The composition of Barclays’ US IHC board and associated committees.   

§  Determined the required structure and composition of the IHC board.

§  Endorsed the implementation of measures to allow potential future IHC board candidates the opportunity to build their knowledge of Barclays’ US businesses ahead of the formal creation of the IHC board in 2016.

  

The Committee agreed the proposed composition of the IHC board, including the appointments of Steve Thieke as chairman and Diane Schueneman as a non-executive director. It oversaw the establishment of a US Governance Review Board to allow proposed IHC board members to familiarise themselves with Barclays’ US businesses.

 

 

 

 

 

 

62  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

 

In addition the Committee covered the following matters:

 

§   the review of non-executive Directors’ performance, independence and time commitment as part of the Committee’s assessment of their eligibility for re-election

 

§   consideration of a new target for Board diversity beyond the end of 2015 in the Company’s Board Diversity Policy and recommended it to the Board for approval

 

§   updating of the Charter of Expectations and Corporate Governance in Barclays

 

§   proposals for the 2015 Corporate Governance Report

 

§   its annual review of the Directors’ register of interests and authorisations granted and

 

§   changes to the Committee’s terms of reference.

Board Nominations Committee allocation of time (%)

 

               2015       2014

 

LOGO

  1   Corporate governance matters      17       21
  2   Board and Committee composition      24       20
  3   Succession planning and talent (including CEO succession)      47       43
  4   Board effectiveness      6       11
  5   Other      6       5
         
         
         
         
         

Appointment and re-election of Directors

The Committee reviews Board and Board Committee composition, including potential new non-executive Directors, at each of its meetings. In addition to seeking successors for known retirements from the Board, the Committee monitors the skills and experience the Group needs to be able to deliver its strategic aims, to govern the Group appropriately, to ensure that risks threatening performance are identified and either addressed or mitigated and to set ‘the tone from the top’ in terms of Barclays’ corporate culture and values. In 2015, the Committee also focused on the need to identify non-executive directors to serve on the boards of the Group’s strategically significant subsidiaries.

When considering a new appointment to the Board, the Committee relies on assessments of the current and expected Board and Board Committee composition, in order to assess the timeline for appointments, and a skills matrix that identifies the core competencies, skills, experience and diversity required for the Board to function effectively, with target weightings for each attribute. These assessments are regularly updated to take account of the Group’s needs over time.

The approach to recruiting new non-executive Directors is to create an individual specification with reference to the role requirements, including time commitment, the key competencies and behaviours set out in our Charter of Expectations and the desired key skills and experience identified from the skills matrix. The curriculum vitae and references of

potential candidates are assessed by the Committee as a whole, before shortlisted candidates are interviewed by members of the Committee. For certain Board positions, the Committee seeks engagement with key shareholders and Barclays’ regulators as part of the selection process. Feedback from these parties is taken into account before any recommendation is made to the Board, which is kept informed of progress throughout the selection and recruitment process. An illustration of the rigorous process applied to appointments can be found in the case study and timeline of the process to identify Jes Staley as Group Chief Executive, which is set out on page 65.

Executive search firms MWM Consulting, Egon Zehnder International and Spencer Stuart were instructed to assist with our Director searches in 2015. None of these firms has any other connection with Barclays, other than to provide executive recruitment services. Open advertising for Board positions was not used during 2015, as the Committee believes that targeted recruitment is the optimal way of recruiting for Board positions.

Barclays announced the appointment of two new non-executive Directors during 2015: Diane Schueneman and Sir Gerry Grimstone. In addition, Barclays announced the appointment of Jes Staley as Group Chief Executive. Each of them brings valued skills and experience which contribute to the efficacy of the Board as a whole. As previously reported, Diane Schueneman brings expertise in operations and technology to the Board, which she gained in financial services organisations, as well as wide-ranging experience of implementing change and achieving turnaround in business success and profitability. Sir Gerry Grimstone, who succeeded Sir Michael Rake as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director, is well known, commands great respect within the financial services industry and brings immense experience, integrity and knowledge to his roles at Barclays. Jes Staley has the leadership skills and wide-ranging experience to deliver shareholder value and to take the Group forward strategically and, in particular, possesses a good understanding of corporate and investment banking. Biographical information is provided on pages 36 and 37, with further details available online at home.barclays

Changes in the composition of the Board and the Committee’s reassessment of the structure, size and composition of the Board and its Committees resulted in a refresh of the membership of Board Committees, as well as their roles and responsibilities, during 2015. Details of the changes are included in each of the Board Committee reports.

The Directors in office at the end of 2015 were subject to an effectiveness review, as described below. Based on the results of the review, the Board accepted the view of the Committee that each Director proposed for re-election continued to be effective and that they had each demonstrated the level of commitment required in connection with their role on the Board and the needs of the business.

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  63


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Nominations Committee report

 

 

 

Diversity statement

The Financial Reporting Council maintains that one of the ways in which constructive board debate can be encouraged is through having sufficient diversity on the board. Barclays agrees with this view and, when it adopted a Board Diversity Policy in 2012, stated the Board’s aspirational goal of achieving 25% female representation on the Board by 2015. Female representation on the Board exceeded 25% at the end of 2015, having increased during the year with the appointment of Diane Schueneman. Noting that the latest progress report on Women on Boards from the Davies Review has suggested a target of 33% by 2020, Barclays has adopted this new target in its Board Diversity Policy.

The Committee assisted the Board in achieving its target of 25% by ensuring that this was recorded on the Board skills matrix and, in particular, that the search firms were aware of the priority. The Committee also supported a number of initiatives to grow the talent pipeline within the Group and sought opportunities to engage with female members of senior management. Diversity as a whole, including gender, was also taken into account when evaluating the effectiveness of the Board. The comprehensive brief provided to Independent Board Evaluation for this year’s review included an evaluation of boardroom dynamics and the effects of diversity. The consultant accordingly assessed the impact of diversity including gender, age, the internationality of the Directors, the breadth of experience, qualifications and skills, concluding that there was a good degree of diversity on the Board with a range of different experiences and outlooks and that the Chairman should continue to nurture inputs from all Directors to derive the benefits of this diversity.

Below Board level, Barclays met its target of 23% female representation among the Managing Director and Director population in 2015. To achieve the target, the Committee endorsed programmes to embed accountability for diversity and inclusion throughout the Group. These efforts included Balanced Scorecard aligned targets for hiring, promotion and attrition set for each business or function, expansion of diversity data to include greater focus, expanding global campaigns to raise awareness and refined communications to drive impact. More details of Barclays’ diversity and inclusion strategy may be found on page 80.

 

LOGO   

You can find the Board Diversity Policy at

home.barclays/corporategovernance

Review of Board and Board Committee effectiveness

Barclays conducts an externally facilitated review of the effectiveness of the Board, Board Committees, individual Directors and the Chairman each year. For 2015, the effectiveness review was facilitated by Independent Board Evaluation, an independent external consultancy with no other connection with Barclays. The review process involved the consultant, Ffion Hague, attending certain Board and Board Committee meetings in November and December 2015 as an observer, alongside detailed interviews conducted according to a set agenda with Directors, members of the Group Executive Committee, the Company Secretary and other members of the executive and senior management. Feedback was also sought from external stakeholders. Independent Board Evaluation prepared a report for the Board on the findings from the review process, which was presented to the Board in December 2015. In addition, the Chairman was provided with a report and feedback on the performance of each of the Directors and the Senior Independent Director received a report on the Chairman. A similar process was followed for the Board Committees. Independent Board Evaluation provided feedback to each of the Committee Chairmen on the performance of each Committee. The feedback is scheduled to be discussed by each Committee in early 2016.

Having assessed the findings of the effectiveness review, the Directors were satisfied that the Board and each of its Committees operated effectively during 2015. Nonetheless, the Board identified a number of actions to help maintain and improve its effectiveness. These, together with an update on the actions taken following the 2014 review, are set out on pages 66 and 67.

Directors’ Conflicts of Interest

Barclays requires Directors to declare any potential or actual conflict of interest that could interfere with a Director’s ability to act in the best interests of the Group. The Board has adopted procedures for ensuring that its powers to authorise Directors’ conflicts operate effectively. A register of actual and potential conflicts and of any authorisation of a conflict granted by the Board is maintained by the Company Secretary and reviewed annually by the Board Nominations Committee.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

64  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

 

 

LOGO  

 

Governance in action: the appointment of

Jes Staley

 

Role requirements

The Committee, which has responsibility for identifying suitable candidates to join the Board, agreed the desired attributes for a successor to Antony Jenkins as Group Chief Executive (CEO). In addition to strong and motivational leadership qualities, the Committee sought candidates with significant experience of retail and/or commercial and investment banking in large scale, complex organisations and an excellent track record of delivery and credibility with regulators and internal and external stakeholders. Personal attributes sought included strategic thinking and the ability to lead and manage change, especially cultural change.

 

Process

The Committee directed the selection process. As the Chairman had accepted the role of Executive Chairman until a successor was in place, it was agreed that he would step down from the Committee to ensure that it remained composed of independent non-executive Directors and that I would lead the process. It was also agreed that the Committee as a whole would be involved in shortlisting and interviewing candidates and, once preferred candidates had been agreed, to involve the rest of the Board and key senior executives. Spencer Stuart, an external search consultant, was engaged to assist with the search and selection process.

 

Search

Having established that there were currently no potential candidates within the Group with the spread and depth of experience required for the role, the Committee examined a ‘long list’ of candidates produced as a result of the global search and received a presentation from Spencer Stuart covering the prospects for consideration. The Committee identified the most credible prospects to be contacted and invited to interview and requested that the views of the Group’s regulators on the preferred type of candidate for the role also be obtained.

 

I asked Committee members to consider sources for potential candidates that might be approached directly and to recommend potential candidates for the role. In addition, although John McFarlane did not take part in the selection process, he was consulted for his view and insights. I also ensured that Board members were kept up-to-date throughout the process.

 

Recruitment

As Jes Staley emerged as the preferred candidate and had confirmed his interest in the role, he undertook a series of interviews involving me, the Chairman and members of the Committee. He also met with the remaining members of the Board and the Group Executive Committee.

 

In addition to the regular communication with Directors, the Board held an additional meeting specifically to discuss the proposed appointment and to allow Directors to share their feedback on Jes Staley before approving his appointment, which was announced on 28 October 2015.

 

LOGO

 

Sir Michael Rake

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  65


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Nominations Committee report

 

 

 

Review of Board and Board Committee effectiveness

 

 

Board priorities

 

   

 

Exhibiting and upholding the Company’s values

 

   

 

Leveraging Board experience in support of executives

 

   

 

Greater awareness of Board Committee work

 

       

2014 findings

To refine the Board’s priorities for 2015.

   

2014 findings

To continue the embedding of cultural change across and deeper into the organisation and provide effective oversight of progress.

   

2014 findings

To continue to build effective relationships between the Board and business and functional heads.

   

2014 findings

To continue to deepen the Board’s focus on the key priorities and main issues facing each of the Board Committees and to ensure that the Board Committee structure remains appropriate and fit for purpose.

 

       

Actions taken in 2015

In 2015 the Board re-focused its time on three key themes:

 

§  focus on core

§  accelerate earnings growth

§  high performance ethic.

 

A set of execution priorities was developed for each theme and progress against these priorities was reported to the Board on a regular basis.

 

   

Actions taken in 2015

The Board Reputation Committee received reports on the progress of cultural change in 2015.

 

Members of senior management completed a survey on cultural change, the results of which were shared with the Board Reputation Committee.

 

The results of the employee opinion survey and a values survey were shared with the Board.

   

Actions taken in 2015

John McFarlane has, and will continue to, discuss his key priorities as Chairman with senior management.

 

Members of the Board Nominations Committee are mentoring high-potential senior managers.

   

Actions taken in 2015

The Board Committee structure was updated in 2015, following review by the Board Nominations Committee. The revised structure was approved by the Board and implemented from July 2015.

 

In line with prior years, all non-executive Directors may attend Board Committee meetings on request, with the agreement of the Committee Chairman. All non-executive Directors were invited to attend Board Risk Committee workshops on risk appetite and on structural reform.

 

       

2015 findings

To ensure that the Board agenda is optimised, including time for ‘blue-sky’ discussion of major risks.

   

2015 findings

No specific matters were raised during the 2015 review.

   

2015 findings

To continue to ensure that all non-executive Directors have the opportunity to contribute to strategic debate.

   

2015 findings

To continue to raise awareness across all Board members of the significant issues considered by Board Committees and to continue to refine the remit and scope of the Board Reputation Committee.

 

       

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will identify opportunities for more free-ranging Board discussions, including discussion of risk.

 

A revised set of Board objectives will be agreed in order to track progress.

   

Actions to be taken in 2016

No actions are proposed for 2016.

   

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will continue to identify ways in which the skills and experience of individual non-executive Directors may be leveraged, including partnering individual non-executive Directors with members of the Group Executive Committee.

   

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will provide opportunities for Board Committee Chairmen to provide more detailed briefings to non-Committee members on the work of their Committee.

 

We will review the role and scope of the Board Reputation Committee with its new Chairman.

 

 

 

 

 

66  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

                             

 

Improvements to the Board appointment process

 

   

 

Director induction

 

   

 

Effective handling of legacy issues

 

   

 

Dealing more strategically with global regulation

 

   
         

2014 findings

To continue to ensure that the Board has sufficient visibility of executive succession planning and the talent pipeline.

   

2014 findings

To extend the new Director induction programme to involve senior executives below Group Executive Committee level and to continue to support new Board Committee Chairmen.

 

   

2014 findings

To continue to focus on the existing priority of overseeing the resolution of legacy issues.

   

2014 findings

To continue to focus the Board’s  time on strategy and strategic options.

   
         

Actions taken in 2015

The non-executive Directors attended a briefing on talent management and succession planning in April 2015.

 

The Board Nominations Committee considered Group Executive Committee succession in October 2015. In November 2015, the HR Director attended the Board meeting to provide an update on talent and succession.

   

Actions taken in 2015

Directors have been offered the opportunity of additional meetings with senior executives as part of their induction programmes.

   

Actions taken in 2015

Work has continued in 2015 to resolve historical legal and conduct risks. Several outstanding  issues have been resolved in 2015.

   

Actions taken in 2015

Additional time was allocated to the discussion of business strategy at Board meetings in 2015. In particular, the Investment Bank and structural reform were both covered in depth.

 

The Group’s three strategic priorities: focus on core; accelerate earnings growth; and high performance ethic, were developed with the Board’s collective input.

 

Representatives from the Group’s UK and US regulators attended Board and Board Committee meetings during the year.

 

   
         

2015 findings

To continue to assess the skills and experience needed on the Board and to ensure that Board composition is balanced between UK and international members.

 

To enhance Board succession planning, particularly in respect of key roles.

 

   

2015 findings

To enhance the Board training and induction programmes with particular focus on the training needs of Board members from outside the financial services sector.

   

2015 findings

No specific matters were raised during the 2015 review.

   

2015 findings

To continue to provide opportunities for Board members  to provide early input to thinking on major issues and decisions.

   
         

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will develop a revised Board succession plan for discussion by the Board Nominations Committee, including planning for succession to key roles, considering the optimum size of the Board and the balance of UK and overseas Directors.

 

We will schedule additional updates to the Board on talent  management and succession planning.

 

   

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will schedule as part of the Board’s training programme for 2016 specific briefings for non-executive Directors who do not have a financial services background.

   

Actions to be taken in 2016

No actions are proposed for 2016.

   

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will continue to allocate sufficient time for Board discussion of strategic priorities and options.

   
 

    

 

 

                           

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  67


Governance: Directors’ report

How we comply

 

 

UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code)

As Barclays is listed on the London Stock Exchange we comply with the Code. A copy of the Code, published in September 2014, can be found at www.frc.org.uk For the year ended 31 December 2015, and at the date of this report, we applied the main principles and complied with the provisions of the Code, except as disclosed below:

 

§   provision A.2.1 of the Code states that the roles of the Chairman and the Chief Executive should not be exercised by the same individual. John McFarlane joined the Board as Chairman designate in January 2015, succeeding Sir David Walker in April 2015, and was considered independent on appointment for the purposes of the Code. Antony Jenkins resigned as Group Chief Executive in July 2015 and, pending the appointment of a new Group Chief Executive, John McFarlane was appointed as Executive Chairman. Jes Staley was appointed as Group Chief Executive with effect from 1 December 2015, at which point John McFarlane returned to his role as non-executive Chairman. The Board believes that for Barclays to continue to operate effectively over this period, non-compliance with the Code for a short time was justified and that in that time no single individual had unfettered powers of decision. There was a strong non-executive presence on the Board throughout this period. In addition, while he was Executive Chairman, John McFarlane stood down as Chairman of the Board Nominations Committee, which was chaired by Sir Michael Rake, then Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director. John McFarlane also stood down as Chairman of the Board Reputation Committee, which was chaired by Sir Michael Rake until the end of 2015 and is now chaired by Sir Gerry Grimstone, the current Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director

 

§   provision E.2.3 of the Code requires that the Chairman should arrange for all Directors to attend the AGM. While such arrangements were made, Reuben Jeffery III was unable to attend the 2015 AGM owing to a prior engagement. The Chairman and all other Directors attended the meeting and the Committee Chairmen were available to answer questions.

Disclosure and Transparency Rules

We comply with the corporate governance statement requirements of the FCA’s Disclosure and Transparency Rules by virtue of the information included in this Governance section of the Annual Report. Certain additional information that is required to be disclosed pursuant to DTR7.2.6 may be found on pages 75 to 78.

New York Stock Exchange (NYSE)

NYSE rules permit Barclays to follow UK corporate governance practices instead of those applied in the US, provided that any significant variations are explained. This explanation is contained in Barclays’ 20-F filing, which can be accessed from the Securities and Exchange Commission’s (SEC) EDGAR database or via our website, home.barclays

 

LOGO  

A description of our corporate governance practices can be found in Corporate Governance in Barclays, which is available online at home.barclays/corporategovernance

Leadership

The Role of the Board

As members of the Board of Directors, we have a collective responsibility to create and deliver sustainable value for our shareholders, in a manner that is supported by the right culture, values and behaviours throughout the Group. To support our role in determining the strategic objectives and policies of the Group, there exists a well-defined Corporate Governance framework. We aim to achieve long-term and sustainable value and it is our responsibility as the Board to ensure that management effectively delivers on short-term objectives, while promoting the long-term growth of Barclays.

In addition, we have further responsibility for ensuring that management maintains both an effective system of internal control and an effective risk management and oversight process. When carrying out these responsibilities we consider the Group’s business and reputation, the materiality of risks that are inherent in the business and the relevant costs and benefits of implementing controls. The Group’s internal control system provides assurance of internal financial controls, compliance with law and regulation and effective and efficient operations.

The Board is the decision-making body for those matters that are considered of significance to the Group owing to their strategic, financial or reputational implications or consequences. To retain control of these key decisions, certain matters have been identified that only we as the Board can approve and there is in place a formal schedule of powers reserved to the Board. As Directors we must act in accordance with the Company’s constitution and only exercise powers for the purposes for which they have been conferred. A summary of the matters reserved to the Board is available at home.barclays/corporategovernance. These matters include the approval of Barclays’ strategy, interim and full year financial statements and any major acquisitions, mergers, disposals or capital expenditure.

Specific responsibilities have been delegated to Board Committees and each Committee has its own terms of reference, which are available on home.barclays/corporategovernance. Each Committee reports to, and has its terms of reference approved by, the Board and the minutes of Committee meetings are shared with the Board. The main Board Committees are the Board Audit Committee, the Board Nominations Committee, the Board Remuneration Committee, the Board Reputation Committee and the Board Risk Committee.

In addition to the principal Board Committees, the Regulatory Investigations Committee, which was formed in late 2012, focuses on providing Board-level oversight of regulatory investigations. This Committee met six times in 2015. John McFarlane is Chairman of the Committee and the other current Committee members are Mike Ashley, Sir Gerry Grimstone, Diane de Saint Victor and Jes Staley. Antony Jenkins, Sir Michael Rake, Sir John Sunderland and Sir David Walker also served on the Committee during 2015, stepping down when they left the Board.

 

 

68  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Attendance

In 2015 we attended both scheduled and additional Board meetings, as disclosed in the table below. The Chairman met privately with non-executive Directors ahead of scheduled Board meetings. If, owing to exceptional circumstances, a Director was not able to attend a Board meeting, he or she ensured that their views were known to the Chairman.

 

 

Board attendance

  Independent     
 
 
 
Scheduled
meetings
eligible to
attend
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
Scheduled
meetings
attended
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Additional
meetings
eligible to
attend
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
Additional
meetings
attended
  
  
  

Group Chairman

                                       

John McFarlane

  On appointment      8         8         2         2   
                                         

Executive Directors

                                       

Tushar Morzariaa

  Executive Director      8         8         2         1   

Jes Staley

  Executive Director      1         1         0         0   
                                         

Non-executive Directors

                                       

Mike Ashley

  Independent      8         8         2         2   

Tim Breedon

  Independent      8         8         2         2   

Crawford Gillies

  Independent      8         8         2         2   

Reuben Jeffery III

  Independent      8         7         2         2   

Wendy Lucas-Bullb

  Non-Independent      8         8         2         2   

Dambisa Moyo

  Independent      8         8         2         1   

Frits van Paasschen

  Independent      8         8         2         2   

Sir Michael Rake

  Deputy Chairman, Senior Independent Director      8         7         2         2   

Diane de Saint Victor

  Independent      8         8         2         2   

Diane Schueneman

  Independent      5         5         1         1   

Steve Thieke

  Independent      8         8         2         2   
                                         

Former Directors

                                       

Sir David Walker

  On appointment      3         3         0         0   

Antony Jenkins

  Executive Director      4         4         1         1   

Sir John Sunderland

  Independent      3         3         0         0   
                                         

Secretary

                                       

Lawrence Dickinson

         8         8         2         2   

Notes

a Although eligible to attend, as an executive Director, Tushar Morzaria did not attend the additional meeting held to consider and approve the appointment of the new Group Chief Executive.
b Although we have reached the conclusion that all non-executive Directors exhibit independence of character and judgement, we continue to disclose that, for the purposes of the Code, Wendy Lucas-Bull was not designated as independent owing to her chairmanship of Barclays Africa Group Limited, a 62%-owned subsidiary of Barclays.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  69


Governance: Directors’ report

How we comply

 

 

Board Governance framework

 

LOGO

 

As a Board we may, under the authority of our Articles of Association and where appropriate, delegate all or any of our powers to an individual Director or to a Committee of Directors. Further information on the operations of each of the Barclays Board Committees can be found on the pages referenced above. Board Committee membership is reviewed regularly by the Board Nominations Committee.

Roles on the Board

As Directors we have established a division of responsibilities between running the Board and running the business of the Group. It is the responsibility of the Chairman to lead the Board and to ensure that it operates effectively, while the responsibility for the day-to-day management of Barclays has been delegated to the Group Chief Executive.

Role profiles setting out the responsibilities of the Chairman, the Group Chief Executive, Deputy Chairman, Senior Independent Director, non-executive Directors, Executive Directors, Committee Chairmen and the Company Secretary can be found in Barclays Charter of Expectations, which is available on home.barclays/corporategovernance. Barclays Charter of Expectations also sets out high-performance indicators for non-executive Directors.

The Group Chief Executive is supported by the Group Executive Committee, which is responsible for making and implementing operational decisions while running the Group’s day-to-day business. Further information on the Group Executive Committee can be found on page 38. The Group Executive Management structure has been designed to support management’s decision-making responsibilities, aligned to personal accountability and delegated authority, while embedding risk and control in business decision-making.

Effectiveness

Composition of the Board

The Board Nominations Committee is responsible for reviewing Board composition, considering succession plans for both the Board and senior executives, selecting and appointing new Directors and considering the results of the Board effectiveness review. For more information on the work of this Committee in 2015 please turn to page 60.

Our individual biographies can be found on pages 36 and 37: these include our relevant skills and experience, Board Committee membership and any other principal appointments. Details of changes to the Board in 2015 and year to date are disclosed on page 75.

The Board currently comprises a Chairman, who was independent on appointment, two Executive Directors and 11 non-executive Directors. In line with the Code, independent non-executive Directors form a majority of our Board. Each year we consider the independence of our non-executive Directors, using the guidance set out in the Code and behaviours determined by us as essential in order for a Director to be considered independent. These independence criteria are disclosed in Corporate Governance in Barclays, which can be viewed at home.barclays/corporategovernance. Having considered this guidance, we have determined those non-executive Directors who are standing for re-election at the 2016 AGM to be independent.

Executive Directors’ service contracts and the letters of appointment for the Chairman and non-executive Directors are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office.

 

 

70  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

We carry out an annual effectiveness review in order to evaluate our performance as a Board. This evaluation includes an assessment of the effectiveness of Board Committees and individual Directors, to ensure that each of us continues to contribute effectively to the decision-making of the Board. Independence and the existence of any conflicts of interest are considered as part of the effectiveness evaluation. We take the outcomes of the review into account when deciding whether Directors will offer themselves for election or re-election at the AGM.

More information on the Board effectiveness review can be found on page 64.

Time commitment

In order to effectively discharge our responsibilities, non-executive Directors must commit sufficient time to their role. Set out below is the average time commitment for each non-executive position on the Board. In practice, however, time commitment is agreed on an individual basis and for certain Board positions additional time commitment will often be required in order to fulfil extra responsibilities, such as those of the Deputy Chairman, Senior Independent Director and Committee Chairmen. In addition, in exceptional circumstances, we are expected to commit significantly more time than disclosed below.

 

Role   Expected time commitment
Chairman   80% of a full-time position
Deputy Chairman   0.5 days a week
Senior Independent Director   As required to fulfil the role
Non-executive Director   30-36 days a year (membership of one Board Committee included, increasing to 40-50 days a year if a member of two Board Committees)
Committee Chairmen   50-60 days (inclusive of non-executive Director time commitment)

It is expected that our Chairman will commit as much time as is necessary to fulfil his duties, with his responsibilities to Barclays taking priority over other business commitments. The Chairman and non-executive Directors are also expected to allocate sufficient time to understanding the business, through meetings with regulators and executives and undergoing training to ensure ongoing business awareness. This time is in addition to that spent preparing for, and attending, Board and Board Committee meetings. When appropriate, a Director joining a Board Committee will be given a specific Board Committee induction programme.

Induction

Following appointment, each Director undergoes a comprehensive induction that has been tailored to individual requirements. The personal induction programme is designed and organised by the Company Secretary in consultation with the Chairman and in doing so they consider how to develop each Director’s understanding of how the Group works and the key issues that it faces.

The purpose of the induction programme is to provide Directors with the information they need to become as effective as possible within the shortest practicable time after joining the Board. Typically, a new Director will meet with members of the Group Executive Committee and senior management, allowing an opportunity to familiarise themselves with various businesses and discuss specific matters with senior individuals. When an induction programme is complete, in addition to understanding the Group’s business, a new Director should have a clear understanding of Barclays’ relationships with its shareholders, regulators and customers and clients.

In 2015, John McFarlane and Diane Schueneman both received tailored induction programmes on joining the Board. Feedback was sought from both new Directors to ensure that the induction programme remains effective.

Training and development

In order to ensure that our non-executive Directors have the necessary knowledge and understanding of the Group’s business to enable them to contribute effectively at Board and Board Committee meetings they are regularly provided with the opportunity for training and development.

As part of the annual performance evaluation process the individual development needs of each non-executive Director are reviewed and discussed with the Chairman. Training can be provided through one-to-one meetings with senior executives, in order to receive further insight into a particular area of the Group’s business, or as part of dedicated training on a particular issue identified by the Directors and the Company Secretary.

Our Directors have a continuing responsibility to fulfil their duties as members of the Board and Board Committees and this is managed through the provision of focused training and development opportunities.

During 2015, non-executive Directors attended briefings on the following subjects:

 

§   talent management and succession planning

 

§   Senior Managers Regime, and

 

§   operational resilience.

Board Committees also undertook specific training and details can be found in the respective Committee Chairmen’s reports.

During 2015, individual Directors also attended regular meetings with our regulators, external auditors and major shareholders. In addition, the Board Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee carried out site visits as part of the audit tender process.

The following provides more detail of a specific training session that took place in 2015.

 

 

Governance in action: training and development

 

Following the July 2015 Board meeting, the non-executive Directors attended a briefing session on the Senior Managers Regime, led by Barclays Compliance. The Senior Managers Regime commences in March 2016 and, although only certain non-executive Directors will be in scope, there are a number of governance, reporting and conduct requirements that will apply to all Board Directors. The briefing session provided an overview of the Senior Managers Regime, with particular focus on the following:

 

§  an introduction to ‘Reasonable Steps’, including practical examples

 

§  the roles and responsibilities of non-executive Directors in scope

 

§  guidance for non-executive Directors who are not in scope, and

 

§  the Conduct Rules (standards that will be expected of all employees in a regulated firm).

 

In addition, Barclays Compliance detailed the work needed in order for Barclays to be ready for implementation of the regime in early 2016. This timetable included scheduling individual briefing sessions with in-scope non-executive Directors.

 

In late 2015/early 2016, Mike Ashley, Tim Breedon, Crawford Gillies and Sir Gerry Grimstone each had individual meetings with Barclays Compliance in order to cover the reasonable steps that, as a result of their particular role on the Board, each of them will be expected to take under the Senior Managers Regime. The session included a review of case studies, which focused on each Director’s prescribed responsibilities under the Senior Managers Regime. The Directors were briefed ahead of the meetings and provided with supporting documentation in advance. These meetings were also attended by the Company Secretary and external advisers.

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  71


Governance: Directors’ report

How we comply

 

 

Information provided to the Board

As set out in the Code, the Chairman is responsible for ensuring that the Board receives accurate, timely and high quality information about the Company’s performance at appropriate intervals and in an appropriate manner to enable it to take sound decisions, monitor effectively and provide advice to promote the success of the Company. Our Company Secretary supports the Chairman in ensuring good information flows between the Board, the Board Committees and the senior executives. In addition to providing dedicated support for the Board, the Company Secretary maintains dialogue with our Directors in order to confirm that the information they require in order to fulfil their responsibilities as a member of the Board is being received. If there is a need for independent and professional advice this can be sought by the Board, via the Company Secretary or directly, at Barclays expense.

Directors expect to be kept informed of key developments in the business by both the Executive Directors and senior management and take seriously their responsibility to request any further explanations as required. The Board and Board Committee annual forward calendars of business are formulated to ensure that Directors receive regular reports and presentations, in addition to periodic communications advising of any updates to the business of the Company, current events and the regulatory environment.

Accountability

The Strategic Report on pages 1 to 33 describes the business model and strategy whereby the Company generates and preserves value over the long term and delivers the objectives of the Company.

Risk management and internal control

The Directors have responsibility for ensuring that management maintain an effective system of risk management and internal control and for assessing its effectiveness. Such a system is designed to identify, evaluate and manage, rather than eliminate, the risk of failure to achieve business objectives and can only provide reasonable and not absolute assurance against material misstatement or loss.

Barclays is committed to operating within a strong system of internal control that enables business to be transacted and risk taken without exposing itself to unacceptable potential losses or reputational damage. Barclays has an overarching framework that sets out the Group’s approach to internal governance (the Barclays Guide). The Barclays Guide establishes the mechanisms and processes by which the Board directs the organisation, through setting the tone and expectations from the top, delegating its authority and assessing compliance.

A key component of the Barclays Guide is the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF). The purpose of the ERMF is to identify and set minimum requirements in respect of the main risks to achieving the Group’s strategic objectives and to provide reasonable assurance that internal controls are effective. The key elements of the Group’s system of internal control, which is aligned to the recommendations of The Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, Internal Control – Integrated Framework (2013 COSO), are set out in the risk control frameworks relating to each of the Group’s principal and key risks. As well as incorporating our internal requirements, these reflect material Group-wide legal and regulatory requirements relating to internal control and assurance.

Effectiveness of internal controls

Key controls are assessed on a regular basis for both design and operating effectiveness. Issues arising out of business risk and control assessments and other internal and external sources are examined to identify pervasive themes. Where appropriate, control issues are reported to the Board Audit Committee. In addition, regular reports are made to the Board Audit Committee by management, Barclays Internal Audit and the Finance, Compliance and Legal functions covering, in particular, financial controls, compliance and other operational controls.

Risk management and internal control framework

The ERMF is the Group’s internal control framework. It is refreshed annually with an assessment of operational maturity provided to the Board Audit Committee. In 2015, the Board Audit Committee received quarterly reports on the effectiveness of the control environment: these reports covered risks and controls including financial, operational and compliance risk.

The Board Audit Committee formally reviews the system of internal control and risk management annually. Throughout the year ending 31 December 2015 and to date, the Group has operated a system of internal control that provides reasonable assurance of effective operations covering all controls, including financial and operational controls and compliance with laws and regulations. Processes are in place for identifying, evaluating and managing the principal risks facing the Group in accordance with the Guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting published by the Financial Reporting Council.

The review of the effectiveness of the system of risk management and internal control is achieved through a four-step approach which is centred on reviewing the effectiveness of the Barclays Guide and its component parts, including the ERMF.

 

1. Governance Risk and Control meetings of the business and functional executive committees monitor, review and challenge the effective operation of key risk management and control processes, including the results of audits and reviews undertaken by Barclays Internal Audit (which include assessments of the control environment and management’s control approach) and examinations and assessments undertaken by our primary regulators, on an ongoing basis as part of the system of risk management and internal control. The remediation of issues identified within the control environment is regularly monitored by management and the Board Audit Committee.

 

2. Testing of the Governance Risk and Control meetings held within the executive committees provides assurance that the committees are effectively overseeing the control environment and associated risk management and internal control processes.

 

3. The owners of the key governance processes which comprise the Barclays Guide undertake a review to confirm that processes have been implemented and are operating effectively.

 

4. The annual review of the system of risk management and internal control brings together the results of the activities completed in steps 1 to 3 to ensure that each of the key processes has been effectively reviewed.

In 2015, the Board received regular reports covering risks of Group-level significance. Over the year, the Board Risk Committee and the Board Reputation Committee examined reports covering the principal risks (credit risk, market risk, capital risk, liquidity risk, operational risk and conduct risk) as well as reports on risk measurement methodologies and risk appetite. Further details of risk management procedures and potential risk factors are given in the Risk Management section on pages 119 to 142.

 

 

72  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Controls over financial reporting

A framework of disclosure controls and procedures is in place to support the approval of the Group’s financial statements. The Legal and Technical Review Committee is responsible for examining the Group’s financial reports and disclosures to ensure that they have been subject to adequate verification and comply with applicable standards and legislation. The Committee reports its conclusions to the Disclosure Committee. The Disclosure Committee examines the content, accuracy and tone of the disclosures and reports its conclusions to the Board Audit Committee, which debates its conclusions and provides further challenge. Finally, the Board scrutinises and approves results announcements and the Annual Report and ensures that appropriate disclosures have been made. This governance process ensures that both management and the Board are given sufficient opportunity to debate and challenge the Group’s financial statements and other significant disclosures before they are made public.

Management’s report on internal control over financial reporting

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting. Internal control over financial reporting is a process designed under the supervision of the principal executive and principal financial officers to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external reporting purposes in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as adopted by the European Union and issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). Internal control over financial reporting includes policies and procedures that pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect transactions and dispositions of assets; provide reasonable assurances that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS and that receipts and expenditures are being made only in accordance with authorisations of management and the respective Directors; and provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use or disposition of assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Internal control systems, no matter how well designed, have inherent limitations and may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that internal controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

Management has assessed internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2015. In making its assessment, management has utilised the criteria set forth by the 2013 COSO framework. Management concluded that, based on its assessment, the internal control over financial reporting was effective as of 31 December 2015. Our independent registered public accounting firm has issued a report on the Group’s internal control over financial reporting, which is set out on page 252.

The system of internal financial and operational controls is also subject to regulatory oversight in the UK and overseas. Further information on supervision by the financial services regulators is provided under Supervision and Regulation in the Risk review section on pages 210 to 215.

Changes in internal control over financial reporting

There have been no changes in the Group’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by this report which have materially affected or are reasonably likely to materially affect the Group’s internal control over financial reporting.

Remuneration

We have delegated responsibility to the Board Remuneration Committee to determine the remuneration arrangements for the Chairman, our Executive Directors and other senior executives and certain other Group employees, as determined by the Committee. Additional information on the Board Remuneration Committee, including its membership and activities in 2015, can be found on pages 83 to 116 in the Directors’ remuneration report, which forms part of the corporate governance statement.

Stakeholder engagement

We describe below how we engage with our stakeholders.

Investor engagement

The Board is committed to promoting effective channels of communication with shareholders and upholding good corporate governance as a means of building stronger and more engaged relationships with them. Our comprehensive investor engagement initiatives help us to understand their views about Barclays, which are communicated regularly to the Board. Our shareholder communication guidelines, which underpin all investor engagement, are available on our website at home.barclays/barclays-investor-relations/corporate-governance/shareholder-communication-guidelines

Institutional investors

In 2015, our engagement with institutional investors took place throughout the year, following our quarterly results as well as outside the reporting cycle. This allowed the opportunity for existing and potential investors to engage with us regularly, and promoted dialogue on longer-term strategic developments, as well as about the recent financial performance of the Group.

The Directors, in conjunction with the senior executive team and Investor Relations, participated in varied forms of engagement across multiple geographic locations, reflecting the diverse nature of our equity and debt institutional ownership. Divisional management also presented extensively to investors, promoting greater awareness and understanding of our operational businesses and other functions.

In the past year, discussions with investors focused on the continued execution of our strategic plan outlined in 2014, and the steps taken in 2015 to improve our returns to shareholders, while adapting to the changing regulatory environment and addressing legacy issues. Meetings focused on corporate governance matters also took place throughout the year, covering topics including management changes, remuneration and other AGM-related matters. Following the appointment of Sir Gerry Grimstone as Senior Independent Director on 1 January 2016, our major investors were offered a meeting with him.

During 2015, we held quarterly results briefings, including an in-person presentation for the 2014 results announcement in March 2015, and quarterly breakfast briefings for equity and debt sellside analysts, hosted by the Group Finance Director. For fixed income investors, we held conference calls at our full year and half year results, hosted by our Group Finance Director and Group Treasurer, as well as quarterly briefings for credit analysts.

An independent audit of investor views took place in April 2015. Interviews with a cross-section of institutional shareholders and non-holders, were conducted on specific topics including strategy, business performance and the management team. The findings of the investor audit were presented to the Board.

To enable the effective distribution of information to all investors, transcripts of executive management speeches were uploaded to the Investor Relations section of the website, alongside associated presentation materials. In 2015, we received the UK Investor Relations Society’s award for the Best Use of Digital Communications, reinforcing the importance placed on using our website to engage with the market. For example, we introduced short videos providing a summary of our results from our Chairman, Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  73


Governance: Directors’ report

How we comply

                

 

 

Private shareholders

Throughout 2015, we continued to communicate with our private shareholders using our shareholder mailings. Also, shareholders can choose to sign up to Shareview so that they receive information about Barclays and their shareholding directly by email. On a practical level, over 60,000 shareholders did not cash their Shares Not Taken Up (SNTU) cheque following the Rights Issue in September 2013. During 2015, we conducted a tracing process to reunite these shareholders with their SNTU monies together with any unclaimed dividends. By the end of the year, we had returned over £2.2m to our shareholders. In addition, we launched a special share dealing service in October 2015 for shareholders holding 4,000 shares or less. Shareholders could donate their sale proceeds to ShareGift if they wished. Shareholders donated nearly £130,000.

 

Our Annual General Meeting (AGM)

Our AGM continues to be a key date in the diary for the Board. It affords us our primary opportunity to engage with shareholders, particularly our private shareholders, on the key issues facing the Group and any questions they may have. The majority of Directors, including the Chairman, were available for informal discussion before and after the formal business of our 2015 AGM. All resolutions proposed at the 2015 AGM, which were considered on a poll, were passed with votes for ranging from 88.5% to 99.9% of the total votes cast.

 

The 2016 AGM will be held on Thursday 28 April 2016 at the Royal Festival Hall in London. The Notice of AGM can be found in a separate document, which is sent out at least 20 working days before the AGM and also made available at home.barclays/agm. Voting on the resolutions will again be by poll and the results will be announced via the Regulatory News Service and made available on our website on the same day. We encourage any shareholders who are unable to attend on the day to vote in advance of the meeting via home.barclays/investorrelations/vote or through Shareview (www.shareview.co.uk).

   LOGO

 

74  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

Other statutory information

                

 

 

The Directors present their report together with the audited accounts for the year ended 31 December 2015.

Other information that is relevant to the Directors’ Report, and which is incorporated by reference into this report, can be located as follows:

 

 

Contents

  

 

Page

   
Employee involvement    80
Policy concerning the employment of disabled persons    81
Financial instruments    272 to 294
Hedge accounting policy    262
Remuneration policy, including details of the remuneration of each Director and Directors’ interests in shares    83 to 116
Corporate governance report    35 to 74
Risk review    117 to 215

Viability statement

 

  

27

 

 

Disclosures required pursuant to Listing Rule 9.8.4R can be found on the following pages:   

 

    

 

Page

   
Long-term incentive schemes    110
Director emoluments    337
Allotment for cash of equity securities    318

Waiver of dividends

 

  

75

 

Section 414A of the Companies Act 2006 requires the Directors to present a Strategic Report in the Annual Report and Financial Statements. The information can be found on pages 1 to 33.

The Company has chosen, in accordance with section 414C(11) of the Companies Act 2006, and as noted in this Directors’ report, to include certain matters in its Strategic Report that would otherwise be disclosed in this Directors’ report.

An indication of likely future developments may be found in the Strategic Report.

The particulars of important events affecting the Company since the financial year end can be found in the Strategic Report and Note 29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters.

Profit and dividends

The adjusted profit for the financial year, after taxation, was £3,713m (2014: £3,798m). Statutory profit after tax for 2015 was £623m (2014: £845m). The final dividend for 2015 of 3.5p per share will be paid on 5 April 2016 to shareholders whose names are on the Register of Members at the close of business on 11 March 2016. With the interim dividends totalling 3p per ordinary share, paid in June, September and December 2015, the total distribution for 2015 is 6.5p (2014: 6.5p) per ordinary share. The interim and final dividends for 2015 amounted to £1,081m (2014: £1,057m).

As at 31 December 2015, the distributable reserves of Barclays PLC (the Parent Company) were £7,075m. As at 31 December 2015, the distributable reserves of Barclays Bank PLC were £29,598m.

The nominee companies of certain Barclays’ employee benefit trusts holding shares in Barclays in connection with the operation of the Company’s share plans have lodged evergreen dividend waivers on shares held by them that have not been allocated to employees. The total amount of dividends waived during the year ended 31 December 2015 was £6.4m.

Shareholders may have their dividends reinvested in Barclays by joining the Barclays PLC Scrip Dividend Programme (the Programme). At the Barclays 2013 AGM, shareholders approved the introduction of the Programme to replace the Barclays Dividend Reinvestment Plan. The Programme enables shareholders, if they wish, to receive new fully-paid ordinary shares in Barclays PLC instead of a cash dividend, without incurring dealing costs or stamp duty.

Board of Directors

The names of the current Directors of Barclays PLC, along with their biographical details, are set out on pages 36 and 37 and are incorporated into this report by reference. Changes to Directors during the year are set out below.

 

Name   Role  

Effective date of appointment/

resignation

 

Diane Schueneman

 

 

 

Non-executive Director

 

 

 

Appointed 25 June 2015

 

 

James (Jes) Staley

 

 

 

Executive Director

 

 

 

Appointed 1 December 2015

 

 

Sir Gerald (Gerry) Grimstone

 

 

 

Non-executive Director

 

 

 

Appointed 1 January 2016

 

 

Sir John Sunderland

 

 

 

Non-executive Director

 

 

 

Retired 23 April 2015

 

 

Sir David Walker

 

 

 

Non-executive Director

 

 

 

Retired 23 April 2015

 

 

Antony Jenkins

 

 

 

Executive Director

 

 

 

Resigned 16 July 2015

 

 

Sir Michael Rake

 

 

 

Non-executive Director

 

 

 

Retired 31 December 2015

 

John McFarlane succeeded Sir David Walker as Chairman of Barclays with effect from the conclusion of the Barclays PLC AGM in April 2015. John McFarlane held the position of Executive Chairman with effect from 17 July 2015 to 1 December 2015, when Jes Staley took up the position of Group Chief Executive.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  75


Governance: Directors’ report

Other statutory information

                

 

 

Appointment and retirement of Directors

The appointment and retirement of Directors is governed by the Company’s Articles of Association (the Articles), the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code), the Companies Act 2006 and related legislation.

The Articles may only be amended by a special resolution of the shareholders. The Board has the power to appoint additional Directors or to fill a casual vacancy among the Directors. Any such Director holds office only until the next AGM and may offer himself/herself for election. The Code recommends that all directors of FTSE 350 companies should be subject to annual re-election.

Directors’ indemnities

Qualifying third party indemnity provisions (as defined by section 234 of the Companies Act 2006) were in force during the course of the financial year ended 31 December 2015 for the benefit of the then Directors and, at the date of this report, are in force for the benefit of the Directors in relation to certain losses and liabilities which they may incur (or have incurred) in connection with their duties, powers or office. In addition, the Company maintains Directors’ and Officers’ Liability Insurance which gives appropriate cover for legal action brought against its Directors.

Qualifying pension scheme indemnity provisions (as defined by section 235 of the Companies Act 2006) were in force during the course of the financial year ended 31 December 2015 for the benefit of the then Directors, and at the date of this report are in force for the benefit of directors of Barclays Pension Funds Trustees Limited as Trustee of the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund. The directors of the Trustee are indemnified against liability incurred in connection with the Company’s activities as Trustee of the retirement fund.

Similarly, qualifying pension scheme indemnities were in force during 2015 for the benefit of Barclays Executive Schemes Trustees Limited as Trustee of Barclays Bank International Zambia Staff Pension Fund (1965), Barclays Capital International Pension Scheme (No.1), Barclays Capital Funded Unapproved Retirement Benefits Scheme, and Barclays PLC Funded Unapproved Retirement Benefits Scheme. The Directors of the Trustee are indemnified against the liability incurred in connection with the Company’s activities as Trustee of the schemes above.

Political donations

The Group did not give any money for political purposes in the UK, the rest of the EU or outside the EU, nor did it make any political donations to political parties or other political organisations, or to any independent election candidates, or incur any political expenditure during the year.

In accordance with the US Federal Election Campaign Act, Barclays provides administrative support to a federal Political Action Committee (PAC) in the US funded by the voluntary political contributions of eligible employees. The PAC is not controlled by Barclays and all decisions regarding the amounts and recipients of contributions are directed by a steering committee comprising employees eligible to contribute to the PAC. Contributions to political organisations reported by the PAC during the calendar year 2015 totalled $79,500 (2014: $103,000).

Environment

Barclays’ climate action programme focuses on addressing environmental issues where we believe we have the greatest potential to make a difference. The programme focuses on managing our own carbon footprint and reducing our absolute carbon emissions, developing products and services to help enable the transition to a low-carbon economy, and managing the risks of climate change to our operations, clients, customers and society at large. We invest in improving the energy efficiency of our operations and offset the emissions remaining through the purchase of carbon credits. We also have a long-standing commitment to managing the environmental and social risks associated with our lending practices, which is embedded into our credit risk processes. A governance structure is in place to facilitate clear dialogue across the business and with suppliers around issues of potential environmental and social risk.

 

We have disclosed global greenhouse gas emissions that we are responsible for as set out by the Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report and Directors’ Report) Regulations 2013. We provide fuller disclosure across our carbon emissions within Barclays Citizenship Data Supplement found on our website home.barclays/citizenship

 

    

Reporting 

yeara

2015 

  

Reporting 

yeara

2014 

  

Reporting 

yeara

2013 

  

Comparison 

yeara

2012 

Global GHG

emissionsb

                   

Total CO2e (tonnes)b

   701,600     853,376     1,036,755     1,119,145 

Scope 1 CO2e emissions (tonnes)c

   65,340     49,939     58,372     47,904 

Scope 2 CO2e emissions (tonnes)d

   500,086     678,443     791,766     880,995 

Scope 3 CO2e emissions (tonnes)e

   136,174     124,993     186,616     190,245 

Intensity ratio

                   

Total full time employees (FTE)

   129,400     132,300     139,600     139,200 

Total CO2e per FTE (tonnes)

   5.42     6.45     7.43     8.04 

Notes

a 2015, 2014 and 2013 reporting years cover Q4 from the previous year and Q1, 2, 3 of the reporting year in question. The carbon reporting year is not fully aligned to the financial reporting year covered by the Directors’ report. This report is produced earlier than previous carbon reporting to allow us to report within the year end financial reporting timelines. The 2012 reporting year is the full calendar year (Jan 2012 – Dec 2012).
b The methodology used to calculate our CO2e emissions is the operational control approach on reporting boundaries and carbon emissions methodology as defined by the World Resources Institute/World Business Council for Sustainable Development (WRI/WBCSD) Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG): A Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard, Revised Edition. Where properties are covered by Barclays’ consolidated financial statements but are leased to tenants who are invoiced for utilities, these emissions are not included in the Group GHG calculations. For properties where Barclays is the tenant, landlords provide Barclays with utility bills which are included in our emissions reporting.
  §   Scope 1 covers direct combustion of fuels and company-owned vehicles (from UK and South Africa only, which are the most material contributors).
  §   Scope 2 covers emissions from electricity and steam purchased for own use.
  §   Scope 3 covers indirect emissions from business travel (global flights and ground transport) from the UK and South Africa. We have improved our coverage for car hire data and now include data from the US and India. Ground transportation data (excluding Scope 1 company cars) covers those countries where this type of transport is material and robust data is available.

In cases where we have collected new data for previously unreported consumption, we have restated the baseline if the new data amounts to a material change greater than 1% of the total consumption. If the change is less than 1%, we have reported consumption from the point at which the data became available. If it is greater than 1%, we have restated the baseline and previous years’ figures based on actual or estimated figures. Reasons for restatements in data are due to more accurate data being available which led to replacements of estimates with actual data for 2012, 2013 and 2014.

c Fugitive emissions reported in Scope 1 for 2015, 2014 and 2013 cover emissions from UK, Americas, Asia-Pacific and South Africa. Fugitive emission data for 2012 is not available. Business travel reported in Scope 1 covers company cars in the UK and South Africa. This covers the majority of our employees where we have retail operations with car fleets.
d Scope 2 carbon emissions from electricity have been calculated using location-based carbon conversion factors as defined by the GHG Protocol 2015. We are mindful of the new location and market based methodology for accounting Scope 2 electricity emissions and these emissions will be reported in future reports.
e Scope 3 is limited to emissions from business travel which covers global flights and ground transport from the UK and South Africa. We have improved our coverage for car hire data and now include data from the US and India. Ground transportation data (excluding Scope 1 company cars) covers only countries where this type of transport is material and data is available.

Research and development

In the ordinary course of business, the Group develops new products and services in each of its business divisions.

 

 

76  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                    

                

            

 

 

Share capital

Share capital structure

The Company has ordinary shares in issue. The Company’s Articles also allow for the issuance of sterling, US dollar, euro and yen preference shares (preference shares). No preference shares have been issued as at 26 February 2016 (the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report). Ordinary shares therefore represent 100% of the total issued share capital as at 31 December 2015 and as at 26 February 2016 (the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report). Details of the movement in ordinary share capital during the year can be found in Note 31 on page 318.

Voting

Every member who is present in person or represented at any general meeting of the Company, and who is entitled to vote, has one vote on a show of hands. Every proxy present has one vote. The proxy will have one vote for and one vote against a resolution if he/she has been instructed to vote for or against the resolution by different members or in one direction by a member while another member has permitted the proxy discretion as to how to vote. On a poll, every member who is present or represented and who is entitled to vote has one vote for every share held. In the case of joint holders, only the vote of the senior holder (as determined by order in the share register) or his proxy may be counted. If any sum payable remains unpaid in relation to a member’s shareholding, that member is not entitled to vote that share or exercise any other right in relation to a meeting of the Company unless the Board otherwise determine. If any member, or any other person appearing to be interested in any of the Company’s ordinary shares, is served with a notice under section 793 of the Companies Act 2006 and does not supply the Company with the information required in the notice, then the Board, in its absolute discretion, may direct that that member shall not be entitled to attend or vote at any meeting of the Company. The Board may further direct that if the shares of the defaulting member represent 0.25% or more of the issued shares of the relevant class, that dividends or other monies payable on those shares shall be retained by the Company until the direction ceases to have effect and that no transfer of those shares shall be registered (other than certain specified ‘excepted transfers’). A direction ceases to have effect seven days after the Company has received the information requested, or when the Company is notified that an excepted transfer of all the relevant shares to a third party has occurred, or as the Board otherwise determines.

Transfers

Ordinary shares may be held in either certificated or uncertificated form. Certificated ordinary shares shall be transferred in writing in any usual or other form approved by the Secretary and executed by or on behalf of the transferor. Transfers of uncertificated ordinary shares shall be made in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 and CREST Regulations.

The Board is not bound to register a transfer of partly-paid ordinary shares or fully-paid shares in exceptional circumstances approved by the FCA. The Board may also decline to register an instrument of transfer of certificated ordinary shares unless it is duly stamped and deposited at the prescribed place and accompanied by the share certificate(s) and such other evidence as reasonably required by the Board to evidence right to transfer, it is in respect of one class of shares only, and it is in favour of a single transferee or not more than four joint transferees (except in the case of executors or trustees of a member).

In accordance with the provisions of Section 84 of the Small Business, Enterprise and Employment Act 2015, preference shares may only be issued in registered form. Preference shares shall be transferred in writing in any usual or other form approved by the Secretary and executed by or on behalf of the transferor. The Company’s registrar shall register such transfers of preference shares by making the appropriate entries in the register of preference shares. Each preference share shall confer, in the event of a winding up or any return of capital by reduction of capital (other than, unless otherwise provided by their terms of issue, a redemption or purchase by the Company of any of its issued shares, or a reduction of share capital), the right to receive out of the surplus assets of the Company available for distribution among the members and in priority to the holders of the ordinary shares and any other shares in the Company ranking junior to the relevant series of preference shares and pari passu with any other class of preference shares (other than any

class of shares then in issue ranking in priority to the relevant series of preference shares), repayment of the amount paid up or treated as paid up in respect of the nominal value of the preference share together with any premium which was paid or treated as paid when the preference share was issued in addition to an amount equal to accrued and unpaid dividends.

Variation of rights

The rights attached to any class of shares may be varied either with the consent in writing of the holders of at least 75% in nominal value of the issued shares of that class or with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate meeting of the holders of the shares of that class. The rights of shares shall not (unless expressly provided by the rights attached to such shares) be deemed varied by the creation of further shares ranking equally with them or subsequent to them.

Limitations on foreign shareholders

There are no restrictions imposed by the Articles or (subject to the effect of any economic sanctions that may be in force from time to time) by current UK laws which relate only to non-residents of the UK and which limit the rights of such non-residents to hold or (when entitled to do so) vote the ordinary shares.

Exercisability of rights under an employee share scheme

Employee Benefit Trusts (EBTs) operate in connection with certain of the Group’s Employee Share Plans (Plans). The trustees of the EBTs may exercise all rights attached to the shares in accordance with their fiduciary duties other than as specifically restricted in the relevant Plan governing documents. The trustees of the EBTs have informed the Company that their normal policy is to abstain from voting in respect of the Barclays shares held in trust. The trustees of the Global Sharepurchase EBT and UK Sharepurchase EBTs may vote in respect of Barclays shares held in the EBTs, but only as instructed by participants in those Plans in respect of their partnership shares and (when vested) matching and dividend shares. The trustees will not otherwise vote in respect of shares held in the Sharepurchase EBTs.

Special rights

There are no persons holding securities that carry special rights with regard to the control of the Company.

Major shareholders

Major shareholders do not have different voting rights from those of other shareholders. Information provided to the Company by major shareholders pursuant to the FCA’s Disclosure Rules and Transparency Rules (DTRs) are published via a Regulatory Information Service and is available on the Company’s website. As at 31 December 2015, the Company had been notified under Rule 5 of the DTRs of the following holdings of voting rights in its shares.

 

    Person interested    Number of Barclays shares      % of total   voting rights   attaching to   issued share   capitala 
The Capital Group Companies Incb    1,172,090,125      6.98  
Qatar Holding LLCc    813,964,522      6.65  
BlackRock, Inc.d    822,938,075      5.02  
Norges Bank    506,870,056      3.02  

Notes

a The percentage of voting rights detailed above was calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures made in accordance with Rule 5 of the DTR.
b The Capital Group Companies Inc (CG) holds its shares via CG Management companies and funds. Part of the CG holding is held as American Depositary Receipts.
c Qatar Holding LLC is wholly owned by Qatar Investment Authority.
d Total shown includes 1,408,618 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. On 25 January 2016, BlackRock, Inc. disclosed, by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,109,026,156 ordinary shares of the Company as of 31December 2015, representing 6.6% of that class of shares.
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  77


Governance: Directors’ report

Other statutory information

            

 

 

Powers of Directors to issue or buy back the Company’s shares

The powers of the Directors are determined by the Companies Act 2006 and the Company’s Articles. The Directors are authorised to issue and allot shares and to buy back shares subject to annual shareholder approval at the AGM. Such authorities were granted by shareholders at the 2015 AGM. It will be proposed at the 2016 AGM that the Directors be granted new authorities to allot and buy back shares.

Repurchase of shares

The Company did not repurchase any of its ordinary shares during 2015 (2014: none). As at 26 February 2016 (the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report) the Company had an unexpired authority to repurchase ordinary shares up to a maximum of 1,650,234,602 ordinary shares.

Change of control

There are no significant agreements to which the Company is a party that are affected by a change of control of the Company following a takeover bid. There are no agreements between the Company and its Directors or employees providing for compensation for loss of office or employment that occurs because of a takeover bid.

Going concern

The Group’s business activities and financial position, the factors likely to affect its future development and performance, and its objectives and policies in managing the financial risk to which it is exposed and its capital are discussed in the Strategic Report and in the Risk Management section.

The Directors considered it appropriate to prepare the financial statements on a going concern basis.

Disclosure of information to auditor

Each Director confirms that, so far as he/she is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the Company’s auditors are unaware and that each Director has taken all the steps that he/she ought to have taken as a Director to make himself/herself aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the Company’s auditors are aware of that information. This confirmation is given pursuant to section 418 of the Companies Act 2006 and should be interpreted in accordance with and subject to those provisions.

Directors’ responsibilities

The following statement, which should be read in conjunction with the Auditors’ report set out on pages 245 to 251, is made with a view to distinguishing for shareholders the respective responsibilities of the Directors and of the auditors in relation to the accounts.

The Directors are required by the Companies Act 2006 to prepare accounts for each financial year and, with regards to Group accounts, in accordance with Article 4 of the IAS Regulation. The Directors have prepared group and individual accounts in accordance with IFRS as adopted by the EU. The accounts are required by law and IFRS to present fairly the financial position of the Company and the Group and the performance for that period. The Companies Act 2006 provides, in relation to such accounts, that references to accounts giving a true and fair view are references to fair presentation.

The Directors consider that, in preparing the accounts on pages 243 to 347, and the additional information contained on pages 143 to 241, the Group has used appropriate accounting policies, supported by reasonable judgements and estimates, and that all accounting standards which they consider to be applicable have been followed.

Having taken all the matters considered by the Board and brought to the attention of the Board during the year into account, the Directors are satisfied that the Annual Report and Financial Statements, taken as a whole, are fair, balanced, understandable, and provide the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Company’s position and performance, business model and strategy.

Directors’ responsibility statement

The Directors have responsibility for ensuring that the Company and the Group keep accounting records which disclose with reasonable accuracy the financial position of the Company and the Group which enable them to ensure the accounts comply with the Companies Act 2006.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the Company’s website. Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

The Directors have general responsibility for taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the assets of the Group and to prevent and detect fraud and other irregularities.

The Directors, whose names and functions are set out on pages 36 and 37, confirm to the best of their knowledge that:

(a) the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, and

(b) the management report, which is incorporated into the Directors’ Report on pages 35 to 78, includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the position of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that they face.

By order of the Board

Lawrence Dickinson

Company Secretary

29 February 2016

Barclays PLC

Registered in England, Company No. 48839

 

 

78  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Governance

People

                

 

 

During 2015 we have continued our work to enhance support for our colleagues in their careers and to enable them to contribute to the long-term success of Barclays.

Culture, values and learning

We are into our third year of cultural change at Barclays. We have defined a common set of Values and Behaviours and embedded them into our core people processes so that they are recognised and understood by our colleagues. Having set the tone from the top by driving cultural change through our Group Executive Committee and business/ functional senior leaders, we have delivered a number of group-wide initiatives to embed the organisational culture. Our leadership development programme is underpinned by our Values, and ensures all senior management are aware of, and are enabled to role model our Values and Behaviours. Both the Barclays Leadership Academy and the Global Curriculum, which provides colleagues with development resources focused on personal and behavioural skill, are widely available and provide a consistent approach to core and leadership development.

We continue to assess candidate alignment to our Values and Behaviours through our recruitment and promotion processes and we also ensure new joiners attend the ‘Being Barclays’ Global Induction programme, which provides an in-depth experience of the Values and life at Barclays. All colleagues are required to attest and demonstrate their understanding of expected behaviours through the Global Code of Conduct (The Barclays Way).

Early careers and apprenticeships

Barclays is committed to helping young people achieve their ambitions when they enter the world of work, so our Early Careers proposition includes graduate, internship and apprenticeship programmes which provide structured support to young people. In 2015, we launched our Bolder Apprenticeship Programme, targeting long-term unemployed adults over the age of 24, which is the first of its kind in the UK and underlines our commitment to tackling societal issues and attracting diverse talent.

We provide pathways for progression from apprentice to graduate supported by recognised qualifications and, in doing so, help to create an internal talent pipeline. In 2015, Barclays hired over 1,000 interns, 800 graduates and have created over 2,500 apprenticeships since 2013. During 2015 we increased our gender diversity across our internship programmes by 8% to 42% female representation.

My Career and mentoring tool

Colleague development, both personal and professional, has been a priority in 2015. We launched the ‘My Career’ online portal which provides a wide range of information and tools to help colleagues understand their potential and make informed career decisions. We recognise the importance of great mentor relationships and have deployed an online tool to match mentors and mentees based on skill sets and experience.

Wellbeing

Our new global wellbeing programme, ‘Be Well’ launched in 2015, aiming to support employee engagement and improve health and well-being. The programme includes existing health and well-being resources, as well as new investment in areas such as employee health screenings, a global speaker series and a new global portal which acts as a gateway to education materials and events.

Performance management

Colleagues are encouraged to align their objectives to business and team goals and behavioural expectations are set in relation to our Values. Performance is assessed against both ‘what’ colleagues do and ‘how’ they do it. The ‘Values in Action’ framework provides all colleagues with the tools to assess ‘what’ objectives they achieved and ‘how’ they achieved them, together with a guide on expected behaviours in line with the Values. Our global recognition plan allows colleagues to recognise the outstanding achievements of those who have demonstrated our Values, with over 188,500 colleagues receiving a Values ‘Thank You’ in 2015.

Managing change

Where business restructuring has been necessary to support the transformation of our business and cost profile, we have consulted on potential job losses with employee representatives, as well as the impacted individuals. Our aim has been to treat all colleagues with respect and to avoid compulsory redundancies wherever possible. We have placed significant emphasis on both voluntary redundancy programmes as well as internal redeployment via ‘Internals First’.

Internals First supports colleagues who have been impacted by change and provides individual support to ensure that we retain talent within Barclays. Internals First is deployed in all our main locations and is managed by a dedicated team. In 2015, 935 colleagues registered for Internals First support and we redeployed 39% of them within Barclays. Throughout 2015, colleagues attended Internals First Career and Networking Events and opted for outplacement support services.

During 2015, we also developed ‘Be Informed’, which is available on both desktop and mobile devices. This intuitive support site gives transparent and helpful advice for colleagues who are impacted by change, including how to manage change, further career options available to them and where to go for help and support during periods of uncertainty.

When an employee does leave Barclays as a consequence of restructuring, our commitment is to ensure they are given the best support for the next stage in their career and life. Following an extensive review, a new globally consistent career transition service has been implemented which offers personalised advice and support for all employees placed at risk of redundancy.

Industrial relations

We continue to advocate and practise a partnership approach to industrial relations and value the relationships we have with over 30 trade unions, works councils and staff associations around the world. In particular, our formal partnership with Unite since 2000 is one of the longest standing in the UK. During 2015, we have continued to have regular, constructive dialogue with employee representatives on a wide range of topics that affect employees, facilitated through established regional consultation forums which bring together representatives from across our businesses.

We are confident that through all these established core people processes and others we have created the right landscape at Barclays to sustain the desired organisational culture. We also believe that while we have a common purpose, Values, and vision, this can mean different things for different parts of our business and so we need to continue to shape our culture in a way that makes sense for each of our business areas. To that end, in 2015, each business CEO was tasked with driving the organisational culture for their business and we supported this by deploying business-specific training academies across the Group. This will continue into 2016.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  79


Governance

People

                    

 

 

Your View

Barclays’ recognises the importance of listening to our colleagues and maintaining open, two-way dialogues between the organisation and colleagues. The views of our colleagues shape the decisions we make, helping us create an environment that colleagues want to work in, which we in turn believe will help drive high performance.

We deployed a global colleague survey, ‘Your View’ once again in 2015 to seek the views of colleagues. This year’s survey was more focused, based on the insights derived from the previous year’s survey, and asked for our colleagues’ views on a range of topics, including our Values, leadership and line management, the working environment, and citizenship. The results showed a near-universal understanding among colleagues of the Values and related behaviours (97% favourable) with 81% agreeing that role modelling the Values is central to creating the right culture at Barclays.

Compared to 2014, colleagues feel an increased sense of job accomplishment and enthusiasm, believe more strongly in Barclays’ goals, and are more likely to recommend Barclays as a place to work. Sustainable Engagement is at 75%, a 3% increase compared to 2014. This is a strong result, suggesting action taken during 2015 is having an impact, notwithstanding the continued and sustained change we have experienced. We have performed an in-depth review of the results of the survey with all senior leaders, and will continue to focus our efforts on improving employee engagement in 2016.

Barclays regularly updates employees regarding the financial and economic factors affecting the company’s performance throughout the year, using a variety of communications channels. These include CEO and senior leader email communications, line manager briefing packs, video interviews and talking points which are distributed to employees every quarter to coincide with Barclays’ financial reporting calendar. They are all designed to build awareness and understanding of Barclays’ results and the broader macroeconomic environment, and to drive dialogue around what the figures mean and how employees should respond. We also hold a variety of events for all employees, across each business division and function throughout the year, which provide employees the chance to hear directly from the CEO, ExCo member or leader and to ask them questions. We have also recently introduced an ‘Ask the Experts’ communication which gives perspectives from across the bank on what Barclays’ results mean and how they are received by different stakeholders such as investors, politicians and the media.

Flagship campaigns are released to all employees each quarter, covering topics such as wellbeing, recognition and dynamic working. Each quarter, colleagues and managers receive interactive updates to raise awareness of the tools being introduced to help them develop their careers at Barclays and to provide them with the opportunity to understand and engage in employee initiatives. Colleagues are also kept informed through regular intranet and email updates about the progress Barclays is making across activity such as our Diversity and Inclusion agenda, Performance Management and annual Pay and Reward processes.

Employees are invited to share their opinion on what it is like to work at Barclays through regular interactive events with senior leaders. These events provide employees with the opportunity to discuss their perspective on a range of areas to help senior management understand what is working well and where we need to improve. Any changes that are implemented as a result of colleague feedback are communicated through leadership briefings and engagement initiatives at an individual business/function level.

Colleagues are also encouraged to be involved with the company’s performance by participating in Barclays all-employee shareplans, which have been running successfully for over 10 years. Further details of our approach to remuneration are included in the Remuneration Report pages 86 and 87.

Diversity and Inclusion

Barclays’ global Diversity and Inclusion (D&I) strategy sets out objectives, and frames our plans for each of five core pillars: Gender, LGBT, Disability, Multicultural and Multigenerational. Central to each pillar is building an inclusive culture, which is why we continue to build leadership competency about Unconscious Bias and have had more than 10,000 participants undertake the training. Following our 2014 programme to engage senior leaders, our ‘Everyday Ism’s’ programme has this year opened up dialogue with colleagues more widely focusing on stereotypes, assumptions and bias.

An important aspect of our D&I agenda is ensuring people from all backgrounds have equal opportunity to join, and progress through, our organisation. In support of this, we have established candidate shortlist diversity goals for senior positions to provide focus during talent decisions, and ensure hiring panels are diverse to broaden assessment perspectives.

This ethos begins with our most senior roles. Having achieved the target we set ourselves in 2012 to increase Board level diversity to 25%, we have now challenged ourselves to achieve a minimum of 33% by 2020. To strengthen the pipeline, we have consecutively achieved our year on year goals towards representation of women in senior roles to 26% by 2018. We have more to do, but are pleased when progress towards greater inclusion is recognised. During 2015, respected organisations such as Stonewall in the UK, Working Mother in the US and Community Business in Asia have praised our programmes and achievements, citing our D&I work as innovative and robust.

Gender

Sustaining progress towards our Balanced Scorecard and Board Diversity goals remains a core focus. Our Board membership has increased to four women, with one woman on Group Executive Committee. Our female senior leadership population stood at 23% at the end of 2015 representing a consecutive 1% increase year-on-year since 2011. Women are also leading countries where we operate, for example in Ireland, Brazil, Singapore, Botswana and Gibraltar.

At all levels, our gender pipeline is strengthening thanks to extensive programmes which focus on building capability and fostering gender intelligence. Our internal HeForShe campaign, in partnership with the United Nations, asks colleagues to pledge a specific commitment that will contribute to gender parity. Since launching HeForShe, 60% of new Women’s Initiative Network members have been male, and men have also taken active roles as mentors and sponsors.

Also new this year is our Returnship programme which is enabling senior women who needed to pause their career, the opportunity to refresh their skills and confidence in preparation for a return to leadership roles. For the eighth year running, we were pleased to be included in The Times Top 50 Workplaces for Women in the UK, and for the third successive year to be named in ‘Working Mother’ 100 Best Companies in the US.

Female representation

 

 

LOGO

Above shows the positive change in female representation within Barclays from 2014 (H2) to 2015 (H2)

 

 

 

80  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

                

                

 

 

LGBT

An inclusive culture is vital for colleagues to have the freedom and choice to bring their whole selves to work, and in particular for people to be open about their sexual orientation if they choose to. Our Your View survey saw 5% of global colleagues identifying as being LGBT globally, a 1% increase since 2014. Enabling that culture are our Global Allies – colleagues from every region who share our commitment to LGBT equality and who take an active role in shaping an LGBT-inclusive workplace. The Allies programme is led by Spectrum, our employee network for anyone interested in LGBT matters. Since 2001, Spectrum has been an important contributor of insight and innovation and now connects colleagues across the world, with the Spectrum App providing access outside the workplace.

‘#PrideHeroes’ was the theme of Pride in London, which we were again the lead sponsors of in 2015. More than 400 colleagues, leaders, friends and family came together for Pride, with many more joining other events across our regions of operation. A specially ‘Pride wrapped’ DLR train carried the ‘#RidewithPride’ message across London, with ATM’s up and down the UK communicating our support for LGBT equality. ATM messaging also conveyed our advocacy for IDAHOBIT (International Day Against Homophobia, Biphobia and Transphobia). For World AIDS Day, £ for £ matching augmented colleague fundraising for organisations leading on the treatment and prevention of AIDS.

Independent recognition reflects the sustained impact of our global work and further motivates us to continue to shape our culture so that colleagues can be themselves at work. In Singapore, we won best LGBT employee network at this year’s ALMA Awards, and Stonewall continue to name us as one of just eight ‘Star Performer’ organisations that are seen as leaders globally. Colleagues across a range of levels were this year recognised in the Financial Times OUTstanding list of 100 LGBT business leaders, and in the Pride Power List.

Disability

Our aspiration to become ‘the most accessible bank’ remains firm. Understanding where we need to focus attention is key which is why we value our Disability Listening forums to bring together colleagues who have insight with those who have influence to turn ideas into action. We listen to our customers too, directly and via our external partners – from RNIB to Leonard Cheshire – as part of our continual improvement ethos. Their feedback contributed to us becoming the first bank to receive an accreditation from AbilityNet for our Mobile Banking app, reflecting its improved accessibility functionality.

In another first, we successfully launched our Return on Disability Exchange Traded Notes (ETNs) on the New York Arca Stock Exchange. The ETNs are a first of a kind investment product, linked to the performance of an index developed in conjunction with The Return on Disability Group. They provide investors with exposure to US based companies that have acted to attract and serve people with disabilities, and their friends and family, as customers and employees.

Continually improving our own workplace is a steadfast aim, and is why we expanded ‘This Is Me’ from a UK to a global campaign. Originally focused on mental health, through ‘This Is Me’ colleagues tell their stories as to how disability touches their lives. The stories told via ‘This Is Me’ included members of our Reach employee network, which connects anyone interested in disability. The inclusive culture enabled by Reach is instrumental in helping us attract people who have a disability, so that they bring their talent to us. Our apprenticeship programme is just one career route that we are ensuring is fully accessible to all.

Awards and recognition from exemplar organisations, including the Business Disability Forum, indicates that we are fast moving towards our own ‘most accessible’ ambition but we want to share learning with others. To celebrate and recognise the 25th anniversary of the American Disability Act (ADA), we partnered with the New York Mayor’s Office to host the only B2B event in the ADA calendar to stimulate thought leadership and encourage partnership. Our Your view Survey saw over 6% of colleagues identifying as having a disability globally, a 1 percentage point improvement from previous year results.

We recognise ability is multi-faceted. We give full and fair consideration to applications from candidates who may have a disability. Our people processes ensure all colleagues can progress their careers, with

comprehensive training and development, and through tailored and needs-based workplace adjustments where relevant. Employees who become disabled during their employment with us can access a full range of services and support ensuring, where-ever possible, we retain their talent. Ongoing reviews ensure adjustments are updated and relevant to individual requirements, providing the ability for colleagues to move between roles with consistent support.

Multigenerational

We benefit from the diverse perspectives of employees from five generations and need to ensure our workplace is inclusive for all. ‘Work’ and ‘place’ are increasingly becoming less co-joined, with shifts in technology and generational expectations requiring us to think and act differently. Dynamic Working, our signature campaign relevant to colleagues’ every life stages with the strapline of ‘how do your work your life’, encourages dialogue about the integration of personal and professional responsibilities through smarter working. With flexibility and agility at the core, more than 12,000 line managers and their teams have participated in workshops, presentations and training to open up discussions about how work could be done differently.

Multigenerational

 

 

LOGO

Above shows the different generations working at Barclays and the percentage change over 2014 (H2) and 2015 (H2)

 

Changing careers is another important time, which is why our Armed Forces Transitioning, Employment and Rehabilitation (AFTER) programme also continued to see ex-military talent join our company, or be supported to gain relevant work-ready skills. Our ‘LifeSkills’ programme continue to prepare young people for their first steps into the world of work and our Emerge network ensures new joiners, whatever their career stage, feel connected from the moment they arrive.

In Singapore, we won the Most Empowering Company for Mums award by the National Trades Union Congress while in the US we were included in the ‘100 Best Companies for Working Mothers’. In the UK, our approach to Talent Attraction was recognised by Working Mums as well as by Business In the Community who felt our apprenticeship and ‘LifeSkills’ programmes were award winning.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  81


Governance

People

                

 

 

Multicultural

Our global footprint covers more than 50 countries, making multicultural inclusion imperative. Fostering cross-cultural connections is enabled by Embrace our multicultural network which brings together all those who share an interest in all aspects of race, ethnicity, nationality and faith. Embrace took an active role in Interfaith week, when leaders hosted discussions to gain insight and ideas for better serving our multicultural customers and clients, and for engaging colleagues across our global community. Embrace also helped us mark important cultural and religious calendar dates throughout 2015 such as Diwali and Eid, creating communications and events to bring to life the rich multicultural diversity of our people. Day-to-day, this diversity is enabled by, for example, a dedicated quiet room in many of our larger sites for prayer and reflection, and by serving halal and kosher food in our canteens.

Ensuring Black, Asian and Minority Ethnic (BAME) female entrepreneurs can sustain and develop their businesses has been a shared focus via our partnership with the UK Women’s Business Council, and in 2015 we also supported the Black British Business Awards to celebrate the achievements of BAME leaders in the UK.

Insight from BAME colleagues has been put into practice for our attraction and recruitment processes, including profiling available roles in jobsites dedicated to the diverse job-seeker and targeting high calibre candidates for our apprenticeship programmes. 26% of our Bolder apprentices have been from a BAME background, evidencing our engagement approach is working but we will continue to strive to ensure our workforce is representative of our communities.

Multicultural

 

 

LOGO

Above shows the percentage of underrepresented populations that make up our global and regional populations. Note that underrepresented populations are defined regionally to ensure inclusion with all groups in the workplace

 

a UK includes Asian, Mixed, Black, Other and Non-disclosed.
b US includes Hispanic/Latino, Asian, Mixed, Black, Other and Non-disclosed.
c South Africa includes African, Indian, Coloured, Other, and Non-disclosed.

 

 

 

FTE by region

 

       2015         2014         2013   
United Kingdom      49,000         48,600         54,400   
Continental Europe      7,400         9,900         9,800   
Americas      10,600         10,900         11,100   
Africa and Middle East      43,600         44,700         45,800   
Asia Pacific      18,800         18,200         18,500   
Total      129,400         132,300         139,600   

    

 

 

82  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual statement from the Chairman of the Board Remuneration Committee

                

 

 

LOGO

‘The Committee’s priorities are to ensure that Barclays pays for sustainable performance, aligns remuneration with risk and delivers a greater proportion of the income we generate to our shareholders.’

 

 

 

 

   Remuneration Committee members

    Chairman

    Crawford Gillies (member from 1 May 2014,

                               Chairman from 24 April 2015)

    Sir John Sunderland (until 23 April 2015)

    Members

    Sir David Walker (until 23 April 2015)

    Tim Breedon

    Steve Thieke

    Dambisa Moyo (from 1 September 2015)

 

Contents      Page   
   
Annual statement      83   
At a Glance – Performance and pay      85   
Remuneration policy for all employees      86   
2015 incentives      88   
Annual report on Directors’ remuneration      92   
Additional remuneration disclosures      105   
Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)      108   
   
The tables marked ‘audited’ in the report have been audited by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP     

Dear Shareholders

I am pleased to introduce my first Remuneration report as Chairman of the Board Remuneration Committee, having taken over from Sir John Sunderland on 24 April 2015.

The Committee thought carefully about Barclays’ remuneration philosophy during 2015, and we agreed a revised, simplified statement, which articulates Barclays’ overarching approach to remuneration. This is set out in full on page 86 and is the background to our 2015 decisions.

The Committee’s priorities are to ensure that Barclays pays for sustainable performance, aligns remuneration with risk and delivers a greater proportion of the income we generate to our shareholders.

Performance and pay

The Committee’s 2015 pay decisions took full consideration of financial performance, both on an adjusted and a statutory basis, and non-financial performance including progress towards the 2018 targets within the Balanced Scorecard. The Committee also recognised the need to improve returns to shareholders and to accelerate delivery. We are committed to moving this forward in a manner that is consistent with Barclays’ Values to ensure that legacy events are not repeated.

Although there were improvements in the Core operating businesses with Core adjusted profit before tax up 3%, Group adjusted profit before tax was down 2% to £5,403m for 2015. Group statutory profit before tax was down 8% at £2,073m. The Group’s capital position has continued to strengthen with a CRD IV fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio of 11.4% and a leverage ratio of 4.5% at the end of the year. Cost targets have been met and Barclays Non-Core has made significant progress in reducing its risk weighted assets.

Against this background, the Group incentive pool for 2015 is again significantly lower than in prior years, down by £191m or 10% in absolute terms at £1,669m compared to the incentive pool of £1,860m for 2014. Similarly, the 2015 Investment Bank incentive pool is down 7%, despite the Investment Bank’s adjusted profit before tax increasing by 17%.

Total compensation costs are down 6%, and the compensation to adjusted net income ratio is 37.2%, down from 37.7% in 2014. The Core compensation to adjusted net income ratio is also down at 34.7% (2014: 35.7%).

Risk and conduct

A central feature of our remuneration philosophy is that remuneration must be aligned with risk, and with the conduct expectations of Barclays, our regulators and stakeholders. The Group incentive pool outlined above is after adjustments the Committee has made for both risk and conduct events. In addition to specific risk and conduct events, we also adjusted the incentive pool to take account of an overall assessment of a wide range of future risks, non-financial factors that can support the delivery of a strong conduct culture and other factors including reputation, impact on customers, markets and other stakeholders.

We have a robust process for considering risk and conduct issues as part of individual performance management reviews with outcomes reflected in individual incentive decisions. Individuals who are directly or indirectly accountable for risk and conduct events have had their remuneration adjusted as appropriate. This includes reductions in current year bonus levels and reductions in vesting amounts of deferred awards through the application of malus. Further details can be found on page 89.

Key remuneration decisions for executive Directors

2015 saw a change in Group Chief Executive. All of the associated remuneration decisions were made in accordance with the Directors’ remuneration policy approved by our shareholders at the 2014 Annual General Meeting (AGM).

We announced on 28 October 2015 that Jes Staley was to become Group Chief Executive with effect from 1 December 2015. He was appointed on a salary of £1,200,000 and Role Based Pay of £1,150,000 commensurate with market pay levels. He was not eligible for a 2015 bonus or a grant under the 2016-2018 long term incentive plan (LTIP)

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  83


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual statement from the Chairman of the Board Remuneration Committee

                

 

 

cycle. The Committee approved the grant of a share ‘buy-out’ award to compensate him for an unvested share award granted to him by a previous employer which was forfeited as a result of him joining Barclays. The award was made on terms aligned to the forfeited award. Jes Staley satisfied, at the date of joining, the executive Directors’ shareholding requirement of four times salary through his personal purchase of 2,790,000 Barclays shares.

During the four month period between Antony Jenkins’ departure as Group Chief Executive and Jes Staley starting in the role, John McFarlane served as Executive Chairman. He indicated to the Committee that he did not wish his remuneration to be increased during that time, and therefore his fee remained unchanged for the period during which he served as Executive Chairman.

The Committee also approved compensation arrangements on Antony Jenkins’ departure as Group Chief Executive during the year. Further details can be found on page 101.

Bonuses for both of the executive Directors in role at the start of 2015 were determined against the financial, Balanced Scorecard and personal measures set at the beginning of the year. The Committee approved a pro-rated 2015 bonus award of £505,000 for Antony Jenkins. A 2015 bonus award of £701,000 was approved for Tushar Morzaria. Tushar Morzaria took on significantly increased executive responsibilities in the second half of 2015 and we regard this bonus as fully deserved in recognition of his strong performance. Further details of the Committee’s 2015 decisions for the executive Directors are set out on pages 93 and 94.

During the year, we also reviewed the performance measures of our LTIP to ensure they are appropriate given our strategy and align the interests of executive Directors and shareholders. We have changed the financial measures and given them an increased weighting of 70% for the award to be granted in 2016 and added a comprehensive Risk Scorecard as the new risk measure which will focus on Barclays’ management of principal risks (including Conduct Risk). Before formal approval, we engaged with shareholders on these changes. Tushar Morzaria is the only participant in this LTIP cycle. Further details are set out on page 95.

Regulatory developments

The volume and pace of regulatory change has continued during 2015.

The PRA made revisions to the Remuneration part of its Rulebook (formerly the UK Remuneration Code) which apply from 1 January 2016. These include the seven, five and three year ‘tiered’ deferral requirements for Senior Managers and different categories of Material Risk Taker (MRT) respectively, and the potential extension of the clawback period to 10 years for Senior Managers (under certain circumstances). These changes, which apply globally to Barclays as a UK-headquartered bank, further emphasise the competitive disadvantages attributable to the lack of a global level regulatory ‘playing field’.

Further revisions to the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook are expected during 2016 as a consequence of the European Banking Authority’s (EBA) final Guidelines on sound remuneration policies. The most significant changes include a prohibition on the payment of dividends on deferred shares and an increase to a one year (from six months) holding period for incentive awards delivered in shares to the large majority of MRTs. The Guidelines apply from 1 January 2017. The application of the Guidelines to UK firms, once confirmed by the PRA and FCA, will contribute to changes to our Directors’ remuneration policy in 2017.

Agenda for 2016

In line with legal requirements, we will be seeking shareholder approval for our Directors’ remuneration policy at the 2017 AGM. As a Committee, we will review our remuneration policy to ensure that future arrangements are fully aligned to our strategy to accelerate delivery to shareholders in a manner consistent with Barclays’ Values and also to meet new regulatory requirements. This will be developed over the coming months and we will engage constructively with shareholders and regulators as we do so.

Our Remuneration report

We have provided an ‘At a glance’ summary of 2015 performance and pay on the next page. The Annual report on Directors’ remuneration provides further details.

The report has been prepared in accordance with the remuneration disclosures required by the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013. The Remuneration report (other than the part containing the Directors’ remuneration policy) will be subject to an advisory vote by shareholders at the 2016 AGM.

On behalf of the Board

 

LOGO

Crawford Gillies

Chairman, Board Remuneration Committee

29 February 2016

 

 

84  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Governance: Remuneration report

At a Glance – Performance and pay

                

 

 

How did we perform and pay in 2015?

The Committee’s 2015 pay decisions took full consideration of financial and non-financial performance. Adjusted profit before tax decreased between 2014 and 2015 by 2%, while the absolute reduction in the Group incentive pool was 10%.

Since 2010 the Group incentive pool has declined steadily, from £3,484m in 2010 to £1,669m in 2015 – a decrease of more than 50% over five years. Over the same period, Group adjusted profit before tax is down 4%.

 

Adjusted profit before tax

    

Group incentive pool

 

LOGO

 

    

 

LOGO

 

Note:

a 2013 adjusted profit before tax has been revised to account for the reclassification as an adjusting item of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency.

How much were executive Directors paid in 2015?

All of the Committee’s 2015 decisions in relation to executive Directors’ remuneration were made within the parameters of the Directors’ remuneration policy which was approved at the 2014 AGM.

 

      

 

Antony Jenkinsa

£000

    

 

Tushar Morzaria

£000

  

  

    

 

Jes Staleyb

£000

  

  

       2015       2014       2015         2014         2015   
Fixed Pay               
Salary      598       1,100       800         800         100   
Role Based Pay (RBP)      516       950       750         750         96   
Benefits      89       100       82         95         48   
Pension      197       363       200         200         33   
Variable pay               
Annual Bonusc      505       1,100       701         900           
LTIPd      1,494       1,854                         
Total pay          3,399           5,467           2,533             2,745         277   

Notes

a The 2015 figures for Antony Jenkins relate to the period to 16 July 2015 when he ceased to be a Director, save in the case of the LTIP which relates to the whole period pursuant to the LTIP rules. In accordance with his contractual entitlements, Antony Jenkins will receive salary, RBP, benefits and pension, in instalments, until 7 July 2016 subject to mitigation. Full details of his leaving arrangements can be found on page 101.
b The 2015 figures for Jes Staley relate to the period from 1 December 2015 when he joined the Board as Group Chief Executive. On joining Barclays, Jes Staley was granted a share award of 896,450 Barclays shares to compensate him for an unvested share award granted to him by JP Morgan. The award will be delivered on 14 March 2016 in line with the vesting date of the original JP Morgan award.
c 2015 bonus awards reflect the formulaic outcome of 2015 performance against the financial measures and the Committee’s assessment of progress towards the Balanced Scorecard targets. These resulted in a total of 22.1% (out of 50% maximum) and 15% (out of 35%) of the maximum bonus being payable respectively. Personal objectives were assessed by the Committee on an individual basis.
d Over the 2013-2015 LTIP performance period, a return on risk weighted assets (RoRWA) of 0.21% and a loan loss rate (LLR) of 53bps resulted in nil (out of 50%) outcome for RoRWA and 30% (out of 30%) for LLR. The Balanced Scorecard assessment was 9% (out of 20%). Therefore 39% of the maximum number of shares will be considered for release in March 2016, subject to an additional two year holding period.

How will executive Directors’ pay be structured?

2016 Fixed pay

 

      
 
Salary
£000
  
  
    

 

RBP

£000

  

  

    
 
Pension
£000
  
  
Jes Staley          1,200             1,150           396   
Tushar Morzaria      800         750         200   

Salary, RBP, pension and benefits are unchanged from 2015.

 

Variable pay      
2016 Annual Bonus      
 Maximum 80% of fixed pay              

 2016 performance measures and weighting:

     

 Financial

     

    Adjusted profit before tax

     20%          

    CET1 ratio

     20%          

    Adjusted costs

         10%          
            50%  

 Balanced Scorecard

      35%  

 Personal objectives

            15%  

 

 

2016-2018 Long term incentive plan      
 Maximum 120% of fixed pay              

 2016-2018 cycle performance measures and weighting:

 Financial

     

    Adjusted return on tangible equity (subject to CET1 ratio underpin)

     25%          

    CET1 ratio

     25%          

    Cost:income ratio

         20%          
            70%  

 Balanced Scorecard

      15%  

 Risk Scorecard (new Risk measure which will

 focus on Barclays’ management of principal

 risks, including Conduct Risk)

            15%  

 Tushar Morzaria is the only participant in the 2016-2018 LTIP cycle.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  85


Governance: Remuneration report

Remuneration policy for all employees

                

 

 

This section sets out Barclays’ remuneration policy for all employees, explaining the philosophy underlying the structure of remuneration packages, and how this links remuneration to the achievement of sustained high performance and long-term value creation.

 

Remuneration philosophy

In October 2015, the Committee formally adopted a revised, simplified remuneration philosophy which articulates Barclays’ overarching remuneration approach and is set out below.

 

 

Barclays’ Remuneration philosophy

 

    

 

Attract and retain talent needed to deliver Barclays’ strategy

 

  

 

Long term success depends on the talent of our employees. This means attracting and retaining an appropriate range of talent to deliver against our strategy, and paying the right amount for that talent

 

 

Align pay with investor interests

 

  

 

Ensure employees’ interests are aligned with those of investors (equity and debt holders), both in structure and the appropriate balance of returns

 

 

Reward sustainable performance

 

  

 

Sustainable performance means making a positive contribution to stakeholders, in both the short and longer term, playing a valuable role in society

 

 

Support Barclays’ Values and culture

 

  

 

Results must be achieved in a manner consistent with our Values. Our Values and culture should drive the way that business is conducted

 

 

Align with risk appetite, risk exposure and conduct expectations

 

  

 

Designed to reward employees for achieving results in line with the Bank’s risk appetite and conduct expectations

 

 

Be clear, transparent and as simple as possible

 

  

 

All employees and stakeholders should understand how we reward our employees. Remuneration structures should be as simple as possible so that everyone can understand how they work and the behaviours they reward

 

Remuneration and performance

Our remuneration philosophy applies to all employees across the whole of Barclays. It ensures that all employees are aligned with and support the achievement of Barclays’ Group priorities.

This is achieved by linking remuneration to a broad assessment of performance, based on expected standards of delivery and behaviour, which are discussed with employees at the start of, and throughout, the performance year. Under the Barclays’ performance management approach, employees are encouraged to align each of their objectives to business and team goals, and behavioural expectations are set in relation to our Values. This ensures that clear expectations are set for not only ‘what’ employees are expected to deliver, but also ‘how’ they are expected to go about it.

Individual performance is then evaluated against both the ‘what’ (performance against objectives) and the ‘how’ (demonstration of our Values). This evaluation takes into account various factors including:

 

§   performance against agreed objectives (both financial and non-financial) and core job responsibilities

 

§   adherence to relevant risk policies and procedures and control frameworks

 

§   behaviour in line with Barclays’ Values

 

§   colleague and stakeholder feedback

 

§   input from the Risk and Compliance functions where there are concerns about the behaviour of any individuals or the risk of the business undertaken.

There is no specific weighting between the financial and non-financial considerations for employees because all of them are important to the determination of the overall performance assessment.

Linking individual performance assessment and remuneration decisions to both the Barclays’ business strategy and our Values in this way promotes the delivery of sustainable individual and business performance, and establishes clear alignment between remuneration policy and Barclays’ strategy.

 

86  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

Remuneration structure

The remuneration structure for employees is aligned with that for executive Directors, set out in detail in the Directors’ remuneration policy which was approved by shareholders at the 2014 AGM. A full copy of the policy can be found on the Barclays PLC website. An abridged version is at pages 108 to 116 of this Report.

Employees receive salary, pension and other benefits and are eligible to be considered for an annual bonus. Employees in some customer-facing businesses participate in incentive plans including plans based on a balanced scorecard of performance which has good customer outcomes at its centre. The plans also recognise how results have been achieved in line with Barclays’ Values. Some senior employees receive Role Based Pay (RBP). Remuneration of PRA Material Risk Takers (MRTs) is subject to the 2:1 maximum ratio of variable to fixed pay. A total of 1,523 (2014: 1,277) individuals were MRTs in 2015. Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR) disclosures on MRTs are set out on pages 159 and 160 of Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

Barclays is a long standing supporter of the Living Wage. As an accredited Living Wage employer, Barclays commits to ensure that all permanent UK employees and those UK employees of third party contractors who provide services to us at our sites, are paid at least the current London or UK Living Wage. This is a commitment which we have also extended to all our UK employed apprentices.

Fixed remuneration

 

 

Salary

 

 

Salaries reflect individuals’ skills and experience and are reviewed annually in the context of annual performance assessment. They are increased where justified by role change, increased responsibility or a change in the latest available market data. Salaries may also be increased in line with local statutory requirements and in line with union and works council commitments.

 

 

Role Based Pay (RBP)

 

 

 

A small number of senior employees receive a class of fixed pay called RBP to recognise the seniority, breadth and depth of their role.

 

 

Pension and benefits

 

 

 

The provision of a competitive package of benefits is important to attracting and retaining the talented staff needed to deliver Barclays’ strategy. Employees have access to a range of country specific company funded benefits, including pension schemes, healthcare, life assurance and Barclays’ share plans as well as other voluntary employee funded benefits. The cost of providing these benefits is defined and controlled. Gracechurch Services Corporation is used to employ US nationals seconded overseas allowing them to retain eligibility to US benefits.

 

Variable remuneration

 

 

Annual bonus

 

 

Annual bonuses incentivise and reward the achievement of Group, business and individual objectives, and reward employees for demonstrating individual behaviours in line with Barclays’ Values.

 

 

 

 

 

The ability to recognise performance through variable remuneration enables the Group to control its cost base flexibly and to react to events and market circumstances. Bonuses remain a key feature of remuneration practice in the highly competitive and mobile market for talent in the financial services sector. The Committee is careful to control the proportion of variable to fixed remuneration paid to individuals.

 

 

 

 

 

Bonus deferral levels are significantly in excess of PRA requirements.

 

 

 

 

 

The typical deferral structures include:

 

 

    For MRTs:         For non-MRTs:         For Managing Directors in the Investment Bank:
 

Incentive award

   Amount deferred              

Incentive award

  

Amount deferred            

        Incentive award   

Amount deferred

  < £500,000    40%       Up to £65,000    0%       All values    100%
  ³ £500,000    60%       > £65,000   

Graduated level

of deferral

       

 

 

Deferred bonuses are generally delivered in equal portions as deferred cash under the Cash Value Plan (CVP) and deferred shares under the Share Value Plan (SVP), each typically vesting in annual tranches over three years subject to the rules of the plans (as amended from time to time) and continued service.

 

 

 

 

 

Deferred bonuses are subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of deferred bonuses (including to nil) at its discretion. Events which may lead the Committee to do this include, but are not limited to, employee misconduct or a material failure of risk management.

 

 

 

   

 

Clawback applies to any variable remuneration awarded to a MRT on or after 1 January 2015 in respect of years for which they are a MRT. Barclays may apply clawback if, at any time during the seven year period from the date on which variable remuneration is awarded to a MRT: (i) there is reasonable evidence of employee misbehaviour or material error, and/or (ii) the firm or the business unit suffers a material failure of risk management, taking account of the individual’s proximity to and responsibility for that incident.

 

 

Share plans

 

 

Alignment of senior employees with shareholders is achieved through deferral of incentive pay into the SVP. We also encourage wider employee shareholding through the all employee share plans. 82% of the global employee population (excluding Africa) are eligible to participate.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  87


Governance: Remuneration report

2015 incentives

 

 

This section provides details of how 2015 total incentive award decisions were made.

 

 

2015 pay and performance headlines

The key performance considerations which the Committee took into account in making its remuneration decisions for 2015 are highlighted below:

 

§   Group adjusted profit before tax was down 2% to £5,403m (2014: £5,502m) while the Investment Bank adjusted profit before tax was up 17% at £1,611m (2014: £1,377m)

 

§   Group statutory profit before tax was down 8% at £2,073m (2014: £2,256m)

 

§   the CET1 ratio was up to 11.4% (2014: 10.3%)

 

§   the leverage ratio was up to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%)

 

§   Balanced Scorecard – progress has been made against the Balanced Scorecard in respect of 2018 targets. Full details of 2015 performance against the eight key measures within the Scorecard are set out on page 11.

The pay outcomes and decisions can be summarised as follows:

 

§   the Group compensation to adjusted net income ratio improved to 37.2% (2014: 37.7%). The Core compensation to adjusted net income ratio also improved to 34.7% (2014: 35.7%)

 

§   total compensation costs decreased 6% to £8,339m (2014: £8,891m). Total compensation costs in the Investment Bank were down 5% at £3,423m (2014: £3,620m)

 

§   total incentive awards granted were £1,669m, down 10% on 2014. Investment Bank incentive awards granted were £976m, down 7% on 2014

 

§   there has been strong differentiation on the basis of individual performance to allow the Group to more effectively manage compensation costs

 

§   average value of incentive awards granted per Group employee is £12,900 (2014: £14,100) and the average value of incentive awards granted per Investment Bank employee is £46,500 (2014: £51,400)

 

§   levels of bonus deferral continue to significantly exceed the minimum requirements in the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook and are expected to remain among the highest deferral levels globally. 2015 bonuses awarded to Managing Directors in the Investment Bank were again 100% deferred.

2015 pay – Questions and answers

How do you justify a 2015 incentive pool of £1,669m?

The Committee remains focused on aligning pay to performance and setting pay at a level which is no more than necessary but is motivational to ensure that we accelerate the delivery of shareholder value.

In line with our financial performance, the final 2015 incentive pool at £1,669m is down 10% on 2014.

The following chart illustrates the reduction in variable remuneration over the period from 2010.

Barclays incentive pools

 

LOGO

 

 

Notes

a 2013 Investment Bank incentive pool has been restated from £1,574m to reflect the business reorganisation. The 2010, 2011 and 2012 Investment Bank incentive pools have not been restated.

b Part of the reduction in incentive pools in 2014 was due to the introduction of Role Based Pay.

 

88  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

What have you done in terms of conduct adjustments in 2015?

A key feature of our revised remuneration philosophy is the alignment of remuneration with risk appetite and with the conduct expectations of Barclays, our regulators and stakeholders. The Committee takes risk and conduct events very seriously and ensures that there are appropriate adjustments to individual remuneration and, where necessary, the incentive pool.

The Remuneration Review Panel, which reports to the Committee, supports the Committee in this process. The Panel is chaired by the Chief Risk Officer and includes senior representatives from the key control functions of Risk, Compliance, Internal Audit, Legal and HR. It sets the policy and processes and is responsible for assessing and recommending to the Committee compensation adjustments for risk and conduct events.

We have a robust process for considering risk and conduct as part of individual performance management reviews with outcomes reflected in individual incentive decisions. When considering individual responsibility, a variety of factors are taken into account such as:

 

§   whether the individual was solely responsible for the event or whether others were also responsible, if not directly involved,

 

§   whether the individual was aware (or could reasonably have been expected to be aware) of the failure,

 

§   whether the individual took or missed opportunities to take adequate steps to address the failure, and

 

§   whether the individual, by virtue of seniority, could be deemed indirectly responsible, including staff who drive the Group’s culture and set its strategy.

Individuals who were directly or indirectly accountable for an event have had their remuneration adjusted as appropriate. This includes reductions in current year bonus levels and reductions in vesting amounts of deferred awards through the application of malus. In addition, a number of employees have been terminated for responsibility and accountability for risk and conduct events resolved during the year. The Committee fully acknowledges the impact such risk and conduct events have on shareholders and believes it is wholly appropriate that this should be reflected in incentive decisions for those whose performance and conduct falls short of Barclays’ standards.

The Committee recognises that conduct events continue to weigh on Group performance, impacting profitability and returns, so in addition to reductions to individuals’ incentive outcomes, material adjustments have also been made to the incentive pool for conduct. These included, but were not limited to, the settlement reached with the New York State Department of Financial Services in respect of its investigation into electronic trading of Foreign Exchange, the settlements reached with the US Securities and Exchange Commission and New York State Attorney General in respect of those agencies’ investigations relating to the operation of LX (an alternative trading system), and the settlement reached with the FCA following an investigation into whether Barclays carried out the appropriate due diligence in connection with a transaction it executed in 2012.

The Committee also made a further adjustment in respect of the settlements reached with a number of authorities in May 2015 in relation to investigations into certain sales and trading practices in the Foreign Exchange market and the setting of the US Dollar ISDAFIX benchmark, over and above the substantial adjustments made in 2014 as part of the Committee’s prudent approach towards incentive funding. The Committee took a similar prudent approach in determining 2015 incentive funding.

The overall impact on the incentive pool resulting from both the direct financial impact on performance and the additional adjustments applied by the Committee is a reduction in excess of £600m.

We have also, in addition to the adjustment for specific risk and conduct issues, adjusted the incentive pool to take account of an overall assessment of a wide range of future risks (including Conduct), non-financial factors that can support the delivery of a strong conduct culture and other factors including reputation, impact on customers, markets and other stakeholders.

Total incentive awards granted – current year and deferred (audited)

 

                Barclays Group                           Investment Bank            
      
 
 
Year ended
31.12.15
£m
  
  
  
    

 

 

Year ended

31.12.14

£m

  

  

  

     % change        
 
 
Year ended
31.12.15
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Year ended
31.12.14

£m

  
  

  

     % change   
Total current year bonus      839         885         5         367         381         4   
Total deferred bonus      661         757         13         579         634         9   
Bonus pool      1,500         1,642         9         946         1,015         7   
Commissions, commitments and other incentives      169         218         22         30         38         21   
Total incentive awards granted      1,669         1,860         10         976         1,053         7   
Proportion of bonus that is deferred      44%         46%            61%         62%      
Total employees (full time equivalent)      129,400         132,300         2         21,000         20,500         (2
Average bonus per employee      £12,900         £14,100         9         £46,500         £51,400         10   

Deferral levels vary according to the incentive award quantum. With reductions in incentive award levels, this has reduced the proportion of the bonus that is deferred.

Deferred bonuses are delivered, subject to the rules, and only once an employee meets certain conditions, including continued service. This creates a timing difference between the communication of the bonus pool and the charges that appear in the income statement which are reconciled in the table below:

Reconciliation of total incentive awards granted to income statement charge (audited)

 

                Barclays Group                           Investment Bank            
      
 
 
Year ended
31.12.15
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Year ended
31.12.14

£m

  
  

  

     % change        
 

 

Year ended
31.12.15

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

Year ended
31.12.14

£m

  
  

  

     % change   
Total incentive awards for 2015      1,669         1,860         10         976         1,053         7   
Less: deferred bonuses awarded in 2015      (661      (757      13         (579      (634      9   
Add: current year charges for deferred bonuses from previous years      874         1,067         18         736         854         14   
Othera      2         (108         51         12      
Income statement charge for performance costs      1,884         2,062         9         1,184         1,285         8   

Note

a Difference between incentive awards granted and income statement charge for commissions, commitments and other incentives

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  89


Governance: Remuneration report

2015 incentives

 

 

§   Employees only become eligible to receive payment from a deferred bonus once all of the relevant conditions have been fulfilled, including the provision of services to the Group.

 

§   The income statement charge for performance costs reflects the charge for employees’ actual services provided to the Group during the relevant calendar year (including where those services fulfil conditions attached to previously deferred bonuses). It does not include charges for deferred bonuses where conditions have not been met.

 

§   As a consequence, the 2015 incentive awards granted decreased 10% compared to 2014, while the income statement charge for performance costs decreased by 9%.

Income statement charge (audited)

 

       Barclays Group         Investment Bank   
      
 
 
Year ended
31.12.15
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
Year ended
31.12.14
£m
  
  
  
     % change        
 
 
Year ended
31.12.15
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
Year ended
31.12.14
£m
  
  
  
     % change   

Deferred bonus charge

     874         1,067         18          736          854         14    

Current year bonus charges

     839         885                 367          381           

Commissions, commitments and other incentives

     171         110         (55)         81          50         (62)   

Performance costs

     1,884         2,062                 1,184          1,285           

Salariesa

     4,954         4,998                 1,847          1,749         (6)   

Social security costs

     594         659         10          248          268           

Post retirement benefitsb c

     545         624         13          112          120           

Allowances and trading incentives

     147         170         14          56          64         13    

Other compensation costs

     215         378         43          (24)         134            

Total compensation costsd

     8,339         8,891                 3,423          3,620           

 

Other resourcing costs

                                                     

Outsourcing

     1,034         1,055                 15          9         (67)   

Redundancy and restructuring

     134         358         63          84          239         65    

Temporary staff costs

     697         530         (32)         248          176         (41)   

Other

     185         171         (8)         51          42         (22)   

Total other resourcing costs

 

     2,050         2,114                 398          466         15    

Total staff costs

     10,389         11,005                 3,821          4,086           
                                                       

Compensation as % of adjusted net income

     37.2%         37.7%            45.5%          47.6%      

Compensation as % of adjusted income

     34.0%         34.6%                  45.2%          47.7%            

Notes

a Salaries include Role Based Pay and fixed pay allowances.
b Post retirement benefits charge includes £246m (2014: £242m) in respect of defined contribution schemes and £(130)m credit (2014: £382m) in respect of defined benefit schemes.
c 2015 post-retirement benefits have been adjusted to exclude the impact of a £429m (2014: nil) gain on valuation of a component of the defined benefit liability. Including the gain would result in a compensation: adjusted net income ratio of 35.3% and a compensation: adjusted income ratio of 32.3%.
d In addition, £236m of Group compensation (2014: £250m) was capitalised as internally generated software.

 

§   Total staff costs decreased 6% to £10,389m, principally reflecting a 9% decrease in performance costs and a 63% decrease in redundancy and restructuring charges.

 

§   Performance costs decreased 9%, reflecting a 18% decrease in the charges for deferred bonuses, a 5% decrease in the bonus charge partially offset by an increase in other performance charges.

 

§   Redundancy and restructuring charges decreased 63% to £134m, predominantly due to the non-recurrence of the 2014 restructuring costs in the Investment Bank.

Deferred bonuses awarded are expected to be charged to the income statement in the years outlined in the table that follows.

 

90  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Year in which income statement charge is expected to be taken for deferred bonuses awarded to datea

 

      Actual      Expectedb  
      
 

 

Year ended
31.12.14

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

Year ended
31.12.15

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

Year ended
31.12.16

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

2017 and
beyond

£m

  
  

  

Barclays Group            
Deferred bonuses from 2012 and earlier bonus pools      488         117         13           
Deferred bonuses from 2013 bonus pool      579         293         111         17   
Deferred bonuses from 2014 bonus pool              464         194         100   
Deferred bonuses from 2015 bonus pool                      370         247   
Income statement charge for deferred bonuses      1,067         874         688         364   
Investment Bank                                    
Deferred bonuses from 2012 and earlier bonus pools      398         101         11           
Deferred bonuses from 2013 bonus pool      456         239         93         13   
Deferred bonuses from 2014 bonus pool              396         167         80   
Deferred bonuses from 2015 bonus pool                      341         217   
Income statement charge for deferred bonuses      854         736         612         310   

 

Bonus pool component    Expected grant date    Expected payment date(s)c   Year(s) in which income statement charge  arisesd
Current year cash bonus   

§   March 2016

  

§   March 2016

 

§   2015

Current year share bonus   

§   March 2016

  

§   March 2016

 

§   2015

Deferred cash bonus   

§   March 2016

  

§   March 2017 (33.3%)

 

§   2016  (48%)

     

§   March 2018 (33.3%)

 

§   2017  (35%)

     

§   March 2019 (33.3%)

 

§   2018  (15%)

             

§   2019 (2%)

Deferred share bonus   

§   March 2016

  

§   March 2017 (33.3%)

 

§   2016  (48%)

     

§   March 2018 (33.3%)

 

§   2017  (35%)

     

§   March 2019 (33.3%)

 

§   2018  (15%)

             

§   2019 (2%)

Notes

a  The actual amount charged and payments made are subject to all conditions being met prior to the expected payment date and will vary compared with the above expectation. In addition, employees receiving a deferred cash bonus may be awarded a service credit of 10% of the initial value of the award at the time that the final instalment is made, subject to continued employment. Dividend equivalent shares may also be awarded under SVP awards.
b  Does not include the impact of grants which will be made in 2016 and 2017.
c  Share awards may be subject to an additional holding period.
d  The income statement charge is based on the period over which conditions are met.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  91


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

    

 

 

  This section explains how our Directors’ remuneration policy was implemented during 2015.

 

 

Executive Directors

Executive Directors: Single total figure for 2015 remuneration (audited)

The following table shows a single total figure for 2015 remuneration in respect of qualifying service for each executive Director together with comparative figures for 2014.

 

      

 

Salary

£000

  

  

    

 

Role Based Pay

£000

  

  

    

 

Taxable benefits

£000

  

  

     

Annual bonus

£000

 

  

    

 

LTIP

£000

  

  

    

 

Pension

£000

  

  

 

Total

£000

  

  

           2015         2014         2015         2014         2015         2014              2015           2014         2015         2014             2015             2014             2015          2014   
Antony Jenkinsa      598         1,100         516         950         89         100          505         1,100         1,494         1,854         197         363         3,399        5,467   
Tushar Morzaria      800         800         750         750         82         95          701         900                         200         200         2,533        2,745   
Jes Staleyb      100                 96                 48                                                        33                   277            

Notes

a The 2015 figures for Antony Jenkins relate to the period to 16 July 2015 when he ceased to be a Director, save in the case of the LTIP which relates to the whole performance period. Details of his leaving arrangements are provided on page 101.
b The 2015 figures for Jes Staley relate to the period from 1 December 2015 when he joined the Board as Group Chief Executive.

John McFarlane was appointed Executive Chairman from 17 July 2015 pending the appointment of a new Group Chief Executive. At his request, he received no increase in fees. Details of his fees are provided on page 100. John McFarlane is not eligible to participate in Barclays’ cash, share or long-term incentive plans or pension plans.

Additional information in respect of each element of pay for the executive Directors (audited)

Salary

Jes Staley commenced employment as Group Chief Executive on 1 December 2015 on a salary of £1,200,000 per annum. Tushar Morzaria was paid a salary of £800,000 per annum as Group Finance Director. Antony Jenkins was paid a salary of £1,100,000 per annum.

Role Based Pay (RBP)

Executive Directors receive RBP which is delivered quarterly in shares, subject to a holding period with restrictions lifting over five years (20% each year). The value shown is of shares at the date awarded.

Taxable benefits

Taxable benefits include private medical cover, life and ill health income protection, tax advice, relocation, home leave related costs, car allowance, the use of a company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes and other benefits that are considered minor in nature.

Annual bonus

Annual bonuses are discretionary and are typically awarded in Q1 following the financial year to which they relate. The 2015 bonus awards reflect the Committee’s assessment of the extent to which the executive Directors achieved their Financial (50% weighting) and Balanced Scorecard (35% weighting) performance measures, and their personal objectives (15% weighting). More information on the performance measures and the outcomes for the 2015 bonuses is set out on pages 93 and 94. Jes Staley was not eligible for a 2015 bonus.

60% of each executive Director’s 2015 bonus will be deferred in the form of a share award under the Share Value Plan vesting over three years with one third vesting each year. 20% will be paid in cash and 20% delivered in shares. All shares (whether deferred or not deferred) are subject to a further six month holding period from the point of release. 2015 bonuses are subject to clawback provisions and, additionally, unvested deferred 2015 bonuses are subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of deferred bonuses (including to nil).

LTIP

The LTIP amount included in Antony Jenkins’ 2015 single total figure is the value of the amount scheduled to be released in relation to the LTIP award granted in 2013 in respect of performance period 2013-2015. As Tushar Morzaria and Jes Staley were not participants in this cycle, the LTIP figure in the single figure table is shown as zero for them. Release is dependent on, amongst other things, performance over the period from 1 January 2013 to 31 December 2015. The performance achieved against the performance targets is as follows.

 

Performance measure

   Weighting        Threshold    Maximum vesting    Actual      % of award vesting

Return on risk weighted assets (RoRWA)

   50%    13% of award vests for average annual RoRWA of 1.1%    Average annual RoRWA of 1.6%    0.21%      0%

Loan loss rate

   30%    10% of award vests for average annual loan loss rate of 75bps    Average annual loan loss rate of 60bps or below    53bps      30%

Balanced Scorecard

   20%    Performance against the Balanced Scorecard was assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 20%. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting.    See below      9%

Total

                         39%

 

92  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

A summary of the Committee’s assessment against the Balanced Scorecard performance measure over the three year performance period is provided below.

 

Category

   Performance   

Vesting out of

maximum 4%

for each ‘C’

Customer and Client

   The Customer and Client Relationship metrics remained stable at 4th place as a strong performance in corporate banking, combined with improvements in Barclaycard UK and Barclays current accounts, was offset by the impact of reshaping the Wealth business and competitive challenges in South Africa. The Client Franchise Rank remained stable at 5th place in challenging market conditions.    2%

Colleague

  

There has been continued advancement towards Barclays’ 2018 gender goal of 26% women in senior leadership roles; at 23% by the end of 2015.

Sustained Engagement is currently 75%, a positive result in light of the ongoing change the organisation has experienced in 2015. Further work is required to achieve the 2018 target.

   2%

Citizenship

   In Citizenship Plan, 10 out of 11 metrics on target shows Barclays is having a positive impact on the communities in which it operates, with lending to households the only initiative to lose momentum primarily as a result of market and trading conditions.    3%

Conduct

   While Conduct reputation as measured by the YouGov survey improved over the period, the Committee nevertheless determined that, by reference to the material conduct events that crystallised during the performance period, nil vesting was appropriate.    0%

Company

   There has been a significant strengthening in the CET1 ratio, which is ahead of 2018 target, however work remains to deliver an acceptable return to shareholders, with adjusted RoE slightly down on 2014.    2%

Total

        9%

The LTIP award is also subject to a discretionary underpin whereby the Committee must be satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Group based on profit before tax. The Committee was satisfied that this underpin was met, and accordingly determined that the award should be considered for release to the extent of 39% of the maximum number of shares under the total award. The shares are scheduled to be released in March 2016. After release, the shares are subject to an additional two year holding period.

Pension

Executive Directors are paid cash in lieu of pension contributions. This is market practice for senior executives in comparable roles.

2015 Annual bonus outcomes

The Committee considered each of the eligible executive Directors’ performance against the financial and non-financial measures which had been set to reflect the strategic priorities for 2015. Performance against their individual personal objectives (15% weighting overall) is assessed on an individual basis. The Committee may exercise its discretion to amend the formulaic outcome of assessment against the targets.

Financial (50% weighting)

The approach taken to assessing financial performance against each of the financial measures is based on a straight line outcome between 25% for threshold performance and 100% applicable to each measure for achievement of maximum performance.

The formulaic outcome from 2015 performance against the financial measures gave a total of 22.1% out of 50% being payable attributable to those measures. A summary of the assessment is provided in the following table.

 

Financial

performance measure

    Weighting             

 

Threshold

25%

 

  

    

 

Maximum

100%

 

  

      

 

2015

Actual

  

  

      

 

2015

    Outcome

  

  

Adjusted profit before tax

    20%            £5,801m         £7,022m           £5,403m           0.0%   

Adjusted costs (ex CTA)

    10%            £16,780m         £15,182m           £16,205m           5.2%   

CET1 ratio

    10%            10.47%         11.34%           11.4%           10.0%   

Leverage ratio

    10%              4.17%         4.72%           4.5%           6.9%   

Total Financial

    50%                                             22.1%   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  93


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

    

 

 

Balanced Scorecard (35% weighting)

Progress in relation to each of the five ‘Cs’ of the Balanced Scorecard was assessed by the Committee. The Committee took an approach based on a three-point scale in relation to each measure, with 0% to 3% for ‘below’ target, 4% or 5% for a ‘met’ target, and 6% or 7% for ‘above’ target progress against a particular Balanced Scorecard component.

Based on this approach to assessing performance against 2015 Balanced Scorecard milestones, the Committee agreed a 15% outcome out of a maximum of 35%. A summary of the assessment is provided in the following table.

 

Balanced Scorecard – 5 Cs

     Weighting         Metrica     

 

2015

Target

  

  

    

 

2015

Actual

  

  

  

2015

Assessment

by the

Committee

  

2015  

Outcome out  

of maximum  

7% for each ‘C’  

Customer and Client

     7%        

PCB, Barclaycard and Africa Banking weighted
average ranking of Relationship Net Promoter

Score v peer sets

     4th         4th       Met target   
                    4.0%  
                Client Franchise Risk      5th         5th       Met target     

Colleague

     7%         Sustained engagement of colleagues’ score      82-88%         75%       Below target    2.0%  
                % women in senior leadership      23%         23%       Met target   

Citizenship

     7%         Citizenship Plan – initiatives      11/11         10/11       Below target    3.0%  

Conduct

     7%         Conduct Reputation (YouGov Survey)      5.6/10         5.4/10       Below target    3.0%  

Company

     7%         Adjusted return on equity      5.9%         4.9%       Below target    3.0%  
                CET1 ratio      11.0%         11.4%       Above target   

Total Balanced Scorecard

     35%                                     15.0%  

Note

a Further details in respect of each metric can be found on pages 12 to 16.

Individual outcomes including assessment of personal objectives

Performance against each of the executive Directors’ individual personal objectives (15% weighting overall) was assessed by the Committee on an individual basis.

(i) Antony Jenkins

A summary of the assessment for Antony Jenkins against his specific performance measures is provided in the following table.

 

Performance measure                Weighting       Outcome  
Financial    See table on page 93         50%       22.1%  
Balanced Scorecard – 5Cs    See table above         35%       15.0%  
Personal objectives    Judgemental assessment – see below           15%       11.0%  
Total                100%       48.1%  
Final outcome approved by the Remuneration Committee                  48.1%  

The Committee determined at the time of his departure that he would remain eligible for a pro-rated 2015 bonus for the part of the year in which he was Group Chief Executive, subject to an assessment post year end of the relevant performance measures and the general discretion of the Committee. Although it was deemed the appropriate time for Barclays to change Group Chief Executive in mid-2015, the Committee recognised that during the first half of the year Antony Jenkins showed full commitment to continuing to embed a customer and client focused culture backed by the Barclays’ Values and to delivering on financial commitments with particular focus on capital accretion, reducing costs and continuing the rundown of Non-Core. He was also responsible for ensuring that the Conduct Risk Framework was embedded into the business. Given Antony Jenkins’ overall personal performance in the first half of the year, the Committee judged that 11% of a maximum of 15% was appropriate.

In aggregate, the performance assessment resulted in an overall formulaic outcome of 48.1% of maximum bonus opportunity being achieved. The resulting 2015 bonus, pro-rated for service, is £505,000.

(ii) Tushar Morzaria

A summary of the assessment for Tushar Morzaria against his specific performance measures is provided in the following table.

 

Performance measure                Weighting       Outcome  
Financial    See table on page 93         50%       22.1%  
Balanced Scorecard – 5Cs    See table above         35%       15.0%  
Personal objectives    Judgemental assessment – see below           15%       13.0%  
Total                100%       50.1%  
Final outcome approved by the Remuneration Committee                  50.1%  

The Committee concluded that Tushar Morzaria had delivered a strong personal performance throughout the year, and noted that during the second half of the year (pending Jes Staley’s arrival) this was achieved while discharging considerably increased executive responsibilities. During 2015, Tushar Morzaria continued to drive transformational change, encouraging focus on the simplification of the operating model, including improved process and technology. He managed external relationships very effectively, in particular with shareholders, investors and regulators. He personally worked hard on improving colleague engagement and diversity and actively participated in supporting and promoting Barclays’ Citizenship agenda. He has managed risk effectively and embedded a positive risk culture. He has also fully embedded the Conduct Risk Framework into the activities of Group Finance, Tax and Treasury. The Committee, in particular, recognised Tushar Morzaria’s role in the significant improvement in the Bank’s capital position and in driving further focus on close and effective cost management during 2015. Given this strong personal performance, the Committee judged that 13% of a maximum of 15% attributable to individual objectives was appropriate.

As a result, the formulaic outcome for Tushar Morzaria was 50.1% of maximum bonus opportunity. The resulting 2015 bonus is £701,000.

 

94  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

Executive Directors: other LTIP awards

The Directors’ remuneration reporting regulations require inclusion in the single total figure of only the value of the LTIP awards whose last year of performance ends in the relevant financial year and whose vesting outcome is known. For 2015, this is the award to Antony Jenkins under the 2013-2015 LTIP cycle and further details are set out on page 92. This section sets out other LTIP cycles in which the executive Directors participate, the outcome of which remains dependent on future performance.

LTIP awards to be granted during 2016

The Committee decided to make an award under the 2016-2018 LTIP cycle to Tushar Morzaria with a face value at grant of 120% of his fixed pay at 31 December 2015. Jes Staley is not eligible for a grant under the 2016-2018 LTIP cycle.

The 2016-2018 LTIP award will be subject to the following performance measures.

 

Performance measure    Weighting    Threshold    Maximum vesting

Adjusted return on tangible

equity (RoTE)

   25%    6.25% of award vests for average adjusted RoTE of 7.5%    average adjusted RoTE of 10.0%
      CET1 ratio must remain at or above an acceptable level for any of this element to vest. The threshold will be reviewed and set annually based on market conditions and regulatory requirements (11% as at 31 December 2016).

CET1 ratio as at 31 December

2018

   25%    6.25% of award vests for CET1 ratio of 11.6%    CET1 ratio of 12.7%
Cost:income ratio    20%    5% of award vests for average cost:income ratio of 66%    average cost:income ratio of 58%
Risk Scorecard    15%    Performance against the Risk Scorecard is assessed by the Committee, with input from the Group Risk function, Board Risk Committee and Board Reputation Committee as appropriate, to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 15%. The Risk Scorecard measures performance against three broad categories – Risk Profile (including Conduct), Control Environment and Risk Capability – using a combination of quantitative and qualitative metrics. Specific targets within each of the categories are deemed to be commercially sensitive. Retrospective disclosure of performance will be made in the 2018 Remuneration report subject to commercial sensitivity no longer remaining.
Balanced Scorecard    15%    Performance against the Balanced Scorecard is assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 15%. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting. Assessment will be made against progress towards the 2018 targets as set out on page 11.

Straight line vesting applies between the threshold and maximum points in respect of the financial measures.

The award is subject to a discretionary underpin by which the Committee must be satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Group.

Outstanding LTIP awards

(i) LTIP awards granted during 2014

The performance measures for the awards made under the 2014-2016 LTIP cycle are shown below.

 

Performance measure    Weighting    Threshold    Maximum vesting

Return on risk weighted assets

(RoRWA)

   50%    23% of award vests for average annual RoRWA of 1.08%    Average annual RoRWA of 1.52%
Loan loss rate    20%    7% of award vests for average annual loan loss rate of 70bps    Average annual loan loss rate of 55bps or below
Balanced Scorecard    30%    Performance against the Balanced Scorecard is assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 30%. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting. The targets within each of the 5Cs are deemed to be commercially sensitive. However, retrospective disclosure of the targets and performance against them will be made in the 2016 Remuneration report subject to commercial sensitivity no longer remaining.

Straight line vesting applies between the threshold and maximum points in respect of the RoRWA and loan loss rate measures. If the Committee is satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Group based on profit before tax, depending on the extent of its satisfaction, the percentage of Barclays shares that may be considered for release by the Committee under the RoRWA measure can be increased or decreased by 10% of the total award, subject always to a maximum of 50% of the award. Performance outcome will be determined at the end of the performance period. For Antony Jenkins, the resulting number of shares will then be pro-rated to his termination date.

(ii) LTIP awards granted during 2015

Awards were made on 16 March 2015 under the 2015-2017 LTIP cycle at a share price on the date of grant of £2.535, in accordance with our remuneration policy to the executive Directors. This is the price used to calculate the face value below.

 

       % of fixed pay         Number of shares         Face value at grant         Performance period   
Antony Jenkins      120%         1,142,248         £2,895,599         2015-2017   
Tushar Morzaria      120%         828,402         £2,099,999         2015-2017   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  95


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

 

 

The performance measures for the 2015-2017 LTIP awards are as follows:

 

Performance measure    Weighting    Threshold    Maximum vesting
Net generated equitya    30%    7.5% of award vests for Net Generated Equity of £1,363m    Net Generated Equity of £1,844m

Core return on risk weighted

assets (RoRWA) excluding own

credit

   20%    5% of award vests for average annual Core RoRWA of 1.34%    Average annual Core RoRWA of 1.81%
Non-Core drag on adjusted return on equity (RoE)    10%   

2.5% of award vests for Non-Core drag on adjusted RoE of –4.02%

 

   Non-Core drag on adjusted RoE of –2.97%
Loan loss rate    10%    2.5% of award vests for average annual loan loss rate of 70bps    Average annual loan loss rate of 55bps or below
Balanced Scorecard    30%    Performance against the Balanced Scorecard is assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 30%. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting. The targets within each of the 5Cs are deemed to be commercially sensitive. However, retrospective disclosure of the targets and performance against them will be made in the 2017 Remuneration report subject to commercial sensitivity no longer remaining.

Note

a Net generated equity is a metric which converts changes in the CET1 ratio into an absolute capital equivalent measure. For remuneration purposes, Net generated equity will exclude inorganic actions such as rights issues, as determined by the Committee.

Straight line vesting applies between the threshold and maximum points in respect of the financial and risk measures. The award is subject to a discretionary underpin by which the Committee must be satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Group. For Antony Jenkins, the resulting number of shares will then be pro-rated to his termination date.

Executive Directors: pension (audited)

Jes Staley and Tushar Morzaria receive cash in lieu of pension. The 2015 cash in lieu of pension shown below for Jes Staley is for the period 1 December 2015 to 31 December 2015.

Antony Jenkins left the UK pension scheme in April 2012, and then started receiving cash in lieu of pension. He has benefits in both the final salary 1964 section and in the cash balance Afterwork section. The accrued pension shown below relates to his 1964 section pension only. The other pension entries relate to his benefits in both sections. Antony Jenkins ceased to be an executive Director on 16 July 2015. The 2015 cash in lieu of pension shown below is for the period 1 January 2015 to 16 July 2015.

 

        
 
 
 

 

Accrued
pension at
31 December
2015

£000

  
  
  
  

  

      
 
 
 
 
 
 
Increase in
value of
accrued
pension over
year net of
inflation
£000
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
    
 

 

Normal
retirement

date

  
  

  

      
 
 
 
Pension value
in 2015 from
DB Scheme
£000
  
  
  
  
      
 
 
 
2015
Cash in lieu
of pension
£000
  
  
  
  
    

            2015 

Total 

£000 

Antony Jenkins        4           0         11 July 2021           0           197         197 
Tushar Morzaria                                         200         200 
Jes Staley                                               33         33 

Executive Directors: Statement of implementation of remuneration policy in 2016

The introduction of new deferral and LTIP requirements in the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook and EBA Guidelines will require some structural changes as to how the approved Directors’ remuneration policy will be implemented in 2016. It is therefore our intent to consult with shareholders over proposed changes once formulated. This section explains how the approved Directors’ remuneration policy would be implemented in 2016 under the current framework.

 

     Jes Staley    Tushar Morzaria         Comments
Salary    £1,200,000    £800,000         No change from 2015.
RBP    £1,150,000    £750,000         Delivered quarterly in shares subject to a holding period with restrictions lifting over five years. No change from 2015.
Pension    33% of salary    25% of salary         Fixed cash allowance in lieu of participation in pension plan. No change from 2015.

Maximum bonus

 

  

80% of fixed pay

 

  

80% of fixed pay

 

      Variable remuneration for the executive Directors is delivered through bonus and LTIP, both of which are currently deferred over three years. Variable remuneration for the 2016 performance year will be delivered in line with the requirements of the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook, including the vesting requirements. Awards under the LTIP will be delivered in shares. The performance and holding periods will be determined before the awards are made in Q1 2017. Vesting will be dependent on performance over the performance period and subject to a further holding period after vesting.
Maximum LTIP    120% of fixed pay    120% of fixed pay      
           
           
                     

 

96  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

                

            

 

 

Total Fixed Pay

The Directors’ remuneration policy sets out the policy on RBP for executive Directors. Following the EBA Guidelines, published in December 2015, and despite the formal power to reduce RBP in the Directors’ remuneration policy, the Committee has agreed, as they also did in 2015, that total fixed pay (salary and RBP elements) will not be reduced in 2016. The Committee will review the structure of RBP in light of the change in regulation and any changes will be reflected in the Directors’ remuneration policy which will be presented to shareholders for approval at the 2017 AGM.

Clawback and malus

Clawback applies to any variable remuneration awarded to the executive Directors on or after 1 January 2015. Barclays may apply clawback if at any time during the seven year period from the date on which any variable remuneration is awarded: (i) there is reasonable evidence of individual misbehaviour or material error, and/or (ii) the firm suffers a material failure of risk management, taking account of the individual’s proximity to, and responsibility for, that incident. For variable remuneration awards granted to executive Directors in respect of 2016 onwards, the clawback period may be extended to 10 years in circumstances where the Company or a regulatory authority has commenced an investigation which could potentially lead to the application of clawback.

As set out in the Directors’ remuneration policy, malus provisions will continue to apply to unvested deferred awards.

Deferral

A seven year deferral period (with no vesting prior to the third anniversary of award, and vesting no faster than on a pro rata basis between the third and seventh year), will apply to any deferred variable remuneration awarded to the executive Directors in respect of the 2016 performance year onwards.

2016 Annual bonus performance measures

Performance measures with appropriately stretching targets have been selected to cover a range of financial and non-financial goals that support the key strategic objectives of the Company. The performance measures and weightings are shown below.

 

 

Financial (50% weighting)

  

 

§  Adjusted profit before tax (20% weighting)

  

 

§  Adjusted costs (10% weighting)

 

A performance target range has been set for each financial measure.

 

  

 

§  CET1 ratio (20% weighting)

 

Balanced Scorecard (35% weighting)

 

  

 

Progress towards the five year Balanced Scorecard targets will be assessed by the Committee at the year end. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard will have equal weighting

 

 

Personal (15% weighting)

  

 

The executive Directors have the following joint personal objectives for 2016:

  

 

§  structure the business effectively, ensuring it is focused on a sustainable core proposition with a simpler performing portfolio, with the majority of restructuring completed in 2016

  

§  make significant progress in exiting Non-Core by the end of 2016

  

§  deliver on financial commitments with particular focus on improvement in cost and productivity, as evidenced by an improved profit and a lower cost:income ratio

  

§  manage risk and conduct effectively and make significant progress in ensuring that legacy events are both resolved expediently and not repeated.

  

 

In addition, individual personal objectives for 2016 are as follows:

 

Jes Staley:

  

 

§   implement the new management structure to support structural reform, including a new operating model designed to improve efficiency

  

§  make substantive progress towards a higher performing culture in line with our Values, while strengthening employee engagement at all levels

  

§  foster an externally focused and customer-centric culture.

   Tushar Morzaria:
  

 

§   demonstrate effective management of external relationships and reputation

    

§  strengthen the performance ethic and employee engagement in Group Finance, Tax and Treasury, while also improving productivity.

 

Detailed calibration of the Financial and Balanced Scorecard targets is commercially sensitive and it is not appropriate to disclose this information externally on a prospective basis. Disclosure of achievement against the targets will be made in the 2016 Annual Report subject to the targets no longer being commercially sensitive. The Committee may exercise its discretion to amend the formulaic outcome of assessment against the targets. Any exercise of discretion will be disclosed and explained.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  97


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

                

 

 

Illustrative scenarios for executive Directors’ remuneration

The charts below show the potential value of the executive Directors’ 2016 remuneration in three scenarios: ‘Minimum’ (i.e. fixed pay only), ‘Maximum’ (i.e. fixed pay and the maximum variable pay that may be awarded) and ‘Mid-point’ (i.e. fixed pay and 50% of the maximum variable pay that may be awarded). For the purposes of these charts, the value of benefits is based on an estimated annual value. The scenarios do not reflect share price movement between award and vesting. LTIP is included at face value; the amount received and included in the single total figure for remuneration will depend on performance over the performance period.

A significant proportion of the potential remuneration of the executive Directors is variable and is therefore performance related. It is also subject to deferral, malus and clawback.

 

Total remuneration opportunity: Group Chief Executive (£000)

   

Total remuneration opportunity: Group Finance Director (£000)

LOGO     LOGO

In the above illustrative scenarios, benefits include regular contractual benefits. Additional ad hoc benefits may arise, for example, overseas relocation of executive Directors, but will always be provided in line with the Directors’ remuneration policy.

Performance graph and table

The performance graph below illustrates the performance of Barclays over the financial years from 2009 to 2015 in terms of total shareholder return compared with that of the companies comprising the FTSE 100 index. The index has been selected because it represents a cross-section of leading UK companies.

 

LOGO

 

98  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                    

                

                

 

 

In addition, the table below provides a summary of the total remuneration of the relevant Group Chief Executive over the same period as the previous graph. For the purpose of calculating the value of the remuneration of the Group Chief Executive, data has been collated on a basis consistent with the ‘single figure’ methodology.

 

Year      2009         2010         2011          2012          2012          2013          2014        
2015 
  
     2015          2015    
Group Chief Executive     
 
John
Varley
  
  
    
 
John
Varley
  
  
    
 
Bob 
Diamond 
  
  
    
 
Bob 
Diamonda
  
  
    
 
Antony 
Jenkinsb
  
  
    
 
Antony 
Jenkins 
  
  
    
 
Antony 
Jenkins 
  
  
   

 

Antony 

Jenkinsb

  

  

    

 

John 

McFarlanec

  

  

    
 
Jes 
Staleyd
  
  
Group Chief Executive single figure of total
remuneration £000s
     2,050         4,567         11,070e         1,892          529          1,602          5,467f        3,399         305          277    
Annual bonus against maximum
opportunity %
     0%         100%         80%          0%          0%          0%          57%         48%         N/A          N/A    
Long-term incentive vesting against
maximum opportunity %
     50%         16%         N/Ag         0%          N/Ag         N/Ag         30%         39%         N/Ag         N/Ag   

Notes

a Bob Diamond left the Board on 3 July 2012.
b Antony Jenkins became Group Chief Executive on 30 August 2012 and left the Board on 16 July 2015.
c John McFarlane was Executive Chairman from 17 July 2015 to 30 November 2015. His fees, which remained unchanged, have been pro-rated for his time in the position. He was not eligible to receive a bonus or LTIP.
d Jes Staley became Group Chief Executive on 1 December 2015.
e This figure includes £5,745k tax equalisation as set out in the 2011 Remuneration report. Bob Diamond was tax equalised on tax above the UK rate where that could not be offset by a double tax treaty.
f Antony Jenkins’ 2014 pay is higher than in earlier years since he declined a bonus in 2012 and 2013 and did not have LTIP vesting in those years.
g Not a participant in a long-term incentive award which vested in the period.

Percentage change in Group Chief Executive’s remuneration

The table below shows how the percentage change in the Group Chief Executive’s salary, benefits and bonus between 2014 and 2015 compares with the percentage change in the average of each of those components of pay for UK based employees.

 

       Salary         Role Based Pay                       Benefits          Annual bonus   
Group Chief Executivea      0.0%         0.0%         20.0%b    (15.6%) 
Average based on UK employeesc      3.0%         12.2%d       0.0%      (8.0%) 

Notes

a The 2015 figures for the Group Chief Executive are based on former Group Chief Executive, Antony Jenkins, and are annualised in order to provide a meaningful comparison of the year on year change in remuneration for the Group Chief Executive and UK based employees.
b The percentage change in benefits for the Group Chief Executive represents an increase in the cost to Barclays of existing benefits. There was no change in actual benefit provision to the former Group Chief Executive from 2014 to 2015.
c Certain populations were excluded to enable a meaningful like for like comparison.
d The majority of the increase was due to the introduction of Role Based Pay to certain populations, including new MRTs required to comply with PRA/EBA requirements.

We have chosen UK based employees as the comparator group as it is the most representative group for pay structure comparisons.

Relative importance of spend on pay

A year on year comparison of the relative importance of pay and distributions to shareholders is shown below. 2015 Group compensation costs have reduced by 6% and dividends to shareholders have increased 2% from 2014.

 

LOGO

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  99


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

                        

 

 

Chairman and non-executive Directors

Remuneration for non-executive Directors reflects their responsibilities and time commitment and the level of fees paid to non-executive Directors of comparable major UK companies.

Chairman and non-executive Directors: Single total figure for 2015 fees (audited)

 

         Fees           Benefits           Total   
        
 
2015
£000
  
  
      
 
2014
£000
  
  
      
 
2015
£000
  
  
      
 
2014
£000
  
  
      
 
2015
£000
  
  
      
 
2014
£000
  
  
Chairman                              
John McFarlanea        628                     11                     639             
Sir David Walkerb        285           750           6           19           291           769   
Non-executive Directors                              
Mike Ashley        207           213                               207           213   
Tim Breedon        232           240                               232           240   
Crawford Gilliesc        178           91                               178           91   
Reuben Jeffery III        135           160                               135           160   
Wendy Lucas-Bulld        358           367                               358           367   
Dambisa Moyo        152           151                               152           151   
Frits van Paasschen        88           80                               88           80   
Sir Michael Rakee        250           250                               250           250   
Diane de Saint Victor        135           135                               135           135   
Diane Schuenemanf k        74                                         74             
Sir John Sunderlandg        60           190                               60           190   
Steve Thiekeh k        184           131                               184           131   
Fulvio Contii                  37                                         37   
Simon Fraserj                  47                                         47   
Total        2,966           2,842           17           19           2,983           2,861   

Non-executive Directors are reimbursed expenses that are incurred for business reasons. Any tax that arises on these reimbursed expenses is paid by Barclays.

The Chairman is provided with private medical cover and the use of a company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes.

Notes

a John McFarlane joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 1 January 2015 and as Chairman from 24 April 2015. The total includes non-executive Director fees of £78,000 for the period from 1 January 2015 to 24 April 2015.
b Sir David Walker retired from the Board with effect from 23 April 2015.
c Crawford Gillies joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 1 May 2014.
d The 2014 figure has been updated to include fees received by Wendy Lucas-Bull for her role as Chairman of Barclays Africa Group Limited. The 2015 figure includes fees received by her in 2015 for that role.
e Sir Michael Rake retired from the Board with effect from 31 December 2015.
f Diane Schueneman joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 25 June 2015.
g Sir John Sunderland retired from the Board with effect from 23 April 2015.
h Steve Thieke joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 7 January 2014.
i Fulvio Conti retired from the Board with effect from 24 April 2014.
j Simon Fraser retired from the Board with effect from 24 April 2014.
k Diane Schueneman and Steve Thieke both served in 2015 on the US Governance Review Board, which is an advisory board set up as the forerunner of the board of our US intermediate holding company which will be established during 2016. The 2015 figures for Diane Schueneman and Steve Thieke include fees of $37,500 and $75,000 for these roles respectively.

Chairman and non-executive Directors: Statement of implementation of remuneration policy in 2016

2016 fees, subject to annual review in line with policy, for the Chairman and non-executive Directors are shown below.

 

      
 
1 January 2016  
£000  
  
  
    
 
1 January 2015
£000
  
  
    
 
Percentage
Increase
  
  
Chairmana      800b         750           
Deputy Chairmana      250           250         0   
Board member      80           80         0   
Additional responsibilities         
Senior Independent Director      30           30         0   
Chairman of Board Audit or Board Remuneration Committee      70           70         0   
Chairman of Board Risk Committee      60           60         0   
Chairman of Board Reputation Committee      50           50         0   
Membership of Board Audit or Board Remuneration Committee      30           30         0   
Membership of Board Reputation or Board Risk Committee      25           25         0   
Membership of Board Nominations Committee      15           15         0   

Notes

a The Chairman and Deputy Chairman do not receive any other additional responsibility fees in addition to the Chairman and Deputy Chairman fees respectively.
b John McFarlane was appointed Chairman on 24 April 2015 on fees of £800,000.

 

100  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

            

                

 

 

Payments to former Directors

Former Group Chief Executive: Antony Jenkins

Antony Jenkins ceased to be Group Chief Executive on 16 July 2015. In accordance with his contractual entitlements, Antony Jenkins will receive base salary, RBP, benefits and pension until 7 July 2016 (the Termination Date). These payments are being made in instalments and are subject to mitigation in the event that Antony Jenkins brings his termination date forward.

The Committee carefully considered the circumstances of Antony Jenkins’ departure, taking into account his contribution in bringing the Group to a much stronger position during a difficult period for the Group. Against that background, the Committee agreed to exercise its discretion to treat Antony Jenkins as an eligible leaver for the purposes of his variable pay in accordance with the Directors’ remuneration policy approved by shareholders at the 2014 AGM. The Committee agreed that:

 

§   Antony Jenkins would remain eligible for an annual bonus in respect of 2015, pro-rated to 16 July 2015

 

§   Antony Jenkins’ 260,355 deferred shares will be considered for release in full on the scheduled release dates. After release, the shares will be subject to an additional 6 month holding period

 

§   the unvested LTIP awards granted to Antony Jenkins in 2014 and 2015 will be considered for release on the scheduled release dates subject to achievement of the applicable performance measures and time pro-rated to the Termination Date. The maximum number of shares (subject to the achievement of the applicable performance measures) after reduction for time pro-rating are LTIP 2014-2016: 1,418,805 shares and LTIP 2015-2017: 475,937 shares. After vesting, the shares will be subject to an additional two year holding period

 

§   all outstanding unvested deferred awards are subject to malus provisions.

The Company has paid £106k in respect of outplacement services and legal costs in connection with Antony Jenkins’ termination of employment in line with the approved Directors’ remuneration policy on terminations.

Former Group Finance Director: Chris Lucas

In 2015, Chris Lucas continued to be eligible to receive life assurance cover, private medical cover and payments under the Executive Income Protection Plan (EIPP). Full details of his eligibility under the EIPP were disclosed in the 2013 Directors’ Remuneration report (page 115 of the 2013 Annual Report). Chris Lucas did not receive any other payment or benefit in 2015.

Other policy information

Outside appointments

During the period while he was Executive Chairman, John McFarlane retained fees in respect of external directorships at Westfield Corporation Limited of $62k and at Old Oak Holdings Limited of £37k.

Directors’ shareholdings and share interests

Executive Directors’ shareholdings and share interests

The chart below shows the value of Barclays’ shares held beneficially by Jes Staley and Tushar Morzaria as at 26 February 2016 that count towards the shareholding requirement of, as a minimum, Barclays’ shares worth four times salary. The current executive Directors have five years from their respective date of appointment to meet this requirement. At close of business on 26 February 2016, the market value of Barclays ordinary shares was £1.6910.

 

LOGO

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  101


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

                

 

 

The table below shows shares owned beneficially by all the Directors and shares over which executive Directors hold awards which are subject to either deferral terms or performance measures. The shares shown below, that are subject to performance measures, are based on the maximum number of shares that may be released (before pro-rating for Antony Jenkins).

Interests in Barclays PLC shares (audited)

 

                                 
 

 

Total as at
31 December

2015 (or date

  
  

  

        
        Unvested         
       Owned outright        
 
 
Subject to
performance
measures
  
  
  
    
 
 
Not subject to
performance
measures
  
  
  
    
 
 
of retirement
from the Board,
if earlier)
  
  
  
    
 
 
Total as at
26 February
2016
  
  
  
Executive Directors               
Antony Jenkinsa      5,540,236         4,579,983         260,355         10,380,574           
Tushar Morzaria      931,310         2,204,213         741,829         3,877,352         3,877,352   
Jes Staleyb      2,812,997                 896,450         3,709,447         3,709,447   
Chairman               
John McFarlanec      11,995                         11,995         11,995   
Sir David Walkerd      151,455                         151,455           
Non-executive Directors               
Mike Ashley      23,547                         23,547         23,547   
Tim Breedon      19,196                         19,196         19,196   
Crawford Gillies      58,856                         58,856         58,856   
Reuben Jeffery III      184,988                         184,988         184,988   
Wendy Lucas-Bull      14,672                         14,672         14,672   
Dambisa Moyo      40,696                         40,696         40,696   
Frits van Paasschen      17,184                         17,184         17,184   
Sir Michael Rakee      75,670                         75,670           
Diane de Saint Victor      21,579                         21,579         21,579   
Diane Schuenemanf      2,000                         2,000         2,000   
Sir John Sunderlandg      139,081                         139,081           
Steve Thieke      23,123                         23,123         23,123   
Sir Gerry Grimstoneh                                      97,045   

Notes

a Antony Jenkins left the Board with effect from 16 July 2015.
b Jes Staley joined the Board as Group Chief Executive with effect from 1 December 2015.
c John McFarlane joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 1 January 2015 and as Chairman with effect from 24 April 2015. He was Executive Chairman from 17 July 2015 to 30 November 2015.
d Sir David Walker retired from the Board with effect from 23 April 2015.
e Sir Michael Rake retired from the Board with effect from 31 December 2015.
f Diane Schueneman joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 25 June 2015.
g Sir John Sunderland retired from the Board with effect from 23 April 2015.
h Sir Gerry Grimstone joined the Board as Senior Independent Director and Deputy Chairman with effect from 1 January 2016. On appointment, he held 97,045 Barclays PLC shares.

 

102  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                    

                    

                

 

 

Barclays Board Remuneration Committee

The Board Remuneration Committee is responsible for overseeing Barclays’ remuneration as described in more detail below.

Terms of Reference

The role of the Committee is to:

 

§   set the overarching principles and parameters of remuneration policy across the Group

 

§   consider and approve the remuneration arrangements of the Chairman, the executive Directors, other senior executives and those employees whose total annual compensation exceeds an amount determined by the Committee from time to time (currently £2m or more)

 

§   exercise oversight for remuneration issues.

The Committee also considers and approves buy-outs of forfeited rights for new hires of £2m or more, and packages on termination where the total discretionary value is £1m or more. It reviews the policy relating to all remuneration plans including pensions, and considers and approves measures to promote the alignment of the interests of shareholders and employees. It is also responsible for the selection and appointment of its independent remuneration adviser.

The Terms of Reference can be found at home.barclays/corporategovernance or from the Company Secretary on request.

Chairman and members

The Chairman and members of the Committee are as follows:

 

§   Crawford Gillies, Committee member since 1 May 2014 and Chairman since 24 April 2015

 

§   Tim Breedon, Committee member since 1 December 2012

 

§   Steve Thieke, Committee member since 6 February 2014

 

§   Dambisa Moyo, Committee member since 1 September 2015

Former Chairman and members

Members who left the Committee during 2015 were as follows:

 

§   Sir John Sunderland, Committee member since 1 July 2005 and Committee Chairman from 24 July 2012 to 23 April 2015

 

§   Sir David Walker, Committee member from 1 September 2012 to 23 April 2015

All current members are considered independent by the Board.

Remuneration Committee attendance in 2015

 

      
 
Number of meetings
eligible to attend
  
  
    
 
Number of
                meetings attended
  
 
Crawford Gillies      7         7   
Tim Breedon      7         7   
Steve Thieke      7         7   
Dambisa Moyo      4         4   
Sir John Sunderland      1         1   
Sir David Walker      1         1   

The performance of the Committee is reviewed each year as part of the Board Effectiveness Review. The December 2015 review concluded that Board members have confidence in the effectiveness of the Committee. Full details of the Board Effectiveness review can be found on page 64.

Advisers to the Remuneration Committee

During 2015, the Committee was advised by Towers Watson (now known as Willis Towers Watson). The Committee is satisfied that the advice provided by Towers Watson to the Committee is independent. Towers Watson is a signatory to, and its appointment as adviser to the Committee is conditional on adherence to, the voluntary UK Code of Conduct for executive remuneration consultants.

Towers Watson’s work in 2015 included advising the Committee and providing the latest market data on compensation and trends when considering incentive levels and remuneration packages. A representative from Towers Watson attends Committee meetings. When requested by the Committee, Towers Watson is available to advise and meet with the Committee members separate from management.

Fees for Committee work are charged on a time/cost basis and Towers Watson was paid a total of £195,000 (excluding VAT) in fees for its advice to the Committee in 2015 relating to the executive Directors (either exclusively or along with other employees within the Committee’s Terms of Reference).

Towers Watson provides pensions advice, advice on health and benefits provision, assistance and technology support for employee surveys and performance management, and remuneration data to the Group. Towers Watson also provides pensions advice and administration services to the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund.

The Committee regularly reviews the objectivity and independence of the advice it receives from Towers Watson.

In the course of its deliberations, the Committee considers the views of the Group Chief Executive, Group Human Resources Director and the Group Reward and Performance Director. The Group Finance Director and Chief Risk Officer provide regular updates on Group and business financial performance and the Group’s risk profile respectively.

No Barclays‘ employee or Director participates in discussions with, or decisions of, the Committee relating to his or her own remuneration. No other advisers provided significant services to the Committee in the year.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  103


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

                        

 

 

Remuneration Committee activities in 2015

The following provides a summary of the Committee’s activities during 2015 and at the January and February 2016 meetings when 2015 remuneration decisions were finalised.

 

Meeting

  Fixed and variable pay issues   Governance, risk and other matters

 

February 2015

 

 

§

 

 

Approved executive Directors’ and senior executives’ 2015 fixed pay

 

 

§

 

§

 

§

 

§

 

 

Risk adjustment and malus review

 

Approved 2014 Remuneration report

 

Review of 2014 reward communications strategy

 

Finance and Risk updates

 

 

§

 

 

Approved 2015 executive Directors’ annual bonus performance measures

   
 

 

§

 

 

Approved group salary and RBP budgets for 2015

   
 

 

§

 

 

Approved final 2014 incentive funding

   
   

 

§

 

 

Approved proposals for executive Directors’ and senior executives’ 2014 bonuses and 2015 LTIP awards for executive Directors

 

       

 

May 2015

  §  

 

2015 early incentive funding projections

 

 

§

 

 

Consideration of the outcomes of the 2014 Board Committees’ effectiveness review

     

 

§

 

 

Update on EBA consultation on draft revised remuneration guidelines

     

 

§

 

 

Employee compensation adjustment review

           

 

§

 

 

Barclays’ remuneration approach review

 

July 2015

     

 

§

 

 

Review of Committee activity and Terms of Reference

     

 

§

 

 

Consideration of process for appointment of Committee’s independent adviser from April 2016

     

 

§

 

 

Update on July 2014 PRA consultation and resulting changes to the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook

     

 

§

 

 

Scope of remuneration philosophy review

           

 

§

 

 

Employee compensation adjustment review

 

October 2015

 

 

§

 

 

Approved Jes Staley’s remuneration arrangements

 

 

§

 

 

Remuneration philosophy review

(Two meetings)

 

               

 

November 2015

 

 

§

 

 

2015 incentive funding projections

 

 

§

 

 

Finance and Risk updates including ex ante risk adjustment

 

 

§

 

 

2016 LTIP performance measures

 

 

§

 

 

Updates on headcount and attrition

     

 

§

 

 

2015 payround shareholder engagement planning

           

 

§

 

 

 

Employee compensation adjustment review

 

 

December 2015

 

 

§

 

 

Initial considerations on senior executives’ 2016 fixed pay

 

 

§

 

 

Review of draft 2015 Remuneration report

 

 

§

 

 

2015 incentive funding proposals and initial proposals for senior executives’ 2015 bonuses

 

 

§

 

§

 

 

 

Finance and Risk updates including ex ante risk adjustment

 

Updates on headcount and attrition

 

             

 

January 2016

 

 

§

 

 

2015 incentive funding proposals

 

 

§

 

 

 

Finance and Risk updates

 

February 2016

(Two meetings)

 

 

§

 

 

Approved executive Directors’ and senior executives’ 2016 fixed pay

 

 

§

 

§

 

§

 

§

 

 

Approved 2015 Remuneration report

 

Finance and Risk updates including ex ante risk adjustment

 

Appointment of Committee independent adviser

 

Updates on headcount and attrition

 

 

§

 

 

Approved 2016 executive Directors’ annual bonus performance measures

   
 

 

 

§

 

 

Approved Group fixed pay budgets for 2016

   
 

 

§

 

 

Approved final 2015 incentive funding

   
   

 

§

 

 

Approved proposals for executive Directors’ and senior executives’ 2015 bonuses and 2016 LTIP awards for executive Directors

 

       

Regular items: market and stakeholder updates including PRA/FCA, US Federal Reserve and other regulatory matters; updates from Remuneration Review Panel meetings; operation of the Committee’s Control Framework on hiring, retention and termination; and LTIP performance updates.

Statement of voting at Annual General Meeting

The table below shows the voting result in respect of our remuneration arrangements at the AGM held on 23 April 2015 and the last policy vote at the AGM held on 24 April 2014:

 

     For

% of

votes cast

Number

   Against

% of

votes cast

Number

   Withheld

Number

Advisory vote on the 2014 Remuneration report

   97.50%    2.50%   
     11,385,216,004            291,926,107            63,613,057        

Binding vote on the Directors’ remuneration policy

   93.21%    6.79%   
     9,936,116,114    723,914,712    154,598,278

 

104  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Governance: Remuneration report

Additional remuneration disclosures

                    

 

 

This section contains voluntary disclosures about levels of remuneration for our eight most highly paid senior executive officers and levels of remuneration of employees in the Barclays Group.

 

            

2015 total remuneration of the eight highest paid senior executive officers below Board level

The table below shows remuneration for the eight highest paid senior executive officers below Board level who were Key Management Personnel in 2015.

Eight highest paid senior executive officers below Board level

      

 
 

1

2015
£000

  

  
  

    

 
 

2

2015
£000

  

  
  

    

 
 

3

2015
£000

  

  
  

    

 
 

4

2015
£000

  

  
  

    

 
 

5

2015
£000

  

  
  

    

 
 

6

2015
£000

  

  
  

    

 
 

7

2015
£000

  

  
  

    

 
 

8

2015
£000

  

  
  

Fixed Pay (salary and RBP)

     3,150         1,500         1,700         1,300         2,050         1,192         878         661   

Current year cash bonus

             600         320         320         100         140         180         204   

Current year share bonus

             600         320         320         100         140         180         204   

Deferred cash bonus

     3,150         900         480         480         150         210         270         306   

Deferred share bonus

     3,150         900         480         480         150         210         270         306   

Total remuneration

     9,450         4,500         3,300         2,900         2,550         1,892         1,778         1,681   

Total remuneration of the employees in the Barclays Group

The table below shows the number of employees in the Barclays Group in 2014 and 2015 in bands by reference to total remuneration. Total remuneration comprises salary, RBP, other allowances, bonus and the value at award of LTIP awards.

Total remuneration of the employees in the Barclays Group

 

       Number of employees   

Remuneration band

                                  2015                                      2014   

£0 to £25,000

     71,886         72,262   

£25,001 to £50,000

     31,804         33,760   

£50,001 to £100,000

     21,196         20,491   

£100,001 to £250,000

     9,903         9,000   

£250,001 to £500,000

     2,266         2,323   

£500,001 to £1,000,000

     761         871   

£1,000,001 to £2,500,000

     268         301   

£2,500,001 to £5,000,000

     50         55   

Above £5m

     5         3   

Barclays is a global business. Of those employees earning above £1m in total remuneration for 2015 in the table above, 55% are based in the US, 34% in the UK, and 11% in the rest of the world.

The number of employees paid above £1m has reduced from 359 in 2014 to 323 in 2015.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  105


Governance: Remuneration report

Additional remuneration disclosures

 

 

Outstanding share plan and long-term incentive plan awards (audited)

 

Plan

    
 
 
Number of shares under
award at 1 January
2015 (maximum)
  
  
  
    
 
 
Number of shares
awarded in year
(maximum)
  
  
  
    
 
Market price
on award date
  
  
    
 
Number of shares
released
  
  
    
 
Market price
on release date
  
  

Antony Jenkins

              

Barclays LTIP 2012-2014

     1,139,217                 £1.81         332,286         £2.67   

Barclays LTIP 2012-2014

     1,371,280                 £1.86         400,030         £2.67   

Barclays LTIP 2013-2015

     1,545,995                 £3.06                   

Barclays LTIP 2014-2016

     1,891,740                 £2.31                   

Barclays LTIP 2015-2017

             1,142,248         £2.54                   

Share Value Plan 2012

     332,377                 £2.53         332,377         £2.54   

Share Value Plan 2012

     1,079,970                 £1.86         1,079,970         £2.54   

Share Value Plan 2015

             260,355         £2.54                   

Tushar Morzaria

              

Barclays LTIP 2014-2016

     1,375,811                 £2.31                   

Barclays LTIP 2015-2017

             828,402         £2.54                   

Share Value Plan 2013

     733,877                 £2.51         411,437         £2.54   

Share Value Plan 2014

     309,557                 £2.31         103,185         £2.54   

Share Value Plan 2015

             213,017         £2.54                   

Jes Staley

              

Share Value Plan 2015

             896,450         £2.34                   

 

The interests shown in the table above are the maximum number of Barclays’ shares that may be received under each plan (before pro-rating for Antony Jenkins). Executive Directors do not pay for any share plan or long-term incentive plan awards. Antony Jenkins received 178,527 dividend shares from Share Value Plan (SVP) and LTIP awards and Tushar Morzaria received 19,669 dividend shares from SVP awards released in 2015.

 

The SVP 2015 award granted to Jes Staley was made in respect of awards he forfeited as a result of accepting employment at Barclays. This award was made in line with the Barclays’ recruitment policy and was made on no more favourable terms than those forfeited awards.

 

Outstanding Cash Value Plan (CVP) awards (audited)

   

   

  

Plan

                      
 
 

 

Value under award at
1 January 2015
(maximum)

£000

  
  
  

  

    
 
Value paid in year
£000
  
  
    
 

 

 

Value under award at
31 December 2015

(maximum)

£000

  
  

  

  

Antony Jenkins

              

Cash Value Plan 2012

                       750         750           

A ‘service credit’ was added, on the final vesting date, to the third and final vesting amount which, for the award shown, was 10% of the original award amount. Antony Jenkins received the CVP award as part of his 2011 bonus, which was awarded in respect of performance in his role as CEO of Retail and Business Banking.

 

106  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

      

Number of shares

lapsed in 2015

    

Number of shares under award at 31 December 2015

(maximum)

    

Value of release

£000

    

End of performance period

or first scheduled release date

    

Last scheduled

release date

     806,931           887          
     971,250           1,068          
          1,545,995           31/12/2015      14/03/2016
          1,891,740           31/12/2016      06/03/2017
          1,142,248           31/12/2017      05/03/2018
               844          
               2,743          
          260,355           14/03/2016      05/03/2018
          1,375,811           31/12/2016      06/03/2017
          828,402           31/12/2017      05/03/2018
          322,440      1,045      17/03/2014      05/03/2018
          206,372      262      16/03/2015      06/03/2017
          213,017           14/03/2016      05/03/2018
            896,450           14/03/2016      14/03/2016

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  107


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)

 

 

 

 

Barclays’ forward looking remuneration policy for Directors was approved at the 2014 AGM held on 24 April 2014 and applies for three years from that date. The full policy can be found on pages 100 to 110 of the 2013 Annual Report or at home.barclays/annualreport. This section sets out an abridged version of the Directors’ remuneration policy and is provided for information only.

 

 

This remuneration policy sets out the framework for how the Committee’s remuneration strategy will be executed for the Directors over the three years beginning on the date of the 2014 AGM. This is to be achieved by having a remuneration policy that seeks to:

 

§   provide an appropriate and competitive mix of fixed and variable pay which, through its short and long-term components, incentivises management and is aligned to shareholders;

 

§   provide direct line of sight with Barclays’ strategy through the incentive programmes; and

 

§   comply with and adapt to the changing regulatory landscape.

Remuneration policy for executive Directors

 

Element and purpose   Operation   Maximum value and performance measures

 

A. Fixed pay

 

       

 

Salary

To reward skills and experience appropriate for the role and provide the basis for a competitive remuneration package

 

 

Salaries are determined with reference to market practice and market data (on which the Committee receives independent advice), and reflect individual experience and role.

 

Executive Directors’ salaries are benchmarked against comparable roles in the following banks: Bank of America, BBVA, BNP Paribas, Citigroup, Credit Suisse, Deutsche Bank, HSBC, JP Morgan, Lloyds, Morgan Stanley, RBS, Santander, Société Générale, Standard Chartered and UBS. The Committee may amend the list of comparator companies to ensure it remains relevant to Barclays or if circumstances make this necessary (for example, as a result of takeovers or mergers).

 

Salaries are reviewed annually and any changes are effective from 1 April in the financial year.

 

 

 

Salaries for executive Directors are set at a point within the benchmark range determined by the Committee taking into account their experience and performance. Increases for the current executive Directors over the policy period will be no more than local market employee increases other than in exceptional circumstances where the Committee judges that an increase is needed to bring an executive Director’s salary into line with that of our competitors. In such circumstances Barclays would consult with its major shareholders.

 

 

Role Based Pay

To enable competitive remuneration opportunity in recognition of the breadth and depth of the role

 

 

Paid quarterly in shares which are subject to a holding period with restrictions lifting over five years (20% each year). As the executive Directors beneficially own the shares, they will be entitled to any dividends paid on those shares.

 

RBP will be reviewed and fixed annually and may be reduced or increased in certain circumstances. Any changes are effective from 1 January in the relevant financial year.

 

 

The maximum RBP for executive Directors is set at £950,000 for the Group Chief Executive, Antony Jenkins, and £750,000 for the Group Finance Director, Tushar Morzaria. It is not pensionable (except where required under local law). These amounts may be reduced but are at the maxima and may not be increased above this level.

 

There are no performance measures.

 

 

Pension

To enable executive Directors to build long-term retirement savings

 

 

Executive Directors receive an annual cash allowance in lieu of participation in a pension arrangement.

 

 

The maximum annual cash allowance is 33% of salary for the Group Chief Executive and 25% of salary for the Group Finance Director and any other executive Director.

 

 

Benefits

To provide a competitive and cost effective benefits package appropriate to role and location

 

 

Executive Directors’ benefits provision includes private medical cover, annual health check, life and ill health income protection, tax advice, car cash allowance, and use of a company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes.

 

Additional benefits may be offered that are minor in nature or are normal market practice in a country to which an executive Director relocates or from which an executive Director is recruited.

 

In addition to the above, if an executive Director were to relocate, additional support would be provided for a defined and limited period of time in line with Barclays’ general employee mobility policy including provision of temporary accommodation, payment of removal costs and relocation flights. Barclays will pay the executive Director’s tax on the relocation costs but will not tax equalise and will also not pay the tax on his or her other employment income.

 

 

 

The maximum value of the benefit is determined by the nature of the benefit itself and costs of provision may depend on external factors, e.g. insurance costs.

 

108  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

 

 

 

 

 

Remuneration policy for executive Directors continued

 

Element and purpose   Operation   Maximum value and performance measures

 

B. Variable Pay

 

       

 

Annual bonus

To reward delivery of short-term financial targets set each year, the individual performance of the executive Directors in achieving those targets, and their contribution to delivering Barclays’ strategic objectives

 

While financial objectives are important, the Balanced Scorecard (which also includes Group financial targets) plays a significant role in bonus determination, to ensure alignment with Barclays’ strategy

 

Deferred bonuses encourage long-term focus and retention. Delivery substantially or fully in shares with a holding period increases alignment with shareholders. Deferred bonuses are granted by the Committee (or an authorised sub-committee) at its discretion, subject to the relevant plan rules

 

 

Determination of annual bonus

Individual bonuses are discretionary and decisions are based on the Committee’s judgement of executive Directors’ performance in the year, measured against Group and personal objectives.

 

Delivery structure

Executive Directors are Code Staff and their bonuses are therefore subject to deferral of at least the level applicable to all Code Staff, currently 40% (for bonuses of no more than £500,000) or 60% (for bonuses of more than £500,000). The Committee may choose to defer a greater proportion of any bonus awarded to an executive Director than the minimum required by the PRA Remuneration Code. At least half the non-deferred bonus is delivered in shares or share-linked instruments.

 

Deferred bonuses for executive Directors may be delivered in a combination of shares or other deferral instruments.

 

Participants may, at the Committee’s discretion, also receive the benefit of any dividends paid between the award date and the relevant release date in the form of dividend shares.

 

Operation of risk and conduct adjustment and malus

Any bonus awarded will reflect appropriate reductions made to incentive pools in relation to risk events. Individual bonus decisions may also reflect appropriate reductions in relation to specific risk and conduct events.

 

All unvested deferred bonuses are subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of deferred bonuses (including to nil) for any reason. These include, but are not limited to:

 

§    A participant deliberately misleading Barclays, the market and/or shareholders in relation to the financial performance of the Barclays Group

 

§   A participant causing harm to Barclays’ reputation or where his/her actions have amounted to misconduct, incompetence or negligence

 

§    A material restatement of the financial statements of the Barclays Group or the Group or any business unit suffering a material down turn in its financial performance

 

§  A material failure of risk management in the Barclays Group

 

§  A significant deterioration in the financial health of the Barclays Group

 

Timing of receipt

Non-deferred cash components of any bonus are paid following the performance year to which they relate, normally in February. Non-deferred share bonuses are awarded normally in March and are subject to a six-month holding period.

 

Deferred share bonuses normally vest in three equal portions over a minimum three-year period, subject to the provisions of the plan rules including continued employment and the malus provisions (as explained above). Should the deferred awards vest, the shares are subject to an additional six-month holding period (after payment of tax).

 

 

 

The maximum annual bonus opportunity is 80% of fixed pay.

 

The performance measures by which any executive Director bonuses are assessed include Group, business and personal measures, both financial and non-financial. Financial measures may include, but are not restricted to such measures as net income, adjusted profit before tax, return on equity, CET1 ratio and return on risk weighted assets. Non-financial measures are based on the Balanced Scorecard. Personal objectives may include key initiatives relating to the role of the Director or in support of Barclays’ strategic objectives. The Balanced Scorecard may be updated from time to time in line with the Group’s strategy. In making its assessment of any bonus, the Committee will consider financial factors to guide 50% of the bonus opportunity, the Balanced Scorecard 35%, and personal objectives 15%. Any bonus is discretionary and any amount may be awarded from zero to the maximum value.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  109


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)

 

 

Remuneration policy for executive Directors continued

 

Element and purpose   Operation   Maximum value and performance measures

 

B. Variable Pay continued

 

       

 

Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) award

To reward execution of Barclays’ strategy and growth in shareholder value over a multi-year period

 

Long-term performance measurement, holding periods and the malus provisions discourage excessive risk-taking and inappropriate behaviours, encourage a long-term view and align executive Directors’ interests with those of shareholders

 

Performance measures balance incentivising management to deliver strong risk-adjusted financial returns, and delivery of strategic progress as measured by the Balanced Scorecard. Delivery in shares with a further two-year holding period increases alignment with shareholders

 

 

Determination of LTIP award

LTIP awards are made by the Committee following discussion of recommendations made by the Chairman (for the Group Chief Executive’s LTIP award) and by the Group Chief Executive (for other executive Directors’ LTIP awards).

 

Delivery structure

LTIP awards are granted subject to the plan rules and are satisfied in Barclays’ shares (although they may be satisfied in other instruments as may be required by regulation).

 

For each award, performance measures are set at grant and there is no retesting allowed of those conditions. The Committee has, within the parameters set out opposite, the flexibility to vary the weighting of performance measures and calibration for each award prior to its grant.

 

The Committee has discretion, and in line with the plan rules approved by shareholders, in exceptional circumstances to amend targets, measures, or number of awards if an event happens (for example, a major transaction) that, in the opinion of the Committee, causes the original targets or measures to be no longer appropriate or such adjustment to be reasonable. The Committee also has the discretion to reduce the vesting of any award if it deems that the outcome is not consistent with performance delivered, including to zero.

 

Participants may, at the Committee’s discretion, also receive the benefit of any dividends paid between the award date and the relevant release date in the form of dividend equivalents (cash or securities).

 

Operation of risk adjustment and malus

The achievement of performance measures determines the extent to which LTIP awards will vest. Awards are also subject to malus provisions (as explained in the Annual bonus paragraphs above) which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of awards (including to nil).

 

Timing of receipt

Barclays LTIP awards have a five-year period in total from grant to when all restrictions are lifted. This will include a minimum three-year vesting period and an additional two-year holding period once vested (after payment of tax)

 

 

 

The maximum annual LTIP award is 120% of fixed pay.

 

Vesting is dependent on performance measures and service.

 

Following determination of the financial measures applicable to an LTIP cycle, if the Committee is satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Barclays Group (based on profit before tax) it may, at its discretion, adjust the percentage of shares considered for release up or down by up to 10% (subject to the maximum % for the award calibrated against financial performance measures).

 

Performance measures will be based on financial performance (e.g. measured on return on risk weighted assets), risk metrics (e.g. measured by loan loss rate) and the Balanced Scorecard which also includes financial measures. The Committee has discretion to change the weightings but financial measures will be at least 50% and the Balanced Scorecard will be a maximum of 30%. The threshold level of performance for each performance measure will be disclosed annually as part of the implementation of remuneration report.

 

Straight line vesting applies between threshold and maximum for the financial and risk measures.

 

110  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Remuneration policy for executive Directors continued

 

Element and purpose   Operation   Maximum value and performance measures

 

C. Other

 

       
 

All employee share plans

To provide an opportunity for Directors to voluntarily invest in the Company

 

Executive Directors are entitled to participate in:

 

(i)  Barclays Sharesave under which they can make monthly savings over a period of three or five years linked to the grant of an option over Barclays’ shares which can be at a discount of up to 20% on the share price set at the start.

 

(ii)  Barclays Sharepurchase under which they can make contributions (monthly or lump sum) out of pre-tax pay (if based in the United Kingdom) which are used to acquire Barclays’ shares.

 

(i)  Savings between £5 and the maximum set by Barclays (which will be no more than the HMRC maximum) per month. There are no performance measures.

 

(ii)   Contributions of between £10 and the maximum set by Barclays (which will be no more than the HMRC maximum) per tax year which Barclays may match up to HMRC maximum (current match is £600). There are no performance measures.

 

 
Previous buy out awards  

Tushar Morzaria currently holds an unvested buy-out award under the Barclays Joiners Share Value Plan which was granted to him in respect of awards he forfeited as a result of accepting employment at Barclays. This award was made in line with the Barclays’ recruitment policy.

 

 

The award was no more generous than and mirrored as far as possible the expected value and timing of vesting of the forfeited awards granted by JP Morgan.

 

 

Shareholding requirement

To further enhance the alignment of shareholders’ and executive Directors’ interests in long-term value creation

 

Executive Directors must build up a shareholding of 400% of salary over five years from the later of: (i) the introduction of the new requirement in 2013; and (ii) the date of appointment as executive Director. They have a reasonable period to build up to this requirement again if it is not met because of a share price fall.

 

Shares that count towards the requirement are beneficially owned shares including any vested share awards subject only to holding periods (including vested LTIPs, vested deferred share bonuses and RBP shares). Shares from unvested deferred share bonuses and unvested LTIPs do not count towards the requirement.

 

  Barclays’ shares worth a minimum of 400% of salary must be held within five years.
 

Outside appointments

To encourage self-development and allow for the introduction of external insight and practice

 

Executive Directors may accept one board appointment in another listed company.

 

Chairman’s approval must be sought before accepting appointment. Fees may be retained by the executive Director. None of the executive Directors currently hold an outside appointment.

 

  Not applicable.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  111


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)

 

 

 

Notes to the table on pages 108 to 111:

Performance measures and targets

The Committee selected the relevant financial and risk based performance measures because they are key to the bank’s strategy and are important measures used by the executive Directors to oversee the direction of the business. The Balanced Scorecard has been selected as it demonstrates the performance and progress of Barclays as measured across the following dimensions (5Cs): Customers & Clients, Colleagues, Citizenship, Conduct and Company. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard will have equal weighting. All targets are set to be stretching but achievable and aligned to enhancing shareholder value.

The Committee is of the opinion that the performance targets for the annual bonus and Balanced Scorecard element of the LTIP are commercially sensitive in respect of the Company and that it would be detrimental to the interests of the Company to disclose them before the start of the relevant performance period. The performance against those measures will be disclosed after the end of the relevant financial year in that year’s remuneration report subject to the sensitivity no longer remaining.

Differences between the remuneration policy of the executive Directors and the policy for all employees of the Barclays Group

The structure of total remuneration packages for executive Directors and for the broader employee population is similar. Employees receive salary, pension and benefits and are eligible to be considered for a bonus and to participate in all employee share plans. The broader employee population typically does not have a contractual limit on the quantum of their remuneration and does not receive RBP which is paid only to some, but not all, Code Staff. Executive Director RBP is determined on a similar basis to other Code Staff.

The Committee approaches any salary increases for executive Directors by benchmarking against market data for named banks. Incremental annual salary increases remain more common among employees at less senior levels.

As with executive Directors, bonuses for the broader employee population are performance based. Bonuses for executive Directors and the broader employee population are subject to deferral requirements. Executive Directors and other Code Staff are subject to deferral at a minimum rate of 40% (for bonuses of no more than £500,000) or 60% (for bonuses of more than £500,000) but the Committee may choose to operate higher deferral rates. For non-Code Staff, bonuses in excess of £65,000 are subject to a graduated level of deferral. The terms of deferred bonus awards for executive Directors and the wider employee population are broadly the same, in particular the vesting of all deferred bonuses (subject to service and malus conditions).

The broader employee population is not eligible to participate in the Barclays LTIP.

How shareholder views and broader employee pay are taken into account by the Committee in setting policy and making remuneration decisions

We recognise that remuneration is an area of particular interest to shareholders and that in setting and considering changes to remuneration it is critical that we listen to and take into account their views. Accordingly, a series of meetings are held each year with major shareholders and shareholder representative groups (including the Association of British Insurers, National Association of Pension Funds and ISS). The Committee Chairman attends these meetings, accompanied by senior Barclays’ employees (including the Reward and Performance Director and the Company Secretary). The Committee notes that shareholder views on some matters are not always unanimous, but values the insight and engagement that these interactions and the expression of sometimes different views provide. This engagement is meaningful and helpful to the Committee in its work and contributes directly to the decisions made by the Committee.

The Committee takes account of the pay and employment conditions of the broader employee base when it considers the remuneration of the executive Directors. The Committee receives and reviews analysis of remuneration proposals for employees across all of the Group’s businesses. This includes analysis by corporate grade and by performance rating and information on proposed bonuses and salary increases across the employee population and individual proposals for Code Staff and highly paid individuals. When the Committee considers executive Director remuneration, it therefore makes that consideration in the context of a detailed understanding of remuneration for the broader employee population and uses the all employee data to compare remuneration and ensure consistency throughout the Group. Employees are not consulted directly on the Directors’ remuneration policy.

 

112  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Executive Directors’ policy on recruitment

 

Element of remuneration   Commentary   Maximum value
 
Salary  

Determined by market conditions, market practice and ability to recruit.

 

For a newly appointed executive Director, whether through external recruitment or internal promotion, if their salary is at a level below the desired market level, the Committee retains the discretion to realign their salary over a transitional period which may mean that annualised salary increases for the new appointee are higher than that set out in the salary section of the remuneration policy.

 

  In line with policy.
 
Role Based Pay  

Determined by role, market practice and ability to recruit. Percentage may decrease or increase in certain circumstances subject to maximum value.

 

  100% of salary.
 
Benefits  

In line with policy.

 

  In line with policy.
 
Pension   In line with policy.  

33% of salary (Group Chief Executive), 25% of salary (Group Finance Director) and 25% if another executive Director is appointed.

 

 
Annual Bonus  

In line with policy.

 

  80% of fixed pay.
 
Long Term Incentive Plan  

In line with policy.

 

  120% of fixed pay.
 
Buy out  

The Committee can consider buying out forfeited bonus opportunity or incentive awards that the new executive Director has forfeited as a result of accepting the appointment with Barclays, subject to proof of forfeiture where applicable.

 

As required by the PRA Remuneration Code, any award made to compensate for forfeited remuneration from the new executive Director’s previous employment may not be more generous than, and must mirror as far as possible the expected value, timing and form of delivery, the terms of the forfeited remuneration and must be in the best long-term interests of Barclays. Barclays deferral policy shall however apply as a minimum to any buy out of annual bonus opportunity.

 

  The value of any buy out is not included within the maximum incentive levels above since it relates to a buy out of forfeited bonus opportunity or incentive awards from a previous employer.

Where a senior executive is promoted to the Board, his or her existing contractual commitments agreed prior to his or her appointment may still be honoured in accordance with the terms of the relevant commitment including vesting of any pre-existing deferred bonus or long-term incentive awards.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  113


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)

    

 

 

Executive Directors’ policy on payment for loss of office (including a takeover)

The Committee’s approach to payments in the event of termination is to take account of the individual circumstances including the reason for termination, individual performance, contractual obligations and the terms of the deferred bonus plans and long-term incentive plans in which the executive Director participates.

 

Standard provision   Policy   Details
 
Notice periods in executive Directors’ service contracts  

12 months’ notice from the Company.

 

6 months’ notice from the executive Director.

 

Executive Directors may be required to work during the notice period or may be placed on garden leave or if not required to work the full notice period may be provided with pay in lieu of notice (subject to mitigation where relevant).

 

 
Pay during notice period or payment in lieu of notice per service contracts   12 months’ salary payable and continuation of pension and other contractual benefits while an employee.  

Payable in phased instalments (or lump sum) and subject to mitigation if paid in instalments and executive Director obtains alternative employment during the notice period or while on garden leave.

 

In the event of termination for gross misconduct neither notice nor payment in lieu of notice is given.

 

 
Treatment of Role Based Pay   Ceases to be payable from the executive Director’s termination date. Therefore, RBP will be paid during any notice period and/or garden leave, but not where Barclays elects to make a payment in lieu of notice (unless otherwise required by local law).  

Shares to be delivered on the next quarterly delivery date shall be pro rated for the number of days from the start of the relevant quarter to the termination date. Where Barclays elects to terminate the employment with immediate effect by making a payment in lieu of notice, the executive Director will not receive any shares that would otherwise have accrued during the period for which the payment in lieu is made (unless required otherwise by local law).

 

 
Treatment of annual bonus on termination  

No automatic entitlement to bonus on termination, but may be considered at the Committee’s discretion and subject to performance measures being met and pro rated for service. No bonus would be payable in the case of gross misconduct or resignation.

 

   
 
Treatment of unvested deferred bonus awards  

Outstanding deferred bonus awards would lapse if the executive Director leaves by reason of resignation or termination for gross misconduct. However in the case of death or if the Director is an ‘eligible leaver’ defined as leaving due to injury, disability or ill health, retirement, redundancy, the business or company which employs the executive Director ceasing to be part of the Group or in circumstances where Barclays terminates the employment (other than in cases of cause or gross misconduct), he or she would continue to be eligible to be considered for unvested portions of deferred awards, subject to the rules of the relevant plan unless the Committee determines otherwise in exceptional circumstances. Deferred awards are subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of deferred bonuses (including to nil).

 

In the event of a takeover or other major corporate event, the Committee has absolute discretion to determine whether all outstanding awards would vest early or whether they should continue in the same or revised form following the change of control. The Committee may also determine that participants may exchange existing awards for awards over shares in an acquiring company with the agreement of that company.

 

  In an eligible leaver situation, deferred bonus awards may be considered for release in full on the scheduled release date unless the Committee determines otherwise in exceptional circumstances. After release, the awards may be subject to an additional holding period of six months.

 

114  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Executive Directors’ policy on payment for loss of office (including a takeover) continued

 

Standard provision   Policy   Details
 
Treatment of unvested
awards under the LTIP
 

Outstanding unvested awards under the LTIP would lapse if the executive Director leaves by reason of resignation or termination for gross misconduct. However, in line with the plan rules approved by shareholders, in the case of death or if the Director is an ‘eligible leaver’ defined as leaving due to injury, disability or ill health, retirement, redundancy, the business or company which employs the executive Director ceasing to be part of the Group (or for any other reason if the Committee decides at its discretion), he or she would continue to be entitled to be considered for an award. Awards are also subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of awards (including to nil).

 

In the event of a takeover or other major corporate event (but excluding an internal reorganisation of the Group), the Committee has absolute discretion to determine whether all outstanding awards vest subject to the achievement of any performance conditions. The Committee has discretion to apply a pro rata reduction to reflect the unexpired part of the vesting period. The Committee may also determine that participants may exchange awards for awards over shares in an acquiring company with the agreement of that company. In the event of an internal reorganisation, the Committee may determine that outstanding awards will be exchanged for equivalent awards in another company.

 

  In an eligible leaver situation, awards may be considered for release on the scheduled release date, pro rated for time and performance, subject to the Committee’s discretion to determine otherwise in exceptional circumstances. After release, the shares (net of deductions for tax) are subject to an additional holding period of two years.
 
Repatriation  

Except in a case of gross misconduct or resignation, where a Director has been relocated at the commencement of employment, the Company may pay for the Director’s repatriation costs in line with Barclays’ general employee mobility policy including temporary accommodation, payment of removal costs and relocation flights. The company will pay the executive Director’s tax on the relocation costs but will not tax equalise and will also not pay tax on his or her other income relating to the termination of employment.

 

   
 
Other  

Except in a case of gross misconduct or resignation, the Company may pay for the executive Director’s legal fees and tax advice relating to the termination of employment and provide outplacement services. The Company may pay the executive Director’s tax on these particular costs.

 

   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  115


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)

 

 

 

 

Remuneration policy for non-executive Directors

 

Element and purpose

  Operation

Fees

Reflect individual responsibilities and membership of Board Committees and are set to attract non-executive Directors who have relevant skills and experience to oversee the implementation of our strategy

 

 

The Chairman and Deputy Chairman are paid an all-inclusive fee for all Board responsibilities. The Chairman has a minimum time commitment equivalent to at least 80% of a full-time role. The other non-executive Directors receive a basic Board fee, with additional fees payable where individuals serve as a member or Chairman of a Committee of the Board.

 

Fees are reviewed each year by the Board as a whole against those for non-executive Directors in companies of similar scale and complexity. Fees were last increased in May 2011.

 

The first £30,000 (Chairman: first £100,000) after tax and national insurance contributions of each non-executive Director’s basic fee is used to purchase Barclays’ shares which are retained on the non-executive Director’s behalf until they retire from the Board.

 

Benefits

For Chairman only

 

The Chairman is provided with private medical cover subject to the terms of the Barclays scheme rules from time to time, and is provided with the use of a Company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes.

 

No other non-executive Director receives any benefits from Barclays. Non-executive Directors are not eligible to join Barclays’ pension plans.

 

Bonus and share plans

 

Non-executive Directors are not eligible to participate in Barclays cash, share or long-term incentive plans.

 

Notice and termination provisions

 

Each non-executive Director’s appointment is for an initial six year term, renewable for a single term of three years thereafter and subject to annual re-election by shareholders.

 

Notice period:

Chairman: 12 months from the Company (six months from the Chairman). Non-executive Directors: six months from the Company (six months from the Non-executive Director).

 

Termination payment policy

The Chairman’s appointment may be terminated by Barclays on 12 months’ notice or immediately in which case 12 months’ fees and contractual benefits are payable in instalments at the times they would have been received had the appointment continued, but subject to mitigation if they were to obtain alternative employment. There are similar termination provisions for non-executive Directors based on six months’ fees. No continuing payments of fees (or benefits) are due if a non-executive Director is not re-elected by shareholders at the Barclays Annual General Meeting.

 

In accordance with the policy table above, any new Chairman and Deputy Chairman would be paid an all-inclusive fee only and any new non-executive Director would be paid a basic fee for their appointment as a Director, plus fees for their participation on and/or chairing of any Board committees, time apportioned in the first year as necessary. No sign-on payments are offered to non-executive Directors.

Discretion

In addition to the various operational discretions that the Committee can exercise in the performance of its duties (including those discretions set out in the Company’s share plans), the Committee reserves the right to make either minor or administrative amendments to the policy to benefit its operation or to make more material amendments in order to comply with new laws, regulations and/or regulatory guidance. The Committee would only exercise this right if it believed it was in the best interests of the Company to do so and where it is not possible, practicable or proportionate to seek or await shareholder approval in General Meeting.

 

116  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Risk review

Contents

 

 

The management of risk plays a central role in the execution of Barclays’ strategy and insight into the level of risk across businesses and portfolios and the material risks and uncertainties the Group face are key areas of management focus.

For a more detailed breakdown of our Risk performance and Risk management contents please see pages 126 and 143.

Barclays’ risk disclosures are located across the Annual Report and Barclays 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

 

                Annual Report      Pillar 3 Report  
Material existing and emerging risks                  
Insight into the level of risk across our business and portfolios, the material existing and emerging risks and uncertainties we face and the key areas of management focus.   §   Credit risk      120         n/a   
  §   Market risk      121         n/a   
  §   Funding risk      121         n/a   
  §   Operational risk      122         n/a   
  §   Conduct risk      124         n/a   
  §  

Material existing and emerging risks potentially impacting more than one Principal risk

 

     125         n/a   
Risk management                          
Overview of Barclays’ approach to risk management. A more comprehensive overview together with more specific information on policies that the Group determines to be of particular significance in the current operating environment can be found in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report or at home.barclays   §   Risk management strategy      128         97   
  §   Governance structure      128         97   
  §   Risk governance and assigning responsibilities      130         100   
  §   Principal risks and Key risks      131         101   
  §   Credit risk management      132         107   
  §   Management of credit risk mitigation techniques and counterparty credit risk      n/a         124   
  §   Market risk management      134         128   
  §   Management of securitisation exposures      n/a         139   
  §   Funding risk management      136         147   
  §   Capital risk management      136         150   
  §   Liquidity risk management      138         148   
  §   Operational risk management      139         143   
  §  

Conduct risk management

 

     141         152   
Risk performance                          

Credit risk:

The risk of suffering financial loss should the Group’s customers, clients or market counterparties fail to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group.

  §   Credit risk overview and summary of performance      145         107   
  §   Analysis of the balance sheet      145         39, 43   
  §   Maximum exposure and collateral and other credit enhancement held      146         28, 41   
  §   The Group’s approach to manage and represent credit quality      148         42, 45  
  §   Loans and advances to customers and banks      150         n/a   
  §   Analysis of the concentration of credit risk      151         35, 37   
  §   Group exposures to specific countries and industries      152         n/a   
  §   Analysis of specific portfolios and asset types      155         n/a   
  §   Analysis of loans on concession programmes      164         n/a   
  §   Analysis of problem loans      167         57   
  §  

Impairment

 

     168         57   

Market risk:

The risk of a reduction to earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions or as a consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity pools.

  §   Market risk overview, measures in the Group and summary of
performance
     172         72   
         
  §   Balance sheet view of trading and banking books      173         73   
  §   Traded market risk      174         74   
  §   Business scenario stresses      175         75   
  §   Review of regulatory measures      175         75   
  §   Non-traded market risk      176         76   
  §   Foreign exchange risk      178         79   
  §   Pension risk review      179         80   
    §  

Insurance risk review

 

     180         81   

Funding risk – Capital:

The risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources.

  §   Capital risk overview and summary of performance      182         n/a   
  §   Regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements      182         8   
  §   Capital resources      183         16   
  §  

Leverage ratio requirements

 

     186         26   

Funding risk – Liquidity:

The risk that the Group, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost.

  §   Liquidity risk overview and summary of performance      188         n/a   
  §   Liquidity risk stress testing      188         n/a   
  §   Liquidity pool      191         n/a   
  §   Funding structure and funding relationships      192         n/a   
  §   Wholesale funding      193         n/a   
  §   Term financing      195         n/a   
  §   Encumbrance      195         158   
  §   Credit ratings      199         n/a   
  §   Liquidity management at Barclays Africa Group Limited      200         n/a   
    §  

Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities

 

     200         n/a   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  117


Risk review

Contents

 

 

 

                Annual Report      Pillar 3 Report  
Risk performance continued          

Operational risk:

Any instance where there is a potential or actual impact to the Group resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people, systems, or from an external event. The impacts to the Group can be financial, including losses or an unexpected financial gain, as well as non-financial such as customer detriment, reputational or regulatory consequences.

 

  §

§

 

Operational risk overview and summary of performance in the period

Operational risk profile

    

 

206

206

  

  

    

 

92

93, 94

 

  

                         

Conduct risk:

The risk that detriment is caused to our customers, clients, counterparties or the Group because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities.

  §
§
§
§
§

 

 

Conduct risk overview

Reputation risk

Summary of performance

Salz recommendations

Conduct reputation measure

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

208

208

208

209

209

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

  

  

  

  

  

Supervision and regulation:

The Group’s operations, including its overseas offices, subsidiaries and associates, are subject to a significant body of rules and regulations that are a condition for authorisation to conduct banking and financial services business.

  §   Supervision of the Group      210         n/a   
  §   Global regulatory developments      210         8   
  §   Influence of European legislation      211         n/a   
  §   EU developments      211         n/a   
  §   Regulation in the UK      212         n/a   
  §   Resolution of UK banking groups      212         n/a   
  §   Structural reform of banking groups      213         8   
  §   Compensation schemes      213         159   
  §   Regulation in the US      214         n/a   
  §

 

 

Regulation in Africa

 

     215         n/a   

Pillar 3 Report

                         
Contains extensive information on risk as well as capital management.   §   High level summary of risk and capital profile      n/a         3   
  §   Notes on basis of preparation      n/a         5   
    §

 

 

Scope of application of Basel rules

 

     n/a         6   
Risk and capital position review: Provides a detailed breakdown of Barclays’ regulatory capital adequacy and how this relates to Barclays’ risk management.   §   Group capital resources, requirements and leverage      n/a         15   
  §   Analysis of credit risk      n/a         27   
  §   Analysis of counterparty credit risk      n/a         63   
  §   Analysis of market risk      n/a         71   
  §   Analysis of credit value adjustment      n/a         81   
  §   Analysis of securitisation exposures      n/a         82   
  §   Analysis of operational risk      n/a         92   

 

118  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

 

 

 

    

 

This section describes the material risks which senior management is currently focused on and believe could cause the Group’s future results of operations, financial condition and prospects to differ materially from current expectations.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LOGO    For more information about the major risk policies which underlie risk exposures, see the consolidated policy-based qualitative information in the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report. A summary of this information may also be found in this report in the Risk management section between pages 127 to 142.
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  119


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance

 

 

 

This section describes the material risks to which senior management pays particular attention, which they believe could cause the future results of the Group’s operations, financial condition and prospects to differ materially from current expectations. These expectations include the ability to pay dividends, maintain appropriate levels of capital and meet capital and leverage ratio targets, and achieve stated commitments as outlined in the Strategic Report. In addition, risks relating to the Group that are not currently known, or that are currently deemed immaterial, may individually or cumulatively have the potential to materially affect the future results of the Group’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Material risks and their impact are described below in two sections: i) risks which senior management believes are likely to impact a single Principal Risk; and ii) risks which senior management believes are likely to affect more than one Principal Risk. Certain risks below have been classified as an ‘emerging risk’, which is a risk that has the potential to have a significant detrimental effect on the Group’s performance, but currently the outcome and the time horizon for the crystallisation of its possible impact is more uncertain and more difficult to predict than for other risk factors that are not identified as emerging risks.

More information on the management of risks may be found in Barclays’ Approach to Managing Risk in the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

Material existing and emerging risks by Principal Risk

Credit risk

The financial condition of the Group’s customers, clients and counterparties, including governments and other financial institutions, could adversely affect the Group.

The Group may suffer financial loss if any of its customers, clients or market counterparties fails to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group. The Group may also suffer loss when the value of its investment in the financial instruments of an entity falls as a result of that entity’s credit rating being downgraded. In addition, the Group may incur significant unrealised gains or losses due to changes in the Group’s credit spreads or those of third parties, as these changes affect the fair value of the Group’s derivative instruments, debt securities that the Group holds or issues, and loans held at fair value.

i) Deterioration in political and economic environment

The Group’s performance is at risk from deterioration in the economic and political environment which may result from a number of uncertainties, including the following:

a) Specific regions

Political instability, economic uncertainty or deflation in regions in which the Group operates could weaken growth prospects and have an adverse impact on customers’ ability to service debt and so result in higher impairment charges for the Group. These include:

China (emerging risk)

Economic uncertainty in China continues to affect a number of emerging economies, particularly those with high fiscal deficits and those reliant on short-term external financing and/or material reliance on commodity exports. Their vulnerability has been further impacted by the fall, and sustained volatility in oil prices, the strong US dollar and the winding down of quantitative easing policies by some central banks. The impact on the Group may vary depending on the vulnerabilities present in each country, but the impact may result in increased impairment charges through sovereign defaults, or the inability or unwillingness of clients and counterparties in that country to meet their debt obligations.

South Africa

The negative economic outlook in South Africa continues, with a challenging domestic and external environment. Recent political events including changes to leaders in the Finance Ministry have added to the domestic challenges. Real GDP growth remains low as a result of declining global demand, in particular China, prices for key mineral exports, a downturn in tourism, persistent power shortages and slowing

house price growth. In the retail sector, concerns remain over the level of consumer indebtedness and affordability as the slowdown in China impacts the mining sector with job losses increasing. Emerging market turmoil has added further pressure on the Rand, which has continued to depreciate against major currencies. The decline in the economic outlook may impact a range of industry sectors in the corporate portfolio, with clients with higher leverage being impacted most.

b) Interest rate rises, including as a result of slowing of monetary stimulus, could impact consumer debt affordability and corporate profitability

To the extent that central banks increase interest rates in certain developed markets, particularly in our main markets, the UK and the US, they are expected to be small and gradual in scale during 2016, albeit following differing timetables. The first of these occurred in the US with a quarter point rise in December 2015. While an increase may support Group income, any sharper than expected changes could cause stress in the loan portfolio and underwriting activity of the Group, particularly in relation to non-investment grade lending, leading to the possibility of the Group incurring higher impairment. Higher credit losses and a requirement to increase the Group’s level of impairment allowance would most notably occur in the Group’s retail unsecured and secured portfolios as a result of a reduction in recoverability and value of the Group’s assets, coupled with a decline in collateral values.

Interest rate increases in developed markets may also negatively impact emerging economies, as capital flows to mature markets to take advantage of the higher returns and strengthening economic fundamentals.

ii) Specific sectors

The Group is subject to risks arising from changes in credit quality and recovery rate of loans and advances due from borrowers and counterparties in a specific portfolio. Any deterioration in credit quality could lead to lower recoverability and higher impairment in a specific sector. The following provides examples of areas of uncertainties to the Group’s portfolio which could have a material impact on performance.

a) UK property

With UK property representing the most significant portion of the overall PCB credit exposure, the Group is at risk from a fall in property prices in both the residential and commercial sectors in the UK. Strong house price growth in London and the South East of the UK, fuelled by foreign investment, strong buy to let (BTL) demand and subdued housing supply, has resulted in affordability levels reaching record levels; average house prices as at the end of 2015 were more than seven times average earnings. A fall in house prices, particularly in London and the South East of the UK, would lead to higher impairment and negative capital impact as loss given default (LGD) rates increase. Potential losses would likely be most pronounced in the higher loan to value (LTV) segments.

The proposal on BTL properties announced by the UK Chancellor of the Exchequer in 2015, changing both the level of tax relief on rental income and increasing levels of stamp duty from April 2016, may cause some dislocation in the BTL market. Possible impacts include a reduced appetite in the BTL market and an influx of properties for sale causing downward pricing pressure, as well as reduced affordability as increased tax liabilities reduce net retail yields. As a consequence this may lead to an increase in BTL defaults at a time when market values may be suppressed, with the potential that, while the Group carefully manages such exposures, it may experience increased credit losses and impairment from loans with high LTV ratios.

b) Natural Resources (emerging risk)

The risk of losses and increased impairment is more pronounced where leverage is higher, or in sectors currently subject to strain, notably oil and gas, mining and metals and commodities. Sustained oil price depression continues and is driven by ongoing global excess supply. While the positioning of these portfolios is relatively defensive and focuses on investment grade customers or collateralised positions, very severe stress in this market does have the potential to significantly increase credit losses and impairment.

 

 

120  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

c) Large single name losses

The Group has large individual exposures to single name counterparties. The default of such counterparties could have a significant impact on the carrying value of these assets. In addition, where such counterparty risk has been mitigated by taking collateral, credit risk may remain high if the collateral held cannot be realised, or has to be liquidated at prices which are insufficient to recover the full amount of the loan or derivative exposure. Any such defaults could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results due to, for example, increased credit losses and higher impairment charges.

d) Leverage Finance underwriting

The Group takes on significant sub-investment grade underwriting exposure, including single name risk, particularly focused in the US and Europe and to a lesser extent in South Africa and other regions. The Group is exposed to credit events and market volatility during the underwriting period. Any adverse events during this period may potentially result in loss for the Group or an increased capital requirement should there be a need to hold the exposure for an extended period.

Market risk

The Group’s financial position may be adversely affected by changes in both the level and volatility of prices leading to lower revenues, or reduced capital:

i) Concerns of major unexpected changes in monetary policy and quantitative easing programmes, foreign exchange movements or slowdown in emerging market economies spilling over to global markets (emerging risk)

The trading business model is focused on client facilitation in wholesale markets, involving market making activities, risk management solutions and execution.

The Group’s trading business is exposed to a rapid unwinding of quantitative easing programmes and deterioration in the macro environment driven by concerns in global growth. An extremely high level of volatility in asset prices could affect market liquidity and cause excess market volatility, impacting the Group’s ability to execute client trades and may also result in lower income or portfolio losses.

A sudden and adverse volatility in interest or foreign currency exchange rates also has the potential to detrimentally impact the Group’s income from non-trading activity.

This is because the Group has exposure to non-traded interest rate risk, arising from the provision of retail and wholesale non-traded banking products and services, including, products which do not have a defined maturity date and have an interest rate that does not change in line with base rate movements, e.g. current accounts. The level and volatility of interest rates can impact the Group’s net interest margin, which is the interest rate spread earned between lending and borrowing costs. The potential for future volatility and margin changes remains in key areas such as in the UK benchmark interest rate to the extent such volatility and margin changes are not fully addressed by hedging programmes.

The Group is also at risk from movements in foreign currency exchange rates as these impact the sterling equivalent value of foreign currency denominated assets in the banking book, exposing it to currency translation risk.

ii) Adverse movements in the pension fund

Adverse movements between pension assets and liabilities for defined benefit pension schemes could contribute to a pension deficit. The liabilities discount rate is a key driver and, in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IAS 19), is derived from the yields of high quality corporate bonds (deemed to be those with AA ratings) and consequently includes exposure to both risk-free yields and credit spreads. Therefore, the Group’s defined benefits scheme valuation would be adversely affected by a prolonged fall in the discount rate or a persistent low rate and/or credit spread environment. Inflation is another significant risk driver to the pension fund, as the liabilities are adversely impacted by an increase in long term inflation expectation. However in

the long term, inflation and rates risk tend to be negatively correlated and therefore partially offset each other.

Funding risk

The ability of the Group to achieve its business plans may be adversely impacted if it does not effectively manage its capital (including leverage), liquidity and other regulatory requirements.

The Group may not be able to achieve its business plans due to: i) being unable to maintain appropriate capital ratios; ii) being unable to meet its obligations as they fall due; iii) rating agency methodology changes resulting in ratings downgrades; and iv) adverse changes in foreign exchange rates on capital ratios.

i) Inability to maintain appropriate prudential ratios

Should the Group be unable to maintain or achieve appropriate capital ratios this could lead to: an inability to support business activity; a failure to meet regulatory capital requirements including the requirements of regulator set stress tests; increased cost of funding due to deterioration in credit ratings; restrictions on distributions including the ability to meet dividend targets; and/or the need to take additional measures to strengthen the Group’s capital or leverage position. While the requirements in CRD IV are now in force in the UK, further changes to capital requirements could occur, whether as a result of (i) further changes to EU legislation by EU legislators (for example, implementation of Bank of International Settlements (BIS) regulatory update recommendations), (ii) relevant binding regulatory technical standards updates by the European Banking Authority (EBA), (iii) changes to UK legislation by the UK government, (iv) changes to PRA rules by the PRA, or (v) additional capital requirements through Financial Policy Committee (FPC) recommendations. Such changes, either individually and/or in aggregate, may lead to further unexpected additional requirements in relation to the Group’s regulatory capital.

Additional prudential requirements may also arise from other regulatory reforms, including UK, EU and the US proposals on bank structural reform and current proposals for ‘Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL) under the EU Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD). Included within these reforms are the BoE proposals on MREL requirements for UK banks which were published in December 2015. The BoE stated its intentions to communicate MREL requirements to UK banks during 2016. Many of the proposals are still subject to finalisation and implementation and may have a different impact when in final form. The impact of these proposals is still being assessed. Overall, it is likely that these changes in law and regulation will have an impact on the Group as they are likely, when implemented, to require changes to the legal entity structure of the Group and how businesses are capitalised and funded. Any such increased prudential requirements may also constrain the Group’s planned activities, lead to forced asset sales and balance sheet reductions and could increase the Group’s costs, impact on the Group’s earnings and restrict the Group’s ability to pay dividends. Moreover, during periods of market dislocation, as currently seen, or when there is significant competition for the type of funding that the Group needs, increasing the Group’s capital resources in order to meet targets may prove more difficult and/or costly.

ii) Inability to manage liquidity and funding risk effectively

Failure to manage its liquidity and funding risk effectively may result in the Group either not having sufficient financial resources to meet its payment obligations as they fall due or, although solvent, only being able to meet these obligations at excessive cost. This could cause the Group to fail to meet regulatory liquidity standards, be unable to support day-to-day banking activities, or no longer be a going concern.

iii) Credit rating changes and the impact on funding costs

A credit rating assesses the creditworthiness of the Group, its subsidiaries and branches and is based on reviews of a broad range of business and financial attributes including risk management processes and procedures, capital strength, earnings, funding, liquidity, accounting and governance. Any adverse event to one or more of these attributes may lead to a downgrade, which in turn could result in contractual outflows to meet contractual requirements on existing contracts.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  121


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance

 

 

Furthermore, outflows related to a multiple notch credit rating downgrade are included in the LRA stress scenarios and a portion of the liquidity pool held against this risk. There is a risk that any potential downgrades could impact the Group’s performance should borrowing costs and liquidity change significantly versus expectations.

For further information, please refer to Credit Ratings in the Liquidity Risk Performance section on page 199.

iv) Adverse changes in foreign exchange rates on capital ratios

The Group has capital resources and risk weighted assets denominated in foreign currencies. Therefore changes in foreign currency exchange rates may adversely impact the sterling equivalent value of foreign currency denominated capital resources and risk weighted assets. As a result, the Group’s regulatory capital ratios are sensitive to foreign currency movements, and a failure to appropriately manage the Group’s balance sheet to take account of foreign currency movements could result in an adverse impact on regulatory capital ratios. The impact is difficult to predict with any accuracy, but it may have a material adverse effect on the Group if capital and leverage ratios fall below required levels.

Operational risk

The operational risk profile of the Group may change as a result of human factors, inadequate or failed internal processes and systems, or external events.

The Group is exposed to many types of operational risk. This includes: fraudulent and other internal and external criminal activities; breakdowns in processes, controls or procedures (or their inadequacy relative to the size and scope of the Group’s business); systems failures or an attempt, by an external party, to make a service or supporting infrastructure unavailable to its intended users, and the risk of geopolitical cyber threat activity which destabilises or destroys the Group’s information technology, or critical infrastructure the Group depends upon but does not control. The Group is also subject to the risk of business disruption arising from events wholly or partially beyond its control, for example, natural disasters, acts of terrorism, epidemics and transport or utility failures, which may give rise to losses or reductions in service to customers and/or economic loss to the Group. All of these risks are also applicable where the Group relies on outside suppliers or vendors to provide services to it and its customers. The operational risks that the Group is exposed to could change rapidly and there is no guarantee that the Group’s processes, controls, procedures and systems are sufficient to address, or could adapt promptly to, such changing risks to avoid the risk of loss.

i) Cyber attacks (emerging risk)

The risk posed by cyber attacks continues to grow. The proliferation of online marketplaces trading criminal services and stolen data has reduced barriers of entry for criminals to perpetrate cyber attacks, while at the same time increasing motivation.

Attacker capabilities continue to evolve as demonstrated by a marked increase in denial of service attacks, and increased sophistication of targeted fraud attacks by organised criminal networks. We face a growing threat to our information (whether it is held by us or in our supply chain), to the integrity of our financial transactions, and to the availability of our services. All of these necessitate a broad intelligence and response capability.

Given the level of increasing global sophistication and scope of potential cyber attacks, future attacks may lead to significant breaches of security which jeopardise the sensitive information and financial transactions of the Group, its clients, counterparties, or customers, or cause disruption to systems performing critical functions. Failure to adequately manage cyber threats and to continually review and update processes in response to new threats could result in increased fraud losses, inability to perform critical economic functions, customer detriment, regulatory censure and penalty, legal liability and reputational damage.

ii) Infrastructure and technology resilience

As the dependency on digital channels and other technologies grows, the impact of technology issues can become more material and immediate. This is also the case in many other industries and organisations but particularly impactful in the banking sector.

The Group’s technology, real-estate and supplier infrastructure is critical to the operation of its businesses and to the delivery of products and services to customers and clients and to meet our market integrity obligations. Sustained disruption to services provided by Barclays, either directly or through third parties, could have a significant impact to customers and to the Group’s reputation and may also lead to potentially large costs to rectify the issue and reimburse losses incurred by customers, as well as possible regulatory censure and penalties.

iii) Ability to hire and retain appropriately qualified employees

The Group requires a diverse mix of highly skilled and qualified colleagues to deliver its strategy and so is dependent on attracting and retaining appropriately qualified individuals. Barclays ability to attract and retain such talent is impacted by a range of external and internal factors.

External regulatory changes such as the introduction of the Individual Accountability Regime and the required deferral and claw back provisions of our compensation arrangements may make Barclays a less attractive proposition relative to both our international competitors and other industries. Similarly, meeting the requirements of structural reform may increase the competitiveness in the market for talent. Internally, restructuring of our businesses and functions, and an increased focus on costs may all have an impact on employee engagement and retention.

Failure to attract or prevent the departure of appropriately qualified employees who are dedicated to overseeing and managing current and future regulatory standards and expectations, or who have the necessary skills required to deliver the Group strategy, could negatively impact our financial performance, control environment and level of employee engagement.

iv) Losses due to additional tax charges

The Group is subject to the tax laws in all countries in which it operates, including tax laws adopted at the EU level, and is impacted by a number of double taxation agreements between countries. There is risk that the Group could suffer losses due to additional tax charges, other financial costs or reputational damage due to a range of possible factors. This includes a failure to comply with, or correctly assess the application of, relevant tax law, a failure to deal with tax authorities in a timely and effective manner or an incorrect calculation of tax estimates for reported and forecast tax numbers. Such charges, or the conduct of any dispute with a relevant tax authority, could lead to adverse publicity, reputational damage and potentially to costs materially exceeding current provisions, which could have an adverse effect on the Group’s operations, financial conditions and prospects.

v) Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires the use of estimates. It also requires management to exercise judgement in applying relevant accounting policies. The key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions are significant to the consolidated and individual financial statements include provisions for conduct and legal, competition and regulatory matters, fair value of financial instruments, credit impairment charges for amortised cost assets, impairment and valuation of available for sale investments, calculation of current and deferred tax and accounting for pensions and post-retirements benefits. There is a risk that if the judgement exercised, or the estimates or assumptions used, subsequently turn out to be incorrect, this could result in significant loss to the Group, beyond what was anticipated or provided for.

As part of the assets in the Non-Core business, the Group holds a UK portfolio of generally longer term loans to counterparties in ESHLA sectors, which are measured on a fair value basis. The valuation of this portfolio is subject to substantial uncertainty due to the long dated nature of the portfolios, the lack of a secondary market in the relevant loans and unobservable loan spreads. As a result of these factors, the Group may be required to revise the fair values of these portfolios to

 

 

122  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

reflect, among other things, changes in valuation methodologies due to changes in industry valuation practices and as further market evidence is obtained in connection with the Non-Core asset rundown and exit process. For further information refer to Note 18 Fair value of assets and liabilities of the Group’s consolidated financial statements.

The further development of standards and interpretations under IFRS could also significantly impact the financial results, condition and prospects of the Group. The introduction of the impairment requirements of IFRS 9 Financial Instruments will result in impairment being recognised earlier than is the case under IAS 39 because it requires expected losses to be recognised before the loss event arises. Measurement will involve increased complexity and judgement including estimation of probabilities of defaults, losses given default, a range of unbiased future economic scenarios, estimation of expected lives, estimation of exposures at default and assessing increases in credit risk. It is expected to have a material financial impact, but it will not be practical to disclose reliable financial impact estimates until the implementation programme is further advanced.

For more information please refer to Note 1 Significant accounting policies on pages 260 to 262.

vi) Legal, competition and regulatory matters

Legal disputes, regulatory investigations, fines and other sanctions relating to conduct of business and financial crime may negatively affect the Group’s results, reputation and ability to conduct its business.

The Group conducts diverse activities in a highly regulated global market and is therefore exposed to the risk of fines and other sanctions relating to the conduct of its business. In recent years authorities have increasingly investigated past practices, vigorously pursued alleged breaches and imposed heavy penalties on financial services firms. This trend is expected to continue. In relation to financial crime, a breach of applicable legislation and/or regulations could result in the Group or its staff being subject to criminal prosecution, regulatory censure and other sanctions in the jurisdictions in which it operates, particularly in the UK and the US. Where clients, customers or other third parties are harmed by the Group’s conduct this may also give rise to legal proceedings, including class actions. Other legal disputes may also arise between the Group and third parties relating to matters such as breaches, enforcement of legal rights or obligations arising under contracts, statutes or common law. Adverse findings in any such matters may result in the Group being liable to third parties seeking damages, or may result in the Group’s rights not being enforced as intended.

Details of material legal, competition and regulatory matters to which the Group is currently exposed are set out in Note 29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters. In addition to those material ongoing matters, the Group is engaged in various other legal proceedings in the UK and a number of overseas jurisdictions which arise in the ordinary course of business. The Group is also subject to requests for information, investigations and other reviews by regulators, governmental and other public bodies in connection with business activities in which the Group is or has been engaged. In light of the uncertainties involved in legal, competition and regulatory matters, there can be no assurance that the outcome of a particular matter or matters will not be material to the Group’s results, operations or cash flow for a particular period, depending on, among other things, the amount of the loss resulting from the matter(s) and the amount of income otherwise reported for the period.

The outcome of material, legal, competition and regulatory matters, both those to which the Group is currently exposed and any others which may arise in the future, is difficult to predict. However, it is likely that in connection with any such matters the Group will incur significant expense, regardless of the ultimate outcome, and any such matters could expose the Group to any of the following: substantial monetary damages and/or fines; remediation of affected customers and clients; other penalties and injunctive relief; additional litigation; criminal prosecution in certain circumstances; the loss of any existing agreed protection from prosecution; regulatory restrictions on the Group’s business operations including the withdrawal of authorisations; increased regulatory compliance requirements; suspension of

operations; public reprimands; loss of significant assets or business; a negative effect on the Group’s reputation; loss of investor confidence and/or dismissal or resignation of key individuals.

There is also a risk that the outcome of any legal, competition or regulatory matters in which the Group is involved may give rise to changes in law or regulation as part of a wider response by relevant law makers and regulators. An adverse decision in any one matter, either against the Group or another financial institution facing similar claims, could lead to further claims against the Group.

vii) Risks arising from regulation of the financial services industry

The financial services industry continues to be the focus of significant regulatory change and scrutiny which may adversely affect the Group’s business, financial performance, capital and risk management strategies. For further information on regulations affecting the Group, including significant regulatory developments, see the section on Supervision and Regulation.

a) Regulatory change

The Group, in common with much of the financial services industry, remains subject to significant levels of regulatory change and increasing scrutiny in many of the countries in which it operates (including, in particular, the UK and the US). This has led to a more intensive approach to supervision and oversight, increased expectations and enhanced requirements. As a result, regulatory risk will remain a focus for senior management and consume significant levels of business resources. Furthermore, this more intensive approach and the enhanced requirements, uncertainty and extent of international regulatory coordination as enhanced supervisory standards are developed and implemented may adversely affect the Group’s business, capital and risk management strategies and/or may result in the Group deciding to modify its legal entity structure, capital and funding structures and business mix, or to exit certain business activities altogether or not to expand in areas despite otherwise attractive potential.

b) Changes in prudential requirements, including changes to CRD IV

The Group’s results and ability to conduct its business may be negatively affected by changes to, or additional supervisory expectations.

In July 2015, the Financial Policy Committee (FPC) of the BoE published a policy statement directing the PRA to require all major UK banks and building societies to hold enough Tier 1 capital to satisfy a minimum leverage ratio of 3% and a countercyclical leverage ratio buffer of 35% of the institution-specific countercyclical capital buffer rate. The FPC also directed that UK G-SIBs and domestically systemically important banks should meet a supplementary leverage buffer ratio of 35% of corresponding risk-weighted capital buffer rates. The PRA published a policy statement, finalised rules and a supervisory statement implementing the FPC’s directions in December 2015 and the new leverage ratio framework came into force on 1 January 2016.

In January 2016, the BCBS endorsed a new market risk framework, including rules made as a result of its fundamental review of the trading book, which will take effect in 2019. Barclays continues to monitor the potential effects on its capital position arising from these rules and from (i) revisions to the BCBS’s standardised rules for credit risk, counterparty credit risk, CVA volatility risk and operational risk; and (ii) the BCBS considering the position regarding the limitation of the use of internal models in certain areas (for example, removing the Advanced Measurement Approach for operational risk) and applying RWA floors based on the standardised approaches.

Changes to, or additional supervisory expectations, in relation to capital and/or leverage ratio requirements either individually or in aggregate, may lead to unexpected enhanced requirements in relation to the Group’s capital, leverage, liquidity and funding ratios or alter the way such ratios are calculated. This may result in a need for further management actions to meet the changed requirements, such as: increasing capital or liquidity resources, reducing leverage and risk weighted assets; modifying legal entity structure (including with regard to issuance and deployment of capital and funding for the Group); changing the Group’s business mix or exiting other businesses; and/or undertaking other actions to strengthen the Group’s position.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  123


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance

 

 

c) Market infrastructure reforms

The derivatives markets are subject to extensive and increasing regulation in many of the Group’s markets, including, in particular, Europe pursuant to the European Market Infrastructure Regulation (EMIR) and in the US under the Dodd Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 (DFA). Certain of these increased regulatory requirements have already come into force, with further provisions expected to become effective in stages, including through a new recast version of the Markets in Financial Instruments Directive and a new regulation (the Markets in Financial Instruments Regulation) in Europe.

It is possible that additional regulations, and the related expenses and requirements, will increase the cost of and restrict participation in the derivatives markets, thereby increasing the costs of engaging in hedging or other transactions and reducing liquidity and the use of the derivatives markets.

Changes in regulation of the derivatives markets could adversely affect the business of the Group and its affiliates in these markets and could make it more difficult and expensive to conduct hedging and trading activities, which could in turn reduce the demand for swap dealer and similar services of the Group and its subsidiaries. In addition, as a result of these increased costs, the new regulation of the derivatives markets may also result in the Group deciding to reduce its activity in these markets.

d) Recovery and resolution planning

There continues to be a strong regulatory focus on ‘resolvability’ from regulators, particularly in the UK, the US and South Africa. The Group made its first formal Recovery and Resolution Plan (RRP) submissions to the UK and US regulators in mid-2012 and made its first Recovery Plan submission to the South African regulators in 2013. Barclays continues to work with the relevant authorities to identify and address potential impediments to the Group’s ‘resolvability’.

In the UK, RRP work is considered part of continuing supervision. Removal of potential impediments to an orderly resolution of the Group or one or more of its subsidiaries is considered as part of the BoE and PRA’s supervisory strategy for each firm, and the PRA can require firms to make significant changes in order to enhance resolvability. Barclays provides the PRA with a Recovery Plan annually and with a Resolution Pack every other year.

In the US, Barclays is one of several systemically important banks required to file resolution plans with the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (Federal Reserve) and the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) (collectively, the Agencies) under provisions of the DFA. Pursuant to the resolution plan regulation in the US, a joint determination by the Agencies that a resolution plan is not credible or would not facilitate an orderly resolution under the US Bankruptcy Code may result in a bank being made subject to more stringent capital, leverage, or liquidity requirements, or restrictions on growth, activities or operations in the US.

Additionally, there are further resolution-related proposals in the US, such as the Federal Reserve’s proposed regulation requiring internal total loss absorbing capital (TLAC) for Barclays’ US Intermediate Holding Company (IHC) that will be established during 2016, and increased record keeping and reporting requirements for obligations under qualified financial contracts (QFC proposal) that may, depending on final rules, materially increase the operational and financing costs of Barclays’ US operations.

In South Africa, the South African Treasury and the South Africa Reserve Bank are considering material new legislation and regulation to adopt a resolution and depositor guarantee scheme in alignment with FSB principles. Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL) and its primary subsidiary Absa Bank Limited, will be subject to these schemes when they are adopted. It is not clear what shape these schemes will take, or when the schemes will be adopted, but current proposals for a funded deposit insurance scheme and for operational continuity may result in material increases in operational and financing costs for the BAGL group.

While the Group believes that it is making good progress in reducing potential impediments to resolution, should the relevant authorities ultimately determine that the Group or any significant subsidiary could not be resolved in an orderly manner, the impact of potential structural

changes that may be required to address such a determination (whether in connection with RRP or other structural reform initiatives) may impact capital, liquidity and leverage ratios, as well as the overall profitability of the Group, for example, due to duplicated infrastructure costs, lost cross-rate revenues and/or additional funding costs.

viii) Regulatory action in the event of a bank failure

The EU Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD) contains provisions similar to the Banking Act on a European level, many of which augment and increase the powers which national regulators are required to have in the event of a bank failure.

The UK Banking Act 2009, as amended (the Banking Act) provides for a regime to allow the BoE (or, in certain circumstances, HM Treasury) to resolve failing banks in the UK. Under the Banking Act, these authorities are given powers to make share transfer orders and property transfer orders. Amendments introduced by the Banking Reform Act gave the BoE statutory bail-in power from 1 January 2015. This power enables the BoE to recapitalise a failed institution by allocating losses to its shareholders and unsecured creditors. It also allows the BoE to cancel liabilities or modify the terms of contracts for the purposes of reducing or deferring the liabilities of the bank under resolution, and gives it the power to convert liabilities into another form (e.g. equity). In addition to the bail-in power, relevant UK resolution authorities are granted additional powers under the Banking Act including powers to direct the sale or transfer of a relevant financial institution or all or part of its business in certain circumstances. Further, parallel developments such as the implementation in the UK of the FSB’s TLAC requirements may result in increased risks that a bank would become subject to resolution authority requirements by regulators seeking to comply with international standards in this area. Please see Funding risk, inability to maintain appropriate prudential ratios on page 121.

If any of these powers were to be exercised, or there is an increased risk of exercise, in respect of the Group or any entity within the Group, this might result in a material adverse effect on the rights or interests of shareholders and creditors including holders of debt securities and/or could have a material adverse effect on the market price of shares and other securities issued by the Group. Such effects could include losses of shareholdings/associated rights including, the dilution of percentage ownership of the Group’s share capital, and may result in creditors, including debt holders, losing all or a part of their investment in the Group’s securities.

Conduct risk

Barclays is committed to Group-wide changes to business practices, governance and mindset and behaviours so that good customer outcomes and protecting market integrity are integral to the way Barclays operates. Improving our reputation will demonstrate to customers that in Barclays they have a partner they can trust. Conduct risk is the risk that detriment is caused to the Group’s customers, clients, counterparties or the Group itself because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities.

During 2015 potential customer impact and reputation risk inherent in varied emerging risks has been managed across the Group and escalated to senior management for discussion. These risks will remain prevalent in 2016 and beyond and the most significant of these include:

i) Organisational change

The Group is at risk of not being able to meet customer and regulatory expectations due to a failure to appropriately manage the: i) complexity in business practice, processes and systems; ii) challenges faced in product suitability, automation and portfolio-level risk monitoring; iii) resilience of its technology; and, iv) execution strategy, including the failure to fulfil the high level of operational precision required for effective execution in order to deliver positive customer outcomes.

ii) Legacy issues

Barclays remains at risk from the potential outcomes of a number of investigations relating to our past conduct. While we are continuing to embed cultural change and improved governance, many stakeholders will remain sceptical and so until there is clear and sustained evidence of

 

 

124  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

 

    

 

consistent cultural and behavioural change, the risk to Barclays’ reputation will remain. Barclays continues to work to rebuild customer trust and market confidence impacted by legacy issues.

For further information in respect of such investigations and related litigation and discussion of the associated uncertainties, please see the Legal, competition and regulatory matters note on page 303.

iii) Market integrity

There are potential risks arising from conflicts of interest, including those related to the benchmark submission process. While primarily relevant to the Investment Bank, these potential risks may also impact the corporate and retail customer base. The Group may be adversely affected if it fails to mitigate the risk of individuals making such inappropriate judgement by the enhancing of operating models, and effective identification and management of conflicts of interest, controls and supervisory oversight.

iv) Financial crime

The Group, as a global financial services firm, is exposed to the risks associated with money laundering, terrorist financing, bribery and corruption and sanctions. As a result, the Group may be adversely affected if it fails to effectively mitigate the risk that its employees or third parties facilitate, or that its products and services are used to facilitate financial crime.

Any one, or combination, of the above risks could have significant impact on the Group’s reputation and may also lead to potentially large costs to both rectify this issue and reimburse losses incurred by customers and regulatory censure and penalties.

Material existing and emerging risks potentially impacting more than one Principal Risk

i) Structural reform (emerging risk)

The UK Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013 (the UK Banking Reform Act) and associated secondary legislation and regulatory rules, require the separation of the Group’s UK and EEA retail and SME deposit taking activities into a legally, operationally and economically separate and independent entity and restrict the types of activity such an entity may conduct (so-called ‘ring fencing’).

The PRA issued a policy statement (PS10/15) in May 2015 setting up legal structures and governance requirements that the UK regulator considers as ‘near-final’. A PRA Consultation was issued in October 2015 relating to post ring fencing prudential requirements and intra-group arrangements among other matters. PRA final rules are expected in 2016. UK ring fencing rules will become binding from January 2019 and Barclays has an internal structural reform programme to implement the changes required by these new regulations (alongside other group structural requirements applicable to or in the course of development for the Group both in the UK and other jurisdictions in which the Group has operations – such as the proposed move towards a single point of entry (Holding Company) resolution model under the BoE’s preferred resolution strategy and the requirement under section 165 of the DFA to create a US intermediate holding company (IHC) to hold the Group’s US banking and non-banking subsidiaries) and to evaluate the Group’s strategic options in light of all current and proposed global structural reform initiatives. Changes resulting from this work will have a material impact in the way the Group operates in the future through increased cost and complexity associated with changes required by ring fencing laws and regulations. Specifically, in order to comply with the UK Banking Reform Act and the DFA, it is proposed that:

 

§   Barclays will create a new UK banking entity which will serve as the ring fenced bank (RFB). It is expected to serve retail and small business customers as well as UK Wealth and credit card customers

 

§   Barclays Bank PLC (BBPLC) is expected to serve corporate, institutional and investment banking clients and will also serve international Wealth and credit card customers; it is also expected to house both the Corporate Banking payments and Barclaycard merchant acquiring businesses

 

§   many of the Group’s US businesses (including Barclays Bank Delaware and Barclays Capital Inc., the Group’s US broker-dealer subsidiary) will be organised under an IHC
§   the Group will establish a number of service companies in order to support its revised operating entity structure.

Implementation of these changes involves a number of risks related to both the revised Group entity structure and also the process of transition to that revised Group structure. Those risks include the following:

 

§   the establishment and ongoing management of the RFB and BBPLC as separate entities will require the Group to evaluate and restructure its intra-group and external capital, funding and liquidity arrangements to ensure they continue to meet regulatory requirements and support business needs. The changes required by ring fencing will in particular impact the sources of funding available to the different entities, including restricting BBPLC’s access to certain categories of deposit funding

 

§   while the Group will seek to manage the changes to business mix and capital, funding and liquidity resources so as to maintain robust credit ratings for each of its key operating entities, the restructuring required by ring fencing is complex and untested, and there is a risk that the changes may negatively impact the assessment made by credit rating agencies, creditors and other stakeholders of the credit strength of the different entities on a standalone basis. Adverse changes to the credit assessment, including the potential for ratings downgrades, could in turn make it more difficult and costly for the Group’s entities to obtain certain sources of funding

 

§   the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Banking Reform) (Pensions) Regulations 2015 provide that, after 1 January 2026, ring fence banks cannot be or become liable for pension schemes outside of the ring fence. To comply with the regulations, the Group will need to decide which Group entities will participate in the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund (UKRF) from 2026, and reach a mutually satisfactory position with the UKRF Trustee regarding past service liabilities. The Group is currently discussing a variety of options with the UKRF Trustee, and engaging with the PRA and the UK Pensions Regulator

 

§   execution risk associated with moving a material number of customer accounts and contracts from one legal entity to another and in particular the risk of legal challenge to the ring-fenced transfer scheme that will be used in order to transfer certain assets and liabilities from BBPLC to the RFB

 

§   customer impacts derived from operational changes related to, for example, the reorganisation of sort codes. In addition, uncertain and potentially varying customer preference in terms of being served by the RFB or BBPLC may increase the execution risk associated with ring fencing; customers may also be impacted by reduced flexibility to provide products through a single entity interface

 

§   at the European level, the draft Bank Structural Reform Regulation contains powers restricting proprietary trading and, if certain conditions are met, for the mandated separation of core retail banking activity from certain trading activities save where a bank is already subject to a national regime which provides for the separation of such activities in a manner compatible with the regulation. The regulation is currently in draft form and no single version (including the scope of any national derogation) has yet been agreed by the Council of Ministers, the European Commission and the European Parliament. The implementation date for these proposals will depend on the date on which any final legislation is agreed. Accordingly, the potential impact on the Group remains unclear.

These, and other regulatory changes and the resulting actions taken to address such regulatory changes, may have an adverse impact on the Group’s profitability, operating flexibility, flexibility of deployment of capital and funding, return on equity, ability to pay dividends, credit ratings, and/or financial condition.

ii) Business conditions, general economy and geopolitical issues

The Group’s performance could be adversely affected in relation to more than one Principal Risk by a weak or deteriorating global economy or political instability. These factors may also occur in one or more of the Group’s main countries of operation.

The Group offers a broad range of services to retail, institutional and government customers, in a large number of countries. The breadth of

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  125


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance

 

 

these operations means that deterioration in the economic environment, or an increase in political instability in countries where it is active, or any other systemically important economy, could adversely affect the Group’s performance.

Global growth is expected to remain modest, with low single digit growth in advanced economies alongside a slowdown in emerging markets. This moderate economic performance, lower commodity prices and increased geopolitical tensions mean that the distribution of risks to global economic activity continues to be biased to the downside.

As the US Federal Reserve embarks on monetary policy tightening, the increasing divergence of policies between major advanced economies risks triggering further financial market volatility. The sharp change in value of the US dollar during 2015 reflected this and, has played a major role in driving asset price volatility and capital reallocation as markets adjusted. Changes to interest rate expectations risk igniting further volatility and US dollar appreciation, particularly if the US Federal Reserve were to increase rates faster than markets currently expect.

Emerging markets have already seen growth slow following increased capital outflows, but a deeper slowdown in growth could emerge if tighter US interest rate policy drives further reallocation of capital. Moreover, sentiment towards emerging markets as a whole continues to be driven in large part by developments in China, where there is significant concern around the ability of authorities to manage the growth transition towards services. A stronger than expected slowdown could result if authorities fail to appropriately manage the end of the investment and credit-led boom, while the consequences from a faster slowdown would flow through both financial and trade channels into other economies, and affect commodity markets.

Commodity prices, particularly oil prices, have already fallen significantly, but could fall further if demand growth remains weak or supply takes longer than expected to adjust. At the same time, countries with high reliance on commodity related earnings have already experienced a tightening of financial conditions. A sustained period of low prices risks triggering further financial distress, default and contagion.

In several countries, reversals of capital inflows, as well as fiscal austerity, have already caused deterioration in political stability. This could be exacerbated by a renewed rise in asset price volatility or sustained pressure on government finances. In addition, geopolitical tensions in some areas of the world, including the Middle East and Eastern Europe are already acute, and are at risk of further deterioration.

While in Europe, risks of stagnation, entrenched deflation and a Eurozone break up have diminished, they remain a risk.

In the UK, the referendum on EU membership gives rise to some political uncertainty and raises the possibility of a disruptive and uncertain exit from the EU, with attendant consequences for investment and confidence. Following the referendum in June 2016, in the event that there is a vote in favour of leaving the EU, a period of negotiation is likely, widely anticipated to be around two years, with unpredictable implications on market conditions.

A drop in business or consumer confidence related to the aforementioned risks may have a material impact on GDP growth in one or more significant markets and therefore Group performance. At the same time, even if output in most advanced economies does grow, it would also be likely to advance at a slower pace than seen in the pre-crisis period. Growth potential could be further eroded by the low levels of fixed asset investment and productivity growth.

For the Group, a deterioration of conditions in its key markets could affect performance in a number of ways including, for example: (i) deteriorating business, consumer or investor confidence leading to reduced levels of client activity; (ii) higher levels of default rates and impairment; and (iii) mark to market losses in trading portfolios resulting from changes in credit ratings, share prices and solvency of counterparties.

iii) Business change/execution (emerging risk)

As Barclays moves towards a single point of entry (Holding Company) resolution model and implementation of the structural reform programme execution, the expected level of structural and strategic change to be implemented over the medium term will be disruptive and is likely to increase funding and operational risks for the Group and could impact its revenues and businesses. These changes will include: the creation and rundown of Non-Core; the delivery against an extensive agenda of operational and technology control and infrastructure improvements; and, planned cost reductions. Execution may be adversely impacted by external factors (such as a significant global macroeconomic downturn or further significant and unexpected regulatory change in countries in which the Group operates) and/or internal factors (such as availability of appropriately skilled resources or resolution of legacy issues). Moreover, progress in regard to Barclays’ strategic plans is unlikely to be uniform or linear and progress on certain targets may be achieved more slowly than others.

If any of the risks outlined above were to occur, singly or in aggregate, they could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

 

126  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Risk review

Risk management

 

 

    

 

 

An overview of Barclays’ approach

to risk management

  
     Page

 

Barclays’ risk management strategy

  
Introduction    128
Risk management strategy    128
Governance structure    128
Risk governance and assigning responsibilities    130

Principal and Key risks

 

   131

 

Credit risk management

  
Overview    132
Organisation and structure    132
Roles and responsibilities    133

Credit risk mitigation

 

   133

 

Market risk management

  
Overview    134
Organisation and structure    134

Roles and responsibilities

 

   135

 

Funding and capital risk management

  
Overview    136
Organisation and structure    136

Roles and responsibilities

 

   136

 

Liquidity risk management

  
Overview    138
Organisation and structure    138

Liquidity risk management

 

   138

 

Operational risk management

  
Overview    139
Organisation and structure    139

Roles and responsibilities

 

   140

 

Conduct risk management

  
Overview    141
Organisation and structure    141
Roles and responsibilities    141

 

 

 

   LOGO        For a more detailed breakdown on our Risk review and Risk management contents please see pages 117 and 118. More detailed information on how Barclays manages these risks can be found in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  127


Risk review

Risk management

 

 

A more comprehensive overview, together with more specific information on Group policies, can be found in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report or at home.barclays/annualreport

Introduction

This section outlines the Group’s strategy for managing risk and how risk culture has been developed to ensure that there is a set of objectives and practices which are shared across the Group. It provides details of the Group’s governance, specific information on policies that the Group determines to be of particular significance in the current operating environment, committee structures and how responsibilities are assigned.

Risk management strategy

The Group has clear risk management objectives and a well established strategy to deliver them through core risk management processes.

At a strategic level, the Group’s risk management objectives are to:

 

§   identify the Group’s significant risks

 

§   formulate the Group’s risk appetite and ensure that the business profile and plans are consistent with it

 

§   optimise risk/return decisions by taking them as closely as possible to the business, while establishing strong and independent review and challenge structures

 

§   ensure that business growth plans are properly supported by effective risk infrastructure

 

§   manage the risk profile to ensure that specific financial deliverables remain achievable under a range of adverse business conditions

 

§   help executives improve the control and coordination of risk taking across the business.

A key element in the setting of clear management objectives is the ERMF, which sets out key activities, tools, techniques and organisational arrangements so that material risks facing the Group are identified and understood, and that appropriate responses are in place to protect Barclays and prevent detriment to its customers, employees or community. This will help the Group meet its goals, and enhance its ability to respond to new opportunities.

The ERMF covers those risks incurred by the Group that were foreseeable, continuous and material enough to merit establishing specific Group-wide control frameworks. These are known as Principal and Key Risks. See Principal and Key Risks on page 131 for more information.

The aim of the risk management process is to provide a structured, practical and easily understood set of three steps, Evaluate, Respond and Monitor (the E-R-M process), that enables management to identify and assess risks, determine the appropriate risk response, and then monitor the effectiveness of the response and changes to the risk profile.

1. Evaluate: risk evaluation must be carried out by those individuals, teams and departments who manage the underlying operational or business process, and so are best placed to identify and assess the potential risks, and also include those responsible for delivering the objectives under review.

2. Respond: the appropriate risk response effectively and efficiently ensures that risks are kept within appetite, which is the level of risk that the Group is prepared to accept while pursuing its business strategy. There are three types of response: i) accept the risk but take necessary mitigating actions such as use of risk controls; ii) stop the existing activity/do not start the proposed activity; or iii) continue the activity but transfer risks to another party via the use of insurance.

Barclays risk management strategy

 

LOGO

3. Monitor: once risks have been identified and measured, and controls put in place, progress towards objectives must be tracked. Monitoring must be ongoing and can prompt re-evaluation of the risks and/or changes in responses. Monitoring must be carried out proactively. In addition to ‘reporting’, it includes ensuring risks are maintained within risk appetite, and checking that controls are functioning as intended and remain fit for purpose.

The process is orientated around material risks impacting delivery of objectives, and is used to promote an efficient and effective approach to risk management. This three step risk management process:

 

§   can be applied to every objective at every level in the bank, both top-down or bottom-up

 

§   is embedded into the business decision making process

 

§   guides the Group’s response to changes in the external or internal environment in which existing activities are conducted

 

§   involves all staff and all three lines of defence (see page 130).

Governance structure

Risk exists when the outcome of taking a particular decision or course of action is uncertain and could potentially impact whether, or how well, the Group delivers on its objectives.

The Group faces risks throughout its business, every day, in everything it does. Some risks are taken after appropriate consideration – such as lending money to a customer. Other risks may arise from unintended consequences of internal actions, for example an IT system failure or poor sales practices. Finally, some risks are the result of events outside the Group but which impact its business – such as major exposure through trading or lending to a market counterparty which later fails.

All employees must play their part in the Group’s risk management, regardless of position, function or location. All employees are required to be familiar with risk management policies that are relevant to their activities, know how to escalate actual or potential risk issues, and have a role appropriate level of awareness of the ERMF (see Risk governance and assigning responsibilities for more information on page 130), risk management process and governance arrangements.

 

 

128  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

 

 

 

Board oversight and flow of risk related information

 

LOGO

 

Furthermore, from March 2016 members of the Board, Executive Committee and a limited number of specified senior individuals will be subject to additional rules included within the Senior Managers Regime (SMR), which clarifies their accountability and responsibilities. Members of the SMR are held to four additional specific rules of conduct in which they must:

 

1. take reasonable steps to ensure that the Group is effectively controlled

 

2. take reasonable steps to ensure that the Group complies with relevant regulatory requirements and standards

 

3. take reasonable steps to ensure that any delegated responsibilities are to the appropriate individual and that the delegated responsibilities are effectively discharged

 

4. disclose appropriately any information to the FCA or PRA, which they would reasonably expect to be made aware of.

There are three key board-level forums which review and monitor risk across the Group. These are: the Board itself; the Board Risk Committee and the Board Reputation Committee.

The Board

One of the Board’s (Board of Directors of Barclays PLC) responsibilities is the approval of risk appetite, which is the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives. The Chief Risk Officer regularly presents a report to the Board summarising developments in the risk environment and performance trends in the key portfolios. The Board is also responsible for the Internal Control and Assurance Framework (Group Control Framework). It oversees the management of the most significant risks through regular review of risk exposures and related key controls. Executive management responsibilities relating to this are set out in the ERMF.

The Board Risk Committee (BRC)

The BRC monitors the Group’s risk profile against the agreed financial appetite. Where actual performance differs from expectations, actions being taken by management are reviewed to ensure that the BRC is comfortable with them. After each meeting, the Chair of the BRC prepares a report for the next meeting of the Board. All members are non-executive directors. The Group Finance Director (GFD) and the Chief Risk Officer (CRO) attend each meeting as a matter of course.

The BRC also considers the Group’s risk appetite statement for operational risk and evaluates the Group’s operational risk profile and operational risk monitoring.

The BRC receives regular and comprehensive reports on risk methodology, the effectiveness of the risk management framework, and the Group’s risk profile, including the key issues affecting each business portfolio and forward risk trends. The Committee also commissions in-depth analyses of significant risk topics, which are presented by the CRO or senior risk managers in the businesses. The Chair of the Committee prepares a statement each year on its activities.

 

The Board Audit Committee (BAC)

The BAC receives regular reports on the effectiveness of internal control systems, quarterly reports on material control issues of significance, quarterly papers on accounting judgements (including impairment). It also receives a half yearly review of the adequacy of impairment allowances, which it reviews relative to the risk inherent in the portfolios, the business environment, the Group’s policies and methodologies and the performance trends of peer banks. The Chairman of the BAC also sits on the BRC.

The Board Reputation Committee (RepCo)

The RepCo reviews management’s recommendations on conduct and reputational risk and the effectiveness of the processes by which the Group identifies and manages these risks. It also reviews and monitors the effectiveness of Barclays’ Citizenship strategy, including the management of Barclays’ economic, social and environmental contribution.

In addition, the Board Audit and Board Remuneration Committees receive regular risk reports to assist them in the undertaking of their duties.

The Board Remuneration Committee (RemCo)

The RemCo receives a detailed report on risk management performance from the BRC, regular updates on the risk profile and proposals for the ex-ante and ex-post risk adjustments to variable remuneration. These inputs are considered in the setting of performance incentives.

Summaries of the relevant business, professional and risk management experience of the Directors of the Board are presented in the Board of Directors section on pages 36 and 37. The terms of reference and additional details on membership and activities for each of the principal Board Committees are available from the Corporate Governance section at: home.barclays/corporategovernance

The CRO manages the independent Risk function and chairs the Financial Risk Committees (FRC) and the Operational Risk Review Forum (ORRF), which monitor the Group’s financial and non-financial risk profile relative to agreed risk appetite.

The Group Treasurer heads the Treasury function and chairs the Treasury Committee which manages the Group’s liquidity, maturity transformation and structural interest rate exposure through the setting of policies and controls, monitors the Group’s liquidity and interest rate maturity mismatch, monitors usage of regulatory and economic capital, and has oversight of the Group’s capital plan.

The Head of Compliance chairs the Conduct and Reputational Risk Committee (CRRC) which assesses the quality of the application of the Reputation and Conduct Risk Control Frameworks. It also recommends conduct risk appetite, sets policies to ensure consistent adherence to that appetite, and reviews known and emerging reputational and conduct related risks to consider if action is required.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  129


Risk review

Risk management

 

 

 

Risk governance and assigning responsibilities

Responsibility for risk management resides at all levels of the Group, from the Board and the Executive Committee down through the organisation to each business manager and risk specialist. These responsibilities are distributed so that risk/return decisions are taken at the most appropriate level, as close as possible to the business, and are subject to robust and effective review and challenge. Responsibilities for effective review and challenge also reside at all levels.

The ERMF articulates a clear, consistent, comprehensive and effective approach for the management of all risks in the Group and creates the context for setting standards and establishing the right practices throughout the Group. The ERMF sets out a philosophy and approach that is applicable to the whole bank, all colleagues and to all types of risk. It sets out the key activities required for all employees to operate Barclays risk and control environment, with specific requirements for key individuals, including the CRO and CEO, and the overall governance framework designed to support its effective operation. See Risk Culture in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report for more information.

The ERMF supports risk management and control by ensuring that there is a:

 

§   sustainable and consistent implementation of the three lines of defence across all businesses and functions

 

§   clear segregation of activities and duties performed by colleagues across the Group

 

§   framework for the management of Principal Risks

 

§   consistent application of Barclays’ risk appetite across all Principal Risks

 

§   clear and simple policy hierarchy.

Three lines of defence

The enterprise risk management process is the ‘defence’, and organising businesses and functions into three ‘lines’ enhances the E-R-M process by formalising independence and challenge, while still promoting collaboration and the flow of information between all areas. The three lines of defence operating model enables the Group to separate risk management activities:

First line: manage operational and business processes; design, implement, operate, test and remediate controls.

First line activities are characterised by:

 

§   ownership of and direct responsibility for the Group’s returns or elements of Barclays’ results

 

§   ownership of major operations, systems and processes fundamental to the operation of the bank

 

§   direct linkage of objective setting, performance assessment and reward to financial performance.

Second line: oversee and challenge the first line and provide second line risk management activity.

Second line activities are characterised by:

 

§   oversight, monitoring and challenge of the first line of defence activities

 

§   design, ownership or operation of Key Risk Control Frameworks impacting the activities of the first line of defence

 

§   operation of certain second line risk management activities (e.g. financial rescue of a firm)

 

§   no direct linkage of objective setting, performance assessment and reward to revenue (measures related to mitigation of losses and balancing risk and reward are permissible).

Third line: provide assurance that the E-R-M process is fit for purpose, and that it is being carried out as intended.

Third line activities are characterised by:

 

§   providing independent and timely assurance to the Board and Executive Management over the effectiveness of governance, risk management and control.

Following the annual review, in 2016, we have further refined the three lines of defence model by clarifying that responsibilities for risk management and control are defined in relation to the activities individuals undertake as part of their role. The three key activities are: ‘Setting Policy and Conformance’ (second line); ‘Managing Operational or Business Process’ (first and second line); and ‘Providing Independent Assurance’ (third line). Second and third line activities have not changed, however we have emphasised the key responsibilities of the first line, which includes colleagues’ responsibility for understanding and owning the process end to end, and designing, operating, testing and remediating appropriate controls to manage those risks. Performed appropriately and by all colleagues, together these responsibilities will drive a stronger risk and control environment at Barclays, benefitting our customers, clients, shareholders and regulators.

 

 

 

Reporting and control

 

LOGO

 

130  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

    

    

    

 

Principal and Key Risks

Principal Risks comprise individual Key Risks to allow for more granular analysis. As at 31 December 2015, the five Principal Risks were: i) Credit; ii) Market; iii) Funding; iv) Operational; and v) Conduct. Since the beginning of 2015, Reputation Risk has been recognised as a Key Risk within Conduct Risk given their close alignment and the fact that as separate Principal Risks they had a common Principal Risk Officer.

Risk management responsibilities for Principal and Key Risks are set out in the ERMF. The ERMF creates clear ownership and accountability; ensures the Group’s most significant risk exposures are understood and managed in accordance with agreed risk appetite and risk tolerances; and ensures regular reporting of risk exposures and control effectiveness.

For each Key Risk, the Key Risk Officer is responsible for developing a risk appetite statement and overseeing and managing the risk in line with the ERMF. This includes the documentation, communication and maintenance of a Key Risk Control Framework which sets out, for every business across the firm, the mandated control requirements in managing exposures to that Key Risk. These control requirements are given further specification, according to the business or risk type, to provide a complete and appropriate system of internal control.

Business and Function Heads are responsible for obtaining ongoing assurance that the key controls they have put in place to manage the risks to their business objectives are operating effectively. Reviews are undertaken on a six-monthly basis and support the regulatory requirement for the Group to make an annual statement about its system of internal controls. At the business level, executive management hold specific Business Risk Oversight Meetings to monitor all Principal Risks.

Key Risk Officers report their assessments of the risk exposure and control effectiveness to Group-level oversight committees and their assessments form the basis of the reports that go to the:

Board Risk Committee:

 

§   Financial Risk Committee has oversight of Credit and Market Risks

 

§   Treasury Committee has oversight of Funding Risk

 

§   Operational Risk Review Forum has oversight of the risk profile of all Operational Risk types.

Board Reputation Committee:

 

§   Conduct and Reputation Risk Committee has oversight of Conduct and Reputation Risks.

The following sections provide an overview of each of the five Principal Risks, and details of the structure and organisation of the relevant management function and its roles and responsibilities, including how the impact of the risk to the Group may be minimised.

    

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  131


Risk review

Risk management

Credit risk management

 

 

Credit risk

The risk of suffering financial loss should any of the Group’s customers, clients or market counterparties fail to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group.

Overview

The granting of credit is one of the Group’s major sources of income and, as a Principal Risk, the Group dedicates considerable resources to its control. The credit risk that the Group faces arises mainly from wholesale and retail loans and advances together with the counterparty credit risk arising from derivative contracts with clients. Other sources of credit risk arise from trading activities, including: debt securities, settlement balances with market counterparties, available for sale assets and reverse repurchase agreements (reverse repos).

Credit risk management objectives are to:

 

§   maintain a framework of controls to ensure credit risk taking is based on sound credit risk management principles

 

§   identify, assess and measure credit risk clearly and accurately across the Group and within each separate business, from the level of individual facilities up to the total portfolio

 

§   control and plan credit risk taking in line with external stakeholder expectations and avoiding undesirable concentrations

 

§   monitor credit risk and adherence to agreed controls

 

§   ensure that risk-reward objectives are met.

More information of the reporting of credit risk can be found in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

Organisation and structure

Wholesale and retail portfolios are managed separately to reflect the differing nature of the assets; wholesale balances tend to be larger and are managed on an individual basis, while retail balances are larger in number but smaller in value and are, therefore, managed on a homogenous portfolio basis.

Credit risk management responsibilities have been structured so that decisions are taken as close as possible to the business, while ensuring robust review and challenge of performance, risk infrastructure and strategic plans. The credit risk management teams in each business are accountable to the relevant Business Credit Risk Officer (BCRO) who, in turn, reports to the CRO.

 

 

Board oversight and flow of risk related information

Organisation and structure

 

LOGO

 

132  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

    

    

    

 

Roles and responsibilities

The responsibilities of the credit risk management teams in the businesses, the sanctioning team and other shared services include: sanctioning new credit agreements (principally wholesale); setting policies for approval of transactions (principally retail); setting risk appetite; monitoring risk against limits and other parameters; maintaining robust processes, data gathering, quality, storage and reporting methods for effective credit risk management; performing effective turnaround and workout scenarios for wholesale portfolios via dedicated restructuring and recoveries teams; maintaining robust collections and recovery processes/units for retail portfolios; and review and validation of credit risk measurement models.

For wholesale portfolios, credit risk approval is undertaken by experienced credit risk professionals operating within a clearly defined delegated authority framework, with only the most senior credit officers entrusted with the higher levels of delegated authority. The largest credit exposures, which are outside the Risk Sanctioning Unit or Risk Distribution Committee authority require the support of the Group Senior Credit Officer (GSCO), the Group’s most senior credit risk sanctioner. For exposures in excess of the GSCO’s authority, approval by Group CRO is required. In the wholesale portfolios, credit risk managers are organised in sanctioning teams by geography, industry and/or product.

The role of the Central Risk function is to provide Group-wide direction, oversight and challenge of credit risk taking. Central Risk sets the Credit Risk Control Framework, which provides the structure within which credit risk is managed, together with supporting credit risk policies.

Credit risk mitigation

The Group employs a range of techniques and strategies to actively mitigate the counterparty credit risks. These can broadly be divided into three types: netting and set-off; collateral; and risk transfer.

Netting and set-off

In most jurisdictions in which the Group operates, credit risk exposures can be reduced by applying netting and set-off. In exposure terms, this credit risk mitigation technique has the largest overall impact on net exposure to derivative transactions, compared with other risk mitigation techniques.

For derivative transactions, the Group’s normal practice is to enter into standard master agreements with counterparties (e.g. ISDAs). These master agreements allow for netting of credit risk exposure to a counterparty resulting from a derivative transaction against the Group’s obligations to the counterparty in the event of default, and so produce a lower net credit exposure. These agreements may also reduce settlement exposure (e.g. for foreign exchange transactions) by allowing payments on the same day in the same currency to be set-off against one another.

Collateral

The Group has the ability to call on collateral in the event of default of the counterparty, comprising:

 

§   home loans: a fixed charge over residential property in the form of houses, flats and other dwellings

 

§   wholesale lending: a fixed charge over commercial property and other physical assets, in various forms

 

§   other retail lending: includes charges over motor vehicles and other physical assets, second lien charges over residential property, and finance lease receivables

 

§   derivatives: the Group also often seeks to enter into a margin agreement (e.g. Credit Support Annex (CSA)) with counterparties with which the Group has master netting agreements in place

 

§   reverse repurchase agreements: collateral typically comprises highly liquid securities which have been legally transferred to the Group subject to an agreement to return them for a fixed price

 

§   financial guarantees and similar off-balance sheet commitments: cash collateral may be held against these arrangements.

Risk transfer

A range of instruments including guarantees, credit insurance, credit derivatives and securitisation can be used to transfer credit risk from one counterparty to another. These mitigate credit risk in two main ways:

 

§   if the risk is transferred to a counterparty which is more credit worthy than the original counterparty, then overall credit risk is reduced

 

§   where recourse to the first counterparty remains, both counterparties must default before a loss materialises. This is less likely than the default of either counterparty individually so credit risk is reduced.

Detailed policies are in place to ensure that credit risk mitigation is appropriately recognised and recorded and more information can be found in the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  133


Risk review

Risk management

Market risk management

 

 

Market risk

The risk of a reduction to earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions or as a consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity pools.

Overview

Traded market risk

Traded market risk arises primarily as a result of client facilitation in wholesale markets, involving market making activities, risk management solutions and execution of syndications. Upon execution of a trade with a client, the Group will look to hedge against the risk of the trade moving in an adverse direction. Mismatches between client transactions and hedges result in market risk due to changes in asset prices.

Non-traded market risk

Banking book operations generate non-traded market risk, primarily through interest rate risk arising from the sensitivity of net interest margins due to changes in interest rates. The principal banking businesses engage in internal derivative trades with Treasury to manage their interest rate risk to within its defined risk appetite. However, the businesses remain susceptible to market risk from four key sources:

 

§   prepayment risk: balance run-off may be faster or slower than expected, due to customer behaviour in response to general economic conditions or interest rates. This can lead to a mismatch between the actual balance of products and the hedges executed with Treasury based on initial expectations

 

§   recruitment risk: the volume of new business may be lower or higher than expected, requiring the business to unwind or execute hedging transactions with Treasury at different rates than expected

 

§   residual risk and margin compression: the business may retain a small element of interest rate risk to facilitate the day-to-day management of customer business. Additionally, in the current low rate environment, deposits on which the Group sets the interest rate are exposed to margin compression. This is because for any further fall in base rate the Group must absorb an increasing amount of the rate move in its margin

 

§   lag risk: the risk of being unable to re-price products immediately after a change in interest rates due to mandatory notification periods. This is highly prevalent in managed rates saving products (e.g. Every Day Saver) where customers must be informed in writing of any planned reduction in their savings rate.

Pension risk

The Group maintains a number of defined benefit pension schemes for past and current employees. The ability of the pension fund to meet the projected pension payments is maintained principally through investments.

Pension risk arises because the estimated market value of the pension fund assets might decline; investment returns might reduce; or the estimated value of the pension liabilities might increase as a result of changes to the market process. The Group monitors the market risks arising from its defined benefit pension schemes, and works with the Trustees to address shortfalls. In these circumstances, the Group could be required or might choose to make extra contributions to the pension fund. The Group’s main defined benefit scheme was closed to new entrants in 2012.

Insurance risk

Insurance risk is managed within Africa Banking, where four categories of insurance risk are recognised: short-term insurance underwriting risk, life insurance underwriting risk, life insurance mismatch risk, and life and insurance investment risk.

Insurance risk arises when:

 

§   aggregate insurance premiums received from policyholders under a portfolio of insurance contracts are inadequate to cover the claims arising from those policies and the expenses associated with the management of the portfolio of policies and claims

 

§   premiums are not invested to adequately match the duration, timing and size of expected claims

 

§   unexpected fluctuations in claims arise or excessive exposure (e.g. in individual or aggregate exposures) relative to capacity is retained in the entity.

Insurance entities also incur market risk (on the investment of accumulated premiums and shareholder capital), credit risk (counterparty exposure on investments and reinsurance transactions), liquidity risk and operational risk from their investments and financial operations.

 

 

Organisation and structure

 

LOGO

 

134  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Overview of the business market risk control structure

 

LOGO

 

Organisation and structure

Traded market risk in the businesses resides primarily in the Investment Bank, Treasury, Africa Banking and Non-Core. These businesses have the mandate to incur traded market risk. Non-traded market risk is mostly incurred in PCB, Barclaycard and Treasury.

Market risk oversight and challenge is provided by business committees, Group committees, including the Market Risk Committee and Group Market Risk. The chart above gives an overview of the business control structure.

Roles and responsibilities

The objectives of market risk management are to:

 

§   understand and control market risk by robust measurement, limit setting, reporting and oversight

 

§   facilitate business growth within a controlled and transparent risk management framework

 

§   ensure that traded market risk in the businesses is controlled according to the allocated appetite

 

§   control non-traded market risk in line with approved appetite

 

§   control insurance risk in line with approved appetite

 

§   support the Non-Core strategy of asset reductions by ensuring that market risk remains within agreed risk appetite.

To ensure the above objectives are met, a well-established governance structure is in place to manage these risks consistent with the ERMF (evaluate-respond-monitor). See page 128 on risk management strategy, governance and risk culture.

More information on market risk management can be found in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  135


Risk review

Risk management

Funding and capital risk management

 

 

Funding risk

The ability of the Group to achieve its business plans may be adversely impacted if it does not effectively manage its capital (including leverage) and liquidity ratios. Group Treasury manage funding risk on a day-to-day basis with the Group Treasury Committee acting as the key governance forum.

Organisation and structure

 

LOGO

Capital risk

Capital risk is the risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources to:

 

  §   meet minimum regulatory requirements in the UK and in other jurisdictions such as the US and South Africa where regulated activities are undertaken. The Group’s authority to operate as a bank is dependent upon the maintenance of adequate capital resources at each level where prudential capital requirements are applied

 

  §   support its credit rating. A weaker credit rating would increase the Group’s cost of funds

 

  §   support its growth and strategic options.

 

Overview

Organisation and structure

Capital management is integral to the Group’s approach to financial stability and sustainability management and is therefore embedded in the way businesses and legal entities operate. Capital demand and supply is actively managed on a centralised basis, at a business level, at a local entity level and on a regional basis taking into account the regulatory, economic and commercial environment in which Barclays operates.

Roles and responsibilities

The Group’s capital management strategy is driven by the strategic aims of the Group and the Risk Appetite set by the Board. The Group’s objectives are achieved through well embedded capital management practices.

Capital planning

Capital forecasts are managed on a top-down and bottom-up basis through both short term (one year) and medium term (three to five years) financial planning cycles. Barclays’ capital plans are developed with the objective of maintaining capital that is adequate in quantity and quality to support the Group’s risk profile, regulatory and business needs. As a result, the Group holds a diversified capital base that provides strong loss absorbing capacity and optimised returns.

Barclays’ capital forecasts are continually monitored against relevant internal target capital ratios to ensure they remain appropriate, and consider risks to the plan including possible future regulatory changes.

Local management ensures compliance with an entity’s minimum regulatory capital requirements by reporting to local Asset and Liability Committees with oversight by the Group’s Treasury Committee, as required.

 

 

136  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

LOGO

Regulatory requirements

Capital planning is set in consideration of minimum regulatory requirements in all jurisdictions in which the Group operates. Group regulatory capital requirements are determined by the PRA.

Under these regulatory frameworks, capital requirements are set in consideration of the level of risk that the firm is exposed to which is measured through both risk weighted assets (RWAs) and leverage.

Capital held to support the level of risk identified is set in consideration of minimum ratio requirements and internal buffers. Capital requirements are set in accordance with the firm’s level of risk.

Governance

The Group and legal entity capital plans are underpinned by the Capital Risk Framework, which includes capital management policies and practices approved by the Principal Risk Officer. These plans are implemented consistently in order to deliver on the Group objectives.

The Board approves the Group capital plan, stress tests and recovery plan. The Treasury Committee manages compliance with the Group’s capital management objectives. The Committee reviews actual and forecast capital demand and resources on a bi-monthly basis. The Board Risk Committee annually reviews risk appetite and then analyses the impacts of stress scenarios on the Group capital forecast in order to understand and manage the Group’s projected capital adequacy.

Monitoring and managing capital

Capital is monitored and managed on an ongoing basis through:

Stress testing: internal group-wide stress testing is undertaken to quantify and understand the impact of sensitivities on the capital plan and capital ratios arising from stressed macroeconomic conditions. Actual recent economic, market and regulatory scenarios are used to inform the assumptions of the stress tests and assess the effectiveness of mitigation strategies.

The Group also undertakes stress tests prescribed by the BoE and EBA. Legal entities undertake stress tests prescribed by their local regulators. These stress tests inform decisions on the size and quality of capital buffer required and the results are incorporated into the Group capital plan to ensure adequacy of capital under normal and severe, but plausible, stressed conditions.

Risk mitigation: as part of the stress testing process, actions are identified that should be taken to mitigate the risks that could arise in the event of material adverse changes in the current economic and business outlook.

As an additional layer of protection, the Barclays Recovery Plan defines the actions and implementation strategies available for the Group to increase or preserve capital resources in the event that stress events are more extreme than anticipated.

Senior management awareness and transparency: Treasury works closely with Risk, businesses and legal entities to support a proactive approach to identifying sources of capital ratio volatilities which are considered in the Group’s capital plan. Capital risks against firm-specific and macroeconomic early warning indicators are monitored and reported to the Treasury Committee, associated with clear escalation channels to senior management.

Capital management information is readily available at all times to support the Executive Management’s strategic and day-to-day business decision making, as may be required.

The Group submits its Board approved ICAAP document to the PRA on an annual basis, which forms the basis of the Individual Capital Guidance (ICG) set by the PRA.

Capital allocation: capital allocations are approved by the Group Executive Committee and monitored by the Treasury Committee, taking into consideration the risk appetite, growth and strategic aims of the Group. Regulated legal entities are, at a minimum, allocated adequate capital to meet their current and forecast regulatory and business requirements.

Transferability of capital: the Group’s policy is for surplus capital held in Group entities to be repatriated to BBPLC in the form of dividends and/or capital repatriation, subject to local regulatory requirements, exchange controls and tax implications. This approach provides optimal flexibility on the re-deployment of capital across legal entities. The Group is not aware of any material impediments to the prompt transfer of capital resources, in line with the above policy, or repayment of intra-Group liabilities when due.

More information on capital risk management can be found in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report pages 150 and 151.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  137


Risk review

Risk management

Funding risk – Liquidity

 

 

Liquidity risk

The risk that the Group, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost. This also results in a firm’s inability to meet regulatory liquidity requirements. This risk is inherent in all banking operations and can be affected by a wide range of Group-specific and market-wide events.

Overview

The Board has formally recognised a series of risks that are continuously present in Barclays and materially impact the achievement of Barclays objectives, one of which is Funding risk. Liquidity risk is recognised as a key risk within Funding risk. The efficient management of liquidity is essential to the Group in retaining the confidence of the financial markets and ensuring that the business is sustainable. Liquidity risk is managed through the Liquidity Risk Management Framework (the Liquidity Framework) which is designed to meet the following objectives:

 

§   to maintain liquidity resources that are sufficient in amount and quality and a funding profile that is appropriate to meet the liquidity risk appetite (LRA) as expressed by the Board

 

§   to maintain market confidence in the Group’s name.

This is achieved via a combination of policy formation, review and governance, analysis, stress testing, limit setting and monitoring. Together, these meet internal and regulatory requirements.

Organisation and structure

Barclays Treasury operates a centralised governance control process that covers all of the Group’s liquidity risk management activities. As per the ERMF, the Key Risk Officer (KRO) approves the Key Risk Control Framework for Liquidity Risk (Key Risk Control Framework) under which the Treasury function operates. The KRO is in the Risk function. The Key Risk Control Framework is subject to annual review. The Key Risk Control Framework describes liquidity policies and controls that the Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within the LRA and is subject to annual review.

The Board sets the LRA, over Group stress tests, being the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations. The approved LRA is implemented and managed by the Treasury Committee through the Key Risk Control Framework.

Liquidity risk management

Barclays has a comprehensive Key Risk Control Framework for managing the Group’s liquidity risk. The Key Risk Control Framework describes liquidity policies and controls that the Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within the LRA. The Key Risk Control Framework is designed to deliver the appropriate term and structure of funding consistent with the LRA set by the Board.

Liquidity is monitored and managed on an ongoing basis through:

Group Stress test risk appetite and planning: Established Group stress test LRA together with the appropriate limits for the management of liquidity risk. This is the level of liquidity risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations.

Liquidity limits: Management of limits on a variety of on and off-balance sheet exposures and these serve to control the overall extent and composition of liquidity risk taken by managing exposure to the cash outflows.

Internal pricing and incentives: Active management of the composition and duration of the balance sheet and of contingent liquidity risk through the transfer of liquidity premium directly to the business.

Early warning indicators: Monitoring of a range of market indicators for early signs of liquidity risk in the market or specific to Barclays. These are designed to immediately identify the emergence of increased liquidity risk to maximise the time available to execute appropriate mitigating actions.

Contingency Funding Plan: Maintenance of a Contingency Funding Plan (CFP) which is designed to provide a framework where a liquidity stress could be effectively managed. The CFP provides a communication plan and includes management actions to respond to liquidity stresses of varying severity.

RRP: In accordance with the requirements of the PRA Rulebook: Recovery and Resolution, Barclays has developed a Group Recovery Plan. The key objectives are to provide the Group with a range of options to ensure the viability of the firm in a stress, set consistent early warning indicators to identify when the Recovery Plan should be invoked and to enable the Group to be adequately prepared to respond to stressed conditions. The Group continues to work with the authorities on RRP, including identifying and addressing any impediments to resolvability.

 

 

LOGO

 

138  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Risk review

Risk management

Operational risk management

 

 

Operational risk

Any instance where there is a potential or actual impact to the Group resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people, systems, or from an external event. The impacts to the Group can be financial, including losses or an unexpected financial gain, as well as non-financial such as customer detriment, reputational or regulatory consequences.

  

Overview

The management of operational risk has two key objectives:

 

§   minimise the impact of losses suffered, both in the normal course of business (small losses) and from extreme events (large losses)

 

§   improve the effective management of the Group and strengthen its brand and external reputation.

The Group is committed to the management and measurement of operational risk and was granted a waiver by the FSA (now the PRA) to operate an Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA) for operational risk under Basel II, which commenced in January 2008. The majority of the Group calculates regulatory capital requirements using AMA (93% of capital requirements); however, in specific areas, the Basic Indicator Approach (7%) is applied. The Group works to benchmark its internal operational risk management and measurement practices with peer banks and to drive the further development of advanced techniques.

The Group is committed to operating within a strong system of internal control that enables business to be transacted and risk taken without exposing the Group to unacceptable potential losses or reputational damage. The Group has an overarching framework that sets out the approach to internal governance. This guide establishes the mechanisms and processes by which the Board directs the organisation, through setting the tone and expectations from the top, delegating authority and monitoring compliance.

Organisation and structure

Operational risk comprises a number of specific Key Risks defined as follows:

 

§   external supplier: inadequate selection and ongoing management of external suppliers

 

§   financial crime: failure to comply with anti-money laundering, anti-bribery, anti-corruption and sanctions policies. In early January 2016, the oversight of financial crime was transferred to Group Compliance

 

§   financial reporting: reporting misstatement or omission within external financial or regulatory reporting

 

§   fraud: dishonest behaviour with the intent to make a gain or cause a loss to others

 

§   information: inadequate protection of the Group’s information in accordance with its value and sensitivity

 

§   legal: failure to identify and manage legal risks

 

§   payments process: failure in operation of payments processes

 

§   people: inadequate people capabilities, and/or performance/reward structures, and/or inappropriate behaviours

 

§   premises and security: unavailability of premises (to meet business demand) and/or safe working environments, and inadequate protection of physical assets, employees and customers against external threats

 

§   taxation: failure to comply with tax laws and practice which could lead to financial penalties, additional tax charges or reputational damage

 

§   technology (including cyber security): failure to develop and deploy secure, stable and reliable technology solutions which includes risk of loss or detriment to Barclays’ business and customers as a result of actions committed or facilitated through the use of networked information systems

 

§   transaction operations: failure in the management of critical transaction processes.

In order to ensure complete coverage of the potential adverse impacts on the Group arising from operational risk, the operational risk taxonomy extends beyond the operational key risks listed above to cover areas included within conduct risk. For more information on conduct risk please see pages 141 and 142.

These risks may result in financial and/or non-financial impacts including legal/regulatory breaches or reputational damage.

 

 

Reporting and control

 

LOGO

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  139


Risk review

Risk management

Operational risk management

 

 

Roles and responsibilities

The prime responsibility for the management of operational risk and the compliance with control requirements rests with the business and functional units where the risk arises. The operational risk profile and control environment is reviewed by business unit management through specific meetings which cover governance, risk and control. Businesses are required to report their operational risks on both a regular and an event driven basis. The reports include a profile of the material risks that may threaten the achievement of their objectives and the effectiveness of key controls, material control issues, operational risk events and a review of scenarios.

The Group Head of Operational Risk, as Principal Risk Officer, is responsible for establishing, owning and maintaining an appropriate Group-wide Operational Risk Framework and for overseeing the portfolio of operational risk across the Group.

Operational risk management acts in a second line of defence capacity, and is responsible for implementation of the framework and monitoring operational risk events, risk exposures and material control issues. Through attendance at Business Unit Governance, Risk and Controls meetings, it provides specific risk input into the issues highlighted and the overall risk profile of the business. Operational risk issues escalated from these meetings are considered by the Group Principal Risk Officer through the second line of defence review meetings, which also consider material control issues and their effective remediation. Depending on their nature, the outputs of these meetings are presented to the BRC or the BAC.

Specific reports are prepared by businesses, Key Risk Officers and Group Operational Risk on a regular basis for ORRF, BRC and BAC.

Risk and control self-assessments and key indicators

The Group identifies and assesses all material risks within each business and evaluates the key controls in place to mitigate those risks. Managers in the businesses use self-assessment techniques to identify risks, evaluate the effectiveness of key controls in place, and assess whether the risks are effectively managed within business risk appetite. The businesses are then able to make decisions on what action, if any, is required to reduce the level of risk to the Group. These risk assessments are monitored on a regular basis to ensure that each business continually understands the risks it faces.

Key Indicators (KIs) are metrics which allow the Group to monitor its operational risk profile. KIs include measurable thresholds that reflect the risk appetite of the business and are monitored to alert management when risk levels exceed acceptable ranges or risk appetite levels and drive timely decision making and actions.

    

 

 

140  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Risk review

Risk management

Conduct risk management

 

 

Conduct risk

The risk that detriment is caused to customers, clients, counterparties or the Group because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities.

Overview

The Group defines, manages and mitigates conduct risk with the goal of providing good customer outcomes and protecting market integrity.

The Group has defined seven Key Risks that are the main sub risk types to Conduct Risk:

 

§   our products or services do not meet customers’ needs or have the potential to cause customer detriment

 

§   the way we design and undertake transaction services has the potential to cause customer detriment

 

§   the way we design or undertake customer servicing has the potential to cause customer detriment

 

§   our strategy or business model has the potential to cause customer detriment

 

§   our governance arrangements or culture has the potential to cause customer detriment

 

§   we fail to obtain and maintain relevant regulatory authorisations, permissions and licence requirements

 

§   damage to Barclays’ reputation is caused during the conduct of our business.

Organisation and structure

The Conduct and Reputation Risk Committee (CRRC) derives its authority from the Barclays Group Head of Compliance. The purpose of the CRRC is to review and monitor the effectiveness of Barclays’ management of Conduct and Reputation Risk. In addition, specific committees monitor conduct risk and the control environment at the business level.

 

Roles and responsibilities

The Conduct Risk Principal Risk Framework (PRF) comprises a number of elements that allow the Group to manage and measure its conduct risk profile.

The PRF is implemented across the Group:

 

§   vertically, through an organisational structure that requires all businesses to implement and operate their own conduct risk framework that meets the requirements detailed within the ERMF

 

§   horizontally, with Group Key Risk Officers (KROs) required to monitor information relevant to their Key Risk from each element of the Conduct Risk PRF.

The primary responsibility for managing conduct risk and compliance with control requirements sits with the business where the risk arises. The Conduct Risk Accountable Executive for each business is responsible for ensuring the implementation of, and adherence to, the PRF.

The Conduct Principal Risk Officer is responsible for owning and maintaining an appropriate Group-wide Conduct Risk PRF and for overseeing Group-wide Conduct Risk management.

Businesses are required to report their conduct risks on both a quarterly and an event driven basis. The quarterly reports detail conduct risks inherent within the business strategy and include forward looking horizon scanning analysis as well as backward looking evidence-based indicators from both internal and external sources. For details please refer to the Risk Review, Conduct Risk Performance section on page 207.

Business level reports are reviewed within Compliance. Compliance then creates Group level reports for consideration by CRRC and RepCo. The Group periodically assesses its management of conduct risk through independent audits and addresses issues identified.

Event-driven reporting consists of any risks or issues that breach certain thresholds for severity and probability. Any such risks or issues must be promptly escalated to the business and the appropriate KRO.

In 2015 Reputation Risk was re-designated as a Key Risk under the Conduct Risk Principal Risk. The Reputation Key Risk Framework outlines the processes and actions required of the business. These include regular and forward looking reviews of current and emerging reputation risks so that a topical and comprehensive reputation risk profile of the organisation can be maintained.

 

 

Organisation and structure

 

LOGO

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  141


Risk review

Risk management

Conduct risk management

 

 

Reputation risk is the risk of damage to the Group’s brand arising from any association, action or inaction which is perceived by stakeholders (e.g. customers, clients, colleagues, shareholders, regulators, opinion formers) to be inappropriate or unethical. Damage to the Group’s brand and consequent erosion of our reputation reduces the attractiveness of the Group to stakeholders and may lead to negative publicity, loss of revenue, regulatory or legislative action, loss of existing and potential client business, reduced workforce morale and difficulties in recruiting talent. Ultimately it may destroy shareholder value.

Reputation risk may arise in many different ways, for example:

 

§   failure to act in good faith and in accordance with the Group’s values and code of conduct

 

§   failure (real or perceived) to comply with the law or regulation, or association (real or implied) with illegal activity

 

§   failures in corporate governance, management or technical systems

 

§   failure to comply with internal standards and policies

 

§   association with controversial sectors or clients

 

§   association with controversial transactions, projects, countries or governments

 

§   association with controversial business decisions, including but not restricted to, decisions relating to: products (in particular new products), delivery channels, promotions/advertising, acquisitions, branch representation, sourcing/supply chain relationships, staff locations, treatment of financial transactions

 

§   association with poor employment practices.

In each case, the risk may arise from failure to comply with either stated norms, which are likely to change over time, so an assessment of reputation risk cannot be static. If not managed effectively, stakeholder expectations of responsible corporate behaviour will not be met.

Reputation risk may also arise and cause damage to the Group’s image, through association with clients, their transactions or their projects if these are perceived by external stakeholders to be environmentally damaging. Where the Group is financing infrastructure projects which have potentially adverse environmental impacts, the Group’s Client Assessment and Aggregation policy and supporting Environmental and Social Risk Standard will apply. This policy identifies the circumstances in which the Group requires due diligence to include assessment of specialist environmental reports. These reports will include consideration of a wide range of the project’s potential impacts including on air, water and land quality, on biodiversity issues, on locally affected communities, including any material upstream and downstream impacts, and working conditions together with employee and community health and safety. Adherence to the Environmental and Social Risk Standard is the mechanism by which Barclays fulfils the requirements of the Equator Principles. These Principles are an internationally recognised framework for environmental due diligence in project finance. Barclays was one of four banks which collaborated in developing the Principles, ahead of their launch in 2003 with 10 adopting banks. There are now more than 80 banks worldwide which have adopted the Equator Principles (see www.equator-principles.com).

 

 

 

 

 

142  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Risk review

Risk performance

 

 

Maintaining our risk profile at an acceptable and appropriate level is essential to ensure our continued performance. This section provides a review of the performance of the Group in 2015 for each of the five Principal Risks, which are credit, market, funding, operational, and conduct risk.

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

Page  

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

   

 

Credit risk   

 

 

 

144  

 

  

 
Market risk      171       
Funding risk – capital risk      181       
Funding risk – liquidity risk      187       
Operational risk      205       
Conduct risk      207       

 

 

 

 

 

   LOGO     

  For a more detailed breakdown on our Risk review and Risk management contents please see pages 117 and 118
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  143


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

Analysis of credit risk

Credit risk is the risk of the Group suffering financial loss should any of its customers, clients, or market counterparties fail to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group.

This section details the Group’s credit risk profile and provides information on the Group’s exposure to loans and advances to customer and banks, maximum exposures with collateral held, and net impairment charges raised in the year. It provides information on balances that are categorised as credit risk loans, balances in forbearance, as well as exposure to and performance metrics for specific portfolios and asset types.

Key metrics

 

  §   Credit impairment charges in 2015 were 2% lower than 2014:

+£32m Group Core

Loan impairment broadly stable reflecting benign economic conditions in the UK and US

+£30m Retail Core

Performance across key portfolios has remained stable and within expectations

+£2m Wholesale Core

Performance benefiting from economic conditions in the UK and US markets offset by impact of stress in Oil and Gas portfolios

-£139m Non-Core

Lower charge reflects sale of Spanish business and higher recoveries in Portugal

 

  §   Net Loans and advances to customers and banks decreased by 6% in 2015.

 

  §   The loan loss rate was stable at 47bps.

 

    

 

 

144  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

    

    

    

 

Credit risk

Credit risk is the risk of the Group suffering financial loss should any of its customers, clients or market counterparties fail to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group.

All disclosures in this section (pages 145 to 170) are unaudited unless otherwise stated

Overview

Credit risk represents a significant risk to the Group and mainly arises from exposure to wholesale and retail loans and advances together with the counterparty credit risk arising from derivative contracts entered into with clients. A summary of performance may be found below.

This section provides an analysis of areas of particular interest or potentially of higher risk, including: i) balance sheet, including the maximum exposure, and collateral, and loans and advances; ii) areas of concentrations, including the Eurozone; iii) exposure to and performance metrics for specific portfolios and assets types, including home loans, credit cards and UK commercial real estate; iv) exposure and performance of loans on concession programmes, including forbearance; v) problem loans, including credit risk loans (CRLs); and vi) impairment, including impairment stock and management adjustments to model outputs.

The topics covered in this section may be found in the credit risk section of the contents on page 117. Please see risk management section on pages 127 to 142 for details of governance, policies and procedures.

Summary of performance in the period

Credit impairment charges in 2015 fell 2% to £2.1bn which principally reflected the benign economic conditions in the UK and US and effective risk management, including the strengthening of the Retail Impairment Policy. These supported generally stable delinquency rates in retail and lower default rates in wholesale where large single names were limited in number and focused on the Oil and Gas sector.

The level of CRL reduced to £7.8bn principally due to a reduction in Non-Core and Personal and Corporate Banking. The coverage ratios for home loans, unsecured retail portfolios and corporate loans remain broadly in line with expected severity rates for these types of portfolios.

Net loans and advances to customers and banks reduced 6% to £440.6bn reflecting a decrease in Non-Core businesses, Investment Bank and Africa Banking offset by increases in Personal and Corporate Banking.

The loan loss rate was broadly stable at 47bps (2014: 46bps).

Analysis of the balance sheet

The Group’s maximum exposure and collateral and other credit enhancements held

Basis of preparation

The following tables present a reconciliation between the Group’s maximum exposure and its net exposure to credit risk; reflecting the financial effects of collateral, credit enhancements and other actions taken to mitigate the Group’s exposure.

For financial assets recognised on the balance sheet, maximum exposure to credit risk represents the balance sheet carrying value after allowance for impairment. For off-balance sheet guarantees, the maximum exposure is the maximum amount that the Group would have to pay if the guarantees were to be called upon. For loan commitments and other credit related commitments that are irrevocable over the life of the respective facilities, the maximum exposure is the full amount of the committed facilities.

This and subsequent analyses of credit risk include only financial assets subject to credit risk. They exclude other financial assets not subject to credit risk, mainly equity securities held for trading, as available for sale or designated at fair value, and traded commodities. Assets designated at fair value in respect of linked liabilities to customers under investment contracts have also not been included as the Group is not exposed to credit risk on these assets. Credit losses in these portfolios, if any, would lead to a reduction in the linked liabilities and not result in a loss to the Group. For off-balance sheet exposures certain contingent liabilities not subject to credit risk such as performance guarantees are excluded.

The Group mitigates the credit risk to which it is exposed through netting and set-off, collateral and risk transfer. Further detail on the Group’s policies to each of these forms of credit enhancement is presented on page 133.

Overview

As at 31 December 2015, the Group’s net exposure to credit risk after taking into account netting and set-off, collateral and risk transfer decreased 6% to £701.4bn, reflecting a decrease in maximum exposure of 14% and a reduction in the level of mitigation held by 21%. Overall, the extent to which the Group holds mitigation against its total exposure reduced slightly to 48% (2014: 53%).

Of the remaining exposure left unmitigated, a significant portion relates to cash held at central banks, available for sale debt securities issued by governments, cash collateral and settlement balances, all of which are considered lower risk. Trading portfolio liability positions, which to a significant extent economically hedge trading portfolio assets but which are not held specifically for risk management purposes, are excluded from the analysis. The credit quality of counterparties to derivative, available for sale and wholesale loan assets are predominantly investment grade. Further analysis on the credit quality of assets is presented on pages 148 and 149.

Where collateral has been obtained in the event of default, the Group does not, as a rule, use such assets for its own operations and they are usually sold on a timely basis. The carrying value of assets held by the Group as at 31 December 2015, as a result of the enforcement of collateral was £69m (2014: £161m).

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  145


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

 Maximum exposure and effects of collateral and other credit enhancements (audited)   
     Maximum          Netting       

 

Collateral       

  

     Risk          Net   
     exposure          and set-off          Cash          Non-cash          transfer          exposure   
 As at 31 December 2015      £m          £m          £m          £m          £m          £m   
 On-balance sheet:                                                      
 Cash and balances at central banks      49,711          –          –          –          –          49,711   
 Items in the course of collection from other banks      1,011          –          –          –          –          1,011   
 Trading portfolio assets:                  
 Debt securities      45,576          –          –          –          –          45,576   
 Traded loans      2,474          –          –          (607)         (1)         1,866   
 Total trading portfolio assets      48,050          –          –          (607)         (1)         47,442   
 Financial assets designated at fair value:                  
 Loans and advances      17,913          –          (21)         (5,850)         (515)         11,527   
 Debt securities      1,383          –          –          –          –          1,383   
 Reverse repurchase agreementsa      49,513          –          (315)         (49,027)         –          171   
 Other financial assets      375          –          –          –          –          375   
 Total financial assets designated at fair value      69,184          –          (336)         (54,877)         (515)         13,456   
 Derivative financial instruments      327,709          (259,582)         (34,918)         (7,484)         (5,529)         20,196   
 Loans and advances to banks      41,349          –          (4)         (4,072)         (64)         37,209   
 Loans and advances to customers:                  
 Home loans      155,863          –          (221)         (154,355)         (634)         653   
 Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending      67,840          (12)         (1,076)         (14,512)         (1,761)         50,479   
 Corporate loans      175,514          (8,399)         (593)         (45,788)         (4,401)         116,333   
 Total loans and advances to customers      399,217          (8,411)         (1,890)         (214,655)         (6,796)         167,465   
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending      28,187          –          (166)         (27,619)         –          402   
 Available for sale debt securities      89,278          –          –          (832)         (811)         87,635   
 Other assets      1,410          –          –          –          –          1,410   
 Total on-balance sheet      1,055,106          (267,993)         (37,314)         (310,146)         (13,716)         425,937   
 Off-balance sheet:                  
 Contingent liabilities      20,576          –          (604)         (1,408)         (104)         18,460   
 Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions      845          –          (33)         (57)         (3)         752   
 Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsb      93          –          –          (91)         –          2   
 Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments      281,369          –          (313)         (24,156)         (662)         256,238   
 Total off-balance sheet      302,883          –          (950)         (25,712)         (769)         275,452   
                                                       
 Total      1,357,989          (267,993)         (38,264)         (335,858)         (14,485)         701,389   

 

 

Notes

a During 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
b Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements were previously disclosed as loan commitments. Following the business designation of reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements at fair value through profit and loss, new forward starting reverse repurchase agreements are within the scope of IAS 39 and are recognised as derivatives on the balance sheet.

 

146  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

 Maximum exposure and effects of collateral and other credit enhancements (audited)   
     Maximum          Netting       

 

Collateral       

  

     Risk          Net   
     exposure          and set-off          Cash          Non-cash          transfer          exposure   
 As at 31 December 2014      £m          £m          £m          £m          £m          £m   
 On-balance sheet:                                                      
 Cash and balances at central banks      39,695          –          –          –          –          39,695   
 Items in the course of collection from other banks      1,210          –          –          –          –          1,210   
 Trading portfolio assets:                  
 Debt securities      65,997          –          –          –          –          65,997   
 Traded loans      2,693          –          –          –          –          2,693   
 Total trading portfolio assets      68,690          –          –          –          –          68,690   
 Financial assets designated at fair value:                  
 Loans and advances      20,198          –          (48)         (6,657)         (291)         13,202   
 Debt securities      4,448          –          –          –          –          4,448   
 Reverse repurchase agreements      5,236          –          –          (4,803)         –          433   
 Other financial assets      469          –          –          –          –          469   
 Total financial assets designated at fair value      30,351          –          (48)         (11,460)         (291)         18,552   
 Derivative financial instruments      439,909          (353,631)         (44,047)         (8,231)         (6,653)         27,347   
 Loans and advances to banks      42,111          (1,012)         –          (3,858)         (176)         37,065   
 Loans and advances to customers:                  
 Home loans      166,974          –          (274)         (164,389)         (815)         1,496   
 Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending      69,022          –          (954)         (16,433)         (1,896)         49,739   
 Corporate loans      191,771          (9,162)         (620)         (40,201)         (5,122)         136,666   
 Total loans and advances to customers      427,767          (9,162)         (1,848)         (221,023)         (7,833)         187,901   
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending      131,753          –          –          (130,135)         –          1,618   
 Available for sale debt securities      85,539          –          –          (938)         (432)         84,169   
 Other assets      1,680          –          –          –          –          1,680   
 Total on-balance sheet      1,268,705          (363,805)         (45,943)         (375,645)         (15,385)         467,927   
 Off-balance sheet:                  
 Contingent liabilities      21,263          –          (781)         (848)         (270)         19,364   
 Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions      1,091          –          (6)         (8)         (3)         1,074   
 Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements      13,856          –          –          (13,841)         –          15   
 Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments      276,315          –          (457)         (17,385)         (793)         257,680   
 Total off-balance sheet      312,525          –          (1,244)         (32,082)         (1,066)         278,133   
                                                       
 Total      1,581,230          (363,805)         (47,187)         (407,727)         (16,451)         746,060   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  147


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

The Group’s approach to managing and representing credit quality

Asset credit quality

All loans and advances are categorised as either ‘neither past due nor impaired’, ‘past due but not impaired’, or ‘past due and impaired’, which includes restructured loans. For the purposes of the disclosures in the balance sheet credit quality section below and the analysis of loans and advances and impairment section on page 150:

 

§   a loan is considered past due when the borrower has failed to make a payment when due under the terms of the loan contract

 

§   the impairment allowance includes allowances against financial assets that have been individually impaired and those subject to collective impairment

 

§   loans neither past due nor impaired consist predominantly of wholesale and retail loans that are performing. These loans, although unimpaired, may carry an unidentified impairment

 

§   loans that are past due but not impaired consist predominantly of wholesale loans that are past due but individually assessed as not being impaired. These loans, although individually assessed as unimpaired, may carry an unidentified impairment provision

 

§   impaired loans that are individually assessed consist predominantly of wholesale loans that are past due and for which an individual allowance has been raised

 

§   impaired loans that are collectively assessed consist predominantly of retail loans that are one day or more past due for which a collective allowance is raised. Wholesale loans that are past due, individually assessed as unimpaired, but which carry an unidentified impairment provision, are excluded from this category.

Home loans, unsecured loans and credit card receivables that are subject to forbearance in the retail portfolios are included in the collectively assessed impaired loans column in the tables in the analysis of loans and advances and impairment section (page 150). Included within wholesale loans that are designated as neither past due nor impaired is a portion of loans that have been subject to forbearance or similar strategies as part of the Group’s ongoing relationship with clients. The loans will have an internal rating reflective of the level of risk to which the Group is exposed, bearing in mind the circumstances of the forbearance, the overall performance and prospects of the client. Loans on forbearance programmes will typically, but not always, attract a higher risk rating than similar loans which are not. A portion of wholesale loans under forbearance is included in the past due but not impaired column, although not all loans subject to forbearance are necessarily impaired or past due. Where wholesale loans under forbearance have been impaired, these form part of individually assessed impaired loans.

The Group uses the following internal measures to determine credit quality for loans that are performing:

 

 Default Grade     
 
 
Retail lending
Probability of
default
  
  
  
   
 
 
Wholesale lending
Probability of
default
  
  
  
    
 
Credit Quality
description
  
  
 1-3      0.0-0.60%        0.0-0.05%         Strong   
 4-5        0.05-0.15%      
 6-8        0.15-0.30%      
 9-11              0.30-0.60%            
 12-14      0.60-10.00%        0.60-2.15%         Satisfactory   
 15-19              2.15-11.35%            
 20-21      10.00%+        11.35%+         Higher risk   

For loans that are performing, these descriptions can be summarised as follows:

Strong: there is a very high likelihood of the asset being recovered in full.

Satisfactory: while there is a high likelihood that the asset will be recovered and therefore, of no cause for concern to the Group, the asset may not be collateralised, or may relate to retail facilities, such as credit card balances and unsecured loans, which have been classified as satisfactory, regardless of the fact that the output of internal grading models may have indicated a higher classification. At the lower end of this grade there are customers that are being more carefully monitored, for example, corporate customers which are indicating some evidence of deterioration, mortgages with a high loan to value, and unsecured retail loans operating outside normal product guidelines.

Higher risk: there is concern over the obligor’s ability to make payments when due. However, these have not yet converted to actual delinquency. There may also be doubts over the value of collateral or security provided. However, the borrower or counterparty is continuing to make payments when due and is expected to settle all outstanding amounts of principal and interest.

Loans that are past due are monitored closely, with impairment allowances raised as appropriate and in line with the Group’s impairment policies. These loans are all considered higher risk for the purpose of this analysis of credit quality.

Debt securities

For assets held at fair value, the carrying value on the balance sheet will include, among other things, the credit risk of the issuer. Most listed and some unlisted securities are rated by external rating agencies. The Group mainly uses external credit ratings provided by Standard & Poor’s, Fitch or Moody’s. Where such ratings are not available or are not current, the Group will use its own internal ratings for the securities.

Balance sheet credit quality

The following tables present the credit quality of Group assets exposed to credit risk.

Overview

As at 31 December 2015, the ratio of the Group’s assets classified as strong remained broadly stable at 85% (2014: 84%) of total assets exposed to credit risk.

Traded assets remained mostly investment grade with the following proportions being categorised as strong: 96% (2014: 94%) of total derivative financial instruments, 95% (2014: 91%) of debt securities held for trading and 99% (2014: 98%) of debt securities held as available for sale. The credit quality of counterparties to reverse repurchase agreements held at amortised cost, and designated at fair value categorised as strong was 83% (2014: 78%). The credit risk of these assets is significantly reduced as balances are largely collateralised.

 

148  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

In the loan portfolios, 89% of home loans (2014: 86%) to customers are measured as strong. The majority of credit card, unsecured and other retail lending remained satisfactory, reflecting the unsecured nature of a significant proportion of the balance, comprising 76% (2014: 71%) of the total. The credit quality profile of the Group’s wholesale lending remained stable with counterparties rated strong at 72% (2014: 72%).

Further analysis of debt securities by issuer and issuer type and netting and collateral arrangements on derivative financial instruments is presented on pages 162 and 163 respectively.

 

Balance sheet credit quality (audited)

  

     
 
 
 

 

Strong
(including
investment
grade)

£m

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
Satisfactory
(BB+ to B)
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 

 

Higher risk
(B- and
below)

£m

  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
Maximum
exposure to
credit risk
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 

 

Strong
(including
investment
grade)

%

  
  
  
  

  

   
 

 

Satisfactory
(BB+ to B)

%

  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Higher risk
(B- and
below)

%

  
  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Maximum
exposure to
credit risk

%

  
  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                                                               

Cash and balances at central banks

    49,711                      49,711        100        0        0        100   

Items in the course of collection from other banks

    922        62        27        1,011        91        6        3        100   

Trading portfolio assets:

               

Debt securities

    43,118        2,217        241        45,576        95        5        0        100   

Traded loans

    329        1,880        265        2,474        13        76        11        100   

Total trading portfolio assets

    43,447        4,097        506        48,050        90        9        1        100   

Financial assets designated at fair value:

               

Loans and advances

    16,751        790        372        17,913        94        4        2        100   

Debt securities

    1,378        3        2        1,383        100        0        0        100   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinga

    41,145        8,352        16        49,513        83        17        0        100   

Other financial assets

    313        62               375        83        17        0        100   

Total financial assets designated at fair value

    59,587        9,207        390        69,184        86        13        1        100   

Derivative financial instruments

    313,114        13,270        1,325        327,709        96        4        0        100   

Loans and advances to banks

    39,059        1,163        1,127        41,349        94        3        3        100   

Loans and advances to customers:

               

Home loans

    139,252        9,704        6,907        155,863        89        6        5        100   

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

    12,347        51,294        4,199        67,840        18        76        6        100   

Corporate loans

    125,743        39,600        10,171        175,514        72        22        6        100   

Total loans and advances to customers

    277,342        100,598        21,277        399,217        70        25        5        100   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

    23,040        5,147               28,187        82        18        0        100   

Available for sale debt securities

    88,536        632        110        89,278        99        1        0        100   

Other assets

    1,142        233        35        1,410        81        17        2        100   

Total assets

    895,900        134,409        24,797        1,055,106        85        13        2        100   

 

As at 31 December 2014

                                                               

Cash and balances at central banks

    39,695                      39,695        100        0        0        100   

Items in the course of collection from other banks

    1,134        47        29        1,210        94        4        2        100   

Trading portfolio assets:

               

Debt securities

    60,290        5,202        505        65,997        91        8        1        100   

Traded loans

    446        1,935        312        2,693        16        72        12        100   

Total trading portfolio assets

    60,736        7,137        817        68,690        89        10        1        100   

Financial assets designated at fair value:

               

Loans and advances

    18,544        844        810        20,198        92        4        4        100   

Debt securities

    4,316        130        2        4,448        97        3        0        100   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

    4,876        346        14        5,236        93        7        0        100   

Other financial assets

    269        168        32        469        57        36        7        100   

Total financial assets designated at fair value

    28,005        1,488        858        30,351        92        5        3        100   

Derivative financial instruments

    414,980        24,387        542        439,909        94        6        0        100   

Loans and advances to banks

    39,453        1,651        1,007        42,111        94        4        2        100   

Loans and advances to customers:

               

Home loans

    143,700        13,900        9,374        166,974        86        8        6        100   

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

    15,369        49,255        4,398        69,022        23        71        6        100   

Corporate loans

    137,102        42,483        12,186        191,771        72        22        6        100   

Total loans and advances to customers

    296,171        105,638        25,958        427,767        69        25        6        100   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

    102,609        29,142        2        131,753        78        22        0        100   

Available for sale debt securities

    84,405        498        636        85,539        98        1        1        100   

Other assets

    1,336        282        62        1,680        79        17        4        100   

Total assets

    1,068,524        170,270        29,911        1,268,705        84        13        3        100   

Note

a During 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  149


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

As the principal source of credit risk to the Group, loans and advances to customers and banks is analysed in detail below:

Loans and advances to customers and banks

 

Analysis of loans and advances and impairment to customers and banks

  

      

 

 

Gross

L&A

£m

  

  

  

    
 
 
Impairment
allowance
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
L&A net of
impairment
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Credit risk
loans

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

CRLs % of
gross L&A

%

  
  

  

    
 
 
 
Loan
impairment
chargesa
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 

 

Loan loss
rates

bps

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                    

Personal & Corporate Banking

     137,212         713         136,499         1,591         1.2         199         15   

Africa Banking

     17,412         539         16,873         859         4.9         273         157   

Barclaycard

     43,346         1,835         41,511         1,601         3.7         1,251         289   

Barclays Core

     197,970         3,087         194,883         4,051         2.0         1,723         87   

Barclays Non-Core

     11,610         369         11,241         845         7.3         85         73   

Total Group Retail

     209,580         3,456         206,124         4,896         2.3         1,808         86   

Investment Bank

     92,321         83         92,238         241         0.3         47         5   

Personal & Corporate Banking

     87,855         914         86,941         1,794         2.0         182         21   

Africa Banking

     14,955         235         14,720         541         3.6         80         53   

Head Office and Other Operations

     5,922                 5,922                                   

Barclays Core

     201,053         1,232         199,821         2,576         1.3         309         15   

Barclays Non-Core

     34,854         233         34,621         345         1.0         (20      (6

Total Group Wholesale

     235,907         1,465         234,442         2,921         1.2         289         12   

Group Total

     445,487         4,921         440,566         7,817         1.8         2,097         47   

Traded loans

     2,474         n/a         2,474               

Loans and advances designated at fair value

     17,913         n/a         17,913               

Loans and advances held at fair value

     20,387         n/a         20,387               

Total loans and advances

     465,874         4,921         460,953               

As at 31 December 2014

                    

Personal & Corporate Bankingb,c

     136,544         766         135,778         1,733         1.3         215         16   

Africa Banking

     21,334         681         20,653         1,093         5.1         295         138   

Barclaycard

     38,376         1,815         36,561         1,765         4.6         1,183         308   

Barclays Core

     196,254         3,262         192,992         4,591         2.3         1,693         86   

Barclays Non-Core

     20,259         428         19,831         1,209         6.0         151         75   

Total Group Retail

     216,513         3,690         212,823         5,800         2.7         1,844         85   

Investment Bank

     106,377         44         106,333         71         0.1         (14)         (1)   

Personal & Corporate Bankingb

     88,192         873         87,319         2,112         2.4         267         30   

Africa Banking

     16,312         246         16,066         665         4.1         54         33   

Head Office and Other Operations

     3,240                 3,240                                   

Barclays Core

     214,121         1,163         212,958         2,848         1.3         307         14   

Barclays Non-Core

     44,699         602         44,097         841         1.9         53         12   

Total Group Wholesale

     258,820         1,765         257,055         3,689         1.4         360         14   

Group Total

     475,333         5,455         469,878         9,489         2.0         2,204         46   

Traded loans

     2,693         n/a         2,693               

Loans and advances designated at fair value

     20,198         n/a         20,198               

Loans and advances held at fair value

     22,891         n/a         22,891               

Total loans and advances

     498,224         5,455         492,769               

Loans and advances at amortised cost net of impairment decreased to £440.6bn (2014: £469.9bn):

§   Non-Core decreased £18.1bn to £45.9bn driven by reclassification of Portuguese and Italian loans now held for sale and a reduction in Europe Retail driven by a run-off of assets

 

§   Investment Bank decreased by £14.1bn to £92.2bn reflecting a decrease in cash collateral balances and a decrease in settlement balances as a result of reduced trading volumes

 

§   Barclaycard increased by £5.0bn to £41.5bn as a result of business growth across the portfolio.

CRLs decreased £1.7bn to £7.8bn primarily due to a reduction of £0.9bn in Non-Core relating to the reclassification of the Portuguese business as held for sale and improved economic conditions for Corporate portfolios.

Loan impairment charges improved 5% to £2,097m, with a loan loss rate of 47bps (2014: 46bps). This reflected higher recoveries in Europe and the sale of the Spanish business in Non-Core, lower impairments in PCB due to the benign economic environment in the UK resulting in lower default rates and charges, partially offset by increased impairment in Barclaycard driven by growth in the business and updates to impairment model methodologies. Loan loss rates for Africa Banking increased reflecting lower year-end loans and advances balances due to Rand depreciation.

Notes

a Excluding impairment charges on available for sale investments and reverse repurchase agreements.
b UK Business Banking has been reclassified from Retail to Wholesale in line with how the business is now managed. 2014 figures have been revised to reflect this, with net loans and advances of £8.4bn, credit risk loans of £482m and impairment charges of £48m reclassified to Wholesale.
c 2014 PCB Credit Risk Loans have been revised by £151m to align the methodology for determining arrears categories with other Home Finance risk disclosures.

 

150  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Analysis of gross loans and advances by product

  

      
 
Home Loans
£m
  
  
    
 
 

 

 

Credit cards,
unsecured
and other

retail lending

£m

  
  
  

  

  

    

 

 

Corporate

Loans

£m

  

  

  

    
 

 

Group
Total

£m

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015

           

Personal & Corporate Banking

     135,380         21,026         68,661         225,067   

Africa Banking

     10,368         7,633         14,366         32,367   

Barclaycard

             41,559         1,787         43,346   

Investment Bank

                     92,321         92,321   

Head Office and Other Operations

                     5,922         5,922   

Total Core

     145,748         70,218         183,057         399,023   

Barclays Non-Core

     10,633         1,016         34,815         46,464   

Group Total

     156,381         71,234         217,872         445,487   

As at 31 December 2014

           

Personal & Corporate Banking

     136,022         23,837         64,877         224,736   

Africa Banking

     12,959         8,375         16,312         37,646   

Barclaycard

             38,376                 38,376   

Investment Bank

                     106,377         106,377   

Head Office and Other Operations

                     3,240         3,240   

Total Core

     148,981         70,588         190,806         410,375   

Barclays Non-Core

     18,540         1,779         44,639         64,958   

Group Total

     167,521         72,367         235,445         475,333   

Analysis of the concentration of credit risk

A concentration of credit risk exists when a number of counterparties are located in a geographical region or are engaged in similar activities and have similar economic characteristics that would cause their ability to meet contractual obligations to be similarly affected by changes in economic or other conditions. The Group implements limits on concentrations in order to mitigate the risk. The analyses of credit risk concentrations presented below are based on the location of the counterparty or customer or the industry in which they are engaged. Further detail on the Group’s policies with regard to managing concentration risk is presented on page 126 of the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

Geographic concentrations

As at 31 December 2015, the geographic concentration of the Group’s assets remained broadly consistent with 2014. 40% (2014: 38%) of the exposure is concentrated in the UK, 31% (2014: 31%) in the Americas and 20% (2014: 22%) in Europe.

Information on exposures to selected Eurozone countries is presented on page 152.

 

Credit risk concentrations by geography (audited)

  

As at 31 December 2015

    
 
 
United
Kingdom
£m
  
  
  
    

 

Europe

£m

  

  

    
 
Americas
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Africa and
Middle East
£m
  
  
  
    

 

Asia

£m

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

On-balance sheet:

                 

Cash and balances at central banks

     14,061         19,094         13,288         2,055         1,213         49,711   

Items in the course of collection from other banks

     543         72                 396                 1,011   

Trading portfolio assets

     7,150         10,012         23,641         2,111         5,136         48,050   

Financial assets designated at fair value

     22,991         5,562         35,910         3,039         1,682         69,184   

Derivative financial instruments

     99,658         103,498         101,592         3,054         19,907         327,709   

Loans and advances to banks

     10,733         9,918         13,078         2,900         4,720         41,349   

Loans and advances to customers

     239,086         47,372         69,803         33,461         9,495         399,217   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinga

     5,905         4,361         15,684         915         1,322         28,187   

Available for sale debt securities

     20,509         40,344         20,520         3,999         3,906         89,278   

Other assets

     868         4         131         314         93         1,410   

Total on-balance sheet

     421,504         240,237         293,647         52,244         47,474         1,055,106   

Off-balance sheet:

                 

Contingent liabilities

     9,543         3,020         5,047         2,505         461         20,576   

Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions

     594         58                 193                 845   

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsb

     9         5         65                 14         93   

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

     104,797         34,370         125,456         13,600         3,146         281,369   

Total off-balance sheet

     114,943         37,453         130,568         16,298         3,621         302,883   

Total

     536,447         277,690         424,215         68,542         51,095         1,357,989   

Note

a  During 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
b  Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements were previously disclosed as loan commitments. Following the business designation of reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements at fair value through profit and loss, new forward starting reverse repurchase agreements are within the scope of IAS 39 and are recognised as derivatives on the balance sheet.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  151


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

Credit risk concentrations by geography (audited)

  

As at 31 December 2014

    
 
 
United
Kingdom
£m
  
  
  
    

 

Europe

£m

  

  

    
 
Americas
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Africa and
Middle East
£m
  
  
  
    

 

Asia

£m

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

On-balance sheet:

                 

Cash and balances at central banks

     13,770         12,224         9,365         2,161         2,175         39,695   

Items in the course of collection from other banks

     644         158                 408                 1,210   

Trading portfolio assets

     12,921         15,638         31,061         2,498         6,572         68,690   

Financial assets designated at fair value

     21,274         1,591         3,986         2,999         501         30,351   

Derivative financial instruments

     133,400         147,421         129,771         2,332         26,985         439,909   

Loans and advances to banks

     7,472         12,793         13,227         3,250         5,369         42,111   

Loans and advances to customers

     241,543         60,018         76,561         39,241         10,404         427,767   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

     20,551         22,655         81,368         928         6,251         131,753   

Available for sale debt securities

     22,888         33,368         22,846         4,770         1,667         85,539   

Other assets

     837                 232         483         128         1,680   

Total on-balance sheet

     475,300         305,866         368,417         59,070         60,052         1,268,705   

Off-balance sheet:

                 

Acceptances, endorsements and other contingent liabilities

                 

Contingent liabilities

     10,222         2,542         5,517         2,757         225         21,263   

Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions

     851         36                 186         18         1,091   

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements

     4,462         5,936         701         2         2,755         13,856   

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

     108,025         34,886         116,343         14,911         2,150         276,315   

Total off-balance sheet

     123,560         43,400         122,561         17,856         5,148         312,525   

Total

     598,860         349,266         490,978         76,926         65,200         1,581,230   

Group exposures to specific countries (audited)

The Group recognises the credit and market risk resulting from the ongoing volatility in the Eurozone and continues to monitor events closely while taking coordinated steps to mitigate the risks associated with the challenging economic environment. These contingency plans have been reviewed and refreshed to ensure they remain effective.

The following table shows Barclays’ exposure to specific Eurozone countries monitored internally as being higher risk and thus being the subject of particular management focus. The basis of preparation is consistent with that described in the 2014 Annual Report.

The net exposure provides the most appropriate measure of the credit risk to which the Group is exposed. The gross exposure is also presented below, alongside off-balance sheet contingent liabilities and commitments.

During 2015, the Group’s net on-balance sheet exposures to Spain, Italy, Portugal, Ireland, Cyprus and Greece decreased by £17.2bn to £26.1bn primarily due to a £13.4bn reduction in Spain following the sale of the Spanish business. The £7.0bn decrease in residential mortgages relates predominantly to Portuguese and Italian loans reclassified to held for sale within the Financial institutions category.

As at 31 December 2015, the local net funding deficit in Italy was 3.8bn (2014: 9.9bn) and the deficit in Portugal was 1.4bn (2014: 1.9bn). The net funding surplus in Spain was 0.2bn (2014: 4.3bn).

 

Net exposure by country and counterparty (audited)

  

      
 
Sovereign
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Financial
institutions
£m
  
  
  
    
 
Corporate
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Residential
mortgages
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Other retail
lending

£m

  
  

  

    

 
 
 
 

Net

on-balance
sheet
exposure
£m

  

  
  
  
  

    
 
 
 
 
Gross
on-balance
sheet
exposure
£m
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Contingent
liabilities and
commitments
£m
  
  
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

                       

Spain

     90         623         1,176         7         311         2,207         7,944         2,073   

Italy

     1,708         2,283         1,039         9,505         675         15,210         20,586         2,701   

Portugal

     87         3,346         152         6         700         4,291         4,555         1,299   

Ireland

     9         2,824         1,282         37         51         4,203         7,454         2,673   

Cyprus

     29         6         59         16         46         156         391         1   

Greece

     1         3         14         4         3         25         975           

Total

     1,924         9,085         3,722         9,575         1,786         26,092         41,905         8,747   

As at 31 December 2014

                       

Spain

     108         14,043         1,149         12         248         15,560         24,873         2,863   

Italy

     1,716         485         1,128         13,530         1,114         17,973         25,967         3,033   

Portugal

     105         7         531         2,995         1,207         4,845         5,050         1,631   

Ireland

     37         3,175         1,453         43         50         4,758         9,445         2,070   

Cyprus

     28         12         61         6         16         123         707         26   

Greece

     1         11         15                         27         1,279           

Total

     1,995         17,733         4,337         16,586         2,635         43,286         67,321         9,623   

Other country risks being closely monitored include exposures to Russia and China.

Net exposure to Russia of £1.4bn (2014: £1.9bn) largely consists of retail loans and advances of £1.0bn (2014: £0.6bn). The retail loans and advances are predominantly secured against property in the UK and south of France. Gross exposure to Russia was £2.5bn (2014: £3.8bn) including derivative assets with financial institutions. The gross exposure is mitigated by offsetting derivative liabilities.

Net exposure to China of £3.7bn (2014: £4.8bn) largely consists of loans and advances (mainly cash collateral and settlement balances) to sovereign

 

152  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

of £1.4bn (2014: £1.7bn) and financial institutions of £1.1bn (2014: £1.4bn). The gross exposure to China excluding offsetting derivative liabilities was £3.9bn (2014: £5.0bn).

Industrial concentrations (audited)

As at 31 December 2015, the industrial concentration of the Group’s assets remained broadly consistent year on year. 42% (2014: 49%) of total assets were concentrated towards banks and other financial institutions, predominantly within derivative financial instruments which decreased during the year. The proportion of the overall balance concentrated towards governments and central banks remained stable at 12% (2014: 11%) and home loans at 12% (2014: 12%).

 

Credit risk concentrations by industry (audited)

  

As at 31 December 2015

   

 

Banks

£m

  

  

   
 
 
 
 
Other
financial
insti-
tutions
£m
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Manu-
facturing
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
Const-
ruction
and
property
£m
 
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 

 

Govern-
ment and
central
bank

£m

  
  
  
  

  

   
 

 

 

Energy
and

water

£m

  
  

  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Wholesale
and retail
distribu-
tion and
leisure

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
Business
and other
services
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

Home
loans

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 
 

 

Cards,
unsecured
loans and
other
personal
lending

£m

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

   

 

Other

£m

  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

On-balance sheet:

                       

Cash and balances at central banks

                                49,711                                                  49,711   

Items in the course of collection from other banks

    1,011                                                                              1,011   

Trading portfolio assets

    1,897        11,826        970        538        25,797        2,554        315        2,727        550               876        48,050   

Financial assets designated at fair value

    14,015        35,109        104        8,642        7,380        33        191        3,402        229               79        69,184   

Derivative financial instruments

    185,782        114,727        2,701        2,940        6,113        4,538        1,063        5,346                      4,499        327,709   

Loans and advances to banks

    36,829                             4,520                                                  41,349   

Loans and advances to customers

           80,729        12,297        23,519        5,940        7,743        13,830        25,728        155,863        60,162        13,406        399,217   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinga

    8,676        18,022               1,011        305               35        138                             28,187   

Available for sale debt securities

    9,745        6,114        68        43        67,645        182        107        5,134                      240        89,278   

Other assets

    312        1,077                      20                                           1        1,410   

Total on-balance sheet

    258,267        267,604        16,140        36,693        167,431        15,050        15,541        42,475        156,642        60,162        19,101        1,055,106   

Off-balance sheet:

                       

Contingent liabilities

    1,152        4,698        3,142        958        9        3,073        1,301        4,645        100        548        950        20,576   

Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions

    378        17        142        1               3        129        50               123        2        845   

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsb

    78        15                                                                       93   

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

    946        31,152        35,865        11,337        871        26,217        15,054        23,180        11,708        111,988        13,051        281,369   

Total off-balance sheet

    2,554        35,882        39,149        12,296        880        29,293        16,484        27,875        11,808        112,659        14,003        302,883   

Total

    260,821        303,486        55,289        48,989        168,311        44,343        32,025        70,350        168,450        172,821        33,104        1,357,989   

Net on-balance sheet exposure to the Oil and Gas sector was £4.4bn (2014: £5.8bn), with contingent liabilities and commitments to this sector of £13.8bn (2014: £12.5bn). Impairment charges were £106m (2014: £1m). The ratio of the Group’s total net exposures classified as strong or satisfactory was 97% (2014: 99%) of the total net exposure to credit risk in this sector.

If average oil prices remained at $30 per barrel throughout 2016, estimated additional impairment of approximately £250m would result. If average oil prices were to reduce to $25 per barrel throughout 2016, estimated additional impairment of approximately £450m would result.

 

Note

a During 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
b Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements were previously disclosed as loan commitments. Following the business designation of reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements at fair value through profit and loss, new forward starting reverse repurchase agreements are within the scope of IAS 39 and recognised as derivatives on the balance sheet.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  153


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

Credit risk concentrations by industry (audited)

  

                                                                       

As at 31 December 2014

   

 

Banks

£m

  

  

   
 
 
 
 
Other
financial
insti-
tutions
£m
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Manu-
facturing
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
Const-
ruction
and
property
£m
 
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 

 

Govern-
ment and
central
bank

£m

  
  
  
  

  

   
 

 

 

Energy
and

water

£m

  
  

  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Wholesale
and retail
distribu-
tion and
leisure

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
Business
and other
services
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

Home
loans

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 
 

 

Cards,
unsecured
loans and
other
personal
lending

£m

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

   

 

Other

£m

  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

On-balance sheet:

                       

Cash and balances at central banks

                                39,695                                                  39,695   

Items in the course of collection from other banks

    1,210                                                                              1,210   

Trading portfolio assets

    2,894        17,718        1,466        593        39,201        2,745        385        2,751                      937        68,690   

Financial assets designated at fair value

    5,113        1,548        70        9,358        10,378        73        207        3,127        393               84        30,351   

Derivative financial instruments

    257,463        149,050        2,519        3,454        7,691        7,794        1,510        6,227                      4,201        439,909   

Loans and advances to banks

    40,265                             1,846                                                  42,111   

Loans and advances to customers

           103,388        11,647        22,842        7,115        8,536        13,339        22,372        166,974        58,914        12,640        427,767   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

    38,946        86,588               4,845        739               24        611                             131,753   

Available for sale debt securities

    11,122        8,365        68        45        61,341        194        27        4,084                      293        85,539   

Other assets

    635        995               14        24                      12                             1,680   

Total on-balance sheet

    357,648        367,652        15,770        41,151        168,030        19,342        15,492        39,184        167,367        58,914        18,155        1,268,705   

Off-balance sheet:

                       

Contingent liabilities

    1,159        5,177        2,709        698               2,757        1,157        6,496        45        191        874        21,263   

Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions

    470        12        197        14               1        218        62        55        28        34        1,091   

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements

    2,128        11,724                      4                                                  13,856   

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

    2,643        29,645        28,589        11,449        2,400        24,830        12,771        24,534        16,119        110,091        13,244        276,315   

Total off-balance sheet

    6,400        46,558        31,495        12,161        2,404        27,588        14,146        31,092        16,219        110,310        14,152        312,525   

Total

    364,048        414,210        47,265        53,312        170,434        46,930        29,638        70,276        183,586        169,224        32,307        1,581,230   

 

154  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Analysis of specific portfolios and asset types

This section provides an analysis of principal portfolios and businesses in the retail and wholesale segments. In particular, home loans, credit cards, overdrafts and unsecured loans are covered for retail segments while exposures in Investment Bank and PCB including watch list analysis are covered for wholesale segments.

In general, benign economic conditions in the UK and US aided better performance in 2015. South African portfolios were resilient despite challenging market conditions with economic growth being affected by weak manufacturing and low commodity prices.

Secured home loans

Total home loans to retail customers of £156bn (2014: £161bn) represented 75% (2014: 72%) of the Group’s total retail balances. The reduction in balances was principally driven by: Portuguese home loans and part of the Italian home loans portfolio being redesignated as held for sale; and, South African home loans due to the depreciation of the Rand.

The two principal portfolios listed below account for 88% of home loans in the Group’s retail portfolios, and comprise first lien mortgages.

 

Home loans principal portfolios

  

      
 
 
 
Gross loans
and
advances
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 

 

>90 day
arrears

%

  
  

  

    
 
 
 
 

 

Non-
performing
proportion of
outstanding
balances

%

  
  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 

 

Gross
charge-off
rates

%

  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 

 

Recoveries
proportion of
outstanding
balances

%

  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 

 

Recoveries
impairment
coverage
ratio

%

  
  
  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                 

PCB – UK

     127,750         0.2         0.7         0.3         0.4         10.1   

Africa Banking – South Africa

     9,180         0.9         4.0         1.6         3.2         26.4   

As at 31 December 2014

                 

PCB – UK

     126,668         0.2         0.6         0.4         0.4         8.3   

Africa Banking – South Africa

     11,513         0.7         4.8         1.9         4.1         31.1   

PCB – UK: Portfolio performance remained steady reflecting the continuing low base rate environment, house price appreciation, and benign economic conditions.

Within the UK home loans portfolio:

 

§   owner-occupied interest only home loans comprised 32% (2014: 33%) of total balances. The average balance weighted LTV on these loans reduced to 44.7% (2014: 48.7%), and >90 day arrears remained broadly steady at 0.2% (2014: 0.1%)

 

§   buy-to-let home loans comprised 9% (2014: 8%) of total balances. The average balance weighted LTV reduced to 54.6% (2014: 57.6%), and >90 day arrears remained steady at 0.2% (2014: 0.1%).

The recoveries impairment coverage increased to 10.1% (2014: 8.3%). In 2015, management adjustments to impairment allowances were better aligned to appropriate segments of the portfolio, resulting in a reduction of the impairment allocated to the recoveries book. The overall impairment coverage of the total home loans portfolio remained unchanged.

Africa Banking – South Africa: Gross loans and advances reduced by 20%, primarily driven by the depreciation of the Rand and repayments on the existing book. The improvement in the charge-off rates to 1.6% (2014: 1.9%) resulted from the focus on collections strategies and reduced rolls through delinquency cycles.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  155


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

Home loans principal portfolios – distribution of balances by LTVa

  

   
 
Distribution of
balances
  
  
   
 
Impairment coverage
ratio
  
  
   
 
 
Non-performing
proportion of
outstanding balances
  
  
  
   
 
 
Non-performing
balances impairment
coverage ratio
  
  
  
   
 
 
Recoveries proportion
of outstanding
balances
  
  
  
   
 
 
Recoveries
impairment coverage
ratio
  
  
  

As at 31 December

   
 
2015
%
  
  
   
 
2014
%
  
  
   

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

   

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

   

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

   

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

   

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

PCB UK

                       

<=75%

    92.1        90.2        0.1               0.6        0.6        4.7        2.8        0.4        0.3        6.8        4.6   

>75% and <=80%

    3.4        4.2        0.2        0.2        1.0        1.2        13.5        6.9        0.8        0.8        15.7        9.2   

>80% and <=85%

    2.1        2.3        0.3        0.2        1.0        1.4        16.7        8.9        0.7        0.9        21.4        11.3   

>85% and <=90%

    1.4        1.4        0.3        0.4        1.3        1.7        15.7        13.0        1.0        1.3        17.8        15.9   

>90% and <=95%

    0.6        1.0        0.6        0.4        1.8        1.9        25.7        13.7        1.5        1.3        28.2        17.8   

>95% and <=100%

    0.2        0.4        1.3        1.0        4.0        2.9        25.4        21.4        3.5        2.2        27.9        26.4   

>100%

    0.2        0.5        3.4        2.4        7.0        6.0        35.6        28.6        5.6        4.3        41.2        36.1   

Africa Banking –

                       

South Africa

                       

<=75%

    76.1        74.6        0.7        0.7        0.6        0.5        13.6        16.2        1.8        1.9        17.9        20.4   

>75% and <=80%

    6.8        7.7        1.6        1.5        1.0        0.9        18.4        20.0        3.3        3.0        21.4        23.5   

>80% and <=85%

    5.3        5.9        1.9        2.0        1.0        1.1        19.2        21.1        3.5        4.2        21.1        23.7   

>85% and <=90%

    3.8        4.3        2.3        2.5        0.9        1.0        20.2        22.3        4.8        5.1        21.8        24.3   

>90% and <=95%

    2.6        2.5        3.7        4.3        1.2        1.4        23.8        26.3        5.9        8.7        24.2        27.6   

>95% and <=100%

    1.8        1.5        4.8        5.4        1.3        1.5        25.6        23.4        7.8        11.6        26.0        24.1   

>100%

    2.8        3.5        14.1        16.4        1.9        1.9        29.7        32.5        26.7        37.1        29.7        32.9   

 

Home loans principal portfolios – Average LTV

                               
    PCB – UK        Africa Banking – South Africa   

As at 31 December

   

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

   

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

Portfolio marked to market LTV (%):

       

Balance weighted

    49.2        51.6        58.4        59.9   

Valuation weighted

    37.3        39.8        39.1        40.2   

Performing balances (%):

       

Balance weighted

    48.8        51.5        57.5        58.6   

Valuation weighted

    37.3        39.7        38.6        39.5   

Non-performing balances (%):

       

Balance weighted

    56.5        62.1        79.3        87.0   

Valuation weighted

    45.1        49.8        59.3        64.7   

For >100% LTVs:

       

Balances (£m)

    310        641        257        390   

Marked to market collateral (£m)

    260        558        218        324   

Average LTV: balance weighted (%)

      123.0        120.9        121.1        124.2   

Average LTV: valuation weighted (%)

    118.5          114.8        117.7        120.3   

% of balances in recoveries

    5.6        4.4        26.6        37.1   

Balance weighted LTV in the UK reduced to 49.2% (2014: 51.6%) due to an increase in average house prices, particularly in London and the South East. The overall non-performing impairment coverage in the UK remained flat year on year but increased across LTV ranges, due to granular alignment of management adjustments across portfolio segments.

PCB – UK: The house price appreciation resulted in a 52% reduction in home loans that have LTV >100% to £310m (2014: £641m).

Africa Banking – South Africa: Balances with >100% LTV reduced 34% to £257m (2014: £390m), primarily due to a reduction in the size of the recovery book as older and higher risk loans were written off, in addition to the depreciation of the Rand.

 

Home loans principal portfolios – new lending

                               
    PCB – UK        Africa Banking – South Africa   

As at 31 December

    2015        2014        2015        2014   

New bookings (£m)

      18,812        20,349        1,621        1,590   

New mortgages proportion above 85% LTV (%)

    8.2        6.6        40.8        33.5   

Average LTV on new mortgages: balance weighted (%)

    63.9        64.8        75.7        74.8   

Average LTV on new mortgages: valuation weighted (%)

    55.0        57.0        66.9        65.4   

PCB – UK: New lending during 2015 reduced by 8%, reflecting an unchanged risk profile against heightened market activity in the prime residential segment.

Africa Banking – South Africa: The proportion of new home loans with LTV above 85% increased to 40.8% (2014: 33.5%) due to a revised strategy which allowed a greater proportion of higher LTV loans to be booked for lower risk customers.

Note

a Portfolio marked to market based on the most updated valuation including recoveries balances. Updated valuations reflect the application of the latest house price index available in the country as at 31 December 2015.

 

156  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Exposure to interest only owner-occupied home loans excluding part and part interest only (P&P IO)a

                 

As at 31 December

     2015         2014   

Interest only balances, excluding P&P IO (£m)

      33,901          35,328   

Interest only home loans maturity years (£m):

     

2016

     703         864   

2017

     1,043         1,180   

2018

     1,131         1,249   

2019

     1,080         1,195   

2020

     1,090         1,176   

2021-2025

     7,359         7,632   

Post 2025

     21,155         21,104   

Total Impairment coverage (bps)

     11         8   

Marked to market LTV: total balances (%)

     

Balance weighted

     44.7         48.7   

Valuation weighted

     34.7         37.6   

For >100% LTVs: (£m)

     

Balances

     178         349   

Marked to market collateral

     150         302   

Overview of performing portfolio

     

Performing balances (£m)

     33,690         35,155   

Marked to market LTV: performing balances (%)

     

Balance weighted

     44.6         48.6   

Valuation weighted

     34.6         37.5   

Overview of non-performing portfolio

     

Non-performing balances (£m)

     211         173   

Non-performing proportion of interest only balances excluding P&P IO (%)

     0.6         0.5   

Marked to market LTV: non-performing balances (%)

     

Balance weighted

     61.4         66.2   

Valuation weighted

     49.8         54.1   

Interest only mortgages account for £50bn (2014: £51bn) of the total balance of £128bn (2014: £127bn) of UK home loans. This comprised £40bn (2014: £42bn) to owner-occupied customers, and £10bn (2014: £9bn) to buy-to-let customers.

Of the £40bn exposure to owner-occupied customers, £34bn (2014: £35bn) was interest only, with the remaining £6bn (2014: £7bn) representing the interest only component of part and part mortgages.

The average balance weighted LTV for interest only owner-occupied balances reduced to 44.7% (2014: 48.7%) as property prices appreciated. The increase in impairment coverage to 11bps (2014: 8bps) was due to (i) enhancements in methodology, where management adjustments to impairment allowances were allocated on a more granular basis to their appropriate segments; and (ii) a broadening of the high risk definition used on interest only mortgages. The overall impairment coverage of the total home loans portfolio remained unchanged.

Exposures to mortgage current accounts (MCA) reserves

The MCA reserve is a secured overdraft facility previously available to home loan customers in the UK on either a fully amortising or interest only mortgage loan, which allows them to borrow against the equity in their home. It permits draw-down up to an agreed available limit on a separate but connected account to the main mortgage loan facility. The balance drawn must be repaid on redemption of the mortgage.

Of the total 917k home loan customers in the UK, 442k have MCA reserves, with total reserve limits of £11.3bn (2014: £17.9bn).

 

As at 31 December

     2015         2014   

Total outstanding of home loans with MCA reserve balances (£bn)

          53.6              62.2   

As a proportion of outstanding UK home loan balances (%)

     42.0         49.1   

Home loan customers with active reserves (000s)

     442         505   

Total reserve limits (£bn)

     11.3         17.9   

Utilisation rate (%)

     48.9         32.3   

Utilisation (£bn)

     5.5         5.8   

Marked to market LTV: balance weighted (%)

     43.7         47.7   

Total outstanding balances which are an aggregate of the mortgage account and the drawn reserve, reduced 14% to £53.6bn (2014: £62.2bn), during the period reflecting paydowns in the main mortgage account.

Reduction in portfolio reserve limits to £11.3bn (2014: £17.9bn) is due to an active limit management programme, combined with natural mortgage redemptions from the existing book during the period. As a result, the utilisation rate increased to 48.9% (2014: 32.3%). MCA balances have remained broadly stable at £5.5bn (2014: £5.8bn), while the average balance weighted LTV reduced to 43.7% (2014: 47.7%) due to an increase in average house prices and repayment on the main mortgage loan.

Although the product has been withdrawn from sale, existing customers can continue to draw against their available reserves.

Note

a A part and part home loan is a product in which part of the loan is interest only and part is amortising. Analysis excludes the interest only portion of the part and part book which contributes £6.2bn (2014: £6.6bn) to the total owner occupied interest only balance of the £40.1bn (2014: £41.9bn). The total exposure on part and part book is £9.9bn (2014, £9.8bn) and represents 8% of total UK home loans portfolio.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  157


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

Credit cards, overdrafts, and unsecured loans

The principal portfolios listed below accounted for 91% (2014: 88%) of the Group’s credit cards, overdrafts and unsecured loans.

 

Principal portfolios

    
 
 
 
Gross loans
and
advances
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 

 

30 day
arrears,
excluding
recoveries

%

  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 

 

90 day
arrears,
excluding
recoveries

%

  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 

 

Gross
charge-off
rates

%

  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 
 

 

Recoveries
proportion
of
outstanding
balances

%

  
  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 

 

Recoveries
impairment
coverage
ratio

%

  
  
  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                 

Barclaycard

                 

UK cardsa

     18,502         2.3         1.2         5.2         3.6         82.6   

US cardsa

     16,699         2.2         1.1         3.9         2.0         84.8   

Barclays Partner Finance

     3,986         1.5         0.6         2.4         2.5         85.2   

Germany cards

     1,419         2.3         1.0         3.8         2.7         81.2   

Personal & Corporate Banking

                 

UK personal loans

     5,476         1.9         0.8         3.0         7.5         73.9   

Africa Banking

                 

South Africa cards

     1,886         8.5         5.0         8.4         7.4         72.6   

As at 31 December 2014

                 

Barclaycard

                 

UK cardsa

     17,447         2.5         1.2         4.3         4.9         87.6   

US cardsa

     14,005         2.1         1.0         3.7         1.8         87.1   

Barclays Partner Finance

     3,399         1.5         0.7         2.4         2.7         76.8   

Germany cards

     1,355         2.5         1.1         3.8         3.4         82.8   

Personal & Corporate Banking

                 

UK personal loans

     4,953         2.0         0.9         3.4         10.0         76.3   

Africa Banking

                 

South Africa cards

     2,364         8.1         4.6         7.6         5.9         75.7   

UK cards: In 2015, both early and late stage arrears remained stable within UK cards. The increase in charge-off rate and the reduction in recoveries as a proportion of outstanding was due to the acceleration of delinquent accounts to charge-off prior to debt sale. The decrease in recovery coverage ratio was driven by enhancements to impairment methodology, which took into account the improvement in recoveries and the impact of debt sales.

US cards: Gross loans and advances increased 19% to £16.7bn (2014: £14bn) principally driven by increased new business volumes. Arrears and charge-off rates remained broadly in line with 2014. The decrease in recoveries impairment coverage ratio was due to enhancements to impairment methodology and improvements in recovery expectation.

UK personal loans: Arrears and charge-off rates fell despite a 11% growth in gross loans and advances and reflected the benign economic conditions in the UK.

Barclays Partner Finance: Gross loans and advances increased 17% to £4.0bn (2014: £3.4bn). Portfolio arrears and charge-off rates remained broadly steady in 2015. The recoveries impairment coverage ratio increased following a management adjustment for the secured motor segment (portfolio started in 2012), which took into account changes to expected recoveries performance as the portfolio matured.

Germany cards: The decrease in recoveries proportion of outstanding balances was due to write off of legacy accounts previously held in recoveries until system migration activities were concluded.

South Africa cards: The increased arrears reflected bookings growth in 2015 in line with business strategy and weaker economic conditions. The gross charge-off rate and the recoveries proportion of outstanding balances percentage increased during 2015 due to additional charge-off in the Edcon portfolio as it was aligned with the Group’s charge-off policy.

 

Note

a For UK and US cards, outstanding recoveries balances for acquired portfolios recognised at fair value (which have no related impairment allowance) have been excluded from the recoveries impairment coverage ratio. Losses have been recognised where related to additional spend from acquired accounts in the period post acquisition.

 

158  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Exposure to UK Commercial Real Estate (CRE)

The UK CRE portfolio includes property investment, development, trading, and house builders but excludes social housing and contractors.

 

UK CRE summary

                 
       2015         2014   

As at 31 December

     

UK CRE loans and advances (£m)

     11,617         11,681   

Past due balances (£m)

     183         393   

Balances past due as % of UK CRE balances (%)

     1.6         3.4   

Impairment allowances (£m)

     99         100   

Past due coverage ratio (%)

     54.1         25.7   

Total collateral (£m)a

     27,062         25,205   

Twelve months ended 31 December

     

Impairment charge (£m)

     4         23   

 

Maturity analysis of exposure to UK CRE

                                                                       
     Contractual maturity of UK CRE loans and advances at amortised cost              

As at 31 December

    
 
 
Past due
balances
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Not more
than
six months
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
 
Over
six months
but not
more than
one year
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
 
Over
one year
but not
more than
two years
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
 
Over
two years
but not
more than
five years
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
 
Over
five years
but not
more than
ten years
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
Over
ten years
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
Total loans
& advances
£m
  
  
  

2015

     183         801         751         941         5,779         1,076         2,087         11,617   

2014

     393         838         839         1,287         4,161         1,939         2,224         11,681   

Total loans and advances at amortised cost remained broadly stable at £11.6bn (2014: £11.7bn) with growth limited to high quality assets. The total collateral increased by 7% to £27.1bn.

The UK CRE businesses operate to specific lending criteria and the portfolio of assets is continually monitored through a range of mandates and limits. The improvement in the past due coverage ratio in 2015 was driven by the sale of three unimpaired real estate loans.

 

UK CRE LTV analysis

                                                     
     Balances        
 
Balances as proportion
of total
  
  
     Collateral held   

As at 31 December

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

    

 

2015

%

  

  

    

 

2014

%

  

  

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

Group

                 

<=100%

     9,045         9,011         78         78         26,927         25,036   

>100% and <=125%

     119         149         1         1         106         138   

>125%

     47         167                 1         29         31   

Unassessed balancesb

     1,636         1,748         14         15                   

Unsecured balances

     770         606         7         5                   

Total

     11,617         11,681         100         100         27,062         25,205   

Portfolio LTVs have reduced due to appreciating commercial property values. Unsecured balances primarily relate to working capital facilities granted to CRE companies.

 

Notes

a Based on the most recent valuation assessment.
b Corporate Banking balances under £1m.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  159


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

Investment Bank

Analysis of loans and advances at amortised cost

  

                                            
      
 
Gross L&A
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Impairment
allowance
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
L&A net of
impairment
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Credit risk
loans

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

CRLs % of
gross L&A

%

  
  

  

    
 
 
 
Loan
impairment
charges
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 

 

Loan loss
rates

bps

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                    

Loans and advances to banks

                    

Interbank lending

     10,174                 10,174                         –          –    

Cash collateral and settlement balances

     7,259                 7,259                         –          –    

Loans and advances to customers

                    

Wholesale lending

     31,451         83         31,368         241         0.8         47          15    

Cash collateral and settlement balances

     43,437                 43,437                         –          –    

Total

     92,321         83         92,238         241         0.3         47            

As at 31 December 2014

                    

Loans and advances to banks

                    

Interbank lending

     10,275                 10,275                         (3)         (3)   

Cash collateral and settlement balances

     9,626                 9,626                         –          –    

Loans and advances to customers

                    

Wholesale lending

     28,436         44         28,392         71         0.2         (11)         (4)   

Cash collateral and settlement balances

     58,040                 58,040                         –          –    

Total

     106,377         44         106,333         71         0.1         (14)         (1)   

Non-Core Wholesale

The table below details Non-Core loans and advances which form part of the Wholesale risk portfolio.

 

Analysis of loans and advances at amortised cost

  

                                            
      
 
Gross L&A
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Impairment
allowance
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
L&A net of
impairment
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Credit risk
loans

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

CRLs % of
gross L&A

%

  
  

  

    
 
 
 
Loan
impairment
charges
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 

 

Loan loss
rates

bps

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                    

Loans and advances to banks

                    

Interbank lending

     258                 258                         (7)         (271)   

Cash collateral and settlement balances

     10,131                 10,131                         –          –    

Loans and advances to customers

                    

Wholesale lending

     5,277         233         5,044         345         6.5         (13)         (25)   

Cash collateral and settlement balances

     19,188                 19,188                         –          –    

Total

     34,854         233         34,621         345         1.0         (20)         (6)   

As at 31 December 2014

                    

Loans and advances to banks

                    

Interbank lending

     373                 373                         –          –    

Cash collateral and settlement balances

     11,622                 11,622                         –          –    

Loans and advances to customers

                    

Wholesale lending

     8,978         602         8,376         841         9.4         53          59    

Cash collateral and settlement balances

     23,726                 23,726                         –          –    

Total

     44,699         602         44,097         841         1.9         53          12    

Wholesale lending decreased £3.7bn to £5.3bn driven by the reclassification of Portuguese loans now held for sale and rundown of legacy loan portfolios. Wholesale loans predominantly relate to capital equipment loans, legacy Collateralised Loan Obligations (CLO) and legacy Collateralised Debt Obligations (CDO).

Loan impairment charges improved £73m to a release of £20m reflecting higher recoveries in Europe and the sale of the Spanish business.

CRLs decreased to £345m (2014: £841m) as a result of the reclassification of Portuguese loans now held for sale and continued rundown of the Non-Core Investment Bank portfolio.

 

160  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Wholesale Personal and Corporate Banking

The table below details Personal and Corporate Banking loans and advances which form part of the Wholesale risk portfolio.

 

Analysis of loans and advances at amortised cost

                                                              
      
 
Gross L&A
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Impairment
allowance
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
L&A net of
impairment
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Credit risk
loans

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

CRLs % of
gross L&A

%

  
  

  

    
 
 
 
Loan
impairment
charges
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 

 

Loan loss
rates

bps

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                    

Banks

     3,593                 3,593                                   

Other financial institutions

     6,321         16         6,305         46         0.7         2         3   

Manufacturing

     6,762         37         6,725         51         0.8         2         3   

Construction

     3,267         38         3,229         47         1.4         1         3   

Property

     15,309         166         15,143         645         4.2         2         1   

Government and central bank

     1,304                 1,304                                   

Energy and water

     2,216         79         2,137         103         4.6         82         370   

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

     11,333         165         11,168         261         2.3         (8      (7

Business and other services

     16,536         223         16,313         271         1.6         54         33   

Home loansa

     5,730         20         5,710         142         2.5                   

Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lendinga

     8,714         1         8,713         14         0.2         4         5   

Other

     6,770         169         6,601         214         3.2         43         64   

Total

     87,855         914         86,941         1,794         2.0         182         21   

As at 31 December 2014b

                    

Banks

     5,507                 5,507                         1         2   

Other financial institutions

     5,357         13         5,344         85         1.6         26         49   

Manufacturing

     7,174         47         7,127         106         1.5                   

Construction

     3,094         40         3,054         58         1.9         7         21   

Property

     15,480         194         15,286         833         5.4         36         23   

Government and central bank

     1,187                 1,187                                   

Energy and water

     1,950         2         1,948         2         0.1         3         16   

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

     10,928         175         10,753         342         3.1         56         52   

Business and other services

     14,160         177         13,983         344         2.4         54         38   

Home loansa

     6,864         36         6,828         96         1.4         34         50   

Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

     9,628         60         9,568         16         0.2         22         23   

Other

     6,863         129         6,734         229         3.3         28         40   

Total

     88,192         873         87,319         2,111         2.4         267         30   

Wholesale PCB loans and advances and CRLs remained broadly stable at £87.9bn (2014: £88.2bn) and £1.8bn (2014: £2.1bn) respectively.

Loan impairment charges improved 32% to £182m due to the benign economic environment in the UK. This led to a decrease in the loan loss rate to 21bps (2014: 30bps).

Analysis of Wholesale balances on watch list

Wholesale accounts that are deemed to contain heightened levels of risk are recorded on a graded watch list comprising four categories graded in line with the perceived severity of the risk attached to the lending, and its probability of default:

 

§   Category 1: a temporary classification for performing obligors who exhibit some unsatisfactory features

 

§   Category 2: performing obligors where some doubt exists, but the belief is that the obligor can meet obligations over the short term

 

§   Category 3: obligors where definite concern exists with well defined weaknesses and failure in the short term could arise should further deterioration occur

 

§   Category 4: non-performing obligors, insolvent or regulatory default. High risk of loss.

Where an obligor’s financial health gives grounds for concern, it is immediately placed into the appropriate category. For more information please see page 111 in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

 

 

Notes

a Included in the above analysis are Wealth and Investment Management exposures measured on an individual customer exposure basis.
b UK Business Banking has been reclassified from Retail to Wholesale in line with how the business is now managed. 2014 figures have been restated to reflect this, with net loans and advances of £8.4bn, credit risk loans of £482m and impairment charges of £48m being reclassified to Wholesale.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  161


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

Watch list rating of wholesale balancesa

                                                                                         
     Watch list 1         Watch list 2         Watch list 3         Watch list 4         Total   

As at 31 December

    
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  
    
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  
    
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  
    
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  
    
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  

Energy and Water

     1,247         160         314         1,011         447         480         285         49         2,293         1,700   

Manufacturing

     928         483         539         347         138         162         267         395         1,872         1,387   

Agriculture, Forestry, Fishing & Miscellaneous Activities

     425         277         496         517         544         324         275         445         1,740         1,563   

Wholesale and Retail, Distribution and Leisure

     626         249         582         939         272         388         260         536         1,740         2,112   

Property

     424         513         410         600         378         1,458         498         1,212         1,710         3,782   

Business and Other Services

     220         241         516         583         639         214         149         157         1,524         1,196   

Transport

     86         98         121         148         208         285         98         111         513         641   

Construction

     65         47         175         131         108         136         84         147         432         461   

Financial Institutions/Services

     (59      29         69         391         62         345         302         325         374         1,090   

Other

     53         75         69         91         119         72         88         29         329         268   

Total

     4,015         2,172         3,291         4,758         2,915         3,865         2,306         3,405         12,527         14,200   

As a percentage of total balances

     32%         15%         26%         34%         23%         27%         19%         24%         100%         100%   

Total watch list balances fell by 12% to £12.5bn principally reflecting the sale of the corporate business in Spain.

Total watch list balances to energy and water increased by 35% to £2,293m (2014: £1,700m), reflecting the increased stress in the oil and gas sector as a result of the oil price. Watch list balances in manufacturing increased due to increased stress in the automotive sector.

Analysis of debt securities

Debt securities include government securities held as part of the Group’s treasury management portfolio for liquidity and regulatory purposes, and are for use on a continuing basis in the activities of the Group.

The following tables provide an analysis of debt securities held by the Group for trading and investment purposes by issuer type, and where the Group held government securities exceeding 10% of shareholders’ equity.

Further information on the credit quality of debt securities is presented on pages 148 and 149. Further disclosure on sovereign exposures to selected Eurozone countries is presented on page 152.

 

Debt securities

                                   
     2015         2014   

As at 31 December

     £m         %         £m         %   

Of which issued by:

           

Governments and other public bodies

     96,537         70.9         106,292         68.1   

Corporate and other issuers

     26,166         19.2         29,557         19.0   

US agency

     8,927         6.6         11,460         7.3   

Mortgage and asset backed securities

     4,009         2.9         8,396         5.4   

Bank and building society certificates of deposit

     598         0.4         279         0.2   

Total

     136,237         100.0         155,984         100.0   
           

Government securities

                                   

As at 31 December

                      

 

 

2015

Fair value

£m

  

  

  

    

 
 

2014

Fair value
£m

  

  
  

US

           26,119         32,096   

UK

           22,372         28,938   

France

           8,874         6,259   

Germany

                       6,619         7,801   

 

 

 

 

Note

a Balances represent on-balance sheet exposures and comprise PCB, Barclays Africa, Non-Core and Investment Bank.

 

162  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Analysis of derivatives (audited)

The tables below set out the fair value of the derivative assets, together with the value of those assets subject to enforceable counterparty netting arrangements for which the Group holds offsetting liabilities and eligible collateral.

 

Derivative assets

                                                     
     2015         2014   

As at 31 December

    
 
 
Balance
sheet assets
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Counterparty
netting

£m

  
  

  

    
 
 
Net
exposure
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
Balance
sheet assets
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Counterparty
netting

£m

  
  

  

    
 
 
Net
exposure
£m
  
  
  

Foreign exchange

     54,936         40,301         14,635         74,470         58,153         16,317   

Interest rate

     231,426         190,513         40,913         309,946         253,820         56,126   

Credit derivatives

     18,181         14,110         4,071         23,507         19,829         3,678   

Equity and stock index

     13,799         8,358         5,441         14,844         10,523         4,321   

Commodity derivatives

     9,367         6,300         3,067         17,142         11,306         5,836   

Total derivative assets

     327,709         259,582         68,127         439,909         353,631         86,278   

Cash collateral held

                       34,918                           44,047   

Net exposure less collateral

                       33,209                           42,231   

Derivative asset exposures would be £295bn (2014: £398bn) lower than reported under IFRS if netting were permitted for assets and liabilities with the same counterparty, or for which the Group holds cash collateral. Similarly, derivative liabilities would be £295bn (2014: £397bn) lower reflecting counterparty netting and collateral placed. In addition, non-cash collateral of £7bn (2014: £8bn) was held in respect of derivative assets. The Group received collateral from clients in support of over the counter derivative transactions. These transactions are generally undertaken under International Swaps and Derivative Association (ISDA) agreements governed by either UK or New York law.

Exposure relating to derivatives, repurchase agreements, reverse repurchase agreements, stock borrowing and loan transactions is calculated using internal PRA approved models. These are used as the basis to assess both regulatory capital and capital appetite and are managed on a daily basis. The methodology encompasses all relevant factors to enable the current value to be calculated and the future value to be estimated, for example, current market rates, market volatility and legal documentation (including collateral rights).

The table below sets out the fair value and notional amounts of Over the Counter (OTC) derivative instruments by type of collateral arrangement.

 

Derivatives by collateral arrangement

                                                     
     2015         2014   
    
 
 

 

Notional
contract
amount

£m

  
  
  

  

  

 

 

 

Fair value

 

  

    
 
 

 

Notional
contract
amount

£m

  
  
  

  

  

 

 

 

Fair value

 

  

         

 

Assets

£m

  

  

    

 

Liabilities

£m

  

  

       

 

Assets

£m

  

  

    

 

Liabilities

£m

  

  

Unilateral in favour of Barclays

                 

Foreign exchange

     15,645         242         (308      15,067         191         (158

Interest rate

     4,365         846         (65      5,826         940         (72

Credit derivatives

     277         2         (7      226         3         (4

Equity and stock index

     303         4         (146      310         3         (8

Commodity derivatives

     905         150         (30      2,455         158         (120

Total unilateral in favour of Barclays

     21,495         1,244         (556      23,884         1,295         (362

Unilateral in favour of counterparty

                 

Foreign exchange

     50,343         810         (2,107      24,861         681         (2,713

Interest rate

     121,231         4,436         (6,981      138,396         6,073         (8,751

Credit derivatives

     140         3         (1      403         6         (19

Equity and stock index

     827         100         (83      1,100         133         (137

Commodity derivatives

     74                 (3      2,881         359         (138

Total unilateral in favour of counterparty

     172,615         5,349         (9,175      167,641         7,252         (11,758

Bilateral arrangement

                 

Foreign exchange

     2,878,125         46,831         (50,899      3,350,366         67,496         (70,919

Interest rate

     7,315,345         197,900         (188,293      9,032,753         263,812         (256,697

Credit derivatives

     663,090         13,617         (11,985      887,041         18,290         (17,002

Equity and stock index

     144,108         4,991         (8,297      162,615         6,033         (10,498

Commodity derivatives

     36,794         3,164         (3,104      68,400         6,254         (6,377

Total bilateral arrangement

     11,037,462         266,503         (262,578      13,501,175         361,885         (361,493

Uncollateralised derivatives

                 

Foreign exchange

     271,819         7,008         (5,424      303,341         6,028         (5,452

Interest rate

     193,565         6,091         (2,907      199,615         8,572         (3,524

Credit derivatives

     7,881         467         (700      8,716         565         (800

Equity and stock index

     6,672         2,204         (3,075      5,789         2,115         (2,406

Commodity derivatives

     13,347         1,733         (1,667      26,099         2,806         (2,766

Total uncollateralised derivatives

     493,284         17,503         (13,773      543,560         20,086         (14,948

Total OTC derivative assets/(liabilities)

     11,724,856         290,599         (286,082      14,236,260         390,518         (388,561

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  163


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

Analysis of loans on concession programmes

Re-age activity

Re-age is applicable only to revolving products where a minimum due payment is required. Re-age refers to returning of a delinquent account to up to date status without collecting the full arrears (principal, interest and fees).

The following are the principal portfolios in which re-age activity occurs.

 

Principal portfolios – core portfolios

                          
     New re-ages in the year        
 
New re-ages as proportion
of total outstanding
  
  
    

 

30 day arrears at

12 months since re-age

  

  

As at 31 December

    
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  
    

 

2015

%

  

  

    

 

2014

%

  

  

    

 

2015

%

  

  

    

 

2014

%

  

  

UK cards

     117         163         0.7         1.0         40.5         43.4   

US cards

     36         31         0.2         0.2         47.2         46.8   

 

UK cards: The reduction of new to re-ages in the year is due to changes in operational and qualification criteria resulting in reduced volume of accounts qualifying for re-age. Enhanced criteria has also led to lower 30 day arrears at 12 months after re-age.

 

US cards: The increase in new to re-ages is in line with portfolio growth, the ratio as a proportion of total outstanding remained stable at 0.2%.

 

Re-age activity in South Africa and Europe card portfolios are not considered to be material. For further detail on policy relating to the re-ageing of loans, please refer to page 116 of the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

 

Forbearance

 

   

  

  

  

Analysis of forbearance programmes

                          
     Balances         Impairment allowance         Impairment coverage   

As at 31 December

    
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  
    

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

    

 

2015

%

  

  

    

 

2014

%

  

  

Personal and Corporate Bankinga

     589         931         33         63         5.6         6.8   

Africa Banking

     209         299         29         45         13.8         15.1   

Barclaycard

     729         972         247         394         33.9         40.5   

Barclays Core

     1,527         2,202         309         502         20.2         22.8   

Barclays Non-Core

     246         419         20         49         8.3         11.7   

Total retail

     1,773         2,621         329         551         18.5         21.0   

Investment Bank

     210         106         4         10         2.1         9.4   

Personal and Corporate Banking

     1,764         1,590         253         225         14.3         14.2   

Africa Banking

     228         132         17         7         7.5         5.3   

Barclays Core

     2,202         1,828         274         242         12.4         13.2   

Barclays Non-Core

     230         651         117         271         50.7         41.6   

Total wholesale

     2,432         2,479         391         513         16.1         20.7   

Group total

     4,205         5,100         720         1,064         17.1         20.9   

Balances on forbearance programmes reduced 18% to £4.2bn (2014: £5.1bn) driven primarily by; (i) fewer customers requiring forbearance as macroeconomic conditions improved; and (ii) the ongoing impact of enhanced qualification criteria. The decrease in impairment coverage to 17.1% (2014: 20.9%) reflected coverage reduction across both the wholesale and retail portfolios.

Retail balances on forbearance reduced by 32% to £1.8bn and reflected a decrease across all businesses.

 

§   PCB: Migration of Business Banking from Retail to Corporate amounting to £239m.

 

§   Barclaycard: Primarily due to multiple asset sales through the year and updated entry criteria for forbearance programmes, which reduced inflows in the UK cards portfolio.

 

§   Africa Banking: Updated qualifying criteria in South African home loans and depreciation of the Rand.

Wholesale balances on forbearance reduced by 2% to £2.4bn as the removal of assets following the sale of the Spanish corporate business was partially offset by the migration of Business Banking forborne assets into the UK Corporate Bank. Excluding these movements, the overall level of forborne balances was broadly stable.

See over for more information on these portfolios.

 

 

Note

a The forbearance definition has been tightened during the year based on observed performance to more accurately reflect signs of financial distress. As a result an element of the MCA population has been reclassified as high risk instead of forbearance. 2014 forbearance balances have been restated for a like for like comparison.

 

164  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Retail forbearance programmes

Forbearance on the Group’s principal retail portfolios in the UK, US and South Africa is presented below. The principal portfolios listed below account for 70% (2014: 83%) of total retail forbearance balances.

 

 Analysis of key portfolios in forbearance programmes   
     Balances on forbearance programmes      Marked      Marked      Impairment         
                   Of which:      to market      to market      allowances      Total  
                          Past due of which:      LTV of      LTV of      marked      balances on  
                                        forbearance      forbearance      against      forbearance  
            % of gross                    91 or more      balances:      balances:      balances on      programmes  
            loans and             1-90 days      days past      balance      valuation      forbearance      coverage  
     Total      advances      Up-to-date      past due      due      weighted      weighted      programmes      ratio  
       £m         %         £m         £m         £m         %         %         £m         %   

As at 31 December 2015

                          

Home loans

                          

PCB – UKa

     445         0.3         211         177         57         48.0         34.1         4         0.8   

Africa Banking – South Africa

     125         1.3         50         64         11         67.5         53.6         7         5.5   

Credit cards

                          

UK

     448         2.4         414         31         3         n/a         n/a         159         35.5   

US

     133         0.8         92         30         11         n/a         n/a         30         22.7   

Unsecured loans

                          

UK

     85         1.6         59         22         3         n/a         n/a         21         24.6   

As at 31 December 2014

                          

Home loans

                          

PCB – UK

     522         0.4         257         206         59         52.1         36.8         3         0.6   

Africa Banking – South Africa

     207         1.8         95         99         13         71.1         57.4         13         6.5   

Credit cards

                          

UK

     724         4.3         679         41         4         n/a         n/a         324         44.8   

US

     98         0.7         67         22         9         n/a         n/a         22         22.1   

Unsecured loans

                          

UK

     121         2.4         83         33         5         n/a         n/a         25         20.9   

Loans in forbearance in the principal home loans portfolios decreased 22% to £570m (2014: £729m).

 

§   PCB – UK (home loans): Balances under forbearance decreased 15% to £445m, principally due to an update to the entry criteria, and fewer customers requiring forbearance in a stable macroeconomic environment. Total past due balances reduced 12% to £234m in line with falling total balances under forbearance.

 

§   Africa Banking – South Africa (home loans): Reduction in forbearance balances to £125m (2014: £207m) was due to enhanced qualification criteria which resulted in a more appropriate and sustainable programme for customers, and depreciation of the Rand.

Forbearance balances on principal credit cards, overdrafts and unsecured loan portfolios decreased by 29% to £666m.

 

§   UK Cards: The reduction in forbearance balances was driven by the implementation of enhanced qualification criteria and asset sales. Balances in arrears and coverage ratio reduced in line with balance reduction.

 

§   US Cards: The increase in balances on forbearance programmes was in line with asset growth on the US portfolio. Balances in arrears remained low as a proportion of the total and coverage was stable.

 

Forbearance by type

  

     Home loans – Barclays Core portfolios   
     UK         South Africa   

As at 31 December

    
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  
    
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  

Interest only conversion

     94         100                   

Interest rate reduction

                     1         1   

Payment concession

     103         106         97         161   

Term extension

     248         316         28         45   

Total

     445         522         125         207   

 

 

Note

a The forbearance definition has been tightened during the year based on observed performance to more accurately reflect signs of financial distress. As a result, an element of the MCA population has been reclassified as high-risk instead of forbearance. 2014 forbearance balances have been restated for a like for like comparison. (2014 MCA balances: £1.3bn).

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  165


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

 Forbearance by type                                                      
     Credit cards and unsecured loans – Barclays Core portfolios   
     UK cards         US cards         UK personal loans   

As at 31 December

    
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  
    

 

2015

£m

  

  

    
 
2014
£m
  
  
    
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  

Payment concession

     21         31                                   

Term extension

                                     6         28   

Fully amortising

                     69         58         79         93   

Repayment plana

     427         693         64         40                   

Total

     448         724         133         98         85         121   

Payment concessions reduced to £21m (2014: £31m) in UK cards following its withdrawal from forbearance offering in 2014.

Repayment plan balances in UK cards decreased to £427m (2014: £693m) driven by a debt sale and the continued reduction in new repayment plan volumes, following the implementation of enhanced qualification criteria in 2012.

Wholesale forbearance programmes

The tables below detail balance information for wholesale forbearance cases.

 

 Analysis of wholesale balances in forbearance programmes                                                
     Balances on forbearance programmes      Impairment         
                   Of which:      allowances      Total  
      
 
 
Total
balances
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
% of gross
loans and
advances
%
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
Performing
balances
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Impaired
up-to-date
balances
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
Balances
between 1
and 90 days
past due
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  

 

 

 

 

 

Balances

91 days

or more

past due

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

marked

against

balances on

forbearance

programmes

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

balances on

forbearance

programmes

coverage

ratio

%

  

  

  

  

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                       

Investment Bank

     210         0.2         81                 100         29         4         2.1   

Personal & Corporate Banking

     1,764         2.0         578         661         93         432         253         14.3   

Africa Banking

     228         1.5         103         4                 121         17         7.5   

Total Barclays Core

     2,202         1.1         762         665         193         582         274         12.4   

Barclays Non-Core

     229         0.7         38         103         2         87         117         50.7   

Group

     2,431         1.0         800         768         195         669         391         16.1   

As at 31 December 2014

                       

Investment Bank

     106         0.1         52                 22         32         10         9.4   

Personal & Corporate Banking

     1,590         2.0         574         587         38         391         225         14.1   

Africa Banking

     132         0.8         30         47         13         42         7         5.0   

Total Barclays Core

     1,828         0.9         656         634         73         465         242         13.2   

Barclays Non-Core

     651         1.5         36         336         41         238         271         41.6   

Group

     2,479         1.0         692         970         114         703         513         20.7   

 

Wholesale forbearance reporting split by exposure class

                                   
      
 
Corporate
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Personal
and trusts
£m
  
  
  
    
 
Other
£m
  
  
    
 
Total
£m
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

           

Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows

     158                         158   

Restructure: maturity date extension

     716         24         62         801   

Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)

     317         1                 318   

Restructure: payment other than cash

     12                         12   

Change in security

     7         1                 8   

Adjustments or non-enforcement of covenants

     295         92                 387   

Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)

     538         208                 746   

Total

     2,043         326         62         2,431   

As at 31 December 2014

           

Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows

     180                         180   

Restructure: maturity date extension

     600         79         4         683   

Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)

     335         25         4         364   

Restructure: payment other than cash

     7         9                 16   

Change in security

     17                         17   

Adjustments or non-enforcement of covenants

     383         53                 436   

Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)

     607         175         1         783   

Total

     2,129         341         9         2,479   

Note

a Repayment plan represents a reduction to the minimum payment due requirements and interest rate.

 

166  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

 Wholesale forbearance reporting split by business unit                                         
      
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 

 

Investment
Bank

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

Africa
Banking

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

Barclays
Non-Core

£m

  
  

  

  

Total 

£m 

As at 31 December 2015

              

Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows

     131                 4         23       158 

Restructure: maturity date extension

     370         162         153         116       801 

Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)

     248         2         68               318 

Restructure: payment other than cash

     1         11                       12 

Change in security

     8                              

Adjustments or non-enforcements of covenants

     338         2                 47       387 

Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)

     668         33         3         43       747 

Total

     1,764         210         228         229       2,431 

As at 31 December 2014

              

Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows

     125                 1         54       181 

Restructure: maturity date extension

     314         72         78         219       683 

Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)

     178         2         49         135       364 

Restructure: payment other than cash

     13                         3       16 

Change in security

     11                         6       17 

Adjustments or non-enforcements of covenants

     329                         107       436 

Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)

     620         32         4         127       783 

Total

     1,589         106         134         651       2,479 

Wholesale forbearance decreased 2% to £2.4bn with an impairment coverage ratio of 16.1% (2014: 20.7%). Personal & Corporate Banking accounted for the largest portion with 73% (2014: 64%) of total balances held as forbearance.

Overall forbearance balances in Core portfolios rose by 20% to £2.2bn, driven primarily by the migration of forborne Business Banking assets into the PCB UK Corporate Banking portfolio from PCB Retail.

Non-Core balances remain focused on the European corporate portfolios and reduced by 65% to £230m following the sale of the Spanish corporate business.

 

 Wholesale forbearance flows in 2015a         
      

 

Balance

£m

  

  

As at 1 January 2015

     2,479   

Added to forbearanceb

     1,302   

Removed from forbearance (credit improvement)

     (190

Fully or partially repaid and other movementsc

     (936

Written off/moved to recoveries

     (224

As at 31 December 2015

     2,431   

Analysis of problem loans

Impaired loans and loans past due within this section are reflected in the balance sheet credit quality tables on page 149 as being Higher Risk.

Age analysis of loans and advances that are past due but not impaired (audited)

The following table presents an age analysis of loans and advances that are past due but not impaired.

 

 Loans and advances past due but not impaired (audited)                                                      
      
 
 
Past due up
to 1 month
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
Past due
1-2 months
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
Past due
2-3 months
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
Past due
3-6 months
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Past due
6 months
and over
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
Total
£m
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

                 

Loans and advances designated at fair value

     70         14                         209         293   

Home loans

     22         8         6         24         80         140   

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

     288         14         15         93         120         530   

Corporate loans

     5,862         897         207         226         280         7,472   

Total

     6,242         933         228         343         689         8,435   

As at 31 December 2014

                 

Loans and advances designated at fair value

     594         48         1                 33         676   

Home loans

     46         6         17         135         230         434   

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

     64         29         14         139         194         440   

Corporate loansd

     5,251         630         874         190         387         7,332   

Total

     5,955         713         906         464         844         8,882   

Notes

a Refer to sustainability of loans under forbearance in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report for more information.
b Includes £239m transitioned to wholesale forbearance categories within the UK SME Businesses previously in Retail.
c Includes £321m removed following the sale of the Non-Core Business in Spain.
d Corporate loan balances past due up to 1 month have been revised down by £1,953m to better reflect the ageing of the loans.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  167


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

Impaired loans

The following table represents an analysis of impaired loans in line with the disclosure requirements from the Enhanced Disclosure Taskforce. For further information on definitions of impaired loans refer to the identifying potential credit risk loans section on page 112 of Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

 

Movement in impaired loans

                                                               
     
 

 

At beginning
of year

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

 

 

Classified as
impaired

during the

year

£m

  
  

  

  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Transferred
to not
impaired
during the
year

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   

 

Repayments

£m

  

  

   

 

 

Amounts

written off

£m

  

  

  

   
 
 
 
Acquisitions
and
disposals
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 

 

Exchange
and other
adjustments

£m

  
  
a 

  

   
 
 
Balance at
31 December
£m
  
  
  

2015

               

Home loans

    1,503        602        (192     (272     (97            (207     1,337   

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

    2,613        2,226        (112     (269     (1,873            (385     2,200   

Corporate loans

    2,683        1,032        (558     (208     (333     (43     (475     2,098   

Total impaired loans

    6,799        3,860        (862     (749     (2,303     (43     (1,067     5,635   

2014

               

Home loans

    1,983        762        (352     (412     (161            (317     1,503   

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

    3,385        2,089        (108     (361     (1,885            (507     2,613   

Corporate loans

    5,142        1,167        (729     (658     (1,211            (1,028     2,683   

Total impaired loans

    10,510        4,018        (1,189     (1,431     (3,257            (1,852     6,799   

 

For information on restructured loans refer to disclosures on forbearance on pages 164 to 167.

 

Analysis of loans and advances assessed as impaired (audited)

The following table presents an age analysis of loans and advances collectively impaired and total individually impaired loans.

 

  

  

  

 Loans and advances assessed as impaired (audited)                                   
     
 
 
Past due up
to 1 month
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Past due
1-2 months
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Past due
2-3 months
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Past due
3-6 months
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Past due
6 months
and over
£m
  
  
  
  
   

 

Total

£m

  

  

   
 
 
 
Individually
assessed for
impairment
£m
  
  
  
  
   

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

               

Home loans

    3,672        1,036        278        364        812        6,162        648        6,810   

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

    1,241        691        284        541        1,792        4,549        964        5,513   

Corporate loans

    251        76        45        76        96        544        1,786        2,330   

Total

    5,164        1,803        607        981        2,700        11,255        3,398        14,653   

As at 31 December 2014

               

Home loans

    5,155        1,424        335        470        1,050        8,434        455        8,889   

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

    1,196        738        299        532        2,225        4,990        800        5,790   

Corporate loans

    284        30        24        25        148        511        2,679        3,190   

Total

    6,635        2,192        658        1,027        3,423        13,935        3,934        17,869   

The decrease in collectively impaired loans to £11.3bn (2014: £13.9bn) predominantly relates to home loans within the past due up to 1 month category. MCA forbearance balances previously allocated into this category (2014 MCA balances: £1.3bn) no longer form part of the forbearance programme nor collectively assessed for impairment.

 

Note

a Exchange and other adjustments includes the reclassification of the Portuguese loans now held for sale and the Spanish loans held for sale in 2014.

 

168  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Potential credit risk loans (PCRLs) and coverage ratios

The Group reports potentially and actually impaired loans as PCRLs. PCRLs comprise two categories of loans: credit risk loans (CRLs) and potential problem loans (PPLs). For further information on definitions of CRLs and PPLs refer to the identifying potential credit risk loans section on page 112 of the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

 

 Potential credit risk loans and coverage ratios by business                                                                  
       CRLs           PPLs           PCRLs   
As at 31 December       

 

2015

£m

  

  

      

 

2014

£m

  

  

      
 
2015
£m
  
  
      
 
2014
£m
  
  
      
 
2015
£m
  
  
      

 

2014

£m

  

  

Personal & Corporate Bankinga        1,591           1,733           263           264           1,854           1,997   
Africa Banking        859           1,093           154           161           1,013           1,254   
Barclaycard        1,601           1,765           249           227           1,850           1,992   
Barclays Core        4,051           4,591           666           652           4,717           5,243   
Barclays Non-Core        845           1,209           13           26           858           1,234   
Total Group retail        4,896           5,800           679           678           5,575           6,477   
Investment Bank        241           71           450           107           691           178   
Personal & Corporate Bankinga        1,794           2,112           567           614           2,361           2,726   
Africa Banking        541           665           245           94           786           759   
Barclays Core        2,576           2,848           1,262           815           3,838           3,663   
Barclays Non-Core        345           841           109           119           454           960   
Total Group wholesale        2,921           3,689           1,371           934           4,292           4,623   
Group total        7,817           9,489           2,050           1,612           9,867           11,100   
                             
       Impairment allowance           CRL coverage           PCRL coverage   
As at 31 December       

 

2015

£m

  

  

      

 

2014

£m

  

  

      
 
2015
%
  
  
      
 
2014
%
  
  
      
 
2015
%
  
  
      

 

2014

%

  

  

Personal & Corporate Bankinga,b        713           766           44.8           44.2           38.5           38.4   
Africa Banking        539           681           62.7           62.3           53.2           54.3   
Barclaycard        1,835           1,815           114.6           102.8           99.2           91.1   
Barclays Core        3,087           3,262           76.2           71.1           65.4           62.2   
Barclays Non-Core        369           428           43.7           35.4           43.0           34.7   
Total Group retail        3,456           3,690           70.6           63.6           62.0           57.0   
Investment Bank        83           44           34.4           62.0           12.0           24.7   
Personal & Corporate Bankinga        914           873           50.9           41.3           38.7           32.0   
Africa Banking        235           246           43.4           37.0           29.9           32.4   
Barclays Core        1,232           1,163           47.8           40.8           32.1           31.7   
Barclays Non-Core        233           602           67.5           71.6           51.3           62.7   
Total Group wholesale        1,465           1,765           50.2           47.8           34.1           38.2   
Group total        4,921           5,455           63.0           57.5           49.9           49.1   

 

§   CRLs decreased 17.6% to £7.8bn, with the Group’s CRL coverage ratio increasing to 63.0% (2014: 57.5%).

 

§   CRLs in retail portfolios have decreased 15.6% to £4.9bn. This is primarily driven by Non-Core as a result of the sale of the Portuguese business and rundown of assets in Europe. Another driver of the decrease is the Africa retail portfolios reducing as a result of improved recoveries. Retail CRL coverage increased to 70.6% (2014: 63.6%), due to the decrease in the retail CRL portfolio.

 

§   Wholesale CRL portfolios decreased by 20.8% to £2.9bn. This is primarily driven by reductions in Non-Core as a result of the sale of the Portuguese corporate loans and continued rundown of the Non-Core Investment Bank portfolio; and within PCB due to the improved economic environment. Investment Bank CRLs increased £170m to £241m predominantly relating to the Oil and Gas sector. Wholesale CRL coverage increased to 50.2% (2014: 47.8%), driven by the decrease in CRLs in 2015.

 

 

Notes

a UK Business Banking has been reclassified from Retail to Wholesale in line with how the business is now managed.
b 2014 PCB CRLs, PPLs and PCRLs have been revised by £151m, £121m and £273m respectively to align methodology for determining arrears categories with other Home Finance risk disclosures.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  169


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

Impairment

Impairment allowances

Impairment allowances decreased 10% to £4,921m primarily within Non-Core as a result of the reclassification of impairments held against the Portuguese loans now held for sale.

 

Movements in allowance for impairment by asset class (audited)

  

      
 

 

At beginning
of year

£m

  
  

  

    
 
 
 
Acquisitions
and
disposals
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
Unwind of
discount
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 

 

Exchange
and other
adjustments

£m

  
  
a 

  

    
 
 
Amounts
written off
£m
  
  
  
    
 
Recoveries
£m
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
Amounts
charged to
income
statement
£m
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
Balance at
31 December
£m
  
  
  

2015

                       

Home loans

     547                 (32)         (64)         (94)         7         154         518   

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

     3,345                 (105)         (170)         (1,848)         301         1,871         3,394   

Corporate loans

     1,563                 (12)         (383)         (335)         92         84         1,009   

Total impairment allowance

     5,455                 (149)         (617)         (2,277)         400         2,109         4,921   

2014

                       

Home loans

     788                 (23)         (200)         (191)         17         156         547   

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

     3,603         13         (116)         (307)         (1,679)         126         1,705         3,345   

Corporate loans

     2,867                 (14)         (540)         (1,167)         78         339         1,563   

Total impairment allowance

     7,258         13         (153)         (1,047)         (3,037)         221         2,200         5,455   

Management adjustments to models for impairment

Management adjustments to models for impairment are applied in order to factor in certain conditions or changes in policy that are not incorporated into the relevant impairment models, or to ensure that the impairment allowance reflects all known facts and circumstances at the period end. Adjustments typically increase the model derived impairment allowance. Where applicable, management adjustments are reviewed and incorporated into future model development.

Management adjustments to models of more than £10m with respect to impairment allowance in our principal portfolios are presented below.

 

Principal portfolios that have management adjustments greater than £10m (unaudited)

  

     2015         2014   

As at 31 December

    
 
 
 
 

 

Total management
adjustments to
impairment stock,
including
forbearance

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
Proportion of total
impairment stock
%
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 

 

Total management
adjustments to
impairment stock,
including
forbearance

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
Proportion of total
impairment stock
%
  
  
  

PCB

           

UK home loans

     68         67         52         55   

UK personal loans

     75         16         48         10   

UK overdrafts

     37         29         30         19   

UK large corporate and business lending

     183         26         98         14   

Africa Banking

           

South Africa home loans

     22         17         22         11   

Barclaycard

           

UK cards

     147         17         62         5   

US Cards

     58         9         10         2   

Barclays Partner Finance

     41         28         9         7   

Germany Cards

     20         21         3         3   

During 2015, the Retail Impairment Policy was significantly strengthened and models enhanced.

UK home loans: Adjustments to capture the potential impact from increase in the house price to earnings ratio, change in the impairment methodology and increased coverage on interest only loans maturing in the next five years.

UK personal loans: Adjustments to incorporate revised impairment policy requirements, and for updated model requirements.

UK overdrafts: Principally for updated model-related requirements and adjustments to align to revised impairment policy.

UK large corporate and business lending: In business lending to reflect policy changes affecting customers on forbearance and impairment treatment. In corporate lending to account for single name losses, adjustment to allow for small names yet to emerge within the oil and gas sector, and the susceptibility of minimum debt service customers to interest rate raises not currently captured in models.

South Africa home loans: Primarily to incorporate the uncertainty in the macroeconomic outlook. The adjustment has increased by 27% in local currency.

Barclaycard: Predominantly to align to new impairment policy requirements in models, and to increase coverage on forbearance programmes and accounts in recoveries.

 

Note

a Exchange and other adjustments includes the reclassification of impairments held against the Portuguese loans now held for sale and the Spanish loans held for sale in 2014.

 

170  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

 

    

 

Analysis of market risk

Market risk is the risk of a reduction in earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions or as a consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity pools.

This section contains key disclosures describing the Group’s market risk profile, highlighting regulatory as well as management measures.

Key metrics

Measures of traded market risk, such as Value at Risk (VaR), decreased in the year primarily due to the removal of certain banking book assets from VaR, reduced client activity, and risk reduction in Non-Core businesses.

We saw a reduction in associated risk measures and lower income from reduced activity

85%

of days generated positive trading revenue

-23%

reduction in management VaR

10%

increase in average daily trading revenue

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  171


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

 

Market risk is the risk of a reduction in earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions or as a consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity pool.

All disclosures in this section (page 172 to 180) are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Overview of market risk

This section contains key statistics describing the market risk profile of the Group. This includes risk weighted assets by major business line, as well as Value at Risk (VaR) measures. A distinction is made between regulatory and management measures within the section. The market risk management section on pages 96 to 154 in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report provides descriptions of these metrics:

 

§   page 73 provides a view of market risk in the context of the Group’s balance sheet

 

§   pages 131 to 136 cover the management of traded market risk. Management measures are shown from page 131 and regulatory equivalent measures are shown from page 133

 

§   non-traded market risk, arising from our banking books, is reviewed from page 136.

Measures of market risk in the Group and accounting measures

Traded market risk measures such as VaR and balance sheet exposure measures have fundamental differences:

 

§   balance sheet measures show accruals-based balances or marked to market values as at the reporting date

 

§   VaR measures also take account of current marked to market values but in addition hedging effects between positions are considered

 

§   market risk measures are expressed in terms of changes in value or volatilities as opposed to static values.

For these reasons, it is not possible to present direct reconciliations of traded market risk and accounting measures. The table ‘Balance sheet view of trading and banking books’, on page 173, helps the reader understand the main categories of assets and liabilities subject to regulatory market risk measures.

Summary of performance in the period

The Group has seen a decrease in market risk from reduced risk positions, notably in equities and interest rates, in addition to risk reduction in Non-Core businesses:

 

§   measures of traded market risk, such as VaR, decreased in the year mainly due to the removal of certain banking book assets from the measure (now reported as non-traded market risks), reduced client activity, and risk reduction in Non-Core businesses

 

§   average trading revenue, in contrast, increased 10% compared with the previous year

 

§   market risk RWAs fell from 2014 levels due to the implementation of diversification of the general and specific market risk VaR charges, partially offset by the inclusion of cost of funding RNIV into VaR

 

§   Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR), a key measure of interest rate risk volatility in the banking book (IRRBB), decreased in 2015, primarily driven by PCB due to increased hedging; and in Treasury driven by increased exposure in the short dated available for sale bond portfolio, partially offset by reduced mismatch between assets and liabilities in the wholesale funding portfolio

 

§   other market risks, such as pension risk and insurance risk, are disclosed from page 179 onwards.
 

 

172  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Balance sheet view of trading and banking books

As defined by the regulatory rules, a trading book consists of positions held for trading intent or to hedge elements of the trading book. Trading intent must be evidenced in the basis of the strategies, policies and procedures set up by the firm to manage the position or portfolio. The table below provides a Group-wide overview of where assets and liabilities on the Group’s balance sheet are managed within regulatory traded and non-traded books.

The balance sheet split by trading book and banking books is shown on an IFRS scope of consolidation. The reconciliation between the accounting and regulatory scope of consolidation is shown in table 1 of the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report. The reconciling items are all part of the banking book.

 

Balance sheet split by trading and banking books

                          

As at 31 December 2015

    
 

 

Banking
book

£m

  
a 

  

    
 

 

Trading
book

£m

  
  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Cash and balances at central banks

     49,711                 49,711   

Items in course of collection from other banks

     1,011                 1,011   

Trading portfolio assets

     3,355         73,993         77,348   

Financial assets designated at fair value

     25,263         51,567         76,830   

Derivative financial instruments

     296         327,413         327,709   

Available for sale financial investments

     90,267                 90,267   

Loans and advances to banks

     39,779         1,570         41,349   

Loans and advances to customers

     380,406         18,811         399,217   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

     28,187                 28,187   

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

     3,010                 3,010   

Investments in associates and joint ventures

     573                 573   

Property, plant and equipment

     3,468                 3,468   

Goodwill and intangible assets

     8,222                 8,222   

Current tax assets

     415                 415   

Deferred tax assets

     4,495                 4,495   

Retirement benefit assets

     836                 836   

Non-current assets classified as held for disposal

     7,364                 7,364   

Total assets

     646,658         473,354         1,120,012   

Deposits from banks

     45,344         1,736         47,080   

Items in course of collection due to other banks

     1,013                 1,013   

Customer accounts

     401,927         16,315         418,242   

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

     25,035                 25,035   

Trading portfolio liabilities

             33,967         33,967   

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

     7,027         84,718         91,745   

Derivative financial instruments

     1,699         322,553         324,252   

Debt securities in issue

     69,150                 69,150   

Subordinated liabilities

     21,467                 21,467   

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

     10,610                 10,610   

Provisions

     4,142                 4,142   

Current tax liabilities

     903                 903   

Deferred tax liabilities

     122                 122   

Retirement benefit liabilities

     423                 423   

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale

     5,997                 5,997   

Total liabilities

     594,859         459,289         1,054,148   

Included within the trading book are assets and liabilities which are included in the market risk regulatory measures. For more information on these measures (VaR, SVaR, IRC and APR) see the risk management section on page 128 in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

 

Note

a The primary risk factors for banking book assets and liabilities are interest rates and, to a lesser extent, foreign exchange rates. Credit spreads and equity prices will also be factors where the Group holds debt and equity securities respectively, either as financial assets designated at fair value (see Note 14) or as available for sale (see Note 16).

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  173


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

 

Traded market risk review

Review of management measures

The following disclosures provide details on management measures of market risk. See the risk management section on page 128 in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report for more detail on management measures and the differences when compared to regulatory measures.

The table below shows the Total management VaR on a diversified basis by risk factor. Total management VaR includes all trading positions in the Investment Bank, Non-Core, Africa Banking and Head Office.

Limits are applied against each risk factor VaR as well as Total management VaR, which are then cascaded further by risk managers to each business.

 

The daily average, maximum and minimum values of management VaR (audited)

  

                                   
              2015                           2014            

Management VaR (95%)

             Average                 High a               Low a               Average                 High a               Low a 

For the year ended 31 December

     £m         £m         £m         £m         £m         £m   

Credit risk

     11         17         8         11         15         9   

Interest rate risk

     6         14         4         11         17         6   

Equity risk

     8         18         4         10         16         6   

Basis risk

     3         4         2         4         8         2   

Spread risk

     3         6         2         4         8         3   

Foreign exchange risk

     3         6         1         4         23         1   

Commodity risk

     2         3         1         2         8         1   

Inflation risk

     3         5         2         2         4         2   

Diversification effecta

     (22      n/a         n/a         (26      n/a         n/a   

Total management VaR

     17         25         12         22         36         17   

Average interest rate VaR decreased by £5m to £6m (Dec 14: £11m) during 2015 as certain banking book positions were transferred from the Investment Bank to Head Office Treasury, reflecting the operational transfer of responsibility (see page 176). These positions are high quality and liquid banking book assets and are now reported as non-traded market risk exposures. Similarly, lower spread risk and basis risk VaR in 2015 reflect reduced risk taking.

Average equities risk VaR reduced by 20% to £8m, reflecting reduced cash portfolio activities and a more conservative risk profile maintained in the derivatives portfolio.

Average foreign exchange risk VaR decreased by 25% to £3m as a result of lower activity in the first half of the year, partially offset by higher volatility in the global foreign exchange market seen in the second half of the year.

Inflation risk VaR increased by £1m to £3m, primarily due to increased volatility in the inflation market.

Average commodity risk VaR remained stable at £2m, but the high levels reduced significantly year-on-year due to the portfolio having been largely divested, and reduced client flows impacted by lower oil prices.

 

Group management VaR

    

Daily trading revenue

LOGO

 

    

LOGO

 

The chart above presents the frequency distribution of our daily trading revenues for all material positions included in VaR for 2015. This includes daily trading revenue generated in the Investment Bank (except for Private Equity and Principal Investments), Treasury, Africa Banking and Non-Core.

The basis of preparation for trading revenue was changed in 2015 to align better with and reflect the portfolio structure included in Group Management VaR. 2014 figures have been presented on a comparable basis. Disclosed trading revenue includes realised and unrealised mark to market gains and losses from intraday market moves but excludes commission and advisory fees. The trading revenue measure is based on actual trading results and holding periods. In contrast, the VaR shows the volatility of a hypothetical measure. To construct this measure, positions are assumed to be held for one day, and the aggregate unrealised gain or loss is the measure. VaR and the actual revenue figure are not directly comparable. VaR informs risk managers of the risk implications of current portfolio decisions.

 

Note

a Diversification effects recognise that forecast losses from different assets or businesses are unlikely to occur concurrently, hence the expected aggregate loss is lower than the sum of the expected losses from each risk factor area. Historic correlations between losses are taken into account in making these assessments. The high and low VaR reported for each category did not necessarily occur on the same day as the high and low VaR reported as a whole. Consequently, diversification effect balances for the high and low VaR would not be meaningful and are therefore omitted from the above table.

 

174  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

The average daily net revenue increased by 10% to £10.1m; there were more positive trading revenue days in 2015 than in 2014, with 85% (2014: 82%) of days generating positive trading revenue.

The daily VaR chart illustrates an average declining trend in 2015. Intermittent VaR increases were due to increased client flow in periods of heightened volatility in specific markets and subsequent risk management of the position.

Business scenario stresses

As part of the Group’s risk management framework, on a regular basis the performance of the trading business in hypothetical scenarios characterised by severe macroeconomic conditions is modelled. Up to six global scenarios are modelled on a regular basis, for example, a sharp deterioration in liquidity, a slowdown in the global economy, terrorist attacks and a sovereign peripheral crisis.

Throughout 2015 the scenario analyses showed the biggest market risk related impact would be due to a severe deterioration in market liquidity and a sovereign peripheral crisis.

Review of regulatory measures

The following disclosures provide details on regulatory measures of market risk. See pages 133 and 134 of the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report for more detail on regulatory measures and the differences when compared to management measures.

The Group’s market risk capital requirement comprises of two elements:

 

§   trading book positions booked to legal entities within the scope of the Group’s PRA waiver where the market risk is measured under a PRA approved internal models approach, including Regulatory VaR, Stressed Value at Risk (SVaR), Incremental Risk Charge (IRC) and All Price Risk (APR) as required

 

§   trading book positions that do not meet the conditions for inclusion within the approved internal models approach. The capital requirement for these positions is calculated using standardised rules.

The table below summarises the regulatory market risk measures under the internal models approach. See table ‘Minimum capital requirement for market risk’ on page 76 of the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report for a breakdown of capital requirements by approach.

 

Analysis of Regulatory VaR, SVaR, IRC and APR

                                           
        
 
Year end
£m
  
  
      
 
Average
£m
  
  
      
 
Max
£m
  
  
      
 
Min
£m
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

                   

Regulatory VaR

       26           28           46           20   

SVaR

       44           54           68           38   

IRC

       129           142               254               59   

APR

       12           15           27           11   

As at 31 December 2014

                   

Regulatory VaR

       29           39           66           29   

SVaR

       72           74           105           53   

IRC

       80           118           287           58   

APR

       24           28           39           24   

Overall, there was a lower risk profile during 2015:

 

§   Regulatory VaR/SVaR: reduction in a Regulatory VaR/SVaR is driven by application of diversification to the general and specific market risk VaR charges which resulted in an overall RWA reduction

 

§   IRC: the IRC increase was mainly driven by the implementation of an updated IRC model in Q4 15 which features a more refined correlation structure, adoption of a continuous transition matrix and a local currency adjustment for sovereign issuance

 

§   APR: reduced as a result of further reductions in a specific legacy portfolio.

 

Breakdown of the major regulatory risk measures by portfolio

  

As at 31 December 2015

    

 

Macro

£m

  

  

    

 

Equities

£m

  

  

    
 
Credit
£m
  
  
   

 
 

Client Capital

Management
£m

  

  
  

    
 
Treasury
£m
  
  
    
 
Africa
£m
  
  
    
 
Non-Core
£m
  
  

Regulatory VaR

     10         8         5        12         4         4         3   

SVaR

     25                 33                 15                18                 11                 6                 12   

IRC

             197         5         79        99         13                 62   

APR

                                                    12   

The table above shows the primary portfolios which are driving the trading businesses’ modelled capital requirement as at 2015 year end. The standalone portfolio results diversify at the total level and are not necessarily additive. Regulatory VaR, SVaR, IRC and APR in the prior table show the diversified results at a group level.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  175


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

 

Non-traded market risk

Overview

The non-traded market risk framework covers exposures in the banking book, mostly consisting of exposures relating to accrual accounted and available for sale instruments. The potential volatility of the net interest income of the bank is measured by an Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR) metric that is monitored regularly and reported to senior management and the Board Risk Committee as part of the limit monitoring framework.

Net interest income sensitivity

The table below shows a sensitivity analysis on pre-tax net interest income for the non-trading financial assets and financial liabilities including the effect of any hedging. The sensitivity has been measured using the Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR) methodology as described on page 136 in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report. Note that this metric is simplistic in that it assumes a large parallel shock occurs instantaneously across all major currencies and ignores the impact of any management actions on customer products.

 

                                                                                                                                               
  Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by business unit   
     
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
Barclaycard
£m
  
  
   
 
Africa
£m
  
  
   

 

Non-Core

£m

a 

  

   

 

Treasury

£m

b 

  

   
 
Total
£m
  
  

  As at 31 December 2015

           

  +200bps

    305        (31     28        27        (131     198   

  +100bps

    152        (14     14        14        (63     103   

  -100bps

    (385     10        (11            (26     (412

  -200bps

    (433     14        (14            (36     (469

  As at 31 December 2014c

           

  +200bps

    464        (59     26        6        14        451   

  +100bps

    239        (27     13        3        10        238   

  -100bps

    (426     26        (9     (1     (29     (439

  -200bps

    (430     29        (17     (1     (39     (458

Overall the NII sensitivity of the Group to sudden changes in interest rates has decreased. The main drivers of the change in NII sensitivities are:

 

§   PCB: The reduction in NII sensitivity was due to increased hedging of certain deposit products exposure to interest rate changes

 

§   Barclaycard: The reduction in NII is due to a decrease in the period of time that the book can be repriced post a change in interest rates

 

§   Non-Core: The increase is predominantly due to a change in the hedge profile following the announced disposals in Europe

 

§   Treasury: The increase in NII sensitivity is primarily driven by an increased exposure in the short dated available for sale bond portfolio. This results in a higher duration mismatch between assets and liabilities which an up-shock scenario creates a negative impact. In a down shock scenario the full benefit of this is not realised due to the rates being floored at zero, resulting in a net negative NII impact from Treasury under these simple modelling assumptions.

 

  Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by currency (audited)                                    
     2015         2014   
  As at 31 December     
 

 

+100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

-100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

+100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

-100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

  GBP

     94         (368      184         (406

  USD

     (15      (30      (11      (11

  EUR

     (6      (8      21         3   

  ZAR

     6         (5      10         (8

  Other currencies

     24         (1      34         (17

  Total

     103         (412      238         (439

  As percentage of net interest income

     0.82      (3.28 )%       1.97      (3.63 )% 

 

 

Notes

a Only retail exposures within Non-Core are included in the calculation.
b Treasury includes both accrual and fair value accounted positions modelled with an appropriate holding period. It excludes hedge accounting ineffectiveness. Although hedge accounting ineffectiveness is recorded within net interest income, it is excluded in this analysis as it is driven by fair value movements rather than interest accruals.
c 2014 comparatives have been revised to reflect the inclusion of all Treasury banking books and the exclusion of hedge ineffectiveness.

 

176  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Economic Capital by business unit

Barclays measures some non-traded market risks using an economic capital (EC) methodology. EC is predominantly calculated using a daily VaR model and then scaled up to a one-year EC confidence interval (99.98%). For more information on definitions of prepayment, recruitment and residual risk, and on how EC is used to manage market risk, see the market risk management section on page 128 in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

 

 Economic capital for non-trading risk by business unit                                            
      
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
Barclaycard
£m
  
  
    

 
 

Africa

Banking
£m

  

  
  

    

 

Non-Core

£m

a 

  

    
 
Total
£m
  
  

 As at 31 December 2015

             

 Prepayment risk

     35        7                         42   

 Recruitment risk

     64        1                 5         70   

 Residual risk

     7        2         126         5         140   

 Total

     106        10         126         10         252   

 As at 31 December 2014

             

 Prepayment risk

     32        15                         47   

 Recruitment risk

     148        1                         149   

 Residual risk

     12        3         34         16         65   

 Total

     192        19         34         16         261   

PCB recruitment risk: The reduction of EC for PCB is driven by lower levels of recruitment risk associated with hedging mismatch for savings and mortgage products as at 31 December 2015. The mortgage book in particular saw significant falls in recruitment risk due to lower levels of pre-hedging, particularly within mortgages of longer tenor.

Africa Banking residual risk: The significant changes in EC for Africa Banking are mainly due to the adoption of new behavioural assumptions for residual risk which went live on 1 January 2015.

Analysis of equity sensitivity

The table below measures the overall impact of a +/- 100bps movement in interest rates on available for sale and cash flow hedge reserves. This data is captured using PV01 which is an indicator of the shift in asset value for a 1 basis point shift in the yield curve. Note that the methodology used to estimate the impact of the negative movement applied a 0% floor to interest rates.

 

 Analysis of equity sensitivity                                    
     2015         2014   
 As at 31 December     
 

 

+100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

-100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

+100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

-100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

 Net interest income

     103         (412      238         (439

 Taxation effects on the above

     (31      124         (57      105   

 Effect on profit for the year

     72         (288      181         (334

 As percentage of net profit after tax

     11.56      (46.23 )%       21.42      (39.53 )% 

 Effect on profit for the year (per above)

     72         (288      181         (334

 Available for sale reserve

     (751      1,052         (698      845   

 Cash flow hedge reserve

     (3,104)         1,351         (3,058      2,048   

 Taxation effects on the above

     1,157         (721      901         (694

 Effect on equity

     (2,626      1,394         (2,674      1,865   

 As percentage of equity

     (3.99)      2.12      (4.05)      2.83

As discussed in relation to the net interest income sensitivity table on page 176, the impact of a 100bps movement in rates is largely driven by PCB and Treasury. The available for sale reserve change in sensitivity was mainly driven by changes in portfolio composition, primarily due to an increase in available for sale assets held on a shorter dated outright basis. Note that the movement in the available for sale reserve would impact CRD IV fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital but the movement in the cash flow hedge reserve would not impact CET1 capital.

 

 

 

Note

a Only the retail exposures within Non-Core are captured in the measure.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  177


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

 

Volatility of the available for sale portfolio in the liquidity pool

Changes in value of the available for sale exposures flow directly through capital via the equity reserve. The volatility of the value of the available for sale investments in the liquidity pool is captured and managed through a value measure rather than an earning measure, i.e. the non-traded market risk VaR.

Although the underlying methodology to calculate the non-traded VaR is the same as the one used to calculate traded management VaR, the two measures are not directly comparable. The non-traded VaR represents the volatility to capital driven by the available for sale exposures. This is used for internal management purposes and although it is not formally backtested like the regulatory VaR (as shown on page 175), it is reviewed on a regular basis by risk managers to ensure it remains adequate for risk appetite and monitoring purposes.

These exposures are in the banking book and do not meet the criteria for trading book treatment. As such available for sale volatility is a risk which is taken into account in the IRRBB internal capital assessment, which is covered by the Pillar 2 capital framework.

 

Volatility of the Available for sale portfolio in liquidity pool

 

LOGO

    

 

 

Analysis of volatility of the available for sale portfolio in liquidity pool

                                
       2015   

For the year ended 31 December

      
 
Average
£m
  
  
      
 
High
£m
  
  
      
 
Low
£m
  
  

Non-traded market VaR (daily, 95%)

       41.6           48.5           37.0   

The non-traded VaR is mainly driven by volatility of interest rates in developed markets in the chart above.

The increase in VaR seen in H215 is due to the volatility in the government and swap rate markets observed in that period, particularly in the US and the UK. The subsequent decrease was due to subsiding market volatility in combination with a reduction in exposure.

Foreign exchange risk

The Group is exposed to two sources of foreign exchange risk.

a) Transactional foreign currency exposure

Transactional foreign exchange exposure represents exposure on banking assets and liabilities denominated in currencies other than the functional currency of the transacting entity.

The Group’s risk management policies prevent the holding of significant open positions in foreign currencies outside the trading portfolio managed by the Investment Bank which is monitored through VaR.

Banking book transactional foreign exchange risk outside of the Investment Bank is monitored on a daily basis by the market risk functions and minimised by the businesses.

b) Translational foreign exchange exposure

The Group’s investments in overseas subsidiaries and branches create capital resources denominated in foreign currencies, principally USD, EUR and ZAR. Changes in the GBP value of the net investments due to foreign currency movements are captured in the currency translation reserve, resulting in a movement in CET1 capital.

The Group’s strategy is to minimise the volatility of the capital ratios caused by foreign exchange movements, by ensuring that the CET1 capital movements broadly match the revaluation of the Group’s foreign currency RWA exposures.

The economic hedges primarily represent the USD and EUR preference shares and Additional Tier 1 (AT1) instruments that are held as equity, which are accounted for at historic cost under IFRS and do not qualify as hedges for accounting purposes.

 

178  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

  Functional currency of operations (audited)                                                      
      

 

 

 

 

Foreign

currency

net

investments

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Borrowings

which hedge

the net

investments

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Derivatives

which hedge

the net

investments

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

Structural

currency

exposures

pre-economic

hedges

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

Economic

hedges

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Remaining

structural

currency

exposures

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  As at 31 December 2015                  
  USD      24,712         8,839         1,158         14,715         7,008         7,707   
  EUR      2,002         630         14         1,358         1,764         (406
  ZAR      3,201         4         99         3,098                 3,098   
  JPY      383         168         205         10                 10   
  Other      2,927                 1,294         1,633                 1,633   
  Total      33,225         9,641         2,770         20,814         8,772         12,042   
  As at 31 December 2014                  
  USD      23,728         5,270         1,012         17,446         6,655         10,791   
  EUR      3,056         328         238         2,490         1,871         619   
  ZAR      3,863                 103         3,760                 3,760   
  JPY      364         164         208         (8              (8
  Other      2,739                 1,198         1,541                 1,541   
  Total      33,750         5,762         2,759         25,229         8,526         16,703   

During 2015, total structural currency exposure net of hedging instruments decreased by £4.7bn to £12.0bn (2014: £16.7bn). The decrease is broadly in line with the overall RWA currency profile, with a reduction in USD RWAs in the year. Foreign currency net investments remained stable at £33.2bn (2014: £33.8bn).

Pension risk review

The UK Retirement Fund (UKRF) represents approximately 92% (2014: 92%) of the Group’s total retirement benefit obligations globally. The other material overseas schemes are in South Africa and in the US and they represent approximately 4% (2014: 4%) and 2% (2014: 2%) respectively of the Group’s total retirement benefit obligations. As such, this risk review section focuses exclusively on the UKRF. Note that the scheme is closed to new entrants.

Pension risk arises as the estimated market value of the pension fund assets might decline, or the investment returns might reduce; or the estimated value of the pension liabilities might increase.

See page 137 of the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report for more information on how pension risk is managed.

Assets

The Board of Trustees defines an overall long term investment strategy for the UKRF, with investments across a broad range of asset classes. This ensures an appropriate mix of return seeking assets to generate future returns as well as liability matching assets to better match the future pension obligations. The main market risks within the asset portfolio are due to movements in interest rates and equities, as shown by the analysis of scheme assets within Note 35 Pensions and retirement benefits.

The fair value of the UKRF plan assets was £26.8bn. See Note 35 Pensions and retirement benefits.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  179


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

 

Liabilities

The retirement benefit obligations are a series of future cash flows with relatively long duration. On an IAS 19 basis these cash flows are sensitive to changes in the expected long term inflation rate and the discount rate (AA corporate bond yield curve):

 

§   an increase in long term inflation corresponds to an increase in liabilities

 

§   an increase in the discount rate corresponds to a decrease in liabilities.

Pension risk is generated through the Group’s defined benefit schemes and this risk is set to reduce over time as our main defined benefit schemes are closed to new entrants, and in many cases closed to future accruals. The chart below outlines the shape of the UKRF’s liability cash flow profile that takes account of future inflation indexing of payments to beneficiaries, with the majority of the cash flows (approximately 83%) falling between 0 and 40 years, peaking within the 21 to 30 year band and reducing thereafter. The shape may vary depending on changes in inflation expectation and mortality and it is updated in line with the triennial valuation process.

For more detail on liability assumptions see Note 35 to the financial statements.

 

Proportion of the liability cash flows

 

 

LOGO

 

    

 

Risk measurement

In line with Barclays risk management framework, the assets and liabilities of the UKRF are modelled within a VaR framework to show the volatility of the pension positions on a total portfolio level. This ensures that the risks, diversification and liability matching characteristics of the UKRF obligations and investments are adequately captured. VaR is measured and monitored on a monthly basis. It is discussed at pension risk fora such as the Market Risk Committee, Pensions Management Group and Pension Executive Board. The VaR model takes into account the valuation of the liabilities following an IAS 19 basis (see Note 35 Pension and post-retirement benefits in the financial statements). The trustees receive quarterly VaR measures on a funding basis.

The pension liability is also sensitive to post-retirement mortality assumptions (see Note 35).

In addition to this, the impact of pension risk to the Group is taken into account as part of the stress testing process. Stress testing is performed internally at least on an annual basis. The UKRF exposure is also included as part of the regulatory stress tests and exercises indicated that the UKRF risk profile is resilient to severe stress events.

The defined benefit pension scheme affects capital in two ways. An IAS 19 deficit impacts the CET1 capital ratio, and pension risk is also taken into account in the Pillar 2A capital assessment.

Triennial valuation

Please see Note 35 Pensions and retirement benefits for information on the funding position of the UKRF.

Insurance risk review

Insurance risk is managed within Africa Banking primarily in the Wealth, Investment Management & Insurance (WIMI) portfolios and is reported across four significant categories. Please see page 138 of the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report for more information on the definitions and governance procedure.

The risk types below mainly determine the regulatory capital requirements. The year-on-year decrease in risk appetite was agreed as part of the medium-term planning process.

 

  Analysis of insurance riska                                    
     2015         2014   
  As at 31 December     
 
Position
£m
  
  
    
 
Appetite
£m
  
  
    
 
Position
£m
  
  
    
 
Appetite
£m
  
  

  Short term insurance underwriting risk

     30         32         40         44   

  Life insurance underwriting risk

     17         20         21         28   

  Life insurance mismatch risk

     12         20         16         40   

  Life and short-term insurance investment risk

     11         18         12         14   

In 2015, the largest year-on-year movement was in short-term insurance underwriting risk where the reduction in the position reflected the closure of the Agriculture book to new insurance business.

For mismatch risk, the 2015 Appetite was materially lower than the 2014 Appetite as the level of mismatch between policyholder assets and policyholder liabilities decreased following the adoption of improved reserving methodologies and sign off by the independent statutory actuary function. As a result, while 2015 Position has reduced in absolute terms, the utilisation against appetite has increased.

From 2016 onwards, the methodology for assessment of Insurance Risk will change from a CAR-based approach to a Solvency Assessment and Management (SAM) based approach (the Solvency II equivalent) which is considered to be a more robust risk management approach with well-developed methodologies.

Note

a The figures in the table are reported using Capital Adequacy Requirement (CAR) approach.

 

180  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – Capital

 

 

        

Analysis of capital risk

Capital risk is the risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources, which could lead to: (i) a failure to meet regulatory requirements; (ii) a change to credit rating; or (iii) an inability to support business activity and growth.

This section details Barclays’ capital position providing information on both capital resources and capital requirements. It also provides detail of the leverage ratio and exposures.

Key metrics

11.4% fully loaded

Common Equity Tier 1 ratio

RWAs decreased by £44bn to £358bn. Non-Core RWAs decreased £29bn to £47bn as a result of the sale of the Spanish business and the rundown of legacy structured and credit products. Investment Bank RWAs decreased by £14bn to £108bn mainly due to a reduction in securities and derivatives, and improved RWA efficiency.

CET1 capital decreased £0.7bn to £40.7bn after absorbing adjusting items and dividends paid and foreseen.

4.5% leverage ratio

The leverage ratio increased significantly to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%) driven by a reduction in the leverage exposure of £205bn to £1,028bn predominantly due to the rundown in Non-Core of £156bn to £121bn.

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  181


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – Capital

 

 

Capital risk is the risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources to:

 

  §   meet minimum regulatory requirements in the UK and in other jurisdictions such as the US and South Africa where regulated activities are undertaken. The Group’s authority to operate as a bank is dependent upon the maintenance of adequate capital resources at each level where prudential capital requirements are applied

 

  §   support its credit rating. A weaker credit rating would increase the Group’s cost of funds and

 

  §   support its growth and strategic options.

More details on monitoring and managing capital risk may be found in the Risk Management sections on pages 136 and 137

All disclosures in this section (pages 182 to 186) are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Overview

The fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio, among other metrics, is a measure of the capital strength and resilience of Barclays. Maintenance of our capital is vital in order to meet the minimum capital requirements of regulatory authorities and to fund growth within our businesses.

This section provides an overview of the Group’s: i) regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements; ii) capital resources; iii) risk weighted assets (RWAs); and iv) leverage ratio and exposures.

Summary of performance in the period

Barclays continues to be in excess of minimum CRD IV transitional and fully loaded capital ratios and PRA capital and leverage ratios.

The fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio increased to 11.4% (2014: 10.3%) driven by a £43.5bn reduction in RWAs to £358.4bn partially offset by a decrease in fully loaded CRD IV CET1 capital of £0.7bn to £40.7bn.

The RWA reduction was primarily driven by a £29bn decrease in the Non-Core RWAs to £47bn as a result of the sale of the Spanish business and a rundown of legacy structured and credit products. Investment Bank RWAs decreased £14bn to £108bn mainly due to a reduction in securities and derivatives, and improved RWA efficiency.

CET1 capital decreased £0.7bn to £40.7bn after absorbing adjusting items and dividends paid and foreseen.

The leverage ratio increased significantly to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%), driven by a reduction in the leverage exposure to £1,028bn (2014: £1,233bn). This was predominantly due to the rundown of the Non-Core business of £156bn to £121bn.

 

Regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements

Capital – Fully loaded

Barclays’ current regulatory requirement is to meet a fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio of 9% by 2019, plus a Pillar 2A add-on. The 9% comprises the required 4.5% minimum CET1 ratio and, phased in from 2016, a Combined Buffer Requirement made up of a Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB) of 2.5% and a Globally Systemically Important Institution (G-SII) buffer of 2%.

Barclays’ Pillar 2A requirement as per the PRA’s Individual Capital Guidance (ICG) is subject to review at least annually. Under current PRA guidance, the Pillar 2A add-on for 2016, will be 3.9% of which 56% will need to be met in CET1 form, equating to approximately 2.2% of RWAs. Basel Committee consultations and reviews might further impact the Pillar 2A requirement in the future.

In addition, a Counter-Cyclical Capital Buffer (CCCB) and/or additional Sectoral Capital Requirements (SCR) may be required by the BoE to protect against perceived threats to financial stability. These buffers could be applied at the Group level or at a legal entity, sub-consolidated or portfolio level. No SCR has been set to date by the BoE, while the CCCB is currently 0% for UK exposures. Other national authorities determine the appropriate CCCBs that should be applied to exposures in their jurisdiction. During 2016, CCCBs will start to apply for our exposures in Hong Kong, Norway and Sweden. Based on current exposures we do not expect this to be material.

Capital – Transitional

On a transitional basis, the PRA has implemented a minimum requirement CET1 ratio of 4%, Tier 1 ratio of 5.5% and Total Capital ratio of 8%.

From 1 January 2015, the transitional capital ratios are equal to the fully loaded ratios following the PRA’s acceleration of transitional provisions relating to CET1 deductions and filters. The adjustment relating to unrealised gains on available for sale debt and equity that was applied throughout 2014 as an exception no longer applies.

Grandfathering limits on capital instruments, previously qualifying as Tier 1 and Tier 2, are unchanged under the PRA transitional rules.

Leverage

In addition to the Group’s capital requirements, minimum ratios have also been set in respect of leverage. The leverage ratio applicable to the Group has been calculated in accordance with the requirements of the EU Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR) which was amended effective from January 2015. The leverage calculation uses the end-point CRR definition of Tier 1 capital for the numerator and the CRR definition of leverage exposure. During 2015 Barclays was measured against the PRA leverage ratio requirement of 3%.

In December 2015, the PRA finalised the UK leverage ratio framework in which it adopted the FPC’s recommendations on leverage ratio requirements. These recommendations have been finalised in the Supervisory Statement SS45/15 and have been incorporated as part of the updated PRA rulebook, effective January 2016. This would result in a fully phased in leverage ratio requirement of 3.7% for Barclays. The minimum requirement would increase in the event that Barclays was subject to: (i) an increased CCCB; and/or (ii) Barclays was reclassified into a higher G-SII category. Furthermore from January 2016, firms are required to report quarterly leverage ratio information, including an average ratio.

 

 

 

 

182  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Capital resources

The CRR and Capital Requirements Directive (CRD) implemented Basel III within the EU (collectively known as CRD IV) on 1 January 2014. The rules are supplemented by Regulatory Technical Standards and the PRA’s rulebook, including the implementation of transitional rules. However, rules and guidance are still subject to change as certain aspects of CRD IV are dependent on final technical standards and clarifications to be issued by the EBA and adopted by the European Commission and the PRA. All capital, RWA and leverage calculations reflect Barclays’ interpretation of the current rules.

 

Key capital ratios

               

As at 31 December

     2015          2014 

Fully Loaded CET1

     11.4%          10.3% 

PRA Transitional CET1a

     11.4%          10.2% 

PRA Transitional Tier 1b,c

     14.7%          13.0% 

PRA Transitional Total Capitalb,c

     18.6%          16.5% 
       

Capital resources (audited)

               

As at 31 December

    

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

    

2014 

£m 

Shareholders’ equity (excluding non-controlling interests) per the balance sheet

     59,810          59,567 

Less: other equity instruments (recognised as AT1 capital)

     (5,305)         (4,322)

Adjustment to retained earnings for foreseeable dividends

     (631)         (615)

Minority interests (amount allowed in consolidated CET1)

     950          1,227 

Other regulatory adjustments and deductions

       

Additional value adjustments (PVA)

     (1,602)         (2,199)

Goodwill and intangible assets

     (8,234)         (8,127)

Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability excluding temporary differences

     (855)         (1,080)

Fair value reserves related to gains or losses on cash flow hedges

     (1,231)         (1,814)

Excess of expected losses over impairment

     (1,365)         (1,772)

Gains or losses on liabilities at fair value resulting from own credit

     127          658 

Defined benefit pension fund assets

     (689)         – 

Direct and indirect holdings by an institution of own CET1 instruments

     (57)         (25)

Other regulatory adjustments

     (177)         (45)

Fully loaded CET1 capital

     40,741          41,453 

Regulatory adjustments relating to unrealised gains

     –          (583)

PRA transitional CET1 capital

     40,741          40,870 

Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital

       

Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts

     5,305          4,322 

Qualifying AT1 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiaries

     6,718          6,870 

Other regulatory adjustments and deductions

     (130)         – 

Transitional AT1 capitald

     11,893          11,192 

PRA transitional Tier 1 capital

     52,634          52,062 

Tier 2 capital

       

Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts

     1,757          800 

Qualifying Tier 2 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiaries

     12,389          13,529 

Other regulatory adjustments and deductions

     (253)         (48)

PRA transitional total regulatory capital

     66,527          66,343 

 

 

 

Notes

a The CRD IV CET1 ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) as applicable to Barclays’ Tier 2 Contingent Capital Notes was 13.1% based on £46.8bn of transitional CRD IV CET1 capital and £358bn RWAs.
b The PRA transitional capital is based on the PRA Rulebook and accompanying supervisory statements.
c As at 31 December 2015, Barclays’ fully loaded Tier 1 capital was £46,173m, and the fully loaded Tier 1 ratio was 12.9%. Fully loaded total regulatory capital was £62,103m and the fully loaded total capital ratio was 17.3%. The fully loaded Tier 1 capital and total capital measures are calculated without applying the transitional provisions set out in CRD IV and assessing compliance of AT1 and Tier 2 instruments against the relevant criteria in CRD IV.
d Of the £11.9bn transitional AT1 capital, fully loaded AT1 capital used for the leverage ratio comprises the £5.3bn capital instruments and related share premium accounts, £0.3bn qualifying minority interests and £0.1bn capital deductions. It excludes legacy Tier 1 capital instruments issued by subsidiaries that are subject to grandfathering.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  183


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – Capital

 

 

Movement in CET1 capital

    
    

2015  

£m  

Opening balance as at 1 January

   41,453  

Loss for the period attributable to equity holders

   (49) 

Own credit

   (531) 

Dividends paid and foreseen

   (1,372) 

Decrease in regulatory capital generated from earnings

   (1,952) 

Net impact of share awards

   609  

Available for sale reserves

   (245) 

Currency translation reserves

   (41) 

Other reserves

   9  

Increase in other qualifying reserves

   332  

Retirement benefit reserve

   916  

Defined benefit pension fund asset deduction

   (689) 

Net impact of pensions

   227  

Minority interests

   (277) 

Additional value adjustments (PVA)

   597  

Goodwill and intangible assets

   (107) 

Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability excluding those arising from temporary differences

   225  

Excess of expected loss over impairment

   407  

Direct and indirect holdings by an institution of own CET1 instruments

   (32) 

Other regulatory adjustments

   (132) 

Decrease in regulatory adjustments and deductions

   681  

Closing balance as at 31 December

   40,741  

 

§   During 2015, the fully loaded CET1 ratio increased to 11.4% (2014: 10.3%) driven by a significant reduction in RWAs.

 

§   CET1 capital decreased by £0.7bn to £40.7bn, after absorbing adjusting items, with the following significant movements:

 

  a £1.4bn reduction for dividends paid and foreseen

 

  a £0.2bn net increase as the retirement benefit reserve increased £0.9bn, offset by £0.7bn pension asset deduction

 

  a £0.7bn increase due to lower regulatory deductions and adjustments including a £0.6bn decrease in PVA, a £0.4bn decrease in expected losses due to the sale of the Spanish business and disposals across the Investment Bank, partially offset by a £0.3bn decrease in eligible minority interests.

 

184  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

 Risk weighted assets (RWAs) by risk type and business   
     Credit risk                   Counterparty credit riska           Market riskb                     
 
Operational
risk
  
  
     Total RWAs   
      

 

Std

£m

  

  

    

 

IRB

£m

  

  

    

 

Std

£m

  

  

    

 

IRB

£m

  

  

   

 

Std

£m

  

  

   

 

IMA

£m

  

  

    £m         £m   
 As at 31 December 2015                     
 Personal & Corporate Banking      31,506         71,352         242         1,122        30               16,176         120,428   
 Barclaycard      17,988         17,852                                      5,505         41,345   
 Africa Banking      8,556         17,698         22         487        885        682        5,604         33,934   
 Investment Bank      4,808         39,414         11,020         10,132        9,626        13,713        19,620         108,333   
 Head Office and Other Operations      1,513         2,763         32         59        48        1,230        2,104         7,749   
 Total Core      64,371         149,079         11,316         11,800        10,589        15,625        49,009         311,789   
 Barclays Non-Core      5,078         11,912         1,397         9,231        679        10,639        7,651         46,587   
 Total risk weighted assets      69,449         160,991         12,713         21,031        11,268        26,264        56,660         358,376   
                    
 As at 31 December 2014                     
 Personal & Corporate Banking      32,657         70,080         238         1,049        26               16,176         120,226   
 Barclaycard      15,910         18,492                                      5,505         39,907   
 Africa Banking      9,015         21,794         10         562        948        588        5,604         38,521   
 Investment Bank      5,773         36,829         13,739         11,781        18,179        16,480        19,621         122,402   
 Head Office and Other Operations      506         2,912         234         62        7        521        1,326         5,568   
 Total Core      63,861         150,107         14,221         13,454        19,160        17,589        48,232         326,624   
 Barclays Non-Core      10,679         19,416         3,023         18,406        2,236        13,088        8,428         75,276   
 Total risk weighted assets      74,540         169,523         17,244         31,860        21,396        30,677        56,660         401,900   
                    
 Movement analysis of risk weighted assets   
 Risk weighted assets                                
 
Credit risk
£bn
  
  
   
 

 

Counterparty
credit risk

£bn

  
a 

  

   

 

Market risk

£bn

b 

  

   
 

 

Operational
risk

£bn

  
  

  

    
 
Total RWAs
£bn
  
  
 As at 1 January 2015               244.0        49.1        52.1        56.7         401.9   
 Book size               8.3        (10.6     (9.5             (11.8
 Acquisitions and disposals               (14.2            (0.4             (14.6
 Book quality               0.1        (1.7     0.7                (0.9
 Model updates               (2.1     (1.1     (2.7             (5.9
 Methodology and policy               2.3        (1.9     (2.6             (2.2
 Foreign exchange movementc               (8.0     (0.1                    (8.1
 Other                                                                
 As at 31 December 2015                                 230.4        33.7        37.6        56.7         358.4   

RWAs decreased £43.5bn to £358.4bn, driven by:

 

§   Book size: RWAs decreased £11.8bn primarily due to a reduction in holdings of US bonds and equities and a reduction in derivatives and securities financing transactions. This was partially offset by a growth in corporate lending, particularly in Africa and the UK

 

§   Acquisitions and disposals: RWAs decreased £14.6bn primarily due to disposals in Non-Core, including the sale of the Spanish business

 

§   Model updates: RWAs decreased £5.9bn primarily due to implementation of diversification benefits across advanced general and specific market risk, as well as a recalibration of a credit risk model within the Investment Bank and Non-Core

 

§   Methodology and policy: RWAs decreased £2.2bn primarily due to the implementation of collateral modelling for mismatched FX collateral, and a transfer of securities financing transactions in certain businesses from the banking book to trading book, enabling further collateral offset

 

§   Foreign exchange movements decreased RWAs by £8.1bn primarily due to depreciation of ZAR against GBP.

 

Notes

a RWAs in relation to default fund contributions are included in counterparty credit risk.
b RWAs in relation to credit valuation adjustment (CVA) are included in market risk.
c Foreign exchange movement does not include FX for modelled counterparty risk or modelled market risk.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  185


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – Capital

 

 

Leverage ratio and exposures

The leverage ratio applicable to the Group has been calculated in accordance with the requirements of the CRR which was amended effective from January 2015. The leverage calculation below uses the end point CRR definition of Tier 1 capital for the numerator and the CRR definition of leverage exposure.

At 31 December 2015, Barclays’ leverage ratio was 4.5%, which exceeds the expected end point minimum requirement of 3.7% as outlined by the PRA Supervisory Statement SS45/15 and the updated PRA rulebook, comprising of the 3% minimum requirement, and the fully phased in G-SII buffer.

 

 Leverage exposure                  
      

 

 

As at

31.12.15

£bn

  

  

  

    

 

 

As at

31.12.14

£bn

  

a 

  

 Accounting assets      
 Derivative financial instruments      328         440   
 Cash collateral      62         73   
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending      28         132   
 Financial assets designated at fair valueb      77         38   
 Loans and advances and other assets      625         675   
 Total IFRS assets      1,120         1,358   
     
 Regulatory consolidation adjustments      (10      (8
 Derivatives adjustments      
 Derivatives netting      (293      (395
 Adjustments to cash collateral      (46      (53
 Net written credit protection      15         27   
 Potential Future Exposure (PFE) on derivatives      129         179   
 Total derivatives adjustments      (195      (242
     
 Securities financing transactions (SFTs) adjustments      16         25   
     
 Regulatory deductions and other adjustments      (14      (15
 Weighted off-balance sheet commitments      111         115   
 Total fully loaded leverage exposure      1,028         1,233   
     
 Fully loaded CET1 capital      40.7         41.5   
 Fully loaded AT1 capital      5.4         4.6   
 Fully loaded Tier 1 capital      46.2         46.0   
     
 Fully loaded leverage ratio      4.5%         3.7%   

 

§   During 2015 the leverage ratio increased significantly to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%) driven by a reduction in the leverage exposure of £205bn to £1,028bn.

 

§   Total derivative exposuresc decreased £76bn to £195bn:

 

  PFE decreased £50bn to £129bn, mainly as a result of continued Non-Core rundown and optimisations including trade compressions and tear-ups

 

  other derivative assets decreased £14bn to £51bn, driven by a net decrease in IFRS derivatives. The decrease was mainly within interest rate and foreign exchange derivatives due to net trade reduction and an increase in major interest forward curves

 

  net written credit protection decreased £12bn to £15bn due to a reduction in business activity and improved portfolio netting.

 

§   Taken together, reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and financial assets designated at fair value decreased £65bn to £105bn, reflecting a reduction in matched book trading and general firm financing due to balance sheet deleveraging.

 

§   Loans and advances and other assets decreased £50bn to £625bn driven by £37bn reduction in trading portfolio assets primarily due to Non-Core rundown, a reduction in trading activities in the Investment Bank, as well as a £10bn decrease in settlement balances and a £5bn decrease in Africa reflecting the depreciation of ZAR against GBP. This was partially offset by lending growth of £3bn in Barclaycard.

 

§   SFT adjustments decreased by £9bn to £16bn due to maturity of trades and a reduction in trading volumes.

 

Notes

a 2014 comparatives have been prepared on a BCBS 270 basis. Barclays does not believe that there is a material difference between the BCBS 270 leverage exposure and a leverage exposure calculated in accordance with the EU delegated act.
b Included within financial assets designated at fair value are reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair value of £50bn (2014: £5bn).
c Total derivative exposures includes IFRS derivative financial instruments, cash collateral and total derivative adjustments.

 

186  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Analysis of liquidity risk

Liquidity risk is the risk that a firm, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost.

This section details the Group’s liquidity risk profile and provides information on the way the Group manages that risk.

Key metrics

133% LCR

The Group strengthened its liquidity position during the year, increasing its surplus to internal and regulatory requirements.

£9bn Term Issuance

The Group maintains access to stable and diverse sources of funding across customer deposits and wholesale debt.

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  187


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost. This also results in a firm’s inability to meet regulatory liquidity requirements. This risk is inherent in all banking operations and can be affected by a range of Group-specific and market-wide events.

All disclosures in this section (pages 188 to 204) are unaudited and exclude BAGL unless otherwise stated.

Overview

The Group has a comprehensive Key Risk Control Framework for managing the Group’s liquidity risk. The Liquidity Framework meets the PRA’s standards and is designed to ensure the Group maintains liquidity resources that are sufficient in amount and quality, and a funding profile that is appropriate to meet the liquidity risk appetite. The Liquidity Framework is delivered via a combination of policy formation, review and governance, analysis, stress testing, limit setting and monitoring.

Liquidity risk is managed separately at Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL) due to local currency and funding requirements. Unless stated otherwise, all disclosures in this section exclude BAGL and they are reported on a stand-alone basis. Adjusting for local requirements, BAGL liquidity risk is managed on a consistent basis to the Group.

This section provides an analysis of the Group’s: i) liquidity risk stress testing; ii) internal and regulatory stress tests; iii) liquidity pool; iv) funding structure and funding relationships; v) wholesale funding; vi) term financing; vii) encumbrance; viii) repurchase agreements; ix) credit ratings; x) liquidity management at BAGL and xi) contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities.

For

further detail on liquidity risk governance and framework see page 138.

Summary of performance in the period

The Group maintained a surplus to its internal and regulatory requirements in 2015. The liquidity pool was £145bn (2014: £149bn) and Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) was 133% (2014: 124%), equivalent to a surplus of £37bn (2014: £30bn). While the liquidity pool may reduce in future, the Group intends to continue to maintain a prudent surplus to regulatory requirements.

Wholesale funding outstanding excluding repurchase agreements reduced to £142bn (2014: £171bn). The Group issued £9bn of term funding net of early redemptions during 2015, of which £4bn was in public and private senior unsecured debt issued by the holding company, Barclays PLC. During Q415, Barclays PLC also issued EUR Tier 2 securities of £1bn equivalent. All the capital and debt proceeds raised by Barclays PLC have been used to subscribe for instruments at Barclays Bank PLC, the operating company with a ranking corresponding to the securities issued by Barclays PLC.

Liquidity risk stress testing

Under the Liquidity Framework, the Group has established a Liquidity Risk Appetite (LRA) together with the appropriate limits for the management of the liquidity risk. This is the level of liquidity risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations. The key expression of the liquidity risk is through internal stress tests. It is measured with reference to the liquidity pool compared to anticipated stressed net contractual and contingent outflows for each of three stress scenarios.

Liquidity Risk Appetite

As part of the LRA, the Group runs three primary liquidity stress scenarios, aligned to the PRA’s prescribed stresses:

 

§   a 90-day market-wide stress event

 

§   a 30-day Barclays-specific stress event

 

§   a combined 30-day market-wide and Barclays-specific stress event.

Under normal market conditions, the liquidity pool is managed to be at a target of at least 100% of anticipated outflows under each of these stress scenarios. The 30-day Barclays-specific stress scenario, results in the greatest net outflows of each of the liquidity stress tests .The combined 30-day scenario assumes outflows consistent with a firm specific stress for the first two weeks of the stress period, followed by relatively lower outflows consistent with a market-wide stress for the remainder of the stress period.

 

 

188  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Key LRA assumptions include:

For the year ended 31 December 2015

 

 Liquidity risk driver   Barclays-specific stress

 Wholesale secured

 and unsecured

 funding

 

§   Zero rollover of wholesale unsecured liabilities maturing, senior unsecured debt and conduit commercial paper.

 

 

§   No benefit assumed from reverse repos covering firm short positions.

 

 

§   Rollover of trades secured on extremely liquid collateral.

 

 

§   Varying rollover of trades secured on liquid collateral, subject to haircut widening.

 

 

§   Zero rollover of trades secured on less-liquid collateral.

 

 

§   100% of contractual buybacks will occur.

 

 

§   Haircuts applied to the market value of marketable assets held in the liquidity buffer.

 

 Deposit outflow

 

 

§   Substantial deposit outflows in PCB and Barclaycard as the Group is seen as greater credit risk than competitors.

 Funding

 concentration

 

 

§   Additional outflows recognised against concentration of providers of wholesale financing (largest unsecured counterparty unwilling to roll).

 Intra-day liquidity

 

 

§   Anticipated liquidity required to support additional intra-day requirements at cash payment and securities settlement venues based on historical peak usage and triparty settlement based on forward maturities of trades.

 

 

 Intra-group

 

 

 

§   Anticipated liquidity required to support material subsidiaries, based on stand-alone stress tests. Surplus liquidity held within certain subsidiaries is not taken as a benefit to the wider Group.

 

 Off-balance sheet  

§   Drawdown on committed facilities based on facility type, counterparty type and counterparty creditworthiness.

 

 

§   Outflow of all collateral owed to counterparties but not yet called.

 

 

§   Collateral outflows based on Monte Carlo simulation and historical stress outflows.

 

 

§   Increase in the Group’s initial margin requirement across all major exchanges.

 

 

§   Outflows as a result of a multi-notch downgrade in credit rating.

 

 Franchise viability

 

 

§   Liquidity required in order to meet outflows that are non-contractual in nature but necessary in order to support the Group’s ongoing franchise (for example, market-making activities and non contractual debt buyback).

 

 

 Cross currency risk

 

 

§   Net settlement cash flows at contractual maturity for physically settled FX forwards and cross currency swaps are reflected.

 

 

§   No benefit assumed from surplus net inflows in non-G10 currencies.

 

 Mitigating actions

 

 

§   Monetisation of unencumbered assets that are of known liquidity value to the firm but held outside the liquidity pool (subject to haircut/valuation adjustment).

 

 

 Internalisation Risk

 

 

§   Loss of internal sources of funding within the Prime Brokerage Synthetic Business.

 

 

§   Acceleration of term profile associated with Prime Brokerage Clients deleveraging their portfolios asymmetrically by closing short positions.

 

Liquidity regulation

Since October 2015, the Group manages its liquidity profile against the new CRD IV liquidity regime implemented by PRA. The CRD IV regime defines the liquidity risk ratio, liquidity pool asset eligibility and net stress outflow applied against Barclays reported balances.

The Group monitors its position against the CRD IV Interim LCR and the Basel III Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR). The LCR is designed to promote short-term resilience of a bank’s liquidity risk profile by ensuring that it has sufficient high quality liquid resources to survive an acute stress scenario lasting for 30 days. The NSFR has a time horizon of at least six months and has been developed to promote a sustainable maturity structure of assets and liabilities.

The PRA regime requires phased compliance with the LCR standard from 1 October 2015 at a minimum of 80% increasing to 100% by January 2018. The methodology for the LCR is based off the final published Delegated Act which became EU law in October 2015.

In October 2014, the BCBS published a final standard for the NSFR with the minimum requirement to be introduced in January 2018 at 100% on an ongoing basis. The methodology for calculating the NSFR is based on an interpretation of the Basel standards published in October 2014 and includes a number of assumptions which are subject to change prior to adoption by the European Commission through the CRD IV.

Based on the CRD IV and Basel III standards respectively, as at 31 December 2015, the Group had a surplus to both of these metrics with a CRD IV Interim LCR of 133% (2014: 124%) and a Basel III NSFR of 106% (2014: 102%).

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  189


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Comparing internal and regulatory liquidity stress tests

The LRA stress scenarios and the CRD IV Interim LCR are all broadly comparable short-term stress scenarios in which the adequacy of defined liquidity resources is assessed against contractual and contingent stress outflows. The CRD IV Interim LCR stress tests provide an independent assessment of the Group’s liquidity risk profile.

 

 Stress Test   Barclays LRA   CRD IV Interim LCR   Basel III NSFR
 Time Horizon   30 – 90 days   30 days   6+ months
 Calculation   Liquid assets to net cash outflows   Liquid assets to net cash outflows  

Stable funding resources to stable

funding requirements

As at 31 December 2015, the Group held eligible liquid assets in excess of 100% of stress requirements for all three LRA scenarios and the CRD IV Interim LCR requirement.

 

 Compliance with internal and regulatory stress tests   
 As at 31 December 2015     

 

 

 
 

 

Barclays’ LRA

(one month

Barclays

specific
requirement

£bn

  

  

  

  
)a 

  

      
 
 

 

CRD IV
Interim
LCR

£bn

  
  
b 

  

 Total eligible liquidity pool      145           147   
 Asset inflows      1           18   
 Stress outflows        
 Retail and commercial deposit outflows      (50        (72
 Wholesale funding      (15        (12
 Net secured funding      (12        (1
 Derivatives      (8        (6
 Contractual credit rating downgrade exposure      (6        (5
 Drawdowns of loan commitments      (7        (32
 Intraday      (13          
 Total stress net cash flows      (110        (110
 Surplus      35           37   
 Liquidity pool as a percentage of anticipated net cash flows      131%           133%   
 As at 31 December 2014      124%           124%   

In 2015, the Group strengthened its liquidity position, building a larger surplus to its internal and regulatory requirements. The Group plans to maintain its surplus to the internal and regulatory stress requirements at an efficient level, while considering risks to market funding conditions and its liquidity position. The continuous reassessment of these risks may lead to appropriate actions being taken with respect to sizing of the liquidity pool.

 

 

 

Note

a Of the three stress scenarios monitored as part of the LRA, the 30-day Barclays-specific scenario results in the lowest ratio at 131% (2014: 124%). This compares to 144% (2014: 135%) under the 90-day market-wide scenario, and 133% (2014: 127%) under the 30-day combined scenario.
b Includes BAGL.

 

190  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                    

                    

                

 

 

Liquidity pool

The Group liquidity pool as at 31 December 2015 was £145bn (2014: £149bn). During 2015, the month-end liquidity pool ranged from £142bn to £168bn (2014: £134bn to £156bn), and the month-end average balance was £155bn (2014: £145bn). The liquidity pool is held unencumbered and is not used to support payment or clearing requirements. Such requirements are treated as part of our regular business funding. The liquidity pool is intended to offset stress outflows, and comprises the following cash and unencumbered assets.

 

 Composition of the Group liquidity pool as at 31 December 2015   
         Liquidity pool of which CRD IV LCR eligible        
      

 

 

      
        
 

 

      Liquidity
pool

£bn

  
  

  

   

 

    Cash

£bn

  

  

   

 

   Level 1

£bn

  

  

   

 

Level 2A

£bn

  

  

      
 
 
2014
      Liquidity
pool
  
  
  
 Cash and deposits with central banksa        48        45        1                  37   
 Government bondsb                
 AAA rated        63               63                  73   
 AA+ to AA- rated        11               7        4           12   
 Other government bonds        1               1                    
 Total government bonds        75               71        4           85   
 Other                
 Supranational bonds and multilateral development banks        7               7                  9   
 Agencies and agency mortgage-backed securities        8               6        2           11   
 Covered bonds (rated AA- and above)        4               2        2           3   
 Other        3                                4   
 Total Other        22               15        4           27   
 Total as at 31 December 2015        145        45        87        8        
 Total as at 31 December 2014        149        37        99        7              

 

The Group liquidity pool is well diversified by major currency and the Group monitors LRA stress scenarios for major currencies.

 

  

 Liquidity pool by currency   
      

 

 

 

 

USD

£bn

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

EUR

£bn

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

GBP

£bn

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

Other

£bn

 

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Total

£bn

 

  

  

 Liquidity pool as at 31 December 2015        41        33        46        25           145   
 Liquidity pool as at 31 December 2014        46        27        54        22           149   

Management of the Group liquidity pool

The composition of the Group liquidity pool is efficiently managed. The maintenance of the liquidity pool increases the Group’s costs as the interest expense paid on the liabilities used to fund the liquidity pool is greater than the interest income received on liquidity pool assets. This cost can be reduced by investing a greater portion of the Group liquidity pool in highly liquid assets other than cash and deposits with central banks while maintaining a minimum level of cash in the liquidity pool to meet cash outflows on the first day of a Barclays-specific stress and enough cash and same day settlement securities to meet all outflows in the first three days of the stress. These assets in the liquidity pool primarily comprise highly rated government bonds, and their inclusion in the liquidity pool does not compromise the liquidity position of the Group.

The composition of the liquidity pool is subject to limits set by the Board, Treasury Committee and the independent Credit risk and Market risk functions. In addition, the investment of the liquidity pool is monitored for concentration risk by issuer, currency and asset type. Given the incremental returns generated by these highly liquid assets, the risk and reward profile is continuously managed.

The Group manages the liquidity pool on a centralised basis. As at 31 December 2015, 94% of the liquidity pool was located in Barclays Bank PLC (2014: 92%) and was available to meet liquidity needs across the Group. The residual liquidity pool is held predominantly within Barclays Capital Inc. (BCI). The portion of the liquidity pool outside of Barclays Bank PLC is held against entity-specific stressed outflows and regulatory requirements. To the extent the use of this portion of the liquidity pool is restricted due to regulatory requirements, it is assumed to be unavailable to the rest of the Group.

 

Notes

a Of which over 97% (2014: over 95%) was placed with the BoE, US Federal Reserve, European Central Bank, Bank of Japan and Swiss National Bank.
b Of which over 92% (2014: over 95%) are UK, US, Japanese, French, German, Danish, Swiss and Dutch securities.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  191


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Contingent liquidity

In addition to the Group liquidity pool, the Group has access to other unencumbered assets which provide a source of contingent liquidity. While these are not relied on in the Group’s LRA, a portion of these assets may be monetised in a stress to generate liquidity through use as collateral for secured funding or through outright sale.

In either a Barclays-specific or market-wide liquidity stress, liquidity available via market sources could be severely disrupted. In circumstances where market liquidity is unavailable or available only at heavily discounted prices, the Group could generate liquidity via central bank facilities. The Group maintains a significant amount of collateral pre-positioned at central banks and available to raise funding.

For more detail on the Group’s other unencumbered assets see page 195.

Funding structure and funding relationships

The basis for sound liquidity risk management is a solid funding structure that reduces the probability of a liquidity stress leading to an inability to meet funding obligations as they fall due. The Group’s overall funding strategy is to develop a diversified funding base (geographically, by type and by counterparty) and maintain access to a variety of alternative funding sources, to provide protection against unexpected fluctuations, while minimising the cost of funding.

Within this, the Group aims to align the sources and uses of funding. As such, retail and commercial customer loans and advances are largely funded by customer deposits, with the surplus funding the liquidity pool. Other assets, together with other loans and advances and unencumbered assets are funded by long-term wholesale debt and equity.

The majority of reverse repurchase agreements are matched by repurchase agreements. The liquidity pool is predominantly funded through wholesale markets. These funding relationships are summarised below:

 

 Assets     
 
       2015
£bn
  
  
    
 
       2014
£bn
  
  
      Liabilities     
 
       2015
£bn
  
  
    
 
       2014
£bn
  
  
 Loans and advances to customersa      336         346        Customer accountsa      374         366   
 Group liquidity pool      145         149        < 1 Year wholesale funding      54         75   
          > 1 Year wholesale funding      88         96   
 Other assetsb      135         153        Equity and other liabilitiesb      104         112   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendingc

     178         271        Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowingc      178         271   
 Derivative financial instruments      326         439        Derivative financial instruments      322         438   
 Total assets      1,120         1,358        Total liabilities and equity      1,120         1,358   

 

Deposit funding (Includes BAGL) (audited)

  

     2015         2014   

Funding of loans and advances to customers

    
 
 
Loans and
advances to
customers
  
  
  
    
 
Customer
deposits
  
  
    
 
 
Loan to
deposit
ratio
  
  
  
    
 
 
Loan to
deposit
ratio
  
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

     £bn         £bn         %         %   

Personal and Corporate Banking

     218         305         

Barclaycard

     40         10         

Africa Banking

     30         31         

Non-Core (retail)

     12         2                     

Total retail and corporate funding

     300         348         86         89   

Investment Bank, Non-Core (wholesale) and Other

     99         70                     

Total

     399         418         95         100   

 

 

 

Notes

a Excluding cash collateral and settlement balances.
b BAGL Group balances other than customer loans and advances of £29bn and customer deposits of £29bn are included in other assets and liabilities.
c Comprised of reverse repurchase that provide financing to customers collateralised by highly liquid securities on a short-term basis or are used to settle short-term inventory positions and repo financing of trading portfolio assets.

 

192  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

PCB, Barclaycard, Non-Core (Retail) and Africa Banking activities are largely funded with customer deposits. As at 31 December 2015, the loan to deposit ratio for these businesses was 86% (2014: 89%). The Group loan to deposit ratio as at 31 December 2015 was 95% (2014: 100%).

The excess of the Investment Bank’s loans and advances over customer deposits is funded with long-term debt and equity. The Investment Bank does not rely on customer retail deposit funding from PCB.

As at 31 December 2015, £129bn (2014: £128bn) of total customer deposits were insured through the UK Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) and other similar schemes. In addition to these customer deposits, there were £4bn (2014: £4bn) of other liabilities insured by governments.

Although, contractually, current accounts are repayable on demand and savings accounts at short notice, the Group’s broad base of customers, numerically and by depositor type, helps protect against unexpected fluctuations in balances. Such accounts form a stable funding base for the Group’s operations and liquidity needs. The Group assesses the behavioural maturity of both customer assets and liabilities to identify structural balance sheet funding gaps. Customer behaviour is determined by quantitative modelling combined with qualitative assessment taking into account for historical experience, current customer composition, and macroeconomic projections. These behavioural profiles represent our forward looking expectation of the run-off profile. The relatively low cash outflow within one year demonstrates that customer funding remains broadly matched with customer assets from a behavioural perspective.

 

Behavioural maturity profile (Includes BAGL)

                                                              
              Behavioural maturity profile cash outflow/(inflow)   
      
 
 
 
Loans and
advances to
customers
£bn
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
Customer
deposits
£bn
  
  
  
    
 
 
 

 

Customer
funding
surplus/
(deficit)

£bn

  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 

 

Not more
than one
year

£bn

  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 
 
 
Over one
year but
not more
than five
years
£bn
  
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
More than
five years
£bn
  
  
  
    
 
Total
£bn
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

                    

Personal and Corporate Banking

     218         305         87         18         3         66         87   

Barclaycard

     40         10         (30      (10      (10      (10      (30

Africa Banking

     30         31         1         2         1         (2      1   

Non-Core (Retail)

     12         2         (10      (1      (2      (7      (10

Total

     300         348         48         9         (8      47         48   

As at 31 December 2014

                    

Personal and Corporate Banking

     217         299         82         19         3         60         82   

Barclaycard

     37         7         (30      (10      (10      (10      (30

Africa Banking

     35         35                 2         (2                

Non-Core (Retail)

     20         8         (12              (2      (10      (12

Total

     309         349         40         11         (11      40         40   

Wholesale funding

Wholesale funding relationships are summarised below:

 

Assets

    

 

      2015

£bn

  

  

    
 
      2014
£bn
  
  
     

Liabilities

    
 
      2015
£bn
  
  
    
 
      2014
£bn
  
  

Trading portfolio assets

     28         37       

Repurchase agreements

     70         124   

Reverse repurchase agreements

     42         87             

Reverse repurchase agreements

     34         45       

Trading portfolio liabilities

     34         45   

Derivative financial instruments

     326         440       

Derivative financial instruments

     322         439   

Liquidity pool

     97         109       

Less than one year wholesale debt

     54         75   

Other assetsa

        103            122       

Greater than one year wholesale debt

and equity

        150            157   

Repurchase agreements fund reverse repurchase agreements and trading portfolio assets. Trading portfolio liabilities are settled by the remainder of reverse repurchase agreements (see Note 19 Offsetting financial assets and liabilities for further detail on netting).

Derivative liabilities and assets are largely matched. A substantial proportion of balance sheet derivative positions qualify for counterparty netting and the remaining portions are largely offset once netted against cash collateral received and paid.

Wholesale debt, along with the surplus of customer deposits to loans and advances to customers, is used to fund the liquidity pool. Term wholesale debt and equity largely fund other assets.

 

 

Note

a Predominantly available for sale investments, financial assets designated at fair value and loans and advances to banks funded by greater than one year wholesale debt and equity and trading portfolio assets.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  193


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Composition of wholesale funding

The Group maintains access to a variety of sources of wholesale funds in major currencies, including those available from term investors across a variety of distribution channels and geographies, money markets, and repo markets. The Group has direct access to US, European and Asian capital markets through its global investment banking operations and long-term investors through its clients worldwide, and is an active participant in money markets. As a result, wholesale funding is well diversified by product, maturity, geography and major currency.

As at 31 December 2015, the Group’s total wholesale funding outstanding (excluding repurchase agreements) was £142bn (2014: £171bn). £54bn (2014: £75bn) of wholesale funding matures in less than one year, of which £14bn (2014: £22bn)a relates to term funding.

As at 31 December 2015, outstanding wholesale funding comprised £25bn (2014: £33bn) of secured funding and £117bn (2014: £138bn) of unsecured funding.

In preparation for a Single Point of Entry resolution model, Barclays continues to issue debt capital and term senior unsecured funding out of Barclays PLC, the holding company, replacing maturing debt in Barclays Bank PLC.

 

Maturity profile of wholesale fundingb

  

     
 
 

 

Not more
than one
month

£bn

  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over one
month but
not more
than three
months

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 
 

 

Over three
months
but not
more than
six
months

£bn

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over six
months
but not
more than
one year

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Sub-total
less than
one year

£bn

  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over one
year but
not more
than two
years

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over three
years but
not more
than four
years

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over four
years but
not more
than five
years

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 

 

More than
five years

£bn

  
  

  

   

 

Total

£bn

  

  

Barclays PLC

                                                                                       

Senior unsecured (public benchmark)

                                              0.8        1.3        0.9        3.1        6.1   

Senior unsecured (privately placed)

                                              0.1                             0.1   

Subordinated liabilities

                                                            0.9        0.9        1.8   

Barclays Bank PLC

                                                                                       

Deposits from banks

    9.5        3.1        1.3        0.8        14.7        0.1                             0.3        15.1   

Certificates of deposit and commercial paper

    0.5        4.9        3.4        5.3        14.1        1.0        0.6        0.9        0.4        0.5        17.5   

Asset backed commercial paper

    2.2        3.3        0.2               5.7                                           5.7   

Senior unsecured (public benchmark)

           1.3               1.4        2.7        3.6               4.3        1.3        3.9        15.8   

Senior unsecured (privately
placed)c

    0.6        1.6        2.3        4.8        9.3        5.1        5.4        3.7        3.0        8.5        35.0   

Covered bonds

                  1.1               1.1        4.4        1.0        1.6               4.2        12.3   

Asset backed securities

    0.7                             0.7        0.5        1.4        1.3        0.5        0.3        4.7   

Subordinated liabilities

                                       1.1        3.0        0.2        0.9        14.0        19.2   

Otherd

    2.3        1.1        0.3        1.5        5.2        0.7        0.3        0.4        0.4        1.6        8.6   

Total as at 31 December 2015

    15.8        15.3        8.6        13.8        53.5        16.5        12.6        13.7        8.3        37.3        141.9   

Of which secured

    4.2        3.9        1.6        0.3        10.0        5.1        2.4        2.8        0.5        4.5        25.3   

Of which unsecured

    11.6        11.4        7.0        13.5        43.5        11.4        10.2        10.9        7.8        32.8        116.6   

Total as at 31 December 2014

    16.8        23.2        14.4        21.0        75.4        14.0        16.1        6.5        14.0        45.4        171.4   

Of which secured

    5.3        7.8        1.7        2.2        17.0        2.7        5.1        0.1        2.4        6.0        33.3   

Of which unsecured

    11.5        15.4        12.7        18.8        58.4        11.3        11.0        6.4        11.6        39.4        138.1   

Outstanding wholesale funding includes £35bn (2014: £45bn) of privately placed senior unsecured notes in issue. These notes are issued through a variety of distribution channels including intermediaries and private banks. Although not a requirement, the liquidity pool exceeded wholesale funding maturing in less than one year by £91bn (2014: £74bn).

 

 

Notes

a Term funding maturities comprise public benchmark and privately placed senior unsecured notes, covered bonds/asset backed securities (ABS) and subordinated debt where the original maturity of the instrument was more than one year.
b The composition of wholesale funds comprises the balance sheet reported deposits from banks, financial liabilities at fair value, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities, excluding cash collateral and settlement balances. It does not include collateral swaps, including participation in the BoE’s Funding for Lending Scheme. Included within deposits from banks are £6bn of liabilities drawn in the European Central Bank’s facilities.
c Includes structured notes of £28bn, £8bn of which mature within one year.
d Primarily comprised of fair value deposits £5bn and secured financing of physical gold £3bn.

 

194  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Currency composition of wholesale debt

As at 31 December 2015, the proportion of wholesale funding by major currencies was as follows:

 

Currency composition of wholesale funding

                                   
      
 
        USD
%
  
  
    
 
        EUR
%
  
  
    
 
        GBP
%
  
  
    
 
        Other
%
  
  

Deposits from banks

     25         51         19         5   

Certificates of deposits and commercial paper

     25         60         14         1   

Asset backed commercial paper

     92         8                   

Senior unsecured (public benchmark)

     43         20         28         9   

Senior unsecured (privately placed)

     39         21         18         22   

Covered bonds/ABS

     27         41         31         1   

Subordinated liabilities

     44         19         37           

Total as at 31 December 2015

     38         31         23         8   

Total as at 31 December 2014

     35         32         25         8   

To manage cross-currency refinancing risk the Group manages to foreign exchange cash flow limits, which limit risk at specific maturities. Across wholesale funding, the composition of wholesale funding is materially unchanged.

Term financing

The Group issued £9bn (2014: £15bn) of term funding net of early redemptions during 2015. The Group has £14bn of term debt maturing in 2016 and £16bn maturing in 2017a.

The Group expects to continue issuing public wholesale debt in 2016, in order to maintain a stable and diverse funding base by type, currency and distribution channel.

Encumbrance

Asset encumbrance arises from collateral pledged against secured funding and other collateralised obligations. Barclays funds a portion of trading portfolio assets and other securities via repurchase agreements and other similar borrowing, and pledges a portion of customer loans and advances as collateral in securitisations, covered bond and other similar secured structures. Barclays monitors the mix of secured and unsecured funding sources within the Group’s funding plan and seeks to efficiently utilise available collateral to raise secured funding and meet other collateralised obligations.

Encumbered assets have been defined consistently with the Group’s reporting requirements under Article 100 of the CRR. Securities and commodities assets are considered encumbered when they have been pledged or used to secure, collateralise or credit enhance a transaction which impacts their transferability and free use. This includes external repurchase or other similar agreements with market counterparts.

Excluding assets positioned at central banks, as at 31 December 2015, £157bn (2014: £176bn) of the Group’s assets were encumbered, primarily due to cash collateral posted, firm financing of trading portfolio assets and other securities and funding secured against loans and advances to customers.

Assets may also be encumbered under secured funding arrangements with central banks, such as the Funding for Lending Scheme. In advance of such encumbrance, assets are often positioned with central banks to facilitate efficient future draw down. £88bn (2014: £99bn) of on-balance sheet assets were positioned at the central banks, consisting of encumbered assets and collateral pre-positioned and available for use in secured financing transactions.

£212bn (2014: £270bn) of on and off-balance sheet assets not positioned at the central bank were identified as readily available and available for use in secured financing transactions. Additionally, they include cash and securities held in the Group liquidity pool as well as unencumbered assets which provide a source of contingent liquidity. While these additional assets are not relied upon in the Group’s LRA, a portion of these assets may be monetised to generate liquidity through use as collateral for secured funding or through outright sale. Loans and advances to customers are only classified as readily available if they are already in a form, such that, they can be used to raise funding without further management actions. This includes excess collateral already in secured funding vehicles.

£208bn (2014: £208bn) of assets not positioned at the central bank were identified as available as collateral. These assets are not subject to any restrictions on their ability to secure funding, to be offered as collateral, or to be sold to reduce potential future funding requirements, but are not immediately available in the normal course of business in their current form. They primarily consist of loans and advances which would be suitable for use in secured funding structures but are conservatively classified as not readily available because they are not in transferable form.

Not available as collateral consist of assets that cannot be pledged or used as security for funding due to restrictions that prevent their pledge or use as security for funding in the normal course of business.

Derivatives and reverse repo assets relate specifically to derivatives, reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending. These are shown separately as these on-balance sheet assets cannot be pledged. However, these assets can give rise to the receipt of non-cash assets which are held off-balance sheet, and can be used to raise secured funding or meet additional funding requirements.

In addition, £265bn (2014: £313bn) of the total £306bn (2014: £396bn) securities accepted as collateral, and held off-balance sheet, were on-pledged, the significant majority of which related to matched-book activity where reverse repurchase agreements are matched by repurchase agreements entered into to facilitate client activity. The remainder relates primarily to reverse repurchases used to settle trading portfolio liabilities as well as collateral posted against derivative margin requirements.

 

Note

a Includes £0.6bn of bilateral secured funding in 2016 and £0.4bn in 2017.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  195


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Asset encumbrancea

  

           
     
 
Assets encumbered as a result of transactions
with counterparties other than central banks
  
  
        

 

Other assets (comprising assets encumbered at the central bank

and unencumbered assets)

  

  

                Assets not positioned at the central bank     

On-balance sheet

As at 31 December 2015

   
 
Assets
£bn
  
  
   

 
 

 

As a result

of covered
bonds

£bn

  

  
  

  

   

 
 
 

 

As a

result of
securitis-
ations

£bn

  

  
  
  

  

   
 
Other
£bn
  
  
   

 

Total

£bn

  

  

 

Assets 

positioned 

at central  banksc

£bn 

  

  

   

  

   
 
 
Readily
available
assets £bn
  
  
  
   

 

 
 

Available

as

collateral
£bn

  

  

  
  

   
 
 
 
 
Not
available
as
collateral
£bn
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 

 

Derivatives
and Reverse
repos

£bn

  
  
  

  

   
 
Total
£bn
  
  

Cash and balances at central banks

    47.9                                         –         47.9                             47.9   

Trading portfolio assets

    74.8                      49.1        49.1          –         25.7                             25.7   

Financial assets at fair value

    72.5                      2.5        2.5          –         3.2        17.7        1.3        47.8        70.0   

Derivative financial instruments

    325.5                                      –                              325.5        325.5   

Loans and advances – banksb

    19.6                                      –         7.9        10.2        1.5               19.6   

Loans and advances – customersb

    307.3        16.4        5.9        8.0        30.3          86.4         14.8        175.8                      277.0   

Cash collateral

    62.6                      62.6        62.6          –                                       

Settlement balances

    20.4                                      –                       20.4               20.4   

Available for sale financial investments

    87.0                      12.2        12.2          –         72.2        1.0        1.6               74.8   

Reverse repurchase agreements

    28.2                                      –                              28.2        28.2   

Non-current assets held for sale

    7.3                                      1.9         1.2        3.2        1.0               7.3   

Other financial assets

    19.9                                        –                       19.9               19.9   

Total on-balance sheet

    1,073.0        16.4        5.9        134.4        156.7            88.3         172.9        207.9        45.7        401.5        916.3   

 

 Off-balance sheet       
     
 
 
Collateral
received
£bn
  
  
  
       
 
 

 
 
 

Collateral 
received of 
which 

on- 
pledged 
£bn 

  
  
  

  
  
  

   
 
 
 
Readily
available
assets
£bn
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Available
as
collateral
£bn
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
Not
available
as
collateral
£bn
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
                    
 
 
  
                 
 Fair value of securities accepted as collateral     305.9            265.4         39.0               1.5       
 Total unencumbered collateral                –         211.9        207.9        47.2       

 

 

 

Notes

a The format of this disclosure has been updated following the issuance of a ‘Dear CFO’ letter by the PRA. The revised format continues to satisfy the recommendations of the Enhanced Disclosure Task Force on encumbrance disclosure.
b Excluding cash collateral and settlement balances.
c Includes both encumbered and unencumbered assets. Assets within this category that have been encumbered are disclosed as assets pledged in Note 40 to the financial statements.

 

196  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


        

    

    

 

 

Asset encumbrancea

  

           
     

 

Assets encumbered as a result of transactions

with counterparties other than central banks

  

  

        

 

Other assets (comprising assets encumbered at the central bank

and unencumbered assets)

  

  

            Assets         Assets not positioned at the central bank     

On-balance sheet

As at 31 December 2014

   

 

Assets

£bn

  

  

   

 

 

 

As a result

of covered

bonds

£bn

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

As a

result of

securitis-

ations

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

Other

£bn

  

  

   

 

Total

£bn

  

  

 

positioned 

at the 

central 

banksc

£bn 

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Readily

available

assets

£bn

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Available

as

collateral

£bn

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Not

available

as

collateral

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Derivatives

and

Reverse

repos

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

Total

£bn

  

  

Cash and balances at central banks

    37.8                                      –         37.8                             37.8   

Trading portfolio assets

    111.9                      50.7        50.7          –         61.2                             61.2   

Financial assets at fair value

    34.2                      2.3        2.3          –         3.5        20.7        2.5        5.2        31.9   

Derivative financial instruments

    438.6                                      –                              438.6        438.6   

Loans and advances – banksb

    19.5                                      –         8.6        9.2        1.7               19.5   

Loans and advances – customersb

    311.1        20.4        9.2        10.3        39.9          93.4         8.7        169.1                      271.2   

Cash collateral

    72.6                      72.6        72.6          –                                       

Settlement balances

    30.8                                      –                       30.8               30.8   

Available for sale financial investments

    82.0                      9.3        9.3          –         70.0        0.5        2.2               72.7   

Reverse repurchase agreements

    131.7                                      –                              131.7        131.7   

Non-current assets held for sale

    15.6               1.5               1.5          5.1         0.2        8.3        0.5               14.1   

Other financial assets

    18.8                                        –                       18.8               18.8   

Total on-balance sheet

    1,304.6        20.4        10.7        145.2        176.3            98.5         190.0        207.8        56.5        575.5        1,128.3   
                       
 Off-balance sheet       
                                     

 

 

Collateral

received

£bn

  

  

  

       

 

 

 

 

 

Collateral

received

of which

on-

pledged

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Readily

available

assets

£bn

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Available

as

collateral

£bn

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Not

available

as

collateral

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

   

Fair value of securities accepted as collateral

  

            395.7            313.0        79.9               2.8       

Total unencumbered collateral

  

                                                269.9        207.8        59.3       

 

 

 

Notes

a The format of this disclosure has been updated following the issuance of a ‘Dear CFO’ letter by the PRA. The revised format continues to satisfy the recommendations of the Enhanced Disclosure Task Force on encumbrance disclosure.
b Excluding cash collateral and settlement balances.
c Includes both encumbered and unencumbered assets. Assets within this category that have been encumbered are disclosed as assets pledged in Note 40 to the financial statements.

 

home.barclays/annualreport

   Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  197


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Repurchase agreements and reverse repurchase agreements

Barclays enters into repurchase and other similar secured borrowing agreements to finance its trading portfolio assets. The majority of reverse repurchase agreements are matched by offsetting repurchase agreements entered into to facilitate client activity. The remainder are used to settle trading portfolio liabilities.

Due to the high quality of collateral provided against secured financing transactions, the liquidity risk associated with this activity is significantly lower than unsecured financing transactions. Nonetheless, Barclays manages to gross and net secured mismatch limits to limit refinancing risk under a severe stress scenario and a portion of the Group’s liquidity pool is held against stress outflows on these positions. The Group secured mismatch limits are calibrated based on market capacity, liquidity characteristics of the collateral and risk appetite of the Group.

The cash value of repurchase and reverse repurchase transactions will typically differ from the market value of the collateral against which these transactions are secured by an amount referred to as a haircut (or over-collateralisation). Typical haircut levels vary depending on the quality of the collateral that underlies these transactions. For transactions secured against extremely liquid fixed income collateral, lenders demand relatively small haircuts (typically ranging from 0-2%). For transactions secured against less liquid collateral, haircuts vary by asset class (typically ranging from 5-10% for corporate bonds and other less liquid collateral).

As at 31 December 2015, the significant majority of repurchases related to matched-book activity. The Group may face refinancing risk on the net maturity mismatch for matched-book activity.

 

Net matched-book activitya,b

  

    

Negative number represents net repurchase agreement (net liability)

    
 
 
Less than 
one month 
£bn 
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
One month 
to three 
months 
£bn 
  
  
  
  
   Over three    months    £bn   

As at 31 December 2015

        

Extremely liquid fixed income

     (12.9)         7.3        5.6   

Liquid fixed income

     0.3          0.6        (0.9)  

Equities

     7.0          (1.5)       (5.5)  

Less liquid fixed income

     1.6          (0.4)       (1.2)  

Total

     (4.0)         6.0        (2.0)  

As at 31 December 2014

        

Extremely liquid fixed income

     (8.9)         6.3        2.6   

Liquid fixed income

     (0.1)         0.5        (0.4)  

Equities

     8.9          (3.0)       (5.9)  

Less liquid fixed income

     1.2          0.3        (1.5)  

Total

     1.1          4.1        (5.2)  

The residual repurchase agreement activity is the firm-financing component and reflects the Group funding of a portion of its trading portfolio assets. The primary risk related to firm-financing activity is the inability to roll-over transactions as they mature. However, 50% (2014: 54%) of firm-financing activity was secured against highly liquid assets.

 

Firm financing repurchase agreementsa,b

  

    
      
 
 
Less than
  one month
£bn
  
  
  
    
 
 

 

  One month
to three
months

£bn

  
  
  

  

    
 
 
Over three
months
£bn
  
  
  
            Total   £bn  

As at 31 December 2015

           

Extremely liquid fixed income

     28.8         8.3         0.3       37.4  

Liquid fixed income

     2.0         0.6         1.1       3.7  

Highly liquid

     10.9         6.3         10.2       27.4  

Less liquid

     2.7         1.1         1.9       5.7  

Total

     44.4         16.3         13.5       74.2  

As at 31 December 2014

           

Extremely liquid fixed income

     33.4         4.1         2.2       39.7  

Liquid fixed income

     3.6         0.3         0.6       4.5  

Highly liquid

     13.1         5.0         4.1       22.2  

Less liquid

     2.3         1.3         3.3       6.9  

Total

     52.4         10.7         10.2       73.3  

 

 

 

Notes

a Includes collateral swaps.
b Includes financing positions for prime brokerage clients which are reported as customer payables/receivables on-balance sheet.

 

198  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

 

 

 

 

Credit ratings

In addition to monitoring and managing key metrics related to the financial strength of the Group, Barclays also subscribe to independent credit rating agency reviews by Standard & Poor’s (S&P), Moody’s, Fitch and Rating and Investment Information (R&I). These ratings assess the creditworthiness of the Group, its subsidiaries and branches and are based on reviews of a broad range of business and financial attributes including risk management processes and procedures, capital strength, earnings, funding, liquidity, accounting and governance.

 

 Credit ratingsa                    
 As at 31 December 2015                                            Standard & Poor’s       Moody’s       Fitch
 Barclays Bank PLC          
 Long-term   A- (Stable)     A2 (Stable)     A (Stable)
 Short-term   A-2     P-1     F1
 Stand-alone rating   BBB+       BAA2       A
 Barclays PLC          
 Long-term   BBB (Stable)     Baa3 (Stable)     A (Stable)
 Short-term   A-2       P-3       F1

Barclays’ ratings carry a stable outlook with S&P, Moody’s and Fitch. Fitch affirmed the ratings in December 2015 as part of its periodic review, noting the balance of Barclays’ stable PCB and strong Barclaycard businesses against the Investment Bank and Barclays Non-Core performance.

Credit rating agencies took industry wide actions in 2015 driven by evolving resolution frameworks. This involved the reassessment of the likelihood of sovereign support resulting in downward pressure on senior credit ratings. They also updated their methodologies which provided some mitigation to reflect the subordination of junior debt available to absorb losses ahead of senior bank creditors.

As a consequence, S&P downgraded Barclays PLC, the holding company, by two notches and Barclays Bank PLC, the operating company, by one notch in H115. Moody’s downgraded Barclays PLC by three notches while affirming the rating of Barclays Bank PLC also in H115. There was no impact on Barclays’ stand-alone credit ratings with all credit rating agencies.

During the year, Barclays also solicited issuer ratings from R&I for which they assigned ratings of A- for Barclays PLC and A for Barclays Bank PLC with stable outlooks.

 

 Contractual credit rating downgrade exposure (cumulative cash flow)   
     Cumulative cash outflow  
      
 
 
One-notch
downgrade
£bn
  
  
  
    
 
 
Two-notch
downgrade
£bn
  
  
  
 As at 31 December 2015      
 Securitisation derivatives      2         3   
 Contingent liabilities      1         1   
 Derivatives margining              1   
 Liquidity facilities      1         1   
 Total contractual funding or margin requirements      4         6   
 As at 31 December 2014      
 Securitisation derivatives      5         6   
 Contingent liabilities      8         8   
 Derivatives margining              1   
 Liquidity facilities      1         2   
 Total contractual funding or margin requirements      14         17   

 

 

 

 

 

 

Note

a Refers to Standard & Poor’s Stand-Alone Credit Profile (SACP), Moody’s Bank Financial Strength Ratio (BFSR)/Baseline Credit Assessment (BCA) and Fitch Viability Rating (VR).

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  199


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Liquidity management at BAGL Group (audited)

Liquidity risk is managed separately at BAGL Group due to local currency, funding and regulatory requirements.

In addition to the Group liquidity pool, as at 31 December 2015, BAGL Group held £6bn (2014: £7bn) of liquidity pool assets against BAGL specific anticipated stressed outflows. The liquidity pool consists of notes and coins, central bank deposits, government bonds and Treasury bills.

The BAGL loan to deposit ratio as at 31 December 2015 was 102% (2014: 102%).

As at 31 December 2015, BAGL had £9bn (2014: £9bn) of wholesale funding outstanding, of which £5bn (2014: £5bn) matures in less than 12 months.

Additional information on liquidity management at BAGL can be found in the Barclays Africa Group Annual Report.

Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (audited)

The table on the next page provides detail on the contractual maturity of all financial instruments and other assets and liabilities. Derivatives (other than those designated in a hedging relationship) and trading portfolio assets and liabilities are included in the ‘on demand’ column at their fair value. Liquidity risk on these items is not managed on the basis of contractual maturity since they are not held for settlement according to such maturity and will frequently be settled before contractual maturity at fair value. Derivatives designated in a hedging relationship are included according to their contractual maturity.

Financial assets designated at fair value in respect of linked liabilities to customers under investment contracts have been included in other assets and other liabilities as the Group is not exposed to liquidity risk arising from them; any request for funds from creditors would be met by simultaneously liquidating or transferring the related investment.

 

200  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

 

 

 

 

 

    Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (including BAGL) (audited)
   

As at

31 December 2015

   
 
 
On
demand
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Not more
than three
months
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 

 
 
 

Over three
months
but not
more

than six
months
£m

  
  
  
  

  
  
  

   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Over six
months
but not
more
than nine
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
Over nine
months
but not
more than
one year
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 

 
 
 
 

Over one
year

but not
more than
two years
£m

  
  

  
  
  
  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

Over three

years but

not more

than five

years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

   
 
 

 
 

 

Over five
years but
not more

than ten
years

£m

  
  
 

  
  

  

   
 

 

Over ten
years

£m

  
  

  

 

Total  

£m  

  Assets                      
  Cash and balances at central banks     49,580        131                                                              49,711 
  Items in the course of collection from other banks     631        380                                                              1,011 
  Trading portfolio assets     77,348                                                                     77,348 
  Financial assets designated at fair value     5,692        46,941        1,722        1,372        583        1,021        587        424        867        16,172      75,381 
  Derivative financial instruments     326,772        28        3        1        53        328        61        257        147        59      327,709 
  Loans and advances to banks     5,354        31,539        1,954        366        468        588        991        43        12        34      41,349 
  Loans and advances to customers     29,117        76,337        13,935        7,084        12,332        27,616        27,318        48,707        50,737        106,034      399,217 
  Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending     2        24,258        3,296        292        205        74        35        1        24             28,187 
  Available for sale investments     467        2,396        1,792        4,936        2,088        11,537        14,659        17,898        21,445        13,049      90,267 
    Other financial assets            1,304                             100                                  1,404 
    Total financial assets     494,963        183,314        22,702        14,051        15,729        41,264        43,651        67,330        73,232        135,348      1,091,584 
    Other assetsa                                                                                   28,428 
    Total assets                                                                                   1,120,012 
  Liabilities                      
  Deposits from banks     5,717        38,720        1,355        540        335        97        9        67        236        4      47,080 
  Items in the course of collection due to other banks     1,013                                                                     1,013 
  Customer accounts     312,921        80,114        7,605        4,253        5,304        2,845        912        1,654        622        2,012      418,242 
  Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing     66        17,346        3,479        1,975        876        843        52               398             25,035 
  Trading portfolio liabilities     33,967                                                                     33,967 
  Financial liabilities designated at fair value     319        52,185        3,152        3,470        2,317        6,093        5,458        7,446        4,139        5,533      90,112 
  Derivative financial instruments     323,786        80        92        49        49        42        13        57        70        14      324,252 
  Debt securities in issue     50        14,270        5,615        4,322        4,469        10,164        4,797        13,037        10,028        2,398      69,150 
  Subordinated liabilities     2                      9        28        1,254        2,994        2,194        8,741        6,245      21,467 
    Other financial liabilities            2,685                             1,075                                  3,760 
    Total financial liabilities     677,841        205,400        21,298        14,618        13,378        22,413        14,235        24,455        24,234        16,206      1,034,078 
    Other liabilitiesa                                                                                   20,070 
    Total liabilities                                                                                   1,054,148 
    Cumulative liquidity gap     (182,878     (204,964     (203,560     (204,127     (201,776     (182,925     (153,509     (110,634     (61,636     57,506      65,864 

 

 

Note

a Other assets includes balances of £7,364m (2014: £15,574m) and other liabilities includes balances of £5,997m (2014: £13,115m) relating to amounts held for sale. Please refer to Note 44 for details.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  201


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

    Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (including BAGL) (audited)
   

As at

31 December 2014

   
 
 
On
demand
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Not more
than three
months
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 

 
 
 

Over three
months
but not
more

than six
months
£m

  
  
  
  

  
  
  

   
 

 
 

 

 
 

Over six
months

but not
more

than nine

months
£m

  
  

  
  

 

  
  

   
 
 
 
 
 
Over nine
months
but not
more than
one year
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 

 
 
 
 

Over one
year

but not
more than
two years
£m

  
  

  
  
  
  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over three
years but
not more
than five
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over five
years but
not more
than ten
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 

 

Over ten
years

£m

  
  

  

 

Total

£m

  Assets                      
  Cash and balances at central banks     39,466        229                                                              39,695
  Items in the course of collection from other banks     828        382                                                              1,210
  Trading portfolio assets     114,717                                                                     114,717
  Financial assets designated at fair value     5,732        3,139        1,540        797        602        2,696        1,322        1,253        1,038        18,538      36,657
  Derivative financial instruments     438,270        26        6        8        7        204        274        443        439        232      439,909
  Loans and advances to banks     5,875        31,138        3,236        225        944        404        233        20        36             42,111
  Loans and advances to customers     24,607        99,208        9,225        6,900        9,241        35,477        24,653        48,486        54,168        115,802      427,767
  Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending     144        117,977        9,857        2,013        941        28        116        109        22        546      131,753
  Available for sale investments     513        1,324        2,045        3,576        844        10,804        16,705        10,107        23,683        16,465      86,066
    Other financial assets            1,469                             176                                  1,645
    Total financial assets     630,152        254,892        25,909        13,519        12,579        49,789        43,303        60,418        79,386        151,583      1,321,530
    Other assetsa                                                                                   36,376
    Total assets                                                                                   1,357,906
  Liabilities                      
  Deposits from banks     7,978        48,155        1,041        504        298        187        95        69        57        6      58,390
  Items in the course of collection due to other banks     1,177                                                                     1,177
  Customer accounts     317,449        86,626        7,284        5,442        3,245        4,208        494        1,219        713        1,024      427,704
  Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing     40        111,766        7,175        2,847        1,989        119        116               427             124,479
  Trading portfolio liabilities     45,124                                                                     45,124
  Financial liabilities designated at fair value     665        6,554        3,493        4,056        3,244        7,015        5,524        9,573        6,174        8,851      55,149
  Derivative financial instruments     438,623        29        7        12        5        62        69        78        268        167      439,320
  Debt securities in issue     10        19,075        11,146        9,712        4,791        7,568        10,560        10,350        11,376        1,511      86,099
  Subordinated liabilities            235        48        15               37        1,259        1,947        10,938        6,674      21,153
    Other financial liabilities            3,060                             815                                  3,875
    Total financial liabilities     811,066        275,500        30,194        22,588        13,572        20,011        18,117        23,236        29,953        18,233      1,262,470
    Other liabilitiesa                                                                                   29,478
    Total liabilities                                                                                   1,291,948
    Cumulative liquidity gap     (180,914     (201,522     (205,807     (214,876     (215,869     (186,091     (160,905     (123,723     (74,290     59,060      65,958

Expected maturity dates do not differ significantly from the contract dates, except for:

 

§   trading portfolio assets and liabilities and derivative financial instruments, which may not be held to maturity as part of the Group’s trading strategies

 

§   retail deposits, which are included within customer accounts, are repayable on demand or at short notice on a contractual basis. In practice, these instruments form a stable base for the Group’s operations and liquidity needs because of the broad base of customers, both numerically and by depositor type (see behavioural maturity profile on page 193) and

 

§   financial assets designated at fair value held in respect of linked liabilities, which are managed with the associated liabilities.

 

Note

a Other assets includes balances of £7,364m (2014: £15,574m) and other liabilities includes balances of £5,997m (2014: £13,115m) relating to amounts held for sale. Please refer to Note 44 for details.

 

202  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

                

            

 

 

 

Contractual maturity of financial liabilities on an undiscounted basis (audited)

The table below presents the cash flows payable by the Group under financial liabilities by remaining contractual maturities at the balance sheet date. The amounts disclosed in the table are the contractual undiscounted cash flows of all financial liabilities (i.e. nominal values).

The balances in the below table do not agree directly to the balances in the consolidated balance sheet as the table incorporates all cash flows, on an undiscounted basis, related to both principal as well as those associated with all future coupon payments.

Derivative financial instruments held for trading and trading portfolio liabilities are included in the on demand column at their fair value.

Financial liabilities designated at fair value in respect of linked liabilities under investment contracts have been excluded from this analysis as the Group is not exposed to liquidity risk arising from them.

 

    Contractual maturity of financial liabilities – undiscounted (including BAGL Group) (audited)   
          

 

 

On

demand

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

Not more

than three

months

£m

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

Over three

months but

not more

than six

months

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Over six

months but

not more

than one year

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

Over one

year

but not

more than

three years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

Over three

years but

not more

than five

years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

Over five

years but

not more

than ten

years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

Over ten

years

£m

  

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

  As at 31 December 2015                           
  Deposits from banks      5,717         38,721         1,357         877         108         70         239         10         47,099   
  Items in the course of collection due to other banks      1,013                                                                 1,013   
  Customer accounts      312,921         80,142         7,640         9,655         3,858         1,854         744         3,087         419,901   
  Repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending      66         17,349         3,482         2,853         898                 491                 25,139   
  Trading portfolio liabilities      33,967                                                                 33,967   
  Financial liabilities designated at fair value      319         52,202         3,165         5,830         11,851         7,840         4,690         8,694         94,591   
  Derivative financial instruments      323,786         81         94         102         57         59         80         16         324,275   
  Debt securities in issue      50         14,352         5,845         9,277         16,777         14,175         11,276         4,547         76,299   
  Subordinated liabilities      2         253         403         344         6,057         3,737         9,969         6,313         27,078   
    Other financial liabilities              2,685                         1,075                                 3,760   
    Total financial liabilities      677,841         205,785         21,986         28,938         40,681         27,735         27,489         22,667         1,053,122   
  As at 31 December 2014                           
  Deposits from banks      7,978         48,155         1,042         804         287         75         62         29         58,432   
  Items in the course of collection due to other banks      1,177                                                                 1,177   
  Customer accounts      317,449         86,659         7,364         8,854         4,851         1,399         1,046         2,218         429,840   
  Repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending      40         111,769         7,178         4,837         236                 428                 124,488   
  Trading portfolio liabilities      45,124                                                                 45,124   
  Financial liabilities designated at fair value      665         6,561         3,508         7,378         12,854         10,285         7,170         14,273         62,694   
  Derivative financial instruments      438,623         30         7         17         137         85         314         341         439,554   
  Debt securities in issue      10         19,481         11,406         14,952         19,416         11,352         12,075         2,760         91,452   
  Subordinated liabilities              380         324         171         1,403         4,339         11,218         6,683         24,518   
    Other financial liabilities              3,060                         815                                 3,875   
    Total financial liabilities      811,066         276,095         30,829         37,013         39,999         27,535         32,313         26,304         1,281,154   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  203


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Maturity of off-balance sheet commitments received and given (audited)

The table below presents the maturity split of the Group’s off-balance sheet commitments received and given at the balance sheet date. The amounts disclosed in the table are the undiscounted cash flows (i.e. nominal values) on the basis of earliest opportunity at which they are available.

 

    Maturity analysis of off-balance sheet commitments received (including BAGL)   
          
 
 
On
demand
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Not more
than three
months
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
Over three
months
but not
more
than six
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
Over six
months
but not
more
than nine
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
 

 

Over nine
months
but not
more
than one
year

£m

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 
 

 

Over one
year but
not more
than two
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 
 

 

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 
 

 

Over three
years but
not more
than five
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 
 

 

Over five
years but
not more
than ten
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
Over ten
years
£m
  
  
  
    

 

Total

£m

  

  

  As at 31 December 2015                                 
  Guarantees, letters of credit and credit insurance      6,329         138         4         5         32         84         12         97         4         17         6,722   
    Forward starting repurchase agreementsa              392                 73                                                         465   
    Total off-balance sheet commitments received      6,329         530         4         78         32         84         12         97         4         17         7,187   
  As at 31 December 2014                                 
  Guarantees, letters of credit and credit insurance      6,571         60         37         38         39         152         138         203         65                 7,303   
    Forward starting repurchase agreementsa              10,778                                                                         10,778   
    Total off-balance sheet commitments received      6,571         10,838         37         38         39         152         138         203         65                 18,081   
                                  
    Maturity analysis of off-balance sheet commitments given (including BAGL) (audited)   
          
 
 
On
demand
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Not more
than three
months
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
Over three
months
but not
more
than six
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
Over six
months
but not
more
than nine
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
 

 

Over nine
months
but not
more
than one
year

£m

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 
 

 

Over one
year but
not more
than two
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 
 

 

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 
 

 

Over three
years but
not more
than five
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 
 

 

Over five
years but
not more
than ten
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
Over ten
years
£m
  
  
  
    

 

Total

£m

  

  

  As at 31 December 2015                                 
  Contingent liabilities      17,421         933         493         140         590         423         158         161         164         138         20,621   
  Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions      617         30         10                 61         119                 8                         845   
  Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsa              93                                                                         93   
    Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments      274,020         1,152         1,564         1,116         1,071         873         554         906         78         35         281,369   
    Total off-balance sheet commitments given      292,058         2,208         2,067         1,256         1,722         1,415         712         1,075         242         173         302,928   
  As at 31 December 2014                                 
  Contingent liabilities      17,304         1,770         352         162         102         410         55         83         1,037         49         21,324   
  Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions      869         75         13                 19         115                                         1,091   
  Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsa              13,735                 121                                                         13,856   
    Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments      262,540         4,045         1,722         844         646         3,638         877         1,846         137         20         276,315   
    Total off-balance sheet commitments given      280,713         19,625         2,087         1,127         767         4,163         932         1,929         1,174         69         312,586   

Note

a Forward starting reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements were previously disclosed as loan commitments. Following the business designation of reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements at fair value through profit and loss, new forward starting reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements are within the scope of IAS 39 and are recognised as derivatives on the balance sheet.

 

204  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Risk review

Risk performance

Operational risk

 

 

 

    

 

Analysis of operational risk

Operational risk is the risk of direct or indirect impacts resulting from human factors, inadequate or failed internal processes and systems or external events.

This section provides an analysis of the Group’s operational risk profile, including events which have had a significant impact in 2015.

A small reduction in the number of recorded incidents occurring during the period

83%

of the Group’s net reportable operational risk events had a loss value of £50,000 or less

67%

of events are due to external fraud

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  205


Risk review

Risk performance

Operational risk

 

 

Operational risk is defined as any instance where there is a potential or actual impact to the Group resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people, systems, or from an external event. The impacts to the Group can be financial, including losses or an unexpected financial gain, as well as non-financial such as customer detriment, reputational or regulatory consequences.

All disclosures in this section (page 206) are unaudited.

Overview

Operational risks are inherent in all the Group’s business activities and are typical of any large enterprise. It is not cost effective to attempt to eliminate all operational risks and in any event it would not be possible to do so. Small losses from operational risks are expected to occur and are accepted as part of the normal course of business. More material losses are less frequent and the Group seeks to reduce the likelihood of these in accordance with its risk appetite.

The Operational Principal Risk comprises the following Key Risks: External suppliers, Financial crime, Financial reporting, Fraud, Information, Legal, Payments process, People, Premises and security, Taxation, Technology (including cyber security) and Transaction operations. For definitions of these key risks see page 139. In order to ensure complete coverage of the potential adverse impacts on the Group arising from Operational risk, the Operational risk taxonomy extends beyond the Operational key risks listed above to cover areas included within Conduct risk.

This section provides an analysis of the Group’s operational risk profile, including events, those which are above the Bank’s reportable threshold, which have had a financial impact in 2015.

For more information on Conduct risk events please see page 208.

Summary of performance in the period

During 2015, total operational risk lossesa increased to £241.3m (2014: £143.9m) with a 3% reduction in number of recorded events as compared to last year driven by a limited number of events in execution, delivery and process management category.

Losses were mainly due to execution, delivery and process management impacts, external fraud and business disruption and system failures.

Operational risk profile

Within operational risk a high proportion of risk events have a low associated financial cost and a very small proportion of operational risk events will have a material impact on the financial results of the Group. In 2015, 82.6% (2014: 78.0%) of the Group’s net reportable operational risk events had a value of £50,000 or less and accounted for 11.1% (2014: 30.5%) of the Group’s total net loss impact.

The analysis below presents the Group’s operational risk events by Basel event category:

 

§   Execution, delivery and process management impacts increased to £137.5m (2014: £81.3m) and accounted for 57.0% (2014: 56.5%) of overall operational risk losses. The events in this category are typical of the banking industry as a whole where high volumes of transactions are processed on a daily basis. The increases in impacts were largely driven by limited number of events with higher loss values

 

§   External fraud (66.6%) is the category with the highest frequency of events where high volume, low value events are also consistent with industry experience, driven by debit and credit card fraud. This accounted for 27.4% of overall operational risk losses in the year from 29.7% last year.

The Group’s operational risk profile is informed by bottom-up risk assessments undertaken by each business unit and top-down qualitative review from the Governance Risk and Control Committees for each of the key risks. External fraud and technology are highlighted as key operational risk exposures. Developments of enhanced fraud prevention and transaction profiling tools underway to combat increasing external fraud frequency especially in the credit cards, digital banking, unauthorised trading and social engineering.

Cyber security risk continues to be an area of attention given the increasing sophistication and scope of potential cyber-attack. Risks to technology and Cyber security change rapidly and require continued focus and investment.

For further information see Risk management section (pages 127 to 142).

 

LOGO

Note

a Figures include operational risk losses for reportable events having impact of +/- £10,000 and exclude events that are conduct risk, aggregated and boundary events. A boundary event is an operational risk event that results in a credit risk impact.

 

206  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Risk review

Risk performance

Conduct risk

 

 

 

 

Analysis of conduct risk

Conduct risk is the risk that detriment is caused to our customers, clients, counterparties or Barclays because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities.

This section details Barclays’ conduct risk profile and provides information on key 2015 risk events and risk mitigation actions Barclays has taken.

Conduct risk

5.4/10 on the conduct

Reputation Balanced

Scorecard Measure

Driven by improvements in the following components:

 

  §   Operates openly and transparently

 

  §   Has high quality products and services

 

  §   Delivers value for money for customers and clients

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  207


Risk review

Risk performance

Conduct risk

 

 

Conduct risk is the risk that detriment is caused to our customers, clients, counterparties or Barclays because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities.

All disclosures in this section (pages 208 and 209) are unaudited unless otherwise stated

Conduct risk

Doing the right thing in the right way and providing suitable products and services for customers and clients is central to Barclays’ strategy. Barclays is committed to Group-wide changes to business practices, governance and mindset and behaviours so that good customer outcomes and protecting market integrity are integral to the way Barclays operates. Improving our reputation in the market will demonstrate to customers that in Barclays they have a partner they can trust.

The FCA expects Barclays Board and Senior Management, supported by a governance structure and suitable management information to: have oversight of and mitigate conduct risks; consistently promote appropriate conduct outcomes; and drive the embedding of a conduct focused culture.

A key driver in delivering effective structural reform is balancing regulatory requirements and ensuring good outcomes for customers. The structural reform programme expects conduct risks to be managed through existing committees with escalation to the Structural Reform Programme Implementation Steering Committee as appropriate.

Furthermore, Barclays is working to implement new regulatory requirements related to Individual Accountability which apply to all UK banks and certain investment firms. The three new interlinking elements under the new rules on Strengthening Personal Accountability are: Senior Managers Regime, Certification Regime and a new set of Conduct Rules. These represent some of the most important regulatory changes in banking to date. At Barclays, we welcome these changes, and recognise the importance of how strengthening personal accountability will enhance the way we work, and will provide us with a framework to demonstrate our integrity and professionalism.

Reputation risk

Reputation risk is designated as a key risk by Barclays. It is defined as the risk of damage to the Group’s brand arising from any association, action or inaction which is perceived by stakeholders to be inappropriate or unethical. While reputation risk can arise anywhere in the business, it is aligned with the Conduct Principal Risk due to the significant correlation between them as issues relating to conduct have material reputation impact.

The Reputation Key Risk Framework governs how Barclays’ businesses and functions implement effective risk management in this area, including identification, evaluation, prioritisation, mitigation, escalation and reporting of current and emerging reputation risks. Forward looking reputation risk horizon scanning is undertaken centrally and validated via ongoing stakeholder dialogue with a variety of relevant opinion formers. This provides an informed and broad view of the external reputation environment and identifies issues and themes likely to impact the reputation of Barclays and the finance sector.

Summary of performance in the period

Throughout 2014, the Conduct Risk Programme designed relevant governance, reporting, training, and definition of roles and responsibilities, and from January 2015 conduct risk management was fully integrated within the businesses.

Following stakeholder feedback additional improvements have been made to enhance conduct risk management in 2015. The main aims have been to:

 

§   simplify the governance processes

 

§   improve the quality, completeness and reliability of Management information reported, including reporting against forward looking risk indicators

 

§   improve the quality of Conduct Material Risk Assessment through more explanation of what good looks like and provision of targeted support to both the business and Compliance

 

§   develop more productive relationships with internal stakeholders and other control functions, including colleagues across Compliance

 

§   increase staff awareness of Conduct risk through e-learning

 

§   align Conduct risk management more closely with HR colleagues

 

§   build a relationship with Operational risk to leverage technology and in recognition of the high level of crossover between the two risks

 

§   improve the consideration of Conduct risk in strategy setting and review processes.

Throughout 2015, conduct risks were raised by businesses for consideration by the RepCo. RepCo has reviewed the risks raised and whether the management actions proposed were appropriate to ensure conduct risks were managed effectively.

Below are general themes of conduct risk and control discussed by Senior Management at the RepCo in 2015.

 

§   Barclays continues to be party to litigation and regulatory actions involving claimants who consider that inappropriate conduct by the Group has caused damage. Details in respect of such investigations and related litigation are included in Note 29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters on page 303.

 

§   The need to ensure that customers, and especially vulnerable customers, experiencing financial difficulty are treated appropriately and with due regard to their circumstances as a means to ensuring good customer outcomes.

 

§   There are potential risks arising from conflicts of interest, including those related to the benchmark submission process. While primarily relevant to the Investment Bank, these potential risks may also impact the corporate and retail customer base. Barclays seeks to mitigate these risks by the maintaining of clear operating models and effective identification and management of conflicts of interest controls and supervisory oversight.

 

§   The risk of mismanagement of customer data.

 

§   Due to the volume and pace of strategic change, good customer outcomes are not sufficiently considered and achieved.

 

§   Customers have degraded access to systems and information such as transaction delays, inability to access funds and incorrect information, increased risk of fraudulent activity and payment delays.

 

§   The risk of digitisation that automated channels may not deliver the services that customers expect, the impact on vulnerable customers, fraud and cyber security risk. The need for strong and robust product design to ensure the minimisation or avoidance of adverse customer outcomes through the sale of products, services and advice inappropriate for a target market.

 

§   Client assets sourcebook (CASS) – Due to the unprecedented level of change the firm is to implement over the next 12 months, the current stable environment relating to CASS is affected.

 

 

 

208  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

            

                    

 

 

 

Such conduct related themes also carry material reputation risk implications. Another area of reputation risk that continues to intensify relates to public, regulatory and political concerns around the integration of climate change issues and impacts into finance sector operations and strategy.

 

§   The intergovernmental conference on climate change in December 2015 agreed to keep global warming to within 2ºC, which will require significant and far reaching policy and regulation to constrain the combustion of fossil fuel reserves. This will impact many sectors, however, there has been significant activity during 2015 on furthering the finance sector’s understanding of the potential financial, operational and strategic implications of climate change. In particular, the Financial Stability Board (FSB) recommended a proposal to the G20 for the creation of an industry-led disclosure task force on climate-related risks in November 2015. This taskforce has been established with the mandate to consider the physical, liability and transition risks associated with climate change; identify effective corporate financial disclosures and develop a set of recommendations for climate-related disclosures. Improving the quality and consistency of climate financial risk disclosures by companies will enable the effective disclosure and analysis of material information by lenders, insurers, investors and other stakeholders.

Barclays participates in a number of industry groups looking at these issues and is assessing the implications for our global business.

Increasing the awareness of all staff of the importance of good customer outcomes and protecting market integrity has been a priority in 2015. Over 97% of Barclays staff have successfully completed training in this area.

The Group continued to incur significant costs in relation to litigation and conduct matters, please refer to Note 29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters and Note 27 Provisions for further detail. Litigation and conduct charges include customer redress as well as expenses including damages, fines, remediation of affected customers or clients, other penalties or settlements incurred in connection with legal, competition and regulatory matters.

Resolution of these matters remains a necessary and important part of delivering the Group’s strategy, but there are early signs that we are driving better outcomes for customers from a more thoughtful consideration of our customers’ needs.

As a result of increased awareness and early consideration of conduct risk in the business, a number of actions have been taken to improve customer outcomes including:

 

§   proactive consideration and management of potential customer detriment associated with Barclays’ strategy to simplify its business and product. For example, change programmes monitoring customers subject to multiple changes including platform and online migrations

 

§   application of more stringent residential mortgage requirements to buy-to-let mortgage applicants, ensuring better lending decisions

 

§   enhanced surveillance monitoring in the Investment Bank identifying and proactively managing activity which appear to cause unusual market impact

 

§   improvements in key areas such as bereavement and power of Attorney and ongoing training to equip staff to support customers in vulnerable circumstances and

 

§   separation plans of Non-Core businesses to consider customer outcomes.

 

Salz recommendations

The Board commissioned a review of Barclays’ business practices in July 2012, led by Sir Anthony Salz. The report contained 34 recommendations that can be categorised broadly under Regulatory, Culture, Board Governance, People Pay and Management Oversight and Risk Management. Please refer to previous annual updates for further detail of past actions taken. All actions to implement the recommendations have been completed and independently validated. The Group continues to monitor the actions to ensure that they become fully embedded throughout the organisation.

Conduct reputation measure

To aid monitoring of progress in the management of conduct, a ‘Conduct Reputation’ measure is included within Barclays’ Balanced Scorecard. The conduct measure is developed through a conduct and reputation survey, undertaken by YouGov, across a range of respondents including business and political stakeholders, the media, NGOs, charities and other opinion formers across key geographies (the UK, Europe, Africa, the US and Asia).

In 2015 Barclays made progress on its Conduct measure recording a score of 5.4 (2014: 5.3). ‘Operates openly and transparently’, ‘Has high quality products and services’ and ‘Delivers value for money for customers and clients’ have all improved according to audience perception. Performance on two components, ‘Treats staff well at all levels of the business’ and ‘it can be trusted’ have declined slightly. In terms of target we are below where we would like to be for 2015, although overall progress on the measure is in line with our expectations and puts our 2018 target within reach.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  209


Risk review

Supervision and regulation

                

 

 

Supervision of the Group

The Group’s operations, including its overseas offices, subsidiaries and associates, are subject to a significant body of rules and regulations that are a condition for authorisation to conduct banking and financial services business. These apply to business operations, affect financial returns and include reserve and reporting requirements and prudential and conduct of business regulations. These requirements are set by the relevant central banks and regulatory authorities that authorise, regulate and supervise the Group in the jurisdictions in which it operates. The requirements reflect global standards developed by, among others, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) and the International Organization of Securities Commissions. They also reflect requirements imposed directly by, or derived from, EU legislation.

In the UK, the BoE has responsibility for monitoring the UK financial system as a whole. The day-to-day regulation and supervision of the Group is divided between the PRA – which is established as part of the Bank of England – and the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA).

In addition, the Financial Policy Committee (FPC) of the BoE has significant influence on the prudential requirements that may be imposed on the banking system through powers of direction and recommendation. The FPC has direction powers over leverage ratios and sectoral capital requirements, which it sets in relation to exposures to specific sectors judged to pose a risk to the financial system as a whole and which apply to all UK banks and building societies generally, rather than to the Group specifically. The government has also made the FPC responsible for the Basel III countercyclical capital buffer, introduced in the EU under the CRD and CRR (collectively known as CRD IV).

The Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (as amended)(FSMA) remains the principal statute under which financial institutions are regulated in the UK. Barclays Bank PLC is authorised under FSMA to carry on a range of regulated activities within the UK. It is also authorised and subject to solo and consolidated prudential supervision by the PRA and subject to conduct regulation and supervision by the FCA.

In its role as supervisor, the PRA seeks to maintain the safety and soundness of financial institutions with the aim of strengthening, but not guaranteeing, the protection of customers and the financial system. The PRA’s continuing supervision of financial institutions is conducted through a variety of regulatory tools, including the collection of information by way of prudential returns, reports obtained from skilled persons, visits to firms and regular meetings with management to discuss issues such as performance, risk management and strategy.

The regulation and supervision of conduct matters is the responsibility of the FCA. FCA regulation of the Group is carried out through a combination of continuous assessment; regular thematic and project work based on the FCA’s sector assessments, which analyse the different areas of the market and the risks that may lie ahead; and responding to crystallised risks, seeking to ensure remediation as appropriate.

Global regulatory developments

Regulatory change continues to affect all large financial institutions; globally notably through the G20, Financial Stability Board (FSB) and Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS), regionally through the EU and nationally, especially in the UK and US. Further changes to prudential requirements and further refinements to the definitions of capital and liquid assets may affect the Group’s planned activities and could increase costs and contribute to adverse impacts on the Group’s earnings. Similarly, increased requirements in relation to capital markets activities and to market conduct requirements may affect the Group’s planned activities and could increase costs and thereby contribute to adverse impacts on the Group’s earnings.

The programme of reform of the global regulatory framework previously agreed by G20 Heads of Government in April 2009 has continued to be taken forward throughout 2015 and into 2016.

 

The FSB has been designated by the G20 as the body responsible for co-ordinating the delivery of the global reform programme in relation to the financial services industry. It has focused particularly on the risks posed by systemically important financial institutions. In 2011, G20 Heads of Government adopted FSB proposals to reform the regulation of Global Systematically Important Financial Institutions (G-SIFIs), including Global Systematically Important Banks (G-SIBs). A key element of this programme is that G-SIFIs should be capable of being resolved without recourse to taxpayer support. Barclays has been designated a G-SIB by the FSB. G-SIBs are subject to a number of requirements, including additional loss absorption capacity above that required by Basel III standards (see below). The surcharges rise in increments from 1% to 2.5% of risk weighted assets (with an empty category of 3.5% for institutions that increase the extent of the systemic risk they pose which is intended to discourage institutions from developing their business in a way that heightens their systemic nature). This additional buffer must be met with common equity.

In its November 2015 list of G-SIBs, the FSB confirmed Barclays position in a category that requires it to meet a 2% surcharge. The additional loss absorbency requirements apply to those financial institutions identified in November 2014 as G-SIBs and will be phased in starting from January 2016, with full implementation due to have taken place by January 2019. G-SIBs have also been required to meet higher supervisory expectations for data aggregation capabilities since 1 January 2016. In the EU the requirements for a systemic risk buffer have been implemented through mechanisms under CRD IV.

The BCBS issued the final guidelines on Basel III capital and liquidity standards in June 2011, with revisions to counterparty credit risk in July and November 2011. Regulatory liquidity revisions were agreed in January 2013 to the definitions of high quality liquid assets and net cash outflows for the purpose of calculating the Liquidity Coverage Ratio, as well as establishing a timetable for phasing in the standard from January 2016. The requirements of Basel III as a whole are subject to a number of transitional provisions that run to the end of 2018. The Group is, however, primarily subject to the EU’s implementation of the Basel III standard through CRD IV (see below).

The BCBS also maintains a number of active workstreams that will affect the Group. In January 2016, the BCBS endorsed a new market risk framework, including rules made as a result of its fundamental review of the trading book, which will take effect in 2019. The Committee also continues to focus on the consistency of risk weighting of assets and explaining the variations between banks. This includes revisions to the standardised rules for credit risk, counterparty credit risk, CVA volatility risk and operational risk. The Committee is also considering whether to limit the use of internal models in certain areas (for example, removing the Advanced Measurement Approach for operational risk) and applying RWA floors based on the standardised approaches. The final standards for measuring and controlling large exposures were published by the Basel Committee in April 2014 to take effect in 2019. Also in April 2014, the Basel Committee published the final standard for calculating regulatory capital for banks’ exposure to Central Counterparties (CCPs). In conjunction with the International Organization of Securities Commissions, the BCBS published a revised version of the framework for margin requirements for non-centrally cleared derivatives in March 2015, which recommends the phasing in of requirements for initial and variation margin from 1 September 2016.

In November 2015 the FSB finalised its proposals to enhance the loss absorbing capacity of G-SIBs to ensure that there is sufficient loss absorbing and recapitalisation capacity available in resolution to implement an orderly resolution which minimises the impact on financial stability, ensures the continuity of critical functions and avoids exposing taxpayers to losses. To this end, the FSB has set a new minimum requirement for ‘Total Loss Absorbing Capacity’ (TLAC). From 1 January 2019, the FSB will expect Barclays and other G-SIBs to meet a minimum TLAC requirement of 16% of the risk weighted assets of their respective resolution groups, rising to 18% from 1 January 2022. From that time, G-SIBs will also be expected to hold TLAC equivalent to at least 6% of the Basel III leverage ratio denominator, rising to 6.75% from 1 January 2022. The BCBS is also consulting on the capital treatment of banks’ TLAC holdings from other issuers.

 

 

210  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

                

                

 

 

 

Also in November 2015, Barclays re-adhered to a protocol which was developed by the International Swaps and Derivatives Association (ISDA) in coordination with the FSB to support cross-border resolution and reduce systemic risk. By re-adhering to this protocol Barclays is able, in ISDA Master Agreements and related credit support agreements, as well as certain repo and stock lending agreements, entered into with other adherents, to opt in to different resolution regimes such that cross-default and direct default rights that would otherwise arise under the terms of such agreements would be stayed temporarily (and in some circumstances overridden) on the resolution of one of the parties.

Influence of European legislation

Financial regulation in the UK is to a significant degree shaped and influenced by EU legislation. This provides the structure of the European Single Market, an important feature of which is the framework for the regulation of authorised firms. This framework is designed to enable a credit institution or investment firm authorised in one EU member state to conduct banking or investment business through the establishment of branches or by the provision of services on a cross-border basis in other member states without the need for local authorisation. Barclays’ operations in Europe are authorised and regulated by a combination of both home and host regulators.

EU developments

The EU continues to develop its regulatory structure in response to the financial and Eurozone crises. At the December 2012 meeting of EU Finance Ministers it was agreed to establish a single supervisory mechanism within the Eurozone. The European Central Bank (ECB) has had responsibility for the supervision of the most significant credit institutions, financial holding companies or mixed financial holding companies within the Eurozone since November 2014. The ECB can also extend its supervision to institutions of significant relevance that have established subsidiaries in more than one participating member state and with significant cross-border assets or liabilities.

Notwithstanding the new responsibilities of the ECB, the European Banking Authority (EBA), along with the other European Supervisory Authorities, remains charged with the development of a single rulebook for the EU as a whole and with enhancing co-operation between national supervisory authorities. The European Securities Markets Authority (ESMA) has a similar role in relation to the capital markets and to banks and other firms doing investment and capital markets business. The progressive reduction of national discretion on the part of national regulatory authorities within the EU may lead to the elimination of prudential arrangements that have been agreed with those authorities. This may serve to increase or decrease the amount of capital and other resources that the Group is required to hold. The overall effect is not clear and may only become evident over a number of years. The EBA and ESMA each have the power to mediate between and override national authorities under certain circumstances.

Responsibility for day-to-day supervision remains with national authorities and for banks, like Barclays Bank PLC, that are incorporated in countries that will not participate in the single supervisory mechanism, is expected to remain so. Barclays Bank PLC Italian and French branches are, however, also subject to direct supervision by the ECB.

Basel III and the capital surcharge for G-SIBs have been, or will be, implemented in the EU by CRD IV. The provisions of CRD IV either entered into force automatically on, or had to be implemented in member states by, 1 January 2014. Much of the ongoing and outstanding implementation is expected to be done through binding technical standards being developed by the EBA, that are intended to ensure a harmonised application of rules through the EU, some of which are still in the process of being developed and adopted.

A significant addition to the EU legislative framework for financial institutions has been the Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD) which establishes a framework for the recovery and resolution of EU credit institutions and investment firms. The BRRD is intended to implement many of the requirements of the FSB’s ‘Key Attributes of Effective Resolution Regimes for Financial Institutions’. The BRRD entered into force in July 2014. All of the provisions of the BRRD had to be implemented in the law of EU Member States by 1 January 2015 except for those relating to bail-in which had to be implemented in Member States by 1 January 2016.

As implemented, the BRRD gives resolution authorities powers to intervene in and resolve a financial institution that is no longer viable, including through the transfers of business and, when implemented in relevant member states, creditor financed recapitalisation (bail-in within resolution) that allocates losses to shareholders and unsecured and uninsured creditors in their order of seniority, at a regulator determined point of non-viability that may precede insolvency. The concept of bail-in will affect the rights of unsecured creditors subject to any bail-in in the event of a resolution of a failing bank.

The BRRD also requires competent authorities to impose a ‘Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities’ (‘MREL’) on financial institutions to facilitate the effective exercise of the bail-in tool referred to above. This will have to be co-ordinated with the FSB’s TLAC standards mentioned above and, as set out in more detail below, the BoE has stated that MREL for UK G-SIBs will be set consistently with those standards. The BRRD also requires the development of recovery and resolution plans at group and firm level. The BRRD sets out a harmonised set of resolution tools across the EU, including the power to impose a temporary stay on the rights of creditors to terminate, accelerate or close out contracts. There are also significant funding implications for financial institutions, which include the establishment of pre-funded resolution funds of 1% of covered deposits to be built up over 10 years, although the proposal envisages that national deposit guarantee schemes may be able to fulfil this function (see directly below). The UK Government uses the bank levy to meet the ex ante funding requirements set out in the BRRD.

The Directive on Deposit Guarantee Schemes provides that national deposit guarantee schemes should be pre-funded, with the funds to be raised over a number of years. The funds of national deposit guarantee scheme are to total 0.8% of the covered deposits of its members by the date 10 years after the entry into force of the recast directive. In the UK, the pre-funding requirements of the UK Financial Services Compensation Scheme are met through the bank levy.

In October 2012, a group of experts set up by the European Commission to consider possible reform of the structure of the EU banking sector presented its report. Among other things, the Group recommended the mandatory separation of proprietary trading and other high risk trading activities from other banking activities. The European Commission issued proposals to implement these recommendations in January 2014. These proposals would apply to institutions that have been identified as G-SIBs under CRD IV and envisage, among other things: (i) a ban on proprietary trading in financial instruments and commodities; and (ii) rules on the economic, legal, governance, and operational links between the separated trading entity and the rest of the banking group.

Contemporaneously, the European Commission also adopted proposals to enhance the transparency of shadow banking, especially in relation to securities financing transactions. These proposals have still yet to be considered formally by the European Parliament and by the Council.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  211


Risk review

Supervision and regulation

                

 

 

The European Market Infrastructure Regulation (EMIR) has introduced requirements designed to improve transparency and reduce the risks associated with the derivatives market, some of which are still to be brought in. When it is fully in force, EMIR will require entities that enter into any form of derivative contract, including interest rate, foreign exchange, equity, credit and commodity derivatives: to report specified details of every derivative contract that they enter to a trade repository (this requirement is already in force); implement risk management standards for all bilateral over-the-counter derivatives trades that are not cleared by a central counterparty (this requirement is also partly in force, but requirements relating to the mandatory provision of margin are to be phased in from 2016); and clear, through a central counterparty, over-the-counter derivatives, but only where those derivatives are subject to a mandatory clearing obligation. The obligation to clear derivatives will only apply to certain counterparties and specified types of derivative. EMIR has potential operational and financial impacts on the Group, including by imposing collateral requirements.

CRD IV aims to complement EMIR by applying higher capital requirements for bilateral, uncleared over-the-counter derivative trades. Lower capital requirements for cleared derivatives trades are only available if the central counterparty through which the trade is cleared is recognised as a ‘qualifying central counterparty’ which has been authorised or recognised under EMIR (in accordance with binding technical standards).

Amendments to the Markets in Financial Instruments Directive (known as MiFID II) came into force in July 2014. These amendments take the form of a directive and a regulation, and will affect many of the investment markets in which the Group operates and the instruments in which it trades, and how it transacts with market counterparties and other customers. Changes to the MiFID regime include the introduction of a new type of trading venue (the organised trading facility), to capture non-equity trading that falls outside the current regime.

Investor protections have been strengthened, and new curbs imposed on high frequency and commodity trading. Pre- and post-trade transparency has been increased, and a new regime for third country firms introduced. The changes also include new requirements for non-discriminatory access to trading venues, central counterparties, and benchmarks, and harmonised supervisory powers and sanctions across the EU. While the final implementation date of MiFID II remains subject to discussions between various European bodies, member states will not have to apply the provisions of MiFID II until 3 January 2017 at the earliest, although recent communications by several European bodies has suggested that this date might be delayed by 12 months. Many of the provisions of MiFID II and its accompanying regulation will be implemented by means of technical standards to be drafted by ESMA. While ESMA has published its final report in respect of some of these technical standards, the impacts on the Group will not be clear until all of the relevant technical standards have been finalised and adopted.

Regulation in the UK

Recent developments in banking law and regulation in the UK have been dominated by legislation designed to ring-fence the retail and SME deposit-taking business of large banks. The content and the impact of this legislation are outlined above. The Banking Reform Act put in place a framework for this ring-fencing and secondary legislation passed in 2014 elaborated on the operation and application of the ring-fence. Ring-fencing rules have been consulted on by the PRA and the FCA and it is expected that final rules will be published during the first half of 2016 which will further determine how ring-fenced banks will be permitted to operate.

 

In addition to, and complementing a EU-wide stress testing exercise conducted on a sample of EU banks by the EBA, and in response to recommendations from the FPC, the BoE conducted a variant of the EU-wide stress test in 2014. The ‘UK variant’ test explored particular UK macroeconomic vulnerabilities facing the UK banking system. Key parameters of the test – including the design of the UK elements of the stress scenario – were designed by the BoE and approved by the FPC and the PRA. The BoE published key elements of its 2014 stress test in March 2015 and the results of its 2015 stress test on 1 December 2015. The FPC determined that no macroprudential actions on bank capital were required in response to the results of either test.

Both the PRA and the FCA have continued to develop and apply a more assertive approach to supervision and the application of existing standards. This may include application of standards that either anticipate or go beyond requirements established by global or EU standards, whether in relation to capital, leverage and liquidity, resolvability and resolution or matters of conduct. The PRA has implemented the European capital regime under CRD IV in the UK and has required banks to meet a 4.5% Pillar 1 CET1 requirement since 1 January 2015, which is up from 4% in 2014. The PRA has expected Barclays, in common with six other major UK banks and building societies, to meet a 7% CET1 ratio at the level of the consolidated Group since 1 January 2016.

The FCA has retained an approach to enforcement based on credible deterrence that has continued to see significant growth in the size of regulatory fines. The FCA has focused strongly on conduct risk and on customer outcomes and will continue to do so. This has included a focus on the design and operation of products, the behaviour of customers and the operation of markets. This may impact both the incidence of conduct costs and increase the cost of remediation.

On 1 April 2014 the FCA took over the regulation of consumer credit in the UK. This has led to a regulatory regime for consumer credit which is considerably more intensive and intrusive than was the case when consumer credit was regulated by the Office of Fair Trading.

In 2014 the PRA and the FCA consulted on new accountability mechanisms for individuals working in banks, including the introduction of a new ‘Senior Managers Regime’ (aimed at a limited number of individuals with senior management responsibilities within a firm) and a ‘Certification Regime’ (aimed at assessing and monitoring the fitness and propriety of a wider range of employees who could pose a risk of significant harm to the firm or any of its customers). This represents the implementation of recommendations made by the Parliamentary Committee on Banking Standards in this area. The FCA and PRA have published final rules on most aspects of the Senior Managers Regime and the regime will enter into force on 7 March 2016.

Resolution of UK banking groups

The Banking Act 2009 (the Banking Act) provides a regime to allow the BoE (or, in certain circumstances, HM Treasury) to resolve failing banks in the UK, in consultation with the PRA and HM Treasury as appropriate. Under the Banking Act the BoE is given powers to: (i) make share transfer instruments pursuant to which all or some of the securities issued by a UK bank may be transferred to a commercial purchaser; (ii) the power to transfer all or some of the property, rights and liabilities of a UK bank to a commercial purchaser or a ‘bridge bank’, which is a company wholly owned by the BoE; and (iii) transfer the impaired or problem assets of the relevant financial institution to an asset management vehicle to allow them to be managed over time. In addition, under the Banking Act, HM Treasury is given the power to take a bank into temporary public ownership by making one or more share transfer orders in which the transferee is a nominee of HM Treasury or a company wholly owned by HM Treasury. A share transfer instrument or share transfer order can extend to a wide range of securities including shares and bonds issued by a UK bank (including Barclays Bank PLC) or its holding company (Barclays PLC) and warrants for such shares and bonds. Certain of these powers also extend to companies within the same group as a UK bank.

 

 

212  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

                

                    

 

 

 

The Banking Act also gives the authorities powers to override events of default or termination rights that might otherwise be invoked as a result of the exercise of the resolution powers. The Banking Act powers apply regardless of any contractual restrictions and compensation that may be payable in the context of both share transfer orders and property appropriation.

The resolution powers described above were supplemented with effect from 31 December 2014 by a ‘bail-in’ power introduced under the Banking Reform Act. This power allows for the cancellation or modification of one or more liabilities (with the exception of ‘excluded liabilities’).

Excluded liabilities include (among other things): deposits protected under a deposit insurance scheme, secured liabilities (to the extent that they are secured), client assets and assets with an original maturity of less than seven days which are owed to a credit institution or investment firm. The BoE’s new bail-in powers were brought into force with effect from 1 January 2015.

In a consultation paper published in 2015, the BoE indicated that during 2016 it would notify banks of the final MREL requirements which would apply to them from 1 January 2020, when the regime will become fully effective. The Bank intends to apply MREL standards on a transitional basis from 2016 until that time. As noted above, during the consultation process, the BoE announced that it intends to set MREL for UK G-SIBs consistently with the FSB’s TLAC standards, and will not set any TLAC requirement for a UK G-SIB which is separate from or different to its MREL.

Since 20 February 2015, UK banks and their parents have also been required to include in debt instruments, issued by them under the law of a non-EEA country, terms under which the relevant creditor recognises that the liability is subject to the exercise of bail-in powers by the BoE. Similar terms will be required in contracts governing other liabilities of UK banks and their parents if those liabilities are governed by the law of a non-EEA country, are not excluded liabilities under the Banking Act 2009 and are issued, entered into or arise after 31 December 2015. The PRA has made rules and will be consulting further in relation to contractual recognition of bail-in of liabilities governed by third country laws.

The Banking Act also gives the BoE the power to override, vary, or impose conditions or contractual obligations between a UK bank, its holding company and its group undertakings, in order to enable any transferee or successor bank to operate effectively after any of the resolution tools have been applied. There is also power for HM Treasury to amend the law (excluding provisions made by or under the Banking Act) for the purpose of enabling it to use the regime powers effectively, potentially with retrospective effect.

The Financial Services Act 2010, among other things, requires the UK regulators to make rules about remuneration and to require regulated firms to have a remuneration policy that is consistent with effective risk management. The Banking Act also amended FSMA to allow the FCA to make rules requiring firms to operate a collective consumer redress scheme to deal with cases of widespread failure by regulated firms to meet regulatory requirements, that may have created consumer detriment.

The PRA has made rules that require authorised firms to draw up recovery plans and resolution packs. Recovery plans are designed to outline credible recovery actions that authorised firms could implement in the event of severe stress in order to restore their business to a stable and sustainable condition. The resolution pack contains detailed information on the authorised firm in question which will be used to develop resolution strategies for that firm, assess its current level of resolvability against the strategy, and to inform work on identifying barriers to the implementation of operational resolution plans.

In addition to establishing the FPC, PRA and FCA, the Financial Services Act 2012 among other things clarifies responsibilities between HM Treasury and the BoE in the event of a financial crisis by giving the Chancellor of the Exchequer powers to direct the BoE where public funds are at risk and there is a serious threat to financial stability. The Financial Services Act 2012 also establishes the objectives and accountabilities of the FPC, PRA and FCA; amends the conditions which need to be met by a firm before it can be authorised; gives the FPC, PRA and FCA additional powers, including powers of direction over unregulated parent undertakings (such as Barclays PLC) where this is necessary to ensure effective consolidated supervision of the Group; and gives the FCA a power to make temporary product intervention rules for a maximum period of six months, if necessary without consultation. The Financial Services Act 2013 also created a new criminal offence relating to the making of a false or misleading statement, or the creation of a false or misleading impression, in connection with the setting of a benchmark.

Structural reform of banking groups

In addition to providing for the bail-in stabilisation power referred to above, the Banking Reform Act requires, among other things: (i) the separation of the retail and SME deposit-taking activities of UK banks in the UK and branches of UK banks in the European Economic Area (EEA) into a legally distinct, operationally separate and economically independent entity, which will not be permitted to undertake a range of activities (so called ring-fencing); (ii) the increase of the loss absorbing capacity of ring-fenced banks and UK headquartered global systemically important banks to levels higher than required under CRD IV and (iii) preference to deposits protected under the Financial Services Compensation Scheme if a bank enters insolvency.

The Banking Reform Act also implements key recommendations of the Parliamentary Commission on Banking Standards. Recommendations that have been implemented include: (i) the establishment of a reserve power for the PRA to enforce full separation of UK banks under certain circumstances; (ii) the creation of a ‘senior manager’s’ regime for senior individuals in the banking and investment banking sectors to ensure better accountability for decisions made; (iii) the establishment of a criminal offence of causing a financial institution to fail; and (iv) the establishment of a regulator for payment systems.

The Banking Reform Act is primarily an enabling statute which provides HM Treasury with the requisite powers to implement the policy underlying the legislation through secondary legislation. Secondary legislation relating to the ring-fencing of banks has now been passed. Parts of the secondary legislation became effective on 1 January 2015 and the rest will come into effect on 1 January 2019 by which date UK banks will be required to be compliant with the structural reform requirements. The PRA published ‘near final’ rules on the legal structure and governance of ring-fenced banks in May 2015 and a consultation paper on post-ring-fencing prudential requirements and intra-group arrangements (among other things) in October 2015. PRA final rules are expected in 2016.

Compensation schemes

Banks, insurance companies and other financial institutions in the UK are subject to a single compensation scheme (the Financial Services Compensation Scheme – FSCS) which operates when an authorised firm is unable or is likely to be unable to meet claims made against it by its customers because of its financial circumstances. Most deposits made with branches of Barclays Bank PLC within the EEA are covered by the FSCS. Most claims made in respect of investment business will also be protected claims if the business was carried on from the UK or from a branch of the bank or investment firm in question in another EEA member state. The FSCS is funded by levies on authorised UK firms such as Barclays Bank PLC. In the event that the FSCS raises those funds more frequently or significantly increases the levies to be paid by firms, the associated costs to the Group may have a material impact on the Group’s results.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  213


Risk review

Supervision and regulation

                    

 

 

 

Regulation in the US

In the US, Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and their US subsidiaries are subject to a comprehensive regulatory framework involving numerous statutes, rules and regulations, including the International Banking Act of 1978, the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (BHC Act), the USA PATRIOT Act of 2001 and the DFA. This legislation regulates the activities of Barclays, including its US banking subsidiaries and the US branches of Barclays Bank PLC, as well as imposing prudential restrictions, such as limits on extensions of credit by Barclays Bank PLC’s US branches and the US banking subsidiaries to a single borrower and to affiliates. The New York and Florida branches of Barclays Bank PLC are subject to extensive federal and state supervision and regulation by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (FRB) and, as applicable, the New York State Department of Financial Services and the Florida Office of Financial Regulation. Barclays Bank Delaware, a Delaware chartered commercial bank, is subject to supervision and regulation by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC), the Delaware Office of the State Bank Commissioner and the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau (CFPB). The deposits of Barclays Bank Delaware are insured by the FDIC. The licensing authority of each US branch of Barclays Bank PLC has the authority, in certain circumstances, to take possession of the business and property of Barclays Bank PLC located in the state of the office it licenses or to revoke or suspend such licence. Such circumstances generally include violations of law, unsafe business practices and insolvency.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC are bank holding companies registered with the FRB, which exercises umbrella supervisory authority over Barclays’ US operations. Barclays is required to implement by July 2016 a US intermediate holding company (IHC) which will hold substantially all of Barclays’ US subsidiaries and assets (including Barclays Capital Inc. and Barclays Bank Delaware, other than Barclays’ US branches and certain other assets and subsidiaries). This IHC will also be a US bank holding company and generally regulated as such under the BHC Act. As part of this supervision, the IHC will also generally be subject to substantially similar enhanced prudential supervision requirements as US bank holding companies of similar size, including: (i) regulatory capital requirements and leverage limits; (ii) mandatory stress testing of capital levels , and submission of a capital plan; (iii) supervisory approval of capital distributions by the IHC to Barclays Bank PLC; (iv) additional substantive liquidity requirements, including requirements to conduct monthly internal liquidity stress tests for the IHC (and also, separately, for Barclays Bank PLC’s US branch network), and to maintain a 30-day buffer of highly liquid assets; (v) other liquidity risk management requirements, including compliance with liquidity risk management standards established by the FRB, and maintenance of an independent function to review and evaluate regularly the adequacy and effectiveness of the liquidity risk management practices of Barclays’ combined US operations; and (vi) overall risk management requirements, including a US risk committee and a US chief risk officer. The IHC will also be subject to TLAC requirements pursuant to proposed regulations issued by the Federal Reserve in the fall of 2015. Barclays is well advanced in its plans to transfer the relevant US subsidiaries and assets into a newly incorporated IHC, and to implement the related DFA and other requirements, to meet the prescribed deadlines.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC have each elected to be treated as a financial holding company under the BHC Act. Financial holding companies may generally engage in a broader range of financial and related activities, including underwriting and dealing in all types of securities, than are permitted to registered bank holding companies that do not maintain financial holding company status. Financial holding companies such as Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC are required to meet or exceed certain regulatory capital ratios and other requirements to be considered ‘well capitalised’ and be deemed to be ‘well managed’ in order to maintain their status as such. Once established, Barclays’ IHC would also need to meet similar requirements for FHC purposes. Barclays Bank Delaware is also required to meet certain capital ratio requirements and be deemed to be ‘well managed’. In addition, Barclays Bank Delaware must have at least a ‘satisfactory’ rating under the Community Reinvestment Act of 1977 (CRA). Entities ceasing to meet any of these requirements are allotted a period of time in which to restore capital levels or the management or CRA rating. Should the relevant Barclays entities fail to meet the above requirements, during the allotted period of time they could be prohibited from engaging in new types of financial activities or making certain types of acquisitions in the US. If the capital level or rating is not restored, the Group may ultimately be required by the FRB to cease certain activities in the US. More generally, Barclays’ US activities and operations may be subject to other requirements and restrictions by the FRB under its supervisory authority, including with respect to safety and soundness.

Under the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, as amended by the DFA, Barclays and the IHC (once established) are required to act as a source of financial strength for Barclays Bank Delaware. This could, among other things, require Barclays and/or the IHC to inject capital into Barclays Bank Delaware if it fails to meet applicable regulatory capital requirements.

Regulations applicable to US operations of Barclays Bank PLC and its subsidiaries impose obligations to maintain appropriate policies, procedures and controls to detect, prevent and report money laundering and terrorist financing and to ensure compliance with US economic sanctions against designated foreign countries, nationals and others. The enforcement of these regulations has been a major focus of US government policy relating to financial institutions in recent years. Failure of a financial institution to maintain and implement adequate programmes to combat money laundering and terrorist financing or to ensure economic sanction compliance could have serious legal and reputational consequences for the institution.

Barclays’ US securities broker/dealer, investment advisory and investment banking operations are also subject to ongoing supervision and regulation by the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) and other government agencies and self-regulatory organisations (SROs) as part of a comprehensive scheme of regulation of all aspects of the securities and commodities business under the US federal and state securities laws.

Similarly, Barclays US commodity futures and commodity options-related operations are subject to ongoing supervision and regulation by the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC), the National Futures Association and other SROs.

Barclays’ US credit card activities are subject to ongoing supervision and regulation by the CFPB, which was established by the DFA. The statute gave the CFPB the authority to examine and take enforcement action against any US financial institution with over $10bn in total assets, such as Barclays Bank Delaware, with respect to its compliance with federal laws and regulations regarding the provision of consumer financial services (including credit card and deposit services) and with respect to ‘unfair, deceptive or abusive acts and practices.’ One of the laws the CFPB enforces is the Credit Card Accountability, Responsibility and Disclosure Act of 2009 which prohibits certain pricing and marketing practices for consumer credit card accounts.

 

 

214  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

                

                

 

 

 

The DFA’s ultimate impact on the Group continues to remain uncertain and some rules are not yet fully implemented. In addition, market practices and structures may change in response to the requirements of the DFA in ways that are difficult to predict but that could impact Barclays business. Nonetheless, certain provisions of the DFA are particularly likely to have a significant effect on the Group, including:

 

§   Restrictions on proprietary trading and fund-related activities: The so-called ‘Volcker Rule’ which was promulgated by the relevant US regulatory agencies, including the FRB, the FDIC, the SEC, and the CFTC, prohibits banking entities, including Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and their various subsidiaries and affiliates, from undertaking certain ‘proprietary trading’ activities and will limit the sponsorship of, and investment in, private equity funds (including non-conforming real estate and credit funds) and hedge funds, in each case broadly defined, by such entities. These restrictions are subject to certain exceptions and exemptions, including exemptions for underwriting, market-making and risk-mitigating hedging activities as well as exemptions applicable to transactions and investments occurring solely outside of the US. As required by the rule, Barclays has developed and implemented an extensive compliance and monitoring programme (both inside and outside of the US) addressing proprietary trading and covered fund activities. These efforts are expected to continue as the FRB and the other relevant US regulatory agencies further implement and monitor these requirements and Barclays may incur additional costs in relation to such efforts. The Volcker Rule is highly complex and its full impact will not be known with certainty until market practices and structures further develop under it. The prohibition on proprietary trading and the requirement to develop an extensive compliance programme came into effect in July 2015. The FRB subsequently extended the compliance period through July 2016 for investments in and relationships with covered funds that were in place prior to 31 December 2013, and indicated that it intends to further extend the compliance period through July 2017.

 

§   Resolution plans: The DFA requires non-bank financial companies supervised by the FRB, such as Barclays, and bank holding companies with total consolidated assets of $50bn or more to submit annually to the FRB, the FDIC, and the Financial Stability Oversight Council (FSOC), a plan for a ‘the firm’s rapid and orderly’ resolution in the event of material financial distress or failure. As required, Barclays submitted its most recent annual US resolution plan to the US regulators on 1 July 2015.

 

§   Regulation of derivatives markets: Among the changes mandated by the DFA is a requirement that many types of derivatives that used to be traded in the over-the-counter markets be traded on an exchange or swap execution facility and centrally cleared through a regulated clearing house. The DFA also mandates that many swaps and security-based swaps be reported and that certain of that information be made available to the public on an anonymous basis. In addition, certain participants in these markets are required to register with the CFTC as ‘swap dealers’ or ‘major swap participants’ and/or, following the compliance date for relevant SEC rules, with the SEC as ‘security based swap dealers’ or ‘major security- based swap participants’. Such registrants would be subject to CFTC and SEC regulation and oversight. SEC finalised the rules for security based swap dealers in August 2015 with an effective date of October 2015. The SEC clarified that registration timing is contingent upon the finalisation of rules under Title VII of DFA in 2016 and no earlier than six months after such date. Barclays Bank PLC has registered as a swap dealer. Entities required to register are subject to business conduct and record-keeping requirements and will be subject to capital and margin requirements.

In this regard, US prudential regulators and the CFTC recently finalised and issued their respective rules imposing initial and variation margin requirements on transactions in uncleared swaps and security-based swaps. Such requirements will become effective over a period of time beginning in September, 2016. The margin requirements can be expected to increase the costs of over-the-counter derivative transactions and could adversely affect market liquidity.

These registration, execution, clearing, reporting and compliance requirements could adversely affect the business of Barclays Bank PLC and its affiliates, including by reducing market liquidity and increasing the difficulty and cost of hedging and trading activities.

 

§   CFPB and consumer protection regulations and enforcement: Since its creation, the CFPB has issued a number of regulations aimed at protecting consumers of financial products including credit card and deposit customers. The CFPB has also initiated several high-profile public actions against financial companies, including major credit card issuers. Settlements of those actions have included monetary penalties, customer remediation requirements, and commitments to modify business practices.

 

§   TLAC in the US: In 2015, the FRB also issued its own TLAC proposal that, while generally following the FSB framework, contains a number of provisions that are more restrictive. If ultimately adopted in its current form, the US TLAC proposal would require the Barclays IHC, subject to certain phase-in provisions between 2019 and 2022: (i) a specified outstanding amount of eligible long term debt (LDT), (ii) a specified outstanding amount of TLAC (consisting of common and preferred equity regulatory capital plus LTD), and (iii) a specified internal common equity buffer, in each case issued to a controlling parent of the IHC. The US TLAC proposal also contains certain other requirements, including that the LTD must be cancellable or convertible into equity of the IHC upon the order to the FRB if the IHC is in default or danger of default and certain other requirements are met. If finally adopted by the FRB, these requirements may increase the funding costs of the IHC.

Regulation in Africa

Barclays’ operations in South Africa, including Barclays Africa Group Limited, are supervised and regulated mainly by the South African Reserve Bank (SARB), the Financial Services Board (SAFSB) as well as the Department of Trade and Industry (DTI). The SARB oversees the banking industry and follows a risk-based approach to supervision, while the SAFSB oversees financial services such as insurance and investment business and focuses on enhancing consumer protection and regulating market conduct. The DTI regulates consumer credit through the National Credit Regulator, established under the National Credit Act (NCA) 2005, as well as other aspects of consumer protection not regulated under the jurisdiction of the SAFSB through the Consumer Protection Act (CPA) 2008. It is intended that regulatory responsibilities in South Africa will in future be divided between the SARB which will be responsible for prudential regulation and the SAFSB will be responsible for matters of market conduct. The transition to ‘twin peaks’ regulation will commence in 2016. Barclays’ operations in other African countries are primarily supervised and regulated by the central banks in the jurisdictions where Barclays has a banking presence. In some African countries, the conduct of Barclays’ operations and the non-banking activities are also regulated by Financial Market Authorities.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  215


 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

216  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Financial review

Contents

 

 

 

A review of the performance of Barclays, including the key performance indicators, and our businesses’ contribution to the overall performance of the Group.

 

 

 

                

 

Page

 

  

 

Financial review                   
     

§  Key performance indicators

     218   
     

§  Consolidated summary income statement

     220   
     

§  Income statement commentary

     221   
     

§  Consolidated summary balance sheet

     223   
     

§  Balance sheet commentary

     224   
     

§  Analysis of results by business

     225   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  217


Financial review

Key performance indicators

    

 

 

 

In assessing the financial performance of the Group, management uses a range of Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) which focus on the Group’s financial strength, the delivery of sustainable returns and cost management.

 

Definition

   Why is it important and how the Group performed              

 

CRD IV fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio

 

Capital requirements are part of the regulatory framework governing how banks and depository institutions are supervised. Capital ratios express a bank’s capital as a percentage of its risk weighted assets (RWAs) as defined by the PRA.

 

In the context of CRD IV, the fully loaded CET1 ratio is a measure of capital that is predominantly common equity as defined by the Capital Requirements Regulation.

  

 

The Group’s capital management objective is to maximise shareholders’ value by prudently optimising the level, mix, and distribution to businesses of its capital resources, while maintaining sufficient capital resources to: ensure the Group is well capitalised relative to its minimum regulatory capital requirements set by the PRA and other regulatory authorities; support its credit rating; and support its growth and strategic objectives.

 

The Group’s CRD IV fully loaded CET1 ratio increased to 11.4% (2014: 10.3%) due to a £44bn reduction in RWAs to £358bn, demonstrating continued progress on the Non-Core rundown together with reductions in the Investment Bank, which was partially offset by a decrease in CET1 capital to £40.7bn (2014: £41.5bn).

 

      

2015: 11.4%

2014: 10.3%

2013: 9.1%

    

 

Leverage ratio

The ratio is calculated as fully loaded Tier 1 Capital divided by leverage exposure.

  

 

The leverage ratio is non-risk based and is intended to act as a supplementary measure to the risk based capital metrics such as the CET1 ratio.

 

The leverage ratio increased to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%), reflecting a reduction in the leverage exposure of £205bn to £1,028bn and an increase in Tier 1 Capital to £46.2bn (2014: £46.0bn). Tier 1 Capital includes £5.4bn (2014: £4.6bn) of Additional Tier 1 (AT1) securities.

 

      

2015: 4.5%

2014: 3.7%

2013: n/a

    

 

Return on average shareholders’ equity (RoE)

RoE is calculated as profit for the year attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent, divided by average shareholders’ equity for the year excluding non-controlling and other equity interests.

 

Adjusted RoE excludes post tax adjusting items for gains on US Lehman acquisition assets, movements in own credit, the revision to the Education, Social Housing and Local Authority (ESHLA) valuation methodology, provisions for UK customer redress, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, the gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability, impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, and losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses.

 

Average shareholders’ equity for adjusted RoE excludes the impact of own credit on retained earnings.

 

  

 

This measure indicates the return generated by the management of the business based on shareholders’ equity. Achieving a target RoE demonstrates the Group’s ability to execute its strategy and align management’s interests with the shareholders’. RoE lies at the heart of the Group’s capital allocation and performance management process.

 

Adjusted RoE for the Group decreased to 4.9% (2014: 5.1%) driven by a 3% reduction in Group adjusted attributable profit, as average shareholders’ equity remained in line at £56bn (2014: £56bn).

 

      

 

Group adjusted RoE

2015: 4.9%

 

2014: 5.1%

2013: 4.3%a

    

 

Note

a 2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.

 

218  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

 

Definition

   Why is it important and how the Group performed              

 

Operating expenses excluding costs to achieve

Defined as adjusted total operating expenses excluding costs to achieve.

 

Adjusted operating expenses exclude provisions for UK customer redress, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, the gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability, impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, and losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses.

  

 

Barclays views the active management and control of operating expenses as a key strategic objective.

 

Adjusted operating expenses excluding costs to achieve of £793m (2014: £1,165m), decreased 4% to £16,205m.

 

Operating expenses in the Core business, excluding costs to achieve of £693m (2014: £953m), were broadly in line at £15,106m (2014: £15,105m).

      

 

Group adjusted

 

2015: £16,205m

 

2014: £16,904m

2013: £18,511ma

 

Core

 

2015: £15,106m

 

2014: £15,105m

2013: £16,377m

    

 

Non-Core RWAs

RWAs are a measure of assets adjusted for associated risks. Risk weightings are established in accordance with the rules as implemented by CRD IV and local regulators.

  

 

Barclays Non-Core was established as a separate unit in 2014 and groups together assets which do not fit with the strategic objectives of the Group. Reducing Non-Core RWAs will rebalance the Group to deliver higher and more sustainable returns.

 

Non-Core RWAs have reduced from £110bn in December 2013 to £47bn, resulting in an equity allocation of £7.2bn as at December 2015, 13% of the Group total. This is down from £15.1bn as at December 2013, which was 28% of the Group total.

 

      

 

Non-Core

 

2015: £47bn

 

2014: £75bn

2013: £110bn

    

 

 

 

Note

a 2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigation and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  219


Financial review

Consolidated summary income statement

 

 

 

For the year ended 31 December

    

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

    

 

2014 

£m 

  

  

    

 

2013a

£m 

  

  

    

 

2012 

£m 

  

  

    

 

2011 

£m 

  

  

Continuing operations

              

Net interest income

     12,558          12,080          11,600          11,654          12,201    

Non-interest income net of claims and benefits on insurance contracts

     11,970          13,648          16,296          17,707          16,312    

Adjusted total income net of insurance claims

     24,528          25,728          27,896          29,361          28,513    

Gain on US Lehman acquisition assets

     496          461          259          –          –    

Own credit gain/(charge)

     430          34          (220)         (4,579)         2,708    

Revision of ESHLA valuation methodology

     –          (935)         –          –          –    

Gain/(loss) on disposal of BlackRock, Inc. investment

     –          –          –          227          (58)   

Gains on debt buy-backs

     –          –          –          –          1,130    

Statutory total income net of insurance claims

     25,454          25,288          27,935          25,009          32,292    

Adjusted credit impairment charges and other provisions

     (2,114)         (2,168)         (3,071)         (3,340)         (3,802)   

Impairment of BlackRock, Inc. investment

     –          –          –          –          (1,800)   

Statutory credit impairment charges and other provisions

     (2,114)         (2,168)         (3,071)         (3,340)         (5,602)   

Adjusted operating expenses

     (16,998)         (18,069)         (19,720)         (18,562)         (19,289)   

Provisions for UK customer redress

     (2,772)         (1,110)         (2,000)         (2,450)         (1,000)   

Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

     (1,237)         (1,250)         (173)         –          –    

Gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability

     429          –          –          –          –    

Impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed

     (96)         –          (79)         –          (597)   

Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses

     (3)         –          –          –          –    

Statutory operating expenses

         (20,677)             (20,429)             (21,972)             (21,012)             (20,886)   

Adjusted other net (expenses)/income

     (13)         11          (24)         140          60    

Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses

     (577)         (446)         –          –          –    

Losses on acquisitions and disposals

     –          –          –          –          (94)   

Statutory other net (expenses)/income

     (590)         (435)         (24)         140          (34)   

Statutory profit before tax

     2,073          2,256          2,868          797          5,770    

Statutory taxation

     (1,450)         (1,411)         (1,571)         (616)         (1,902)   

Statutory profit after tax

     623          845          1,297          181          3,868    

Statutory (loss)/profit attributable to equity holders of the parent

     (394)         (174)         540          (624)         2,924    

Statutory profit attributable to non-controlling interests

     672          769          757          805          944    

Statutory profit attributable to other equity holdersb

     345          250          –          –          –    
       623          845          1,297          181          3,868    

Selected statutory financial statistics

                                            

Basic (loss)/earnings per share

     (1.9p)         (0.7p)         3.8p          (4.8p)         22.9p    

Diluted (loss)/earnings per share

     (1.9p)         (0.7p)         3.7p          (4.8p)         21.9p    

Dividends per ordinary share

     6.5p          6.5p          6.5p          6.5p          6.0p    

Return on average tangible shareholders’ equityb

     (0.7%)         (0.3%)         1.2%          (1.4%)         7.1%    

Return on average shareholders’ equityb

     (0.6%)         (0.2%)         1.0%          (1.2%)         5.9%    

Adjusted profit before tax

     5,403          5,502          5,081          7,599          5,482    

Adjusted taxation

     (1,690)         (1,704)         (2,029)         (2,159)         (1,299)   

Adjusted profit after tax

     3,713          3,798          3,052          5,440          4,183    

Adjusted profit attributable to equity holders of the parent

     2,696          2,779          2,295          4,635          3,239    

Adjusted profit attributable to non-controlling interests

     672          769          757          805          944    

Adjusted profit attributable to other equity interestsb

     345          250          –          –          –    
       3,713          3,798          3,052          5,440          4,183    

Selected adjusted financial statistics

                                            

Basic earnings per share

     16.6p          17.3p          16.0p          35.5p          25.3p    

Dividend payout ratio

     39%          38%          41%          18%          24%    

Return on average tangible shareholders’ equityb

     5.8%          5.9%          5.1%          10.6%          8.1%    

Return on average shareholders’ equityb

     4.9%          5.1%          4.3%          9.0%          6.7%    

The financial information above is extracted from the published accounts. This information should be read together with the information included in the accompanying consolidated financial statements.

Notes

a  2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.
b  The profit after tax attributable to other equity holders of £345m (2014: £250m) is offset by a tax credit recorded in reserves of £70m (2014: £54m). The net amount of £275m (2014: £196m), along with non-controlling interests (NCI) is deducted from profit after tax in order to calculate earnings per share, return on average tangible shareholders’ equity and return on average shareholders’ equity.

 

220  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Financial review

Income statement commentary

 

 

2015 compared to 2014

Statutory profit before tax decreased to £2,073m (2014: £2,256m), adjusted profit before tax decreased 2% to £5,403m.

Statutory total income net of insurance claims increased 1% to £25,454m, including adjusting items for a £496m (2014: £461m) gain on the US Lehman acquisition assets and an own credit gain of £430m (2014: £34m). 2014 statutory total income net of insurance claims included a loss of £935m (2015: nil) relating to a revision to the ESHLA valuation methodology.

Adjusted total income net of insurance claims decreased 5% to £24,528m, as Non-Core income reduced to a net expense of £164m following assets and securities rundown, business sales, including the impact of the sales of the Spanish and UAE retail businesses, and fair value losses on the ESHLA portfolio of £359m (2014: £156m). Core income remained in line at £24,692m (2014: £24,678m) reflecting: a 13% increase to £4,927m in Barclaycard, primarily reflecting growth in US cards; Investment Bank income remaining broadly in line at £7,572m (2014: £7,588m); a 1% reduction in PCB due to the impact of customer redress in, and the sale of, the US Wealth business; and a 2% reduction in Africa Banking as the ZAR depreciated against GBP. On a constant currency basisa income in Africa Banking increased 7% reflecting good growth in Retail and Business Banking and corporate banking in South Africa, and Wealth, Investment Management and Insurance (WIMI).

Net interest income increased 4% to £12,558m, with higher net interest income in PCB, Barclaycard and Non-Core, partially offset by reductions in Africa Banking, the Investment Bank and Head Office. Net interest income for PCB, Barclaycard and Africa Banking increased 5% to £12,024m due to an increase in average customer assets to £287.7bn (2014: £280.0bn) with growth in PCB and Barclaycard, partially offset by reductions in Africa Banking as the ZAR depreciated against GBP. Net interest margin increased 10bps to 4.18% primarily due to growth in interest earning lending within Barclaycard.

Credit impairment charges improved 2% to £2,114m, with a loan loss rate of 47bps (2014: 46bps). This reflected higher recoveries in Europe and the sale of the Spanish business in Non-Core, and lower impairments in PCB due to the benign economic environment in the UK resulting in lower default rates and charges. This was partially offset by a number of single name exposures in the Investment Bank, and increased impairment in Barclaycard reflecting asset growth and updates to impairment model methodologies.

Statutory operating expenses increased 1% to £20,677m. This included adjusting items for additional UK customer redress provisions of £2,772m (2014: £1,110m), £1,237m (2014: £1,250m) of additional provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, a £429m (2014: nil) gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability, £96m (2014: nil) of impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, and £3m (2014: nil) of losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses.

Adjusted operating expenses decreased 6% to £16,998m as a result of savings from strategic cost programmes, particularly in the Investment Bank and PCB, in addition to the continued rundown of Non-Core. Total compensation costs decreased 6% to £8,339m, with the Investment Bank reducing 5% to £3,423m, reflecting lower deferred and current year bonus charges and reduced headcount. Reductions in costs to achieve of 32% to £793m, and in litigation and conduct charges of 16% to £378m, were partially offset by costs associated with the implementation of the structural reform programme and a 3% increase in the UK bank levy to £476m.

The statutory cost:income ratio remained in line at 81% (2014: 81%). The adjusted cost:income ratio decreased to 69% (2014: 70%).

Statutory other net expenses increased to £590m (2014: £435m) and included an adjusting item for losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses of £577m (2014: £446m).

The tax charge of £1,450m (2014: £1,411m) on statutory profit before tax of £2,073m (2014: £2,256m) represents an effective tax rate of 69.9% (2014: 62.5%). The effective tax rate on adjusted profit before tax of 31.3% (2014: 31.0%) is less than the effective tax rate on statutory profit before tax mainly because it excludes the impact of adjusting items such as non-deductible provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange and provisions for UK customer redress. The adjusted measure of profit before tax is considered to provide a more consistent basis for comparing business performance between periods as it is more representative of the underlying, ongoing performance. Consistent with this, the effective tax rate on adjusted profit before tax is considered a more representative measure of the Group’s underlying, ongoing tax charge.

 

 

 

 

Note

a Constant currency results are calculated by converting ZAR results into GBP using the average exchange rate for 2015.
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  221


Financial review

Income statement commentary

 

 

2014 compared to 2013

Statutory profit before tax decreased to £2,256m (2013: £2,868m), adjusted profit before tax increased 8% to £5,502m.

Statutory total income net of insurance claims decreased 9% to £25,288m including adjusting items for an own credit gain of £34m (2013: loss of £220m), a £461m (2013: £259m) gain on the US Lehman acquisition assets and a valuation revision of £935m (2013: nil) relating to changes in discount rates applied in the valuation methodology of the ESHLA loan portfolio held at fair value.

Adjusted total income net of insurance claims decreased 8% to £25,728m, reflecting a 54% reduction in Non-Core following assets and securities rundown and business disposals, a 12% reduction in the Investment Bank, driven by a decrease in the Markets business, particularly Macro, and a 9% reduction in Africa Banking, due to adverse currency movements, partially offset by growth in Barclaycard and PCB.

Net interest income increased 4% to £12,080m, with higher net interest income in PCB, the Investment Bank and Barclaycard, partially offset by reductions in Africa Banking, Head Office and Non-Core. Net interest income for PCB, Barclaycard and Africa Banking increased 4% to £11,435m driven by strong savings income growth in PCB, and volume growth in Barclaycard, partially offset by a reduction in Africa Banking due to currency movements. This resulted in a net interest margin of 4.08% (2013: 4.02%).

Credit impairment charges improved 29% to £2,168m, with a loan loss rate of 46bps (2013: 64bps). This reflected the non-recurrence of impairments on single name exposures, impairment releases on the wholesale portfolio, and improved performance in Europe within Non-Core. Within the Core business there were lower impairments in PCB due to the improving UK economic environment, particularly impacting Corporate Banking which benefited from one-off releases and lower defaults from large UK corporate clients, and reduced impairments in the Africa Banking South Africa mortgages portfolio.

As a result, statutory net operating income for the Group decreased 7% to £23,120m. Net adjusted operating income excluding movements in own credit, the gains on US Lehman acquisition assets and the revision of the ESHLA valuation methodology decreased 5% to £23,560m.

Statutory operating expenses reduced 7% to £20,429m. This included adjusting items for an additional PPI redress provision of £1,270m, resulting in a full year net charge of £1,110m (2013: £2,000m) in relation to UK customer redress, £1,250m (2013: £173m) of provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange and goodwill impairment of nil (2013: £79m). Adjusted operating expenses decreased 8% to £18,069m, driven by savings from strategic cost programmes, including a 5% reduction in headcount and currency movements. Total compensation costs decreased 8% to £8,891m, with the Investment Bank reducing 9% to £3,620m, reflecting reduced headcount, and lower deferred and current year bonus charges. Costs to achieve were £1,165m (2013: £1,209m) and the UK bank levy was £462m (2013: £504m).

The statutory cost:income ratio increased to 81% (2013: 79%). The adjusted cost:income ratio excluding movements in own credit, the gains on US Lehman acquisition assets, provisions for UK customer redress, the provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, the revision of the ESHLA valuation methodology and goodwill impairment decreased to 70% (2013: 71%).

Statutory other net expense increased to £435m (2013: £24m) including an adjusting item for a loss on the sale of the Spanish business of £446m, which completed on 2 January 2015. In addition, accumulated currency translation reserve losses of approximately £100m were recognised on completion in Q115.

The tax charge was £1,411m (2013: £1,571m) on statutory profit before tax of £2,256m (2013: £2,868m), representing an effective tax rate of 62.5% (2013: 54.8%). The effective tax rate on adjusted profit before tax decreased to 31.0% (2013: 39.9%). 2013 included a charge of £440m relating to the write-down of deferred tax assets in Spain.

 

 

222  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Financial review

Consolidated summary balance sheet

 

 

As at 31 December

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

    

 

2013

£m

  

  

    

 

2012

£m

  

  

    

 

2011

£m

  

  

Assets

              

Cash and balances at central banks

     49,711         39,695         45,687         86,191         106,894   

Items in the course of collection from other banks

     1,011         1,210         1,282         1,473         1,812   

Trading portfolio assets

     77,348         114,717         133,069         146,352         152,183   

Financial assets designated at fair value

     76,830         38,300         38,968         46,629         36,949   

Derivative financial instruments

     327,709         439,909         350,300         485,140         559,010   

Available for sale investments

     90,267         86,066         91,756         75,109         68,491   

Loans and advances to banks

     41,349         42,111         39,422         41,799         48,576   

Loans and advances to customers

     399,217         427,767         434,237         430,601         437,355   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

     28,187         131,753         186,779         176,522         153,665   

Other assets

     28,383         36,378         22,128         22,535         23,745   

Total assets

     1,120,012         1,357,906         1,343,628         1,512,351         1,588,680   

Liabilities

              

Deposits from banks

     47,080         58,390         55,615         77,345         90,905   

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

     1,013         1,177         1,359         1,587         969   

Customer accounts

     418,242         427,704         431,998         390,828         371,806   

Trading portfolio liabilities

     33,967         45,124         53,464         44,794         45,887   

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

     91,745         56,972         64,796         78,561         87,997   

Derivative financial instruments

     324,252         439,320         347,118         480,987         548,944   

Debt securities in issue

     69,150         86,099         86,693         119,525         129,736   

Subordinated liabilities

     21,467         21,153         21,695         24,018         24,870   

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowings

     25,035         124,479         196,748         217,178         207,292   

Other liabilities

     22,197         31,530         20,193         17,542         16,315   

Total liabilities

     1,054,148         1,291,948         1,279,679         1,452,365         1,524,721   

Equity

              

Called up share capital and share premium

     21,586         20,809         19,887         12,477         12,380   

Other equity instruments

     5,305         4,322         2,063                   

Other reserves

     1,898         2,724         249         3,674         3,837   

Retained earnings

     31,021         31,712         33,186         34,464         38,135   

Total equity excluding non-controlling interests

     59,810         59,567         55,385         50,615         54,352   

Non-controlling interests

     6,054         6,391         8,564         9,371         9,607   

Total equity

     65,864         65,958         63,949         59,986         63,959   

Total liabilities and equity

     1,120,012         1,357,906         1,343,628         1,512,351         1,588,680   
                                              

Net tangible asset value per share

     275p         285p         283p         349p         381p   

Net asset value per ordinary share

     324p         335p         331p         414p         446p   

Number of ordinary shares of Barclays PLC (in millions)

     16,805         16,498         16,113         12,243         12,199   
                                              

Year-end US Dollar exchange rate

     1.48         1.56         1.65         1.62         1.54   

Year-end Euro exchange rate

     1.36         1.28         1.20         1.23         1.19   

Year-end South African Rand exchange rate

     23.14         18.03         17.37         13.74         12.52   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  223


Financial review

Balance sheet commentary

 

 

2015 compared to 2014

Total assets

Total assets decreased £238bn to £1,120bn.

Cash and balances at central banks and items in the course of collection from other banks increased £10bn to £51bn, as the cash contribution to the Group liquidity pool was increased.

Trading portfolio assets decreased £37bn to £77bn primarily driven by balance sheet deleveraging resulting in lower securities positions, consistent with client demand in the Investment Bank, and exiting of positions in Non-Core.

Financial assets designated at fair value increased by £39bn to £77bn. During the period, new reverse repurchase agreements in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance. This has resulted in an increase of £44bn in this account line. Across fair value and amortised cost classifications, total reverse repurchase agreements have decreased £59bn due to a reduction in matched book trading and general firm financing due to balance sheet deleveraging. Additionally, within financial assets designated at fair value, there was a partial offset by decreases in loans and advances and debt securities.

Derivative financial instrument assets decreased £112bn to £328bn, consistent with the decrease in derivative financial instrument liabilities. This included a £79bn decrease in interest rate derivatives due to net trade reductions and increases in major forward interest rates and a £19bn decrease in foreign exchange derivatives reflecting trade reductions.

Available for sale investments increased £4bn to £90bn due to an increase in government bonds held in the liquidity pool.

Total loans and advances decreased by £29bn to £441bn driven by a net £20bn decrease in settlement and cash collateral balances, a £6bn reclassification of loans to other assets, relating to the Portuguese retail business and Italian retail banking branch network which are now held for sale and a £5bn decrease in Africa reflecting the depreciation of ZAR against GBP. This was partially offset by lending growth of £5bn in Barclaycard.

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending decreased £104bn to £28bn reflecting a reduction in matched book trading and general firm financing due to balance sheet deleveraging and as a result of the designation to fair value described in the financial assets designated at fair value comment above.

Total liabilities

Total liabilities decreased £238bn to £1,054bn.

Deposits from banks decreased £11bn to £47bn primarily driven by a £9bn decrease in cash collateral due to lower derivative mark to market.

Customer accounts decreased £10bn to £418bn as a result of reclassification of £4bn to other liabilities relating to the Portuguese retail business and Italian retail banking branch network which are now held for sale, a £7bn reduction in settlement balances, a £3bn decrease in cash collateral due to lower derivative mark to market and a £7bn decrease due to depreciation of ZAR. This is partially offset by £13bn growth within PCB, Barclaycard and Africa.

Trading portfolio liabilities decreased £11bn to £34bn primarily driven by balance sheet deleveraging resulting in lower securities positions, consistent with client demand in the Investment Bank, and exiting of positions in Non-Core.

Financial liabilities designated at fair value increased by £35bn to £92bn. In line with financial assets designated at fair value, the designation of repurchase agreements to fair value resulted in an increase of £45bn during the year. Across fair value and amortised cost classifications, total repurchase agreements have decreased £54bn due to a reduction in matched book trading and general firm financing due to balance sheet deleveraging. Additionally, within financial liabilities designated at fair value, there was a partial offset in debt securities due to reduced funding requirements.

Derivative financial instrument liabilities decreased £115bn to £324bn in line with the decrease in derivative financial assets.

Debt Securities in issue decreased by £17bn to £69bn primarily driven by a decrease in Certificate of Deposits and Bonds and MTNs due to reduced funding requirements.

Subordinated liabilities increased £0.3bn to £21.5bn due to issuances of dated subordinated notes, partially offset by the redemptions of dated and undated subordinated notes, and fair value hedge movements.

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowings decreased £99bn to £25bn reflecting a reduction in matched book trading and general firm financing due to balance sheet deleveraging and as a result of the designation to fair value described in the financial assets designated at fair value comment above.

Shareholders’ equity

Total shareholders’ equity remained flat at £66bn.

Share capital and share premium increased by £0.8bn to £22bn due to the issuance of shares under employee share schemes and the Barclays PLC scrip dividend programme. Other equity instruments increased by £1.0bn to £5.3bn due to issuance of equity accounted AT1 securities to investors.

The available for sale reserve decreased £0.2bn to £0.3bn driven by £0.4bn of losses from changes in the fair value of government bonds, predominantly held in the liquidity pool, £0.1bn of losses from related hedging, £0.4bn of net gains transferred to net profit, partially offset by £0.4bn gains from changes in fair value of equity investments in Visa Europe and an £0.1bn change in insurance liabilities. A tax credit of £0.1bn was recognised in the period relating to these items.

The cash flow hedging reserve decreased £0.6bn to £1.3bn driven by a £0.4bn decrease in the fair value of interest rate swaps held for hedging purposes as interest rate forward curves increased, and £0.2bn of gains recycled to the income statement in line with when the hedged item affects profit or loss, partially offset by a tax credit of £0.1bn.

The currency translation reserve remained stable as the effect of ZAR depreciating against GBP was offset by the appreciation of USD against GBP.

Net tangible asset value per share decreased to 275p (2014: 285p). The decrease was primarily attributable to dividends paid and a decrease in the cash flow hedging reserve as explained.

 

 

224  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

 

 

Segmental analysis (audited)

 

Analysis of adjusted results by business

                                                                       
      
 
 
 
 
Personal 
and 
Corporate 
Banking 
£m 
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
Barclaycard 
£m 
  
  
    
 
 
Africa 
Banking 
£m 
  
  
  
    
 

 

Investment 
Bank 

£m 

  
  

  

    
 
 
Head 
Office 
£m 
  
  
  
    
 

 

Barclays 
Core 

£m 

  
  

  

    
 
 
Barclays 
Non-Core 
£m 
  
  
  
    
 
 

 

Group 
adjusted 
results 

£m 

  
  
  

  

For the year ended 31 December 2015

                       

Total income net of insurance claims

     8,726          4,927          3,574          7,572          (107)         24,692          (164)         24,528    

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

     (378)         (1,251)         (352)         (55)         –          (2,036)         (78)         (2,114)   

Net operating income

     8,348          3,676          3,222          7,517          (107)         22,656          (242)         22,414    

Operating expenses

     (4,774)         (1,927)         (2,169)         (5,362)         (246)         (14,478)         (873)         (15,351)   

UK bank levy

     (93)         (42)         (52)         (203)         (8)         (398)         (78)         (476)   

Litigation and conduct

     (109)         –          –          (107)         (14)         (230)         (148)         (378)   

Costs to achieve

     (292)         (106)         (29)         (234)         (32)         (693)         (100)         (793)   

Other (losses)/incomea

     (40)         33                  –                          (18)         (13)   

Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations

     3,040          1,634          979          1,611          (402)         6,862          (1,459)         5,403    

Total assets (£bn)

     287.2          47.4          49.9          375.9          56.4          816.9          303.1          1,120.0    
                                                                         

For the year ended 31 December 2014

                       

Total income net of insurance claims

     8,828          4,356          3,664          7,588          242          24,678          1,050          25,728    

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

     (482)         (1,183)         (349)         14          –          (2,000)         (168)         (2,168)   

Net operating income

     8,346          3,173          3,315          7,602          242          22,678          882          23,560    

Operating expenses

     (4,951)         (1,727)         (2,244)         (5,504)         (57)         (14,483)         (1,510)         (15,993)   

UK bank levy

     (70)         (29)         (45)         (218)         (9)         (371)         (91)         (462)   

Litigation and conduct

     (54)         –          (2)         (129)         (66)         (251)         (198)         (449)   

Costs to achieve

     (400)         (118)         (51)         (374)         (10)         (953)         (212)         (1,165)   

Other income/(losses)a

     14          40          11          –          (3)         62          (51)         11    

Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations

     2,885          1,339          984          1,377          97          6,682          (1,180)         5,502    

Total assets (£bn)

     285.0          41.3          55.5          455.7          49.1          886.5          471.5          1,357.9    
                                                                         

For the year ended 31 December 2013b

                       

Total income net of insurance claims

     8,723          4,103          4,039          8,596          142          25,603          2,293          27,896    

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

     (621)         (1,096)         (479)         22                  (2,171)         (900)         (3,071)   

Net operating income

     8,102          3,007          3,560          8,618          145          23,432          1,393          24,825    

Operating expenses

     (5,362)         (1,752)         (2,451)         (6,141)         (103)         (15,809)         (1,929)         (17,738)   

UK bank levy

     (66)         (22)         (42)         (236)         (29)         (395)         (109)         (504)   

Litigation and conduct

     (98)         (34)         –          (31)         (10)         (173)         (96)         (269)   

Costs to achieve

     (384)         (49)         (26)         (190)         (22)         (671)         (538)         (1,209)   

Other income/(losses)a

     41          33                  –                  86          (110)         (24)   

Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations

     2,233          1,183          1,049          2,020          (15)         6,470          (1,389)         5,081    

Total assets (£bn)

     278.5          34.4          54.9          438.0          26.6          832.4          511.2          1,343.6    

 

 

 

Notes

a Other (losses)/income represents the share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures, profit (or loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures, and gains on acquisitions.
b 2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  225


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

 

 

Adjusted results reconciliation

  

              2015                           2014                           2013a            

For the year ended 31 December

    
 
 
 
Group 
adjusted 
results 
£m 
  
  
  
  
    
 

 

Adjusting 
items 

£m 

  
  

  

    
 
 
 
Group 
statutory 
results 
£m 
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Group 
adjusted 
results 
£m 
  
  
  
  
    
 

 

Adjusting 
items 

£m 

  
  

  

    
 
 
 
Group 
statutory 
results 
£m 
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Group 
adjusted 
results 
£m 
  
  
  
  
    
 

 

Adjusting 
items 

£m 

  
  

  

    
 
 
 
Group 
statutory 
results 
£m 
  
  
  
  

Total income net of insurance claims

     24,528          926          25,454          25,728          (440)         25,288          27,896          39          27,935    

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

     (2,114)         –          (2,114)         (2,168)         –          (2,168)         (3,071)         –          (3,071)   

Net operating income

     22,414          926          23,340          23,560          (440)         23,120          24,825          39          24,864    

Operating expenses

     (15,351)         330          (15,021)         (15,993)         –          (15,993)         (17,738)         (79)         (17,817)   

UK bank levy

     (476)         –          (476)         (462)         –          (462)         (504)         –          (504)   

Litigation and conduct

     (378)         (4,009)         (4,387)         (449)         (2,360)         (2,809)         (269)         (2,173)         (2,442)   

Costs to achieve

     (793)         –          (793)         (1,165)         –          (1,165)         (1,209)         –          (1,209)   

Other (losses)/incomeb

     (13)         (577)         (590)         11          (446)         (435)         (24)         –          (24)   

Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations

     5,403          (3,330)         2,073          5,502          (3,246)         2,256          5,081          (2,213)         2,868    
                          

Adjusted profit reconciliation

                                                                                

For the year ended 31 December

                                                          

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

    

 

2014 

£m 

  

  

    

 

2013a

£m  

  

  

Adjusted profit before tax

  

     5,403          5,502          5,081    

Provisions for UK customer redress

  

     (2,772)         (1,110)         (2,000)   

Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

  

     (1,237)         (1,250)         (173)   

Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses

  

     (580)         (446)         –    

Gain on US Lehman acquisition assets

  

     496          461          259    

Own credit

  

     430          34          (220)   

Gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability

  

     429          –          –    

Impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed

  

     (96)         –          (79)   

Revision of ESHLA valuation methodology

  

     –          (935)         –    

Statutory profit before tax

  

                       2,073          2,256          2,868    
                          

Income by geographic region (audited)

  

                                                                       
                       Adjusted                              Statutory            
                                 

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

    

 

2013

£m

  

  

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

    

 

2013

£m

  

  

Continuing operations

                          

UKc

              11,730         12,357         11,681         12,160         11,456         11,461   

Europe

              2,245         2,896         4,019         2,245         2,896         4,019   

Americasd

              6,114         5,547         6,775         6,610         6,008         7,034   

Africa and Middle East

              3,801         4,152         4,137         3,801         4,152         4,137   

Asia

              638         776         1,284         638         776         1,284   

Total

                                24,528         25,728         27,896         25,454         25,288         27,935   
                          

Statutory income from individual countries which represent more than 5% of total income (audited)e

  

                          
                                                            

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

    

 

2013

£m

  

  

Continuing operations

                          

UK

                       12,160         11,456         11,461   

US

                       6,228         5,866         6,760   

South Africa

                                                           2,727         2,915         2,884   

 

Notes

a 2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.
b Other (losses)/income represents the share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures, profit (or loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures, and gains on acquisitions.
c UK adjusted income excludes the impact of an own credit gain of £430m (2014: £34m gain) and ESHLA valuation revision of nil (2014: £935m).
d Americas adjusted income excludes the gains on US Lehman acquisition assets of £496m (2014: £461m).
e Total income net of insurance claims based on counterparty location. Income from any single external customer does not amount to 10% or greater of the Group’s total income net of insurance claims.

 

226  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Barclays Core                    

 

  

 

      

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

    

 

2013

£m

  

  

Income statement information

        

Total income net of insurance claims

     24,692         24,678         25,603   

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

     (2,036      (2,000      (2,171

Net operating income

     22,656         22,678         23,432   

Operating expenses

     (14,478      (14,483      (15,809

UK bank levy

     (398      (371      (395

Litigation and conduct

     (230      (251      (173

Costs to achieve

     (693      (953      (671

Total operating expenses

     (15,799      (16,058      (17,048

Other net income

     5         62         86   

Profit before tax

     6,862         6,682         6,470   

Tax charge

     (1,749      (1,976      (1,754

Profit after tax

     5,113         4,706         4,716   

Non-controlling interests

     (610      (648      (638

Other equity interests

     (284      (194        

Attributable profit

     4,219         3,864         4,078   

Balance sheet information

                          

Total assets

     £816.9bn         £886.5bn         £832.4bn   

Risk weighted assets

     £311.8bn         £326.6bn         £332.6bn   

Leverage exposure

     £906.5bn         £955.9bn         n/a   

Key facts

        

Number of employees (full time equivalent)

     123,800         123,400         129,700   

Performance measures

                          

Return on average tangible equity

     10.9%         11.3%         14.4%   

Average allocated tangible equity

     £39.2bn         £34.6bn         £28.4bn   

Return on average equity

     9.0%         9.2%         11.3%   

Average allocated equity

     £47.3bn         £42.3bn         £35.9bn   

Period end allocated equity

     £47.6bn         £44.9bn         £39.0bn   

Cost:income ratio

     64%         65%         67%   

Loan loss rate (bps)

     51         49         55   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  227


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

 

 

Personal and

Corporate Banking

 

£8,726m total income

£3,040m profit before tax

 

 

2015 compared to 2014

Profit before tax improved 5% to £3,040m driven by the continued reduction in operating expenses and lower impairment due to the benign economic environment in the UK. The reduction in operating expenses was delivered through strategic cost programmes including the restructure of the branch network and technology improvements to increase automation. Corporate performed strongly with income increasing 5% through growth in both lending and cash management.

PCB results were significantly impacted by customer redress in, and the sale of, the US Wealth business. Excluding the US Wealth business profit before tax improved 12% to £3,277m.

Total income reduced 1% to £8,726m. Excluding the US Wealth business income remained flat. Personal income decreased 3% to £4,054m driven by a reduction in fee income and mortgage margin pressure, partially offset by improved deposit margins and balance growth. Corporate income increased 5% to £3,754m due to balance growth in both lending and deposits and improved deposit margins, partially offset by reduced margins in the lending business. Wealth income reduced 15% to £918m primarily as a result of the impact of customer redress in, and the sale of, the US Wealth business. Excluding the US Wealth business income decreased 2%.

Net interest income increased 2% to £6,438m driven by growth in Corporate balances and the change in the overdraft proposition in June 2014. Net interest margin remained broadly in line at 2.99% (2014: 3.00%) as mortgage margin pressure and lower Corporate lending margins were partially offset by increased margins on Corporate and Personal deposits, and the benefit of the change in the overdraft proposition.

Net fee, commission and other income reduced 10% to £2,288m driven primarily by the impact of the change in the overdraft proposition and customer redress in the US.

Credit impairment charges improved 22% to £378m due to the benign economic environment in the UK resulting in lower default rates and charges across all businesses. The loan loss rate reduced 4bps to 17bps.

Total operating expenses reduced 4% to £5,268m reflecting savings realised from strategic cost programmes relating to restructuring of the branch network and technology improvements, and lower costs to achieve, partially offset by increased litigation and conduct charges.

Loans and advances to customers increased 1% to £218.4bn due to increased Corporate lending.

Total assets increased 1% to £287.2bn driven by the growth in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased 2% to £305.4bn primarily driven by the Personal and Corporate businesses.

RWAs were broadly flat at £120.4bn (2014: £120.2bn).

2014 compared to 2013

Profit before tax increased 29% to £2,885m driven by 3% growth in Personal income, lower impairment due to the improving economic environment in the UK, and the continued reduction in operating expenses delivered through strategic cost programmes. This resulted in a 2.2% increase in return on average equity to 11.9%. In Personal, income increased £119m alongside significant cost reductions, with the net closure of 72 branches as part of ongoing branch network optimisation, as well as investment in the customer experience across multiple channels. Corporate increased both loans and deposits, and Wealth undertook a substantial reorganisation to reduce the number of target markets while simplifying operations.

Total income increased 1% to £8,828m. Personal income increased 3% to £4,159m due to balance growth and improved savings margins, partially offset by lower fee income. Corporate income was broadly in line at £3,592m (2013: £3,620m), with balance growth in both lending and deposits, offset by margin compression. Wealth income was broadly in line at £1,077m (2013: £1,063m) driven by growth in the UK business, offset by client and market exits as part of the reorganisations in the US and EU businesses, and lower fee income.

Net interest income increased 7% to £6,298m driven by lending and deposit growth and margin improvement. Net interest margin improved 9bps to 3.00% primarily due to the launch of a revised overdraft proposition, which recognises the majority of overdraft income as net interest income as opposed to fee income, and higher savings margins within Personal and Wealth. These factors were partially offset by lower Corporate deposit margins.

Net fee, commission and other income reduced 11% to £2,530m due to the launch of the revised overdraft proposition and lower transactional income in Wealth.

Credit impairment charges improved 22% to £482m and the loan loss rate reduced 7bps to 21bps due to the improving economic environment in the UK, particularly impacting Corporate which benefited from one-off releases and lower defaults from large UK Corporate clients.

Total operating expenses reduced 7% to £5,475m reflecting savings realised from strategic cost programmes relating to restructuring of the branch network and technology improvements to increase automation.

Loans and advances to customers increased 2% to £217.0bn due to mortgage growth and Corporate loan growth.

Total assets increased 2% to £285.0bn driven by the growth in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased to £299.2bn (2013: £295.9bn).

RWAs increased 2% to £120.2bn primarily driven by growth in mortgage and Corporate lending.

 

 

228  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

      

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

    

 

2014 

£m 

  

  

  

2013 

£m 

Income statement information

        

Net interest income

     6,438          6,298        5,893 

Net fee, commission and other income

     2,288          2,530        2,830 

Total income

     8,726          8,828        8,723 

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

     (378)         (482)       (621)

Net operating income

     8,348          8,346        8,102 

Operating expenses

     (4,774)         (4,951)       (5,362)

UK bank levy

     (93)         (70)       (66)

Litigation and conduct

     (109)         (54)       (98)

Costs to achieve

     (292)         (400)       (384)

Total operating expenses

     (5,268)         (5,475)       (5,910)

Other net (expenses)/income

     (40)         14        41 

Profit before tax

     3,040          2,885        2,233 

Attributable profit

     2,179          2,058        1,681 

Balance sheet information

                      

Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost

     £218.4bn          £217.0bn        £212.2bn 

Total assets

     £287.2bn          £285.0bn        £278.5bn 

Customer deposits

     £305.4bn          £299.2bn        £295.9bn 

Risk weighted assets

     £120.4bn          £120.2bn        £118.3bn 

Key facts

                      

Average LTV of mortgage lendinga

     49%          52%        56% 

Average LTV of new mortgage lendinga

     64%          65%        64% 

Client assetsb

     £112.2bn          £148.6bn        £155.3bn 

Number of branches

     1,362          1,488        1,560 

Number of employees (full time equivalent)

     45,700          45,600        50,100 

Performance measures

                      

Return on average tangible equity

     16.2%          15.8%        12.7% 

Average allocated tangible equity

     £13.6bn          £13.1bn        £13.2bn 

Return on average equity

     12.1%          11.9%        9.7% 

Average allocated equity

     £18.2bn          £17.5bn        £17.3bn 

Cost:income ratio

     60%          62%        68% 

Loan loss rate (bps)

     17          21        28 

Net interest margin

     2.99%          3.00%        2.91% 

Analysis of total income

     £m          £m        £m 

Personal

     4,054          4,159        4,040 

Corporate

     3,754          3,592        3,620 

Wealth

     918          1,077        1,063 

Total income

     8,726          8,828        8,723 

Analysis of loans and advances to customers at amortised cost

                      

Personal

     £137.0bn          £136.8bn        £133.8bn 

Corporate

     £67.9bn          £65.1bn        £62.5bn 

Wealth

     £13.5bn          £15.1bn        £15.9bn 

Total loans and advances to customers at amortised cost

     £218.4bn          £217.0bn        £212.2bn 

Analysis of customer deposits

                      

Personal

     £151.3bn          £145.8bn        £140.5bn 

Corporate

     £124.4bn          £122.2bn        £118.5bn 

Wealth

     £29.7bn          £31.2bn        £36.9bn 

Total customer deposits

     £305.4bn          £299.2bn        £295.9bn 

 

 

Notes

a Average LTV of mortgage lending and new mortgage lending calculated on the balance weighted basis.
b Includes assets managed or administered by Barclays on behalf of clients including Assets Under Management (AUM), custody assets, assets under administration, and Wealth client deposits and client lending.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  229


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

 

 

Barclaycard

    

 

£4,927m total income

£1,634m profit before tax

 

 

2015 compared to 2014

Profit before tax increased 22% to £1,634m. Strong growth was delivered through the diversified consumer and merchant business model with asset growth across all geographies. The cost to income ratio improved to 42% (2014: 43%) whilst investment in business growth continued. The business focus on risk management was reflected in stable 30 day delinquency rates and improved loan loss rates.

Total income increased 13% to £4,927m driven primarily by business growth in US cards and the appreciation of the average USD rate against GBP.

Net interest income increased 16% to £3,520m driven by business growth. Net interest margin also improved to 9.13% (2014: 8.75%) reflecting growth in interest earning lending.

Net fee, commission and other income increased 7% to £1,407m due to growth in payment volumes, partially offset by the impact of rate capping from European Interchange Fee Regulation.

Credit impairment charges increased 6% to £1,251m primarily reflecting asset growth and updates to impairment model methodologies, partially offset by improved performance in UK Cards. Delinquency rates remained broadly stable and the loan loss rate reduced 19bps to 289bps.

Total operating expenses increased 11% to £2,075m due to continued investment in business growth, the appreciation of the average USD rate against GBP and the impact of one-off items, including a write-off of intangible assets of £55m relating to the withdrawal of the Bespoke product.

Loans and advances to customers increased 9% to £39.8bn reflecting growth across all geographies.

Total assets increased 15% to £47.4bn primarily due to the increase in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased 40% to £10.2bn driven by the deposits funding strategy in the US.

RWAs increased 4% to £41.3bn primarily driven by the growth in the US cards business.

2014 compared to 2013

Profit before tax increased 13% to £1,339m. Strong growth in 2014 was delivered through a diversified consumer and merchant business model, with customer numbers increasing to 29m (2013: 26m) and asset growth across all geographies generating a 6% increase in income. Growth has been managed on a well-controlled cost base, with the business focusing on scale through insourcing of services, consolidation of sites and digitalisation, resulting in an improvement in the cost to income ratio to 43% (2013: 45%). The business focus on risk management is reflected in stable 30 day delinquency rates and falling loan loss rates. The diversified and scaled business model has allowed the business to deliver a strong return on average equity of 16.0% (2013: 15.5%).

Total income increased 6% to £4,356m reflecting growth in the UK consumer and merchant, Germany and US businesses, partially offset by depreciation of average USD against GBP.

Net interest income increased 8% to £3,044m driven by volume growth. Net interest margin decreased to 8.75% (2013: 8.99%) due to a change in product mix and the impact of promotional offers, particularly in the US, partially offset by lower funding costs.

Net fee, commission and other income increased 3% to £1,312m due to growth in payment volumes.

Credit impairment charges increased 8% to £1,183m due to asset growth and enhanced coverage for forbearance. Delinquency rates remained broadly stable and the loan loss rate reduced 24bps to 308bps.

Total operating expenses increased 1% to £1,874m driven by higher costs to achieve of £118m (2013: £49m), partially offset by depreciation of average USD against GBP, VAT refunds, and savings from strategic cost programmes, including insourcing of services, consolidation of sites and digitalisation.

Loans and advances to customers increased 16% to £36.6bn reflecting growth across all geographies, including the impact of promotional offers and the acquisition of portfolios in the US.

Total assets increased 20% to £41.3bn due to the increase in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased 43% to £7.3bn driven by the deposits funding strategy in the US.

RWAs increased 12% to £39.9bn primarily driven by the growth in loans and advances to customers.

 

 

230  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

          

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

    

 

2014 

£m 

  

  

  

2013 

£m 

   
  Income statement information           
  Net interest income      3,520          3,044        2,829   
    Net fee, commission and other income      1,407          1,312        1,274     
  Total income      4,927          4,356        4,103   
    Credit impairment charges and other provisions      (1,251)         (1,183)       (1,096)    
    Net operating income      3,676          3,173        3,007     
  Operating expenses      (1,927)         (1,727)       (1,752)  
  UK bank levy      (42)         (29)       (22)  
  Litigation and conduct      –          –        (34)  
    Costs to achieve      (106)         (118)       (49)    
  Total operating expenses      (2,075)         (1,874)       (1,857)  
    Other net income      33          40        33     
  Profit before tax      1,634          1,339        1,183   
  Attributable profit      1,106          938        822   
    Balance sheet information                           
  Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost      £39.8bn          £36.6bn        £31.5bn   
  Total assets      £47.4bn          £41.3bn        £34.4bn   
  Customer deposits      £10.2bn          £7.3bn        £5.1bn   
    Risk weighted assets      £41.3bn          £39.9bn        £35.7bn     
    Key facts                           
  30 days arrears rates – UK cards      2.3%          2.5%        2.4%   
  30 days arrears rates – US cards      2.2%          2.1%        2.1%   
  Total number of Barclaycard consumer customers      28.2m          29.1m        26.3m   
  Total number of Barclaycard business clients      341,000          340,000        350,000   
  Value of payments processed      £293bn          £257bn        £236bn   
    Number of employees (full time equivalent)      13,100          12,200        11,000     
    Performance measures                           
  Return on average tangible equity      22.3%          19.9%        19.9%   
  Average allocated tangible equity      £5.0bn          £4.7bn        £4.1bn   
  Return on average equity      17.7%          16.0%        15.5%   
  Average allocated equity      £6.3bn          £5.9bn        £5.3bn   
  Cost:income ratio      42%          43%        45%   
  Loan loss rate (bps)      289          308        332   
    Net interest margin      9.13%          8.75%        8.99%     

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  231


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

 

 

Africa Banking

    

 

£3,574m total income net

of insurance claims

£979m profit before tax

 

 

2015 compared to 2014

Profit before tax decreased 1% to £979m and total income net of insurance claims decreased 2% to £3,574m. The ZAR depreciated against GBP by 10% based on average rates and by 28% based on the closing exchange rate in 2015. The deterioration was a significant contributor to the movement in the reported results of Africa Banking and therefore the discussion of business performance below is based on results on a constant currency basis.

Results on a constant currency basis

Profit before tax increased 11% to £979m reflecting an increase of 18% in operations outside South Africa and an increase of 9% in South Africa despite the challenging macroeconomic environment. Good growth was delivered in the focus areas of Retail and Business Banking (RBB) and corporate banking in South Africa, and Wealth, Investment Management and Insurance (WIMI), whilst performance in the corporate business outside South Africa was impacted by higher impairment.

Total income net of insurance claims increased 7% to £3,574m.

Net interest income increased 8% to £2,066m driven by higher average customer advances in Corporate and Investment Banking (CIB) and strong growth in customer deposits in RBB. Net interest margin increased 11bps to 6.06% primarily due to improved asset margins in retail in South Africa.

Net fee, commission and other income increased 5% to £1,668m reflecting increased transactional income in RBB, partially offset by lower investment banking income in South Africa.

Credit impairment charges increased 11% to £352m driven by an increase in single name exposures and additional coverage on performing loans. The loan loss rate increased 16bps to 109bps.

Total operating expenses increased 5% to £2,250m reflecting inflationary impacts, partially offset by savings from strategic cost programmes including the restructure of the branch network, technology improvements and property rationalisation.

Loans and advances to customers increased 8% to £29.9bn driven by strong CIB growth.

Total assets increased 14% to £49.9bn primarily due to the increase in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased 11% to £30.6bn reflecting strong growth in the RBB business.

RWAs increased 8% to £33.9bn primarily due to an increase in corporate lending.

2014 compared to 2013

On a reported basis, total income net of insurance claims decreased 9% to £3,664m and profit before tax decreased 6% to £984m. Based on average rates, the ZAR depreciated against GBP by 18% in 2014. The deterioration was a significant contributor to the movement in the reported results of Africa Banking. The discussion of business performance below is based on results on a constant currency basis unless otherwise stated.

Results on a constant currency basis

Profit before tax increased 13% to £984m, reflecting good growth in Corporate and Investment Banking (CIB) and Retail and Business Banking (RBB). CIB experienced strong income growth, driven by the corporate banking business outside South Africa and improved investment banking trading performance across Africa. Continued progress was made on the RBB South Africa turnaround strategy, with increased net fee and commission income growth in the second half of the year, and Wealth, Investment Management and Insurance (WIMI) delivered strong growth outside South Africa due to expansion initiatives.

Total income net of insurance claims increased 7% to £3,664m.

Net interest income increased 9% to £2,093m, primarily driven by higher average loans and advances to customers in CIB and growth in customer deposits in RBB in South Africa. Net interest margin on a reported basis increased 14bps to 5.95% following the rise in the South African benchmark interest rate and the favourable impact of higher deposit margins, partially offset by lower rates outside South Africa.

Net fee, commission and other income increased 4% to £1,741m mainly reflecting increased RBB transactions in South Africa.

Credit impairment charges decreased 14% to £349m and on a reported basis the loan loss rate improved 35bps to 93bps, driven by reduced impairments in the South Africa mortgages portfolio and business banking, partially offset by increased impairments in the card portfolio.

Total operating expenses increased 8% to £2,342m largely reflecting inflationary increases, resulting in higher staff costs and increased investment spend on key initiatives, including higher costs to achieve of £51m (2013: £23m), partially offset by savings from strategic cost programmes.

Loans and advances to customers increased 5% to £35.2bn primarily driven by strong corporate banking growth across Africa in CIB and limited growth in RBB, mainly due to a modest reduction in the South Africa mortgages portfolio.

Total assets increased 5% to £55.5bn due to the increase in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased 5% to £35.0bn reflecting strong growth in the South African RBB business.

RWAs increased 1% to £38.5bn on a reported basis, primarily driven by growth in loans and advances to customers, partially offset by the depreciation of ZAR against GBP.

 

 

232  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

                                          Constant currencya    
            

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

    

 

2014 

£m 

  

  

    

2013 

£m 

        

2015 

£m 

    

2014 

£m 

   
  Income statement information                           
  Net interest income        2,066          2,093          2,245         2,066       1,908   
    Net fee, commission and other income        1,668          1,741          1,979           1,668       1,583     
  Total income        3,734          3,834          4,224         3,734       3,491   
    Net claims and benefits incurred under insurance contracts        (160)         (170)         (185)          (160)      (155)    
  Total income net of insurance claims        3,574          3,664          4,039         3,574       3,336   
    Credit impairment charges and other provisions        (352)         (349)         (479)          (352)      (317)    
    Net operating income        3,222          3,315          3,560           3,222       3,019     
  Operating expenses        (2,169)         (2,244)         (2,451)        (2,169)      (2,051)  
  UK bank levy        (52)         (45)         (42)        (52)      (45)  
  Litigation and conduct        –          (2)         –         –       (2)  
    Costs to achieve        (29)         (51)         (26)          (29)      (46)    
  Total operating expenses        (2,250)         (2,342)         (2,519)        (2,250)      (2,144)  
    Other net income                11                        10     
  Profit before tax        979          984          1,049         979       885   
  Attributable profit        332          360          356         332       320   
    Balance sheet information                                                 
  Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost        £29.9bn          £35.2bn          £34.9bn         £29.9bn       £27.6bn   
  Total assets        £49.9bn          £55.5bn          £54.9bn         £49.9bn       £43.8bn   
  Customer deposits        £30.6bn          £35.0bn          £34.6bn         £30.6bn       £27.6bn   
    Risk weighted assets        £33.9bn          £38.5bn          £38.0bn           £33.9bn       £31.3bn     
    Key facts                                                 
  Average LTV of mortgage portfoliob        58.4%          59.9%          62.3%               
  Average LTV of new mortgage lendingb        74.7%          74.8%          74.9%               
    Number of employees (full time equivalent)        44,400          45,000          45,900                       
    Performance measures                                                 
  Return on average tangible equity        11.7%          12.9%          11.3%               
  Average allocated tangible equity        £2.8bn          £2.8bn          £3.2bn               
  Return on average equity        8.7%          9.3%          8.1%               
  Average allocated equity        £3.8bn          £3.9bn          £4.4bn               
  Cost:income ratio        63%          64%          62%               
  Loan loss rate (bps)        109          93          128               
    Net interest margin        6.06%          5.95%          5.81%                       

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Notes

a Constant currency results are calculated by converting ZAR results into GBP using the average 2015 exchange rate for the income statement and the closing 2015 exchange rate for the balance sheet to eliminate the impact of movement in exchange rates between the two periods.
b Average LTV of mortgage portfolio and new mortgage lending calculated on the balance weighted basis.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  233


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

 

 

 

Investment Bank

 

 

 

£7,572m total income

£1,611m profit before tax

 

 

2015 compared to 2014

Profit before tax increased 17% to £1,611m. Income remained flat despite reductions in RWAs. Focusing on its home markets of the UK and US, the business continued to build on existing strengths in the face of challenging market conditions. Costs decreased as a result of improved cost efficiency and a reduction in costs to achieve.

Total income was broadly flat at £7,572m (2014: £7,588m), including the appreciation of the average USD rate against GBP.

Banking income was flat at £2,529m (2014: £2,528m). Investment Banking fee income reduced 1% to £2,093m driven by lower equity underwriting fees, partially offset by higher financial advisory and debt underwriting fees. Lending income increased to £436m (2014: £417m) due to lower losses on fair value hedges.

Markets income was broadly flat at £5,030m (2014: £5,040m). Credit income decreased 5% to £995m driven by lower income in securitised products as a result of the accelerated strategic repositioning in this asset class and lower income from distressed credit. This was partially offset by higher income as a result of client driven credit flow trading. Equities income decreased 2% to £2,001m driven by lower client activity in EMEA in equity derivatives, partially offset by higher performance in cash equities. Macro income increased 4% to £2,034m due to higher income in rates and currency products reflecting increased market volatility and client activity.

Credit impairment charges of £55m (2014: release of £14m) arose from a number of single name exposures.

Total operating expenses decreased 5% to £5,906m reflecting a 5% reduction in compensation costs to £3,423m and lower costs to achieve. Further cost savings were achieved from strategic cost programmes, including business restructuring, operational streamlining and real estate rationalisation, partially offset by the appreciation of the average USD rate against GBP.

Derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities decreased 25% to £114.3bn and 24% to £122.2bn respectively, due to net trade reduction and increases in major interest rate forward curves.

Trading portfolio assets decreased 31% to £65.1bn primarily driven by balance sheet deleveraging, resulting in lower securities positions.

Total assets decreased 18% to £375.9bn due to a decrease in derivative financial instrument assets, trading portfolio assets, and settlement and cash collateral balances within loans and advances to banks and customers.

RWAs decreased 12% to £108.3bn mainly due to a reduction in securities and derivatives, and improved RWA efficiency.

2014 compared to 2013

Profit before tax decreased 32% to £1,377m. The Investment Bank continues to make progress on its origination-led strategy, building on leading positions in its home markets of the UK and US, while driving cost savings and RWA efficiencies. The business is focused on a simpler product set in Markets, which will enable it to build on existing strengths and adapt to regulatory developments. The business continued to execute this strategy despite difficult market-making conditions and continued low levels of activity. This has particularly impacted credit and interest rate products, resulting in an income decline across the Markets businesses. This decline was partially offset by improved banking performance and significant cost reductions as a result of savings from strategic cost programmes.

Total income decreased 12% to £7,588m, including the impact of depreciation of average USD against GBP. Banking income increased 2% to £2,528m. Investment Banking fee income decreased 2% to £2,111m driven by lower debt underwriting fees, partially offset by higher financial advisory and equity underwriting fees. Lending income increased to £417m (2013: £325m) due to lower fair value losses on hedges and higher net interest and fee income.

Markets income decreased 18% to £5,040m. Credit decreased 17% to £1,044m driven by reduced volatility and client activity, with lower income in distressed credit, US high yield and US high grade products. Equities decreased 11% to £2,046m due to declines in cash equities and equity derivatives, reflecting lower client volumes, partially offset by higher income in equity financing. Macro decreased 24% to £1,950m reflecting subdued client activity in rates and lower volatility in currency markets in the first half of the year.

Net credit impairment release of £14m (2013: £22m) arose from a number of single name exposures.

Total operating expenses decreased 6% to £6,225m reflecting a 9% reduction in compensation costs to £3,620m, savings from strategic cost programmes, including business restructuring, continued rationalisation of the technology platform and real estate infrastructure, and depreciation of average USD against GBP. This was partially offset by increased costs to achieve of £374m (2013: £190m) and litigation and conduct charges.

Loans and advances to customers and banks increased 2% to £106.3bn driven by an increase in cash collateral and lending, partially offset by a reduction in settlement balances due to reduced activity.

Derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities increased 40% to £152.6bn and 38% to £160.6bn respectively, driven by decreases in predominantly GBP, USD and EUR forward interest rates, and strengthening of USD against major currencies.

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending decreased 18% to £64.3bn due to decreased match book trading and funding requirements.

Total assets increased 4% to £455.7bn due to an increase in derivative financial instrument assets, partially offset by a decrease in reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending, and financial assets at fair value.

RWAs decreased 2% to £122.4bn primarily driven by risk reductions in the trading book, partially offset by the implementation of a revised credit risk model for assessing counterparty probability of default.

 

 

234  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

 

      

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

    

 

2014 

£m 

  

  

    

 

2013 

£m 

  

  

  Income statement information         
  Net interest income      588          647          393    
  Net trading income      3,859          3,735          4,969    
  Net fee, commission and other income      3,125          3,206          3,234    
  Total income      7,572          7,588          8,596    
  Credit impairment (charges)/releases and other provisions      (55)         14          22    
  Net operating income      7,517          7,602          8,618    
  Operating expenses      (5,362)         (5,504)         (6,141)   
  UK bank levy      (203)         (218)         (236)   
  Litigation and conduct      (107)         (129)         (31)   
  Costs to achieve      (234)         (374)         (190)   
  Total operating expenses      (5,906)         (6,225)         (6,598)   
  Profit before tax      1,611          1,377          2,020    
  Attributable profit      804          397          1,308    
  Balance sheet information                           
  Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised costa      £92.2bn          £106.3bn          £104.5bn    
  Trading portfolio assets      £65.1bn          £94.8bn          £96.6bn    
  Derivative financial instrument assets      £114.3bn          £152.6bn          £108.7bn    
  Derivative financial instrument liabilities      £122.2bn          £160.6bn          £116.6bn    
  Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendingb      £25.5bn          £64.3bn          £78.2bn    
  Financial assets designated at fair valueb      £48.1bn          £8.9bn          £16.5bn    
  Total assets      £375.9bn          £455.7bn          £438.0bn    
  Risk weighted assets      £108.3bn          £122.4bn          £124.4bn    
       
  Key facts         
  Number of employees (full time equivalent)      19,800          20,500          22,600    
  Performance measures                           
  Return on average tangible equity      6.0%         2.8%         8.5%   
  Average allocated tangible equity      £13.9bn          £14.6bn          £15.3bn    
  Return on average equity      5.6%         2.7%         8.2%   
  Average allocated equity      £14.8bn          £15.4bn          £15.9bn    
  Cost:income ratio      78%         82%         77%   
       
  Analysis of total income                           
  Investment banking fees      2,093          2,111          2,160    
  Lending      436          417          325    
  Banking      2,529          2,528          2,485    
  Credit      995          1,044          1,257    
  Equities      2,001          2,046          2,297    
  Macro      2,034          1,950          2,580    
  Markets      5,030          5,040          6,134    
  Banking & Markets      7,559          7,568          8,619    
  Other      13          20          (23)   
  Total income      7,572          7,588          8,596    

 

 

 

 

Notes

a As at 31 December 2015 loans and advances included £74.8bn (2014: £86.4bn) of loans and advances to customers (including settlement balances of £18.6bn (2014: £25.8bn) and cash collateral of £24.8bn (2014: £32.2bn)) and loans and advances to banks of £17.4bn (2014: £19.9bn) (including settlement balances of £1.6bn (2014: £2.7bn) and cash collateral of £5.7bn (2014: £6.9bn)).
b During 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance. Included within financial assets designated at fair value are reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair value of £42.5bn (2014: £3.4bn).

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  235


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

 

 

Head Office

 

    

2015 compared to 2014

The loss before tax of £402m (2014: profit of £97m) was primarily due to the net expense from Treasury operations and costs relating to the implementation of the structural reform programme.

Net operating income decreased to an expense of £107m (2014: income of £242m) primarily reflecting the net expense from Treasury operations and the non-recurrence of gains in 2014, including net gains from foreign exchange recycling arising from the restructure of Group subsidiaries.

Total operating expenses increased £158m to £300m primarily due to costs relating to the implementation of the structural reform programme and an increase in costs to achieve, partially offset by reduced litigation and conduct charges.

Total assets increased £7.3bn to £56.4bn due to an increase in the element of the liquidity buffer held centrally.

2014 compared to 2013

Profit before tax of £97m improved from a loss of £15m in 2013.

Net operating income increased to £242m (2013: £145m) predominantly due to net gains of £88m from foreign exchange recycling arising from the restructure of Group subsidiaries.

Total operating expenses decreased £22m to £142m mainly due to a reduction in UK bank levy to £9m (2013: £29m), the non-recurrence of costs associated with the Salz Review and the establishment of the strategic cost programme in the prior year, partially offset by increased litigation and conduct charges.

Total assets increased £22.5bn to £49.1bn reflecting an increase in the Group liquidity pool assets.

RWAs decreased £10.6bn to £5.6bn, including receipt of certain US Lehman acquisition assets and a £6.9bn revision to 2013 RWAs following full implementation of CRD IV reporting, as disclosed in the 30 June 2014 Results Announcement.

Negative average allocated equity reduced to £0.4bn (2013: £7.0bn) as the Group moved towards the allocation rate of 10.5% fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio during the year, resulting in a reduction in excess equity allocated to businesses.

 

 

 

 

 

      

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

    

 

2013

£m

  

  

 Income statement information        
 Total income      (107     242         142   
 Credit impairment releases and other provisions                     3   
 Net operating (expense)/income      (107     242         145   
 Operating expenses      (246     (57      (103
 UK bank levy      (8     (9      (29
 Litigation and conduct      (14     (66      (10
 Cost to achieve      (32     (10      (22
 Total operating expenses      (300     (142      (164
 Other net income/(expense)      5        (3      4   
 (Loss)/profit before tax      (402     97         (15
 Attributable (loss)/profit      (202     112         (89
 Balance sheet information                          
 Total assets      £56.4bn        £49.1bn         £26.6bn   
 Risk weighted assets      £7.7bn        £5.6bn         £16.2bn   
 Key facts                          
 Number of employees (full time equivalent)      800        100         100   

 

236  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

 

Barclays Non-Core

 

(£164m) total income net of

insurance claims

£1,459m loss before tax

 

 

2015 compared to 2014

Loss before tax increased 24% to £1,459m driven by continued progress in the exit of Businesses, Securities and loans, and Derivative assets. RWAs reduced £29bn to £47bn including a £10bn reduction in Derivatives, £9bn reduction in Securities and loans, and Business reductions from the completion of the sales of the Spanish and UK Secured Lending businesses. The announced sales of the Portuguese and Italian retail businesses, which are due to be completed in H116, are expected to result in a further £2.5bn reduction in RWAs.

Total income net of insurance claims reduced to an expense of £164m (2014: income of £1,050m). Businesses income reduced 44% to £613m due to the impact of the sale of the Spanish business and the sale and rundown of legacy portfolio assets. Securities and loans income reduced to an expense of £481m (2014: income of £117m) primarily driven by fair value losses and funding costs on the ESHLA portfolio, the active rundown of securities, exit of historical investment bank businesses and the non-recurring gain on the sale of the UAE retail banking portfolio in 2014. Fair value losses on the ESHLA portfolio were £359m (2014: £156m), of which £156m was in Q415, as gilt swap spreads widened. Derivatives income reduced 76% to an expense of £296m reflecting the active rundown of the portfolios and funding costs.

Credit impairment charges improved 54% to £78m due to higher recoveries in Europe and the sale of the Spanish business.

Total operating expenses improved 40% to £1,199m reflecting savings from the sales of the Spanish, UAE retail, commodities, and several principal investment businesses, as well as a reduction in costs to achieve, and conduct and litigation charges.

Loans and advances to banks and customers reduced 28% to £45.9bn due to the reclassification of £5.5bn of loans relating to the announced sales of the Portuguese and Italian businesses to assets held for sale, and the rundown and exit of historical investment bank assets.

Derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities decreased 26% to £210.3bn and 28% to £198.7bn respectively, largely as a result of trade reduction.

Total assets decreased 36% to £303.1bn due to reduced reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending, and lower derivative financial instrument assets.

Leverage exposure reduced £156.2bn to £121.3bn primarily in reverse repurchase agreements, potential future exposure on derivatives and trading portfolio assets.

RWAs decreased £28.7bn to £46.6bn and period end equity decreased £3.8bn to £7.2bn primarily driven by the sale of the Spanish business, the active rundown of legacy structured and credit products, and derivative trade unwinds.

2014 compared to 2013

Loss before tax reduced 15% to £1,180m as Non-Core made good progress in exiting and running down certain businesses and securities during 2014. This drove a £34.6bn reduction in RWAs, making substantial progress towards the Non-Core target reductions as outlined in the Group Strategy Update on 8 May 2014.

Total income net of insurance claims reduced 54% to £1,050m. Businesses income reduced 27% to £1,101m due to the sale and rundown of legacy portfolio assets and the rationalisation of product offerings within the European retail business. Securities and loans income reduced 82% to £117m primarily driven by the active rundown of securities, fair value losses on wholesale loan portfolios and the non-recurrence of prior year favourable market movements on certain securitised products, partially offset by a £119m gain on the sale of the UAE retail banking portfolio. Derivatives income reduced £321m to an expense of £168m reflecting the funding costs of the traded legacy derivatives portfolio and the non-recurrence of fair value gains in the prior year.

Credit impairment charges improved 81% to £168m due to the non-recurrence of impairments on single name exposures, impairment releases on the wholesale portfolio as a result of confirmation on Spanish government subsidies in the renewable energy sector and improved performance in Europe, primarily due to improved recoveries and delinquencies in the mortgages portfolio.

Total operating expenses improved 25% to £2,011m reflecting savings from strategic cost programmes, including lower headcount and the results of the previously announced European retail restructuring. In addition, costs to achieve reduced 61% to £212m.

Loans and advances to banks and customers reduced 22% to £63.9bn due to a £12.9bn reclassification of loans relating to the Spanish business, which was held for sale, and a reduction in Europe retail driven by a run-off of assets.

Trading portfolio assets reduced 48% to £15.9bn due to the sale and rundown of legacy portfolio assets.

Derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities increased 19% to £285.4bn and 21% to £277.1bn respectively, driven by decreases in major forward interest rates.

Total assets decreased 8% to £471.5bn with reduced reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending, and trading portfolio assets, due to the rundown of legacy portfolio assets, offset by an increase in derivative financial instrument assets. BCBS 270 leverage exposure reduced to £277bn.

RWAs decreased £34.6bn to £75.3bn and average allocated equity decreased £3.7bn to £13.4bn, reflecting the disposal of businesses, rundown and exit of securities and loans, and derivative risk reductions.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  237


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

 

 

Barclays Non-Core – continued

 

      

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013a

£m

  

  

 Income statement information       
 Net interest income      249        214        307   
 Net trading income      (805     120        1,327   
 Net fee, commission and other income      765        1,026        983   
 Total income      209        1,360        2,617   
 Net claims and benefits incurred under insurance contracts      (373     (310     (324
 Total income net of insurance claims      (164     1,050        2,293   
 Credit impairment charges and other provisions      (78     (168     (900
 Net operating (expense)/income      (242     882        1,393   
 Operating expenses      (873     (1,510     (1,929
 UK bank levy      (78     (91     (109
 Litigation and conduct      (148     (198     (96
 Costs to achieve      (100     (212     (538
 Total operating expenses      (1,199     (2,011     (2,672
 Other net expenses      (18     (51     (110
 Loss before tax      (1,459     (1,180     (1,389
 Attributable loss      (1,523     (1,085     (1,783
 Balance sheet information                         
 Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised costb      £45.9bn        £63.9bn        £81.9bn   
 Derivative financial instrument assets      £210.3bn        £285.4bn        £239.3bn   
 Derivative financial instrument liabilities      £198.7bn        £277.1bn        £228.3bn   
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendingc      £2.4bn        £49.3bn        £104.7bn   
 Financial assets designated at fair valuec      £20.1bn        £22.2bn        £19.5bn   
 Total assets      £303.1bn        £471.5bn        £511.2bn   
 Customer deposits      £14.9bn        £21.6bn        £29.3bn   
 Risk weighted assets      £46.6bn        £75.3bn        £109.9bn   
 Leverage exposure      £121.3bn        £277.5bn        n/a   
 Key facts                         
 Number of employees (full time equivalent)      5,600        8,900        9,900   
 Performance measures                         
 Return on average tangible equityd      (5.1%     (5.4%     (9.3%
 Average allocated tangible equity      £8.9bn        £13.2bn        £16.8bn   
 Return on average equityd      (4.1%     (4.1%     (7.0%
 Average allocated equity      £9.0bn        £13.4bn        £17.1bn   
 Period end allocated equity      £7.2bn        £11.0bn        £15.1bn   
 Analysis of total income net of insurance claims      £m        £m        £m   
 Businesses      613        1,101        1,498   
 Securities and loans      (481     117        642   
 Derivatives      (296     (168     153   
 Total income net of insurance claims      (164     1,050        2,293   

 

 

 

Notes

a 2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigations including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.
b As at 31 December 2015 loans and advances included £35.2bn (2014: £51.6bn) of loans and advances to customers (including settlement balances of £0.2bn (2014: £1.6bn) and cash collateral of £19.0bn (2014: £22.1bn)) and loans and advances to banks of £10.6bn (2014: £12.3bn) (including settlement balances of nil (2014: £0.3bn) and cash collateral of £10.1bn (2014: £11.3bn)).
c During 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance. Included within financial assets designated at fair value are reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair value of £1.4bn (2014: £1.0bn).
d Return on average equity and average tangible equity for Barclays Non-Core represents its impact on the Group. This does not represent the return on average tangible equity of the Non-Core business.

 

238  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

 

Returns and equity

by business

Returns on average equity and average tangible equity are calculated as profit for the year attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent (adjusted for the tax credit recorded in reserves in respect of coupons on other equity instruments) divided by average allocated equity or average allocated tangible equity for the period as appropriate, excluding non-controlling and other equity interests for businesses, apart from Africa Banking (see below). Allocated equity has been calculated as 10.5% of CRD IV fully loaded risk weighted assets for each business, adjusted for CRD IV fully loaded capital deductions, including goodwill

and intangible assets, reflecting the assumptions the Group uses for capital planning purposes. The excess of allocated Group equity, caused by the fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio being below 10.5% on average in the period, is allocated as negative equity to Head Office. Allocated tangible equity is calculated using the same method, but excludes goodwill and intangible assets.

For Africa Banking, the equity used for return on average equity is Barclays’ share of the statutory equity of the BAGL entity (together with that of the Barclays Egypt and Zimbabwe businesses which remain outside the BAGL corporate entity), as well as Barclays’ goodwill on acquisition of these businesses. The tangible equity for return on tangible equity uses the same basis, but excludes both the Barclays’ goodwill on acquisition and the goodwill and intangibles held within the BAGL statutory equity.

 

 

 

 Return on average tangible equity                           
      

 

2015

%

  

  

    

 

2014

%

  

  

    

 

2013

%

c 

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking      16.2         15.8         12.7   
 Barclaycard      22.3         19.9         19.9   
 Africa Banking      11.7         12.9         11.3   
 Investment Bank      6.0         2.8         8.5   
 Barclays Core operating businesses      12.7         10.8         11.6   
 Head Office impacta      (1.8      0.5         2.8   
 Barclays Core      10.9         11.3         14.4   
 Barclays Non-Core impacta      (5.1      (5.4      (9.3
 Barclays Group adjusted total      5.8         5.9         5.1   
                            
 Return on average equity                           
      

 

2015

%

  

  

    

 

2014

%

  

  

    

 

2013

%

c 

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking      12.1         11.9         9.7   
 Barclaycard      17.7         16.0         15.5   
 Africa Banking      8.7         9.3         8.1   
 Investment Bank      5.6         2.7         8.2   
Barclays Core operating businesses      10.4         8.9         9.7   
 Head Office impacta      (1.4      0.3         1.6   
 Barclays Core      9.0         9.2         11.3   
 Barclays Non-Core impacta      (4.1      (4.1      (7.0
 Barclays Group adjusted total      4.9         5.1         4.3   
                            
 Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parentb                           
      

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

    

 

2013

£m

c 

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking      2,203         2,075         1,681   
 Barclaycard      1,114         943         822   
 Africa Banking      332         360         356   
 Investment Bank      829         415         1,308   
 Head Office      (202      112         (89
 Barclays Core      4,276         3,905         4,078   
 Barclays Non-Core      (1,510      (1,072      (1,783
 Barclays Group adjusted total      2,766         2,833         2,295   

 

 

Notes

a Return on average equity and average tangible equity for Head Office and Barclays Non-Core represents their impact on Barclays Core and the Group respectively. This does not represent the return on average equity and average tangible equity of Head Office or the Non-Core business.
b Profit for the period attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent includes the tax credit recorded in reserves in respect of interest payments on other equity instruments.
c 2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  239


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

 

 

Returns and equity by business – continued

 

 Average allocated tangible equity                           
      
 
        2015
£bn
  
  
    
 
        2014
£bn
  
  
    
 
        2013
£bn
  
  
 Personal and Corporate Banking      13.6         13.1         13.2   
 Barclaycard      5.0         4.7         4.1   
 Africa Banking      2.8         2.8         3.2   
 Investment Bank      13.9         14.6         15.3   
 Head Officea      3.9         (0.6      (7.4
 Barclays Core      39.2         34.6         28.4   
 Barclays Non-Core      8.9         13.2         16.8   
 Barclays Group adjusted total      48.1         47.8         45.2   
                            
 Average allocated equity                           
      

 

2015

£bn

  

  

    

 

2014

£bn

  

  

    

 

2013

£bn

  

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking      18.2         17.5         17.3   
 Barclaycard      6.3         5.9         5.3   
 Africa Banking      3.8         3.9         4.4   
 Investment Bank      14.8         15.4         15.9   
 Head Officea      4.2         (0.4      (7.0
 Barclays Core      47.3         42.3         35.9   
 Barclays Non-Core      9.0         13.4         17.1   
 Barclays Group adjusted total      56.3         55.7         53.0   
                            
 Period end allocated equity                           
      

 

2015

£bn

  

  

    

 

2014

£bn

  

  

    

 

2013

£bn

  

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking      18.3         17.9         17.3   
 Barclaycard      6.3         6.2         5.4   
 Africa Banking      3.4         4.0         3.8   
 Investment Bank      13.0         14.7         14.6   
 Head Officea      6.6         2.1         (2.1
 Barclays Core      47.6         44.9         39.0   
 Barclays Non-Core      7.2         11.0         15.1   
 Barclays Group adjusted total      54.8         55.9         54.1   

 

 

Note

 

a Based on risk weighted assets and capital deductions in Head Office plus the residual balance of average ordinary shareholders’ equity and tangible ordinary shareholders’ equity.

 

240  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

 Margins analysis

  

Total PCB, Barclaycard and Africa Banking net interest income increased 5% to £12.0bn due to an increase in average customer assets to £287.7bn (2014: £280.0bn) with growth in PCB and Barclaycard, partially offset by reductions in Africa Banking as the ZAR depreciated against GBP. Net interest margin increased 10bps to 4.18% primarily due to growth in interest earning lending within Barclaycard.

 

Group net interest income increased to £12.6bn (2014: £12.1bn) including structural hedge contributions of £1.5bn (2014: £1.6bn). Equity structural hedge income decreased driven by the maintenance of the hedge in a continuing low rate environment.

Net interest margin by business reflects movements in the Group’s internal funding rates which are based on the cost to the Group of alternative funding in wholesale markets. The internal funding rate prices intra-group funding and liquidity to give appropriate credit to businesses with net surplus liquidity and to charge those businesses in need of alternative funding at a rate that is driven by prevailing market rates and includes a term premium.

 

 

 

       Year ended 31 December 2015         Year ended 31 December 2014   
      
 

 

Net interest 
income 

£m 

  
  

  

    
 
 
 
Average
customer
assets
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 

 

Net interest
margin

%

  
  

  

    
 

 

Net interest 
income 

£m 

  
  

  

    
 
 
 
Average
customer
assets
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 

 

Net interest
margin

%

  
  

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking      6,438          214,989         2.99         6,298          210,026         3.00   
 Barclaycard      3,520          38,560         9.13         3,044          34,776         8.75   
 Africa Banking      2,066          34,116         6.06         2,093          35,153         5.95   
 Total Personal and Corporate Banking, Barclaycard
 and Africa Banking
     12,024          287,665         4.18         11,435          279,955         4.08   
 Investment Bank      588                647          
 Head Office      (303)                           (216)                     
 Barclays Core      12,309                11,866          
 Barclays Non-Core      249                            214                      
 Group net interest income      12,558                            12,080                      

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  241


 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

242  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Financial statements

Contents

 

 

Detailed analysis of our statutory accounts, independently audited and providing in-depth disclosure on the financial performance of the Group.

 

 

               Page           Note   
Consolidated financial statements                    
 

§

  Presentation of information      244           n/a   
 

§

  Independent Auditors’ Report      245           n/a   
 

§

  Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm’s report      252           n/a   
 

§

  Consolidated income statement      253           n/a   
 

§

  Consolidated statement of comprehensive income      254           n/a   
 

§

  Consolidated balance sheet      255           n/a   
 

§

  Consolidated statement of changes in equity      256           n/a   
 

§

  Consolidated cash flow statement      257           n/a   
 

§

  Parent Company accounts      258           n/a   
 

§

  Notes to the financial statements      260           n/a   
   

§

 

Significant accounting policies

 

     260           1   
Notes to the financial statements                    
Performance/return  

§

  Segmental reporting      263           2   
 

§

  Net interest income      263           3   
 

§

  Net fee and commission income      264           4   
 

§

  Net trading income      264           5   
 

§

  Net investment income      265           6   
 

§

  Credit impairment charges and other provisions      265           7   
 

§

  Operating expenses      267           8   
 

§

  Profit/(loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures      267           9   
 

§

  Tax      268           10   
 

§

  Earnings per share      271           11   
   

§

 

Dividends on ordinary shares

 

     271           12   
Assets and liabilities held at fair value  

§

  Trading portfolio      272           13   
 

§

  Financial assets designated at fair value      272           14   
 

§

  Derivative financial instruments      273           15   
 

§

  Available for sale financial assets      276           16   
 

§

  Financial liabilities designated at fair value      276           17   
 

§

  Fair value of assets and liabilities      277           18   
   

§

 

Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities

 

     293           19   
Financial instruments held  

§

  Loans and advances to banks and customers      295           20   
at amortised cost  

§

  Finance leases      295           21   
 

§

  Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar      296           22   
       

secured lending and borrowing

 

                   
Non-current assets and other investments  

§

  Property, plant and equipment      297           23   
 

§

  Goodwill and intangible assets      298           24   
   

§

 

Operating leases

 

     300           25   
Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings  

§

  Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities      301           26   
 

§

  Provisions      301           27   
 

§

  Contingent liabilities and commitments      303           28   
   

§

 

Legal, competition and regulatory matters

 

     303           29   
Capital instruments, equity and reserves  

§

  Subordinated liabilities      314           30   
 

§

  Ordinary shares, share premium and other equity      318           31   
 

§

  Reserves      319           32   
   

§

 

Non-controlling interests

 

     319           33   
Employee benefits  

§

  Share based payments      321           34   
   

§

 

Pensions and post retirement benefits

 

     323           35   
Scope of consolidation  

§

  Principal subsidiaries      327           36   
 

§

  Structured entities      328           37   
 

§

  Investments in associates and joint ventures      333           38   
 

§

  Securitisations      333           39   
   

§

 

Assets pledged

 

     335           40   
Other disclosure matters  

§

  Related party transactions and Directors’ remuneration      336           41   
 

§

  Auditors’ remuneration      338           42   
 

§

  Financial risks, liquidity and capital management      339           43   
 

§

  Non-current assets held for sale and associated liabilities      339           44   
 

§

  Barclays PLC (the Parent Company)      340           45   
   

§

 

Related undertakings

 

     341           46   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  243


Presentation of information

 

 

Barclays’ approach to disclosures

The Group aims to continually enhance its disclosures and their usefulness to the readers of the financial statements in the light of developing market practice and areas of focus. Consequently Barclays’ disclosures go beyond the minimum standards required by accounting standards and other regulatory requirements.

Barclays continues to support the recommendations and guidance made by the Enhanced Disclosure Taskforce (EDTF). The EDTF was formed by the Financial Stability Board with a remit to broaden and deepen the risk disclosures of global banks in a number of areas, including liquidity and funding, credit risk and market risk. Barclays has fully adopted the recommendations across the Annual Report and Pillar 3 Report.

In line with the Financial Reporting Council’s guidance on ‘Clear and Concise’ reporting, for 2015, Barclays has focused reporting on material items and sought to reorganise information to aid users understanding.

It is Barclays’ view that best in class disclosures will continue to evolve in light of ongoing market and stakeholder engagement with the banking sector. Barclays is committed to engaging with a published Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure (the Code). The Code sets out five disclosure principles together with supporting guidance which states that UK banks will:

 

§   provide high quality, meaningful and decision-useful disclosures

 

§   review and enhance their financial instrument disclosures for key areas of interest

 

§   assess the applicability and relevance of good practice recommendations to their disclosures acknowledging the importance of such guidance

 

§   seek to enhance the comparability of financial statement disclosures across the UK banking sector and

 

§   clearly differentiate in their annual reports between information that is audited and information that is unaudited.

British Bankers’ Association (BBA) Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure

Barclays has adopted the BBA Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure and has prepared the 2015 Annual Report and Accounts in compliance with the Code.

Statutory accounts

The consolidated accounts of Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries are set out on pages 253 to 257 along with the accounts of Barclays PLC itself on pages 258 and 259. The accounting policies on pages 260 to 262 and the Notes commencing on page 263 apply equally to both sets of accounts unless otherwise stated.

The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis, in accordance with The Companies Act 2006 as applicable to companies using IFRS.

Capital Requirements Country by Country Reporting

HM Treasury has transposed the requirements set out under CRD IV and issued the Capital Requirements Country by Country Reporting Regulations 2013. The legislation requires Barclays PLC to publish additional information in respect of the year ended 31 December 2015. This information is available on the Barclays website: home.barclays/citizenship/reports-and-publications/country-snapshot.html

 

 

244  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Independent Auditors’ report

Independent Auditors’ report to the members of Barclays PLC

    

 

 

Report on the financial statements

Our opinion

In our opinion, Barclays PLC’s Group financial statements and Parent Company financial statements (the financial statements):

 

§   give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the Parent Company’s affairs as at 31 December 2015 and of the Group’s and the Parent Company’s profit and cash flows for the year then ended

 

§   have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the EU, and

 

§   have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

What we have audited

The financial statements, included within the Annual Report, comprise:

 

§   the Consolidated and Parent Company balance sheets as at 31 December 2015

 

§   the Consolidated and Parent Company income statements and the Consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year then ended

 

§   the Consolidated and Parent Company cash flow statement for the year then ended

 

§   the Consolidated and Parent Company statement of changes in equity for the year then ended, and

 

§   the notes to the financial statements, which include a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory information.

Certain required disclosures have been presented elsewhere in the Annual Report, rather than in the notes to the financial statements. These are cross-referenced from the financial statements and are identified as audited.

The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the financial statements is applicable law and IFRSs as adopted by the EU.

 

Our audit approach

Overview

 

Materiality

  

 

Overall Group materiality: £313 million represents 5% of adjusted profit before tax (per the adjusted profit reconciliation on page 226) excluding cost to achieve. The use of this measure of profit mitigates the effects of volatility. Adjusted profit is the measure disclosed in the Financial Review as is operating expenses excluding costs to achieve which is a key performance indicator that the Directors focus on.

 

 

Audit scope

  

 

We planned and scoped our audit for 2015 reflecting the Group’s move to a more legal entity focused reporting structure. As a result we defined the Barclays Bank PLC, Barclays Capital Inc., Barclays Africa Group Limited and Barclays Capital Securities Limited as significant components of the Group, subject to an audit of their complete financial information. Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Africa Group Ltd entities are themselves consolidations of individually distinct sub-components. Consequently we performed a combination of full scope audits and audits of specific financial statement line items (namely investments in joint ventures and associates) based on the financial significance of the sub-component to achieve the desired level of audit evidence.

 

 

Areas of focus

  

 

The areas of focus for our audit comprised to which we allocated the greatest amount of our resources and effort were:

  

 

§   impairment of loans and advances to customers

  

§   valuation of financial instruments held at fair value

  

§   provisions for conduct redress costs

  

§   litigation and regulatory claims

  

§   IT systems and controls over financial reporting and

    

§   provision for uncertain tax positions.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  245


Independent Auditors’ report

Independent Auditors’ report to the members of Barclays PLC

    

 

 

 

The scope of our audit and our areas of focus

We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland) (‘ISAs (UK & Ireland)’).

 

We designed our audit by determining materiality and assessing the risks of material misstatement in the financial statements. In particular, we looked at where the Directors made subjective judgements, for example in respect of significant accounting estimates that involved making assumptions and considering future events that are inherently uncertain. As in all of our audits we also addressed the risk of management override of internal controls, including evaluating whether there was evidence of bias by the Directors that represented a risk of material misstatement due to fraud.

 

    

The risks of material misstatement that had the greatest effect on our audit, including the allocation of our resources and effort, are identified as ‘areas of focus’ in the table below. We have also set out how we tailored our audit to address these specific areas in order to provide an opinion on the financial statements as a whole, and any comments we make on the results of our procedures should be read in this context. This is not a complete list of all risks identified by our audit. All of these areas of focus were discussed with the Board Audit Committee. Their report on those matters that they considered to be significant financial statement reporting issues is set out on pages 44 to 46.

 

We have gained an understanding, evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of the controls in each process below. The table sets out further work performed to address the areas of focus.

 

Area of focus          How our audit addressed the area of focus

 

Impairment of loans and advances to customers

 

 

We focused on this area because the Directors make complex and subjective judgements over both timing of recognition of impairment and the estimation of the size of any such impairment.

 

In wholesale loans and advances, the material portion of impairment is individually calculated. For retail loans and advances, the material portion of the impairment is calculated on a modelled basis for portfolios of loans and advances.

 

We focused our audit on the following areas of impairment specifically relating to:

    

 

We assessed and tested the design and operating effectiveness of the controls over impairment data and calculations. These controls included those over the identification of which loans and advances were impaired, the granting of forbearance, the data transfer from source systems to impairment models and model output to the general ledger, and the calculation of the impairment provisions. In addition, we tested IT controls for impairment systems. We determined that we could rely on these controls for the purposes of our audit.

 

We tested the entity and business unit level controls over the end to end model process including in relation to model build, model monitoring, the annual validation process and governance committee approvals. We determined that we could rely on these controls for the purposes of our audit.

 

In addition, we performed detailed testing on a sample of new and existing models used to calculate both unidentified and identified impairment. This testing varied by portfolio, but typically included testing of the coding used in impairment models, re-performance of the calculation, testing the extraction of data used in the models including the ‘bucketing’ into delinquency bandings, and testing and applying sensitivities to the underlying critical assumptions.

 

We tested a sample of post model adjustments, including considering the basis for the adjustment, the logic applied, the source data used, the key assumptions adopted and the sensitivity of the adjustment to these assumptions.

 

Where impairment was individually calculated, we tested controls over the timely identification of potentially impaired loans. We determined that we could rely on these controls for the purposes of our audit. We also tested a sample of loans and advances to ascertain whether the loss event (that is the point at which impairment is recognised) had been identified in a timely manner including, where relevant, how forbearance had been considered. Where impairment had been identified, we examined the forecasts of future cash flows prepared by management to support the calculation of the impairment, challenging the assumptions and comparing estimates to external evidence where available. We found no material exceptions in these tests.

 

We examined a sample of loans and advances which had not been identified by management as potentially impaired and formed our own judgement as to whether that was appropriate including using external evidence in respect of the relevant counterparties. We found no material exceptions in these tests.

 

For customers with exposure to the oil, gas and commodity prices, we increased our sample testing of cases individually assessed for impairment, included those customers identified on the watchlist, and those that remained in the ‘good book’. In addition, we tested relevant post model adjustments held and considered the completeness of the unidentified impairment provision for these customers.

 

In the case of some impairment provisions, we formed a different view from that of management, but in our view the differences were within a reasonable range of outcomes in the context of the overall loans and advances and the uncertainties disclosed in the financial statements.

 

  §   the key assumptions and judgements made by the Directors that underlie the calculation of modelled retail impairment (including in relation to a number of model changes that were implemented in 2015). Key assumptions and judgements include the emergence period used for unidentified impairment, the probability of default calculation and the loss given default calculation     
  §  

the post model adjustments recorded in response to a range of identified internal factors, such as known data and system issues impacting specific impairment models, and external factors such as the persistently low interest rate environment in the UK

    
  §  

the completeness of the customer accounts that are included in the impairment calculation, including how unidentified impairment (customers that have had a loss event that has not yet manifested itself in a missed payment or other indicator) and forbearance are taken account of.

 

    
   

In addition, in wholesale we considered the impact of lower oil, gas and commodity prices on the creditworthiness of relevant counterparties.

 

See Notes 7 and 20 to the financial statements on pages 265 and 295 respectively and the relevant parts of the Risk review to which they are cross-referred.

 

    

 

 

246  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

 

 

Area of focus              How our audit addressed the area of focus

Valuation of financial

instruments held at

fair value

 

The valuation of the Group’s financial instruments held at fair value was a key area of audit focus due to their significance.

 

The Directors make significant judgement because of the complexity involved in valuing some of these assets and liabilities given the limited external evidence to support the Group’s valuations.

 

In particular, the Education, Social Housing and Local Authority (ESHLA) loan books (£16.2bn) requires significant judgement in the valuation methodology used due to limited availability of observable market data used to calibrate the funding and credit spreads used in the valuation.

 

The Group’s Funding Fair Value Adjustment (FFVA) for the measurement of uncollateralised derivatives is an area of judgement for the Directors as there are limited uncollateralised derivative trades. The limited data available does not allow the different elements of pricing to be isolated resulting in the Directors exercising their judgement in assessing fair value.

 

See Notes 14 to 18 to the financial statements on pages 272 to 292.

    

We assessed the design and operating effectiveness of the Group’s key controls supporting the identification, measurement and oversight of valuation risk of financial instruments.

 

We examined the Group’s independent price verification processes, model validation and approval processes, controls over data feeds and inputs to valuation and the Group’s governance and reporting processes and controls. We made our own examination of collateral disputes, gains and losses on disposals and other events which could provide evidence about the appropriateness of the Group’s valuations. We determined that we could rely on the key controls operated by the Group for the purposes of our audit.

 

For the more judgemental valuations, which may depend on unobservable inputs, we evaluated the assumptions, methodologies and models used by the Group. We performed an independent valuation of a sample of positions which in some cases resulted in a different valuation to that calculated by management. In our view, the differences were within a reasonable range of outcomes in the context of the inherent uncertainties disclosed in the financial statements.

 

In auditing the ESHLA loan book, we assessed the appropriateness of the valuation methodology for the portfolio and the level of observability in the market, including performing comparable credit spread research and comparing any observations to those used by management within the Credit Valuation Adjustment. We independently performed the valuation of a sample of derivatives and loans and evaluated the appropriateness of ESHLA specific fair value adjustments.

 

In respect of the FFVA for uncollateralised derivatives we assessed the methodology applied, and assumptions made, by the Group and compared it with our knowledge of current industry practice. We tested the controls over the data inputs to the valuation model and involved our internal specialists to test the appropriateness of the model. We evaluated the extent to which funding costs are incorporated into derivative valuation with reference to the limited observable transaction and other market data available.

 

Overall, in our view, in the context of the inherent uncertainties as disclosed in the financial statements, these valuations were within a reasonable range of outcomes.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  247


Independent Auditors’ report

Independent Auditors’ report to the members of Barclays PLC

 

 

Area of focus              How our audit addressed the area of focus

Provisions for conduct

redress costs

 

We focused on this area because the Directors have made provisions that require significant judgement in relation to the amount of current and potential future claims from customers for losses or damages associated with inappropriate business activities.

 

For conduct exposures identified, the measurement of provisions is highly judgemental and key assumptions are difficult to forecast, such as complaint volumes. In particular we focused on the £2.2bn provision for Payment Protection Insurance (‘PPI’).

 

Barclays have developed a calculation methodology which is used to provide data for tracking PPI, and for provision calculations. The key input is the future complaints flow which is inherently difficult to estimate given the variety of factors which can influence the volumes.

 

A new factor impacting estimation uncertainty this year was the Financial Conduct Authority’s consultation paper 15/39 in which they propose a two year timebar and address how banks should respond to the Plevin ruling. The Directors have had to make significant judgements in updating their PPI provision methodology to reflect the impact these factors may have on future claims flows.

 

See Note 27 to the financial statements on pages 301 and 302.

 

    

We assessed and tested the design and operating effectiveness of the controls over the calculation of the provisions for the cost of conduct remediation. We determined that we could rely on these controls for the purposes of the audit. In the view of significant judgements involved, we also examined the more material provisions in detail and sought additional evidence.

 

In relation to PPI, we examined the data capture, analysis and modelling process around the provision calculations. We tested the nature, categorisation and history of claim volumes and settlement amounts and assessed whether the assumptions underpinning the provision calculations, including future claim volumes and settlement amounts, where appropriate.

 

We tested the provisioning models and underlying assumptions used, in particular how management updated their provisioning models to address actual complaint flows, the proposed timebar and implications of the Plevin judgement. To challenge management assumptions, we have developed and used our own model to run different provisioning scenarios and compared if management assumptions were within our range of provisioning.

 

We have evaluated whether the disclosures within the financial statements appropriately address the significant uncertainties that exist around determining the provisions and the sensitivity of the provisions to changes in the underlying assumptions and the impact of the proposed timebar.

 

We considered the sensitivity of the provision to possible variations in those assumptions. This could result in different amounts for some provisions to those calculated by Directors, but in our view these differences were within a reasonable range of outcomes in the context of the degree of uncertainty.

 

Litigation and

regulatory claims

 

We focused on this area because the Group is subject to challenge in respect of a number of legal, regulatory and competition matters, many of which are beyond its control. Consequently, the Directors make judgements about the incidence and quantum of such liabilities arising from litigation and regulatory or competition claims which are subject to the future outcome of legal or regulatory processes.

 

See Note 29 to the financial statements on pages 303 to 313.

    

We assessed and tested the design and operating effectiveness of the controls over the identification, evaluation, provisioning and reporting of legal, regulatory and competition matters. We determined that we could rely on these controls for the purposes of our audit.

 

In view of the significant judgements required, we also examined the more material provisions in detail and sought additional evidence. We evaluated the Group’s assessment of the nature and status of litigation, claims and provision assessments, if any, and discussed with internal counsel to understand the legal position and the basis of material risk positions. In some cases we have confirmed this information directly with the Group’s external counsel.

 

As set out in the financial statements, the outcome of litigation and regulatory claims are dependent on the future outcome of continuing legal and regulatory processes and consequently the calculations of the provisions are subject to inherent uncertainty. In our view, the provisions had been arrived at based on the information currently available to the Group and after consideration of the legal advice received by the Group.

 

IT systems and

controls over financial

reporting

 

We identified IT systems and controls over financial reporting as an area of focus as the Group’s financial accounting and reporting systems are heavily dependent on complex systems and there is a risk that automated accounting procedures and related IT dependent manual controls are not designed and operating effectively.

 

A particular area of focus related to logical access management and segregation of duties controls which were remediated in 2015.

    

We assessed and tested the design and operating effectiveness of the controls over the continued integrity of the IT systems that are relevant to financial reporting. We examined the framework of governance over the Group’s IT organisation and the controls over program development and changes, access to programs and data and IT operations, including compensating controls where required. Where necessary we also carried out direct tests of certain aspects of the security of the Group’s IT systems including access management and segregation of duties.

 

The combination of the tests of the controls and the direct tests that we carried out gave us sufficient evidence to enable us to rely on the continued and proper operation of the Group’s IT systems for the purposes of our audit.

 

 

248  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

 

Area of focus              How our audit addressed the area of focus

Provision for

uncertain tax

positions

 

We focused on this area because the Group is subject to taxation in many jurisdictions and, in many cases, the ultimate tax treatment is uncertain and is not determined until resolved with the relevant tax authority. Consequently, the Directors make judgements about the incidence and quantum of tax liabilities which are subject to the future outcome of assessments by the relevant tax authorities and potentially associated legal processes.

 

See Note 10 to the financial statements on pages 268 to 270.

 

    

Our tax specialists examined the correspondence between the Group and the relevant tax authorities and between the Group and its external advisers. We examined the matters in dispute and used our knowledge of the law of the relevant tax jurisdictions and other similar taxation matters to assess the available evidence and the provisions made by Directors.

 

As set out in the financial statements, since the settlement of the Group’s tax position is subject to future negotiation with various tax authorities, the calculations of the provisions are subject to inherent uncertainty. In our view, the provisions were within a reasonable range of outcomes in the context of that uncertainty.

 

How we tailored the audit scope

We tailored the scope of our audit to ensure that we performed enough work to be able to give an opinion on the financial statements as a whole, taking into account the geographic structure of the Group, the accounting processes and controls, and the industry in which the Group operates.

Component scoping

In response to the Group’s move to a more legal entity focused reporting structure, we revised our audit scope to reflect this. Consequently, our assessment of components of the Group focused primarily on the Group’s legal entities, rather than its operating segments as in previous years.

The following legal entities were deemed to be significant components of the Group, and were subject to an audit of their complete financial information:

 

§   Barclays Bank PLC

 

§   Barclays Africa Group Ltd.

 

§   Barclays Capital Inc. and

 

§   Barclays Capital Securities Ltd.

These components accounted for 86% of Group Total Income and 94% of Group Total Assets.

Sub-component scoping

The Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Africa Group Ltd. entities are themselves consolidations of individually distinct sub-components (namely the business units disclosed in the segmental analysis note of the Financial Review on page 225), which in turn consolidate their own sub-components.

We therefore assessed what audit work was necessary in each of these sub-components, based on their financial significance to the relevant legal entity, for the purposes of the Group audit. At this sub-component level, we performed a combination of full scope audits and audits of specific financial statement line items (namely investments in joint ventures and associates) in order to achieve the desired level of audit evidence.

We also performed an audit of costs to achieve, taxation and each of the adjusting items disclosed in the Consolidated Summary Income Statement in the Financial Review on page 220, namely:

 

§   Own credit

 

§   Gain on US Lehman acquisition assets

 

§   Gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability

 

§   Provisions for UK customer redress

 

§   Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

 

§   Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses.

These audit procedures, together with the audits performed at the Barclays Capital Inc. and Barclays Capital Securities Ltd. components, gave us coverage over 69% of Group Total Income and 81% of Group Total Assets. We also performed Group level analytical procedures and testing of Group-wide controls that enabled us to determine that we did not need to obtain further audit evidence over the remaining population.

Involvement with component auditors

We determined whether the work would be performed by us (in relation to activity within the UK) or by other PwC network firms operating under our instruction (in relation to activity outside the UK). The most significant overseas territories are the US and South Africa.

Where work was performed by component auditors from other network firms, our involvement in that work included visits to the component auditors including New York and Johannesburg by members of the Group and component engagement teams, review of the results of their audit procedures including the nature, timing and extent of the work impacting the Group audit opinion and frequent communications by the Group engagement team to corroborate that our audit plan was appropriately executed. The nature, timing and extent of the work impacting the Group audit opinion is set and monitored in the UK, with input from the overseas team at the risk assessment stage.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  249


Independent Auditors’ report

Independent Auditors’ report to the members of Barclays PLC

    

 

 

Materiality

The scope of our audit was influenced by our application of materiality. We set certain quantitative thresholds for materiality. These, together with qualitative considerations, helped us to determine the scope of our audit and the nature, timing and extent of our audit procedures on the individual financial statement line items and disclosures and in evaluating the effect of misstatements, both individually and on the financial statements as a whole.

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:

 

   

Overall Group materiality

 

    

£313 million (2014: £330 million).

 

How we determined it     

5% of adjusted profit before tax excluding costs to achieve. The adjusting items disclosed in the Consolidated Summary Income Statement in the Financial Review on page 220 to get to Statutory profit before tax are as follows: Own credit, Gain on US Lehman acquisition assets, Gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability, Provisions for UK customer redress, Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, and Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses.

 

Rationale for benchmark

applied

 

    

The use of adjusted profit before tax is considered appropriate as the adjusting items are excluded on the basis that the Directors deem them to be exceptional by nature, either because they are non-recurring or because they are influenced by market conditions that are not reflective of the operations of the business. Adjusted profit is the measure disclosed in the Financial Review.

 

      

We excluded costs to achieve, as in 2014 the Directors embarked on a significant restructuring of the Group. The costs associated with this initiative are significant and, like the adjusting items listed above, are expected to be discrete and non-recurring in nature and thus is not considered as an appropriate indicator of the underlying performance of the business. Operating expenses excluding costs to achieve is a key performance indicator that the Directors focus on, included in the Financial Review. The costs are separately disclosed on the face of the ‘Analysis of results by business’ segments in the Financial Review and a measure of profit, excluding these costs, is specifically highlighted in the Group’s Results Announcement.

 

 

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to them misstatements identified during our audit above £15 million (2014: £15 million) as well as misstatements below that amount that, in our view, warranted reporting for qualitative reasons.

Going concern

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review the Directors’ Statement, set out on page 78, in relation to going concern. We have nothing to report having performed our review.

Under ISAs (UK & Ireland) we are also required to report to you if we have anything material to add or to draw attention to in relation to the Directors’ statement about whether they considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial statements. We have nothing material to add or to draw attention to.

As noted in the Directors’ statement, the Directors have concluded that it is appropriate to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial statements. The going concern basis presumes that the Group and Parent Company have adequate resources to remain in operation, and that the Directors intend them to do so, for at least one year from the date the financial statements were signed. In drawing this conclusion, the Directors have considered the regulatory capital position of the Group as well as the funding and liquidity position of the Group.

As part of our audit we have concluded that the Directors’ use of the going concern basis is appropriate. However, because not all future events or conditions can be predicted, these statements are not a guarantee as to the Group’s and Parent Company’s ability to continue as a going concern.

 

 

Other required reporting

Consistency of other information

Companies Act 2006 opinion

In our opinion, the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the financial statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements.

 

ISAs (UK & Ireland) reporting

 

Under ISAs (UK & Ireland) we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

§    information in the Annual Report is

  

We have no exceptions

to report.

 

-  materially inconsistent with the information in the audited financial statements or

  

-  apparently materially incorrect based on, or materially inconsistent with, our knowledge of the Group and Parent Company

   acquired in the course of performing our audit or

  

-  otherwise misleading

 

    

§   the statement given by the Directors on page 78, in accordance with provision C.1.1 of the UK Corporate Governance Code (the ‘Code’), that they consider the Annual Report taken as a whole to be fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information necessary for members to assess the Group’s and Parent Company’s performance, business model and strategy is materially inconsistent with our knowledge of the Group and Parent Company acquired in the course of performing our audit

 

   We have no exceptions to report.

§   the section of the Annual Report on page 44 as required by provision C.3.8 of the Code, describing the work of the Audit Committee does not appropriately address matters communicated by us to the Audit Committee.

 

   We have no exceptions to report.

 

250  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

The Directors’ assessment of the prospects of the Group and of the principal risks that would threaten the solvency or liquidity of the Group

 

Under ISAs (UK & Ireland) we are required to report to you if we have anything material to add or to draw attention to in relation to:     

§   the Directors’ confirmation in the Annual Report that they have carried out a robust assessment of the principal risks facing the Group, including those that would threaten its business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity

  

We have nothing

material to add or to

draw attention to.

 

§   the disclosures in the Annual Report that describe those risks and explain how they are being managed or mitigated

  

We have nothing

material to add or to

draw attention to.

 

§   the Directors’ explanation in the Annual Report as to how they have assessed the prospects of the Group, over what period they have done so and why they consider that period to be appropriate, and their statement as to whether they have a reasonable expectation that the Group will be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the period of their assessment, including any related disclosures drawing attention to any necessary qualifications or assumptions.

 

  

We have nothing

material to add or to

draw attention to.

 

 

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review the Directors’ Statement that they have carried out a robust assessment of the principal risks facing the Group and the Directors’ Statement in relation to the longer-term viability of the Group, set out on page 26. Our review was substantially less in scope than an audit and only consisted of making inquiries and considering the Directors’ process supporting their statements; checking that the statements are in alignment with the relevant provisions of the Code; and considering whether the statements are consistent with the knowledge acquired by us in the course of performing our audit. We have nothing to report having performed our review.

 

 

Adequacy of accounting records and information and explanations received

 

 

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

    

§   we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit

  

We have no exceptions

to report.

 

§   adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not visited by us

  

We have no exceptions

to report.

 

§   the Parent company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns.

  

We have no exceptions

to report.

 

 

Directors’ remuneration

Directors’ remuneration report – Companies Act 2006 opinion

In our opinion, the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

Other Companies Act 2006 reporting

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion, certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made. We have no exceptions to report arising from these responsibilities.

Corporate governance statement

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review the part of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to ten further provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code. We have nothing to report having performed our review.

Responsibilities for the financial statements and the audit

Our responsibilities and those of the Directors

As explained more fully in the Directors’ Responsibilities Statement set out on page 78, the Directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view.

Our responsibility is to audit and express an opinion on the financial statements in accordance with applicable law and ISAs (UK & Ireland). Those standards require us to comply with the Auditing Practices Board’s Ethical Standards for Auditors.

This report, including the opinions, has been prepared for and only for the Company’s members as a body in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006 and for no other purpose. We do not, in giving these opinions, accept or assume responsibility for any other purpose or to any other person to whom this report is shown or into whose hands it may come save where expressly agreed by our prior consent in writing.

 

What an audit of financial statements involves

An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements sufficient to give reasonable assurance that the financial statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. This includes an assessment of:

 

§   whether the accounting policies are appropriate to the Group’s and the Parent Company’s circumstances and have been consistently applied and adequately disclosed

 

§   the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by the Directors

 

§   the overall presentation of the financial statements.

We primarily focus our work in these areas by assessing the Directors’ judgement against available evidence, forming our own judgements, and evaluating the disclosures in the financial statements.

We test and examine information, using sampling and other auditing techniques, to the extent we consider necessary to provide a reasonable basis for us to draw conclusions. We obtain audit evidence through testing the effectiveness of controls, substantive procedures or a combination of both.

In addition, we read all the financial and non-financial information in the Annual Report to identify material inconsistencies with the audited financial statements and to identify any information that is apparently materially incorrect based on, or materially inconsistent with, the knowledge acquired by us in the course of performing the audit. If we become aware of any apparent material misstatements or inconsistencies we consider the implications for our report.

Henry Daubeney (Senior Statutory Auditor)

for and on behalf of

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors

London

29 February 2016

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  251


Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm’s report

    

    

 

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To The Board of Directors and Shareholders of Barclays PLC

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheets and the related consolidated income statements, consolidated statements of comprehensive income, consolidated statements of changes in equity and consolidated cash flow statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries at 31 December 2015 and 31 December 2014, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2015 in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. Also in our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2015, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework 2013 issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). The Company’s management is responsible for these financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in management’s report on internal control over financial reporting included in the Directors’ Report appearing on page 72 of the Annual Report to Shareholders. Our responsibility is to express opinions on these financial statements and on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our integrated audits. We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (US). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audits of the financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting

included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinions.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (i) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (ii) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorisations of management and directors of the company; and (iii) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

London, UK

29 February 2016

 

 

252  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated income statement

    

 

 

For the year ended 31 December

     Notes        

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

    

 

2013

£m

  

  

Continuing operations

           

Interest income

     3         17,201         17,363         18,315   

Interest expense

     3         (4,643      (5,283      (6,715

Net interest income

              12,558         12,080         11,600   

Fee and commission income

     4         9,655         9,836         10,479   

Fee and commission expense

     4         (1,763      (1,662      (1,748

Net fee and commission income

              7,892         8,174         8,731   

Net trading income

     5         3,623         3,331         6,553   

Net investment income

     6         1,138         1,328         680   

Net premiums from insurance contracts

        709         669         732   

Other income

              67         186         148   

Total income

        25,987         25,768         28,444   

Net claims and benefits incurred on insurance contracts

              (533      (480      (509

Total income net of insurance claims

        25,454         25,288         27,935   

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

     7         (2,114      (2,168      (3,071

Net operating income

              23,340         23,120         24,864   

Staff costs

     8         (9,960      (11,005      (12,155

Infrastructure costs

     8         (3,180      (3,443      (3,531

Administration and general expenses

     8         (3,528      (3,621      (4,113

Provision for UK customer redress

     27         (2,772      (1,110      (2,000

Provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

     27         (1,237      (1,250      (173

Operating expenses

     8         (20,677      (20,429      (21,972

Share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures

        47         36         (56

(Loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures

     9         (637      (471      6   

Gain on acquisitions

                              26   

Profit before tax

        2,073         2,256         2,868   

Taxation

     10         (1,450      (1,411      (1,571

Profit after tax

              623         845         1,297   

Attributable to:

                                   

Equity holders of the parent

        (394      (174      540   

Other equity holdersa

              345         250           

Total equity holders

        (49      76         540   

Non-controlling interests

     33         672         769         757   

Profit after tax

              623         845         1,297   
                p         p         p   

Earnings per share

           

Basic (loss)/earnings per share

     11         (1.9      (0.7      3.8   

Diluted (loss)/earnings per share

     11         (1.9      (0.7      3.7   

 

 

Note

a  The profit after tax attributable to other equity holders of £345m (2014: £250m) is offset by a tax credit recorded in reserves of £70m (2014: £54m). The net amount of £275m (2014: £196m), along with NCI, is deducted from profit after tax in order to calculate earnings per share.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  253


Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

 

 

 

 

For the year ended 31 December

      
 
2015
£m
  
  
      
 
2014
£m
  
  
      
 
2013
£m
  
  

Profit after tax

       623           845           1,297   

Other comprehensive (loss)/income from continuing operations:

              

Currency translation reserve

              

Currency translation differences

       (476        486           (1,767

Available for sale reserve

              

Net gains/(losses) from changes in fair value

       33           5,333           (2,734

Net gains transferred to net profit on disposal

       (373        (619        (145

Net losses/(gains) transferred to net profit due to impairment

       17           (31        (7

Net (gains)/losses transferred to net profit due to fair value hedging

       (148        (4,074        2,376   

Changes in insurance liabilities

       86           (94        28   

Tax

       134           (102        100   

Cash flow hedging reserve

              

Net (losses)/gains from changes in fair value

       (407        2,687           (1,914

Net gains transferred to net profit

       (268        (767        (547

Tax

       81           (380        571   

Other

       21           (42        (37

Total comprehensive (loss)/income that may be recycled to profit or loss

       (1,300        2,397           (4,076

Other comprehensive income/(loss) not recycled to profit or loss:

              

Retirement benefit remeasurements

       1,174           268           (512

Tax

       (260        (63        (3

Other comprehensive (loss)/income for the period

 

      

 

(386

 

 

      

 

2,602

 

  

 

      

 

(4,591

 

 

Total comprehensive income/(loss) for the year

       237           3,447           (3,294

Attributable to:

              

Equity holders of the parent

       45           2,756           (3,406

Non-controlling interests

       192           691           112   
         237           3,447           (3,294

 

254  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated balance sheet

 

 

As at 31 December

     Notes        

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

    

 

2013

£m

  

  

Assets

           

Cash and balances at central banks

        49,711         39,695         45,687   

Items in the course of collection from other banks

        1,011         1,210         1,282   

Trading portfolio assets

     13         77,348         114,717         133,069   

Financial assets designated at fair value

     14         76,830         38,300         38,968   

Derivative financial instruments

     15         327,709         439,909         350,300   

Available for sale investments

     16         90,267         86,066         91,756   

Loans and advances to banks

     20         41,349         42,111         39,422   

Loans and advances to customers

     20         399,217         427,767         434,237   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

     22         28,187         131,753         186,779   

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

        3,010         3,607         3,920   

Investments in associates and joint ventures

     38         573         711         653   

Property, plant and equipment

     23         3,468         3,786         4,216   

Goodwill and intangible assets

     24         8,222         8,180         7,685   

Current tax assets

     10         415         334         219   

Deferred tax assets

     10         4,495         4,130         4,807   

Retirement benefit assets

     35         836         56         133   

Non current assets classified as held for sale

     44         7,364         15,574         495   

Total assets

              1,120,012         1,357,906         1,343,628   

Liabilities

           

Deposits from banks

        47,080         58,390         55,615   

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

        1,013         1,177         1,359   

Customer accounts

        418,242         427,704         431,998   

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

     22         25,035         124,479         196,748   

Trading portfolio liabilities

     13         33,967         45,124         53,464   

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

     17         91,745         56,972         64,796   

Derivative financial instruments

     15         324,252         439,320         347,118   

Debt securities in issue

        69,150         86,099         86,693   

Subordinated liabilities

     30         21,467         21,153         21,695   

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

     26         10,610         11,423         12,934   

Provisions

     27         4,142         4,135         3,886   

Current tax liabilities

     10         903         1,021         1,042   

Deferred tax liabilities

     10         122         262         373   

Retirement benefit liabilities

     35         423         1,574         1,958   

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale

     44         5,997         13,115           

Total liabilities

              1,054,148         1,291,948         1,279,679   

Total equity

           

Called up share capital and share premium

     31         21,586         20,809         19,887   

Other equity instruments

     31         5,305         4,322         2,063   

Other reserves

     32         1,898         2,724         249   

Retained earnings

              31,021         31,712         33,186   

Total equity excluding non-controlling interests

        59,810         59,567         55,385   

Non-controlling interests

     33         6,054         6,391         8,564   

Total equity

              65,864         65,958         63,949   

Total liabilities and equity

              1,120,012         1,357,906         1,343,628   

The Board of Directors approved the financial statements on pages 253 to 347 on 29 February 2016.

John McFarlane

Group Chairman

Jes Staley

Group Chief Executive

Tushar Morzaria

Group Finance Director

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  255


Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

 

 

      
 
 
 
 

 

Called up
share
capital
and share
premium

£m

  
  
  
  
a 

  

    

 

 

 

Other

equity

instruments

£m

  

  

a 

  

    
 
 

 

Available
for sale
reserve

£m

  
  
b 

  

    

 

 

 

 

Cash

flow

hedging

reserve

£m

  

  

  

b 

  

    

 

 

 

Currency

translation

reserve

£m

  

  

b 

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

Other

reserves

and

treasury

shares

£m

  

  

  

  

b 

  

    

 

 

Retained

earnings

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total

equity

excluding

non-

controlling

interests

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

Non-

controlling

interests

£m

  

  

  

  

    
 
 
Total
equity
£m
  
  
  

Balance as at 1 January 2015

     20,809         4,322         562         1,817         (582      927         31,712         59,567         6,391         65,958   

Profit after tax

             345                                         (394      (49      672         623   

Currency translation movements

                                     (41                      (41      (435      (476

Available for sale investments

                     (245                                      (245      (6      (251

Cash flow hedges

                             (556                              (556      (38      (594

Pension remeasurement

                                                     916         916         (2      914   

Other

                                                     20         20         1         21   

Total comprehensive income for the year

             345         (245      (556      (41              542         45         192         237   

Issue of new ordinary shares

     137                                                         137                 137   

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

     640                                                 571         1,211                 1,211   

Issue and exchange of other equity instruments

             995                                                 995                 995   

Other equity instruments coupons paid

             (345                                      70         (275              (275

Redemption of preference shares

                                                                               

Increase in treasury shares

                                             (602              (602              (602

Vesting of shares under employee share schemes

                                             618         (755      (137              (137

Dividends paid

                                                     (1,081      (1,081      (552      (1,633

Other reserve movements

             (12                                      (38      (50      23         (27

Balance as at 31 December 2015

     21,586         5,305         317         1,261         (623      943         31,021         59,810         6,054         65,864   
                                                                                           

Balance as at 1 January 2014

     19,887         2,063         148         273         (1,142      970         33,186         55,385         8,564         63,949   

Profit after tax

             250                                         (174      76         769         845   

Currency translation movements

                                     560                         560         (74      486   

Available for sale investments

                     414                                         414         (1      413   

Cash flow hedges

                             1,544                                 1,544         (4      1,540   

Pension remeasurement

                                                     205         205                 205   

Other

                                                     (43      (43      1         (42

Total comprehensive income for the year

             250         414         1,544         560                 (12      2,756         691         3,447   

Issue of new ordinary shares

     150                                                         150                 150   

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

     772                                                 693         1,465                 1,465   

Issue and exchange of other equity instruments

             2,263                                         (155      2,108         (1,527      581   

Other equity instruments coupons paid

             (250                                      54         (196              (196

Redemption of preference shares

                                                     (104      (104      (687      (791

Increase in treasury shares

                                             (909              (909              (909

Vesting of shares under employee share schemes

                                             866         (866                        

Dividends paid

                                                     (1,057      (1,057      (631      (1,688

Other reserve movements

             (4                                      (27      (31      (19      (50

Balance as at 31 December 2014

     20,809         4,322         562         1,817         (582      927         31,712         59,567         6,391         65,958   

 

 

 

 

Notes

a For further details refer to Note 31.
b For further details refer to Note 32.

 

256  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated cash flow statement

    

 

 

For the year ended 31 December

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

    

 

2013

£m

  

  

Continuing operations

        

Reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash flows from operating activities:

        

Profit before tax

     2,073         2,256         2,868   

Adjustment for non-cash items:

        

Allowance for impairment

     2,105         2,168         3,071   

Depreciation, amortisation and impairment of property, plant, equipment and intangibles

     1,324         1,279         1,274   

Other provisions, including pensions

     4,333         3,600         3,674   

Net loss on disposal of investments and property, plant and equipment

     (374      (619      (145

Other non-cash movements

     (635      (808      (1,293

Changes in operating assets and liabilities

        

Net decrease/(increase) in loans and advances to banks and customers

     27,565         3,684         (3,915

Net decrease/(increase) in reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

     103,566         55,021         (10,264

Net (decrease) in deposits and debt securities in issue

     (37,721      (2,113      (13,392

Net (decrease) in repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

     (99,444      (72,269      (20,430

Net (increase)/decrease in derivative financial instruments

     (2,868      2,593         971   

Net decrease in trading assets

     37,342         18,368         13,443   

Net (decrease)/increase in trading liabilities

     (11,157      (8,340      8,670   

Net (increase) in financial investments

     (3,757      (7,156      (6,114

Net (increase)/decrease in other assets

     (2,324      (14,694      128   

Net (decrease)/increase in other liabilities

     (2,230      8,141         (1,930

Corporate income tax paid

     (1,670      (1,552      (1,558

Net cash from operating activities

     16,128         (10,441      (24,942

Purchase of available for sale investments

     (120,251      (108,645      (92,015

Proceeds from sale or redemption of available for sale investments

     113,048         120,843         69,473   

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

     (852      (657      (736

Other cash flows associated with investing activities

     (379      (886      633   

Net cash from investing activities

     (8,434      10,655         (22,645

Dividends paid

     (1,496      (1,688      (1,672

Proceeds of borrowings and issuance of subordinated debt

     1,138         826         700   

Repayments of borrowings and redemption of subordinated debt

     (682      (1,100      (1,425

Net issue of shares and other equity instruments

     1,278         559         9,473   

Net purchase of treasury shares

     (679      (909      (1,066

Net redemption of shares issued to non-controlling interests

             (746      (100

Net cash from financing activities

     (441      (3,058      5,910   

Effect of exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents

     824         (431      198   

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

     8,077         (3,275      (41,479

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

     78,479         81,754         123,233   

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

     86,556         78,479         81,754   

Cash and cash equivalents comprise:

        

Cash and balances at central banks

     49,711         39,695         45,687   

Loans and advances to banks with original maturity less than three months

     35,876         36,282         35,259   

Available for sale treasury and other eligible bills with original maturity less than three months

     816         2,322         644   

Trading portfolio assets with original maturity less than three months

     153         180         164   
       86,556         78,479         81,754   

Interest received was £20,376m (2014: £21,372m, 2013: £23,387m) and interest paid was £7,534m (2014: £8,566m, 2013: £10,709m).

The Group is required to maintain balances with central banks and other regulatory authorities and these amounted to £4,369m (2014: £4,448m, 2013: £4,722m).

For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash comprises cash on hand and demand deposits, and cash equivalents comprise highly liquid investments that are convertible into cash with an insignificant risk of changes in value with original maturities of three months or less. Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements are not considered to be part of cash equivalents.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  257


Financial statements of Barclays PLC

Parent company accounts

        

 

 

Income statement

                                         

For the year ended 31 December

     Notes          
 
2015
£m
  
  
      
 
2014
£m
  
  
      
 
2013
£m
  
  

Dividends received from subsidiary

          876           821           734   

Net interest expense

          (7        (6        (6

Other income/(expense)

     45           227           275           (137

Management charge from subsidiary

                (6        (6        (6

Profit before tax

          1,090           1,084           585   

Tax

                (43        (57        35   

Profit after tax

                1,047           1,027           620   

Attributable to

                                         

Ordinary equity holders

          702           777           620   

Other equity holders

                345           250             

 

Profit after tax and total comprehensive income for the year was £1,047m (2014: £1,027m). There were no other components of total comprehensive income other than the profit after tax.

 

The Company had no staff during the year (2014: nil, 2013: nil).

 

  

  

Balance sheet

                                         

As at 31 December

                Notes          
 
2015
£m
  
  
      
 
2014
£m
  
  

Assets

                 

Investment in subsidiary

          45           35,303           33,743   

Loans and advances to subsidiary

          45           7,990           2,866   

Derivative financial instrument

          45           210           313   

Other assets

                           133           174   

Total assets

                           43,636           37,096   

Liabilities

                 

Deposits from banks

               494           528   

Subordinated liabilities

          45           1,766           810   

Debt securities in issue

          45           6,224           2,056   

Other liabilities

                                     10   

Total liabilities

                           8,484           3,404   

Shareholders’ equity

                 

Called up share capital

          31           4,201           4,125   

Share premium account

          31           17,385           16,684   

Other equity instruments

          31           5,321           4,326   

Capital redemption reserve

               394           394   

Retained earnings

                           7,851           8,163   

Total shareholders’ equity

                           35,152           33,692   

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

                           43,636           37,096   

The financial statements on pages 258 and 259 and the accompanying note on page 340 were approved by the Board of Directors on 29 February 2016 and signed on its behalf by:

John McFarlane

Group Chairman

Jes Staley

Group Chief Executive

Tushar Morzaria

Group Finance Director

 

258  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Statement of changes in equity

                                                     
           Notes        

 

 
 

 

    Called up

share capital

and share
premium

£m

 

 

  
  

  

    

 
 

 

    Other

equity
instruments

£m

 

  
  

  

    

 

 
 

Capital

    reserves and

other equity
£m

  

  

  
  

    

 
 

    Retained

earnings
£m

  

  
  

    
 
    Total equity
£m
  
  

Balance as at 1 January 2015

        20,809         4,326         394         8,163         33,692   

Profit after tax and total comprehensive income

                345                 702         1,047   

Issue of new ordinary shares

        137                                 137   

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

        640                                 640   

Issue of other equity instruments

                995                         995   

Dividends

     12                                 (1,081      (1,081

Other equity instruments coupons paid

                (345              70         (275

Other

                                      (3      (3

Balance as at 31 December 2015

              21,586         5,321         394         7,851         35,152   

Balance as at 1 January 2014

        19,887         2,063         394         8,398         30,742   

Profit after tax and total comprehensive income

                250                 777         1,027   

Issue of new ordinary shares

        150                                 150   

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

        772                                 772   

Issue of other equity instruments

                2,263                         2,263   

Dividends

     12                                 (1,057      (1,057

Other equity instruments coupons paid

                (250              54         (196

Other

                                      (9      (9

Balance as at 31 December 2014

              20,809         4,326         394         8,163         33,692   
                 

Cash flow statement

                                                     

For the year ended 31 December

                               

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

    

 

2013

£m

  

  

Reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash flows from operating activities:

                 

Profit before tax

              1,090         1,084         585   

Changes in operating assets and liabilities

              100         734         (546

Other non-cash movements

              52         (43      (20

Corporate income tax (paid)/received

                                (27      38         (3

Net cash from operating activities

                                1,215         1,813         16   

Capital contribution to subsidiary

                                (1,560      (3,684      (8,630

Net cash used in investing activities

                                (1,560      (3,684      (8,630

Issue of shares and other equity instruments

              1,771         3,185         9,473   

Net (increase) in loans and advances to bank subsidiaries of the Parent

              (4,973      (2,866        

Net increase in deposits and debt securities in issue

              4,052         2,056           

Proceeds of borrowings and issuance of subordinated debt

              921         803         (859

Dividends paid

              (1,081      (1,057        

Coupons paid

                                (345      (250        

Net cash from financing activities

                                345         1,871         8,614   

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

                                                  

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

                                                  

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

                                                  

Net cash from operating activities includes:

                 

Dividends received

              876         821         734   

Interest paid

                                (7      (6      (6

The Parent Company’s principal activity is to hold the investment in its wholly-owned subsidiary, Barclays Bank PLC. Dividends received are treated as operating income.

The Company was not exposed at 31 December 2015 or 2014 to significant risks arising from the financial instruments it holds, which comprised loans and advances and other assets which had no market risk or material credit risk.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  259


Notes to the financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2015

    

 

 

This section describes Barclays’ significant accounting policies and critical accounting estimates that relate to the financial statements and notes as a whole. If an accounting policy or a critical accounting estimate relates to a specific note, the applicable accounting policy and/or critical accounting estimate is contained within the relevant note.

    

1 Significant accounting policies

 

 

1. Reporting entity

These financial statements are prepared for Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries (the Barclays PLC Group or the Group) under Section 399 of the Companies Act 2006. The Group is a major global financial services provider engaged in retail banking, credit cards, wholesale banking, investment banking, wealth management and investment management services. In addition, individual financial statements have been presented for the holding company.

 

2. Compliance with International Financial Reporting Standards

The consolidated financial statements of the Group, and the individual financial statements of Barclays PLC, have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and interpretations (IFRICs) issued by the Interpretations Committee, as published by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). They are also in accordance with IFRS and IFRIC interpretations endorsed by the EU. The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of the consolidated and individual financial statements are set out below, and in the relevant notes to the financial statements. These policies have been consistently applied.

 

3. Basis of preparation

The consolidated and individual financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention modified to include the fair valuation of investment property, and particular financial instruments, to the extent required or permitted under IFRS as set out in the relevant accounting policies. They are stated in millions of pounds Sterling (£m), the functional currency of Barclays PLC.

 

4. Accounting policies

Barclays prepares financial statements in accordance with IFRS. The Group’s significant accounting policies relating to specific financial statement items, together with a description of the accounting estimates and judgements that were critical to preparing them, are set out under the relevant notes. Accounting policies that affect the financial statements as a whole are set out below.

 

(i) Consolidation

Barclays applies IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

The consolidated financial statements combine the financial statements of Barclays PLC and all its subsidiaries. Subsidiaries are entities over which Barclays PLC has control. The Group has control over another entity when the Group has all of the following:

 

1) power over the relevant activities of the investee, for example through voting or other rights

 

2) exposure to, or rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the investee, and

 

3) the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee.

 

The assessment of control is based on the consideration of all facts and circumstances. The Group reassesses whether it controls an investee if facts and circumstances indicate that there are changes to one or more of the three elements of control.

 

Intra-group transactions and balances are eliminated on consolidation and consistent accounting policies are used throughout the Group for the purposes of the consolidation.

 

Changes in ownership interests in subsidiaries are accounted for as equity transactions if they occur after control has already been obtained and they do not result in loss of control.

 

As the consolidated financial statements include partnerships where the Group member is a partner, advantage has been taken of the exemption under Regulation 7 of the Partnership (Accounts) Regulations 2008 with regard to preparing and filing of individual partnership financial statements.

 

Details of the principal subsidiaries are given in Note 36, and a complete list of all subsidiaries is presented in Note 46.

 

(ii) Foreign currency translation

The Group applies IAS 21 The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates. Transactions and balances in foreign currencies are translated into Sterling at the rate ruling on the date of the transaction. Foreign currency balances are translated into Sterling at the period end exchange rates. Exchange rate gains and losses on such balances are taken to the income statement.

 

The Group’s foreign operations (including subsidiaries, joint ventures, associates and branches) based mainly outside the UK may have different functional currencies. The functional currency of an operation is the currency of the main economy to which it is exposed.

 

Prior to consolidation (or equity accounting) the assets and liabilities of non-Sterling operations are translated at the closing rate and items of income, expense and other comprehensive income are translated into Sterling at the rate on the date of the transactions. Exchange rate differences arising on the translation of foreign operations are included in currency translation reserves within equity. These are transferred to the income statement when the Group loses control, joint control or significant influence over the foreign operation or on partial disposal of the operation.

 

(iii) Financial assets and liabilities

The Group applies IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement to the recognition, classification and measurement, and derecognition of financial assets and financial liabilities, the impairment of financial assets, and hedge accounting.

 

Recognition

The Group recognises financial assets and liabilities when it becomes a party to the terms of the contract, which is the trade date or the settlement date.

 

 

260  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

1 Significant accounting policies continued

 

 

Classification and measurement

Financial assets and liabilities are initially recognised at fair value and may be held at fair value or amortised cost depending on the Group’s intention towards the assets and the nature of the assets and liabilities, mainly determined by their contractual terms.

 

The accounting policy for each type of financial asset or liability is included within the relevant note for the item. The Group’s policies for determining the fair values of the assets and liabilities are set out in Note 18.

 

Derecognition

The Group derecognises a financial asset, or a portion of a financial asset, from its balance sheet where the contractual rights to cash flows from the asset have expired, or have been transferred, usually by sale, and with them either substantially all the risks and rewards of the asset or significant risks and rewards, along with the unconditional ability to sell or pledge the asset.

 

Financial liabilities are derecognised when the liability has been settled, has expired or has been extinguished. An exchange of an existing financial liability for a new liability with the same lender on substantially different terms – generally a difference of 10% in the present value of the cash flows or a substantive qualitative amendment – is accounted for as an extinguishment of the original financial liability and the recognition of a new financial liability.

 

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

Transactions in which the Group transfers assets and liabilities, portions of them, or financial risks associated with them can be complex and it may not be obvious whether substantially all of the risks and rewards have been transferred. It is often necessary to perform a quantitative analysis. Such an analysis compares the Group’s exposure to variability in asset cash flows before the transfer with its retained exposure after the transfer.

 

A cash flow analysis of this nature may require judgement. In particular, it is necessary to estimate the asset’s expected future cash flows as well as potential variability around this expectation. The method of estimating expected future cash flows depends on the nature of the asset, with market and market-implied data used to the greatest extent possible. The potential variability around this expectation is typically determined by stressing underlying parameters to create reasonable alternative upside and downside scenarios. Probabilities are then assigned to each scenario. Stressed parameters may include default rates, loss severity, or prepayment rates.

 

(iv) Issued debt and equity instruments

The Group applies IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation, to determine whether funding is either a financial liability (debt) or equity.

 

Issued financial instruments or their components are classified as liabilities if the contractual arrangement results in the Group having a present obligation to either deliver cash or another financial asset, or a variable number of equity shares, to the holder of the instrument. If this is not the case, the instrument is generally an equity instrument and the proceeds included in equity, net of transaction costs. Dividends and other returns to equity holders are recognised when paid or declared by the members at the AGM and treated as a deduction from equity.

 

Where issued financial instruments contain both liability and equity components, these are accounted for separately. The fair value of the debt is estimated first and the balance of the proceeds is included within equity.

 

New and amended standards and interpretations

The accounting policies adopted are consistent with those of the previous financial year. There were no new or amended standards or interpretations that resulted in a change in accounting policy.

 

Future accounting developments

There have been, and are expected to be, a number of significant changes to the Group’s financial reporting after 2015 as a result of amended or new accounting standards that have been or will be issued by the IASB. The most significant of these are as follows:

 

IFRS 9 – Financial instruments

IFRS 9 Financial Instruments which will replace IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement is effective for periods beginning on or after 1 January 2018 and is currently expected to be endorsed by the EU in 2016. IFRS 9, in particular the impairment requirements, will lead to significant changes in the accounting for financial instruments.

 

Impairment

IFRS 9 introduces a revised impairment model which will require entities to recognise expected credit losses based on unbiased forward-looking information, replacing the existing incurred loss model which only recognises impairment if there is objective evidence that a loss is already incurred.

 

The IFRS 9 impairment model will be applicable to all financial assets at amortised cost, lease receivables, debt financial assets at fair value through OCI, loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts. This contrasts to the IAS 39 impairment model which is not applicable to loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts (these were covered by IAS 37). In addition, the IAS 39 Available for Sale assets model is not fully aligned to the model for amortised cost assets.

 

IFRS 9 requires the recognition of lifetime expected credit losses for financial instruments for which the credit risk has increased significantly since initial recognition. If the credit risk has not increased significantly since initial recognition 12 month expected credit losses are recognised, being the expected credit losses from default events that are possible within 12 months after the reporting date.

 

Expected credit losses are the unbiased probability of default weighted average credit losses determined by evaluating a range of possible outcomes and forecast future economic conditions. Credit losses are the expected cash shortfalls from what is contractually due over the expected life of the financial instrument, discounted at the effective interest rate.

 

Under IFRS 9, impairment will be recognised earlier than is the case under IAS 39 because it requires expected losses to be recognised before the loss event arises. Measurement will involve increased complexity and judgement including estimation of probabilities of defaults, loss given default, a range of unbiased future economic scenarios, estimation of expected lives, estimation of exposures at default and assessing increases in credit risk. It is expected to have a material financial impact, but it will not be practical to disclose reliable financial impact estimates until the implementation programme is further advanced.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  261


Notes to the financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2015

    

 

 

 

1 Significant accounting policies continued

 

 

Based on the current requirements of CRD IV, the expected increase in the accounting impairment provision would reduce CET1 capital but the impact would be partially mitigated by the ‘excess of expected losses over impairment’ included in the CET1 calculation as discussed on page 183.

 

Classification and measurement

IFRS 9 will require financial assets to be classified on the basis of two criteria:

 

1) the business model within which financial assets are managed, and

 

2) their contractual cash flow characteristics (whether the cash flows represent ‘solely payments of principal and interest’).

 

Financial assets will be measured at amortised cost if they are held within a business model whose objective is to hold financial assets in order to collect contractual cash flows, and their contractual cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest.

 

Financial assets will be measured at fair value through other comprehensive income if they are held within a business model whose objective is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets, and their contractual cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest.

 

Other financial assets are measured at fair value through profit and loss. There is an option to make an irrevocable election for non-traded equity investments to be measured at fair value through other comprehensive income.

 

The accounting for financial liabilities is largely unchanged, except for financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit and loss. Gains and losses on such financial liabilities arising from changes in Barclays’ own credit risk will be presented in other comprehensive income rather than in profit and loss.

 

Hedge accounting

IFRS 9 contains revised requirements on hedge accounting, which are more closely aligned with an entity’s risk management strategies and risk management objectives. The new rules would replace the current quantitative effectiveness test with a simpler version, and requires that an economic relationship exist between the hedged item and the hedging instrument. Under the new rules, voluntary hedge de-designations would not be allowed.

 

Adoption of the IFRS 9 hedge accounting requirements is optional, and certain aspects of IAS 39, being the portfolio fair value hedge for interest rate risk, would continue to be available for entities (while applying IFRS 9 to the remainder of the entity’s hedge accounting relationships) until the IASB completes its accounting for dynamic risk management project. Barclays is considering the most appropriate approach to adopt in this area.

 

IFRS 15 – Revenue from Contracts with Customers

In 2014, the IASB issued IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers which will replace IAS 18 Revenue and IAS 11 Construction Contracts. It applies to all contracts with customers except leases, financial instruments and insurance contracts. The standard will establish a more systematic approach for revenue measurement and recognition. During July 2015, the IASB confirmed the deferral of the effective date by one year to

1 January 2018. The standard has not yet been endorsed by the EU. Adoption of the standard is not expected to have a significant impact.

 

IFRS 16 – Leases

In January 2016, the IASB issued IFRS 16 Leases, which will replace IAS 17 Leases. Under the new requirements, lessees would be required to recognise assets and liabilities arising from both operating and finance leases on the balance sheet. The expected effective date is 1 January 2019. The standard has not yet been endorsed by the EU.

 

Insurance contracts

The IASB also plans to issue a new standard on insurance contracts.

 

The Group is in the process of considering the financial impacts of the new standards.

 

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires the use of estimates. It also requires management to exercise judgement in applying the accounting policies. The key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions are significant to the consolidated and individual financial statements are highlighted under the relevant note. Critical accounting estimates and judgements are disclosed in:

 

   Page       Page  

 

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

  

 

265

  

 

Fair value of financial instruments

   277  

 

Income taxes

  

 

268

  

 

Provisions

   301  

 

Available for sale assets

  

 

276

  

 

Retirement benefit obligations

   323  

 

Other disclosures

To improve transparency and ease of reference, by concentrating related information in one place, and to reduce duplication, certain disclosures required under IFRS have been included within the Risk management section as follows:

 

§   Segmental reporting on pages 225 to 241

 

§   Credit risk management, on pages 132 and 133, including exposures to selected countries

 

§   Market risk, on pages 134 and 135

 

§   Funding risk – capital, on pages 136 and 137

 

§   Funding risk – liquidity, on page 138.

 

These are covered by the Audit opinion included on pages 245 to 252.

 

 

262  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

            

 

 

 

The notes included in this section focus on the results and performance of the Group. Information on the income generated, expenditure incurred, segmental performance, tax, earnings per share and dividends are included here.

            

2 Segmental reporting

 

 

Presentation of segmental reporting

The Group’s segmental reporting is in accordance with IFRS 8 Operating Segments. Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the Executive Committee, which is responsible for allocating resources and assessing performance of the operating segments, and has been identified as the chief operating decision maker. All transactions between business segments are conducted on an arm’s-length basis, with intra-segment revenue and costs being eliminated in Head Office. Income and expenses directly associated with each segment are included in determining business segment performance.

 

An analysis of the Group’s performance by business segment and income by geographic segment is included on pages 225 and 226. Further details on each of the segments are provided on pages 227 to 241.

3 Net interest income

 

 

Accounting for interest income and expense

The Group applies IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement. Interest income on loans and advances at amortised cost, available for sale debt investments, and interest expense on financial liabilities held at amortised cost, are calculated using the effective interest method which allocates interest, and direct and incremental fees and costs, over the expected lives of the assets and liabilities.

 

The effective interest method requires the Group to estimate future cash flows, in some cases based on its experience of customers’ behaviour, considering all contractual terms of the financial instrument, as well as the expected lives of the assets and liabilities. Due to the large number of product types (both assets and liabilities), in the normal course of business there are no individual estimates that are material to the results or financial position.

 

 

        
 
2015
£m
  
  
      
 
2014
£m
  
  
      
 
2013
£m
  
  
 Cash and balances with central banks        158           193           219   
 Available for sale investments        1,387           1,615           1,804   
 Loans and advances to banks        541           446           468   
 Loans and advances to customers        14,732           14,677           15,613   
 Other        383           432           211   
 Interest income        17,201           17,363           18,315   
 Deposits from banks        (177        (199        (201
 Customer accounts        (930        (1,473        (2,656
 Debt securities in issue        (1,722        (1,922        (2,176
 Subordinated liabilities        (1,644        (1,622        (1,572
 Other        (170        (67        (110
 Interest expense        (4,643        (5,283        (6,715
 Net interest income        12,558           12,080           11,600   

Interest income includes £149m (2014: £153m) accrued on impaired loans.

Other interest income principally includes interest income relating to reverse repurchase agreements and hedging activity. Similarly, other interest expense principally includes interest expense relating to repurchase agreements and hedging activity.

Included in net interest income is hedge ineffectiveness as detailed on page 275.

2015

Net interest income increased by 4% to £12,558m, driven by margin improvement in Barclaycard and Africa Banking, and volume growth in both PCB and Barclaycard. This was partially offset by a decrease in Head Office due to a reduction in interest income on AFS investments. Interest income decreased by 1% to £17,201m, driven by a decline in income on AFS investments which fell 14% to £1,387m. Interest expense decreased 12% to £4,643m, driven by reduced interest expense on customer accounts falling by 37% to £930m.

2014

Net interest income increased by 4% to £12,080m, driven by improvements in PCB savings margins and volume growth in Barclaycard, partially offset by a reduction in Africa Banking due to currency movements and the sale and rundown of assets in Non-Core. Interest income decreased by 5% to £17,363m, driven by a reduction in income from loans and advances to customers which fell 6% to £14,677m. Interest expense reduced 21% to £5,283m, driven by a reduction in interest on customer accounts of £1,183m to £1,473m.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  263


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

    

 

 

4 Net fee and commission income

 

 

Accounting for net fee and commission income

The Group applies IAS 18 Revenue. Fees and commissions charged for services provided or received by the Group are recognised as the services are provided, for example on completion of the underlying transaction.

 

 

        
 
2015
£m
  
  
      
 
2014
£m
  
  
      
 
2013
£m
  
  
 Fee and commission income               
 Banking, investment management and credit related fees and commissions        9,497           9,681           10,311   
 Foreign exchange commission        158           155           168   
 Fee and commission income        9,655           9,836           10,479   
 Fee and commission expense        (1,763        (1,662        (1,748
 Net fee and commission income        7,892           8,174           8,731   

2015

Net fee and commission income decreased £282m to £7,892m. This was primarily driven by lower income due to the sale of the US Wealth and Spanish retail businesses and launch of the revised PCB overdraft proposition in mid 2014, which recognises the majority of the overdraft income as net interest income as opposed to fee income. Investment Bank income decreased, driven by lower equity underwriting fees partially offset by higher financial advisory and debt underwriting fees. Growth in Africa Banking was offset by adverse currency movements. These movements were partly offset by increases in Barclaycard, driven by growth in payment volumes.

2014

Net fee and commission income decreased £557m to £8,174m. This was driven by lower fees as a result of decreased debt underwriting fees and declines in cash commissions, reflecting lower volumes in the Investment Bank. Further decreases were caused by the launch of the revised PCB overdraft proposition, which recognises the majority of the overdraft income as net interest income as opposed to fee income, and adverse currency movements in Africa Banking. These movements were partly offset by increases in Barclaycard, driven by growth in payment volumes.

5 Net trading income

 

 

Accounting for net trading income

In accordance with IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, trading positions are held at fair value, and the resulting gains and losses are included in the income statement, together with interest and dividends arising from long and short positions and funding costs relating to trading activities.

 

Income arises from both the sale and purchase of trading positions, margins which are achieved through market making and customer business and from changes in fair value caused by movements in interest and exchange rates, equity prices and other market variables.

 

Own credit gains/losses arise from the fair valuation of financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit and loss. See Note 17 Financial liabilities designated at fair value.

 

 

        
 
2015
£m
  
  
      
 
2014
£m
  
  
      
 
2013
£m
  
  
 Trading income        3,193           3,297           6,773   
 Own credit gains/(losses)        430           34           (220
 Net trading income        3,623           3,331           6,553   

Included within net trading income were gains of £992m (2014: £1,051m loss; 2013: £914m gain) on financial assets designated at fair value and losses of £187m (2014: £65m loss; 2013: £684m loss) on financial liabilities designated at fair value.

2015

Net trading income increased 9% to £3,623m, primarily reflecting a £396m favourable variance in own credit due to widening of credit spreads on Barclays’ issued debt. Trading income decreased by £104m, mainly driven by the continued disposal and running down of certain businesses and fair value movements on the ESHLA portfolio within Non-Core, and depreciation of ZAR against GBP. This was partially offset by increases in various Investment Bank businesses driven by higher volatility and trading activity during the year.

2014

Net trading income decreased 49% to £3,331m, primarily reflecting a £2,541m decrease in trading income, as lower volatility and subdued trading activity combined with tighter spreads reduced income across a number of businesses. Disposals and running down of certain Non-Core businesses and the £935m fair value reduction on the ESHLA portfolio (see Note 18 for further details) also contributed to the lower income. This was partially offset by a £254m favourable variance in own credit gains/losses.

 

264  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

6 Net investment income

 

 

Accounting for net investment income

Dividends are recognised when the right to receive the dividend has been established. Other accounting policies relating to net investment income are set out in Note 16 Available for sale financial assets and Note 14 Financial assets designated at fair value.

 

 

        
 
2015
£m
  
  
      
 
2014
£m
  
  
      
 
2013
£m
  
  

Net gain from disposal of available for sale investments

       374           620           145   

Dividend income

       8           9           14   

Net gain from financial instruments designated at fair value

       238           233           203   

Other investment income

       518           466           318   

Net investment income

       1,138           1,328           680   

2015

Net investment income decreased by £190m to £1,138m. This was largely driven by lower gains and fewer disposals of available for sale investments due to unfavourable market conditions. During the year, a gain of £496m (2014: £461m) was recognised in other investment income due to the final and full legal settlement in respect of US Lehman acquisition assets.

2014

Net investment income increased by £648m to £1,328m. This was largely driven by an increase in disposals of available for sale investments due to favourable market conditions and increases in other investment income as a result of greater certainty regarding the recoverability of certain assets not yet received from the 2008 US Lehman acquisition (2014: £461m gain; 2013: £259m gain).

7 Credit impairment charges and other provisions

 

 

Accounting for the impairment of financial assets

 

Loans and other assets held at amortised cost

In accordance with IAS 39, the Group assesses at each balance sheet date whether there is objective evidence that loan assets or available for sale financial investments (debt or equity) will not be recovered in full and, wherever necessary, recognises an impairment loss in the income statement.

 

An impairment loss is recognised if there is objective evidence of impairment as a result of events that have occurred and these have adversely impacted the estimated future cash flows from the assets. These events include:

 

§  becoming aware of significant financial difficulty of the issuer or obligor

 

§  a breach of contract, such as a default or delinquency in interest or principal payments

 

§  the Group, for economic or legal reasons relating to the borrower’s financial difficulty, grants a concession that it would not otherwise consider

 

§  it becomes probable that the borrower will enter bankruptcy or other financial reorganisation

 

§  the disappearance of an active market for that financial asset because of financial difficulties

 

§  observable data at a portfolio level indicating that there is a measurable decrease in the estimated future cash flows, although the decrease cannot yet be ascribed to individual financial assets in the portfolio – such as adverse changes in the payment status of borrowers in the portfolio or national or local economic conditions that correlate with defaults on the assets in the portfolio.

 

Impairment assessments are conducted individually for significant assets, which comprise all wholesale customer loans and larger retail business loans and collectively for smaller loans and for portfolio level risks, such as country or sectoral risks. For the purposes of the assessment, loans with similar credit risk characteristics are grouped together – generally on the basis of their product type, industry, geographical location, collateral type, past due status and other factors relevant to the evaluation of expected future cash flows.

 

The impairment assessment includes estimating the expected future cash flows from the asset or the group of assets, which are then discounted using the original effective interest rate calculated for the asset. If this is lower than the carrying value of the asset or the portfolio, an impairment allowance is raised.

 

If, in a subsequent period, the amount of the impairment loss decreases, and the decrease can be related objectively to an event occurring after the impairment was recognised, the previously recognised impairment loss is reversed by adjusting the allowance account. The amount of the reversal is recognised in the income statement.

 

Following impairment, interest income continues to be recognised at the original effective interest rate on the restated carrying amount, representing the unwind of the discount of the expected cash flows, including the principal due on non-accrual loans.

 

Uncollectable loans are written off against the related allowance for loan impairment on completion of the Group’s internal processes and all recoverable amounts have been collected. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited to the income statement.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  265


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

    

 

 

7 Credit impairment charges and other provisions continued

 

 

Available for sale financial assets

 

Impairment of available for sale debt instruments

Debt instruments are assessed for impairment in the same way as loans. If impairment is deemed to have occurred, the cumulative decline in the fair value of the instrument that has previously been recognised in the AFS reserve is removed from reserves and recognised in the income statement. This may be reversed if there is evidence that the circumstances of the issuer have improved.

 

Impairment of available for sale equity instruments

Where there has been a prolonged or significant decline in the fair value of an equity instrument below its acquisition cost, it is deemed to be impaired. The cumulative net loss that has been previously recognised directly in the AFS reserve is removed from reserves and recognised in the income statement.

 

Increases in the fair value of equity instruments after impairment are recognised directly in other comprehensive income. Further declines in the fair value of equity instruments after impairment are recognised in the income statement.

 

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The calculation of impairment involves the use of judgement, based on the Group’s experience of managing credit risk.

 

Within the retail and small businesses portfolios, which comprise large numbers of small homogenous assets with similar risk characteristics where credit scoring techniques are generally used, statistical techniques are used to calculate impairment allowances on a portfolio basis, based on historical recovery rates and assumed emergence periods. These statistical analyses use as primary inputs the extent to which accounts in the portfolio are in arrears and historical information on the eventual losses encountered from such delinquent portfolios. There are many such models in use, each tailored to a product, line of business or customer category. Judgement and knowledge is needed in selecting the statistical methods to use when the models are developed or revised. The impairment allowance reflected in the financial statements for these portfolios is therefore considered to be reasonable and supportable. The impairment charge reflected in the income statement for retail portfolios is £1,808m (2014: £1,844m; 2013: £2,161m) and amounts to 86% (2014: 84%; 2013: 71%) of the total impairment charge on loans and advances.

 

For individually significant assets, impairment allowances are calculated on an individual basis and all relevant considerations that have a bearing on the expected future cash flows are taken into account (for example, the business prospects for the customer, the realisable value of collateral, the Group’s position relative to other claimants, the reliability of customer information and the likely cost and duration of the work-out process). The level of the impairment allowance is the difference between the value of the discounted expected future cash flows (discounted at the loan’s original effective interest rate), and its carrying amount. Subjective judgements are made in the calculation of future cash flows. Furthermore, judgements change with time as new information becomes available or as work-out strategies evolve, resulting in frequent revisions to the impairment allowance as individual decisions are taken. Changes in these estimates would result in a change in the allowances and have a direct impact on the impairment charge. The impairment charge reflected in the financial statements in relation to wholesale portfolios is £289m (2014: £360m; 2013: £901m) and amounts to 14% (2014: 16%; 2013: 29%) of the total impairment charge on loans and advances. Further information on impairment allowances and related credit information is set out within the Risk review.

 

 

        

 

2015

£m

  

  

      

 

2014

£m

  

  

      

 

2013

£m

  

  

New and increased impairment allowances

       3,056           3,230           3,929   

Releases

       (547        (809        (683

Recoveries

       (400        (221        (201

Impairment charges on loans and advances

       2,109           2,200           3,045   

Provision (releases)/charges for undrawn contractually committed facilities and guarantees provided

       (12        4           17   

Loan impairment

       2,097           2,204           3,062   

Available for sale investment

       17           (31        1   

Reverse repurchase agreements

                 (5        8   

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

       2,114           2,168           3,071   

2015

Loan impairment fell 5% to £2,097m, reflecting lower impairment in PCB and Non-Core, partially offset by higher charges in the Investment Bank and Barclaycard.

2014

Loan impairment fell 28% to £2,204m, reflecting lower impairment in Non-Core, PCB, and Africa Banking partially offset by higher charges in Barclaycard.

 

266  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

8 Operating expenses

 

 

Accounting for staff costs

The Group applies IAS 19 Employee benefits in its accounting for most of the components of staff costs.

 

Short-term employee benefits – salaries, accrued performance costs and social security are recognised over the period in which the employees provide the services to which the payments relate.

 

Performance costs – recognised to the extent that the Group has a present obligation to its employees that can be measured reliably and are recognised over the period of service that employees are required to work to qualify for the services.

 

Deferred cash bonus awards and deferred share bonus awards are made to employees to incentivise performance over the vesting period. To receive payment under an award, employees must provide service over the vesting period, typically three years from the grant date. The period over which the expense for deferred cash and share bonus awards is recognised is based upon the common understanding between the employee and the Group and the terms and conditions of the award. The Group considers that it is appropriate to recognise the awards over the period from the date of grant to the date that the awards vest as this is the period over which the employees understand that they must provide service in order to receive awards. The table on page 91 details the relevant award dates, payment dates and the period in which the income statement charge arises for bonuses. No expense has been recognised in 2015 for the deferred bonuses that will be granted in March 2016, as they are dependent upon future performance rather than performance during 2015.

 

The accounting policies for share based payments, and pensions and other post retirement benefits are included in Note 34 and Note 35 respectively.

 

 

        
 
2015
£m
  
  
      
 
2014
£m
  
  
      
 
2013
£m
  
  
 Infrastructure costs               
 Property and equipment        1,353           1,570           1,610   
 Depreciation of property, plant and equipment        554           585           647   
 Operating lease rentals        500           594           645   
 Amortisation of intangible assets        617           522           480   
 Impairment of property, equipment and intangible assets        153           172           149   
 Gain on property disposals        3                       
 Total infrastructure costs        3,180           3,443           3,531   
 Administration and general costs               
 Consultancy, legal and professional fees        1,191           1,104           1,253   
 Subscriptions, publications, stationery and communications        760           842           869   
 Marketing, advertising and sponsorship        536           558           583   
 Travel and accommodation        218           213           307   
 UK bank levy        476           462           504   
 Goodwill impairment        102                     79   
 Other administration and general expenses        245           442           518   
 Total administration and general costs        3,528           3,621           4,113   
 Recurring staff cost        10,389           11,005           12,155   
 Gains on retirement benefits        (429)                       
 Staff costs        9,960           11,005           12,155   
 Provision for UK customer redress        2,772           1,110           2,000   
 Provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange        1,237           1,250           173   
 Operating expenses        20,677           20,429           21,972   

For information on staff costs, refer to pages 90 and 91 of the Remuneration Report.

2015

Operating expenses have increased by 1% to £20,677m (2014: £20,429m) attributable to an increase in provisions for UK customer redress including PPI and an increase in impairment of goodwill partially offset by a decrease in staff costs (includes a gain on Retirement benefits, refer to Note 35 of £429m) and infrastructure costs reflecting savings from strategic cost programmes.

2014

Operating expenses have reduced by 7% to £20,429m, primarily driven by savings from strategic cost programmes, including a 5% reduction in headcount and currency movements, lower provisions for UK customer redress including PPI, reduced IT and infrastructure spend and non-occurrence of various provisions raised last year. This was partially offset by the charge of £1,250m (2013: £173m) for ongoing investigations and litigation relating to Foreign Exchange.

The impact of strategic cost programmes have driven savings across infrastructure and administration costs. Staff costs have decreased by 9% to £11,005m, reflecting a 5% net reduction in headcount and reductions in incentive awards granted.

9 Profit/(loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures

During the year, the loss on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures was £637m (2014: loss of £471m; 2013: gain of £6m), principally relating to the sale of Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses. Please refer to Note 44 Non-current assets held for sale and associated liabilities.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  267


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

    

 

 

 

10 Tax

 

 

Accounting for income taxes

Barclays applies IAS 12 Income Taxes in accounting for taxes on income. Income tax payable on taxable profits (Current Tax) is recognised as an expense in the period in which the profits arise. Withholding taxes are also treated as income taxes. Income tax recoverable on tax allowable losses is recognised as a current tax asset only to the extent that it is regarded as recoverable by offset against taxable profits arising in the current or prior period. Current tax is measured using tax rates and tax laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

 

Deferred tax is provided in full, using the liability method, on temporary differences arising from the differences between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the consolidated financial statements. Deferred tax is determined using tax rates and legislation enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date which are expected to apply when the deferred tax asset is realised or the deferred tax liability is settled. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are only offset when there is both a legal right to set-off and an intention to settle on a net basis.

 

 

        
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  
      
 
2013
£m
  
  

Current tax charge

            

Current year

       1,901         1,421           1,997   

Adjustment for prior years

       (183      (19        156   
         1,718         1,402           2,153   

Deferred tax charge/(credit)

            

Current year

       (346      75           (68)   

Adjustment for prior years

       78         (66        (514)   
         (268      9           (582)   

Tax charge

       1,450         1,411           1,571   

Tax relating to each component of other comprehensive income can be found in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income which additionally includes within Other a tax credit of £21m (2014: £42m charge) principally relating to share based payments.

The table below shows the reconciliation between the actual tax charge and the tax charge that would result from applying the standard UK corporation tax rate to the Group’s profit before tax.

 

        
 
2015
£m
  
  
      
 
2015
%
  
  
      
 
2014
£m
  
  
      
 
2014
%
  
  
      
 
2013
£m
  
  
      
 
2013
%
  
  

Profit before tax from continuing operations

       2,073                      2,256                      2,868              

Tax charge based on the standard UK corporation tax rate of 20.25%

(2014: 21.50%, 2013: 23.25%)

       420           20.25           485           21.50           667           23.25   

Non-creditable taxes including withholding taxes

       309           14.9           329           14.6           559           19.5   

Non-deductible provisions for UK customer redress

       283           13.6                                           

Non-UK profits at statutory tax rates different from the UK statutory tax rate

       274           13.2           253           11.2           328           11.4   

Non-deductible provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

       261           12.6           387           17.2                       

Non-deductible expenses including UK bank levy

       207           10.0           285           12.6           296           10.3   

Impact of change in tax rates

       158           7.6           9           0.4           (159        (5.5

Tax adjustments in respect of share based payments

       30           1.4           21           0.9           (13        (0.5

Non-deductible impairments and losses on disposal

       26           1.3           234           10.4                       

Non-taxable gains and income

       (241        (11.6        (282        (12.5        (234        (8.2

Adjustments in respect of prior years

       (105        (5.1        (85        (3.8        (358        (12.5

Changes in recognition and measurement of deferred tax assets

       (77        (3.7        (183        (8.1        409           14.3   

Other items

       (52        (2.5        40           1.8           137           4.8   

Non-UK losses at statutory tax rates different from the UK statutory tax rate

       (43        (2.1        (82        (3.6        (61        (2.1

Tax charge

       1,450           69.9           1,411           62.5           1,571           54.8   

The effective tax rate of 69.9% (2014: 62.5%) increased from the previous year. This is mainly due to provisions for UK customer redress, that were non-deductible in 2015 as a result of changes introduced by the UK summer Budget, and the impact of changes to tax rates. The changes to tax rates in the period that had an adverse impact on the 2015 tax charge were the reduction of the local New York tax rate and the increase of the UK tax rate, specifically through the introduction of the new corporation tax surcharge that applies to banks. These tax rate changes resulted in the carrying value of US deferred tax assets being reduced and are further explained later in Note 10.

The effective tax rate of 69.9% on statutory profit before tax is significantly higher than the effective tax rate on adjusted profit before tax. For further details on the adjusted effective tax rate, please refer to page 221 of the financial review.

 

268  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

 

10 Tax continued

Current tax assets and liabilities

Movements on current tax assets and liabilities were as follows:

 

      
 
         2015 
£m 
  
  
    
 
         2014 
£m 
  
  

Assets

     334          219    

Liabilities

     (1,021)         (1,042)   

As at 1 January

     (687)         (823)   

Income statement

     (1,718)         (1,402)   

Other comprehensive income

             (26)   

Corporate income tax paid

     1,670          1,552    

Other movements

     241          12    
       (488)         (687)   

Assets

     415          334    

Liabilities

     (903)         (1,021)   

As at 31 December

     (488)         (687)   

Deferred tax assets and liabilities

     

The deferred tax amounts on the balance sheet were as follows:

 

     
      

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

    

 

2014 

£m 

  

  

Barclays Group US Inc (BGUS) – US tax group

     1,903          1,588    

Barclays Bank PLC (US Branch) – US tax group

     1,569          1,591    

Barclays PLC – UK tax group

     411          461    

Other

     612          490    

Deferred tax asset

     4,495          4,130    

Deferred tax liability

     (122)         (262)   

Net deferred tax

     4,373          3,868    

US deferred tax assets in BGUS and the US Branch

The deferred tax asset in BGUS of £1,903m (2014: £1,588m) includes £449m (2014: £348m) relating to tax losses and the deferred tax asset in the US Branch of £1,569m (2014: £1,591m) includes £244m (2014: £479m) relating to tax losses. Under US tax rules losses can be carried forward and offset against profits for a period of 20 years. The losses first arose in 2011 in BGUS and 2008 in the US Branch and therefore any unused amounts may begin to expire in 2031 and 2028 respectively. The remaining US deferred tax assets relate primarily to temporary differences for which there is no time limit on recovery.

The valuation of the Group’s US deferred tax assets was adjusted downwards in 2015 as a result of both the reduction in the local New York rate of tax, which affected the deferred tax asset in both BGUS and the US Branch, and the introduction of the new UK corporation tax surcharge, which affected the deferred tax asset in the US Branch. The US Branch deferred tax asset is stated net of a measurement for UK tax because Barclays Bank PLC is subject to UK tax on the profits of its non-UK branches.

The deferred tax asset for the BGUS tax loss is projected to be fully utilised in 2017 and the deferred tax asset for the US Branch loss to be fully utilised in 2018.

UK tax group deferred tax asset

The deferred tax asset in the UK tax group of £411m (2014: £461m) relates entirely to temporary differences (2014: £245m related to tax losses). Based on profit forecasts, it is probable that there will be sufficient future taxable profits available against which the temporary differences will be utilised.

Other deferred tax assets

The deferred tax asset of £612m (2014: £490m) in other entities within the Group includes £209m (2014: £243m) relating to tax losses carried forward. These deferred tax assets relate to a number of different territories and their recognition is based on profit forecasts or local country laws which indicate that it is probable that the losses and temporary differences will be utilised.

Of the deferred tax asset of £612m (2014: £490m), an amount of £106m (2014: £140m) relates to entities which have suffered a loss in either the current or prior year. This has been taken into account in reaching the above conclusion that these deferred tax assets will be fully recovered in the future.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  269


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

    

 

 

10 Tax continued

The table below shows movements on deferred tax assets and liabilities during the year. The amounts are different from those disclosed on the balance sheet and in the preceding table as they are presented before offsetting asset and liability balances where there is a legal right to set-off and an intention to settle on a net basis.

 

      

 

 

 

Fixed asset

timing

differences

£m

  

  

  

  

    

 
 

 

Available

for sale
investments

£m

  

  
  

  

    
 
 
Cash flow
hedges
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Retirement
benefit
obligations
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Loan
impairment
allowance
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
Other
provisions
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Tax losses
carried
forward
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
Share based
payments
and deferred
compensation
£m
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
Other
£m
  
  
    
 
Total
£m
  
  

Assets

     1,542         18         5         321         176         233         1,315         729         951          5,290    

Liabilities

     (555      (35      (464                                              (368)         (1,422)   

At 1 January 2015

     987         (17      (459      321         176         233         1,315         729         583          3,868    

Income statement

     779         (13      1         (119      (14      21         (540      (126      279          268    

Other comprehensive income

             (14      221         (261                      122         (10      (21)         37    

Other movements

     48         2         3         10         (5      7         5         30         100          200    
       1,814         (42      (234      (49      157         261         902         623         941          4,373    

Assets

     2,008         28         5         95         157         261         902         623         1,511          5,590    

Liabilities

     (194      (70      (239      (144                                      (570)         (1,217)   

At 31 December 2015

     1,814         (42      (234      (49      157         261         902         623         941          4,373    
                                                                                           

Assets

     1,525         53         5         490         376         360         1,235         762         1,078          5,884    

Liabilities

     (761      (61      (87      (9                                      (532)         (1,450)   

At 1 January 2014

     764         (8      (82      481         376         360         1,235         762         546          4,434    

Income statement

     172         84         (1      (54      70         (87      4         (40      (157)         (9)   

Other comprehensive income

             (104      (380      (63                              (10      (5)         (562)   

Other movements

     51         11         4         (43      (270      (40      76         17         199            
       987         (17      (459      321         176         233         1,315         729         583          3,868    

Assets

     1,542         18         5         321         176         233         1,315         729         951          5,290    

Liabilities

     (555      (35      (464                                              (368)         (1,422)   

At 31 December 2014

     987         (17      (459      321         176         233         1,315         729         583          3,868    

Other movements include deferred tax amounts relating to acquisitions, disposals and exchange gains and losses.

The amount of deferred tax liability expected to be settled after more than 12 months is £675m (2014: £1,123m). The amount of deferred tax assets expected to be recovered after more than 12 months is £4,838m (2014: £4,845m). These amounts are before offsetting asset and liability balances where there is a legal right to set-off and an intention to settle on a net basis.

Unrecognised deferred tax

Deferred tax assets have not been recognised in respect of gross deductible temporary differences of £51m (2014: £2,332m), gross tax losses of £13,456m (2014: £9,764m) which includes capital losses of £3,838m (2014: £3,522m), and unused tax credits of £452m (2014: £405m). Of these tax losses, £389m (2014: £341m) expire within five years, £13m (2014: £18m) expire within six to ten years, £124m (2014: £812m) expire within 11 to 20 years and £12,930m (2014: £8,593m) can be carried forward indefinitely. Deferred tax assets have not been recognised in respect of these items because it is not probable that future taxable profits and gains will be available against which they can be utilised.

Deferred tax is not recognised in respect of the value of the Group’s investments in subsidiaries, branches and associates where the Group is able to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences and it is probable that such differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future. It is not practicable to determine the amount of income tax that would be payable were such temporary differences to reverse.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The Group is subject to corporate income taxes in numerous jurisdictions and the calculation of the Group’s tax charge and worldwide provisions for corporate income taxes necessarily involves a degree of estimation and judgement. There are many transactions and calculations for which the ultimate tax treatment is uncertain and cannot be determined until resolution has been reached with the relevant tax authority. The Group has a number of open tax returns with various tax authorities with whom there is active dialogue. Liabilities relating to these open and judgemental matters are based on estimates of whether additional taxes will be due after taking into account external advice, where appropriate. Where the final tax outcome of these matters is different from the amounts provided, such differences will impact the tax charge in a future period. There is no individual position currently subject to challenge by a tax authority that if resolved in an adverse manner would materially impact the Group’s financial position.

Deferred tax assets have been recognised based on business profit forecasts. Further detail on the recognition of deferred tax assets is provided in the deferred tax assets and liabilities section of this tax note.

 

270  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

11 Earnings per share

 

        
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  
    
 
2013
£m
  
  

(Loss)/profit attributable to equity holders of parent from continuing operations

  

     (394      (174      540   

Tax credit on profit after tax attributable to other equity holders

  

     70         54           

Dilutive impact of convertible options

  

                     1   

(Loss)/profit attributable to equity holders of parent from continuing operations including dilutive impact of convertible options

  

     (324      (120      541   
                 
        
 
2015
million
  
  
    
 
2014
million
  
  
    
 
2013
million
  
  

Basic weighted average number of shares in issue

  

     16,687         16,329         14,308   

Number of potential ordinary shares

  

     367         296         360   

Diluted weighted average number of shares

  

     17,054         16,625         14,668   
                 
       Basic earnings per share                 Diluted earnings per sharea            
      
 
2015
p
  
  
    
 
2014
p
  
  
    
 
2013
p
  
  
    

 

2015

p

  

  

    

 

2014

p

  

  

    

 

2013

p

  

  

(Loss)/earnings per ordinary share from continuing operations

     (1.9      (0.7      3.8         (1.9      (0.7      3.7   

The calculation of basic earnings per share is based on the profit attributable to equity holders of the parent and the basic weighted average number of shares excluding treasury shares held in employee benefit trusts or held for trading. When calculating the diluted earnings per share, the weighted average number of shares in issue is adjusted for the effects of all dilutive potential ordinary shares held in respect of Barclays PLC, totalling 367m (2014: 296m) shares. In addition, the profit attributable to equity holders of the parent is adjusted for the dilutive impact of the potential conversion of outstanding options held in respect of Barclays Africa Group Limited. The increase in the number of potential ordinary shares is due to the average share price of £2.52 (2014: £2.39) being greater than the average strike price of £2.11 (2014: £2.15). During the year, the total number of share options granted under employee share schemes was 553m (2014: 666m). The schemes have strike prices ranging from £1.30 to £4.35.

Of the total number of employee share options and share awards at 31 December 2015, 23m (2014: 24m) were anti-dilutive.

The 358m increase in the basic weighted average number of shares since 31 December 2014 to 16,687m is due to shares issued under employee share schemes and the Scrip Dividend Programme.

12 Dividends on ordinary shares

The Directors have approved a final dividend in respect of 2015 of 3.5p per ordinary share of 25p each which will be paid on 5 April 2016 to shareholders on the Share Register on 11 March 2016. As at 31 December 2015, there were 16,805m ordinary shares in issue. The financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2015 does not reflect this dividend, which will be accounted for in shareholders’ equity as an appropriation of retained profits in the year ending 31 December 2016. The 2015 financial statements include the 2015 interim dividends of £503m (2014: £493m) and final dividend declared in relation to 2014 of £578m (2014: £564m).

 

 

Note

a Potential ordinary shares shall be treated as dilutive when, and only when, their conversion to ordinary shares would increase loss per share.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  271


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

 

 

 

The notes included in this section focus on assets and liabilities the Group holds and recognises at fair value. Fair value refers to the price that would be received to sell an asset or the price that would be paid to transfer a liability in an arm’s-length transaction with a willing counterparty, which may be an observable market price or, where there is no quoted price for the instrument, may be an estimate based on available market data. Detail regarding the Group’s approach to managing market risk can be found on pages 134 and 135.

13 Trading portfolio

 

 

Accounting for trading portfolio assets and liabilities

In accordance with IAS 39, all assets and liabilities held for trading purposes are held at fair value with gains and losses in the changes in fair value taken to the income statement in Net trading income (Note 5).

 

 

      Trading portfolio assets      Trading portfolio liabilities  
     

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

 

2015 

£m 

 

2014  

£m  

Debt securities and other eligible bills

    45,576         65,997      (24,985)   (28,739) 

Equity securities

    29,055         44,576      (8,982)   (16,022) 

Traded loans

    2,474         2,693      –    –  

Commodities

    243         1,451      –    (363) 

Trading portfolio assets/(liabilities)

    77,348         114,717      (33,967)   (45,124) 

 

14 Financial assets designated at fair value

 

 

Accounting for financial assets designated at fair value

In accordance with IAS 39, financial assets may be designated at fair value, with gains and losses taken to the income statement in Net trading income (Note 5) and Net investment income (Note 6). The Group has the ability to make the fair value designation when holding the instruments at fair value reduces an accounting mismatch (caused by an offsetting liability or asset being held at fair value), or is managed by the Group on the basis of its fair value, or includes terms that have substantive derivative characteristics (Note 15 Derivative financial instruments).

 

The details on how the fair value amounts are arrived for financial assets designated at fair value are described in Fair value of assets and liabilities (Note 18).

 

    

        
                                                        

2015 

£m 

 

2014 

£m 

Loans and advances

       17,913    20,198 

Debt securities

       1,383    4,448 

Equity securities

       6,197    6,306 

Reverse repurchase agreementsa

       49,513    5,236 

Customers’ assets held under investment contracts

       1,449    1,643 

Other financial assets

                   375    469 

Financial assets designated at fair value

                   76,830    38,300 

Credit risk of loans and advances designated at fair value and related credit derivatives

The following table shows the maximum exposure to credit risk, the changes in fair value attributable to changes in credit risk, and the cumulative changes in fair value since initial recognition together with the amount by which related credit derivatives mitigate this risk:

 

      
 
Maximum exposure as at
31 December
  
  
    

 

Changes in fair value

during the year ended

  

  

    

 

Cumulative changes in

fair value from inception

  

  

      
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  
    
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014 
£m 
  
  
    
 
2015 
£m 
  
  
    
 
2014 
£m 
  
  

Loans and advances designated at fair value, attributable to credit risk

     17,913         20,198         69         (112)         (629)         (828)   

Value mitigated by related credit derivatives

     417         359         26         –          42          18    

 

 

Note

a During 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

 

272  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

 

15 Derivative financial instruments

 

 

Accounting for derivatives

Derivative instruments are contracts whose value is derived from one or more underlying financial instruments or indices defined in the contract. They include swaps, forward rate agreements, futures, options and combinations of these instruments and primarily affect the Group’s net interest income, net trading income, net fee and commission income and derivative assets and liabilities. Notional amounts of the contracts are not recorded on the balance sheet.

 

The Group applies IAS 39. All derivative instruments are held at fair value through profit or loss. Derivatives are classified as assets when their fair value is positive or as liabilities when their fair value is negative. This includes terms included in a contract or other financial asset or liability (the host), which, had it been a stand-alone contract, would have met the definition of a derivative. These are separated from the host and accounted for in the same way as a derivative.

 

Hedge accounting

The Group applies hedge accounting to represent, to the maximum possible extent permitted under accounting standards, the economic effects of its interest and currency risk management strategies. Derivatives are used to hedge interest rate, exchange rate, commodity, and equity exposures and exposures to certain indices such as house price indices and retail price indices related to non-trading positions. Where derivatives are held for risk management purposes, and when transactions meet the required criteria for documentation and hedge effectiveness, the Group applies fair value hedge accounting, cash flow hedge accounting, or hedging of a net investment in a foreign operation, as appropriate to the risks being hedged.

 

Fair value hedge accounting

Changes in fair value of derivatives that qualify and are designated as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that are attributable to the hedged risk. The fair value changes adjust the carrying value of the hedged asset or liability held at amortised cost.

 

If hedge relationships no longer meet the criteria for hedge accounting, hedge accounting is discontinued. For fair value hedges of interest rate risk, the fair value adjustment to the hedged item is amortised to the income statement over the period to maturity of the previously designated hedge relationship using the effective interest method. If the hedged item is sold or repaid, the unamortised fair value adjustment is recognised immediately in the income statement.

 

Cash flow hedge accounting

For qualifying cash flow hedges, the fair value gain or loss associated with the effective portion of the cash flow hedge is recognised initially in other comprehensive income, and then recycled to the income statement in the periods when the hedged item will affect profit or loss. Any ineffective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in the income statement immediately.

 

When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss existing in equity at that time remains in equity and is recognised when the hedged item is ultimately recognised in the income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was recognised in equity is immediately transferred to the income statement.

 

Hedges of net investments

The Group’s net investments in foreign operations, including monetary items accounted for as part of the net investment, are hedged for foreign currency risks using both derivatives and foreign currency borrowings. Hedges of net investments are accounted for similarly to cash flow hedges; the effective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is being recognised directly in other comprehensive income and the ineffective portion being recognised immediately in the income statement. The cumulative gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income is recognised in the income statement on the disposal or partial disposal of the foreign operation, or other reductions in the Group’s investment in the operation.

 

 

Total derivatives

                                                     
     2015         2014   
  

 

 

 

Notional

 

  

        

 

 

 

Notional

 

  

     
     contract         Fair value         contract         Fair value   
     amount         Assets         Liabilities         amount         Assets         Liabilities   
       £m         £m         £m         £m         £m         £m   

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

     29,437,102         326,772         (323,788      32,624,342         438,270         (438,623

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

     316,605         937         (464      268,448         1,639         (697

Derivative assets/(liabilities)

     29,753,707         327,709         (324,252      32,892,790         439,909         (439,320

The fair value of gross derivative assets decreased by 26% to £328bn, driven by decrease in interest rate derivatives of £79bn due to net trade reduction and an increase in the major interest rate forward curves and a decrease in foreign exchange derivatives of £19bn, materially reflecting trade maturities. Information on further netting of derivative financial instruments is included within Note 19 Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities.

Trading derivatives are managed within the Group’s market risk management policies, which are outlined on pages 134 and 135.

The Group’s exposure to credit risk arising from derivative contracts are outlined in the Credit Risk section on page 163.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  273


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

 

 

15 Derivative financial instruments continued

The fair values and notional amounts of derivative instruments held for trading are set out in the following table:

 

Derivatives held for trading

                                                     
     2015         2014   
      
 
 

 

Notional
contract
amount

£m

  
  
  

  

     Fair value        
 
 

 

Notional
contract
amount

£m

  
  
  

  

  

 

 

 

Fair value

 

  

       

 

Assets

£m

  

  

    

 

Liabilities

£m

  

  

       

 

Assets

£m

  

  

    

 

Liabilities

£m

  

  

Foreign exchange derivatives

                 

Forward foreign exchange

     1,277,863         17,613         (19,433      1,684,832         31,883         (34,611

Currency swaps

     1,006,640         30,703         (32,449      1,109,795         32,209         (33,919

OTC options bought and sold

     924,832         6,436         (6,771      895,226         10,267         (10,665

OTC derivatives

     3,209,335         54,752         (58,653      3,689,853         74,359         (79,195

Foreign exchange derivatives cleared by central counterparty

     9,308         33         (44      11,382         56         (70

Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold

     6,071         13         (12      57,623         18         (16

Foreign exchange derivatives

     3,224,714         54,798         (58,709      3,758,858         74,433         (79,281

Interest rate derivatives

                 

Interest rate swaps

     4,600,472         159,040         (148,475      5,779,015         209,962         (200,096

Forward rate agreements

     371,510         440         (390      467,812         794         (722

OTC options bought and sold

     2,634,527         48,995         (49,001      3,083,200         67,039         (67,575

OTC derivatives

     7,606,509         208,475         (197,866      9,330,027         277,795         (268,393

Interest rate derivatives cleared by central counterparty

     11,407,745         21,871         (22,603      15,030,090         30,166         (31,152

Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold

     5,470,872         281         (263      2,210,602         382         (336

Interest rate derivatives

     24,485,126         230,627         (220,732      26,570,719         308,343         (299,881

Credit derivatives

                 

OTC swaps

     671,389         14,087         (12,693      896,386         18,864         (17,825

Credit derivatives cleared by central counterparty

     277,257         4,094         (3,931      287,577         4,643         (4,542

Credit derivatives

     948,646         18,181         (16,624      1,183,963         23,507         (22,367

Equity and stock index derivatives

                 

OTC options bought and sold

     53,645         5,507         (7,746      67,151         6,461         (9,517

Equity swaps and forwards

     98,264         1,794         (3,855      102,663         1,823         (3,532

OTC derivatives

     151,909         7,301         (11,601      169,814         8,284         (13,049

Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold

     429,592         6,498         (6,851      490,960         6,560         (6,542

Equity and stock index derivatives

     581,501         13,799         (18,452      660,774         14,844         (19,591

Commodity derivatives

                 

OTC options bought and sold

     21,959         1,402         (1,408      38,196         1,592         (1,227

Commodity swaps and forwards

     29,161         3,645         (3,397      61,639         7,985         (8,175

OTC derivatives

     51,120         5,047         (4,805      99,835         9,577         (9,402

Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold

     145,995         4,320         (4,466      350,193         7,566         (8,101

Commodity derivatives

     197,115         9,367         (9,271      450,028         17,143         (17,503

Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

     29,437,102         326,772         (323,788      32,624,342         438,270         (438,623

Total OTC derivatives held for trading

     11,690,262         289,662         (285,618      14,185,915         388,879         (387,864

Total derivatives cleared by central counterparty held for trading

     11,694,310         25,998         (26,578      15,329,049         34,865         (35,764

Total exchange traded derivatives held for trading

     6,052,530         11,112         (11,592      3,109,378         14,526         (14,995

Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

     29,437,102         326,772         (323,788      32,624,342         438,270         (438,623

 

274  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

15 Derivative financial instruments continued

The fair values and notional amounts of derivative instruments held for risk management are set out in the following table:

 

Derivatives held for risk management

                                                          
        2015         2014   
           
 
 
 
Notional
contract
amount
£m
  
  
  
  
  

 

 

 

Fair value

 

  

    
 
 
 
Notional
contract
amount
£m
  
  
  
  
     Fair value   
          
 
Assets
£m
  
  
    
 
Liabilities
£m
  
  
       
 
Assets
£m
  
  
    
 
Liabilities
£m
  
  

Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges

                    

Currency swaps

        1,357         133                                   

Interest rate swaps

        14,198         162         (115      19,218         223         (60

Forward foreign exchange

        759         5                 930         17           

Interest rate derivatives cleared by central counterparty

          147,072                         82,550                   

Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges

          163,386         300         (115      102,698         240         (60

Derivatives designated as fair value hedges

                    

Interest rate swaps

        13,798         637         (264      27,345         1,379         (590

Forward foreign exchange

        2,527                 (32                        

Interest rate derivatives cleared by central counterparty

          134,939                         135,553                   

Derivatives designated as fair value hedges

          151,264         637         (296      162,898         1,379         (590

Derivatives designated as hedges of net investments

                    

Forward foreign exchange

          1,955                 (53      2,852         20         (47

Derivatives designated as hedges of net investments

          1,955                 (53      2,852         20         (47

Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

          316,605         937         (464      268,448         1,639         (697

Total OTC derivatives held for risk management

        34,594         937         (464      50,345         1,639         (697

Total derivatives cleared by central counterparty held for risk management

          282,011                         218,103                   

Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

          316,605         937         (464      268,448         1,639         (697

The Group has hedged the following forecast cash flows, which primarily vary with interest rates. These cash flows are expected to impact the income statement in the following periods, excluding any hedge adjustments that may be applied:

 

  

            Up to         One to         Two to         Three to         Four to         More than   
   Total      one year         two years         three years         four years         five years         five years   
     £m      £m         £m         £m         £m         £m         £m   

2015

                    

Forecast receivable cash flows

        4,952      555         816         875         813         633         1,260   

Forecast payable cash flows

   872      769         35         31         22         11         4   

2014

                    

Forecast receivable cash flows

   4,277      308         491         695         729         651         1,403   

Forecast payable cash flows

   972      178         770         10         7         4         3   
                                                            

Amounts recognised in net interest income

                                                          
                    2015         2014   
                                                £m         £m   

Gains/(losses) on the hedged items attributable to the hedged risk

                 552         2,610   

(Losses)/gains on the hedging instruments

                                              (485      (2,797

Fair value ineffectiveness

                    67         (187

Cash flow hedging ineffectiveness

                    16         41   

Net investment hedging ineffectiveness

                                              (2        

Gains and losses transferred from the cash flow hedging reserve to the income statement included a £36m gain (2014: £52m gain) transferred to interest income; a £267m gain (2014: £778m gain) to interest expense; a £4m loss (2014: £15m loss) to net trading income; a £17m gain (2014: nil) to administration and general expenses; and a £69m loss (2014: £78m loss) to taxation.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  275


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

 

 

16 Available for sale financial assets

 

 

Accounting for available for sale financial assets

 

Available for sale financial assets are held at fair value with gains and losses being included in other comprehensive income. The Group uses this classification for assets that are not derivatives and are not held for trading purposes or otherwise designated at fair value through profit or loss, or at amortised cost. Dividends and interest (calculated using the effective interest method) are recognised in the income statement in Note 3 Net interest income or Note 6 Net investment income. On disposal, the cumulative gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income is also included in net investment income.

 

 

       2015         2014   
       £m         £m   

Debt securities and other eligible bills

     89,278         85,539   

Equity securities

     989         527   

Available for sale investments

     90,267         86,066   

17 Financial liabilities designated at fair value

 

 

Accounting for liabilities designated at fair value through profit and loss

 

In accordance with IAS 39, financial liabilities may be designated at fair value, with gains and losses taken to the income statement within Net trading income (Note 5) and Net investment income (Note 6). The Group has the ability to make the fair value designation when holding the instruments at fair value reduces an accounting mismatch (caused by an offsetting liability or asset being held at fair value), or is managed by the Group on the basis of its fair value, or includes terms that have substantive derivative characteristics (see Note 15 Derivative financial instruments).

 

The details on how the fair value amounts are arrived for financial liabilities designated at fair value are described in Fair value of assets and liabilities (Note 18).

 

 

       2015         2014   
      

 

Fair value

£m

  

  

    

 

 

 

Contractual

amount due

on maturity

£m

  

  

  

  

    

 

Fair value

£m

  

  

    

 

 

 

Contractual

amount due

on maturity

£m

  

  

  

  

Debt securities

     33,177         36,097         42,395         44,910   

Deposits

     6,029         6,324         7,206         7,301   

Liabilities to customers under investment contracts

     1,633                 1,823           

Repurchase agreementsa

     50,838         50,873         5,423         5,433   

Other financial liabilities

     68         68         125         125   

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

     91,745         93,362         56,972         57,769   

The cumulative own credit loss recognised is £226m (2014: £716m).

 

 

 

 

 

Note

a During 2015, new repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

 

276  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilities

 

 

Accounting for financial assets and liabilities – fair values

The Group applies IAS 39. All financial instruments are initially recognised at fair value on the date of initial recognition and, depending on the classification of the asset or liability, may continue to be held at fair value either through profit or loss or other comprehensive income. The fair value of a financial instrument is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date.

 

Wherever possible, fair value is determined by reference to a quoted market price for that instrument. For many of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities, especially derivatives, quoted prices are not available, and valuation models are used to estimate fair value. The models calculate the expected cash flows under the terms of each specific contract, and then discount these values back to a present value. These models use as their basis independently sourced market parameters including, for example, interest rate yield curves, equities and commodities prices, option volatilities and currency rates.

 

For financial liabilities measured at fair value, the carrying amount reflects the effect on fair value of changes in own credit spreads derived from observable market data, such as spreads on Barclays issued bonds or credit default swaps (CDS). Most market parameters are either directly observable or are implied from instrument prices. The model may perform numerical procedures in the pricing such as interpolation when input values do not directly correspond to the most actively traded market trade parameters.

 

On initial recognition, it is presumed that the transaction price is the fair value unless there is observable information available in an active market to the contrary. The best evidence of an instrument’s fair value on initial recognition is typically the transaction price. However, if fair value can be evidenced by comparison with other observable current market transactions in the same instrument, or is based on a valuation technique whose inputs include only data from observable markets, then the instrument should be recognised at the fair value derived from such observable market data.

 

For valuations that have made use of unobservable inputs, the difference between the model valuation and the initial transaction price (‘Day One profit’) is recognised in profit or loss either: on a straight-line basis over the term of the transaction; or over the period until all model inputs will become observable where appropriate; or released in full when previously unobservable inputs become observable.

 

Various factors influence the availability of observable inputs and these may vary from product to product and change over time. Factors include the depth of activity in the relevant market, the type of product, whether the product is new and not widely traded in the marketplace, the maturity of market modelling and the nature of the transaction (bespoke or generic). To the extent that valuation is based on models or inputs that are not observable in the market, the determination of fair value can be more subjective, dependent on the significance of the unobservable input to the overall valuation. Unobservable inputs are determined based on the best information available, for example by reference to similar assets, similar maturities or other analytical techniques.

 

The sensitivity of valuations used in the financial statements to possible changes in significant unobservable inputs is shown on page 286.

 

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The valuation of financial instruments often involves a significant degree of judgement and complexity, in particular where valuation models make use of unobservable inputs (‘Level 3’ assets and liabilities). This note provides information on these instruments, including the related unrealised gains and losses recognised in the period, a description of significant valuation techniques and unobservable inputs, and a sensitivity analysis.

 

Valuation

IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement requires an entity to classify its assets and liabilities according to a hierarchy that reflects the observability of significant market inputs. The three levels of the fair value hierarchy are defined below.

Quoted market prices – Level 1

Assets and liabilities are classified as Level 1 if their value is observable in an active market. Such instruments are valued by reference to unadjusted quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in active markets where the quoted price is readily available, and the price represents actual and regularly occurring market transactions. An active market is one in which transactions occur with sufficient volume and frequency to provide pricing information on an ongoing basis.

Valuation technique using observable inputs – Level 2

Assets and liabilities classified as Level 2 have been valued using models whose inputs are observable in an active market. Valuations based on observable inputs include assets and liabilities such as swaps and forwards which are valued using market standard pricing techniques, and options that are commonly traded in markets where all the inputs to the market standard pricing models are observable.

Valuation technique using significant unobservable inputs – Level 3

Assets and liabilities are classified as Level 3 if their valuation incorporates significant inputs that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs). A valuation input is considered observable if it can be directly observed from transactions in an active market, or if there is compelling external evidence demonstrating an executable exit price. Unobservable input levels are generally determined via reference to observable inputs, historical observations or using other analytical techniques.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  277


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilities continued

The following table shows the Group’s assets and liabilities that are held at fair value disaggregated by valuation technique (fair value hierarchy) and balance sheet classification:

 

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

                                   
     Valuation technique using      
      

 

 

 

 

Quoted

market

prices

(Level 1)

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

Observable

inputs

(Level 2)

£m

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Significant

unobservable

inputs

(Level 3)

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

           

Trading portfolio assets

     36,676         35,725         4,947         77,348   

Financial assets designated at fair valuea

     6,163         52,909         17,758         76,830   

Derivative financial assets

     6,342         315,949         5,418         327,709   

Available for sale investments

     42,552         46,693         1,022         90,267   

Otherb

     26         8         7,470         7,504   

Total assets

     91,759         451,284         36,615         579,658   

Trading portfolio liabilities

     (23,978      (9,989              (33,967

Financial liabilities designated at fair valuea

     (240      (90,203      (1,302      (91,745

Derivative financial liabilities

     (5,450      (314,033      (4,769      (324,252

Otherb

     (1,024      (802      (4,171      (5,997

Total liabilities

     (30,692      (415,027      (10,242      (455,961

As at 31 December 2014

           

Trading portfolio assets

     48,962         59,428         6,327         114,717   

Financial assets designated at fair value

     9,934         8,461         19,905         38,300   

Derivative financial assets

     9,863         425,301         4,745         439,909   

Available for sale investments

     44,234         40,519         1,313         86,066   

Otherb

     33         198         15,550         15,781   

Total assets

     113,026         533,907         47,840         694,773   

Trading portfolio liabilities

     (26,840      (17,935      (349      (45,124

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

     (15      (55,141      (1,816      (56,972

Derivative financial liabilities

     (10,313      (424,687      (4,320      (439,320

Otherb

                     (13,115      (13,115

Total liabilities

     (37,168      (497,763      (19,600      (554,531

 

 

 

 

Notes

a During 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
b Other includes assets and liabilities held for sale of £7,364m (2014: £15,574m) and £5,997m (2014: £13,115m) respectively, which are measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis. Refer to Note 44 for more information on non-current assets and liabilities held for sale. Other also includes investment property of £140m (2014: £207m).

 

278  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilities continued

The following table shows the Group’s assets and liabilities that are held at fair value disaggregated by valuation technique (fair value hierarchy) and product type:

 

Assets and liabilities held at fair value by product type

                                                     
        Assets               Liabilities      
     Valuation technique using         Valuation technique using   
      

 

 

 

 

Quoted

market

prices

(Level 1)

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

Observable

inputs

(Level 2)

£m

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Significant

unobservable

inputs

(Level 3)

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Quoted

market

prices

(Level 1)

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

Observable

inputs

(Level 2)

£m

  

  

  

  

    
 
 

 

 

Significant
unobservable
inputs

(Level 3)

£m

  
  
  

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                 

Interest rate derivatives

             228,751         2,675                 (218,864      (2,247

Foreign exchange derivatives

     2         54,839         95         (4      (58,594      (196

Credit derivativesa

             16,279         1,902                 (16,405      (219

Equity derivatives

     3,830         9,279         690         (2,870      (14,037      (1,545

Commodity derivatives

     2,510         6,801         56         (2,576      (6,133      (562

Government and government sponsored debt

     55,150         52,967         419         (15,036      (5,474      (1

Corporate debt

     352         11,598         2,895         (234      (4,558      (15

Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments

     82         503                 (5      (6,955      (382

Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreementsb

             49,513                         (50,838        

Non-asset backed loans

             1,931         16,828                           

Asset backed securities

             12,009         770                 (384      (37

Commercial real estate loans

                     551                           

Issued debt

                                     (29,695      (546

Equity cash products

     29,704         4,038         171         (8,943      (221        

Funds and fund linked products

             1,649         378                 (1,601      (148

Physical commodities

     87         156                                   

Otherc

     42         971         9,185         (1,024      (1,268      (4,344

Total

     91,759         451,284         36,615         (30,692      (415,027      (10,242

As at 31 December 2014

                 

Interest rate derivatives

             308,706         1,239         (5      (299,181      (1,344

Foreign exchange derivatives

     4         74,358         108         (3      (79,188      (138)   

Credit derivativesa

             21,541         1,966                 (21,958      (409

Equity derivatives

     3,847         9,750         1,247         (3,719      (13,780      (2,092

Commodity derivatives

     6,012         10,946         185         (6,586      (10,580      (337

Government and government sponsored debt

     62,577         48,296         1,014         (11,563      (14,002      (346

Corporate debt

     151         22,036         3,061                 (3,572      (13

Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments

     78         921                 (4      (6,276      (665

Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements

             5,236                         (5,423        

Non-asset backed loans

     1         2,462         17,744                           

Asset backed securities

     30         16,211         1,631                 (67        

Commercial real estate loans

                     1,180                           

Issued debt

                             (10      (40,592      (749

Equity cash products

     40,252         7,823         171         (15,276      (699        

Funds and fund linked products

             2,644         631                 (2,060      (210

Physical commodities

     4         1,447                         (363        

Otherc

     70         1,530         17,663         (2      (22      (13,297

Total

     113,026         533,907         47,840         (37,168      (497,763      (19,600

Assets and liabilities reclassified between Level 1 and Level 2

There were transfers of £537m assets and £801m liabilities (2014: nil) of equity and foreign exchange derivatives from Level 1 to Level 2 to reflect the market observability of these product types.

 

Notes

a Credit derivatives includes derivative exposure to monoline insurers.
b During 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar lending and repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
c Other includes non-current assets and liabilities held for sale, private equity investments, asset backed loans and investment property.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  279


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilities continued

Level 3 movement analysis

The following table summarises the movements in the Level 3 balance during the year. The table shows gains and losses and includes amounts for all assets and liabilities transferred to and from Level 3 during the year. Transfers have been reflected as if they had taken place at the beginning of the year.

 

Analysis of movements in Level 3 assets and liabilities

  

                                                                       
  

 
 
 

 

As at
1 January
2015

£m

  
  
  

  

                

 

 
 

Total gains and losses

in the period

recognised in the
income statement

  

  

  
  

  

 

 
 
 

 

 

Total

gains
or losses
recognised

in OCI

£m

  

  
  
  

  

  

     Transfers      

 

 

 

 

As at 31

December

2015

£m

  

  

  

  

         
 
Purchases
£m
  
  
    

 

Sales

£m

  

  

    
 
Issues
£m
  
  
    
 
Settlements
£m
  
  
    

 

 

Trading

income

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

Other

income

£m

  

  

  

       

 

In

£m

  

  

    

 

Out

£m

  

  

  

Government and government sponsored debt

     685         27         (119              (109      (6                      2         (160      320   

Corporate debt

     3,026         62         (64              (20      (47                      5         (80      2,882   

Asset backed securities

     1,610         1,365         (1,565              (711      58                         5         (19      743   

Non-asset backed loans

     273         520         (251              (3      (42                      11         (1      507   

Funds and fund linked products

     589                 (174              (56      (27                      12         (4      340   

Other

     144         23         (19              (9      (14                      53         (23      155   

Trading portfolio assets

     6,327         1,997         (2,192              (908      (78                      88         (287      4,947   

Commercial real estate loans

     1,179         3,540         (3,878              (342      49         1                                 549   

Non-asset backed loansc

     17,471         192         (114              (756      (531      (6                              16,256   

Asset backed loans

     393         1,098         (1,260              2         8                         15                 256   

Private equity investments

     701         94         (200              (3      8         38                 4         (132      510   

Other

     161         66         (31              (3      (11      5                 26         (26      187   

Financial assets designated at fair value

     19,905         4,990         (5,483              (1,102      (477      38                 45         (158      17,758   

Asset backed securities

     1                                                                         (1        

Government and government sponsored debt

     327         14         (36                                      1                 (212      94   

Other

     985         65         (91              (1,026              549         419         27                 928   

Available for sale investments

     1,313         79         (127              (1,026              549         420         27         (213      1,022   
                                                                                                    

Othera

     207         27         (89                              (5                              140   
                                                                                                    

Trading portfolio liabilities

     (349                                                                      349           

Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments

     (666                      (216      261                 17                         221         (383

Issued debt

     (748                      (16      245         (4      (8              (38      4         (565

Other

     (402                              (19      (18      75                         10         (354

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

     (1,816                      (232      487         (22      84                 (38      235         (1,302

Interest rate derivatives

     (105      1         218                 (247      203                         243         117         430   

Credit derivatives

     1,557         273         (12              (6      (123                      (11      7         1,685   

Equity derivatives

     (845      111         (2      (290      103         34                         (21      52         (858

Commodity derivatives

     (152                              (66      (6                      (388      106         (506

Foreign exchange derivatives

     (30      14         (1      (7      9         (14                      (73              (102

Net derivative financial instrumentsb

     425         399         203         (297      (207      94                         (250      282         649   
                                                                                                    

Total

     26,012         7,492         (7,688      (529      (2,756      (483      666         420         (128      208         23,214   

Notes

a Other includes investment property of £140m (2014: £207m). Non-current assets held for sale of £7,330m (2014: £15,574m) and liabilities in a disposal group classified as held for sale of £4,171m (2014: £13,115m) are not included as these are measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis.
b The derivative financial instruments are represented on a net basis. On a gross basis, derivative financial assets are £5,418m (2014: £4,745m) and derivative financial liabilities are £4,769m (2014: £4,320m).
c A partially offsetting market gain of £172m (2014: £2,921m loss) has been recognised on the Level 2 derivative instruments that hedge the ESHLA loan portfolio interest rate risk.

 

280  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


            

        

        

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilities continued

 

Analysis of movements in Level 3 assets and liabilities

  

                                                                       
  

 
 
 

 

As at
1 January
2014

£m

  
  
  

  

                
 
 
Total gains and losses in
the period recognised in
the income statement
  
  
  
  

 

 
 
 
 

 

Total

gains
or losses
recognised
in OCI

£m

  

  
  
  
  

  

     Transfers      

 
 
 

 

As at 31
December
2014

£m

  
  
  

  

         
 
Purchases
£m
  
  
    
 
Sales
£m
  
  
    
 
Issues
£m
  
  
    
 
Settlements
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Trading
income
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
Other
income
£m
  
  
  
       

 

In

£m

  

  

    
 
Out
£m
  
  
  

Government and government sponsored debt

     161         96         (198              (46      5                         676         (9      685   

Corporate debt

     3,039         177         (332              (370      484                         39         (11      3,026   

Asset backed securities

     2,111         1,037         (1,552              (141      178                         8         (31      1,610   

Non-asset backed loans

     176         250         (30              (49      2                         13         (89      273   

Funds and fund linked products

     494                 (92                      (17                      204                 589   

Other

     440         8         (369              54         22                                 (11      144   

Trading portfolio assets

     6,421         1,568         (2,573              (552      674                         940         (151      6,327   

Commercial real estate loans

     1,198         2,919         (2,678              (334      76         (2                              1,179   

Non-asset backed loansc

     15,956         2         (177              (81      1,830         9                         (68      17,471   

Asset backed loans

     375         855         (777              (4      19                         1         (76      393   

Private equity investments

     1,168         173         (500              (11      4         82                         (215      701   

Other

     73         75         (1              (35      9         32                 2         6         161   

Financial assets designated at fair value

     18,770         4,024         (4,133              (465      1,938         121                 3         (353      19,905   

Asset backed securities

     1                                                                                 1   

Government and government sponsored debt

     59         281         (12              (1                                              327   

Other

     2,085         37         (78              (1,694      1         586         74         4         (30      985   

Available for sale investments

     2,145         318         (90              (1,695      1         586         74         4         (30      1,313   
                                                                                                    

Othera

     451         47         (238                              5                         (58      207   
                                                                                                    

Trading portfolio liabilities

                                             (3                      (346              (349

Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments

     (409                      (254      12         2         88                 (108      3         (666

Issued debt

     (1,164                      (16      293         88                         (48      99         (748

Other

     (67                      (341      10         6         30                 (40              (402

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

     (1,640                      (611      315         96         118                 (196      102         (1,816

Interest rate derivatives

     (15      5         45         (5      7         (358                      103         113         (105

Credit derivatives

     1,420         11                         42         121                         (81      44         1,557   

Equity derivatives

     (601      86         (12      (305      113         (278                      (14      166         (845

Commodity derivatives

     (141                      (3      (10      4                         (11      9         (152

Foreign exchange derivatives

     31                 (12      (4      (71      (6                      29         3         (30

Net derivative financial instrumentsb

     694         102         21         (317      81         (517                      26         335         425   
                                                                                                    

Total

     26,841         6,059         (7,013      (928      (2,316      2,189         830         74         431         (155      26,012   

Notes

a Other includes investment property of £140m (2014: £207m). Non-current assets held for sale of £7,330m (2014: £15,574m) and liabilities in a disposal group classified as held for sale of £4,171m (2014: £13,115m) are not included as these are measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis.
b The derivative financial instruments are represented on a net basis. On a gross basis, derivative financial assets are £5,418m (2014: £4,745m) and derivative financial liabilities are £4,769m (2014: £4,320m).
c A partially offsetting market gain of £172m (2014: £2,921m loss) has been recognised on the Level 2 derivative instruments that hedge the ESHLA loan portfolio interest rate risk.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  281


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilities continued

Assets and liabilities move between Level 2 and Level 3 primarily due to i) an increase or decrease in observable market activity related to an input, or ii) a change in the significance of the unobservable input, with assets and liabilities classified as Level 3 if an unobservable input is deemed significant.

Unrealised gains and losses on Level 3 financial assets and liabilities

The following table discloses the unrealised gains and losses recognised in the year arising on Level 3 financial assets and liabilities held at year end.

 

Unrealised gains and losses recognised during the period on Level 3 assets and liabilities held at period end

  

     2015         2014   
           Other                  Other      
     Income statement         compre-            Income statement         compre-      
     Trading         Other         hensive            Trading         Other         hensive      

As at 31 December

    

 

income

£m

  

  

    

 

income

£m

  

  

    

 

income

£m

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

    

 

income

£m

  

  

    

 

income

£m

  

  

    

 

income

£m

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Trading portfolio assets

     (125                      (125      466                         466   

Financial assets designated at fair value

     (562      (17              (579      1,849         (9              1,840   

Available for sale assets

             (20      488         468                 572         80         652   

Trading portfolio liabilities

     (1                      (1      (3                      (3

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

     (24      76                 52         98         118                 216   

Othera

             (22              (22              5                 5   

Net derivative financial instruments

     123                         123         (238                      (238

Total

     (589      17         488         (84      2,172         686         80         2,938   

The trading losses of £562m (2014: trading gains of £1,849m) within Level 3 financial assets designated at fair value was primarily due to fair value losses on the ESHLA loan portfolio of £531m.

Valuation techniques and sensitivity analysis

Sensitivity analysis is performed on products with significant unobservable inputs (Level 3) to generate a range of reasonably possible alternative valuations. The sensitivity methodologies applied take account of the nature of valuation techniques used, as well as the availability and reliability of observable proxy and historical data and the impact of using alternative models.

Sensitivities are dynamically calculated on a monthly basis. The calculation is based on range or spread data of a reliable reference source or a scenario based on relevant market analysis alongside the impact of using alternative models. Sensitivities are calculated without reflecting the impact of any diversification in the portfolio.

The valuation techniques used for the material products within Levels 2 and 3, and observability and sensitivity analysis for products within Level 3, are described below.

Interest rate derivatives

Description: These are derivatives linked to interest rates or inflation indices. This category includes futures, interest rate and inflation swaps, swaptions, caps, floors, inflation options, balance guaranteed swaps and other exotic interest rate derivatives.

Valuation: Interest rate derivative cash flows are valued using interest rate yield curves whereby observable market data is used to construct the term structure of forward rates. This is then used to project and discount future cash flows based on the parameters of the trade. Instruments with optionality are valued using volatilities implied from market observable inputs. Exotic interest rate derivatives are valued using industry standard and bespoke models based on observable and unobservable market parameter inputs. Input parameters include interest rates, volatilities, correlations and others as appropriate. Inflation forward curves and interest rate yield curves may be extrapolated beyond observable tenors. Balance guaranteed swaps are valued using cash flow models that calculate fair value based on loss projections, prepayment, recovery and discount rates. These parameters are determined by reference to underlying asset performance.

Observability: In general, input parameters are deemed observable up to liquid maturities which are determined separately for each parameter and underlying. Certain correlation, convexity, long dated forwards and volatility exposures are unobservable beyond liquid maturities. Unobservable market data and model inputs are set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques or inferred via another reasonable method.

Level 3 sensitivity: Sensitivity relating to unobservable valuation inputs is based on the dispersion of consensus data services where available, otherwise stress scenarios or historic data are used.

 

Notes

a Other consists of investment properties.

 

282  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilities continued

Foreign exchange derivatives

Description: These are derivatives linked to the foreign exchange (FX) market. This category includes FX forward contracts, FX swaps and FX options. The vast majority are traded as OTC derivatives.

Valuation: Exotic and non-exotic derivatives are valued using industry standard and bespoke models. Input parameters include FX rates, interest rates, FX volatilities, interest rate volatilities, FX interest rate correlations and others as appropriate. Unobservable model inputs are set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques to match the appropriate risk profile.

Observability: Certain correlations, long dated forwards and volatilities are unobservable beyond liquid maturities.

Level 3 sensitivity: Sensitivity relating to unobservable valuation inputs is primarily based on the dispersion of consensus data services.

Credit derivatives

Description: These are derivatives linked to the credit spread of a referenced entity, index or basket of referenced entities or a pool of referenced assets via securitisation. This category includes single name and index CDS, asset backed CDS, synthetic CDOs, and Nth-to-default basket swaps.

Valuation: CDS are valued using a market standard model that incorporates the credit curve as its principal input. Credit spreads are observed directly from broker data, third party vendors or priced to proxies. Where credit spreads are unobservable, they are determined with reference to recent transactions or proxied from bond spreads on observable trades of the same issuer or other similar entities. Synthetic CDOs are valued using a model that calculates fair value based on credit spreads, recovery rates, correlations and interest rates, and is calibrated to the index tranche market.

Observability: CDS contracts referencing entities that are not actively traded are considered unobservable. The correlation input to synthetic CDO valuation is considered unobservable as it is proxied from the observable index tranche market. Where an asset backed credit derivative does not have an observable market price and the valuation is determined using a model, the instrument is considered unobservable.

Level 3 sensitivity: The sensitivity of valuations of the illiquid CDS portfolio is determined by applying a shift to each spread curve. The shift is based on the average range of pricing observed in the market for similar CDS. Synthetic CDO sensitivity is calculated using correlation levels derived from the range of contributors to a consensus bespoke service.

Derivative exposure to monoline insurers

Description: These products are derivatives through which credit protection has been purchased on structured debt instruments (primarily CLOs) from monoline insurers.

Valuation: Given the bespoke nature of the CDS, the primary valuation input is the price of the cash instrument it protects.

Observability: While the market value of the cash instrument underlying the CDS contract may be observable, its use in the valuation of CDS is considered unobservable due to the bespoke nature of the monoline CDS contracts.

Level 3 sensitivity: Due to the high degree of uncertainty, the sensitivity reflects the impact of writing down the credit protection element of fair value to zero.

Equity derivatives

Description: These are derivatives linked to equity indices and single names. This category includes exchange traded and OTC equity derivatives including vanilla and exotic options.

Valuation: The valuations of OTC equity derivatives are determined using industry standard models. Input parameters include stock prices, dividends, volatilities, interest rates, equity repo curves and, for multi-asset products, correlations. Unobservable model inputs are determined by reference to liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques to match the appropriate risk profile.

Observability: In general, input parameters are deemed observable up to liquid maturities which are determined separately for each parameter and underlying.

Level 3 sensitivity: Sensitivity is estimated based on the dispersion of consensus data services either directly or through proxies.

Commodity derivatives

Description: These products are exchange traded and OTC derivatives based on underlying commodities such as metals, crude oil and refined products, agricultural, power and natural gas.

Valuation: The valuations of commodity swaps and options are determined using models incorporating discounting of cash flows and other industry standard modelling techniques. Valuation inputs include forward curves, volatilities implied from market observable inputs and correlations.

Unobservable inputs are set with reference to similar observable products or by applying extrapolation techniques from the observable market.

Observability: Certain correlations, forward curves and volatilities for longer dated exposures are unobservable.

Level 3 sensitivity: Sensitivity is determined primarily by measuring historical variability over two years. Where historical data is unavailable or uncertainty is due to volumetric risk, sensitivity is measured by applying appropriate stress scenarios or using proxy bid-offer spread levels.

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  283


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilities continued

Complex derivative instruments

Valuation estimates made by counterparties with respect to complex derivative instruments, for the purpose of determining the amount of collateral to be posted, often differ, sometimes significantly, from Barclays’ own estimates. In almost all cases, Barclays has been able to successfully resolve such differences or otherwise reach an accommodation with respect to collateral posting levels, including in certain cases by entering into compromise collateral arrangements. Due to the ongoing nature of collateral calls, Barclays will often be engaged in discussion with one or more counterparties in respect of such differences at any given time. Valuation estimates made by counterparties for collateral purposes are, like any other third party valuation, considered when determining Barclays’ fair value estimates.

Government and government sponsored debt

Description: These are government bonds, supra sovereign bonds and agency bonds.

Valuation: Liquid government bonds actively traded through an exchange or clearing house are marked to the closing levels observed in these markets. Less liquid bonds are valued using observable market prices which are sourced from broker quotes, inter-dealer prices or other reliable pricing services. Where there are no observable market prices, fair value is determined by reference to either issuances or CDS spreads of the same issuer as proxy inputs to obtain discounted cash flow amounts.

Observability: Where an observable market price is not available, the bond is considered Level 3.

Level 3 sensitivity: Sensitivity is calculated by using the range of observable proxy prices.

Corporate debt

Description: This primarily contains corporate bonds.

Valuation: Corporate bonds are valued using observable market prices which are sourced from broker quotes, inter-dealer prices or other reliable pricing services. Where there are no observable market prices, fair value is determined by reference to either issuances or CDS spreads of the same issuer as proxy inputs to obtain discounted cash flow amounts. In the absence of observable bond or CDS spreads for the respective issuer, similar reference assets or sector averages are applied as a proxy (the appropriateness of proxies being assessed based on issuer, coupon, maturity and industry).

Observability: Where an observable market price is not available, the security is considered Level 3.

Level 3 sensitivity: The sensitivity for the corporate bonds portfolio is determined by applying a shift to each underlying position driven by average ranges of external levels observed in the market for similar bonds.

Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements

Description: These include securities purchased under resale agreements, securities sold under repurchase agreements, and other similar secured lending agreements.

Valuation: Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements are valued by discounting the expected future cash flows. The inputs to the valuation include interest rates and repo rates, which are determined based on the specific parameters of the transaction.

Observability: In general, input parameters are deemed observable up to liquid maturities, as determined based on the specific parameters of the transaction. Unobservable market data and model inputs are set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques or inferred via another reasonable method.

Level 3 sensitivity: Sensitivity relating to unobservable valuation inputs is based on the dispersion of consensus data services where available, otherwise stress scenarios or historic data are used. In general, the sensitivity of unobservable inputs is insignificant to the overall balance sheet valuation given the predominantly short term nature of the agreements.

Non-asset backed loans

Description: This category is largely made up of fixed rate loans, such as the ESHLA portfolio, which are valued using models that discount expected future cash flows.

Valuation: Fixed rate loans are valued using models that calculate fair value based on observable interest rates and unobservable loan spreads. Unobservable loan spreads incorporate funding costs, the level of comparable assets such as gilts, issuer credit quality and other factors.

Observability: Within this population, the unobservable input is the loan spread.

Level 3 sensitivity: The sensitivity for fixed rate loans is calculated by applying a shift to loan spreads.

Asset backed securities

Description: These are securities that are linked to the cash flows of a pool of referenced assets via securitisation. This category includes residential mortgage backed securities, commercial mortgage backed securities, CDOs, CLOs and other asset backed securities.

Valuation: Where available, valuations are based on observable market prices which are sourced from broker quotes and inter-dealer prices. Otherwise, valuations are determined using industry standard discounted cash flow analysis that calculates the fair value based on valuation inputs such as constant default rate, conditional prepayment rate, loss given default and yield. These inputs are determined by reference to a number of sources including proxying to observed transactions, market indices or market research, and by assessing underlying collateral performance.

Proxying to observed transactions, indices or research requires an assessment and comparison of the relevant securities’ underlying attributes including collateral, tranche, vintage, underlying asset composition (historical losses, borrower characteristics and loan attributes such as loan to value ratio and geographic concentration) and credit ratings (original and current).

Observability: Where an asset backed product does not have an observable market price, and the valuation is determined using a discounted cash flow analysis, an instrument is considered unobservable.

Level 3 sensitivity: The sensitivity analysis for asset backed products is based on externally sourced pricing dispersion or by stressing the inputs of discounted cash flow analysis.

 

 

 

284  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilities continued

Commercial real estate loans

Description: This portfolio includes loans that are secured by a range of commercial property types including retail, hotel, office, multi-family and industrial properties.

Valuation: Performing loans are valued using discounted cash flow analysis which considers the characteristics of the loan such as property type, geographic location, credit quality and property performance reviews in order to determine an appropriate credit spread. Where there is significant uncertainty regarding loan performance, valuation is based on independent third party appraisals or bids for the underlying properties. Independent third party appraisals are determined by discounted cash flow analysis, and key valuation inputs are yield and loss given default.

Observability: Since each commercial real estate loan is unique in nature, and the secondary loan market is relatively illiquid, valuation inputs are generally considered unobservable.

Level 3 sensitivity: For performing loans, sensitivity is determined by stressing the credit spread for each loan. For loans which have significant uncertainty regarding loan performance, sensitivity is determined by either a range of bids or by stressing the inputs to independent third party appraisals.

Issued debt

Description: This category contains Barclays issued notes.

Valuation: Fair valued Barclays issued notes are valued using discounted cash flow techniques and industry standard models incorporating various observable input parameters depending on the terms of the instrument.

Observability: Barclays issued notes are generally observable. Structured notes are debt instruments containing embedded derivatives. Where either an input to the embedded derivative or the debt instrument is deemed unobservable and significant to the overall valuation of the note, the structured note is classified as Level 3.

Level 3 sensitivity: Sensitivity to the unobservable input in the embedded derivative is calculated in line with the method used for the type of derivative instrument concerned.

Other

Description: Other includes non-current assets and liabilities held for sale and private equity investments. See below for more detail. Other also includes investment properties.

Non-current assets held for sale

Description: Non-current assets held for sale materially consists of the Portuguese Retail Banking, Wealth and Investment Management businesses and part of the Portuguese Corporate banking business, Barclays Vida y Pensiones (BVP), a company offering life insurance, pension products and services in Spain, Portugal and Italy, and the Italian Retail business. These sales are part of the divestment of the Barclays Non-Core segment of the Group.

Valuation: Non-current assets held for sale are valued at the lower of carrying value and fair value less cost to sell.

Observability: The items in Level 2 and Level 3 include customer cash, nostro accounts with other banks and other time deposits.

Level 3 sensitivity: The businesses held for sale are valued at the agreed price less costs to sell and are not expected to display significant sensitivity.

Private equity investments

Description: This category includes private equity investments.

Valuation: Private equity investments are valued in accordance with the ‘International Private Equity and Venture Capital Valuation Guidelines’. This requires the use of a number of individual pricing benchmarks such as the prices of recent transactions in the same or similar entities, discounted cash flow analysis and comparison with the earnings multiples of listed comparative companies. Full valuations are generally performed at least biannually, with the positions reviewed periodically for material events that might impact upon fair value. The valuation of unquoted equity instruments is subjective by nature. However, the relevant methodologies are commonly applied by other market participants and have been consistently applied over time. Private equity investments include Barclays’ equity interest in Visa Europe, an available for sale asset, which has been valued by reference to consideration, some of which is contingent upon future events, that will be receivable upon completion of the announced sale of Visa Europe to Visa Inc. The elements of consideration that are contingent on future events have been deemed unobservable and no value has been attributed to such elements in the year-end valuation.

Observability: Unobservable inputs include earnings estimates, multiples of comparative companies, marketability discounts and discount rates.

Level 3 sensitivity: The relevant valuation models are each sensitive to a number of key assumptions, such as projected future earnings, comparator multiples, marketability discounts and discount rates. Valuation sensitivity is estimated by flexing such assumptions to reasonable alternative levels and determining the impact on the resulting valuation.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  285


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

 

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilities continued

 

Sensitivity analysis of valuations using unobservable inputs

                                                     
     Fair value         Favourable changes         Unfavourable changes   
      
 
 
Total
assets
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
Total
liabilities
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
Income
statement
£m
  
  
  
    
 
Equity
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Income
statement
£m
  
  
  
    
 
Equity
£m
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

                 

Interest rate derivatives

     2,675         (2,247      93                 (103        

Foreign exchange derivatives

     95         (196      17                 (17        

Credit derivativesa

     1,902         (219      66                 (96        

Equity derivatives

     690         (1,545      167                 (185        

Commodity derivatives

     56         (562      13                 (13        

Government and government sponsored debt

     419         (1      4                 (4        

Corporate debt

     2,895         (15      10         1         (5      (1

Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments

             (382                                

Non-asset backed loans

     16,828                 1,581                 (1,564        

Asset backed securities

     770         (37      1                 (1        

Commercial real estate loans

     551                 24                 (1        

Issued debt

             (546                                

Equity cash products

     171                         17                 (17

Funds and fund linked products

     378         (148      1                 (1        

Otherb

     9,185         (4,344      154         318         (172      (53

Total

     36,615         (10,242      2,131         336         (2,162      (71

As at 31 December 2014

                 

Interest rate derivatives

     1,239         (1,344      70                 (71        

Foreign exchange derivatives

     108         (138      36                 (36        

Credit derivativesa

     1,966         (409      81                 (229        

Equity derivatives

     1,247         (2,092      220                 (220        

Commodity derivatives

     185         (337      46                 (46        

Government and government sponsored debt

     1,014         (346                      (2        

Corporate debt

     3,061         (13      26         (1      (9      (4

Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments

             (665      3                 3           

Non-asset backed loans

     17,744                 1,164                 (820        

Asset backed securities

     1,631                 46         1         (72      (1

Commercial real estate loans

     1,180                 20                 (19        

Issued debt

             (749                                

Equity cash products

     171                         11                 (11

Funds and fund linked products

     631         (210      14                 (14        

Otherb

     17,663         (13,297      180         82         (156      (55

Total

     47,840         (19,600      1,906         93         (1,691      (71

The effect of stressing unobservable inputs to a range of reasonably possible alternatives, alongside considering the impact of using alternative models, would be to increase fair values by up to £2.1bn (2014: £1.9bn) or to decrease fair values by up to £2.2bn (2014: £1.7bn) with substantially all the potential effect impacting profit and loss rather than reserves.

 

Notes

a Credit derivatives includes derivative exposure to monoline insurers.
b Other includes non-current assets and liabilities held for sale, which are measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis, investment property, private equity investments and asset backed loans.

 

286  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilities continued

Significant unobservable inputs

The following table discloses the valuation techniques and significant unobservable inputs for assets and liabilities recognised at fair value and classified as Level 3, along with the range of values used for those significant unobservable inputs:

 

      
 
 
Total
assets
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
Total
liabilities
£m
  
  
  
  

Valuation

technique(s)

  

Significant

unobservable

inputs

        

 

2015    

Range    

  

  

    

 

2014    

Range    

  

  

     Unitsa   
                     Min         Max         Min         Max      

Derivative financial

instrumentsb

                            

Interest rate

     2,675         (2,247    Discounted cash flows    Inflation forwards        0.3         8         (0.5      11         %   

derivatives

         Option model    Inflation volatility        36         197         40         300         bp vol   
            IR – IR correlation        (55      100         (88      100         %   
            FX – IR correlation        (20      30         14         90         %   
                            Interest rate volatility          5         249         6         437         bp vol   

Credit derivativesc

     1,902         (219    Discounted cash flows    Credit spread        140         413         116         240         bps   
         Correlation model    Credit correlation        26         41         36         90         %   
            Credit spread        10         9,923         6         5,898         bps   
                       Comparable pricing    Price          80         102         64         100         points   

Equity derivatives

     690         (1,545       Equity volatility                318         1         97         %   
            Equity – equity correlation        (54      100         (55      99         %   
                            Equity – FX correlation          (100      40         (80      55         %   

Non-derivative

financial

instruments

                            

Corporate debt

     2,895         (15    Discounted cash flows    Credit spread        120         529         140         900         bps   
                       Comparable pricing    Price          1         114                 104         points   

Asset backed

     770         (37    Discounted cash flows    Conditional prepayment rate                25                 5         %   

securities

            Constant default rate                2                 9         %   
            Loss given default        30         100         45         100         %   
            Yield        5         58         3         11         %   
            Credit spread        157         1,416         74         2,688         bps   
                       Comparable pricing    Price          1         114                 100         points   

Commercial real

     551               Discounted cash flows    Loss given default        0         100                 100         %   

estate loans

            Yield                        4         8         %   
                            Credit spread          230         801         124         675         bps   

Non-asset backed

loans

     16,828               Discounted cash flows    Loan spread          3         994         39         1,000         bps   

Otherd

     1,855         (173    Discounted cash flows    Loss given default                94                         %   
            Yield        7         12         8         9         %   
                       Comparable pricing    Price                  103                 133         points   

 

 

Notes

a The units used to disclose ranges for significant unobservable inputs are percentages, points, basis point volatility and basis points. Basis point volatility is a measure of implied volatility in terms of annual absolute basis point change in the underlying rate. Points are a percentage of par; for example, 100 points equals 100% of par. A basis point equals 1/100th of 1%; for example, 150 basis points equals 1.5%.
b Certain derivative instruments are classified as Level 3 due to a significant unobservable credit spread input into the calculation of the Credit Valuation Adjustment for the instruments. The range of significant unobservable credit spreads is between 69-1,175bps.
c Credit derivatives includes derivative exposure to monoline insurers.
d Other includes private equity investments, asset backed loans and investment property.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  287


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilities continued

The following section describes the significant unobservable inputs identified in the table above, and the sensitivity of fair value measurement of the instruments categorised as Level 3 assets or liabilities to increases in significant unobservable inputs. Where sensitivities are described, the inverse relationship will also generally apply.

Where reliable interrelationships can be identified between significant unobservable inputs used in fair value measurement, a description of those interrelationships is included below.

Comparable price

Comparable instrument prices are used in valuation by calculating an implied yield (or spread over a liquid benchmark) from the price of a comparable observable bond, then adjusting that yield (or spread) to derive a value for the unobservable bond. The adjustment to yield (or spread) should account for relevant differences in the bonds such as maturity or credit quality. Alternatively, a price-to-price basis can be assumed between the comparable instrument and bond being valued in order to establish the value of the bond.

In general, a significant increase in comparable price in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is favourable for the holder of a cash instrument.

For a derivative instrument, a significant increase in an input derived from a comparable price in isolation can result in a movement in fair value that is favourable or unfavourable depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Conditional prepayment rate

Conditional prepayment rate is the proportion of voluntary, unscheduled repayments of loan principal by a borrower. Prepayment rates affect the weighted average life of securities by altering the timing of future projected cash flows.

A significant increase in a conditional prepayment rate in isolation can result in a movement in fair value that is favourable or unfavourable depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Conditional prepayment rates are typically inversely correlated to credit spread, i.e. securities with high borrower credit spread typically experience lower prepayment rates, and also tend to experience higher default rates.

Constant default rate

The constant default rate represents an annualised rate of default of the loan principal by the borrower.

A significant increase in a constant default rate in isolation can result in a movement in fair value that is favourable or unfavourable depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Constant default rate and conditional prepayment rates are typically inversely correlated: fewer defaults on loans typically will mean higher credit quality and therefore more prepayments.

Correlation

Correlation is a measure of the relationship between the movements of two variables (i.e. how the change in one variable influences a change in the other variable). Correlation is a key input into valuation of derivative contracts with more than one underlying instrument. For example, where an option contract is written on a basket of underlying names, the volatility of the basket, and hence the fair value of the option, will depend on the correlation between the basket components. Credit correlation generally refers to the correlation between default processes for the separate names that make up the reference pool of a CDO structure.

A significant increase in correlation in isolation can result in a movement in fair value that is favourable or unfavourable depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Credit spread

Credit spreads typically represent the difference in yield between an instrument and a benchmark security or reference rate. Credit spreads reflect the additional yield that a market participant would demand for taking exposure to the credit risk of an instrument, and form part of the yield used in a discounted cash flow calculation.

In general, a significant increase in credit spread in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is unfavourable for the holder of a cash asset.

For a derivative instrument, a significant increase in credit spread in isolation can result in a movement in fair value that is favourable or unfavourable depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Loan spread

Loan spreads typically represent the difference in yield between an instrument and a benchmark security or reference rate. Loan spreads typically reflect funding costs, credit quality, the level of comparable assets such as gilts and other factors, and form part of the yield used in a discounted cash flow calculation.

The ESHLA portfolio primarily consists of long dated fixed rate loans extended to counterparties in the UK Education, Social Housing and Local Authority sectors. The loans are categorised as Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy due to their illiquid nature and the significance of unobservable loan spreads to the valuation. Valuation uncertainty arises from the long dated nature of the portfolio, the lack of secondary market in the loans and the lack of observable loan spreads. The majority of ESHLA loans are to borrowers in heavily regulated sectors that are considered extremely low credit risk, and have a history of zero defaults since inception. While the overall credit spread range is 991bps (2014: 961bps), the vast majority of spreads are concentrated towards the bottom end of this range, with 99% of the loan notional being valued with spreads less than 200bps, consistently for both years.

In general, a significant increase in loan spreads in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is unfavourable for the holder of a loan.

Forwards

A price or rate that is applicable to a financial transaction that will take place in the future. A forward is generally based on the spot price or rate, adjusted for the cost of carry, and defines the price or rate that will be used to deliver a currency, bond, commodity or some other underlying instrument at a point in the future. A forward may also refer to the rate fixed for a future financial obligation, such as the interest rate on a loan payment. In general, a significant increase in a forward in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is favourable for the contracted receiver of the underlying (currency, bond, commodity, etc), but the sensitivity is dependent on the specific terms of the instrument.

 

288  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilities continued

Loss given default (LGD)

LGD represents the expected loss upon liquidation of the collateral as a percentage of the balance outstanding.

In general, a significant increase in the LGD in isolation will translate to lower recovery and lower projected cash flows to pay to the securitisation, resulting in a movement in fair value that is unfavourable for the holder of the securitised product.

Volatility

Volatility is a key input in the valuation of derivative products containing optionality. Volatility is a measure of the variability or uncertainty in returns for a given derivative underlying. It represents an estimate of how much a particular underlying instrument, parameter or index will change in value over time. In general, volatilities will be implied from observed option prices. For unobservable options the implied volatility may reflect additional assumptions about the nature of the underlying risk, as well as reflecting the given strike/maturity profile of a specific option contract.

In general a significant increase in volatility in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is favourable for the holder of a simple option, but the sensitivity is dependent on the specific terms of the instrument.

There may be inter-relationships between unobservable volatilities and other unobservable inputs that can be implied from observation (e.g. when equity prices fall, implied equity volatilities generally rise) but these are specific to individual markets and may vary over time.

Yield

The rate used to discount projected cash flows in a discounted future cash flow analysis.

In general, a significant increase in yield in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is unfavourable for the holder of a cash instrument.

Fair value adjustments

Key balance sheet valuation adjustments are quantified below:

 

        
 
2015
£m
  
  
      
 
2014
£m
  
  

Bid-offer valuation adjustments

       (360        (396

Other exit adjustments

       (149        (169

Uncollateralised derivative funding

       (72        (100

Derivative credit valuation adjustments:

         

– Monolines

       (9        (24

– Other derivative credit valuation adjustments

       (318        (394

Derivative debit valuation adjustments

       189           177   

Bid-offer valuation adjustments

The Group uses mid market pricing where it is a market maker and has the ability to transact at, or better than, mid price (which is the case for certain equity, bond and vanilla derivative markets). For other financial assets and liabilities, bid-offer adjustments are recorded to reflect the price for the expected close out strategy. The methodology for determining the bid-offer adjustment for a derivative portfolio involves calculating the net risk exposure by offsetting long and short positions by strike and term in accordance with the risk management and hedging strategy.

Bid-offer levels are derived from market sources, such as broker data.

Other exit adjustments

Market data input for exotic derivatives may not have a directly observable bid-offer spread. In such instances, an exit adjustment is applied as a proxy for the bid-offer adjustment. An example of this is correlation risk where an adjustment is applied to reflect the possible range of values that market participants apply. The exit adjustment may be determined by calibrating to derivative prices, by scenario analysis or historical analysis. Other exit adjustments have reduced by £20m to £149m respectively as a result of movements in market bid-offer spreads.

Discounting approaches for derivative instruments

Collateralised

In line with market practice, the methodology for discounting collateralised derivatives takes into account the nature and currency of the collateral that can be posted within the relevant CSA. This CSA aware discounting approach recognises the ‘cheapest to deliver’ option that reflects the ability of the party posting collateral to change the currency of the collateral.

Uncollateralised

A fair value adjustment of £72m is applied to account for the impact of incorporating the cost of funding into the valuation of uncollateralised and partially collateralised derivative portfolios and collateralised derivatives where the terms of the agreement do not allow the rehypothecation of collateral received. This adjustment is referred to as the ‘Funding Fair Value Adjustment’ (FFVA). FFVA has decreased by £28m to £72m mainly as a result of material trade unwinds and the reduction in the average maturity date of the portfolio as trades tend to maturity.

FFVA is determined by calculating the net expected exposure at a counterparty level and applying a funding rate to these exposures that reflects the market cost of funding. Barclays’ internal Treasury rates are used as an input to the calculation. The approach takes into account the probability of default of each counterparty, as well as any mandatory break clauses.

FFVA incorporates a scaling factor which is an estimate of the extent to which the cost of funding is incorporated into observed traded levels. On calibrating the scaling factor, it is with the assumption that Credit Valuation Adjustments (CVA) and Debit Valuation Adjustments (DVA) are retained as valuation components incorporated into such levels. The effect of incorporating this scaling factor at 31 December 2015 was to reduce FFVA by £216m (2014: £300m).

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  289


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilities continued

Uncollateralised derivative trading activity is used to determine this scaling factor. The trading history analysed includes new trades, terminations, trade restructures and novations. The FFVA balance and movement is driven by the Barclays’ own cost of funding spread over LIBOR, counterparty default probabilities and recovery rates, as well as the market value of the underlying derivatives. Movements in the market value of the portfolio in scope for FFVA are mainly driven by interest rates, inflation rates and foreign exchange levels.

Barclays continues to monitor market practices and activity to ensure the approach to uncollateralised derivative valuation remains appropriate. The above approach has been in use since 2012 with no significant changes.

Derivative credit and debit valuation adjustments

Credit valuation adjustments (CVA) and debit valuation adjustments (DVA) are incorporated into derivative valuations to reflect the impact on fair value of counterparty credit risk and Barclays’ own credit quality respectively. These adjustments are calculated for uncollateralised and partially collateralised derivatives across all asset classes. CVA and DVA are calculated using estimates of exposure at default, probability of default and recovery rates, at a counterparty level. Counterparties include, but are not limited to, corporates, monolines, sovereigns and sovereign agencies, supranationals and special purpose vehicles.

Exposure at default is generally based on expected exposure, estimated through the simulation of underlying risk factors. For some complex products, where this approach is not feasible, simplifying assumptions are made, either through approximating with a more vanilla structure, or using current or scenario based mark to market as an estimate of future exposure. Where a strong CSA exists to mitigate counterparty credit risk, the exposure at default is set to zero.

Probability of default and recovery rate information is generally sourced from the CDS markets. For counterparties where this information is not available, or considered unreliable due to the nature of the exposure, alternative approaches are taken based on mapping internal counterparty ratings onto historical or market based default and recovery information. In particular, this applies to sovereign related names where the effect of using the recovery assumptions implied in CDS levels would imply a £56m (2014: £120m) increase in CVA.

Correlation between counterparty credit and underlying derivative risk factors may lead to a systematic bias in the valuation of counterparty credit risk, termed ‘wrong way’ or ‘right way’ risk. This is not incorporated into the CVA calculation, but risk of ‘wrong way’ exposure is controlled at the trade origination stage.

CVA decreased by £91m to £327m, primarily due to reduction in the average maturity date of the portfolio as trades tend to maturity. In addition, there was a reduction in monoline CVA of £15m due to trade unwinds. DVA increased by £12m to £189m, primarily as a result of Barclays’ credit spreads deteriorating.

Portfolio exemptions

The Group uses the portfolio exemption in IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement to measure the fair value of groups of financial assets and liabilities. Instruments are measured using the price that would be received to sell a net long position, i.e. an asset, for a particular risk exposure or to transfer a net short position, i.e. a liability, for a particular risk exposure in an orderly transaction between market participants at the balance sheet date under current market conditions. Accordingly, the Group measures the fair value of the group of financial assets and liabilities consistently with how market participants would price the net risk exposure at the measurement date.

Unrecognised gains as a result of the use of valuation models using unobservable inputs

The amount that has yet to be recognised in income that relates to the difference between the transaction price, i.e. the fair value at initial recognition, and the amount that would have arisen had valuation models using unobservable inputs been used on initial recognition, less amounts subsequently recognised, is £101m (2014: £96m). There are additions of £35m (2014: nil) and £31m (2014: £41m) of amortisation and releases.

The reserve held for unrecognised gains is predominantly related to derivative financial instruments.

Third party credit enhancements

Structured and brokered certificates of deposit issued by Barclays Group are insured up to $250,000 per depositor by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) in the US. The FDIC is funded by premiums that Barclays and other banks pay for deposit insurance coverage. The carrying value of these issued certificates of deposit that are designated under the IAS 39 fair value option includes this third party credit enhancement. The on-balance sheet value of these brokered certificates of deposit amounted to £3,729m (2014: £3,650m).

Valuation control framework

The valuation control framework covers fair value positions and is a key control in ensuring the material accuracy of valuations.

The valuation control function within Finance is responsible for independent price verification, oversight of prudent and fair value adjustments and escalation of valuation issues.

Governance over the valuation process is the responsibility of the Valuation Committee, and this is the governance forum to which valuation issues are escalated.

The Valuation Committee meets on a monthly basis and is responsible for overseeing valuation policy and practice within the Group. It provides reports to the Board Audit Committee, which examines the judgements taken on valuation and related disclosures.

Price verification uses independently sourced data that is deemed most representative of the market. The characteristics against which the data source is assessed are independence, reliability, consistency with other sources and evidence that the data represents an executable price. The most current data available at the balance sheet date is used. Where significant variances are noted in the independent price verification process, an adjustment is made to fair value. Additional fair value adjustments may be made to reflect such factors as bid-offer spreads, market data uncertainty, model limitations and counterparty risk. Further detail on these fair value adjustments is disclosed on page 289.

 

290  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilities continued

Comparison of carrying amounts and fair values for assets and liabilities not held at fair value

The following table summarises the fair value of financial assets and liabilities measured at amortised cost on the Group’s balance sheet:

 

As at 31 December 2015       

 

 

Carrying

amount

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

Fair

value

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 
 

 

Quoted

market

prices
(Level 1)

£m

  

  

  
  

  

    

 

 

 

Observable

inputs

(Level 2)

£m

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Significant

unobservable

inputs

(Level 3)

£m

  

  

  

  

  

Financial assets                 
Loans and advances to banks        41,349         41,301         5,933         34,125         1,243   
Loans and advances to customers:                 
– Home loans        155,863         151,431                         151,431   
– Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending        67,840         67,805         1,148         284         66,373   
– Finance lease receivables        4,776         4,730            
– Corporate loans        170,738         169,697         585         129,847         39,265   
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinga        28,187         28,187                 28,187           
Financial liabilities                 
Deposits from banks        (47,080      (47,080      (4,428      (42,652        
Customer accounts:                 
– Current and demand accounts        (147,122      (147,121      (130,439      (16,537      (145
– Savings accounts        (135,567      (135,600      (122,029      (13,537      (34
– Other time deposits        (135,553      (135,796      (43,025      (84,868      (7,903
Debt securities in issue        (69,150      (69,863      (190      (69,122      (551
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowinga        (25,035      (25,035              (25,035        
Subordinated liabilities        (21,467      (22,907              (22,907        
As at 31 December 2014                 
Financial assets                 
Loans and advances to banks        42,111         42,088         2,693         38,756         639   
Loans and advances to customers:                 
– Home loans        166,974         159,602                         159,602   
– Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending        63,583         63,759         1,214         488         62,057   
– Finance lease receivables        5,439         5,340            
– Corporate loans        191,771         188,805         233         143,231         45,341   
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending        131,753         131,753         2         131,751           
Financial liabilities                 
Deposits from banks        (58,390      (58,388      (4,257      (54,117      (14
Customer accounts:                 
– Current and demand accounts        (143,057      (143,085      (126,732      (16,183      (170
– Savings accounts        (131,163      (131,287      (116,172      (15,086      (29
– Other time deposits        (153,484      (153,591      (43,654      (101,736      (8,201
Debt securities in issue        (86,099      (87,522      (188      (87,334        
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing        (124,479      (124,479      (423      (124,056        
Subordinated liabilities        (21,153      (22,718              (22,701      (17

Fair value is an estimate of the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. As a wide range of valuation techniques are often available, it may not be appropriate to directly compare this fair value information to independent market sources or other financial institutions. Different valuation methodologies and assumptions can have a significant impact on fair values which are based on unobservable inputs.

 

 

Note

a During 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  291


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

        

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilities continued

Financial assets

The carrying value of financial assets held at amortised cost (including loans and advances to banks and customers, and other lending such as reverse repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities borrowed) is determined in accordance with the relevant accounting policy noted on pages 295 and 296.

Loans and advances to banks

The fair value of loans and advances, for the purpose of this disclosure, is derived from discounting expected cash flows in a way that reflects the current market price for lending to issuers of similar credit quality. Where market data or credit information on the underlying borrowers is unavailable, a number of proxy/extrapolation techniques are employed to determine the appropriate discount rates.

There is minimal difference between the fair value and carrying amount due to the short term nature of the lending (i.e. predominantly overnight deposits) and the high credit quality of counterparties.

Loans and advances to customers

The fair value of loans and advances to customers, for the purpose of this disclosure, is derived from discounting expected cash flows in a way that reflects the current market price for lending to issuers of similar credit quality.

For retail lending (i.e. home loans and credit cards) tailored discounted cash flow models are used to estimate the fair value of different product types. For example, for home loans different models are used to estimate fair values of tracker, offset and fixed rate mortgage products. Key inputs to these models are the differentials between historic and current product margins and estimated prepayment rates.

The discount of fair value to carrying amount for home loans has reduced to 2.8% (2014: 4.4%) due to changes in product mix across the loan portfolio and movements in product margins.

The fair value of corporate loans is calculated by the use of discounted cash flow techniques where the gross loan values are discounted at a rate of difference between contractual margins and hurdle rates or spreads where Barclays charges a margin over LIBOR depending on credit quality and loss given default and years to maturity. The discount between the carrying and fair value has decreased to 0.6% (2014: 1.5%).

Reverse repurchase agreements

The fair value of reverse repurchase agreements approximates carrying amount as these balances are generally short dated and fully collateralised.

Financial liabilities

The carrying value of financial liabilities held at amortised cost (including customer accounts, other deposits, repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities lent, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities) is determined in accordance with the accounting policy noted on pages 296 and 314.

Deposits from banks and customer accounts

In many cases, the fair value disclosed approximates carrying value because the instruments are short term in nature or have interest rates that reprice frequently such as customer accounts and other deposits and short term debt securities.

The fair value for deposits with longer term maturities such as time deposits, are estimated using discounted cash flows applying either market rates or current rates for deposits of similar remaining maturities. Consequently the fair value discount is minimal.

Debt securities in issue

Fair values of other debt securities in issue are based on quoted prices where available, or where the instruments are short dated, carrying amount approximates fair value. The fair value difference has decreased to 1.0% (2014: 1.7%).

Repurchase agreements

The fair value of repurchase agreements approximates carrying amounts as these balances are generally short dated.

Subordinated liabilities

Fair values for dated and undated convertible and non-convertible loan capital are based on quoted market rates for the issue concerned or issues with similar terms and conditions.

 

292  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


        

        

        

 

 

19 Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities

In accordance with IAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation, the Group reports financial assets and financial liabilities on a net basis on the balance sheet only if there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is intention to settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. The following table shows the impact of netting arrangements on:

 

§   all financial assets and liabilities that are reported net on the balance sheet

 

§   all derivative financial instruments and reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and borrowing agreements that are subject to enforceable master netting arrangements or similar agreements, but do not qualify for balance sheet netting.

The table identifies the amounts that have been offset in the balance sheet and also those amounts that are covered by enforceable netting arrangements (offsetting arrangements and financial collateral) but do not qualify for netting under the requirements of IAS 32 described above.

The ‘Net amounts’ presented below are not intended to represent the Group’s actual exposure to credit risk, as a variety of credit mitigation strategies are employed in addition to netting and collateral arrangements.

 

       Amounts subject to enforceable netting arrangements                     
     Effects of offsetting on-balance sheet         Related amounts not offseta        

 
 
 
 

 

Amounts not

subject to
enforceable
netting
arrangements

£m

  

  
  
  
c 

  

  
      
 
 
Gross
amounts
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Amounts
offset

£m

  
b 

  

    
 
 
 

 

Net amounts
reported on
the balance
sheet

£m

  
  
  
  

  

    
 

 

Financial
instruments

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

Financial
collateral

£m

  
  

  

    
 
Net amount
£m
  
  
       

 

 

Balance sheet

total

£m

  

d 

  

As at 31 December 2015

                       

Derivative financial assetse

     328,692         (7,685      321,007         (259,582      (42,402      19,023         6,702         327,709   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

     33,805         (11,220      22,585                 (22,299      286         5,602         28,187   

Reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair valuef

     135,792         (91,668      44,124                 (44,101      23         5,389         49,513   

Total assets

     498,289         (110,573      387,716         (259,582      (108,802      19,332         17,693         405,409   

Derivative financial liabilitiese

     (325,984      7,645         (318,339      259,582         40,124         (18,633      (5,913      (324,252

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

     (30,525      10,687         (19,838              19,838                 (5,197      (25,035

Repurchase agreements designated at fair valuef

     (141,126      92,201         (48,925              48,364         (561      (1,913      (50,838

Total liabilities

     (497,635      110,533         (387,102      259,582         108,326         (19,194      (13,023      (400,125

As at 31 December 2014

                       

Derivative financial assets

     617,981         (182,274      435,707         (353,631      (52,278      29,798         4,202         439,909   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

     204,895         (97,254      107,641                 (106,436      1,205         24,112         131,753   

Reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair value

     4,119                 4,119                 (3,918      201         1,117         5,236   

Total assets

     826,995         (279,528      547,467         (353,631      (162,632      31,204         29,431         576,898   

Derivative financial liabilities

     (617,161      184,496         (432,665      353,631         54,311         (24,723      (6,655      (439,320

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

     (202,218      97,254         (104,964              104,023         (941      (19,515      (124,479

Repurchase agreements designated at fair value

     (4,256              (4,256              3,942         (314      (1,167      (5,423

Total liabilities

     (823,635      281,750         (541,885      353,631         162,276         (25,978      (27,337      (569,222

Notes

a Financial collateral of £42,402m (2014: £52,278m) was received in respect of derivative assets, including £34,918m (2014: £44,047m) of cash collateral and £7,484m (2014: £8,231m) of non-cash collateral. Financial collateral of £40,124m (2014: £54,311m) was placed in respect of derivative liabilities, including £35,464m (2014: £43,768m) of cash collateral and £4,660m (2014: £10,543m) of non-cash collateral. The collateral amounts are limited to net balance sheet exposure so as to not include over-collateralisation. Of the £34,918m, (2014: £44,047m) cash collateral held, £27,732m, (2014: £33,769m) was included in deposits from banks and £7,186m (2014: £10,278m), was included in customer accounts. Of the £35,464m, (2014: £43,768m) cash collateral placed, £13,238m (2014: £16,815m) was included in loans and advances to banks and £22,226m (2014: £26,953m) was included in loans and advances to customers.
b Amounts offset for Derivative financial assets include cash collateral netted of £572m (2014: £1,052m). Amounts offset for Derivative liabilities include cash collateral netted of £532m (2014: £3,274m). Settlements assets and liabilities have been offset amounting to £8,886m (2014: £13,258m). No other significant recognised financial assets and liabilities were offset in the balance sheet. Therefore, the only balance sheet categories necessary for inclusion in the table are those shown above.
c This column includes contractual rights of set off that are subject to uncertainty under the laws of the relevant jurisdiction.
d The balance sheet total is the sum of ‘Net amounts reported on the balance sheet’ that are subject to enforceable netting arrangements and ‘Amounts not subject to enforceable netting arrangements’.
e The decrease in amounts offset is due to the conversion of Barclays daily collateralised interest rate swaps with LCH Clearnet Ltd, for which the collateral was offset against the derivative exposure, into daily settled interest rate swaps in December 2015. This led to a reduction in gross balances available to be offset. The derivative notional disclosure in Note 15 includes the notional of the daily settled interest rate swaps.
f During 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and repurchase agreements, other similar secured lending and borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  293


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

 

 

 

19 Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities continued

Derivative assets and liabilities

The ‘Financial instruments’ column identifies financial assets and liabilities that are subject to set off under netting agreements, such as the ISDA Master Agreement or derivative exchange or clearing counterparty agreements, whereby all outstanding transactions with the same counterparty can be offset and close-out netting applied across all outstanding transaction covered by the agreements if an event of default or other predetermined events occur.

Financial collateral refers to cash and non-cash collateral obtained, typically daily or weekly, to cover the net exposure between counterparties by enabling the collateral to be realised in an event of default or if other predetermined events occur.

Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and borrowing

The ‘Amounts offset’ column identifies financial assets and liabilities that are subject to set off under netting agreements, such as global master repurchase agreements and global master securities lending agreements, whereby all outstanding transactions with the same counterparty can be offset and close-out netting applied across all outstanding transaction covered by the agreements if an event of default or other predetermined events occur.

Financial collateral typically comprises highly liquid securities which are legally transferred and can be liquidated in the event of counterparty default.

These offsetting and collateral arrangements and other credit risk mitigation strategies used by the Group are further explained in the Credit risk mitigation section on page 133.

 

294  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Notes to the financial statements

Financial instruments held at amortised cost

    

 

 

 

The notes included in this section focus on assets that are held at amortised cost arising from the Group’s retail and wholesale lending including loans and advances, finance leases, repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements and similar secured lending. Detail regarding the Group’s capital and liquidity position can be found on pages 187 to 204.

    

20 Loans and advances to banks and customers

 

 

Accounting for financial instruments held at amortised cost

Loans and advances to customers and banks, customer accounts, debt securities and most financial liabilities are held at amortised cost. That is, the initial fair value (which is normally the amount advanced or borrowed) is adjusted for repayments and the amortisation of coupon, fees and expenses to represent the effective interest rate of the asset or liability.

 

In accordance with IAS 39, where the Group no longer intends to trade in financial assets, it may transfer them out of the held for trading classification and measure them at amortised cost if they meet the definition of a loan. The initial value used for the purposes of establishing amortised cost is fair value on the date of the transfer.

 

 

As at 31 December

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

Gross loans and advances to banks

     41,349         42,111   

Less: allowance for impairment

               

Loans and advances to banks

     41,349         42,111   

Gross loans and advances to customers

     404,138         433,222   

Less: allowance for impairment

     (4,921      (5,455

Loans and advances to customers

     399,217         427,767   

Further information on the Group’s loans and advances to banks and customers and impairment allowances is included on pages 150 and 151.

Prior to 2010, the Group reclassified certain financial assets, originally classified as held for trading, that were deemed to be not held for trading purposes to loans and advances. The carrying value and fair value of securities reclassified into loans and advances is £975m (2014: £1,862m) and £958m (2014: £1,834m) respectively.

If the reclassifications had not been made, the Group’s income statement for 2015 would have included a net gain on the reclassified trading assets of £12m (2014: gain of £57m).

21 Finance leases

 

 

Accounting for finance leases

The Group applies IAS 17 Leases in accounting for finance leases, both where it is the lessor or the lessee. A finance lease is a lease which confers substantially all the risks and rewards of the leased assets on the lessee. Where the Group is the lessor, the leased asset is not held on the balance sheet; instead a finance lease receivable is recognised representing the minimum lease payments receivable under the terms of the lease, discounted at the rate of interest implicit in the lease. Where the Group is the lessee, the leased asset is recognised in property, plant and equipment and a finance lease liability is recognised, representing the minimum lease payments payable under the lease, discounted at the rate of interest implicit in the lease.

 

Interest income or expense is recognised in interest receivable or payable, allocated to accounting periods to reflect a constant periodic rate of return.

 

Finance lease receivables

Finance lease receivables are included within loans and advances to customers. The Group engages in asset-based lending and works with a broad range of international technology, industrial equipment and commercial companies to provide customised finance programmes to assist manufacturers, dealers and distributors of assets.

 

       2015         2014   
           Present                  Present      
     Gross            value of            Gross            value of      
     investment            minimum         Un-         investment            minimum         Un-   
     in finance         Future         lease         guaranteed         in finance         Future         lease         guaranteed   
     lease         finance         payments         residual         lease         finance         payments         residual   
     receivables         income         receivable         values         receivables         income         receivable         values   
       £m         £m         £m         £m         £m         £m         £m         £m   

Not more than one year

     1,826         (230      1,596         117         2,139         (304      1,835         125   

Over one year but not more than five years

     3,569         (555      3,014         275         4,159         (682      3,477         293   

Over five years

     224         (32      192         21         213         (40      173         17   

Total

     5,619         (817      4,802         413         6,511         (1,026      5,485         435   

The impairment allowance for uncollectable finance lease receivables is £56m (2014: £82m).

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  295


Notes to the financial statements

Financial instruments held at amortised cost

                    

 

 

21 Finance leases continued

Finance lease liabilities

The Group leases items of property, plant and equipment on terms that meet the definition of finance leases. Finance lease liabilities are included within Note 26 Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities.

As at 31 December 2015, the total future minimum payments under finance leases were nil (2014: £14m). The carrying amount of assets held under finance leases was nil (2014: £31m).

22 Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing

Reverse repurchase agreements (and stock borrowing or similar transaction) are a form of secured lending whereby the Group provides a loan or cash collateral in exchange for the transfer of collateral, generally in the form of marketable securities subject to an agreement to transfer the securities back at a fixed price in the future. Repurchase agreements are where the Group obtains such loans or cash collateral, in exchange for the transfer of collateral.

 

 

Accounting for reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing

The Group purchases (a reverse repurchase agreement) or borrows securities subject to a commitment to resell or return them. The securities are not included in the balance sheet as the Group does not acquire the risks and rewards of ownership. Consideration paid (or cash collateral provided) is accounted for as a loan asset at amortised cost, unless it is designated at fair value through profit and loss.

 

The Group may also sell (a repurchase agreement) or lend securities subject to a commitment to repurchase or redeem them. The securities are retained on the balance sheet as the Group retains substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership. Consideration received (or cash collateral provided) is accounted for as a financial liability at amortised cost, unless it is designated at fair value through profit and loss.

 

 

        
 
2015
£m
  
  
      

 

2014

£m

  

  

Assets

         

Banks

       8,954           39,528   

Customers

       19,233           92,225   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinga

       28,187           131,753   

Liabilities

         

Banks

       13,951           49,940   

Customers

       11,084           74,539   

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowinga

       25,035           124,479   

 

 

 

 

Note

a During 2015, new reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar secured lending and borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance (see Notes 14 and 17 for further detail).

 

296  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Notes to the financial statements

Non-current assets and other investments

    

 

 

The notes included in this section focus on the Group’s non-current tangible and intangible assets and property, plant and equipment, which provide long-term future economic benefits.

    

23 Property, plant and equipment

 

 

 

Accounting for property, plant and equipment

 
  The Group applies IAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment and IAS 40 Investment Properties.  
  Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost, which includes direct and incremental acquisition costs less accumulated depreciation and provisions for impairment, if required. Subsequent costs are capitalised if these result in an enhancement to the asset.  
 

Depreciation is provided on the depreciable amount of items of property, plant and equipment on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful economic lives. Depreciation rates, methods and the residual values underlying the calculation of depreciation of items of property, plant and equipment are kept under review to take account of any change in circumstances. The Group uses the following annual rates in calculating depreciation:

 

 
  Annual rates in calculating depreciation    Depreciation rate  
  Freehold land    Not depreciated  
     Freehold buildings and long-leasehold property (more than 50 years to run)    2-3.3%  
  Leasehold property over the remaining life of the lease (less than 50 years to run)    Over the remaining life of the lease          
  Costs of adaptation of freehold and leasehold property    6-10%  
  Equipment installed in freehold and leasehold property    6-10%  
  Computers and similar equipment    17-33%  
  Fixtures and fittings and other equipment    9-20%  
  Where leasehold property has a remaining useful life of less than 17 years, costs of adaptation and installed equipment are depreciated over the remaining life of the lease.  
  Investment property  
 

The Group initially recognises investment property at cost, and subsequently at fair value at each balance sheet date, reflecting market conditions at the reporting date. Gains and losses on remeasurement are included in the income statement.

 

 

 

      
 

 

Investment
property

£m

  
  

  

    

 

Property

£m

  

  

    

 

Equipment

£m

  

  

    
 
 
    Leased
assets
£m
  
  
  
    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Cost               
As at 1 January 2015      207         4,054         4,350         10         8,621   
Additions and disposals      (71      22         173         49         173   
Change in fair value of investment properties      10                                 10   
Exchange and other movements      (6      (157      (264      3         (424
As at 31 December 2015      140         3,919         4,259         62         8,380   
Accumulated depreciation and impairment               
As at 1 January 2015              (1,669      (3,157      (9      (4,835
Depreciation charge              (181      (373              (554
Disposals              144         159                 303   
Exchange and other movements              9         194         (29      174   
As at 31 December 2015              (1,697      (3,177      (38      (4,912
Net book value      140         2,222         1,082         24         3,468   
Cost               
As at 1 January 2014      451         3,924         4,552         10         8,937   
Additions and disposals      (160      174         7                 21   
Change in fair value of investment properties      (1                              (1
Exchange and other movements      (83      (44      (209              (336
As at 31 December 2014      207         4,054         4,350         10         8,621   
Accumulated depreciation and impairment               
As at 1 January 2014              (1,513      (3,201      (7      (4,721
Depreciation charge              (184      (399      (2      (585
Disposals              34         271                 305   
Exchange and other movements              (6      172                 166   
As at 31 December 2014              (1,669      (3,157      (9      (4,835
Net book value      207         2,385         1,193         1         3,786   

Property rentals of £9m (2014: £5m) and £9m (2014: £14m) have been included in net investment income and other income respectively. Impairment of £38m (2014: £61m) was charged in the period.

The fair value of investment property is determined by reference to current market prices for similar properties, adjusted as necessary for condition and location, or by reference to recent transactions updated to reflect current economic conditions. Discounted cash flow techniques may be employed to calculate fair value where there have been no recent transactions, using current external market inputs such as market rents and interest rates. Valuations are carried out by management with the support of appropriately qualified independent valuers. Refer to Note 18 Fair value of assets and liabilities for further details.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  297


Notes to the financial statements

Non-current assets and other investments

                        

 

 

24 Goodwill and intangible assets

 

 

 

Accounting for goodwill and other intangible assets

Goodwill

The carrying value of goodwill is determined in accordance with IFRS 3 Business Combinations and IAS 36 Impairment of Assets.

 

Goodwill arises on the acquisition of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures, and represents the excess of the fair value of the purchase consideration over the fair value of the Group’s share of the assets acquired and the liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed on the date of the acquisition.

 

Goodwill is reviewed annually for impairment, or more frequently when there are indications that impairment may have occurred. The test involves comparing the carrying value of goodwill with the present value of the pre-tax cash flows, discounted at a rate of interest that reflects the inherent risks of the cash generating unit (CGU) to which the goodwill relates, or the CGU’s fair value if this is higher.

 

Intangible assets

Intangible assets other than goodwill are accounted for in accordance with IAS 38 Intangible Assets and IAS 36 Impairment of Assets.

 

Intangible assets include brands, customer lists, internally generated software, other software, licences and other contracts and core deposit intangibles. They are initially recognised when they are separable or arise from contractual or other legal rights, the cost can be measured reliably and, in the case of intangible assets not acquired in a business combination, where it is probable that future economic benefits attributable to the assets will flow from their use.

 

Intangible assets are stated at cost (which is, in the case of assets acquired in a business combination, the acquisition date fair value) less accumulated amortisation and provisions for impairment, if any, and are amortised over their useful lives in a manner that reflects the pattern to which they contribute to future cash flows, using the amortisation periods set out below:

 

 
    Annual rates in calculating amortisation    Amortisation period  
    Goodwill    Not amortised  
    Internally generated software    12 months to 6 years  
    Other software    12 months to 6 years  
    Core deposits intangibles    12 months to 25 years  
    Brands    12 months to 25 years  
    Customer lists    12 months to 25 years  
    Licences and other    12 months to 25 years  
 

 

Intangible assets are reviewed for impairment when there are indications that impairment may have occurred.

 

 

 

                Internally                  Core                                       
        generated         Other         deposit            Customer         Licences      
     Goodwill         software         software         intangibles         Brands         lists         and other         Total   
       £m         £m         £m         £m         £m         £m         £m         £m   

2015

                       

Cost

                       

As at 1 January 2015

     6,329         3,240         482         186         112         1,721         447         12,517   

Additions and disposals

     (515      998         75                                 18         576   

Exchange and other movements

     (211      (126      (15      (40      (26      (56      6         (468

As at 31 December 2015

     5,603         4,112         542         146         86         1,665         471         12,625   

Accumulated amortisation and impairment

                       

As at 1 January 2015

     (1,442      (1,257      (194      (88      (111      (962      (283      (4,337

Disposals

     518         128         2                                 3         651   

Amortisation charge

             (421      (17      (6              (143      (30      (617

Impairment charge

     (102      (101      (1      (1              (12              (217

Exchange and other movements

     28         17         (2      20         25         36         (7      117   

As at 31 December 2015

     (998      (1,634      (212      (75      (86      (1,081      (317      (4,403

Net book value

     4,605         2,478         330         71                 584         154         8,222   

2014

                       

Cost

                       

As at 1 January 2014

     6,346         2,411         556         194         116         1,543         437         11,603   

Additions and disposals

     36         702         176                         123         7         1,044   

Exchange and other movements

     (53      127         (250      (8      (4      55         3         (130

As at 31 December 2014

     6,329         3,240         482         186         112         1,721         447         12,517   

Accumulated amortisation and impairment

                       

As at 1 January 2014

     (1,468      (999      (217      (85      (97      (799      (253      (3,918

Disposals

             98         21                         14         2         135   

Amortisation charge

             (306      (19      (7      (18      (142      (30      (522

Impairment charge

             (74      (21                      (5              (100

Exchange and other movements

     26         24         42         4         4         (30      (2      68   

As at 31 December 2014

     (1,442      (1,257      (194      (88      (111      (962      (283      (4,337

Net book value

     4,887         1,983         288         98         1         759         164         8,180   

 

298  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                    

            

 

 

24 Goodwill and intangible assets continued

Goodwill

Goodwill is allocated to business segments as follows:

 

   

2015

£m

      

 

2014

£m

  

  

Personal and Corporate Banking

  3,472        3,471   

Africa Banking

  725        915   

Barclaycard

  408        427   

Barclays Non-Core

         74   

Total net book value of goodwill

      4,605            4,887   

Goodwill

Testing goodwill for impairment involves a significant amount of judgement. This includes the identification of independent CGUs and the allocation of goodwill to these units based on which units are expected to benefit from the acquisition. The allocation is reviewed following business reorganisation. Cash flow projections necessarily take into account changes in the market in which a business operates including the level of growth, competitive activity, and the impacts of regulatory change. Determining both the expected pre-tax cash flows and the risk adjusted interest rate appropriate to the operating unit requires the exercise of judgement. The estimation of pre-tax cash flows is sensitive to the periods for which detailed forecasts are available and to assumptions regarding long-term sustainable cash flows.

Other intangible assets

Determining the estimated useful lives of intangible assets (such as those arising from contractual relationships) requires an analysis of circumstances. The assessment of whether an asset is exhibiting indicators of impairment as well as the calculation of impairment, which requires the estimation of future cash flows and fair values less costs to sell, also requires the preparation of cash flow forecasts and fair values for assets that may not be regularly bought and sold.

Impairment testing of goodwill

During 2015, the Group recognised an impairment charge of £102m (2014: nil) primarily attributable to Non-Core and the withdrawal of the Bespoke product in Barclaycard. This is as a result of the carrying amount of the goodwill relating to these businesses not being supported based on the value in use calculations.

Key assumptions

The key assumptions used for impairment testing are set out below for each significant goodwill balance. Other goodwill of £881m (2014: £1,031m) was allocated to multiple CGUs which are not considered individually significant.

Personal and Corporate Banking (PCB)

Goodwill relating to Woolwich was £3,225m (2014: £3,225m) of the total PCB balance. The carrying value of the CGU is determined using an allocation of total Group shareholder funds excluding goodwill based on the CGU’s share of risk weighted assets before goodwill balances are added back. The recoverable amount of the CGU has been determined using cash flow predictions based on financial budgets approved by management and covering a three-year period, with a terminal growth rate of 2.4% (2014: 2.4%) applied thereafter. The forecast cash flows have been discounted at a pre-tax rate of 11.4% (2014: 11.0%). Based on these assumptions, the recoverable amount exceeded the carrying amount including goodwill by £24,811m (2014: £17,260m). A one percentage point change in the discount rate or terminal growth rate would increase or decrease the recoverable amount by £4,860m (2014: £2,888m) and £3,422m (2014: £2,070m) respectively. A reduction in the forecast cash flows of 10% per annum would reduce the recoverable amount by £4,835m (2014: £2,697m).

Africa

Goodwill relating to the Absa Retail Bank CGU was £499m (2014: £631m) of the total Africa Banking balance. The carrying value of the CGU has been determined by using net asset value. The recoverable amount of Absa Retail Bank has been determined using cash flow predictions based on financial budgets approved by management and covering a three year period, with a terminal growth rate of 6% (2014: 6%) applied thereafter. The forecast cash flows have been discounted at a pre-tax rate of 18.5% (2014: 18.7%). The recoverable amount calculated based on value in use exceeded the carrying amount including goodwill by £2,946m (2014: £1,623m). A one percentage point change in the discount rate or the terminal growth rate would increase or decrease the recoverable amount by £349m (2014: £329m) and £221m (2014: £206m) respectively. A reduction in the forecast cash flows of 10% per annum would reduce the recoverable amount by £469m (2014: £440m).

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  299


Notes to the financial statements

Non-current assets and other investments

    

 

 

25 Operating leases

 

 

Accounting for operating leases

The Group applies IAS 17 Leases, for operating leases. An operating lease is a lease where substantially all of the risks and rewards of the leased assets remain with the lessor. Where the Group is the lessor, lease income is recognised on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease unless another systematic basis is more appropriate. The Group holds the leased assets on-balance sheet within property, plant and equipment.

 

Where the Group is the lessee, rentals payable are recognised as an expense in the income statement on a straight-line basis over the lease term unless another systematic basis is more appropriate.

 

Operating lease receivables

The Group acts as lessor, whereby items of plant and equipment are purchased and then leased to third parties under arrangements qualifying as operating leases. The future minimum lease payments expected to be received under non-cancellable operating leases was £1m (2014: £1m).

Operating lease commitments

The Group leases various offices, branches and other premises under non-cancellable operating lease arrangements. With such operating lease arrangements, the asset is kept on the lessor’s balance sheet and the Group reports the future minimum lease payments as an expense over the lease term. The leases have various terms, escalation and renewal rights. There are no contingent rents payable.

Operating lease rentals of £500m (2014: £594m) have been included in administration and general expenses.

The future minimum lease payments by the Group under non-cancellable operating leases are as follows:

 

       2015         2014   
      
 
Property
£m
  
  
    
 
Equipment
£m
  
  
    
 
Property
£m
  
  
    
 
Equipment
£m
  
  

Not more than one year

     376         1         403         41   

Over one year but not more than five years

     1,127         11         1,147         106   

Over five years

     1,874                 2,036           

Total

     3,377         12             3,586         147   

Total future minimum sublease payments to be received under non-cancellable subleases were £1m (2014: £99m).

 

300  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

 

 

The notes included in this section focus on the Group’s accruals, provisions and contingent liabilities. Provisions are recognised for present obligations arising as consequences of past events where it is probable that a transfer of economic benefit will be necessary to settle the obligation, and it can be reliably estimated. Contingent liabilities reflect potential liabilities that are not recognised on the balance sheet.

26 Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

 

 

Accounting for insurance contracts

The Group applies IFRS 4 Insurance Contracts to its insurance contracts. An insurance contract is a contract that compensates a third party against a loss from non-financial risk. Some wealth management and other products, such as life assurance contracts, combine investment and insurance features; these are treated as insurance contracts when they pay benefits that are at least 5% more than they would pay if the insured event does not occur.

 

Insurance liabilities include current best estimates of future contractual cash flows, claims handling, and administration costs in respect of claims. Liability adequacy tests are performed at each balance sheet date to ensure the adequacy of contract liabilities. Where a deficiency is highlighted by the tests, insurance liabilities are increased with any deficiency being recognised in the income statement.

 

Insurance premium revenue is recognised in the income statement in the period earned, net of reinsurance premiums payable, in net premiums from insurance contracts. Increases and decreases in insurance liabilities are recognised in the income statement in net claims and benefits on insurance contracts.

 

 

      

 

2015

£m

  

  

  

2014   

£m   

Accruals and deferred income

     4,271       4,770  

Other creditors

     3,770       3,851  

Obligations under finance leases (see Note 21)

           36  

Insurance contract liabilities, including unit-linked liabilities

     2,569       2,766  

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

         10,610           11,423  

Accruals and deferred income decreased by 10% to £4.3bn mainly driven by lower staff costs and administrative and general costs accrued as at 31 December 2015.

Insurance liabilities relate principally to the Group’s long-term business. Insurance contract liabilities associated with the Group’s short term non-life business are £115m (2014: £157m). The maximum amounts payable under all of the Group’s insurance products, ignoring the probability of insured events occurring and the contribution from investments backing the insurance policies, were £65bn (2014: £82bn) or £49bn (2014: £74bn) after reinsurance. Of this insured risk, £55bn (2014: £69bn) or £43bn (2014: £66bn) after reinsurances was concentrated in short-term insurance contracts in Africa.

The impact to the income statement and equity under a reasonably possible change in the assumptions used to calculate the insurance liabilities would be £5m (2014: £8m).

27 Provisions

 

 

Accounting for provisions

The Group applies IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets in accounting for non-financial liabilities.

 

Provisions are recognised for present obligations arising as consequences of past events where it is more likely than not that a transfer of economic benefit will be necessary to settle the obligation, which can be reliably estimated. Provision is made for the anticipated cost of restructuring, including redundancy costs when an obligation exists. This is the case when the Group has a detailed formal plan for restructuring a business and has raised valid expectations in those affected by the restructuring by announcing its main features or starting to implement the plan. A provision is made for undrawn loan commitments if it is probable that the facility will be drawn and results in the recognition of an asset at an amount less than the amount advanced.

 

 

                 Undrawn                      Legal,                   
       contractually       Customer redress      competition       
      

 

 

Onerous

contracts

£m

  

  

  

 

Redundancy 

and 

restructuring 

£m 

 

committed 

facilities and 

guarantees 

£m 

    
 
 
 
Payment
Protection
Insurance
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Other
customer
redress
£m
  
  
  
  
 

and 

regulatory 

matters 

£m 

    

 

 

Sundry

provisions

£m

  

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 1 January 2015      205      291    94       1,059         586      1,690       210         4,135   
Additions      120      190    25       2,200         821      1,559       177                 5,092   
Amounts utilised      (42   (136)   (2)      (1,171      (440   (2,616)      (49      (4,456
Unused amounts reversed      (149   (140)   (37)              (32   (136)      (86      (580
Exchange and other movements      7      (19)   (20)      18         (39   (8)      12         (49
As at 31 December 2015      141      186    60       2,106         896      489       264         4,142   

Provisions expected to be recovered or settled within no more than 12 months after 31 December 2015 were £2,113m (2014: £3,464m).

Onerous contracts

Onerous contract provisions comprise an estimate of the costs involved with fulfilling the terms and conditions of contracts where the liability is higher than the amount of economic benefit to be received.

Redundancy and restructuring

These provisions comprise the estimated cost of restructuring, including redundancy costs where an obligation exists. Additions made during the year relate to formal restructuring plans and have either been utilised, or reversed, where total costs are now expected to be lower than the original provision amount.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  301


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

 

 

27 Provisions continued

Undrawn contractually committed facilities and guarantees

Provisions are made if it is probable that a facility will be drawn and the resulting asset is expected to have a realisable value that is less than the amount advanced.

Customer redress

Customer redress provisions comprise the estimated cost of making redress payments to customers, clients and counterparties for losses or damages associated with inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities. Provisions for other customer redress include £282m (2014: nil) in respect of Packaged Bank Accounts and £290m (2014: nil) in respect of historic pricing practices associated with certain Foreign Exchange transactions for certain customers between 2005 and 2012, and smaller provisions across the retail and corporate businesses which are likely to be utilised within the next 12 months.

Sundry provisions

This category includes provisions that do not fit into any of the other categories, such as fraud losses and dilapidation provisions.

Legal, competition and regulatory matters

The Group is engaged in various legal proceedings, both in the UK and a number of other overseas jurisdictions, including the US. For further information in relation to legal proceedings and discussion of the associated uncertainties, please see Note 29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

Payment Protection Insurance redress

As at 31 December 2015, Barclays had recognised cumulative provisions totalling £7.4bn (2014: £5.2bn) against the cost of Payment Protection Insurance (PPI) redress and associated processing costs with utilisation of £5.3bn (2014: £4.2bn), leaving a residual provision of £2.1bn (2014: £1.1bn).

Through to 31 December 2015, 1.6m (2014: 1.3m) customer initiated claimsa had been received and processed. The volume of claims received during 2015 decreased 9%b from 2014. This rate of decline however was slower than previously expected, due to steady levels of claims from Claims Management Companies (CMC) in particular.

During 2015 claims volumes continued to decline, but at a slower rate than had been projected at the start of the year based on historic experience. As a result, management has revised upwards its estimate of future volumes and recognised additional provisions totalling £2.2bn during the year. The provision estimate reflects an assessment of the proposals contained in a consultation published by the FCA on 26 November 2015 which, if enacted, would impact on the timing and volume of future claims flow. This includes estimating the impact of a proposed 2018 complaint deadline and guidance on the impact of a 2014 UK Supreme Court judgment (Plevin vs Paragon Personal Finance Limited). The potential impact of these proposals is difficult to estimate and the outcome of the consultation is not yet known.

The provision is calculated using a number of key assumptions which continue to involve significant management judgement and modelling:

 

§   customer initiated claim volumes – claims received but not yet processed plus an estimate of future claims initiated by customers where the volume is anticipated to decline over time

 

§   proactive response rate – volume of claims in response to proactive mailing

 

§   uphold rate – the percentage of claims that are upheld as being valid upon review

 

§   average claim redress – the expected average payment to customers for upheld claims based on the type and age of the policy/policies

 

§   processing cost per claim – the cost to Barclays of assessing and processing each valid claim.

These assumptions remain subjective, in particular due to the uncertainty associated with future claims levels, which include complaints driven by CMC activity.

The current provision represents Barclays’ revised best estimate of all future expected costs of PPI redress, however, it is possible the eventual outcome may differ from the current estimate. If this were to be material, the provision will be increased or decreased accordingly.

The following table details by key assumption, actual data through to 31 December 2015, forecast assumptions used in the provision calculation and a sensitivity analysis illustrating the impact on the provision if the future expected assumptions prove too high or too low.

 

       Cumulative                    Sensitivity analysis         Cumulative   
     actual to           Future           increase/decrease         actual to   

Assumption

     31.12.15             expected           in provision         31.12.14   

Customer initiated claims received and processeda

     1,570k         730kc         50k = £103m         1,300k   

Proactive mailing

     680k           150k           50k = £16m         680k   

Response rate to proactive mailing

     28%           26%           1% = £2m         28%   

Average uphold rate per claimc

     86%d         88%           1% = £18m         79%   

Average redress per valid claime

     £1,808           £1,810           £100 = £87m         £1,740   

Processing cost per claimf

     £300           £295           50k = £15m         £294   

 

Notes

a Total claims received to date, including those received via CMCs but excluding those for which no PPI policy exists and excluding responses to proactive mailing.
b Gross volumes received.
c Average uphold rate per claim excludes those for which no PPI policy exists.
d Change in average uphold rate mainly due to increased remediation in 2015.
e Average redress stated on a per policy basis and excludes remediation.
f Processing cost per claim on an upheld complaints basis, includes direct staff costs and associated overheads.

 

302  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


            

 

 

28 Contingent liabilities and commitments

 

 

Accounting for contingent liabilities

Contingent liabilities are possible obligations whose existence will be confirmed only by uncertain future events, and present obligations where the transfer of economic resources is uncertain or cannot be reliably measured. Contingent liabilities are not recognised on the balance sheet but are disclosed unless the outflow of economic resources is remote.

 

 

The following table summarises the nominal amount of contingent liabilities and commitments which are not classified as on-balance sheet:

 

      

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

Guarantees and letters of credit pledged as collateral security

     16,065         14,547   

Performance guarantees, acceptances and endorsements

     4,556         6,777   

Contingent liabilities

     20,621         21,324   

Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions

     845         1,091   

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsa

     93         13,856   

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

     281,369           276,315   

The Financial Services Compensation Scheme

The Financial Compensation Scheme (the FSCS) is the UK government-backed compensation scheme for customers of authorised institutions that are unable to pay claims. It provides compensation to depositors in the event that UK licensed deposit-taking institutions are unable to meet their claims. The FSCS raises levies on UK licensed deposit-taking institutions to meet such claims based on their share of UK deposits on 31 December of the specified years preceding the scheme year (which runs from 1 April to 31 March).

Compensation has previously been paid out by the FSCS, funded by loan facilities totalling approximately £18bn provided by HM Treasury to FSCS in support of FSCS’s obligations to the depositors of banks declared in default. The interest rate chargeable on the loan and levied to the industry is subject to a floor equal to the higher of HM Treasury’s own cost of borrowing (typically 2024 UK Gilt yield), and GBP LIBOR with 12-month maturity plus a spread. The FSCS recovered £1bn capital shortfall in respect of the legacy facility from industry in three instalments across 2013, 2014 and 2015. A separate shortfall in respect of Dunfermline Building Society was levied on the industry in both 2014 and 2015. The FSCS liability for the interest and capital levy for 2015-2016 was recognised and paid in 2015. Barclays has included an accrual of £56m in other liabilities as at 31 December 2015 (2014: £88m) in respect of the Barclays’ portion of the Interest Levy. Capital Levies for 2015/16 were recognised in 2015 and settled in the same year.

Further details on contingent liabilities relating to legal and competition and regulatory matters can be found in Note 29.

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters

Barclays PLC (BPLC), Barclays Bank PLC (BBPLC) and the Group face legal, competition and regulatory challenges, many of which are beyond our control. The extent of the impact on BPLC, BBPLC and the Group of these matters cannot always be predicted but may materially impact our operations, financial results, condition and prospects. Matters arising from a set of similar circumstances can give rise to either a contingent liability or a provision, or both, depending on the relevant facts and circumstances. The Group has not disclosed an estimate of the potential financial effect on the Group of contingent liabilities where it is not currently practicable to do so.

Investigations into certain agreements and Civil Action

The Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) has alleged that BPLC and BBPLC breached their disclosure obligations in connection with two advisory services agreements entered into by BBPLC. The FCA has imposed a £50m fine. BPLC and BBPLC are contesting the findings. The UK Serious Fraud Office (SFO), the US Department of Justice (DOJ) and the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) are also investigating these agreements.

Background Information

The FCA has investigated certain agreements, including two advisory services agreements entered into by BBPLC with Qatar Holding LLC (Qatar Holding) in June and October 2008 respectively, and whether these may have related to BPLC’s capital raisings in June and November 2008. The FCA issued warning notices (Warning Notices) against BPLC and BBPLC in September 2013.

The existence of the advisory services agreement entered into in June 2008 was disclosed but the entry into the advisory services agreement in October 2008 and the fees payable under both agreements, which amount to a total of £322m payable over a period of five years, were not disclosed in the announcements or public documents relating to the capital raisings in June and November 2008. While the Warning Notices consider that BPLC and BBPLC believed at the time that there should be at least some unspecified and undetermined value to be derived from the agreements, they state that the primary purpose of the agreements was not to obtain advisory services but to make additional payments, which would not be disclosed, for the Qatari participation in the capital raisings.

The Warning Notices conclude that BPLC and BBPLC were in breach of certain disclosure-related listing rules and BPLC was also in breach of Listing Principle 3 (the requirement to act with integrity towards holders and potential holders of the Company’s shares). In this regard, the FCA considers that BPLC and BBPLC acted recklessly. The financial penalty in the Warning Notices against the Group is £50m. BPLC and BBPLC continue to contest the findings.

Note

a Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements were previously disclosed as loan commitments. Following the business designation of reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements at fair value through profit and loss, new forward starting reverse repurchase agreements are within the scope of IAS 39 and are recognised as derivatives on the balance sheet.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  303


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

    

 

 

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters continued

Recent Developments

The FCA has agreed that the FCA enforcement process be stayed pending progress in the SFO’s investigation into the agreements referred to above, in respect of which the Group has received and has continued to respond to requests for further information.

In January 2016, PCP Capital Partners LLP and PCP International Finance Limited (PCP) served a claim on BBPLC seeking damages of £721.4m plus interest and costs for fraudulent misrepresentation and deceit, arising from alleged statements made by BBPLC to PCP in relation to the terms on which securities were to be issued to investors, including PCP, in the November 2008 capital raising. BBPLC is defending the claim.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period. PCP has made a claim against BBPLC totalling £721.4m plus interest and costs. This amount does not necessarily reflect BBPLC’s potential financial exposure if a ruling were to be made against it.

Investigations into certain business relationships

The DOJ and SEC are undertaking an investigation into whether the Group’s relationships with third parties who assist BPLC to win or retain business are compliant with the US Foreign Corrupt Practices Act. Certain regulators in other jurisdictions have also been briefed on the investigations. Separately, the Group is cooperating with the DOJ and SEC in relation to an investigation into certain of its hiring practices in Asia and is keeping certain regulators in other jurisdictions informed.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Alternative Trading Systems and High-Frequency Trading

The SEC, the New York State Attorney General (NYAG), the FCA and regulators in certain other jurisdictions have been investigating a range of issues associated with alternative trading systems (ATSs), including dark pools, and the activities of high-frequency traders. Various parties, including the NYAG, have filed complaints against BPLC and Barclays Capital Inc. (BCI) and certain of the Group’s current and former officers in connection with ATS related activities. BPLC and BCI have settled with the NYAG and the SEC, and BCI continues to provide information to other relevant regulatory authorities in response to their enquiries. BPLC and BCI continue to defend against the class actions described below.

Background Information

Civil complaints have been filed in the New York Federal Court on behalf of a putative class of plaintiffs against BPLC and BCI and others generally alleging that the defendants violated the federal securities laws by participating in a scheme in which high-frequency trading firms were given informational and other advantages so that they could manipulate the US securities market to the plaintiffs’ detriment. These complaints were consolidated (Trader Class Action) and Barclays filed a motion to dismiss this action.

In June 2014, the NYAG filed a complaint (NYAG Complaint) against BPLC and BCI in the Supreme Court of the State of New York (NY Supreme Court) alleging, amongst other things, that BPLC and BCI engaged in fraud and deceptive practices in connection with LX, the Group’s SEC-registered ATS.

BPLC and BCI have also been named in a class action by an institutional investor client under California law based on allegations similar to those in the NYAG Complaint. This California class action has been consolidated with the Trader Class Action.

Also, following the filing of the NYAG Complaint, BPLC and BCI were named in a shareholder securities class action along with certain of its former CEOs, and its current and a former CFO and an employee in Equities Electronic Trading on the basis that investors suffered damages when their investments in Barclays American Depository Receipts declined in value as a result of the allegations in the NYAG Complaint. BPLC and BCI filed a motion to dismiss the complaint, which the court granted in part and denied in part. In February 2016, the court granted plaintiffs’ motion to conduct the litigation as a class action.

Recent Developments

In August 2015, the Court granted Barclays’ motion to dismiss the Trader Class Action, and the plaintiffs have chosen not to appeal. Also in August 2015, the Court granted Barclays’ motion to dismiss the California class action, and later transferred that action to the Central District of California. The California class action plaintiffs have filed an amended complaint, which Barclays has filed a motion to dismiss.

On 1 February 2016, Barclays reached separate settlement agreements with each of the SEC and the NYAG to resolve those agencies’ claims against BPLC and BCI relating to the operation of LX for $35m each.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

The remaining complaints seek unspecified monetary damages and injunctive relief. It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the matters in this section or what effect that these matters might have upon operating results, cash flows or the Group’s financial position in any particular period.

 

304  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

 

 

 

 

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters continued

FERC

The US Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (FERC) has filed a civil action against BBPLC and certain of its former traders in the US District Court in California seeking to collect on an order assessing a $435m civil penalty and the disgorgement of $34.9m of profits, plus interest, in connection with allegations that BBPLC manipulated the electricity markets in and around California. The US Attorney’s Office in the Southern District of New York (SDNY) has informed BBPLC that it is looking into the same conduct at issue in the FERC matter, and a civil class action complaint was filed in the US District Court for the SDNY against BBPLC asserting antitrust allegations that mirror those raised in the civil suit filed by FERC.

Background Information

In October 2012, FERC issued an Order to Show Cause and Notice of Proposed Penalties (Order and Notice) against BBPLC and four of its former traders in relation to their power trading in the western US. In the Order and Notice, FERC asserted that BBPLC and its former traders violated FERC’s Anti-Manipulation Rule by manipulating the electricity markets in and around California from November 2006 to December 2008, and proposed civil penalties and profit disgorgement to be paid by BBPLC.

In October 2013, FERC filed a civil action against BBPLC and its former traders in the US District Court in California seeking to collect the $435m civil penalty and disgorgement of $34.9m of profits, plus interest.

In September 2013, the criminal division of the US Attorney’s Office in SDNY advised BBPLC that it is looking at the same conduct at issue in the FERC matter.

In June 2015, a civil class action complaint was filed in the US District Court for the SDNY against BBPLC by Merced Irrigation District, a California utility company, asserting antitrust allegations in connection with BBPLC’s purported manipulation of the electricity markets in and around California. The allegations mirror those raised in the civil suit filed by FERC against BBPLC currently pending in the US District Court in California.

Recent Developments

In October 2015, the US District Court in California ordered that it would bifurcate its assessment of liabilities and penalties from its assessment of disgorgement. FERC has filed and BBPLC is opposing a brief seeking summary affirmance of the penalty assessment. The court has indicated that it will either affirm the penalty assessment or require further evidence to determine this issue.

BBPLC has appealed the bifurcation order to the US Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit and has also filed a motion with the US District Court in California to stay the proceedings pending the outcome of the appeal.

In December 2015, BBPLC filed a motion to dismiss the civil class action for failure to state a claim.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

FERC has made claims against BBPLC and certain of its former traders totalling $469.9m, plus interest, for civil penalties and profit disgorgement. The civil class action complaint refers to damages of $139.3m. These amounts do not necessarily reflect BBPLC’s potential financial exposure if a ruling were to be made against it in either action.

Investigations into LIBOR and other Benchmarks

Regulators and law enforcement agencies from a number of governments have been conducting investigations relating to BBPLC’s involvement in manipulating certain financial benchmarks, such as LIBOR and EURIBOR. BBPLC, BPLC and BCI have reached settlements with the relevant law enforcement agency or regulator in certain of the investigations, but others, including the investigations by the US State Attorneys General, the SFO and the prosecutors’ office in Trani, Italy remain pending.

Background Information

In June 2012, BBPLC announced that it had reached settlements with the Financial Services Authority (FSA) (as predecessor to the FCA), the US Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC) and the DOJ Fraud Section (DOJ-FS) in relation to their investigations concerning certain benchmark interest rate submissions, and BBPLC agreed to pay total penalties of £290m. The settlement with the DOJ-FS was made by entry into a Non-Prosecution Agreement (LIBOR NPA) which has now expired. In addition, BBPLC was granted conditional leniency from the DOJ Antitrust Division (DOJ-AD) in connection with potential US antitrust law violations with respect to financial instruments that reference EURIBOR.

Investigations by the US State Attorneys General

Following the settlements announced in June 2012, a group of 31 US State Attorneys General (SAGs) commenced its own investigation into LIBOR, EURIBOR and the Tokyo Interbank Offered Rate. The Group has cooperated with the investigation throughout and is in advanced discussions with the SAGs about potential resolution.

Investigation by the SFO

In July 2012, the SFO announced that it had decided to investigate the LIBOR matter, in respect of which BBPLC has received and continues to respond to requests for information.

For a discussion of civil litigation arising in connection with these investigations see ‘LIBOR and other Benchmarks Civil Actions’.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

Aside from the settlements discussed above, it is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  305


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

    

 

 

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters continued

LIBOR and other Benchmark Civil Actions

Following the settlements of the investigations referred to above in ‘Investigations into LIBOR and other Benchmarks’, a number of individuals and corporates in a range of jurisdictions have threatened or brought civil actions against the Group in relation to LIBOR and/or other benchmarks. While several of such cases have been dismissed and certain have settled subject to approval from the court, other actions remain pending and their ultimate impact is unclear.

Background Information

A number of individuals and corporates in a range of jurisdictions have threatened or brought civil actions against the Group and other banks in relation to manipulation of LIBOR and/or other benchmark rates.

USD LIBOR Cases in MDL Court

The majority of the USD LIBOR cases, which have been filed in various US jurisdictions, have been consolidated for pre-trial purposes before a single judge in the SDNY (MDL Court).

The complaints are substantially similar and allege, amongst other things, that BBPLC and the other banks individually and collectively violated provisions of the US Sherman Antitrust Act, the Commodity Exchange Act (CEA), the US Racketeer Influenced and Corrupt Organizations Act (RICO) and various state laws by manipulating USD LIBOR rates.

The lawsuits seek unspecified damages with the exception of five lawsuits, in which the plaintiffs are seeking a combined total in excess of $1.25bn in actual damages against all defendants, including BBPLC, plus punitive damages. Some of the lawsuits also seek trebling of damages under the US Sherman Antitrust Act and RICO.

The proposed class actions purport to be brought on behalf of (amongst others) plaintiffs that (i) engaged in USD LIBOR-linked over-the-counter transactions (OTC Class); (ii) purchased USD LIBOR-linked financial instruments on an exchange (Exchange-Based Class); (iii) purchased USD LIBOR-linked debt securities (Debt Securities Class); (iv) purchased adjustable rate mortgages linked to USD LIBOR (Homeowner Class); or (v) issued loans linked to USD LIBOR (Lender Class).

In August 2012 the MDL Court stayed all newly filed proposed class actions and individual actions (Stayed Actions), so that the MDL Court could address the motions pending in three lead proposed class actions (Lead Class Actions) and three lead individual actions (Lead Individual Actions).

In March 2013, August 2013 and June 2014, the MDL Court issued a series of decisions effectively dismissing the majority of claims against BBPLC and other panel bank defendants in the Lead Class Actions and Lead Individual Actions.

As a result, the:

 

§   Debt Securities Class was dismissed entirely

 

§   claims of the Exchange-Based Class were limited to claims under the CEA

 

§   claims of the OTC Class were limited to claims for unjust enrichment and breach of the implied covenant of good faith and fair dealing.

The Debt Securities Class has appealed the dismissal of their action to the US Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit (Second Circuit). Multiple other plaintiffs in the litigation before the MDL Court also joined the appeal, which has been briefed and argued. A decision is pending.

Additionally, the MDL Court has begun to address the claims in the Stayed Actions, many of which, including state law fraud and tortious interference claims, were not asserted in the Lead Class Actions. As a result, in October 2014, the direct action plaintiffs (those who have brought suits individually rather than as part of a class action) filed their amended complaints and in November 2014, the defendants filed their motions to dismiss. In August 2015, the MDL Court granted in part and denied in part the motion to dismiss the direct action plaintiffs’ claims. Although the MDL Court dismissed a number of claims on various grounds, a number of state law claims will proceed to discovery.

In November 2014, the plaintiffs in the Lender Class and Homeowner Class actions filed their amended complaints. In January 2015, the defendants filed their motions to dismiss. In November 2015, the MDL Court granted in part and denied in part the motions to dismiss these actions, dismissing all claims against BBPLC brought by the Homeowner Class and reserving judgment with respect to the claims asserted by the Lender Class. In December 2015, the MDL Court approved a schedule for litigation of class certification issues, with the associated discovery beginning in 2016 and extending through 2017.

Until there are further decisions, the ultimate impact of the MDL Court’s decisions will be unclear, although it is possible that the decisions will be interpreted by the courts to affect other litigation, including the actions described further below, some of which concern different benchmark interest rates.

In December 2014, the MDL Court granted preliminary approval for the settlement of the remaining Exchange-Based Class claims for $20m. Final approval of the settlement is awaiting plaintiff’s submission of a plan for allocation of the settlement proceeds acceptable to the MDL Court.

In November 2015, the outstanding OTC Class claims were settled for $120m. The settlement is subject to approval by the MDL Court.

 

306  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

 

 

 

 

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters continued

EURIBOR Cases

In February 2013, a EURIBOR-related class action was filed against BPLC, BBPLC, BCI and other EURIBOR panel banks. The plaintiffs assert antitrust, CEA, RICO, and unjust enrichment claims. In particular, BBPLC is alleged to have conspired with other EURIBOR panel banks to manipulate EURIBOR. The lawsuit is brought on behalf of purchasers and sellers of NYSE LIFFE EURIBOR futures contracts, purchasers of Euro currency-related futures contracts and purchasers of other derivative contracts (such as interest rate swaps and forward rate agreements that are linked to EURIBOR) during the period 1 June 2005 through 31 March 2011. In October 2015, the class action was settled for $94m subject to court approval. The settlement has been preliminarily approved by the court but remains subject to final approval.

Securities Fraud Case in the SDNY

BPLC, BBPLC and BCI were also named as defendants along with four former officers and directors of BBPLC in a securities class action in the SDNY in connection with BBPLC’s role as a contributor panel bank to LIBOR. The complaint principally alleged that BBPLC’s Annual Reports for the years 2006 to 2011 contained misstatements and omissions and that BBPLC’s daily USD LIBOR submissions constituted false statements in violation of US securities law. In November 2015, the class action was settled for $14m. The settlement has been preliminarily approved by the court but remains subject to final approval.

Additional USD LIBOR Case in the SDNY

An additional individual action was commenced in February 2013 in the SDNY against BBPLC and other panel bank defendants. The plaintiff alleged that the panel bank defendants conspired to increase USD LIBOR, which caused the value of bonds pledged as collateral for a loan to decrease, ultimately resulting in the sale of the bonds at a low point in the market. The panel bank defendants moved to dismiss the action, and the motion was granted in April 2015. In June 2015, the plaintiff sought leave to file a further amended complaint; that motion is pending.

Sterling LIBOR Cases in SDNY

In May 2015, a putative class action was commenced in the SDNY against BBPLC and other Sterling LIBOR panel banks by a plaintiff involved in exchange-traded and over-the-counter derivatives that were linked to Sterling LIBOR. The complaint alleges, among other things, that BBPLC and other panel banks manipulated the Sterling LIBOR rate between 2005 and 2010 and, in so doing, committed CEA, antitrust, and RICO violations. Proceedings are ongoing.

In January 2016, an additional putative class action concerning Sterling LIBOR was commenced in the SDNY against BBPLC and BCI, as well as other Sterling LIBOR panel banks. This additional class action similarly alleges manipulation of the Sterling LIBOR rate between 2005 and 2010, and asserts claims for violations of the CEA, antitrust, and RICO statutes, as well as common law violations. Proceedings are ongoing.

Complaint in the US District Court for the Central District of California

In July 2012, a purported class action complaint in the US District Court for the Central District of California was amended to include allegations related to USD LIBOR and names BBPLC as a defendant. The amended complaint was filed on behalf of a purported class that includes holders of adjustable rate mortgages linked to USD LIBOR. In January 2015, the court granted BBPLC’s motion for summary judgment and dismissed all of the remaining claims against BBPLC. The plaintiff has appealed the court’s decision to the US Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit.

Japanese Yen LIBOR Case in SDNY

A class action was commenced in April 2012 in the SDNY against BBPLC and other Japanese Yen LIBOR panel banks by a plaintiff involved in exchange-traded derivatives. The complaint also names members of the Japanese Bankers Association’s Euroyen Tokyo Interbank Offered Rate (Euroyen TIBOR) panel, of which BBPLC is not a member. The complaint alleges, amongst other things, manipulation of the Euroyen TIBOR and Yen LIBOR rates and breaches of the CEA and US Sherman Antitrust Act between 2006 and 2010. In March 2014, the court dismissed the plaintiff’s antitrust claims in full, but sustained the plaintiff’s CEA claims. The plaintiff moved for leave to file a third amended complaint adding additional claims, including a RICO claim, which was denied in March 2015. The Plaintiff has sought an immediate appeal of that decision, and that request is pending. Discovery is continuing.

In July 2015, a second class action concerning Yen LIBOR was filed in the SDNY against BPLC, BBPLC and BCI. The complaint names members of the Yen LIBOR panel, the Euroyen TIBOR panel, and certain of their affiliates and brokers. The complaint alleges breaches of the US Sherman Antitrust Act and RICO between 2006 and 2010 based on factual allegations that are substantially similar to those in the April 2012 class action.

Non-US Benchmarks Cases

In addition to US actions, legal proceedings have been brought or threatened against the Group in connection with alleged manipulation of LIBOR and EURIBOR in a number of jurisdictions. The number of such proceedings in non-US jurisdictions, the benchmarks to which they relate, and the jurisdictions in which they may be brought have increased over time.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

Aside from the settlements discussed above, it is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect they might have on the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  307


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

    

 

 

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters continued

Foreign Exchange Investigations

Various regulatory and enforcement authorities have been investigating a range of issues associated with Foreign Exchange sales and trading, including electronic trading. Certain of these investigations involve multiple market participants in various countries. The Group has reached settlements with the CFTC, the DOJ, the New York State Department of Financial Services (NYDFS), the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (Federal Reserve) and the FCA (together, the Resolving Authorities) with respect to certain of these investigations as further described below. Investigations by the European Commission (Commission), the Administrative Council for Economic Defence in Brazil and the South African Competition Commission, amongst others, remain pending.

Background Information

In May 2015, the Group announced that it had reached settlements with the Resolving Authorities in relation to investigations into certain sales and trading practices in the Foreign Exchange market, that it had agreed to pay total penalties of approximately $2.38bn, including a $60m penalty imposed by the DOJ as a consequence of certain practices continuing after entry into the LIBOR NPA, and that BPLC had agreed to plead guilty to a violation of US anti-trust law.

Under the plea agreement with the DOJ, BPLC agreed to pay a criminal fine of $650m and a term of probation of three years from the date of the final judgment in respect of the plea agreement during which BPLC must, amongst other things, (i) commit no crime whatsoever in violation of the federal laws of the United States, (ii) implement and continue to implement a compliance program designed to prevent and detect the conduct that gave rise to the plea agreement and (iii) strengthen its compliance and internal controls as required by relevant regulatory or enforcement agencies.

Pursuant to the settlement with the CFTC, BBPLC consented to, among other things, pay a civil monetary penalty of $400m.

Pursuant to its settlement with the Federal Reserve, BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch consented to an order imposing a civil monetary penalty of $342m and ordering BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch to submit in writing to the Federal Reserve Bank of New York for its approval certain programs to enhance internal controls and compliance. Under the Federal Reserve order, BBPLC and its institution-affiliated parties must not in the future directly or indirectly retain certain individuals who participated in the misconduct underlying the order.

Pursuant to the settlement with the NYDFS, BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch consented to an order imposing a civil monetary penalty of $485m and requiring BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch to take all steps necessary to terminate four identified employees. BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch must also continue to engage the independent monitor previously selected by the NYDFS to conduct a comprehensive review of certain compliance programs, policies, and procedures.

The FCA issued a Final Notice and imposed a financial penalty of £284m on BBPLC.

The full text of the DOJ plea agreement, the CFTC, NYDFS and Federal Reserve orders, and the FCA Final Notice referred to above are publicly available on the Resolving Authorities’ respective websites.

The settlements reached in May 2015 did not encompass ongoing investigations of electronic trading in the Foreign Exchange market. The Group is cooperating with certain authorities which continue to investigate sales and trading practices of various sales and trading personnel, including Foreign Exchange personnel, among multiple market participants, including BBPLC, in various countries.

The FCA is also investigating historic pricing practices by BBPLC associated with certain Foreign Exchange transactions for certain customers between 2005 and 2012. BBPLC is cooperating with the FCA regarding the proposed terms and timing for appropriate customer redress.

For a discussion of civil litigation arising in connection with these investigations see ‘Civil Actions in Respect of Foreign Exchange Trading’ below.

Recent Developments

In November 2015, BBPLC announced that it had reached a settlement with the NYDFS in respect of its investigation into BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch electronic trading of Foreign Exchange and Foreign Exchange trading systems in the period between 2009 to 2014. Pursuant to the settlement the NYDFS imposed a civil monetary penalty of $150m, primarily for certain internal systems and controls failures. The Group continues to cooperate with other ongoing investigations.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

The fines in connection with the May 2015 settlements with the Resolving Authorities were covered by the Group’s provisions of £2.05bn.

A provision of £290m in redress costs for certain customers was recognised in Q3 2015 in relation to the FCA investigation into historic pricing practices by BBPLC associated with certain Foreign Exchange transactions referred to above. It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of any further financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect they might have on the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

 

308  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

 

 

 

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters continued

Civil Actions in respect of Foreign Exchange

Since November 2013, a number of civil actions have been filed in the SDNY on behalf of proposed classes of plaintiffs alleging manipulation of Foreign Exchange markets under the US Sherman Antitrust Act and New York state law and naming several international banks as defendants, including BBPLC. In February 2014, the SDNY combined all then-pending actions alleging a class of US persons in a single consolidated action. Settlements have been agreed with certain proposed classes of plaintiffs in the consolidated class action subject to court approval. The remaining proceedings are ongoing.

Since February 2015, several additional civil actions have been filed in the SDNY on behalf of proposed classes of plaintiffs alleging injuries related to Barclays’ alleged manipulation of Foreign Exchange rates and naming several international banks as defendants, including BPLC, BBPLC and BCI. One of the newly filed actions asserts claims under the US Employee Retirement Income Security Act (ERISA) statute and includes allegations that are duplicative of allegations in the other cases, as well as additional allegations about Foreign Exchange sales practices and ERISA plans. Another action was filed in the Northern District of California on behalf of a putative class of individuals that exchanged currencies on a retail basis at bank branches.

Recent Developments

In September 2015, BBPLC and BCI settled with certain proposed classes of plaintiffs in the consolidated action for $384m subject to court approval.

In addition, in November 2015 and December 2015, two additional civil actions were filed in the SDNY on behalf of proposed classes of plantiffs alleging injuries based on Barclays’ purported improper rejection of customer trades through Barclays’ Last Look system. In February 2016, BBPLC and BCI agreed a settlement with plaintiffs in one of the actions on a class-wide basis subject to court approval. The amount of the proposed settlement is $50m. In February 2016, the plaintiffs in the second action voluntarily dismissed their claims.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

Aside from the settlements discussed above, the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period is currently uncertain.

ISDAFIX Investigation

Regulators and law enforcement agencies, including the CFTC, have conducted separate investigations into historical practices with respect to ISDAFIX, amongst other benchmarks.

In May 2015, the CFTC entered into a settlement order with BPLC, BBPLC and BCI pursuant to which BPLC, BBPLC and BCI agreed to pay a civil monetary penalty of $115m in connection with the CFTC’s industry-wide investigation into the setting of the US Dollar ISDAFIX benchmark. In addition, the CFTC order requires BPLC, BBPLC and BCI to cease and desist from violating provisions of the CEA, fully cooperate with the CFTC in related investigations and litigation and undertake certain remediation efforts to the extent not already undertaken.

Investigations by other regulators and law enforcement agencies remain pending. For a discussion of civil litigation arising in connection with these investigations see ‘Civil Actions in Respect of ISDAFIX’ below.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

The fine in connection with the May 2015 settlement with the CFTC was covered by the Group’s provisions of £2.05bn.

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of any further financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect they might have on the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Civil Actions in respect of ISDAFIX

Since September 2014, a number of ISDAFIX related civil actions have been filed in the SDNY on behalf of a proposed class of plaintiffs, alleging that BBPLC, a number of other banks and one broker, violated the US Sherman Antitrust Act and several state laws by engaging in a conspiracy to manipulate the USD ISDAFIX. A consolidated amended complaint was filed in February 2015.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Precious Metals Investigation

BBPLC has been providing information to the DOJ and other authorities in connection with investigations into precious metals and precious metals-based financial instruments.

For a discussion of civil litigation arising in connection with these investigations see ‘Civil Actions in Respect of the Gold Fix’ below.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Civil Actions in respect of the Gold Fix

Since March 2014, a number of civil complaints have been filed in US Federal Courts, each on behalf of a proposed class of plaintiffs, alleging that BBPLC and other members of The London Gold Market Fixing Ltd. manipulated the prices of gold and gold derivative contracts in violation of the CEA, the US Sherman Antitrust Act, and state antitrust and consumer protection laws. All of the complaints have been transferred to the SDNY and consolidated for pre-trial purposes. In April 2015, defendants filed a motion to dismiss the claims. Proceedings are ongoing.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  309


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

    

 

 

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters continued

US Residential and Commercial Mortgage-related Activity and Litigation

The Group’s activities within the US residential mortgage sector during the period from 2005 through 2008 included:

 

§   sponsoring and underwriting of approximately $39bn of private-label securitisations

 

§   economic underwriting exposure of approximately $34bn for other private-label securitisations

 

§   sales of approximately $0.2bn of loans to government sponsored enterprises (GSEs)

 

§   sales of approximately $3bn of loans to others

 

§   sales of approximately $19.4bn of loans (net of approximately $500m of loans sold during this period and subsequently repurchased) that were originated and sold to third parties by mortgage originator affiliates of an entity that the Group acquired in 2007 (Acquired Subsidiary).

Throughout this time period affiliates of the Group engaged in secondary market trading of US residential mortgaged-backed securities (RMBS) and US commercial mortgage-backed securities (CMBS), and such trading activity continues today.

In connection with its loan sales and certain private-label securitisations, on 31 December 2015, the Group had unresolved repurchase requests relating to loans with a principal balance of approximately $2.3bn at the time they were sold, and civil actions have been commenced by various parties alleging that the Group must repurchase a substantial number of such loans.

In addition, the Group is party to a number of lawsuits filed by purchasers of RMBS asserting statutory and/or common law claims. The current outstanding face amount of RMBS related to these pending claims against the Group as of 31 December 2015 was approximately $0.4bn.

Regulatory and governmental authorities, including amongst others, the DOJ, SEC, Special Inspector General for the US Troubled Asset Relief Program, the US Attorney’s Office for the District of Connecticut and the US Attorney’s Office for the Eastern District of New York have initiated wide-ranging investigations into market practices involving mortgage-backed securities, and the Group is cooperating with several of those investigations.

RMBS Repurchase Requests

Background

The Group was the sole provider of various loan-level representations and warranties (R&Ws) with respect to:

 

§   approximately $5bn of Group sponsored securitisations

 

§   approximately $0.2bn of sales of loans to GSEs

 

§   approximately $3bn of loans sold to others.

In addition, the Acquired Subsidiary provided R&Ws on all of the $19.4bn of loans it sold to third parties.

R&Ws on the remaining Group sponsored securitisations were primarily provided by third-party originators directly to the securitisation trusts with a Group subsidiary, such as the depositor for the securitisation, providing more limited R&Ws. There are no stated expiration provisions applicable to most R&Ws made by the Group, the Acquired Subsidiary or these third parties.

Under certain circumstances, the Group and/or the Acquired Subsidiary may be required to repurchase the related loans or make other payments related to such loans if the R&Ws are breached.

The unresolved repurchase requests received on or before 31 December 2015 associated with all R&Ws made by the Group or the Acquired Subsidiary on loans sold to GSEs and others and private-label activities had an original unpaid principal balance of approximately $2.3bn at the time of such sale.

A substantial number (approximately $2.2bn) of the unresolved repurchase requests discussed above relate to civil actions that have been commenced by the trustees for certain RMBS securitisations in which the trustees allege that the Group and/or the Acquired Subsidiary must repurchase loans that violated the operative R&Ws. Such trustees and other parties making repurchase requests have also alleged that the operative R&Ws may have been violated with respect to a greater (but unspecified) amount of loans than the amount of loans previously stated in specific repurchase requests made by such trustees. All of the litigation involving repurchase requests remain at early stages.

In addition, the Acquired Subsidiary is subject to a civil action seeking, among other things, indemnification for losses allegedly suffered by a loan purchaser as a result of alleged breaches of R&Ws provided by the Acquired Subsidiary in connection with loan sales to the purchaser during the period 1997 to 2007. This litigation is ongoing.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

 

310  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

 

 

 

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters continued

RMBS Securities Claims

Background

As a result of some of the RMBS activities described above, the Group is party to a number of lawsuits filed by purchasers of RMBS sponsored and/or underwritten by the Group between 2005 and 2008. As a general matter, these lawsuits allege, among other things, that the RMBS offering materials allegedly relied on by such purchasers contained materially false and misleading statements and/or omissions and generally demand rescission and recovery of the consideration paid for the RMBS and recovery of monetary losses arising out of their ownership.

Recent Developments

The Group has settled a number of these claims, including in October 2015 a settlement with the National Credit Union Administration to resolve two outstanding civil lawsuits for $325m.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

If the Group were to lose the pending actions the Group believes it could incur a loss of up to the outstanding amount of the RMBS at the time of judgment, plus any cumulative losses on the RMBS at such time and any interest, fees and costs, less the market value of the RMBS at such time and less any provisions taken to date.

The original face amount of RMBS related to the pending civil actions against the Group total approximately $1.3bn, of which approximately $0.4bn was outstanding as at 31 December 2015. Cumulative realised losses reported on these RMBS as at 31 December 2015 were approximately $0.1bn.

Although the purchasers in the remaining securities actions have generally not identified a specific amount of alleged damages, the Group has estimated the total market value of these RMBS as at 31 December 2015 to be approximately $0.3bn. The Group may be entitled to indemnification for a portion of such losses.

Mortgage-related Investigations

In addition to the RMBS Repurchase Requests and RMBS Securities Claims, numerous regulatory and governmental authorities, amongst them the DOJ, SEC, Special Inspector General for the US Troubled Asset Relief Program, the US Attorney’s Office for the District of Connecticut and the US Attorney’s Office for the Eastern District of New York have been investigating various aspects of the mortgage-related business, including issuance and underwriting practices in primary offerings of RMBS and trading practices in the secondary market for both RMBS and CMBS. The Group continues to respond to requests relating to the RMBS Working Group of the Financial Fraud Enforcement Task Force (RMBS Working Group), which was formed to investigate pre-financial crisis mortgage-related misconduct. In connection with several of the investigations by members of the RMBS Working Group, a number of financial institutions have entered into settlements involving substantial monetary payments.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period, but the cost of resolving these investigations could individually or in aggregate prove to be substantial.

American Depositary Shares

BPLC, BBPLC and various former members of BPLC’s Board of Directors have been named as defendants in a securities class action consolidated in the SDNY alleging misstatements and omissions in offering documents for certain American Depositary Shares issued by BBPLC in April 2008 with an original face amount of approximately $2.5 billion (the April 2008 Offering).

Background Information

The plaintiffs have asserted claims under the Securities Act of 1933, alleging that the offering documents for the April 2008 Offering contained misstatements and omissions concerning (amongst other things) BBPLC’s portfolio of mortgage-related (including US subprime-related) securities, BBPLC’s exposure to mortgage and credit market risk, and BBPLC’s financial condition. The plaintiffs have not specifically alleged the amount of their damages.

In June 2014, the SDNY denied the defendants’ motion to dismiss the claims. The case is in discovery.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the action described on the Group or what effect that it might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

BDC Finance L.L.C.

BDC Finance L.L.C. (BDC) filed a complaint against BBPLC in the NY Supreme Court alleging breach of contract in connection with a portfolio of total return swaps governed by an ISDA Master Agreement (collectively, the Agreement). Parties related to BDC have also sued BBPLC and BCI in Connecticut State Court in connection with BBPLC’s conduct relating to the Agreement.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  311


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

    

 

 

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters continued

Background Information

In October 2008, BDC filed a complaint in the NY Supreme Court alleging that BBPLC breached the Agreement when it failed to transfer approximately $40m of alleged excess collateral in response to BDC’s October 2008 demand (Demand).

BDC asserts that under the Agreement BBPLC was not entitled to dispute the Demand before transferring the alleged excess collateral and that even if the Agreement entitled BBPLC to dispute the Demand before making the transfer, BBPLC failed to dispute the Demand. BDC demands damages totalling $298m plus attorneys’ fees, expenses, and prejudgement interest. Proceedings are currently pending before the NY Supreme Court.

In September 2011, BDC’s investment advisor, BDCM Fund Adviser L.L.C. and its parent company, Black Diamond Capital Holdings L.L.C. also sued BBPLC and BCI in Connecticut State Court for unspecified damages allegedly resulting from BBPLC’s conduct relating to the Agreement, asserting claims for violation of the Connecticut Unfair Trade Practices Act and tortious interference with business and prospective business relations. The parties have agreed to a stay of that case.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

BDC has made claims against the Group totalling $298m plus attorneys’ fees, expenses, and pre-judgement interest. This amount does not necessarily reflect the Group’s potential financial exposure if a ruling were to be made against it.

Civil Actions in respect of the US Anti-Terrorism Act

In April 2015, an amended civil complaint was filed in the US Federal Court in the Eastern District of New York by a group of approximately 250 plaintiffs, alleging that BBPLC and a number of other banks engaged in a conspiracy and violated the US Anti-Terrorism Act (ATA) by facilitating US dollar denominated transactions for the Government of Iran and various Iranian banks, which in turn funded Hezbollah attacks that injured the plaintiffs’ family members. Plaintiffs seek to recover for pain, suffering and mental anguish pursuant to the provisions of the ATA, which allows for the tripling of any proven damages. BBPLC has filed a motion to dismiss the action which is fully briefed.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the matters in this section or what effect that these matters might have upon operating results, cash flows or the Group’s financial position in any particular period.

Interest Rate Swap US Civil Action

In November 2015, an antitrust class action was filed against BPLC, BBPLC, BCI and other financial institutions in the SDNY by a US retirement and pension fund. The complaint alleges that the defendants that act as market makers for certain types of derivatives and Tradeweb conspired to prevent the development of exchanges for interest rate swaps (IRS) and demands unspecified money damages, treble damages and legal fees. The plaintiff claims to represent a class of buy-side investors that transacted in fixed-for-floating IRS with defendants in the US from 1 January 2008 to the present, including other retirement funds, university endowments, municipalities, corporations and insurance companies.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the action described on the Group or what effect it has upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Treasury Auction Securities Civil Actions

Numerous putative class action complaints have been filed in US Federal Courts against BCI and other financial institutions that have served as primary dealers in US Treasury securities. The complaints have been or are in the process of being consolidated in the Federal Court in New York. The complaints generally allege that defendants conspired to manipulate the US Treasury securities market in violation of US federal antitrust laws, the CEA and state common law. Some complaints also allege that defendants engaged in illegal “spoofing” of the US Treasury market. The Group is considering the allegations in the complaints and is keeping all relevant agencies informed.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Investigation into Americas Wealth & Investment Management Advisory Business

The SEC is investigating the non-performance of certain due diligence on third-party managers by the Manager Research division of Barclays’ Wealth & Investment Management, Americas investment advisory business and the Group is responding to requests for information.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the investigation on the Group or what effect that it might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Retail Structured Products Investigation

The Group is cooperating with an enforcement investigation commenced by the FCA in connection with structured deposit products provided to UK customers from June 2008 to the present.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of these matters or what effect that they may have upon operating results, cash flows or the Group’s financial position in any particular period.

 

312  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

 

 

 

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters continued

Investigation into suspected money laundering related to foreign exchange transactions in South African operation

Absa Bank Limited, a subsidiary of Barclays Africa Group Limited, has identified potentially fraudulent activity by certain of its customers using import advance payments to effect foreign exchange transfers from South Africa to beneficiary accounts located in Asia, UK, Europe and the US. As a result, the Group is conducting a review of relevant activity, processes, systems and controls. The Group is keeping relevant agencies and regulators informed as to the ongoing status of this matter.

It is too early to assess reliably the outcome.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Portuguese Competition Authority Investigation

The Portuguese Competition Authority is investigating whether competition law was infringed by the exchange of information about retail credit products amongst 15 banks in Portugal, including the Group, over a period of 11 years with particular reference to mortgages, consumer lending and lending to small and medium enterprises. The Group is cooperating with the investigation.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of these matters or what effect that they may have upon operating results, cash flows or the Group’s financial position in any particular period.

Credit Default Swap (CDS) Antitrust Investigations and Civil Actions

The Commission and the DOJ-AD commenced investigations into the CDS market, in 2011 and 2009, respectively. In December 2015 the Commission announced its decision to close its investigations in respect of BBPLC and 12 other banks. The Commission continues to pursue its case in respect of Markit Ltd. and ISDA, which could indirectly expose BBPLC to financial loss. The case relates to concerns about actions to delay and prevent the emergence of exchange traded credit derivative products.

The DOJ-AD’s investigation is a civil investigation and relates to similar issues.

In September 2015, BBPLC settled a proposed, consolidated class action that had been filed in the US alleging similar issues for $178m subject to court approval.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

Aside from the settlement discussed above, it is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Lehman Brothers

Since September 2009, BCI and BBPLC have been engaged in litigation with various entities that have sought to challenge certain aspects of the transaction pursuant to which BCI, BBPLC and other companies in the Group acquired most of the assets of Lehman Brothers Inc. in September 2008, as well as the court order (Order) approving the sale (Sale). All of the claims challenging the Sale were ultimately resolved in favour of BCI. In May 2015, BCI and BBPLC reached a settlement with the SIPA Trustee for Lehman Brothers Inc. (Trustee) to resolve the remaining outstanding litigation between them relating to the Sale. Pursuant to the settlement, BBPLC has received all of the assets that BBPLC asserted it was entitled to receive with the exception of $80m of assets that the Trustee is entitled to retain and approximately $0.3bn of margin for exchange-traded derivatives still owed to BBPLC but expected to be received from third parties. The settlement was approved by the United States Bankruptcy Court for the SDNY on 29 June 2015, thereby bringing the litigation relating to the Sale to an end.

General

The Group is engaged in various other legal, competition and regulatory matters both in the UK and a number of overseas jurisdictions. It is subject to legal proceedings by and against the Group which arise in the ordinary course of business from time to time, including (but not limited to) disputes in relation to contracts, securities, debt collection, consumer credit, fraud, trusts, client assets, competition, data protection, money laundering, financial crime, employment, environmental and other statutory and common law issues.

The Group is also subject to enquiries and examinations, requests for information, audits, investigations and legal and other proceedings by regulators, governmental and other public bodies in connection with (but not limited to) consumer protection measures, compliance with legislation and regulation, wholesale trading activity and other areas of banking and business activities in which the Group is or has been engaged. The Group is keeping all relevant agencies briefed as appropriate in relation to these matters and others described in this note on an ongoing basis.

At the present time, the Group does not expect the ultimate resolution of any of these other matters to have a material adverse effect on its financial position. However, in light of the uncertainties involved in such matters and the matters specifically described in this note, there can be no assurance that the outcome of a particular matter or matters will not be material to the Group’s operating results or cash flows for a particular period, depending on, among other things, the amount of the loss resulting from the matter(s) and the amount of income otherwise reported for the reporting period.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  313


Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

 

 

 

 

 

The notes included in this section focus on the Group’s loan capital and shareholders’ equity including issued share capital, retained earnings, other equity balances and interests of minority shareholders in our subsidiary entities (non-controlling interests). For more information on capital management and how the Group maintains sufficient capital to meet our regulatory requirements see pages 181 to 186.

 

30 Subordinated liabilities

 

 

Accounting for subordinated debt

Subordinated debt is measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method under IAS 39.

 

Subordinated liabilities include accrued interest and comprise undated and dated loan capital as follows:

 

               

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

Undated subordinated liabilities

        5,248         5,640   

Dated subordinated liabilities

              16,219         15,513   

Total subordinated liabilities

              21,467         21,153   

 

None of the Group’s loan capital is secured.

 

        

Undated subordinated liabilities

                          
           

Subordinated liabilities per

balance sheet

 
       Initial call date        
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  

Barclays Bank PLC issued

        

Tier One Notes (TONs)

        

6% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes

     2032         16         16   

6.86% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes (USD 569m)

     2032         626         604   

Reserve Capital Instruments (RCIs)

        

5.926% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments (USD 159m)

     2016         113         112   

7.434% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments (USD 117m)

     2017         85         85   

6.3688% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments

     2019         38         39   

14% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments

     2019         3,062         3,065   

5.3304% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments

     2036         51         52   

Undated Notes

        

6.875% Undated Subordinated Notes

     2015                 140   

6.375% Undated Subordinated Notes

     2017         143         146   

7.7% Undated Subordinated Notes (USD 99m)

     2018         69         69   

8.25% Undated Subordinated Notes

     2018         149         152   

7.125% Undated Subordinated Notes

     2020         195         202   

6.125% Undated Subordinated Notes

     2027         245         249   

Junior Undated Floating Rate Notes (USD 109m)

     Any interest payment date         74         70   

Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 3

     Any interest payment date         145         145   

Bonds

        

9.25% Perpetual Subordinated Bonds (ex-Woolwich PLC)

     2021         91         94   

9% Permanent Interest Bearing Capital Bonds

     At any time         45         46   

Loans

        

5.03% Reverse Dual Currency Undated Subordinated Loan (JPY 8,000m)

     2028         42         39   

5% Reverse Dual Currency Undated Subordinated Loan (JPY 12,000m)

     2028         59         54   

Barclays SLCSM Funding B.V. guaranteed by the Bank

        

6.14% Fixed Rate Guaranteed Perpetual Subordinated Notes

     2015                 261   

Total undated subordinated liabilities

              5,248         5,640   

 

314  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


            

 

 

30 Subordinated liabilities continued

Undated loan capital

Undated loan capital is issued by the Bank and its subsidiaries for the development and expansion of the business and to strengthen the capital bases. The principal terms of the undated loan capital are described below.

Subordination

All undated loan capital ranks behind the claims against the bank of depositors and other unsecured unsubordinated creditors and holders of dated loan capital in the following order: Junior Undated Floating Rate Notes; other issues of Undated Notes, Bonds and Loans ranking pari passu with each other; followed by TONs and RCIs ranking pari passu with each other.

Interest

All undated loan capital bears a fixed rate of interest until the initial call date, with the exception of the 9% Bonds which are fixed for the life of the issue, and the Junior and Series 3 Undated Notes which are floating rate.

After the initial call date, in the event that they are not redeemed, the 6.375%, 7.125%, 6.125% Undated Notes and the 9.25% Bonds will bear interest at rates fixed periodically in advance for five-year periods based on market rates. All other undated loan capital except the two floating rate Undated Notes will bear interest, and the two floating rate Undated Notes currently bear interest, at rates fixed periodically in advance based on London interbank rates.

Payment of interest

The Bank is not obliged to make a payment of interest on its Undated Notes, Bonds and Loans excluding the 7.7% Undated Notes, 8.25% Undated Notes and 9.25% Bonds if, in the preceding six months, a dividend has not been declared or paid on any class of shares of Barclays PLC or, in certain cases, any class of preference shares of the Bank. The Bank is not obliged to make a payment of interest on its 9.25% Perpetual Subordinated Bonds if, in the immediately preceding 12 months’ interest period, a dividend has not been paid on any class of its share capital. Interest not so paid becomes payable in each case if such a dividend is subsequently paid or in certain other circumstances. During the year, the Bank declared and paid dividends on its ordinary shares and on all classes of preference shares.

No payment of principal or any interest may be made unless the Bank satisfies a specified solvency test.

The Bank may elect to defer any payment of interest on the 7.7% Undated Notes and 8.25% Undated Notes. Until such time as any deferred interest has been paid in full, neither the Bank nor Barclays PLC may declare or pay a dividend, subject to certain exceptions, on any of its ordinary shares, preference shares, or other share capital or satisfy any payments of interest or coupons on certain other junior obligations.

The Bank may elect to defer any payment of interest on the RCIs. Any such deferred payment of interest must be paid on the earlier of: (i) the date of redemption of the RCIs, (ii) the coupon payment date falling on or nearest to the tenth anniversary of the date of deferral of such payment, and (iii) in respect of the 14% RCIs only, substitution. While such deferral is continuing, neither the Bank nor Barclays PLC may declare or pay a dividend, subject to certain exceptions, on any of its ordinary shares or preference shares.

The Bank may elect to defer any payment of interest on the TONs if it determines that it is, or such payment would result in it being, in non-compliance with capital adequacy requirements and policies of the PRA. Any such deferred payment of interest will only be payable on a redemption of the TONs. Until such time as the Bank next makes a payment of interest on the TONs, neither the Bank nor Barclays PLC may (i) declare or pay a dividend, subject to certain exceptions, on any of their respective ordinary shares or Preference Shares, or make payments of interest in respect of the Bank’s Reserve Capital Instruments and (ii) certain restrictions on the redemption, purchase or reduction of their respective share capital and certain other securities also apply.

Repayment

All undated loan capital is repayable at the option of the Bank, generally in whole, at the initial call date and on any subsequent coupon or interest payment date or in the case of the 6.375%, 7.125%, 6.125% Undated Notes and the 9.25% Bonds on any fifth anniversary after the initial call date. In addition, each issue of undated loan capital is repayable, at the option of the Bank in whole in the event of certain changes in the tax treatment of the notes, either at any time, or on an interest payment date. There are no events of default except non-payment of principal or mandatory interest. Any repayments require the prior approval of the PRA.

Other

All issues of undated subordinated liabilities are non-convertible.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  315


Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

                

 

 

30 Subordinated liabilities continued

 

Dated subordinated liabilities

                            
            Subordinated liabilities
            per balance sheet
       Initial      Maturity       2015      2014
         call date      date       £m      £m

Barclays PLC issued

                

2.625% Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Notes (EUR 1,250m)

       2020      2025       918     

4.375% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,250m)

       2024       883      810

Barclays Bank PLC issued

                

4.38% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 75m)

       2015            49

4.75% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 150m)

       2015            98

6.05% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,556m)

       2017       1,124      1,102

Floating Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 40m)

       2018       29      31

6% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,750m)

       2018       1,377      1,462

CMS-Linked Subordinated Notes (EUR 100m)

       2018       77      82

CMS-Linked Subordinated Notes (EUR 135m)

       2018       103      109

Fixed/Floating Rate Subordinated Callable Notes

       2018      2023       555      565

7.75% Contingent Capital Notes (USD 1,000m)

       2018      2023       679      640

Floating Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 50m)

       2019       36      38

5.14% Lower Tier 2 Notes (USD 1,094m)

       2020       808      767

6% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,500m)

       2021       1,252      1,338

9.5% Subordinated Bonds (ex-Woolwich PLC)

       2021       293      306

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 100m)

       2021       73      77

10% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes

       2021       2,317      2,363

10.179% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,521m)

       2021       1,083      1,062

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 50m)

       2022       37      39

6.625% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,000m)

       2022       891      947

7.625% Contingent Capital Notes (USD 3,000m)

       2022       1,984      1,856

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 50m)

       2023       37      39

5.75% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes

       2026       802      828

5.4% Reverse Dual Currency Subordinated Loan (JPY 15,000m)

       2027       80      74

6.33% Subordinated Notes

       2032       60      62

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 100m)

       2040       74      78

Absa Bank Limited issued

                

8.1% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 2,000m)

       2015      2020            114

10.28% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 600m)

       2017      2022       26      34

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 400m)

       2017      2022       18      22

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,805m)

       2017      2022       79      101

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 2,007m)

       2018      2023       88      112

8.295% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,188m)

       2018      2023       42      64

5.50% CPI-linked Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,500m)

       2023      2028       86      109

Barclays Africa Group Limited Issued

                

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 370m)

       2019      2024       16      21

10.835% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 130m)

       2019      2024       6      7

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,693m)

       2020      2025       74     

10.05% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 807m)

       2020      2025       36     

11.4% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 288m)

       2020      2025       13     

11.365% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 508m)

       2020      2025       23     

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 437m)

       2020      2025       19     

11.81% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 737m)

       2022      2027       33     

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 30m)

       2022      2027       1     

Other capital issued by Barclays Africa and Japan

             2016–2019       87      107

Total dated subordinated liabilities

                    16,219              15,513

 

316  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

                

                

 

 

30 Subordinated liabilities continued

Dated loan capital

Dated loan capital is issued by the Company, the Bank and respective subsidiaries for the development and expansion of their business and to strengthen their respective capital bases. The principal terms of the dated loan capital are described below:

Subordination

Dated loan capital issued by the Company ranks behind the claims against the Company of unsecured unsubordinated creditors but before the claims of the holders of its equity.

All dated loan capital issued by the Bank ranks behind the claims against the Bank of depositors and other unsecured unsubordinated creditors but before the claims of the undated loan capital and the holders of its equity. The dated loan capital issued by other subsidiaries is similarly subordinated.

Interest

Interest on the Floating Rate Notes is fixed periodically in advance, based on the related interbank or local central bank rates.

Interest on the 7.75% Contingent Capital Notes and the 2.625% Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Notes are fixed until the call date. After the respective call dates, in the event that they are not redeemed, the interest rates will be reset and fixed until maturity based on a market rate.

Repayment

Those Notes with a call date are repayable at the option of the issuer, on conditions governing the respective debt obligations, some in whole or in part, and some only in whole. The remaining dated loan capital outstanding at 31 December 2015 is redeemable only on maturity, subject in particular cases to provisions allowing an early redemption in the event of certain changes in tax law, or to certain changes in legislation or regulations.

Any repayments prior to maturity require, in the case of the Company and the Bank, the prior approval of the PRA, or in the case of the overseas issues, the approval of the local regulator for that jurisdiction and of the PRA in certain circumstances.

There are no committed facilities in existence at the balance sheet date which permit the refinancing of debt beyond the date of maturity.

Other

The 7.625% Contingent Capital Notes will be automatically transferred from investors to Barclays PLC (or another entity within the Group) for nil consideration in the event the Barclays PLC consolidated CRD IV CET1 ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) falls below 7.0%.

The 7.75% Contingent Capital Notes will be automatically written-down and investors will lose their entire investment in the notes in the event the Barclays PLC consolidated CRD IV CET1 ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) falls below 7.0%.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  317


Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

 

 

31 Ordinary shares, share premium, and other equity

Called up share capital, allotted and fully paid

                                            
      

 

 

Number of

shares

m

  

  

  

    

 

 

Ordinary

shares

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

Share

premium

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Total share

capital and

share

premium

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

Other

equity

instruments

£m

  

  

  

  

 As at 1 January 2015      16,498         4,125         16,684         20,809         4,322   
 Issued to staff under share incentive plans      253         63         577         640           
 Issuances relating to Scrip Dividend Programme      54         13         124         137           
 AT1 securities issuance                                      995   
 Other movements                                      (12
 As at 31 December 2015      16,805         4,201         17,385         21,586         5,305   
 As at 1 January 2014      16,113         4,028         15,859         19,887         2,063   
 Issued to staff under share incentive plans      320         81         691         772           
 Issuances relating to Scrip Dividend Programme      65         16         134         150           
 AT1 securities issuance                                      2,263   
 Other movements                                      (4
 As at 31 December 2014      16,498         4,125         16,684         20,809         4,322   

Called up share capital

Called up share capital comprises 16,805m (2014: 16,498m) ordinary shares of 25p each. The increase was due to the issuance of 253m (2014:320m) shares under employee share schemes and a further 54m (2014: 65m) issued as part of the Barclays PLC Scrip Dividend Programme.

Share repurchase

At the 2015 AGM on 23 April 2015, Barclays PLC was authorised to repurchase 1,650m of its ordinary shares of 25p. The authorisation is effective until the AGM in 2016 or the close of business on 30 June 2016, whichever is the earlier. No share repurchases were made during either 2015 or 2014.

Other equity instruments

Other equity instruments of £5,305m (2014: £4,322m) include AT1 securities issued by Barclays PLC. In 2015, there was one issuance of Fixed Rate Resetting Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities, with a principal amount of £1.0bn. In 2014, there were three issuances of Fixed Rate Resetting Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities, with principal amounts of $1.2bn, 1.1bn and £0.7bn.

The AT1 securities are perpetual securities with no fixed maturity and are structured to qualify as AT1 instruments under CRD IV.

The principal terms of the AT1 securities are described below:

 

§   AT1 securities rank behind the claims against Barclays PLC of (i) unsubordinated creditors; (ii) claims which are expressed to be subordinated to the claims of unsubordinated creditors of Barclays PLC but not further or otherwise; or (iii) claims which are, or are expressed to be, junior to the claims of other creditors of Barclays PLC, whether subordinated or unsubordinated, other than claims which rank, or are expressed to rank, pari passu with, or junior to, the claims of holders of the AT1 securities

 

§   AT1 securities bear a fixed rate of interest until the initial call date. After the initial call date, in the event that they are not redeemed, the AT1 securities will bear interest at rates fixed periodically in advance for five-year periods based on market rates

 

§   interest on the AT1 securities will be due and payable only at the sole discretion of Barclays PLC, and Barclays PLC has sole and absolute discretion at all times and for any reason to cancel (in whole or in part) any interest payment that would otherwise be payable on any interest payment date and

 

§   AT1 securities are undated and are repayable, at the option of Barclays PLC, in whole at the initial call date, or on any fifth anniversary after the initial call date. In addition, the AT1 securities are repayable, at the option of Barclays PLC, in whole in the event of certain changes in the tax or regulatory treatment of the securities. Any repayments require the prior consent of the PRA.

All AT1 securities will be converted into ordinary shares of Barclays PLC, at a pre-determined price, should the fully loaded CET1 ratio of Barclays PLC fall below 7.0%.

 

318  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

32 Reserves

Currency translation reserve

The currency translation reserve represents the cumulative gains and losses on the retranslation of the Group’s net investment in foreign operations, net of the effects of hedging.

As at 31 December 2015, there was a debit balance of £623m (2014: £582m debit) in the currency translation reserve. The increase in the debit balance of £41m (2014: £560m decrease to a debit balance) principally reflected the depreciation of ZAR and EUR against GBP, offset by the appreciation of USD against GBP. The currency translation reserve movement associated with non-controlling interests was a £435m debit (2014: £74m debit) reflecting the depreciation of ZAR against GBP.

During the year, a £65m net loss (2014: £91m net gain) from recycling of the currency translation reserve was recognised in the income statement.

Available for sale reserve

The available for sale reserve represents the unrealised change in the fair value of available for sale investments since initial recognition.

As at 31 December 2015 there was a credit balance of £317m (2014: £562m credit) in the available for sale reserve. The decrease of £245m (2014: £414m increase) principally reflected a £350m loss from changes in fair value on government bonds, predominantly held in the liquidity pool, £148m of losses from related hedging, £378m of net gains transferred to the income statement, partially offset by a £396m gain from changes in fair value of equity investments in Visa Europe and an £86m change in insurance liabilities. A tax credit of £132m was recognised in the period relating to these items. The tax credit on AFS movements represented an effective rate of tax of 35.0% (2014: 19.9%). This is significantly higher than the UK corporation tax rate of 20.25% (2014: 21.5%) due to AFS movements including the Visa Europe gain that will be offset by existing UK capital losses for which a deferred tax asset has not been recognised.

Cash flow hedging reserve

The cash flow hedging reserve represents the cumulative gains and losses on effective cash flow hedging instruments that will be recycled to the income statement when the hedged transactions affect profit or loss.

As at 31 December 2015, there was a credit balance of £1,261m (2014: £1,817m credit) in the cash flow hedging reserve. The decrease of £556m (2014: £1,544m increase) principally reflected a £378m decrease in the fair value of interest rate swaps held for hedging purposes as interest rate forward curves increased and £247m gains recycled to the income statement in line with when the hedged item affects profit or loss, partially offset by a tax credit of £66m. The tax credit on cash flow hedging reserve movements represented an effective rate of tax of 10.6% (2014: 19.8%). This is significantly lower than the UK corporation tax rate of 20.25% (2014: 21.5%) due to the tax rate changes introduced by the UK Summer Budget increasing associated deferred tax liabilities.

Other reserves and treasury shares

As at 31 December 2015, there was a credit balance of £1,011m (2014: £1,011m credit) in other reserves relating to the excess repurchase price paid over nominal of redeemed ordinary and preference shares issues by the Group.

The treasury shares relate to Barclays PLC shares held in relation to the Group’s various share schemes. These schemes are described in Note 34 Share based payments.

Treasury shares are deducted from shareholders’ equity within other reserves. A transfer is made to retained earnings in line with the vesting of treasury shares held for the purposes of share based payments.

As at 31 December 2015, there was a debit balance of £68m (2014: £84m debit) in other reserves relating to treasury shares. The increase principally reflected £602m (2014: £909m) of net purchases of treasury shares held for the purposes of employee share schemes, partially offset by £618m (2014: £866m) transferred to retained earnings reflecting the vesting of deferred share based payments.

33 Non-controlling interests

 

      
 
Profit attributable to
non-controlling interest
  
  
    
 
Equity attributable to
non-controlling interest
  
  
    
 
Dividends paid to
non-controlling interest
  
  
      
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  
    
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  
    
 
2015
£m
  
  
    
 
2014
£m
  
  
 Barclays Bank PLC issued:                  
 – Preference shares      343         441         3,654         3,654         343         441   
 – Upper Tier 2 instruments      2         2         486         486                   
 Barclays Africa Group Limited      325         320         1,902         2,247         209         189   
 Other non-controlling interests      2         6         12         4                 1   
 Total      672         769         6,054         6,391         552         631   

Subsidiaries of the Group that give rise to significant non-controlling interests are Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Africa Group Limited.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  319


Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

    

 

 

33 Non-controlling interests continued

Barclays Bank PLC

Barclays PLC holds 100% of the voting rights of Barclays Bank PLC. As at 31 December 2015, Barclays Bank PLC has in issue preference shares and Upper Tier 2 instruments, representing 11% (2014: 11%) of its equity. Preference share dividends and redemption are typically at the discretion of Barclays Bank PLC. The payment of Upper Tier 2 instrument coupons and principal are typically at the discretion of Barclays Bank PLC, except for coupon payments that become compulsory where Barclays PLC has declared or paid a dividend on ordinary shares in the preceding six month period. Preference share and Upper Tier 2 instrument holders typically only have rights to redeem in the event of insolvency.

 

Instrument

            
      

 

2015

£m

  

  

 

2014 

£m 

Preference Shares:

    

6.00% non cumulative callable preference shares

     203      203 

6.278% non cumulative callable preference shares

     318      318 

4.75% non cumulative callable preference shares

     211      211 

6.625% non cumulative callable preference shares

     406      406 

7.1% non cumulative callable preference shares

     657      657 

7.75% non cumulative callable preference shares

     550      550 

8.125% non cumulative callable preference shares

     1,309      1,309 

Total Barclays Bank PLC Preference Shares

     3,654      3,654 

Barclays Africa Group Limited

     201      258 

Total

     3,855      3,912 

Upper Tier 2 Instruments:

    

Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 1

     222      222 

Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 2

     264      264 

Total Upper Tier 2 Instruments

     486      486 

 

Summarised financial information for Barclays Africa Group Limited

 

Summarised financial information for Barclays Africa Group Limited, before intercompany eliminations, is set out below:

 

    
      
 
 

 

 

Barclays
Africa Group
Limited

2015

£m

  
  
  

  

  

 

Barclays  Africa Group  Limited 

2014 

£m 

Income statement information

    

Total income net of insurance claims

     3,418      3,530 

Profit after tax

     781      765 

Total other comprehensive income for the year, after tax

     26      (7)

Total comprehensive income for the year

     807      758 

Statement of cash flows information

    

Net cash inflows

     923      43 

Balance sheet information

    

Total assets

     49,471      55,378 

Total liabilities

     45,200      50,150 

Shareholder equity

     4,271      5,228 

Full financial statements for Barclays Africa Group Limited can be obtained at barclaysafrica.com/barclaysafrica/Investor-Relations.

Protective rights of non-controlling interests

Barclays Africa Group Limited

Barclays owns 62.5% (62.3% including treasury shares) of the share capital of Barclays Africa Group Limited. Barclays PLC’s rights to access the assets of Barclays Africa and its group companies are restricted by virtue of the South African Companies Act which requires 75% shareholder approval to dispose of all or the greater part of Barclays Africa Group Limited’s assets or to complete the voluntary winding up of the entity.

Barclays Bank PLC

Barclays Bank PLC also has in issue preference shares which are non-controlling interests to the Group. Under the terms of these instruments, Barclays PLC may not pay dividends on ordinary shares until a dividend is next paid on these instruments or the instruments are redeemed or purchased by Barclays Bank PLC. There are no restrictions on Barclays Bank PLC’s ability to remit capital to the Parent as a result of these issued instruments.

 

320  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

    

 

 

The notes included in this section focus on the costs and commitments associated with employing our staff.

        

34 Share based payments

 

 

Accounting for share based payments

 

The Group applies IFRS 2 Share Based Payments in accounting for employee remuneration in the form of shares.

 

Employee incentives include awards in the form of shares and share options, as well as offering employees the opportunity to purchase shares on favourable terms. The cost of the employee services received in respect of the shares or share options granted is recognised in the income statement over the period that employees provide services, generally the period in which the award is granted or notified and the vesting date of the shares or options. The overall cost of the award is calculated using the number of shares and options expected to vest and the fair value of the shares or options at the date of grant.

 

The number of shares and options expected to vest takes into account the likelihood that performance and service conditions included in the terms of the awards will be met. Failure to meet the non-vesting condition is treated as a cancellation, resulting in an acceleration of recognition of the cost of the employee services.

 

The fair value of shares is the market price ruling on the grant date, in some cases adjusted to reflect restrictions on transferability. The fair value of options granted is determined using option pricing models to estimate the numbers of shares likely to vest. These take into account the exercise price of the option, the current share price, the risk-free interest rate, the expected volatility of the share price over the life of the option and other relevant factors. Market conditions that must be met in order for the award to vest are also reflected in the fair value of the award, as are any other non-vesting conditions – such as continuing to make payments into a share based savings scheme.

 

The charge for the year arising from share based payment schemes was as follows:

 

         Charge for the year   
        
 
2015
£m
  
  
      
 
        2014
£m
  
  
      
 
2013
£m
  
  

Share Value Plan

       442           575           576   

Others

       100           84           126   

Total equity settled

       542           659           702   

Cash settled

       24           43           25   

Total share based payments

       566           702           727   

The terms of the main current plans are as follows:

Share Value Plan (SVP)

The SVP was introduced in March 2010 and approved by shareholders (for Executive Director participation and use of new issue shares) at the AGM in April 2011. SVP awards are granted to participants in the form of a conditional right to receive Barclays PLC shares or provisional allocations of Barclays PLC shares which vest or are considered for release over a period of three years in equal annual tranches. Participants do not pay to receive an award or to receive a release of shares. The grantor may also make a dividend equivalent payment to participants on release of a SVP award. SVP awards are also made to eligible employees for recruitment purposes. All awards are subject to potential forfeiture in certain leaver scenarios.

Other schemes

In addition to the SVP, the Group operates a number of other schemes including schemes operated by, and settled in, the shares of subsidiary undertakings, none of which are individually material in relation to the charge for the year or the dilutive effect of outstanding share options. Included within other schemes are Sharesave (both UK and overseas), the Barclays’ Long Term Incentive Plan and the Executive Share Award Scheme.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  321


Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

    

 

 

34 Share based payments continued

Share option and award plans

The weighted average fair value per award granted and weighted average share price at the date of exercise/release of shares during the year was:

 

                       
 
Weighted average fair value
per award granted in year
  
  
    

 

 

Weighted average share

price at exercise/release

during year

  

  

  

                       

 

2015

£

  

  

   

 

2014

£

  

  

    

 

2015

£

  

  

    

 

2014

£

  

  

SVPa

          2.54        2.33         2.53         2.31   

Othersa

                      0.49-2.54        0.52-2.39         2.37-2.67         2.23-2.56   

 

SVP are nil cost awards on which the performance conditions are substantially completed at the date of grant. Consequently the fair value of these awards is based on the market value at that date.

 

Movements in options and awards

 

The movement in the number of options and awards for the major schemes and the weighted average exercise price of options was:

 

  

  

  

       SVPa,b        Othersa,c   
     Number (000s)        Number (000s)        

 

Weighted average

ex. price (£)

  

  

       2015         2014        2015        2014         2015         2014   

Outstanding at beginning of year/acquisition date

     480,042         524,260        185,599        231,989         1.61         1.55   

Granted in the year

     186,397         275,152        55,982        64,326         2.27         1.78   

Exercised/released in the year

     (252,031      (287,319     (50,538     (71,594      1.41         1.44   

Less: forfeited in the year

     (27,938      (32,051     (20,811     (32,784      1.76         1.66   

Less: expired in the year

                    (3,257     (6,338      2.39         2.24   

Outstanding at end of year

     386,470         480,042        166,975        185,599         1.75         1.61   

Of which exercisable:

     30         44        26,058        20,025         1.48         1.88   

 

Certain of the Group’s share option plans enable certain Directors and employees to subscribe for new ordinary shares of Barclays PLC. For accounting for treasury shares see Note 32 Reserves.

 

The weighted average contractual remaining life and number of options and awards outstanding (including those exercisable) at the balance sheet date are as follows:

 

  

  

                        2015         2014   
                       
 
 
 
 
Weighted
average
remaining
contractual
life in years
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
Number of
options/
awards
outstanding
(000s)
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
Weighted
average
remaining
contractual
life in years
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
Number of
options/
awards
outstanding
(000s)
  
  
  
  
  

SVPa,b

          1        386,470         1         480,042   

Othersa

                      0-2        166,975         0-3         185,599   

There were no significant modifications to the share based payments arrangements in 2015 and 2014.

As at 31 December 2015, the total liability arising from cash-settled share based payments transactions was £13m (2014: £45m).

Holdings of Barclays PLC shares

Various employee benefit trusts established by the Group hold shares in Barclays PLC to meet obligations under the Barclays share based payment schemes. The total number of Barclays shares held in these employee benefit trusts at 31 December 2015 was 5.1 million (2014: 5.2 million). Dividend rights have been waived on all these shares. The total market value of the shares held in trust based on the year end share price of £2.19 (2014: £2.43) was £11.2m (2014: £12.6m).

 

Notes

 

a Options/awards granted over Barclays PLC shares.
b Nil cost award and therefore the weighted average exercise price was nil.
c The number of awards within Others at the end of the year principally relates to Sharesave (number of awards exercisable at end of year was 12,479,264). The weighted average exercise price relates to Sharesave.

 

322  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

35 Pensions and post retirement benefits

 

Accounting for pensions and post retirement benefits

The Group operates a number of pension schemes (including defined contribution and defined benefit) and post-employment benefit schemes.

Defined contribution schemes – the Group recognises contributions due in respect of the accounting period in the income statement. Any contributions unpaid at the balance sheet date are included as a liability.

Defined benefit schemes – the Group recognises its obligations to members of the scheme at the period end, less the fair value of the scheme assets after applying the asset ceiling test. The clarifications contained in the proposed amendments to IFRIC 14 as to when an entity has an unconditional right to benefit from a scheme surplus are not expected to have a material impact on the Group.

Each scheme’s obligations are calculated using the projected unit credit method on the assumptions set out in the note below. Scheme assets are stated at fair value as at the period end.

Changes in pension scheme liabilities or assets (remeasurements) that do not arise from regular pension cost, net interest on net defined benefit liabilities or assets, past service costs, settlements or contributions to the scheme, are recognised in other comprehensive income.

Remeasurements comprise experience adjustments (differences between previous actuarial assumptions and what has actually occurred), the effects of changes in actuarial assumptions, return on scheme assets (excluding amounts included in the interest on the assets) and any changes in the effect of the asset ceiling restriction (excluding amounts included in the interest on the restriction).

Post-employment benefits – the cost of providing health care benefits to retired employees is accrued as a liability in the financial statements over the period that the employees provide services to the Group, using a methodology similar to that for defined benefit pension schemes.

Pension schemes

UK Retirement Fund (UKRF)

The UKRF is the Group’s main scheme, representing 92% of the Group’s total retirement benefit obligations. The UKRF was closed to new entrants on 1 October 2012, and comprises 10 sections, the two most significant of which are:

 

§   Afterwork, which comprises a contributory cash balance defined benefit element, and a voluntary defined contribution element. The cash balance element is accrued each year and revalued until Normal Retirement Age in line with the increase in Retail Price Index (RPI) (up to a maximum of 5% p.a.). An investment related increase of up to 2% a year may also be added at Barclays’ discretion. Between 1 October 2003 and 1 October 2012 the majority of new employees outside of the Investment Bank were eligible to join this section. The costs of ill-health retirements and death in service benefits for Afterwork members are borne by the UKRF. The main risks that Barclays runs in relation to Afterwork are limited to needing to make additional contributions if pre-retirement investment returns are not sufficient to provide for the benefits.

 

§   the 1964 Pension Scheme. Most employees recruited before July 1997 built up benefits in this non-contributory defined benefit scheme in respect of service up to 31 March 2010. Pensions were calculated by reference to service and pensionable salary. From 1 April 2010, members became eligible to accrue future service benefits in either Afterwork or the Pension Investment Plan (PIP), a historic defined contribution section which is now closed to future contributions. The risks that Barclays runs in relation to the 1964 section are typical of final salary pension schemes, principally that investment returns fall short of expectations, that inflation exceeds expectations, and that retirees live longer than expected.

Barclays Pension Savings Plan (BPSP)

§   From 1 October 2012, a new UK pension scheme, the BPSP, was established to satisfy Auto Enrolment legislation. The BPSP is a defined contribution scheme (Group Personal Pension) providing benefits for all new Barclays UK hires from 1 October 2012, Investment Bank UK employees who were in PIP as at 1 October 2012, and also all UK employees who were not members of a pension scheme at that date. As a defined contribution scheme, BPSP is not subject to the same investment return, inflation or longevity risks for Barclays that defined benefit schemes are. Members’ benefits reflect contributions paid and the level of investment returns achieved.

Apart from the UKRF and the BPSP, Barclays operates a number of smaller pension and long-term employee benefits and post-retirement health care plans globally, the largest of which are the US and South African defined benefit schemes. Many of the schemes are funded, with assets backing the obligations held in separate legal vehicles such as trusts. Others are operated on an unfunded basis. The benefits provided, the approach to funding, and the legal basis of the schemes, reflect their local environments.

Governance

The UKRF operates under trust law and is managed and administered on behalf of the members in accordance with the terms of the Trust Deed and Rules and all relevant legislation. The Corporate Trustee is Barclays Pension Funds Trustees Limited, a private limited company and a wholly owned subsidiary of Barclays Bank PLC. The Trustee is the legal owner of the assets of the UKRF which are held separately from the assets of the Group.

The Trustee Board comprises six Management Directors selected by Barclays, of whom three are independent Directors with no relationship with Barclays or the UKRF, plus three Member Nominated Directors selected from eligible active staff and pensioner members who apply for the role.

The BPSP is a Group Personal Pension arrangement which operates as a collection of personal pension plans. Each personal pension plan is a direct contract between the employee and the BPSP provider (Legal & General Assurance Society Limited), and is regulated by the FCA.

Similar principles of pension governance apply to the Group’s other pension schemes, although different legislation covers overseas schemes where, in most cases, the Group has the power to determine the funding rate.

Amounts recognised

The following tables include amounts recognised in the income statement and an analysis of benefit obligations and scheme assets for all Group defined benefit schemes. The net position is reconciled to the assets and liabilities recognised on the balance sheet. The tables include funded and unfunded post-retirement benefits.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  323


Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

    

 

 

35 Pensions and post retirement benefits continued

 

Income statement charge

                          
               2015                   2014                   2013   
       £m         £m         £m   

Current service cost

     303         324         371   

Net finance cost

     42         78         55   

Past service cost

     (434      (5      4   

Settlements

     1         (15      (3

Total

     (88      382         427   

Past Service costs includes a £429m (2014: nil; 2013: nil) gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability.

 

Balance sheet reconciliation

     2015         2014   
        Of which            Of which   
        relates to            relates to   
     Total         UKRF         Total         UKRF   
       £m         £m         £m         £m   

Benefit obligation at beginning of the year

     (30,392      (27,931      (27,568      (25,093

Current service cost

     (303      (234      (324      (258

Interest costs on scheme liabilities

     (1,147      (1,010      (1,261      (1,101

Past service cost

     434         429         5         2   

Settlements

                     83           

Remeasurement gain/(loss) – financial

     1,161         1,121         (2,493      (2,382

Remeasurement loss – demographic

     (159      (160      (370      (340

Remeasurement gain – experience

     609         611         407         418   

Employee contributions

     (36      (2      (35      (2

Benefits paid

     1,172         1,021         999         825   

Exchange and other movements

     382         128         165           

Benefit obligation at end of the year

     (28,279      (26,027      (30,392      (27,931

Fair value of scheme assets at beginning of the year

         28,874             26,827             25,743             23,661   

Interest income on scheme assets

     1,105         979         1,183         1,042   

Employer contribution

     689         586         347         241   

Settlements

                     (68        

Remeasurement – return on scheme assets greater than discount rate

     (476      (446      2,736         2,705   

Employee contributions

     36         2         35         2   

Benefits paid

     (1,172      (1,021      (999      (825

Exchange and other movements

     (304      (98      (103      1   

Fair value of scheme assets at the end of the year

     28,752         26,829         28,874         26,827   

Net surplus/(deficit)

     473         802         (1,518      (1,104

Irrecoverable surplus (effect of asset ceiling)

     (60                        

Net recognised assets/(liabilities)

     413         802         (1,518      (1,104

Retirement benefit assets

     836         802         56           

Retirement benefit liabilities

     (423              (1,574      (1,104

Net retirement benefit liabilities

     413         802         (1,518      (1,104

Included within the benefit obligation was £2,050m (2014: £2,272m) relating to overseas pensions and £202m (2014: £189m) relating to other post-employment benefits. Of the total benefit obligation of £28,279m (2014: £30,392m), £245m (2014: £286m) was wholly unfunded.

As at 31 December 2015, the UKRF scheme assets were in surplus versus IAS 19R obligations by £802m (2014: deficit of £1,104m). The movement for the UKRF is mainly due to a £1.9bn decrease in the defined benefit obligation. The decrease in defined benefit obligation can be linked to an increase in discount rate, membership experience, and a change to the calculation of statutory underpin for certain benefits.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

Actuarial valuation of the schemes’ obligation is dependent upon a series of assumptions, below is a summary of the main financial and demographic assumptions adopted for UKRF.

 

UKRF financial assumptions

                
                 2015                    2014   
       % p.a        % p.a   

Discount rate

     3.82        3.67   

Inflation rate

     3.05        3.05   

Rate of increase in salaries

     2.55        2.55   

Rate of increase for pensions in payment

     2.87        2.98   

Rate of increase for pensions in deferment

     2.87        2.98   

Afterwork revaluation rate

     3.27        3.35   

The UKRF discount rate assumption for 2015 was based on a variant of the standard Willis Towers Watson RATE Link model. This variant includes all bonds rated AA by at least one of the four major ratings agencies, and assumes that yields after year 30 are flat. For 2014, the discount rate assumption was based on the single equivalent discount rate implied by the standard Willis Towers Watson RATE Link model.

 

324  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

        

        

 

 

35 Pensions and post retirement benefits continued

The UKRF’s post-retirement mortality assumptions are based on a best estimate assumption derived from an analysis in 2014 of Barclays’ own post-retirement mortality experience, and taking account of the recent evidence from published mortality surveys. An allowance has been made for future mortality improvements based on the 2013 core projection model published by the Continuous Mortality Investigation Bureau subject to a long-term trend of 1.25% p.a. in future improvements. The table below shows how the assumed life expectancy at 60, for members of the UKRF, has varied over the past three years:

 

Assumed life expectancy

                          
             2015                 2014                 2013   
       £m         £m         £m   

Life expectancy at 60 for current pensioners (years)

        

– Males

     28.4         28.3         27.9   

– Females

     30.0         29.9         29.0   

Life expectancy at 60 for future pensioners currently aged 40 (years)

        

– Males

     30.2         30.1         29.3   

– Females

     32.0         31.9         30.6   

Sensitivity analysis on actuarial assumptions

The sensitivity analysis has been calculated by valuing the UKRF liabilities using the amended assumptions shown in the table below and keeping the remaining assumptions the same as disclosed in the table above, except in the case of the inflation sensitivity where other assumptions that depend on assumed inflation have also been amended correspondingly. The difference between the recalculated liability figure and that stated in the balance sheet reconciliation table above is the figure shown. The selection of these movements to illustrate the sensitivity of the defined benefit obligation to key assumptions should not be interpreted as Barclays expressing any specific view of the probability of such movements happening.

 

Change in key assumptions

                 
     2015         2014   
     Impact on UKRF defined         Impact on UKRF defined   
     benefit obligation         benefit obligation   
     (Decrease)/         (Decrease)/         (Decrease)/         (Decrease)/   
     Increase         Increase         Increase         Increase   
       %         £bn         %         £bn   

0.5% increase in discount rate

     (8.2      (2.1      (9.0      (2.5

0.5% increase in assumed price inflation

     5.4         1.4         7.3         2.0   

One year increase to life expectancy at 60

     3.5         0.9         3.5         1.0   

The weighted average duration of the benefit payments reflected in the defined benefit obligation for the UKRF is 18 years.

Assets

A long term investment strategy has been set for the UKRF, with its asset allocation comprising a mixture of equities, bonds, property and other appropriate assets. This recognises that different asset classes are likely to produce different long term returns and some asset classes may be more volatile than others. The long term investment strategy ensures, among other aims, that investments are adequately diversified. Asset managers are permitted some flexibility to vary the asset allocation from the long term investment strategy within control ranges agreed with the Trustee from time to time.

The UKRF also employs derivative instruments, where appropriate, to achieve a desired exposure or return, or to match assets more closely to liabilities. The value of assets shown reflects the assets held by the scheme, with any derivative holdings reflected on a fair value basis.

The value of the assets of the schemes and their percentage in relation to total scheme assets were as follows:

 

Analysis of scheme assets

                                  
     Total         Of which relates to UKRF   
        % of total           % of total   
        fair value of           fair value of   
        scheme           scheme   
     Value         assets         Value        assets   
       £m         %         £m        %   

As at 31 December 2015

          

Equities – quoted

     7,764         27.0         6,947        25.9   

Equities – non quoted

     1,757         6.1         1,750        6.5   

Bonds – fixed governmenta

     1,105         3.8         577        2.2   

Bonds – index-linked governmenta

     9,677         33.7         9,670        36.0   

Bonds – corporate and othera

     5,856         20.4         5,680        21.2   

Property – commercialb

     1,602         5.6         1,581        5.9   

Derivativesb

     183         0.6         183        0.7   

Cash

     67         0.2         47        0.2   

Otherb

     741         2.6         394        1.4   

Fair value of scheme assets

     28,752         100.0         26,829        100.0   

Notes

a Assets held are predominantly quoted.
b Assets held are predominantly non-quoted.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  325


Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

    

 

 

35 Pensions and post retirement benefits continued

 

Analysis of scheme assets

                                   
     Total         Of which relates to UKRF   
        % of total            % of total   
            fair value of                fair value of   
        scheme            scheme   
     Value         assets         Value         assets   
       £m         %         £m         %   

As at 31 December 2014

           

Equities – quoted

     6,813         23.6         5,808         21.6   

Equities – non-quoted

     1,549         5.4         1,537         5.7   

Bonds – fixed governmenta

     934         3.2         609         2.3   

Bonds – index-linked governmenta

     7,114         24.6         7,114         26.5   

Bonds – corporate and othera

     5,599         19.4         5,317         19.8   

Property – commercialb

     2,023         7.0         1,945         7.3   

Derivativesb

     1,472         5.1         1,472         5.5   

Cash

     2,897         10.0         2,644         9.9   

Pooled fundsc

     284         1.0         284         1.1   

Otherb

     189         0.7         97         0.3   

Fair value of scheme assets

     28,874         100.0             26,827         100.0   

Included within the fair value of scheme assets were: £5m (2014: £3m) relating to shares in Barclays PLC, £23m (2014: £39m) relating to bonds issued by the Barclays Group, £6m (2014: £6m) relating to property occupied by Group companies, and £7m (2014: £14m) relating to other investments. The UKRF also invests in investment vehicles which may hold shares or debt issued by the Barclays Group.

The UKRF scheme assets also include £36m (2014: £36m) relating to UK private equity investments and £1,714m (2014: £1,502m) relating to overseas private equity investments. These are disclosed above within Equities – non-quoted.

Approximately a third of the UKRF assets are invested in liability-driven investment strategies; primarily UK gilts as well as interest rate and inflation swaps. These are used to better match the assets to its liabilities. The swaps are used to reduce the scheme’s inflation and duration risks against its liabilities.

Funding

The latest triennial funding valuation of the UKRF was carried out with an effective date of 30 September 2013. This was completed in 2014 and showed a deficit of £3.6bn and a funding level of 87.4%. The next funding valuation of the UKRF is due to be completed in 2017 with an effective date of 30 September 2016. In non-valuation years, the Scheme Actuary prepares an annual update of the funding position. The latest annual update was carried out as at 30 September 2015 and showed a deficit of £6.0bn and a funding level of 82.7%. The increase in funding deficit over the year to 30 September can be mainly attributed to the fall in real gilt yields over the year.

The Bank and Trustee agreed a scheme specific funding target, statement of funding principles, a schedule of contributions and a recovery plan to eliminate the deficit in the Fund. The main differences between the funding and IAS 19 assumptions are a more prudent longevity assumption for funding and a different approach to setting the discount rate.

The recovery plan to eliminate the deficit will result in the Bank paying deficit contributions to the Fund until 2021. Deficit contributions of £300m were paid in 2015, and also are payable in 2016. Further deficit contributions of £740m per annum are payable during 2017 to 2021. Up to £500m of the 2021 deficit contribution is payable in 2017 depending on the deficit level at that time. These deficit contributions are in addition to the regular contributions to meet the Group’s share of the cost of benefits accruing over each year.

In non-valuation years, the Scheme Actuary prepares an annual update of the funding position. The latest annual update was carried out as at 30 September 2015 and showed a deficit of £6.0bn and a funding level of 82.7%. The increase in funding deficit over the year to 30 September 2015 can be mainly attributed to the fall in real gilt yields over the year.

Defined benefit contributions paid with respect to the UKRF were as follows:

 

Contributions paid

        
       £m   

2015

             586   

2014

     241   

2013

     238   

The Group’s expected contribution to the UKRF in respect of defined benefits in 2016 is £632m (2015: £586m). In addition, the expected contributions to UK defined contribution schemes in 2016 is £49m (2015: £52m) to the UKRF and £140m (2015: £126m) to the BPSP. For the material non-UK defined benefit schemes, the expected contributions in 2016 are £78m (2015: £107m).

 

Notes

 

a Assets held are predominantly quoted.
b Assets held are predominantly non-quoted.
c Pooled funds relate to a variety of investments which are predominantly non-quoted.

 

326  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

    

 

 

This section presents information on the Group’s investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates and its interests in structured entities. Detail is also given on securitisation transactions the Group has entered into and arrangements that are held off-balance sheet.

 

36 Principal subsidiaries

 

 

Barclays applies IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements. The consolidated financial statements combine the financial statements of Barclays PLC and all its subsidiaries. Subsidiaries are entities over which the Group has control. Under IFRS 10, this is when the Group is exposed or has rights to variable returns from its involvement in the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity.

 

The Group reassesses whether it controls an entity if facts and circumstances indicate that there have been changes to its power, its rights to variable returns or its ability to use its power to affect the amount of its returns.

 

Intra-group transactions and balances are eliminated on consolidation and consistent accounting policies are used throughout the Group for the purposes of the consolidation. Changes in ownership interests in subsidiaries are accounted for as equity transactions if they occur after control has been obtained and they do not result in loss of control.

 

The significant judgements used in applying this policy are set out below.

 

Accounting for investment in subsidiaries

In the individual financial statements of Barclays PLC, investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less impairment.

Principal subsidiaries for the Group are set out below. This includes those subsidiaries that are most significant in the context of the Group’s business, results or financial position.

 

                        Non-         Non-   
            controlling         controlling   
            interests –         interests –   
         Percentage         proportion of         proportion of   
         of voting         ownership         voting   
  Principal place of business or        rights held         interests         interests   

Company name

  incorporation   Nature of business      %         %         %   

Barclays Bank PLC

  England   Banking, holding company      100         11           

Barclays Capital Securities Limited

  England   Securities dealing      100                   

Barclays Private Clients International Limited

  Isle of Man   Banking      100                

Barclays Securities Japan Limited

  Japan   Securities dealing      100                   

Barclays Africa Group Limited

  South Africa   Banking      62         38         38   

Barclays Capital Inc

  United States   Securities dealing      100                   

Barclays Bank Delaware

  United States   Credit card issuer      100                   

The country of registration or incorporation is also the principal area of operation of each of the above subsidiaries. Investments in subsidiaries held directly by Barclays Bank PLC are marked *. See Note 46 Related undertakings for further information on the Group’s undertakings.

Ownership interests are in some cases different to voting interests due to the existence of non-voting equity interests, such as preference shares. See Note 33 Non-controlling interests for more information.

Barclays Bank SAU was considered a principal subsidiary in 2014. Barclays Bank SAU and its subsidiaries, comprising all its associated assets and liabilities, was sold to a third party, Caixabank, SA on 2 January 2015.

Significant judgements and assumptions used to determine the scope of the consolidation

Determining whether the Group has control of an entity is generally straightforward based on ownership of the majority of the voting capital. However, in certain instances, this determination will involve significant judgement, particularly in the case of structured entities where voting rights are often not the determining factor in decisions over the relevant activities. This judgement may involve assessing the purpose and design of the entity. It will also often be necessary to consider whether the Group, or another involved party with power over the relevant activities, is acting as a principal in its own right or as an agent on behalf of others.

There is also often considerable judgement involved in the ongoing assessment of control over structured entities. In this regard, where market conditions have deteriorated such that the other investors’ exposures to the structure’s variable returns have been substantively eliminated, the Group may conclude that the managers of the structured entity are acting as its agent and therefore will consolidate the structured entity.

An interest in equity voting rights exceeding 50% would typically indicate that the Group has control of an entity. However, certain entities, as set out below, are excluded from consolidation because the Group does not have exposure to their variable returns.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  327


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

    

 

 

36 Principal subsidiaries continued

 

  Country of registration or incorporation    Company name   

Percentage of voting

rights held (%)

  

Equity shareholder’s

funds (£m)

  

Retained profit for   

the year (£m)   

  UK    Fitzroy Finance Limited    100       –  
  Cayman Islands    Palomino Limited    100    2    –  

These entities are managed by external counterparties and consequently are not controlled by the Group. Where appropriate, interests relating to these entities are included in Note 37 Structured entities.

Significant restrictions

As is typical for a Group of its size and international scope, there are restrictions on the ability of Barclays PLC to obtain distributions of capital, access the assets or repay the liabilities of members of its Group due to the statutory, regulatory and contractual requirements of its subsidiaries and due to the protective rights of non-controlling interests. These are considered below.

Regulatory requirements

Barclays’ principal subsidiary companies have assets and liabilities before intercompany eliminations of £1,468bn (2014: £1,757bn) and £1,398bn (2014: £1,683bn) respectively. The assets and liabilities are subject to prudential regulation and regulatory capital requirements in the countries in which they are regulated. These require entities to maintain minimum capital levels which cannot be returned to the parent company, Barclays PLC on a going concern basis.

In order to meet capital requirements, subsidiaries may hold certain equity-accounted and debt-accounted issued financial instruments and non-equity instruments such as Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital instruments and other forms of subordinated liabilities. See Note 33 Non-controlling interests and Note 30 Subordinated liabilities for particulars of these instruments. These instruments may be subject to cancellation clauses or preference share restrictions that would limit the ability of the entity to repatriate the capital on a timely basis.

Liquidity requirements

Regulated subsidiaries of the Group are required to maintain liquidity pools to meet PRA and local regulatory requirements. The main subsidiaries affected are Barclays Bank PLC, Barclays Africa Group Limited and Barclays Capital Inc which must maintain daily compliance with the regulatory minimum. See pages 188 to 204 for further details of liquidity requirements, including those of our significant subsidiaries.

Statutory requirements

The Group’s subsidiaries are subject to statutory requirements not to make distributions of capital and unrealised profits and generally to maintain solvency. These requirements restrict the ability of subsidiaries to make remittances of dividends to Barclays PLC, the ultimate parent, except in the event of a legal capital reduction or liquidation. In most cases, the regulatory restrictions referred to above exceed the statutory restrictions.

Contractual requirements

Asset encumbrance

The Group uses its financial assets to raise finance in the form of securitisations and through the liquidity schemes of central banks. Once encumbered, the assets are not available for transfer around the Group. The assets typically affected are disclosed in Note 40 Assets pledged.

Assets held by consolidated structured entities

£80m (2014: £379m) of assets included in the Group’s balance sheet relate to consolidated investment funds and are held to pay return and principal to the holders of units in the funds. The assets held in these funds cannot be transferred to other members of the Group. The decrease is materially driven by the sale of the Spanish business in January 2015, which included certain European wealth funds, and the disposal of a French wealth fund during the year.

Other restrictions

The Group is required to maintain balances with central banks and other regulatory authorities, and these amounted to £4,369m (2014: £4,448m).

Barclays Africa Group Limited assets are subject to exchange control regulation determined by the South African Reserve Bank (SARB). Special dividends and loans in lieu of dividends cannot be transferred without SARB approval.

37 Structured entities

A structured entity is an entity in which voting or similar rights are not the dominant factor in deciding control. Structured entities are generally created to achieve a narrow and well defined objective with restrictions around their ongoing activities.

Depending on the Group’s power over the activities of the entity and its exposure to and ability to influence its own returns, it may consolidate the entity. In other cases, it may sponsor or have exposure to such an entity but not consolidate it.

Consolidated structured entities

The Group has contractual arrangements which may require it to provide financial support to the following types of consolidated structured entities:

Securitisation vehicles

The Group uses securitisation as a source of financing and a means of risk transfer. Refer to Note 39 Securitisations for further detail.

The Group provides liquidity facilities to certain securitisation vehicles. At 31 December 2015, there were outstanding loan commitments to these entities totalling £135m (2014: £201m).

 

328  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

         

 

 

37 Structured entities continued

Commercial paper (CP) and medium-term note conduits

The Group provided £8.5bn (2014: £9.1bn) in undrawn contractual backstop liquidity facilities to CP conduits.

Fund management entities

Barclays has contractually guaranteed the performance of certain cash investments in a number of managed investment funds which have resulted in their consolidation. As at 31 December 2015, the notional value of the guarantee was £257m (2014: £585m). The decrease is primarily due to the closure of a number of European wealth funds during the year.

Employee benefit and other trusts

The Group provides capital contributions to employee share trusts to enable them to meet their obligations to employees under share-based payment plans. During 2015, the Group provided undrawn liquidity facilities of £784m (2014: £332m) to certain trusts.

Unconsolidated Structured Entities in which the Group has an interest

An interest in a structured entity is any form of contractual or non-contractual involvement which creates variability in returns arising from the performance of the entity for the Group. Such interests include holdings of debt or equity securities, derivatives that transfer financial risks from the entity to the Group, lending, loan commitments, financial guarantees and investment management agreements.

Interest rate swaps, foreign exchange derivatives that are not complex and which expose the Group to insignificant credit risk by being senior in the payment waterfall of a securitisation and derivatives that are determined to introduce risk or variability to a structured entity are not considered to be an interest in an entity and have been excluded from the disclosures below.

The nature and extent of the Group’s interests in structured entities is summarised below:

 

Summary of interests in unconsolidated structured entities

                                            
      

 

 

Secured

financing

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

    Short-term

traded

interests

£m

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

Traded

    derivatives

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

Other

    interests

£m

  

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at December 2015

              

Assets

              

Trading portfolio assets

             8,949                 1,648         10,597   

Financial assets designated at fair value

     12,382                         353         12,735   

Derivative financial instruments

                     4,427         1,926         6,353   

Available for sale investments

                             1,060         1,060   

Loans and advances to banks

                             4,067         4,067   

Loans and advances to customers

                             27,700         27,700   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

     7,117                                 7,117   

Other assets

                             31         31   

Total assets

     19,499         8,949         4,427         36,785         69,660   

Liabilities

              

Derivative financial instruments

                     2,761         1,926         4,687   

As at December 2014

              

Assets

              

Trading portfolio assets

             14,538                 3,668         18,206   

Financial assets designated at fair value

                             963         963   

Derivative financial instruments

                     5,207         1,594         6,801   

Available for sale investments

                             1,216         1,216   

Loans and advances to banks

                             4,277         4,277   

Loans and advances to customers

                             30,067         30,067   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

     37,139                                 37,139   

Other assets

                             38         38   

Total assets

     37,139         14,538         5,207             41,823             98,707   

Liabilities

              

Derivative financial instruments

                     5,222         1,514         6,736   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  329


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

    

 

 

37 Structured entities continued

Secured financing arrangements, short term traded interests and traded derivatives are typically managed under market risk management described on page 174 which includes an indication of the change of risk measures compared to last year. For this reason, the total assets of these entities are not considered meaningful for the purposes of understanding the related risks and so have not been presented. Other interests include a Non-Core portfolio which is being managed down, conduits and corporate lending where the interest is driven by normal customer demand.

Secured financing

The Group routinely enters into reverse repurchase contracts, stock borrowing and similar arrangements on normal commercial terms where the counterparty to the arrangement is a structured entity. Due to the nature of these arrangements, especially the transfer of collateral and ongoing margining, the Group has minimal exposure to the performance of the structured entity counterparty. A description of these transactions is included in Note 22 Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar secured lending and borrowing.

Short-term traded interests

The Group buys and sells interests in structured entities as part of its trading activities, for example, retail mortgage backed securities, CDOs and similar interests. Such interests are typically held individually or as part of a larger portfolio for no more than 90 days. In such cases, the Group typically has no other involvement with the structured entity other than the securities it holds as part of trading activities and its maximum exposure to loss is restricted to the carrying value of the asset.

As at 31 December 2015, £8,576m (2014: £12,058m) of the Group’s £8,949m (2014: £14,538m) short-term traded interests were comprised of debt securities issued by asset securitisation vehicles.

Traded derivatives

The Group enters into a variety of derivative contracts with structured entities which reference market risk variables such as interest rates, foreign exchange rates and credit indices among other things. The main derivative types which are considered interests in structured entities include index based and entity specific credit default swaps, balance guaranteed swaps, total return swaps, commodities swaps, and equity swaps. A description of the types of derivatives and the risk management practices are detailed in Note 15 Derivative financial instruments. The risk of loss may be mitigated through ongoing margining requirements as well as a right to cash flows from the structured entity which are senior in the payment waterfall. Such margining requirements are consistent with market practice for many derivative arrangements and in line with the Group’s normal credit policies.

Derivative transactions require the counterparty to provide cash or other collateral under margining agreements to mitigate counterparty credit risk. Included in the traded derivatives total are £409m (2014: £445m) of derivative assets which are ‘cleared derivative’ type arrangements. These are transactions where the Group enters into a contract with an exchange on behalf of a structured entity client and holds an opposite position with it. The Group is exposed to settlement risk only on these derivatives which is mitigated through daily margining. Total notionals amounted to £117,642m (2014: £176,584m).

Except for CDS where the maximum exposure to loss is the swap notional amount, it is not possible to estimate the maximum exposure to loss in respect of derivative positions as the fair value of derivatives is subject to changes in market rates of interest, exchange rates and credit indices which by their nature are uncertain. In addition, the Group’s losses would be subject to mitigating action under its traded market risk and credit risk policies that require the counterparty to provide collateral in cash or other assets on a daily basis in most cases.

Other interests in unconsolidated structured entities

The Group’s interests in structured entities not held for the purposes of short-term trading activities are set out below, summarised by the purpose of the entities and limited to significant categories, based on maximum exposure to loss.

 

330  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

        

        

 

 

37 Structured entities continued    

 

Nature of interest

                                                              
      

 

 

 

Structured

credit

portfolio

£m

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

Multi-seller

conduit

programmes

£m

  

  

  

  

    

 

Lending

£m

  

  

    
 

 

 

Mortgage-
backed

securities

£m

  
  

  

  

    

 

 

 

Investment

funds and

trusts

£m

  

  

  

  

    

 

Others

£m

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at December 2015

                    

Trading portfolio assets

                    

– Debt securities

     1,545                                         40         1,585   

– Equity securities

                                             63         63   

Financial assets designated at fair value

                    

– Loans and advances to customers

                     247                         6         253   

– Debt securities

                     41                         57         98   

– Equity securities

                                             2         2   

Derivative financial instruments

                                             1,926         1,926   

Available for sale investments

                    

– Debt securities

     537                         515                 8         1,060   

Loans and advances to customers

     1,599         5,029         20,571                         501         27,700   

Loans and advances to banks

                     4,051                         16         4,067   

Other assets

             4         7                 20                 31   

Total on-balance sheet exposures

     3,681         5,033         24,917         515         20         2,619         36,785   

Total off-balance sheet notional amounts

     708         3,042         10,225                         1,409         15,384   

Maximum exposure to loss

     4,389         8,075         35,142         515         20         4,028         52,169   

Total assets of the entity

     36,290         81,355         376,296         115,351         21,766         5,084         636,142   

As at December 2014

                    

Trading portfolio assets

                    

– Debt securities

     3,590                                         51         3,641   

– Equity securities

                                             27         27   

Financial assets designated at fair value

                    

– Loans and advances to customers

                     881                         11         892   

– Debt securities

                                             35         35   

– Equity securities

                                             36         36   

Derivative financial instruments

                     80                         1,514         1,594   

Available for sale investments

                    

– Debt securities

     1         575                 626                 14         1,216   

Loans and advances to customers

     3,390         8,236         17,780                         661         30,067   

Loans and advances to banks

                     4,277                                 4,277   

Other assets

             5         9                 21         3         38   

Total on-balance sheet exposures

     6,981         8,816         23,027         626         21         2,352         41,823   

Total off-balance sheet notional amounts

     1,078         8,075         6,359                         2,104         17,616   

Maximum exposure to loss

     8,059         16,891         29,386         626         21         4,456         59,439   

Total assets of the entity

     50,279         97,298             390,522         147,422         25,556             5,816             716,893   

Maximum exposure to loss

Unless specified otherwise below, the Group’s maximum exposure to loss is the total of its on-balance sheet positions and its off-balance sheet arrangements, being loan commitments and financial guarantees. Exposure to loss is mitigated through collateral, financial guarantees, the availability of netting and credit protection held.

Structured Credit Portfolio

This comprises interests in debt securities issued by securitisation vehicles, mainly CLOs, CDOs, Residential and Commercial Mortgage-Backed Securitisation structures (RMBSs and CMBSs), and drawn and undrawn loan facilities to these entities. In some cases, the securities are ‘wrapped’ with credit protection from a monoline insurer, which transfers the credit risk to the monoline. The entities are wholly debt financed through the issuance of tranches of debt securities or through direct funding, such as the loan facilities provided by the Group. As the underlying assets of the entities amortise and pay down, the debt securities issued by the entities are repaid in order of seniority. Where the entities experience significant credit deterioration, debt securities may be written off or cancelled in reverse order of seniority.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  331


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

    

 

 

37 Structured entities continued

As at 31 December 2015 the Group’s funded exposures comprised £1,545m (2014: £3,591m) debt securities at fair value and £1,599m (2014: £3,390m) amortised cost loans and advances. Of the £3,681m (2014: £6,981m), £2,783m (2014: £4,822m) is investment grade, with the remainder either non-investment grade or not rated. The Group also had £708m (2014: £1,078m) of unfunded exposures in the form of undrawn liquidity commitments. Of the £4,389m (2014: £8,059m) of funded and unfunded exposures, £4,387m (2014: £7,897m) is senior in the capital structure of the entity.

Though the Group’s funded exposures are primarily investment grade and senior in the capital structure, there are cases where the interests that are subordinate to the Group’s senior and mezzanine interests have minimal or no value, due to decreases in the fair value of the underlying collateral held by the entity.

The Group’s income from these entities comprises trading income (largely gains and losses on changes in the fair value and interest earned on bonds) on items classified as held for trading and interest income on interests classified as loans and receivables.

During 2015, the Group recorded a fair value loss of £4m (2014: £91m loss) on debt securities. Impairment losses recorded on loans and advances were immaterial in both the current and prior year.

The fair value of the Group’s interests in certain CLOs and CDOs is influenced by the protection directly provided to the structured entities by monoline insurers in addition to the value of the collateral held by the entities. The protection provided to the entities by the monoline insurers is in the form of a CDS. However, the ability of the monolines to make payments is uncertain, which is reflected in the valuation of the Group’s interests in the monoline wrapped CLOs and CDOs.

Multi-seller conduit programmes

The conduits engage in providing financing to various clients and hold whole or partial interests in pools of receivables or similar obligations. These instruments are protected from loss through over-collateralisation, seller guarantees, or other credit enhancements provided to the conduits. The Group’s off-balance sheet exposure included in the table above represents liquidity facilities that are provided to the conduits for the benefit of the holders of the commercial paper issued by the conduits and will only be drawn where the conduits are unable to access the commercial paper market. If these facilities are drawn, the Group is protected from loss through over-collateralisation, seller guarantees, or other credit enhancements provided to the conduits. The Group earns income from fees received on the liquidity facility and the letter of credit provided to the conduits. There were no impairment losses on this lending in either of the current year or the prior year.

Lending

The portfolio includes lending provided by the Group to unconsolidated structured entities in the normal course of its lending business to earn income in the form of interest and lending fees and includes loans to structured entities that are generally collateralised by property, equipment or other assets. All loans are subject to the Group’s credit sanctioning process. Collateral arrangements are specific to the circumstances of each loan with additional guarantees and collateral sought from the sponsor of the structured entity for certain arrangements. During the period the Group incurred an impairment of £35m (2014: £31m) against such facilities. The main types of lending are £3bn (2014: £4bn) of funding loans to bankruptcy remote structured entities to either invest or develop properties, £4bn (2014: £5bn) of loans to structured entities which have been created by an individual to hold one or more assets, £2bn (2014: £2bn) to entities whose operations are limited to financing or funding the acquisition of specific assets such as schools, hospitals, roads and renewable energy projects under the Private Finance Initiative (PFI), and £1bn (2014: £1bn) of funding loans to bankruptcy remote structured entities to enable them to purchase capital equipment for parent companies and are supported by government export guarantees.

Mortgage-backed securities

This represents a portfolio of floating rate notes, mainly mortgage-backed security positions, used as an accounting hedge of interest rate risk under the Group’s structural hedging programme. All notes are investment grade. The portfolio has decreased owing to a reduced requirement for hedge accounting capacity in sterling.

Investment funds and trusts

In the course of its fund management activities, the Group establishes pooled investment funds that comprise investments of various kinds, tailored to meet certain investors’ requirements. The Group’s interest in funds is generally restricted to a fund management fee, the value of which is typically based on the performance of the fund.

The Group acts as trustee to a number of trusts established by or on behalf of its clients. The purpose of the trusts, which meet the definition of structured entities, is to hold assets on behalf of beneficiaries. The Group’s interest in trusts is generally restricted to unpaid fees which, depending on the trust, may be fixed or based on the value of the trust assets. Barclays has no other risk exposure to the trusts.

Other

This includes £1,926m (2014: £1,514m) of derivative transactions with structured entities where the market risk is materially hedged with corresponding derivative contracts.

Assets transferred to sponsored unconsolidated structured entities

Assets transferred to sponsored unconsolidated structured entities were immaterial.

 

332  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

38 Investments in associates and joint ventures

 

 

Accounting for associates and joint ventures

Barclays applies IAS 28 Investments in Associates and IFRS 11 Joint Arrangements. Associates are entities in which the Group has significant influence, but not control, over the operating and financial policies. Generally the Group holds more than 20%, but less than 50%, of their voting shares. Joint ventures are arrangements where the Group has joint control and rights to the net assets of the entity.

 

The Group’s investments in associates and joint ventures are initially recorded at cost and increased (or decreased) each year by the Group’s share of the post acquisition profit/(loss). The Group ceases to recognise its share of the losses of equity accounted associates when its share of the net assets and amounts due from the entity have been written off in full, unless it has a contractual or constructive obligation to make good its share of the losses. In some cases, investments in these entities may be held at fair value through profit or loss, for example, those held by private equity businesses.

 

There are no individually significant investments in joint ventures or associates held by Barclays.

 

       2015         2014   
     Associates         Joint ventures           Total         Associates         Joint ventures           Total   
       £m         £m           £m         £m         £m           £m   
  Equity accounted      217         356           573         303         408           711   
  Held at fair value through profit or loss      77         475           552         307         366           673   
  Total      294         831           1,125         610         774           1,384   

 

Summarised financial information for the Group’s equity accounted associates and joint ventures is set out below. The amounts shown are the net income of the investees, not just the Group’s share for the year ended 31 December 2015, with the exception of certain undertakings for which the amounts are based on accounts made up to dates not earlier than three months before the balance sheet date.

 

   

                           Associates         Joint ventures   
                 2015             2014             2015               2014   
                           £m         £m         £m           £m   
  Profit/(loss) from continuing operations              6         (9      86           146   
  Other comprehensive income                                  13         (24        (5
  Total comprehensive income                          6         4         62           141   

Unrecognised shares of the losses of individually immaterial associates and joint ventures were nil (2014: nil).

The Group’s associates and joint ventures are subject to statutory requirements such that they cannot make remittances of dividends or make loan repayments to Barclays PLC without agreement from the external parties.

The Group’s share of commitments and contingencies of its associates and joint ventures comprised unutilised credit facilities provided to customers of £1,450m (2014: £1,566m). In addition, the Group has made commitments to finance or otherwise provide resources to its joint ventures and associates of £177m (2014: £183m).

39 Securitisations

 

 

Accounting for securitisations

The Group uses securitisations as a source of finance and a means of risk transfer. Such transactions generally result in the transfer of contractual cash flows from portfolios of financial assets to holders of issued debt securities.

 

Securitisations may, depending on the individual arrangement, result in continued recognition of the securitised assets and the recognition of the debt securities issued in the transaction; lead to partial continued recognition of the assets to the extent of the Group’s continuing involvement in those assets or to derecognition of the assets and the separate recognition, as assets or liabilities, of any rights and obligations created or retained in the transfer. Full derecognition only occurs when the Group transfers both its contractual right to receive cash flows from the financial assets, or retains the contractual rights to receive the cash flows, but assumes a contractual obligation to pay the cash flows to another party without material delay or reinvestment, and also transfers substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership, including credit risk, prepayment risk and interest rate risk.

 

In the course of its normal banking activities, the Group makes transfers of financial assets, either legally (where legal rights to the cash flows from the asset are passed to the counterparty) or beneficial (where the Group retains the rights to the cash flows but assumes a responsibility to transfer them to the counterparty). Depending on the nature of the transaction, this may result in derecognition of the assets in their entirety, partial derecognition or no derecognition of the assets subject to the transfer.

Full derecognition only occurs when the Group transfers both its contractual right to receive cash flows from the financial assets (or retains the contractual rights to receive the cash flows, but assumes a contractual obligation to pay the cash flows to another party without material delay or reinvestment) and substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership, including credit risk, prepayment risk and interest rate risk. When an asset is transferred, in some circumstances, the Group may retain an interest in it (continuing involvement) requiring the Group to repurchase it in certain circumstances for other than its fair value on that date.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  333


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

    

 

 

39 Securitisations continued

A summary of the main transactions, and the assets and liabilities and the financial risks arising from these transactions, is set out below:

Transfers of financial assets that do not result in derecognition

Securitisations

The Group was party to securitisation transactions involving its residential mortgage loans, business loans and credit card balances.

In these transactions, the assets, interests in the assets, or beneficial interests in the cash flows arising from the assets, are transferred to a special purpose entity, which then issues interest bearing debt securities to third party investors.

Securitisations may, depending on the individual arrangement, result in continued recognition of the securitised assets and the recognition of the debt securities issued in the transaction. Partial continued recognition of the assets to the extent of the Group’s continuing involvement in those assets can also occur or derecognition of the assets and the separate recognition, as assets or liabilities, of any rights and obligations created or retained in the transfer.

The following table shows the carrying amount of securitised assets that have not resulted in full derecognition, together with the associated liabilities, for each category of asset on the balance sheet:

 

       2015         2014   
     Assets         Liabilities         Assets           Liabilities   
      
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
    
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
    
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
    
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
      
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
    
 
Fair value
£m
  
  

Loans and advances to customers

                         

Residential mortgage loans

     376         362         (168      (170      2,830         2,619           (2,352      (2,360

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

     5,433         5,472         (4,604      (4,606      7,060         7,162           (5,160      (5,178

Corporate loans

     8         8         (8      (8      157         154           (135      (146

Total

     5,817         5,842         (4,780      (4,784      10,047         9,935           (7,647      (7,684

Loans and advances to customers

                         

Retained interests in residential mortgage loans

                                     66         n/a                   n/a   

Retained interests in corporate loans

     42         42         n/a         n/a                                     

Balances included within loans and advances to customers represent securitisations where substantially all the risks and rewards of the asset have been retained by the Group.

The relationship between the transferred assets and the associated liabilities is that holders of notes may only look to cash flows from the securitised assets for payments of principal and interest due to them under the terms of their notes, although the contractual terms of their notes may be different to the maturity and interest of the transferred assets.

Retained interests in transfers of financial assets that resulted in partial derecognition are securities which represent a continuing exposure to the prepayment and credit risk in the underlying securitised assets. The carrying amount of the loans before transfer was £78m (2014: £120m). The retained interest is initially recorded as an allocation of the original carrying amount based on the relative fair values of the portion derecognised and the portion retained.

For transfers of assets in relation to repurchase agreements, see Note 22 Reverse repurchase agreements including other similar and secured lending and borrowing and Note 40 Assets pledged.

Continuing involvement in financial assets that have been derecognised

In some cases, the Group may have transferred a financial asset in its entirety but may have continuing involvement in it. This arises in asset securitisations where loans and asset backed securities were derecognised as a result of the Group’s involvement with CLOs, CDOs, RMBS and CMBS. Continuing involvement largely arises from providing financing into these structures in the form of retained notes, which do not bear first losses.

The table below shows the potential financial implications of such continuing involvement:

 

      

 

Continuing involvement as at

31 December 2015

  

  

    
 
Gain/(loss) from
continuing involvement
  
  

Type of transfer

    
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
    
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
    
 
 
 
Maximum
exposure
to loss
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 

 

For the year
ended 31
December
2015

£m

  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 

 

Cumulative
to 31
December
2015

£m

  
  
  
  

  

CLO and other assets

     686         684         686         7         (36

US sub-prime and Alt-A

     38         37         38                 (426

Commercial mortgage backed securities

                                       

Total

     724         721         724         7         (462

 

334  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

39 Securitisations continued

 

      

 

            Continuing  involvement as at            

31 December 2014

  

  

    
 
Gain/(loss) from
continuing involvement
  
  

Type of transfer

    
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
    
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
    
 
 

 

Maximum
exposure
to loss

£m

  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 

 

For the year
ended 31
December
2014

£m

  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 

 

Cumulative
to 31
December
2014

£m

  
  
  
  

  

CLO and other assets

     1,370         1,354         1,370         14         (720

US sub-prime and Alt-A

     208         195         208                 (1,365

Commercial mortgage backed securities

     200         200         200         15         (8

Total

     1,778         1,749         1,778         29         (2,093

Assets which represent the Group’s continuing involvement in derecognised assets are recorded in the following line items:

 

  

Type of transfer

                      
 
 
Loans and
advances
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 

 

Trading
portfolio
assets

£m

  
  
  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

              

CLO and other assets

           327         359         686   

US sub-prime and Alt-A

           38                 38   

Commercial mortgage backed securities

                                         

Total

                       365         359         724   

As at 31 December 2014

              

CLO and other assets

           829         541         1,370   

US sub-prime and Alt-A

           200         8         208   

Commercial mortgage backed securities

                               200         200   

Total

                       1,029         749         1,778   

40 Assets pledged

Assets are pledged as collateral to secure liabilities under repurchase agreements, securitisations and stock lending agreements or as collateral posted against derivative margin requirements. Assets pledged as collateral include all assets categorised as encumbered in the disclosure on page 195, other than those held in commercial paper conduits. In these transactions, Barclays will be required to step in to provide financing itself under a liquidity facility if the vehicle cannot access the commercial paper market. The following table summarises the nature and carrying amount of the assets pledged as security against these liabilities:

 

      

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

a 

  

Trading portfolio assets

     49,308         50,782   

Financial assets designated at fair value

     2,534         2,324   

Loans and advances to customers

     51,038         62,459   

Cash collateral

     62,599         72,562   

Available for sale financial investments

     11,666         8,732   

Non current assets held for sale

     1,930         4,693   

Assets pledged

     179,075         201,552   

Barclays has an additional £13bn (2014: £9bn) of loans and advances within its asset backed funding programmes that can readily be used to raise additional secured funding and are available to support future issuance.

Collateral held as security for assets

Under certain transactions, including reverse repurchase agreements and stock borrowing transactions, the Group is allowed to resell or re-pledge the collateral held. The fair value at the balance sheet date of collateral accepted and re-pledged to others was as follows:

 

      

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

Fair value of securities accepted as collateral

     308,162         396,480   

Of which fair value of securities re-pledged/transferred to others

     266,015         313,354   

The full disclosure as per IFRS 7 has been included in collateral and other credit enhancements (see pages 145 to 147).

Note

a 2014 has been revised to align balance sheet categories to the asset encumbrance table on page 196.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  335


Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

    

 

 

The notes included in this section focus on related party transactions, auditors’ remuneration and Directors’ remuneration. Related parties include any subsidiaries, associates, joint ventures, entities under common directorships and Key Management Personnel.

 

 

41 Related party transactions and Directors’ remuneration

Related party transactions

Parties are considered to be related if one party has the ability to control the other party or exercise significant influence over the other party in making financial or operational decisions, or one other party controls both. The definition includes subsidiaries, associates, joint ventures and the Group’s pension schemes.

Subsidiaries

Transactions between Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries also meet the definition of related party transactions. Where these are eliminated on consolidation, they are not disclosed in the Group Financial Statements. Transactions between Barclays PLC and its subsidiary, Barclays Bank PLC are fully disclosed in Barclays PLC’s balance sheet and income statement. A list of the Group’s principal subsidiaries is shown in Note 36.

Associates, joint ventures and other entities

The Group provides banking services to its associates, joint ventures, the Group pension funds (principally the UK Retirement Fund) and to entities under common directorships, providing loans, overdrafts, interest and non-interest bearing deposits and current accounts to these entities as well as other services. Group companies also provide investment management and custodian services to the Group pension schemes. The Group also provides banking services for unit trusts and investment funds managed by Group companies, which are not individually material. All of these transactions are conducted on the same terms as third party transactions. Summarised financial information for the Group’s investments in associates and joint ventures is set out in Note 38.

Amounts included in the Group’s financial statements, in aggregate, by category of related party entity are as follows:

 

                       Pension  
                   funds, unit  
                   trusts and  
            Joint       investment  
     Associates       ventures       funds  
       £m          £m        £m  

For the year ended and as at 31 December 2015

        

Income

     (19)         40        4  

Impairment

     (4)         (2)       –  

Total assets

     36          1,578        –  

Total liabilities

     158          133        184  

 

For the year ended and as at 31 December 2014

        

Income

     (5)               4  

Impairment

     –          (1)       –  

Total assets

     130          1,558        –  

Total liabilities

     264          188        149  

 

For the year ended and as at 31 December 2013

        

Income

     (10)         24        3  

Impairment

     (3)         (4)       –  

Total assets

     116          1,521        5  

Total liabilities

     278          185        207  

Guarantees, pledges or commitments given in respect of these transactions in the year were £881m (2014: £911m) predominantly relating to joint ventures. No guarantees, pledges or commitments were received in the year. Derivatives transacted on behalf of the pension funds unit trusts and investment funds were £13m (2014: £587m).

Key Management Personnel

The Group’s Key Management Personnel, and persons connected with them, are also considered to be related parties for disclosure purposes. Key Management Personnel are defined as those persons having authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of Barclays PLC (directly or indirectly) and comprise the Directors of Barclays PLC and the Officers of the Group, certain direct reports of the Group Chief Executive and the heads of major business units and functions.

There were no material related party transactions with entities under common directorship where a Director or other member of Key Management Personnel (or any connected person) is also a Director or other member of Key Management Personnel (or any connected person) of Barclays.

 

336  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


            

            

            

 

 

41 Related party transactions and Directors’ remuneration continued

The Group provides banking services to Directors and other Key Management Personnel and persons connected to them. Transactions during the year and the balances outstanding were as follows:

 

 

  Loans outstanding                
       2015        2014  
         £m        £m  
  As at 1 January        11.4        13.4  
  Loans issued during the year        1.1        1.3  
  Loan repayments during the year        (2.7)       (3.3) 
  As at 31 December        9.8        11.4  

No allowances for impairment were recognised in respect of loans to Directors or other members of Key Management Personnel (or any connected person).

 

  Deposits outstanding                
       2015        2014  
         £m        £m  
  As at 1 January        103.0        100.2  
  Deposits received during the year        44.8        25.7  
  Deposits repaid during the year        (31.3)       (22.9) 
  As at 31 December        116.5        103.0  

Total commitments outstanding

Total commitments outstanding refers to the total of any undrawn amounts on credit cards and/or overdraft facilities provided to Key Management Personnel. Total commitments outstanding as at 31 December 2015 were £0.5m (2014: £1.3m).

All loans to Directors and other Key Management Personnel (and persons connected to them), (a) were made in the ordinary course of business, (b) were made on substantially the same terms, including interest rates and collateral, as those prevailing at the same time for comparable transactions with other persons and (c) did not involve more than a normal risk of collectability or present other unfavourable features.

Remuneration of Directors and other Key Management Personnel

Total remuneration awarded to Directors and other Key Management Personnel below represents the awards made to individuals that have been approved by the Board Remuneration Committee as part of the latest remuneration decisions, and is consistent with the approach adopted for disclosures set out on pages 83 to 116. Costs recognised in the income statement reflect the accounting charge for the year and are included within operating expenses. The difference between the values awarded and the recognised income statement charge principally relates to the recognition of deferred costs for prior year awards. Figures are provided for the period that individuals met the definition of Directors and other Key Management Personnel.

 

         2015        2014  
         £m        £m  
  Salaries and other short-term benefits        31.3        28.3  
  Pension costs        0.3        0.3  
  Other long-term benefits        4.7        8.1  
  Share-based payments        11.0        15.0  
  Employer social security charges on emoluments        5.2        5.8  
  Costs recognised for accounting purposes        52.5        57.5  
  Employer social security charges on emoluments        (5.2)       (5.8) 
  Other long-term benefits – difference between awards granted and costs recognised        2.5        (4.3) 
  Share-based payments – difference between awards granted and costs recognised        (2.3)       (8.4) 
  Total remuneration awarded        47.5        39.0  

Disclosure required by the Companies Act 2006

The following information regarding Directors is presented in accordance with the Companies Act 2006:

 

         2015        2014  
         £m        £m  
  Aggregate emolumentsa        7.0        7.8  
  Amounts paid under LTIPsb        2.2        –  
         9.2        7.8  

There were no pension contributions paid to defined contribution schemes on behalf of Directors (2014: nil). There were no notional pension contributions to defined contribution schemes.

As at 31 December 2015, there were no Directors accruing benefits under a defined benefit scheme (2014: nil).

 

Notes

 

a The aggregate emoluments include amounts paid for the 2015 year. In addition, deferred share awards for 2015 will be made to Antony Jenkins and Tushar Morzaria which will only vest subject to meeting certain conditions. The total of the deferred share awards is £0.7m (£1.2m for 2014).
b The figure shown for 2015 in ‘Amounts paid under long-term incentive schemes’ is the amount that was released in 2015 in respect of the 2012-2014 Barclays Long Term Incentive Plan (‘LTIP’) cycle. The LTIP amount in the single total figure table for executive Directors’ 2015 remuneration in the Directors’ Remuneration report relates to the award that is scheduled to be released in 2016 in respect of the 2013-2015 LTIP cycle.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  337


Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

    

 

 

41 Related party transactions and Directors’ remuneration continued

Directors’ and Officers’ shareholdings and options

The beneficial ownership of ordinary share capital of Barclays PLC by all Directors and Officers of Barclays PLC (involving 26 persons) at 31 December 2015 amounted to 10,586,812 (2014: 9,078,157) ordinary shares of 25p each (0.06% of the ordinary share capital outstanding).

At 31 December 2015, executive Directors and officers of Barclays PLC (involving 32 persons) held options to purchase a total of 17,206 (2014: 30,398) Barclays PLC ordinary shares of 25p each at prices ranging from 133.01p to 178p under Sharesave.

Advances and credit to Directors and guarantees on behalf of Directors

In accordance with Section 413 of the Companies Act 2006, the total amount of advances and credits made available in 2015 to persons who served as Directors during the year was £0.3m (2014: £0.4m). The total value of guarantees entered into on behalf of Directors during 2015 was nil (2014: nil).

42 Auditors’ remuneration

Auditors’ remuneration is included within consultancy, legal and professional fees in administration and general expenses and comprises:

 

               

 

 

 

Audit

 

  

  

 

 

 

Taxation

 

  

  

 

 

 

Other

 

  

    
       Audit      related      services      services              Total  
         £m         £m         £m         £m       £m  
  2015                 
  Audit of the Group’s annual accounts        13                               13  
  Other services:                 
  Fees payable for the Company’s associatesa        21                               21  
  Other services suppliedb                3                       3  
  Other services relating to taxation                 
  – compliance services                        1               1  
  – advisory servicesc                                      –  
  Other                4                 1       5  
  Total auditors’ remuneration        34         7         1         1       43  
  2014                 
  Audit of the Group’s annual accounts        11                               11  
  Other services:                 
  Fees payable for the Company’s associatesa        24                               24  
  Other services suppliedb                4                       4  
  Other services relating to taxation                 
  – compliance services                        1               1  
  – advisory servicesc                                      –  
  Other                3                 1       4  
  Total auditors’ remuneration        35         7         1         1       44  
  2013                 
  Audit of the Group’s annual accounts        10                               10  
  Other services:                 
  Fees payable for the Company’s associatesa        25                               25  
  Other services suppliedb                3                       3  
  Other services relating to taxation                 
  – compliance services                        2               2  
  – advisory servicesc                                      –  
  Other                3                 2       5  
  Total auditors’ remuneration        35         6         2         2       45  

The figures shown in the above table relate to fees paid to PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP and its associates for continuing operations of business. Fees paid to other auditors not associated with PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP in respect of the audit of the Company’s subsidiaries were £4m (2014: £4m, 2013: £5m).

Notes

 

a Comprises the fees for the statutory audit of the subsidiaries and associated pension schemes both inside and outside Great Britain and fees for the work performed by associates of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP in respect of the consolidated financial statements of the Company. Fees relating to the audit of the associated pension schemes were nil (2014: £0.2m).
b Comprises services in relation to statutory and regulatory filings. These include audit services for the review of the interim financial information under the Listing Rules of the UK listing authority.
c Includes consultation on tax matters, tax advice relating to transactions and other tax planning and advice.

 

338  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


        

        

        

 

 

43 Financial risks, liquidity and capital management

To improve transparency and ease of reference, by concentrating related information in one place, and to reduce duplication, disclosures required under IFRS relating to financial risks and capital resources have been included within the Risk management and governance section as follows:

 

§   Credit risk, on pages 144 to 170

 

§   Market risk, on pages 171 to 180

 

§   Capital risk, on pages 181 to 186

 

§   Liquidity risk, on pages 187 to 204.

44 Non-current assets held for sale and associated liabilities

 

 

Accounting for non-current assets held for sale and associated liabilities

 

The Group applies IFRS 5 Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations.

 

Non-current assets (or disposal groups) are classified as held for sale when their carrying amount is to be recovered principally through a sale transaction rather than continuing use. In order to be classified as held for sale, the asset must be available for immediate sale in its present condition subject only to terms that are usual and customary and the sale must be highly probable. Non-current assets (or disposal groups) held for sale are measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less cost to sell.

 

 

Assets classified as held for sale

                                                             
        
 

 

Portugal
2015

£m

  
  

  

      

 

 

BVP

2015

£m

  

  

  

      

 

 

Italy

2015

£m

  

  

  

      
 
 
Other
2015
£m
  
  
  
      
 

 

Total
2015

£m

  
  

  

    

Total  

2014  

£m  

Available for sale financial investments

       7           1,220                     3           1,230         162  

Loans and advances to customers

       3,407                     2,091           15           5,513         14,943  

Property, plant and equipment

       42                               86           128         92  

Deferred tax assets

                 22                               22         291  

Other assets

       28           756           27           104           915         557  

Total

       3,484           1,998           2,118           208           7,808         16,045  

Balance of impairment unallocated under IFRS 5

       (180        (22        (242                  (444      (471) 

Total agreed to consolidated balance sheet

       3,304           1,976           1,876           208           7,364         15,574  
                                                               

Liabilities classified as held for sale

                                                             
        
 

 

Portugal
2015

£m

  
  

  

      

 

 

BVP

2015

£m

  

  

  

      

 

 

Italy

2015

£m

  

  

  

      
 
 
Other
2015
£m
  
  
  
      
 

 

Total
2015

£m

  
  

  

    

Total  

2014  

£m  

Deposits from banks

                                                       (4,313) 

Customer accounts

       (1,826                  (2,174                  (4,000      (6,827) 

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

                                                       (77) 

Other liabilities

       (37        (1,858        (66        (36        (1,997      (1,898) 

Total

       (1,863        (1,858        (2,240        (36        (5,997      (13,115) 

Sale of the Portuguese business

The disposal group includes all assets and liabilities of the Portuguese Retail Banking, Wealth and Investment Management businesses and part of the Portuguese Corporate banking business. This sale is part of the divestment of the Non-Core segment of the Group.

The Portuguese disposal was announced on 2 September 2015 and the sale is due to complete in Q116. A loss of £180m has been recognised in the income statement within (loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures.

Sale of Barclays Vida Y Pensiones

The disposal group includes all assets and liabilities of Barclays Vida Y Pensiones (BVP), a company offering life insurance, pension products and services in Spain, Portugal and Italy. BVP was classified as held for sale in the first half of 2015 and is expected to be sold in the first half of 2016. A loss of £22m has been recognised in the income statement within (loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures.

Sale of the Italian business

The disposal group includes the assets and liabilities of the Italian Retail Banking business including mortgages. This sale is part of the divestment of the Non-Core segment of the Group.

The Italian disposal was announced on 3 December 2015 and the sale is expected to complete in the first half of 2016. A loss of £258m has been recognised in the income statement within (loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  339


Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

    

 

 

44 Non-current assets held for sale and associated liabilities continued

Other held for sale assets

Other assets includes the Barclays Risk Analysis Index Solutions business. A pre-tax gain of approximately £480m is expected to be recognised on completion during 2016.

During the year, a number of held for sale assets have been disposed of. The sale of the Spanish business (Barclays Bank SAU) took place in January 2015. Losses of £446m in 2014 and £117m in 2015 have been recognised in the income statement within (loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures. Of the 2015 loss, £97m relates to recycling of the related currency translation reserve with the remainder due to revision of the estimated closing net asset value of the disposal group on completion. The sale of the Pakistan business took place in June 2015, and UKSL in September 2015 with gains of £14m and £7m respectively recognised in other income.

45 Barclays PLC (the Parent Company)

Other income/(expense)

Other income of £227m (2014: £275m) includes £345m (2014: £250m) of income received from gross coupon payments on Barclays Bank PLC issued AT1 securities partially offset by a £114m fair value loss (2014: £27m gain) on derivative financial instruments.

Non-current assets and liabilities

Investment in subsidiary

The investment in subsidiary of £35,303m (2014: £33,743m) represents investments made into Barclays Bank PLC, including £5,350m (2014: £4,350m) of AT1 securities. The increase of £1,560m during the year was due to a £1,000m increased holding in Barclays Bank PLC issued securities and a further cash contribution of £560m.

Loans and advances to subsidiary, subordinated liabilities and debt securities in issue

During the period, Barclays PLC issued 1.25bn equivalent of Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes included within the subordinated liabilities balance of £1,766m (2014: £810m), $5.5bn of Fixed Rate Senior Notes, Yen 60bn of Fixed and Floating Rate Notes and 100m of private MTN included within the debt securities in issue balance of £6,224m (2014: £2,056m). The proceeds raised through these transactions were used to invest in Barclays Bank PLC Notes in each case with a ranking corresponding to the notes issued by Barclays PLC and included within the loans and advances to subsidiary balance of £7,990m (2014: £2,866m).

Derivative financial instrument

The derivative financial instrument of £210m (2014: £313m) held by the Parent Company represents Barclays PLC’s right to receive a Capital Note with a face value of $3bn for no additional consideration, in the event the Barclays PLC consolidated CRD IV CET1 ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) falls below 7% at which point the notes are automatically assigned by the holders to Barclays PLC.

Shareholders’ equity

Called up share capital and share premium of Barclays PLC was £21,586m (2014: £20,809m). Other equity instruments of £5,321m (2014: £4,326m) comprises of AT1 securities. For further details please refer to Note 31.

 

340  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Notes to the financial statements

    

 

 

46 Related undertakings

The Group’s corporate structure consists of a number of related undertakings, comprising subsidiaries, joint ventures, associates and significant other interests. A full list of these undertakings, the country of incorporation and the ownership of each share class is set out below. The information is provided as at 31 December 2015.

The entities are grouped by the countries in which they are incorporated. The profits earned by the activities of these entities are in some cases taxed in countries other than the country of incorporation. Barclays’ 2015 Country Snapshot provides details of where the Group carries on its business, where its profits are subject to tax and the taxes it pays in each country it operates in.

Wholly owned subsidiaries

Unless otherwise stated the undertakings below are wholly owned and consolidated by Barclays and the share capital disclosed comprises ordinary or common shares which are held by Group subsidiaries. Where multiple share classes are held the proportion of the nominal value of each class of shares held is 100% unless otherwise stated.

 

Wholly owned subsidiaries   Note

United Kingdom

 

 
54 Lombard Street Investments   F, I
Aequor Investments Limited  
Alynore Investments Limited Partnership   B
Ardencroft Investments Limited   F, I
Astraea Investment Funds   J, K
Axis Partners   B
B D & B Investments Limited  
B.P.B. (Holdings) Limited  
Barafor Limited  
Barclay Leasing Limited  
Barclaycard Funding PLC  
Barclays (Security Realisation) Limited  
Barclays Africa Group Holdings Limited   J, K
Barclays Aldersgate Investments Limited  
Barclays Asset Management Limited  
Barclays Bank PLC   A, F, I
Barclays Bank Trust Company Limited   I, P
Barclays Bayard Investments Trust   D
Barclays BCL FI Trust   D
Barclays Bedivere Trust   D
Barclays BR Holdings Trust   D
Barclays BR Investments Trust   D
Barclays Cantal Investments Trust   D
Barclays Capital Asia Holdings Limited  
Barclays Capital Finance Limited  
Barclays Capital Japan Securities Holdings Limited  
Barclays Capital Luxembourg S.à r.l. Trust   D
Barclays Capital Margin Financing Limited  
Barclays Capital Nominees (No. 2) Limited  
Barclays Capital Nominees (No. 3) Limited  
Barclays Capital Nominees Limited  
Barclays Capital Principal Investments Limited  
Barclays Capital Securities Client Nominee Limited  
Barclays Capital Securities Limited   F, I
Barclays Capital Services Limited  
Barclays Capital Strategic Advisers Limited  
Barclays Capital Trading Luxembourg Trust   D
Barclays CCP Funding LLP   B
Barclays Claudas Investments Partnership   B
Barclays Converted Investments (No. 2) Limited  
Barclays Converted Investments Limited  
Barclays Darnay Euro Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Barclays Direct Investing Nominees Limited  
Barclays Directors Limited  
Barclays Equity Index Investments Bare Trust   D
Barclays Executive Schemes Trustees Limited  
Barclays Export and Finance Company Limited (In Liquidation)  
Barclays Fiduciary Services (UK) Limited  
Barclays Financial Planning  
Barclays Financial Planning Nominee Company Limited  
Barclays Funds Investments Limited  
Barclays Global Investors Finance Limited (In Liquidation)  
Barclays Global Investors UK Holdings Limited (in Liquidation)   J, K
Barclays Global Shareplans Nominee Limited  
Barclays Group Holdings Limited  
Barclays Group Operations Limited  
Barclays Industrial Development Limited  
Barclays Industrial Investments Limited  
Barclays Insurance Services Company Limited  
Barclays Investment Management Limited  
Wholly owned subsidiaries   Note
Barclays Lamorak Trust   D
Barclays Leasing (No.9) Limited  
Barclays Long Island Limited  
Barclays Luxembourg EUR Holdings Trust   D
Barclays Luxembourg Finance Index Trust   D
Barclays Luxembourg GBP Holdings Trust   D
Barclays Luxembourg USD Holdings Trust   D
Barclays Marlist Limited  
Barclays Mercantile Business Finance Limited  
Barclays Mercantile Highland Finance Limited (In Liquidation)  
Barclays Mercantile Limited  
Barclays Metals Limited  
Barclays Nominees (Branches) Limited  
Barclays Nominees (George Yard) Limited  
Barclays Nominees (K.W.S.) Limited  
Barclays Nominees (Monument) Limited  
Barclays Nominees (Provincial) Limited  
Barclays Nominees (United Nations For UNJSPF) Limited  
Barclays Operational Services Limited  
Barclays Pelleas Investments Limited Partnership   B
Barclays Pelleas Trust   D
Barclays Pension Funds Trustees Limited  
Barclays Physical Trading Limited  
Barclays Private Bank  
Barclays Private Banking Services Limited  
Barclays Private Trust  
Barclays Risk Analytics and Index Solutions Limited  
Barclays SAMS Limited  
Barclays Services (Japan) Limited  
Barclays Sharedealing  
Barclays Shea Limited  
Barclays Singapore Global Shareplans Nominee Limited  
Barclays SLCSM (No.1) Limited  
Barclays Stockbrokers (Holdings) Limited  
Barclays Stockbrokers Limited  
Barclays UK and Europe PLC  
Barclays Unquoted Investments Limited  
Barclays Unquoted Property Investments Limited  
Barclays USD Funding LLP   B
Barclays Wealth Nominees Limited  
Barclayshare Nominees Limited  
Barcosec Limited  
Barley Investments Limited   I, J, K
Barometers Limited  
Barsec Nominees Limited  
BB Client Nominees Limited  
BBUK Private Credit Partners Limited (In Liquidation)  
BCLI GP Trust   D
Blossom Finance General Partnership   B
BMBF (Bluewater Investments) Limited  
BMBF (No.12) Limited  
BMBF (No.18) Limited (Dissolved 20/01/2016)  
BMBF (No.21) Limited  
BMBF (No.24) Limited  
BMBF (No.3) Limited  
BMBF (No.6) Limited  
BMBF (No.9) Limited  
BMBF USD NO 1 Limited  
BMI (No.6) Limited (Dissolved 16/01/2016)  
BMI (No.9) Limited  
BNRI ENG 2013 Limited Partnership   B
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  341


Notes to the financial statements

    

    

 

 

46 Related undertakings continued

Wholly owned subsidiaries   Note
BNRI ENG 2014 Limited Partnership   B
BNRI ENG GP LLP   B
BNRI England 2010 Limited Partnership   B
BNRI England 2011 Limited Partnership   B
BNRI England 2012 Limited Partnership   B
BNRI PIA Scot GP Limited  
BNRI Scots GP, LLP   B
Boudeuse Limited  
Capel Cure Sharp Limited  
Carnegie Holdings Limited   I, J, K
Chapelcrest Investments Limited  
Clearlybusiness.com Limited (In Liquidation)  
Clydesdale Financial Services Limited  
Cobalt Investments Limited  
Condor No.1 Limited Partnership   B
Condor No.2 Limited Partnership   B
CP Flower Guaranteeco (UK) Limited   E
CP Propco 1 Limited  
CP Propco 2 Limited  
CP Topco Limited   J, K
CPIA England 2008 Limited Partnership   B
CPIA England 2009 Limited Partnership   B
CPIA England No.2 Limited Partnership   B
Denham Investments Limited  
DMW Realty Limited  
Durlacher Nominees Limited  
Eagle Financial and Leasing Services (UK) Limited  
Ebbgate Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Eldfell Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
EM Investments No.1 Limited (In Liquidation)  
Equity Value Investments Limited Liability Partnership   B
Equity Value Investments No.1 Limited  
Equity Value Investments No.2 Limited   F, I
Exshelfco (DZBC)  
Fair and Square Limited (In Liquidation)  
Finpart Nominees Limited  
FIRSTPLUS Financial Group PLC  
Fitzroy Finance Limited   Z
Foltus Investments Limited  
Gerrard (OMH) Limited  
Gerrard Financial Planning Limited  
Gerrard Investment Management Limited  
Gerrard Management Services Limited  
Gerrard Nominees Limited  
Global Dynasty Natural Resource Private Equity Limited Partnership   B
Globe Nominees Limited  
GM Computers Limited  
Greig Middleton Holdings Limited  
Greig Middleton Nominees Limited  
Hawkins Funding Limited  
Heraldglen Limited   G, H, I
Hoardburst Limited (In Liquidation)  
Investors In Infrastructure Limited  
J.V. Estates Limited  
Keepier Investments  
Kirsche Investments Limited  
Laser Investment Company 1 Limited (In Liquidation)  
Laser Investment Company 2 Limited (In Liquidation)  
Leonis Investments LLP   B
Lindley Developments Limited   U
Lombard Street Nominees Limited  
Long Island Assets Limited  
Luscinia Investments Funds  
Maloney Investments Limited  
MCC Leasing (No. 6) Limited (In Liquidation)  
MCC Leasing (No.24) Limited (Dissolved 04/02/2016)  
Menlo Investments Limited  
Mercantile Credit Company Limited  
Mercantile Industrial Leasing Limited (In Liquidation)  
Mercantile Leasing Company (No.132) Limited  
Mercers Debt Collections Limited  
MK Opportunities LP   B
Muleta Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Murray House Investment Management Limited  
Wholly owned subsidiaries   Note
Naxos Investments Limited  
North Colonnade Investments Limited  
Northwharf Investments Limited   I, X
Northwharf Nominees Limited  
Odysseus (Martins) Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Pecan Aggregator LP   B
Pendle Shipping Limited  
PIA England No.2 Limited Partnership   B
Preferred Liquidity Limited Partnership   B
R.C. Greig Nominees Limited  
Real Estate Participation Management Limited  
Real Estate Participation Services Limited  
Reflex Nominees Limited  
Relative Value Investments UK Limited Liability Partnership   B
Relative Value Trading Limited  
Roder Investments No. 1 Limited   I, Y
Roder Investments No. 2 Limited   I, Y
Ruthenium Investments Limited  
RVT CLO Investments LLP   B
Scotlife Home Loans (No.3) Limited  
Sharelink Nominees Limited  
Solution Personal Finance Limited   J, K, L
Stellans Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Surety Trust Limited  
Swan Lane Investments Limited   F, I
The Logic Group Enterprises Limited  
The Logic Group Holdings Limited   J
US Real Estate Holdings No.3 Limited  
W.D. Pension Fund Limited  
Wedd Jefferson (Nominees) Limited  
Westferry Investments Limited  
Woolwich Assured Homes Limited  
Woolwich Homes (1987) Limited   E
Woolwich Homes Limited  
Woolwich Limited  
Woolwich Plan Managers Limited  
Woolwich Qualifying Employee Share Ownership Trustee Limited  
Woolwich Surveying Services Limited  
Wysteria Euro Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Zeban Nominees Limited    
Argentina  
Compañia regional del Sur S.A.  
Compañía Sudamerica S.A.    
Belgium  
Belgian Turbine Lease Corporation NV    
Brazil  
Banco Barclays S.A.  
Barclays Corretora de Titulos e Valores Mobiliarios S.A.    
Canada  
Barclays Canadian Commodities Limited  
Barclays Capital Canada Inc  
Barclays Corporation Limited  
CPIA Canada Holdings   B
Cayman Islands  
Alymere Investments Limited   G, H, I
Alymere Investments Two Limited (In Liquidation)  
Analytical Trade UK Limited  
Aquitaine Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Aubisque UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Barclays Capital (Cayman) Limited  
Barclays Trust Company (Cayman) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclays Wealth Corporate Nominees Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Beille Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Bigorre UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Blaytell Limited  
Braven Investments No.1 Limited  
Brule 1 Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Calthorpe Investments Limited  
Capton Investments Limited  
Claudas Investments Limited   G, H, I
Claudas Investments Two Limited  
Colombiere UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Coskwo Limited  
CPIA Investments No.1 Limited   V
 

 

342  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


            

        

        

 

 

46 Related undertakings continued

Wholly owned subsidiaries   Note
CPIA Investments No.2 Limited   F, I
Cureton Investments No. 1 Limited (In Liquidation)  
Cuth Investments Limited   F, I, T
Eagle Holdings Ltd (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Eagle Management Services Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Feste Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Furbridge Investments Limited  
Gallen Investments Limited   H, I
Gironde Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Godler Limited  
Golden Eagle Holdings Ltd (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Hamar Investments Limited  
Harflane Limited  
Hauteville UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Hentock Limited  
Hollygrice Limited  
Hurley Investments No.1 Limited   I, W
Hurley Investments No.2 Limited (In Liquidation)  
HYMF (Cayman) Limited  
Iris Investments 1 Limited   G, H, I
JV Assets Limited  
Mintaka Investments No. 4 Limited  
Moselle No 3 UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
OGP Leasing Limited  
Palomino Limited   Z
Pelleas Investments Limited  
Pelleas Investments Two Limited  
Pilkbull Limited  
Pippin Island Investments Limited  
Raglan Investments Limited  
Razzoli Investments Limited   F, I
RVH Limited   F, I
Spargi Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Spatial Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Spoonhill Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Strickyard Limited  
Tourmalet UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Ventotene Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Wessex Investments Limited  
Winhall Limited  
Zane Investments Limited  
Zanonne Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  
Zinc Holdings Limited (In Liquidation)  
Zumboorok Investments Limited   F, I, T
China  
Barclays Technology Centre (Shanghai) Company Limited    
Egypt  
Barclays Bank Egypt SAE    
France  
Barclays Courtage SAS  
Barclays Diversification  
Barclays France SA  
Barclays Patrimoine S.C.S.  
Barclays Vie SA  
Barclays Wealth Managers France SA  
BBAIL SAS    
Germany  
Barclaycard Bank AG  
Barclays Capital Effekten GmbH  
Baubecon Holding 1 GmbH (In Liquidation)  
Opal 110. GmbH (In Liquidation)  
Sulm Investments GmbH    
Gibraltar  
Barclays Gibraltar Nominees Company Limited  
Frankland Properties Limited  
Norfolk LP   B
Ringmer Properties Limited  
Saveway Properties Limited  
Stowmarket Investments Limited  
Townmead Properties Limited  
Trefield Holdings Limited  
Wholly owned subsidiaries   Note
Guernsey  
Barclays Insurance Guernsey PCC Limited   Q
Barclays Nominees (Guernsey) Limited  
Barclays Wealth Advisory Holdings (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclays Wealth Corporate Officers (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclays Wealth Corporate Services (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclays Wealth Directors (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclays Wealth Fund Managers (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclays Wealth Nominees (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclays Wealth Trustees (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Bormio Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Lindmar Trust Company Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Regency Secretaries Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)    
Hong Kong  
Barclays Asia Limited  
Barclays Bank (Hong Kong Nominees) Limited (In Liquidation)  
Barclays Capital Asia Limited  
Barclays Capital Asia Nominees Limited (In Liquidation)  
Barclays Wealth Nominees (Hong Kong) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)    
India  
Barclays Holdings India Private Limited (In Liquidation)  
Barclays Investments & Loans (India) Limited   F, I
Barclays Securities (India) Private Limited  
Barclays Shared Services Private Limited  
Barclays Technology Centre India Private Limited  
Barclays Wealth Trustees (India) Private Limited    
Indonesia  
PT Bank Barclays Indonesia (In Liquidation)  
PT Bhadra Buana Persada (In Liquidation)    
Ireland  
Barclaycard International Payments Limited  
Barclays Assurance (Dublin) Limited  
Barclays Bank Ireland Public Limited Company  
Barclays Equities Trading (Ireland) Limited (In Liquidation)  
Barclays Insurance (Dublin) Limited  
Barclays Ireland Nominees Limited    
Isle of Man  
Barclays Holdings (Isle of Man) Limited  
Barclays Nominees (Manx) Limited  
Barclays Portfolio (IoM GP) No.2 Limited  
Barclays Private Clients International Limited   J, K
Barclays Trust Company (Isle of Man) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclays Wealth Corporate Officers (Isle of Man) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclays Wealth Corporate Services (IOM) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclays Wealth Directors (Isle of Man) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclays Wealth Nominees (IOM) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclays Wealth Trustees (Isle of Man) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclaytrust (Nominees) Isle of Man Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclaytrust International Nominees (Isle of Man) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Island Nominees Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Stowell Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Walbrook (IOM) 2006 Nominees (No. 1) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Walbrook (IOM) Nominees (No. 23) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Walbrook (IOM) Nominees (No. 3) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Walbrook (IOM) Nominees (No. 4) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Walbrook (IOM) Nominees (No. 5) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Walbrook (IOM) Nominees (No. 6) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)    
Italy  
Barclays Private Equity S.p.A. (In Liquidation)  
Barclays Services Italia S.p.A. (In Liquidation)    
Japan  
Barclays Funds and Advisory Japan Limited  
Barclays Securities Japan Limited  
Barclays Wealth Services Limited    
Jersey  
Barbridge Limited  
Barclays Nominees (Jersey) Limited  
Barclays Services Jersey Limited  
Barclays Trust Company (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclays Wealth Corporate Officers (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclays Wealth Directors (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclays Wealth Fund Managers (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclays Wealth Management Jersey Limited  
Barclays Wealth Signatories Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  343


Notes to the financial statements

    

    

 

 

46 Related undertakings continued

Wholly owned subsidiaries   Note
Barclays Wealth Trustees (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclaytrust Channel Islands Limited  
Barclaytrust International (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Barclaytrust Jersey Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
BIFML PTC Limited  
CP Newco 1 Limited  
CP Newco2 Limited   J, K
CP Newco3 Limited  
Karami Holdings Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
MK Opportunities GP Ltd  
Sandringham Nominees Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Tiara Trustees (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Walbrook Executors Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)  
Walbrook Properties Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)    
Korea, Republic of  
Barclays Korea GP Limited    
Luxembourg  
Adler Toy Holding Sarl  
Barclays Aegis Investments S.à r.l.  
Barclays Alzin Investments S.à r.l.  
Barclays Bayard Investments S.à r.l.   J, K
Barclays BCL Fixed Income S.à r.l.  
Barclays BCLI no.1 S.à r.l.  
Barclays BCLI no.2 S.à r.l.  
Barclays Bedivere Investments S.à r.l.  
Barclays Bordang Investments S.à r.l.  
Barclays BR Holdings S.à r.l.  
Barclays BR Investments S.à r.l.  
Barclays Cantal Investments S.à r.l.  
Barclays Capital Luxembourg S.à r.l.   I, N
Barclays Capital Trading Luxembourg S.à r.l.  
Barclays Equity Index Investments S.à r.l.  
Barclays Lamorak Investments S.à r.l.  
Barclays Leto Investments S.à r.l.  
Barclays Luxembourg EUR Holdings S.à r.l  
Barclays Luxembourg Finance S.à r.l.   I, K
Barclays Luxembourg GBP Holdings S.à r.l.  
Barclays Luxembourg Holdings S.à r.l.  
Barclays Luxembourg Holdings SSC   B
Barclays Luxembourg USD Holdings S.à r.l.  
Barclays Pelleas Investments S.à r.l.   G, I
Barclays US Investments S.à r.l.   J, K
Malaysia  
Barclays Capital Markets Malaysia Sdn Bhd.   F, I
Mauritius  
Barclays (H&B) Mauritius Limited  
Barclays Capital Mauritius Limited  
Barclays Capital Securities Mauritius Limited  
Barclays Mauritius Overseas Holdings Limited    
Mexico  
Barclays Bank Mexico, S.A.   K, M
Barclays Capital Casa de Bolsa, S.A. de C.V.   K, M
Grupo Financiero Barclays Mexico, S.A. de C.V.   K, M
Servicios Barclays, S.A. de C.V.    
Monaco  
Barclays Wealth Asset Management (Monaco) S.A.M.    
Netherlands  
Barclays SLCSM Funding B.V.  
Chewdef BidCo BV. (In Liquidation)    
Nigeria  
Barclays Group Representative Office (NIG) Limited    
Philippines  
Meridian (SPV-AMC) Corporation    
Portugal  
Barclays Wealth Managers Portugal – SGFIM, S.A.    
Russian Federation  
Limited Liability Company Barclays Capital    
Saudi Arabia  
Barclays Saudi Arabia (In Liquidation)    
Singapore  
Barclays Bank (Singapore Nominees) Pte Ltd.  
Barclays Bank (South East Asia) Nominees Private Limited  
Barclays Capital Futures (Singapore) Private Limited  
Wholly owned subsidiaries   Note
Barclays Capital Holdings (Singapore) Private Limited  
Barclays Merchant Bank (Singapore) Ltd.  
Barclays Wealth Trustees (Singapore) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)    
Spain  
Barclays Mediador, Operador de Banca Seguros Vinculado, S.A.  
Barclays Tenedora De Immuebles SL.  
Barclays Vida Y Pensiones, Compañía De Seguros, S.A.  
Iberalbion A.I.E.  
The Logic Group Enterprises S.L    
Switzerland  
Barclays Bank (Suisse) S.A.  
Barclaytrust (Suisse) SA (Sold 14/01/2016)  
BPB Holdings SA    
Taiwan  
Barclays Capital Securities Taiwan Limited    
Thailand  
Barclays Capital Securities (Thailand) Ltd.    
Uganda  
Barclays Bank of Uganda Limited    
Ukraine  
Barclays Capital Services (Ukraine) LLC (In Liquidation)   C
United States  
475 Fifth 09 LLC   C
Analog Analytics Inc  
Analytical FX Trading Strategy Cell I   F, I
Analytical FX Trading Strategy Cell II  
Analytical FX Trading Strategy Series LLC   C
Analytical Trade Holdings LLC  
Analytical Trade Investments LLC   H
Archstone Equity Holdings Inc  
Barclays Bank Delaware   F, I
Barclays BWA, Inc.  
Barclays Capital Commodities Corporation  
Barclays Capital Derivatives Funding LLC   C
Barclays Capital Energy Inc.  
Barclays Capital Equities Trading GP   B
Barclays Capital Holdings Inc.   G, I
Barclays Capital Inc.  
Barclays Capital Real Estate Finance Inc.  
Barclays Capital Real Estate Holdings Inc.  
Barclays Capital Real Estate Inc.  
Barclays Capital Services Inc.  
Barclays Commercial Mortgage Securities LLC   C
Barclays Delaware Holdings LLC   F, I
Barclays Dryrock Funding LLC   C
Barclays Electronic Commerce Holdings Inc.  
Barclays Financial LLC   C
Barclays Group US Inc.  
Barclays Insurance U.S. Inc.  
Barclays Investment Holdings Inc.  
Barclays Oversight Management Inc.  
Barclays Receivables LLC   C
Barclays Services Corporation  
Barclays Services LLC   C
Barclays US CCP Funding LLC   C
Barclays US Funding LLC   C
Barclays US GPF Inc.  
Barclays US LP   B
Barclays US Management, LLC   C
BCAP LLC   C
BNRI Acquisition No.4 LLC   C
BNRI Acquisition No.5, LP   B
BTXS Inc.  
Centergate at Gratigny LLC   C
CPIA Acquisition No.1 LLC   C
CPIA Acquisition No.2 LLC   C
CPIA Acquisition No.3 LLC   C
CPIA Equity No. 1 Inc.  
CPIA Finance No.1, LLC   C
CPIA FX Investments Inc.  
CPIA Holdings No.1, LLC   C
Crescent Real Estate Member LLC   C
Curve Investments GP   B
 

 

344  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


        

        

        

 

 

46 Related undertakings continued

Wholly owned subsidiaries   Note
Equifirst Corporation (In Liquidation)  
Gracechurch Services Corporation  
HYMF, Inc.  
La Torretta Beverages LLC   C
La Torretta Hospitality LLC   C
La Torretta Operations LLC   C
Lagalla Investments LLC   C
Long Island Holding A LLC   C
Long Island Holding B LLC   C
LTDL Holdings LLC   C
Marbury Holdings LLC  
Persica Holdings LLC   C
Persica Lease LLC   C
Persica LL LLC   C
Persica Property LLC   C
Preferred Liquidity, LLC  
Procella Investments LLC   C
Procella Investments No.1 LLC   C
Procella Investments No.2 LLC   C
Procella Investments No.3 LLC   C
Procella Swaps LLC   C
Protium Finance I LLC   C
Protium Master Grantor Trust   D
Protium Master Mortgage LP   B
Protium REO I LP   B
RB Special Assets, L.L.C.   C
Relative Value Holdings, LLC  
Rhode Investments LLC   C
Securitized Asset Backed Receivables LLC   C
Sutton Funding LLC   C
TPLL LLC   C
TPProperty LLC   C
TPWorks LLC   C
US Secured Investments LLC   C
Vail 09 LLC   C
Vail Development 09 LLC   C
Vail Hotel 09 LLC   C
Vail Hotel A LLC   C
Vail Hotel B LLC   C
Vail Residential 09 LLC   C
Vail SC LLC   C
Vanoise Inc   H, I
Verain Investments LLC   I, J, K
Wilmington Riverfront Receivables LLC   J, K
Zambia  
Barclays Bank Zambia Plc  
Kafue House Limited    
Zimbabwe  
Afcarme Zimbabwe Holdings (Pvt) Limited  
Branchcall Computers (Pvt) Limited    

Other related undertakings

Unless otherwise stated, the undertakings below are consolidated and the share capital disclosed comprises ordinary or common shares which are held by subsidiaries of the Group. The ownership percentage is provided for each undertaking. Where multiple share classes are held the proportion of the nominal value of each class of shares held is the same as the ownership unless otherwise stated.

 

Other related undertakings   Percentage        Note        
United Kingdom     
Barclays Africa Limited   62.32%   
Barclays Alma Mater Management Limited     
Partnership   30.00%    B, Z
Barclays Covered Bond Funding LLP   50.00%    B
Barclays Infrastructure Investors Management LP   38.00%    B, Z
BEIF Management Limited Partnership   30.00%    B, Z
BMC (UK) Limited   40.13%    Z
Business Growth Fund PLC   23.96%    Z
Camperdown UK Limited   50.00%    J, Z
Claas Finance Limited   51.00%    K
Equistone Founder Partner II L.P.   20.00%    B, Z
Equistone Founder Partner III L.P.   35.00%    B, Z
Other related undertakings   Percentage        Note
Equity Estates Basingstoke Limited   31.16%    J, Z
GN Tower Limited   50.00%    Z
Gresham Leasing March (3) Limited   30.00%    Z
GW City Ventures Limited   50.00%    K, Z
Igloo Regeneration (General Partner) Limited   25.00%    L, Z
Imalivest LP   66.28%    B, Z
Intelligent Processing Solutions Limited   19.50%    Z
PetroGranada Limited   65.25%    Z
PSA Credit Company Limited (in liquidation)   50.00%    J, L
Vocalink Holdings Limited   15.00%    Z
Woolwich Countryside Limited   50.00%    O, Z
Australia     
Hydra Energy Holdings Pty Ltd   59.26%    Z
Botswana     
Barclays Bank of Botswana Limited   42.27%   
Barclays Insurance Services (Pty) Limited   42.27%   
Barclays Life Botswana Proprietary Limited   62.32%     
Canada     
Clearbrook Resources Inc   20.71%    Z
Cayman Islands     
Chrysaor Holdings Limited   37.98%    Z
Cupric Canyon Capital GP Limited   49.90%    Z
Cupric Canyon Capital LP   38.10%    B, Z
Southern Peaks Mining LP   54.67%    B, Z
SPM GP Limited   49.61%    Z
Third Energy Holdings Limited   74.76%    Z
France     
Financière DSBG SAS   31.51%    Z
Sogetrel   27.31%    Z
Germany     
Eschenbach Holding GmbH   23.25%    Z
Ghana     
Barclays Bank of Ghana Limited   62.32%     
Hong Kong     
CR SpaClub at Sea (HK) Limited   53.86%    Z
Indonesia     
PT Barclays Capital Securities Indonesia   99.00%     
Isle of Man     
Absa Manx Holdings Limited   62.32%   
Absa Manx Insurance Company Limited   62.32%     
Italy     
Eudea SpA   22.03%    Z
Jersey     
Barclays Index Finance Trust   32.69%    S
Kenya     
Barclays (Kenya) Nominees Limited   42.69%   
Barclays Bank Insurance Agency Limited   42.69%   
Barclays Bank of Kenya Limited   42.69%   
Barclays Deposit-Taking Microfinance Limited   42.69%   
Barclays Financial Services Limited   42.69%   
Barclays Life Assurance Kenya Limited   39.45%   
Barclays Pension Services Limited   38.81%   
First Assurance Company Limited   39.45%   
First Assurance Holdings Limited   62.31%     
Korea, Republic of     
Woori BC Pegasus Securitization Specialty Co., Limited   70.00%     
Luxembourg     
BNRI Limehouse No.1 Sarl   96.30%    R
Partnership Investments S.à r.l.   33.40%   
Preferred Funding S.à r.l.   33.33%    H
Preferred Investments S.à r.l.   33.33%    H, I
Malta     
RS2 Software PLC   18.25%    Z
Mauritius     
Barclays Bank Mauritius Limited   62.32%    G, H, J, K 
Monaco     
Société Civile Immobilière 31 Avenue de la Costa   75.00%     
Mozambique     
Barclays Bank Moçambique SA   61.58%   
Global Alliance Seguros, S.A.   62.32%     
Namibia     
Absa Namibia Proprietary Limited   62.32%   
EFS Namibia Proprietary Limited   62.32%   
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  345


Notes to the financial statements

    

    

 

 

46 Related undertakings continued

Other related undertakings   Percentage       Note      
Netherlands    
Tulip Oil Holding BV   30.43%   Z
Nigeria    
Absa Capital Representative Office Nigeria Limited   62.32%    
Norway    
EnterCard Norge AS   40.00%   Z
Origo Exploration Holding AS   23.08%   Z
Seychelles    
Barclays Bank (Seychelles) Limited   62.18%    
South Africa    
1900 Summerstrand Share Block Limited   62.32%  
Absa Alternative Asset Management Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Asset Management Proprietary Limited   62.26%  
Absa Bank Limited   62.32%   I, J
Absa Capital Securities Proprietary Limited   62.32%   F, I
Absa Consultants and Actuaries Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Development Company Holdings Proprietary Limited   62.32%   F, I
Absa Estate Agency Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Financial Services Africa Holdings Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Financial Services Limited   62.32%  
Absa Fleet Services Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Fund Managers Limited   62.32%  
Absa idirect Limited   62.32%  
Absa Insurance and Financial Advisers Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Insurance Company Limited   62.32%  
Absa Insurance Risk Management Services Limited   62.32%  
Absa Investment Management Services Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Life Limited   62.32%   F, I
Absa Mortgage Fund Managers Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Nominees Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Ontwikkelingsmaatskappy Eiendoms Beperk   62.32%  
Absa Outsource Competency Centre Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Portfolio Managers Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Property Development Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Secretarial Services Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Stockbrokers Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Technology Finance Solutions Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Trading and Investment Solutions Holdings   62.32%  
Proprietary Limited    
Absa Trading and Investment Solutions Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Trust (Natal) Limited   62.32%  
Absa Trust Limited   62.32%   I, J
Absa Vehicle Management Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Absa Vehicle Management Solutions Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
ABSAN Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Account on Us Proprietary Limited   31.16%  
ACMB Specialised Finance Nominees Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
(In Liquidation)    
ACS Nominees Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
African Spirit Trading 309 Proprietary Limited   31.16%   Z
AIMS Nominees (RF) Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Alberton Industrial Properties Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Allied Development Company Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Allied Grinaker Properties Proprietary Limited   31.78%  
Allpay Consolidated Investment Holdings Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Allpay Eastern Cape Proprietary Limited – (In Liquidation)   41.13%  
Allpay Free State Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)   37.39%  
Allpay Gauteng Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)   37.39%  
Allpay Limpopo Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)   62.32%  
Allpay Mpumalanga Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Allpay Northern Cape Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)   62.32%  
Allpay Northwest Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)   62.32%  
Allpay Payment Solutions Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)   62.32%  
Allpay Western Cape Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)   41.13%  
Bankorptrust Limited   62.32%  
Barclays Africa Group Limited   62.32%  
Barclays Africa Regional Office Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Barrie Island Property Investments Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Blue Age Properties 60 Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Campus on Rigel Proprietary Limited   20.77%   Z
Cedar Lakes Country Estates Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Combined Mortgage Nominees Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Compro Holdings Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Culemborg Investment Properties Proprietary Limited   35.67%   J, K
Other related undertakings   Percentage       Note      
Diluculo Investments Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Diluculo Properties Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Diluculo Property Trading Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Draaikloof Properties Proprietary Limited   49.86%  
FFS Finance South Africa (RF) Proprietary Limited   31.16%  
Fradey Nominees (RF) Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Goldreef Village Share Block Limited   61.88%  
Guaret Investments No 1 Proprietary Limited   62.32%   H, I
Integrated Processing Solutions Proprietary Limited   31.16%  
iSentials Proprietary Limited   31.16%  
Kangrove Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)   62.32%  
Kempwest Proprietary Limited   31.16%  
Lekkerleef Eiendoms Beperk   62.32%  
Lodel Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)   62.32%  
MAN Financial Services (SA) (RF) Proprietary Limited   31.16%  
Marmanet Retirement Village Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
MB Acquired Operations Limited (In Liquidation)   62.32%  
Meeg Asset Finance Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)   62.32%  
Merfin Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Nation-Wide Recovery Services Proprietary Limited   31.16%  
NewFunds (RF) Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Newgold Issuer (RF) Limited   62.32%  
Newgold Managers Proprietary Limited   30.54%  
Ngwenya River Estate Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Nkwe Rosslyn Properties Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Northern Lights Trading 197 Proprietary Limited   31.16%   Z
Olieven Properties Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Ottawa Development Trust Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Pacific Heights Investments 196 Proprietary Limited   31.16%   Z
Palmietfontein Investments Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Pienaarsrivier Properties Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
RainFin (RF) Proprietary Limited   30.54%   Z
Roodekop Townships Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Somerset West Autopark Proprietary Limited   20.77%   Z
T E AND M J Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)   62.32%  
Tembisa Mall Proprietary Limited   31.16%   Z
The Ballito Junction Development Proprietary Limited   62.32%   F, I
(in Liquidation)    
Thebes Landgoed Eiendoms Beperk   62.32%  
UBS Trust Limited   62.32%  
United Development Corporation Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
United Towers Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Up-Front Investments 132 Proprietary Limited   31.16%  
Volkskas Eiendomsdienste Eiendoms Beperk   62.32%   I, J
Volkskastrust Beperk   62.32%   I, J
Woodbook Finance Proprietary Limited   62.32%  
Woolworths Financial Services Proprietary Limited   31.16%    
Sweden    
EnterCard Holding AB   40.00%   K, Z
EnterCard Sverige AB   40.00%   Z
Tanzania, United Republic of    
Barclays Bank Tanzania Limited   62.32%  
First Assurance Company Limited (Tanzania)   34.43%  
National Bank of Commerce Limited   41.06%    
Turkey    
CRKK RESORT OTEL ISLETMECILGI LIMITED SIRKETI   54.40%   Z
United States    
Blue River Land Company, LLC   39.55%   C, Z
Canyon Ranch Enterprises, LLC   54.40%   C, Z
Central Platte Valley Management, LLC   51.78%   C, Z
Continental Intermodal Group GP LLC   50.00%   C, Z
Continental Intermodal Group LP   37.29%   B, Z
CR Bodrum Management, LLC   54.40%   C, Z
CR Employment, Inc.   54.40%   Z
CR Las Vegas, LLC   54.40%   C, Z
CR Lenox Residences, LLC   54.40%   C, Z
CR License, LLC   54.40%   C, Z
CR Management, LLC   54.40%   C, Z
CR Miami Employment, LLC   54.40%   C, Z
CR Miami, LLC   54.40%   C, Z
CR Operating, LLC   54.40%   C, Z
CR Orlando, LLC   54.40%   C, Z
CR Products, LLC   54.40%   C, Z
CR Resorts, LLC   54.40%   C, Z
 

 

346  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


            

        

        

 

 

46 Related undertakings continued

Other related undertakings   Percentage       Note      
CR SpaClub at Sea, LLC   54.40%   C, Z
CR SPE1, LLC   54.40%   C, Z
CRE Diversified Holdings LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Crescent CR Holdings LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Crescent Crown Greenway Plaza SPV LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Crescent Crown Land Holding SPV LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Crescent Fresh Series B Hold Co.   80.00%   Z
Crescent McKinney Olive Holdings GP LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Crescent Plaza Hotel Owner GP, LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Crescent Plaza Hotel Owner, L.P.   80.00%   B, Z
Crescent Plaza Residential LP, LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Crescent Plaza Residential, L.P.   80.00%   B, Z
Crescent Plaza Residential, LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Crescent Plaza Restaurant GP, LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Crescent Property Services LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Crescent Real Estate Equities Limited Partnership   80.00%   B, Z
Crescent Real Estate Equities, LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Crescent Real Estate Holdings LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Crescent Resort Development LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Crescent Tower Residences GP, LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Crescent Tower Residences, L.P.   80.00%   B, Z
Crescent TRS Holdings LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Crescent-Fearing, L.P.   40.00%   B, Z
CREW Tahoe Holdings LLC   80.00%   C, Z
CREW Tahoe LLC   60.80%   C, Z
Cupric Canyon Capital LLC   26.04%   C, Z
DBL Texas Holdings LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Desert Mountain Development LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Desert Mountain Properties Limited Partnership   74.40%   B, Z
DG Solar Lessee II, LLC   50.00%   C, Z
DG Solar Lessee, LLC   50.00%   C, Z
East West Resort Development IV, L.P., L.L.L.P.   71.11%   B, Z
East West Resort Development V, L.P., L.L.L.P.   74.75%   B, Z
East West Resort Development VI, L.P., L.L.L.P.   35.86%   B, Z
East West Resort Development VII LLC   80.00%   C, Z
East West Resort Development VIII, L.P., L.L.L.P.   71.11%   B, Z
East West Resort Development XIV, L.P., L.L.L.P.   33.52%   B, Z
EW Deer Valley, LLC   29.28%   C, Z
EWRD Perry Holding, L.P., L.L.L.P.   67.61%   B, Z
EWRD Perry-Riverbend, LLC   54.31%   C, Z
EWRD Summit Holding, L.P., L.L.L.P.   79.57%   B, Z
EWRD Summit, LLC   79.10%   C, Z
Gray’s Station, LLC   56.96%   C, Z
Home Run Tahoe, LLC   60.82%   C, Z
Mira Vista Development LLC   78.40%   C, Z
Mira Vista Golf Club, L.C.   76.83%   Z
Moon Acquisition Holdings LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Moon Acquisition LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Mountainside Partners LLC   80.00%   C, Z
MV Penthouses, LLC   51.20%   C, Z
MVWP Development LLC   30.40%   C, Z
MVWP Investors LLC   60.80%   C, Z
Northstar Mountain Properties, LLC   60.82%   C, Z
Northstar Trailside Townhomes, LLC   60.82%   C, Z
Northstar Village Townhomes, LLC   56.93%   C, Z
Old Greenwood Realty, Inc.   60.80%   Z
Old Greenwood, LLC   60.80%   C, Z
Overlook at Sugarloaf Inc   62.32%  
Parkside Townhomes, LLC   47.63%   C, Z
Sonoma Golf Club, LLC   64.00%   C, Z
Sonoma Golf, LLC   64.00%   C, Z
Sonoma National, LLC   80.00%   C, Z
Spa Project Advisors, LLC   54.40%   C, Z
St. Charles Place, LLC   47.63%   C, Z
Stellar Residences, LLC   60.82%   C, Z
Stellar Townhomes, LLC   60.82%   C, Z
Tahoe Club Company, LLC   60.80%   C, Z
Tahoe Club Employee Company   60.80%   Z
Tahoe Mountain Resorts, LLC   60.82%   C, Z
The Glades Tahoe, LLC   60.82%   C, Z
The Park at One Riverfront, LLC   47.63%   C, Z
Truckee Land, LLC   74.75%   C, Z
Tucson/Lenox Special Manager, Inc.   54.40%   Z
Tucson/Lenox, LLC   54.40%   C, Z

 

Other related undertakings   Percentage       Note      
Union Center LLC   51.78%   C, Z
Vendue/Prioleau Associates LLC   49.60%   C, Z
Village Walk, LLC   46.08%   C, Z
VS BC Solar Lessee I LLC   50.00%   C, Z
Water House on Main Street LLC   35.26%   C, Z

Zambia

 

   
Barclays Life Zambia Limited   62.32%    

Zimbabwe

 

   
Barclays Bank of Zimbabwe Limited   67.68%  
Barclays Merchant Bank of Zimbabwe Limited (In Liquidation)   67.68%  
Barclays Zimbabwe Nominees (Pvt) Limited   67.68%  
BRAINS Computer Processing (Pvt) Limited (In Liquidation)   67.68%   F, I
Fincor Finance Corporation Limited   67.68%    

Subsidiaries by virtue of control

The related undertakings below are subsidiaries in accordance with s.1162 Companies Act 2006 as Barclays can exercise dominant influence or control over them. The entities are all owned by the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund.

 

Subsidiaries by virtue of control   Percentage       Note      

United Kingdom

 

   
Oak Pension Asset Management Limited   0.00%   Z
Water Street Investments Limited   0.00%   Z

Cayman Islands

 

   
Hornbeam Limited   0.00%   Z

Joint Ventures

The related undertakings below are Joint Ventures in accordance with s. 18, Schedule 4, The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 and are proportionally consolidated.

 

Joint Ventures   Percentage       Joint management factors

United Kingdom

 

   

Vaultex UK Limited

21 Garlick Hill, London EC4V 2AU

  50.00%   The Joint Venture Board comprises two Barclays representative directors, two JV partner directors and three non-JV partner directors. The Board are responsible for setting the company strategy and budgets.

 

Notes

A Directly held by Barclays PLC
B Partnership Interest
C Membership Interest
D Trust Interest
E Guarantor
F Preference Shares
G A Preference Shares
H B Preference Shares
I Ordinary/Common Shares in addition to other shares
J A Ordinary Shares
K B Ordinary Shares
L C Ordinary Shares
M F Ordinary Shares
N O Ordinary Shares
O W Ordinary Shares
P Redeemable Ordinary Shares
Q Core Shares and Insurance (Classified) Shares
R B, C, D, E (94.36%), F (94.36%), G (94.36%), H (94.36%), I (94.36%), J (95.23%) and K Class Shares
S A and B Unit Shares
T Class A Residual Shares, Class B Residual Shares
U A Voting Shares and B Non-Voting Shares
V Class A Ordinary Shares, Class A Preference Shares (48.50%), Class B Ordinary Shares, Class C Ordinary Shares, Class C Preference Shares (92.53%), Class D Ordinary Shares, Class D Preference Shares, Class E Ordinary Shares, Class E Preference Shares, Class F Ordinary Shares, Class F Preference Shares, Class H 2012 Ordinary Shares, Class H 2012 Preference Shares, Class H Ordinary Shares, Class H Preference Shares (79.84%), Class I Preference Shares (50.00%), Class J Ordinary Shares, Class J Preference Shares
W Class A1, A2, A3, A4, A6, A8, A9, A10, A11, A12, A13, A14, A15, A16 and Class B
X PEF Carry Shares
Y EUR Tracker Shares, GBP Tracker Shares and USD Tracker Shares
Z Not Consolidated (see Note 37 for scope of consolidation)
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  347


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

348  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Shareholder information

Contents

 

 

 

  Resources for shareholders including contact details for shareholder enquiries

 

 

 

 

               

Page

 

 
Shareholder information                 
    §   Your Barclays shareholding      350   
  §   Useful contact details      351   

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  349


Your Barclays shareholding

Shareholder information

    

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

Key dates

 

5 April 2016

Final dividend payment date

 

27 April 2016

Q1 Results Announcement

 

28 April 2016

Annual General Meeting

 

19 September 2016a

Interim dividend payment date

 

 

Annual General Meeting (AGM)

This year’s AGM will be held at the Royal Festival Hall,

Southbank Centre, Belvedere Road, London SE1 8XX

on Thursday, 28 April 2016 at 11.00am.

The Chairman and Chief Executive will update shareholders on our performance in 2015 and our goals for 2016. Shareholders will also have the opportunity to ask the Board questions at the meeting.

 

LOGO

 

LOGO   

You can find out more at

home.barclays/agm

 

 

Returning funds to shareholders

 

Over 60,000 shareholders did not cash their Rights Issue cheques which were sent out in September 2013.

 

During 2015, we conducted a tracing process to reunite these shareholders with their monies together with any unclaimed dividends. At the end of 2015, we had returned over £2.2m to our shareholders.

 

 

Note

a Please note that this dates are provisional and subject to change.

Dividends

We have declared a final dividend of 3.5 pence per share, making 6.5 pence in total for 2015. However, we intend to pay a dividend of 3.0 pence for both 2016 and 2017. This will help us accelerate the imperative rundown of Non-Core. We recognise the importance of paying a meaningful dividend as part of total shareholder returns and are committed to doing so in the future. We will pay dividends semi-annually from 2016 rather than quarterly.

How do Barclays shareholders receive their dividends?

As at 31 December 2015, Barclays shareholders received their dividends in the following ways:

 

LOGO  

    1 Direct to your bank account

    2 Cheque

    3 Scrip dividend programme (new shares)

   52%

27%

21%

    
    

You can choose how you would like to receive your Barclays dividends – save time and receive your dividends faster

You can have your dividends paid directly into your bank or building society account. It is easy to set up and your money will be in your bank account on the dividend payment date. If you hold 2,500 shares or less, you can provide your bank or building society details quickly and easily over the telephone using the Equiniti contact details overleaf. If you hold more than 2,500 shares, please write to Equiniti.

Scrip Dividend Programme (the Programme)

Shareholders can choose to have their dividends reinvested in new ordinary Barclays shares through the Programme. More information, including the Programme Terms and Conditions and application form, are available on our website.

 

LOGO   

To find out more, contact Equiniti or visit

home.barclays/dividends

 

 

Donation to charity

 

We launched a special share dealing service in October 2015 for shareholders holding 4,000 shares or less. Shareholders could donate their sale proceeds to ShareGift if they wished. Our shareholders donated nearly £130,000.

 

Action for shareholders

Keep your personal details up to date

Please remember to tell Equiniti if:

 

§   you move house

 

§   you need to update your bank or building society details.

If you are a Shareview member, you can update your bank or building society account or address details online. If you hold 2,500 shares or less, you can update details quickly and easily over the telephone using the Equiniti contact details overleaf. If you hold more than 2,500 shares you will need to write to Equiniti. You must provide a copy of your share certificate, Sharestore statement or most recent dividend tax voucher. If these are not available, you will need to provide a copy of a utility bill or bank statement dated in the last three months.

 

 

350  |  Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Shareholder information continued

    

    

 

 

Managing your shares online

Shareview

An increasing number of Barclays shareholders go online to manage their shareholding and find out about Barclays’ performance.

By joining Shareview, you:

 

§   will receive the latest updates from Barclays direct by email

 

§   can update your address and bank details online

 

§   can vote in advance of general meetings.

 

LOGO

 

 

To join Shareview, please follow these three easy steps:

   
Step 1        Go to shareview.co.uk
   
Step 2   

    Register for electronic communications

    by following the instructions on screen

   

Step 3

 

  

    You will be sent an activation code

    in the post the next working day

 

Shareholder security

Shareholders should be wary of any cold calls with an offer to buy or sell shares. These fraudsters use persuasive and high-pressure techniques to lure shareholders into high-risk investments or scams. You should treat any unsolicited calls with caution.

Please keep in mind that firms authorised by the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) are unlikely to contact you out of the blue. You should consider getting independent financial or professional advice from someone unconnected to the respective firm before you hand over any money.

 

LOGO

   Report a scam. If you suspect you have been approached by fraudsters please tell the FCA using the share fraud reporting form at fca.org.uk/scams. You can also call the FCA Helpline on 0800 111 6768 or through Action Fraud on 0300 123 2040.

Equiniti

 

LOGO

   The Barclays share register is maintained by Equiniti. If you have any questions about your Barclays shares, please contact Equiniti: shareview.co.uk
Equiniti

LOGO

  

0371 384 2055a (in the UK)

+44 121 415 7004 (from overseas)

0371 384 2255a (for the hearing impaired in the UK)

+44 121 415 7028 (for the hearing impaired from overseas)

LOGO

  

Aspect House

Spencer Road

Lancing

West Sussex

BN99 6DA

Shareholder Relations

 

LOGO

  

To give us your feedback or if you have any questions,

please contact: privateshareholderrelations@barclays.com

Shareholder Relations

 

LOGO

  

Barclays PLC

1 Churchill Place

London

E14 5HP

American Depositary Receipts (ADRs)

 

LOGO

   If you have any questions about ADRs, please contact J.P. Morgan: jpmorgan.adr@wellsfargo.com or visit adr.com

J.P. Morgan Shareholder Services

 

LOGO

  

+1 800 990 1135 (toll free in US and Canada)

+1 651 453 2128 (outside the US and Canada)

LOGO

  

JPMorgan Chase Bank N.A.

PO Box 64504

St Paul

MN 55165-0854

USA

Share price

 

LOGO

 

  

Information on the Barclays share price and other share price tools are available at: home.barclays/investorrelations

 

 

Alternative formats

   LOGO  

   Shareholder documents can be provided in large print, audio CD or braille free of charge by calling Equiniti.

 0371 384 2055a (in the UK)

 +44 121 415 7004 (from overseas)

  Audio versions of the Strategic Report will   also be available at the AGM.

 

 

 

Note

 

a Lines open 8.30am to 5.30pm Monday to Friday, excluding public holidays.
 

    

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Annual Report 2015  |  351


LOGO

Front cover:

Dopay

Founded in 2014, dopay takes the cash out of the payroll process, while empowering unbanked employees at the same time. The company provides a revolutionary cloud-based payroll service that helps employers to calculate salaries and pay all employees electronically. Unbanked employees receive their salary in a dopay account, which comes with a debit card. Employees can also manage their ‘day-to-day’ finances with the dopay app, which gives them instant and real-time access to their balance. Dopay participated in the London 2014 Barclays Accelerator Programme.

Featured in the photo, left to right:

Brad van Leeuwen, Dopay Chief Partnerships Officer

Deddy Gan, Head of the Barclays Accelerator

Frans van Eersel, Dopay CEO & Founder

 

 

 

 

LOGO

This Report is printed on Cocoon Preprint made from 100% FSC® Recycled certified fibre sourced from de-inked post-consumer waste. The printer and the manufacturing mill are both credited with ISO14001 Environmental Management Systems Standard and both are FSC® certified. By printing this publication on Cocoon Preprint, the environmental impact was reduced by: 4,952 kg of landfill, 732 kg CO2 and greenhouse gases, 102,989 litres of water, 9,490 kWh of energy and 8,046 kg of wood.

Source: Carbon footprint data evaluated by Labelia Conseil in accordance with the Bilan Carbone methodology. Calculations are based on a comparison between the recycled paper used versus a virgin fibre paper according to the latest European BREF data (virgin fibre paper) available.

 

Registered office: 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP    © Barclays Bank PLC 2016
Registered in England. Registered No: 48839    XXXXXXX
Designed by FleishmanHillard Fishburn    www.fhflondon.co.uk
 


 

 

LOGO

  Return to stability

 

 

         

Barclays PLC

Strategic Report 2015


How do I use this document?

The diagram below maps the structure

and flow of the Strategic Report.

 

 

    

 

 

LOGO

 

Notes

The term Barclays or Group refers to Barclays PLC together with its subsidiaries. Unless otherwise stated, the income statement analysis compares the year ended 31 December 2015 to the corresponding 12 months of 2014 and balance sheet analysis as at 31 December 2015 with comparatives relating to 31 December 2014. The abbreviations ‘£m’ and ‘£bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of Pounds Sterling respectively; the abbreviations ‘$m’ and ‘$bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of US Dollars respectively; and the abbreviations ‘m’ and ‘bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of Euros respectively.

Comparatives pre Q214 have been restated to reflect the implementation of the Group structure changes and the reallocation of elements of the Head Office results under the revised business structure. These restatements were detailed in our announcement on 10 July 2014, accessible at home.barclays/barclays-investor-relations/ results-and-reports

References throughout this document to ‘provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange’ mean ‘provisions held for certain aspects of ongoing investigations involving certain authorities and litigation including Foreign Exchange.’

Adjusted profit before tax, adjusted attributable profit and adjusted performance metrics have been presented to provide a more consistent basis for comparing business performance between periods. Adjusting items are considered to be significant but not representative of the underlying business performance. Items excluded from the adjusted measures are: the impact of own credit; provisions for UK customer redress; gain on US Lehman acquisition assets; provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange; losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses; impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed; revision of Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) valuation methodology; and gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability. As management reviews adjusting items at a Group level, results by business, Core and Non-Core are presented excluding these items. The reconciliation of adjusted to statutory performance is done at a Group level only.

Relevant terms that are used in this document but are not defined under applicable regulatory guidance or International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) are explained in the Results glossary that can be accessed at home.barclays/results

 

 

The information in this announcement, which was approved by the Board of Directors on 29 February 2016, does not comprise statutory accounts within the meaning of Section 434 of the Companies Act 2006. Statutory accounts for the year ended 31 December 2015, which included certain information required for the Joint Annual Report on Form 20-F of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC to the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) and which contained an unqualified audit report under Section 495 of the Companies Act 2006 (which did not make any statements under Section 498 of the Companies Act 2006) have been delivered to the Registrar of Companies in accordance with Section 441 of the Companies Act 2006.

These results will be furnished as a Form 20-F to the SEC as soon as practicable following their publication. Once furnished with the SEC, copies of the Form 20-F will also be available from the Barclays Investor Relations website at home.barclays/investorrelations and from the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov

Barclays is a frequent issuer in the debt capital markets and regularly meets with investors via formal road-shows and other ad hoc meetings. Consistent with its usual practice, Barclays expects that from time to time over the coming quarter it will meet with investors globally to discuss these results and other matters relating to the Group.

Forward-looking statements

This document contains certain forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 21E of the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and Section 27A of the US Securities Act of 1933, as amended, with respect to the Group. Barclays cautions readers that no forward-looking statement is a guarantee of future performance and that actual results or other financial condition or performance measures could differ materially from those contained in the forward-looking statements. These forward-looking statements can be identified by the fact that they do not relate only to historical or current facts. Forward-looking statements sometimes use words such as ‘may’, ‘will’, ‘seek’, ‘continue’, ‘aim’, ‘anticipate’, ‘target’, ‘projected’, ‘expect’, ‘estimate’, ‘intend’, ‘plan’, ‘goal’, ‘believe’, ‘achieve’ or other words of similar meaning. Examples of forward-looking statements include, among others, statements regarding the Group’s future financial position, income growth, assets, impairment charges and provisions, business strategy, capital, leverage and other regulatory ratios, payment of dividends (including dividend pay-out ratios), projected levels of growth in the banking and financial markets, projected costs or savings,

 

 

original and revised commitments and targets in connection with the strategic cost programme and the Group Strategy Update, rundown of assets and businesses within Barclays Non-Core, estimates of capital expenditures and plans and objectives for future operations, projected employee numbers and other statements that are not historical fact. By their nature, forward-looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to future events and circumstances. These may be affected by changes in legislation, the development of standards and interpretations under IFRS, evolving practices with regard to the interpretation and application of accounting and regulatory standards, the outcome of current and future legal proceedings and regulatory investigations, future levels of conduct provisions, the policies and actions of governmental and regulatory authorities, geopolitical risks and the impact of competition. In addition, factors including (but not limited to) the following may have an effect: capital, leverage and other regulatory rules (including with regard to the future structure of the Group) applicable to past, current and future periods; United Kingdom (UK), United States (US), Africa, Eurozone and global macroeconomic and business conditions; the effects of continued volatility in credit markets; market related risks such as changes in interest rates and foreign exchange rates; effects of changes in valuation of credit market exposures; changes in valuation of issued securities; volatility in capital markets; changes in credit ratings of any entities within the Group or any securities issued by such entities; the potential for one or more countries exiting the Eurozone; the implementation of the strategic cost programme; and the success of future acquisitions, disposals and other strategic transactions. A number of these influences and factors are beyond the Group’s control. As a result, the Group’s actual future results, dividend payments, and capital and leverage ratios may differ materially from the plans, goals, and expectations set forth in the Group’s forward-looking statements. Additional risks and factors which may impact the Group’s future financial condition and performance are identified in our filings with the SEC (including, without limitation, our Annual Report on Form 20-F for the fiscal year ended 31 December 2015), which are available on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov

Subject to our obligations under the applicable laws and regulations of the UK and the US in relation to disclosure and ongoing information, we undertake no obligation to update publicly or revise any forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.

 

 

Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015      home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

    

 

LOGO

 

 

 

The Strategic Report was approved by the Board of Directors on 29 February 2016 and signed on its behalf by the Chairman.

Status of the Strategic Report 2015

The Strategic Report 2015 is a standalone report that summarises the 2015 Annual Report and Accounts.

For further information and a fuller understanding of the results and the state of affairs of the Group, please refer to the full 2015 Annual Report and Accounts at home.barclays/annualreport

Details on how to obtain a copy of the full 2015 Annual Report and Accounts can be found in the Shareholder enquiries section.

Report of the Auditor

The Auditor’s report on the full accounts for the year ended 31 December 2015 was unqualified, and their statement under section 496 (whether the Strategic Report and the Directors’ report are consistent with the accounts) of the Companies Act 2006 was unqualified.

Where can I find out more?

You can learn about Barclays’ strategy, our businesses and performance, approach to governance and risk online, where latest and archived annual and strategic reports are available to view or download.

 

 

LOGO

 

 

Annual Report

home.barclays/annualreport

  
 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  01


Chairman’s letter

Addressing the issues facing Barclays today…

    

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

“Banking is in the eye of a perfect storm. It was in full consciousness of this, that I undertook the role as your Chairman at the end of April, with the strong conviction that we could not only stabilise the situation relatively quickly, but also return the Group to prosperity during my tenure.”

In such an environment it is so easy to become consumed by challenges, market volatility and the short-termism of the financial markets, but this tends to obscure the underlying quality of the Barclays brand and franchise, the genuine and substantive progress that the Group has made in recent years and the potential for the organisation arising from the decisions and actions we are now taking for the future.

Today the Group is smaller, safer, more focused, less leveraged, better capitalised and highly liquid. Comparing 2015 with 2008, we find:

 

§   £2.1trn in assets historically against £1.1trn and declining

 

§   shareholders’ equity was £36.6bn, and is now £54.5bn

 

§   balance sheet leverage (total assets to ordinary shareholders’ funds) was 56 times and is now 20 times and comparable to more highly- rated peers

 

§   shareholders’ equity as a percentage of risk weighted assets (RWAs) was 8.5% and is now 15.2%.

While we will continue this journey towards greater financial strength, the main issue for the Group is no longer capital as some remark, but earnings and returns. Put simply, for the past few years and including last year, we have produced either negligible retained profits or losses before dividends. Going forward, we need to reverse this and generate superior returns out of our franchise. This said, we also needed to take action to preserve and enhance our capital in unpredictable times. To this end, while we declared the full year 2015 dividend in line with guidance, we also decided it would be prudent to scale back dividends in 2016 and 2017, until such time as we can cover them from earnings.

Barclays has a number of industry leading businesses that produce excellent returns, but this is not universal across the portfolio. Personal and Corporate Banking and Barclaycard together produce profits after tax of £3.3bn and a combined return on equity of 13.4%. The other segments however fared less well and produced returns below the Group’s hurdle rate. Barclays Africa profits, although strong in local currency, were significantly impacted by the decline in the Rand and by the UK bank levy, bringing sterling returns down to an after-tax profit of £0.3bn and a return on equity of 8.7%. Also, while doubling over the prior year, the Investment Bank’s profit of £0.8bn generated an improved, but still substandard, return on equity of 5.6%, up from 2.7%.

Our core businesses overall produced a profit before tax of £6.9bn and a return on equity of 9%. While respectable, this of course is below our required return and needs to be improved. On the other hand, this profit was fully eroded by the £1.5bn drag of the non-core portfolio, £4.0bn in litigation and conduct charges relating to historical matters (in addition to the £0.4bn included in the core and non-core business results), and £1.5bn in corporate income taxes contributing to an overall loss for our ordinary shareholders of £0.4bn. Since conduct and related charges are no longer tax deductible, Barclays tax rate for last year was effectively 70%. If the £0.5bn cost of the UK bank levy is added to corporate income taxes, the effective ‘tax’ rate rises to 76%. The extent of the UK tax we bear was reflected in the results of PwC’s 2015 survey of the One Hundred Group, which represents most of the UK’s largest groups and concluded that Barclays paid the greatest amount of UK tax.

Of course with respect to our underlying profitability and the scale of the charges against this, things cannot stay the same. Tough situations like this demand effective action.

New Leadership

As an important starting point, the Board decided that new leadership was required. In July, we announced the departure of Antony Jenkins as Chief Executive and in October the appointment of Jes Staley, like me, a banking veteran. While I was able to exercise executive responsibility in an interim capacity immediately following Antony’s departure, and was able to set a number of initiatives in train, we were particularly fortunate that Jes was able to be active so quickly.

Jes has made good progress in building his new management team. In short order, he has appointed Ashok Vaswani as head of Barclays UK with responsibility for the establishment of the new Ring-Fenced Bank. Jes has also recruited Paul Compton as Chief Operating Officer and C.S. Venkatakrishnan as Chief Risk Officer.

Back to Core

The Board recently reflected on the strategy and situation of the Group and decided that our strategic core was our UK retail and small business franchise, our international Corporate and Investment Banking business largely centred around our trading hubs in London, New York and Asia, and our international credit card businesses. The remainder of the Group was therefore designated non-core, and to be exited, in addition to the continued rundown of the heritage non-core portfolio.

We therefore decided, subject to shareholder and regulatory approval, to take our ownership of Barclays Africa Group Limited to a level where we can achieve accounting and regulatory deconsolidation as soon as this can be executed. We have sold, or are in the process of exiting, the balance of retail banking operations outside the UK. We have also sold, or put up for sale, our international Private Banking businesses other than the UK region, Monaco and Geneva. In the Investment Bank, we withdrew from nine countries, cash equities trading other than in New York and London, all local currency trading outside our major hubs, and certain securitised products trading in the US. The capital released will be used to underpin our capital strength going forward.

 

 

02  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


        

        

        

 

 

LOGO

 

 

A New Corporate Structure

Following the statutory decision in the UK to ring-fence UK retail and small business banking by 2019, we decided to bring forward the establishment of the new bank and an application will be made for regulatory approval. When implemented, it will result (pending sell-down of our stake in Barclays Africa Group Limited) in three separate banks that we currently refer to as ‘Barclays UK’, ‘Barclays Corporate & International’ and ‘Barclays Africa’, each of which will have its own board, chief executive, management team and certain operational services. So as to prepare ourselves for this new structure, we are reorganising the divisional structure along these lines. This has the additional benefit of decentralising the very large corporate centre and results in a more streamlined, accountable and lower cost organisation. It also enhances the Group’s strategic flexibility and options going forward.

Underpinning Future Earnings Performance

The decisions to change leadership, to reduce our exposure to non-strategic businesses, as well as implementing our leaner corporate structure should have significant positive earnings and capital outcomes. These are necessary but not sufficient. We are investing in our segments with the highest growth and return prospects, including UK retail banking and Barclaycard. The Investment Bank, even in its more focused form, faces unpredictable market prospects. The Board has agreed a medium-term plan that is designed to produce increased returns in the future, that we will continue to monitor closely. Additionally, Barclays has a heavy overhead structure that needs streamlining. To this end, we have initiated a Group-wide overhead reduction programme, hiring restrictions, and a very limited number of senior salary increases. These should begin to deal with those matters within our control.

Historical Regulatory and Conduct Matters

We continue to be subject to very significant capital and conduct charges by regulators and governments that frankly are not sustainable. They arise understandably from the position that banks engendered in the Global Financial Crisis and from conduct issues that we have been working hard to address. While justified in principle, in practice they have achieved a level that is undermining our transformational efforts, and those of the regulators, to build capital and support economic growth. Banks are seen by many as unpopular and having deep pockets. But those pockets belong to our shareholders, who pay penalties out of current and future earnings that would otherwise build capital.

We are half the size we were a few years ago and the narrowing of our focus as a result of current decisions will make Barclays better capitalized and less globally systemic. But as we shrink the bank, we reduce our ability to pay outsized conduct charges. The charges are not proportionate to our smaller size and ability to pay relative to many of our peers. Our FX fines are an example. We paid one of the highest amounts in penalties of the banks who settled with the government, even though the offense was the same, even though we are by some measures one half the size of other banks that settled, and even though we received acknowledgement for our cultural changes and remediation after our LIBOR settlement. When conduct charges consume our profits, as they have for the past three years, we have no choice but to meet them by shrinking our franchise – selling or closing businesses – which reduces our capacity to support the real economy. A £50m fine or penalty is the equivalent of employing 1,000 fewer employees, closing 100 small regional branches, or foregoing the capacity to lend over £500m to small businesses or consumers. The societal costs of excessive penalties is very real.

EU Referendum

On balance we think it is in the interests of our customers and clients for the UK to remain in the EU. We have modest interests domestically on the continent, but provide significant services to European companies from London. More importantly, we are heavily reliant on a successful UK domestic and international economy and feel this is enhanced through the UK’s membership.

 

Thank You

Being on a bank board today is not for the faint-hearted. I would therefore like to thank our Board for their contribution to our company. Fortunately, the Barclays name is able to attract people with the finest credentials. I would particularly like to thank Sir David Walker, my predecessor, who retired at our AGM in April. He did an incredible job by providing wise oversight and a stable hand and we are grateful to him. I would once again like to thank Antony Jenkins, our former Chief Executive for all that he did for Barclays. He took over as Chief Executive at an extremely difficult time for the organisation and was able to provide the stability that was necessary and to advance significantly the culture and values of the organisation, much of which had been eroded. Sir Michael Rake, our Senior Independent Director retired at the end of last year after eight years, and Sir John Sunderland at our last AGM after a similar tenure and we are grateful to both for their enormous contribution.

I would particularly like to thank our staff across the organisation for coming every day to serve our customers, without whom we would not have an enterprise. I would also pay respect to our shareholders who have had a pretty miserable time, but who have supported us throughout. Your patience will be rewarded.

A New Beginning

In the eye of the storm it is difficult to sustain or engender faith in the organisation and in its future. For my part, while we continue to be buffeted by historical matters and the political and regulatory environment, I have never lost sight on the end game, the way forward and our eventual success. It has been a very active and decisive year for our company as will be the year ahead. Through decisions already taken, we will quickly reach a more stable and productive foundation.

We are though not without residual challenges, including an uncertain economic environment, as well as further historical regulatory penalties and remedies that will haunt us for some years. We are nevertheless working hard to put these behind us. This will ultimately be achieved although in the interim we would hope for a more proportional attitude from governments and conduct regulators towards banks. However, the conservative assumption, based on our experience, is that any success we do achieve is more likely to arise from our own efforts.

Priorities for the Future

Now that we are getting back to core, our priorities going forward are to:

 

§   generate greater value from our portfolio, including bringing the Investment Bank to returns above the cost of equity and the Group cost-income ratio below 60%

 

§   execute in the least value-destructive way the rundown of our historical and newly designated non-core businesses and assets

 

§   implement the structural reform programme, the creation of the ring-fenced bank and the effective operation of the new decentralised divisional structure

 

§   put historical conduct matters finally behind us

 

§   become a more externally and customer focused company, with a strong performance ethic and underpinned by strong customer, people and community values.

John McFarlane

Chairman

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  03


Chief Executive’s review

…with a strategy that answers

the business challenges ahead…

 

 

LOGO

 

 

LOGO

“I am honoured to have been chosen to lead Barclays. It is a huge responsibility, which I do not take lightly. In every part of the Group, I have been impressed and inspired by our colleagues and the work that they do for our customers and clients.”

Our 2015 results show a core business that is fundamentally strong, with franchises that position us well, generating attractive earnings, with excellent prospects for growth, and collectively they already deliver a Return on Tangible Equity which is above our cost of equity. Our principal task is therefore to liberate those businesses from the two major factors which drag them down today.

The first is legacy products and businesses that are neither sufficiently profitable nor strategic for Barclays – our Non-Core Unit. And the second is the continued impact of billions of pounds of litigation and conduct expenses that are largely the product of past failures in culture.

We are going to address both of these matters head on, with the objective of putting most of these issues behind us in 2016. This will be achieved through simplifying our core business, aggressively running down our Non-Core operations, and resolving as soon as practicable our remaining legacy conduct issues, while at the same time promoting a strong values driven culture across the bank that helps to prevent the creation of new ones.

We have made great progress in simplifying Barclays over the last few years by reshaping our balance sheet, strengthening our capital base, and reducing costs.

All of this has been done to move us towards becoming a Group which can generate the returns our shareholders deserve.

But in order to complete our restructuring and deliver for shareholders in a reasonable timeframe, we must take action today.

It is our intention, subject to regulatory and shareholder approvals if and as required, to reduce our interest in Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL) to a non-controlling, non-consolidated position over the next two to three years.

This has been a very difficult decision to make. Barclays has been in Africa for over 100 years. We have some excellent franchises across the continent, with a great management team and dedicated colleagues.

But we face a regulatory environment where we carry 100% of the financial responsibility for Barclays Africa, and receive only 62% of the benefits. The international reach of the UK bank levy, the Global

 

 

What we do

Barclays is a transatlantic Consumer,

Corporate and Investment bank…

Our Goal

…that will become the bank of choice

for our stakeholders…

Our focus

…by providing superior services

and supporting our stakeholders*…

Our strategy

…via a commercially successful

business that generates long-term

sustainable returns.

 

 

*Our strategic performance is measured by our Balanced Scorecard (see page 11)

 

 

Systemically Important Bank (GSIB) buffer, minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL) and Total Loss Absorbing Capital (TLAC), and other regulatory requirements, present specific challenges to Barclays as owners. The returns Barclays realises from its controlling interest in BAGL are significantly below the 17% Return on Equity reported locally.

Because of these specific challenges, we believe that it is in the best interest of shareholders to reduce our position. Given what is driving this decision, we have flexibility with respect to the pace at which we reduce our ownership and as a result, we will execute this change in our investment opportunistically over the next two to three years.

Reducing our interest to a non-controlling, non-consolidated position will also improve our Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio, though not until we deconsolidate BAGL as a regulatory matter. In the medium term, that will allow us to invest in the core franchises of Barclays. It also has the positive effect of shrinking our cost base by approximately £2bn, our headcount by around 40,000 and, of course significantly reduces our organisational complexity.

Besides simplifying our business further, we also need to accelerate the separation of our profitable Core businesses from the drag of our Non-Core businesses.

Our Non-Core RWAs started at £110bn two years ago. By the end of 2015 we reduced that to £47bn. As we conclude our restructuring, we are taking the opportunity to exit other marginal businesses and regions, including elements of the Investment Bank in nine countries, our Egyptian and Zimbabwean businesses, Southern European cards and wealth management in Asia. As a result, our Non-Core RWAs rise to

 

 

04  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

            

            

 

 

LOGO

 

 

LOGO

 

approximately £55bn as at the end of 2015. We anticipate those one-time additions will add approximately £600m to underlying Non-Core costs, but we expect to exit the majority of these in the course of 2016.

Our Non-Core businesses act as a significant drag on our Group profitability that must be eliminated as soon as possible.

The Board has therefore decided to adjust our near-term dividend to give us the flexibility to accelerate our exit of Non-Core activities. It is our intention to reduce our dividend to 3 pence, in 2016 and 2017. This will help us accelerate the imperative rundown of Non-Core.

I recognise the importance of paying a meaningful dividend as part of total shareholder returns and am committed to doing so in the future.

But for now, the reduction of the dividend is the right choice. These are hard decisions, but we believe the shareholder value created by getting Non-Core closed will greatly exceed the downside of cutting the dividend for the next two years.

These strategic actions will bring forward the completion of our restructuring and the emergence of a simpler and very profitable Barclays.

We are also changing the way in which we structure Barclays to further simplify the Group and prepare early for UK ring-fencing requirements.

At the heart of Barclays’ strategy is to build on our strength as a Transatlantic Consumer, Corporate and Investment bank, anchored in the two financial centres of the world, London and New York.

Barclays will operate as two clearly defined divisions, Barclays UK and Barclays Corporate & International. Barclays UK will include our leading

UK retail bank, our UK consumer credit card business, and play its traditional role as a committed provider of lending and financial services for small businesses up and down the UK.

The business has 22 million retail customers, and almost one million business banking clients. We are one of the country’s leading business banks. We are the second largest wealth manager in the UK, and Barclaycard is the number one card issuer in Britain with close to 11 million UK card customers. Barclays UK will also continue to pioneer innovation in the provision of consumer financial services.

This represents formidable strength. It will ultimately become our UK ring-fenced bank, a resilient British bank, compliant with all regulatory requirements.

Second, Barclays Corporate & International will comprise our market leading Corporate banking business, our Barclaycard operations in Europe and the US, our bulge bracket Investment Bank, and our International Wealth offering.

Barclays Corporate & International has scale in wholesale banking and consumer lending, strength in our key geographies, and good balance in its revenue streams, delivering further resilience.

Barclays Corporate & International will ultimately become our non-ringfenced bank. It will operate as a strong unit within the Barclays Group, and is wholly complementary to Barclays UK. It is a strategically coherent collection of franchises across corporate, investment, and consumer banking, creating a robust and diversified business for us.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  05


Our approach

...delivered through a simpler

and better structured business...

  LOGO

 

LOGO

 

We are confident that Barclays Corporate & International will continue to be well capitalised with a balanced funding profile, supporting solid investment grade credit ratings.

In summary then, the future is bright. Both Barclays UK and Barclays Corporate & International already generate double digit Returns on Tangible Equity (RoTE). They are strong financially, and will be as sibling businesses, and shareholders and debt investors in Barclays will benefit from the diversified revenue streams they produce.

We are also simplifying our financial targets for the Group going forward to focus on three key metrics, and will be aiming to achieve these targets in a reasonable timeframe, in order to deliver shareholder value:

 

§   RoTE: As we reduce the Non-Core drag on Group returns, the Group’s RoTE will converge towards the Core RoTE, and achieve attractive returns for shareholders

 

§   CET 1 ratio: We wil run the Group’s CET 1 ratio at 100-150 basis points above our regulatory minimum level

 

§   Cost:Income ratio: We will reduce the Group’s Cost:Income Ratio to below 60%

Going forward, we will also return to normalised financial metrics. Barclays is in the process of emerging from restructuring and our future disclosures will be based on our business divisions – Barclays UK and Barclays Corporate & International. They will no longer include things like ‘cost to achieve’ or ‘Structural Reform Programme charges’. Instead, you will get a simple and clear statutory presentation of our Group’s performance.

Achieving our goals must be realised at the same time as we complete the critically important cultural transformation of the Group.

More than 300 years ago, Barclays was founded by a group of Quakers. Those first Barclays bankers earned the trust of English merchants, and those bankers felt responsible as stewards of that trust. The Bank, early on, built an exceptional reputation for integrity. Barclays became renowned for the principled way it did business.

I joined banking back in 1979, because I was excited to be a part of a respected profession. Being a banker back then was like being a lawyer or a doctor. The practitioners of the profession of banking were skilled at understanding the complex topics of capital, credit, savings and investor returns; and they were highly regarded as they used that knowledge to help consumers, corporations, investors and governments, to navigate, with transparency and clarity, the world of finance. It was a profession because it was moored to a commitment for integrity.

A company that retains the loyalty of its employees solely based on compensation is a company that gambles with its institutional culture. I want Barclays to be a bank where our employees choose to work here because they believe in the institution, and its intrinsically valuable role in society.

This is a mind-set I want to reinvigorate in everyone at Barclays, from branch colleagues working on the high street in Manchester, to the M&A banker in New York.

Banking, at Barclays, will again be a ‘profession’ and it will be up to all of our employees to promote that goal internally, and to find the people

 

 

06  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Our approach

…that is best suited to our

business environment…

 

LOGO

 

 

LOGO

 

that want to join Barclays because they want to be part of a great profession. The profession of banking.

I look forward to meeting investors at our AGM, and in the course of the next year, and thank you for your support as we continue the work of restoring Barclays to where it should be.

James E. Staley

Group Chief Executive

Barclays is a transatlantic Consumer, Corporate and Investment bank, governed by global and local regulatory standards.

Global economic growth has been modest in recent years, and unprecedented monetary policies, such as Quantitative Easing and near zero and negative interest rates, have been implemented by many Central Banks to stimulate growth. During the second half of 2015 and into 2016, the macroeconomic environment has deteriorated, driven by commodities weakness, particularly oil prices, along with economic uncertainty in China. In the UK, the referendum on EU membership gives rise to political uncertainty. We remain alert to these changes and more, and monitor and manage our risks accordingly.

Regulation continues to direct attention towards capital, liquidity and funding, in order to create a safer banking environment. In 2015, the Financial Policy Committee of the Bank of England clarified the overall capital framework for banks. This has provided greater certainty and allowed us to progress our strategy. Reforms requiring banks to separate certain activities, such as structural reform in the UK and US, continue to be a big focus and have been accounted for in the structure of our revised strategy, as described on page 4.

Conduct issues have hurt Barclays, causing loss of trust among stakeholders. We continue to embed cultural change and improve governance to work to rebuild customer and client trust and market confidence.

Digitalisation trends continue to grow and the power of technology has raised customer and client expectations, resulted in new competitors in the digital space, and increased the challenge of defeating cybercriminals. It has also reduced the cost-to-serve through automation, process improvement and innovation, while making customer experiences faster, more personalised and lower risk.

Without active risk management to address these external factors, our long-term goals could be adversely impacted. Our approach to risk management is outlined in the Annual Report 2015 on page 127, and material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance are outlined on page 119.

Our strategy continues to evolve to respond effectively to the external environment. Please refer to page 4 for an update on our strategy.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  07


Our approach

…and underpinned by our robust

approach to risk management…

 

LOGO

 

 

LOGO

 

To protect Barclays from a volatile and weak external environment, a strong risk capability is needed. At Barclays the Risk teams:

 

§   provide critical risk capabilities, including directing risk appetite and the risk profile
§   set frameworks, policies and standards
§   provide strong and independent second line challenge on a business by business basis
§   lead implementation of critical regulatory risk initiatives.

In the execution of our strategy, some of the risks we face arise as a result of our decisions, and some result from operational processes, or the external environment. We classify risks under five types:

 

§   Credit risk: Financial loss should customers not fulfil contractual obligations
§   Market risk: Earnings or capital impact due to volatility of trading book positions or as the consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity funding pool
§   Funding risk: Failure to maintain adequate capital and liquidity
§   Operational risk: Cost from human factors, inadequate processes and systems or external events
§   Conduct risk: Detriment through inappropriate judgement in execution of business activities.

In the course of business we identify and assess these risks, determine the appropriate risk response, and monitor the effectiveness of these actions and changes to the risk profile:

 

§   Evaluate: Individuals and teams who manage processes identify and assess the proposed risks
§   Respond: Ensures risks are kept within appetite, the level of risk the Group is prepared to accept while pursuing its business strategy, and where appropriate taking necessary mitigation actions
§   Monitor: Monitoring the risks identified is on-going and proactive, and can often mean re-evaluating risks as well as changing our response.

In 2015, the Risk function and the businesses carried out detailed evaluations of the risks Barclays faces using tools such as stress testing. These risks included lower global energy and commodity prices, a slow down in China’s economic growth, or of any risks from the EU referendum in the UK. We have responded to changing market conditions by tightening lending criteria in riskier areas and re-deploying risk capacity toward sectors offering better returns on risk. Senior management and the Board are actively engaged in monitoring these risks, and provide high-level direction.

Responsibilities for the management of risk and control are aligned to a 3 lines of defence activity-based model:

§   first line of defence responsibilities rest with the colleagues who manage operational or business processes. They are responsible for identifying the related risks, and designing, operating, testing and remediating appropriate controls to manage those risks
§   designing frameworks and policies and providing independent oversight and challenge to ensure compliance constitute the second line of defence role
§   Barclays Internal Audit, the third line, provides independent assurance.

When performed appropriately by all colleagues, these responsibilities ensure that there is a strong risk and control environment at Barclays.

 

 

08  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Our approach

…to better drive value creation

and sustainable stakeholder return…

 

 

LOGO

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

As a transatlantic Consumer, Corporate and Investment bank Barclays offers a well-balanced and integrated set of products and services across personal, corporate and investment banking, credit cards and wealth management. We serve individuals, small and large businesses, local authorities, corporations, institutions and governments.

Barclays seeks to satisfy the needs of our customers and clients by offering a well-rounded value proposition, focused on our core strengths, particularly in our UK and US home markets, and thereby deliver a diversified income stream and long-term sustainable returns.

Our business model has been simplified through actions taken over the past two years. It provides us with a stable platform from which to capitalise on the scale and diversity of our businesses and the quality, character and relationships of our people.

The creation of Barclays UK and Barclays Corporate & International further strengthens our value proposition and reinforces the resilient business mix that we enjoy from having an appropriate balance across consumer and wholesale revenue streams.

For example, the scale of our Corporate Banking and Investment Bank franchises serving large, multi-national companies and financial institutions complements that of our market leading consumer businesses across personal banking, wealth management and credit cards. Similarly, our payments solutions offering to businesses and consumers combines our Corporate Banking payments knowledge with our Barclaycard merchant acquiring expertise.

Our international reach and scale mean we have the responsibility – indeed the obligation – following our designation as a GSIB, to work together with our regulators to help reduce risk in the industry and provide a more sustainable banking landscape over the long term.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  09


Our approach

…through our broad service offer.

    

 

 

LOGO

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

Our integrated products and services offer expertise across the customer and client spectrum

Our diverse business model enables us to provide continuing and relevant support across all our businesses to our customers and clients, whatever their stage of life.

For example, for individuals, Barclays offers a safe place to store savings, can help a first-time buyer take their first steps onto the property ladder, give people from a variety of backgrounds the opportunity to grow and manage their wealth, or provide cross-border advice for the affluent for example, helping family members abroad. For businesses it means being ready to help entrepreneurs launch a business, fund its growth, manage payments securely, expand internationally, manage risk effectively, and issue bonds and listed equity shares.

Technology is a critical component of this service offering that benefits customers and clients across the spectrum, regardless of which part of our business they engage with first. Digitalisation and automation of simple banking processes deepens relationships with our customers. For example, automation of account opening and unsecured lending provides increased convenience to personal and corporate customers alike. Similarly, the digitisation of FX transfers and innovative payments solutions enable businesses to achieve their ambitions in the same way that our multi-asset trading platform enables institutional clients to

achieve theirs. These are all examples of the way Barclays adds value and provides benefit to all of our customers and clients through our approach to banking.

 

 

10  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

 

How we are doing

Our Balanced Scorecard measures progress

and performance against our goal…

 

 

LOGO

 

We have agreed eight key measures categorised into the 5Cs against which our stakeholders can hold us to account.

 

         

Metric

 

   Actual 2014            Actual 2015            Target 2018        
     
LOGO   

Customer and Client

Page 12

  

Personal and Corporate Banking (PCB), Barclaycard and Africa Banking weighted average ranking of Relationship Net Promoter Score® (NPS) vs. peer sets

 

   4th    4th    1st
     

 

Client Franchise Rank: Weighted average ranking of wallet share or customer satisfaction with priority clients in the Investment Bank

 

  

 

5th

  

 

5th

  

 

Top 3

     

LOGO

 

  

Colleague

Page 13

   Sustained engagement of colleagues score    72%    75%    87-91%
     

% women in senior leadership

 

   22%    23%    26%
     

LOGO

 

  

Citizenship

Page 14

  

Citizenship Plan – initiatives on track or ahead

 

   11/11    10/11    Plan targets
     

LOGO

 

  

Conduct

Page 15

  

Conduct Reputation (YouGov survey)

 

   5.3/10    5.4/10    6.5/10
     

LOGO

 

  

Company

Page 16

  

Adjusted Return on Equity (RoE)

 

   5.1%    4.9%    N/Aa
     

 

Fully Loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio (Capital Requirements Directive IV Common Equity Tier 1)

 

  

 

10.3%

  

 

11.4%

  

 

N/Aa

 

Note
a Please refer to the new financial targets set out in the Chief Executive’s review on page 4.

Gender Barclays Board membership includes four women and ten men, and one woman and nine men on the Group Executive Committee. During 2015 we had a maximum of three women on the Group Executive Committee. Under the Companies Act 2006, Barclays are also required to report on the gender breakdown of our employees and ‘senior managers’. Of our global workforce of 129,400 (66,100 male, 63,300 female), 796 were senior managers (574 male, 222 female), which include Officers of the Group, certain direct reports of the Chief Executive, heads of major business units, certain senior Managing Directors, and directors on the boards of undertakings of the Group, but exclude individuals who sit as directors on the board of the Company.

 

LOGO

In 2015 the Balanced Scorecard was used throughout the organisation and formed part of the framework by which our staff were assessed, with individual performance objectives aligned to the 5Cs.

This year has seen improvement across a number of our metrics, especially our capital strengthening, as measured by the CET1 ratio, and within Colleague. Further work is required in some areas, including RoE.

The Customer and Client Relationship metrics remained stable as a strong performance in corporate banking, combined with improvements in Barclays current accounts, was partially offset by the impact of reshaping our wealth business. Our Client Franchise Rank remained stable in challenging market conditions.

Under Colleague, we have seen an improvement in both the colleague engagement and the gender-diversity in our leadership, with numerous initiatives to promote equality and support our workforce proving successful.

In our Citizenship plan, 10 out of 11 metrics on target shows that we are having a positive impact on the communities in which we operate, with lending to households the only initiative to lose momentum primarily as a result of market and trading conditions.

Conduct also showed a slight improvement on 2014 following a number of actions being taken to improve customer outcomes, although we are below where we would like to be.

Within Company there has been a significant strengthening in the CET1 ratio, however we have plenty of work to do to deliver an acceptable return to shareholders, with RoE slightly down on 2014.

There is still plenty of work to do and we remain focused on improving our balanced performance for colleagues, customers and clients, the wider community and shareholders.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  11

 


How we are doing

…for our Customers and Clients

we aim to be the bank of choice…

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

 

 

What we are doing

 

In building customer advocacy we will continue to:

 

§  further invest in our brand and the attractiveness of customer and client propositions

 

§  bring increased accountability to those closer to customers

 

§  innovate through customer relevant technology and the transformation of the branch network

 

§  develop service models tailored to the changing needs of our global customer and client base.

 

The 2018 target is to be 1st in NPS, and Top 3 in Client Franchise Rank.

 

 

 

 

 

Balanced Scorecard metric

 

     LOGO
        
 
Actual
2015
  
  
    
 
Actual
2014
  
  
  Actual   2013       
  PCB, Barclaycard and Africa Banking weighted average ranking of Relationship Net Promoter Score® vs. peer sets      4th         4th      3rda      
  Client Franchise Rank: Weighted average ranking of wallet share or customer satisfaction with priority clients in the Investment Bank      5th         5th      N/A      
 

 

a   Revised due to the creation of PCB as part of the May 2014 Strategy Update. Corporate clients now contribute to the NPS metric, and no longer contribute to the Client Franchise Rank

 

How we measure success

 

§  Commercial success across our businesses depends on the continued endorsement by our customers

 

§  Competition for customers and clients has never been stronger. 2015 saw unprecedented levels of switching in our key UK retail markets and intense competition in corporate markets

 

§  Relationship NPS ranking provides a simple customer advocacy measure and indicates growth potential across our franchise

 

§  A ranking widely used in banking and other industries, it facilitates comprehensive benchmarking, simplifies target setting and identifies best practice, bringing the customer’s voice to the heart of Barclays. It is income-weighted using divisional customer satisfaction

 

§  For the investment banking industry, NPS is not as widely measured. Therefore, a ‘Client Franchise Rank’ is calculated by measuring use of our products and services by target clients. It is a revenue-weighted ranking of our global client share across the Investment Bank

 

§  Improving our rank with these clients is a key indicator of effectiveness in meeting their needs, supporting delivery of improved returns for Barclays

 

 

    

How we are doing

Relationship NPS

2015 saw improved performance in UK retail markets with increased NPS scores for both Barclaycard UK credit cards and Barclays current accounts. In 2015 we’ve focused on improving key customer experience touch points for our retail customers whether they contact us in branch, over the phone or by online channels. We’ve also launched our Barclays Blue Rewards proposition to UK retail customers and have measured improved perceptions of value as a result. In the UK, Barclaycard has continued to introduce industry leading balance transfer offers and innovative payment plan products.

Elsewhere across our customer franchises we’ve maintained a very strong performance in the corporate banking market where we’ve vied for leadership position among our peers throughout the year. Our NPS ranks for our Wealth business slipped as we exited the US market.

While we have recorded improvement in NPS scores in key markets, acceptable progress towards our 2018 Group target will require us to ultimately outperform our peers – in addition to improving our own scores. We believe we are well placed to achieve this by leveraging technology to accelerate the transformation of customer and client interaction. Transforming the nature of banking globally through innovations such as Barclays Mobile Banking, Pingit, Mobile Cheque Imaging and Video Banking will be fundamental to our success.

Client Franchise Rank

Our ranking of 5th for 2015 provides a strong platform from which to build as we aspire to our goal of being ‘top 3’ with our target clients. We will seek to achieve this goal by focusing on the following key areas:

 

§   further aligning our structure to client needs: As part of the Strategic Review in 2014 we brought Equities and Credit teams together under the same management to provide a more integrated approach. In 2015 we have taken steps to further align teams across Banking and Markets to provide a complete service to clients encompassing primary issuance and secondary trading

 

§   improving client management information: We have invested technology and resources in our management information and analytics that enable us to provide more finely targeted solutions for our clients

 

§   investing in people and conduct: The quality of our people and the way they do business is fundamental to building and maintaining strong relationships with our clients. We are committed to attract and retain the best talent to serve our clients and help them achieve their ambitions. The Investment Bank remains focused on strengthening the Conduct framework, and Conduct Risk training for colleagues is delivered throughout the year.

 

 

 

Case study

 

 

Barclays has piloted a ground-breaking new service at our branches. Customers with a disability or impairment can now enter their accessibility needs and preferences into an optional free-to- download app, along with their name and a photo of themselves. The data is ‘awoken’ and passed discretely to any participating branch when the customer comes into range of its Bluetooth beacon. A staff member is alerted to the customer’s arrival and can proactively tailor the service they provide, according to the stated wishes, making communication and interaction both easier and more empathetic to both parties. We know how tiresome it can be for some customers to re-articulate their access needs every time they visit the branch, so we used their feedback to drive direction of the design. For further information, please visit www.barclays.co.uk/ beacons

 

 

 

12  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


How we are doing

…creating an environment where our

Colleagues can fulfil their potential…

 

 

LOGO

 

 

 

What we are doing

 

Our colleagues remain core to success at Barclays, and we remain committed to investing in them and ensuring they are enabled to consistently deliver strong performance over time.

 

Fostering an inclusive and diverse culture where all colleagues can achieve their potential remains a core business focus:

 

§   through diversity, we gain a greater breadth of perspectives

 

§   through inclusion these perspectives feed innovation.

 

In turn, this ensures we deliver services and innovative products that are market leading, enabling our diverse customers to achieve their goals.

 

The 2018 target is for a score of 87-91% in Sustained Engagement of colleagues, and 26% women in senior leadership.

 

 

 

 

Balanced Scorecard metric

 

     LOGO
        
 
Actual
2015
  
  
    
 
Actual
2014
  
  
  Actual   2013       
 

Sustainable Engagement of

colleagues score

     75%         72%      74%       
  % women in senior leadership      23%         22%      21%       
 

 

To drive our own progress towards gender parity, we continue to measure the number and percentage of women at each level of the organisation. We have seen continued advancement towards our 2018 gender goal of 26% women in senior leadership roles; at 23% by the end of 2015. Female representation across the firm has again increased, sustaining a 1% year on year upward trend since 2012. Sustained Engagement at Barclays is currently 75%, a positive result in light of the ongoing change our organisation experienced in 2015. For further details see the People section on pages 79 to 82 in the Annual Report 2015.

 

How we measure success

 

Increasing the representation of women in senior roles, and building a robust pipeline of diverse talent remain priorities. Practical talent management tools are in place to deliver tangible change, ranging from our global unconscious bias training programme, to ensuring diversity is reflected in candidate shortlists and hiring panels. Targeted sponsorship and mentoring programmes connect leaders with rising talent, with networks and forums all actively supporting our people to achieve their potential. Collectively our approach aims to contribute to the culture and commitment needed to build greater gender parity.

 

We place emphasis on how committed our colleagues are to working at Barclays, the environment we create to enable our colleagues to do their best work, and our colleagues’ overall well-being within the workplace. These aspects form what we call Sustainable Engagement. We measure progress by asking colleagues how engaged they feel working at Barclays.

    

How we are doing

Women in senior leadership

Achieving gender parity requires a cultural shift so we continue to enable and amplify dialogue with internal and external stakeholders to promote equality. Our Shattering Stereotypes research in 2015 has highlighted key opportunities and barriers to unlocking the economic power of female entrepreneurship. Our Women in Leadership Index continues to enable investors to show their interest in companies with gender-diverse leadership. Internally, we have continued to embed gender parity principles into our core people processes and practices. We have established alumni and returnership programmes to enable women to restart paused careers, while our Women on Boards programme prepares our senior leaders for external non-executive director roles. The diversity of our own Board continues to be a focus, with our recently revised Board Diversity Policy setting out our intention to see female Board representation rise to a 33% minimum by the end of 2020.

Sustainable Engagement

Now in its second year, the global employee opinion survey (Your View) was deployed across the Group in October 2015, with over 100,000 colleagues participating. The survey is in line with our Group-wide approach to measuring employee feedback, and allows us to consistently track progress, measure success and highlight areas for improvement. The survey was more concise and focused this year and provides insight on Sustainable Engagement, colleague alignment to our Values, the working environment and perceptions of Leadership.

With a Sustainable Engagement score of 75%, a 3% increase on the prior year, our colleagues strongly believe in the goals and objectives of Barclays, and would recommend our organisation as a place to work. We remain committed to building on the positive trend we have seen in Sustainable Engagement in 2015, and will use the insights from this year’s survey to sharpen aspects of our people strategy. This includes focusing on how we collectively make the best use of our resources, supporting colleagues with an effective technology infrastructure. In doing so we are creating an environment that both allows our colleagues to thrive professionally, and deliver for Barclays customers.

 

 

 

 

Case study

 
 

Working with the United Nations (UN) as one of ten Impact Champion organisations highlights our commitment to achieving greater equality for women. To advance the cultural shift towards gender parity, we became a founding supporter of the UN led ‘HeForShe’ movement. This important campaign unifies efforts, and significantly is enabling men to demonstrate why equality matters to them. Male and female colleagues, including members of the Group Executive Committee, have signed a Barclays ‘HeForShe’ pledge, channelling leadership commitment towards key gender initiatives such as mentoring. Membership of our gender network the Women’s Initiative Network (WiN) has also increased significantly as leaders see the importance of being vocal and visible advocates for gender equality. Since launching the ‘HeForShe’ campaign, 60% of new WiN members have been male. ‘HeForShe’ is an integral aspect of our strategy in enabling women to achieve their full potential at Barclays, and ensuring our communities benefit fully from their talent.

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  13


How we are doing

…we have a positive impact on the

communities in which we operate…

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

 

What we are doing

 

§  Ensuring that the way we do business is responsible, sustainable, and takes account of wider stakeholder needs

 

§  Contributing to growth by supporting households and businesses

 

§  Supporting our communities by building the skills of young people

 

We met or exceeded 10 of 11 targets set out in the 2012-2015 Citizenship Plan and are developing a new strategy to launch in 2016.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balanced Scorecard metric

 

     LOGO
      

 

 
 

 

Actual
2015

 

  
  

  

 

 
 

 

Actual
2014

 

  
  

 

 

Actual   2013  

    
  Citizenship Plan –      10/11         11/11      10/11       
  initiatives on track or ahead                           
 

 

Barclays achieved 10 of 11 targets set out in the 2012-2015 Citizenship Plan. For detailed performance on the underlying 2015 Citizenship Plan metrics, please see the Citizenship Data Supplement 2015.

 

We provide further detail on our programmes and a range of case studies on our website at home.barclays/citizenship In addition, we also provide further disclosures aligned to the Global Reporting Initiative G4 guidelines, in the Citizenship Data Supplement 2015 available at home.barclays/annualreport

 

How we measure success

 

Fully integrated with the Balanced Scorecard, the Citizenship Plan included 11 targets to deliver by the end of 2015. A performance summary is available below with more detailed information in the Citizenship Data Supplement 2015.

 

We are now preparing to launch the next chapter in our Citizenship ambitions, which will be even more integrated and with a sharper focus on accelerating shared growth for our business and for society. This next evolution is deeply aligned with our strategy, geographical footprint and strengths.

 

Each of the business units will contribute to our Citizenship commitments with a focus on where they can deliver positive societal impact. We see exciting opportunities to partner across customers, clients, government, suppliers and NGOs to create new solutions that will deliver the greatest social impact and return for our business. The new strategy will be launched in 2016.

 

*Cumulative performance 2012 to 2015, unless otherwise indicated

 

    

How we are doing

The way we do business

Attestation to the Barclays Way code of conduct met target with 99% of employees attesting. We exceeded our target to reduce carbon emissions by 10%, achieving a total reduction of 37.3% against a 2012 baseline, driven by operational energy efficiency initiatives and travel management.

We have continued to see moderate improvement in stakeholder perceptions, based on the results of the Citizenship Reputation (YouGov survey), with our overall score increasing to 5.24/10 (2014: 5.11/10). Supplier payment performance hit 86% on time, ahead of our target of 85%. We have evaluated our reporting requirements under the UK Modern Slavery Act and continue to embed and refine necessary changes to our supplier screening and human rights related policies and practices, prior to reporting in our 2016 disclosures.

Contributing to growth*

As a result of market and trading conditions, we missed our target to deliver £150bn of new and renewed lending to households, providing a total of £141.8bn by the end of 2015 (2014: £107.7bn). We met our target to deliver £50bn of new and renewed lending to SMEs, providing a total of £50.7bn on a cumulative basis (2014: £38.5bn). We assisted in raising £3,366bn of financing for businesses and governments on a cumulative basis (2014: £2,487bn).

We reached over 190,000 participants at SME support events, exceeding our target of 120,000. We also exceeded our target to recruit 2,000 apprentices with a total of 2,263 apprentices at Barclays in the UK (2014: 1,734).

Supporting our communities*

2015 marks the conclusion of Barclays’ 5 Million Young Futures commitment. Between 2012 and 2015, we have invested in programmes to support young people around the world develop vital skills they need to achieve their ambitions. Over this period we have reached more than 5.7 million young people and invested nearly £262m in the community against our cumulative target of £250m. In 2015 alone, we helped to build the enterprise, employability or financial skills of more than 1.5 million young people and invested £63m in the community.

 

 

 

 

 

Case study

 

As Green Bonds continue to mature as a way of financing environmentally beneficial activities, Barclays remains committed to the development of the space.

 

Barclays made a public commitment in 2014 to invest £1bn in Green Bonds within the Group liquidity pool by November 2015. After meeting that goal, we committed to an additional £1bn investment in Green Bonds in December 2015, representing one of the largest investments into this sector to date.

 

We are a signatory to the Green Bond Principles and have been an active underwriter on a variety of Green Bond transactions for corporate, supranational and municipal issuers, raising a total of £1.3bn in 2015.

 

 

 

 

14  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


How we are doing

…acting with integrity in everything we do…

    

 

 

LOGO

 

 

 

 

What we are doing

 

The Group continued to incur the significant costs of conduct matters

 

§  Additional charges were recognised for customer redress including £2.2bn for the cost of PPI remediation

 

§  Resolution of these matters remains a necessary and important part of delivering the Group’s strategy

 

§  There are early signs that we are driving better outcomes for customers from a more thoughtful consideration of our customers’ needs.

 

The 2018 target is for a Conduct Reputation (YouGov survey) score of 6.5/10.

 

 

 

 

 

Balanced Scorecard metric

 

    

LOGO

        
 
Actual
2015
  
  
    
 
Actual
2014
  
  
  Actual   2013       
  Conduct Reputation      5.4/10         5.3/10      5.2/10       
  (YouGov survey)                           
 

 

We are below where we would like to be for 2015, although overall progress on the measure is in line with our expectations and puts our 2018 targets within reach.

 

How we measure success

 

§  The Conduct measure is developed through a Conduct reputation survey, undertaken by YouGov, across a range of respondents including business and political stakeholders, the media, NGOs, charities and other opinion formers

 

§  The 2015 Conduct score, taken from two surveys, each of 2,000 respondents, comprises questions relating to transparency, employee welfare, quality and customer value as well as trust

 

 

    

How we are doing

In 2015 Barclays made progress on its Conduct measure recording a score of 5.4 (2014: 5.3). ‘Operates openly and transparently’, ‘Has high quality products and services’ and ‘Delivers value for money for customers and clients’ have all improved according to audience perception. Performance on two components, ‘Treats staff well at all levels of the business’ and ‘It can be trusted’ have declined slightly.

As a result of increased awareness and early consideration of conduct risk in the business, a number of actions have been taken to improve customer outcomes including:

§  proactive consideration and management of potential customer detriment associated with Barclays’ strategy to simplify its business and products. For example, change programmes monitoring customers subject to multiple changes including platform and online migrations

§  application of more stringent residential mortgage requirements to buy-to-let mortgage applicants, ensuring better lending decisions

§  improvements in key areas such as bereavement and power of attorney and ongoing training to equip staff to support customers in vulnerable circumstances

§  enhanced surveillance monitoring in the Investment Bank identifying and proactively managing activity which appeared to cause unusual market impact

§  separation plans of non-core businesses consider customer outcomes.

In 2016 there will be continued improvements of conduct risk management across governance structures, MI, culture change initiatives, risk management processes and enterprise-wide risk management. There will also be further enhancements to how conduct risk is considered in strategy setting.

 

 

 

 

 

Case study

 

An Investment Bank client inadvertently elected to earn a lower interest rate of 0.13% (instead of the correct interest rate of 0.30%) on a $100m deposit cash trade. Operations staff identified the mismatch and despite being legally entitled to proceed with the lower interest rate, agreed that the right thing to do was to amend the rate in favour of the client.

 

Barclays have teams in place that constantly monitor such transactions in order to spot operational or system errors. Although Barclays had the right to go ahead and apply the lower interest rate (which would have cost the client £130,000) we instead amended the trade in favour of the client.

 

By putting ourselves in our clients’ shoes, we have elected to achieve our ambitions in the right way. We believe that our customers should be able to trust us to have their best interest at heart as this ensures long term profits through customer loyalty.

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  15


How we are doing

…effectively managing risk to create

sustainable returns for our Company.

 

 

LOGO

 

 

 What we are doing

 

We are committed to delivering long-term acceptable returns to shareholders in a sustainable way, while maintaining adequate levels of capital to enable the Bank to operate safely through challenging economic conditions.

 

We will achieve this by prudently optimising the level, mix and distribution to businesses of our capital resources whilst maintaining sufficient capital resources in order to:

 

§   ensure the Group is well capitalised relative to its minimum  regulatory capital requirements set by the PRA and other regulatory  authorities

 

§   support its credit rating

 

§   support its growth and strategic objectives.

 

 

 

 

 

Balanced Scorecard metric

 

   LOGO
        
 
Actual
2015
  
  
    
 
Actual
2014
  
  
   Actual   2013a    
  Fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio      11.4%         10.3%       9.1%     
  Return on Equity (Adjusted)      4.9%         5.1%       4.3%     
 

 

Note

a   2013 Return on Equity (Adjusted) has been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.

  
 

 

How we measure success

 

Fully Loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio

  
 

§  The Fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio demonstrates the capital strength and resilience of Barclays. By ensuring we are well capitalised relative to minimum capital requirements of regulatory authorities, we create a safer bank for customers and clients, and all stakeholders through challenging economic conditions.

  
 

 

§  The ratio expresses Barclays’ capital as a percentage of risk weighted assets (RWAs), as defined by the PRA, in the context of CRD IV (an EU Directive prescribing capital adequacy and liquidity requirements), and is part of the regulatory framework governing how banks and depository institutions are supervised.

  
 

 

Adjusted Return on Equity (RoE)

  
 

§  Adjusted RoE measures the organisation’s ability to generate acceptable returns for shareholders.

  
 

 

§  Adjusted RoE is calculated as adjusted profit for the year attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent divided by average shareholders’ equity for the year excluding non-controlling and other equity interests. It excludes certain items, including those that are significant but not representative of the underlying business performance.

  
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    

How we are doing

Fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio

In 2015 the Group’s CET1 ratio increased by 110 basis points to 11.4%. The main driver was a £44bn reduction in RWAs to £358bn, demonstrating continued progress on the Non-Core rundown together with reductions in the Investment Bank. This was partially offset by a decrease in CET1 capital to £40.7bn (2014: £41.5bn). We will continue to reduce RWAs within Non-Core, while looking to allocate capital to RoE enhancing growth opportunities in our Core businesses.

Adjusted Return on Equity

Adjusted RoE in 2015 decreased to 4.9% (2015: 5.1%) as adjusted PBT fell by 2% to £5,403m, driven by a 24% increase in the Non-Core loss before tax to £1,459m as a result of the continued rundown, partially offset by a 3% increase in Core profit before tax to £6,862m. Adjusted RoE for Core was 9.0% (2014: 9.2%).

The Group estimates its cost of equity for 2016 at 10.5%.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Case study

 

Our Non-Core division is responsible for the divestment of Barclays non-strategic assets and businesses, and is run by a dedicated management team operating within a clear governance framework to rundown the unit while optimising shareholder value.

 

When the Non-Core division was created in May 2014, RWAs were £110bn. By the end of 2015, this had reduced to £47bn as a result of the disposal of Businesses, the rundown and exit of Securities and Loans, and Derivative risk reductions. Key drivers of the decrease in RWAs of £29bn in 2015 were a £10bn reduction in the Derivative portfolio, £9bn reduction in Securities and Loans, and reductions as a result of the sale of the Spanish and UK Secured Lending businesses. The announced sale of the Portuguese and Italian retail businesses in H215, due to be completed in H116, are expected to result in a further £2.5bn reduction in Non-Core RWAs.

 

 

 

16  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

How we are doing

The activity in our business units reflects our

progress in becoming the partner of choice…

 

 

 

 

  LOGO

 

Barclays Group: our 2015 structure, markets and customer type

 

Group structure

 

  

Markets

 

 

Customer type

 

Personal and Corporate Banking    

§   UK Retail

 

 

LOGO

  

§   Corporate Banking

 

See pages 18-19

 

 

  

§   Wealth

 

 

Barclaycard

 

  

§   UK cards

 

 

 

LOGO

  

§   US cards

 

See pages 19-20

 

  

§   Card businesses in Europe

 
    

§   Business Solutions

 

 

Africa Banking

 

  

§   Retail and business banking, cards

 

 

LOGO

 

  

§   Corporate and investment banking

 

See pages 21-22

 

 

  

§   Wealth and Investment Management, and Insurance

 

 

Investment Bank

 

  

§   Markets

 

 

 

LOGO

  

§   Banking

 

See pages 22-23

 

 

  

§   Research

 

 

Barclays Non-Core

 

See pages 24

  

§   Principal non-strategic businesses

 

 

LOGO

  

§   Securities and loans, such as non-strategic long dated  corporate loans

 
  

§   Derivatives impacted by regulation

 

 

 

The 2015 performance has been reported in the business units that operated during the year. With a change in structure for 2016, an upcoming restatement document will detail 2015 performance under the new business units.

The following pages provide an insight into what each of the businesses do, the products they provide and markets they serve, and how they look to add value to Barclays’ business model.

How each of our businesses deliver the strategy will differ. For instance, the majority of our colleagues in Personal and Corporate Banking work in our distribution network whereas Africa Banking provides fundamental banking infrastructure to a developing continent. Hence the contribution of each of our businesses will differ to the overall Balanced Scorecard for the Group, as seen on page 11. Therefore the metrics on the following pages demonstrate how each of our businesses contribute in their own individual way. Africa Banking contributes to the Balanced Scorecard of the South African listed entity, Barclays Africa Group Limited.

 

 

LOGO

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  17

 


The activity in our business units reflects our progress

in becoming the partner of choice… continued

 

 

 

LOGO

 

Personal and Corporate Banking

 

“We are succeeding by putting our customers and clients at the heart of everything we do and by continuing to do this we will become the partner of choice for the UK Ecosystem.”

 

Ashok Vaswani

Chief Executive,

Personal and Corporate Banking

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

  Personal and Corporate Banking              
  Contribution to the Group      2015         2014     
  Income (£m)      8,726         8,828     
  Profit before tax (£m)      3,040         2,885     
  Adjusted RoE (%)      12.1%         11.9%     
  Risk Weighted Assets (£bn)      120.4         120.2     
         

 

 

LOGO

Salford City Council partnership

Our ability and enthusiasm for supporting the wider, non-banking needs of the Council, has led us to become the chosen financial services partner for the Local Authority Sector in the Greater Manchester area.

We worked closely with Salford City Council to understand their specific needs and devised a strategic plan in conjunction with the Council and its partners, focusing on digital skills and driving efficiency by:

 

  §   utilising Barclays Digital Eagles to provide free ‘Code Playground’ and ‘Tea and Teach’ sessions across the City, supporting residents of all ages with building confidence in digital skills

 

  §   providing an easier and more convenient way for residents to pay for Council services by signing Salford City Council up to Pingit, our innovative payment solution

 

  §   collaborating with the Council to develop a secure communication portal, enabling the Council to share information with colleagues in a safe and secure way.

    

 

Our purpose

Society is facing a digital revolution which is transforming the lives and businesses of our customers and clients. We firmly believe that Barclays has a social and commercial responsibility to help customers and non-customers to embrace the new and ensure that no one is left behind on the digital journey.

How the business is structured and what we provide to the Group

PCB is a powerhouse with the potential to challenge the traditional UK banking landscape.

 

§   Personal Banking: provision of simple and transparent banking products to c.14 million customers, with a focus on transforming customer interactions through automating routine transactions and humanising important moments

 

§   Mortgages: a single, highly automated, industrial strength engine to provide mortgage services to over 1.5 million individuals

 

§   Corporate Banking: an end-to-end proposition and service continuum that supports nearly one million clients, from start-ups and small businesses, through FTSE 100 companies, to partnering with the largest global corporations

 

§   Wealth: a differentiated wealth and investment management business for 35,000 high net worth and ultra-high net worth clients focused on the UK Ecosystem

Using our structure and leveraging advances in technology we can innovate to deliver relevant and differentiated client and customer experiences while driving down costs and improving control.

Environment in which the business operates

We’re in the midst of a digital revolution where everyone now expects and demands services that are easy to access, fast and reliable. Customers expect us to be with them, whenever, wherever and however they choose to transact. That’s why we’re investing in building the capacity to deliver our services digitally and finding ways to redefine how we meet customer expectations. We are restless in the pursuit of finding innovative ways to solve the routine everyday money moments while empowering and training our colleagues to help customers when they need us the most.

Risks to this business model

While executing our strategy we are cognisant that the external market and environment in which PCB operates is constantly changing, with emerging regulation, rapidly evolving competitive landscape and increasing customer expectations.

We are making good progress to adapt and evolve with the changing environment to mitigate against these risks. For example:

 

§   focusing on ensuring operational and business risks are totally understood and appropriately addressed

 

§   reshaping the way we interact with our customers in a way that will drive customer satisfaction and deepen customer engagement

 

§   automating and simplifying processes, controls, systems and products

 

§   driving technological innovation to enable our existing customers to do more with us.

We continue to focus on embedding Conduct Risk awareness across PCB to build on our values-led culture and keep customers and clients at the centre of everything we do, by empowering colleagues to ensure the right outcomes for our customers.

 

 

18  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

  LOGO

 

Review of the year

2015 was a transformational year for PCB. We continued to support growth in the communities in which we operate, helping 17,600 people take their first steps onto the property ladder, lending £3.6bn in Barclayloans and launching a £150m fund to support fast growing technology businesses in the UK.

By innovating and harnessing technology, we are able to provide simple and relevant solutions for our customers and clients. We launched Barclays Blue Rewards providing customers with a simple and inclusive digital rewards proposition, paying cash every month, to recognise and reward their relationship with us. We also created the FX powered by Barclays app, giving users an information-only tool to compare up to the second FX rates and margins.

We continued to use technology to make customers’ lives easier in a number of UK banking firsts. Over 60,000 cheques, totalling over £55m, were processed as digital images through our Mobile Cheque Imaging pilot and through the partnership between Pingit and Camelot, we were able to create the first new payment option for the National Lottery in over a decade.

We were the first UK bank to launch Video Banking, allowing customers to securely carry out their banking through a digital face to face service with our expert colleagues. Our Serve Anywhere iPad technology enabled colleagues to access customer systems remotely in an industry first for any UK retail bank.

We made significant progress in de-risking the business and made a strategic decision to sell Barclays Wealth Americas and transformed the Wealth business with a focus on simplification and innovation in markets where we can compete at scale. In 2015, we were awarded Wealth Manager of the Year at the Global Investor Awards.

We continued to work towards our ambition to become the most inclusive and accessible bank in 2015, reaching over 4,000 Talking ATMs, being the first bank to launch a Sign Video service and launching the Community Driving Licence – a modularised colleague training app to better understand the needs of different customer circumstances.

We are firmly committed to leaving no-one behind as we enter into the digital revolution, with our network of over 15,000 UK Digital Eagles supporting customers and non-customers to build their confidence in digital skills. In 2015 alone, they hosted almost 5,000 Tea and Teach sessions helping those taking their first steps to get online, more than 1,000 Code Playgrounds teaching young people and their parents to code and over 250 Digital Business Clubs supporting small businesses in taking advantage of the opportunities new technology brings. We also continued to help the next generation secure employment and manage their finances more effectively, with the number of young people participating in our LifeSkills programme since 2013 reaching over 1.8 million and almost 3,000 colleagues volunteering to run LifeSkills sessions last year.

 

Barclaycard

 

“We continue to build on our heritage of innovation, offering a range of market leading solutions to help consumers make and retailers take payments.”

 

Amer Sajed

Interim Chief Executive,

Barclaycard

  LOGO

 

LOGO

   

Barclaycard

 

             
  Contribution to the Group      2015         2014   
  Income (£m)      4,927         4,356   
  Profit before tax (£m)      1,634         1,339   
  Adjusted RoE (%)      17.7%         16.0%   
  Risk Weighted Assets (£bn)      41.3         39.9   
       

 

LOGO

 

Delighting our customers with free access to credit scores and education

 

When Barclaycard US discovered that more than 60% of the US population does not check their credit score regularly, they realised just how far this was impacting their everyday decisions from renting an apartment to getting a new mobile phone contract. The team made enhancements to their mobile app and servicing website to give customers their FICO® Credit Score; top two key factors affecting it; along with related information for customers to keep in mind.

 

Over three million cardholders in the US are now proactively viewing their FICO® scores with about 60% accessing it monthly and around 35% using our mobile app. Lower rates of delinquency have been observed in customers taking advantage of the service.

 

Based on the positive feedback and engagement from our customers in the US, a similar initiative with a local partner has since been taken up in the UK with free credit score checks for all our UK customers too.

 

®FICO is a registered trademark of Fair Isaac Corporation in the US and other countries.

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  19


The activity in our business units reflects our progress

in becoming the partner of choice… continued

    

 

 

 

LOGO

 

Our purpose

Barclaycard aspires to be the most recommended brand to help consumers buy and clients sell, every day. We provide funding to facilitate payments and lend responsibly to customers and clients based on their needs and our risk appetite. We also enable retailers to accept payments through a range of innovative point of sale solutions.

How the business is structured and what we provide to the Group

Barclaycard serves consumers in both of Barclays’ core geographies, the UK and the US, as well as in Germany and Southern Europe. We also operate in Norway, Sweden and Denmark via our EnterCard joint venture. We provide branded and co-branded consumer cards to our customers, and business solutions to our clients, including commercial cards, payment acceptance and point of sale finance. Our business model is diversified by geography and product line and our scale helps us deliver a strong financial performance through the economic cycle.

Environment in which the business operates

The consumer payments and lending environment is experiencing considerable change, driven by new competitors and technology, consumer behaviour and regulation. Competition from traditional and non-traditional players is intensifying, adding further pressure to an already crowded payments environment. Electronic and mobile commerce are changing consumer expectations, driving a need for a fast and seamless payments experience. Across the payments landscape regulation is challenging existing business models but also enabling increased card acceptance, as cash is replaced by electronic payments.

Many of the trends above provide opportunities for Barclaycard to help its customers and clients achieve their goals. Our future business strategy is focused on opportunities that represent the best interests of our customers and clients and that help us deliver sustainable growth.

Risks to this business model

Managing risk is a critical element of our culture. Barclaycard faces risks every day which, if they crystallise, could negatively impact our business, our customers and clients and our colleagues.

Barclaycard is exposed to a series of risks and threats, including: macroeconomic fluctuations, potential economic shocks, further regulatory changes, fraud, increasingly sophisticated cyber crime and the resilience of our core infrastructure.

We address risk by rigorous consideration of customer outcomes in the way we define and execute our strategy and make decisions. We operate within agreed risk appetites to ensure we maintain the planned risk profile. Our lending strategy is supported by clear target market criteria, ensuring we lend to those for whom credit is suitable.

We also address risk through our diversified business model; by innovating to create new opportunities; by identifying ways to meet changing customer demands in a more efficient way; and by continuing to invest in technology, people and processes.

Examples of innovations/deals this year

Barclaycard achieved numerous industry accolades in 2015.

Our proprietary bPay wearable payments solution secured eight industry awards, including “Best Alternative Payments” at the Card and Payments Awards for UK and Ireland.

Since our deployment of contactless payment across London’s transport network in 2014, over 250 million journeys have been completed using over 8.7m unique cards from 80 countries.

Finally, our US business announced a partnership with JetBlue to launch a new co-brand credit card program in early 2016, adding to our list of prestigious partnerships.

Review of the year

Barclaycard delivered a record performance in 2015. Profit before tax increased 22% to £1,634m. Strong growth was delivered through the diversified consumer and merchant business model with asset growth across all geographies. Cost to income ratio improved to 42% (2014: 43%), while investment in business growth continued. The business focus on risk management was reflected in stable 30-day delinquency rates and improved loan loss rates. This resulted in a return on average equity of 17.7% (2014: 16.0%) and a return on average tangible equity of 22.3% (2014: 19.9%).

Total income increased 13% to £4,927m, driven primarily by growth in US cards and the appreciation of the average USD rate against GBP.

Loans and advances to customers increased 9% to £39.8bn reflecting growth across all geographies.

Customer deposits increased 40% to £10.2bn driven by the deposits funding strategy in the US.

In 2015, the value of transactions increased by 14%, to reach £293bn. We have also maintained the strong customer acquisition trend from previous years, as we welcomed over 4 million new customers and 32,000 new clients in 2015, while reaching an important milestone in Germany of over 1 million customers. We have also continued to improve customer satisfaction by delivering products and services important to our customers, enabling simplification of our proposition and driving digital customer engagement.

We have made further progress in embedding Conduct Risk into our business, by strengthening areas around governance and culture, product design and customer servicing, and embedding a Conduct focused culture throughout our business, thus striving to deliver the right outcomes for our customers and clients.

Building on our commitment to make a positive difference to the communities in which we live and work, 69% of colleagues used Barclays support to volunteer, fundraise or donate. We are also making Barclaycard an even better place to work, with over 93% of our high performing employees retained, 56% of hires internal appointments and 34% of our senior leaders women.

In 2016, we are very excited to mark two significant milestones in our history, celebrating Barclaycard’s 50th anniversary and the 25th year of activity for our German operations. Since launching the UK’s first credit card in 1966, Barclaycard has continued to push the boundaries and challenge the status quo – creating the payment innovations of today and defining the possibilities of how people will pay tomorrow.

 

 

20  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

LOGO

 

 Africa Banking

 

“In the third year since the formation of Barclays Africa Group Limited, our strategy execution is on track. We are well positioned to address the Africa growth opportunity, make a positive economic contribution to our communities, and deliver sustainable returns for our shareholders.”

 

 Maria Ramos

 Chief Executive,

 Africa Banking

  LOGO

 

LOGO

 

Africa Banking

 

        
  Contribution to the Group      2015         2014      
  Income (£m)      3,574         3,664      
  Profit before tax (£m)      979         984      
  Adjusted RoE (%)      11.7%         12.9%      
  Risk Weighted Assets (£bn)      33.9         38.5      
          

 

LOGO

Delivering Shared Growth:

ReadytoWork Initiative

 

In October 2015, we launched ReadytoWork, a pan-Africa employability initiative aimed at empowering young people with the skills they need to successfully transition from basic education into the world of work. ReadytoWork aims at addressing youth unemployment by providing work readiness skills through a free interactive e-learning platform. We rolled out ReadytoWork in Zambia, Seychelles, Botswana, Kenya, Mauritius, Zimbabwe and South Africa, in partnership with several institutions of higher learning.

 

Over 4,500 users have independently registered on the portal, with an additional 64,000 learners across 325 secondary schools in South Africa accessing the curriculum through our partnership with the Gauteng Department of Basic Education.

 

 

 

Our purpose

We are focused on our goal to be the bank of choice in Africa. Our growth strategy is based on a unique competitive advantage – we are an African bank that is fully local, fully regional and fully international.

How the business is structured and what we provide to the Group

Africa Banking is a diversified financial services provider offering an integrated range of products and services across retail and business banking (RBB), credit cards, corporate and investment banking, wealth and investment management and insurance (WIMI). We serve nearly 12 million customers across Africa and have a long-standing presence in 12 countries, including in our largest market South Africa.

Africa Banking is a combination of the results of Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL), and Barclays Egypt and Barclays Zimbabwe.

BAGL strategy

BAGL’s strategy is underpinned by four clear themes. First, as an African bank, we invest in growth opportunities on the continent and provide access to the African and global capital markets. Second, as a customer-focused organisation, we aim to ensure customer experience remains our primary focus to make customers’ lives easier and help them prosper. Third, we are simplifying our business to reduce costs and improve efficiency. Finally, we continue to make significant investments in technology and automation.

Our Retail and Business Bank strategy is to transform our leading retail franchise in South Africa, and in our other African markets. We made strong progress on new customer acquisition, improved customer experience, and are investing heavily in mobile and other technologies. In our Business bank, we are improving channel efficiency to serve small businesses and medium corporates. In our Corporate and Investment bank, we completed the roll out of a best-in-class integrated product platform for corporates in all our markets, and are repositioning our Markets business. In our Wealth, Investment Management and Insurance business, we expanded into East Africa, improved performance in our short-term insurance business, and transformed our Wealth and Investment Management business to an advisory-led model.

Environment in which the business operates

Against the backdrop of a slowing global economy, Africa economies are experiencing lower growth rates in part driven by lower commodity prices. In South Africa, our largest market, persistent power shortages and drought have had a significant economic impact. In many African countries, the challenges of job creation and access to quality affordable education, and the need for a more equitable society free of race and gender discrimination, have become more critical. As a major financial services group in Africa, we aim to have positive economic impact and invest in our communities, while delivering sustainable shareholder returns.

The industry in which we operate is highly competitive and dynamic. Mobile and other technologies enable new market entrants and disrupt traditional models, while at the same time the complexity in the operations and technology environments has increased. BAGL continues to make sizeable investments in innovation, data and automation to improve customer experience and increase efficiency. Mobile technology in particular is transforming our distribution channels in line with industry and competitor trends.

Review of the year

Africa Banking 2015 performance was solid and we made further progress on the financial commitments that we set out to the market. Our Cost-to-Income ratio was lower than 2014 as income growth

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  21


The activity in our business units reflects our progress

in becoming the partner of choice… continued

    

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

exceeded sub-inflationary cost growth. Africa Banking RoE of 8.7% and RoTE of 11.7% was lower than 2014, although underlying returns in BAGL increased further. Contribution from the markets outside of South Africa increased, and is now above 20% as these markets grew faster than South Africa. We are currently top 3 by income in four of our largest five markets.

On a reported basis, profit before tax decreased 1% to £979m and total income net of insurance claims decreased 2% to £3,574m. The ZAR depreciated against GBP by 10% based on average rates and by 28% based on the closing exchange rate in 2015 and was again a significant contributor to the movement in the reported results of Africa Banking.

The discussion of business performance that follows is based on results on a constant currency basis unless otherwise stated.

Profit before tax increased 11% reflecting growth in rest of Africa operations of 18% and growth in South Africa of 9%. Good growth was achieved in the identified strategic areas of RBB and Corporate Bank in South Africa, and WIMI, while the corporate business outside South Africa was negatively impacted by higher impairments. Investment Bank trading performance in South Africa was lower as Fixed Income, Currencies and Commodities (FICC) income was impacted by a volatile environment.

Total operating expenses for Africa Banking increased 5% with inflationary pressure, partially offset by savings from strategic cost programmes including restructure of the branch network, increased automation, and property rationalisation.

Loans and advances to customers increased 8% to £29.9bn (reported) driven by strong Corporate and Investment Bank growth, resulting in increased net interest income for African Banking. Customer deposits increased 11% to £30.6bn (reported) reflecting RBB growth.

 

Investment Bank

 

“From our unique position with dual home markets and global reach, we continue to transform the Investment Bank so that we can help our target clients achieve their ambitions.”

 

Tom King

Chief Executive,

Investment Bank

  LOGO

 

LOGO

  Investment Bank        
 

 

Contribution to the Group

  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014

 

  

 
  Income (£m)      7,572         7,588     
  Profit before tax (£m)      1,611         1,377     
  Adjusted RoE (%)      5.6%         2.7%     
  Risk Weighted Assets (£bn)      108.3         122.4     
         

 

LOGO

 

Long-standing relationships with our clients

 

Barclays has had a long-standing relationship with Dell, having advised the Company on a number of capital markets transactions as well as its acquisition of Wyse Technology in 2012. When Dell, together with its owners, Michael Dell, MSD Partners and Silver Lake Partners agreed to acquire EMC Corporation in 2015 for $67 billion, Barclays acted as a financial adviser to Dell and provided financing for the transaction.

 

This landmark transaction, which represents the largest technology M&A transaction to date, will create the world’s largest privately-controlled technology company with an integrated portfolio positioned to address customers’ rapidly changing critical IT needs.

 

Barclays is committed to delivering innovative financial solutions to empower our clients to seize opportunities for growth and tackle the big challenges of the future.

 

 

 

 

22  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

Our purpose

We enable the movement of capital between those who need it, for example to grow their company or build new infrastructure, and those looking to generate a return on investment. In doing so we fund and facilitate global economic growth, helping people to achieve their ambitions.

How the business is structured and what we provide to the Group

Our business is split into three core areas:

 

§   Markets: provides execution, prime brokerage and risk management services across the full range of asset classes including equity and fixed income, currency and select commodity products

 

§   Banking: provides long-term strategic advice on mergers and acquisitions, corporate finance and strategic risk management solutions, and equity and credit origination capabilities

 

§   Research: provides multi-asset class and macro-economic research delivering practical ideas to help our clients make informed investment decisions

Through this range of business activities we can provide Barclays with a diversity of income and risk, while delivering a full spectrum of advisory, financing and market execution services for our corporate, government and institutional clients.

Environment in which the business operates

The investment banking sector continues to change, driven by regulatory evolution, higher capital requirements and changing client demands. This has resulted in significant differences in the strategic responses from industry peers.

The changes we have made following our strategy update in May 2014 have rebalanced our business mix towards core business lines in which we have competitive strengths and can drive higher returns, while ensuring that we continue to provide a holistic service to our target clients. In January 2016 we announced several complementary initiatives to further support the execution of this strategy (e.g. through certain product and country exits). The Investment Bank continues to make progress on earnings, capital and leverage as set out in the strategy update.

Risks to this business model

The market environment remains challenging, marked by uncertain macro conditions and resource constraints. Alongside structural regulatory change, including new capital and leverage requirements, this has put increasing pressure on the Investment Bank’s ability to deliver returns.

Changes resulting from new and impending regulation will continue to impact our business model. In particular, adapting our business framework in response to structural reform will be a key focus over the coming years as we seek to comply with global structural reform plans.

In addition the business continues to face conduct and litigation risk. We continue to strengthen our control environment, evolve our culture and simplify our products in order to minimise these risks.

Examples of innovations/deals this year

During 2015, the Investment Bank executed several transactions that demonstrate its execution capabilities, connectivity to clients and the strength of the franchise. A few notable examples are listed below.

 

§   Barclays acted as a financial adviser to long-term client Teva Pharmaceutical on its $40.5bn definitive agreement to acquire the Actavis generics business from Allergan

 

§   Barclays executed BHP Billiton’s $6.45bn equivalent five tranche, three currency hybrid capital security
§   Barclays executed large strategic trades for clients including a large FX trade off the back of Tesco’s Korean business disposal and the structuring and issue of the largest MXN Development equity certificate acquired by the Mexican Pension Funds

Review of the year

The Investment Bank continues to make progress on its origination led strategy, building on leading positions in its home markets of the UK and US, while driving cost savings and RWA efficiencies. Annual revenues remained resilient at £7.6bn (2014: £7.6bn) and disciplined capital deployment resulted in lower RWAs of £108bn (2014: £122bn). The PBT for the year improved to £1.6bn (2014: £1.4bn).

We have continued to deliver for our clients by advising on some of the most noteworthy transactions of the year and helping institutional clients navigate the evolving markets landscape:

 

§   Maintained number one position in Greenwich Associates’ annual survey of European fixed income investors for the ninth year in a row

 

§   Advised on several prominent deals of the year, including some of the largest transactions in Consumer, Technology and Pharmaceutical sectors

 

§   Named ‘Bond House of the Year’ by IFR magazine in 2015

Through our business activities, we aim to have a positive impact on our colleagues and the broader communities in which we operate. A few notable results in 2015 are listed below:

 

§   Barclays facilitates the flow of capital towards environmentally and socially beneficial activity, with a range of business lines actively involved in delivering solutions across product groups, geographies and industry sectors. For example, the Investment Bank issued more than £5.6bn (at share) of environmental financings that positively contribute to the low carbon economy

 

§   The Investment Bank participates in a three-year rotational apprenticeship programme which runs across a number of areas of Barclays in the UK. Apprentices will receive a degree-level qualification and a permanent role upon completing the programme

 

§   The internal Employee Survey demonstrates the progress we continue to make in transforming the business and culture. The survey results point to significant improvement in sense of personal accomplishment, belief in Barclays’ goals and strategy, and the likelihood of recommending Barclays as a good place to work

The Investment Bank remains focused on strengthening the Conduct framework. The Conduct Risk committee and the relevant sub-committees ensure conduct considerations are firmly embedded in all business and strategic decisions. In-person and online Conduct Risk training for colleagues is delivered throughout the year.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  23


The activity in our business units reflects our progress

in becoming the partner of choice… continued

 

 

LOGO

 

 

Barclays Non-Core

 

“Barclays Non-Core is responsible for the divestment of Barclays’  non-strategic assets and businesses.”

 

 

 

LOGO

 

Non-Core

 

                 
      Contribution to the Group     2015         2014         
  Income (£m)     (164)        1,050      
  Loss before tax (£m)     (1,459)        (1,180)     
  Adjusted RoE drag (%)     (5.1%)        (5.4%)     
  Risk Weighted Assets (£bn)     46.6         75.3      
            

How the business is structured and what we provide to the Group

Barclays Non-Core (BNC) was formed to oversee the divestment of Barclays’ non-strategic assets and businesses, releasing capital to support strategic growth in our Core business.

BNC brings together businesses and assets that do not fit our client strategy, remain sub-scale with limited growth opportunities, or are challenged by the regulatory capital environment. Non-Core assets have been grouped together in BNC, comprising three main elements: Principal Businesses, Securities and Loans, and Derivatives. Several of the businesses managed within BNC are profitable and will be attractive to other owners.

BNC will be reduced over time, through sale or run-off. Reducing the capital and cost base will help improve Group returns and deliver shareholder value.

Criteria for BNC

Two criteria were used to determine which businesses should be placed in BNC:

 

§   Strategic fit: businesses either not client-driven or operate in areas where we do not have competitive advantage

 

§   Returns on both a CRD IV capital and leverage exposure: capital and/or leverage-intensive businesses, unlikely to meet our target returns over the medium term

At the creation of BNC, almost 80% of BNC RWAs related to the non-core Investment Bank. It included the majority of our commodities and emerging markets businesses, elements of other trading businesses including legacy derivative transactions, and non-strategic businesses. The key non-core portfolios outside the Investment Bank comprised the whole of our European retail business, some European corporate exposures and a small number of Barclaycard and Wealth portfolios.

BNC is run by a dedicated management team operating within a clear governance framework to optimise shareholder value and preserve maximum book value as businesses and assets are divested.

Market environment and risks

To divest BNC successfully we are partly dependent on external market factors. The income from our businesses and assets, the quantum of associated RWAs and finally market appetite for BNC components are all influenced by market environment. In addition, regulatory changes in the treatment of RWAs can significantly impact the ‘stock’ of RWAs.

These factors mean the market environment in which BNC operates can have positive or negative consequences for our planned rundown profile.

BNC maintains a robust risk management framework to mitigate the risks inherent in our businesses and assets. However we may need to take further, currently unforeseen, actions to achieve our rundown objectives which may include incurring additional costs of exit, or a change in direction to our planned rundown trajectory.

Although the emphasis is on bringing down RWAs, reducing costs in BNC is also critical. We are strongly focused on ensuring we reduce both, although this may not always happen simultaneously.

Review of the year

Loss before tax increased 24% to £1,459m driven by continued progress in the exit of businesses, securities and loans, and derivative assets. RWAs reduced £29bn to £47bn including a £10bn reduction in Derivatives, £9bn reduction in Securities and Loans, and Business reductions from the completion of the sales of the Spanish and UK Secured Lending businesses. The announced sales of the Portuguese and Italian retail businesses, which are due to be completed in H116, are expected to result in a further £2.5bn reduction in RWAs.

Total income net of insurance claims reduced to an expense of £164m:

 

§   Businesses income reduced 44% to £613m due to the impact of the sale of the Spanish business and the sale and rundown of legacy portfolio assets

 

§   Securities and Loans income reduced to an expense of £481m primarily driven by fair value losses and funding costs on the ESHLA portfolio, the active rundown of securities, exit of historical investment bank businesses and the non-recurring gain on the sale of the UAE retail banking portfolio in 2014

 

§   Derivatives income reduced 76% to an expense of £296m reflecting active rundown of the portfolios and funding costs

Credit impairment charges improved 54% to £78m due higher recoveries in Europe and the sale of the Spanish business.

Total operating expenses improved 40% to £1,199m reflecting savings from the sale of the Spanish, UAE retail, commodities, and several principal investment businesses, as well as a reduction in costs to achieve, and conduct and litigation charges.

Total assets decreased 36% to £303.1bn with reduced reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending, and lower derivative financial instrument assets.

 

 

24  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Running the company well

Your Board sets strategic direction and

provides oversight and control…

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

John McFarlane

Chairman

 

Chairman’s governance overview

 

  The oversight and constructive challenge provided by the Board is essential to strategic success.”

The Board is responsible to shareholders for creating and delivering sustainable shareholder value by approving the strategic direction of the Group’s businesses. In our pursuit of greater long-term shareholder value, we must maintain the highest standards of corporate governance, which are the foundation on which we manage risk and build the trust of all our stakeholders. The way in which we govern the Group to achieve these standards is set out in our governance framework, described below.

On becoming Chairman in April 2015, I wrote to shareholders setting out the three strategic priorities for the Group: to evolve the strategy to focus on our core segments and markets; to wind down non-core exposures and assets and achieve our target capital levels; and to instil a high performance culture with strong ethical values. To meet these commitments and build a business for the future, your Board has taken decisive action to increase focus, discipline and accountability, as briefly highlighted below.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  25


Your Board sets strategic direction and provides oversight and control…

continued

    

    

 

 

LOGO

 

Focus on core segments and markets

During 2015, your Board emphasised the need to focus resources on areas that matter to the Group and to exit those that do not provide an appropriate return. We approved the revised strategy to unlock greater value from the Investment Bank. We discussed increasing the pace of exit from Non-Core and during 2015 Barclays shrank non-core assets, disposing of a number of businesses or asset portfolios, with a resulting reduction in RWAs. These disposals included the sales of the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian banking networks, the Index business, FirstPlus mortgages, the Wealth business in the US and UK Secured Lending.

Generate shareholder value

While we recognise the importance of dividends in delivering returns to shareholders, we have decided it would be prudent to scale back dividends in 2016 and 2017. We are focused on improving returns to enable future increases in the dividend and to fund growth. We also progressed a number of options for increasing capital accretion over the level achieved in recent years, including the release of capital from underperforming business areas and a reduction in expenses driven by savings from strategic cost programmes. The benefit from the latter, however, was impacted by the costs of legacy conduct issues. In addition, we explored a number of new ways to improve the cost:income ratio, such as the increased deployment of technology in our core businesses.

Instil a high performance culture with strong ethical values

To ensure we have the right balance of skills and experience to drive the Group’s strategy to completion, we appointed new non-executive Directors during 2015, in addition to the appointment of Jes Staley as the new Group Chief Executive. As Chairman, I strive to instil a performance culture with increased personal accountability to enable the organisation to become more efficient and agile. Progress reports on our cultural transformation during the year revealed that the factors contributing to execution risk mainly derive from fairly simple cultural issues. As a result your Board recommended a high-level single view of the portfolio of key strategic initiatives to manage dependencies, harness potential synergies and increase the speed of completion.

 

LOGO

John McFarlane

Chairman

29 February 2016

 

LOGO   

You can read more about the work of your Board and its Committees in the Governance section on home.barclays/annualreport

Our corporate governance framework

What your Board does and how it does it underpins the delivery of long-term sustainable success. This creates the framework within which the Executive can lead the business and deliver the agreed strategy.

Leadership

Your Board provides challenge, oversight and advice to ensure that Barclays is doing the right things in the right way. Your Board is also attentive to the need to cultivate future leaders and ensure that robust succession plans are in place.

Effectiveness

Your Board requires the right balance of expertise, skills, experience and perspectives to be effective. It also needs to have the right information, at the right time, so that it can engage deeply on how the business is operating, how the Executive is performing and fully understand the risks and major challenges the business is facing. The performance of your Board, its Committees and each of the Directors is scrutinised each year in the Board Effectiveness Review.

Risk management and control

Understanding and managing our risks and continuously improving our controls are central to the delivery of our strategic aims. Your Board’s risk committees play an active role in ensuring that Barclays undertakes well-measured, profitable risk-taking activity that supports long-term sustainable growth. During 2015, we simplified and streamlined the structure of the Board’s risk committees. We disbanded the Board Enterprise Wide Risk Committee and your Board assumed responsibility for oversight of enterprise wide risk. We also revised the responsibilities of the other Board-level risk committees so that the Board Risk Committee took on responsibility for oversight of the capital and financial implications of operational risk.

Remuneration

Your Board seeks to ensure that remuneration decisions are aligned with and support the achievement of long-term value creation.

Engagement

Barclays’ wider societal responsibilities means it is attentive to a broad set of stakeholders. Your Board undertakes regular engagement with shareholders, investors and other stakeholders to maintain strong relationships.

Your Board

John McFarlane (68) Group Chairman

Jes Staley (59) Group Chief Executive; Executive Director

Sir Gerry Grimstone (66) Deputy Chairman and

Senior Independent Director

Mike Ashley (61) Non-executive Director

Tim Breedon (58) Non-executive Director

Crawford Gillies (59) Non-executive Director

Reuben Jeffery III (62) Non-executive Director

Wendy Lucas-Bull (62) Non-executive Director

Tushar Morzaria (47) Group Finance Director; Executive Director

Dambisa Moyo (47) Non-executive Director

Frits van Paasschen (54) Non-executive Director

Diane de Saint Victor (61) Non-executive Director

Diane Schueneman (63) Non-executive Director

Steve Thieke (69) Non-executive Director

 

 

26  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


                

                

                        

 

 

LOGO

 

 

Board diversity

Your Board’s overriding duty is to ensure it is strong and effective, with strong and effective Directors. All appointments to your Board are therefore made on merit, taking into account the collective balance of skills, experience and diversity that the Board requires. Our Board Diversity Policy, which is available at home.barclays, sets out our policy and objectives for achieving diversity on your Board. At the end of 2015, there were four women on your Board (29%), compared to our target of 25% by the end of 2015.

Noting that the latest progress report on women on boards from the Davies Review has suggested a target of at least 33% by 2020, your Board has adopted this new target in its Board Diversity Policy.

 

LOGO    Gender balance

 

   31.12.15       4 Female Directors (29%)
         10 Male Directors (71%)
  

 

31.12.14

  

 

   3 Female Directors (21%)

         11 Male Directors (79%)
  

 

31.12.13

  

 

   3 Female Directors (20%)

         12 Male Directors (80%)
  

 

31.12.12

  

 

   1 Female Director (8%)

         11 Male Directors (92%)

Viability statement

While the financial statements and accounts have been prepared on a going concern basis, the UK Corporate Governance Code requires the Directors to make a statement in the Annual Report with regard to the viability of the Group, including explaining how they have assessed the prospects of the Group, the period of time for which they have made the assessment and why they consider that period to be appropriate.

In considering the viability of the Group, the Board has carried out a regular and robust assessment of the Group’s risk profile across the five principal risks and the material existing and emerging risks. The material existing and emerging risks considered include those risks that senior management believe could cause the Group’s future results of operations, financial condition and prospects to differ materially from current expectations, including the ability to meet dividend expectations, ability to maintain appropriate levels of capital and meet capital and leverage ratio targets, and achieve stated targets and commitments as outlined in the Strategy section. The assessment also considered the Group’s resilience to the threats to its viability posed by those risks in certain stress scenarios.

In addition to the robust assessment described above, the Board considered management’s working capital and viability report dated 15 February 2016. As part of this report, the Board considered a forecast of Barclays’ Group CET1 ratio trajectory to December 2018, a forecast of the leverage ratio trajectory, the Tier 1 and total capital ratio and the build-up of loss absorbing capacity. The Board also considered the liquidity and funding profile of the Group as expressed by Barclays’ internal liquidity risk appetite (LRA) and regulatory liquidity coverage and stable funding ratios. In addition, the review included an up-to-date assessment of financial risks, including market and credit risk, and a review of operational and conduct risk. The latest internal stress test conducted in February 2016 was also reviewed, including consideration of the potential for management and strategic actions in the event stresses were to materialise. The spot position and forecast trajectory of solvency and liquidity ratios, as well as financial and non-financial risks, were considered in line with risk appetite. The report also included solvency and liquidity forecasts of key legal entities, on a post structural reform basis. The Board and Board Risk Committee frequently review and monitor solvency ratios and the risk profile.

Information relevant to the Board’s assessment of the Group’s viability can be found in the following sections of the Annual Report:

§   pages 119 to 126 in the Annual Report 2015, which provide details of the material existing and emerging risks that the Board believes could threaten the Group’s business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity;

 

§   pages 143 to 215 in the Annual Report 2015, which provide a review of the performance of the Group against each of the five principal risks;

 

§   pages 127 to 142 in the Annual Report 2015, which provide an overview of the Group’s approach to risk management, its control and governance systems and how such risks may be mitigated;

 

§   pages 217 to 241 in the Annual Report 2015, which review the performance of Barclays, including key performance indicators and the contributions made by each of its businesses to the overall performance of the Group;

 

§   pages 243 to 347 in the Annual Report 2015, which give a detailed analysis of the statutory accounts and in-depth disclosure of the financial performance of the Group.

In its review of the information outlined above, the Board has been particularly focused on the implementation of structural reform, legacy conduct matters and the impact of a Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL). The potential impacts of these risks have been estimated and included within the Medium-Term Plans, and working capital report. The review and analysis of this information enables the Directors to confirm they have a reasonable expectation of the Group’s viability over the next three years. This period covers the period used for the Group’s medium-term capital plans and projections and has been selected as it provides management and the Board sufficient and realistic visibility of the future industry environment. During this projected three year period, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that Barclays will continue to operate and meet its liabilities as they fall due.

In assessing the Group’s viability over the next three years, it is recognised that all future assessments are subject to a level of uncertainty that increases with time and that future outcomes cannot be guaranteed or predicted with any certainty. The Board’s assessment of the Group’s viability over the next three years is also subject to the risk factors highlighted on pages 119 to 126 in the Annual Report 2015 and in particular those items of focus referenced above, all of which could have an impact on the future performance of Barclays.

 

LOGO  

Read more in the Governance section at home.barclays/corporategovernance

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  27


Running the Company well

…with a relevant and balanced

remuneration framework…

 

 

LOGO

 

 

LOGO

 

2015 incentives

The Board Remuneration Committee’s priorities are to ensure that Barclays pays for sustainable performance, aligns remuneration with risk and delivers a greater proportion of the income we generate to our shareholders.

Performance and pay

The Committee’s 2015 pay decisions took full consideration of financial performance, both on an adjusted and a statutory basis, and non-financial performance including progress towards the 2018 targets within the Balanced Scorecard. The Committee also recognised the need to improve returns to shareholders and to accelerate delivery. We are committed to moving this forward in a manner that is consistent with Barclays’ Values to ensure that legacy events are not repeated.

Although there were improvements in the Core operating businesses with Core adjusted profit before tax up 3%, Group adjusted profit before tax was down 2% to £5,403m for 2015. Group statutory profit before tax was down 8% at £2,073m. The Group’s capital position has continued to strengthen with a CRD IV fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio of 11.4% and a leverage ratio of 4.5% at the end of the year. Cost targets have been met and Barclays Non-Core has made significant progress in reducing its risk weighted assets.

Against this background, the Group incentive pool for 2015 is again significantly lower than in prior years, down by £191m or 10% in absolute terms at £1,669m compared to the incentive pool of £1,860m for 2014.

Similarly, the 2015 Investment Bank incentive pool is down 7%, despite the Investment Bank’s adjusted profit before tax increasing by 17%.

Total compensation costs are down 6%, and the compensation to adjusted net income ratio is 37.2%, down from 37.7% in 2014. The Core compensation to adjusted net income ratio is also down at 34.7% (2014: 35.7%).

Risk and conduct

A central feature of our remuneration philosophy is that remuneration must be aligned with risk, and with the conduct expectations of Barclays, our regulators and stakeholders. The Group incentive pool outlined above is after adjustments the Committee has made for both risk and conduct events. In addition to specific risk and conduct events, we also adjusted the incentive pool to take account of an overall assessment of a wide range of future risks, non-financial factors that can support the delivery of a strong conduct culture and other factors including reputation, impact on customers, markets and other stakeholders.

We have a robust process for considering risk and conduct issues as part of individual performance management reviews with outcomes reflected in individual incentive decisions. Individuals who are directly or indirectly accountable for risk and conduct events have had their remuneration adjusted as appropriate. This includes reductions in current year bonus levels and reductions in vesting amounts of deferred awards through the application of malus. Further details can be found on page 89 in the Annual Report 2015.

 

 

28  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

LOGO

 

Summary Remuneration report

The full Remuneration Report can be found on pages 83 to 116 in the Annual Report 2015. The Remuneration report (other than the part containing the Directors’ Remuneration Policy) will be subject to an advisory vote by shareholders at the 2016 AGM.

Executive team

2015 saw a change in Group Chief Executive. The Company announced on 28 October 2015 that Jes Staley was to become Group Chief Executive with effect from 1 December 2015. He was appointed on a salary of £1,200,000 and Role Based Pay of £1,150,000 commensurate with market pay levels. The Committee approved the grant of a share ‘buy-out’ award to compensate him for an unvested share award granted to him by a previous employer which was forfeited as a result of him joining Barclays. The award was made on terms aligned to the forfeited award. Jes Staley satisfied, at the date of joining, the executive Directors’ shareholding requirement of four times salary through his personal purchase of 2,790,000 Barclays shares.

During the four month period between Antony Jenkins’ departure as Group Chief Executive and Jes Staley starting in the role, John McFarlane served as Executive Chairman. John McFarlane indicated to the Committee that he did not wish his remuneration to be increased during that time and therefore his fee remained unchanged for the period during which he served as Executive Chairman.

The Committee also approved compensation arrangements on Antony Jenkins’ departure as Group Chief Executive during the year. Further details can be found on page 101 in the Annual Report 2015.

2015 remuneration

The following tables show a single total figure for 2015 remuneration in respect of qualifying service for each executive and non-executive Director together with comparative figures for 2014.

Executive Directors: Single total figure for 2015 remuneration (audited)

 

      

 

Salary

£000

  

  

    

 

Role Based Pay

£000

  

  

    

 

Taxable benefits

£000

  

  

     

Annual bonus

£000

  

  

    

 

LTIP

£000

  

  

    

 

Pension

£000

  

  

 

Total

£000

  

  

           2015         2014             2015             2014           2015         2014              2015           2014         2015         2014             2015             2014            2015          2014   

Antony Jenkinsa

     598         1,100         516         950         89         100          505         1,100         1,494         1,854         197         363         3,399        5,467   

Tushar Morzaria

     800         800         750         750         82         95          701         900                         200         200         2,533        2,745   

Jes Staleyb

     100                 96                 48                                                        33                   277            

Notes

a The 2015 figures for Antony Jenkins relate to the period to 16 July 2015 when he ceased to be a Director, save in the case of the LTIP which relates to the whole performance period.
b The 2015 figures for Jes Staley relate to the period from 1 December 2015 when he joined the Board as Group Chief Executive.

John McFarlane was appointed Executive Chairman from 17 July 2015 to 30 November 2015. Details of his fees are provided on page 31.

Additional information in respect of 2015 remuneration for the executive Directors (audited)

Role Based Pay (RBP)

Executive Directors receive RBP which is delivered quarterly in shares, subject to a holding period with restrictions lifting over five years (20% each year). The value shown in the above table is of shares at the date awarded.

Taxable benefits

Taxable benefits include private medical cover, life and ill health income protection, tax advice, relocation, home leave related costs, car allowance and the use of a company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes and other benefits that are considered minor in nature.

Annual bonus

Annual bonuses are discretionary and are typically awarded in Q1 following the financial year to which they relate. The 2015 bonus awards reflect the Committee’s assessment of the extent to which the executive Directors achieved their Financial (50% weighting) and Balanced Scorecard (35% weighting) performance measures, and their personal objectives (15% weighting). A summary of the assessment against the performance measures is provided below. For more information please see pages 93 and 94 in the Annual Report 2015. Jes Staley was not eligible for a 2015 bonus.

Financial (50% weighting)

 

Performance measure

     Weighting          

 

Threshold

25%

 

  

      

 

Maximum

100%

 

  

      

 

2015

Actual

  

  

      

 

2015

Outcome

  

  

Financial

                      

Adjusted profit before tax

     20%           £5,801m           £7,022m           £5,403m           0.0%   

Adjusted costs (ex CTA)

     10%           £16,780m           £15,182m           £16,205m           5.2%   

CET1 ratio

     10%           10.47%           11.34%           11.4%           10.0%   

Leverage ratio

     10%           4.17%           4.72%           4.5%           6.9%   

Total Financial

     50%                                            22.1%   

The approach taken to assessing financial performance against each of the financial measures is based on a straight line outcome between 25% for threshold performance and 100% applicable to each measure for achievement of maximum performance.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  29


…with a relevant and balanced remuneration framework… continued

 

 

LOGO

 

 

Balanced Scorecard (35% weighting)

Progress in relation to each of the five ‘Cs’ of the Balanced Scorecard was assessed by the Committee. The Committee took an approach based on a three-point scale in relation to each measure, with 0% to 3% for ‘below’ target, 4% or 5% for ‘met’ target, and 6% or 7% for ‘above’ target progress against a particular Balanced Scorecard component.

 

Balanced Scorecard – 5Cs

     Weighting         Metric     
 
2015
Target
  
  
    
 
2015
Actual
  
  
  

2015

Assessment

  

2015  

Outcome out  

of maximum  

7% for each ‘C’  

Customer and Client

     7%        

PCB, Barclaycard and Africa Banking weighted average ranking of Relationship Net Promoter Score v peer sets

Client Franchise Risk

     4th         4th       Met target   
                    4.0%  
                     5th         5th       Met target     

Colleague

     7%         Sustained engagement of colleagues’ score      82-88%         75%       Below target    2.0%  
                % women in senior leadership      23%         23%       Met target   

Citizenship

     7%         Citizenship Plan – initiatives      11/11         10/11       Below target    3.0%  

Conduct

     7%         Conduct Reputation (YouGov Survey)      5.6/10             5.4/10       Below target    3.0%  

Company

     7%         Adjusted return on equity      5.9%         4.9%       Below target    3.0%  
                CET1 ratio      11.0%         11.4%           Above target   

Total Balanced Scorecard

     35%                                     15.0%  

Personal objectives (15% weighting)

(i) Antony Jenkins: The Committee recognised that during the first half of the year Antony Jenkins showed full commitment to continuing to embed a customer and client focused culture backed by the Barclays Values and to delivering on financial commitments with particular focus on capital accretion, reducing costs and continuing the rundown of Non-Core. The Committee judged that 11% of a maximum of 15% was appropriate.

 

(ii) Tushar Morzaria: The Committee concluded that Tushar Morzaria had delivered a strong personal performance throughout the year, and noted that during the second half of the year (pending Jes Staley’s arrival) this was achieved while discharging considerably increased executive responsibilities. During 2015, Tushar Morzaria continued to drive transformational change, played a significant role in the improvement in the Bank’s capital position and in driving further focus on close and effective cost management. The Committee judged that 13% of a maximum of 15% was appropriate.

Overall summary

The performance assessment for Antony Jenkins resulted in an overall formulaic outcome of 48.1% of maximum bonus opportunity being achieved. Antony Jenkins’ resulting 2015 bonus, pro-rated for service, is £505,000. The formulaic outcome for Tushar Morzaria was 50.1% of maximum bonus opportunity. Tushar Morzaria’s resulting 2015 bonus is £701,000.

60% of each executive Director’s 2015 bonus will be deferred in the form of a share award under the Share Value Plan vesting over three years with one third vesting each year. 20% will be paid in cash and 20% delivered in shares. All shares (whether deferred or not deferred) are subject to a further six month holding period from the point of release. 2015 bonuses are subject to clawback provisions and, additionally, unvested deferred 2015 bonuses are subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of deferred bonuses (including to nil).

LTIP

The LTIP amount included in Antony Jenkins’ 2015 single total figure is the value of the amount scheduled to be released in relation to the LTIP award granted in 2013 in respect of performance period 2013-2015. Tushar Morzaria and Jes Staley were not participants in this cycle. The performance achieved against the performance targets is as follows.

 

Performance measure

   Weighting        Threshold   

Maximum vesting

   Actual      % of award vesting

Return on risk weighted assets (RoRWA)

   50%    13% of award vests for average annual RoRWA of 1.1%   

Average annual RoRWA of 1.6%

   0.21%      0%

Loan loss rate

   30%    10% of award vests for average annual loan loss rate of 75bps   

Average annual loan loss rate of 60bps or below

   53bps      30%

Balanced Scorecard

   20%    Performance was assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting.    See page 93 of the
Annual Report 2015
     9%

The Committee was also satisfied that the discretionary underpin in respect of the underlying financial health of the Group based on profit before tax was met, and accordingly determined that 39% of the maximum number of shares under the total award should be considered for release in March 2016. After release, the shares are subject to an additional two year holding period.

Pension

Executive Directors are paid cash in lieu of pension contributions. This is market practice for senior executives in comparable roles.

 

30  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

LOGO

 

2016 remuneration

The introduction of new deferral and LTIP requirements in the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook and EBA Guidelines will require some structural changes as to how the approved Directors’ remuneration policy will be implemented in 2016. It is therefore our intent to consult with shareholders over proposed changes once formulated. The following summarises how the approved Directors’ remuneration policy would be implemented in 2016 under the current framework.

 

       Fixed pay         Annual Bonus         Long term incentive plan   
             Salary             Role Based Pay                 Pension         
       £000         £000         £000                     

Jes Staley

     1,200         1,150         396                 Maximum 80% of fixed pay                 Maximum 120% of fixed pay     

 

Tushar Morzaria

     800         750         200             Maximum 80% of fixed pay                 Maximum 120% of fixed pay     

Salary, Role Based Pay, pension and benefits are unchanged from 2015.

Chairman and non-executive Directors: Single total figure for 2015 fees (audited)

 

       Fees         Benefits         Total
     2015         2014         2015         2014         2015       2014  
                   £000                     £000                     £000                     £000                     £000                   £000  

Chairman

                 

John McFarlanea

     628                 11                 639       –  

Sir David Walkerb

     285         750         6         19         291       769  

Non-executive Directors

                 

Mike Ashley

     207         213                         207       213  

Tim Breedon

     232         240                         232       240  

Crawford Gilliesc

     178         91                         178       91  

Reuben Jeffery III

     135         160                         135       160  

Wendy Lucas-Bulld

     358         367                         358       367  

Dambisa Moyo

     152         151                         152       151  

Frits van Paasschen

     88         80                         88       80  

Sir Michael Rakee

     250         250                         250       250  

Diane de Saint Victor

     135         135                         135       135  

Diane Schuenemanf,k

     74                                 74       –  

Sir John Sunderlandg

     60         190                         60       190  

Steve Thiekeh,k

     184         131                         184       131  

Fulvio Contii

             37                               37  

Simon Fraserj

             47                               47  

Total

     2,966         2,842         17         19         2,983       2,861  

Non-executive Directors are reimbursed expenses that are incurred for business reasons. Any tax that arises on these reimbursed expenses is paid by Barclays. The Chairman is provided with private medical cover and the use of a company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes.

Notes

a John McFarlane joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 1 January 2015 and as Chairman from 24 April 2015. The total includes non-executive Director fees of £78,000 for the period from 1 January 2015 to 24 April 2015.
b Sir David Walker retired from the Board with effect from 23 April 2015.
c Crawford Gillies joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 1 May 2014.
d The 2014 figure has been updated to include fees received by Wendy Lucas-Bull for her role as Chairman of Barclays Africa Group Limited. The 2015 figure includes fees received by her in 2015 for that role.
e Sir Michael Rake retired from the Board with effect from 31 December 2015.
f Diane Schueneman joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 25 June 2015.
g Sir John Sunderland retired from the Board with effect from 23 April 2015.
h Steve Thieke joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 7 January 2014.
i Fulvio Conti retired from the Board with effect from 24 April 2014.
j Simon Fraser retired from the Board with effect from 24 April 2014.
k Diane Schueneman and Steve Thieke both served in 2015 on the US Governance Review Board, which is an advisory board set up as the forerunner of the board of our US intermediate holding company which will be implemented during 2016. The 2015 figures for Diane Schueneman and Steve Thieke include fees of $37,500 and $75,000 for these roles respectively.

Regulatory developments

The PRA made revisions to the Remuneration part of its Rulebook (formerly the UK Remuneration Code) during 2015 which apply from 1 January 2016. These include the seven, five and three year ‘tiered’ deferral requirements for Senior Managers and different categories of Material Risk Taker (MRT) respectively, and the potential extension of the clawback period to ten years for Senior Managers (under certain circumstances). These changes, which apply globally to Barclays as a UK headquartered bank, further emphasise the competitive disadvantages attributable to the lack of a global level regulatory ‘playing field’.

Further revisions to the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook are required during 2016 for the European Banking Authority’s (EBA) final Guidelines on sound remuneration policies. The most significant changes include a prohibition on the payment of dividends on deferred shares and an increase to a one year (from six months) holding period for incentive awards delivered in shares to the large majority of MRTs. The Guidelines apply from 1 January 2017. The application of the Guidelines to UK firms, once confirmed by the PRA and FCA, will contribute to changes to our Directors’ remuneration policy in 2017.

Agenda for 2016

In line with legal requirements, we will be seeking shareholder approval for our Directors’ remuneration policy at the 2017 AGM. As a Committee, we will review our remuneration policy to ensure that future arrangements are fully aligned to our strategy to accelerate delivery to shareholders in a manner consistent with Barclays’ Values and also to meet new regulatory requirements. This will be developed over the coming months and we will engage constructively with shareholders and regulators as we do so.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  31


Running the company well

…underpinned by solid capital footings.

    

 

 

LOGO

 

    

LOGO

 

The financial statements of the business not only allow analysis of the key financial information in a standardised format, but are important to help understand the performance and management of the business.

The key performance indicators (KPIs) used by management to measure our progress are set out on pages 4 to 7 and summarised below. These KPIs focus on the Group’s financial strength, the delivery of sustainable returns and cost management.

    2015   2014   
  Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio   11.40%   10.30%  
  Leverage ratio   4.50%   3.70%  

  Return on average shareholders’ equity (RoE)

  4.90%   5.10%  

  Operating expenses excluding costs to achieve

  £16,205m       £16,904m  
  Non-Core RWAs   £47bn   £75bn  
 

 

32  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


 

LOGO

 

 

Performance commentary:

2015 results were characterised by further the continued execution of the strategy.

Group capital and leverage ratios continued to strengthen. The fully loaded common equity tier 1 (CET1) ratio increased 110 basis points to 11.4% driven by a reduction in risk weighted assets of £44bn to £358bn. The leverage ratio increased 80 basis points to 4.5% driven by a reduction in leverage exposure of £205bn to £1,028bn.

Strong progress on the rundown of the Non-Core business continued, with a further reduction in risk weighted assets of £29bn to £47bn contributing to the increase in the CET1 ratio. Non-Core leverage exposure decreased to £121bn (2014: £277bn). The announced sales of the Portuguese and Italian retail businesses in H215, due to be completed in H116, are expected to result in a further £2.5bn reduction in Non-Core risk weighted assets. Non-Core period end allocated equity reduced to £7bn (2014: £11bn).

The accelerated rundown of the Non-Core business resulted in a 2% reduction in Group adjusted profit before tax to £5,403m due to a 24% increase in the Non-Core loss before tax to £1,459m.

The Core business performed well reflecting continued strategic progress. This resulted in a 3% increase in profit before tax to £6,862m, with improvements in all Core operating businesses, including Africa Banking on a constant currency basis.

The improved profit before tax in the Core business was driven by positive cost to income jaws across all Core operating businesses. Combined with the increase in average allocated equity of £5bn to £47bn, this resulted in a return on average equity for the Core business of 9.0% (2014: 9.2%) and a the return on average tangible equity of 10.9% (2014: 11.3%). Group adjusted return on average equity was 4.9% (2014: 5.1%).

Driving efficiency remains a significant focus for the Group, with total adjusted operating expenses reducing 6% to £16,998m. Adjusted operating expenses excluding costs to achieve reduced 4% to £16,205m, driven by savings from strategic cost programmes.

Statutory profit before tax reduced 8% to £2,073m after absorbing net losses on adjusting items of £3,330m (2014: £3,246m).

A final dividend for 2015 of 3.5p per share will be paid, resulting in a total 6.5p dividend per share for the year

2015 Adjusting items to income statement

In order to provide a more consistent basis for comparing business performance between periods, management assess performance on both an adjusted and statutory basis. Adjusted measures exclude items considered to be significant but not representative of the underlying business performance and are detailed below.

 

Adjusted profit reconciliation

 

2015 

£m 

 

2014 

£m 

Adjusted profit before tax

  5,403    5,502 

Provisions for UK customer redress

  (2,772)   (1,110)

Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

  (1,237)   (1,250)

Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses

  (580)   (446)

Gain on US Lehman acquisition assets

  496    461 

Own credit

  430    34 

Gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability

  429    – 

Impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed

  (96)   – 

Revision of ESHLA valuation methodology

  –    (935)

Statutory profit before tax

  2,073    2,256 

 

 

 

 

LOGO

   These financial highlights provide an overview of 2015 performance. For further information on the results of the Group, please see our Financial review on page 217 of the Annual Report 2015 at home.barclays/annualreport

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  33


Running the company well

Consolidated income statement

    

 

 

LOGO

 

 

For the year ended 31 December

    

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

 

2014  

£m  

Continuing operations

    

Interest income

     17,201       17,363  

Interest expense

     (4,643)      (5,283) 

Net interest income

     12,558       12,080  

Fee and commission income

     9,655       9,836  

Fee and commission expense

     1,763       (1,662) 

Net fee and commission income

     7,892       8,174  

Net trading income

     3,623       3,331  

Net investment income

     1,138       1,328  

Net premiums from insurance contracts

     709       669  

Other income

     67       186  

Total income

     25,987       25,768  

Net claims and benefits incurred on insurance contracts

     (533)      (480) 

Total income net of insurance claims

     25,454       25,288  

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

     (2,114)      (2,168) 

Net operating income

     23,340       23,120  

Staff costs

     (9,960)      (11,005) 

Infrastructure costs

     (3,180)      (3,443) 

Administration and general expenses

     (3,528)      (3,621) 

Provision for UK customer redress

     (2,772)      (1,110) 

Provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

     (1,237)      (1,250) 

Operating expenses

     (20,677)      (20,429) 

Share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures

     47       36  

(Loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures

     (637)      (471) 

Profit before tax

     2,073       2,256  

Taxation

     (1,450)      (1,411) 

Profit after tax

     623       845  

Attributable to:

            

Equity holders of the parent

     (394)      (174) 

Other equity holders

     345       250  

Total equity holders

     (49)      76  

Non-controlling interests

     672       769  

Profit after tax

     623       845  
            p  

Earnings per share

    

Basic (loss)/earnings per share

     (1.9)      (0.7) 

Diluted (loss)/earnings per share

     (1.9)      (0.7) 

 

34  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Running the company well

Consolidated balance sheet

        

 

 

LOGO

 

 

As at 31 December

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

 

2014 

£m 

Assets

    

Cash and balances at central banks

     49,711      39,695 

Items in the course of collection from other banks

     1,011      1,210 

Trading portfolio assets

     77,348      114,717 

Financial assets designated at fair value

     76,830      38,300 

Derivative financial instruments

     327,709      439,909 

Available for sale investments

     90,267      86,066 

Loans and advances to banks

     41,349      42,111 

Loans and advances to customers

     399,217      427,767 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

     28,187      131,753 

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

     3,010      3,607 

Investments in associates and joint ventures

     573      711 

Property, plant and equipment

     3,468      3,786 

Goodwill and intangible assets

     8,222      8,180 

Current tax assets

     415      334 

Deferred tax assets

     4,495      4,130 

Retirement benefit assets

     836      56 

Non current assets classified as held for sale

     7,364      15,574 

Total assets

     1,120,012      1,357,906 

Liabilities

    

Deposits from banks

     47,080      58,390 

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

     1,013      1,177 

Customer accounts

     418,242      427,704 

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

     25,035      124,479 

Trading portfolio liabilities

     33,967      45,124 

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

     91,745      56,972 

Derivative financial instruments

     324,252      439,320 

Debt securities in issue

     69,150      86,099 

Subordinated liabilities

     21,467      21,153 

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

     10,610      11,423 

Provisions

     4,142      4,135 

Current tax liabilities

     903      1,021 

Deferred tax liabilities

     122      262 

Retirement benefit liabilities

     423      1,574 

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale

     5,997      13,115 

Total liabilities

     1,054,148      1,291,948 

Total equity

    

Called up share capital and share premium

     21,586      20,809 

Other equity instruments

     5,305      4,322 

Other reserves

     1,898      2,724 

Retained earnings

     31,021      31,712 

Total equity excluding non-controlling interests

     59,810      59,567 

Non-controlling interests

     6,054      6,391 

Total equity

     65,864      65,958 

Total liabilities and equity

     1,120,012      1,357,906 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  35


Your Barclays shareholding

Shareholder information

    

 

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

Key dates

 

5 April 2016

Final dividend payment date

 

27 April 2016

Q1 Results Announcement

 

28 April 2016

Annual General Meeting

 

19 September 2016a

Interim dividend payment date

 

 

Annual General Meeting (AGM)

This year’s AGM will be held at the Royal Festival Hall,

Southbank Centre, Belvedere Road, London SE1 8XX

on Thursday, 28 April 2016 at 11.00am.

The Chairman and Chief Executive will update shareholders on our performance in 2015 and our goals for 2016. Shareholders will also have the opportunity to ask the Board questions at the meeting.

 

LOGO

 

LOGO   

You can find out more at

home.barclays/agm

 

Returning funds to shareholders

 

Over 60,000 shareholders did not cash their Rights Issue cheques which were sent out in September 2013.

 

During 2015, we conducted a tracing process to reunite these shareholders with their monies together with any unclaimed dividends. At the end of 2015, we had returned over £2.2m to our shareholders.

 

 

 

Note

a Please note that this date is provisional and subject to change.

Dividends

We have declared a final dividend of 3.5 pence per share, making 6.5 pence in total for 2015. However, we intend to pay a dividend of 3.0 pence for both 2016 and 2017. This will help us accelerate the imperative rundown of Non-Core. We recognise the importance of paying a meaningful dividend as part of total shareholder returns and are committed to doing so in the future. We will pay dividends semi-annually from 2016 rather than quarterly.

How do Barclays shareholders receive their dividends?

As at 31 December 2015, Barclays shareholders received their dividends in the following ways:

 

LOGO  

    1 Direct to your bank account

    2 Cheque

    3 Scrip dividend programme (new shares)

  52%

27%

21%

   
   

You can choose how you would like to receive your Barclays dividends – save time and receive your dividends faster

You can have your dividends paid directly into your bank or building society account. It is easy to set up and your money will be in your bank account on the dividend payment date. If you hold 2,500 shares or less, you can provide your bank or building society details quickly and easily over the telephone using the Equiniti contact details overleaf. If you hold more than 2,500 shares, please write to Equiniti.

Scrip Dividend Programme (the Programme)

Shareholders can choose to have their dividends reinvested in new ordinary Barclays shares through the Programme. More information, including the Programme Terms and Conditions and application form, are available on our website.

 

LOGO   

To find out more, contact Equiniti or visit

home.barclays/dividends

 

 

Donation to charity

 

We launched a special share dealing service in October 2015 for shareholders holding 4,000 shares or less. Shareholders could donate their sale proceeds to ShareGift if they wished. Our shareholders donated nearly £130,000.

 

Action for shareholders

Keep your personal details up to date

Please remember to tell Equiniti if:

 

§   You move house

 

§   You need to update your bank or building society details.

If you are a Shareview member, you can update your bank or building society account or address details online. If you hold 2,500 shares or less, you can update details quickly and easily over the telephone using the Equiniti contact details overleaf. If you hold more than 2,500 shares you will need to write to Equiniti. You must provide a copy of your share certificate, Sharestore statement or most recent dividend tax voucher. If these are not available, you will need to provide a copy of a utility bill or bank statement dated in the last three months.

 

 

36  |  Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015    home.barclays/annualreport


Shareholder information continued

    

    

 

 

Managing your shares online

Shareview

An increasing number of Barclays shareholders go online to manage their shareholding and find out about Barclays’ performance.

By joining Shareview, you:

 

§   will receive the latest updates from Barclays direct by email

 

§   can update your address and bank details online

 

§   can vote in advance of general meetings.

 

LOGO

 

 

To join Shareview, please follow these 3 easy steps:

   
Step 1    Go to shareview.co.uk
   
Step 2   

Register for electronic communications

by following the instructions on screen

   

Step 3

 

  

You will be sent an activation code

in the post the next working day

 

Shareholder security

Shareholders should be wary of any cold calls with an offer to buy or sell shares. These fraudsters use persuasive and high-pressure techniques to lure shareholders into high-risk investments or scams. You should treat any unsolicited calls with caution.

Please keep in mind that firms authorised by the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) are unlikely to contact you out of the blue. You should consider getting independent financial or professional advice from someone unconnected to the respective firm before you hand over any money.

 

LOGO

   Report a scam. If you suspect you have been approached by fraudsters please tell the FCA using the share fraud reporting form at fca.org.uk/scams. You can also call the FCA Helpline on 0800 111 6768 or through Action Fraud on 0300 123 2040.

Equiniti

 

LOGO

   The Barclays share register is maintained by Equiniti. If you have any questions about your Barclays shares, please contact Equiniti: shareview.co.uk

Equiniti

 

LOGO

  

0371 384 2055a (in the UK)

+44 121 415 7004 (from overseas)

0371 384 2255a (for the hearing impaired in the UK)

+44 121 415 7028 (for the hearing impaired from overseas)

LOGO

  

Aspect House

Spencer Road

Lancing

West Sussex

BN99 6DA

Shareholder Relations

 

LOGO

   To give us your feedback or if you have any questions, please contact: privateshareholderrelations@barclays.com

Shareholder Relations

 

LOGO

  

Barclays PLC

1 Churchill Place

London

E14 5HP

American Depositary Receipts (ADRs)

 

LOGO

   If you have any questions about ADRs, please contact J.P. Morgan: jpmorgan.adr@wellsfargo.com or visit adr.com

J.P. Morgan Shareholder Services

 

LOGO

  

+1 800 990 1135 (toll free in US and Canada)

+1 651 453 2128 (outside the US and Canada)

LOGO

  

JPMorgan Chase Bank N.A.

PO Box 64504

St Paul

MN 55165-0854

USA

Share price

 

LOGO

 

  

Information on the Barclays share price and other share price tools are available at: home.barclays/investorrelations

 

 

Alternative formats

  LOGO  

   Shareholder documents can be provided in large print, audio CD or braille free of charge by calling Equiniti.

 0371 384 2055a (in the UK)

 +44 121 415 7004 (from overseas)

  Audio versions of the Strategic Report will   also be available at the AGM.

 

 

Note

 

a Lines open 8.30am to 5.30pm Monday to Friday, excluding public holidays.
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Strategic Report 2015  |  37


LOGO

Front cover:

Everledger

Founded in 2015, Everledger is a global and permanent ledger for diamond certification and related transaction history. Utilising blockchain, Machine Learning and detection methodologies, Everledger has developed a system of warranties that enables industry to track, verify and certify diamonds alongside other luxury goods. Everledger participated in the London 2015 Barclays Accelerator Programme.

Featured in the photo, left to right:

Leanne Kemp, Everledger CEO & Founder and

Eser Torun, Director, Senior Relationship Management Team

 

 

 

 

LOGO

This Report is printed on Cocoon Preprint made from 100% FSC® Recycled certified fibre sourced from de-inked post-consumer waste. The printer and the manufacturing mill are both credited with ISO14001 Environmental Management Systems Standard and both are FSC® certified. By printing this publication on Cocoon Preprint, the environmental impact was reduced by: 4,952 kg of landfill, 732 kg CO2 and greenhouse gases, 102,989 litres of water, 29,490 kWh of energy and 8,046 kg of wood.

Source: Carbon footprint data evaluated by Labelia Conseil in accordance with the Bilan Carbone methodology. Calculations are based on a comparison between the recycled paper used versus a virgin fibre paper according to the latest European BREF data (virgin fibre paper) available.

 

Registered office: 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP    © Barclays Bank PLC 2016
Registered in England. Registered No: 48839    XXXXXXX
Designed by FleishmanHillard Fishburn    www.fhflondon.co.uk

    

 


 

 

LOGO

   Return to stability

 

 

         

Barclays PLC

Pillar 3 Report 2015


Contents

    

    

 

 

       

Page

 

 

Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report

 

 

2

 

 

Summary of risk profile

 

 

3

 

 

Notes on basis of preparation

 

 

5

 

 

Scope of application of Basel rules

 

 

6

 

 

Risk and capital position review

 

 

14

 

 

 

§   Group capital resources, requirements and leverage

  15
 

§   Analysis of credit risk

  27
 

§   Analysis of counterparty credit risk

  63
 

§   Analysis of market risk

  71
 

§   Analysis of securitisation exposures

  82
   

§   Analysis of operational risk

 

 

92

 

 

Barclays’ approach to managing risks

 

 

95

 

 

 

§   Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

  96
 

§   Management of credit risk and the internal ratings based approach

  107
 

§   Management of counterparty credit risk and credit risk mitigation techniques

  124
 

§   Management of market risk

  128
 

§   Management of securitisation exposures

  139
 

§   Management of operational risk

  143
 

§   Management of funding risk

  147
   

§   Management of conduct risk (including reputation risk)

 

 

152

 

 

Appendix A – PD, LGD, RWA and EAD by country

 

 

156

 

 

Appendix B – Disclosure on asset encumbrance

 

 

158

 

 

Appendix C – Remuneration disclosures

 

 

159

 

 

Appendix D – CRD IV reference

 

 

161

 

 

Location of risk disclosures

 

 

168

 

 

Index of tables

 

 

170

 

 

   

LOGO

  See page 168 for an index of all risk disclosures in the Pillar 3 and Annual Reports
   

LOGO

 

  A glossary of terms and remuneration disclosures can be found at: home.barclays/annualreport

 

Forward-looking statements

This document contains certain forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 21E of the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and Section 27A of the US Securities Act of 1933, as amended, with respect to the Group. Barclays cautions readers that no forward-looking statement is a guarantee of future performance and that actual results or other financial condition or performance measures could differ materially from those contained in the forward-looking statements. These forward-looking statements can be identified by the fact that they do not relate only to historical or current facts. Forward-looking statements sometimes use words such as ‘may’, ‘will’, ‘seek’, ‘continue’, ‘aim’, ‘anticipate’, ‘target’, ‘projected’, ‘expect’, ‘estimate’, ‘intend’, ‘plan’, ‘goal’, ‘believe’, ‘achieve’ or other words of similar meaning. Examples of forward-looking statements include, among others, statements regarding the Group’s future financial position, income growth, assets, impairment charges and provisions, business strategy, capital, leverage and other regulatory ratios, payment of dividends (including dividend pay-out ratios), projected levels of growth in the banking and financial markets, projected costs or savings, original and revised commitments and targets in connection with the strategic cost programme and the Group Strategy Update, rundown

 

of assets and businesses within Barclays Non-Core, estimates of capital expenditures and plans and objectives for future operations, projected employee numbers and other statements that are not historical fact. By their nature, forward-looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to future events and circumstances. These may be affected by changes in legislation, the development of standards and interpretations under International Financial Reporting Standards, evolving practices with regard to the interpretation and application of accounting and regulatory standards, the outcome of current and future legal proceedings and regulatory investigations, future levels of conduct provisions, the policies and actions of governmental and regulatory authorities, geopolitical risks and the impact of competition. In addition, factors including (but not limited to) the following may have an effect: capital, leverage and other regulatory rules (including with regard to the future structure of the Group) applicable to past, current and future periods; UK, US, Africa, Eurozone and global macroeconomic and business conditions; the effects of continued volatility in credit markets; market related risks such as changes in interest rates and foreign exchange rates; effects of changes in valuation of credit market exposures; changes in valuation of issued

 

securities; volatility in capital markets; changes in credit ratings of any entities within the Group or any securities issued by such entities; the potential for one or more countries exiting the Eurozone; the implementation of the strategic cost programme; and the success of future acquisitions, disposals and other strategic transactions. A number of these influences and factors are beyond the Group’s control. As a result, the Group’s actual future results, dividend payments, and capital and leverage ratios may differ materially from the plans, goals, and expectations set forth in the Group’s forward-looking statements. Additional risks and factors which may impact the Group’s future financial condition and performance are identified in our filings with the SEC (including, without limitation, our Annual Report on Form 20-F for the fiscal year ended 31 December 2015), which are available on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov.

Subject to our obligations under the applicable laws and regulations of the UK and the US in relation to disclosure and ongoing information, we undertake no obligation to update publicly or revise any forward looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  1


Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report

    

 

 

 

LOGO

      LOGO

 

Robert Le Blanc

Chief Risk Officer

     

Tushar Morzaria

Group Finance Director

‘The continued strengthening of our capital and leverage ratios reflect the strong progress made this year in rebalancing the Group.’

Capital position and risk management in 2015

Our annual disclosures contain extensive information on risk as well as capital management. This Pillar 3 Report provides a detailed breakdown of Barclays’ regulatory capital adequacy and how this relates to Barclays’ risk management:

 

§   the fully loaded CRD IV Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio increased significantly to 11.4% (2014: 10.3%) driven by a £44bn reduction in risk weighted assets (RWAs) to £358bn (2014: £402bn)

 

§   the leverage ratio increased significantly to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%) driven by a £205bn reduction in the exposure to £1,028bn (2014: £1,233bn).

Accelerated execution of our strategy with strong progress made on the rundown of the Non-Core business:

 

§   Non-Core RWAs reduced £29bn to £47bn, having more than halved since the business unit was created

 

§   Non-Core leverage exposures reduced £156bn to £121bn primarily in securities financing transactions, potential future exposure on derivatives and trading portfolio assets

 

§   the Non-Core business is subject to the same robust risk management framework as Barclays’ Core businesses.

We saw continued improvement in the credit and market risk positions of the firm:

 

§   credit impairment charges improved 2% to £2.1bn, reflecting the benign economic conditions in the UK and the US

 

§   credit impairment charges within the Non-Core business improved 54% to £78m, reflecting the sale of the Spanish business and higher recoveries in Europe

 

§   counterparty credit risk reduced 31% to £33.7bn driven by trading book risk reductions

 

§   market risk levels decreased mainly driven by equities and interest rates as well as asset reductions in the Non-Core business. Related RWAs reduced 28% to £37.6bn while average management value at risk decreased 23% year on year.

We continued to make strong progress in embedding the elements of a sound risk culture including the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF):

 

§   we updated and refined the ERMF in order to promote a strong risk culture and embed it further within the businesses

 

§   we clarified further the “three lines of defence” governance model so that responsibilities for risk management and control are an integral part of individuals’ roles (see page 101)

 

§   training on our code of conduct and other related topics relevant to specific roles continue to be deployed to all colleagues.
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  2


Summary of risk profile

    

 

 

This section presents a high-level summary of Barclays’ risk profile and its interaction with the Group’s risk appetite. Please see page 168 for a comprehensive index of all risk disclosures.

 

 

The Board makes use of the Risk Appetite Framework to set appetite, and continuously monitors existing and emerging risks.

The Group sets its risk appetite in terms of performance metrics as well as a set of mandate and scale limits to monitor risks. During 2015, the Group’s performance was in line with its risk appetite. The following risk metrics reflect the Group’s risk profile:

11.4%

Common Equity Tier 1 ratio (see page 16)

2014: 10.3%

£40.7bn

Common Equity Tier 1 capital (see page 16)

2014: £41.5bn

£358.4bn

Risk weighted assets (see page 23)

2014: £401.9bn

4.9%

Return on average shareholders’ equity (see page 220 of the 2015 Annual Report)

2014: 5.1%

4.5%

Leverage ratio (see page 26)

2014: 3.7%

133%

Liquidity coverage ratio (see page 187 of the 2015 Annual Report)

2014: 124%

47bps

Loan loss rate (see page 109)

2014: 46bps

£17m

Management Value at Risk (see page 74)

2014: £22m

 

 

 

 

 

§   Fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio increased significantly to 11.4% (2014: 10.3%) reflecting a decrease in RWAs to £358.4bn (2014: £401.9bn).

 

§   The RWA reduction was primarily driven by a £29bn decrease in the Non-Core business to £47bn, driven by the sale of the Spanish business and a rundown of legacy structured and credit products.

 

§   The leverage ratio increased significantly to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%), reflecting a £205bn exposure reduction to £1,028bn. This was driven by the Non-Core business exposures rundown of £156bn to £121bn.

 

§   The loan loss rate remained stable at 47bps (2014: 46bps) reflecting the benign economic conditions in the UK and the US. These conditions supported generally stable delinquency rates in retail and lower default rates in wholesale where large single-name losses were limited in number and mainly within the oil and gas sector.

 

§   Average management Value at Risk fell by 23% to £17m (2014: £22m), mainly driven by interest rate risk.

Another component of the Group’s risk appetite is a set of mandate and scale limits to help mitigate concentration risk, keep business activities within our mandate and allow Barclays to remain of an appropriate scale. During 2015, Barclays paid particular attention to Non-Core assets, and undertook deep dive reviews of specific sectors to help ensure risk capacity continues to be deployed within overall appetite.

The material existing and emerging risks section on page 119 of the Barclays PLC Annual Report describes the main risks currently faced by the Group.

 

LOGO    Please see page 106 for a discussion of risk appetite, and page 119 of the Annual Report for a discussion of material and emerging risks.

The Pillar 3 Report provides detailed regulatory risk measures that reflect the Group’s risk profile and strategy. 2015 measures show the progress accomplished in rebalancing the Group’s risk profile as follows:

 

          
 
2015
£bn
  
  
    
 
2014
£bn
  
  

 

LOGO

 

 

1 Credit risk

     230.4         244.0   
  2 Counterparty credit risk      33.7         49.1   
  3 Market risk      37.6         52.1   
  4 Operational risk      56.7         56.7   
       
       
       

 

1. credit risk decreased 6% to £230.4bn, primarily driven by the sale of the Spanish business and the rundown of legacy structured and credit products within Non-Core

 

2. counterparty credit risk decreased 31% to £33.7bn, primarily driven by trading risk reductions within the Investment Bank and Non-Core

 

3. market risk decreased 28% to £37.6bn, driven by trading risk reductions within the Investment Bank and Non-Core

 

4. operational risk remained unchanged at £56.7bn (2014: £56.7bn).

 

LOGO    We hold RWAs for credit (discussed on page 27), market (page 71), and operational (page 92) risks. See page 24 for the main drivers of movements for each of these risk types.
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  3


Summary of risk profile

    

    

 

 

              
 
2015
£bn
  
  
    
 
2014
£bn
  
  

 

LOGO

    1 Personal & Corporate Banking      120.4         120.2   
    2 Barclaycard      41.3         39.9   
    3 Africa Banking      33.9         38.5   
    4 Investment Bank      108.3         122.4   
    5 Head Office and Other Operations      7.7         5.6   
    6 Barclays Non-Core      46.6         75.3   
         
         
         

RWAs decreased 11% to £358.4bn (2014: £401.9bn):

 

1. Personal and Corporate Banking (PCB) remained stable at £120.4bn

 

2. Barclaycard increased 4% to £41.3bn, primarily driven by growth in the US cards business

 

3. Africa Banking decreased 12% to £33.9bn, primarily driven by the depreciation of ZAR against GBP. Excluding the impact of currency movements, Africa Banking increased 8% due to an increase in corporate lending

 

4. Investment Bank decreased 12% to £108.3bn mainly due to a reduction in securities and derivatives, and improved RWA efficiency

 

5. Head Office increased 38% to £7.7bn, primarily driven by an increase in deferred tax assets and reallocation of operational risk

 

6. Non-Core RWAs decreased 38% to £46.6bn, primarily driven by the sale of the Spanish business, the active rundown of legacy structured and credit products, and derivative trade unwinds.

    

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  4


Notes on basis of preparation

    

    

 

 

Pillar 3 Report regulatory framework

The Pillar 3 Report is prepared in accordance with the Capital Requirements Regulation and Directive IV (‘CRR’ and ‘CRD IV’, also known as the ‘CRD IV legislative package’). In particular, articles 431 to 455 of the CRR specify the Pillar 3 framework requirements. The CRD IV legislative package came into force on 1 January 2014.

 

LOGO   

See ‘Application of the Basel framework’ on page 7 for a more detailed description.

 

Key changes in the 2015 Pillar 3 Report

The tables and information from last year’s CRD IV comparatives section have been reallocated back to their relevant sections as all comparatives are now on a CRD IV basis.

We are now using the term Globally Systematically Important Bank (G–SIB) rather than Globally Systematically Important Financial Institution (G-SIFI) in line with BCBS and FSB terminology.

Comparatives for Collateral (page 41), CVA (page 81) and Remuneration (page 159) tables are now included (these were first time disclosures last year).

 

LOGO   

See Appendix D on page 161 for a CRD IV reference.

 

Presentation of risk data in the Pillar 3 disclosures vs. the Annual Report and financial statements

This document discloses Barclays’ assets in terms of exposures and capital requirements. For the purposes of this document:

Asset/exposure classes

Throughout this report, tables show credit exposures or capital requirements split into various exposure classes (for instance, industry or type of borrower). Some of these classes are specified in CRD IV. Where the regulations are not explicit, such as in industry and geographic analyses, Barclays shows exposure class splits at an appropriate level of granularity.

Credit losses

Where impairment or losses are disclosed within this document, Barclays has followed the IFRS definitions used in the Annual Report.

Scope of application

Where this document discloses credit exposures or capital requirements, Barclays has followed the scope and application of its Pillar 1 capital adequacy calculations (unless noted otherwise).

 

Definition of credit exposures

Credit exposure, or ‘Exposure at Default’ (EAD) is defined as the estimate of the amount at risk in the event of a default (before any recoveries) or through the decline in value of an asset. This estimate takes account of contractual commitments related to undrawn amounts.

In contrast, an asset in the Group’s balance sheet is reported as a drawn balance only. This is one of the reasons why exposure values in the Pillar 3 Report will differ from asset values as reported in the Annual Report.

 

LOGO    Table 15 provides a reconciliation between IFRS and EAD for credit risk. Tables 33 to 39 provides a reconciliation between the IFRS impairment provision and the regulatory impairment allowance.

Policy, validation and sign-off

Throughout the year ended 31 December 2015, and to date, Barclays has operated a system of risk management and internal control, which provides reasonable assurance over the information disclosed in this report as well as with regards to compliance with laws and regulations.

 

LOGO   

See Appendix D for a reference to Barclays’ compliance with the CRD IV.

 

This report was validated and approved internally by Barclays in line with its Pillar 3 policy. Businesses attest to the accuracy of their data submissions. Consistency checks and reconciliations are performed with financial statements and regulatory returns.

The Pillar 3 policy, approved by the Board Risk Committee, also requires that Barclays’ external disclosures (which include the Pillar 3 Report, interim management statements, and the Annual Report) convey its risk profile comprehensively, subject to the information being material and not proprietary nor confidential. The policy also covers frequency of disclosures.

During the publication process the report is subject to reviews by Barclays’ Legal and Technical committee. This committee is responsible for reviewing the Group’s financial reports and disclosures to ensure that they are fit for purpose for external disclosures, and reports its conclusions to the Disclosure Committee.

The Disclosure Committee, which is chaired by the Group Finance Director, considers the content and accuracy of the disclosures, reporting its conclusions to the Board Audit Committee (BAC). The BAC reviews the report, with final approval provided by the Board.

This governance process is in place to ensure both management and the Board are given sufficient opportunity to review and challenge the Group’s financial statements and other significant disclosures before they are made public.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  5


Scope of application of Basel rules

    

    

 

 

This section explains the scope of application of Basel rules in relation to capital adequacy.

 

  §   Figure 1 shows a representation of Barclays’ entities within the scope of regulatory consolidation and how this differs from IFRS consolidation.

 

  §   Table 1 shows how IFRS balances contribute to the regulatory scope of consolidation on a line by line basis.

 

  §   The regulatory risk type associated with each balance sheet line is indicated in table 2.

 

  §   Tables 3 and 4 show the scope of permission of calculation approaches that summarises the various approaches to calculate RWAs, and Barclays’ permission to use them.

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  6


Scope of application of Basel rules

Application of the Basel framework

    

 

 

Overview of Pillar 3

Barclays has applied the Basel framework since its implementation. The framework is made up of three pillars:

 

 

Pillar 1:

 

covers the calculation of RWAs for credit risk, counterparty credit risk, market risk and operational risk

 

Pillar 2:

 

covers the consideration of whether additional capital is required over and above the Pillar 1 risk calculations. A firm’s own internal models and assessments support this process

 

Pillar 3:

 

covers external communication of risk and capital information by banks as specified in the Basel rules to promote transparency and good risk management

 

Pillar 3 requires the disclosure of exposures and associated RWAs for each risk type and approach to calculating capital requirements for Pillar 1.

Distinct regulatory capital approaches are followed for each of the following risk and exposure types:

 

§   credit risk (including certain non-traded equity exposures)

 

§   counterparty credit risk

 

§   market risk

 

§   credit valuation adjustment

 

§   securitisations

 

§   operational risk.

Approaches to calculating capital requirements under CRD IV

Calculation of capital for credit risk

The credit risk weighted assets calculation is based on an estimate of the Exposure at Default (EAD). In addition, where Barclays has the necessary regulatory waivers, it estimates Probabilities of Default (PD) and Loss Given Default (LGD) (see page 116 and the online glossary for definitions):

 

§   Standardised approach: assesses capital requirements using standard industry wide risk weightings based on a detailed classification of asset types, ratings and maturity

 

§   Internal Ratings Based approach (IRB): assesses capital requirements using the Group’s specific data and internal models to calculate risk weightings. The IRB approach is further sub-divided into two applications:

 

  - Advanced IRB (AIRB): where internal calculations of PD, LGD and credit conversion factors are used to model risk exposures

 

  - Foundation IRB (FIRB): where internal calculations of PD, but standardised parameters for LGD and credit conversion factors are used. The Africa Banking wholesale portfolio previously reported under the FIRB approach, moved to AIRB during 2015.

 

LOGO

  

See page 27 for more details on capital requirements for credit risk. Also, the IRB approach to credit risk section on page 107 discusses credit risk modelling in detail.

Calculation of capital for counterparty credit risk (CCR)

CCR differs from credit risk, above, in how the EAD is calculated and applies to traded exposures. It arises where a counterparty default may lead to losses of an uncertain nature as they are market driven. This uncertainty is factored into the valuation of the Group’s credit exposure arising from such transactions. The Group uses three methods under the regulatory framework to calculate CCR exposure:

 

§   the Mark to Market method (MTM, also known as Current Exposure method), which is the sum of the current market value of the instrument plus an add-on (dependent on potential future exposure, or PFE) that accounts for the potential change in the value of the contract until a hypothetical default of the counterparty

 

§   the Internal Model Method (IMM), subject to regulatory approval, allows the use of internal models to calculate an effective expected positive exposure (EEPE), multiplied by a factor stipulated by the regulator called alpha. For Barclays this is set at 1.4

 

§   the Financial Collateral Comprehensive Method (FCCM), which is the net position of securities financing transactions after the application of volatility haircuts prescribed by CRR.

 

LOGO

  

See page 63 for more details on capital requirements for CCR exposures.

Calculation of capital for market risk

RWA calculations for market risk assess the losses from extreme movements in the prices of financial assets and liabilities:

 

§   Standardised approach: a calculation is prescribed that depends on the type of contract, the net position at portfolio level, and other inputs that are relevant to the position. For instance, for equity positions a general market risk component captures changes in the market, while specific market risk is calculated based on features of the specific security (for instance, country of issuance)

 

§   Model based approach: with regulatory permission, the Group can use proprietary Value at Risk (VaR) models to calculate capital requirements. Under the Basel framework, stressed VaR, incremental risk charge and all price risk models must also be used to ensure that sufficient levels of capital are maintained.

 

LOGO

  

See page 71 for more details on capital requirements for market risk.

Calculation of credit valuation adjustment (CVA) capital charge

The CVA is the capital charge accounting for potential MTM losses due to credit quality deterioration of a counterparty (that does not necessarily default). Two approaches can be used to calculate the adjustment:

 

§   Standardised approach: takes account of the external credit rating of each counterparty, and incorporates the effective maturity and EAD from the CCR calculation

 

§   Advanced approach: this approach requires the calculation of the charge as; a) a 10-day 99% VaR measure for the current one year period; and b) the same measure for a stressed period. The sum of the two VaR measures is tripled to calculate the capital charge.

 

LOGO

  

See page 81 for more details on CVA.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  7


Scope of application of Basel rules

Application of the Basel framework

    

 

 

Calculation of capital for securitisation exposures

A separate regulatory framework exists for the calculation of securitisations RWA exposures, the scope of which is defined by the CRR. Securitisations give rise to credit, market and other risks. Whilst CRR prescribes a standardised and advanced approach for the calculation of risk weights, Barclays has approval to use, and therefore applies the IRB approach, which includes:

 

§   the Ratings Based Approach, where external ratings are available

 

§   for unrated transactions and where certain criteria is met the ‘look through’ approach can be used, which considers the risk of the underlying assets

 

§   the Internal Assessment Approach, which is also used for unrated backed commercial paper programmes, which applies a similar methodology to rating agency models.

 

LOGO         See page 82 for more details on capital requirements for securitisation exposures.

Calculation of capital for operational risk

Capital set aside for operational risk is deemed to cover the losses or costs resulting from human factors, inadequate or failed internal processes and systems or external events.

To assess capital requirements for operational risk, the following methods apply:

 

§   Basic Indicator approach (BIA): sets the capital requirement as 15% of the gross income, averaged over the last three years. If the income in any year is negative or zero, that year is not considered in the average

 

§   Standardised approach: the capital requirement is calculated as the sum of a percentage of the gross income per business line, averaged over the last three years. The Group does not use this approach

 

§   Advanced Management approach (AMA): under the AMA, and subject to the regulatory approval, the capital requirement is calculated using the Group’s own models.

Note that only two of the above methods can be used concurrently. Barclays uses the AMA for the majority (93%) of its exposures, and the BIA for the remaining 7%.

 

LOGO         See page 92 for more details on capital requirements for operational risk.

Calculation of capital for large exposures

Barclays has not exceeded the large exposure limit set in CRR, and as such no capital charge applies.

Regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements

Capital – Fully loaded

Barclays’ current regulatory requirement is to meet a fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio of 9% by 2019, plus a Pillar 2A add-on. The 9% comprises the required 4.5% minimum CET1 ratio and, phased in from 2016, a Combined Buffer Requirement made up of a Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB) of 2.5% and a Globally Systemically Important Institution (G-SII) buffer of 2%.

Barclays’ Pillar 2A requirement as per the PRA’s Individual Capital Guidance (ICG) is subject to review at least annually. Under current PRA guidance, the Pillar 2A add-on for 2016, will be 3.9%, of which 56% will need to be met in CET1 form, equating to approximately 2.2% of RWAs. Basel Committee consultations and reviews might further impact the Pillar 2A requirement in the future.

In addition, a Counter-Cyclical Capital Buffer (CCCB) and/or additional Sectoral Capital Requirements (SCR) may be required by the Bank of England to protect against perceived threats to financial stability. These buffers could be applied at the Group level or at a legal entity, sub-consolidated or portfolio level. No SCR has been set to date by the Bank of England, while the CCCB is currently 0% for UK exposures. Other national authorities determine the appropriate CCCBs that should be applied to exposures in their jurisdiction. During 2016, CCCBs will start to apply for our exposures in Hong Kong, Norway and Sweden. Based on current exposures we do not expect this to be material.

Capital – Transitional

On a transitional basis, the PRA has implemented a minimum requirement CET1 ratio of 4%, Tier 1 ratio of 5.5% and Total Capital ratio of 8%.

From 1 January 2015, the transitional capital ratios are equal to the fully loaded ratios following the PRA’s acceleration of transitional provisions relating to CET1 deductions and filters. The adjustment relating to unrealised gains on available for sale debt and equity that was applied throughout 2014 as an exception no longer applies.

Grandfathering limits on capital instruments, previously qualifying as Tier 1 and Tier 2, are unchanged under the PRA transitional rules.

Leverage

In addition to the Group’s capital requirements, minimum ratios have also been set in respect of leverage. The leverage ratio applicable to the Group has been calculated in accordance with the requirements of the CRR which was amended effective from January 2015. The leverage calculation uses the end-point CRR definition of Tier 1 capital for the numerator and the CRR definition of leverage exposure. During 2015 Barclays was measured against the PRA leverage ratio minimum requirement of 3%.

In December 2015, the PRA finalised the UK leverage ratio framework in which it adopted the FPC’s recommendations on Leverage ratio requirements. These recommendations have been finalised in the Supervisory Statement SS45/15 and have been incorporated as part of the updated PRA rulebook, effective January 2016. This would result in a fully phased in leverage ratio requirement of 3.7% for Barclays. The minimum requirement would increase in the event that Barclays was subject to (i) an increased CCCB; and/or (ii) Barclays was reclassified into a higher G-SII category. Furthermore from January 2016, firms are required to report quarterly leverage ratio information, including an average ratio.

Impact of new regulations

Global Systemically Important Banks (G-SIBs)

G-SIBs are defined as banks representing a greater risk to the global economy, due to their size, interconnectedness and complexity. G-SIBs are required to maintain additional capital buffers and disclose indicators that are relevant to their systemic importance.

The list of G-SIBs is updated by the Financial Stability Board (FSB) on an annual basis. In November 2015, the FSB confirmed Barclays’ position in a category that requires it to meet a G-SII buffer of 2%; this categorisation was based on year end 2014 data published by Barclays on 30 April 2015. (https://www.home.barclays/content/dam/ barclayspublic/docs/InvestorRelations/IRNewsPresentations/2015News/ Barclays_G-SII_external_disclosure_Dec2014.pdf). Barclays plans to publish an updated set of indicators in April 2016. Following the FSB’s November 2014 categorisation, Barclays has been required to meet the 2% surcharge since January 2016.

 

LOGO         Please see page 210 of the Annual Report for a more complete discussion of regulatory changes.

Structural reform of banking groups

The UK Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013 (the UK Banking Reform Act) and associated secondary legislation and regulatory rules, require the separation of the Group’s UK and EEA retail and SME deposit taking activities into a legally, operationally and economically separate and independent entity and restrict the types of activity such an entity may conduct (so-called ‘ring fencing’).

The PRA issued a Policy statement (PS10/15) in May 2015 setting up legal structures and governance requirements that the UK regulator considers as ‘near-final’. A PRA Consultation was issued in October 2015 relating to post ring fencing prudential requirements and intra group arrangements among other matters. PRA final rules are expected in 2016. UK ring fencing rules will become binding from January 2019.

 

LOGO         Please see page 213 of the Annual Report for a more complete discussion of structural reform.
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  8


Scope of application of Basel rules

Risk and capital position review

    

 

 

Scope of consolidation

In this report, Barclays PLC is presented on a consolidated basis for the year ended 31 December 2015. The consolidation basis used is the same as that used for reporting regulatory capital adequacy to the PRA. This scope of consolidation is similar to that used for statutory accounting reporting for most of the Group’s activities, except for:

 

§   subsidiaries engaged in non-financial activities such as insurance and securitisation vehicles that are fully consolidated for statutory purposes but are not consolidated for regulatory purposes (exposures to securitisation vehicles are subject to a specific capital treatment, see page 83 for further details). Entities not consolidated for regulatory purposes are adequately capitalised
§   associates, joint ventures and participations, that are financial in nature and accounted for on an equity basis in the statutory accounts, are consolidated in proportion to the participation for regulatory calculations

 

§   entities that are not financial in nature, as well as private equity investments treated as associates, are accounted for on an equity basis in the statutory accounts, but are either risk weighted or deducted from capital for regulatory calculations.

The chart below summarises Barclays’ structure with an indication of the sizes of subsidiaries in terms of their respective contribution to total assets.

Barclays also reports on a solo consolidation basis in accordance with its regulatory waiver. The solo consolidation is not reported on a standalone basis in this report.

 

 

Figure 1: Summary of regulatory scope of consolidation as at 31 December 2015a,b

 

LOGO

 

Significant subsidiaries (not wholly owned)

CRD IV regulations require Barclays to prepare its Pillar 3 disclosures at a consolidated Group level. Significant subsidiaries must also report limited Pillar 3 information on their capital resources on a standalone basis. Barclays Bank PLC is the main operating subsidiary of the Group, and is represented as part of this report.

Barclays also has a significant subsidiary in Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL). BAGL’s primary regulator is the South African Reserve Bank (SARB). BAGL discloses its own separate Pillar 3 Report in compliance with the SARB’s regulation. These disclosures may be found in the investor relations section of BAGL’s website: www.barclaysafrica.com

Please see page 151 for information on transferability of capital between parent and subsidiaries.

Notes

a Barclays Bank Solus refers to Barclays Bank PLC UK branches, excluding those of its subsidiaries.
b Barclays Bank PLC holds 100% interest in all its subsidiaries with the exception of the Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL), in which it holds a 62.3% interest in the shareholders’ equity and recognises the remainder as non-controlling interests.
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  9


Scope of application of Basel rules

Risk and capital position review

        

 

 

Table 1: Barclays PLC balance sheet – statutory versus regulatory view

This table shows a reconciliation between Barclays PLC balance sheet for statutory and regulatory purposes. Please note that the amount shown under the regulatory scope of consolidation is not a RWA measure; it is based on an accounting measure and cannot be directly reconciled to other tables in this report.

 

As at 31 December 2015

    
 
 
 
 

 

Accounting
balance sheet
per published
financial
statements

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 
Deconsolidation
of insurance/
other entities
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
Consolidation
of banking
associates/
other entities
£m
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
Balance sheet
per regulatory
scope of
consolidation
£m
  
  
  
  
  

Assets

           

Cash and balances at central banks

     49,711          (10)         51          49,752    

Items in the course of collection from other banks

     1,011          –          –          1,011    

Trading portfolio assets

     77,348          –          2,762          80,110    

Financial assets designated at fair value

     76,830          (2,414)         146          74,562    

Derivative financial instruments

     327,709          (2)         (1,642)         326,065    

Available for sale investments

     90,267          (2,152)         –          88,115    

Loans and advances to banks

     41,349          (146)         80          41,283    

Loans and advances to customers

     399,217          (5,878)         1,465          394,804    

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

     28,187          –          –          28,187    

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

     3,010          402          32          3,444    

Investments in associates and joint ventures

     573          (105)         (420)         48    

Property, plant and equipment

     3,468          (16)         21          3,473    

Goodwill and intangible assets

     8,222          (22)         10          8,210    

Current tax assets

     415          (1)         (1)         413    

Deferred tax assets

     4,495          (29)                 4,469    

Retirement benefit assets

     836          (1)         –          835    

Non current assets classified as held for disposal

     7,364          (1,959)         –          5,405    

Total assets

     1,120,012          (12,333)         2,507          1,110,186    

Liabilities

           

Deposits from banks

     (47,080)         926          (1,002)         (47,156)   

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

     (1,013)         –          –          (1,013)   

Customer accounts

     (418,242)         –          1,774          (416,468)   

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

     (25,035)         –          –          (25,035)   

Trading portfolio liabilities

     (33,967)         –          (2,549)         (36,516)   

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

     (91,745)         1,468          (550)         (90,827)   

Derivative financial instruments

     (324,252)         –          –          (324,252)   

Debt securities in issue

     (69,150)         5,761          –          (63,389)   

Subordinated liabilities

     (21,467)         –          (2)         (21,469)   

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

     (10,610)         2,101          (117)         (8,626)   

Provisions

     (4,142)                 (1)         (4,140)   

Current tax liabilities

     (903)         20          (2)         (885)   

Deferred tax liabilities

     (122)                 (48)         (169)   

Retirement benefit liabilities

     (423)                 (8)         (428)   

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale

     (5,997)         1,871          –          (4,126)   

Total liabilities

     (1,054,148)         12,154          (2,505)         (1,044,499)   

Total equity

           

Called up share capital and share premium

     (21,586)         –          –          (21,586)   

Other equity instruments

     (5,305)         –          –          (5,305)   

Other reserves

     (1,898)         (52)         –          (1,950)   

Retained earnings

     (31,021)         141          (2)         (30,882)   

Total equity excluding non-controlling interests

     (59,810)         89          (2)         (59,723)   

Non-controlling interests

     (6,054)         90          –          (5,964)   

Total equity

     (65,864)         179          (2)         (65,687)   

Total liabilities and equity

     (1,120,012)         12,333          (2,507)         (1,110,186)   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  10


Scope of application of Basel rules

Risk and capital position review

    

 

 

 Table 2: Regulatory calculation drivers split by IFRS account classification

 

       Driver for regulatory calculations   

IFRS classification

    
 
Credit risk
page 27
  
  
    
 
 
Counterparty
credit risk
page 63
  
  
  
    
 
Market riska
page 71
  
  

Assets

        

Cash and balances at central banks

               ¡          ¡    

Items in course of collection from other banks

               ¡          ¡    

Trading portfolio assets

     ¡          ¡              

Financial assets designated at fair value

                             

Derivative financial instruments

     ¡                        

Available for sale financial investments

               ¡          ¡    

Loans and advances to banks

               ¡          ¡    

Loans and advances to customers

               ¡          ¡    

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

     ¡                    ¡    

Other assetsb

               ¡              

Liabilities

        

Deposits from banks

     ¡          ¡          ¡    

Items in course of collection due to other banks

     ¡          ¡          ¡    

Customer accounts

     ¡          ¡          ¡    

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

     ¡                    ¡    

Trading portfolio liabilities

     ¡          ¡              

Financial liabilities designated at fair value:

     ¡                        

Derivative financial instruments

     ¡                        

Debt securities in issue

     ¡          ¡          ¡    

Subordinated liabilities

     ¡          ¡          ¡    

Other liabilitiesc

     ¡          ¡          ¡    

 

 

Notes

a Includes credit valuation adjustment.
b Other assets consists of: prepayments, accrued income and other assets, investments in associates and joint ventures, property, plant and equipment, goodwill and intangible assets, current tax assets, deferred tax assets, retirement benefit assets and non current assets classified as held for sale.
c Other liabilities consists of: accruals, deferred income and other liabilities, provisions, current tax liabilities, deferred tax liabilities, retirement benefit liabilities, liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  11


Scope of application of Basel rules

Risk and capital position review

    

 

 

Scope of permission for calculation approaches

Barclays seeks permission from its regulators to use modelled approaches where possible, to enable risk differentiation.

Barclays has regulatory approval to use its internal models for the calculation of the majority of its banking and trading book as well as operational risks. The following table summarises the principal portfolios within Barclays that use the Standardised and Advanced IRB approaches as at 31 December 2015.

The Africa Banking wholesale portfolio previously reported under the FIRB approach, moved to AIRB during 2015; as such, 2015 FIRB balances are nil.

Table 3: The scope of the Standardised and IRB approaches for credit and counterparty credit risk

 

        

 

Credit risk

(see Table 13 and 14)

  

  

    

Counterparty credit risk

(see Table 41 and 42)

  

  

             

Business as at

31 December 2015

      

 

RWA

£m

  

  

      
 
Average
risk weight
  
  
      
 
 
EAD
post-CRM
£m
  
  
  
    

RWA

£m

      
 
Average
risk weight
  
  
      
 

 

EAD
post-CRM

£m

  
  

  

  

Advanced Internal

Ratings Based (IRB)

approaches

    

 

Standardised

approach

  

  

Personal &

Corporate Banking

       102,858           33%           314,484         1,364        35%           3,890      

UK managed retail

and wholesale

portfolios

    

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Mainly non-UK

managed retail

(including Wealth)

and wholesale

portfolios

(including legacy),

UK asset and

sales finance

  

  

  

  

  

  

  

  

Barclaycard

       35,840           59%           60,412                n/a                

UK, Germany

and Spain retail

credit cards

    

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

US retail credit

cards, joint card

issuance, partner

finance, secure

lending, commercial

payment and any

recent portfolio

acquisitions.

  

  

  

  

  

  

  

  

Africa Banking

       26,254           57%           46,109         509        37%           1,392      

Retail mortgages,

current accounts,

personal loans

and credit cards in

Absa

    

 

 

Mainly retail and

wholesale portfolios

outside South Africa

  

  

  

Investment Bank

       44,222           35%           127,863         21,152        31%           69,221       Most portfolios     

 

 

 

 

Certain portfolios

typically with low or

no defaults, or

other exposures

by exception

  

  

  

  

  

Head Office

       4,276           8%           55,692         91        33%           279      

Small number

of portfolios

    

 

 

 

Most portfolios

including high

quality liquidity

pool assets

  

  

  

  

Non-Core

       16,990           35%           48,736         10,628        50%           21,090      

Certain legacy

Investment Bank

portfolios, models

related to retail

exposures in

Continental Europe

    

 

 

 

 

Certain portfolios

typically with low or

no defaults,

or insufficient

historical data

  

  

  

  

  

Total

       230,440           35%           653,296         33,744        35%           95,872         

Barclays’ AIRB roll-out plans are discussed with our regulators and updated on an agreed schedule.

Barclays has permission to use the Internal Model Method (IMM) to calculate its counterparty credit risk exposures. The permission is comprehensive and applies to the majority of its trades and portfolios. Exceptions include certain contracts entered into by Barclays Capital Inc., for instance exchange traded derivatives and margin loans.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  12


Scope of application of Basel rules

Risk and capital position review

    

 

 

Table 4: Summary of the scope of application of regulatory methodologies for market and operational risk

 

As at 31 December 2015

Risk type

  Risk weighted assets   Scope

Market risk

  £37.6bn  

As explained from page 132, the risk of loss from changes in the prices of assets in the trading book are captured by a combined RWA calculation for general and specific market risks. The regulatory permission for Barclays to use models considers risk types and legal entities; see table 9 on page 23 for capital requirements related to each approach and risk factor.

 

Barclays has regulatory approval for VaR modelling for general market risk, which is designed to capture the risk of loss arising from changes in market interest rates, along with the risk of losses arising from changes in foreign exchange, commodities and equity market value.

 

The capital charge for specific market risk is designed to protect against losses from adverse movements in the price of an individual security owing to factors related to the individual issuer. Barclays has permission to model specific market risk, including credit spread, migration, and default risks, for certain legal entities and product types. Where the Group does not have permission to use a model (notably in Barclays Capital Inc), the Standardised approach is applied.

Of which:

Credit valuation

adjustment (CVA)

 

  £11.3bn   Barclays calculates CVA risk for all contracts in scope as defined by article 382 of the CRR. Barclays has permission to use an internal model for the specific risk of debt instruments and therefore is allowed to use the Advanced method for CVA for such instruments where applicable. The Standardised method for CVA is used otherwise.

Operational risk

  £56.7bn   Barclays has regulatory approval to calculate its operational risk capital requirement using a CRD IV AMA, this accounts for 93% of operational risk RWAs as at 2015 year end. Recently acquired businesses are excluded from this approval. Barclays uses the BIA while it transitions these businesses to AMA, this accounts for 7% of operational risk RWAs as at 2015 year end.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  13


Risk and capital position review

Contents

    

 

 

       

Page 

 

 

Risk and capital position review

 

       
 

 

§   Group capital resources, requirements and leverage

 

 

15 

 

§   Analysis of credit risk

  27 
 

§   Analysis of counterparty credit risk

  63 
 

§   Analysis of market risk

  71 
 

§   Analysis of securitisation exposures

  82 
 

§   Analysis of operational risk

  92 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  14


Risk and capital position review

Group capital resources, requirements and leverage

    

 

 

    

 

This section details Barclays’ capital position providing information on both capital resources and capital requirements. It also provides detail of the leverage ratio and exposures.

 

Key metrics and movements in 2015

 

11.4% fully loaded

Common Equity Tier 1 ratio

RWAs decreased by £43.5bn to £358.4bn. Non-Core RWAs decreased £28.7bn to £46.6bn as a result of the sale of the Spanish business and the rundown of legacy structured and credit products. Investment Bank RWAs decreased £14.1bn to £108.3bn mainly due to a reduction in securities and derivatives, and improved RWA efficiency.

 

CET1 capital decreased £0.7bn to £40.7bn after absorbing adjusting items and dividends paid and foreseen.

 

4.5% leverage ratio

The leverage ratio increased significantly to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%) driven by a reduction in the leverage exposures of £205bn to £1,028bn predominantly due to the rundown in Non-Core of £156bn to £121bn.

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  15


Risk and capital position review

Group capital resources, requirements and leverage

    

 

 

Table 5: Capital resources

This table shows the Group’s capital resources. Table 7 presents the components of regulatory capital on both a transitional and fully loaded basis as at 31 December 2015.

 

Key capital ratios

             

As at 31 December

     2015       2014   

Fully Loaded CET1

     11.4%       10.3%  

PRA Transitional CET1a

     11.4%       10.2%  

PRA Transitional Tier 1b

     14.7%       13.0%  

PRA Transitional Total Capitalb

     18.6%       16.5%  
         

Capital resources (audited)

             

As at 31 December

    

2015   

£m   

    

2014   

£m   

Shareholders’ equity (excluding non-controlling interests) per the balance sheet

     59,810        59,567  

Less: other equity instruments (recognised as AT1 capital)

     (5,305)       (4,322) 

Adjustment to retained earnings for foreseeable dividends

     (631)       (615) 

Minority interests (amount allowed in consolidated CET1)

     950        1,227  

Other regulatory adjustments and deductions

         

Additional value adjustments (PVA)

     (1,602)       (2,199) 

Goodwill and intangible assets

     (8,234)       (8,127) 

Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability excluding temporary differences

     (855)       (1,080) 

Fair value reserves related to gains or losses on cash flow hedges

     (1,231)       (1,814) 

Excess of expected losses over impairment

     (1,365)       (1,772) 

Gains or losses on liabilities at fair value resulting from own credit

     127        658  

Defined benefit pension fund assets

     (689)       –  

Direct and indirect holdings by an institution of own CET1 instruments

     (57)       (25) 

Other regulatory adjustments

     (177)       (45) 

Fully loaded CET1 capital

     40,741        41,453  

Regulatory adjustments relating to unrealised gains

     –        (583) 

PRA transitional CET1 capital

     40,741        40,870  

Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital

         

Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts

     5,305        4,322  

Qualifying AT1 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiaries

     6,718        6,870  

Other regulatory adjustments and deductions

     (130)       –  

Transitional AT1 capital

     11,893        11,192  

PRA transitional Tier 1 capital

     52,634        52,062  

Tier 2 capital

         

Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts

     1,757        800  

Qualifying Tier 2 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiaries

     12,389        13,529  

Other regulatory adjustments and deductions

     (253)       (48) 

PRA transitional total regulatory capital

     66,527        66,343  

 

 

Notes

a The CRD IV CET1 ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) as applicable to Barclays’ Tier 2 Contingent Capital Notes was 13.1% based on £46.8bn of transitional CRD IV CET1 capital and £358bn RWAs.
b The PRA transitional capital is based on the PRA Rulebook and accompanying supervisory statements.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  16


Risk and capital position review

Group capital resources, requirements and leverage

 

 

Table 6: Summary of movements in capital resources

 

Movement in PRA transitional total capital

      
      

2015   

£m   

Opening fully loaded CET1 capital

     41,453  

Loss for the period attributable to equity holders

     (49) 

Own credit

     (531) 

Dividends paid and foreseen

     (1,372) 

Decrease in regulatory capital generated from earnings

     (1,952) 

Net impact of share awards

     609  

Available for sale reserves

     (245) 

Currency translation reserves

     (41) 

Other reserves

     9  

Increase in other qualifying reserves

     332  

Retirement benefit reserve

     916  

Defined benefit pension fund asset deduction

     (689) 

Net impact of pensions

     227  

Minority interests

     (277) 

Additional value adjustments (PVA)

     597  

Goodwill and intangible assets

     (107) 

Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability excluding those arising from temporary differences

     225  

Excess of expected loss over impairment

     407  

Direct and indirect holdings by an institution of own CET1 instruments

     (32) 

Other regulatory adjustments

     (132) 

Decrease in regulatory adjustments and deductions

     681  

Closing fully loaded CET1 capital

     40,741  

Opening PRA transitional AT1 capital as at 1 January

     11,192  

Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts

     983  

Qualifying AT1 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiaries

     (152) 

Other regulatory adjustments and deductions

     (130) 

Increase in AT1 capital

     701  

Closing PRA transitional AT1 capital

     11,893  

Opening PRA transitional Tier 2 capital as at 1 January

     14,281  

Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts

     957  

Qualifying Tier 2 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiaries

     (1,140) 

Other regulatory adjustments and deductions

     (205) 

Decrease in Tier 2 capital

     (388) 

Closing PRA transitional Tier 2 capital

     13,893  

Total PRA transitional regulatory capital

     66,527  

 

§   During 2015, the fully loaded CET1 ratio increased to 11.4% (2014: 10.3%) driven by a significant reduction in RWAs.
§   CET1 capital decreased by £0.7bn to £40.7bn, after absorbing adjusting items, with the following significant movements:
  - a £1.4bn reduction for dividends paid and foreseen
  - a £0.2bn net increase as the retirement benefit reserve increased £0.9bn, partially offset by £0.7bn pension asset deduction
  - a £0.7bn increase due to lower regulatory deductions and adjustments including a £0.6bn decrease in PVA, a £0.4bn decrease in expected losses due to the sale of the Spanish business and disposals across the Investment Bank, partially offset by a £0.3bn decrease in eligible minority interests
§   Transitional Tier 1 capital increased by £0.7bn to £11.9bn largely due to a £1.0bn issuance of AT1 securities.
§   Transitional Tier 2 capital decreased by £0.4bn to £13.9bn due to redemptions in the period, an increase in capital deductions for own paper and decreased eligible minority interests. This was partly offset by an issuance of 1.25bn Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  17


Risk and capital position review

Group capital resources, requirements and leverage

 

 

Table 7: Regulatory capital

This table shows the components of regulatory capital presented on both a transitional and fully loaded basis as at 31 December 2015.

This disclosure has been prepared using the format set out in Annex IV and Annex VI of the final ‘Implementing technical standards with regard to disclosure of own funds requirements for institution’ (Commission implementing regulation – EU 1423/2013).

 

Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital: instruments and reserves   
           
 
 
 

 

31 December
2015
Transitional
position

£m

  
  
  
  

  

    
 

 

Transitional
impacts

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 
 

 

31 December
2015

Fully loaded
position

£m

  
  

  
  

  

1    Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts      21,586                 21,586   
   of which: ordinary shares      21,586                 21,586   
2    Retained earnings      31,021                 31,021   
3    Accumulated other comprehensive income (and other reserves)      1,898                 1,898   
5    Minority interests (amount allowed in consolidated CET1)      950                 950   
5a    Independently reviewed interim net profits net of any foreseeable charge or dividenda      (631              (631
   Scope of consolidation adjustment      (177              (177
6    Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital before regulatory adjustments      54,647                 54,647   
                                 
     Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital: regulatory adjustments                           
7    Additional value adjustments      (1,602              (1,602
8    Intangible assets (net of related tax liability)      (8,234              (8,234
10    Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability excluding those arising from temporary differences         
   (net of related tax liability)      (855              (855
11    Fair value reserves related to gains or losses on cash flow hedges      (1,231              (1,231
12    Negative amounts resulting from the calculation of expected losses amounts      (1,365              (1,365
14    Gains or losses on liabilities at fair value resulting from changes in own credit standing      127                 127   
15    Defined-benefit pension fund assets      (689              (689
16    Direct and indirect holdings by an institution of own CET1 instruments      (57              (57
28    Total regulatory adjustments to Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1)      (13,906              (13,906
29    Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital      40,741                 40,741   
                                 
     Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital: instruments                           
30    Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts      5,305                 5,305   
31    of which: classified as equity under IFRS      5,305                 5,305   
34    Qualifying Tier 1 capital included in consolidated AT1 capital (including minority interests) issued         
   by subsidiaries and held by third parties      6,718         (6,461      257   
35    of which: instruments issued by subsidiaries subject to phase out      6,683         (6,683        
36    Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital before regulatory adjustments      12,023         (6,461      5,562   
                                 
     Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital: regulatory adjustments                           
37    Direct and indirect holdings by an institution of own AT1 instruments      (130              (130
43    Total regulatory adjustments to Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital      (130              (130
44    Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital      11,893         (6,461      5,432   
                                 
45    Tier 1 capital (T1 = CET1 + AT1)      52,634         (6,461      46,173   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Note

a Adjustment to retained earnings for foreseeable dividends only.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  18


Risk and capital position review

Group capital resources, requirements and leverage

 

 

 

Table 7 Regulatory capital continued

 

           
 
 
 

 

31 December
2015
Transitional
position

£m

  
  
  
  

  

    
 

 

Transitional
impacts

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 
 

 

31 December
2015

Fully loaded
position

£m

  
  

  
  

  

     Tier 2 (T2) capital: instruments and provisions                           
46    Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts      1,757                 1,757   
   Qualifying own funds instruments included in consolidated T2 capital (including minority interests)         
48    issued by subsidiaries and held by third parties      12,389         2,037         14,426   
49    of which: instruments issued by subsidiaries subject to phase out      1,742         (1,742        
51    Tier 2 (T2) capital before regulatory adjustments      14,146         2,037         16,183   
                                 
     Tier 2 (T2) capital: regulatory adjustments                           
52    Direct and indirect holdings by an institution of own T2 instruments and subordinated loans      (250              (250
   Direct and indirect holdings by the institution of the T2 instruments and subordinated loans of financial         
   sector entities where the institution has a significant investment in those entities (net of eligible short         
55    positions)      (3              (3
57    Total regulatory adjustments to Tier 2 (T2) capital      (253              (253
58    Tier 2 (T2) capital      13,893         2,037         15,930   
59    Total capital (TC = T1 + T2)      66,527         (4,424      62,103   
                                 
60    Total risk weighted assets      358,376                 358,376   
                                 
     Capital ratios and buffers                           
61    Common Equity Tier 1 (as a percentage of risk exposure amount)      11.4%            11.4%   
62    Tier 1 (as a percentage of risk exposure amount)      14.7%            12.9%   
63    Total capital (as a percentage of risk exposure amount)      18.6%            17.3%   
68    Common Equity Tier 1 available to meet buffers (as a percentage of risk exposure amount)      7.4%                  6.9%   
     Amounts below the thresholds for deduction (before risk weighting)                           
   Direct and indirect holdings of the capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a         
72    significant investment in those entities (amount below 10% threshold and net of eligible short positions)      2,743            2,743   
   Direct and indirect holdings by the institution of the CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where         
   the institution has a significant investment in those entities (amount below 10% threshold and net of         
73    eligible short positions)      604            604   
   Deferred tax assets arising from temporary differences (amount below 10% threshold, net of related         
75    tax liability)      4,016                  4,016   
     Applicable caps on the inclusion of provisions in Tier 2                           
77    Cap on inclusion of credit risk adjustments in T2 under Standardised approach      1,007            1,007   
79    Cap for inclusion of credit risk adjustments in T2 under Internal ratings based approach      1,092                  1,092   
     Capital instruments subject to phase out arrangements (only applicable between 1 Jan 2013 and 1 Jan 2022)                           
82    Current cap on AT1 instruments subject to phase out arrangements      6,717         
83    Amount excluded from AT1 due to cap (excess over cap after redemptions and maturities)      3         
84    Current cap on T2 instruments subject to phase out arrangements      2,480                     

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  19


Risk and capital position review

Group capital resources, requirements and leverage

 

 

Table 8: Summary of terms and conditions of capital resources

This table breaks down the Additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital issued by instrument and provides selected key terms and conditions. All Tier 1 capital comprises perpetual instruments with no maturity date. Regulatory capital might differ from the amounts recorded under IFRS due to PRA requirements relating to: capital eligibility criteria, amortisation of principal in the final five years to maturity, and the exclusion of the impact of fair value hedging.

Transitional provisions contained within CRR Article 486 are not applicable on an instrument by instrument basis and therefore instruments have been included in their transitional tiers rather than their tiers under fully loaded rules.

Further details on the terms of each instrument of subordinated liabilities can be found on pages 314 to 317 of the Barclays PLC Annual Report and online at home.barclays/annualreport. The online disclosure has been prepared using the format set out in Annex II of the final ‘Implementing technical standards with regard to disclosure of own funds requirements for institutions’ (Commission implementing regulation – EU1423/2013).

 

                Regulatory balance         IFRS balance   

Instrument

     Initial call date        

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

Additional Tier 1 Capital

              

Additional Tier 1 Equity Instruments – Barclays PLC

              

8.25% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (USD 2,000m)

     2018         1,229         1229         1,229         1229   

7.00% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities

     2019         695         695         695         695   

6.625% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (USD 1,211m)

     2019         712         712         712         712   

6.5% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (EUR 1,077m)

     2019         844         856         844         856   

8.0% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (EUR 1,000m)

     2020         830         830         830         830   

7.875 % Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities

     2022         995                 995           

Total Additional Tier 1 Equity Instruments

              5,305         4,322         5,305         4,322   

Preference Shares

              

Barclays Bank PLC

              

6.00% non cumulative callable preference shares

     2017         203         203         203         203   

4.75% non cumulative callable preference shares

     2020         211         211         211         211   

6.278% non cumulative callable preference shares

     2034         318         318         318         318   
     Any dividend               

6.625% non cumulative callable preference shares

     payment date         406         406         406         406   
     Any dividend               

7.1% non cumulative callable preference shares

     payment date         657         657         657         657   
     Any dividend               

7.75% non cumulative callable preference shares

     payment date         550         550         550         550   
     Any dividend               

8.125% non cumulative callable preference shares

     payment date         1,309         1,309         1,309         1,309   

Absa Bank Limited

              

Absa Preference Shares

              201         258         201         258   

Total Preference Shares

              3,855         3,912         3,855         3,912   

Tier One Notes (TONs) – Barclays Bank PLC

              

6% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes

     2032         13         13         16         16   

6.86% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes (USD 569m)

     2032         383         365         626         604   

Total Tier One Notes

              396         378         642         620   

Reserve Capital Instruments (RCIs) – Barclays Bank PLC

              

5.926% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments (USD 159m)

     2016         107         102         113         112   

7.434% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments (USD 117m)

     2017         79         75         85         85   

6.3688% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments

     2019         33         33         38         39   

14% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments

     2019         2,178         2,171         3,062         3,065   

5.3304% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments

     2036         35         35         51         52   

Total Reserve Capital Instruments

                  2,432             2,416             3,349             3,353   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  20


Risk and capital position review

Group capital resources, requirements and leverage

 

 

Table 8: Summary of terms and conditions of capital resources continued

 

                Regulatory balance         IFRS balance   

Instrument

     Initial call date        

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

Tier 2 Capital

              

Undated subordinated liabilities – Barclays Bank PLC

              

6.875% Undated Subordinated Notes

     2015                 135                 140   

6.375% Undated Subordinated Notes

     2017         134         133         143         146   

7.7% Undated Subordinated Notes (USD 99m)

     2018         67         63         69         69   

8.25% Undated Subordinated Notes

     2018         140         140         149         152   

7.125% Undated Subordinated Notes

     2020         158         158         195         202   

6.125% Undated Subordinated Notes

     2027         195         196         245         249   
     Any interest               

Junior Undated Floating Rate Notes (USD 109m)

     payment date         74         70         74         70   
     Any interest               

Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 3

     payment date         145         145         145         145   

Bonds – Barclays Bank PLC

              

9.25% Perpetual Subordinated Bonds (ex-Woolwich Plc)

     2021         75         75         91         94   

9% Permanent Interest Bearing Capital Bonds

     At any time         40         40         45         46   

Loans – Barclays Bank PLC

              

5.03% Reverse Dual Currency Undated Subordinated Loan (JPY 8,000m)

     2028         45         43         42         39   

5% Reverse Dual Currency Undated Subordinated Loan (JPY 12,000m)

     2028         67         64         59         54   

Barclays SLCSM Funding B.V. guaranteed by the Bank

              

6.14% Fixed Rate Guaranteed Perpetual Subordinated Notes

     2015                 265                 261   

Total undated subordinated liabilities

                  1,140             1,527             1,257             1,667   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  21


Risk and capital position review

Group capital resources, requirements and leverage

    

 

 

Table 8: Summary of terms and conditions of capital resources continued

 

                         Regulatory balance         IFRS balance   

Instrument

     Initial call date         Maturity date        

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

    

 

2014

£m

  

  

Barclays PLC issued

                 

2.625% Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Notes (EUR 1,250m)

     2020         2025         916                 918           

4.375% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,250m)

        2024         842         800         883         810   

Barclays Bank PLC issued

                 

4.38% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 75m)

        2015                 5                 49   

4.75% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 150m)

        2015                 3                 98   

6.05% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,556m)

        2017         404         582         1,124         1,102   

Floating Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 40m)

        2018         15         22         29         31   

6% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,750m)

        2018         532         836         1,377         1,462   

CMS-Linked Subordinated Notes (EUR 100m)

        2018         30         48         77         82   

CMS-Linked Subordinated Notes (EUR 135m)

        2018         44         68         103         109   

Fixed/Floating Rate Subordinated Callable Notes

     2018         2023         500         499         555         565   

7.75% Contingent Capital Notes (USD 1,000m)

     2018         2023         672         638         679         640   

Floating Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 50m)

        2019         29         38         36         38   

5.14% Lower Tier 2 Notes (USD 1,094m)

        2020         718         701         808         767   

6% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,500m)

        2021         1,104         1,168         1,252         1,338   

9.5% Subordinated Bonds (ex-Woolwich Plc)

        2021         200         199         293         306   

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 100m)

        2021         74         78         73         77   

10% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes

        2021         1,955         1,954         2,317         2,363   

10.179% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,521m)

        2021         1,027         975         1,083         1,062   

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 50m)

        2022         37         39         37         39   

6.625% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,000m)

        2022         733         775         891         947   

7.625% Contingent Capital Notes (USD 3,000m)

        2022         2,016         1,913         1,984         1,856   

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 50m)

        2023         37         39         37         39   

5.75% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes

        2026         604         604         802         828   

5.4% Reverse Dual Currency Subordinated Loan (JPY 15,000m)

        2027         84         81         80         74   

6.33% Subordinated Notes

        2032         50         50         60         62   

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 100m)

        2040         74         78         74         78   

Absa Bank Limited issued

                 

8.1% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 2,000m)

     2015         2020                 113                 114   

10.28% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 600m)

     2017         2022                         26         34   

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 400m)

     2017         2022                         18         22   

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,805m)

     2017         2022         78         101         79         101   

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 2,007m)

     2018         2023         87         112         88         112   

8.295% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,188m)

     2018         2023         51         66         42         64   

5.50% CPI-linked Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,500m)

     2023         2028                         86         109   

Barclays Africa Group Limited Issued

                 

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 370m)

     2019         2024         16         21         16         21   

10.835% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 130m)

     2019         2024         6         7         6         7   

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,693m)

        2025         73                 74           

10.05% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 807m)

        2025         34                 36           

11.4% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 288m)

        2025         13                 13           

11.365% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 508m)

     2020         2025         22                 23           

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 437m)

     2020         2025         19                 19           

11.81% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 737m)

     2022         2027         32                 33           

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 30m)

     2022         2027         1                 1           

Other capital issued by Barclays Africa and Japan

             
 
2016-
2019
 
  
                     87         107   

Total dated subordinated liabilities

                       13,129         12,613         16,219         15,513   

Non controlling Tier 2 capital – Barclays Bank PLC

                 

Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 1 (USD 335m)

    
 
Any interest
payment date
  
  
        222         222         222         222   

Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 2 (USD 415m)

    
 
Any interest
payment date
  
  
              264         264         264         264   

Total non controlling Tier 2 capital

                       486         486         486         486   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  22


Risk and capital position review

Group capital resources, requirements and leverage

    

 

 

Table 9: Risk weighted assets (RWAs) by risk type and business

This table shows RWAs by risk type and business.

 

Risk weighted assets (RWAs) by risk type and business

  

                                                               
    Credit risk                Counterparty credit risk                Market risk       
 
Operational
risk
  
  
 
     

 

Std

£m

  

  

   

 

F-IRB

£m

  

  

   

 

A-IRB

£m

  

  

   

 

Std

£m

  

  

   
 
F-IRB
£m
  
  
   

 

A-IRB

£m

  

  

   
 
 
Default
fund
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Settle-
ment
Risk
  
  
  
   

 

CVA

£m

  

  

   

 

Std

£m

  

  

   

 

IMA

£m

  

  

    £m       
 

 

Total
RWAs

£m

  
  

  

As at

31 December 2015

                                                                                                       

Personal & Corporate

                         

Banking

    31,506               71,352        242               1,122                      30                      16,176        120,428   

Barclaycard

    17,988               17,852                                                                5,505        41,345   

Africa Banking

    8,556               17,698        22               479               8        325        560        682        5,604        33,934   

Investment Bank

    4,808               39,414        9,587               10,132        916        517        3,438        9,327        10,574        19,620        108,333   

Head Office

    1,513               2,763        20               59        12               57               1,221        2,104        7,749   

Total Core

    64,371               149,079        9,871               11,792        928        525        3,850        9,887        12,477        49,009        311,789   

Barclays Non-Core

    5,078               11,912        1,221               9,231        176               7,418        599        3,301        7,651        46,587   

Total risk weighted assets

    69,449               160,991        11,092               21,023        1,104        525        11,268        10,486        15,778        56,660        358,376   

As at

31 December 2014

                                                                                                       

Personal & Corporate

                         

Banking

    32,657               70,080        238               1,049                      26                      16,176        120,226   

Barclaycard

    15,910               18,492                                                                5,505        39,907   

Africa Banking

    9,015        11,502        10,292        10        561                      1        310        638        588        5,604        38,521   

Investment Bank

    5,773               36,829        12,445               11,328        1,249        498        6,680        16,014        11,965        19,621        122,402   

Head Office

    506               2,912                      62        234               21        5        502        1,326        5,568   

Total Core

    63,861        11,502        138,605        12,693        561        12,439        1,483        499        7,037        16,657        13,055        48,232        326,624   

Barclays Non-Core

    10,679               19,416        2,619               18,403        369        38        8,470        1,575        5,279        8,428        75,276   

Total risk weighted assets

    74,540        11,502        158,021        15,312        561        30,842        1,852        537        15,507        18,232        18,334        56,660        401,900   

Table 10: Movements in risk weighted assets (RWAs)

This table shows movements in RWAs, split by risk types and macro drivers

 

Movement analysis of risk weighted assets (RWAs)

                                            
      
 
Credit risk 
£bn 
  
  
    
 
 
Counterparty 
credit riska
£bn 
  
  
  
    
 
Market riskb
£bn 
  
  
    
 

 

Operational
risk

£bn

  
  

  

    
 
Total 
£bn 
  
  

As at 1 January 2015

     244.0          49.1          52.1          56.7         401.9    

Book size

     8.3          (10.6)         (9.5)                 (11.8)   

Acquisitions and disposals

     (14.2)         –          (0.4)                 (14.6)   

Book quality

     0.1          (1.7)         0.7                  (0.9)   

Model updates

     (2.1)         (1.1)         (2.7)                 (5.9)   

Methodology and policy

     2.3          (1.9)         (2.6)                 (2.2)   

Foreign exchange movementc

     (8.0)         (0.1)         –                  (8.1)   

Other

     –          –          –                  –    

As at 31 December 2015

     230.4          33.7          37.6          56.7         358.4    

 

 

Notes

a RWAs in relation to default fund contributions are included in counterparty credit risk.
b RWAs in relation to CVA are included in market risk.
c Foreign exchange movement does not include FX for modelled counterparty credit risk or modelled market risk.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  23


Risk and capital position review

Group capital resources, requirements and leverage

        

 

 

Total RWA movement

RWAs decreased £43.5bn to £358.4bn, driven by:

 

§   Book size: RWAs decreased by £11.8bn primarily due to a reduction in holdings of US bonds and equities and a reduction in derivatives and securities financing transactions. This was partially offset by a growth in corporate lending, particularly in Africa and the UK

 

§   Acquisitions and disposals: RWAs decreased by £14.6bn primarily due to disposals in Non-Core, including the sale of the Spanish business

 

§   Model updates: RWAs decreased by £5.9bn primarily due to implementation of diversification benefits across advanced general and specific market risk, as well as a recalibration of a credit risk model within the Investment Bank and Non-Core

 

§   Methodology and policy: RWAs decreased by £2.2bn primarily due to the implementation of collateral modelling for mismatched FX collateral and a transfer of securities financing transactions in certain businesses from the banking book to trading book, enabling further collateral offset

 

§   Foreign exchange movements: RWAs decreased by £8.1bn primarily due to depreciation of ZAR against GBP.

Credit risk

RWAs decreased by £13.6bn, reflecting:

 

§   Acquisitions and disposals: RWAs decreased by £14.2bn driven by disposals in Non-Core, including the sale of the Spanish business

 

§   Foreign exchange movements: RWAs decreased by £8.0bn primarily due to depreciation of ZAR against GBP

 

§   Model updates: RWAs decreased by £2.1bn primarily driven by the transition to a new model within PCB and following a model recalibration within the Investment Bank and Non-Core.

Offset by:

 

§   Book size: RWAs increased by £8.3bn driven by a £3.4bn increase in Africa Banking due to an increase in corporate lending; £1.9bn increase in PCB primarily driven by UK corporate asset growth; and £1.9bn increase in Barclaycard primarily due to asset growth in the US

 

§   Methodology and policy: RWAs increased by £2.3bn primarily driven by the Investment Bank and Non-Core in part due to a transfer of counterparties from the trading to the banking book following a change in the regulatory treatment for securitisation transactions.

Counterparty credit risk

RWAs decreased by £15.4bn, reflecting:

 

§   Book size: RWAs decreased by £10.6bn primarily driven by a reduction in derivative and securities financing transaction exposures in the Investment Bank and Non-Core

 

§   Methodology and policy: RWAs decreased by £1.9bn primarily due to the implementation of collateral modelling for mismatched FX collateral and a a transfer of securities financing transactions in certain businesses from the banking book to trading book, enabling further collateral offset. This was partially offset by an increase in RWAs due to the capture of an extended margin period of risk on securities financing transactions within the Investment Bank

 

§   Book quality: RWAs decreased by £1.7bn, primarily due to counterparties no longer in default as a result of debt restructure

 

§   Model updates: RWAs decreased by £1.1bn primarily driven by a model recalibration within the Investment Bank and Non-Core.

Market risk

RWAs decreased by £14.5bn, reflecting:

 

§   Book size: RWAs reduced by £9.5bn driven by a reduction in the holdings of US bonds and equities trading book exposures within the Investment Bank and Non-Core

 

§   Model updates: RWAs decreased by £2.7bn primarily due to implementation of diversification benefits across advanced general and specific market risk within the Investment Bank and Non-Core

 

§   Methodology and policy: RWAs decreased by £2.6bn partly driven by a change in calculation methodology on CVA as a result of updated regulatory guidance.

Operational risk

§   Barclays’ operational risk RWA requirement has remained static at £56.7bn, pending regulatory approval for AMA model enhancements.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  24


Risk and capital position review

Group capital resources, requirements and leverage

        

 

 

Basis of preparation for movements in risk weighted assets

This analysis splits RWA movement by credit, counterparty credit, market and operational risk. Seven categories of drivers have been identified and are described below. Not all the drivers are applicable to all risk types, however all categories have been listed below for completeness purposes.

Book size

Credit risk and counterparty risk

This represents RWA movements driven by changes in the size and composition of underlying positions, measured using EAD values for existing portfolios over the period. This includes, but is not exclusive to:

 

§   new business and maturing loans

 

§   changes in product mix and exposure growth for existing portfolios

 

§   book size reductions owing to write-offs.

Market risk (inc CVA)

This represents RWA movements owing to the changes in trading positions and volumes driven by business activity.

Book quality

Credit risk and counterparty risk

This represents RWA movements driven by changes in the underlying credit quality and recoverability of portfolios and reflected through model calibrations or realignments where applicable. This includes, but is not exclusive to:

 

§   PD migration and LGD changes driven by economic conditions

 

§   ratings migration for standardised exposures

 

§   changing lending practices, demographics and maturity.

Market risk (inc CVA)

This is the movement in RWAs owing to changing risk levels in the trading book, caused by fluctuations in market conditions.

Model updates

Credit risk and counterparty risk

This is the movement in RWAs as a result of both internal and external model updates. This includes, but is not exclusive to:

 

§   updates to existing model inputs driven by both internal and external review

 

§   model enhancements to improve model performance.

Market risk (inc CVA)

This is the movement in RWAs reflecting changes in model scope, changes to market data levels, volatilities, correlations, liquidity and ratings used as input for the internal modelled RWA calculations.

Methodology and policy

Credit risk and counterparty risk

This is the movement in RWAs as a result of both internal and external methodology, policy and regulatory changes. This includes, but is not exclusive to:

 

§   updates to RWA calculation methodology, communicated by the regulator

 

§   the implementation of credit risk mitigation to a wider scope of portfolios.

Market risk (inc CVA)

This is the movement in RWAs as a result of both internal and external methodology, policy and regulatory changes for market risk and CVA.

Acquisitions and disposals

This is the movement in RWAs as a result of the disposal or acquisition of business operations impacting the size of banking and trading portfolios. This includes credit RWA reductions relating to Non-Core.

Foreign exchange movements

This is the movement in RWAs as a result of changes in the exchange rate between the functional currency of the Barclays business area or portfolio and Barclays’ presentational currency for consolidated reporting. It should be noted that foreign exchange movements shown in table 10 do not include the impact of foreign exchange for the counterparty credit risk IMM and modelled market risk RWAs.

Other

This is the movement in RWAs driven by items that cannot be reasonably assigned to the other driver categories. This category had a nil balance for the year ended 31 December 2015.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  25


Risk and capital position review

Group capital resources, requirements and leverage

    

 

 

Leverage ratio and exposures

Table 11: Leverage ratio

The leverage calculation below uses the end-point CRR definition of Tier 1 capital for the numerator and the CRR definition of leverage exposure.

At 31 December 2015, Barclays’ leverage ratio was 4.5%, which exceeds the expected end-point minimum requirement of 3.7% as outlined by the PRA Supervisory Statement SS45/15 and the updated PRA rulebook, comprising of the 3% minimum requirement, and the fully phased-in G-SII buffer.

 

Leverage ratio

                 

Leverage exposure

    
 
 
As at
31.12.15
£bn
  
  
  
    
 

 

As at
31.12.14

£bn

  
a 

  

Accounting assets

     

Derivative financial instruments

     328          440    

Cash collateral

     62          73    

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

     28          132    

Financial assets designated at fair valueb

     77          38    

Loans and advances and other assets

     625          675    

Total IFRS assets

     1,120          1,358    

Regulatory consolidation adjustments

     (10)         (8)   

Derivatives adjustments

     

Derivatives netting

     (293)         (395)   

Adjustments to cash collateral

     (46)         (53)   

Net written credit protection

     15          27    

Potential Future Exposure (PFE) on derivatives

     129          179    

Total derivatives adjustments

     (195)         (242)   

Securities financing transactions (SFTs) adjustments

     16          25    

Regulatory deductions and other adjustments

     (14)         (15)   

Weighted off-balance sheet commitments

     111          115    

Total fully loaded leverage exposure

     1,028          1,233    

Fully loaded CET1 capital

     40.7          41.5    

Fully loaded AT1 capital

     5.4          4.6    

Fully loaded Tier 1 capital

     46.2          46.0    

Fully loaded leverage ratio

     4.5%         3.7%   

During 2015 the leverage ratio increased significantly to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%) driven by a reduction in the leverage exposure of £205bn to £1,028bn:

 

§   total derivative exposuresc decreased £76bn to £195bn:

 

  - PFE decreased £50bn to £129bn, mainly as a result of continued Non-Core rundown and optimisations including trade compressions and tear-ups

 

  - other derivative assets decreased £14bn to £51bn, driven by a net decrease in IFRS derivatives. The decrease was mainly within interest rate and foreign exchange derivatives due to net trade reduction and an increase in major interest forward curves

 

  - net written credit protection decreased £12bn to £15bn due to a reduction in business activity and improved portfolio netting

 

§   taken together, reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and financial assets designated at fair value decreased £65bn to £105bn, reflecting a reduction in matched book trading and general firm financing due to balance sheet deleveraging

 

§   loans and advances and other assets decreased by £50bn to £625bn driven by a £37bn reduction in trading portfolio assets primarily due to Non-Core rundown, a reduction in trading activities in the Investment Bank, as well as a £10bn decrease in settlement balances and a £9bn decrease in Africa Banking reflecting the depreciation of ZAR against GBP. This was partially offset by lending growth of £3bn in Barclaycard and £2bn in PCB

 

§   SFT adjustments decreased by £9bn to £16bn due to maturity of trades and a reduction in trading volumes.

 

Notes

a 2014 comparatives have been prepared on a BCBS 270 basis. Barclays does not believe that there is a material difference between the BCBS 270 leverage exposure and a leverage exposure calculated in accordance with the EU delegated act.
b Included within financial assets designated at fair value are reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair value of £50bn (2014:£5bn).
c Total derivative exposures includes IFRS derivative financial instruments, cash collateral and total derivative adjustments.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  26


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

    

 

This section details Barclays’ credit risk profile, focusing on regulatory measures such as exposure at default and risk weighted assets. The risk profile is analysed by business segment, country and industry concentrations, residual maturities, probabilities of default and actual losses.

 

§  RWAs decreased 5.6% to £230.4bn, primarily driven by disposals in Non-Core and foreign exchange movements, partially offset by exposure growth in Africa Banking, PCB and Barclaycard.

 

Risk weighted assets for credit risk reduced in the year

 

-£13.6bn total RWA

Driven by:

 

-£14.2bn

Disposals in Non-Core

 

-£8.0bn

Foreign exchange movement due to the depreciation of ZAR against GBP

 

-£2.1bn

Recalibration of a credit risk model within Investment Bank and Non-Core; offset by:

 

+£8.3bn

Corporate lending increase in Africa Banking and asset growth in PCB and Barclaycard

 

+£2.3bn

Counterparty transfer from the trading to banking book in Investment Bank and Non-Core due to a change in securitisation rules

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  27


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Analysis of capital requirements for credit risk and exposures

Table 12: Minimum capital requirements and exposure for credit risk – Note on pre- and post credit risk mitigation (CRM) EAD

This table summarises credit risk information presented in the rest of this report and shows exposure at default pre and post-CRM, and the associated capital requirements. In accordance with regulatory requirements, credit risk mitigation is either reflected in regulatory measures for exposure at default (EAD), or in the risk inputs: probability of default (PD) and loss given default (LGD). For the majority of Barclays’ exposures, in particular mortgages and those under the AIRB treatment, the impact of CRM is primarily reflected in the PD or LGD rather than EAD measures.

The Africa Banking wholesale portfolio previously reported under the FIRB approach, moved to AIRB during 2015; as such, 2015 FIRB balances are nil.

RWAs and post-CRM exposures are analysed by business on pages 30 and 31. Pre-CRM exposures are further analysed by geography on page 35, industry on page 37 and residual maturity on page 39. Information on the impact of CRM on EAD is set out on page 126.

 

 

Credit exposure class

       EAD pre-CRMa         EAD post-CRMa         Capital requirements   

As at 31 December 2015

    

 

Year end

£m

  

  

    

 

Average

£m

b 

  

    

 

Year end

£m

  

  

    

 

Average

£m

b 

  

    

 

RWA

£m

  

  

    
 

 

Average
RWA

£m

  
b 

  

    
 

 

Capital
reqs

£m

  
  

  

Standardised approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

     113,327         105,769         113,183         105,716         2,509         2,512         201   

Regional governments or local authorities

     881         638         881         638         121         46         10   

Public sector entities

     213         306         204         297         45         112         4   

Multilateral development banks

     4,181         4,145         4,181         4,145                 7           

International organisations

     2,394         2,634         2,394         2,634                           

Institutions

     7,735         8,004         7,663         7,863         1,990         2,160         161   

Corporates

     48,749         49,394         36,638         36,754         31,211         31,142         2,497   

Retail

     27,109         26,746         26,476         26,033         19,828         19,596         1,586   

Secured by mortgages

     13,860         14,913         13,860         14,913         5,714         6,130         457   

Exposures in default

     2,247         2,183         2,199         2,145         2,800         2,710         224   

Items associated with high risk

     2,034         1,625         2,034         1,625         3,339         2,722         267   

Covered bonds

     1,209         1,118         1,209         1,118         242         224         19   

Securitisation positions

                                                       

Collective investment undertakings

     1                 1                 1                   

Equity positions

     526         627         526         627         1,161         1,362         93   

Other items

     2,167         2,933         2,167         2,933         488         558         39   

Total Standardised approach credit risk exposure

     226,633         221,035         213,616         207,441         69,449         69,281         5,558   

Foundation IRB approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

                                                       

Institutions

                                                       

Corporates

                                                       

Total Foundation approach credit risk exposure

                                                       

Advanced IRB approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

     14,782         13,135         14,782         13,135         2,648         3,054         212   

Institutions

     28,219         30,023         28,219         30,023         7,096         6,895         568   

Corporates

     159,011         155,311         151,520         147,720         72,926         73,460         5,833   

Retail

                    

– Small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs)

     7,897         8,432         7,897         8,432         3,609         3,889         289   

– Secured by real estate collateral

     155,977         158,534         155,977         158,534         27,023         27,601         2,162   

– Qualifying revolving retail

     44,003         44,198         44,003         44,198         18,766         19,389         1,501   

– Other retail

     8,596         8,963         8,596         8,963         8,658         9,013         693   

Equity

                                                       

Securitisation positions

     17,367         20,237         17,367         20,237         3,141         4,178         251   

Non-credit obligation assets

     11,319         11,663         11,319         11,663         17,124         17,080         1,370   

Total Advanced IRB credit risk exposure

     447,171         450,496         439,680         442,905         160,991         164,559         12,879   

Total credit exposure

     673,804         671,531         653,296         650,346         230,440         233,840         18,437   

 

 

Notes

a Collateral and guarantees for Advanced IRB are not included within EAD as these are incorporated in loss given default (LGD) calculations.
b Averages are based on the past four quarter end positions.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  28


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

 Table 12: Minimum capital requirements and exposure for credit risk – Note on pre and post credit risk mitigation (CRM) EAD continued

 

 

 Credit exposure class

 

     EAD pre-CRMa,c         EAD post-CRMa         Capital requirements   

As at 31 December 2014

    
 
Year end
£m
  
  
    

 

Average

£m

b 

  

    

 

Year end

£m

  

  

    

 

Average

£m

b 

  

    

 

RWA

£m

  

  

    

 

 

Average

RWA

£m

  

b 

  

    
 
 
Capital
reqs
£m
  
  
  

Standardised approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

     104,499         103,061         104,499         103,046         2,828         2,480         226   

Regional governments or local authorities

     863         1,512         862         1,512         37         66         3   

Public sector entities

     365         267         354         263         190         120         15   

Multilateral development banks

     3,085         3,848         3,085         3,848         26         7         2   

International organisations

     2,609         1,623         2,609         1,623                           

Institutions

     6,952         6,887         6,765         6,714         2,844         2,466         197   

Corporates

     49,953         48,808         37,344         35,617         32,798         33,091         2,611   

Retail

     27,711         26,688         26,879         25,788         20,506         19,572         1,640   

Secured by mortgages

     15,948         16,112         15,948         16,114         6,424         6,244         514   

Exposures in default

     3,086         2,862         3,061         2,827         3,885         3,504         311   

Items associated with high risk

     1,552         1,816         1,552         1,816         2,683         3,183         215   

Covered bonds

     858         837         858         837         172         187         14   

Securitisation positions

                                                       

Collective investment undertakings

             132                 126                 38           

Equity positions

     660         890         660         890         1,524         1,791         110   

Other items

     2,852         2,975         2,852         2,975         623         659         50   

Total Standardised approach credit risk exposure

     220,993         218,318         207,328         203,996         74,540         73,408         5,908   

Foundation IRB approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

     176         212         176         212         95         102         8   

Institutions

     981         970         981         970         472         433         38   

Corporates

     14,761         14,458         14,761         14,458         10,935         10,766         875   

Total Foundation approach credit risk exposure

     15,918         15,640         15,918         15,640         11,502         11,301         921   

Advanced IRB approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

     6,704         8,662         6,704         8,662         744         1,039         57   

Institutions

     30,521         31,558         30,521         31,558         7,108         7,368         604   

Corporates

     138,168         134,952         129,547         126,049         64,987         63,506         5,191   

Retail

                    

– Small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs)

     8,835         9,014         8,835         9,014         4,203         4,970         336   

– Secured by real estate collateral

     172,500         172,415         172,500         172,415         30,895         31,613         2,472   

– Qualifying revolving retail

     43,953         43,212         43,953         43,212         19,676         19,529         1,574   

– Other retail

     9,053         9,051         9,053         9,051         8,614         8,408         689   

Equity

                                                       

Securitisation positions

     20,848         20,802         20,848         20,802         5,315         8,200         425   

Non-credit obligation assets

     11,729         12,204         11,729         12,204         16,479         14,973         1,319   

Total Advanced IRB credit risk exposure

     442,311         441,870         433,690         432,967         158,021         159,606         12,667   

Total credit exposure

     679,222         675,828         656,936         652,603         244,063         244,315         19,496   

Exposure at default pre and post CRM and RWA decrease is primarily driven by the sale of the Spanish business and the UK Secured Lending portfolio and rundown of legacy portfolio assets.

The key movements by business are as shown in Table 13 and 14 while further details are provided in tables 16 to 32.

 

 

Notes

a Collateral and guarantees for advanced IRB are not included within EAD as these are incorporated in loss given default (LGD) calculations.
b Averages are calculated from the past four quarters. This is to show intra-year fluctuations.
c EAD Pre-CRM excludes the impact of balance sheet netting. Prior period balances on tables 12, 16, 17 and 18 have been revised to reflect this.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  29


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Credit risk exposures

The following tables analyse credit risk exposures and risk weighted assets.

Table 13: Detailed view of exposure at default, post-CRM by business

This table shows exposure at default post-CRM by business and credit exposure class for credit risk.

The Africa Banking wholesale portfolio previously reported under the FIRB approach, moved to AIRB during 2015; as such, 2015 FIRB balances are nil.

 

EAD post-CRM credit exposure class

                                                                       

As at 31 December 2015

    
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
Barclaycard
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Africa
Banking
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Investment
Bank

£m

  
  

  

    
 
Head Office
£m
  
  
    
 
Total Core
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Barclays
Non-Core
£m
  
  
  
    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Credit risk

                                                                       

Standardised approach

                       

Central governments or central banks

     43,261         2,558         3,765         18,760         39,729         108,073         5,110         113,183   

Regional governments or local authorities

     326         11         2         242         266         847         34         881   

Public sector entities

     176                         3                 179         25         204   

Multilateral development banks

     1,683         19         10         747         1,527         3,986         195         4,181   

International organisations

     963         11         6         428         874         2,282         112         2,394   

Institutions

     4,248         309         123         747         1,791         7,218         445         7,663   

Corporates

     23,925         289         3,553         7,021         56         34,844         1,794         36,638   

Retail

     782         22,861         2,046                         25,689         787         26,476   

Secured by mortgages

     12,524                 153         576                 13,253         607         13,860   

Exposures in default

     1,205         333         125         167                 1,830         369         2,199   

Items associated with high risk

     54         3                 182         583         822         1,212         2,034   

Covered bonds

     413         5         2         183         434         1,037         172         1,209   

Securitisation positions

                                                               

Collective investment undertakings

                     1                         1                 1   

Equity positions

     33                 222         45                 300         226         526   

Other items

     1,666         100         287         11         20         2,084         83         2,167   

Total Standardised approach credit risk exposure

     91,259         26,499         10,295         29,112         45,280         202,445         11,171         213,616   

Foundation IRB approach

                       

Central governments or central banks

                                                               

Institutions

                                                               

Corporates

                                                               

Total Foundation approach credit risk exposure

                                                               

Advanced IRB approach

                       

Central governments or central banks

     3,185         23         3,077         1,625         6,188         14,098         684         14,782   

Institutions

     6,735         27         640         10,461         2,603         20,466         7,753         28,219   

Corporates

     58,917         3         13,271         68,529         250         140,970         10,550         151,520   

Retail

                                                               

– Small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs)

     6,790                 1,107                         7,897                 7,897   

– Secured by real estate collateral

     130,530                 10,782                         141,312         14,665         155,977   

– Qualifying revolving retail

     9,900         31,883         2,220                         44,003                 44,003   

– Other retail

     5,388         1         3,199                         8,588         8         8,596   

Equity

                                                               

Securitisation positions

                     151         13,515         515         14,181         3,186         17,367   

Non-credit obligation assets

     1,780         1,976         1,367         4,621         856         10,600         719         11,319   

Total Advanced IRB credit risk exposure

     223,225         33,913         35,814         98,751         10,412         402,115         37,565         439,680   

Total credit risk exposure

     314,484         60,412         46,109         127,863         55,692         604,560         48,736         653,296   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  30


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Table 13: Detailed view of exposure at default, post-CRM by business continued

 

EAD post-CRM credit exposure class

                                                                       

As at 31 December 2014

    
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
Barclaycard
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Africa
Banking
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Investment
Bank

£m

  
  

  

    
 
Head Office
£m
  
  
    
 
Total Core
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Barclays
Non-Core
£m
  
  
  
    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Credit risk

                                                                       

Standardised approach

                       

Central governments or central banks

     37,745         1,710         7,295         16,629         30,653         94,032         10,467         104,499   

Regional governments or local authorities

     448         2         1         124         219         794         68         862   

Public sector entities

     181                         163                 344         10         354   

Multilateral development banks

     1,203         8         31         525         1,004         2,771         314         3,085   

International organisations

     1,026         7         5         448         856         2,342         267         2,609   

Institutions

     4,901         356         548         171         108         6,084         681         6,765   

Corporates

     23,714         464         2,756         6,708         188         33,830         3,514         37,344   

Retail

     1,075         20,049         2,224                         23,348         3,531         26,879   

Secured by mortgages

     14,175                 153         558                 14,886         1,062         15,948   

Exposures in default

     1,243         293         232         21                 1,789         1,272         3,061   

Items associated with high risk

     57                         165         135         357         1,195         1,552   

Covered bonds

                                     698         698         160         858   

Securitisation positions

                                                               

Collective investment undertakings

                                                               

Equity positions

     47                 250         133                 430         230         660   

Other items

     1,575         121         468         84         15         2,263         589         2,852   

Total Standardised approach credit risk exposure

     87,390         23,010         13,963         25,729         33,876         183,968         23,360         207,328   

Foundation IRB approach

                       

Central governments or central banks

                     176                         176                 176   

Institutions

                     981                         981                 981   

Corporates

                     14,761                         14,761                 14,761   

Total Foundation approach credit risk exposure

                     15,918                         15,918                 15,918   

Advanced IRB Approach

                       

Central governments or central banks

     1,947         8         5         1,632         1,763         5,355         1,349         6,704   

Institutions

     6,969         23         15         11,303         4,462         22,772         7,749         30,521   

Corporates

     55,611         2         6         58,908         264         114,791         14,756         129,547   

Retail

                       

– Small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs)

     7,711                 1,124                         8,835                 8,835   

– Secured by real estate collateral

     130,575                 13,896                         144,471         28,029         172,500   

– Qualifying revolving retail

     9,643         31,605         2,705                         43,953                 43,953   

– Other retail

     4,844         2         4,197                         9,043         10         9,053   

Equity

                                                               

Securitisation positions

     93                 270         14,978         628         15,969         4,879         20,848   

Non-credit obligation assets

     2,054         1,785         1,543         4,023         927         10,332         1,397         11,729   

Total Advanced IRB credit risk exposure

     219,447         33,425         23,761         90,844         8,044         375,521         58,169         433,690   

Total credit risk exposure

     306,837         56,435         53,642         116,573         41,920         575,407         81,529         656,936   

Exposure at default post- CRM decreased by £3.6bn to £653.3bn. The key movements by business were as follows:

 

§   PCB increased by £7.6bn to £314.5bn, driven by an increase in corporate lending

 

§   Barclaycard increased by £4.0bn to £60.4bn, driven by asset growth and the depreciation of GBP against USD

 

§   Africa Banking decreased by £7.5bn to £46.1bn, driven by depreciation of ZAR against GBP

 

§   Investment Bank increased by £11.3bn to £127.9bn, driven by new syndication facilities and movement in the Group liquidity pool

 

§   Head Office increased by £13.8bn to £55.7bn, driven by movement in the Group liquidity pool, increased deferred tax assets and collateral pledges

 

§   Barclays Non-Core decreased by £32.8bn to £48.7bn, driven by the sale of the Spanish business and the UK Secured Lending portfolio and the rundown of legacy portfolio assets.

The total Group liquidity pool composition has decreased £4bn to £145bn. This was primarily driven by a £14bn decrease in bonds sourced through reverse repurchase transactions, offset by a £10bn increase in bonds held on-balance sheet. These result in an increase in credit risk EAD and a decrease in counterparty credit risk EAD. The composition of the liquidity pool is efficiently and centrally managed, with further details provided in the Annual Report page 191.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  31


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

            

 

 

Table 14: Detailed view of credit risk RWAs by business

This table shows RWAs for credit risk by business, broken down by credit exposure class for credit risk in the banking book.

 

Risk weighted assets credit exposure class

                                                                       

As at 31 December 2015

    
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
Barclaycard
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Africa
Banking
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Investment
Bank

£m

  
  

  

    
 
Head Office
£m
  
  
    
 
Total Core
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Barclays
Non-Core
£m
  
  
  
    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Credit risk

                                                                       

Standardised approach

                       

Central governments or central banks

             1         2,441         14         52         2,508         1         2,509   

Regional governments or local authorities

     7         2                 112                 121                 121   

Public sector entities

     39                         1                 40         5         45   

Multilateral development banks

                                                               

International organisations

                                                               

Institutions

     1,244         61         52         77         445         1,879         111         1,990   

Corporates

     22,520         341         3,533         3,759         51         30,204         1,007         31,211   

Retail

     583         17,146         1,535                         19,264         564         19,828   

Secured by mortgages

     5,150                 116         223                 5,489         225         5,714   

Exposures in default

     1,488         413         163         229         1         2,294         506         2,800   

Items associated with high risks

     81         4                 278         874         1,237         2,102         3,339   

Covered bonds

     83         1                 37         87         208         34         242   

Securitisation positions

                                                               

Collective investment undertakings

                     1                         1                 1   

Equity positions

     82                 497         68                 647         514         1,161   

Other items

     229         19         218         10         3         479         9         488   

Total Standardised approach credit risk exposure

     31,506         17,988         8,556         4,808         1,513         64,371         5,078         69,449   

Foundation IRB approach

                       

Central governments or central banks

                                                               

Institutions

                                                               

Corporates

                                                               

Total Foundation approach credit risk exposure

                                                               

Advanced IRB approach

                       

Central governments or central banks

     548         5         1,237         310         467         2,567         81         2,648   

Institutions

     2,758         5         309         1,243         431         4,746         2,350         7,096   

Corporates

     36,155                 7,449         27,039         16         70,659         2,267         72,926   

Retail

                       

– Small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs)

     3,000                 609                         3,609                 3,609   

– Secured by real estate collateral

     19,399                 3,019                         22,418         4,605         27,023   

– Qualifying revolving retail

     1,579         15,754         1,433                         18,766                 18,766   

– Other retail

     6,160         1         2,496                         8,657         1         8,658   

Equity

                                                               

Securitisation positions

                     21         1,720         46         1,787         1,354         3,141   

Non-credit obligation assets

     1,753         2,087         1,125         9,102         1,803         15,870         1,254         17,124   

Total Advanced IRB credit risk exposure

     71,352         17,852         17,698         39,414         2,763         149,079         11,912         160,991   

Total credit risk weighted assets

     102,858         35,840         26,254         44,222         4,276         213,450         16,990         230,440   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  32


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Table 14: Detailed view of credit risk RWAs by business continued

 

Risk weighted assets credit exposure class

                                                                       

As at 31 December 2014

    
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
Barclaycard
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Africa
Banking
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Investment
Bank

£m

  
  

  

    
 
Head Office
£m
  
  
    
 
Total Core
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Barclays
Non-Core
£m
  
  
  
    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Credit risk

                                                                       

Standardised approach

                       

Central governments or central banks

     3                 2,518                 51         2,572         256         2,828   

Regional governments or local authorities

     27                         10                 37                 37   

Public sector entities

     45                         135                 180         10         190   

Multilateral development banks

                     26                         26                 26   

International organisations

                                                               

Institutions

     1,695         72         272         419         26         2,484         360         2,844   

Corporates

     22,537         479         2,755         4,337         85         30,193         2,605         32,798   

Retail

     817         15,038         2,091                         17,946         2,560         20,506   

Secured by mortgages

     5,632                 115         217                 5,964         460         6,424   

Exposures in default

     1,561         296         316         32                 2,205         1,680         3,885   

Items associated with high risk

     85                         248         202         535         2,148         2,683   

Covered bonds

                                     140         140         32         172   

Securitisation positions

                                                               

Collective investment undertakings

                                                               

Equity positions

     116                 538         342                 996         528         1,524   

Other items

     139         25         384         33         2         583         40         623   

Total Standardised approach credit risk exposure

     32,657         15,910         9,015         5,773         506         63,861         10,679         74,540   

Foundation IRB approach

                       

Central governments or central banks

                     95                         95                 95   

Institutions

                     472                         472                 472   

Corporates

                     10,935                         10,935                 10,935   

Total Foundation approach credit risk exposure

                     11,502                         11,502                 11,502   

Advanced IRB approach

                       

Central governments or central banks

     219         1         1         250         151         622         122         744   

Institutions

     2,134         5         4         1,370         1,352         4,865         2,243         7,108   

Corporates

     34,905                 5         25,205         121         60,236         4,751         64,987   

Retail

                       

– Small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs)

     3,530                 673                         4,203                 4,203   

– Secured by real estate collateral

     19,747                 3,622                         23,369         7,526         30,895   

– Qualifying revolving retail

     1,423         16,539         1,714                         19,676                 19,676   

– Other retail

     5,626         2         2,983                         8,611         3         8,614   

Equity

                                                               

Securitisation positions

     28                 51         2,187         57         2,323         2,992         5,315   

Non-credit obligation assets

     2,468         1,945         1,239         7,817         1,231         14,700         1,779         16,479   

Total Advanced IRB credit risk exposure

     70,080         18,492         10,292         36,829         2,912         138,605         19,416         158,021   

Total credit risk weighted assets

     102,737         34,402         30,809         42,602         3,418         213,968         30,095         244,063   

Risk weighted assets decreased by £13.6bn to £230.4bn. The key movements by business were as follows:

 

§   PCB remained stable at £102.9bn

 

§   Barclaycard increased by £1.4bn to £35.8bn, driven by asset growth, especially within Barclaycard US

 

§   Africa Banking decreased by £4.6bn to £26.3bn, driven by depreciation of ZAR against GBP, partly offset by underlying asset growth

 

§   Investment Bank increased by £1.6bn to £44.2bn, driven by new syndication facilities

 

§   Head Office increased by £0.9bn to £4.3bn, driven by increased deferred tax assets and collateral pledges

 

§   Barclays Non-Core decreased by £13.1bn to £17.0bn, driven by the sale of the Spanish business and the UK Secured Lending portfolio and the rundown of legacy portfolio assets.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  33


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Table 15: Banking book reconciliation of IFRS balance sheet and credit risk calculation

This table provides a bridge between the IFRS balance sheet and regulatory exposures subject to credit risk calculation.

The table expands upon Table 1, which shows the difference between the IFRS and regulatory scope of consolidation. In addition, the following balances are excluded for the purpose of determining exposures subject to credit risk calculations:

 

§   assets not subject to credit risk – this includes items subject to market risk and counterparty credit risk calculations, and settlement balances

 

§   specific regulatory adjustments – this includes adjustments to account for differences in IFRS and regulatory netting, items treated as regulatory capital deductions and other adjustments to IFRS balances as prescribed by CRD IV

 

§   off-balance sheet – this captures items that are off-balance sheet for the purpose of IFRS disclosures, but within the scope of credit risk calculations. These balances are shown after applying credit conversion factors to reflect the conversion of credit facilities into drawn balances.

The total regulatory exposure is disclosed pre-CRM, as the differences between EAD pre- and post-CRM are already expressed through other tables within the document.

 

As at 31 December 2015

 

Accounting

balance sheet

per published

financial

statements

£m

 

Deconsolid- 

ation of 

insurance/ 

 other entities 

£m 

 

Consolidation  of banking  associates/ 

other entities 

£m 

 

Balance

sheet per

regulatory

scope of

consolidation

£m

 

  Balances not 

subject to 

credit risk 

calculations 

£m 

 

Specific 

Regulatory 

Adjustments   and balances 

adjusted 

directly 

through 

Capital 

£m 

 

Regulatory 

Exposure 

 value of IFRS 

off balance 

sheet items 

post CCFs 

£m 

 

Total  

£m  

Assets

               

Cash and balances at central banks and items in the course of collection from other banks

  50,722   (10)   51    50,763   –    –    –    50,763  

Trading portfolio assets

  77,348   –    2,762    80,110   (80,110)   –    –    –  

Financial assets designated at fair value

  76,830   (2,414)   146    74,562   (52,149)   (177)   –    22,236  

Derivative financial instruments

  327,709   (2)   (1,642)   326,065   (326,065)   –    –    –  

Available for sale investments

  90,267   (2,152)   –    88,115   (3)   (801)   (9)   87,302  

Loans and advances to banks

  41,349   (146)   80    41,283   (19,127)   (9)   168    22,315  

Loans and advances to customers

  399,217   (5,878)   1,465    394,804   (67,430)   19,366    127,745    474,485  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

  28,187   –    –    28,187   (28,187)   –    –    –  

Other assets

  28,383   (1,731)   (355)   26,297   (9,475)   (119)   –    16,703  

Total assets

  1,120,012   (12,333)   2,507   1,110,186   (582,546)   18,260    127,904        673,804  

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  34


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Table 16: Geographic analysis of credit exposure

This table shows exposure at default pre-CRM, broken down by credit exposure class and geographic location of the counterparty.

The Africa Banking wholesale portfolio previously reported under the FIRB approach, moved to AIRB during 2015; as such, 2015 FIRB balances are nil.

 

EAD pre-CRM credit exposure class

                                                    

As at 31 December 2015

    
 
 
United
Kingdom
£m
  
  
  
    

 

Europe

£m

  

  

    
 
Americas
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Africa and
  Middle East
£m
  
  
  
    

 

Asia

£m

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Standardised approach

                

Central governments or central banks

     31,591         44,299         32,974        4,202         261         113,327   

Regional governments or local authorities

     41         728         11        101                 881   

Public sector entities

     47         154         3                9         213   

Multilateral development banks

             2,866         1,147        86         82         4,181   

International organisations

             2,394                                2,394   

Institutions

     3,569         981         753        120         2,312         7,735   

Corporates

     15,094         8,680         15,404        6,012         3,559         48,749   

Retail

     6,564         3,188         15,099        2,150         108         27,109   

Secured by mortgages

     9,235         2,231         1,451        596         347         13,860   

Exposures in default

     844         622         553        198         30         2,247   

Items associated with high risk

     998         409         603        3         21         2,034   

Covered bonds

             1,209                                1,209   

Securitisation positions

                                              

Collective investment undertakings

                            1                 1   

Equity positions

     120         136         17        226         27         526   

Other items

     1,775         94         2        280         16         2,167   

Total Standardised approach credit risk exposure

     69,878         67,991         68,017        13,975         6,772         226,633   

Foundation IRB approach

                

Central governments or central banks

                                              

Institutions

                                              

Corporates

                                              

Total Foundation approach credit risk exposure

                                              

Advanced IRB approach

                

Central governments or central banks

     4,385         2,247         106        3,672         4,372         14,782   

Institutions

     11,695         5,425         7,342        925         2,832         28,219   

Corporates

     79,355         20,140         43,434        13,742         2,340         159,011   

Retail

     181,481         17,648         16        17,322         6         216,473   

Equity

                                              

Securitisation positions

     3,521         886         12,634        151         175         17,367   

Non-credit obligation assets

     7,976         329         1,618        1,210         186         11,319   

Total Advanced IRB credit risk exposure

     288,413         46,675         65,150        37,022         9,911         447,171   

Total credit risk exposure

       358,291          114,666           133,167        50,997           16,683           673,804   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  35


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

 

 

 

Table 16: Geographic analysis of credit exposure continued

 

EAD pre-CRM credit exposure class

  

As at 31 December 2014

    

 

 

United

Kingdom

£m

  

  

  

    

 

Europe

£m

  

  

    

 

Americas

£m

  

  

    

 

 

Africa and

Middle East

£m

  

  

  

    

 

Asia

£m

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Standardised approach

                 

Central governments or central banks

     35,243         31,248         29,218         7,828         962         104,499   

Regional governments or local authorities

     15         437         10                 401         863   

Public sector entities

     1         190                 128         46         365   

Multilateral development banks

     11         2,254         660         26         134         3,085   

International organisations

             2,609                                 2,609   

Institutions

     676         1,297         662         517         3,800         6,952   

Corporates

     15,657         10,831         15,293         4,750         3,422         49,953   

Retail

     7,561         4,430         13,147         2,360         213         27,711   

Secured by mortgages

     10,876         2,486         1,640         629         317         15,948   

Exposures in default

     858         1,500         395         307         26         3,086   

Items associated with high risk

     578         448         471         20         35         1,552   

Covered bonds

             858                                 858   

Securitisation positions

                                               

Collective investment undertakings

                                               

Equity positions

     277         74         45         255         9         660   

Other items

     2,042         258         17         458         77         2,852   

Total Standardised approach credit risk exposure

     73,795         58,920         61,558         17,278         9,442         220,993   

Foundation IRB approach

                                               

Central governments or central banks

                             176                 176   

Institutions

     131         2                 848                 981   

Corporates

     151         185         142         14,283                 14,761   

Total Foundation approach credit risk exposure

     282         187         142         15,307                 15,918   

Advanced IRB approach

                                               

Central governments or central banks

     1,038         1,932         595         731         2,408         6,704   

Institutions

     10,835         7,132         9,378         912         2,264         30,521   

Corporates

     79,198         18,883         37,319         520         2,248         138,168   

Retail

     181,792         30,560         33         21,944         12         234,341   

Equity

                                               

Securitisation positions

     4,529         544         15,392         269         114         20,848   

Non-credit obligation assets

     7,614         803         1,742         1,395         175         11,729   

Total Advanced IRB credit risk exposure

     285,006         59,854         64,459         25,771         7,221         442,311   

Total credit risk exposure

     359,083         118,961           126,159         58,356          16,663         679,222   

Exposure at default pre-CRM decreased by £5.4bn to £673.8bn. The key movements by geographical area were as follows:

 

§   exposure in the UK decreased by £0.8bn to £358.3bn, driven by the sale of UK Secured Lending portfolio partially offset by increases in collateral pledges given and corporate lending

 

§   exposure in Europe decreased by £4.3bn to £114.7bn, driven by the sale of the Spanish business and further rundown of legacy portfolio assets, offset by movement in the Group liquidity pool

 

§   exposure in Americas increased by £7.0bn to £133.2bn, driven by new syndication facilities and asset growth in the US cards portfolio

 

§   exposure in Africa and Middle East decreased by £7.4bn to £51.0bn, driven by depreciation of ZAR against GBP, offset by asset growth primarily in corporate and retail lending.

The total Group liquidity pool composition has decreased £4bn to £145bn. This was primarily driven by a £14bn decrease in bonds sourced through reverse repurchase transactions, offset by a £10bn increase in bonds held on-balance sheet. These result in an increase in credit risk EAD and a decrease in counterparty credit risk EAD. The composition of the liquidity pool is efficiently and centrally managed, with further details provided in the Annual Report page 191.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  36


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

 

 

 

Table 17: Industry analysis of credit exposure

This table shows exposure at default pre-CRM, broken down by credit exposure class and the industrial sector associated with the obligor or counterparty.

The Africa Banking wholesale portfolio previously reported under the FIRB approach, moved to AIRB during 2015; as such, 2015 FIRB balances are nil.

 

EAD pre-CRM credit exposure class

As at

31 December 2015

 

Govern-

ment

and

central

banks

£m

 

Banks

£m

 

Other

financial

institu-

tions

£m

 

 Manufac-

turing

£m

 

 Construc-

tion

£m

 

 Property

£m

 

Energy

 and water

£m

 

Wholesale

and retail,

distribu-

tion

and

leisure

£m

 

Business

 and other

services

£m

 

Home

loans

£m

 

Cards,

unsecured

loans,

other

personal

lending

£m

 

Other

£m

 

Total  

£m 

Standardised approach

                         

Central governments or central banks

  113,327                         113,327 

Regional governments or local authorities

  109             11     753     8     881 

Public sector entities

  149             9     50       5   213 

Multilateral development banks

    4,181                       4,181 

International organisations

  21     533             1,840         2,394 

Institutions

  86   6,953   284           114   195     102   1   7,735 

Corporates

  49   872   14,198   4,911   577   1,675   2,430   3,625   14,012     3,784   2,616   48,749 

Retail

        7   3   26   1   14   775   141   26,055   87   27,109 

Secured by mortgages

    154   781   11   9   669     315   2,504   3,649   5,713   55   13,860 

Exposures in default

  2   1   79   119   23   422   45   89   347   32   937   151   2,247 

Items associated with high risk

    3   685   235     110   189   76   336       400   2,034 

Covered bonds

    851   358                     1,209 

Securitisation positions

                          – 

Collective investment undertakings

  1                        

Equity positions

    5   372   7   11       5   85       41   526 

Other items

    242   16               113     1,796   2,167 

Total Standardised approach credit exposure

  113,744   13,262   17,306   5,290   623   2,902   2,685   4,238   20,897   3,935   36,599   5,152   226,633 

Foundation IRB approach

                         

Central governments or central banks

                          – 

Institutions

                          – 

Corporates

                          – 

Total Foundation IRB approach credit exposure

                          – 

Advanced IRB approach

                         

Central governments or central banks

  14,782                         14,782 

Institutions

  6,312   17,902   1,374       2   87     2,499       43   28,219 

Corporates

  344   1,821   10,538   27,967   4,818   30,028   20,490   15,850   32,826     69   14,260   159,011 

Retail

        412   458   1,230   5   1,703   1,596   156,290   49,887   4,892   216,473 

Equity

                          – 

Securitisation positions

      16,916             446       5   17,367 

Non-credit obligation assets

    1,138                     10,181   11,319 

Total Advanced IRB approach credit exposure

  21,438   20,861   28,828   28,379   5,276   31,260   20,582   17,553   37,367   156,290   49,956   29,381   447,171 

Total credit exposures

  135,182     34,123     46,134     33,669   5,899     34,162    23,267   21,791     58,264     160,225   86,555      34,533     673,804 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  37


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

 Table 17: Industry analysis of credit exposure continued

 

EAD pre-CRM credit exposure class

As at

31 December 2014

 

Govern-

ment

and

central

banks

£m

 

Banks

£m

 

Other

financial institu-

tions

£m

 

Manufac-

turing

£m

 

Construc-

tion

£m

 

Property

£m

 

Energy

and

water

£m

 

Wholesale

and retail,

distribu-

tion

and leisure

£m

 

Business

and

other

services

£m

 

Home

loans

£m

 

Cards,

unsecured

loans,

other

personal

lending

£m

 

Other

£m

 

Total 

£m 

Standardised approach

                         

Central governments or central banks

  104,499                         104,499 

Regional governments or local authorities

  221             26     607       9   863 

Public sector entities

  160       3       19     181       2   365 

Multilateral development banks

    3,085                       3,085 

International organisations

  26     1,180             1,403         2,609 

Institutions

  79   5,232   772     8   1     177   569     110   4   6,952 

Corporates

  35   725   13,407   4,716   599   1,923   2,887   3,965   14,050   7   4,932   2,707   49,953 

Retail

  3   84   41   22   10   134   42   69   936   1,902   24,444   24   27,711 

Secured by mortgages

    135   1,091   13   8   779   3   308   2,212   4,244   7,105   50   15,948 

Exposures in default

  1   41   93   222   41   594   220   195   460   194   945   80   3,086 

Items associated with high risk

      566   206       199   51   511       19   1,552 

Covered bonds

    444   414                     858 

Securitisation positions

                          – 

Collective investment undertakings

                          – 

Equity positions

    6   410   26   14   2     20   144       38   660 

Other items

    414   9       345             2,084   2,852 

Total Standardised approach credit exposure

  105,024   10,166   17,983   5,208   680   3,778   3,396   4,785   21,073   6,347   37,536   5,017   220,993 

Foundation IRB approach

                          – 

Central governments or central banks

  176                         176 

Institutions

    818               163         981 

Corporates

  491   1,106   66   2,285   353   1,354   454   1,804   4,356       2,492   14,761 

Total Foundation IRB approach credit exposure

  667   1,924   66   2,285   353   1,354   454   1,804   4,519       2,492   15,918 

Advanced IRB approach

                          – 

Central governments or central banks

  6,704                         6,704 

Institutions

  6,785   21,742   1,424             570         30,521 

Corporates

      11,045   22,144   4,320   28,782   18,622   12,532   29,946     43   10,734   138,168 

Retail

  1   23   2   465   491   1,437   11   1,887   1,732   172,617   49,646   6,029   234,341 

Equity

                          – 

Securitisation positions

      20,209       93     154   392         20,848 

Non-credit obligation assets

    1,268                     10,461   11,729 

Total Advanced IRB approach credit exposure

  13,490   23,033   32,680   22,609   4,811   30,312   18,633   14,573   32,640   172,617   49,689   27,224   442,311 

Total credit exposures

  119,181   35,123   50,729   30,102   5,844   35,444   22,483   21,162   58,232   178,964   87,225   34,733   679,222 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  38


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Exposure at default pre-CRM decreased by £5.4bn to £673.8bn. The key movements by industry sector were as follows:

 

§   Governments and central banks increased by £16.0bn to £135.2bn, driven by movement in the Group liquidity pool

 

§   Banks decreased by £1.0bn to £34.1bn, driven by bond positions maturing and a reduction in nostro positions, partly offset by increased collateral pledges given

 

§   Other Financial Institutions decreased by £4.6bn to £46.1bn, driven by reduction in securitisation exposure in the Investment Bank

 

§   Manufacturing increased by £3.6bn to £33.7bn, driven by new syndication facilities in the Investment Bank

 

§   Property decreased by £1.3bn to £34.2bn with no material single movement

 

§   Home loans decreased by £18.7bn to £160.2bn, driven by the sale of the Spanish business and further rundown of legacy portfolio assets.

The total Group liquidity pool composition has decreased £4bn to £145bn. This was primarily driven by a £14bn decrease in bonds sourced through reverse repurchase transactions, offset by a £10bn increase in bonds held on-balance sheet. These result in an increase in credit risk EAD and a decrease in counterparty credit risk EAD. The composition of the liquidity pool is efficiently and centrally managed, with further details provided in the Annual Report page 191.

Barclays’ exposures to the oil and gas sector are further described in the Annual Report pages 153 and 154.

Table 18: Residual maturity analysis credit exposures

This table shows exposure at default pre-CRM, broken down by credit exposure class and residual maturity. Residual maturity is the remaining number of years before an obligation becomes due according to the existing terms of the agreement.

The Africa Banking wholesale portfolio previously reported under the FIRB approach, moved to AIRB during 2015; as such, 2015 FIRB balances are nil.

 

EAD pre-CRM credit exposure class

  

As at 31 December 2015

    

 

 

 

 

On demand

and

qualifying

revolving

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

Under

one year

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

Over one

year but

not more

than three

years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Over three

years but not

more than

five years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

Over

five years

but not

more than

10 years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

Over

10 years

or undated

£m

  

  

a 

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Standardised approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

     34,059         23,825         12,904         15,058         16,872         10,609         113,327   

Regional governments or local authorities

             111         572         105         93                 881   

Public sector entities

             9         7         151         10         36         213   

Multilateral development banks

             93         1,316         1,067         1,573         132         4,181   

International organisations

     6                 2,267                 121                 2,394   

Institutions

     655         6,685         122         122         114         37         7,735   

Corporates

     5,187         19,160         8,669         8,061         2,297         5,375         48,749   

Retail

     19,280         1,107         2,339         2,624         1,383         376         27,109   

Secured by mortgages

     27         2,970         2,862         2,130         3,067         2,804         13,860   

Exposures in default

     293         1,128         294         134         365         33         2,247   

Items associated with high risk

             640         157         43                 1,194         2,034   

Covered bonds

             97         995         52         65                 1,209   

Securitisation positions

                                                       

Collective investment undertakings

     1                                                 1   

Equity positions

             33         175         222                 96         526   

Other items

     228                 72                         1,867         2,167   

Total Standardised approach credit exposure

     59,736         55,858         32,751         29,769         25,960         22,559         226,633   

Foundation IRB approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

                                                       

Institutions

                                                       

Corporates

                                                       

Total Foundation IRB approach credit exposure

                                                       

Advanced IRB approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

     1,058         5,357         6,850         1,517                         14,782   

Institutions

     3,053         9,499         5,126         2,664         178         7,699         28,219   

Corporates

     18,505         24,202         41,011         49,931         5,805         19,557         159,011   

Retail

     48,174         3,030         6,392         10,229         21,729         126,919         216,473   

Equity

                                                       

Securitisation positions

             2,636         3,366         4         9,834         1,527         17,367   

Non-credit obligation assets

     351         764         202                         10,002         11,319   

Total Advanced IRB approach credit exposure

     71,141         45,488         62,947         64,345         37,546         165,704         447,171   

Total credit exposures

     130,877         101,346         95,698         94,114         63,506         188,263         673,804   

Note

a The ‘Over 10 years or undated’ category includes some items without contractual liquidity such as cash and tax assets. These are found in the ‘Other items’ and ‘Non-credit obligations assets’ lines.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  39


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Table 18: Residual maturity analysis credit exposures continued

 

EAD pre-CRM assets credit exposure class

                                                              

As at 31 December 2014

    

 

 

 

 

On demand

and

qualifying

revolving

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

Under

one year

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

Over one

year but

not more

than three

years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Over three

years but not

more than

five years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

Over

five years

but not

more than

10 years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

Over

10 years

or undated

£m

  

  

a 

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Standardised approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

     36,194         7,058         20,674         7,619         18,849         14,105         104,499   

Regional governments or local authorities

     7         324         444                 86         2         863   

Public sector entities

     12         44         137         103         64         5         365   

Multilateral development banks

             466         859         498         955         307         3,085   

International organisations

     13         13         1,862         152         569                 2,609   

Institutions

     499         5,875         255         244         44         35         6,952   

Corporates

     5,393         17,333         10,060         8,172         2,759         6,236         49,953   

Retail

     17,241         1,472         2,413         2,756         2,179         1,650         27,711   

Secured by mortgages

     25         2,634         3,025         3,265         3,458         3,541         15,948   

Exposures in default

     590         850         373         215         650         408         3,086   

Items associated with high risk

             29         160         87         22         1,254         1,552   

Covered bonds

             27         738         23         70                 858   

Securitisation positions

                                                       

Collective investment undertakings

                                                       

Equity positions

             47         173         250                 190         660   

Other items

     204                 78                         2,570         2,852   

Total Standardised approach credit exposure

     60,178         36,172         41,251         23,384         29,705         30,303         220,993   

Foundation IRB approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

             48         13         114                 1         176   

Institutions

     1         326         522         132                         981   

Corporates

     1,535         6,554         3,965         2,374         306         27         14,761   

Total Foundation IRB approach credit exposure

     1,536         6,928         4,500         2,620         306         28         15,918   

Advanced IRB approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

     2,110         2,474         887         635         598                 6,704   

Institutions

     4,482         12,565         3,794         1,261         1,735         6,684         30,521   

Corporates

     15,271         17,897         28,268         49,043         4,793         22,896         138,168   

Retail

     48,959         3,147         6,329         11,152         22,521         142,233         234,341   

Equity

                                                       

Securitisation positions

             6,604         5,607         220         6,175         2,242         20,848   

Non-credit obligation assets

     579         345         198                         10,607         11,729   

Total Advanced IRB approach credit exposure

     71,401         43,032         45,083         62,311         35,822         184,662         442,311   

Total credit exposures

     133,115         86,132         90,834         88,315         65,833         214,993         679,222   

Exposure at default pre-CRM decreased by £5.4bn to £673.8bn. The key movements by maturity band were as follows:

 

§   On demand and qualifying revolving decreased by £2.2bn to £130.9bn driven by the depreciation of ZAR against GBP, partially offset by underlying growth in Barclaycard

 

§   Under one year increased by £15.2bn to £101.3bn driven by changes in the composition of the Group liquidity pool

 

§   Exposure over one year but not more than three years increased by £4.9bn to £95.7bn driven by growth in Investment Bank syndication facilities and term lending in Corporate, offset by movement in the composition of the Group liquidity pool

 

§   Exposure over three years but not more than five years increased by £5.8bn to £94.1bn, driven by movement in the composition of the Group liquidity pool

 

§   Exposure over 5 years but not more than ten years decreased by £2.3bn to £63.5bn, driven by the sale of the Spanish business and rundown of legacy portfolios assets and movements in the composition of the Group liquidity pool

 

§   Over ten years or undated decreased by £26.7bn to £188.3bn primarily driven by the sale of the Spanish business and the UK Secured Lending portfolio and rundown of legacy portfolio assets.

The total Group liquidity pool composition has decreased £4bn to £145bn. This was primarily driven by a £14bn decrease in bonds sourced through reverse repurchase transactions, offset by a £10bn increase in bonds held on-balance sheet. These result in an increase in credit risk EAD and a decrease in counterparty credit risk EAD. The composition of the liquidity pool is efficiently and centrally managed, with further details provided in the Annual Report page 191.

 

 

Note

a The ‘Over 10 years or undated’ category includes some items without contractual liquidity such as cash and tax assets. These are found in the ‘Other items’ and ‘Non-credit obligation assets’ lines.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  40


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Credit risk mitigation

Barclays employs a range of techniques and strategies to actively mitigate credit risks. Within the regulatory framework this is commonly referred to as credit risk mitigation (CRM) and is fully discussed on page 125 of this document. In the case of collateral, the recognition of the mitigant is reflected through regulatory calculations in several different ways. This is dependent on the nature of the collateral and the underlying approach applied to the exposure.

Table 19: Exposures covered by guarantees and credit derivatives

This table shows the proportion of credit risk exposures, covered by funded credit protection and unfunded credit protection in the form of guarantees or credit derivatives. Under the Standardised approach, the risk weight of the underlying exposure covered is substituted by that of the credit protection provider – generally a central government or institution. Any uncovered exposure is risk weighted using the normal framework.

Financial collateral, includes but is not exclusive of, cash, debt securities, equities and gold, that can be used to directly reduce credit exposures subject to the Standardised approach. The impact of financial collateral CRM can be observed on page 43 and 44, as a component of the difference between EAD pre-CRM and EAD-post CRM. The below table has been populated post substitution effect for the Standardised approach.

When an exposure is fully and completely secured or partially secured under the Standardised approach, this is considered in the risk weight applied, as discussed on page 125.

Where exposures are subject to Advanced calculations, Barclays typically recognises eligible collateral by reducing the modelled downturn loss given default (LGD) metric. The below table represents exposures covered by eligible collateral for Advanced calculations.

The Africa Banking wholesale portfolio previously reported under the FIRB approach, moved to AIRB during 2015; as such, 2015 FIRB balances are nil.

 

Credit exposure class

                                            
    

 

Exposures covered by

unfunded credit protection

  

  

    

 

Exposures covered by

funded credit protection

  

  

      
 
Standardised
£m
  
  
    
 

 

Foundation
IRB

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

Advanced
IRB

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

Foundation
IRB

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

Advanced
IRB

£m

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015

              

Central governments or central banks

                     436                   

Institutions

     1,937                 5,381                 5,078   

Corporates

     1,183                 6,225                 35,811   

Retail

     3                 5,016                 415,180   

Exposures in default

     1                                   

Equity

                                       

Securitisation positions

                                       

Non-credit obligation assets

                                       

Total

     3,124                 17,058                 456,069   

As at 31 December 2014a

              

Central governments or central banks

                     613                   

Institutions

     1,517                 4,525                 5,111   

Corporates

     1,183         11         5,996         3,954         29,769   

Retail

     7                 5,567                 468,914   

Exposures in default

     2                                   

Equity

                                       

Securitisation positions

                                       

Non-credit obligation assets

                                       

Total

     2,709         11         16,701         3,954         503,794   

Exposures covered by unfunded credit protection increased by £0.8bn to £20.2bn. This was driven by a number of small counterparties exposure increases.

Exposures covered by funded credit protection decreased by £51.7bn to £456.1bn, primarily driven by:

§  £68bn decrease due to the sale of the Spanish business and the UK Secured Lending portfolio and rundown of legacy portfolio assets offset by

§  £15bn portfolio growth in PCB.

 

 

Note

a Prior year comparatives have been restated to more accurately reflect the form and impact of credit protection.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  41


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Credit quality analysis of Standardised exposures

Credit Rating Agencies

Under the Standardised approach, ratings assigned by External Credit Assessment Institutions (ECAIs) are used in the calculation of RWAs. The PRA determines which agencies may be used to determine the correct risk weight. Barclays uses ratings assigned by the following agencies for credit risk calculations:

 

§   Standard & Poor’s

 

§   Moody’s

 

§   Fitch

These ratings are used in the calculation of risk weights for the central governments and central banks, institutions and corporate exposure classesa.

Rated and unrated counterparties

The following section summarises the rules governing standardised calculations.

Each exposure must be assigned to one of six credit quality steps if a rating is available, as defined in the table belowb. After assignment to a quality step, exposure class and maturity are then used to determine the risk weight percentage. Exposures cannot be assigned a risk weight lower than that of the sovereign risk of the country in which the asset is located. The following table is a simplified version of the risk weight allocation process.

Where a credit rating is not available, a default treatment is applied as specified by regulatory guidance. In most cases this default risk weight equates to that which is applied to credit quality step 3.

Table 20: Relationship of long-term external credit ratings to credit quality steps under the Standardised approach

 

Credit Quality Step

                          
       Standard and Poor’s         Moody’s         Fitch   

Credit Quality Step 1

     AAA to AA-         Aaa to Aa3         AAA to AA-   

Credit Quality Step 2

     A+ to A-         A1 to A3         A+ to A-   

Credit Quality Step 3

     BBB+ to BBB-         Baa1 to Baa3         BBB+ to BBB-   

Credit Quality Step 4

     BB+ to BB-         Ba1 to Ba3         BB+ to BB-   

Credit Quality Step 5

     B+ to B-         B1 to B3         B+ to B-   

Credit Quality Step 6

     CCC+ and below         Caa1 and below         CCC+ and below   

Table 21: Credit quality steps and risk weights under the standardised approach

This table shows the prescribed risk weights associated with credit quality steps.

 

Credit Quality Step

                                            
        Institution (includes banks)      
       
 
Sovereign
method
  
  
     Credit assessment method      
       Corporates        
 
 
Credit
assessment
method
  
  
  
    
 
Maturity
> 3 months
  
  
    
 

 

Maturity
3 months

or less

  
  

  

    
 
 
 
Central
governments
or central
banks
  
  
  
  

Credit Quality Step 1

     20%         20%         20%         20%         0%   

Credit Quality Step 2

     50%         50%         50%         20%         20%   

Credit Quality Step 3

     100%         100%         50%         20%         50%   

Credit Quality Step 4

     100%         100%         100%         50%         100%   

Credit Quality Step 5

     150%         100%         100%         50%         100%   

Credit Quality Step 6

     150%         150%         150%         150%         150%   

Exposures to international organisations are generally assigned a risk weight of 0%.

If considered fully and completely secured by residential or commercial property, a retail exposure is assigned a risk weight of 35% or 50% respectively. If only partially secured, a more complex framework is applied. Other retail exposures are generally assigned a risk weight of 75%.

The unsecured portion of a past due exposure is assigned a risk weight of either 150% or 100%, depending on the specific credit risk adjustments recognised.

Items of high risk are assigned a risk weight of 150%, whereas Equity positions not subject to threshold calculations are generally assigned a risk weight of 100%.

Other Items are assigned a risk weight of 100%, unless they relate to cash in hand (0%) or items in the course of collection (20%).

 

Notes

a The rating agency DBRS is used to calculate risk weight for securitisation exposures only. Please see page 141 for further details.
b The mapping of external ratings to credit quality steps applicable as at year-end 2015 is found in Supervisory Statement SS10/13, published by the Prudential Regulation Authority in December 2013 (see http://www.bankofengland.co.uk/pra/Documents/publications/ss/2013/ss1013.pdf”. Implementing technical standards that will update these mappings have been finalised by the Joint Committee of the three European Supervisory Authorities (EBA, ESMA and EIOPA) and are awaiting endorsement by the European Commission (see https://www.eba.europa.eu/regulation-and-policy/external-credit-assessment-institutions-ecai).

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  42


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Table 22: Credit quality step analysis of pre-CRM exposure and capital deductions under the Standardised approach

This table shows exposure at default pre-CRM, broken down by credit exposure class and credit quality step. This table includes exposures subject to the Standardised approach only. The ‘Uniform regulatory treatment’ is equivalent, in most cases, to Credit Quality Step 3 and is applied where a rating is not available or has not been used for the RWA calculation. This is the case for the majority of retail and smaller business customers.

 

EAD pre-CRM

Credit exposure class

                                                                       
      
 
 

 

Credit
quality
step 1

£m

  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 
Credit
quality
step 2
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Credit
quality
step 3
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Credit
quality
step 4
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Credit
quality
step 5
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Credit
quality
step 6
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Uniform
regulatory
treatment
£m
  
  
  
  
    

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                       

Central governments or central banks

     110,288         202         451                 1,077         1         1,308         113,327   

Regional governments or local authorities

     722                                                 159         881   

Public sector entities

     3         9                                         201         213   

Multilateral development banks

     4,181                                                         4,181   

International organisations

     2,394                                                         2,394   

Institutions

     3,918         691         1,454         63                         1,609         7,735   

Corporates

     882         1,708         1,466         420         48         102         44,123         48,749   

Retail

                                                     27,109         27,109   

Secured by mortgages

                                                     13,860         13,860   

Exposures in default

                                                     2,247         2,247   

Items associated with high risk

                                                     2,034         2,034   

Covered bonds

     1,085         124                                                 1,209   

Securitisation positions

                                                               

Collective investment undertakings

                                                     1         1   

Equity positions

                                                     526         526   

Other items

                                                     2,167         2,167   

Total Standardised approach credit exposure/capital

     123,473         2,734         3,371         483         1,125         103         95,344         226,633   

As at 31 December 2014

                       

Central governments or central banks

     101,524         78         342         4         1,096         172         1,283         104,499   

Regional governments or local authorities

     619                         8                         236         863   

Public sector entities

     48         10                                         307         365   

Multilateral development banks

     3,060                                                 25         3,085   

International organisations

     2,609                                                         2,609   

Institutions

     1,022         1,258         1,352         59                 3         3,258         6,952   

Corporates

     575         1,764         584         294         164         34         46,538         49,953   

Retail

                                                     27,711         27,711   

Secured by mortgages

                                                     15,948         15,948   

Exposures in default

                     41                                 3,045         3,086   

Items associated with high risk

                                                     1,552         1,552   

Covered bonds

     698         160                                                 858   

Securitisation positions

                                                               

Collective investment undertakings

                                                               

Equity positions

                                                     660         660   

Other items

     345                                                 2,507         2,852   

Total Standardised approach credit exposure/capital

     110,500         3,270         2,319         365         1,260         209         103,070         220,993   

Exposures subject to the Standardised approach increased by £5.6bn to £226.6bn, primarily driven by movements in Credit Quality Step 1 partially offset by uniform regulatory treatment:

 

§   ‘Credit Quality Step 1’ increased by £13.0bn to £123.5bn driven by movement in the Group liquidity pool

 

§   ‘Uniform regulatory treatment’ decreased by £7.7bn to £95.3bn driven by a change in treatment of South Africa government bonds from Standardised to IRB approach.

The total Group liquidity pool composition has decreased £4bn to £145bn. This was primarily driven by a £14bn decrease in bonds sourced through reverse repurchase transactions, offset by a £10bn increase in bonds held on-balance sheet. These result in an increase in credit risk EAD and a decrease in counterparty credit risk EAD. The composition of the liquidity pool is efficiently and centrally managed, with further details provided in the Annual Report page 191.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  43


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Table 23: Credit quality step analysis of post-CRM exposure and capital deductions under the Standardised approach

The difference between exposure at default pre-CRM set out in Table 22 and exposures at default post-CRM in Table 23 below is the impact of financial collateral CRM as described at the bottom of Table 19 on page 41.

Year on year movements for Credit Quality Step analysis of post-CRM exposure and capital deductions under the Standardised approach have been driven by the same factors as for Credit Quality Step analysis of pre-CRM exposure and capital deductions under the Standardised approach (Table 22).

 

EAD post-CRM

Credit exposure class

                                                                       
      
 
 

 

Credit
quality
step 1

£m

  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 
Credit
quality
step 2
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Credit
quality
step 3
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Credit
quality
step 4
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Credit
quality
step 5
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Credit
quality
step 6
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Uniform
regulatory
treatment
£m
  
  
  
  
    

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                       

Central governments or central banks

     110,288         202         451                 1,077         1         1,164         113,183   

Regional governments or local authorities

     721                                                 160         881   

Public sector entities

     3                                                 201         204   

Multilateral development banks

     4,181                                                         4,181   

International organisations

     2,394                                                         2,394   

Institutions

     3,918         691         1,454         63                         1,537         7,663   

Corporates

     882         1,708         1,419         420         48         102         32,059         36,638   

Retail

                                                     26,476         26,476   

Secured by mortgages

                                                     13,860         13,860   

Exposures in default

                                                     2,199         2,199   

Items associated with high risk

                                                     2,034         2,034   

Covered bonds

     1,085         124                                                 1,209   

Securitisation positions

                                                               

Collective investment undertakings

                                                     1         1   

Equity positions

                                                     526         526   

Other items

                                                     2,167         2,167   

Total Standardised approach credit exposure/capital

     123,472         2,725         3,324         483         1,125         103         82,384         213,616   

As at 31 December 2014

                       

Central governments or central banks

     101,524         78         342         4         1,096         172         1,283         104,499   

Regional governments or local authorities

     618                         8                         236         862   

Public sector entities

     48                                                 306         354   

Multilateral development banks

     3,060                                                 25         3,085   

International organisations

     2,609                                                         2,609   

Institutions

     1,022         1,258         1,352         59                         3,074         6,765   

Corporates

     575         1,764         584         294         164         34         33,929         37,344   

Retail

                                                     26,879         26,879   

Secured by mortgages

                                                     15,948         15,948   

Exposures in default

                     41                                 3,020         3,061   

Items associated with high risk

                                                     1,552         1,552   

Covered bonds

     698         160                                                 858   

Securitisation positions

                                                               

Collective investment undertakings

                                                               

Equity positions

                                                     660         660   

Other items

     345                                                 2,507         2,852   

Total Standardised approach credit exposure/capital

     110,499         3,260         2,319         365         1,260         206         89,419         207,328   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  44


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

        

 

 

Credit quality analysis of IRB exposures

The following section provides breakdowns of inputs into risk weighted asset calculations. Please note that risk weights and risk factors may be volatile in granular breakdowns of wholesale exposures, especially in categories that are more sparsely populated. This is often due to the addition or removal of a relatively large exposure to or from narrow categories when its risk factors are different to the category average. This happens in the normal course of business, for instance, following new lending, repayments, or syndications. See page 116 for a discussion of IRB models.

Table 24: Internal default grade probabilities and mapping to external ratings

The table below illustrates the relationship between external rating agency grades and our own internal scale for default grade bands (DG bands) for wholesale exposures. Note that this relationship is dynamic, and, therefore, varies over time, region and industry. Specifically, the table below is intended to provide a broad indication of the current mapping between external agency ratings and through-the-cycle internal DG ratings for non-financial corporates in our main markets. For example, agency ratings for commercial banks generally correspond to less favourable DG ratings in comparison. Barclays DG system follows estimation rules and governance that may differ from those of ratings agencies.

 

                                          Financial                 
       Default Probability           statements         

DG Band

       >Min           Mid           <=Max           description         Standard and Poor’s       Moody’s

1

       0.00%           0.01%           0.02%           Strong         AAA, AA+, AA       Aaa, Aa1, Aa2

2

       0.02%           0.03%           0.03%              AA-       A1

3

       0.03%           0.04%           0.05%              A+       A2

4

       0.05%           0.08%           0.10%              A, A-       A3, Baa1

5

       0.10%           0.13%           0.15%              BBB+       Baa2

6

       0.15%           0.18%           0.20%              BBB       Baa3

7

       0.20%           0.23%           0.25%              BBB-      

8

       0.25%           0.28%           0.30%               Ba1

9

       0.30%           0.35%           0.40%              BB+      

10

       0.40%           0.45%           0.50%              

11

       0.50%           0.55%           0.60%                           Ba2

12

       0.60%           0.90%           1.20%           Satisfactory         BB, BB-       Ba3

13

       1.20%           1.38%           1.55%               B1

14

       1.55%           1.85%           2.15%              B+      

15

       2.15%           2.60%           3.05%               B2

16

       3.05%           3.75%           4.45%              B      

17

       4.45%           5.40%           6.35%               B3

18

       6.35%           7.50%           8.65%              B-       Caa1

19

       8.65%           10.00%           11.35%                            

20

       11.35%           15.00%           18.65%           Higher risk         CCC+       Caa2, Caa3, Ca, C

21

               18.65%                   30.00%                 100.00%                    CCC, CCC-, CC+, C        

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  45


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

 

 

IRB wholesale obligor grade disclosure

The following tables show credit risk and counterparty credit risk exposure at default post-CRM for the advanced IRB approach and foundation IRB approach for wholesale portfolios within both the trading and banking books. Separate tables are provided for the following credit exposure classes: central governments and central banks (Table 25), institutions (Table 26), corporates (Table 27), corporates subject to slotting (Table 28), SME (Table 29), secured retail (Table 30), revolving retail (Table 31) and other retail (Table 32).

PD boundaries for DG bands have been aligned in Pillar 3 to regulatory submissions. Prior period balances have been revised accordingly.

Table 25: IRB wholesale obligor grade disclosure for central governments and central banks

The Africa Banking wholesale portfolio previously reported under the FIRB approach, moved to AIRB during 2015; as such, 2015 FIRB balances are nil.

 

Obligor grade disclosure for Advanced IRB

  

     Exposure value                                                   
      

 

Total

£m

  

  

    
 
 
 
 
Of which:
arising from
counterparty
credit risk
£m
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 

 

Average
exposure
value

£m

  
  
  

  

    
 
 
Undrawn
commitments
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

 

Average
probability of

default (PD)

%

  
 

  

  

    
 
 
 
Exposure
weighted
average LGD
%
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
Risk
weighted
exposure
amount
£m
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 

 

Exposure
weighted
average risk
weight

%

  
  
  
  

  

    
 

 

Expected
loss

£m

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                          

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

     9,251         4,453         9,664         478         0.0%         45.0%         322         3.5%           

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

     203         118         262                 0.0%         45.0%         22         10.9%           

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

     4,991         3,993         3,075         80         0.0%         45.9%         420         8.4%         1   

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

     4,639         287         6,628         730         0.1%         33.1%         490         10.6%         1   

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

     4,485         1,463         2,135         7         0.1%         45.0%         2,410         53.7%         3   

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     549         73         1,617                 0.2%         45.0%         292         53.2%           

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     440         12         1,480                 0.2%         7.0%         32         7.2%           

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

     425         32         125                 0.3%         46.2%         306         72.0%         1   

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

     267         55         357                 0.4%         45.7%         118         44.2%           

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

     63         63         46                 0.5%         45.0%         37         59.1%           

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

                     1                 0.6%         53.0%                 45.9%           

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

     4         3         51                 0.7%         49.4%         3         73.5%           

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

     62         62         16                 1.2%         45.0%         94         150.0%           

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

                                     1.9%         45.0%                 76.7%           

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

                                     2.6%         60.4%                 133.2%           

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

                                     0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

     17                 18                 5.4%         45.1%         23         138.4%           

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

                                     7.5%         60.7%                 212.4%           

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

                                                                       

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

                                                                       

DG21: 18.65-100%

                                                                       

In default

                                                                       

Total

     25,396         10,614         25,475         1,295         0.1%         42.4%         4,569         18.0%         6   

As at 31 December 2014

                          

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

     9,571         7,185         9,576         1,559         0.0%         45.0%         525         5.5%           

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

     726         683         2,846                 0.0%         45.0%         61         8.4%           

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

     3,975         2,819         5,770         859         0.0%         41.4%         281         7.1%         1   

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

     5,438         3,169         3,387                 0.1%         45.0%         2,293         42.2%         4   

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

     2         1         73                 0.1%         50.5%         2         100.0%           

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     815         220         1,227         11         0.2%         18.1%         104         12.8%           

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     59         59         50                 0.2%         48.2%         47         79.7%           

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

                     33                 0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

     348         98         417                 0.4%         46.9%         205         58.9%         1   

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

                     29                 0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

     5         3         255                 0.6%         47.0%         4         80.0%           

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

     64         64         62                 0.9%         45.0%         96         150.0%           

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

                                     0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

                                     0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

                                     0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

                                     0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

                                     0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

     1         1                         7.5%         66.4%         1         100.0%           

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

                     1                 0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

                     6                 17.0%         63.0%                 0.0%           

DG21: 18.65-100%

     2                 2                 35.2%         78.0%         8         400.0%           

In default

                                     0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

Total

     21,006         14,302         23,734         2,429         0.1%         43.3%         3,627         17.3%         6   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  46


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

 

 

Table 25: IRB wholesale obligor grade disclosure for central governments and central banks continued

 

Obligor grade disclosure for Foundation IRB

  

     Exposure value                        
      
 
Total
£m
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
Of which:
arising from
counterparty
credit risk
£m
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 

 

Average
exposure
value

£m

  
  
  

  

    
 
 
Undrawn
commitments
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Average
probability of
default (PD)
%
  
  
  
  
    
 
 

 

Exposure
weighted
average LGD

%

  
  
  

  

    
 
 
 
 
Risk
weighted
exposure
amount
£m
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 

 

Exposure
weighted
average risk
weight

%

  
  
  
  

  

    
 

 

Expected
loss

£m

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2014

                          

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

                                                                       

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

                                                                       

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

                                                                       

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

                                                                       

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

                                                                       

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     92         1         155         9         0.2%         45.0%         41         44.6%           

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     72         1         18                 0.2%         45.0%         33         45.8%           

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

                                                                       

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

                                                                       

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

                     5                 0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

                                                                       

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

                                                                       

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

                                                                       

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

                                                                       

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

                     1                 0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

                     3                 0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

     14                 7                 5.4%         45.0%         22         157.1%           

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

                     24                 0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

                                                                       

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

                                                                       

DG21: 18.65-100%

                     3                 0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

In default

                                                                       

Total

     178         2         216         9         0.6%         45.0%         96         53.9%           

The exposure weighted average risk weight associated with IRB exposure to central governments and central banks remained broadly stable from 17.3% to 18.0%.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  47


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Table 26: IRB wholesale obligor grade disclosure for institutions

The Africa Banking wholesale portfolio previously reported under the FIRB approach, moved to AIRB during 2015; as such, 2015 FIRB balances are nil.

 

Obligor grade disclosure for Advanced IRB   
     Exposure value      

 

 

 

 

Average

exposure

value

£m

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

Undrawn

commitments

£m

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

Average

probability of

default (PD)

%

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

Exposure

weighted

average LGD

%

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

Risk

weighted

exposure

amount

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

Exposure

weighted

average risk

weight

%

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

Expected

loss

£m

  

  

  

      

 

Total

£m

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Of which:

arising from

counterparty

credit risk

£m

  

  

  

  

  

                    

As at 31 December 2015

                          

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

     235         159         340         169         0.0%         45.0%         24         10.4%           

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

     6,515         4,578         7,387         179         0.0%         40.6%         1,378         21.2%         1   

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

     15,959         3,502         23,345         1,320         0.0%         44.1%         3,938         24.7%         3   

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

     13,336         4,039         11,377         735         0.1%         29.0%         2,174         16.3%         2   

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

     948         636         1,481         169         0.1%         47.2%         456         48.0%         1   

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     1,872         336         830         336         0.2%         31.2%         749         40.0%         1   

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     673         157         1,204         174         0.2%         47.0%         341         50.6%         1   

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

     143         85         315         33         0.3%         52.4%         90         62.9%           

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

     433         164         942         79         0.3%         47.6%         284         65.7%         1   

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

     1,034         103         675         42         0.5%         45.4%         757         73.2%         2   

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

     194         64         132         44         0.6%         51.6%         182         93.5%         1   

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

     348         36         185         90         0.9%         45.8%         439         126.4%         1   

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

     30         4         29         11         1.4%         46.3%         33         109.4%           

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

     164         55         91         5         1.8%         42.7%         165         100.4%         1   

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

     71         10         86         14         2.6%         36.5%         83         117.0%         1   

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

     43         16         38         8         3.6%         44.2%         67         154.0%         1   

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

     106         5         56         6         5.4%         44.3%         195         183.0%         2   

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

     19         1         9         1         7.5%         38.7%         34         182.3%         1   

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

     4         2         5                 9.8%         38.0%         6         175.6%           

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

     36         24         53                 13.3%         44.9%         101         277.3%         3   

DG21: 18.65-100%

     14                 7                 30.0%         35.8%         33         231.8%         2   

In default

     18                 14         1         100.0%         30.4%         27         153.3%         3   

Total

     42,195         13,976         48,600         3,415         0.2%         38.4%         11,556         27.4%         28   

As at 31 December 2014

                          

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

     370         278         1,296         160         0.0%         45.0%         46         12.6%           

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

     13,205         8,109         15,134         832         0.0%         46.7%         3,177         24.1%         3   

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

     21,657         4,075         24,822         1,037         0.0%         39.0%         4,901         22.6%         4   

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

     9,410         4,559         6,849         112         0.1%         41.9%         2,913         31.0%         4   

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

     1,043         691         1,319         71         0.1%         45.8%         471         45.2%         1   

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     745         253         547         14         0.2%         45.6%         333         44.7%         1   

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     587         315         404         96         0.2%         46.9%         292         49.8%         1   

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

     580         99         456         40         0.3%         43.6%         302         52.1%         1   

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

     1,450         402         1,011         108         0.4%         46.4%         949         65.5%         2   

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

     189         137         177         15         0.5%         48.4%         193         101.9%         1   

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

     30         23         146         7         0.6%         45.3%         22         74.2%           

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

     201         159         197         24         0.8%         47.5%         255         126.6%         1   

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

     61         57         63         3         1.3%         45.0%         97         158.7%         1   

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

     11         9         102                 2.0%         50.7%         15         140.8%           

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

     36         31         43         2         2.7%         44.5%         55         153.2%         1   

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

     49         21         24         9         3.8%         45.5%         69         140.2%         1   

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

     76         70         41         1         5.1%         44.4%         184         242.0%         5   

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

     24         22         36                 8.4%         44.0%         53         221.8%         1   

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

     5         2         4         1         9.7%         39.6%         10         193.6%           

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

     7                 10         7         15.0%         37.4%         15         207.4%           

DG21: 18.65-100%

     7         3         5                 27.9%         37.2%         16         235.1%         1   

In default

     92                 70                 100.0%         24.3%         266         289.3%           

Total

     49,835         19,314         52,754         2,539         0.3%         42.3%         14,635         29.4%         29   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  48


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Table 26: IRB wholesale obligor grade disclosure for institutions continued

 

Obligor grade disclosure for Foundation IRB

  

     Exposure value                        
      

 

Total

£m

  

  

    

 

 
 
 

Of which:

arising from

counterparty
credit risk
£m

  

  

  
  
  

    
 
 

 

Average
exposure
value

£m

  
  
  

  

    
 
 
Undrawn
commitments
£m
  
  
  
    

 

 

 

Average

probability of

default (PD)

%

  

  

  

  

    
 
 
 
Exposure
weighted
average LGD
%
  
  
  
  
    

 

 

 

 

Risk

weighted

exposure

amount

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Exposure

weighted

average risk

weight

%

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

Expected

loss

£m

  

  

  

As at 31 December 2014

                          

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

                                                                       

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

                                                                       

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

     766         507         867         327         0.0%         45.0%         103         13.4%           

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

     492         292         293         95         0.1%         45.0%         91         18.5%           

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

                     74         321         0.1%         45.0%                 0.0%           

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     85         84         151         1         0.2%         45.0%         44         51.8%           

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     181         72         193                 0.2%         45.0%         122         67.4%           

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

                     15                 0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

     169         70         43         6         0.3%         45.0%         130         76.9%           

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

     1         1         14                 0.4%         45.0%         1         100.0%           

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

     6                 2                 0.5%         45.0%         4         66.7%           

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

     172                 65         2         0.9%         45.0%         114         66.3%           

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

     7                 130         9         1.4%         45.0%         7         100.0%           

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

     27         3         9         84         1.8%         45.0%         32         118.5%           

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

     83         67         27                 2.6%         45.0%         91         109.6%         1   

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

     88                 24                 3.8%         45.0%         58         65.9%           

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

                     1                 0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

                     1                 0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

                     2         1         0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

                                                                       

DG21: 18.65-100%

                     1                 0.0%         0.0%                 0.0%           

In default

                                                                       

Total

     2,077         1,096         1,910         846         0.5%         45.0%         798         38.4%         1   

The exposure weighted average risk weight associated with advanced IRB exposures to financial institutions decreased from 29.4% to 27.4%.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  49


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

 

 

 

Table 27: IRB wholesale obligor grade disclosure for corporates

The Africa Banking wholesale portfolio previously reported under the FIRB approach, moved to AIRB during 2015; as such, 2015 FIRB balances are nil.

 

Obligor grade disclosure for Advanced IRB

  

     Exposure value                        
      

 

Total

£m

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Of which:

arising from

counterparty

credit risk

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

Average

exposure

value

£m

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

Undrawn

commitments

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

Average

probability of

default (PD)

%

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

Exposure

weighted

average LGD

%

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Risk

weighted

exposure

amount

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Exposure

weighted

average risk

weight

%

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

Expected

loss

£m

  

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                          

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

     176         138         323                 0.0%         40.1%         31         17.5%           

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

     34,999         18,009         27,055         26,965         0.0%         43.9%         5,337         15.2%         5   

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

     31,392         9,392         45,365         19,114         0.0%         36.2%         5,695         18.1%         6   

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

     29,484         7,059         29,932         24,601         0.1%         40.5%         7,417         25.2%         9   

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

     14,984         3,016         15,241         11,087         0.1%         41.9%         5,558         37.1%         8   

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     10,060         2,230         9,230         6,566         0.2%         41.2%         4,447         44.2%         7   

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     7,796         1,475         7,295         4,928         0.2%         44.6%         3,941         50.5%         8   

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

     4,559         382         5,091         3,841         0.3%         42.0%         2,427         53.2%         5   

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

     4,952         399         5,429         2,918         0.3%         38.6%         2,843         57.4%         7   

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

     4,858         727         4,906         2,622         0.5%         40.5%         3,196         65.8%         9   

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

     4,712         272         4,866         3,609         0.5%         39.7%         3,306         70.2%         10   

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

     12,004         606         12,103         6,704         0.9%         37.0%         8,813         73.4%         40   

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

     3,914         166         3,837         2,928         1.4%         36.6%         3,183         81.3%         20   

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

     4,300         267         3,931         2,486         1.8%         32.7%         3,489         81.2%         26   

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

     4,530         339         5,192         2,599         2.6%         34.9%         4,380         96.7%         44   

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

     5,412         223         3,863         2,947         3.6%         24.4%         4,516         83.4%         53   

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

     2,471         130         2,871         832         5.3%         34.4%         2,757         111.6%         45   

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

     1,009         23         902         648         7.5%         32.2%         1,106         109.6%         23   

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

     391         61         370         122         10.1%         34.9%         509         130.1%         13   

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

     838         35         661         446         14.6%         26.4%         1,000         119.3%         33   

DG21: 18.65-100%

     548         9         573         302         32.4%         35.7%         1,026         187.3%         60   

In default

     1,691         48         1,569         404         100.0%         31.9%         3,185         188.4%         298   

Total

     185,080         45,006         190,605         126,669         1.6%         39.3%         78,162         42.2%         729   

 

As at 31 December 2014

                          

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

     294         263         1,495                 0.0%         45.0%         53         18.1%           

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

     36,676         23,130         36,045         21,956         0.0%         45.3%         6,050         16.5%         5   

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

     33,419         10,108         32,844         19,033         0.0%         37.7%         6,910         20.7%         6   

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

     26,813         7,139         26,027         23,138         0.1%         41.2%         8,252         30.8%         9   

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

     14,248         4,217         14,706         10,161         0.1%         41.7%         5,632         39.5%         8   

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     7,502         1,892         7,441         4,759         0.2%         44.7%         3,485         46.4%         6   

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     6,652         2,154         6,369         4,053         0.2%         45.5%         3,473         52.2%         6   

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

     3,991         824         4,043         2,188         0.3%         44.0%         2,475         62.0%         5   

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

     5,003         706         5,317         3,569         0.3%         45.3%         3,738         74.7%         7   

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

     4,407         489         4,349         2,193         0.4%         42.7%         3,062         69.5%         9   

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

     3,469         306         4,626         1,995         0.5%         40.3%         2,531         73.0%         8   

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

     10,785         1,143         10,375         6,598         0.9%         38.8%         9,053         83.9%         39   

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

     2,801         193         2,982         1,752         1.4%         36.1%         2,350         83.9%         14   

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

     3,423         338         3,711         1,430         1.9%         33.2%         2,946         86.1%         23   

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

     4,276         356         4,590         2,793         2.6%         32.2%         4,120         96.4%         39   

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

     2,558         285         3,351         1,487         3.6%         33.4%         2,608         102.0%         34   

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

     2,839         241         2,335         1,083         5.3%         31.8%         3,013         106.1%         50   

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

     602         36         1,111         383         7.4%         34.2%         727         120.8%         16   

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

     251         45         538         90         10.0%         43.7%         452         179.9%         11   

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

     446         26         490         282         14.8%         23.9%         452         101.3%         15   

DG21: 18.65-100%

     267         22         450         75         29.7%         36.9%         488         182.7%         28   

In default

     1,171         140         1,223         329         100.0%         32.7%         2,633         224.8%         174   

Total

     171,893         54,053         174,418         109,347         1.2%         41.0%         74,502         43.3%         512   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  50


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

 

 

 

 

Table 27 continued

 

Obligor grade disclosure for Foundation IRB

  

     Exposure value                        
      
 
Total
£m
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
Of which:
arising from
counterparty
credit risk
£m
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 

 

Average
exposure
value

£m

  
  
  

  

    
 
 
Undrawn
commitments
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Average
probability of
default (PD)
%
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Exposure
weighted
average LGD
%
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
Risk
weighted
exposure
amount
£m
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 

 

Exposure
weighted
average risk
weight

%

  
  
  
  

  

    
 

 

Expected
loss

£m

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2014

                          

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

                     17                                                   

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

                     6                                                   

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

     1,223         107         1,133         459         0.0%         44.4%         237         19.4%         1   

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

     945         14         960         1,093         0.1%         44.9%         246         26.0%           

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

     1,079         27         826         847         0.1%         42.6%         385         35.7%         1   

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     1,587         42         1,859         403         0.2%         42.2%         641         40.4%         1   

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     1,033         98         829         453         0.2%         40.8%         436         42.2%         1   

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

     727         47         637         402         0.3%         44.7%         377         51.9%         1   

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

     784         8         979         212         0.3%         44.5%         446         56.9%         1   

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

     689         21         605         279         0.5%         42.5%         427         62.0%         1   

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

     768         8         650         650         0.5%         44.3%         561         73.0%         2   

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

     1,954         19         1,702         575         0.9%         43.9%         1,596         81.7%         12   

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

     988         10         1,600         757         1.4%         44.1%         985         99.7%         6   

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

     596         18         582         221         1.9%         43.4%         629         105.5%         5   

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

     1,035         4         981         479         2.6%         43.4%         1,176         113.6%         12   

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

     414         5         376         112         3.7%         43.4%         492         118.8%         7   

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

     367         3         279         175         5.3%         43.7%         498         135.7%         9   

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

     154                 171         166         7.4%         42.8%         234         151.9%         5   

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

     44                 40         13         10.0%         44.4%         75         170.5%         2   

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

     178         6         126         69         15.3%         43.5%         378         212.4%         12   

DG21: 18.65-100%

     67                 48         61         33.7%         43.8%         156         232.8%         11   

In default

     324                 323         130         100.0%         37.1%         985         304.0%         107   

Total

     14,956         437         14,729         7,556         3.4%         43.3%         10,960         73.3%         197   

The exposure weighted average risk weight associated with advanced IRB exposures to corporates decreased to 42.2% from 43.3%. This is mainly due to migration from FIRB to AIRB. This is partially offset by an increase in corporate term loans over the period and move to higher default grades.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  51


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Table 28: Corporate exposures subject to the slotting approach

Slotting, also known as specialised lending, is an approach that is applied to financing of individual projects where the repayment is highly dependent on the performance of the underlying pool or collateral. It uses a standard set of rules for the calculation of RWAs, based upon an assessment of factors such as the financial strength of the counterparty. The requirements for the application of the Slotting approach are detailed in CRR article 153.

 

Obligor grade

                                   
    

 

Remaining maturity

<2.5 years

  

  

    

 

Remaining maturity

>2.5 years

  

  

      

 

 

EAD

post-CRM

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

Risk weighted

assets

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

EAD

post-CRM

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

Risk weighted

assets

£m

  

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

           

Strong

     2,231         1,114         5,220         3,654   

Good

     1,707         1,195         1,710         1,541   

Satisfactory

     320         368         487         560   

Weak

     125         311         73         184   

Defaulta

     396                 89           

Total

     4,779         2,988         7,579         5,939   

As at 31 December 2014

           

Strong

     2,343         1,172         5,101         3,571   

Good

     1,728         1,210         1,731         1,558   

Satisfactory

     558         641         490         563   

Weak

     421         1,054         429         1,073   

Defaulta

     390                 291           

Total

     5,440         4,077         8,042         6,765   

Exposures subject to the slotting approach decreased RWAs by £1.9bn to £8.9bn, driven by a rundown of the legacy portfolio assets.

 

 

 

 

 

Note

a Exposures in default do not generate risk weighted assets as they are already reflected in deductions to capital resources.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  52


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Table 29: IRB retail obligor grade disclosure for SME

 

Obligor grade disclosure for Advanced IRB

  

      

 

 

Exposure

value

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

Average

exposure

value

£m

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

Undrawn

commitments

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

Average

probability of

default (PD)

%

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

Exposure

weighted

average LGD

%

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Risk

weighted

exposure

amount

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Exposure

weighted

average risk

weight

%

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

Expected

loss

£m

  

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                       

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

                                                               

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

                                                               

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

     997         992         231         0.0%         26.9%         118         11.8%         2   

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

     293         309         36         0.1%         24.6%         42         14.5%         1   

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

     239         246         58         0.1%         34.2%         43         18.0%           

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     228         242         74         0.2%         38.0%         48         21.0%           

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     184         204         56         0.2%         37.3%         42         23.1%           

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

     176         159         50         0.3%         34.4%         42         23.7%           

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

     335         345         100         0.3%         38.9%         90         26.7%         1   

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

     286         298         81         0.4%         38.4%         80         27.9%         1   

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

     248         255         72         0.5%         40.0%         85         34.4%         1   

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

     1,075         1,196         278         0.9%         38.9%         413         38.4%         5   

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

     583         606         158         1.4%         42.8%         259         44.4%         4   

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

     575         619         120         1.9%         39.1%         290         50.5%         5   

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

     710         750         142         2.6%         40.3%         393         55.4%         8   

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

     559         637         83         3.7%         42.6%         344         61.6%         9   

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

     339         408         50         5.4%         45.4%         230         67.9%         9   

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

     199         224         36         7.5%         47.0%         147         73.8%         7   

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

     119         137         15         10.0%         49.4%         99         82.9%         6   

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

     146         150         16         14.9%         48.4%         135         92.4%         11   

DG21: 18.65-100%

     240         230         23         30.3%         41.0%         241         100.6%         30   

In default

     366         425         9         100.0%         25.0%         468         128.0%         81   

Total

     7,897         8,432         1,688         7.3%         37.5%         3,609         45.7%         181   

As at 31 December 2014

                       

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

                                                               

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

                                                               

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

     1,005         980         269         0.0%         27.9%         106         10.5%         2   

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

     324         308         49         0.1%         24.7%         41         12.7%           

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

     271         251         70         0.1%         31.7%         43         15.9%         1   

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     271         255         86         0.2%         35.5%         51         18.8%         1   

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     203         205         59         0.2%         36.9%         44         21.7%           

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

     169         172         46         0.3%         36.2%         39         23.1%           

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

     354         363         114         0.3%         39.5%         91         25.7%         1   

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

     316         324         91         0.4%         38.6%         84         26.6%         1   

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

     263         270         79         0.5%         38.6%         84         31.9%         1   

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

     1,239         1,251         313         0.9%         39.0%         460         37.1%         6   

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

     572         579         155         1.4%         46.0%         251         43.9%         4   

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

     646         652         137         1.9%         38.4%         297         46.0%         5   

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

     789         818         137         2.6%         43.9%         430         54.5%         10   

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

     707         725         98         3.7%         37.3%         379         53.6%         10   

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

     468         416         65         5.4%         41.8%         276         59.0%         11   

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

     243         303         39         7.5%         45.1%         166         68.3%         9   

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

     133         143         13         10.0%         45.5%         286         215.0%         6   

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

     149         157         16         15.0%         49.3%         136         91.3%         11   

DG21: 18.65-100%

     221         221         18         30.2%         42.5%         224         101.4%         29   

In default

     492         593         9         100.0%         27.9%         715         145.3%         110   

Total

     8,835         8,984         1,863         8.2%         37.5%         4,203         47.6%         218   

The exposure weighted average risk weight associated with retail SME exposures decreased to 45.7% from 47.6%. This decrease is driven by the migration to lower default grades, reflecting an improved risk performance across the portfolio.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  53


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

 

 

 

 

Table 30: IRB retail obligor grade disclosure for secured retail

 

Obligor grade disclosure for Advanced IRB

                                                                       
      
 

 

Exposure
value

£m

  
  

  

    
 
 

 

Average
exposure
value

£m

  
  
  

  

    
 
 
Undrawn
commitments
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Average
probability of
default (PD)
%
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Exposure
weighted
average LGD
%
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
Risk
weighted
exposure
amount
£m
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 

 

Exposure
weighted
average risk
weight

%

  
  
  
  

  

    
 

 

Expected
loss

£m

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                       

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

                                                               

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

                                                               

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

     1,797         1,977         727         0.0%         10.2%         20         1.1%           

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

     3,082         3,333         86         0.1%         18.7%         259         8.4%         1   

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

     8,226         8,676         203         0.1%         21.9%         1,110         13.5%         3   

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     2,613         3,034         327         0.2%         20.9%         461         17.7%         1   

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     2,510         2,360         591         0.2%         14.6%         227         9.1%         1   

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

     1,971         2,136         602         0.3%         16.0%         223         11.3%         1   

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

     12,002         11,861         1,481         0.4%         9.3%         723         6.0%         4   

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

     19,434         21,189         1,493         0.5%         10.4%         1,552         8.0%         9   

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

     15,214         18,755         902         0.6%         10.3%         1,426         9.4%         9   

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

     60,944         57,871         3,216         0.8%         11.5%         8,113         13.3%         55   

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

     8,789         7,909         310         1.3%         14.6%         2,082         23.7%         17   

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

     6,233         5,764         215         1.9%         15.7%         1,949         31.3%         18   

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

     4,642         4,742         247         2.6%         16.4%         2,350         50.6%         32   

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

     1,955         1,963         116         3.7%         14.6%         842         43.1%         10   

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

     2,248         2,180         122         5.0%         18.4%         1,429         63.6%         20   

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

     707         732         41         7.6%         14.0%         423         59.9%         7   

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

     296         298         18         9.9%         13.7%         213         71.9%         4   

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

     351         352         19         14.5%         15.2%         329         94.0%         8   

DG21: 18.65-100%

     1,025         1,076         24         44.1%         15.0%         1,010         98.5%         73   

In default

     1,938         2,326         3         100.0%         21.4%         2,282         117.7%         322   

Total

     155,977         158,534         10,743         2.4%         12.8%         27,023         17.3%         595   

 

As at 31 December 2014

                       

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

             1                                                   

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

                                                               

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

     5,585         5,861         922         0.0%         17.3%         107         1.9%           

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

     5,905         6,133         365         0.1%         20.2%         342         5.8%         1   

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

     10,124         10,506         548         0.1%         22.0%         1,042         10.3%         4   

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     5,067         5,289         536         0.2%         21.0%         584         11.5%         2   

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     2,626         2,729         688         0.2%         16.9%         244         9.3%         1   

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

     2,511         2,563         784         0.3%         14.9%         244         9.7%         1   

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

     11,691         13,748         2,252         0.4%         10.5%         804         6.9%         4   

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

     25,991         23,521         2,840         0.4%         10.9%         2,148         8.3%         13   

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

     18,405         18,788         2,406         0.6%         11.2%         1,819         9.9%         11   

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

     56,843         55,562         5,240         0.8%         12.2%         8,420         14.8%         58   

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

     6,673         6,691         321         1.4%         16.2%         1,773         26.6%         15   

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

     4,825         4,606         286         1.9%         15.6%         1,494         31.0%         14   

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

     5,052         4,548         433         2.6%         18.1%         2,134         42.2%         22   

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

     2,065         2,275         126         3.8%         16.8%         1,059         51.3%         13   

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

     2,048         2,040         133         5.2%         16.2%         1,179         57.6%         17   

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

     941         867         35         7.6%         15.1%         614         65.2%         11   

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

     283         299         5         9.9%         13.5%         197         69.6%         4   

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

     504         569         2         14.5%         18.3%         541         107.3%         14   

DG21: 18.65-100%

     1,545         1,795         25         44.1%         18.7%         1,623         105.0%         135   

In default

     3,816         4,060         66         100.0%         20.6%         4,527         118.6%         556   

Total

     172,500         172,446         18,013         3.4%         13.9%         30,895         17.9%         896   

The exposure weighted average risk weight associated with retail mortgages remained broadly stable from 17.9% to 17.3%. This is primarily driven by disposal of the Spanish business, rundown of legacy portfolio assets and positive FX impact in the period reducing exposures.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  54


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

 

 

 

Table 31: IRB retail obligor grade disclosure for revolving retail

 

Obligor grade disclosure for Advanced IRB

                                                                       
      

 

 

Exposure

value

£m

  

  

  

    
 
 

 

Average
exposure
Value

£m

  
  
  

  

    
 
 
Undrawn
commitments
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Average
probability of
default (PD)
%
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Exposure
weighted
average LGD
%
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
Risk
weighted
exposure
amount
£m
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 

 

Exposure
weighted
average risk
weight

%

  
  
  
  

  

    
 

 

Expected
loss

£m

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                       

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

                                                               

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

                                                               

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

     6,600         6,563         8,290         0.0%         80.5%         139         2.1%         2   

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

     3,841         3,854         7,503         0.1%         79.0%         153         4.0%         2   

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

     2,948         2,973         5,813         0.1%         78.0%         182         6.2%         3   

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     1,977         1,964         4,004         0.2%         77.6%         157         8.0%         3   

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     1,410         1,373         2,820         0.2%         77.9%         139         9.9%         2   

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

     1,220         1,196         2,417         0.3%         77.6%         141         11.6%         3   

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

     1,885         1,861         3,415         0.3%         77.6%         266         14.1%         5   

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

     1,460         1,400         2,403         0.4%         77.5%         252         17.2%         5   

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

     1,231         1,209         1,899         0.5%         77.5%         250         20.3%         6   

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

     5,178         5,067         6,271         0.9%         77.7%         1,523         29.4%         39   

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

     1,967         1,901         1,708         1.4%         78.2%         855         43.5%         27   

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

     2,386         2,308         1,822         1.8%         77.8%         1,241         52.0%         38   

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

     2,234         2,232         1,299         2.6%         77.0%         1,440         64.4%         47   

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

     3,133         3,361         1,776         3.7%         75.8%         2,550         81.4%         92   

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

     1,671         1,698         476         5.3%         75.6%         1,719         102.9%         70   

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

     1,143         1,229         220         7.4%         75.3%         1,440         126.0%         66   

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

     660         676         98         9.9%         75.1%         987         149.5%         51   

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

     690         765         85         14.3%         74.9%         1,245         180.5%         76   

DG21: 18.65-100%

     651         678         60         37.6%         75.5%         1,417         217.7%         196   

In default

     1,718         1,890         497         100.0%         75.0%         2,670         155.4%         1,108   

Total

     44,003         44,198         52,876         6.0%         77.7%         18,766         42.6%         1,841   

As at 31 December 2014

                       

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

                                                               

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

                                                               

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

     6,316         6,092         8,077         0.0%         79.4%         129         2.0%         2   

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

     3,779         3,667         7,611         0.1%         78.5%         147         3.9%         2   

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

     2,932         2,864         5,862         0.1%         77.6%         175         6.0%         3   

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     1,970         1,911         4,110         0.2%         77.4%         153         7.8%         3   

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     1,340         1,307         2,750         0.2%         77.9%         131         9.8%         2   

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

     1,183         1,156         2,429         0.3%         77.5%         135         11.4%         3   

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

     1,834         1,823         3,410         0.3%         77.5%         253         13.8%         5   

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

     1,349         1,333         2,301         0.4%         77.3%         228         16.9%         5   

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

     1,171         1,147         1,857         0.5%         77.1%         232         19.8%         5   

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

     4,904         4,857         6,112         0.9%         77.4%         1,407         28.7%         36   

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

     1,874         1,845         1,688         1.4%         78.0%         767         40.9%         22   

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

     2,222         2,192         1,708         1.8%         77.6%         1,121         50.5%         34   

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

     2,288         2,211         1,420         2.5%         76.9%         1,450         63.4%         48   

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

     3,026         3,180         1,507         3.8%         75.6%         2,464         81.4%         89   

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

     2,100         1,906         838         5.2%         75.5%         2,124         101.1%         85   

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

     1,306         962         279         7.4%         74.9%         1,624         124.3%         74   

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

     701         526         112         9.9%         74.7%         1,032         147.2%         53   

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

     869         649         111         14.2%         74.4%         1,542         177.4%         94   

DG21: 18.65-100%

     714         542         60         36.0%         75.4%         1,561         218.6%         205   

In default

     2,075         1,602         689         100.0%         74.5%         3,001         144.6%         1,349   

Total

     43,953         41,771         52,931         6.9%         77.3%         19,676         44.8%         2,119   

The exposure weighted average risk weight associated with qualifying revolving retail exposures, mainly comprising credit cards and overdrafts, decreased from 44.8% to 42.6%. This was primarily due to disposal of various exposures within higher DG bands and exposure growth in lower grade bands.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  55


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

 

 

 

Table 32: IRB retail obligor grade disclosure for other retail exposures

 

Obligor grade disclosure for Advanced IRB

                                                                       
      
 

 

Exposure
value

£m

  
  

  

    
 
 

 

Average
exposure
value

£m

  
  
  

  

    
 
 
Undrawn
commitments
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Average
probability of
default (PD)
%
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Exposure
weighted
average LGD
%
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
Risk
weighted
exposure
amount
£m
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 

 

Exposure
weighted
average risk
weight

%

  
  
  
  

  

    
 

 

Expected
loss

£m

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                       

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

                                                               

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

                                                               

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

     69         53         1         0.0%         55.5%         4         6.5%           

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

     33         39                 0.1%         38.3%         3         9.4%           

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

     72         78                 0.1%         54.0%         12         16.0%           

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     7         9                 0.2%         75.3%         2         29.4%           

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     3         4                 0.2%         82.4%         1         38.2%           

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

     18         20                 0.3%         73.5%         7         39.2%           

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

     66         70                 0.3%         78.3%         31         46.7%           

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

     193         214                 0.5%         50.1%         71         36.5%           

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

     140         148                 0.5%         73.0%         82         58.4%         1   

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

     1,193         1,213         13         1.0%         79.0%         984         82.6%         9   

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

     798         815         1         1.4%         79.7%         776         97.2%         9   

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

     1,413         1,408                 1.8%         74.4%         1,402         99.2%         19   

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

     1,549         1,546         16         2.5%         73.1%         1,591         102.7%         33   

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

     1,108         1,155         6         3.7%         78.5%         1,395         125.8%         41   

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

     504         599                 5.2%         76.7%         607         120.5%         20   

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

     347         420                 7.8%         57.8%         332         95.9%         15   

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

     109         120                 9.6%         61.6%         118         108.5%         6   

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

     237         277                 15.3%         60.3%         301         126.9%         22   

DG21: 18.65-100%

     198         223                 45.9%         70.3%         311         157.2%         70   

In default

     539         552                 100.0%         77.3%         628         116.4%         379   

Total

     8,596         8,963         37         10.0%         73.8%         8,658         100.7%         624   

As at 31 December 2014

                       

DG1: 0.00-0.02%

                                                               

DG2: 0.02-0.03%

                                                               

DG3: 0.03-0.05%

     51         42         2         0.0%         66.5%         4         7.8%           

DG4: 0.05-0.10%

     46         47                 0.1%         38.3%         4         8.7%           

DG5: 0.10-0.15%

     84         86                 0.1%         54.0%         13         15.5%           

DG6: 0.15-0.20%

     15         26                 0.2%         80.6%         5         33.3%           

DG7: 0.20-0.25%

     13         28                 0.2%         88.1%         5         38.5%           

DG8: 0.25-0.30%

     34         51                 0.3%         79.9%         14         41.2%           

DG9: 0.30-0.40%

     105         139                 0.3%         82.1%         52         49.5%           

DG10: 0.40-0.50%

     270         297                 0.5%         54.6%         107         39.6%         1   

DG11: 0.50-0.60%

     195         218                 0.5%         75.4%         119         61.0%         1   

DG12: 0.60-1.20%

     1,348         1,379         43         0.9%         77.7%         1,103         81.8%         11   

DG13: 1.20-1.55%

     730         688         1         1.4%         77.4%         697         95.5%         9   

DG14: 1.55-2.15%

     1,299         1,172                 1.9%         70.6%         1,238         95.3%         19   

DG15: 2.15-3.05%

     1,596         1,595                 2.5%         65.1%         1,496         93.7%         28   

DG16: 3.05-4.45%

     1,111         991         4         3.7%         71.0%         1,329         119.6%         38   

DG17: 4.45-6.35%

     542         494                 5.3%         73.1%         629         116.1%         22   

DG18: 6.35-8.65%

     349         290                 7.7%         61.3%         358         102.6%         17   

DG19: 8.65-11.35%

     119         95                 9.7%         67.4%         143         120.2%         8   

DG20: 11.35-18.65%

     305         249                 15.3%         59.4%         382         125.2%         28   

DG21: 18.65-100%

     218         155                 40.5%         67.2%         349         160.1%         66   

In default

     623         544                 100.0%         76.0%         567         91.0%         437   

Total

     9,053         8,585         50         10.5%         70.4%         8,614         95.2%         685   

The exposure weighted average risk weight associated with other retail exposures, primarily comprised of unsecured personal loans, increased from 95.2% to 100.7%. This is mainly driven by overall movements in DG bands, due to growth in consumer lending.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  56


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

IFRS Impairment

The following tables are presented using the IFRS consolidation rather than the regulatory consolidation basis. See pages 112 and 113 for background on impairment, and page 9 explaining the scope of regulatory consolidation.

Table 33: Analysis of impaired and past due exposures and allowance for impairment by exposure type

This table shows total loans and advances to customers and banks, past due balances and impaired loan balances, split by exposure type.

 

      
 
 
 
Neither Past
due nor
Impaired
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
Past Due
but not
Impaired
£m
  
  
  
  
  

 

 

 

Impaired Loans

 

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

    
 
 
 
Allowance
for
Impairment
£m
  
  
  
  
          
 
Individually
£m
  
  
    
 
Collectively
£m
  
  
     

As at 31 December 2015

                 

Traded loans

     2,474                                 2,474           

Financial assets designated at fair value

     17,620         293                         17,913           

Loans and advances to banks

     40,640         709                         41,349           

Home Loans

     149,431         140         648         6,162         156,381         518   

Credit card receivables

     36,501         3         387         2,539         39,430         1,870   

Other personal lending

     28,690         527         577         2,010         31,804         1,524   

Wholesale and Corporate loans and advances

     162,818         6,760         1,766         346         171,690         953   

Finance lease receivables

     4,612         3         20         198         4,833         56   

Total

     442,786         8,435         3,398         11,255         465,874         4,921   

As at 31 December 2014

                 

Traded loans

     2,693                                 2,693           

Financial assets designated at fair value

     19,522         676                         20,198           

Loans and advances to banks

     41,241         870                         42,111           

Home Loans

     158,313         434         455         8,434         167,636         546   

Credit card receivables

     34,236         27         306         2,929         37,498         1,918   

Other personal lending

     26,416         411         456         1,851         29,134         1,372   

Wholesale and Corporate loans and advancesa

     181,829         6,462         2,679         511         191,481         1,564   

Finance lease receivables

     5,270         2         38         210         5,520         55   

Total

     469,520         8,882         3,934         13,935         496,271         5,455   

 

§   Individually impaired loans decreased by £0.5bn to £3.4bn primarily due to the transfer of impaired loans in the Portuguese business to ‘held for sale’.

 

§   Collectively impaired loans decreased by £2.7bn to £11.3bn, predominantly driven by a £1.3bn reduction as a result of changes in forbearance criteria for Mortgage Current Accounts (MCA) during the year.

 

Note

a Corporate loan balances past due but not impaired have been revised down to better reflect the ageing of the loans.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  57


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

        

 

 

Table 34: Geographic analysis of impaired and past due exposures and allowance for impairment

This table shows past due and impaired loans and advances to customers and banks, split by geographic location of the counterparty.

 

      

 

 

 

Past due

but not

Impaired

£m

  

  

a 

  

     Impaired Loans        

 

 

 

Allowance

for

Impairment

£m

  

  

  

  

         

 

Individually

£m

  

  

    

 

Collectively

£m

  

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

           

UK

     3,198         1,236         7,782         2,492   

Europe

     524         908         922         816   

Americas

     4,389         568         909         725   

Africa and Middle East

     241         603         1,602         839   

Asia

     83         83         40         49   

Total

     8,435         3,398         11,255         4,921   

As at 31 December 2014

           

UK

     4,214         1,534         9,806         2,653   

Europe

     656         1,341         1,183         1,219   

Americas

     3,293         312         481         499   

Africa and Middle East

     444         676         2,459         1,001   

Asia

     275         71         6         83   

Total

     8,882         3,934         13,935         5,455   

Past due but not impaired

§   Americas increased £1.1bn to £4.4bn, primarily relating to wholesale and corporate lending within IB. The increase was predominantly within the past due up to 1 month category.

 

§   UK decreased £1.0bn to £3.2bn primarily relating to wholesale and corporate lending within PCB, which has seen lower defaults as a result of the economic environment in the UK.

Individually impaired loans

§   Europe decreased by £0.4bn to £0.9bn, primarily as a result of the transfer to held for sale of impaired loans in the Portuguese businesses.

Collectively impaired loans

§   UK decreased by £2.0bn to £7.8bn, primarily driven by a £1.3bn decrease in collective impairment against MCA forbearance cases as a result of changes in forbearance criteria.

 

§   Africa and Middle East decreased by £0.9bn to £1.6bn due to depreciation of ZAR against GBP.

Further analysis of impairment allowance is presented below.

Table 35: Analysis of movement on impairment and amounts taken directly to profit and loss

This table shows the movement in the impairment allowance between 2014 and 2015 year-end. Please refer to pages 112 and 113 of this document and Note 7 of the 2015 Annual Report for further information on impairment.

 

Impairment movement

                 
     Allowance for Impairment   
      
 
 

 

Year Ended
31 December
2015

£m

  
  
  

  

    
 
 

 

Year Ended
31 December
2014

£m

  
  
  

  

Starting period

     5,455         7,258   

Acquisitions and disposals

             13   

Exchange and other adjustments

     (617      (1,047

Unwind of discount

     (149      (153

Amounts written off

     (2,277      (3,037

Recoveries

     400         221   

Amounts charged against profit (see below)

     2,109         2,200   

Ending period

     4,921         5,455   
     

Amounts charged against profit

                 
     Profit and loss impact   
       £m         £m   

New and increased impairment allowances

     3,056         3,230   

Releases

     (547      (809

Recoveries

     (400      (221

Total Impairment on loans and advances

     2,109         2,200   

Loan impairment fell by 4.1% to £2,109m, due to lower impairment in Non-Core and PCB. This was partially offset by higher charges in Investment Banking and Barclaycard.

Note

a Corporate loan balances past due but not impaired have been revised down to better reflect the ageing of the loans.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  58


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Regulatory adjustments to statutory Impairment

The IFRS impairment allowance is adjusted to reflect a regulatory view, which is used to calculate the provision misalignment adjustment to regulatory capital. The primary differences are detailed below:

 

§   Scope of consolidation– adjustments driven by differences between the IFRS and regulatory consolidation, as highlighted on page 9. These include, but are not exclusive to, impairments relating to securitisation vehicles and associates

 

§   Other value adjustments– adjustments over and above specific or general provisions, to correct asymmetry within the provision misalignment adjustment to regulatory capital or certain credit risk calculations. Examples include adjustments for fair value loans

 

§   Securitisation positions– expected loss is not calculated for securitisation positions. As such, impairments associated with these positions are removed from the regulatory view.

Table 36: Regulatory adjustments to statutory Impairment

 

As at 31 December 2015

     £m   

IFRS allowance for impairment

       4,921   

Regulatory adjustments

  

Scope of consolidation

     246   

AFS impairments

     72   

Other regulatory adjustments

     349   

Regulatory impairment allowance

     5,588   

The tables within this section are based on the regulatory consolidation.

Table 37: Analysis of regulatory impairment allowance by regulatory exposure class

The Africa Banking wholesale portfolio previously reported under the FIRB approach, moved to AIRB during 2015; as such, 2015 FIRB balances are nil.

 

Regulatory impairment allowance

               
     

 

 
 

 

Impairment

As at

31 December
2015

£m

  

  

  
  

  

   

 

 
 

 

Impairment

As at

31 December
2014

£m

  

  

  
  

  

Standardised approach

   

Central governments or central banks

    3          

Regional governments or local authorities

             

Public sector entities

           1   

Multilateral development banks

             

International organisations

             

Institutions

    4        1   

Corporates

    250        350   

Retail

    268        357   

Secured by mortgages

             

Exposures in default

    1,984        2,524   

Items associated with high risk

    118        155   

Covered bonds

             

Securitisation positions

             

Collective investment undertakings

             

Equity positions

             

Other items

             

Total Standardised approach credit exposure

    2,627        3,388   

Foundation IRB approach

   

Central governments or central banks

             

Institutions

             

Corporates

           139   

Total Foundation IRB approach credit exposure

           139   

Advanced IRB approach

   

Central governments or central banks

    1          

Institutions

    4        3   

Corporates

    560        326   

Retail

             

– Small and medium enterprises (SME)

    187        198   

– Secured by real estate collateral

    465        637   

– Qualifying revolving retail

    1,252        1,506   

– Other retail

    492        565   

Equity

             

Securitisation positions

             

Non-credit obligation assets

             

Total Advanced IRB approach credit exposure

    2,961        3,235   

Total credit exposures

    5,588        6,762   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  59


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

    

 

 

Impairment allowance under the Standardised approach decreased by £0.8bn to £2.6bn. This was primarily driven by the sale of the Spanish business.

Impairment allowance under the Advanced IRB decreased by £0.3bn to £3.0bn. This was driven by:

 

§   Retail exposures secured by real estate collateral decreased by £0.2bn to £0.5bn due to the sale of the Spanish business

 

§   Qualifying revolving retail exposures decreased by £0.3bn to £1.3bn, primarily driven by a reduction in UK Cards due to debt sale activities.

Table 38: Impairment charges, other value adjustments and individual impairment charges for IRB exposures

This table represents a regulatory view of impairment charged directly against profits during the period, for portfolios that are subject to IRB calculations and individually assessed. The impact of other value adjustments are provided on the same basis. These charges are included within net trading income and net investment income within the financial statements

The total impairment charged against profits will not reconcile directly to table 35 owing to differences in regulatory scope, as highlighted in table 1. Furthermore, table 38 does not analyse portfolios subject to standardised calculations or IRB portfolios that are assessed collectively.

 

IRB Exposure Class

                
     
 
 

 

As at
31 December
2015

£m

  
  
  

  

    
 
 

 

As at
31 December
2014

£m

  
  
  

  

Central governments or central banks

              

Institutions

    1           

Corporates

    163         89   

Retail

              

– Retail SME

            4   

– Retail exposures secured by real estate collateral

    64         43   

– Qualifying revolving retail

    4           

– Other retail

    1           

Equity

              

Securitisation positions

              

Non-credit obligation assets

              

Total

    233         136   

Individual impairment charges for portfolios subject to IRB calculations increased by £0.1bn, primarily due to an increase in impairment charges for corporate exposures. This is driven by a number of immaterial counterparties.

Loss analysis – regulatory expected loss (EL) versus actual losses

The following table compares Barclays expected loss (EL) measure against the regulatory view of actual loss for those portfolios where credit risk is calculated using the IRB approach.

As expected loss best estimate (ELBE) represents a charge for assets already in default, it has been separately disclosed from total EL. This facilitates comparison of actual loss during the period to the expectation of future loss or EL, as derived by our IRB models in the prior period.

The following should be considered when comparing EL and actual loss metrics:

 

§   the purpose of EL is not to represent a prediction of future impairment charges

 

§   whilst the impairment charge and the EL measure respond to similar drivers, they are not directly comparable

 

§   the EL does not reflect growth of portfolios or changes in the mix of exposures. In forecasting and calculating impairment, balances and trends in the cash flow behaviour of customer accounts are considered.

It should be noted that Barclays’ EL models and regulatory estimations present a conservative view compared to actual loss.

Regulatory expected loss

EL is an input to the capital adequacy process which can be seen as an expectation of average future loss derived from IRB models over a one year period as follows:

 

§   Non-defaulted assets: EL is calculated using probability of default and downturn loss given default estimates

 

§   Defaulted assets: EL is based upon an estimate of likely recovery levels for each asset and is generally referred to as ELBE.

Actual loss

Actual loss represents a regulatory view of the amount charged against profit.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  60


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

 

 

Table 39: Analysis of expected loss versus actual losses for IRB exposures

 

  

IRB exposure class

  

      

 

EL

£m

  

  

    

 

ELBE

£m

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

Total

expected

loss at

31 December

2014

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Total actual

loss at

31 December

2015

£m

  

  

  

  

  

Central governments or central banks

     7                7          

Institutions

     29                30          

Corporates

     567         621        1,188        271   

Retail

         

– SME

     108         110        219        2   

– Secured by real estate collateral

     340         556        896        161   

– Qualifying revolving retail

     769         1,349        2,117        643   

– Other retail

     247         437        683        192   

Equity

                             

Securitisation positions

                             

Non-credit obligation assets

                             

Total IRB

             2,067                 3,073        5,140        1,269   
         
      

 

EL

£m

  

  

    

 

ELBE

£m

  

  

   

 

 
 
 

 
 

Total

expected

loss at
31 December
2013

(CRD III basis)
£m

  

  

  
  
  

  
  

   
 
 
 

 

Total actual
loss at
31 December
2014

£m

  
  
  
  

  

Central governments or central banks

     7                7          

Institutions

     6         4        10        2   

Corporates

     685         648        1,333        130   

Retail

         

– SME

     133         140        273        6   

– Secured by real estate collateral

     388         644        1,032        205   

– Qualifying revolving retail

     747         965        1,712        728   

– Other retail

     236         699        935        194   

Equity

     2                2          

Securitisation positions

     n/a         n/a        n/a        n/a   

Non-credit obligation assets

     n/a         n/a        n/a        n/a   

Total IRB

     2,204         3,100        5,304        1,265   

Actual loss remained broadly stable at £1.3bn with an offsetting movement between Corporate and Qualifying revolving retail exposures.

Expected loss has decreased for most of the asset classes as a result of greater write offs and exposure reductions offset by introduction of CRD IV and increases in Qualifying revolving retail exposures following the migration of portfolios to IRB.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  61


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of credit risk

 

 

Non-trading book equity investments

For non-trading book equity investments, the group calculates credit risk RWAs using both standardised and advanced calculations. However, the Advanced IRB approach is only available where regulatory approval has been given.

Table 40: Fair value of, and gains and losses on equity investments

This table shows the fair value of non trading book equity positions subject to credit risk calculations, plus associated gains and losses.

The holding of non-trading book equity positions is primarily related to the holding of investments by the Private Equity business.

 

Non-trading book equity positions

                                   
     As at 31 December 2015         As at 31 December 2014   
      

 

Fair Value

£m

  

  

    

 

RWAs

£m

  

  

    

 

Fair Value

£m

  

  

    

 

RWAs

£m

  

  

Exchange Traded

     198         297         152         236   

Private Equity

     1,983         3,680         1,136         1,846   

Other

                     36         52   

Total

     2,181         3,977         1,324         2,134   

Realised gains/(losses) from sale and liquidations of equity investments

     57            36      

Unrealised gains

     685            119      

Unrealised gains included in PRA transitional CET1 Capital

     685                 

Non-trading book fair value equity balance increased primarily due to movements in the value of Barclays’ holding in Visa Europe Limited, following the proposed acquisition by Visa Inc.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  62


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of counterparty credit risk

    

 

 

    

 

This section details Barclays’ counterparty credit risk profile, focusing on regulatory measures such as exposure at default and risk weighted assets. The risk profile is analysed by business segment, financial contract type, approach and notional value.

 

§  Risk weighted assets decreased 31.3% to £33.7bn, driven by risk reductions in the Investment Bank and Non-Core.

 

§  Counterparty credit risk RWAs are primarily generated by the following IFRS account classifications: financial assets designated at fair value; derivative financial instruments; reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending.

 

Risk weighted assets for counterparty credit risk reduced in the year

 

-£15.4bn total RWA

Driven by:

 

-£10.6bn

Reduction in derivative and securities financing transaction risks in the Investment Bank and Non-Core

 

-£1.9bn

The implementation of collateral modelling for mismatched FX collateral and a transfer of securities financing transactions in certain businesses from the banking book to trading book, enabling further collateral offset

 

-£1.7bn

Counterparties no longer in default as a result of debt restructure

 

-£1.1bn

Following a model recalibration within the Investment Bank and Non-Core.

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  63


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of counterparty credit risk

    

 

 

Counterparty risk exposures

Counterparty credit risk (CCR) is the risk related to a counterparty defaulting before the final settlement of a transaction’s cash flows. Barclays calculate CCR using three methods: Internal Model Method (IMM), Financial Collateral Comprehensive Method (FCCM), and Mark to Market Method (MTM).

The following tables analyse counterparty credit risk exposures and risk weighted assets.

Table 41: Exposure at default associated with counterparty credit risk by business

This table summarises EAD post-credit risk mitigation by business and exposure class for counterparty credit risk.

The Africa Banking wholesale portfolio previously reported under the FIRB approach, moved to AIRB during 2015; as such, 2015 FIRB balances are nil.

 

Post-CRM EAD

                                                              

As at 31 December 2015

    

 

 

 

Personal &

Corporate

Banking

£m

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

Africa

Banking

£m

  

  

  

    
 

 

Investment
Bank

£m

  
  

  

    
 
Head Office
£m
  
  
    

 

Total Core

£m

  

  

    

 

 

Barclays

Non-Core

£m

  

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Counterparty credit risk exposure class

                    

Standardised approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

                     2                 2                 2   

Regional governments or local authorities

                     5                 5                 5   

Public sector entities

                     77                 77         623         700   

Multilateral development banks

                                                       

International organisations

                     14                 14                 14   

Institutions

             17         11,570         128         11,715         512         12,227   

Corporates

     279         11         6,502                 6,792         1,013         7,805   

Retail

                                                       

Secured by mortgages

                                                       

Exposures in default

                                                       

Items associated with high risk

                     2,104                 2,104         15         2,119   

Covered bonds

                                                       

Securitisation positions

                                                       

Collective investment undertakings

                                                       

Equity positions

                                                       

Other items

                                                       

Total Standardised approach credit risk exposure

     279         28         20,274         128         20,709         2,163         22,872   

Foundation IRB approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

                                                       

Institutions

                                                       

Corporates

                                                       

Total Foundation approach credit risk exposure

                                                       

Advanced IRB approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

                     7,880         35         7,915         2,699         10,614   

Institutions

             881         9,759         79         10,719         3,257         13,976   

Corporates

     3,611         483         30,078         21         34,193         11,725         45,918   

Securitisation positions

                     26                 26         1,033         1,059   

Total Advanced IRB credit risk exposure

     3,611         1,364         47,743         135         52,853         18,714         71,567   

Default fund contributions

                     1,204         16         1,220         213         1,433   

Total counterparty credit risk

     3,890         1,392         69,221         279         74,782         21,090         95,872   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  64


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of counterparty credit risk

    

 

 

Table 41 continued

 

Post-CRM EAD

  

As at 31 December 2014

    
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
Africa
Banking
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Investment
Bank

£m

  
  

  

    
 
Head Office
£m
  
  
    
 
Total Core
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Barclays
Non-Core
£m
  
  
  
    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Counterparty credit risk exposure class

                    

Standardised approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

                     4                 4         8         12   

Regional governments or local authorities

                     22                 22         4         26   

Public sector entities

                     53                 53         670         723   

Multilateral development banks

                                                       

International organisations

                     72                 72         27         99   

Institutions

             5         14,347         7         14,359         2,639         16,998   

Corporates

     284         7         7,026         15         7,332         1,584         8,916   

Retail

                                                       

Secured by mortgages

                                                       

Exposures in default

                                                       

Items associated with high risk

                     3,318         11         3,329         595         3,924   

Covered bonds

                                                       

Securitisation positions

                                                       

Collective investment undertakings

                                                       

Equity positions

                                                       

Other items

                                                       

Total Standardised approach credit risk exposure

     284         12         24,842         33         25,171         5,527         30,698   

Foundation IRB approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

             2                         2                 2   

Institutions

             1,096                         1,096                 1,096   

Corporates

             437                         437                 437   

Total Foundation approach credit risk exposure

             1,535                         1,535                 1,535   

Advanced IRB approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

                     5,351         34         5,385         8,917         14,302   

Institutions

                     10,929         143         11,072         8,242         19,314   

Corporates

     2,782                 29,156         49         31,987         23,599         55,586   

Securitisation positions

                     24                 24         1,033         1,057   

Total Advanced IRB credit risk exposure

     2,782                 45,460         226         48,468         41,791         90,259   

Default fund contributions

                     801         150         951         236         1,187   

Total counterparty credit risk

     3,066         1,547         71,103         409         76,125         47,554         123,679   

Counterparty credit risk exposure post-CRM decreased by £27.8bn to £95.9bn, primarily due to:

 

§   Investment Bank decreased by £1.9bn to £69.2bn primarily driven by business reductions in the OTC derivative portfolio, offset by an extended margin period of risk on securities financing transactions (SFTs) in certain businesses

 

§   Non-Core decreased by £26.4bn to £21.1bn primarily driven by the active rundown of the fixed income financing business, reduction of the OTC derivative portfolio and the implementation of collateral modelling for mismatched FX collateral following PRA approval.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  65


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of counterparty credit risk

    

 

 

Table 42: Risk weighted assets of counterparty credit risk exposures by business units

This table summarises risk weighted assets by business and exposure class for counterparty credit risk.

The Africa Banking wholesale portfolio previously reported under the FIRB approach, moved to AIRB during 2015; as such, 2015 FIRB balances are nil.

 

Risk weighted assets

                                                              

As at 31 December 2015

    
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
Africa
Banking
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Investment
Bank

£m

  
  

  

    
 
Head Office
£m
  
  
    
 
Total Core
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Barclays
Non-Core
£m
  
  
  
    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Counterparty credit risk exposure class

                    

Standardised approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

                     2                 2                 2   

Regional governments or local authorities

                     5                 5                 5   

Public sector entities

                     15                 15         128         143   

Multilateral development banks

                                                       

International organisations

                                                       

Institutions

             11         420         20         451         19         470   

Corporates

     242         11         6,550                 6,803         1,008         7,811   

Retail

                                                       

Secured by mortgages

                                                       

Exposures in default

                                                       

Items associated with high risk

                     3,112                 3,112         66         3,178   

Covered bonds

                                                       

Securitisation positions

                                                       

Collective investment undertakings

                                                       

Equity positions

                                                       

Other items

                                                       

Total Standardised approach credit risk exposure

     242         22         10,104         20         10,388         1,221         11,609   

Foundation IRB approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

                                                       

Institutions

                                                       

Corporates

                                                       

Total Foundation approach credit risk exposure

                                                       

Advanced IRB approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

                     431         14         445         1,476         1,921   

Institutions

             234         2,552         34         2,820         1,640         4,460   

Corporates

     1,122         253         7,129         11         8,515         5,707         14,222   

Securitisation positions

                     20                 20         408         428   

Total Advanced IRB credit risk exposure

     1,122         487         10,132         59         11,800         9,231         21,031   

Default fund contributions

                     916         12         928         176         1,104   

Total counterparty credit risk

     1,364         509         21,152         91         23,116         10,628         33,744   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  66


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of counterparty credit risk

    

 

 

Table 42: Risk weighted assets of counterparty credit risk exposures by business units continued

 

Risk weighted assets

                                                              

As at 31 December 2014

    

 

 

 

Personal &

Corporate

Banking

£m

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

Africa

Banking

£m

  

  

  

    

 

 

Investment

Bank

£m

  

  

  

    

 

Head Office

£m

  

  

    

 

Total Core

£m

  

  

    

 

 

Barclays

Non-Core

£m

  

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Counterparty credit risk exposure class

                    

Standardised approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

                     17                 17         14         31   

Regional governments or local authorities

                     7                 7         4         11   

Public sector entities

                     25                 25         136         161   

Multilateral development banks

                                                       

International organisations

                                                       

Institutions

             3         533                 536         14         550   

Corporates

     238         7         6,908                 7,153         1,594         8,747   

Retail

                                                       

Secured by mortgages

                                                       

Exposures in default

                                                       

Items associated with high risk

                     5,000                 5,000         892         5,892   

Covered bonds

                                                       

Securitisation positions

                                                       

Collective investment undertakings

                                                       

Equity positions

                                                       

Other items

                                                       

Total Standardised approach credit risk exposure

     238         10         12,490                 12,738         2,654         15,392   

Foundation IRB approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

             1                         1                 1   

Institutions

             326                         326                 326   

Corporates

             235                         235                 235   

Total Foundation approach credit risk exposure

             562                         562                 562   

Advanced IRB approach

                    

Central governments or central banks

                     336         18         354         2,529         2,883   

Institutions

                     3,434         6         3,440         4,087         7,527   

Corporates

     1,049                 7,881         38         8,968         11,179         20,147   

Securitisation positions

                     130                 130         611         741   

Total Advanced IRB credit risk exposure

     1,049                 11,781         62         12,892         18,406         31,298   

Default fund contributions

                     1,249         234         1,483         369         1,852   

Total counterparty credit risk

     1,287         572         25,520         296         27,675         21,429         49,104   

Counterparty credit risk weighted assets decreased by £15.4bn to £33.7bn, primarily due to:

 

§   Investment Bank decreased by £4.4bn to £21.2bn primarily driven by improved matching of SFT collateral to agent lenders, offset by an extended margin period of risk on SFTs in certain businesses

 

§   Non-Core decreased by £10.8bn to £10.6bn primarily driven by trade reduction in the OTC derivative portfolio and the implementation of collateral modelling for mismatched FX collateral following PRA approval.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  67


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of counterparty credit risk

    

 

 

Table 43: Counterparty credit exposures analysed by financial contract type

This table shows the Group’s counterparty credit risk exposure at default post-CRM analysed by the type of financial contract. The nature of the calculation of credit exposure under the Internal Model Method (IMM) precludes the identification of individual product exposures. As such, the split per financial contract type for IMM is not shown in the table below. This table excludes exposure values related to default fund contributions.

 

 

Financial contract type

  

As at 31 December 2015

    

 

 

 

 

 

EAD post

CRM under

Internal

Model

Method

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

EAD post

CRM under

other

approaches

£m

  

  

  

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

EAD post

CRM under

Mark to

Market

approach

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

Interest rate contracts

                2,027   

Foreign currency contracts

                996   

Equities contracts

                3,262   

Precious metal other than cold contracts

                10   

Commodities other than precious metal contracts

                746   

Securities financing transactions

        11,828           

Credit derivatives

                788   

Other

              930         2   

Total

     73,848         12,758         7,831   

As at 31 December 2014

        

Interest rate contracts

                2,700   

Foreign currency contracts

                760   

Equities contracts

                4,256   

Precious metal other than cold contracts

                92   

Commodities other than precious metal contracts

                2,118   

Securities financing transactions

        13,088           

Credit derivatives

                1,607   

Other

              1,095         1   

Total

     96,254         14,183         11,534   

Exposure under the IMM approach decreased by £22.4bn to £73.8bn, primarily driven by:

 

§   the implementation of collateral modelling for mismatched FX collateral following PRA approval

 

§   the active rundown of derivative positions and trade unwinds in Non-Core

 

§   transfer of securities financing transactions in certain businesses from the banking book to trading book, enabling further collateral offset.

Exposure under other approaches decreased £1.4bn to £12.8bn, primarily driven by:

 

§   the active rundown of the SFT portfolio and improved matching of SFT collateral to previously unmatched agent lender positions

Offset by:

 

§   an extended margin period of risk on SFTs in certain businesses.

Exposures under the MTM method decreased by £3.7bn to £7.8bn, primarily driven by:

 

§   the continued rundown of OTC derivative portfolios in Non-Core.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  68


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of counterparty credit risk

    

 

 

Table 44: Counterparty credit exposure by approach

This table shows counterparty credit risk trading book exposures for derivative exposures. The population does not include CCR relating to securities financing or other categories.

Exposures reported under the Mark to Market (MTM) method refer to credit exposures arising from derivatives that are not measured using a modelled approach. Such exposures are subject to appropriate netting and collateral offsets and require adjustment for market driven movements that may lead to increased replacement cost at the time of default (potential future credit exposure).

Internal Model Method (IMM) is the most risk sensitive approach available for the calculation of CCR exposures. Please note that as the IMM considers the interactions of different factors such as collateral and market movements within a statistical simulation across a range of asset classes, the output cannot be split across the categories shown in the columns below.

 

Outstanding amount of exposure held

                                                     

As at 31 December 2015

    
 
 
 
 
Gross
positive
fair value of
contracts
£m
  
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
Potential
future
credit
exposure
£m
  
  
  
  
  
    
 

 

Netting
benefits

£m

  
  

  

    
 
 
 
Net current
credit
exposure
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 

 

Collateral
held

£m

  
  

  

    
 
 
 
 
Net
derivatives
credit
exposure
£m
  
  
  
  
  

Mark to Market Method

     11,196         10,143         (12,313      9,026         (1,195      7,831   

Internal Model Method

                                             49,955   

As at 31 December 2014

                 

Mark to Market Method

     12,626         14,686         (15,292      12,020         (486      11,534   

Internal Model Method

                                             60,545   

The IMM derivative credit exposure decreased by £10.6bn to £50.0bn, primarily driven by:

§  the active rundown of derivative positions and trade unwinds in Non-Core

§  the implementation of collateral modelling for mismatched FX collateral following PRA approval.

The MTM method net derivative credit exposure decreased by £3.7bn to £7.8bn, primarily driven by:

§  the continued rundown of OTC derivative portfolios in Non-Core.

Credit derivative notionals

The following table shows the notional of the credit derivative transactions outstanding as at 31 December 2015.

Table 45: Notional exposure associated with credit derivative contracts

This table splits the notional values of credit derivatives, credit default swaps (CDS) and total return swaps (TRS), by two categories: own credit portfolio and intermediation activities.

Own credit portfolio consists of trades used for hedging and credit management. Intermediation activities cover all other credit derivatives.

Credit derivatives booked arising from clearing activities performed on behalf of external counterparties (for example within Barclays subsidiaries) are not reported in this table as the Group does not have any long/short exposures to the underlying reference obligations.

Own credit for the purposes of this note is different from own credit used for accounting disclosures purposes, which represents the change in fair value due to Barclays’ own credit standing.

 

Outstanding amount of exposure held:

  

    Own credit portfolio        Intermediation activities   

Credit derivative product type

As at 31 December 2015

   

 

 

As protection

purchaser

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

As protection

seller

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

As protection

purchaser

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

As protection

seller

£m

  

  

  

Credit default swaps

    2,673        1,578        430,315        424,442   

Total return swaps

                  18,577          

Total

    2,673        1,578        448,892        424,442   

Credit derivative product type

As at 31 December 2014

       

Credit default swaps

    3,077        1,554        545,510        523,456   

Total return swaps

                  19,633          

Total

    3,077        1,554        565,143        523,456   

Own credit portfolio, which mainly comprises derivatives used to manage the banking book, reduced by £0.4bn to £4.3bn, reflecting a reduction to £2.7bn in relation to protection purchaser of credit default swaps, principally driven by improving market conditions leading to close-out of positions.

Intermediation activities, which mainly comprises derivatives used to manage the trading book, reduced by £215.3bn to £873.3bn, reflecting a decrease of £115.2bn to £430.3bn in relation to credit default swap protection purchased and a £99.0bn decrease to £424.4bn in relation to credit default swaps protection sold, driven principally by the closing out of positions and unwinding of bilateral trades.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  69


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of counterparty credit risk

    

 

 

Table 46: Notional value of credit derivative contracts held for hedging purposes

 

Risk methodology

                 
      
 
 

 

As at
31 December
2015

£m

  
  
  

  

    
 
 

 

As at
31 December
2014

£m

  
  
  

  

Notional value of credit derivative hedges for Mark to Market method

     1,418         771   

Notional value of credit derivative hedges under the Internal Model Method

     809         1,271   

Total

     2,227         2,042   

The notional value of credit derivative hedges has increased by £0.2bn to £2.2bn driven by the increases in new credit derivative hedges under the MTM method, partly offset by decreases in IMM due to lower hedges and maturities.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  70


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of market risk

    

 

 

    

      

This section contains key disclosures describing the Group’s market risk profile, highlighting regulatory as well as management measures. This includes risk weighted assets by major business line, as well as Value at Risk measures.

 

  §   Risk weighted assets decreased 27.9% to £37.6bn, driven by reduced trading book exposures in the Investment Bank and Non-Core

 

  §   Measures of traded market risk, such as Value at Risk (VaR), decreased in the year primarily due to the removal of certain banking book assets from VaR, reduced client activity, and risk reduction in Non-Core businesses

 

  §   Market risk RWAs are primarily generated by the following IFRS account classifications: Trading portfolio assets and liabilities; and derivative financial instruments assets and liabilities

Risk weighted assets for market risk reduced in the year

-£14.5bn Total RWAs

Driven by:

-£9.5bn

Risk reductions within the Investment Bank and Non-Core, primarily as a result of reduced holdings of US bonds and equities

-£2.7bn

Implementation of diversification benefits across advanced general and specific market risk within the Investment Bank and Non-Core

-£2.6bn

Change in calculation methodology on credit valuation adjustments (CVA) as a result of updated regulatory guidance

Reduction in associated risk measures and lower income from reduced activity

85%

Of days generated positive trading revenue

-23%

Reduction in management Value at Risk

10%

Increase in average daily trading revenue

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  71


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of market risk

    

 

 

Market risk is the risk of a reduction in earnings or capital due to volatility of the trading book positions or as a consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity pools.

 

Overview of market risk

This section contains key statistics describing the market risk profile of the Group. This includes risk weighted assets by major business line, as well as Value at Risk (VaR) measures. A distinction is made between regulatory and management measures within the section. The market risk management section on pages 128 to 138 provides descriptions of these metrics:

 

§   page 73 provides a view of market risk in the context of the Group’s balance sheet

 

§   pages 131 to 136 cover the management of traded market risk. Management measures are shown from page 131 and regulatory equivalent measures are shown from page 133

 

§   non-traded market risk, arising from our banking books, is reviewed from page 136.

Measures of market risk in the Group and accounting measures

Traded market risk measures such as VaR and balance sheet exposure measures have fundamental differences:

 

§   balance sheet measures show accruals-based balances or marked to market values as at the reporting date

 

§   VaR measures also take account of current marked to market values, but in addition hedging effects between positions are considered

 

§   market risk measures are expressed in terms of changes in value or volatilities as opposed to static values.

For these reasons, it is not possible to present direct reconciliations of traded market risk and accounting measures. The table ‘Balance sheet split by trading and banking books’, on page 73, helps the reader understand the main categories of assets and liabilities subject to regulatory market risk measures.

Summary of performance in the period

The Group has seen a decrease in market risk from reduced risk positions, notably in equities and interest rates, in addition to risk reduction in Non-Core businesses:

 

§   measures of traded market risk, such as VaR, decreased in the year mainly due to the removal of certain banking book assets from the measure (now reported as non-traded market risks), reduced client activity , and risk reduction in Non-Core businesses

 

§   average trading revenue, in contrast, increased 10% compared with the previous year

 

§   market risk RWAs fell from 2014 levels due to the implementation of diversification of the general and specific market risk VaR charges, partially offset by the inclusion of cost of funding RNIV into VaR

 

§   Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR), a key measure of interest rate risk volatility in the banking book (IRRBB), decreased in 2015, primarily driven by PCB due to increased hedging; and in Treasury driven by increased exposure in the short dated available for sale bond portfolio, partially offset by reduced mismatch between assets and liabilities in the wholesale funding portfolio

 

§   other market risks, such as pension risk and insurance risk, are disclosed from page 137 onwards.
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  72


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of market risk

 

 

Balance sheet view of trading and banking books

As defined by the regulatory rules, a trading book consists of positions held for trading intent or to hedge elements of the trading book. Trading intent must be evidenced in the basis of the strategies, policies and procedures set up by the firm to manage the position or portfolio. The table below provides a Group-wide overview of where assets and liabilities on the Group’s balance sheet are managed within regulatory traded and non-traded books.

The balance sheet split by trading book and banking books is shown on an IFRS scope of consolidation. The reconciliation between the accounting and regulatory scope of consolidation is shown in table 1 on page 10. The reconciling items are all part of the banking book.

Table 47: Balance sheet split by trading and banking books

 

As at 31 December 2015

    
 

 

Banking
book

£m

  
a 

  

    
 

 

Trading
book

£m

  
  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Cash and balances at central banks

     49,711                 49,711   

Items in course of collection from other banks

     1,011                 1,011   

Trading portfolio assets

     3,355         73,993         77,348   

Financial assets designated at fair value

     25,263         51,567         76,830   

Derivative financial instruments

     296         327,413         327,709   

Available for sale financial investments

     90,267                 90,267   

Loans and advances to banks

     39,779         1,570         41,349   

Loans and advances to customers

     380,406         18,811         399,217   

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

     28,187                 28,187   

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

     3,010                 3,010   

Investments in associates and joint ventures

     573                 573   

Property, plant and equipment

     3,468                 3,468   

Goodwill and intangible assets

     8,222                 8,222   

Current tax assets

     415                 415   

Deferred tax assets

     4,495                 4,495   

Retirement benefit assets

     836                 836   

Non-current assets classified as held for disposal

     7,364                 7,364   

Total assets

     646,658         473,354         1,120,012   

Deposits from banks

     45,344         1,736         47,080   

Items in course of collection due to other banks

     1,013                 1,013   

Customer accounts

     401,927         16,315         418,242   

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

     25,035                 25,035   

Trading portfolio liabilities

             33,967         33,967   

Financial liabilities designated at fair value:

     7,027         84,718         91,745   

Derivative financial instruments

     1,699         322,553         324,252   

Debt securities in issue

     69,150                 69,150   

Subordinated liabilities

     21,467                 21,467   

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

     10,610                 10,610   

Provisions

     4,142                 4,142   

Current tax liabilities

     903                 903   

Deferred tax liabilities

     122                 122   

Retirement benefit liabilities

     423                 423   

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale

     5,997                 5,997   

Total liabilities

     594,859         459,289         1,054,148   

Included within the trading book are assets and liabilities which are included in the market risk regulatory measures. For more information on these measures (VaR, SVaR, IRC and APR) see the risk management section on page 133.

 

 

Note

a The primary risk factors for banking book assets and liabilities are interest rates and, to a lesser extent, foreign exchange rates. Credit spreads and equity prices will also be a factor where the Group holds debt and equity securities respectively, either as financial assets designated at fair value or as available for sale, shown in Note 14 and Note 16 of the Barclays PLC 2015 Annual Report.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  73


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of market risk

 

 

Traded market risk review

Review of management measures

The table below shows the Total management VaR on a diversified basis by risk factor. Total management VaR includes all trading positions in the Investment Bank, Non-Core, Africa Banking and Head Office.

Limits are applied against each risk factor VaR as well as Total management VaR, which are then cascaded further by risk managers to each business.

Table 48: The daily average, maximum and minimum values of management VaR

 

Management VaR (95%)

                                                                 
       2015           2014   

For the year ended 31 December

      
 
Average
£m
  
  
      

 

High

£m

a 

  

      

 

Low

£m

a 

  

      
 
Average
£m
  
  
      

 

High

£m

a 

  

      

 

Low

£m

a 

  

Credit risk

       11           17           8           11           15           9   

Interest rate risk

       6           14           4           11           17           6   

Equity risk

       8           18           4           10           16           6   

Basis risk

       3           4           2           4           8           2   

Spread risk

       3           6           2           4           8           3   

Foreign exchange risk

       3           6           1           4           23           1   

Commodity risk

       2           3           1           2           8           1   

Inflation risk

       3           5           2           2           4           2   

Diversification effecta

       (22        n/a           n/a           (26        n/a           n/a   

Total management VaR

       17           25           12           22           36           17   

Average interest rate VaR decreased by £5m to £6m (Dec 14: £11m) during 2015 as certain banking book positions were transferred from the Investment Bank to Head Office Treasury reflecting the operational transfer of responsibility (see page 77). These are high quality and liquid banking book assets now reported as non-traded market risk exposures. Similarly, lower spread risk and basis VaR in 2015 reflect reduced risk taking.

Average equities VaR reduced by 20% to £8m, reflecting reduced cash portfolio activities and a more conservative risk profile maintained in the derivatives portfolio.

Average foreign exchange VaR decreased by 25% to £3m as a result of lower activity in the first half of the year, partially offset by higher volatility in the global foreign exchange market seen in the second half of the year.

Inflation risk VaR increased by £1m to £3m, primarily due to increased volatility in the inflation market.

Average commodity VaR remained stable at £2m, but the high levels reduced significantly year-on-year due to the portfolio having been largely divested, and reduced client flows impacted by lower oil prices.

 

Group Management VaR

 

 

LOGO

Daily trading revenue

 

 

LOGO

 

 

The chart above presents the frequency distribution of our daily trading revenues for all material positions included in VaR for 2015. This includes daily trading revenue generated in the Investment Bank (except for Private Equity and Principal Investments), Treasury, Africa Banking and Non-Core.

The basis of preparation for trading revenue was changed in 2015 to better align and reflect the portfolio structure included in Group Management VaR. 2014 figures have been presented on a comparable basis. Disclosed trading revenue includes realised and unrealised mark to market gains and losses from intraday market moves, but excludes commission and advisory fees. The trading revenue measure is based on actual trading results and holding periods. In contrast, the VaR shows the volatility of a hypothetical measure. To construct this measure, positions are assumed to be held for one day, and the aggregate unrealised gain or loss is the measure. VaR and the actual revenue figure are not directly comparable. VaR informs risk managers of the risk implications of current portfolio decisions.

The average daily net revenue increased by 10% to £10.1m; there were more positive trading revenue days in 2015 than in 2014, with 85% (2014: 82%) of days generating positive trading revenue.

The daily VaR chart illustrates an average declining trend in 2015. Intermittent VaR increases were due to increased client flow in periods of heightened volatility in specific markets and subsequent risk management of the position.

Note

a Diversification effects recognise that forecast losses from different assets or businesses are unlikely to occur concurrently, hence the expected aggregate loss is lower than the sum of the expected losses from each risk factor area. Historic correlations between losses are taken into account in making these assessments. The high and low VaR reported for each category did not necessarily occur on the same day as the high and low VaR reported as a whole. Consequently a diversification effect balance for the high and low VaR would not be meaningful and is therefore omitted from the above table.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  74


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of market risk

    

 

 

Business scenario stresses

As part of the Group’s risk management framework, on a regular basis the performance of the trading business in hypothetical scenarios characterised by severe macroeconomic conditions is modelled. Up to six global scenarios are modelled on a regular basis, for example, a sharp deterioration in liquidity, a slowdown in the global economy, terrorist attacks and a sovereign peripheral crisis.

Throughout 2015, the scenario analyses showed the biggest market risk related impact would be due to a severe deterioration in market liquidity and a sovereign peripheral crisis.

Review of regulatory measures

The following disclosures provide details on regulatory measures of market risk. See pages 133 and 136 for more detail on regulatory measures and the differences when compared to management measures.

The Group’s market risk capital requirement comprises of two elements:

 

§   trading book positions booked to legal entities within the scope of the Group’s PRA waiver where the market risk is measured under a PRA approved internal models approach, including Regulatory VaR, Stressed Value at Risk (SVaR), Incremental Risk Charge (IRC) and All Price Risk (APR) as required

 

§   trading book positions that do not meet the conditions for inclusion within the approved internal models approach. The capital requirement for these positions is calculated using standardised rules.

The table below summarises the regulatory market risk measures under the internal models approach. See Table “Minimum capital requirement for market risk”, on page 76 for a breakdown of capital requirements by approach.

Table 49: Analysis of Regulatory VaR, SVaR, IRC and APR

 

 

        
 
Year-end
£m
  
  
      
 
Avg.
£m
  
  
      
 
Max
£m
  
  
      
 
Min
£m
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

                   

Regulatory VaR

       26           28           46           20   

SVaR

       44           54           68           38   

IRC

       129           142           254           59   

APR

       12           15           27           11   

As at 31 December 2014

                   

Regulatory VaR

       29           39           66           29   

SVaR

       72           74           105           53   

IRC

       80           118           287           58   

APR

       24           28           39           24   

Overall, there was a lower risk profile during 2015:

 

§   Regulatory VaR/SVaR: reduction in Regulatory VaR/SVaR is driven by the application of diversification to the general and specific market risk VaR charges which resulted in an overall RWA reduction

 

§   IRC: the IRC increase was mainly driven by the implementation of an updated IRC model in Q4 2015 which features a more refined correlation structure, adoption of a continuous transition matrix and a local currency adjustment for sovereign issuance

 

§   APR reduced as a result of further reductions in a specific legacy portfolio.

Table 50: Breakdown of the major regulatory risk measures by portfolio

 

 

As at 31 December 2015

    

 

Macro

£m

  

  

    

 

Equities

£m

  

  

    

 

Credit

£m

  

  

    

 

 

Client Capital

Management

£m

  

  

  

    

 

Treasury

£m

  

  

    

 

Africa

£m

  

  

    

 

Non-Core

£m

  

  

Regulatory VaR

     10         8         5         12         4         4         3   

SVaR

     25         33         15         18         11         6         12   

IRC

     197         5         79         99         13                 62   

APR

                                                     12   

The table above shows the primary portfolios which are driving the trading businesses’ modelled capital requirement as at 2015 year end. The standalone portfolio results diversify at the total level and are not necessarily additive. Regulatory VaR, SVaR, IRC and APR in the prior table show the diversified results at a group level.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  75


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of market risk

    

 

 

Capital requirements for market risk

The table below breaks down the elements of capital requirements and risk weighted assets under the market risk framework as defined in the CRR. The Group is required to hold capital for the market risk exposures arising from regulatory trading books. Inputs for the modelled components include the measures on table 49 ‘Analysis of regulatory VaR, SVaR, IRC and APR’, using the higher of the end of period value or an average over the past 60 days (times a multiplier in the case of VaR and SVaR).

It should be noted that the disclosure below excludes CVA which is shown separately on page 81

Table 51: Minimum capital requirement for market risk

 

 

       Capital requirements             Risk weighted assets       

Market risk

    

 
 

 

As at

31 December
2015

£m

  

  
  

  

    

 
 

 

As at

31 December
2014

£m

  

  
  

  

    

 
 

 

As at

31 December
2015

£m

  

  
  

  

    

 
 

 

As at

31 December
2014

£m

  

  
  

  

VaR model-based PRR

     311         329         3,884         4,113   

SVaR model-based PRR

     548         632         6,852         7,900   

APR measure requirement

     12         27         144         338   

RNIV

     262         387         3,275         4,838   

Incremental risk charge requirement

     129         91         1,611         1,138   

Interest rate PRR

     531         968         6,643         12,100   

Equity PRR

     185         308         2,315         3,850   

Option non delta risk

     79         68         991         850   

Collective investment schemes PRR

     28         86         348         1,075   

Commodity PRR

             2                 25   

Foreign exchange PRR

     16         27         201         339   

Total market risk

     2,101         2,925         26,264         36,566   

Of which:

Specific interest rate risk of securitisation positions

     87         300         1,088         3,750   

In the table above, VaR and SVaR model-based position risk requirement (PRR), APR measure, RNIV and the incremental risk charge represent the modelled RWA component, with the remainder contributing towards the standardised approach.

Overall market risk RWAs decreased £10.3bn to £26.3bn, driven by:

 

§   £1.3bn decrease in VaR and SVaR model-based PRR, primarily driven by the implementation of diversification of the general and specific market risk VaR charges. This was partially offset by the inclusion of the cost of funding RNIV into VaR.

 

§   £1.6bn decrease in RNIV primarily driven by methodology enhancements to cost of funding RNIV which switched from Non-VaR type RNIV to a VaR type calculation. This was partially offset by increases in the Fixing Exposure RNIV and the Event Risk for pegged currencies RNIV. Please see below for more details on RNIVs.

 

§   £5.5bn decrease in interest rate PRR due to business driven reductions in Non-Agency RMBS securitisation positions and US Agency positions

 

§   £1.5bn decrease in equity PRR due to business driven reduction in US equities.

Cost of Funding RNIV captures the potential variation of the fair value adjustment in the uncollateralised derivatives portfolio arising from funding spread risks.

Fixing Exposure RNIV relates to indices which do not trade directly through exchange traded futures or are not liquid OTC contracts. Exposures to such indices are risk managed via a model which decomposes them into liquid and hedgeable instruments. The RNIV captures the residual risk which is the difference between the index level implied through these contracts and the published fixing.

Event Risk for pegged currencies RNIV captures the potential understatement in VaR for managed currencies with low realised volatilities that are actively managed by local central banks (via outright pegs, crawling pegs or other targeted ranges within specific bands).

Non-traded market risk

Overview

The non-traded market risk framework covers exposures in the banking book, mostly consisting of exposures relating to accrual accounted and AFS instruments. The potential volatility of the net interest income of the bank is measured by an Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR) metric that is monitored regularly and reported to Senior Management and the Board Risk Committee as part of the limit monitoring framework.

Net interest income sensitivity

The table below shows a sensitivity analysis on pre-tax net interest income for non-trading financial assets and financial liabilities including the effect of any hedging. The sensitivity has been measured using the Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR) methodology as described on page 136. Note that this metric is simplistic in that it assumes a large parallel shock occurs instantaneously across all major currencies and ignores the impact of any management actions on customer products.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  76


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of market risk

    

 

 

Table 52: Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by business unit

 

      
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
Barclaycard
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Africa
Banking
£m
  
  
  
    
 
Non-Corea
£m 
  
  
    
 
Treasuryb
£m 
  
  
    
 
Total
£m
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

                 

+200bps

     305         (31      28         27         (131      198   

+100bps

     152         (14      14         14         (63      103   

-100bps

     (385      10         (11              (26      (412

-200bps

     (433      14         (14              (36      (469

As at 31 December 2014c

                 

+200bps

     464         (59      26         6         14         451   

+100bps

     239         (27      13         3         10         238   

-100bps

     (426      26         (9      (1      (29      (439

-200bps

     (430      29         (17      (1      (39      (458

Overall the NII sensitivity of the Group to sudden changes in interest rates has decreased. The main drivers of the change in NII sensitivities are:

§  PCB: The reduction in NII sensitivity was due to increased hedging of certain deposit products exposure to interest rate changes

§  Barclaycard: The reduction in NII is due to a decrease in the period of time that the book can be re-priced post a change in interest rates

§  Non-Core: The increase is predominantly due to a change in the hedge profile following the announced disposals in Europe

§   Treasury: The increase in NII sensitivity is primarily driven by an increased exposure in the short dated available for sale bond portfolio. This results in a higher duration mismatch between assets and liabilities which in an up-shock scenario creates a negative impact. In a down shock scenario the full benefit of this is not realised due to the rates being floored at zero, resulting in a net negative NII impact from Treasury under these simple modelling assumptions.

Table 53: Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by currency

 

       2015         2014   

As at 31 December

    
 

 

+100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

-100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

+100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

-100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

GBP

     94         (368      184         (406

USD

     (15      (30      (11      (11

EUR

     (6      (8      21         3   

ZAR

     6         (5      10         (8

Other currencies

     24         (1      34         (17

Total

     103         (412      238         (439

As percentage of net interest income

     0.82      (3.28 )%       1.97      (3.63 )% 

Economic Capital by business unit

Barclays measures some non-traded market risks using an economic capital (EC) methodology. EC is predominantly calculated using a daily VaR model and then scaled up to a one-year EC confidence interval (99.98%). For more information on definitions of prepayment, recruitment and residual risk, and on how EC is used to manage market risk, see the market risk management section on page 137.

Table 54: Economic capital for non-traded risk by business unit

 

      
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
    
 
Barclaycard
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Africa
Banking
£m
  
  
  
    

 

Non-Core

£m 

d 

  

    
 
Total
£m
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

              

Prepayment risk

     35         7                 –          42   

Recruitment risk

     64         1                         70   

Residual risk

     7         2         126                 140   

Total

     106         10         126         10          252   

As at 31 December 2014

              

Prepayment risk

     32         15                 –          47   

Recruitment risk

     148         1                 –          149   

Residual risk

     12         3         34         16          65   

Total

     192         19         34         16          261   

PCB recruitment risk: The reduction of EC for PCB is driven by lower levels of recruitment risk associated with hedging mismatch for savings and mortgage products as at December 2015. The mortgage book in particular saw significant falls in recruitment risk due to lower levels of pre-hedging, particularly within mortgages of longer tenor.

Africa Banking residual risk: The significant changes in EC for Africa Banking are mainly due to the adoption of new behavioural assumptions for residual risk which went live on 1 January 2015.

Notes

a Only retail exposures within Non-Core are included in the calculation.
b Treasury includes both accrual and fair value accounted positions modelled with an appropriate holding period. It excludes hedge accounting ineffectiveness. Although hedge accounting ineffectiveness is recorded within Net interest income, it is excluded in this analysis as it is driven by fair value movements rather than interest accruals.
c 2014 comparatives have been revised to reflect the inclusion of all Treasury banking books and the exclusion of hedge ineffectiveness.
d Only the retail exposures within Non-Core are captured in the measure.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  77


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of market risk

    

 

 

Analysis of equity sensitivity

The table below measures the overall impact of a +/- 100bps movement in interest rates on available for sale and cash flow hedge reserves. This data is captured using PV01 which is an indicator of the shift in asset value for a 1 basis point shift in the yield curve. Note that the methodology used to estimate the impact of the negative movement applied a 0% floor to interest rates.

Table 55: Analysis of equity sensitivity

 

       2015         2014   

As at 31 December

    
 

 

+100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

-100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

+100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

    
 

 

-100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

Net interest income

     103         (412      238         (439

Taxation effects on the above

     (31      124         (57      105   

Effect on profit for the year

     72         (288      181         (334

As percentage of net profit after tax

     11.56      (46.23 )%       21.42      (39.53 )% 

Effect on profit for the year (per above)

     72         (288      181         (334

Available for sale reserve

     (751      1,052         (698      845   

Cash flow hedge reserve

     (3,104      1,351         (3,058      2,048   

Taxation effects on the above

     1,157         (721      901         (694

Effect on equity

     (2,626      1,394         (2,674      1,865   

As percentage of equity

     (3.99 )%       2.12      (4.05 )%       2.83

As discussed in relation to the net interest income sensitivity table on page 77, the impact of a 100bps movement in rates is largely driven by PCB and Treasury. The available for sale reserve change in sensitivity was mainly driven by changes in the portfolio composition, primarily due to an increase in available for sale assets held on a shorter dated outright basis. Note that the movement in the available for sale reserve would impact CRD IV fully loaded CET1 capital, but the movement in the cash flow hedge reserve would not impact CET1 capital.

Volatility of the available for sale portfolio in the liquidity pool

Changes in value of available for sale exposures flow directly through capital via equity reserve. The volatility of the value of the available for sale investments in the liquidity pool is captured and managed through a value measure rather than an earning measure, i.e. the non traded market risk VaR.

Although the underlying methodology to calculate the non-traded VaR is the same as the one used to calculate traded management VaR, the two measures are not directly comparable. The non-traded VaR represents the volatility to capital driven by the available for sale exposures. This is used for internal management purposes and although it is not formally backtested like the regulatory VaR (as shown on page 134), it is reviewed on a regular basis by risk managers to ensure it remains adequate for risk appetite and monitoring purposes.

These exposures are in the banking book and do not meet the criteria for trading book treatment. As such available for sale volatility is a risk which is taken into account in the broader IRRBB internal capital assessment, which is covered by the Pillar 2 capital framework.

Volatility of the available for sale portfolio in liquidity pool

 

 

LOGO

  

Table 56: Analysis of volatility of the available for sale portfolio in liquidity pool

 

         2015   

For the year ended 31 December

      
 
Average
£m
  
  
      
 
High
£m
  
  
      
 
Low
£m
  
  

Non Traded Market Value at Risk (daily, 95%)

       41.6           48.5           37.0   

The Non Traded VaR is mainly driven by volatility of interest rates in developed markets in the chart above.

The increase in VaR in H2 is due to the volatility in the government and swap rate markets observed in that period, particularly in the US and the UK. The subsequent decrease was due to subsiding market volatility in combination with a reduction in exposure.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  78


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of market risk

 

 

 

 

Foreign exchange risk

The Group is exposed to two sources of foreign exchange risk.

a) Transactional foreign currency exposure

Transactional foreign exchange exposures represent exposure on banking assets and liabilities denominated in currencies other than the functional currency of the transacting entity.

The Group’s risk management policies prevent the holding of significant open positions in foreign currencies outside the trading portfolio managed by the Investment Bank which is monitored through VaR.

Banking book transactional foreign exchange risk outside of the Investment Bank is monitored on a daily basis by the market risk functions and minimised by the businesses.

b) Translational foreign exchange exposure

The Group’s investments in overseas subsidiaries and branches create capital resources denominated in foreign currencies, principally USD, EUR and ZAR. Changes in the GBP value of the net investments due to foreign currency movements are captured in the currency translation reserve, resulting in a movement in CET1 capital.

The Group’s strategy is to minimise the volatility of the capital ratios caused by foreign exchange movements, by ensuring that the CET1 capital movements broadly match the revaluation of the Group’s foreign currency RWA exposures.

The economic hedges primarily represent the USD and EUR preference shares and Additional Tier 1 (AT1) instruments that are held as equity, which are accounted for at historic cost under IFRS and do not qualify as hedges for accounting purposes.

Table 57: Functional currency of operations

 

Functional currency of operations                                                      
      
 
 
 
 
Foreign
currency
net
investments
£m
  
  
  
  
  
    

 

 
 
 

Borrowings

which hedge

the net
investments
£m

  

  

  
  
  

    

 

 

 
 

Derivatives

which hedge

the net

investments
£m

  

  

  

  
  

    
 
 

 
 

 

Structural
currency
exposures

pre-economic
hedges

£m

  
  
  

  
  

  

    
 
 
Economic
hedges
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
Remaining
structural
currency
exposures
£m
  
  
  
  
  
As at 31 December 2015                  
US Dollar      24,712         8,839         1,158         14,715         7,008         7,707   
Euro      2,002         630         14         1,358         1,764         (406
Rand      3,201         4         99         3,098                 3,098   
Japanese Yen      383         168         205         10                 10   
Other      2,927                 1,294         1,633                 1,633   
Total      33,225         9,641         2,770         20,814         8,772         12,042   
As at 31 December 2014                  
US Dollar      23,728         5,270         1,012         17,446         6,655         10,791   
Euro      3,056         328         238         2,490         1,871         619   
Rand      3,863                 103         3,760                 3,760   
Japanese Yen      364         164         208         (8              (8
Other      2,739                 1,198         1,541                 1,541   
Total      33,750         5,762         2,759         25,229         8,526         16,703   

During 2015, total structural currency exposure net of hedging instruments decreased by £4.7bn to £12.0bn. The decrease is broadly in line with the overall RWA currency profile, with a reduction in USD RWAs in the year. Foreign currency net investments remained stable at £33.2bn (2014: £33.8bn).

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  79


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of market risk

 

 

 

 

Pension risk review

The UK Retirement Fund (UKRF) represents approximately 92% (2014: 92%) of the Group’s total retirement benefit obligations globally. The other material overseas schemes are in South Africa and in the US where they represent approximately 4% (2014: 4%) and 2% (2014: 2%) respectively of the Group’s total retirement benefit obligations. As such, this risk review section will focus exclusively on the UKRF. Note that the scheme is closed to new entrants.

Pension risk arises as the estimated market value of the pension fund assets might decline, or the investment returns might reduce; or the estimated value of the pension liabilities might increase.

See page 137 for more information on how pension risk is managed.

Assets

The Board of Trustees defines an overall long-term investment strategy for the UKRF, with investments across a broad range of asset classes. This ensures an appropriate mix of return seeking assets to generate future returns as well as liability matching assets to better match the future pension obligations. The main market risks within the asset portfolio are against interest rates and equities, as shown by the analysis of scheme assets within Note 35 in the Barclays PLC Annual Report.

The fair value of the UKRF plan assets was £26.8bn. See Note 35 in the Barclays PLC Annual Report for details.

Liabilities

The retirement benefit obligations are a series of future cash flows with relatively long duration. On an IAS19 basis these cash flows are sensitive to changes in the expected long-term inflation rate and the discount rate (AA corporate bond yield curve):

 

§   An increase in long-term inflation corresponds to an increase in liabilities

 

§   An increase in the discount rate corresponds to a decrease in liabilities

Pension risk is generated through the Group’s defined benefit schemes and this risk is set to reduce over time as our main defined benefit schemes are closed to new entrants, and in many cases closed to future accruals. The chart below outlines the shape of the UKRF’s liability cash flow profile that takes account of future inflation indexing of payments to beneficiaries, with the majority of the cash flows (approximately 83%) falling between 0 and 40 years, peaking within the 21 to 30 year band and reducing thereafter. The shape may vary depending on changes in inflation expectation and mortality and it is updated in line with the triennial valuation process.

For more detail on liability assumptions see Note 35 in the Barclays PLC Annual Report.

 

Proportion of IAS 19 liability cash flows

 

  
LOGO   

Risk measurement

In line with Barclays’ risk management framework, the assets and liabilities of the UKRF are modelled within a VaR framework to show the volatility of the pension positions on a total portfolio level. This ensures that the risks, diversification and liability matching characteristics of the UKRF obligations and investments are adequately captured. VaR is measured and monitored on a monthly basis. It is discussed at pension risk fora such as the Market Risk Committee, Pensions Management Group and Pension Executive Board. The VaR model takes into account the valuation of the liabilities following an IAS 19 basis. The trustees receive quarterly VaR measures on a funding basis.

The pension liability is also sensitive to post-retirement mortality assumptions. See Note 35 in the Barclays PLC Annual Report for more details.

In addition to this, the impact of pension risk to the Group is taken into account as part of the stress testing process. Stress testing is performed internally at least on an annual basis. The UKRF exposure is also included as part of the regulatory stress tests and exercises indicated that the UKRF risk profile is resilient to severe stress events.

The defined benefit pension scheme affects capital in two ways. An IAS 19 deficit impacts the CET1 capital ratio, and pension risk is also taken into account in the Pillar 2A capital assessment.

Triennial valuation

Please see Note 35 in the Barclays PLC Annual Report for information on the funding position of the UKRF.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  80


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of market risk

    

 

 

Insurance risk review

Insurance risk is managed within Africa Banking primarily in the Wealth, Investment Management & Insurance (WIMI) portfolios and is reported across four significant categories. Please see page 138 for more information on the definitions and governance procedure.

The risk types below mainly determine the regulatory capital requirements. The year-on-year decreases in appetite were agreed as part of the medium-term planning process.

Table 58: Analysis of insurance riska

 

       2015         2014   

As at 31 December

    
 
Position
£m
  
  
    
 
Appetite
£m
  
  
    
 
Position
£m
  
  
    
 
Appetite
£m
  
  

Short-term insurance underwriting risk

     30         32         40         44   

Life insurance underwriting risk

     17         20         21         28   

Life insurance mismatch risk

     12         20         16         40   

Life and short-term insurance investment risk

     11         18         12         14   

In 2015, the largest year-on-year movement was in short-term insurance underwriting risk where the reduction in the position reflected the closure of the Agriculture book to new insurance business.

For mismatch risk, the 2015 Appetite was materially lower than the 2014 Appetite as the level of mismatch between policyholder assets and policyholder liabilities decreased following the adoption of improved reserving methodologies and sign off by the independent statutory actuary function. As a result, while 2015 Position has reduced in absolute terms, the utilisation against appetite has increased.

From 2016 onwards, the methodology for assessment of Insurance Risk will change from a CAR-based approach to a Solvency Assessment and Management (SAM) based approach (the Solvency II equivalent) which is considered to be a more robust risk management approach with well-developed methodologies.

Credit value adjustments

The Credit Value Adjustment (CVA) measures the risk from MTM losses due to deterioration in the credit quality of a counterparty to over-the-counter derivative transactions with Barclays. It is a complement to the counterparty credit risk charge, that accounts for the risk of outright default of a counterparty.

CVA is shown as part of the market risk section, which is consistent with other regulatory disclosures.

 

LOGO

  See page 7 for a high-level description of the approach, and page 13 for a description of the scope of our permissions.

Table 59: Credit valuation adjustment capital charge

Two approaches can be used to calculate the adjustment:

 

§   Standardised approach: this approach takes account of the external credit rating of each counterparty, and incorporates the effective maturity and EAD from the calculation of the CCR

 

§   Advanced approach: this approach requires the calculation of the charge as a) a 10-day 99% Value at Risk (VaR) measure for the current one-year period and b) the same measure for a stressed period. The sum of the two VaR measures is tripled to yield the capital charge.

 

Credit valuation adjustment capital charge

                          

Total portfolios subject to the Advanced CVA capital charge

    
 

 

EAD
post-CRM

£m

  
  

  

    

 

RWA

£m

  

  

    

 

 

Capital

requirements

£m

  

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

        

(i) VaR component (including the 3x multiplier)

     19,332         1,670         134   

(ii) Stressed VaR component (including 3x multiplier)

     22,419         8,817         706   

All portfolios subject to the standardised CVA capital charge

     1,755         781         62   

Total subject to the CVA capital charge

             11,268         902   

As at 31 December 2014

        

(i) VaR component (including the 3x multiplier)

     25,689         2,244         180   

(ii) Stressed VaR component (including 3x multiplier)

     29,620         10,098         808   

All portfolios subject to the standardised CVA capital charge

     3,318         3,163         253   

Total subject to the CVA capital charge

             15,505         1,241   

CVA risk weighted assets decreased by £4.2bn to £11.3bn, primarily due to the implementation of collateral modelling for mismatched FX collateral following PRA approval and the removal of client clearing business exposures following EBA guidance.

Note

a The figures in the table are reported using Capital Adequacy Requirement (CAR) approach.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  81


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of securitisation exposures

    

 

 

 

This section shows the credit, counterparty credit and market risk arising from securitisation positions. These are already included in previous related sections.

Securitisation positions are subject to a specific risk weighted assets calculation framework, which is why these are disclosed separately.

 

  §   Securitisation exposures have reduced by 22.3% to £19.8bn this year, primarily driven by continued reduction in Non-Core and reduced trading activity.

-£3.5bn

reduction in Banking book exposures

-£2.3bn

reduction in Trading book exposures

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  82


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of securitisation exposures

    

 

 

For regulatory disclosures purposes, a securitisation is defined as a transaction or scheme where the payments are dependent upon the performance of a single exposure or pool of exposures and where the subordination of tranches determines the distribution of losses during the on-going life of the transaction or scheme. Such transactions are undertaken for a variety of reasons including the transfer of risk for Barclays or on behalf of a client.

The tables below detail exposures from securitisation trades entered into by the Group and cover banking book and trading book exposures. Only transactions that achieved significant risk transfer (SRT) are included in these tables. Where securitisations do not achieve SRT (for instance when they are entered into for funding purposes), the associated exposures are presented alongside the rest of the banking book or trading book positions in other sections of the Pillar 3 Report.

Please see page 140 for further details on Barclays’ securitisation activities.

Barclays completes the Pillar 3 disclosures in accordance with the Basel framework, which prescribes minimum disclosure requirements. The following quantitative disclosures are not applicable or result in a nil return for the current and prior reporting period:

 

§   securitised facilities subject to an early amortisation period – there were no securitisation positions backed by revolving credit exposures, where Barclays acted as the originator and capital relief was sought

 

§   re-securitisation exposures subject to hedging insurance or involving financial guarantors – there were no such exposures in the current or prior reporting period

 

§   a separate table for capital deduction is no longer applicable, in line with CRD IV.

Barclays PLC Balance sheet – summary versus regulatory view for securitisation exposures

Table 1 shows a reconciliation between Barclays PLC balance sheet for statutory purposes versus a regulatory view. Specifically for securitisation positions, the regulatory balance sheet will differ from the statutory balance sheet due to the following:

 

§   deconsolidation of certain securitisation entities that are considered for accounting purposes, but not for regulatory purposes (refer to page 142 for a summary of accounting policies for securitisation activities)

 

§   securitised positions are treated in accordance with the Group’s accounting policies, as set out in the 2015 Annual Report. Securitisation balances will therefore be disclosed in the relevant asset classification according to their accounting treatment

 

§   some securitisation positions are considered to be off-balance sheet and relate to undrawn liquidity lines to securitisation vehicles, market risk derivative positions and where Barclays is a swap provider to a Special Purposes Vehicle (SPV). These balances are disclosed in table 64.

Location of securitisation risk disclosures

Securitisation exposures are subject to a different risk weighted asset framework, therefore further granular disclosures are provided in addition to the exposure balances disclosed in the credit, counterparty and market risk sections.

This table shows a reconciliation of securitisation exposures in the following section and where the balance can be found in the relevant credit, counterparty and market risk sections.

Table 60: Reconciliation of exposures and capital requirements relating to securitisations

 

As at 31 December 2015

    
 
Table number in
this document
  
  
    
 

 

Exposure
value

£m

  
  

  

    
 
RWAs
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Capital
requirement
£m
  
  
  

Banking book

           

Standardised approach

           

Credit risk

     Tables 12,13,14                           

Total Standardised approach

                                

Advanced IRB

           

Credit risk

     Tables 12,13,14         17,367         3,141         252   

Counterparty credit risk

     Tables 41,42         1,059         428         34   

Total IRB

              18,426         3,569         286   

Total banking book

              18,426         3,569         286   

Trading book

           

Trading book – specific interest rate market risk

           

Standardised approach

     Tables 51         1,355         1,082         87   

Total trading book

              1,355         1,082         87   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  83


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of securitisation exposures

    

 

 

Table 61: Securitisation activity during the year

This table discloses a summary of the securitisation activity during 2015, including the amount of exposures securitised and recognised gain or loss on sale in the banking book. Barclays is involved in the origination of traditional and synthetic securitisations. A securitisation is considered to be a synthetic securitisation where the transfer of risk is achieved through the use of credit derivatives or guarantees, and the exposure remains on Barclays’ balance sheet.

 

       Banking book         Trading book   
      
 
Traditional
£m
  
  
    
 
Synthetic
£m
  
  
    
 

 

Total banking
book

£m

  
  

  

    
 
 
Gain/loss
on sale
£m
  
  
  
    
 
Traditional
£m
  
  
    
 
Synthetic
£m
  
  
    
 

 

Total trading
book

£m

  
  

  

    
 
 
Gain/loss
on sale
£m
  
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

Originator

                       

Residential mortgages

                                                               

Commercial mortgages

     3,536                 3,536         47                                   

Credit card receivables

                                                               

Leasing

                                                               

Loans to corporates or SMEs

     277                 277         7                                   

Consumer loans

                                                               

Trade receivables

                                                               

Securitisations/Re-securitisations

     30                 30                 945                 945         1   

Other assets

                                                               

Total

     3,843                 3,843         54         945                 945         1   

As at 31 December 2014

Originator

                       

Residential mortgages

             93         93                                           

Commercial mortgages

     2,389                 2,389         37                                   

Credit card receivables

                                                               

Leasing

                                                               

Loans to corporates or SMEs

     247                 247         7                                   

Consumer loans

                                                               

Trade receivables

                                                               

Securitisations/Re-securitisations

                                     1,839                 1,839         8   

Other assets

                                                               

Total

     2,636         93         2,729         44         1,839                 1,839         8   

The value of assets securitised in the banking book increased by £1.1bn to £3.8bn:

 

§   Barclays continues to be involved in the securitisation of commercial mortgage loans, alongside third party banks. Barclays’ role in these transactions is to contribute the underlying mortgage loan to the securitisation and to act as lead manager, book runner or underwriter to distribute the issued securities. The amount shown in table 61 represents Barclays share of assets contributed to the securitisation.

 

§   As part of these transactions, Barclays held assets on its balance sheet prior to securitisation.

 

§   Barclays may participate in secondary trading of these positions in its trading book. At 31 December 2015, the exposure value of positions held was £3m. These are not reflected in the above table as for trading book purposes, Barclays is considered to be an investor.

 

§   Barclays was also involved in European and US CLO transactions where it provided tranched limited recourse financing and contributed a portion of the underlying loan assets that had been on Barclays’ balance sheet. The value of assets contributed during 2015 was £277m as shown in the table above under “Loans to corporates or SMEs”.

The value of assets securitised in the trading book decreased £0.9bn to £0.9bn:

 

§   Barclays continues to participate in re-securitisations of Real Estate Mortgage Investment Conduits (Re-REMICs) and there has been a reduction in the origination activity for these positions during the year.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  84


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of securitisation exposures

        

 

 

 

Table 62: Assets awaiting securitisation

This table discloses the value of assets held on the balance sheet at year end and awaiting securitisation.

 

Exposure type

                 
      
 
 
Banking
book
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
Trading
book
£m
  
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

     

Originator

     

Residential mortgages

               

Commercial mortgages

     354           

Credit card receivables

               

Leasing

               

Loans to corporates or SMEs

               

Consumer loans

               

Trade receivables

               

Securitisations/Re-securitisations

               

Other assets

               

Total

     354           

As at 31 December 2014

     

Originator

     

Residential mortgages

     33           

Commercial mortgages

     422           

Credit card receivables

               

Leasing

               

Loans to corporates or SMEs

     64           

Consumer loans

               

Trade receivables

               

Securitisations/Re-securitisations

               

Other assets

               

Total

     519           

Banking book assets awaiting securitisation decreased £0.2bn to £0.4bn, with no significant movements to note.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  85


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of securitisation exposures

 

 

Table 63: Outstanding amount of exposures securitised – Asset value and impairment charges

This table presents the asset values and impairment charges relating to securitisation programmes where Barclays is the originator or sponsor. Where Barclays contributed assets to a securitisation alongside third parties, the amount represents the entire asset pool. Barclays is considered a sponsor of one multi-seller asset-backed commercial paper (ABCP) conduit. Please note that table 63 will not reconcile to table 61, as it shows outstanding amount of exposure for the positions held/retained by Barclays, whereas table 63 shows the total position originated in 2015.

 

       Banking book         Trading book   
      
 
Traditional
£m
  
  
    
 
Synthetic
£m
  
  
    
 

 

Total banking
book

£m

  
  

  

    
 
 
Of which
past due
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Recognised
losses

£m

  
  

  

    
 
Traditional
£m
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

                 

Originator

                 

Residential mortgages

     3,075                 3,075         655                   

Commercial mortgages

     3,521                 3,521         72                   

Credit card receivables

                                               

Leasing

                                               

Loans to corporates and SMEs

     1,216         1,164         2,380         85                   

Consumer loans

                                               

Trade receivables

                                               

Securitisations/Re-securitisations

     1,012                 1,012         0                   

Other assets

     268                 268                           

Total (Originator)

     9,092         1,164         10,256         812                   

Sponsor

                 

Residential mortgages

     889                 889         0                   

Commercial mortgages

                                               

Credit card receivables

                                               

Leasing

     1,056                 1,056         15                   

Loans to corporates and SMEs

     704                 704         3                   

Consumer loans

     3,554                 3,554         43                   

Trade receivables

     492                 492         2                   

Securitisations/Re-securitisations

                                               

Other assets

     74                 74                           

Total (Sponsor)

     6,769                 6,769         63                   

Total

     15,861         1,164         17,025         875                   

As at 31 December 2014

                 

Originator

                 

Residential mortgages

     4,021         99         4,120         588                 203   

Commercial mortgages

     4,500                 4,500                           

Credit card receivables

                                               

Leasing

                                               

Loans to corporates and SMEs

     3,925         2,477         6,402         79                   

Consumer loans

                                               

Trade receivables

                                               

Securitisations/Re-securitisations

     3,915                 3,915                         180   

Other assets

     1,150                 1,150         347                   

Total (Originator)

     17,511         2,576         20,087         1,014                 383   

Sponsor

                 

Residential mortgages

     874                 874                           

Commercial mortgages

                                               

Credit card receivables

                                               

Leasing

     891                 891         17                   

Loans to corporates and SMEs

     953                 953         2                   

Consumer loans

     2,812                 2,812         38                   

Trade receivables

     708                 708         4                   

Securitisations/Re-securitisations

                                               

Other assets

     98                 98                           

Total (Sponsor)

     6,336                 6,336         61                   

Total

     23,847         2,576         26,423         1,075                 383   

Banking book securitised assets where Barclays is considered to be the originator or sponsor has decreased by £9.4bn to £17.0bn, primarily driven by:

 

§   originated residential mortgage and corporate exposures have reduced due to continued Non-Core reductions

 

§   reduction in re-securitisation positions following the restructuring of an existing transaction which resulted in Barclays being fully repaid and no longer exposed to the originated assets

 

§   synthetic securitisation exposures have reduced following repayment of the outstanding notes in line with the decrease of the corporate loan portfolio.

Additionally, Barclays continues to be a sponsor and provides liquidity and programme-wide credit enhancement to its remaining conduit: Sheffield Receivables Corporation.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  86


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of securitisation exposures

 

 

Table 64: Securitisation exposures – by exposure class

The table below discloses the aggregate amount of securitisation exposures held, which is consistent with table 65, 67, and table 68.

For originated positions, the table below discloses the exposure that Barclays has retained in the securitisation programmes disclosed in table 63.

For clarity, table 63 discloses the underlying asset value of these programmes.

For invested and sponsored positions, the table below presents the aggregate amount of positions purchased.

 

                Banking book         Trading book   
      
 
Originator
£m
  
  
    
 
Sponsora,b
£m    
  
  
    
 
Investor
£m
  
  
    
 

 

Total banking
book

£m

  
  

  

    
 
Originator
£m
  
  
    
 
Investor
£m
  
  
    
 

 

Total trading
book

£m

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015                     
On-balance sheet                     
Residential mortgages      140         –             1,886         2,026                 633         633   
Commercial mortgages      24         –                     24                 15         15   
Credit card receivables              –             108         108                 72         72   
Leasing              –                                               
Loans to corporates or SMEs      1,626         –             413         2,039                 322         322   
Consumer loans              –             3,276         3,276                 90         90   
Trade receivables              –                                               
Securitisations/Re-securitisations              –             418         418                 77         77   
Other assets              –             1,018         1,018                 127         127   
Total On-balance sheet      1,790         –             7,119         8,909                 1,336         1,336   
Off-balance sheet                     
Residential mortgages      265         594             841         1,700                 19         19   
Commercial mortgages      63         –             203         267                           
Credit card receivables              –             419         419                           
Leasing              –             76         76                           
Loans to corporates or SMEs      18         –             192         210                           
Consumer loans              4,962             1,462         6,424                           
Trade receivables              –                                               
Securitisations/Re-securitisations              –             13         13                           
Other assets      1         19             389         408                           
Total Off-balance sheet      347         5,575             3,595         9,517                 19         19   
Total      2,137         5,575             10,714         18,426                 1,355         1,355   
As at 31 December 2014                     
On-balance sheet                     
Residential mortgages      345         –             1,862         2,207         7         1,848         1,855   
Commercial mortgages              –             4         4                 396         396   
Credit card receivables              –             214         214                 150         150   
Leasing              –                                               
Loans to corporates or SMEs      3,758         –             398         4,156                 331         331   
Consumer loans              –             1,661         1,661                 280         280   
Trade receivables              –                                               
Securitisations/Re-securitisations      344         –             349         693         1         177         178   
Other assets      52         –             905         957                 278         278   
Total On-balance sheet      4,499         –             5,393         9,892         8         3,460         3,468   
Off-balance sheet                     
Residential mortgages      401         –             920         1,321                 19         19   
Commercial mortgages      252         –             218         470                 129         129   
Credit card receivables              –             653         653                           
Leasing              –             192         192                           
Loans to corporates or SMEs      167         –             130         297                           
Consumer loans              4,931             2,904         7,835                           
Trade receivables              –             45         45                           
Securitisations/Re-securitisations      89         –             31         120                           
Other assets      153         25             902         1,080                           
Total Off-balance sheet      1,062         4,956             5,995         12,013                 148         148   
Total      5,561         4,956             11,388         21,905         8         3,608         3,616   

The total amount of securitisation positions in the banking book has decreased by £3.5bn to £18.4bn, primarily driven by:

 

§   Reduction in exposures in Loans to corporates or SMEs as a result of a reduction in the underlying corporate loan pool of a synthetic securitisation position within Non-Core.

The trading book exposure has decreased by £2.3bn to £1.4bn, primarily driven by disposals within Non-Core as well as reduced trading activity in residential mortgage backed securities (RMBS).

Notes

a The exposure type is based on the asset class of underlying positions.
b Off-balance sheet relates to liquidity lines to securitisation vehicles, market risk derivative positions and where the Group is a swap provider to a SPV.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  87


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of securitisation exposures

 

 

Table 65: Securitisation exposures – by capital approach

This table discloses the total exposure value and associated capital requirement of securitisation positions held by the approach adopted in accordance with the Basel framework. Barclays has approval to use, and therefore applies the IRB approach for the calculation of its RWAs. The total population is as per tables 64, table 67, and table 68.

 

       Exposure values         Capital requirements   
      
 
Originator
£m
  
  
    
 
Sponsor
£m
  
  
    
 
Investor
£m
  
  
    

 

Total

£m

  

  

    
 
Originator
£m
  
  
    
 
Sponsor
£m
  
  
    
 
Investor
£m
  
  
    
 
Total
£m
  
  
As at 31 December 2015                        
Banking book                        
IRB approach                        
Ratings Based Approach                        
<= 10%      946         1,315         4,977         7,238         6         8         31         45   
> 10% <= 20%      434         180         2,669         3,283         4         2         28         35   
> 20% <= 50%      712         47         1,373         2,133         18         1         26         45   
> 50% <= 100%      26                 134         160         1                 8         9   
>100% <= 650%      13                 25         38         5                 4         8   
> 650% < 1250%                      2         2                         1         1   
= 1250%/Look through      6                 1,534         1,539         4                 108         112   
Internal Assessment Approach              4,033                 4,033                 31                 31   
Supervisory Formula Method                                                                
Total IRB      2,137         5,575         10,714         18,426         38         42         206         286   
Standardised approach                                                                
Total banking book      2,137         5,575         10,714         18,426         38         42         206         286   
Trading book                        
IRB approach                        
Ratings Based Approach                                                                
<= 10%                      378         378                         2         2   
> 10% <= 20%                      118         118                         1         1   
> 20% <= 50%                      570         570                         12         12   
> 50% <= 100%                      135         135                         7         7   
>100% <= 650%                      75         75                         13         13   
> 650% < 1250%                      25         25                         14         14   
= 1250%/Look through                      54         54                         38         38   
Total trading book                      1,355         1,355                         87         87   
As at 31 December 2014                        
Banking book                        
IRB approach                        
Ratings Based Approach                        
<= 10%      2,613         833         5,965         9,411         16         5         37         58   
> 10% <= 20%      506         191         2,689         3,386         5         2         28         35   
> 20% <= 50%      1,451         98         998         2,547         29         2         21         52   
> 50% <= 100%      22         1         135         158         1                 8         9   
>100% <= 650%      692                 40         732         59                 8         67   
> 650% < 1250%                      2         2                         1         1   
= 1250%/Look through      184         4         1,559         1,747         53         4         167         224   
Internal Assessment Approach              3,829                 3,829                 31                 31   
Supervisory Formula Method      93                         93         7                         7   
Total IRB      5,561         4,956         11,388         21,905         170         44         270         484   
Standardised approach                                                                
Total banking book      5,561         4,956         11,388         21,905         170         44         270         484   
Trading book                        
IRB approach                        
Ratings Based Approach                        
<= 10%                      787         787                         5         5   
> 10% <= 20%                      1,027         1,027                         12         12   
> 20% <= 50%                      876         876                         20         20   
> 50% <= 100%                      250         250                         12         12   
>100% <= 650%                      348         348                         61         61   
> 650% < 1250%                      26         26                         15         15   
= 1250%/Look through      8                 294         302         8                 167         175   
Total trading book      8                 3,608         3,616         8                 292         300   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  88


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of securitisation exposures

    

 

 

 

Table 65: Securitisation exposures – by capital approach continued

 

Risk Weighted Band    IRB S&P Equivalent Rating    STD S&P Equivalent Rating
<= 10%    AAA to A+ (Senior Position Only)    N/A
> 10% <= 20%    A to A- (Senior Position Only)/AAA to A+ (Base Case)    N/A
> 20% <= 50%    A to A- (Base Case)    AAA to AA-
> 50% <= 100%    BBB+ to BBB (Base Case)    A+ to A-
> 100% <= 650%    BBB- (Base Case) to BB (Base Case)    BBB+ to BBB-
> 650% < 1250%    BB- (Base Case)    BB to BB-
= 1250% / deduction    Below BB-    Below BB-

The total amount of securitisation positions in the banking book decreased £3.5bn to £18.4bn primarily driven by:

 

§   reduction in the <=10% band for originated positions following repayment of outstanding notes in line with the decrease for the corporate loan portfolio

 

§   reduction in the 20-50% band following the restructuring of an existing transaction which resulted in Barclays being fully repaid and no longer exposed to originated assets.

Trading book exposures have decreased by £2.3bn across all risk weights to £1.4bn, primarily driven by reduced trading activity in RMBS.

Table 66: Re-securitisation exposures – by risk weight band

The table is a subset of table 65 and discloses Barclays exposures to re-securitisations by capital approach. For the purposes of the table below, a re-securitisation is defined as a securitisation where at least one of the underlying exposures is a securitisation position. This is in line with Basel capital requirements.

For securitisations with mixed asset pools (for example some collateralised loan obligations), the exposure class disclosed in Tables 64, 67 and 68 represents the exposure class of the predominant underlying asset class.

 

       Exposure values         Capital requirements   

As at 31 December 2015

    

 

Originator

£m

  

  

    

 

Sponsor

£m

  

  

    

 

Investor

£m

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

    

 

Originator

£m

  

  

    

 

Sponsor

£m

  

  

    

 

Investor

£m

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Banking book

                       

IRB approach

                       

Ratings Based Approach

                       

<= 10%

                                                               

> 10% <= 20%

                                                               

> 20% <= 50%

     369                 419         788         8                 7         15   

> 50% <= 100%

                     6         6                                   

>100% <= 650%

                                                               

> 650% < 1250%

                                                               

= 1250%/Look through

                     334         334                         67         67   

Internal Assessment Approach

                                                               

Supervisory Formula Method

                                                               

Total IRB

     369                 759         1,128         8                 74         82   

Standardised approach

                                                               

Total banking book

     369                 759         1,128         8                 74         82   

Trading book

                       

IRB approach

                       

Ratings Based Approach

                       

<= 10%

                                                               

> 10% <= 20%

                                                               

> 20% <= 50%

                     67         67                         2         2   

> 50% <= 100%

                     42         42                         2         2   

>100% <= 650%

                     2         2                                   

> 650% < 1250%

                                                               

= 1250%/Look through

                                                               

Total trading book

                     111         111                         4         4   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  89


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of securitisation exposures

    

 

 

 

Table 66: Re-securitisation exposures – by risk weight band continued

 

 

  

              Exposure values                  Capital requirements   

As at 31 December 2014

    

 

Originator

£m

  

  

    

 

Sponsor

£m

  

  

    

 

Investor

£m

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

    

 

Originator

£m

  

  

    

 

Sponsor

£m

  

  

    

 

Investor

£m

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

Banking book

                       

IRB approach

                       

Ratings Based Approach

                       

<= 10%

                                                               

> 10% <= 20%

                                                               

> 20% <= 50%

     1,240                 642         1,882         25                 12         37   

> 50% <= 100%

     22                 5         27         1                         1   

>100% <= 650%

                     16         16                         3         3   

> 650% < 1250%

                                                               

= 1250%/Look through

                     6         6                         6         6   

Internal Assessment Approach

                                                               

Supervisory Formula Method

                                                               

Total IRB

     1,262                 669         1,931         26                 21         47   

Standardised approach

                                                               

Total banking book

     1,262                 669         1,931         26                 21         47   

Trading book

                       

IRB approach

                       

Ratings Based Approach

                       

<= 10%

                                                               

> 10% <= 20%

                                                               

> 20% <= 50%

                     205         205                         5         5   

> 50% <= 100%

                     18         18                         1         1   

>100% <= 650%

                     107         107                         18         18   

> 650% < 1250%

                     5         5                         4         4   

= 1250%/Look through

     1                 56         57         1                 56         57   

Total trading book

     1                 391         392         1                 84         85   

Re-securitisation exposures reduced by £1.1bn to £1.2bn, primarily driven by:

 

§   Reduction in the 20-50% band is due to the termination of an existing re-securitised transaction which resulted in Barclays being fully repaid and no longer exposed to originated assets.

Table 67: Aggregate amount of securitised positions retained or purchased by geography – banking book

This table presents total banking book securitised exposure type by geography, based on location of the counterparty.

 

Exposure type

                                                     
      

 

 

United

Kingdom

£m

  

  

  

    

 

Europe

£m

  

  

    

 

Americas

£m

  

  

    

 

 

Africa and

Middle East

£m

  

  

  

    

 

Asia

£m

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                 

Residential mortgages

     1,641         21         1,827         132         106         3,727   

Commercial mortgages

     86                 205                         291   

Credit card receivables

                     527                         527   

Leasing

                     76                         76   

Loans to corporates or SMEs

     460         122         1,667                         2,249   

Consumer loans

     1,221         628         7,943                         9,792   

Trade receivables

                                               

Securitisations/Re-securitisations

     202         128         101                         431   

Other assets

                     1,178         19         136         1,333   

Total

     3,610         899         13,524         151         242         18,426   

As at 31 December 2014

                 

Residential mortgages

     2,751         64         280         205         228         3,528   

Commercial mortgages

     469         4         1                         474   

Credit card receivables

     1                 866                         867   

Leasing

                     192                         192   

Loans to corporates or SMEs

     1,393         3         3,057                         4,453   

Consumer loans

     396         487         8,613                         9,496   

Trade receivables

                     45                         45   

Securitisations/Re-securitisations

     5                 808                         813   

Other assets

     137         2         1,834         64                 2,037   

Total

     5,152         560         15,696         269         228         21,905   

Banking book exposures decreased by £3.5bn to £18.4bn primarily driven by reductions in the UK and Americas.

UK exposures reduction has been predominantly driven by ‘Loans to Corporates or SMEs’ within Non-Core.

The reduction in Americas has been primarily within Non-Core, partly offset by strong client facilitation business activity.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  90


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of securitisation exposures

    

 

 

Table 68: Aggregate amount of securitised positions retained or purchased by geography – trading book

This table presents total trading book securitised exposure type by geography. The country is based on the country of operation of the issuer.

 

Exposure type

                                                     
      

 

 

United

Kingdom

£m

  

  

  

    

 

Europe

£m

  

  

    

 

Americas

£m

  

  

    
 

 

Africa and
Middle East

£m

  
  

  

    

 

Asia

£m

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                 

Residential mortgages

     561         1         90                         652   

Commercial mortgages

                     15                         15   

Credit card receivables

     16                 56                         72   

Leasing

                                               

Loans to corporates or SMEs

     161         8         153                         322   

Consumer loans

     4                 86                         90   

Trade receivables

                                               

Securitisations/Re-securitisations

     77                                         77   

Other assets

     97                 30                         127   

Total

     916         9         430                         1,355   

As at 31 December 2014

                 

Residential mortgages

     1,418         222         232                 2         1,874   

Commercial mortgages

     27         48         450                         525   

Credit card receivables

     68         8         74                         150   

Leasing

                                               

Loans to corporates or SMEs

     154         21         156                         331   

Consumer loans

     32         22         226                         280   

Trade receivables

                                               

Securitisations/Re-securitisations

     139         30         9                         178   

Other assets

     40         6         232                         278   

Total

     1,878         357         1,379                 2         3,616   

Trading book exposures decreased by £2.3bn to £1.4bn, primarily driven by a reduction in trading activity in RMBS in UK and Americas and Commercial mortgages primarily in Americas.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  91


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of operational risk

    

 

 

    

This section contains details of capital requirements for operational risk, expressed as RWAs, and an analysis of the Group’s operational risk profile, including events which have had a significant impact in 2015.

Operational risk RWAs remained unchanged during the year

£56.7bn RWA

 

  §   Barclays’ operational risk RWA requirement has remained unchanged at £56.7bn.

 

  §   Disposal of Non-Core businesses has resulted in the movement of AMA RWAs from Non-Core to Head Office.

For the purpose of risk reporting, conduct risk remediation provisions have been included within this operational risk section

Conduct risk is a separate principal risk with further details provided on pages 152 to 154

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  92


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of operational risk

    

 

 

 

Operational risk risk weighted assets

Operational risks are inherent in the Group’s business activities and are typical of any large operation. It is not cost effective to attempt to eliminate all operational risks and in any event it would not be possible to do so. Small losses from operational risks are expected to occur and are accepted as part of the normal course of business. More material losses are less frequent and the Group seeks to reduce the likelihood of these in accordance with its risk appetite.

The Operational Principal Risk comprises the following key risks: financial crime, financial reporting, fraud, information, legal, payments process, people, premises and security, supplier, tax, technology (including cyber) and transaction operations. For definitions of these key risks see page 145. In order to ensure complete coverage of the potential adverse impacts on the Group arising from operational risk, the operational risk taxonomy extends beyond the operational key risks listed above to cover areas included within conduct risk.

The following table details the Group’s operational risk RWAs. Barclays has approval from the PRA to calculate its operational risk capital requirement using an Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA), although recently acquired businesses are excluded from this approval. Barclays uses the Basic Indicator Approach (BIA) to calculate capital for these businesses.

See pages 143 to 146 for information on operational risk management.

Table 69: Risk weighted assets for operational risk

 

 

      
 
 

 

Personal and
Corporate
Banking

£m

  
  
  

  

    

 

Barclaycard

£m

  

  

    
 
 
Africa
Banking
£m
  
  
  
    
 

 

Investment
Bank

£m

  
  

  

    
 
Head Office
£m
  
  
    

 

Total Core

£m

  

  

    

 

Non-Core

£m

  

  

    

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                       

Operational Risk

                       

Basic Indicator Approach

     996         1,001         639         998                 3,634         74         3,708   

Standardised Approach

                                                               

Advanced Measurement Approach

     15,180         4,504         4,965         18,622         2,104         45,375         7,577         52,952   

Total operational risk RWAs

     16,176         5,505         5,604         19,620         2,104         49,009         7,651         56,660   

As at 31 December 2014

                       

Operational Risk

                       

Basic Indicator Approach

     996         1,001         639         998                 3,634         74         3,708   

Standardised Approach

                                                               

Advanced Measurement Approach

     15,180         4,504         4,965         18,623         1,326         44,598         8,354         52,952   

Total operational risk RWAs

     16,176         5,505         5,604         19,621         1,326         48,232         8,428         56,660   

Barclays’ operational risk RWA requirement has remained static at £56.7bn, pending regulatory approval for AMA model enhancements. Barclays currently holds sufficient operational risk capital to cover the range of potential extreme operational risks the group faces.

Disposal of Non-Core businesses has resulted in the movement of AMA RWAs from Non-Core to Head Office.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  93


Risk and capital position review

Analysis of operational risk

    

 

 

 

Operational risk profile

During 2015, total operational risk lossesa increased to £241.3m (2014: £143.9m) with a 3% reduction in the number of recorded events as compared to last year driven by a limited number of events in execution, delivery and process management category.

Losses were mainly due to execution, delivery and process management impacts, external fraud and business disruption and system failures.

Within operational risk a high proportion of risk events have a low associated financial cost and a very small proportion of operational risk events will have a material impact on the financial results of the Group. In 2015, 82.6% of the Group’s net reportable operational risk events had a value of £50,000 or less (2014: 78.0%) and accounted for 11.1% (2014: 30.5%) of the Group’s total net loss impact.

The analysis below presents the Group’s operational risk events by Basel event category:

 

§   execution, delivery and process management impacts increased to £137.5m (2014: £81.3m) and accounted for 57.0% (2014: 56.5%) of overall operational risk losses. The events in this category are typical of the banking industry as a whole where high volumes of transactions are processed on a daily basis. The value increase was largely driven by a limited number of events with high loss values.

 

§   external fraud (66.6%) is the category with the highest frequency of events where high volume, low value events are also consistent with industry experience, driven by debit and credit card fraud. This accounted for 27.4% of overall operational risk losses in the year from 29.7% last year.

The Group’s operational risk profile is informed by bottom-up risk assessments undertaken by each business unit and top-down qualitative review from the Governance Risk and Control Committees for each of the key risks. External Fraud and Technology are highlighted as key operational risk exposures. Developments of enhanced fraud prevention and transaction profiling tools are underway to combat increasing external fraud frequency especially in credit cards, digital banking, unauthorised trading and social engineering.

CyberSecurity risk continues to be an area of attention given the increasing sophistication and scope of potential cyber attack. Risks to technology and CyberSecurity change rapidly and require continued focus and investment.

For further information see Risk Management section (pages 143 to 146).

 

Operational risk events by risk category     Operational risk events by risk category  

% of total risk events by count

 

   

% of total risk events by value

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

Note

a These include operational risk losses for reportable events having an impact of +/- £10,000 and exclude events that are conduct risk, aggregated and boundary events. A boundary event is an operational risk event that results in a credit risk impact.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  94


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Contents

      

 

 

        Page

Barclays’ approach to managing risks

 

   
 

 

§   Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

  96
 

§   Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

  107
 

§   Management of counterparty credit risk and credit risk mitigation techniques

  124
 

§   Management of market risk

  128
 

§   Management of securitisation exposures

  139
 

§   Management of operational risk

  143
 

§   Management of funding risk

  147
 

§   Management of conduct risk (including reputation risk)

  152

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  95


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

            

 

 

    

In this section we describe the approaches and strategies for managing risks at Barclays. It contains information on how risk management functions are organised, how they ensure their independence and foster a sound risk culture throughout the organisation.

 

  §   A discussion of how our risk management strategy is designed to foster a strong risk culture is contained on pages 99 to 101

 

  §   A governance structure, encompassing the organisation of the function as well as executive and Board committees, supports the continued application of the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF). This is discussed in pages 97 to 99

 

  §   The ERMF sets out the tools, techniques and organisational arrangements to ensure all material risks are identified and understood (see pages 101 and 102)

 

  §   Pages 102 to 106 describe group-wide risk management tools that support risk management, ExCo and the Board in discharging their responsibilities, and how they are applied in the strategic planning cycle.

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  96


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

    

 

 

The following pages provide a comprehensive overview of the Group’s approach to risk management and more specific information on policies that the Group determines to be of particular significance in the current operating environment.

This section outlines the Group’s strategy for managing risk and how risk culture has been developed to ensure that there is a set of objectives and practices which are shared across the Group. It provides details of the Group’s governance, specific information on policies that the Group determines to be of particular significance in the current operating environment, committee structures and how responsibilities are assigned. The last part of the section provides an insight into how risk management is part of the strategy setting process, including the planning process, the setting of risk appetite and stress testing across the Group.

Risk Management Strategy

The Group has clear risk management objectives and a well established strategy to deliver them through core risk management processes.

At a strategic level, the Group’s risk management objectives are to:

 

§   identify the Group’s significant risks

 

§   formulate the Group’s risk appetite and ensure that business profile and plans are consistent with it

 

§   optimise risk/return decisions by taking them as close as possible to the business, while establishing strong and independent review and challenge structures

 

§   ensure that business growth plans are properly supported by effective risk infrastructure

 

§   manage risk profile to ensure that specific financial deliverables remain achievable under a range of adverse business conditions

 

§   help executives improve the control and coordination of risk taking across the business.

A key element in the setting of clear management objectives is the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF), which sets out key activities, tools, techniques and organisational arrangements so that material risks facing the Group are identified and understood, and that appropriate responses are in place to protect Barclays and prevent detriment to its customers, employees or community. This will help the Group meet its goals, and enhance its ability to respond to new opportunities.

The ERMF covers those risks incurred by the Group that were foreseeable, continuous, and material enough to merit establishing specific Group-wide control frameworks. These are known as Principal and Key Risks. See Principal and Key Risks on page 101 for more information.

The aim of the risk management process is to provide a structured, practical and easily understood set of three steps, Evaluate, Respond and Monitor (the E-R-M process), that enables management to identify and assess risks, determine the appropriate risk response, and then monitor the effectiveness of the risk response and changes to the risk profile.

1. Evaluate: risk evaluation must be carried out by those individuals, teams and departments who manage the underlying operational or business process, and so are best placed to identify and assess the potential risks, and also include those responsible for delivering the objectives under review.

2. Respond: the appropriate risk response effectively and efficiently ensures that risks are kept within appetite, which is the level of risk that the Group is prepared to accept while pursuing its business strategy. There are three types of response: i) accept the risk but take necessary

Barclays risk management strategy

 

 

LOGO

mitigating actions such as use of risk controls; ii) stop the existing activity/do not start the proposed activity; or iii) continue the activity but transfer risks to another party via use of insurance.

3. Monitor: once risks have been identified and measured, and controls put in place, progress towards objectives must be tracked. Monitoring must be ongoing and can prompt re-evaluation of the risks and/or changes in responses. Monitoring must be carried out proactively . In addition to ‘reporting’, it includes ensuring risks are maintained within risk appetite, and checking that controls are functioning as intended and remain fit for purpose.

The process is orientated around material risks impacting delivery of objectives, and is used to promote an efficient and effective approach to risk management. This three step risk management process:

 

§   can be applied to every objective at every level in the bank, both top-down or bottom-up

 

§   is embedded into the business decision making process

 

§   guides the Group’s response to changes in the external or internal environment in which existing activities are conducted

 

§   involves all staff and all three lines of defence (see page 101).

Governance structure

Risk exists when the outcome of taking a particular decision or course of action is uncertain and could potentially impact whether, or how well, the Group delivers on its objectives.

The Group faces risks throughout its business, every day, in everything it does. Some risks are taken after appropriate consideration – such as lending money to a customer. Other risks may arise from unintended consequences of internal actions, for example an IT system failure or poor sales practices. Finally, some risks are the result of events outside the Group but which impact its business – such as major exposure through trading or lending to a market counterparty which later fails.

All employees must play their part in the Group’s risk management, regardless of position, function or location. All employees are required to be familiar with risk management policies that are relevant to their activities, know how to escalate actual or potential risk issues, and have a role appropriate level of awareness of the ERMF (see Risk governance and assigning responsibilities for more information on page 100), risk management processes and governance arrangements.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  97


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

    

 

 

Board oversight and flow of risk related information

 

 

LOGO

 

Furthermore, from March 2016 members of the Board, Executive Committee and a limited number of specified senior individuals will be subject to additional rules included within the Senior Managers Regime (SMR), which clarifies their accountability and responsibilities. Members of the SMR are held to four additional specific rules of conduct in which they must:

 

1. take reasonable steps to ensure that the Group is effectively controlled

 

2. take reasonable steps to ensure that the Group complies with relevant regulatory requirements and standards

 

3. take reasonable steps to ensure that any delegated responsibilities are to the appropriate individual and that the delegated responsibilities are effectively discharged

 

4. disclose appropriately any information to the FCA or PRA, which they would reasonably expect to made aware of.

There are three key Board-level forums which review and monitor risk across the Group. These are: The Board itself, the Board Risk Committee and the Board Reputation Committee.

The Board

One of the Board’s (Board of Directors of Barclays PLC) responsibilities is the approval of risk appetite (see page 102), which is the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives. The Chief Risk Officer regularly presents a report to the Board summarising developments in the risk environment and performance trends in the key portfolios. The Board is also responsible for the Internal Control and Assurance Framework (Group Control Framework). It oversees the management of the most significant risks through regular review of risk exposures and related key controls. Executive management responsibilities relating to this are set out in the ERMF.

The Board Risk Committee (BRC)

The BRC monitors the Group’s risk profile against the agreed financial appetite. Where actual performance differs from expectations, the actions being taken by management are reviewed to ensure that the BRC is comfortable with them. After each meeting, the Chair of the BRC prepares a report for the next meeting of the Board. All members are non-executive directors. The Group Finance Director (GFD) and the Chief Risk Officer (CRO) attend each meeting as a matter of course.

The BRC also considers the Group’s risk appetite statement for operational risk and evaluates the Group’s operational risk profile and operational risk monitoring.

The BRC receives regular and comprehensive reports on risk methodology, the effectiveness of the risk management framework, and the Group’s risk profile, including the key issues affecting each business portfolio and forward risk trends. The Committee also commissions in-depth analyses of significant risk topics, which are presented by the CRO or senior risk managers in the businesses. The Chair of the Committee prepares a statement each year on its activities.

The Board Audit Committee (BAC)

The BAC receives regular reports on the effectiveness of internal control systems, quarterly reports on material control issues of significance, and quarterly papers on accounting judgements (including impairment). It also receives a half yearly review of the adequacy of impairment allowances, which it reviews relative to the risk inherent in the portfolios, the business environment, the Group’s policies and methodologies and the performance trends of peer banks. The Chairman of the BAC also sits on the BRC.

The Board Reputation Committee (RepCo)

The RepCo reviews management’s recommendations on conduct and reputational risk and the effectiveness of the processes by which the Group identifies and manages these risks. It also reviews and monitors the effectiveness of Barclays’ Citizenship strategy, including the management of Barclays’ economic, social and environmental contribution.

In addition, the Board Audit and Board Remuneration Committees receive regular risk reports to assist them in the undertaking of their duties.

The Board Remuneration Committee (RemCo)

The RemCo receives a detailed report on risk management performance from the BRC, regular updates on the risk profile and proposals for the ex-ante and ex-post risk adjustments to variable remuneration. These inputs are considered in the setting of performance incentives.

Summaries of the relevant business, professional and risk management experience of the Directors of the Board are presented in the Board of Directors section on pages 36 to 38 of the 2015 Annual Report. The terms of reference and additional details on membership and activities for each of the principal Board Committees are available from the Corporate Governance section at: home.barclays/corporategovernance.

The CRO is a member of the Executive Committee and has overall day-to-day accountability for risk management under delegated authority from the Chief Executive Officer (CEO). The CEO is accountable for proposing a risk appetite that underpins the strategic plan to the Board for approval, and the CRO is responsible for providing oversight, advice and challenge to the CEO, and preparing and recommending the Group’s risk appetite to the CEO and the Board. Risk appetite therefore sets the ‘tone from the top’ and provides a basis for ongoing dialogue between management and Board level around the Group’s current and evolving risk profile.

The CRO manages the independent risk function and chairs the Financial Risk Committee (FRC) and the Operational Risk Review Forum (ORRF), which monitor the Group’s financial and non-financial risk profile relative to agreed risk appetite. Principal Risk Officers (PROs), reporting to the CRO and supported by Key Risk Officers (KROs) where appropriate, are responsible for establishing a Group-wide framework for oversight of the relevant risks and controls. Their teams liaise with each business as part of the monitoring and management processes.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  98


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

 

 

In addition, each business has an embedded risk management function, headed by a Business Chief Risk Officer (BCRO). BCROs and their teams are responsible for assisting business heads in the identification and management of their business risk profiles and for implementing appropriate controls. These teams also assist Central Risk in the formulation of Group policies and their implementation across the businesses. The BCROs’ report jointly to the CRO and to their respective business heads.

The Risk Executive Committee is responsible for the effectiveness and efficiency of risk management and embedding a strong risk culture, approval of the Group’s risk governance framework, and agreement and endorsement of the overall infrastructure strategy for the risk function. It is also the senior decision making forum for the risk function, excluding matters relating to the risk profile. It is chaired by the CRO with a membership comprising senior risk management.

The CEO must consult the Chairman of the BRC in respect of the CRO’s performance appraisal and compensation, as well as all appointments to or departures from the role.

The Group Treasurer heads the Group Treasury function and chairs the Treasury Committee which:

 

§   manages the Group’s liquidity, maturity transformation and structural interest rate exposure through the setting of policies and controls

 

§   monitors the Group’s liquidity and interest rate maturity mismatch

 

§   monitors usage of regulatory and economic capital

 

§   has oversight of the management of the Group’s capital plan.

The Head of Compliance chairs the Conduct and Reputation Risk Committee (CRRC) which assesses the quality of the application of the Reputation and Conduct Risk Control Frameworks. It also recommends conduct risk appetite, sets policies to ensure consistent adherence to that appetite, and reviews known and emerging reputational and conduct related risks to consider if action is required.

Barclays’ risk culture

In Barclays, risk culture refers to the combination of the individual and collective norms, values, attitudes and behaviours of all of employees, in relation their awareness of risk, and how they take and manage risk.

The taking of risk is a fundamental part of banking, and so for Barclays to be successful it must have good risk management practices underpinned by a strong risk culture. To ensure that this is achieved all colleagues are required to:

 

§   understand that risk management is important in all of our activities

 

§   have an awareness and sensitivity to the risk issues which could arise in their individual roles

 

§   take risk issues and considerations fully into account, before taking decisions and acting

 

§   have good practices on how they manage risk on an ongoing basis as appropriate:

– recognise when they are taking risk

– discuss and debate risks

– take action to manage and mitigate risks

– escalate risks where necessary

– identify areas for improvement and learn from mistakes

– seek to remediate and improve how we manage risk.

 

§   Value and promote these habits, practices and behaviours.

There is a focus on four key areas that evidence a strong risk culture: tone from the top; accountability; effective communication and challenge; and incentives.

Tone from the top

Leaders should demonstrate through their everyday behaviours the importance of strong risk management and ensure that their teams have sufficient resource and capability to manage the risk environment.

Achieving good outcomes for customer and clients is central to colleagues’ approach to managing risk and managers will ensure that their teams identify and resolve risk issues within agreed timeframes and learn from mistakes to avoid repeating them.

 

 

Reporting and control

 

LOGO

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  99


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

 

 

Accountability

Barclays has implemented and operates a strong Risk Governance framework and ensures that colleagues understand the business processes, as well as the associated risks relevant to their role and the level of risk they can take, which is consistent with the Group’s risk appetite.

Colleagues must actively manage risk, believe it is the right thing to do and take personal responsibility for risk management issues.

Effective Communication and Challenge

Barclays ensures that colleagues feel empowered and supported to raise issues and that those issues are then appropriately escalated, investigated and reported.

Incentives

The Group’s desired risk management behaviours are supported by appropriate recruitment, performance, reward and promotion decisions. It also ensures that wrong behaviour is defined and that there are visible consequences to such actions.

Sustaining a sound risk culture

Barclays uses a variety of tools to sustain its risk culture including, for example, employee training, semi-annual performance reviews and adjustments to compensation. Employees are provided with regular role-specific mandatory quarterly training courses, which deliver training across the breadth of risk topics; with further optional training courses continuously available.

Semi-annual performance reviews include an assessment of risk and control performance, which is also considered as part of promotion decisions, particularly to Managing Director.

Risk performance is also measured (in the form of employee breaches and any involvement in other risk events) and taken into consideration for compensation purposes.

Risk Appetite and the ‘Tone from the top’

Communicating and enforcing risk appetite in all businesses creates a common understanding and fosters debate around what types of risks are acceptable, and what levels of risk are appropriate at business and Group level.

To develop a consistently strong risk culture across the Group, clear statements have been communicated as to the Group risk appetite for all risk types. In particular, risk appetite:

 

§   articulates the types and level of risk we are willing to take and why, to enable specific risk taking activities. It also specifies those risks the Group seeks to avoid and why, to constrain specific risk taking activities

 

§   is embedded within key decision-making processes including business planning, mergers and acquisitions, new product approvals and business change initiatives

 

§   provides a framework for performance management and disciplinary consequences in cases of breach

 

§   is implemented under the direct leadership of the CEO, who is responsible for leading, managing and organising executive management to achieve execution of the strategy and business plans in line with risk appetite

 

§   is owned by the Board.

Improvements to the approach in 2015 have delivered further embedment within the businesses, and improved alignment with stress testing. See risk appetite on page 102 for more information.

Supporting colleagues to manage risk – in the right way

By supporting colleagues to manage risk in the right way, the Group seeks to ensure that all risk managers share the Barclays’ Values and to promote a common understanding of the role that risk management plays:

 

§   risk management capability and ability to act in a risk aware manner forms part of the assessment process for all new employees and promotion candidates globally

 

§   management of risk and control is assessed as part of the annual performance appraisal process for all colleagues globally. Positive risk management behaviours will be rewarded

 

§   the “Being Barclays” global induction programme supports new colleagues in understanding how risk management culture and practices support how the Group does business and the link to the Barclays’ values

 

§   leadership master classes cover the building, sustaining and supporting a trustworthy organisation and are offered to colleagues globally.

Learning from our mistakes

Learning from mistakes is central to the Group’s culture and values, demonstrating a commitment to excellence, service and stewardship and taking accountability for failure as well as success. The Group seeks to learn lessons on a continuous basis to support achievement of strategic objectives; operational excellence and to meet commitments to stakeholders, including colleagues, customers, shareholders and regulators.

Barclays has implemented a Group Lessons Learnt Standard as part of the ERMF, setting out requirements for completing Lessons Learnt Assessments in response to significant events. The approach to Lessons Learnt builds on the process established for operational risk in 2012 and fulfils the Group’s Salz commitments by ensuring a consistent and effective approach applicable to all Principal Risks. The approach is directly aligned to the three lines of defence model (see below), with businesses and functions accountable for undertaking lessons learnt assessments; Principal and Key Risk Officers providing input, oversight and challenge; with independent review by internal audit.

Core components of the Lessons Learnt approach include:

 

§   defined triggers for when lessons learnt assessments must be completed

 

§   requirements and guidance for root cause analysis to identify the causes of events within the Group

 

§   templates to ensure conclusions are reported consistently throughout management committees

 

§   a central system to record completed lessons learnt assessments and to facilitate sharing across the Group.

Since its launch at the end of 2014, Lessons Learnt approach continues to evolve and an enhanced approach will be launched in 2016.

Risk governance and assigning responsibilities

Responsibility for risk management resides at all levels of the Group, from the Board and the Executive Committee down through the organisation to each business manager and risk specialist. These responsibilities are distributed so that risk/return decisions are taken at the most appropriate level, as close as possible to the business, and are subject to robust and effective review and challenge. Responsibility for effective review and challenges resides at all levels.

The ERMF articulates a clear, consistent, comprehensive and effective approach for the management of all risks within the Group and creates the context for setting standards and establishing the right practices throughout the Group. The ERMF sets out a philosophy and approach that is applicable to the whole bank, all colleagues and to all types of risk. It sets out the key activities required for all employees to operate Barclays’ risk and control environment with specific requirements for key individuals, including the CRO and CEO, and the overall governance framework designed to support its effective operation. See risk culture on page 99 for more information.

The ERMF supports risk management and control by ensuring that there is a:

 

§   sustainable and consistent implementation of the three lines of defence across all businesses and functions

 

§   clear segregation of activities and duties performed by colleagues across the Group

 

§   framework for the management of Principal Risks

 

§   consistent application of Barclays’ risk appetite across all Principal Risks

 

§   clear and simple policy hierarchy.
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  100


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

    

 

 

Three lines of defence

The enterprise risk management process is the ‘defence’ and organising businesses and functions into three ‘lines’ enhances the E-R-M process by formalising independence and challenge, while still promoting collaboration and the flow of information between all areas. The three lines of defence operating model enables the Group to separate risk management activities:

First line: manage operational and business processes; design, implement, operate, test and remediate controls

First line activities are characterised by:

§  ownership of and direct responsibility for the Group’s returns or elements of its results

§  ownership of major operations, systems and processes fundamental to the operation of the bank

§  direct linkage of objective setting, performance assessment and reward to profit and loss performance.

With respect to risk management the first line responsibilities include:

§  taking primary accountability for risk identification, ownership, management and control (including performance of portfolios, trading positions, operational risks etc.) within approved mandate, as documented under the Key Risk Control Frameworks, including embedding a supportive risk culture

§  collaborating with second line on implementing and improving risk management processes and controls

§  monitoring the effectiveness of risk controls and the risk profile compared to the approved risk appetite

§  maintaining an effective control environment across all risks, processes and operations arising from the business, including implementing standards to meet Group policies.

Second Line: oversee and challenge the first line and provide second line risk management activity.

Second line activities are characterised by:

§  oversight, monitoring and challenge of the first line of defence activities

§  design, ownership or operation of Key Risk Control Frameworks impacting the activities of the first line of defence

§  operation of certain second line risk management activities (e.g. financial rescue of a firm)

§  no direct linkage of objective setting, performance assessment and reward to revenue (measures related to mitigation of losses and balancing risk and reward are permissible).

With respect to risk management the second line of defence responsibilities include:

§  defining the ERMF

§  establishing the policy architecture for the Key Risks, including Key Risk Control Frameworks, policies, and standards

§  defining delegated discretions and setting limits within the control frameworks to empower risk taking by the first line

§  assisting in setting the direction of the portfolio to achieve performance against risk appetite

§  may define and operate approval processes for certain decisions within the second line to protect the Group from material risks

§  communicating, educating and advising the first line on their understanding of the risk framework and its requirements

§  collaborating with the first line to support business growth and drive an appropriate balance between risk and reward without diminishing the independence from the first line

§  reporting on the effectiveness of the risk and control environment to executive management and Board committees.

Third line: provide assurance that the E-R-M process is fit for purpose, and that it is being carried out as intended

Third line activities are characterised by:

§  providing independent and timely assurance to the Board and Executive Management over the effectiveness of governance, risk management and control.

With respect to risk management the third line of defence responsibilities include:

§  assessing the effectiveness of risk management and risk mitigation in the context of the current and expected business environment

§  acting independently and objectively.

Following the annual review, in 2016, we have further refined the three lines of defence model by clarifying that responsibilities for risk management and control are defined in relation to the activities individuals undertake as part of their role. The three key activities are: ‘Setting Policy and Conformance’ (second line); ‘Managing Operational or Business Process’ (first and second line); and ‘Providing Independent Assurance’ (third line). Second and third line activities have not changed, however we have emphasised the key responsibilities of the first line, which includes colleagues’ responsibility for understanding and owning the process end to end, and designing, operating, testing and remediating appropriate controls to manage those risks. Performed appropriately and by all colleagues, together these responsibilities will drive a stronger risk and control environment at Barclays, benefitting our customers, clients, shareholders and regulators.

Principal and Key Risks

Principal Risks comprise individual Key Risks to allow for more granular analysis. As at 31 December 2015, the five Principal Risks were: i) Credit; ii) Market; iii) Funding; iv) Operational; and v) Conduct. Since the beginning of 2015, Reputation Risk has been recognised as a Key Risk within Conduct Risk given their close alignment and the fact that as separate Principal Risks they had a common Principal Risk Officer.

Risk management responsibilities for Principal and Key Risks are set out in the ERMF. The ERMF creates clear ownership and accountability; ensures the Group’s most significant risk exposures are understood and managed in accordance with agreed risk appetite and risk tolerances; and ensures regular reporting of risk exposures and control effectiveness.

For each Key Risk, the Key Risk Officer is responsible for developing a risk appetite statement and overseeing and managing the risk in line with the ERMF. This includes the documentation, communication and maintenance of a Key Risk Control Framework which sets out, for every business across the firm, the mandated control requirements in managing exposures to that Key Risk. These control requirements are given further specification, according to the business or risk type, to provide a complete and appropriate system of internal control.

Business and Function Heads are responsible for obtaining ongoing assurance that the key controls they have put in place to manage the risks to their business objectives are operating effectively. Reviews are undertaken on a six-monthly basis and support the regulatory requirement for the Group to make an annual statement about its system of internal controls. At the business level executive management holds specific Business Risk Oversight Meetings to monitor all Principal Risks.

Key Risk Officers report their assessments of the risk exposure and control effectiveness to Group-level oversight committees and their assessments form the basis of the reports that go to the:

Board Risk Committee:

§  Financial Risk Committee has oversight of Credit and Market Risks

§  Treasury Committee has oversight of Funding Risk

§  Operational Risk Review Forum has oversight of the risk profile of all Operational Risk types.

Board Reputation Committee:

§  Conduct and Reputation Risk Committee has oversight of Conduct and Reputation Risks.

Assurance

Assurance is undertaken to assess the control environment and to independently assess the ERMF, which includes testing specific elements of the control environment documented in standards and checking that control testing activities are reliable, to provide confidence to the Board in the risk and control framework.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  101


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

    

 

 

The Credit Risk Review Group (CRRG) provides an independent review and monitoring of the quality and condition of all the wholesale loan and derivative portfolios through a review of the overall credit sanctioning process. CRRG has a mandate from the CRO and has direct access to the CRO and to the BRC.

Internal Audit is responsible for the independent review of risk management and the control environment. Its objective is to provide reliable, valued and timely assurance to the Board and executive management over the effectiveness of controls, mitigating current and evolving material risks and thus enhancing the control culture within the Group. The BAC reviews and approves Internal Audit’s plans and resources, and evaluates the effectiveness of Internal Audit. An assessment by independent external advisers is also carried out periodically.

Effectiveness of risk management arrangements

The embedding of the ERMF is monitored by executive and board committees as described above. The ERMF and its component key risks are subject to control testing assurance reviews to confirm its effectiveness or identify issues to be mitigated. Management and the Board are satisfied that these arrangements are appropriate given the risk profile of the Group.

Management of model risk

Model risk is the risk of suffering adverse consequences from decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and reports. Management of model risk is an important area of focus for the Group.

Model risk is inherent in each of the Key Risks where models are used for measurement or management and is, therefore, managed as part of each individual key risk control framework and supported by the Group Model Risk Policy (GMRP) and relevant standards.

Model risk is managed by a number of activities, including:

§  ensuring that models are identified as per the GMRP definition, across businesses and recorded in the Group Models Database (GMD), the Group-wide model inventory

§  ensuring that every model has a model owner who is accountable for the model, and drives the development/maintenance of the model by a qualified model developer

§  ensuring that every model is subject to technical validation by the Independent Validation Unit (IVU) as required by GMRP

§  ensuring that every model is approved by appropriately senior and knowledgeable risk individuals in the organisation, following IVU validation

§  periodic model risk reporting to the senior management and the Board

§  Internal Audit provides independent challenge of model risk management through business line and thematic audits.

The Executive Models Committee (EMC) fulfils the specific requirement of approving the Group’s most material (A*/High and Complex) models; the EMC decisions are based on business reviews and the associated IVU validations for these models. EMC is chaired by the accountable Risk ExCo member and has among its members the Deputy Group Finance Director and the Chief Risk Officer.

Group-wide risk management tools

To support the Group-wide management of risks, the Board uses risk appetite and stress testing as key inputs in the setting of the Group’s strategy.

Risk Appetite

Risk appetite is defined as the level of risk that the Group is prepared to accept while pursuing its business strategy, recognising a range of possible outcomes as business plans are implemented.

Risk appetite sets the ‘tone from the top’ and provides a basis for ongoing dialogue between management and Board with respect to the Group’s current and evolving risk profile, allowing strategic and financial decisions to be made on an informed basis.

The Risk Appetite Framework is intended to achieve the following objectives:

§  describe agreed parameters for Group performance under various stress levels, for example:

 

  Profitability, loss and return metric

 

  Capital levels, CET1 ratio

§  consider all Principal and Key Risks both individually and, where appropriate, in aggregate

§  assess and communicate the acceptable level of risk for each risk types; this may be expressed in financial or non-financial terms, but must enable measurement and effective monitoring

§  articulate the risks the Group is willing to take and why to enable specific risk taking activities; and articulate those risks to avoid and why to constrain specific risk taking activities

§  be embedded in key decision-making processes including mergers and acquisitions, new product approvals and business change initiatives

§  monitor throughout the year and respond as appropriate.

The risk appetite for financial risks is set by the Board on the basis of severe stress tests as it is during periods of macro-economic stress that losses materialise. In order to articulate the risk appetite for the firm, the Board first defines the deterioration in the firm’s performance it is willing to accept under stressed macroeconomic conditions. The acceptable deterioration is defined through a range of financial performance and capital metrics, which are reviewed by the Board on an annual basis. Barclays have moved to a scenario-based Stress Testing approach from the previous modelled approach of 1 in 7 and 1 in 25 risk events. The new approach continues to assess scenarios under stress conditions. For 2016 these are summarised in the following table.

 

Measure relevant to

strategy and risk

   Link between strategy and risk profile
Profit before tax, Return on equity, Return on RWAs    Fundamental economic and business indicators of the performance of the Bank and underpin the firm’s capacity to make capital distributions.
Common Equity Tier 1 and leverage ratios    Monitor capital adequacy in relation to capital plan and targets.
Loan loss rate (LLR)    Describes the credit risk profile and whether impairment is within appetite.
Return on equity (RoE), Return on regulatory capital    Risk-return based performance metrics which allow strategic and financial decisions to be made on an informed basis.
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  102


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

        

 

 

Barclays businesses run the stress test(s) as a fully integrated part of the annual Medium Term Planning (MTP) process, to ensure that the risk appetite business demand is based on the businesses’ most recent strategic plans. The deterioration of financial performance as a result of the stress test is subsequently compared to the tolerances agreed by the Board. Subsequently the risk appetite is allocated back to individual businesses and utilisation is monitored on a quarterly basis. This approach ensures that businesses’ risk appetite proposals are based on their latest strategic plans and allows the Board to allocate risk appetite such that it fully supports the firm’s chosen strategy within acceptable boundaries of risk taking.

Mandate and scale

Mandate and scale is a risk management approach that seeks to formally review and control business activities to ensure that they are within mandate (i.e. aligned with expectations), and are of an appropriate scale (relative to the risk and reward of the underlying activities) based on an extensive system of limits. Using limits and triggers helps mitigate the risk of concentrations which would be out of line with expectations, and which may lead to unexpected losses of a scale that would be detrimental to the stability of the relevant business line or the Group.

For example, for commercial property finance and construction portfolios, there is a comprehensive series of limits in place to control exposure within each business and geographic sector. To ensure that limits are aligned to the underlying risk characteristics, the mandate and scale limits differentiate between types of exposure. There are, for example, individual limits for property investment and property development.

The mandate and scale framework is used to:

 

§   limit concentration risk

 

§   keep business activities within Group and individual business mandate

 

§   ensure activities remain of an appropriate scale relative to the underlying risk and reward

 

§   ensure risk-taking is supported by appropriate expertise and capabilities.

As well as Group-level mandate and scale limits, further limits are set by risk managers within each business, covering particular portfolios. Unapproved excesses of limits will result in performance management and disciplinary consequences.

 

Stress testing

Group-wide stress tests are an integral part of the MTP process and annual review of risk appetite. They aim to ensure that the Group’s financial position and risk profile provide sufficient resilience to withstand the impact of severe economic stress. The Group-wide stress testing process is supported by a Capital Stress Testing Standard which sets out the minimum control requirements and defines clear roles and responsibilities across businesses and central functions. The diagram below outlines the key steps in the Group-wide stress testing process.

The Group-wide stress testing process begins with a detailed scenario setting process, with the FRC and BRC agreeing the range of scenarios to be tested. The scenarios are designed to be severe but plausible, and relevant to the business. A wide range of macroeconomic parameters are defined (such as GDP, unemployment, house prices, FX and interest rates), which allows the impact of the scenarios across the wide range of products and portfolios to be assessed across the Group.

Businesses prepare detailed MTP business plans which form the baseline for the stress test assessment. The stress test process is detailed and comprehensive, using bottom-up analysis across the businesses including both on- and off-balance sheet positions, and combines running statistical models with expert judgement. An overview of the stress testing approach by Principal Risk is provided in the table below. As part of their stress test assessments, businesses are also required to identify potential management actions that could be taken to mitigate the impact of stress and document these within their results.

There is robust governance in place with detailed review of stress testing methodology and results both within businesses (including sign-off by BCROs and BCFOs) and by central functions.

The businesses stress test results are consolidated to form a Group view which is used for tax analysis and by Group Treasury to assess the stress impact on the Group’s capital plans. For the latter, capital management actions such as reducing dividends or redeeming certain capital instruments may be considered. The Group also maintains recovery plans which take into consideration actions to facilitate recovery from severe stress or an orderly resolution. These actions are additional to those included in the Group-wide stress testing results.

The overall stress testing results of the Group are presented for review and approval by the FRC and BRC, and are also shared with the Treasury Committee and included as part of the review and sign-off of the MTP by the Board.

 

 

LOGO

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  103


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

    

 

 

Summary of methodologies for Group-wide stress testing by risk type:

 

Principal Risk

      Stress testing approach

 

Credit risk

 

 

 

 

§

 

  

 

 

Credit risk impairment: For retail portfolios businesses use regression models to establish a relationship between arrears movements and key macroeconomic parameters such as interest rates and unemployment, incorporating roll-rate analysis to estimate stressed levels of arrears by portfolio. In addition, combination of house price reductions and increased customer drawdowns for revolving facilities leads to higher LGD which also contributes to increased impairment levels. For wholesale portfolios the stress shocks on credit risk drivers (PDs, LGDs and EADs) are primarily calibrated using historical and expected relationships with key macro-economic parameters such as GDP, inflation and interest rates.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

§

 

 

 

  

 

 

  Counterparty credit risk losses: The scenarios include market risk shocks that are applied to determine the market value under stress of contracts that give rise to Counterparty Credit Risk (CCR). Counterparty losses, including from changes to the Credit Valuation Adjustment and from defaults, are modelled based on the impact of these shocks as well as using stressed credit risk drivers (PDs and LGDs). The same approach is used to stress the market value of assets held as available for sale or at fair value in the banking book.

 

   

 

 

 

 

§

 

 

  

 

 

 

Credit risk weighted assets: The impact of the scenarios is calculated via a combination of business volumes and using similar factors to impairment drivers above, as well as the regulatory calculation and the level of pro-cyclicality of underlying regulatory credit risk models.

 

 

Market risk

 

 

 

 

§

 

  

 

 

Trading book losses: All market risk factors on the balance sheet are stressed using specific market risk shocks (and are used for the CCR analysis, above). The severity of the shocks applied are dependent on the liquidity of the market under stress, e.g. illiquid positions are assumed to have a longer holding period than positions in liquid markets.

 

   

 

 

 

§

 

  

  Pension fund: The funding position of pension funds are stressed, taking into account key economic drivers impacting future obligations (e.g. long-term inflation and interest rates) and the impact of the scenarios on the value of fund assets.

 

 

Funding risk

 

 

 

 

§

 

  

 

 

The risk of a mismatch between assets and liabilities, leading to funding difficulties, is assessed. Businesses apply scenario variables to forecasts of customer loans and advances and deposits levels, taking into account management actions to mitigate the impact of the stress which may impact business volumes. The Group funding requirement under stress is then estimated and takes into account lower availability of funds in the market.

 

 

 

 

 

 

§

 

 

  

 

 

 

The analysis of funding risk also contributes to the estimate of stressed income and costs:

 

     

Stress impact on non-interest income is primarily driven by lower projected business volumes and hence lower income from fees and commissions

 

     

Impact on net interest income is driven by stressed margins, which depend on the level of interest rates under stress as well as funding costs, and on stressed balance sheet volumes. This can be partly mitigated by management actions that may include repricing of variable rate products, taking into account interbank lending rates under stress

 

             

The impact on costs is mainly driven by business volumes and management actions to partly offset profit reductions (due to impairment increases and decreases in income) such as headcount reductions and lower performance costs.

 

 

Operational risk, and Conduct risk

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

§

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

These Principal Risks are generally not impacted as they are not directly linked to the economic scenario. Note that operational risk, however, is included as part of the reverse stress testing framework that incorporates assessment of idiosyncratic operational risk events.

 

The role of stress testing as input to businesses’ plans and setting of strategy is described in more detail in the section below. The results also feed into our internal capital adequacy assessment process (ICAAP) submission to the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA).

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  104


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

        

 

 

In 2015, the internal Group-wide stress testing exercise was run as part of the MTP process, where the Group assessed the impact of an “Adverse” global recession scenario. This was used for the MTP Risk Review and risk appetite setting process.

Regulatory stress testing

In addition to running internal Group-wide stress tests, the Group also runs regulatory stress tests.

Additionally in 2015, the PRA ran its annual concurrent stress testing of the major UK banks, which was based on the Bank of England (BoE) stress scenario. The results of the stress test were published in December 2015, and support the BoE’s aim for increased transparency as part of its stress testing framework.

In 2016, the European Banking Authority will run a stress test across the major EU banks. This will be run in addition to the annual BoE stress test.

Reverse stress testing

The Group-wide stress testing framework also includes reverse stress testing techniques which aim to identify the circumstances under which the Group’s business model would no longer be viable, leading to a significant change in business strategy and to identify appropriate mitigating actions. Examples include extreme macroeconomic downturn scenarios (for example in 2015 Barclays ran a ‘Severely Adverse’ global recession scenario), or specific idiosyncratic events, covering both operational risk and capital/liquidity events.

Reverse stress testing is used to help support ongoing risk management and is an input to our Recovery Planning process.

Business and risk type specific stress tests

Stress testing techniques at portfolio and product level are also used to support risk management. For example, portfolio management in the US cards business employs stressed assumptions of loss rates to determine profitability hurdles for new accounts. In the UK mortgage business, affordability thresholds incorporate stressed estimates of interest rates. In the Investment Bank, global scenario testing is used to gauge potential losses that could arise in conditions of a severe but plausible market stress. Stress testing is also conducted on positions in particular asset classes, including interest rates, commodities, equities, credit and foreign exchange.

Risk management in the setting of strategy

The planning cycle is centred on the MTP process, performed annually. This embeds the Group’s objectives into detailed business plans which take into account the likely business and macroeconomic environment. The strategy is informed by a detailed risk assessment of the plans, which includes reviewing the Group’s risk profile and setting of risk appetite. The BRC has overall responsibility for reviewing the Group’s risk profile and making appropriate recommendations to the Board. The Board is ultimately responsible for approving the MTP and the Group’s risk appetite.

The planning cycle is summarised in the diagram opposite, and shows that the detailed risk assessment of the plans is an integral part of the MTP process. In particular, the risk appetite process ensures that senior management and the Board understand the MTP’s sensitivities to key risk types, and includes a set of limits to ensure the Group stays within appetite. Additionally, stress testing informs management about the impact to the business of adverse macroeconomic scenarios and potential management actions that could be taken to mitigate the impact of stress.

Plan

Businesses prepare detailed business plans as part of the MTP process. A key component of this process is the businesses’ internal risk assessment, which combines running statistical models e.g. to calculate forecast impairments over the period of the plan, and risk subject matter expert judgement. The risk teams work closely with other functions within their businesses to inform the business plans.

The planning cycle

 

LOGO

Businesses are required to assess each of their portfolios and all Principal Risks (as relevant to their business) when preparing their business plans, and prepare detailed documentation, providing key risk metrics such as projected loan loss rate (LLR) by portfolio. As part of their internal risk assessment, businesses provide performance of their business plans under expected and stressed macroeconomic scenarios, which defines the proposed risk appetite reflected in their plans and feeds into the setting of risk appetite for the Group.

Additionally, businesses assess the performance of their business plans under stress, based on ‘severe, but plausible’ macroeconomic scenarios provided by risk in collaboration with business economists and agreed with the BRC at the start of the process. As part of their stress test assessment, businesses are required to identify and document management actions that would be taken to mitigate the impact of stress, such as cost reductions and increased collections activity to reduce impairments.

Within the businesses, there is detailed risk review of the business plans, involving senior risk managers, with BCROs required to sign off on the risk profile of the plans, including the risk appetite and stress testing assessments described above. The results of businesses’ internal risk assessment and corresponding detailed documentation forms the basis for discussion for the risk review process and setting of risk appetite for the Group, outlined below.

Evaluate

Following submissions by businesses of their MTP business plans, there is a detailed review process led by the central risk team. This includes a robust review and challenge of business’ plans to ensure that the financial projections are internally consistent, value creating, achievable given risk management capabilities (e.g. supported by appropriate risk infrastructure) and that they present a suitable balance between risk and reward. The risk review process is informed by the detailed documentation provided by businesses, which forms the basis for discussion. The format and content of the documentation is pre-agreed to ensure sufficient information is provided to allow a detailed and comprehensive risk review.

The risk review process includes a review of the proposed risk appetite by the business, including assessment of business plans under stress which is used to inform the MTP. If the businesses’ plans entail too high a level of risk, management will challenge the businesses’ plans. This assessment is based on a comparison of businesses’ own risk appetite assessment reflected in their business plans (‘bottom-up’ risk appetite) with the central risk team’s view (‘top-down’ risk appetite) based on the

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  105


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

 

 

financial constraints set by the Board for the Group. Businesses may be asked to update their business plans to ensure the bottom-up risk appetite is within top-down appetite. There is also a detailed review of the stressed estimates and methodology used to translate the economic scenario to stressed estimates, as well as the management actions included in businesses’ results to ensure that these are appropriate and realistic in a stressed environment.

Risk review meetings are held with the CRO and each business, where the senior management of the business present their business plans and the findings from the risk reviews are discussed, including the risk appetite proposals and stress testing results. Businesses may be required to change their business plans as a result of these meetings.

Respond

Following detailed risk review of businesses plans, the central risk team will recommend to the BRC for approval by the Board an appropriate risk appetite for the Group, taking into account businesses’ stress testing results. Mandate and Scale limits are also set. Based on the agreed risk appetite, limits are reviewed for appropriateness by the central risk team, as outlined below, and recommended to the BRC.

Risk Appetite

The Group level loss appetite limit across principal financial risks is set by the Board as part of the annual setting of risk appetite. The allocation is consistent with the annual MTP risk review of the business strategy under stress.

Mandate and scale

Mandate and scale limits are set at Group or business level.

 

§   Group limits are approved by the appropriate risk committee (e.g. Wholesale Credit Risk Management Committee) and are subject to additional escalation and governance requirements.

 

§   Business limits are approved by the relevant business risk team and reportable to the relevant risk committee.

Limits reflect the nature of the risk being managed and controlled and are measured by total financing limits, LGD, stress loss or other metrics as appropriate. There is explicit identification of the exposures that are captured by limits and any material exclusion must be agreed. Limits are reviewed at least annually. The factors taken into consideration when setting the limit will include:

 

§   Group Risk Appetite

 

§   current exposure / MTP forecasts

 

§   risk return considerations

 

§   senior risk management judgement.

Mandate and scale limits are split between three types:

 

§   caps: Hard limit, set to limit concentration to a live portfolio or risk

 

§   run off ceilings: Set to monitor legacy positions being managed down over time

 

§   triggers for discussion: Threshold set as trigger for follow up/ investigation.

 

Monitor

Risk Appetite

The loss appetite allocation to businesses is tracked using an agreed and repeatable monitoring measure. The percentage utilisation of appetite is a risk metric that is part of the business Balanced Scorecard. Appetite utilisation is reported to the BRC on a quarterly basis. Breaches must be approved and remedial actions mandated.

Mandate and scale

The limit excess process includes the following key points:

 

§   businesses must have adequate processes in place to monitor limit caps to avoid excesses

 

§   all excesses must be reported to the central risk team within 24 hours

 

§   credit applications that would cause or increase an excess can only be approved once the limit cap is increased

 

§   a remediation plan must be put in place.

A limit breach will have occurred if a limit goes into excess without being authorised by the relevant authority; or where the limit excess process is not adhered to unless the policy or terms of the limit allows for temporary excess.

Stress testing

Stress testing is also used as part of the risk monitoring framework. For example, the stress testing results inform the retail early warning indicator framework which is designed to trigger actions that would be taken to mitigate the impact of stress.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  106


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

 

 

 

 

This section discusses the organisation specific to the management of credit risks, and provides details of the calculation of risk weighted assets under the Internal Ratings-Based approach of the Basel framework.

 

  §   Pages 108 to 116 cover the aspects of the Group’s risk management framework specific to credit risk, including committees and the Group reporting structure

 

  §   As 64% of our regulatory capital is for credit risk, we devote pages 116 to 123 to detailing how we approach the internal ratings models, and how the framework supports risk differentiation and management.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  107


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

 

 

 

 

Credit risk management

The risk of suffering financial loss should any of the Group’s customers, clients or market counterparties fail to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group.

 

Overview

The granting of credit is one of the Group’s major sources of income and, as a Principal Risk, the Group dedicates considerable resources to its control. The credit risk that the Group faces arises mainly from wholesale and retail loans and advances together with the counterparty credit risk arising from derivative contracts with clients. This is demonstrated by the impairment charge analysis chart. Other sources of credit risk arise from trading activities, including: debt securities, settlement balances with market counterparties, available for sale (AFS) assets and reverse repurchase agreements (reverse repos).

Credit risk management objectives are to:

 

§   maintain a framework of controls to ensure credit risk taking is based on sound credit risk management principles

 

§   identify, assess and measure credit risk clearly and accurately across the Group and within each separate business, from the level of individual facilities up to the total portfolio

 

§   control and plan credit risk taking in line with external stakeholder expectations and avoiding undesirable concentrations

 

§   monitor credit risk and adherence to agreed controls

 

§   ensure that risk-reward objectives are met.

Total credit impairment charge and other provisions –

Dec 15 (£2,114m)

 

                  2015

 

LOGO

     1      Wholesale Loans & Advances    £290m
     2      AFS and Reverse Repos    £16m
     3      Retail Loans and Advances    £1,808m
       
       
       
       
       

Note

Wholesale and Retail Loans and Advances include charges against contingent liabilities

and guarantees.

 

 

Organisation and structure

 

LOGO

 

Wholesale and retail portfolios are managed separately to reflect the differing nature of the assets; wholesale balances tend to be larger and are managed on an individual basis, while retail balances are larger in number but smaller in value and are, therefore, managed on a homogenous portfolio basis.

Credit risk management responsibilities have been structured so that decisions are taken as close as possible to the business, while ensuring robust review and challenge of performance, risk infrastructure and strategic plans. The credit risk management teams in each business are accountable to the relevant BCRO who, in turn, reports to the CRO.

 

Roles and responsibilities

The responsibilities of the credit risk management teams in the businesses, the sanctioning team and other shared services include: sanctioning new credit agreements (principally wholesale); setting policies for approval of transactions (principally retail); monitoring risk against limits and other parameters; maintaining robust processes, data gathering, quality, storage and reporting methods for effective credit risk management; performing effective turnaround and workout scenarios for wholesale portfolios via dedicated restructuring and recoveries teams; maintaining robust collections and recovery processes/units for retail portfolios; and review and validation of credit risk measurement models.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  108


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

    

 

 

For wholesale portfolios, credit risk approval is undertaken by experienced credit risk professionals operating within a clearly defined delegated authority framework, with only the most senior credit officers entrusted with the higher levels of delegated authority. The largest credit exposures, which are outside the Risk Sanctioning Unit or Risk Distribution Committee authority, require the support of the Group Senior Credit Officer (GSCO), the Group’s most senior credit risk sanctioner. For exposures in excess of the GSCO authority, approval by Group CRO is required. In the wholesale portfolios, credit risk managers are organised in sanctioning teams by geography, industry and/or product.

The role of the Central Risk function is to provide Group-wide direction, oversight and challenge of credit risk-taking. Central Risk sets the Credit Risk Control Framework, which provides the structure within which credit risk is managed, together with supporting credit risk policies.

Reporting

The Group dedicates considerable resources to gaining a clear and accurate understanding of credit risk across the business and ensuring that its balance sheet correctly reflects the value of the assets in accordance with applicable accounting principles. This process can be summarised in five broad stages:

 

§   measuring exposures and concentrations

 

§   monitoring performance and asset quality

 

§   monitoring for weaknesses in portfolios

 

§   raising allowances for impairment and other credit provisions

 

§   returning assets to a performing status or writing off assets when the whole or part of a debt is considered irrecoverable.

Measuring exposures and concentrations

Loans and advances to customers provide the principal source of credit risk to the Group although it is also exposed to other forms of credit risk through, for example, loans and advances to banks, loan commitments and debt securities. Risk management policies and processes are designed to identify and analyse risk, to set appropriate risk appetite, limits and controls, and to monitor the risks and adherence to limits by means of reliable and timely data.

One area of particular review is concentration risk. A concentration of credit risk exists when a number of counterparties or customers are engaged in similar activities or geographies, and have similar economic characteristics that would cause their ability to meet contractual obligations to be similarly affected by changes in economic and other conditions. As a result, the Group constantly reviews its concentration in a number of areas including, for example, geography, maturity and industry.

Mandate and scale limits are used to maintain concentrations at appropriate levels, which are aligned with the businesses’ stated risk appetite. Limits are typically based on the nature of the lending and the amount of the portfolio meeting certain standards of underwriting criteria. Diversification, to reduce concentration risk, is achieved through setting maximum exposure guidelines to individual counterparties. Excesses are reported to the BRC.

Monitoring performance and asset quality

Trends in the quality of the Group’s loan portfolio are monitored in a number of ways including tracking loan loss rate and coverage ratios.

Loan loss rate

The loan loss rate (LLR) provides a way of consistently monitoring trends in loan portfolio quality at the Group, business and product levels. The LLR represents the annualised impairment charges on loans and advances to customers and banks and other credit provisions as a percentage of the total, period-end loans and advances to customers and banks, gross of impairment allowances. Details of the LLR for the current period may be found in the Credit Risk Performance section in the 2015 Annual Report.

 

 

Loan loss rate (bps) – Longer-term trends

 

LOGO

 

From a full year peak of 156bps at 31 December 2009, the LLR has been on an improving trend. By the end of 2011, the LLR of 77bps had returned to pre-crisis levels and was lower than the long-term average. The LLR fell from 2012 to 2014 and remained at a low level in 2015 at 47bps.

Coverage ratios

The impairment allowance is the aggregate of the identified and unidentified impairment (UI) balances. Impairment allowance coverage, or the coverage ratio, is reported at two levels:

 

§   credit risk loans (CRLs) coverage ratio, calculated as impairment allowances as a percentage of CRL balances

 

§   potential credit risk loans coverage ratio (impairment allowances as a percentage of total CRL and Potential Problem Loan balances).

See identifying potential credit risk loans on page 112 for more information for the criteria for these categories.

Note

a Restated to reflect the impact of IFRS10, which results in some former Exit Quadrant exposures being recorded at fair value from 2012 onwards
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  109


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

    

 

 

CRL coverage

 

LOGO

Note

Some Non-Core exposures are not reported as CRLs following the introduction of IFRS10, which accounts for these balances at fair value

Appropriate coverage ratios will vary according to the type of product but can be broadly shown to have typical severity rates based upon historic analysis:

 

§   secured retail home loans: 10%-25%

 

§   credit cards, unsecured and other personal lending products: 65%-85%

 

§   corporate facilities: 30%-50%.

CRL coverage ratios would therefore be expected to be at or around these levels over a defined period of time.

In principle, a number of factors may affect the Group’s overall coverage ratios, including:

The mix of products within total CRL balances: coverage ratios will tend to be lower when there is a high proportion of secured retail and corporate balances within total CRLs. This is due to the fact that the recovery outlook on these types of exposures is typically higher than Retail unsecured products, with the result that they will have lower impairment requirements.

The stage in the economic cycle: coverage ratios will tend to be lower in the earlier stages of deterioration in credit conditions. At this stage, retail delinquent balances will be predominantly in the early delinquency cycles and corporate names will have only recently moved to CRL categories. As such balances attract a lower impairment requirement, the CRL coverage ratio will be lower.

The balance of PPLs to CRLs: the impairment requirements for PPLs are lower than for CRLs, so the greater the proportion of PPLs, the lower the PCRL coverage ratio.

Write-off policies: the speed with which defaulted assets are written off will affect coverage ratios. The more quickly assets are written off, the lower the ratios will be, since stock with 100% coverage will tend to roll out of PCRL categories more quickly.

Details of the coverage ratios for the current period are shown in the above chart and may be found in the analysis of loans and advances and impairment section in the 2015 Annual Report.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  110


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

    

 

 

Monitoring weaknesses in portfolios

While the basic principles for monitoring weaknesses in wholesale and retail exposures are broadly similar, they reflect the differing nature of the assets. As a matter of policy, all facilities granted to corporate or wholesale counterparties are subject to a review on, at least, an annual basis, even when they are performing satisfactorily.

 

LOGO

 

Wholesale portfoliosa

Within the Wholesale portfolios, the Basel definitions of default are used as default indicators which have been aligned to the IAS 39 objective evidence of impairment. A default is triggered if individual identified impairment is recognised. Group definitions of default used are:

 

§   bank puts the credit obligation on a non-accrued status

 

§   bank makes a charge-off or account specific identified impairment resulting from a significant perceived decline in credit quality

 

§   bank sells the credit obligation at a material credit-related economic loss

 

§   bank consents to a distressed restructuring of the credit obligation where this is likely to result in a diminished financial obligation caused by the material forgiveness or postponement of principal, interest or fees

 

§   bank triggers a petition for obligor’s bankruptcy or similar order

 

§   bank becomes aware of the obligor having sought or having been placed in bankruptcy or similar protection where this would avoid or delay repayment of the credit obligation to the banking group

 

§   bank becomes aware of an acceleration of an obligation by a firm

 

§   where the obligor is a bank – revocation of authorisation

 

§   where the obligor is a sovereign – trigger of default definition of an approved External Credit Assessment Institution (ECAI) such as a rating agency

 

§   obligor past due more than 90 days on any material credit obligation to the Group.

Note

a Includes certain Business Banking facilities which are recorded as Retail for management purposes.

 

Wholesale accounts that are deemed to contain heightened levels of risk are recorded on graded watchlists (WL) comprising three categories graded in line with the perceived severity of the risk attached to the lending, and its probability of default. Examples of heightened levels of risk may include, for example:

 

§   a material reduction in profits

 

§   a material reduction in the value of collateral held

 

§   a decline in net tangible assets in circumstances which are not satisfactorily explained

 

§   periodic waiver requests or changes to the terms of the credit agreement over an extended period of time.

These lists are updated monthly and circulated to the relevant risk control points. Once an account has been placed on WL, the exposure is monitored and, where appropriate, exposure reductions are effected. Should an account become impaired, it will normally, but not necessarily, have passed through each of the three categories, which reflects the need for increasing caution and control. While all counterparties, regardless of financial health, are subject to a full review of all facilities on at least an annual basis, more frequent interim reviews may be undertaken should circumstances dictate. Specialist recovery functions deal with counterparties in higher levels of WL, default, collection or insolvency. Their mandate is to maximise shareholder value, ideally via working intensively with the counterparty to help them to either return to financial health or, in the cases of insolvency, obtain the orderly and timely recovery of impaired debts. Where a counterparty’s financial health gives grounds for concern, it is immediately placed into the appropriate category.

Retail portfolios

Within the retail portfolios, which tend to comprise homogeneous assets, statistical techniques more readily allow potential credit weaknesses to be monitored on a portfolio basis. The approach is consistent with the Group’s policy of raising a collective impairment allowance as soon as objective evidence of impairment is identified. Retail accounts can be classified according to specified categories of arrears status (or 30 day cycle), which reflects the level of contractual payments which are overdue. An outstanding balance is deemed to be delinquent when it is one day or “one penny” down and goes into default when it moves into recovery, normally 180 days. Impairment is considered at all stages of the customer’s outstanding obligations.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  111


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

    

 

 

The probability of default increases with the number of contractual payments missed, thus raising the associated impairment requirement.

Once a loan has passed through a prescribed number of cycles, normally six, it will be charged-off and enter recovery status. Charge-off refers to the point in time when collections activity changes from the collection of arrears to the recovery of the full balance. In most cases, charge-off will result in the account moving to a legal recovery function or debt sale. This will typically occur after an account has been treated by a collections function. However, in certain cases, an account may be charged off directly from a performing status, such as in the case of insolvency or death.

The timings of the charge-off points are established based on the type of loan. For the majority of products, the standard period for charging off accounts is six cycles (180 days past due date of contractual obligation). Early charge-off points are prescribed for unsecured assets. For example, in case of customer bankruptcy or insolvency, associated accounts are charged off within 60 days of notification.

Identifying potential credit risk loans

The Group reports potentially and actually impaired loans as PCRLs. PCRLs comprise two categories of loans: PPLs and CRLs.

PPLs are loans that are currently complying with repayment terms but where serious doubt exists as to the ability of the borrower to continue to comply with such terms in the near future. If the credit quality of a wholesale loan on a WL deteriorates to the highest category, or a Retail loan deteriorates to delinquency cycle 2, consideration is given to including it within the PPL category.

Should further evidence of deterioration be observed, a loan may move to the CRL category. Events that would trigger the transfer of a loan from the PPL to the CRL category include a missed payment or a breach of covenant. CRLs comprise three classes of loans:

Impaired loans: comprises loans where an individually identified impairment allowance has been raised and also include loans which are fully collateralised or where indebtedness has already been written down to the expected realisable value. This category includes all retail loans that have been charged off to legal recovery. The category may include loans, which, while impaired, are still performing.

Accruing past due 90 days or more: comprises loans that are 90 days or more past due with respect to principal or interest. An impairment allowance will be raised against these loans if the expected cash flows discounted at the effective interest rate are less than the carrying value.

Impaired and restructured loans: comprises loans not included above where, for economic or legal reasons related to the debtor’s financial difficulties, a concession has been granted to the debtor that would not otherwise be considered. Where the concession results in the expected cash flows discounted at the effective interest rate being less than the loan’s carrying value, an impairment allowance will be raised. See Forbearance and other concession programmes on page 113 for more detail.

Allowances for impairment and other credit provisions

The Group establishes, through charges against profit, impairment allowances and other credit provisions for the incurred loss inherent in the lending book. Under IFRS, impairment allowances are recognised where there is objective evidence of impairment as a result of one or more loss events that have occurred after initial recognition, and where these events have had an impact on the estimated future cash flows of the financial asset or portfolio of financial assets. Impairment of loans and receivables is measured as the difference between the carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows discounted at the financial asset’s original effective interest rate. If the carrying amount is less than the discounted cash flows, then no further allowance is necessary.

As one of the controls to ensure that adequate impairment allowances are held, movements in impairment to individual names with a total impairment allowance of £10m or more are presented to the GSCO for approval.

Individually assessed impairment

Impairment allowances are measured individually for assets that are individually significant, and collectively where a portfolio comprises homogenous assets and where appropriate statistical techniques are available. In terms of individual assessment, the principal trigger point for impairment is the missing of a contractual payment which is evidence that an account is exhibiting serious financial problems, and where any further deterioration is likely to lead to failure. Details of other trigger points can be found above. Two key inputs to the cash flow calculation are the valuation of all security and collateral, as well as the timing of all asset realisations, after allowing for all attendant costs. This method applies mainly in the wholesale portfolios.

Collectively assessed impairment

For collective assessment, the principal trigger point for impairment is the missing of a contractual payment, which is the policy consistently adopted across all credit cards, unsecured loans, mortgages and most other retail lending. The calculation methodology relies on the historical experience of pools of similar assets; hence the impairment allowance is collective. The impairment calculation is typically based on a roll-rate approach, where the percentage of assets that move from the initial delinquency to default is derived from statistical probabilities based on historical experience. Recovery amounts are calculated using a weighted average for the relevant portfolio. This method applies mainly to the retail portfolios and is consistent with Group policy of raising an allowance as soon as impairment is identified. Unidentified impairment is also included in collective impairment.

Impairment for losses incurred but not specifically indentified

Unidentified impairment allowances are also raised to cover losses which are judged to be incurred but not yet specifically identified in customer exposures at the balance sheet date, and which, therefore, have not been specifically reported. The incurred but not yet reported calculation is based on the asset’s probability of moving from the performing portfolio to being specifically identified as impaired within the given emergence period and then on to default within a specified period, termed as the outcome period. This is calculated on the present value of estimated future cash flows discounted at the financial asset’s effective interest rate. The emergence and outcome periods vary across products.

Wholesale portfolios

Impairment in the wholesale portfolios is generally calculated by valuing each impaired asset on a case by case basis, i.e. on an individual assessment basis. A relatively small amount of wholesale impairment relates to unidentified or collective impairment; in such cases, impairment is calculated using modelled Probability of Default (PD) x Loss Given Default (LGD) x Exposure at Default (EAD) adjusted for an emergence period.

Retail portfolios

For retail portfolios, the impairment allowance is mainly assessed on a collective basis and is based on the drawn balances adjusted to take into account the likelihood of the customer defaulting at a particular point in time (PDpit) and the amount estimated as not recoverable (LGD). The basic calculation is:

Impairment allowance = Total outstandings x PDpit x LGD

The PDpit increases with the number of contractual payments missed thus raising the associated impairment requirement.

In retail, the current policy also incorporates a high risk segment which is included in the unidentified impairment calculation. High risk segments are those which can be demonstrated to experience higher levels of loss within the performing segment. This segmentation allows for earlier identification of potential loss in a portfolio. Unidentified impairment is also referred to as collective impairment. This is to reflect the impairment that is collectively held against a pool of assets where a loss event has occurred, but has not yet been captured.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  112


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

    

 

 

Sensitivity of the impairment to key assumptions

Wholesale portfolios

Impairment in the wholesale portfolios is generally calculated by valuing each impaired asset on a case by case basis, and is not therefore primarily model-driven. As such, the key assumptions that would have the most impact on impairment provisions in the wholesale portfolios are the valuations placed upon security and collateral held and the timing of asset realisations.

When calculating impairment, estimated future cash flows are discounted at the financial asset’s original effective interest rate. At present, in wholesale portfolios, the impact of discounting is relatively small in itself but would rise with reference rates. In addition, to the extent that a rise in interest rates impacted economic growth and/or serviceability of wholesale clients and customers, this would be expected to feed through in future impairment numbers.

In 2015, key judgements were made on a number of identified cases within Investment Bank, Corporate Banking and Wealth and Investment Management.

Retail portfolios

For Retail portfolios, impairment is calculated predominantly using models. The models are developed using historical data and include explicit and implicit assumptions such as debt sale estimates, house price valuations and the distribution of accounts. Model monitoring and validation are undertaken regularly, at least annually, to ensure that models are fit for purpose. Further to this, the Group accounts for the impact of changes in the economic environment and lags resulting from the design of the models to ensure overall impairment adequacy. See Management adjustments to Models for Impairment in the 2015 Annual Report for more information on key management judgements in 2015. See stress testing (page 103) for further information.

Emergence and outcome periods

To develop models to calculate the allowance for impairment it is first necessary to estimate the time horizons of these models. These time horizons are called the emergence and outcome periods Emergence Period relates to the time between a loss event occurring and that event becoming apparent via the account becoming delinquent and attracting identified impairment. Outcome is an analytically derived period taken to capture lifetime defaults associated with the observed loss event.

This methodology ensures that the Group captures the loss incurred at the correct balance sheet date. These impairment allowances are reviewed and adjusted at least quarterly by an appropriate charge or release of the stock of impairment allowances based on statistical analysis and management judgement. Where appropriate, the accuracy of this analysis is periodically assessed against actual losses. For further detail, see modelling of risk on pages 117 to 118.

Wholesale portfolios

For Wholesale portfolios in Corporate Banking and Investment Bank, the emergence period is portfolio specific and is based on the anticipated length of time from the occurrence of a loss event to identified impairment being incurred. The emergence period in Corporate Banking is derived from actual case file review. This is periodically benchmarked against the time taken to move between risk grades in internal watchlists, from WL1 or 2 into WL3, which is the level of risk that will attract a collective impairment allowance. Both methodologies produce similar results for the emergence period, which is currently six months. Within Corporate Banking, post model adjustments can be made to increase the emergence period for certain industry sectors to reflect, for example, a benign environment. The average life of the Investment Bank portfolio is estimated to be 18 months, during which time Investment Bank is exposed to losses on the portfolio. However, it is expected that incurred losses would become apparent within six months, therefore the Investment Bank also uses a six-month emergence period.

Retail portfolios

During 2015, the Retail Impairment Policy was significantly strengthened and required enhancements to modelling approaches to both emergence and outcome periods. Policy continues to define minimum emergence periods at a product level, as shown in the following table.

Emergence periods

                 
    
 
Emergence period
(months)
  
  

Product Type

     2015         2014   

Credit cards

     2         3   

Current Accounts/Overdrafts

     3         3   

Unsecured Loans

     3         3   

Secured Loans

     6         3   

Policy enhancement now requires businesses to capture lifetime defaults allowing consideration to cure rates and future events, subject to a minimum floor of 80%.

Businesses undertake regular analysis, at least annually, to validate that the minimum emergence periods above continue to reflect the actual observed time between the occurrence of a loss event and entry to an impaired state, in order to ensure they remain appropriate and provide sufficient coverage of future losses.

Where any shortfalls are identified at a business or portfolio level, the prescribed minimum emergence periods are increased to reflect our most up-to-date experience of customer behaviour.

The final approved emergence periods are incorporated within the rates used as part of the overall UI assessment, which now encompasses total outstanding balances on all accounts that are in order, and for which no identified impairment allowances are held.

Individual evidence based outcome periods are also derived at a business/portfolio level, subject to the minimum period in the table above. Final outcome periods adopted are re-evaluated on an annual basis to ensure they continue to reflect the actual time elapsing from the initial indication of potential default to the default event.

Returning assets to a performing status

Wholesale portfolios

In wholesale portfolios, an account may only be returned to a performing status when it ceases to have any actual or perceived financial stress and no longer meets any of the WL criteria, or once facilities have been fully repaid or cancelled. Unless a facility is fully repaid or cancelled, the decision in Corporate Banking to return an account to performing status may only be taken by the credit risk team, while within the Investment Bank, the decision can only be taken by the Investment Bank Watchlist Committee.

Retail portfolios

A retail asset, pre-point of charge-off, may only be returned to a performing status in the following circumstances:

 

§   all arrears (both capital and interest) have been cleared and payments have returned to original contractual payments

 

§   for revolving products, a re-age event (see page 116) has occurred, when the customer is returned to an up-to-date status without having cleared the requisite level of arrears

 

§   for amortising products, which are performing on a programme of forbearance and meet the following criteria may be returned to the performing book classified as High Riska:

 

  no interest rate concessions must have been granted

 

  restructure must remain within original product parameters (original term + extension)

 

  twelve consecutive payments at the revised contractual payment amount must have been received post the restructure event.

For residential mortgages, accounts may also be considered for rehabilitation post charge-off, where customer circumstances have changed. The customer must clear all unpaid capital and interest, and confirm their ability to meet full payments going forward.

Note

a The identification and subsequent treatment of up-to-date customers who, either through an event or observed behaviour exhibit potential financial difficulty. High Risk includes customers who have suffered recent financial dislocation, i.e. prior forbearance or re-age.
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  113


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

    

 

 

Recovery units

Recovery units are responsible for exposures where deterioration of the counterparty/customer credit profile is severe, to the extent that timely or full recovery of exposure is considered unlikely and default has occurred or is likely in the short-term. Recovery teams set and implement strategies to recover the Group’s exposure through realisation of assets and collateral, in co-operation with counterparties/customers and where this is not possible through insolvency and legal procedures.

In Wholesale, for a case to be transferred to a recovery unit, it must be in default and have ceased to actively trade or be in insolvency. In Retail, the timings of the charge-off points to recovery units are established based on the type of loan. For the majority of products, the standard period for charging off accounts is six missed contractual payments (180 days past due date of contractual obligation) unless a Forbearance programme is agreed. Early points are prescribed for unsecured assets. For example, in case of customer bankruptcy or insolvency, associated accounts are charged off within 60 days of notification. See recovery information included in Analysis of Specific Portfolio and Asset Types section in the 2015 Annual Report.

Foreclosures in process and properties in possession

Foreclosure is the process where the bank initiates legal action against a customer, with the intention of terminating the loan agreement whereby the bank may repossess the property subject to local law and recover amounts it is owed. This process can be initiated by the bank independent of the impairment treatment and it is therefore possible that the foreclosure process may be initiated while the account is still in collections (delinquent) or in recoveries (post charge-off) where the customer has not agreed a satisfactory repayment schedule with the bank.

Properties in possession include properties held as ‘loans and advances to customers’ and properties held as ‘other real estate owned’.

Held as ’loans and advances to customers’ (UK and Italy) refers to the properties where the customer continues to retain legal title but where the bank has enforced the possession order as part of the foreclosure process to allow for the disposal of the asset, or the court has ordered the auction of the property.

Held as ‘other real estate owned’ (South Africa and Portugal) refers to properties where the bank has taken legal ownership of the title as a result of purchase at an auction or similar and treated as ‘other real estate owned’ within other assets on the bank’s balance sheet.

Writing off assets

Write-off refers to the point where it is determined that the asset is irrecoverable, it is no longer considered economically viable to try and recover the asset, it is deemed immaterial, or full and final settlement is reached and a shortfall remains. In the event of write-off, the customer balance is removed from the balance sheet and the impairment reserve held against the asset is released.

The timing and extent of write-offs may involve some element of subjective judgement. Nevertheless, a write-off will often be prompted by a specific event, such as the inception of insolvency proceedings or other formal recovery action, which makes it possible to establish that some or the entire advance is beyond realistic prospect of recovery. The position of impaired loans is also reviewed at least quarterly to ensure that irrecoverable advances are being written off in a prompt and orderly manner and in compliance with any local regulations.

For retail portfolios, the timings of the write-off points are established based on the type of loan. For unsecured, assets in the recoveries book will be written-off if the required qualifying repayments are not made within a rolling twelve-month period. For secured loans, the shortfall after the receipt of the proceeds from the disposal of the collateral is written off within three months of that date if no repayment schedule has been agreed with the borrower. Such assets are only written off once all the necessary procedures have been completed and the amount of the loss has been determined.

Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are written back and hence decrease the amount of the reported loan impairment charge in the income statement. In 2015, total write-offs of impaired financial assets decreased 24% to £2.27bn (2014: £3.01bn).

Total write-offs of financial assets (£m)

 

LOGO

 

Forbearance and other concession programmes

Forbearance programmes

Forbearance takes place when a concession is made on the contractual terms of a facility in response to an obligor’s financial difficulties. The Group offers forbearance programmes to assist customers and clients in financial difficulty through agreements that may include accepting less than contractual amounts due where financial distress would otherwise prevent satisfactory repayment within the original terms and conditions of the contract. These agreements may be initiated by the customer, the bank or a third party.

Forbearance programmes for wholesale portfolios

The majority of wholesale client relationships are individually managed, with lending decisions made with reference to specific circumstances and on bespoke terms.

Forbearance occurs when, for reasons relating to the actual or perceived financial difficulty of an obligor, a concession is granted below the Group’s current standard rates (i.e. lending criteria below the Group’s current lending terms), that would not otherwise be considered. This includes all troubled debt restructures granted below our standard rates.

Forbearance would typically be evident where the concession(s) agreed impact the ability to repay debt or avoid recognising a default with a lack of appropriate commercial balance and risk mitigation/structural enhancement of benefit to the Group in return for concession(s).

The following list is not exhaustive but provides some examples of instances that would typically be considered to be evidence of forbearance:

 

§   a reduction of current contractual interest rate for the sole purpose of maintaining performing debt status, with no other improvement to terms of benefit to the Group

 

§   non-enforcement of a material covenant breach impacting the counterparty’s ability to repay

 

§   converting a fully or partially amortising facility to a bullet repayment at maturity, with no other improvement to terms of benefit to the Group, for the sole purpose of avoiding a payment default due to customer’s inability to meet amortisation

 

§   extension in maturity date for a project finance facility that gives an effective contractual term longer than the underlying project contract being financed

 

§   any release of a material security interest without receiving appropriate value by way of repayment/alternate security offered or other improvement in terms available to the Group commensurate with the value of the security released.

Where a concession is granted that is not a result of financial difficulty and/or is within our current market terms, the concession would not amount to forbearance. For example, a commercially balanced restructure within the Group’s current terms which involves the granting concessions and receiving risk mitigation/structural enhancement of benefit to the Group would not be indicative of forbearance.

The following list (not exhaustive) gives some examples of instances that would not typically be considered to be forbearance:

 

§   temporary/permanent waivers/resets of covenants agreed in line with our current terms

 

§   amending contractual maturity to meet current lending terms that results in a previously amortising facility having a bullet repayment as a consequence of shorter maturity date
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  114


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

        

 

 

§   equity/warrants taken to increase return to the Group without compromising contractual interest

 

§   extension of maturity date where the extension is within the normally granted terms for the type of facility in question

 

§   release of a material security interest where commensurate value is received by way of repayment/other security offered.

Cases where a technical default may have occurred, the Group has decided to reserve its position but does not consider the default to be sufficient to impact the counterparty’s ability to pay, would not typically be considered forbearance (as the counterparty would continue to meet its payment obligations under existing terms).

The Troubled Assets Policy requires that a permanent record is retained of all individual cases of forbearance, and upon granting forbearance the counterparty is placed on WL. The counterparty then remains on WL and is flagged as being in forbearance for a minimum of 12 months from the date forbearance is applied. Counterparties may be removed from WL status within 12 months in exceptional circumstances, e.g. full repayment of facilities or significant restructuring. Counterparties placed on WL status are subject to increased levels of credit risk oversight.

Counterparties who have been granted forbearance are classified as a Basel ‘unlikeliness’ to pay default for capital purposes, with PD of 1 throughout the period that they remain classified as being in forbearance. This is on the basis that, without intervention by the Group, the counterparties are unlikely to meet their obligations in full which would lead to default.

Impairment is assessed on an individual basis and recognised where relevant impairment triggers have been reached including where counterparties are in arrears and require renegotiation of terms. Forbearance is considered to be an indicator that impairment may be present and an impairment test is performed for all cases placed in forbearance.

Given that these loans have already been assessed for impairment at the point of being classified as being in forbearance, the Group does not have additional procedures to evaluate the likelihood that these loans would default within the loss emergence and confirmation periods.

A control framework exists along with regular sampling to ensure policies for watchlist and impairment are enforced as defined and to ensure that all assets have suitable levels of impairment applied. Portfolios are subject to independent assessment.

Aggregate data for Wholesale forbearance cases is reviewed by the Wholesale Credit Risk Management Committee.

Forbearance programmes for retail portfolios

Retail forbearance is available to customers experiencing financial difficulties. Forbearance solutions take a number of forms depending on individual customer circumstances. Short-term solutions focus on temporary reductions to contractual payments and may change from capital and interest payments to interest only. For loan customers with longer-term financial difficulties, term extensions may be offered, which may include interest rate concessions, For credit card customers with longer-term financial difficulties, a switch to a fully amortising plan may be offered, which may include an interest rate concession.

When an account is placed into a programme of forbearance, the asset will be classified as such for the remainder of its term, unless after 12 months it qualifies for reclassification, upon which it will be returned to the up-to-date book and classified as high risk for a further 12 month period. When the Group agrees to a forbearance programme with a customer, the impairment allowance recognises the impact on cash flows of the agreement to receive less than the original contractual payments. The Retail Impairment Policy prescribes the methodology for impairment of forbearance assets, which is measured by comparing the debt outstanding to the revised expected repayment. This results in higher impairment, in general, than for fully performing assets, reflecting the additional credit risk attached to loans subject to forbearance.

Barclays has continued to assist customers in financial difficulty through the use of forbearance programmes. However, the extent of forbearance offered by the Group to customers and clients remains small in comparison to the overall size of the loan book.

The level of forbearance extended to customers in other Retail portfolios is not material and, typically, does not currently play a significant part in the way customer relationships are managed. However, additional portfolios will be added to this disclosure should the forbearance in respect of such portfolios become material.

A retail loan is not considered to be renegotiated where the amendment is at the request of the customer, there is no evidence of actual or imminent financial difficulty and the amendment meets with all underwriting criteria. In this case it would be treated as a new loan. In the normal course of business, customers who are not in financial difficulties frequently apply for new loan terms, for example to take advantage of a lower interest rate or to secure a further advance on a mortgage product. Where these applications meet our underwriting criteria and the loan is made at market interest rates, the loan is not classified as being in forbearance. Only in circumstances where a customer has requested a term extension, interest rate reduction or further advance and there is evidence of financial difficulty is the loan classified as forbearance and included in our disclosures on forbearance.

Please see the Credit risk performance section of the 2015 Annual Report for details of principal wholesale and retail assets currently in forbearance.

Impairment of loans under forbearance

Loans under forbearance programmes are subject to Group policy. In both retail and wholesale portfolios, identified impairment is raised for such accounts, recognising the agreement between the Group and customer to pay less than the original contractual payment and is measured using a future discounted cash flow approach comparing the debt outstanding to the expected repayment on the debt. This results in higher impairment, in general, being held for loans under forbearance than for fully performing assets, reflecting the additional credit risk attached to loans subject to forbearance.

Sustainability of loans under forbearance

The Group monitors the sustainability of loans for which forbearance has been granted.

Wholesale portfolios

In the wholesale portfolios, counterparties that have been granted forbearance are placed on WL and therefore are subject to increased levels of credit risk oversight. Counterparties then remain on WL and are classified as being in forbearance with a PD of 1 for capital purposes for a minimum of 12 months from the date forbearance is applied until satisfactory performance is evidenced. Forbearance status and the related default treatment for capital can be removed after 12 months from being applied if any of the following criteria is met:

 

§   the counterparty no longer benefits from a concession below our current market rates or reverts back to their original lending terms (prior to the concession being applied)

 

§   the counterparty ceases to have any actual or perceived financial stress

 

§   a significant restructure takes place which leads to a significant improvement in the credit profile of the counterparty.

Counterparties may only be removed from being classified as being in forbearance with a PD of 1 for capital purposes within 12 months in exceptional circumstances, e.g. full repayment of facilities or significant restructuring that materially improves credit quality. Counterparties continuing to benefit from a concession below current market can be removed from WL and no longer be classified as in forbearance provided they do not meet any of the WL criteria and can evidence consistent satisfactory performance throughout the minimum twelve-month period.

Retail portfolios

In retail portfolios, the type of forbearance programme offered should be appropriate to the nature and the expected duration of the customer’s financial distress. It is imperative that the solution agreed is both appropriate to that customer and sustainable, with a clear demonstration from the customer of both willingness and ability to repay. Before any permanent programme of forbearance is granted, an affordability assessment is undertaken to ensure suitability of the offer. When customers exit forbearance, the accounts are ring-fenced as a High Risk segment within the up-to-date book for a period of at least twelve months.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  115


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

        

 

 

For disclosure on the Group’s accounting policy with respect to impairment, see pages 112 to 114 and Note 7 of the 2015 Annual Report.

Other programmes

Retail re-ageing activity

Re-ageing refers to the placing of an account into an up-to-date position without the requisite repayment of arrears. The re-age policy applies to revolving products only. No reduction is made to the minimum due payment amounts which are calculated, as a percentage of balance, with any unpaid principal included in the calculation of the following month’s minimum due payment.

The changes in timing of cash flows following re-aging do not result in any additional cost to the Group. The following are the conditions required to be met before a re-age may occur:

 

§   the account must not have been previously charged off or written off

 

§   the borrower cannot be bankrupt, subject to an Individual Voluntary Arrangement (a UK contractual arrangement with creditors for individuals wishing to avoid bankruptcy), a fraud or deceased

 

§   the borrower must show a renewed willingness and ability to repay the debt. This will be achieved by the borrower making at least three consecutive contractual monthly payments or the equivalent cumulative amount. Contractual monthly payment is defined as the contractual minimum due. Funds may not be advanced for any part of this

 

§   the account must have been on book at least nine months (i.e. nine months prior to the three-month qualification period)

 

§   no account should be re-aged more than once within any twelve-month period, or more than twice in a five year period.

Assets are considered to belong to a separate High Risk pool. Under High Risk, the performance of the assets is a risk characteristic and results in a higher probability of default being assigned to them in impairment models which meet the requirement of IAS 39, AG87-88. This results in an appropriately higher impairment allowance being recognised on the assets. See 2015 Annual Report for more information.

Retail small arrears capitalisation

All small arrears capitalisations are now considered a form of Forbearance, based on the European Banking Authority’s requirements for Supervisory Reporting on Forbearance and Non-Performing exposures.

Refinancing risk

This is the risk that the borrower or group of correlated borrowers may be unable to repay bullet-repayment loans at expiry, and will therefore need refinancing.

From a large corporates perspective, refinancing risk will typically be associated with loans that have an element of bullet repayment incorporated into the repayment profile. Refinancing risk is taken into account on a case by case basis as part of the credit review and approval process for each individual loan. The review will consider factors such as the strength of the business model and sustainability of the cash flows; and for bridge loans, the certainty of the sources of repayment and any associated market risk.

Commercial real estate loans will frequently incorporate a bullet repayment element at maturity. Where this is the case, deals are sized and structured to enable the Group to term out the loan if the client were unable to refinance the loan at expiry. Credit review will incorporate an examination of various factors that are central to this consideration, such as tenant quality, tenancy agreements (including break clauses), property quality and interest rate sensitivity.

Loans to small and medium enterprises (SMEs) will typically be either revolving credit lines to cover working capital needs or amortising exposures, with periodic refinancing to give the opportunity to review structure, pricing, etc.

Please refer to the maturity analysis for UK CRE and customers with interest-only home loans in the credit risk performance section in the 2015 Annual Report for more information.

 

Environmental Risk

The Group has a dedicated Environmental Risk Management team, as part of the central Credit Risk Management function, recognising that environment is a mainstream credit risk issue. Environmental issues are required considerations in credit risk assessment, and environmental risk standards are included in the Wholesale Credit Risk Control Framework.

The Group’s approach to environmental credit risk management addresses risk under three categories, namely Direct Risk and Indirect Risk, which are covered below, and Reputation Risk, on which more detail may be found in the Conduct Risk section (pages 152 to 154).

Direct Risk can arise when the Group takes commercial land as collateral. In many jurisdictions, enforcement of a commercial mortgage by the bank, leading to possession, potentially renders the Group liable for the costs of remediating a site if deemed by the regulator to be contaminated, including for pre-existing conditions. In the UK, the Group’s approach requires commercial land, if being pledged as collateral, to be subject to a screening mechanism. Where required further assessment of the commercial history of a piece of land and its potential for environmental contamination helps ensure any potential environmental degradation is reflected in the value ascribed to that security. It also identifies potential liabilities which may be incurred by the Group, if realisation of the security were to become a possibility.

Indirect Risk can arise when environmental issues may impact the creditworthiness of the borrower. For instance, incremental costs may be incurred in upgrading a business’ operations to meet emerging environmental regulations or tightening standards. In other circumstances, failure to meet those standards may lead to fines. Environmental impacts on businesses may also include shifts in the market demand for goods or services generated by our customers, or changing supply chain pressures. Environmental considerations affecting our clients can be varied. The bank has developed a series of environmental risk briefing notes, covering ten broad industry headings ranging from Agriculture and Fisheries to Oil and Gas, from Mining and Metals to Utilities and Waste Management. These briefing notes are available to colleagues in business development and credit risk functions across the organisation, outlining the nature of environmental and social risks of which to be aware, as well as the factors which mitigate those risks.

Internal ratings based (IRB) approach

The IRB approach relies on internal models to derive the risk parameters/ components used in determining the capital requirement for a given exposure. The main risk components include measures of the probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD) and the exposure at default (EAD). The IRB approach is divided into two alternative applications, Advanced and Foundation:

 

§   Advanced IRB (AIRB): Barclays uses its own models to estimate PD, LGD and EAD to calculate given risk exposures for various asset classes and the associated Risk Weighted Assets (RWAs)

 

§   Foundation IRB (FIRB): Barclays uses its own PD estimates as for Advanced, but relies on supervisory estimates for other risk components. The IRB approach is particularly used to floor risk parameters for wholesale credit exposures where default data scarcity may impact the robustness of the model build process.

The IRB calculation for credit risk

For both AIRB and FIRB approaches, Barclays uses the regulatory prescribed risk-weight functions for the purposes of deriving capital requirements.

In line with regulatory requirements, through the cycle (TTC) PD and downturn LGD and EAD estimates are used for each customer/facility to determine regulatory capital for all exposures in scope.

For the purpose of pricing and existing customer management, point in time (PIT) PD, LGD and EAD are generally used as these represent the best estimates of risk given the current position in the credit cycle. PIT PDs are also used for the calculation of capital on certain retail unsecured products, in line with regulation.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  116


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

    

 

 

Applications of internal ratings

The three components – PD, LGD and EAD – are the building blocks used in a variety of applications that measure credit risk across the entire portfolio:

 

§   credit approval: PD models are used in the approval process in both retail and wholesale portfolios. In high-volume retail portfolios, application and behaviour scorecards are frequently used as decision-making tools. In wholesale and some retail mortgage portfolios, PD models are used to direct applications to an appropriate credit-sanctioning level

 

§   credit grading: this was originally introduced in the early 1990s to provide a common measure of risk across the Group. Barclays now employs a 21-point scale of default probabilities. These are shown in Table 24 on page 45

 

§   risk-reward and pricing: PD, EAD and LGD estimates are used to assess the profitability of deals and portfolios and to facilitate risk-adjusted pricing and strategy decisions

 

§   risk appetite: estimates are used to calculate the expected loss and the potential volatility of loss in the Group’s risk appetite framework. See page 102

 

§   impairment calculation: under IAS 39, many collective impairment estimates incorporate the use of PD and LGD models. See page 112

 

§   Collections and recoveries: model outputs are used to identify segments of the portfolio where collection and recovery efforts should be prioritised

 

§   economic capital (EC) calculation: most EC calculations use similar inputs as the regulatory capital (RC) process

 

§   risk management information: Risk generate reports to inform senior management on issues such as business performance, risk appetite and EC consumption. Model outputs are used as key indicators in those reports.

Ratings processes and models for credit exposures

Wholesale Credit

To construct ratings for wholesale customers, including financial institutions, corporates, specialised lending, purchased corporate receivables and equity exposures, Barclays complements its internal models suite with external models and rating agencies’ information. The rating system is constructed to ensure that a client receives the same rating, regardless of the part of the business originating the transaction. To achieve this, a model hierarchy is in place requiring users/credit officers to adopt a consistent approach/model to rate each counterparty based on the asset class type and the nature of the transaction.

Wholesale PD models

Barclays employs a range of methods in the construction of these models:

 

§   statistical models are used for our high volume portfolios such as small or medium enterprises (SME). The models are typically built using large amounts of internal data, combined with supplemental data from external data suppliers where available. Wherever external data is sourced to validate or enhance internally held data, similar data quality standards to those applicable to the internal data management are enforced

 

§   structural models incorporate in their specification the elements of the industry-accepted Merton framework to identify the distance to default for a counterparty. This relies upon the modeller having access to specific time series data or data proxies for the portfolio. Data samples used to build and validate these models are typically constructed by appropriately combining data sets from internal default observations with comparable externally obtained data sets from commercial providers such as rating agencies and industry data gathering consortia

 

§   expert lender models are used for those parts of the portfolio where there is insufficient internal or external data to support the construction of a statistically robust model. These models utilise the knowledge and in-depth expertise of the senior credit officers dealing with the specific customer type being modelled. For all portfolios with a low number of default observations, the Group adopts specific regulatory rules, methodologies and floors in its estimates to ensure
   

that the calibration of the model meets the current regulatory criteria for conservatism.

Wholesale LGD models

The LGD models typically rely on statistical analysis to derive the model drivers (including seniority of claim, collateral coverage, recovery periods, industry and costs) that best explain the Group’s historical loss experience, often supplemented with other relevant and representative external information where available. The models are calibrated to downturn conditions for regulatory capital purposes and, where internal and external data is scarce, they are subject to low default portfolio (LDP) and/or FIRB floors to ensure the calibration of the model meets the current regulatory criteria for conservatism.

Wholesale EAD models

The wholesale EAD models estimate the potential utilisation of the currently available headroom based on statistical analysis of the available internal and external data and past client behaviour. As is the case with the LGD models, the EAD models are subject to downturn calibration for regulatory capital purposes and to floors where data is scarce.

Retail Credit

Retail banking and cards operations have long and extensive experience of using credit models in assessing and managing risks. As a result, models play an integral role in customer approval and management decisions. Most retail portfolios are data rich; consequently, most models are built in-house using statistical techniques and internal data. Exceptions are some expert lender models (similar to those described in the wholesale context) where data scarcity precludes the statistically robust derivation of model parameters. In these cases, appropriately conservative assumptions are typically used, and wherever possible these models are validated/benchmarked against external data.

Retail PD models

Application and behavioural scorecards are most commonly used for retail PD modelling:

 

§   application scorecards are derived from historically observed performance of new clients. They are built using customer demographic and financial information, supplemented by credit bureau information where available. Through statistical techniques, the relationship between these candidate variables and the default marker is quantified to produce output scores reflecting a PD. These scores are used primarily for new customer decisioning but are, in some cases, also used to allocate a PD to new customers for the purpose of capital calculation

 

§   behavioural scorecards differ from application scorecards in that they rely on the historically observed performance of existing clients. The statistically derived output scores are used for existing customer management activities as well as for the purpose of capital calculation.

Retail LGD models

Retail LGD models are built using bespoke methods chosen to best model the operational recovery process and practices. In a number of secured portfolios, LGD drivers are parameterised with market factors (e.g. house price indices) to capture market trends. For most unsecured portfolios, where recoveries are not based on collateral, statistical models of cash flows are used to estimate ultimate recoveries and LGDs. In all instances, cash flows are discounted to the point of default by using bespoke country and product level factors. For capital calculations, customised economic downturn adjustments are made to adjust losses to stressed conditions.

Retail EAD models

EAD models within retail portfolios are split into two main methodological categories. The general methodology is to derive product level credit conversion factors (CCFs) from historical balance migrations. These are frequently further segmented at a delinquency bucket level. The most sophisticated EAD models are based on behavioural factors, determining customer level CCFs from characteristics of the individual facility. For capital calculations, customised downturn adjustments are made to adjust for stressed conditions.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  117


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

    

 

 

The control mechanisms for the rating system

Model risk has been identified as a risk to be managed under the ERMF. Consequently, the GMRP and its supporting standards covering the end-to-end model life cycle are in place to support the management of risk models.

Key controls captured by the Model Risk Policy cover:

 

§   model governance is anchored in assigning accountabilities and responsibilities to each of the main stakeholders:

 

  model owner – each model must have a model owner who has overall accountability for the model

 

  model developers – support the model owner and drive development according to model owner defined scope/purpose

 

  Independent Validation Unit (IVU) – responsible for independent review and challenge of all models

 

  model approver – person/committee tasked with approving models for use following model owner sign-off and IVU review.

 

§   externally developed models are subject to the same governance standards as internal models

 

§   models are classified by Materiality (High/Low) and Complexity (Complex/Non-complex)

 

§   all models must be validated by IVU before initial implementation/use

 

§   models are subject to annual review by the model owner and periodic validation by IVU

 

§   all models must be recorded in the Group Models Database (GMD)

 

§   all models are assigned an intrinsic model risk score (RAG) based on the following five components of model risk:

 

  data quality – At inception validations, assessment of the quality and relevance of any data used in the model development process. For validations of approved models data quality, relevance assessments will be performed on the datasets used for annual reviews

 

  design and conceptual soundness – Assessment of conceptual soundness and appropriateness of the model design against its intended scope and purpose

 

  model design implementation – Testing of the model prototype to ensure the model is implemented as per the model documentation/ specification

 

  model use and performance – Assessment of model performance, given the design and intended uses of the model

 

  internal and external model-related requirements – Assessment of model risk arising from potential gaps against internal and external/ regulatory model-related requirements.

Further to these key controls, to ensure that the governance process is effective and that senior management is focused on the more material models, the list of models classified as ‘A*/High and Complex’ materiality are reviewed annually by the Executive Models Committee. If a model is found to perform sub-optimally, it may be subjected to a Post Model Adjustment (PMA) before approval for continued use is granted.

Table 70 for credit risk model characteristics shows modelled variables to calculate RWAs (PD, LGD, and EAD) at portfolio level, with number of models and their significance in terms of RWAs, model method or approach, numbers of years of data used, Basel asset class of the customer or client, and regulatory thresholds applied.

Selected features of material models

The table on the next page contains selected features of the Group’s most material credit risk models:

 

§   PD models listed in the table account for £100bn, or 54.9% of total IRB approach RWAs

 

§   LGD models listed in the table account for £117.1bn, or 64.3% of IRB approach RWAs

 

§   EAD models listed in the table account for £104.8bn, or 57.6% of IRB approach RWAs.
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  118


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

    

 

 

Table 70: IRB credit risk models’ selected features

 

Component  

modelled

  Business unit    Portfolio   

Size of

associated

portfolio

(RWAs)

  Model description and methodology  

Number of

years loss

data

   Basel asset classes measured  

Applicable

industry-wide

regulatory thresholds

PD

  Investment Bank Barclays Non-Core Personal and Corporate Banking Africa Banking    Publicly traded corporates    £23.9bn   Statistical model using a Merton-based methodology. It takes quantitative factors as inputs.   >10 years    Corporates   PD floor of 0.03%

PD

 

Investment Bank Barclays Non-Core Treasury Personal

and Corporate

Banking Africa Banking

   Customers rated by Moody’s and S&P    £25.8bn   Rating Agency Equivalent model converts agency ratings into estimated equivalent PIT default rates using credit cycles based on Moody’s data.   >10 years    Corporate, Financial institutions and Sovereigns   PD floor of 0.03% for corporates and institutions

PD

  Investment Bank Barclays Non-Core Personal and Corporate Banking    Corporate and SME customers with turnover < £20m    £5.2bn   Statistical model that uses regression techniques to derive relationship between observed default experience and a set of behavioural variables.   6-10 years    Corporates Corporate SME Retail SME   PD floor of 0.03%

PD

  Investment Bank Barclays Non-Core Personal and Corporate Banking    Corporate and SME customers with turnover >= £20m    £9bn   Statistically derived model sourced from an external vendor (Moody’s KMV).   6-10 years    Corporate Corporate SME   PD floor of 0.03%

PD

  Personal and Corporate Banking    Home Finance    £18.4bn   Statistical scorecards estimated using regression techniques, segmented along arrears status and portfolio type. They are further calibrated against long-run industry default data.   >10 years    Retail mortgages (residential and buy-to-let mortgages)   PD floor of 0.03%

PD

  Barclaycard    Barclaycard UK    £15.4bn   Statistical scorecards estimated using segmented regression techniques.   6-10 years    QRRE   PD floor of 0.03%

PD

  Africa Group    Absa Home Loans    £2.3bn   Statistical scorecards calibrated against long-run default data.   6-10 years    Retail mortgages (residential and buy-to-let mortgages)   PD floor of 0.03%

LGD

 

Investment Bank Barclays Non-Core Treasury Personal

and Corporate

Banking

   Corporates and Financial institutions    £49.0bn   Model based on a statistical regression that outputs a long run average LGD and a downturn LGD by estimating the expected value of recovery. Inputs include industry, seniority, instrument, collateral and country.   >10 years    Corporate Financial institutions    

LGD

  Personal and Corporate Banking   

All business

customers (excluding certain

specialised sectors)

   £32bn   Model is based on a function estimated using actual recoveries experience. It takes account of collateral value and an allowance for non-collateral recovery.   >10 years    Corporates Corporate SME Retail SME    

LGD

  Personal and Corporate Banking    Home Finance    £18.4bn   Data driven estimates of loss and probability of possession.   6-10 years    Retail mortgages (residential and buy-to-let mortgages)   The portfolio average downturn LGD is floored at 10%.

LGD

  Barclaycard    Barclaycard UK    £15.4bn   Statistical models combining segmented regression and other forecasting techniques.   6-10 years    QRRE    

LGD

  Africa Group    Absa Home Loans    £2.3bn   A data driven statistical approach estimates loss and probability of possession complemented with expert judgement where appropriate.   6-10 years    Retail mortgages (residential and buy-to-let mortgages)   LGD floor of 10% at portfolio level.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  119


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

 

 

Table 70: IRB credit risk models’ selected features continued

 

Component modelled

   Business unit    Portfolio   

Size of associated portfolio

(RWAs)

   Model description and methodology   

Number of

years loss

data

  

Basel asset

classes measured

  

Applicable

industry-wide

regulatory thresholds

EAD

   Investment Bank Barclays Non-Core Treasury    Corporates and Financial institutions    £27.3bn    The model applies product type specific Credit Conversion Factors (CCFs) and Product Credit Conversion Factors (PCCFs) to the drawn and undrawn amounts, consistent with experience. Where there is insufficient data, the entire drawn and undrawn amount is applied.    >10 years    Corporate Financial Institutions    EAD must be at least equivalent to current balance utilisation at account level.

EAD

   Personal and Corporate Banking    All business customers (excluding certain specialised sectors)    £41.4bn    Model estimates the proportion of undrawn exposures that would be used in a default situation, based on a statistical analysis of actual experience and dependent on factors such as product type and industry of the obligor. Expert judgement is used for off-balance sheet products.    6-10 years    Corporates Corporate SME Retail SME Institutions    EAD must be at least equivalent to current balance utilisation at account level.

EAD

   Personal and Corporate Banking    Home Finance    £18.4bn    Split by Main Mortgage and Reserve Mortgage. Uses statistical model to calculate Reserve Mortgage.    >10 years    Retail mortgages (residential and buy-to-let mortgages)    EAD must be at least equivalent to current balance utilisation at account level.

EAD

   Barclaycard    Barclaycard UK    £15.4bn    Model uses segmented statistical regression.    6-10 years    QRRE    EAD must be at least equivalent to current balance utilisation at account level.

EAD

   Africa Group    Absa Home Loans    £2.3bn   

Statistical approach using historic data to determine a credit conversion factor, which is applied to the non-defaulted assets in appropriate cohorts to forecast EAD.

 

   3-5 years    Retail mortgages (residential and buy-to-let mortgages)   

EAD must be at least equivalent to current balance utilisation at account level.

 

 

Credit model performance – estimated versus actual

The table on the following page shows the forecast PD, LGD and EAD from the IRB exposure models. They are compared with data from actual defaults. These comparisons are used to help assess whether the models are fit for purpose.

The PDs relate to the portfolios managed following the Advanced and Foundation IRB approaches. Individual portfolio PDs within an exposure class have been weighted at the same level as they were estimated (usually obligor or facility) to yield average PDs. The LGD percentages and EAD ratios are based on defaulted assets in Advanced approach portfolios (the Foundation approach does not estimate these figures but uses parameters stipulated by PRA regulations).

Difference with values used as inputs to the capital calculation

The forecasts shown in the table are based on the Group’s model calibrations using estimates as at the start of the twelve-month period compared with the actuals as at the end. The estimates and actuals represent the direct output from the models rather than outputs used in regulatory capital calculations that may be adjusted to apply more conservative assumptions to reflect:

 

§   PD values on a TTC basis factoring in the long-run default rate in comparison to the annual default rate presented in this table; LGD on a downturn basis, reflecting the impact of stress on collateral recovery

 

§   minimum values for certain parameters typically that imply higher severity than modelled and observed values. For example, retail loans secured by real estate collateral have a regulatory minimum LGD of 10%.

Note that post-model adjustments are applied only when they have the effect of increasing capital requirements.

Estimated versus actual analysis

Risk models are subject to the Group’s Risk Model policy which contains detailed guidance on the minimum standards for model development. For instance, PDs must be estimated over a sufficient period, show sufficient differentiation in predictions for different customers, show conservatism where data limitations exist, and follow prescriptive techniques. These standards are achieved via an independent validation process (using appropriately independent experts). Once validated and correctly implemented, models are subject to regular monitoring to ensure they can still be used. Comparing model estimates with actual default rates for PD and loss rates for LGD form part of this monitoring.

PD measures

§   Estimated PDs are simple averages at the level of single exposures (usually facilities for retail asset classes, and obligors for wholesale asset classes), for the total portfolio population. The estimate is a forward-looking average PD modelled at the beginning of the twelve-month period.

 

§   The PIT PD is used as a predicted measure in internal monitoring and annual validation of the models. In contrast, the capital calculation uses TTC PDs (not shown above), calibrated to long-run default averages with additional adjustments where modelled outputs display evidence of risk understatement (including credit expert overrides, regulatory adjustments, Basel III add-ons). Some retail portfolios use TTC PDs for this analysis, and these are also subject to regulatory adjustments, though only in cases where such adjustments increase the overall RWAs. The PIT measure is subject to under or over prediction depending on the relative position of the portfolio to the credit cycle.
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  120


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

    

 

 

§  Actual PD is the default rate for each asset class, which is the ratio of the defaulted population to the total population over the previous twelve months in terms of unit of exposure.

Average LGD measures

§  Estimated LGDs are derived from simple averages at facility or customer level at the time of default for the set of closed cases over the previous twelve months.

§  The PIT LGD measures are used as a predicted measure in internal monitoring and annual validation of the models. The capital

calculation uses downturn LGDs (not shown above) with additional adjustments where modelled outputs display evidence of risk understatement (including credit expert overrides, regulatory adjustments, and Basel III add-ons).

§  The actual LGD rate is the simple average observed loss rates of all the closed cases during the previous twelve months, regardless of the time of default.

EAD ratio is calculated as the estimated EAD, as a proportion of the actual EAD, for the defaulted population.

 

 

Table 71: Analysis of expected performance versus actual results

This table provides an overview of credit risk model performance, assessed by the analysis of average PDs, average LGDs and EAD ratios.

The table compares the raw model output to the actual experience in our portfolios. Such analysis is used to assess and enhance the adequacy and accuracy of models.

The raw outputs are subject to a number of adjustments before they are used in the calculation of capital, for example to allow for the position in the credit cycle and the impact of stress on recovery rates.

 

IRB Exposure Class\Year         
     PD of total portfolio           LGD of defaulted assets           EAD of defaulted assets     
       Estimate %             Actual %              Estimated %             Actual %              Estimate to actual ratio   

As at 31 December 2015

                  

Wholesale

                  

Central governments or central banks

                  

– Investment Bank

     0.40                                       

– Corporate Banking

     0.01                                       

– Barclays Africa Group

     0.35                   n/a         n/a           n/a   

Institutions

                  

– Investment Bank

     0.16                                       

– Corporate Banking

     0.01                                       

– Barclays Africa Group

     0.28                   n/a         n/a           n/a   

Corporates

                  

– Investment Bank

     0.63         0.38           34         18           1.06   

– Corporate Banking

     2.68         0.75           44         23           1.22   

– Barclays Africa Group

     1.53         2.03           n/a         n/a           n/a   

Retail

                  

SME

     5.72         4.99           78         78           1.04   

Secured by real estate collateral UK

     0.41         0.38           3         1           1.03   

Secured by real estate collateral Rest of World

     2.15         2.13           13         20           1.02   

Qualifying revolving retail

     1.70         1.80           78         67           1.01   

Other retail

     6.52         5.69             69         47             1.07   

As at 31 December 2014

                  

Wholesale

                  

Central governments or central banks

                  

– Investment Bank

     0.42                                       

– Corporate Banking

                                           

– Barclays Africa Group

     0.32                   n/a         n/a           n/a   

Institutions

                  

– Investment Bank

     0.24                                       

– Corporate Banking

     0.02                                       

– Barclays Africa Group

     0.26                   n/a         n/a           n/a   

Corporates

                  

– Investment Bank

     0.79         0.08           38         25           0.96   

– Corporate Banking

     2.60         1.30           37         22           1.29   

– Barclays Africa Group

     1.50         2.15           n/a         n/a           n/a   

Retail

                  

SME

     6.58         5.15           78         78           1.07   

Secured by real estate collateral UK

     0.52         0.43           3         2           1.02   

Secured by real estate collateral Rest of World

     2.20         2.37           9         23           1.02   

Qualifying revolving retail

     1.78         1.86           78         72           0.99   

Other retail

     6.28         5.86             66         58             1.02   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  121


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

    

 

 

Developments in 2015

Changes in estimated and actual credit risk metrics are largely driven by the business environment and the Group’s lending strategy, as detailed in this report. Additionally, management of IRB models and changes in regulatory approaches can have an impact as discussed below:

Corporates

§  Actual PD increased in the Investment Bank due to higher defaults primarily in the Energy sector.

§  Changes in actual year-on-year EAD and LGD values in the Investment Bank are typically large as they are based on a small population of resolved and defaulted cases, making them sensitive to individual events.

§  Actual PD for Corporate Banking decreased in 2015, due to the low number of defaults in the Corporate SME sub-class. Estimated model-driven PDs are high as the redeveloped model awaits implementation.

§  The actual LGD value in the Corporate Bank was lower than predicted as collateral values improved and recoveries were more timely.

§  Actual Africa Banking PD was higher than estimated PD. A new model has been implemented during 2015 which is expected to improve accuracy. RWAs adjustments are in place to compensate for the lower than predicted PD.

Secured by real estate collateral UK

§  The actual LGD in 2015 was based on a small population of resolved cases, as a number of cases subject to an industry-wide litigation procedure were excluded. These cases would typically lead to higher realised losses. This has resulted in a larger difference between estimate and actual LGD for the current year.

Secured by real estate collateral Rest of World

§  Actual LGDs were higher than predicted principally due to Africa Banking where the model has been redeveloped and awaits regulatory approval before implementation.

Qualifying revolving retail

§  Actual PDs were higher than predicted principally due to Africa Banking where the model has been redeveloped and awaits regulatory approval before implementation.

 

 

IRB Exposure Class\Year

  

     PD of total portfolio           LGD of defaulted assets           EAD of defaulted assets   
       Estimate %         Actual %             Estimated %         Actual %                   Estimate to actual ratio   

As at 31 December 2013

                  

Wholesale

                  

Central governments or central banks

                  

– Investment Bank

     0.31                                       

– Corporate Banking

                                           

– Africa Group

     0.41                   n/a         n/a           n/a   

Institutions

                  

– Investment Bank

     0.80         0.02                               

– Corporate Banking

     0.43                                       

– Africa Group

     0.52                   n/a         n/a           n/a   

Corporates

                  

– Investment Bank

     1.27         0.48           67         60           1.02   

– Corporate Banking

     2.14         2.50           40         28           1.05   

– Africa Group

     1.16         3.19           n/a         n/a           n/a   

Retail

                  

SME

     7.15         5.89           79         72           1.08   

Secured by real estate collateral UK

     0.61         0.49           3         2           1.02   

Secured by real estate collateral Rest of World

     1.85         2.09           9         23           1.03   

Qualifying revolving retail

     1.58         1.68           78         72           1.00   

Other retail

     6.39         6.07             64         67             1.07   

As at 31 December 2012

                  

Wholesale

                  

Central governments or central banks

                  

– Investment Bank

     0.36                                       

– Corporate Banking

     0.23                                       

– Africa Group

     0.74                   n/a         n/a           n/a   

Institutions

                  

– Investment Bank

     0.97         0.02                             1.43   

– Corporate Banking

     1.11                                       

– Africa Group

     1.05                   n/a         n/a           n/a   

Corporates

                  

– Investment Bank

     1.65         0.31           44         15           1.08   

– Corporate Banking

     2.75         1.70           45         45           1.11   

– Africa Group

     1.85         2.15           n/a         n/a           n/a   

Retail

                  

SME

     7.06         5.91           68         72           1.06   

Secured by real estate collateral UK

     0.67         0.53           4         1           1.02   

Secured by real estate collateral Rest of World

     1.98         2.10           14         24           1.03   

Qualifying revolving retail

     1.64         1.77           84         83           1.02   

Other retail

     7.44         4.81             62         60             1.01   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  122


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the Internal Ratings-Based Approach

    

 

 

IRB Exposure Class\Year

                                                    
           PD of total portfolio                      LGD of defaulted assets                      EAD of defaulted assets      
       Estimate %         Actual %               Estimated %         Actual %               Estimate to actual ratio   

As at 31 December 2011

                  

Wholesale

                  

Central governments or central banks

                  

– Investment Bank

     0.24         –                     –               

– Corporate Banking

     n/a         n/a             n/a         n/a             n/a   

– Africa Group

     0.85         –             n/a         n/a             n/a   

Institutions

                  

– Investment Bank

     1.02         0.01             67         64             0.88   

– Corporate Banking

     0.87         0.38                     –             1.00   

– Africa Group

     0.98         –             n/a         n/a             n/a   

Corporates

                  

– Investment Bank

     1.77         0.50             37         34             1.13   

– Corporate Banking

     3.53         1.76             50         51             1.06   

– Africa Group

     1.78         1.76             n/a         n/a             n/a   

Retail

                  

SME

     6.74         5.55             65         69             1.04   

Secured by real estate collateral UK

     0.68         0.57             4         1             1.02   

Secured by real estate collateral Rest of World

     2.13         2.84             8         15             1.02   

Qualifying revolving retail

     1.85         2.12             83         83             1.00   

Other retail

     7.89         6.36               63         60               1.01   

Note that some of the data underlying the table follows the business model monitoring cycle that does not precisely coincide with year ends; we do not consider this introduces a bias in a particular direction.

Note that LGD and EAD for Foundation IRB portfolios (wholesale Absa asset classes) are prescribed measures and not derived using credit risk models, hence do not form part of this report.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  123


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of counterparty credit risk and credit risk mitigation techniques

    

 

 

 

    

Counterparty credit risk arises from derivatives and similar contracts. This section details the specific aspects of the risk framework related to this type of credit risk. As credit risk mitigation is one of the principal uses of derivative contracts by banks, this is also discussed in this section.

 

  §   A discussion of credit risk mitigation (covering traditional credit risks) is included on pages 125 and 126.

 

  §   On page 127 a high level description of the types of exposures incurred in the course of Barclays’ activity supplements the analytical tables in pages 63 to 70.

 

  §   Mitigation techniques specific to counterparty credit risk are also discussed.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  124


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of counterparty credit risk and credit risk mitigation techniques

    

 

 

Credit risk mitigation

The Group employs a range of techniques and strategies to actively mitigate the counterparty credit risk. These can broadly be divided into three types:

 

§   netting and set-off

 

§   collateral

 

§   risk transfer

The Group has detailed policies in place to ensure that credit risk mitigation is appropriately recognised and recorded. The recognition of credit risk mitigation is subject to a number of considerations, including ensuring legal certainty of enforceability and effectiveness, ensuring the valuation and liquidity of the collateral is adequately monitored, and ensuring the value of the collateral is not materially correlated with the credit quality of the counterparty.

All three types of credit risk mitigation may be used by different areas of the Group for exposures with a full range of counterparties. For instance, Investment Bank, Corporate Banking and other business areas may all take property, cash or other physical assets as collateral for exposures to retailers, property companies or other client types.

Netting and set-off

In most jurisdictions in which the Group operates, credit risk exposures can be reduced by applying netting and set-off. In exposure terms, this credit risk mitigation technique has the largest overall impact on net exposure to derivative transactions, compared with other risk mitigation techniques.

For derivative transactions, the Group’s normal practice is to enter into standard master agreements with counterparties (e.g. ISDAs). These master agreements allow for netting of credit risk exposure to a counterparty resulting from a derivative transaction against the Group’s obligations to the counterparty in the event of default, and so produce a lower net credit exposure. These agreements may also reduce settlement exposure (e.g. for foreign exchange transactions) by allowing payments on the same day in the same currency to be set-off against one another.

Under IFRS, netting is permitted only if both of the following criteria are satisfied:

 

§   the entity currently has a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts

 

§   the entity intends either to settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.

Under US GAAP, netting is also permitted, regardless of a currently legally enforceable right of set-off and/or the intention to settle on a net basis, where there is a counterparty master agreement that would be enforceable in the event of bankruptcy.

Collateral

The Group has the ability to call on collateral in the event of default of the counterparty, comprising:

 

§   home loans: a fixed charge over residential property in the form of houses, flats and other dwellings. The value of collateral is impacted by property market conditions which drive demand and therefore value of the property. Other regulatory interventions on ability to repossess, longer period to repossession and granting of forbearance may also affect the collateral value

 

§   wholesale lending: a fixed charge over commercial property and other physical assets, in various forms

 

§   other retail lending: includes charges over motor vehicle and other physical assets; second lien charges over residential property, which are subordinate to first charges held either by the Group or by another party; and finance lease receivables, for which typically the Group retains legal title to the leased asset and has the right to repossess the asset on the default of the borrower
§   derivatives: the Group also often seeks to enter into a margin agreement (e.g. Credit Support Annex (CSA)) with counterparties with which the Group has master netting agreements in place. These annexes to master agreements provide a mechanism for further reducing credit risk, whereby collateral (margin) is posted on a regular basis (typically daily) to collateralise the mark to market exposure of a derivative portfolio measured on a net basis. The Group may additionally negotiate the receipt of an independent amount further mitigating risk by collateralising potential mark to market exposure moves

 

§   reverse repurchase agreements: collateral typically comprises highly liquid securities which have been legally transferred to the Group subject to an agreement to return them for a fixed price

 

§   financial guarantees and similar off-balance sheet commitments: cash collateral may be held against these arrangements.

For details of the fair value of collateral held, please refer to maximum exposure table in the Credit risk performance section of the 2015 Annual Report.

In exposure terms, the main portfolios that the Group takes collateral for are home loans and Reverse Repurchase Agreements with financial institutions.

Floating charges over receivables

The Group may also obtain collateral in the form of floating charges over receivables and inventory of corporate and other business customers. The value of this collateral varies from period to period depending on the level of receivables and inventory. It is impracticable to provide an estimate of the amount (fair value or nominal value) of this collateral. The Group may in some cases obtain collateral and other enhancements at a counterparty level, which are not specific to a particular class of financial instrument. The fair value of the credit enhancement gained has been apportioned across the relevant asset classes.

Collateral for derivative contracts

The collateral obtained for derivatives is predominantly cash or government bonds (G7 and other highly rated governments). Appropriate haircuts may be applied to non-cash collateral, which are agreed when the margin agreement (e.g. CSA) is negotiated.

Valuation of collateral and impact of market moves

Typically, assets other than cash are subject to regular revaluation (for example via physical review, linking to an external index or depreciation of the asset), to ensure they continue to achieve appropriate mitigation of risk. Customer agreements often include requirements for provision of additional collateral, should valuations decline or credit exposure increase, for example due to market moves impacting a derivative exposure.

The carrying value of non-cash collateral reflects the fair value of the physical assets, limited to the carrying value of the asset where the exposure is over-collateralised. In certain cases, where active markets or recent valuations of the assets are not available, estimates are used. For assets collateralised by residential or commercial property (and certain other physical assets), where it is not practicable to assess current market valuations of each underlying property, values reflect historical fair values updated for movements in appropriate external indices. For further information on LTV ratios in principal home loans portfolios, see the Risk performance – Credit risk section of the 2015 Annual Report.

Liens over fluctuating assets such as inventory and trade receivables, known as floating charges, over the assets of a borrower are monitored annually. The valuation of this type of collateral takes into account the ability to establish objectively a price or market value, the frequency with which the value can be obtained (including a professional appraisal or valuation), and the volatility or a proxy for the volatility of the value of the collateral.

For assets collateralised by traded financial instruments, values reflect MTM or mark to model values of those assets, applying a haircut where appropriate. A haircut is the valuation percentage applicable to each type of collateral and will be largely based on liquidity and price volatility of the underlying security.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  125


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of counterparty credit risk and credit risk mitigation techniques

        

 

 

Valuation of collateral – property

When property is taken as collateral, it is monitored to establish whether the current value is less than its value at origination. Monitoring is undertaken annually for commercial property or via linking to an external index for residential property. More frequent monitoring may be carried out where the property sector is subject to significant deterioration.

Deterioration is monitored principally by geography. Specific exercises to monitor property values may be undertaken where the property sector in a given geography has been subject to significant deterioration and where the Group has a material concentration of property collateral.

Monitoring may be undertaken either at a portfolio level (typically retail) or at an individual level (typically wholesale).

In retail businesses, monitoring on a portfolio level refers to a more frequent process of indexing collateral values on each individual loan, using a regional or national index, and updating LGD values. This monitoring may be a desk top assessment and need not necessarily include physical assessment of properties. In the event of charge-off, an individual valuation of the property is undertaken within 3 months of the charge-off event and subsequently undertaken at least every six months whilst in charge-off.

In wholesale, monitoring is undertaken by individuals who are not part of the sales / relationship part of the business. Where an appropriate local index is not available, property values are monitored on an individual basis as part of the annual review process for the loan. For larger loans, in addition to the regular annual review, the property value is reviewed by an independent valuer at least once every three years. This review is a more detailed assessment than the standard property monitoring review, and may include a fresh professional valuation. In addition, an independent valuer reviews the property valuation where information indicates that the value of the property may have declined materially relative to general market prices. In addition, trigger points are defined under which property values must be reviewed.

Valuation of collateral – distressed assets

The net realisable value from a distressed sale of collateral obtained by the Group upon default or insolvency of counterparty will in some cases be lower than the carrying value recognised. Assets obtained are normally sold, generally at auction, or realised in an orderly manner for the maximum benefit of the Group, the borrower’s other creditors and the borrower, in accordance with the relevant insolvency regulations. For business customers, in some circumstances, where excess funds are available after repayment in full of the outstanding loan, they are offered to any other, lower ranked, secured lenders. Any additional funds are returned to the borrower. The Group does not occupy repossessed properties for its business use or use assets obtained in its operations.

Additional revaluations are usually performed when a loan is moved to WL. Exceptions to this may be considered where it is clear a revaluation is not necessary, for instance where there is a very high margin of security or a recent valuation has been undertaken. Conversely, a material reduction in the value of collateral held represents an increase in credit risk and will often cause a loan to be placed on the WL.

Any one of the above events may also trigger a test for impairment, depending on individual circumstances of the loan. When calculating impairment, the difference between an asset’s carrying amount and the present value of all estimated cash flows discounted at the original effective interest rate will be recognised as impairment. Such cash flows include the estimated fair value of the collateral, which reflects the results of the monitoring and review of collateral values as detailed above and valuations undertaken as part of the Group’s impairment process.

Whether property values are updated as part of the annual review process, or by indexation of collateral values, the updated collateral values feed into the calculation of risk parameters which, in turn, feed into identified and unidentified impairment calculations at each balance sheet date.

Trends in LLRs incorporate the impact of any decrease in the fair value of collateral held.

Risk transfer

A range of instruments including guarantees, credit insurance, credit derivatives and securitisation can be used to transfer credit risk from one counterparty to another. These mitigate credit risk in two main ways:

 

§   if the risk is transferred to a counterparty which is more credit worthy than the original counterparty, then overall credit risk is reduced

 

§   where recourse to the first counterparty remains, both counterparties must default before a loss materialises. This is less likely than the default of either counterparty individually so credit risk is reduced.

Risk transfer can also be used to reduce risk concentrations within portfolios lowering the impact of stress events.

Risk transfer transactions are undertaken with consideration to whether the collateral provider is correlated with the exposure, the credit worthiness of the collateral provider and legal certainty of enforceability and effectiveness. Where credit risk mitigation is deemed to transfer credit risk, this exposure is appropriately recorded against the credit risk mitigation provider.

In exposure terms, risk transfer is used most extensively as a credit risk mitigation technique for wholesale loans and derivative financial instruments.

Off-balance sheet risk mitigation

The Group applies fundamentally the same risk management policies for off-balance sheet risks as it does for its on-balance sheet risks. In the case of commitments to lend, counterparties/customers will be subject to the same credit management policies as for loans and advances. Collateral may be sought depending on the strength of the counterparty and the nature of the transaction.

Recognition of credit risk mitigation in capital calculations

Credit risk mitigation is used to reduce credit risk associated with an exposure, which may reduce potential losses in the event of obligor default or other specified credit events.

Credit risk mitigation that meets certain regulatory criteria may be used to improve risk parameters and reduce RWA consumption against a given obligor. Collateral that meets these regulatory conditions is referred to as eligible collateral. Eligibility criteria are specified in articles 195 to 204 of the Capital Regulations Requirement (CRR).

The Group’s policies and standards set out criteria for the recognition of collateral as eligible credit risk mitigation and are designed to be fully consistent with all applicable local regulations and regulatory permissions.

Where regulatory capital is calculated under AIRB regulations, the benefit of collateral is generally taken by adjusting LGDs. For standardised portfolios, the benefit of collateral is taken using the financial collateral comprehensive method: supervisory volatility adjustments approach.

For instruments that are deemed to transfer credit risk, in AIRB portfolios the protection is generally recognised by using the PD and LGD of the protection provider.

For exposures treated under the standardised approach, the impact of eligible credit risk mitigation is primarily recognised by reducing the EAD associated with the exposure that benefits from the mitigation.

Managing concentrations within credit risk mitigation

Credit risk mitigation taken by the Group to reduce credit risk may result in credit or market risk concentrations.

Guarantees that are treated as eligible credit risk mitigation are marked as an exposure against the guarantor and aggregated with other credit exposure to the guarantor. Limit monitoring at the counterparty level is then used for monitoring of concentrations in line with Group policy.

Commercial real estate lending is another potential source of concentration risk arising from the use of credit risk mitigation. The portfolio is regularly reviewed to assess whether a concentration in a particular region, industry or property type exists, and portfolio limits are in place to control the level of exposure to commercial, residential, investment and development activity.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  126


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of counterparty credit risk and credit risk mitigation techniques

        

 

 

Counterparty credit risk

Derivative counterparty credit exposures

The Group enters into financial instruments that are traded or cleared on an exchange, including interest rate swaps, futures and options on futures. Holders of exchange traded instruments provide daily margins with cash or other securities at the exchange, to which the holders look for ultimate settlement.

The Group also enters into financial instruments that are traded over the counter, rather than on a recognised exchange. These instruments range from standardised transactions in derivative markets, to trades where the specific terms are tailored to the requirements of the Group’s counterparties. In most cases, industry standard documentation is used, most commonly in the form of a master agreement, with individual transaction confirmations. The existence of a signed master agreement is intended to give the Group protection in situations where the Group’s counterparty is in default.

Counterparty credit exposure arises from the risk that parties are unable to meet their payment obligations under certain financial contracts such as derivatives, securities financing transactions (e.g. repurchase agreements), or long settlement transactions.

A Monte Carlo simulation engine is used to estimate the Potential Future Exposure (PFE) to derivative and securities financing counterparties. The exposure simulation model simulates future market states and the MTM of the derivative transactions under those states. Simulated exposures including the effect of credit mitigants such as netting, collateral and mandatory break clauses can then be generated.

Credit limits for CCR are assessed and allocated using the PFE measure. A number of factors are taken into account when setting credit limits for individual counterparties, including but not limited to the credit quality and nature of the counterparty the rationale for the trading activity entered into and any wrong-way risk considerations.

The expected exposures generated by this engine are also used as an input into both internal and regulatory capital calculations covering CCR.

‘Wrong-way risk’ in a trading exposure arises when there is significant correlation between the underlying asset and the counterparty, which in the event of default would lead to a significant MTM loss to the counterparty. Specific wrong-way risk trades, which are self-referencing or reference to other entities within the same counterparty group, require approval by a senior credit officer. The exposure to the counterparty will reflect the additional risk generated by these transactions.

Derivative CCR (credit value adjustments)

As the Group participates in derivative transactions it is exposed to CCR, which is the risk that a counterparty will fail to make the future payments agreed in the derivative contract. This is considered as a separate risk to the volatility of the MTM payment flows. Modelling this counterparty risk is an important part of managing credit risk on derivative transactions.

The counterparty risk arising under derivative transactions is taken into account when reporting the fair value of derivative positions. The adjustment to the value is known as credit value adjustment (CVA). It is the difference between the value of a derivative contract with a risk-free counterparty and that of a contract with the actual counterparty. This is equivalent to the cost of hedging the counterparty risk in the Credit Default Swap (CDS) market.

CVAs for derivative positions are calculated as a function of the expected exposure, which is the average of future hypothetical exposure values for a single transaction or group of transactions with the same counterparty, the credit spread for a given horizon and the LGD.

The expected exposure is calculated using Monte Carlo simulations of risk factors that may affect the valuation of the derivative transactions in order to simulate the exposure to the counterparty through time. These simulated exposures include the effect of credit mitigants such as netting, collateral and mandatory break clauses. Counterparties with appropriate credit mitigants will generate a lower expected exposure profile compared to counterparties without credit mitigants in place for the same derivative transactions.

Derivative netting and collateral arrangements

Credit risk from derivatives is mitigated where possible through netting agreements whereby derivative assets and liabilities with the same counterparty can be offset. Group policy requires all netting arrangements to be legally documented. The ISDA Master Agreement is the Group’s preferred agreement for documenting OTC derivatives. It provides the contractual framework within which dealing activities across a full range of OTC products are conducted, and contractually binds both parties to apply close-out netting across all outstanding transactions covered by an agreement if either party defaults or other predetermined events occur. The majority of the Group’s OTC derivative exposures are covered by ISDA master netting and ISDA CSA collateral agreements.

Collateral is obtained against derivative assets, depending on the creditworthiness of the counterparty and/or nature of the transaction. Any collateral taken in respect of OTC trading exposures will be subject to a ‘haircut’, which is negotiated at the time of signing the collateral agreement. A haircut is the valuation percentage applicable to each type of collateral and will be largely based on liquidity and price volatility of the underlying security. The collateral obtained for derivatives is predominantly either cash, direct debt obligation government (G14+) bonds denominated in the domestic currency of the issuing country, debt issued by supranationals or letters of credit issued by an institution with a long-term unsecured debt rating of A+/A3 or better. Where the Group has ISDA master agreements, the collateral document will be the ISDA CSA. The collateral document must give Barclays the power to realise any collateral placed with it in the event of the failure of the counterparty.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  127


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

    

 

 

    

 

This section describes the governance structure specific to the management of market risks, as well as a discussion of measurement techniques.

 

§  Market risks are varied, and a range of techniques must be used to manage them. From page 129 we provide an overview of the market risks we incur across the Group

 

§  The governance structure specific to market risks is discussed on pages 130 and 131.

 

The rest of the section is divided into traded, non-traded and other risks:

 

§  Traded market risk, the risk of the Group being impacted by changes in the level or volatility of positions in the trading book, is covered on pages 131 to 136. Measurement techniques such as VaR, are discussed, as well as techniques applied when statistical techniques are not appropriate

 

§  Non-traded market risks, the risk that the Group is unable to fully hedge its banking book, mainly arising as a result of lending and deposit taking activities, are discussed on pages 136 and 137, along with a discussion of how they are managed

 

§  Other market risks, such as those associated with Barclays pension obligations, are analysed separately from page 137.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  128


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

    

 

 

 

Introduction to the management of market risk

 

The risk of a reduction to earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions or as a consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity funding pools.

 

Overview

Traded market risk

Traded market risk arises primarily as a result of client facilitation in wholesale markets, involving market making activities, risk management solutions and execution of syndications. Upon execution of a trade with a client, the Group will look to hedge against the risk of the trade moving in an adverse direction. Mismatches between client transactions and hedges result in market risk due to changes in asset prices.

Non-traded market risk

Banking book operations generate non-traded market risk, primarily through interest rate risk arising from the sensitivity of net interest margins to changes in interest rates. The principal banking businesses engage in internal derivative trades with Treasury to manage their interest rate risk to within its defined risk appetite. However, the businesses remain susceptible to market risk from four key sources:

§  prepayment risk: balance run-off may be faster or slower than expected, due to customer behaviour in response to general economic conditions or interest rates. This can lead to a mismatch between the actual balance of products and the hedges executed with Treasury based on initial expectations

§  recruitment risk: the volume of new business may be lower or higher than expected, requiring the business to unwind or execute hedging transactions with Treasury at different rates than expected

§  residual risk and margin compression: the business may retain a small element of interest rate risk to facilitate the day-to-day management of customer business. Additionally, in the current low rate environment, deposits on which the Group sets the interest rate are exposed to margin compression. This is because for any further fall in base rate the Group must absorb an increasing amount of the rate move in its margin

§  lag risk: the risk of being unable to re-price products immediately after a change in interest rates due to mandatory notification periods. This is highly prevalent in managed rates savings product (e.g. Every Day Saver) where customers must be informed in writing of any planned reduction in their savings rates.

Pension risk

The Group maintains a number of defined benefit pension schemes for past and current employees. The ability of the pension fund to meet the projected pension payments is maintained principally through investments.

Pension risk arises because the estimated market value of the pension fund assets might decline; investment returns might reduce; or the estimated value of the pension liabilities might increase as a result of changes to the market process. The Group monitors the market risks arising from its defined benefit pension schemes, and works with the Trustees to address shortfalls. In these circumstances, The Group could be required or might choose to make extra contributions to the pension fund. The Group’s main defined benefit scheme was closed to new entrants in 2012.

Insurance risk

Insurance risk is managed within Africa Banking, where four categories of insurance risk are recognised: short-term insurance underwriting risk, life insurance underwriting risk, life insurance mismatch risk, and life and insurance investment risk.

Insurance risk arises when:

§  aggregate insurance premiums received from policyholders under a portfolio of insurance contracts are inadequate to cover the claims arising from those policies and the expenses associated with the management of the portfolio of policies and claims

§  premiums are not invested to adequately match the duration, timing and size of expected claims

§  unexpected fluctuations in claims arise or excessive exposure (e.g. in individual or aggregate exposures) relative to capacity is retained in the entity.

Insurance entities also incur market risk (on the investment of accumulated premiums and shareholder capital), credit risk (counterparty exposure on investments and reinsurance transactions), liquidity risk and operational risk from their investments and financial operations.

 

 

Organisation and structure

 

LOGO

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  129


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

    

 

 

Overview of the business market risk control structure

 

LOGO

 

Organisation and structure

Traded market risk in the businesses resides primarily in Investment Bank, Treasury, Africa Banking and Non-Core. These businesses have the mandate to incur traded market risk. Non-traded market risk is mostly incurred in PCB, Barclaycard and Treasury.

Market risk oversight and challenge is provided by business committees, Group committees, including the Market Risk Committee and Group Market Risk. The chart above gives an overview of the business control structure.

Roles and responsibilities

The objectives of market risk management are to:

 

§   understand and control market risk by robust measurement, limit setting, reporting and oversight

 

§   facilitate business growth within a controlled and transparent risk management framework

 

§   ensure that traded market risk in the businesses is controlled according to the allocated appetite

 

§   control non-traded market risk in line with approved appetite

 

§   control insurance risk in line with approved appetite

 

§   support the Non-Core strategy of asset reductions by ensuring that market risk remains within agreed risk appetite.

To ensure the above objectives are met, a well-established governance structure is in place to manage these risks consistent with the ERMF (evaluate-respond-monitor). See page 96 on risk management strategy, governance and risk culture.

The BRC recommends market risk appetite to the Board for their approval. The Market Risk Principal Risk Officer (MRPRO) is responsible for the Market Risk Control Framework and, under delegated authority from the CRO, agrees with the BCROs a limit framework within the context of the approved market risk appetite.

Across the Group, market risk oversight and challenge is provided by business committees, Group committees, including the Group Market Risk Committee and Group Market Risk. The chart above gives an overview of the business control structure.

The Group Market Risk Committee approves and makes recommendations concerning the Group-wide market risk profile. This includes overseeing the operation of the Market Key Risk Frameworks and associated standards and policies; reviewing arising market or regulatory issues, limits and utilisation; and risk appetite levels to the Board. The Committee is chaired by the MRPRO and attendees include the business heads of market risk, business aligned risk managers, and senior managers from Group Market Risk and Internal Audit.

The head of each business is accountable for all market risks associated with its activities, while the head of the market risk team covering each business is responsible for implementing the key risk control frameworks for market risk.

Risk management in the setting of strategy

Appetite for market risk is recommended by the risk function to BRC for agreement by the Board. Mandate and scales are set to control levels of market risk and ensure the Group remains within the BRC approved risk appetite. The Group runs an annual Group-wide stress testing exercise which aims to simulate the dynamics of exposures across the Group and cover all risk factors. The exercise is also designed to measure the impact to the Group’s fundamental business plan, and is used to manage the wider Group’s strategy.

See pages 105 and 106 for more detail on the role of risk in the setting of strategy.

Market risk culture

Market risk managers are independent from the businesses they cover, and their line management reports into the CRO. This embeds a risk culture with strong adherence to limits that support Group-wide risk appetite. See pages 99 to 101 for more detail on risk culture.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  130


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

    

 

 

Management of traded market risk, mitigation and hedging policies

The governance structure helps ensure all market risks that the Group is exposed to are well managed and understood.

Traded market risk is generated primarily as a result of market making activities, syndications and providing risk management solutions to clients. Group Treasury supports the businesses in managing their interest rate risk. Positions will contribute both to market risk limits and regulatory capital if relevant.

As part of the continuous monitoring of the risk profile, Market Risk meets with the businesses to discuss the risk profile on a regular basis. The outcome of these reviews includes further detailed assessments of event risk via stress testing, risk mitigation and risk reduction.

Traded market risk measurement – management view

Market risk management measures

A range of complementary approaches to measure traded market risk are used which aim to capture the level of losses that the bank is exposed to due to unfavourable changes in asset prices. The primary tools to control the firm’s exposures are:

 

Measure

   Description

Management Value at Risk (VaR)

   An estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements, if the current positions were to be held unchanged for one business day.

Primary stress tests

   An estimate of potential losses that might arise from severe market moves or scenarios impacting key liquid market risk exposures.

Secondary stress tests

   Modelled losses from unfavourable market movements to illiquid market risk exposures.

Business scenario

   Multi asset scenario analysis of severe, but

stresses

   plausible events that may impact the market risk exposures of the Investment Bank.

The use of Management VaR for traded market risk is broader than the application for use of VaR for regulatory capital, and captures standardised, advanced and certain banking books where traded market risks are deemed to exist. The wider scope of Management VaR is what the Group deems as material market risk exposures which may have a detrimental impact on the performance of the trading business. The scope used in Regulatory VaR (see page 133) is narrower as it applies only to trading book positions as approved by the PRA.

Stress testing and scenario analysis are also an important part of the risk management framework, to capture potential risk that may arise in severe but plausible events.

Management VaR

Estimates the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements, over one day for a given confidence level:

 

§   differs from the Regulatory VaR used for capital purposes in scope, confidence level and horizon

 

§   back testing is performed to ensure the model is fit for purpose.

VaR is an estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements if the current positions were to be held unchanged for one business day. For internal market risk management purposes, a historical simulation methodology with a two-year equally weighted historical period, at the 95% confidence level is used for all trading books and some banking books. Risk factors driving VaR are grouped into key risk types as follows:

Risk factor

   Description

Interest rate

   Changes in the level or shape of interest rate expectations can impact prices of interest rate sensitive assets, such as bonds and derivatives instruments, such as interest rate swaps.

Spread

   Difference between bond yields and swaps rates that arises when a business has positions in both bonds and interest rate/inflation derivatives instruments. Both assets may trade at different levels but are fundamentally exposed to similar risk.

Foreign exchange

   The impact of changes in foreign exchange rates and volatilities.

Equity

   Risk due to changes in equity prices, volatilities and dividend yields, for example as part of market making activities, syndication or underwriting of initial public offerings.

Commodity

   Arises primarily from providing hedging solutions to clients and access to financial investors to a range of commodity products on both a derivative and physical basis, and involves movements in the absolute and shape of the spot and forward curves.

Inflation

   Arises from the impact of changes in inflation rates and volatilities on cash instruments and derivatives. This arises as part of market marking activities, whereby the Group may be exposed to changes in inflation rates, for example, market making syndications for inflation linked securities.

Traded credit

   Arises from the uncertainty of credit quality impacting prices of assets, for example positions such as corporate bonds, securitised products and credit based derivative instruments, including credit default swaps.

Basis

   The impact of changes in interest rate tenor basis (e.g. the basis between swaps vs 3M LIBOR and swaps vs 6M LIBOR) and cross-currency basis and is primarily generated as a result of market making activities.

In some instances, historical data is not available for particular market risk factors for the entire look-back period, for example, complete historical data would not be available for our equity security following an initial public offering. In these cases, market risk managers will proxy the unavailable market risk factor data with available data for a related market risk factor.

The output of the Management VaR model can be readily tested through back testing. This checks instances where actual losses exceed the predicted potential loss estimated by the VaR model. If the number of instances is higher than expected, where actual losses exceed the predicted potential loss estimated by the VaR model, this may indicate limitations with the VaR calculation, for example, a risk factor that would not be adequately captured by the model.

The Management VaR model in some instances may not appropriately measure some market risk exposures, especially for market moves that are not directly observable via prices. Market risk managers are required to identify risks which are not adequately captured in VaR (‘risks not in VaR’ or ‘RNIVs’, discussed below).

When reviewing VaR estimates, the following considerations are taken into account:

 

§   the historical simulation uses the most recent two years of past data to generate possible future market moves, but the past may not be a good indicator of the future

 

§   the one-day time horizon may not fully capture the market risk of positions that cannot be closed out or hedged within one day

 

§   VaR is based on positions as at close of business and consequently, it is not an appropriate measure for intra-day risk arising from a position bought and sold on the same day

 

§   VaR does not indicate the potential loss beyond the VaR confidence level.
 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  131


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

 

 

Limits are applied at the total level as well as by risk factor type, which are then cascaded down to particular trading desks and businesses by the market risk management function.

See page 74 for a review of Management VaR in 2015.

Primary stress tests

§   Key tool used by management to measure liquid market risks from extreme market movements or scenarios in each major trading asset class.

Stress testing provides an estimate of potential significant future losses that might arise from extreme market moves or scenarios. Primary stress tests apply stress moves to key liquid risk factors for each of the major trading asset classes, namely:

 

§   interest rates: shock to the level and structure of interest rates and inflation across currencies

 

§   credit: impact on traded corporate credit exposures, including across rating grades, geography, sectors and products

 

§   foreign exchange: impact of unfavourable moves in currency prices and volatility

 

§   equity: shocks to share prices including exposures to specific markets and sectors

 

§   commodities: adverse commodity price changes across both physical and derivative markets

 

§   securitised products: stresses to securitised structures and associated hedges.

Primary stresses apply moves to liquid assets incorporating up to 10 days holding period. Shock scenarios are determined by a combination of observed extreme historical moves and forward looking elements as appropriate.

Primary stresses are calculated for each asset class on a standalone basis. Risk managers calculate several stress scenarios and communicate the results to senior managers to highlight concentrations and the level of exposures. Primary stress loss limits are applied across the trading businesses and is a key market risk control.

Secondary stress tests

§   Key tool used by management to measure illiquid market risks from extreme market movements or scenarios in each major trading asset class.

Secondary stress tests are used in measuring potential losses arising from market risks that are not captured in the primary stress tests. These may relate to financial instruments or risk exposures which are not readily or easily tradable or markets that are naturally sensitive to a rapid deterioration in market conditions.

For each asset class, secondary stresses are aggregated to a single stress loss which allows the business to manage its liquid and illiquid risk factors. Limits against secondary stress losses are also applied, which allows the firm to manage and control the level of illiquid risk factors.

Stresses are specific to the exposure held and are calibrated on both observed extreme moves and some forward-looking elements as appropriate.

Business scenario stresses

§   Key tool used by management to measure aggregated losses across the entire trading book as a result of extreme forward-looking scenarios encompassing simultaneous shocks to multiple asset classes.

Business scenario stresses apply simultaneous shocks to all risk factors assessed by applying changes to foreign exchange rates, interest rates, credit spreads, commodities and equities to the entire portfolio, for example, the impact of a rapid and extreme slowdown in the global economy. The measure shows results on a multi-asset basis across all trading exposures. Business scenarios are used for risk appetite monitoring purposes and are useful in identifying concentrations of exposures and highlighting areas that may provide some diversification.

The estimated impact on market risk exposures are calculated and reported by the market risk management function on a frequent and

regular basis. The stress scenario and the calibration of the shocks are also reviewed by market risk managers periodically for its relevance considering the market environment.

Scenarios such as a global recession, deterioration in the availability of liquidity, contagion effects of a slowdown in one of the major economies, slowdown in a major economic region and a historical event scenario are examples of business scenarios. If necessary, market event-specific scenarios are also calculated, such as, a unilateral decision to exit the Eurozone by a member country, and the impact of a disorderly exit of quantitative easing programmes, including unexpected rapid and continuous interest rate rises as a result.

See page 75 for a review of business scenario stresses in 2015.

Traded market risk measurement – regulatory view

Regulatory view of traded positions

For regulatory purposes, the trading book is defined as one that consists of all positions in CRD financial instruments and commodities held either with trading intent, or in order to hedge other elements of trading, and which are either free of any restrictive covenants on their tradability, or able to be hedged. A CRD financial instrument is defined as a contract that gives rise to both a financial asset of one party and a financial liability or equity instrument of another party.

All of the below regulatory measures, including the standardised approach, generate market risk capital requirements, in line with the regulatory requirements set out in the Capital Requirements Directive (‘CRD IV’) and Regulation. Positions which cannot be included in the trading book are included within the banking book and generate risk capital requirements in line with this treatment.

Inclusion of exposures in the regulatory trading book

The Group maintains a Trading Book Policy, which defines the minimum requirements a business must meet to run trading positions and the process by which positions are allocated to trading or banking books. Trading intent is a key element in deciding whether a position should be treated as a trading or banking book exposure.

Positions in the trading book are subject to market risk capital, computed using models where regulatory approval has been granted, otherwise the market risk capital requirement is calculated using standard rules as defined in the Capital Requirement Regulation (CRR), part of the CRD IV package. If any of the criteria specified in the policy are not met for a position, then that position must be allocated to the banking book.

Most of the Group’s market risk regulatory models are assigned the highest model materiality rating. Consequently, the Regulatory VaR model is subject to annual re-approval at the Executive Models Committee (EMC), which is chaired by the CRO and the GFD. EMC considers evidence of model suitability provided by the model owner, as well as an independent validation conducted by the Independent Validation Unit. The following table summarises the models used for market risk regulatory purposes and the applicable regulatory thresholds.

Valuation standards

CRR article 105 defines regulatory principles which need to be applied to fair value assets and liabilities, in order to determine a prudent valuation.

The Prudent Valuation Adjustment (PVA) is applied to accounting fair values where there are a range of plausible alternative valuations. It is calculated in accordance with Article 105 of the Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR), and includes (where relevant) adjustments for the following factors: unearned credit spreads, close-out costs, operational risk, market price uncertainty, early termination, investing and funding costs, future administrative costs and model risk. The PVA includes adjustment for all fair valued financial instruments and commodities, irrespective of whether they are in the trading or banking book.

Page 290 of the Annual Report sets out the valuation control framework for accounting valuations and the related responsibilities of the Finance-Product Control Valuations function and the Valuation Committee. This function and committee are also responsible for the oversight of the PVA and ensuring compliance with article 105 of the CRR.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  132


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

 

 

Regulatory measures for traded market risk

There are a number of regulatory measures which the Group has permission to use in calculating regulatory capital (internal models approval). These are listed below:

 

Measure

   Definition

Regulatory Value at

Risk (VaR)

   An estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements calibrated to 99% confidence interval 10-day holding period.

Stressed Value at

Risk (SVaR)

   An estimate of the potential loss arising from a twelve-month period of significant financial stress calibrated to 99% confidence interval 10-day holding period.

Incremental Risk

Charge (IRC)

   An estimate of the incremental risk arising from rating migrations and defaults, beyond what is already captured in specific market risk VaR for the non-correlation trading portfolio. Uses a 99.9% confidence level and a one-year horizon.

All Price Risk (APR)

   An estimate of all the material market risk, including rating migration and default for the correlation trading portfolio.

Regulatory VaR

§   Estimates the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements.

 

§   Regulatory VaR differs from the management approach in the following respects.

 

VaR Variable

  Regulatory   Management

Confidence interval

  99%   95%

Scope

  As approved by the regulator (PRA)   Management view of market risk exposures. Includes trading books and banking books exposed to price risk

Look-back period

  2 years   2 years

Liquidity Horizon (holding period)

  10 days   1 day

Regulatory VaR allows oversight of the total potential losses, at a given confidence level, of those trading books which received approval from the regulator to be covered via an internal model. Regulatory VaR levels contribute to the calculation of the market risk RWAs.

Management VaR allows the bank to supervise the total market risk across the Group, including all trading books and some banking books.

Management VaR is also utilised for internal capital model (economic capital).

Regulatory VaR is fundamentally the same as the Management VaR (see page 74), with the key differences listed above.

The model is complemented with RNIVs, as described on page 136. See page 76 for significant RNIVs over the year.

Stressed Value at Risk (SVaR)

§   Estimates the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements in a stressed environment.

 

§   Identical to Regulatory VaR, but calibrated over a one-year stressed period.

Regulatory capital is allocated to individual businesses. For regulatory capital calculation purposes the Group computes a market risk capital requirement based on a ten-day, 99% VaR metric calibrated to a period of significant financial stress. This Stressed VaR (‘SVaR’) capital requirement is added to the market risk capital requirement arising from regulatory VaR, the Incremental Risk Charge and the All Price Risk on an undiversified basis.

The SVaR model must be identical to the VaR model used by the Group, with the exception that the SVaR model must be calibrated to a one-year period of significant financial stress (‘the SVaR period’). The Group selects the SVaR period to be a one-year period that maximises the sum of general market risk Regulatory VaR and specific market risk Regulatory VaR for positions in scope of regulatory approval. The SVaR period is reviewed on a quarterly basis or when required by material changes in market conditions or the trading portfolio.

SVaR cannot be meaningfully backtested as it is not sensitive to current market conditions. Many market risk factors with complete historical data over a two-year period may not have complete data covering the SVaR period and consequently, more proxies may be required for SVaR than for VaR. The SVaR metric itself has the same strengths and weaknesses as the Group’s VaR model.

Incremental Risk Charge (IRC)

§   Captures risk arising from rating migrations and defaults for traded debt instruments incremental to that already captured by Regulatory VaR and SVaR.

IRC captures the risk arising from ratings migrations or defaults in the traded credit portfolio. IRC measures this risk at a 99.9% confidence level with a one-year holding period and applies to all positions in scope for specific risk including sovereign exposure.

The Group’s IRC model simulates default and ratings transition events for individual names. The behaviour of names is correlated with one another to simulate a systemic factor to model the possibility of multiple downgrades or defaults. The correlations between non-sovereign names are based on the Basel-defined correlations stipulated in the IRB approach to measuring credit risk capital, with a fixed correlation between sovereign names.

The Group’s IRC model simulates the impact of a ratings transition by estimating the improvement or deterioration in credit spreads resulting from the transition and assumes that the historically observed average change in credit spreads (measured in relative terms) resulting from ratings transitions provides an accurate estimate of likely widening or tightening of credit spreads in future transitions. For each position, the model computes the impact of spread moves up or down at pre-specified relative movements, and the actual impact is obtained by interpolating or extrapolating the actual spread move from these pre-computed values.

The Group’s IRC model assumes that ratings transitions, defaults and any spread increases occur on an instantaneous basis.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  133


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

 

 

All Price Risk (APR)

Captures all market risks affecting the correlation trading portfolio.

APR covers the correlation trading portfolio and is intended to adequately capture all risk factors relevant to corporate Nth-to-default (on a basket of referenced names) and tranched credit derivatives. The capital requirement is based on a 99.9% confidence interval over a one-year holding period. The model generates a scenario based on a Monte Carlo simulation and revalues the portfolio under the simulated market scenario. The model captures the following risk factors in the correlation trading portfolio:

§   default and ratings migration over a one-year time horizon

 

§   credit spread volatility

 

§   recovery risk: uncertainty of the recoverable value under default

 

§   correlation risk

 

§   basis risk: basis between credit indices and its underlying constituents

 

§   hedge slippage: portfolio rebalancing assumption.

The Group’s APR model is based on the IRC model but also captures market risks not related to transition or default events, such as movements in credit spreads or correlations. These risk factors are included as part of the Monte Carlo simulation using distributions calibrated to historically observed moves.

 

Table 72: Market risk models selected features

  

Component modelled

  

Number of significant models and

size of associated portfolio (RWAs)

   Model description and methodology    Applicable regulatory thresholds

Regulatory VaR

   1 model; £ 3.9bn    Equally-weighted historical simulation of potential daily P&L arising from market moves    Regulatory VaR is computed with 10-day holding period and 99% confidence level

SVaR

   1 model; £6.9bn    Same methodology as used for VaR model, but using a different time series    Regulatory SVaR is computed with 10-day holding period and 99% confidence level

IRC

   1 model; £1.6bn    Monte Carlo simulation of profit and loss arising from ratings migrations and defaults    IRC is computed with one-year holding period and 99.9% confidence level

APR

   1 model; £ 0.1bn    Same approach as IRC, but it incorporates market-driven movements in spreads and correlations for application to correlation trading portfolios.    APR is computed with one-year holding period and 99.9% confidence level. As required in CRD IV, the APR charge is subject to a floor set with reference to standard rules charge

See page 75 for a review of regulatory measures in 2015.

 

Regulatory back testing

Back testing is the method by which the Group checks and affirms that its procedures for estimating VaR are reasonable and serve its purpose of estimating the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements. The back testing process is a regulatory requirement and seeks to estimate the performance of the regulatory VaR model. Performance is measured by the number of exceptions to the model i.e. net trading P&L loss in one trading day is greater than the estimated VaR for the same trading day. The Group’s procedures could be underestimating VaR if exceptions occur regularly (a 99% confidence interval indicates that one exception will occur in 100 days).

Back testing is performed at a legal entity level, sub-portfolio levels and business-aligned portfolios (shown in the table below and in the charts on the next page) on the Group’s regulatory VaR model. Regulatory back testing compares Regulatory VaR at 99% confidence level (one-day holding period equivalent) to actual and hypothetical changes in portfolio value as defined in CRR Article 366. The consolidated Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Capital Securities Ltd is the highest level of consolidation for the VaR models that are used in the calculation of regulatory capital.

A back testing exception is generated when a loss is greater than the daily VaR for any given day.

As defined by the PRA, a green model is consistent with a good working VaR model and is achieved for models that have four or fewer back testing exceptions in a 12-month period. Back testing counts the number of days when a loss exceeds the corresponding VaR estimate, measured at the 99% regulatory confidence level. For the Investment Bank’s regulatory DVaR model, green model status was maintained for 2015.

Back testing is also performed on management VaR to ensure it remains reasonable and fit for purpose.

The table below shows the VaR back testing exceptions on legal entities aligned to the Group’s business in 2015. A back testing exception is generated when a loss is greater than the VaR for a given day. Exceptions are shown by legal entity rather than asset class as in prior disclosures. Model performance at a legal entity level determines regulatory capital within those entities. Legal entity disclosure also reflects the management perspective as Barclays moves forward with structural change, where VaR and model performance of VaR for a legal entity across asset class becomes more relevant than asset class metrics across legal entity.

 

Legal Entities   Total Exception   Status
BBPLC Trading and BCSL   3  

Green

BBPLC Trading   4  

Green

BCSL   4  

Green

BBSA   2  

Green

BCI   2  

Green

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  134


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

 

 

The charts below show VaR for the Group’s regulatory portfolios aligned to legal entity where at least one exception has occurred during 2015. The dark blue lines indicate losses on the small number of days on which they exceeded the VaR amount.

The majority of the backtesting exceptions in the year were driven by markets moving in a fashion unanticipated by the model, primarily by increases in realised volatility compared to that predicted by the VaR at the 99% confidence level. Additional exceptions are caused by non-VaR

type risks which may be related to events, such as corporate actions or pricing remarks in line with valuation policies, which are not captured in the VaR model.

Exceptions are reported to internal management and regulators on a regular basis and exceptions are investigated to ensure the model performs as expected. Overall back testing for the consolidated legal entity remains in the green zone, suggesting that the VaR remains fit for purpose.

 

 

LOGO

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  135


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

 

 

Management of risks not fully captured in models, including Risks not in VaR (RNIVs)

The Group’s’ risk identification process captures risks that either have been observed to, or have the capacity to, produce material losses in normal and stressed market conditions. To ensure risk coverage, the range of key risks is identified following either market convention, regulatory guidance, or the specific historical experience of the Group’s and is considered as part of the new product processes.

In some instances, the Management and Regulatory VaR model may not appropriately measure some market risks, especially where market moves are not directly observable via prices, the Group has policies to ensure that add-ons are applied where risks are not captured by the model. RNIVs refer to those key risks that are not captured, or not adequately captured, in VaR and SVaR. RNIVs can include:

 

§   risks not fully captured elsewhere and/or illiquid risk factors such as cross-risks;

 

§   basis risks;

 

§   higher-order risks;

 

§   calibration parameters, for instance to model parameter uncertainty; and

 

§   potential losses in excess of fair valuation adjustments taken in line with the Valuation Control Framework. Please see Note 18 in the 2015 Annual Report ‘Fair value of assets and liabilities’ for more details on fair value adjustments.

The treatment of RNIVs follows whether the risks are considered VaR type or non-VaR type, which depends on, and can change with, the evolving state of financial markets:

 

§   VaR-type RNIVs: Typically represent risks that are not well captured in VaR, mainly because of infrastructure limitations or methodology limitations. In this instance two metrics are calculated, a VaR RNIV and a SVaR RNIV, using the same confidence level, capital horizon and observation period as VaR and SVaR respectively and are capitalised using the same multipliers as VaR and SVaR

 

§   Non-VaR-type RNIVs: Typically represent risks which would not be well captured by any VaR model either because it rcepresents an event not historically observed in the VaR time series (e.g. currency peg break) or a market risk factor which is not seen to move frequently (e.g. correlation). These are typically estimated using stress scenarios. The stress methodology is calibrated equivalently to at least 99% confidence level and a capital horizon of at least 10 days over an appropriate observation period, depending on the liquidity of the risk. For the purpose of regulatory capital, the capital charge is equal to the loss arising from the stress test except when these risks are already adequately captured elsewhere e.g. via the IRC or APR models, which are intended to capture certain risks not adequately covered by VaR

For regulatory capital these RNIVs are aggregated without any offsetting or diversification benefit.

Traded market risk control

The metrics that are used to measure market risk are controlled through the implementation of appropriate limit frameworks. Limits are set at the total Group level, asset class level, for example, interest rate risk, and at business level, for example, securitised products. Stress limits and many book limits, such as foreign exchange and interest rate sensitivity limits, are also used to control risk appetite.

Firm-wide limits are reported to the BRC and are termed A-level limits for total management VaR, asset class VaR, primary stress and secondary stresses and business scenarios. These are then cascaded down by risk managers in order to meet the firm-wide risk appetite.

Each A-level limit is set after consideration is given to revenue generation opportunities and overall risk appetite approved by the Board. Compliance with limits is monitored by the independent risk functions in the trading businesses with oversight provided by Group Market Risk.

Throughout 2015, Group Market Risk continued its ongoing programme of conformance reviews on the trading businesses’ market risk management practices. These reviews are intended to verify the business’s conformance with the Market Risk Control Framework and best practices.

Traded market risk reporting

Trading businesses market risk managers produce a number of detailed and summary market risk reports daily, weekly, fortnightly and monthly for business and risk managers. Where relevant on a Group-wide basis, these are sent to Group Market Risk for review and a risk summary is presented at the Group Market Risk Committee and the trading businesses’ various market risk committees. The overall market risk profile is also presented to BRC on a regular basis.

Management of non-traded market risk, mitigation and hedging policies

Barclays actively seeks to minimise interest risk in the banking book by actively hedging this risk with the use of interest rate products. At the same time Barclays actively manages the potential asset and liability mismatches and changes to interest rates that could reduce the value of our investment portfolios.

Non-traded risk measurement

Barclays uses a range of complementary technical approaches to measure non-traded market risk.

Summary of measures for non-traded market risk

 

Measure

     Definition
Annual earnings at risk      Impact on earnings of a parallel (upward or downward) movement in interest rates.
Economic value of equity (EVE)      Change in the present value of the banking book of a parallel (upward or downward) interest rate shock.
Economic capital      Economic Capital (EC) is held to protect against unexpected loss (in excess of expected loss) and calculated over a one-year time horizon.
Value at risk (VaR)      An estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements, if the current positions were to be held unchanged for a set period of time.
Stress testing      Scenario based stress testing using a variety of economic parameters to quantify the impact to profit and loss and the balance sheet under various levels of stress.

The risk in each business is measured and controlled using both an income metric (Annual Earnings at Risk) and value metrics (Economic Value of Equity, Economic Capital and VaR).

Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR)

AEaR measures the sensitivity of net interest income over the next one-year period. It is calculated as the difference between the estimated income using the expected base rate forecast and the lowest estimated income following a parallel increase or decrease in interest rates (200bps), subject to a minimum interest rate of 0%. 200bp shocks are consistent with industry best practice and supported by banking regulators.

The main model assumptions are:

 

§   The balance sheet is kept at the current level, i.e. no growth is assumed; and

 

§   Balances are adjusted for an assumed behavioural profile. This includes the treatment of fixed rate loans including mortgages.

AEaR is applied to the entire banking book, including the liquidity buffer and internal trades with the trading book to hedge against interest rate risk in the banking book exposures. The metric provides a measure of how interest rate risk may impact the Group’s earnings, providing a simple comparison between risk and returns. The main disadvantage of the metric is its short-term focus, as it only measures the impact on a position in the first 12 months. In order to counter this, the Group has implemented additional economic value risk metrics.

See page 77 for a review of AEaR in 2015.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  136


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

 

 

Economic Value of Equity (EVE)

EVE calculates the change in the present value of the non traded exposure for a parallel upward and downward interest rate (200bps) shock. This shock is useful for drawing comparisons across portfolios, and is also a regulatory reporting requirement. Note that the EVE calculation measures sensitivity in terms of present value, while AEaR measures income sensitivity.

The EVE measure is applied to the entire banking book, that is, the same coverage as AEaR, and covers the full life of transactions and hedges ensuring the risk over the whole life of positions are considered. The main weaknesses of this model stem from its simplicity. In particular, it does not capture the impact of business growth or of management actions, and is based on the balance sheet as at the reporting date.

Economic Capital (EC, for recruitment, prepayment and residual risk)

EC consistent models, based on DVaR methodologies, are used to measure unexpected losses to a 99.98% confidence interval over a one-year period. Within non-traded risk, this measure aims to capture recruitment risk, prepayment risk and residual risk for banking book products (see definitions on page 129). EC metrics typically measure variations in economic value from specific sources of risk, for example, prepayment risk EC for fixed rate mortgages predicts the cost of hedging to reduce any mismatch exposure resulting from the impact of an interest rate shock on customer prepayment levels.

EC is used in the active management of the banking book. Limits are set against EC metrics and breaches trigger mitigating actions to reduce exposure to appropriate levels. EC modelling is typically applied only to fixed rate products and the majority of variable rate and administered rate portfolios are not subject to an EC measure.

Advantages of EC are that it can calculate unexpected losses to an appropriate degree of confidence given the nature of the risks, and that it covers sources of loss beyond the scope of other models (AEaR only covers income changes over a one-year period; EVE only considers existing business and does not include any dynamic customer behaviour assumptions). The main weaknesses come from necessary simplifying assumptions. In the case of models based on statistical confidence intervals, the choice of the statistical distribution may drive under-prediction of very extreme events (i.e. the real distribution may be fat-tailed). To mitigate this, the Group continues to improve its models using long time series of historical data to capture extreme effects.

See page 77 for a review of EC in 2015.

Value at Risk (VaR)

VaR is an estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements, if the current positions were to be held unchanged for a set period. For internal market risk management purposes, a historical simulation methodology is used with a two-year equally weighted historical period, at the 95% confidence level for banking book portfolios covered by the measure. This calculation is a present value sensitivity while AEaR is an income sensitivity.

Daily VaR is used to measure residual interest and foreign exchange risks within certain banking book portfolios.

Quarterly scaled VaR is used to measure risk in the Liquidity Buffer Investment Portfolio. The calculation uses a five-year historical period, a 95% confidence level and is scaled from daily to quarterly by an approved constant factor.

Stress testing

Stress losses are calculated for the liquidity buffer portfolio, but not subject to controlled limits.

All non-traded market risk positions are subject to the Group’s annual stress testing exercise, where scenarios based on economic parameters are used to determine the potential impact of the positions on results and the balance sheet.

Non-traded market risk control

Non-traded market risk is controlled through the use of limits on many of the above risk measures. Limits are set at the total business level and then cascaded down. The total business level limits are owned by the BCROs, while the overall Group AEaR limit is agreed with Group Market Risk and approved by the FRC. Compliance with limits is monitored by the respective business market risk team with oversight provided by Group Market Risk.

Businesses manage their interest rate risk exposures by transferring this risk to Group Treasury, who then mitigate this risk using external markets if appropriate to keep the overall exposure within the agreed risk appetite. Group policy prevents non-trading businesses to run trading books; this is only permitted for the Investment Bank, Group Treasury, Barclays Non-Core and Africa Banking.

Non-traded market risk reporting

The Group Market Risk function produces a number of detailed market risk reports on a daily, weekly, fortnightly and monthly basis, for business and risk managers. A risk summary is presented at the Group Market Risk Committee and other market risk forums.

Management of Pension Risk

Pension risk control

The investment strategy of the UKRF is owned and defined by the Trustee who is independent to the bank. As such, pension risk is not governed by the conventional limit framework observed in traded and non-traded market risk. Instead, Group Market Risk have put in place a pension risk control framework to create consistency in the evaluation and monitoring of the risk in a coordinated way with other key risks across Barclays.

The risk and positions are reported monthly to the Market Risk Committee (MRC) and periodically to the Pensions Management Group (PMG), Pension Executive Board (PEB) and BRC.

Group Market Risk is responsible for the ongoing challenge of the risk profile and to that aim will ensure:

 

§   At least annual review of all pension funds shortfalls;

 

§   Detailed review of liability driven data;

 

§   A continuous and detailed interaction exists between Group Market Risk, the pension asset manager and other key stakeholders;

 

§   To conduct, where necessary, any ad-hoc analyses to ensure a consistent view of the risk positions of the fund.

Pension risk measurements

The following metrics are used to describe pension risk:

 

§   Asset/Liability mismatch under IAS19, Funding and Solvency Rules;

 

§   Asset VaR and liability VaR;

 

§   Total pension risk VaR i.e. which captures the hedging effect of the matching assets, and potential diversification between assets and liabilities.

The VaR used for pension risk is calibrated at a 95% confidence level, with a one year horizon to reflect the long-term nature of the risk. Whilst the asset portfolio is sensitive to the volatility to any asset class the pension asset manager invests in, the liabilities are mainly exposed to interest rates and corporate credit spreads which are the main components of the discount rate; and inflation which drives the pension increase assumptions.

Group Market Risk also conduct regulatory and internal stress tests on material pension schemes to assess how these react to potential shock scenarios, the results of which form part of Barclays submission for the EU and Bank of England Stress Tests.

See page 80 for a review of pension risk in 2015.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  137


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

 

 

Management of insurance risk

Insurance risk measurement

Risk measurement is largely based on best practice actuarial methodologies for the measurement of assets and liabilities, capital quantification and the monitoring of exposures against predetermined limits, in compliance with regulatory standards relevant to their application. The methodology can be deterministic or stochastic (both closed-form and simulation), depending on the application. Capital adequacy calculations are calculated at a 99.5% confidence level for regulatory purposes, and a higher confidence level for economic capital purposes. Absa Life extrapolates the underwriting Capital Adequacy Requirement (CAR) by assuming that life underwriting risk follows an appropriate statistical distribution.

The estimation of insurance technical provisions requires a number of assumptions. The appropriateness of the actuarial assumptions are reviewed by the independent external actuaries. Furthermore, the internal risk function acts as second line of defence, and provides oversight, review and challenge to the actuarial functions. Assumptions are made around demographic factors (e.g. mortality, morbidity), statistical factors (e.g. claims incidence, reporting and development patterns), and economic factors (e.g. yield curves, market returns). Stress testing can also be used to isolate and examine the impact of specific, or combinations of, variables.

Insurance risk control

Insurance risk is managed within Barclays Africa Group Limited. From an economic capital perspective, four significant categories of insurance risk and their governance procedures are:

 

§   short-term insurance underwriting risk: monitored on a quarterly basis by the Underwriting Committee to ensure the risk taken is in line with underwriting guidelines and appropriately priced and reserved for. Risk governance is monitored by the Control Review Committee (CRC), the Actuarial Review Committee (ARC) and Key Risk reporting

 

§   life insurance underwriting risk: monitored on a quarterly basis by the Underwriting Committee to ensure the risk taken is in line with underwriting guidelines and appropriately priced and reserved for. Risk governance is monitored by the CRC, the ARC and Key Risk reporting

 

§   life insurance mismatch risk: monitored every other month by the entity’s Capital and Investment Risk Committee. A quarterly review is conducted by the Wealth, Investment Management and Insurance (WIMI) Financial Risk Committee, and an annual review by the ARC

 

§   life and short-term insurance investment risk: monitored by the entity Capital and Investment Risk Committee on at least a quarterly basis.

Short-term insurance underwriting activities are undertaken by Absa Insurance Company and Absa idirect. Life insurance underwriting activities are undertaken by Absa Life, Barclays Life Botswana, Barclays Life Zambia and Woolworths Financial Services (through an Absa Life cell captive). Global Alliance Mozambique underwrites both life and short-term insurance business.

Short-term insurance underwriting risk, life insurance underwriting risk, life insurance mismatch risk and investment risks are core to the business of the insurance entities. The successful management of these risks ultimately impacts the success of the entities. The same risk management frameworks and governance structures that enabled the effective management of risks for the South African entities are implemented and embedded in any new entities.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  138


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of securitisation exposures

 

 

    

Securitisations give rise to credit, market and other risks. This section discusses the types of business activities and exposures that we incur in the course of activities related to securitisations.

 

  §   The objectives pursued in securitisation activities and the types of activities undertaken are discussed on page 140.

 

  §   A description of the risks incurred in the course of securitisation activities, and how we manage them, is contained on page 141.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  139


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of securitisation exposures

 

 

This section discloses information about the Group’s securitisation activities distinguishing between the various functions performed in supporting its customers and managing its risks. It includes traditional securitisations as well as synthetic transactions effected through the use of derivatives.

For the purposes of Pillar 3 disclosures on pages 82 to 91, a securitisation is defined as a transaction or scheme where the payments are dependent upon the performance of a single exposure or pool of exposures and where the subordination of tranches determines the distribution of losses during the ongoing life of the transaction or scheme. Such transactions are ordinarily undertaken to transfer risk for the Group or on behalf of a client.

Certain transactions undertaken by the Group are not disclosed in the quantitative section (pages 82 to 91) as they do not fall under the regulatory securitisation framework (defined under Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5 of the CRR, part of the CRD IV package). These include funding transactions for the purposes of generating term liquidity, and certain government-guaranteed transactions.

Objectives of securitisation activities

In the course of its business, the Group has undertaken securitisations of its own originated assets as well as the securitisation of third party assets via special purpose vehicles, sponsored conduit vehicles and shelf programmes.

The Group has securitised its own originated assets in order to manage the Group’s credit risk position and to generate term liquidity for the Group balance sheet. In addition, the Group has warehoused assets prior to securitising them at clients’ request. The Group also participates in primary securitisations in commercial mortgage-backed securities (CMBS) and asset-backed securities (ABS), and distributes bonds to clients.

Further, the Group makes a secondary market for a range of securitised products globally, including residential mortgage-backed securities (RMBS) and whole loans, CMBS and ABS. The Group also provides derivative transactions to securitisations sponsored by itself and third parties. These transactions are included in the Group trading book and form part of its market-making activities.

The role and involvement of the Group in securitisations in 2015

The Group adopts the following roles in the securitisation processes in which it is involved:

Originator of assets prior to securitisation

The Group originates or purchases commercial mortgage loans or asset-backed loans for the purpose of securitisation. The securities are then sold to investors through a broker-dealer subsidiary, or retained on the Group’s balance sheet to access central bank funding.

Providing warehousing facilities collateralised by third-party assets prior to securitisation or exit via whole-loan sale

The Group provides warehouse financing to third party loan originators, including for agency eligible loans that can be securitised by the Federal National Mortgage Association (‘Fannie Mae’), the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation (‘Freddie Mac’), or the Government National Mortgage Association (‘Ginnie Mae’).

Executor of securitisation trades including bond marketing and syndication

The Group transacts primarily as a principal in RMBS, ABS and CMBS with institutional investors and other broker- dealers. Agency-backed residential and commercial mortgage securitisations include collateralised mortgage obligations (CMOs) and Credit Risk Transfer securities (Fannie Mae-sponsored CAS and Freddie Mac-sponsored STACR bonds). ABS securitisations include consumer ABS (e.g. credit card, student loan and auto) and non-traditional ABS (e.g. timeshares, mobile phone towers, whole business securitisations). Non-agency commercial mortgage securitisations include CMBS and commercial real estate collateralised loan obligations (CRE CLO). The bank can also create re-securitisations of real estate mortgage investment conduits (Re-REMICs) of mortgage-backed securities.

Purchaser of third party securitisations to support client franchise

The Group may purchase third party securitisations, acting as an investor. The Group also funds on its own balance sheet securitisations similar to the ones funded via its sponsored conduit (see below). In such transactions the Group would not be defined as an originator or sponsor for regulatory purposes.

Sponsoring conduit vehicles

The Group acts as managing agent and administrative agent of a multi-seller asset-backed commercial paper (ABCP) conduits, Sheffield Receivables Corporation (Sheffield), through which interests in securitisations of third-party-originated assets are funded via the issuance of asset-backed commercial paper.

From a regulatory perspective, the Group would be defined primarily as a sponsor of Sheffield. In relation to such conduit activity, the Group provides all or a portion of the backstop liquidity to the commercial paper, programme-wide credit enhancement and, as appropriate, interest rate and foreign currency hedging facilities. The Group receives fees for the provision of these services.

The conduit is a vehicle that holds securities classified as available for sale, measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognised through other comprehensive income (OCI) and non-securities classified as loans and receivables, measured at amortised cost on their standalone financial statements. It funds the assets through the issuance of asset-backed commercial paper. Note that the conduit vehicle is consolidated for accounting but not regulatory purposes.

Funding transactions to generate term liquidity

Secured funding forms one of the key components of the Group’s diversified funding sources providing access to secured wholesale market and complementing the diversification of funding by maturity, currency and geography. The Group issues ABS that are secured primarily by customer loans and advances. In 2015, the Group raised secured term funding (including both private and public issuances).

The Group currently manages four primary, on-balance sheet asset-backed funding programmes to obtain term financing for mortgage and credit card lending. The UK regulated covered bond and the residential mortgage master trust securitisation programmes both utilise assets originated by the Group’s UK residential mortgage business. The third programme is a credit card master trust securitisation and uses receivables from the Group’s UK credit card business. The fourth programme is a SEC registered securitisation programme backed by US domiciled credit card receivables established in Q4 2012.

Synthetic transactions

The Group participates in a number of risk transfer schemes under the UK NewBuy umbrella. These are cash collateralised and insolvency-remote insurance structures which fall under the CRD IV framework for regulatory capital reporting purposes.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  140


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of securitisation exposures

 

 

Securitisation risks, monitoring and hedging policies

Capital requirements against securitisation exposures are subject to a separate framework under CRD IV (see CRR article 449) to account for the particular characteristics of this asset class. For risk management purposes, however, a securitisation is aligned to the risk type to which it gives rise.

Credit risks

In a securitisation structure, the payments are dependent upon the performance of a single exposure or pool of exposures. As these underlying exposures are usually credit instruments, the performance of the securitisation is exposed to credit risk.

Securitisation exposures are subject to the Group Credit Risk policies and standards and business level procedures. This includes the requirement to review in detail each transaction at a minimum on an annual basis. As collateral risk is the primary driver the analysis places a particular focus on the underlying collateral performance, key risk drivers, servicer due diligence and cash flows, and the impact of these risks on the securitisation notes. The risk is addressed through the transaction structure and by setting an appropriate modelled tolerance level. Structural features incorporate wind-down triggers set against factors including, but not limited to, defaults/charge-offs, delinquencies, excess spread, dilution, payment rates and yield, all of which help to mitigate potential credit deterioration. Qualitative aspects such as counterparty risk and ancillary issues (operational and legal risk) are also considered. Changes to the credit risk profile of securitisation exposures will also be identified through ongoing transaction performance monitoring. In addition, periodic stress tests of the portfolio as part of ongoing risk management are conducted as well as in response to Group-wide or Regulatory requests.

The principal committee responsible for the monitoring of the credit risk arising from securitisations is Credit Portfolio Risk Committee (CPRC) and Wholesale Credit Risk Management Committee (WCRMC). Executive responsibility rests with the Head of Counterparty and Financial Institutions Credit Risk.

Market and liquidity risks

Market risk for securitised products is measured, controlled and limited through a suite of VaR, non-VAR and stress metrics in accordance with the Group’s Market Risk Policies and Procedures. The key risks of securitisation structures are interest rate, credit, spread, prepayment and liquidity risk. Interest rate and spread risk is hedged with standard liquid interest rate instruments (including interest rate swaps, US Treasuries and US Treasury futures). The universe of hedging instruments for credit and prepayment risk is limited and relatively illiquid, resulting in basis risks. In providing warehouse financing, the Group is exposed to mark to market (if counterparty defaults on related margin call).

Hedging

Securitisation and re-securitisation exposures benefit from the relative seniority of the exposure in the capital structure. Due to lack of availability in the credit default swap market for individual asset-backed securities, there are no material CDS hedge counterparties relating to the securitisation and re-securitisation population.

Operational risks

Operational risks are incurred in all of the Group’s operations. In particular, all securitised (and re-securitised) assets are subject to a degree of risk associated with documentation and the collection of cash flows.

In providing warehouse financing, we incur potential operational risks related to representations and warranties should it be later discovered that the underlying loans were not underwritten to agency agreed criteria. Such risks are mitigated by daily collateral margining and ready agency bids. Market risk is also mitigated by employing forward trades.

The Operational Risk Review Forum oversees the management of operational risks for the entire range of the Group’s activities.

Rating methodologies, ECAIs and RWA calculations

RWAs reported for securitised and re-securitised banking book and trading book assets at 31 December 2015 are calculated in line with CRR and UK PRA rules and guidance. The Group has approval to use, and therefore applies, the Internal Ratings-Based Approach for the calculation of RWAs where appropriate, and the Standardised Approach elsewhere.

The Group employs eligible ratings issued by nominated External Credit Assessment Institutions (ECAIs) to risk weight its securitisation and re securitisation exposure where their use is permitted. Ratings are considered eligible for use if they comply with requirements in both CRR and European Credit Rating Agency regulation. The ECAIs nominated by the Group for this purpose are Standard & Poor’s, Moody’s, Fitch and DBRS.

As required by CRR, the Group uses credit ratings issued by these ECAIs consistently for all exposures within the securitisation exposure class. For that reason, there is no systematic assignment of particular agencies to types of transactions within the securitisation exposure class.

For each Asset-Backed Commercial Paper (ABCP) transaction, the Internal Assessment Approach (IAA) framework mirrors the ECAI methodology, which also includes Moody’s and S&P, who rate the Sheffield and Salisbury programmes. Under the IAA framework, the securitisation exposure must be internally rated, and the bank’s internal assessment process must meet certain requirements in order to map its own internal rating to an ECAI. Cash flow stress analysis on a securitisation structure is performed as prescribed by an ECAI methodology for the relevant ratings level, and is at least as conservative as the published methodology. Stress factors may include, among other factors, asset yields, principal payment rates, losses, delinquency rates and interest rates.

In determining an internal rating, collateral risks are the primary driver and are addressed through the transaction structure and modelled statistical confidence. The analysis reflects the Group’s view on the transaction, including dilution risk, concentration and tenor limits, as well as qualitative aspects such as counterparty risk and important ancillary issues (operational and legal risks). The adequacy and integrity of the servicer’s systems and processes for underwriting, collections policies and procedures are also reviewed. The Group conducts a full due diligence review of the servicer for each transaction. Each transaction is reviewed on, at least, an annual basis with a focus on the performance of underlying assets. The results of any due diligence review and the financial strength of the seller/servicer, are also factored into the analysis. Ratings of the transaction are reaffirmed with the most up to date ECAI methodologies. Any transaction which deviates from the current methodology is amended accordingly.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  141


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of securitisation exposures

 

 

Summary of the accounting policies for securitisation activities

Certain Group-sponsored entities have issued debt securities or have entered into funding arrangements with lenders in order to finance specific assets. An entity is consolidated by the Group when the Group has control over the entity. The Group controls an entity if it has all of the three elements of control which are i) power over the entity; and ii) exposure, or rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the entity; iii) the ability to use its power over the entity to affect the amount of the Group returns.

The consolidation treatment must be initially assessed at inception and is reassessed if facts and circumstances indicate that there are changes to one or more of the three elements of control.

Typically, assets that are awaiting securitisation on the Group balance sheet are measured at fair value through profit and loss, using the appropriate method for the asset class as they are classified as held for trading or are designed at fair value through profit and loss, under the IAS 39 fair value option. However some non-derivative assets held prior to securitisation may qualify as loans and receivables and are measured at amortised cost. When securitised assets have been included on the Group balance sheet it is necessary to consider whether those assets may be removed from the Group balance sheet. Assets which have been transferred to third parties (i.e. an unconsolidated Group entity), will remain on the Group balance sheet, and treated as financings, unless the following criteria apply:

 

§   substantially all the risks and rewards associated with the assets have been transferred, in which case, they are derecognised in full

 

§   if a significant portion, but not all, of the risks and rewards have been transferred, the asset is derecognised entirely if the transferee has the ability to sell the financial asset, otherwise the asset continues to be recognised only to the extent of the Group’s continuing involvement.

Any financial support or contractual arrangements provided to unconsolidated entities, over securitised assets, would be recognised as a liability on balance sheet if it met the relevant IFRS criteria, or gave rise to a provision under IAS 37, and have to be disclosed (see Note 39 in the 2015 Annual Report). Note, however, that the Group has a Significant Risk Transfer policy that does not allow for any support to be provided to any transactions that fall under the securitisation framework.

Assets may be transferred to a third party through a legal sale or an arrangement that meets the ‘passthrough’ criteria where the substance of the arrangement is principally that the Group is acting solely as a cash collection agent on behalf of the eventual recipients.

Where the transfer applies to a fully proportionate share of all or specifically identified cash flows, the relevant accounting treatment is applied to that proportion of the asset.

When the above criteria support the case that the securitisation should not be accounted for as financing, the transaction will result in sale treatment or partial sale treatment to the extent the Group has no continuing involvement. Where the Group has continuing involvement the assets will continue to be recognised to the extent of the continuing involvement. Gains are recognised to the extent that proceeds that can be measured using observable market data exceed the assets derecognised.

Any retained interests, which will consist of loans and/or securities depending on the nature of the transaction, are valued in accordance with the Group’s Accounting Policies, as set out in the 2015 Annual Report. To the extent that these interests are measured at fair value, they will be included within the fair value disclosures in the financial statements in the Annual Report. As outlined in these disclosures, key valuation assumptions for retained interests of this nature will include spreads to discount rates, default and recovery rates and prepayment rates that may be observable or unobservable.

In a synthetic securitisation transaction, the underlying assets are not sold into the relevant special purpose entity (SPE). Instead, their performance is transferred into the vehicle through a synthetic instrument such as a CDS, a credit linked note or a financial guarantee. The accounting policies outlined above will apply to synthetic securitisations.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  142


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of operational risk

 

 

 

    

The sources of operational risks, and how those risks are managed, are detailed in this section.

 

  §   Governance, management and measurement techniques are covered on pages 144 to 146.

 

  §   The types of risks that are classified as operational risks are described on page 145.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  143


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of operational risk

 

 

Operational risk

 

Any instance where there is a potential or actual impact to the Group resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people, systems, or from an external event. The impacts to the Group can be financial, including losses or an unexpected financial gain, as well as non-financial such as customer detriment, reputational or regulatory consequences.

     

Overview

 

The management of operational risk has two key objectives:

 

§   minimise the impact of losses suffered, both in the normal course of business (small losses) and from extreme events (large losses)

 

§   improve the effective management of the Group and strengthen its brand and external reputation.

 

The Group is committed to the management and measurement of operational risk and was granted a waiver by the FSA (now the PRA) to operate an Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA) for operational risk, which commenced in January 2008. The majority of the Group calculates regulatory capital requirements using AMA (93% of capital requirements); however, in specific areas, the Basic Indicator Approach (7%) is applied. The Group works to benchmark its internal operational risk management and measurement practices with peer banks and to drive the further development of advanced techniques.

 

The Group is committed to operating within a strong system of internal control that enables business to be transacted and risk taken without exposing the Group to unacceptable potential losses or reputational damage. The Group has an overarching framework that sets out the approach to internal governance. This guide establishes the mechanisms and processes by which the Board directs the organisation, through setting the tone and expectations from the top, delegating authority and monitoring compliance.

 

    

    

    

    

    

 

     

Organisation and structure

 

LOGO

 

A key component is the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF), the purpose of which is to identify and set minimum requirements in respect of the main risks to achieving the Group’s strategic objectives and to provide reasonable assurance that internal controls are effective. The ERMF also defines the characteristics of an effective Control Environment, against which the businesses are assessed. Management, in all three lines of defence, are required to manage their businesses and functions in accordance with the characteristics set out below:

 

§   there is a strong tone from the top and culture supporting the management of controls

 

§   there is clear individual accountability and responsibility for the management of the control environment, starting at senior levels, and incorporated into performance objectives

 

§   key customer processes and other activities are clearly identified and understood

 

§   the material risks arising from these are identified and assessed

 

§   a risk appetite is established for the variable outcomes in these risks
§   a set of comprehensive and sustainable key controls is established and operated to remain within the risk appetite

 

§   any issues, events outside of risk appetite including control failures are identified and escalated

 

§   programmes for the remediation of control gaps or execution failures are established and implemented

 

§   a feedback loop including a “Lessons Learnt” process is used to inform and improve control performance

 

§   assurance is provided by 1st line and 2nd lines of defence on the reliability of control solutions and remediation activities for their own control areas.

 

The key elements of the Group’s system of internal control, which is aligned to the recommendations of The Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, Internal Control – Integrated Framework (COSO), are set out in the risk control frameworks relating to each of the Group’s Key Risks and in the Group Operational Risk Framework.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  144


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of operational risk

 

 

Operational Risk comprises a number of specific Key Risks defined as follows:

 

§   external supplier: inadequate selection and ongoing management of external suppliers

 

§   financial crime: failure to comply with anti money laundering , anti-bribery and anti-corruption and sanctions policies. In early January 2016, the oversight of financial crime was transferred to Group Compliance

 

§   financial reporting: reporting mis-statement or omission within external financial or regulatory reporting

 

§   fraud: dishonest behaviour with the intent to make a gain or cause a loss to others

 

§   information: inadequate protection of the Group’s information in accordance with its value and sensitivity

 

§   legal: failure to identify and manage legal risks

 

§   payments process: failure in operation of payments processes

 

§   people: inadequate people capabilities, and/or performance/reward structures, and/or inappropriate behaviours

 

§   premises and security: unavailability of premises (to meet business demand) and/or safe working environments, and inadequate protection of physical assets, employees and customers against external threats

 

§   taxation: failure to comply with tax laws and practice which could lead to financial penalties, additional tax charges or reputational damage

 

§   technology (including cyber security): failure to develop and deploy secure, stable and reliable technology solutions which includes risk of loss or detriment to the Group’s business and customers as a result of actions committed or facilitated through the use of networked information systems

 

§   transaction operations: failure in the management of critical transaction processes.

In order to ensure complete coverage of the potential adverse impacts on the Group arising from operational risk, the operational risk taxonomy extends beyond the operational Key Risks listed above to cover areas included within conduct risk. For more information on Conduct Risk please see pages 152 to 154.

These risks may result in financial and/or non-financial impacts including legal/regulatory breaches or reputational damage.

Roles and responsibilities

The prime responsibility for the management of operational risk and the compliance with control requirements rests with the business and functional units where the risk arises. The operational risk profile and control environment is reviewed by business management through specific meetings which cover governance, risk and control. Businesses are required to report their operational risks on both a regular and an event-driven basis. The reports include a profile of the material risks that may threaten the achievement of their objectives and the effectiveness of key controls, material control issues, operational risk events and a review of scenarios.

The Group Head of Operational Risk, as Principal Risk Officer, is responsible for establishing, owning and maintaining an appropriate Group-wide Operational Risk Framework and for overseeing the portfolio of operational risk across the Group.

Operational risk management acts in a second line of defence capacity is responsible for implementation of the framework and monitoring operational risk events, risk exposures and material control issues. Through attendance at Business Unit Governance, Risk and Controls meetings, it provides specific risk input into the issues highlighted and the overall risk profile of the business. Operational risk issues escalated from these meetings are considered by the Principal Risk Officer through the second line of defence review meetings, which also consider material control issues and their effective remediation. Depending on their nature, the outputs of these meetings are presented to the BRC or the BAC.

Specific reports are prepared by businesses, Key Risk Officers and Group Operational Risk on a regular basis for BRC and BAC.

Operational risk framework

The Operational Risk Strategy and Framework comprises a number of elements which allow the Group to manage and measure its operational risk profile and to calculate the amount of operational risk capital that the Group needs to hold to absorb potential losses. The minimum, mandatory requirements for each of these elements are set out in the group operational risk framework and supporting standards. This framework is implemented across the Group:

 

§   vertically, through the organisational structure with all businesses required to implement and operate an operational risk framework that meets, as a minimum, the requirements detailed in these operational risk policies

 

§   horizontally, with the Group Key Risk officers required to monitor information relevant to their Key Risk from each operational risk framework element.

The Operational Risk framework is a key component of the ERMF and has been designed to improve risk management and meet a number of external governance requirements including the Basel Capital Accord, the Capital Requirements Directive and Turnbull guidance as an evaluation framework for the purposes of Section 404(a) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. It also supports the Sarbanes-Oxley requirements.

The operational risk strategy and framework includes the following elements:

Risk and Control Self-Assessments

The Group identifies and assesses all material risks within each business and evaluates the key controls in place to mitigate those risks. Managers in the businesses use self-assessment techniques to identify risks, evaluate the effectiveness of key controls in place and assess whether the risks are effectively managed within business risk appetite. The businesses are then able to make decisions on what action, if any, is required to reduce the level of risk to the Group. These risk assessments are monitored on a regular basis to ensure that each business continually understands the risks it faces.

Risk events

An operational risk event is any circumstance where, through the lack or failure of a control, the Group has actually, or could have, made a loss. The definition includes situations in which the Group could have made a loss, but in fact made a gain, as well as incidents resulting in reputational damage or regulatory impact only.

A standard threshold is used across the Group for reporting risk events and part of the analysis includes the identification of improvements to processes or controls, to reduce the recurrence and/or magnitude of risk events. For significant events, both financial and non-financial, this analysis includes the completion of a formal lessons learnt.

The Group also maintains a record of external risk events which are publicly available and is a member of the Operational RiskData eXchange (ORX), a not-for-profit association of international banks formed to share anonymous loss data information. This external loss information is used to support and inform risk identification, assessment and measurement.

Operational risk appetite

The Group’s approach to determining its operational risk appetite combines both quantitative measures and qualitative judgement, in order to best reflect the nature of non-financial risks.

The monitoring and tracking of operational risk measures is supplemented with qualitative review and discussion at senior management executive committees on the actions being taken to improve controls and reduce risk to an acceptable level.

Operational risk appetite is aligned to the Group’s Risk Appetite Framework. The BRC considers, and recommends to the Board for approval, the Group’s risk appetite statement for operational risk based on performance in the current year and the projections for financial volatility the following year.

Key Risk appetite statements are agreed with the Principal Risk Officer, utilising the same approach, and are contained within the respective Key Risk Frameworks.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  145


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of operational risk

 

 

Key indicators

Key indicators (KIs) are metrics which allow the Group to monitor its operational risk profile. KIs include measurable thresholds that reflect the risk appetite of the business and are monitored to alert management when risk levels exceed acceptable ranges or risk appetite levels and drive timely decision making and actions.

Key Risk scenarios

Key Risk scenarios are a summary of the extreme potential risk exposure for each Key Risk in each business and function, and include an assessment of the potential frequency of risk events, the average size of losses and three extreme scenarios. The Key Risk scenario assessments are a key input to the Advanced Measurement Approach calculation of regulatory and economic capital requirements (see following section on operational risk measurement). The assessment considers analysis of internal and external loss experience, Key Risk Indicators, risk and control self-assessments and other risk information. The businesses and functions analyse potential extreme scenarios, considering the:

 

§   circumstances and contributing factors that could lead to an extreme event

 

§   potential financial and non-financial impacts (for example reputational damage)

 

§   controls that seek to limit the likelihood of such an event occurring, and the mitigating actions that would be taken if the event were to occur (for example crisis management procedures, business continuity or disaster recovery plans).

Management may then conclude whether the potential risk is acceptable (within appetite) or whether changes in risk management control or business strategy are required.

The key risk scenarios are regularly re-assessed, taking into account trends in risk factors such as mis-selling, conduct and financial crime risks.

Reporting

The ongoing monitoring and reporting of operational risk is a key component of the Operational Risk Framework. Reports are used by the operational risk function and by business management to understand, monitor, manage and control operational risks and losses.

The operational risk profile is reviewed by senior management at the Operational Risk Review Forum, as well as BRC, BAC and the Board.

Operational risk measurement

The Group assesses its operational risk capital requirements using an Advanced Measurement Approach. The approach involves estimating the potential range of losses that could be incurred in a year from operational risk events, using statistical distributions. Regulatory capital requirements are set to cover 99.9% of the estimated losses. The Group also assesses its economic capital requirements to cover 99.98% of the estimated losses that exceed the typical losses (diversified across all risk classes).

The potential frequency and severity of losses is estimated for each Key Risk (within the Operational Risk and Conduct risk categories) across the Group’s businesses and functions. The potential range of individual loss severities is represented by a statistical distribution, estimated from the average loss size and three extreme scenarios (from Risk Assessments), as well as loss data from the Operational Riskdata eXchange (ORX).

The capital calculation also takes into account the possibility of dependences between operational risk losses occurring in a year (between businesses and functions and between risks).

In certain joint ventures and associates, the Group uses the Basic Indicator Approach to determine the capital requirements: some Africa Retail Banking, including Barclays Bank Mozambique and National Bank of Commerce (Tanzania); the business activities acquired from Lehman Brothers; and the portfolios of assets purchased from Woolworths Financial Services in South Africa, Standard Life Bank, ING Direct, MBNA Corporate Cards, Upromise, RCI, Egg Cards, EdCon, Sallie Mae, Ameriprice, Hawaiian Airlines and US Airways.

Insurance

As part of its risk management approach, the Group also uses insurance to mitigate the impact of some operational risks.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  146


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of funding risk

 

 

 

    

This section provides an analysis of the management of liquidity and capital risk.

 

  §   Liquidity risk, with a focus on how it is managed to ensure that resources are adequate at all times including under stress, is discussed on pages 148 to 150

 

  §   Capital risk, including how the risk of insufficient capital and leverage ratios is managed, is discussed on pages 150 and 151.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  147


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of funding risk

 

 

 

 

Funding Risk

The ability of the Group to achieve its business plans may be adversely impacted if it does not effectively manage its capital (including leverage) and liquidity ratios. Group Treasury manage funding risk on a day-to-day basis with the Treasury Committee acting as the key governance forum.

Organisation and structure

 

LOGO

Capital and Liquidity Risks are managed by two separate areas; these are covered below.

 

Liquidity Risk

The risk that the Group, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost. This also results in a firm’s inability to meet regulatory liquidity requirements. This risk is inherent in all banking operations and can be affected by a range of Group-specific and market-wide events.

The Board has formally recognised a series of risks that are continuously present in Barclays and materially impact the achievement of Barclays objectives one of which is funding risk. Liquidity risk is recognised as a Key Risk within funding risk. The efficient management of liquidity is essential to the Group in retaining the confidence of the financial markets and ensuring that the business is sustainable. Liquidity risk is managed through the Liquidity Risk Management Framework (the Liquidity Framework) which is designed to meet the following objectives:

§   to maintain liquidity resources that are sufficient in amount and quality and a funding profile that is appropriate to meet the liquidity risk appetite (LRA) as expressed by the Board

 

§   to maintain market confidence in the Group’s name.

This is achieved via a combination of policy formation, review and governance, analysis, stress testing, limit setting and monitoring. Together, these meet internal and regulatory requirements.

Governance and organisation

Barclays Treasury operates a centralised governance control process that covers all of the Group’s liquidity risk management activities. As per the ERMF the Key Risk Officer (KRO) approves the Key Risk Control Framework for Liquidity Risk (‘Key Risk Control Framework’) under which the treasury function operates. The KRO is in the Risk function. The Key Risk Control Framework describes liquidity policies and controls that the Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within the LRA and is subject to annual review.

The Board sets the LRA, over Group stress tests, being the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations. The approved LRA is implemented and managed by the Treasury Committee through the Key Risk Control Framework.

Liquidity risk framework

Barclays has a comprehensive Key Risk Control Framework for managing the Group’s liquidity risk. The Key Risk Control Framework describes liquidity policies and controls that the Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within the LRA. The Key Risk Control Framework is designed to deliver the appropriate term and structure of funding consistent with the LRA set by the Board.

The Key Risk Control Framework incorporates a range of ongoing business management tools to monitor, limit and stress test the Group’s balance sheet and contingent liabilities and a Contingency Funding Plan. Limit setting and transfer pricing are tools that are designed to control the level of liquidity risk taken and drive the appropriate mix of funds, which together reduce the likelihood that a liquidity stress event could lead to an inability to meet the Group’s obligations as they fall due. The stress tests assess potential contractual and contingent stress outflows under a range of scenarios, which are then used to determine the size of the liquidity pool that is immediately available to meet anticipated outflows, if a stress occurred.

The Group maintains a Contingency Funding Plan which details how liquidity stress events of varying severity would be managed. Since the precise nature of any stress event can not be known in advance, the plans are designed to be flexible to the nature and severity of the stress event and provide a menu of options that could be used as appropriate at the time. Barclays also maintains Recovery Plans which consider actions to generate additional liquidity in order to facilitate recovery in a severe stress.

 

 

LOGO

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  148


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of funding risk

 

 

 

Ongoing business management

Risk Appetite and Planning

Under the Key Risk Control Framework, Barclays has established a Liquidity Risk Appetite (LRA), over Group stress tests, being the level of liquidity risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations.

The key expression of the liquidity risk is through stress test. It is measured with reference to the liquidity pool compared to anticipated stressed net contractual and contingent outflows for each of five stress scenarios.

The LRA for internal stress tests is approved by the Board. The LRA is reviewed on a continuous basis and is subject to formal review at least annually as part of the Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP).

 

 

Statement of Liquidity Risk Appetite: The Board has approved that the Group will maintain an amount of available liquidity resources to meet modelled and prescribed regulatory liquidity stress outflows over a period of time (minimum buffer duration):

 

§   30 days in a Barclays specific stress

 

§   90 days in a market wide stress

 

§   30 days in a combined stress

 

§   Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) 30 days minimum ratio 100% (Pillar 1 basis)

 

The stress outflows are used to determine the size of the Group Liquidity Pool, which represents those resources immediately available to meet outflows in a stress. In addition to the liquidity pool, the Key Risk Control Framework provides for other management actions, including generating liquidity from other liquid assets on the Group’s balance sheet in order to meet additional stress outflows, or to preserve or restore the Liquidity Pool in the event of a liquidity stress.

Liquidity Limits

Barclays manages limits on a variety of on and off-balance sheet exposures, a sample of which is shown in the table below. These limits serve to control the overall extent and composition of liquidity risk taken by managing exposure to the cash outflows.

 

 

LOGO

 

Internal Pricing and Incentives

Barclays actively manages the composition and duration of the balance sheet and of contingent liabilities through the transfer of liquidity premium directly to business units. Liquidity premiums are charged and credited to businesses according to the behavioural life of assets and liabilities and contingent liquidity risk under stress. These transfer pricing mechanisms are designed to ensure that liquidity risk is reflected in product pricing and performance measurement, thereby ensuring that the Liquidity Framework is integrated into business level decision making to drive the appropriate mix of sources and uses of funds.

 

Early Warning Indicators

Barclays monitors a range of market indicators for early signs of liquidity risk either in the market or specific to Barclays, a sample of which are shown in the table below. These are designed to immediately identify the emergence of increased liquidity risk to maximise the time available to execute appropriate mitigating actions. Early Warning Indicators are used as part of the assessment of whether to invoke the Group’s Contingency Funding Plan, which provides a framework for how the liquidity stress would be managed.

 

 

LOGO

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  149


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of funding risk

 

 

Contingency Funding Plan

Barclays maintains a Contingency Funding Plan (CFP), which is designed to provide a framework where a liquidity stress could be effectively managed. The CFP is proportionate to the nature, scale and complexity of the business and is tested to ensure that it is operationally robust. The CFP details the circumstances in which the plan could be invoked, including as a result of adverse movements in Liquidity Early Warning Indicators. As part of the plan the Barclays Treasurer has established a Liquidity Management Committee (LMC.) On invocation of the CFP by the Executive Committee (ExCo), the LMC would meet to identify the likely impact of the event on the Group and determine the response, which would be proportionate to the nature and severity of the stress.

The CFP provides a communication plan and includes management actions to respond to liquidity stresses of varying severity. This could include monetising the liquidity pool, slowing the extension of credit, increasing the tenor of funding and securitising or selling assets.

Recovery and resolution planning (RRP)

In accordance with the requirements of the PRA Rulebook: Recovery and Resolution, Barclays has developed a Group Recovery Plan. The key objectives are to provide the Group with a range of options to ensure the viability of the firm in a stress, set consistent early warning indicators to identify when the Recovery Plan should be invoked and to enable the Group to be adequately prepared to respond to stressed conditions.

 

Capital Risk

Overview

Capital risk

Capital risk is the risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources to:

 

  §   meet minimum regulatory requirements in the UK and in other jurisdictions such as the US and South Africa where regulated activities are undertaken. The Group’s authority to operate as a bank is dependent upon the maintenance of adequate capital resources at each level where prudential capital requirements are applied

 

  §   support its credit rating. A weaker credit rating would increase the Group’s cost of funds

 

  §   support its growth and strategic options.

Organisation and structure

Capital Management is integral to the Group’s approach to financial stability and sustainability management and is therefore embedded in the way businesses and legal entities operate. Capital demand and supply is actively managed on a centralised basis, at a business level, at a local entity level and on a regional basis, taking into account the regulatory, economic and commercial environment in which Barclays operates.

Roles and responsibilities

The Group’s Capital Management strategy is driven by the strategic aims of the Group and the Risk Appetite set by the Board. The Group’s objectives are achieved through well embedded capital management practices:

Capital planning

Capital forecasts are managed on a top-down and bottom-up basis through both short-term (one year) and medium-term (three to five years) financial planning cycles. Barclays’ capital plans are developed with the objective of maintaining capital that is adequate in quantity and quality to support the Group’s risk profile, regulatory and business needs. As a result, the Group holds a diversified capital base that provides strong loss absorbing capacity and optimised returns.

Barclays’ capital forecasts are continually monitored against relevant internal target capital ratios to ensure they remain appropriate, and consider risks to the plan, including possible future regulatory changes.

Local management ensures compliance with an entity’s minimum regulatory capital requirements by reporting to local Asset and Liability Committees with oversight by the Group’s Treasury Committee, as required.

 

LOGO

Regulatory requirements

Capital planning is set in consideration of minimum regulatory requirements in all jurisdictions in which the Group operates. Regulatory capital requirements are determined by the PRA.

Under these regulatory frameworks, capital requirements are set in consideration of the level of risk that the firm is exposed to which is measured through both risk weighted assets (RWAs) and leverage.

Capital held to support the level of risk identified is set in consideration of minimum ratio requirements and internal buffers. Capital requirements are set in accordance with the firm’s level of risk.

Target ratios

The Group’s capital plan is set in consideration of our risk profile, business and regulatory requirements as determined by the PRA. The Group expects to meet the minimum requirements for leverage and capital ratios including the CET1, AT1, T2 and MREL/TLAC minima, both during the transition period and upon full implementation and also hold an internal buffer sized according to the firm’s assessment of various risks including uncontrollable market factors.

Regulatory reform

Further changes to capital requirements may occur due to continued regulatory focus on the risk weighting of assets, including Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) proposals on fundamental review of the trading book, revisions to standardised rules for credit risk, counterparty credit risk, CVA volatility risk and operational risk as well as the application of RWA floor based on standardised approach to limit the use of internal models in certain areas.

Additional capital requirements may also arise from other regulatory reforms, including UK, EU and US proposals on bank structural reform and current European Banking Authority (EBA) proposals for ‘Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities’ (MREL) under the EU Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD). Included within these reforms are the Bank of England proposals on MREL requirements for UK banks which were published in December 2015. We expect these requirements to be finalised and communicated to banks during the course of 2016.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  150


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of funding risk

 

 

However, many of the proposals are still subject to finalisation and implementation and may have a different effect when in final form, the impact of these proposals is still being assessed. For further information see Funding Risk in Material Risks Review and Regulatory Developments in the section on Supervision and Regulation.

Governance

The Group and legal entity capital plans are underpinned by the Capital Risk Framework, which includes capital management policies and practices approved by the Principal Risk Officer. These plans are implemented consistently in order to deliver on the Group objectives.

The Board approves the Group capital plan, stress tests and recovery plan. The Treasury Committee manages compliance with the Group’s capital management objectives. The Committee reviews actual and forecast capital demand and resources on a monthly basis. The Board Risk Committee annually reviews risk appetite and then analyses the impacts of stress scenarios on the Group capital forecast in order to understand and manage the Group’s projected capital adequacy.

Monitoring and managing capital

Capital is monitored and managed on an ongoing basis through:

Stress testing: Internal group-wide stress testing is undertaken to quantify and understand the impact of sensitivities on the capital plan and capital ratios arising from stressed macroeconomic conditions. Actual recent economic, market and peer institution stresses are used to inform the assumptions of stress tests and assess the effectiveness of mitigation strategies.

The Group also undertakes stress tests prescribed by the BoE and EBA. Legal entities undertake stress tests prescribed by their local regulators. These stress tests inform decisions on the size and quality of capital buffer required and the results are incorporated into the Group capital plan to ensure adequacy of capital under normal and severe, but plausible, stressed conditions.

Risk mitigation: As part of the stress testing process actions are identified that should be taken to mitigate the risks that could arise in the event of material adverse changes in the current economic and business outlook.

As an additional layer of protection, the Barclays Recovery Plan defines the actions and implementation strategies available for the Group to increase or preserve capital resources in the event that stress events are more extreme than anticipated.

Senior Management awareness and transparency: Treasury works closely with Risk, businesses and legal entities to support a proactive approach to identifying sources of capital ratio volatilities which are considered in the Group’s capital plan. Capital risks against firm-specific and macroeconomic early warning indicators are monitored and reported to Treasury Committee, associated with clear escalation channels to senior management.

Capital management information is readily available at all times to support the Executive Management’s strategic and day-to-day business decision making, as may be required.

The Group submits its Board approved ICAAP document to the PRA on an annual basis, which forms the basis of the Individual Capital Guidance (ICG) set by the PRA.

Capital allocation: Capital allocations are approved by the Group Executive committee and monitored by the Treasury Committee, taking into consideration the risk appetite, growth and strategic aims of the Group. Regulated legal entities are, at a minimum, allocated adequate capital to meet their current and forecast regulatory and business requirements.

Transferability of capital: The Group’s policy is for surplus capital held in Group entities to be repatriated to BB PLC in the form of dividends and/or capital repatriation, subject to local regulatory requirements, exchange controls and tax implications. This approach provides optimal flexibility on the re-deployment of capital across legal entities. The Group is not aware of any material impediments to the prompt transfer of capital resources, in line with the above policy, or repayment of intra-group liabilities when due.

Foreign exchange risk: The Group has capital resources and risk weighted assets denominated in foreign currencies. Changes in foreign exchange rates result in changes in the Sterling equivalent value of foreign currency denominated capital resources and RWAs. As a result, the Group’s regulatory capital ratios are sensitive to foreign currency movements.

The Group’s capital ratio management strategy is to minimise the volatility of the capital ratios caused by foreign exchange rate movements. To achieve this, the Group aims to maintain the ratio of foreign currency CET1, Tier 1 and Total Capital Resources to foreign currency RWAs the same as the Group’s consolidated capital ratios.

The Group’s investments in foreign currency subsidiaries and branches, to the extent that they are not hedged for foreign exchange movements, translate into GBP upon consolidation creating CET1 capital resources sensitive to foreign currency movements. Changes in the GBP value of the investments due to foreign currency movements are captured in the currency translation reserve, resulting in a movement in CET1 capital.

To create foreign currency Tier 1 and Total Capital Resources additional to the CET1 capital resources, the Group issues, where possible, debt capital in non-Sterling currencies. This is primarily achieved by the issuance of debt capital from Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC in USD and EUR, but can also be achieved by subsidiaries issuing capital in local currencies, such as Barclays Africa Group Limited in South Africa.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  151


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of conduct risk (including reputation risk)

 

 

This section provides an analysis of the management of conduct risk (including reputation risk).

 

  §   Conduct risk is the risk that detriment is caused to our customers, clients, counterparties or the Group and its employees because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities

 

  §   Reputation risk is the risk of damage to the Barclays brand arising from association, action or inaction which is perceived by stakeholders to be inappropriate or unethical

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  152


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of conduct risk (including reputation risk)

 

 

Conduct risk

The risk that detriment is caused to customers, clients, counterparties or the Group because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities.

Overview

The Group defines, manages and mitigates conduct risk with the goal of providing good customer outcomes and protecting market integrity.

The Group has defined seven Key Risks that are the main sub-risk types to Conduct Risk:

 

§   our products or services do not meet customers’ needs or have the potential to cause customer detriment

 

§   the way we design and undertake transaction services has the potential to cause customer detriment

 

§   the way we design or undertake customer servicing has the potential to cause customer detriment

 

§   our strategy or business model has the potential to cause customer detriment

 

§   our governance arrangements or culture has the potential to cause customer detriment

 

§   we fail to obtain and maintain relevant regulatory authorisations, permissions and licence requirements

 

§   damage to Barclays reputation is caused during the conduct of our business

Organisation and structure

The Conduct and Reputation Risk Committee (CRRC) derives its authority from the Barclays Group Head of Compliance. The purpose of the CRRC is to review and monitor the effectiveness of Barclays’ management of Conduct and Reputation Risk. In addition, specific committees monitor conduct risk and the control environment at the business level.

Roles and responsibilities

The Conduct Risk Principal Risk Framework (PRF) comprises a number of elements that allow the Group to manage and measure its conduct risk profile.

The PRF is implemented across the Group:

 

§   vertically, through an organisational structure that requires all businesses to implement and operate their own conduct risk framework that meets the requirements detailed within the ERMF

 

§   horizontally, with Group Key Risk Officers (KROs) required to monitor information relevant to their Key Risk from each element of the Conduct Risk PRF

The primary responsibility for managing conduct risk and compliance with control requirements sits with the business where the risk arises. The Conduct Risk Accountable Executive for each business is responsible for ensuring the implementation of, and adherence to the PRF.

The Conduct Principal Risk Officer is responsible for owning and maintaining an appropriate Group-wide Conduct Risk PRF and for overseeing Group-wide Conduct Risk management.

Businesses are required to report their conduct risks on both a quarterly and an event-driven basis. The quarterly reports detail conduct risks inherent within the business strategy and include forward looking horizon scanning analysis as well as backward looking evidence-based indicators from both internal and external sources. For details please refer to the Risk Review, Conduct Risk Performance section of the 2015 Annual Report (page 208).

Business level reports are reviewed within Compliance. Compliance then creates Group level reports for consideration by CRRC and RepCo. The Group periodically assesses its management of conduct risk through independent audits and addresses issues identified.

Event-driven reporting consists of any risks or issues that breach certain thresholds for severity and probability. Any such risks or issues must be promptly escalated to the business and the appropriate KRO.

In 2015 Reputation Risk was re-designated as a Key Risk under the Conduct Risk Principal Risk. The Reputation Key Risk Framework outlines the processes and actions required of the business. These include regular and forward looking reviews of current and emerging reputation risks so that a topical and comprehensive reputation risk profile of the organisation can be maintained.

 

 

Organisation and structure

 

LOGO

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  153


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of conduct risk (including reputation risk)

 

 

Reputation risk is the risk of damage to the Group’s brand arising from any association, action or inaction which is perceived by stakeholders (e.g. customers, clients, colleagues, shareholders, regulators, opinion formers) to be inappropriate or unethical. Damage to the Group’s brand and consequent erosion of our reputation reduces the attractiveness of the Group to stakeholders and may lead to negative publicity, loss of revenue, regulatory or legislative action, loss of existing and potential client business, reduced workforce morale and difficulties in recruiting talent. Ultimately it may destroy shareholder value.

Reputation risk may arise in many different ways, for example:

 

§   failure to act in good faith and in accordance with the Group’s values and code of conduct

 

§   failure (real or perceived) to comply with the law or regulation, or association (real or implied) with illegal activity

 

§   failures in corporate governance, management or technical systems

 

§   failure to comply with internal standards and policies

 

§   association with controversial sectors or clients

 

§   association with controversial transactions, projects, countries or governments

 

§   association with controversial business decisions, including but not restricted to, decisions relating to: products (in particular new products), delivery channels, promotions/advertising, acquisitions, branch representation, sourcing/supply chain relationships, staff locations, treatment of financial transactions

 

§   association with poor employment practices.

In each case, the risk may arise from failure to comply with either stated norms, which are likely to change over time, so an assessment of reputation risk cannot be static. If not managed effectively, stakeholder expectations of responsible corporate behavior will not be met.

Reputation Risk may also arise and cause damage to the Group’s image, through association with clients, their transactions or their projects if these are perceived by external stakeholders to be environmentally damaging. Where the Group is financing infrastructure projects which have potentially adverse environmental impacts, the Group’s Client Assessment and Aggregation policy and supporting Environmental and Social Risk Standard will apply. This policy identifies the circumstances in which the Group requires due diligence to include assessment of specialist environmental reports. These reports will include consideration of a wide range of the project’s potential impacts including on air, water and land quality, on biodiversity issues, on locally affected communities, including any material upstream and downstream impacts, and on working conditions together with employee and community health and safety. Adherence to the Environmental and Social Risk Standard is the mechanism by which Barclays fulfils the requirements of the Equator Principles. These Principles are an internationally recognised framework for environmental due diligence in project finance. Barclays was one of the four banks which collaborated in developing the Principles, ahead of their launch in 2003 with 10 adopting banks. There are now more than 80 banks worldwide which have adopted the Equator Principles (see www.equator-principles.com).

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  154


Appendices

Contents

 

 

    

 

 

 

Page

 

  

Appendix A – PD, LGD, RWA and Exposure by country      156   
Appendix B – Disclosure on asset encumbrance      158   
Appendix C – Disclosures on remuneration      159   
Appendix D – CRD IV reference      161   
Location of risk disclosures      168   
Index of tables      170   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  155


Appendices

Appendix A

PD, LGD, RWA and Exposure by country

 

 

The following tables show IRB data for countries in which Barclays is active where the IRB RWA amount is more than 1% of the Group total for any asset class. The countries are shown in descending order of aggregated total RWAs for all asset classes.

 

Table 73: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure values by country for IRB – all asset classes

 

  

Asset class – all asset classes                              
Country     

 

PD

%

  

  

    

 

LGD

%

  

  

    

 

RWA

£m

  

  

    

 

Exposure

£m

  

  

   Country     

 

PD

%

  

  

    

 

LGD

%

  

  

    
 
RWA
£m
  
  
    

 

Exposure

£m

  

  

United Kingdom      2.72%         32.0%         90,980         280,688       Jersey      0.37%         33.6%         1,192         2,202   
United States      1.10%         35.7%         20,214         63,738       Portugal      4.84%         31.4%         1,054         2,939   
South Africa      4.97%         33.1%         16,265         34,449       Australia      0.10%         45.7%         890         3,460   
Italy      4.24%         28.7%         6,320         15,307       Brazil      0.53%         46.1%         857         1,162   
Germany      1.38%         55.1%         3,387         11,032       Belgium      0.33%         43.5%         680         3,771   
France      0.68%         36.1%         2,155         8,251       India      0.24%         53.0%         505         937   
Ireland      1.22%         43.3%         1,923         4,766       Switzerland      0.20%         45.0%         481         2,150   
Spain      4.02%         53.4%         1,686         2,430       Saudi Arabia      0.04%         45.1%         216         3,066   
Netherlands      0.39%         45.4%         1,637         4,569       Qatar      0.07%         53.2%         163         531   
Japan      0.09%         42.1%         1,447         8,355       China      0.05%         47.6%         160         804   
Canada      0.41%         41.7%         1,281         3,890                                            

 

Table 73a: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure values by country for IRB – central governments and central banks

 

  

Asset class – central governments and central banks                              
Country     

 

PD

%

  

  

    

 

LGD

%

  

  

    
 
RWA
£m
  
  
    
 
Exposure
£m
  
  
   Country     

 

PD

%

  

  

    

 

LGD

%

  

  

    
 
RWA
£m
  
  
    
 
Exposure
£m
  
  
United Kingdom      0.02%         41.7%         99         5,275       Jersey                                
United States      0.01%         45.0%         52         875       Portugal      0.26%         50.0%         57         95   
South Africa      0.14%         40.1%         1,229         3,389       Australia      0.00%         45.0%         23         373   
Italy      0.19%         45.0%         1,534         1,901       Brazil      0.49%         45.0%         10         30   
Germany      0.01%         45.0%         79         514       Belgium      0.02%         45.0%         14         113   
France      0.01%         45.0%         28         280       India      0.35%         45.0%         109         247   
Ireland      0.04%         50.0%         50         390       Switzerland      0.01%         45.0%                 7   
Spain      0.16%         45.0%         328         548       Saudi Arabia      0.04%         45.0%         202         3,010   
Netherlands      0.01%         45.0%         11         141       Qatar      0.04%         45.0%         54         236   
Japan      0.08%         34.1%         385         3,484       China      0.03%         53.0%         28         272   
Canada      0.02%         45.0%         2         104                                            

 

Table 73b: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure values by country for IRB – institutions

 

  

Asset class – institutions                              
Country     

 

PD

%

  

  

    

 

LGD

%

  

  

    
 
RWA
£m
  
  
    
 
Exposure
£m
  
  
   Country     

 

PD

%

  

  

    

 

LGD

%

  

  

    
 
RWA
£m
  
  
    
 
Exposure
£m
  
  
United Kingdom      0.32%         43.4%         4,087         12,843       Jersey      0.88%         56.0%         151         77   
United States      0.07%         22.3%         869         7,532       Portugal      1.60%         45.2%         55         49   
South Africa      0.39%         45.1%         391         853       Australia      0.04%         42.6%         330         1,556   
Italy      0.45%         45.3%         160         176       Brazil      0.47%         45.2%         774         1,042   
Germany      0.04%         42.8%         738         2,806       Belgium      0.03%         34.3%         145         516   
France      0.09%         26.6%         940         3,459       India      0.47%         49.3%         88         114   
Ireland      0.21%         44.2%         181         320       Switzerland      0.03%         44.1%         208         1,111   
Spain      0.13%         46.2%         183         333       Saudi Arabia      0.04%         53.5%         13         47   
Netherlands      0.03%         43.0%         263         907       Qatar      0.06%         45.0%         31         112   
Japan      0.08%         47.5%         635         3,371       China      0.06%         44.8%         124         484   
Canada      0.05%         38.2%         149         762                                            

 

Table 73c: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure values by country for IRB – corporates

 

  

Asset class – corporates                              
Country     

 

PD

%

  

  

    

 

LGD

%

  

  

    
 
RWA
£m
  
  
    
 
Exposure
£m
  
  
   Country     

 

PD

%

  

  

    

 

LGD

%

  

  

    
 
RWA
£m
  
  
    
 
Exposure
£m
  
  
United Kingdom      2.36%         36.8%         42,365         81,092       Jersey      0.35%         32.9%         1,041         2,124   
United States      1.25%         37.4%         19,291         55,319       Portugal      1.81%         47.0%         134         155   
South Africa      3.74%         34.6%         7,088         12,898       Australia      0.18%         49.0%         537         1,529   
Italy      0.91%         51.5%         893         1,433       Brazil      1.26%         57.0%         73         89   
Germany      0.39%         49.1%         1,429         4,977       Belgium      0.40%         45.0%         521         3,140   
France      1.18%         42.8%         1,185         4,502       India      0.14%         57.2%         308         576   
Ireland      1.13%         42.7%         1,670         4,030       Switzerland      0.36%         46.3%         271         1,016   
Spain      4.36%         48.8%         825         1,141       Saudi Arabia      0.04%         45.0%         1         9   
Netherlands      0.48%         46.1%         1,361         3,517       Qatar      0.11%         68.8%         78         183   
Japan      0.14%         48.4%         427         1,500       China      0.03%         45.3%         8         48   
Canada      0.51%         42.5%         1,130         3,024                                            

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  156


Appendices

Appendix A

PD, LGD, RWA and Exposure by country

 

 

Table 73d: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure values by country for IRB – SME retail

 

  

Asset class – SME retail                              
Country     

 

PD

%

  

  

    

 

LGD

%

  

  

    

 

RWA

£m

  

  

    

 

Exposure

£m

  

  

   Country     

 

PD

%

  

  

    

 

LGD

%

  

  

    

 

RWA

£m

  

  

    

 

Exposure

£m

  

  

United Kingdom      7.79%         35.5%         2,998         6,781       Jersey      5.35%         16.2%                 1   
United States      0.50%         28.0%                       Portugal                                
South Africa      4.48%         50.2%         609         1,107       Australia      0.52%         10.7%                 1   
Italy      0.18%         87.5%                       Brazil                                
Germany                                    Belgium                                
France      0.70%         5.0%                       India                                
Ireland      2.84%         31.9%                 1       Switzerland                                
Spain      16.15%         18.7%                       Saudi Arabia                                
Netherlands                                    Qatar                                
Japan                                    China                                
Canada      0.18%         87.5%                                                            

Table 73e: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure values by country for IRB – secured retail

 

  

Asset class – secured retail                              
Country     

 

PD

%

  

  

    

 

LGD

%

  

  

    

 

RWA

£m

  

  

    

 

Exposure

£m

  

  

   Country     

 

PD

%

  

  

    

 

LGD

%

  

  

    
 
RWA
£m
  
  
    

 

Exposure

£m

  

  

United Kingdom      1.80%         11.5%         19,428         130,661       Jersey                                
United States      7.56%         25.3%         2         12       Portugal      5.25%         29.6%         808         2,640   
South Africa      6.26%         13.0%         3,019         10,783       Australia      0.37%         21.3%                 1   
Italy      5.28%         23.1%         3,732         11,789       Brazil      0.24%         19.6%                 1   
Germany      4.91%         23.4%                 3       Belgium      0.24%         22.1%                 2   
France      3.12%         25.8%         2         9       India                                
Ireland      46.78%         26.2%         22         26       Switzerland      2.04%         24.2%         2         16   
Spain      7.76%         25.3%         1         6       Saudi Arabia      0.12%         24.7%                   
Netherlands      14.54%         22.7%         2         4       Qatar                                
Japan      0.19%         22.7%                       China      0.13%         25.4%                   
Canada      0.28%         14.4%                                                            

Table 73f: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure values by country for IRB – revolving retail

 

  

Asset class – revolving retail                              
Country     

 

PD

%

  

  

    

 

LGD

%

  

  

    

 

RWA

£m

  

  

    

 

Exposure

£m

  

  

   Country     

 

PD

%

  

  

    

 

LGD

%

  

  

    
 
RWA
£m
  
  
    

 

Exposure

£m

  

  

United Kingdom      5.75%         77.6%         15,842         38,647       Jersey                                
United States                                    Portugal                                
South Africa      10.28%         75.8%         1,433         2,220       Australia                                
Italy                                    Brazil                                
Germany      4.81%         80.4%         1,141         2,734       Belgium                                
France                                    India                                
Ireland                                    Switzerland                                
Spain      11.44%         84.1%         349         402       Saudi Arabia                                
Netherlands                                    Qatar                                
Japan                                    China                                
Canada                                                                         

Table 73g: PD, LGD, RWA and exposure values by country for IRB – other retail exposures

 

  

Asset class – other retail exposures                              
Country     

 

PD

%

  

  

    

 

LGD

%

  

  

    
 
RWA
£m
  
  
    
 
Exposure
£m
  
  
   Country     

 

PD

%

  

  

    

 

LGD

%

  

  

    
 
RWA
£m
  
  
    
 
Exposure
£m
  
  
United Kingdom      10.85%         88.4%         6,161         5,389       Jersey                                
United States                                    Portugal                                
South Africa      8.38%         49.2%         2,496         3,199       Australia                                
Italy      96.39%         90.8%         1         8       Brazil                                
Germany                                    Belgium                                
France                                    India                                
Ireland                                    Switzerland                                
Spain                                    Saudi Arabia                                
Netherlands                                    Qatar                                
Japan                                    China                                
Canada                                                                         

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  157


Appendices

Appendix B

Disclosure on asset encumbrance

 

 

Asset encumbrance arises from collateral pledged against secured funding and other collateralised obligations. Barclays funds a portion of trading portfolio assets and other securities via repurchase agreements and other similar borrowing and pledges a portion of customer loans and advances as collateral in securitisation, covered bond and other similar structures. Barclays monitors the mix of secured and unsecured funding sources within the Group’s funding plan and seeks to efficiently utilise available collateral to raise secured funding and meet other collateralised obligations. The encumbered assets below will not agree to those disclosed in the Annual Report (page 196). The assets below are disclosed on a quarterly averaging basis and include BAGL. The Annual Report disclosure is reported as at year end and excludes BAGL. There will also be a difference in consolidation between the Annual Report (IFRS consolidation) and the Pillar 3 Report (regulatory consolidation).

 

Template A – Assets

  

           
 
 
 

 

 

Carrying
amount of
encumbered
assets

010

£bn

  
  
  
  

  

  

    
 
 

 

 

Fair value of
    encumbered
assets

040

£bn

  
  
  

  

  

   

 
 
 

 

 

Carrying

amount of
unencumbered
assets

060

£bn

  

  
  
  

  

  

   
 
 

 

 

Fair value of
unencumbered
assets

090

£bn

  
  
  

  

  

010

         Assets of the reporting institution      199.4           1,010.8     

030

         Equity instruments      27.0         27.0        20.6        20.6   

040

         Debt securities      49.6         49.6        105.9        105.9   

120

         Other assets                      382.9           

    

  

   

Template B – Collateral received

  

                            
 
 
 
 
 

 

 

Fair value of
encumbered
collateral
received or
own debt
securities issued

010

£bn

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

  

   
 
 

 
 

 

 
 
 

 

Fair value of
collateral
received or

own debt
securities

issued

available for
encumbrance
040

£bn

  
  
  

  
  

  

  
  
  

  

130

         Collateral received by the reporting institution           283.2        46.5   

150

         Equity instruments           57.1        9.6   

160

         Debt securities           223.7        38.6   

230

         Other collateral received                    

240

         Own debt securities issued other than own covered bonds or ABSs                              4.8   

    

  

   

Template C – Encumbered assets/collateral received and associated liabilities

  

                            
 
 
 
 
 

 

Matching
liabilities,
contingent
liabilities or
securities lent
010

£bn

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 

 

 
 
 
 

 

 

Assets, collateral
received and
own debt
securities

issued

other than
covered bonds
and ABSs
encumbered

030

£bn

  
  
  
  

  

  
  
  
  

  

  

010

         Carrying amount of selected financial liabilities                       190.8        308.3   

The Group’s average asset encumbrance for 2015 was £199.4bn, which primarily related to firm financing of trading portfolio assets and other securities, cash collateral and secured funding against loans and advances to customers. Encumbered assets have been identified in a manner consistent with the Group’s reporting requirements under CRR. Securities and commodity assets are considered encumbered when they have been pledged or used to secure, collateralise or credit enhance a transaction which impacts their transferability and free use.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  158


Appendices

Appendix C

Disclosures on remuneration

 

 

Remuneration

The following tables show the remuneration awards made to Barclays’ Material Risk Takers (MRTs) in respect of the 2015 performance year.

Information on decision-making policies for remuneration and the links between pay and performance and Barclays’ remuneration policy and process (including information on remuneration design, performance measurement and risk adjustment, deferral and vesting, fixed to variable remuneration ratio and variable remuneration and benefits policy) is contained in the Remuneration report, which can be found on pages 83 to 116 of the 2015 Annual Report.

The disclosure below is made in accordance with Article 450 of the Capital Requirements Regulation in relation to employees who have been identified as MRTs and to the extent it is applicable to the 2015 performance year.

MRTs

MRTs are the members of the Barclays PLC Board and Barclays’ employees whose professional activities could have a material impact on the Group’s risk profile. A total of 1,523 individuals were MRTs in 2015 (2014: 1,277).

‘Senior management’ means members of the Barclays PLC Board (executive Directors and non-executive Directors) and members of the Barclays Group Executive Committee in accordance with Article 3(9) of CRDIV.

 

MRT aggregate remuneration by business

  

      
 

 

Investment
Bank

£m

  
  

  

    
 
 

 

Personal and
Corporate
Banking

£m

  
  
  

  

    
 
Barclaycard
£m
  
  
    
 
 
Africa
Banking
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
Group
Functions
£m
  
  
  
    
 
Non-Core
£m
  
  

2015

     842         103         18         28         199         34   

2014

     748         124         11         30         175         44   

 

MRT aggregate remuneration by remuneration type

                                   
     2015         2014   
      
 
Senior
management
  
  
    
 
Other
MRTs
  
  
    

 

Senior

management

  

  

    
 
Other
MRTs
  
  

Fixed pay

Number of individuals

     29         1,494         29         1,248   

Fixed pay (£m)

     27         602         25         522   

Variable pay

           

Number of individuals

     14         1,246         9         1,059   

Current year cash bonus (£m)

     3         49         2         44   

Current year share bonus (£m)

     3         39         2         39   

Deferred cash bonus (£m)

     7         242         2         242   

Deferred share bonus (£m)

     7         243         4         245   

Total variable pay (£m)

     20         573         10         570   

Long-term incentive award (outcome contingent on future performance)(£m)a

     2                 5           

    

           

MRT deferred remuneration

                                   
     2015         2014   
      
 
 
Senior
management
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
Other
MRTs
£m
  
  
  
    
 
 
Senior
management
£m
  
  
  
    

 
 

Other

MRTs
£m

  

  
  

Awarded in yearb

     27         684         40         892   

Paid in yearc

     40         793         59         761   

Reduced through performance adjustmentsd

     (9      (7      (14      (22

Outstanding at 31 December, of which:d

     50         1,317         91         1,622   

– vested

             6         2         19   

– unvested

     50         1,311         89         1,603   

 

Notes

a Value of long-term incentive awards is the face value at grant.
b Valued at grant price.
c Valued at date of payment.
d Valued at 31 December of the relevant year.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  159


Appendices

Appendix C

Disclosures on remuneration

 

 

MRT joining and severance payments

                                   
     2015         2014   
      
 
Senior
management
  
  
    
 
Other
MRTs
  
  
    
 
Senior
management
  
  
    
 
Other
MRTs
  
  

Sign-on awards

           

Number of individuals

             3                   

Made during the year (£m)

             1                   

Buy-out awards

           

Number of individuals

     1         9         1         24   

Made during the year (£m)

     2         5         4         21   

Severance awards

           

Number of individuals

             14                 42   

Made during the year (£m)

             1                 4   

Highest individual award

                               

    

  

MRT aggregate remuneration by banda

  

        2015 a       2014   
          
 
Constant
currency
  
b 
     Actual c 

Remuneration band

             
 
Number
of MRTs
  
  
    

 

Number

of MRTs

  

  

    
 
Number
of MRTs
  
  

1,000,001 to 1,500,000

        291         318         279   

1,500,001 to 2,000,000

        119         132         132   

2,000,001 to 2,500,000

        69         85         59   

2,500,001 to 3,000,000

        56         34         28   

3,000,001 to 3,500,000

        16         18         19   

3,500,001 to 4,000,000

        19         18         22   

4,000,001 to 4,500,000

        14         19         7   

4,500,001 to 5,000,000

        10         9         5   

5,000,001 to 6,000,000

        4         8         5   

6,000,001 to 7,000,000

        8         2         2   

7,000,001 to 8,000,000

        3         2           

8,000,001 to 9,000,000

        1                 1   

9,000,001 to 10,000,000

                1           

10,000,001 to 11,000,000

        1                   

11,000,001 to 12,000,000

                          

12,000,001 to 13,000,000

                          

13,000,001 to 14,000,000

        1                 1   

14,000,001 to 15,000,000

                          

15,000,001 to 16,000,000

                      1           

 

 

Notes

a The table is prepared in Euros in accordance with Article 450 of the Capital Requirements Regulation, at an exchange rate of £1:1.4227.
b Prior year constant currency comparatives shown at an exchange rate of £1:1.4227.
c Prior year actual comparatives are shown at the December 2014 European Commission Financial Programming and Budget rate of £1:1.2626.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  160


Appendices

Appendix D

CRD IV reference

 

 

Table 74: CRD IV reference

 

CRR ref.

   High-level summary    Compliance reference

Scope of disclosure requirements

431 (1)

   Requirement to publish Pillar 3 disclosures    Barclays publishes Pillar 3 disclosures

431 (2)

   Firms with permission to use specific operational risk methodologies must disclose operational risk information.    The Operational Risk section from page 143 contains a description of the operational risk framework, and required Pillar 3 disclosures.

431 (3)

   Institution must have a policy covering frequency of disclosures. Their verification, comprehensiveness and overall appropriateness.    Barclays has a dedicated Pillar 3 policy.

431 (4)

   Explanation of ratings decision upon request    Barclays provides explanations of rating decisions to SMEs whose loan applications were declined in writing, and suggests alternative sources of finance. Barclays participates in a formal appeals process, one of the successful initiatives implemented as part of Business Finance Taskforce, with a government-appointed overseer. In the case of larger corporates, written explanations are not usually requested as direct discussions with relationship managers take place.

Non-material, proprietary or confidential information

432 (1)

   Institutions may omit information that is not material if certain conditions are respected.    Compliance with this provision is covered by Barclays’ policy.

432 (2)

   Institutions may omit information that is proprietary or confidential if certain conditions are respected.    Compliance with this provision is covered by Barclays’ policy.

432 (3)

   Where 432 (1) and (2) apply this must be stated in the disclosures, and more general information must be disclosed.    This table specifies where disclosures are omitted.

432 (4)

   Use of 432 (1) or (2) is without prejudice to scope of liability for failure to disclose material information     

Frequency of disclosure

433

   Disclosures must be published once a year at a minimum, and more frequently if necessary.    Compliance with this provision is covered by Barclays’ policy. See under ‘Notes on basis of preparation’ (page 5).

Means of disclosures

434 (1)

   To include of disclosures in one appropriate medium, or provide clear cross-references.    Most disclosures are contained within this document. Signposting directs the reader to other publications where appropriate. Note that remuneration disclosures are contained in a dedicated publication.

434 (2)

   Disclosures made under other requirements (e.g. accounting) can be used to satisfy Pillar 3 if appropriate.    Any cross-references to accounting or other disclosures are clearly signposted in this document. In particular, see page 168 for ‘Location of Risk Disclosures’.

Risk management objectives and policies

435 (1) (a)

   Disclose information on strategies and processes;    Risk management strategy: pages 96-106

435 (1) (b)

   organisational structure, reporting systems and risk mitigation/hedging.    Credit Risk: pages 107-123

435 (1) (c)

      Counterparty Credit Risk: pages 124-127

435 (1) (d)

      Market Risk: pages 128-138
        Operational Risk: pages 143-146
        Other Principal Risks:
        Funding Risk – Liquidity: pages 148-150 and page 138 in 2015 Annual Report
        Funding Risk – Capital: pages 150-151 and page 136 in 2015 Annual Report
          Conduct including Reputation Risk: pages 152-154 and page 141 in 2015 Annual Report

435 (1) (e)

   Inclusion of a declaration approved by the Board on adequacy of risk management arrangements.    See page 101. This statement covers all Principal Risks.

435 (1) (f)

   Inclusion of a concise risk statement approved by the Board.    Please see page 102 for effectiveness of risk management arrangements. This statement covers all Principal Risks.

435 (2)

   Information on governance arrangements, including information on Board composition and recruitment, and risk committees.    See pages 97-99 for a description of the risk committees. Page 36-37 of the 2015 Annual Report contains information on Board composition, experience and recruitment.

435(2) (a)

   Number of directorships held by directors.    Please see pages 36-37 of the 2015 Annual Report.

435 (2) (b)

   Recruitment policy of Board members, their experience and expertise.    Please see pages 36-37, 39-40 of the 2015 Annual Report.

435 (2) (c)

   Policy on diversity of Board membership and results against targets.    Please see pages 39-40 of the 2015 Annual Report.

435 (2) (d)

   Disclosure of whether a dedicated risk committee is in place, and number of meetings in the year.    Please see pages 52-56 of the 2015 Annual Report.

435 (2) (e)        

   Description of information flow on risk to Board.    Figure on page 98 in the risk management strategy section illustrates the reporting structure to Board committees.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  161


Appendices

Appendix D

CRD IV reference

 

 

Table 74: CRD IV continued

 

CRR ref.

   High-level summary    Compliance reference

Scope of application

436 (a)

   Name of institution    See under ‘Scope of consolidation’ (page 9).

436 (b)

   Difference in basis of consolidation for accounting and prudential purposes, naming entities that are:    Figure 1: Summary of regulatory scope of consolidation as at 31.12.15

436 (b) (i)

   Fully consolidated;   

436 (b) (ii)

   Proportionally consolidated;   

436 (b) (iii)

   Deducted from own funds;   

436 (b) (iv)

   Neither consolidated nor deducted.     

436 (c)

   Impediments to transfer of funds between parent and subsidiaries    There are no such impediments. See page 151.

436 (d)

   Capital shortfalls in any subsidiaries outside of scope of consolidation    Entities outside the scope of consolidation are appropriately capitalised.

436 (e)

   Making use of articles on derogations from a) prudential requirements or b) liquidity requirements for individual subsidiaries/entities    Barclays makes use of these provisions according to its waiver from the PRA.

Own funds

437 (1)

   Requirements regarding capital resources table    Page 16/Table 5: Capital resources

437 (1) (a)

        Page 17/Table 6: Summary of movements in capital resources

437 (1) (b)

        Pages 20-22/Table 8: Summary of terms and conditions of capital resources

437 (1) (c)

       

437 (1) (d) (i)

       

437 (1) (d) (ii)

       

437 (1) (d) (iii)  

       

437 (1) (e)

       

437 (1) (f)

         

437 (2)

   EBA to publish implementation standards for points above.    Barclays follows the implementation standards.

Capital requirements

438 (a)

   Summary of institution’s approach to assessing adequacy of capital levels.    Discussions of capital calculations are contained in each risk type management section (credit, market and operational). General discussion on capital planning is on page 150.

438 (b)

   Result of ICAAP on demand from authorities.    Barclays has not received this request from its regulator.

438 (c)

   Capital requirement amounts for credit risk for each Standardised Approach exposure class.    Pages 30-31/Table 13: Detailed view of exposure at default, post-CRM by business.
          Various other tables contain capital requirements throughout the report.

438 (d)

  

Capital requirements amounts for credit risk for each

Internal Ratings Based Approach exposure class .

  

Pages 30-31/Table 13: Detailed view of exposure at default, post-CRM by business.

Various other tables contain capital requirements throughout the report.

438 (d) (i)

     

438 (d) (ii)

       

438 (d) (iii)

       

438 (d) (iv)

         

438 (e)

   Capital requirements amounts for market risk or settlement risk, or large exposures where they exceed limits.    Capital requirements for market risk are disclosed in Page 76/Table 51: Minimum capital requirement for market risk.

438 (f)

   Capital requirement amounts for operational risk, separately for the basic indicator approach, the standardised approach, and the advanced measurement approaches as applicable.    Page 93/Table 69: Risk weighted assets for operational risk

438 (endnote)

   Requirement to disclose specialised lending exposures and equity exposures in the banking book falling under the simple risk weight approach.    Specialised lending exposures: Page 52/Table 28: Corporate exposures subject to the slotting approach

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  162


Appendices

Appendix D

CRD IV reference

 

 

Table 74: CRD IV continued

 

CRR ref.

   High-level summary    Compliance reference

Exposure to counterparty credit risk (CCR)

439 (a)

   Description of process to assign internal capital and credit limits to CCR exposures.    Page 127

439 (b)

   Discussion of process to secure collateral and establishing reserves.    Pages 125-126

439 (c)

   Discussion of management of wrong-way exposures.    Page 127

439 (d)

   Disclosure of collateral to be provided (outflows) in the event of a ratings downgrade.    See the liquidity risk management section, pages 148-149.

439 (e)

   Derivation of net derivative credit exposure.    Page 69/Table 44: Counterparty credit exposure by approach

439 (f)

   Exposure values for mark-to-market, original exposure, standardised and internal model methods.    Page 68/Table 43: Counterparty credit exposures analysed by financial contract type

439 (g)

   Notional value of credit derivative hedges and current credit exposure by type of exposure.    Page 70/Table 46: Notional value of credit derivative contracts held for hedging purposes

439 (h)

   Notional amounts of credit derivative transactions for own credit, intermediation, bought and sold, by product type.    Page 69/Table 45: Notional exposure associated with credit derivative contracts

439 (i)

   Estimate of alpha, if applicable.    The alpha used by Barclays is 1.4. See page 7.

Capital buffers

440 (1) (a)

   Geographical distribution of relevant credit exposures.    Barclays’ counter cyclical capital buffer (CCCB) is currently set at 0% for UK exposures. In other jurisdictions where CCCB is being applied we do not expect this to be material. See page 8. High level indication of the distribution of exposures is disclosed in Table 73, for each country in which Barclays operates.

440 (1) (b)

  

Amount of the institution specific countercyclical capital buffer.

 

 

 

  

440 (2)

   EBA will issue technical implementation standards related to 440 (1)    Barclays will comply with the standards once applicable.

Indicators of global systemic importance

441 (1)

   Disclosure of the indicators of global systemic importance    Discussed on page 8.

441 (2)

   EBA will issue technical implementation standards related to 441 (1)    Barclays will comply with the standards once applicable.

Credit risk adjustments

442 (a)

   Disclosure of bank’s definitions of past due and impaired.    Impairment on page 265 of the 2015 Annual Report; online glossary for ‘Past Due’. Pages 109-116 provide a complete description of credit quality measures.

442 (b)

   Approaches for calculating credit risk adjustments.    Pages 112-116

442 (c)

   Disclosure of pre-CRM EAD by exposure class.    See points 442 (d), (e), (f) below which break down this total.

442 (d)

   Disclosures of pre-CRM EAD by geography and exposure class.    Pages 35-36/Table 16: Geographic analysis of credit exposure

442 (e)

   Disclosures of pre-CRM EAD by industry and exposure class.    Pages 37-39/Table 17: Industry analysis of credit exposure

442 (f)

   Disclosures of pre-CRM EAD by residual maturity and exposure class.    Pages 39-40/Table 18: Residual maturity analysis credit exposures

442 (g)

  

Breakdown of impaired, past due, specific and general credit adjustments, and impairment charges for the

period, by exposure class or counterparty type.

   Page 57/Table 33: Analysis of impaired and past due exposures and allowance for impairment by exposure type

442 (g) (i)

     

442 (g) (ii)

     

442 (g) (iii)

         

442 (h)

   Impaired, past due exposures, by geographical area, and amounts of specific and general impairment for each geography.    Page 58/Table 34: Geographic analysis of impaired and past due exposures and allowance for impairment

442 (i)

   Reconciliation of changes in specific and general credit risk adjustments.   

Page 58/Table 35: Analysis of movement on impairment and amounts taken directly to profit and loss

Page 59/Table 36: Regulatory adjustments to statutory impairment

442 (i) (i)

     

442 (i) (ii)

       

442 (i) (iii)

       

442 (i) (iv)

       

442 (i) (v)

         

442 endnote  

   Specific credit risk adjustments recorded to income statement are disclosed separately.    Page 58/Table 35: Analysis of movement on impairment and amounts taken directly to profit and loss

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  163


Appendices

Appendix D

CRD IV reference

 

 

Table 74: CRD IV continued

 

CRR ref.

   High-level summary    Compliance reference

Unencumbered assets

443

   Disclosures on unencumbered assets    Page 158

Use of ECAIs

444 (a)

   Names of the ECAIs used in the calculation of Standardised Approach RWAs, and reasons for any changes    Page 42

444 (b)

   Exposure classes associated with each ECAI    Page 42

444 (c)

   Explanation of the process for translating external ratings into credit quality steps    Page 42

444 (d)

   Mapping of external rating to credit quality steps    Page 42/Table 20: Relationship of long-term external credit ratings to credit quality steps under the standardised approach Page 42/Table 21: Credit quality steps and risk weights under the standardised approach

444 (e)

   Exposure value pre- and post-credit risk mitigation, by credit quality step.    Page 43/Table 22: Credit quality step analysis of pre-CRM exposure and capital deductions under the standardised approach Page 44/Table 23: Credit quality step analysis of post-CRM exposure and capital deductions under the standardised approach

Exposure to market risk

445

   Disclosure of position risk, large exposures exceeding limits, FX, settlement and commodities risk.    Page 76/Table 51: Minimum capital requirement for market risk

Operational risk

446

   Disclosure of the scope of approaches used to calculate operational risk, discussion of advanced methodology and external factors considered.    Pages 92 and 146

Exposure in equities not included in the trading book

447 (a)

   Differentiation of exposures based on objectives    Page 62/Table 40: Fair value of, and gains and losses on equity investments

447 (b)

   Recorded and fair value, and actual prices of exchange traded equity where it differs from fair value.   

447(c)

   Types, nature and amounts of the relevant classes of equity exposures.   

447 (d)

   Realised cumulative gains and losses on sales over the period.   

447 (e)

   Total unrealised gains/losses, latent revaluation gains/losses, and amounts included within Tier 1 capital.     

Exposure to interest rate risk on positions not included in the trading book

448 (a)

   Nature of risk and key assumptions in measurement models.    Model assumptions on pages 136-137.

448 (b)        

   Variation in earnings or economic value, or other measures used by the bank from upward and downward shocks to interest rates, by currency.   

Page 77/Table 52: Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by business unit

Page 77/Table 53: Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by currency

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  164


Appendices

Appendix D

CRD IV reference

 

 

Table 74: CRD IV continued

 

 CRR ref.    High-level summary    Compliance reference
 Exposure to securitisation positions     
 449    Exposure to securitisations positions.     
 449 (a)    Objectives in relation to securitisation activity.    Page 140
 449 (b)    Nature of other risks in securitised assets, including liquidity.    Pages 140-141
 449 (c)    Risks in re-securitisation activity stemming from seniority of underlying securitisations and ultimate underlying assets.    Page 141
 449 (d)    The roles played by institutions in the securitisation process.    Page 140
 449 (e)    Indication of the extent of involvement in these roles.    Page 140
 449 (f)    Processes in place to monitor changes in credit and market risks of securitisation exposures, and how the processes differ for re-securitisation exposures.    Pages 140-141
 449 (g)    Description of the institution’s policies with respect to hedging and unfunded protection, and identification of material hedge counterparties.    Page 141
 449 (h)    Approaches to calculation of RWA for securitisations mapped to types of exposures.    Page 141 ‘Rating methodologies, ECAIs and RWA calculations’
 449 (i)    Types of SSPEs used to securitise third-party exposures, and list of SSPEs.    Page 140 ‘Sponsoring conduit vehicles’
 449 (j)    Summary of accounting policies for securitisations:    Page 142 ‘Summary of the accounting policies for securitisation activities’
 449 (j) (i)        Treatment of sales or financings;   
 449 (j) (ii)    Recognition of gains on sales;   
 449 (j) (iii)    Approach to valuing securitisation positions;   
 449 (j) (iv)    Treatment of synthetic securitisations;   
 449 (j) (v)    Valuation of assets awaiting securitisations;   
 449 (j) (vi)    Recognition of arrangements that could require the bank to provide support to securitised assets.     
 449 (k)    Names of ECAIs used for securitisations.    Page 141
 449 (l)    Full description of Internal Assessment Approach.    Page 42/Table 20: Relationship of long-term external credit ratings to credit quality steps under the standardised approach
 449 (m)    Explanation of changes in quantitative disclosures.    Satisfied throughout; we comment on every quantitative table in the securitisation section.
 449 (n)    Banking and trading book securitisation exposures:     
 449 (n) (i)    Amount of outstanding exposures securitised;    Page 86/Table 63: Outstanding amount of exposures securitised – Asset value and impairment charges
 449 (n) (ii)    On balance sheet securitisation retained or purchased, and off-balance sheet exposures;    Page 87/Table 64: Securitisation exposures – by exposure class
 449 (n) (iii)    Amount of assets awaiting securitisation;    Page 85/Table 62: Assets awaiting securitisation
 449 (n) (iv)    Early amortisation treatment; aggregate drawn exposures, capital requirements;    There is no applicable data to publish in respect of this table. See page 83
 449 (n) (v)    Deducted or 1250%-weighted securitisation positions;    See page 83. Pages 88-89/Table 65: Securitisation exposures – by capital approach. Pages 89-90/Table 66: Re-securitisation exposures – by risk weight band
 449 (n) (vi)    Amount of exposures securitised and recognised gains or losses on sales.    Page 84/Table 61: Securitisation activity during the year
 449 (o)    Banking and trading book securitisations by risk band:     
 449 (o) (i)    Retained and purchased exposure and associated capital requirements, broken down by risk-weight bands;    Pages 88-89/Table 65: Securitisation exposures – by capital approach Pages 89-90/Table 66: Re-securitisation exposures – by risk weight band
 449 (o) (ii)    Retained and purchased re-securitisation exposures before and after hedging and insurance; exposure to financial guarantors broken down by guarantor credit worthiness.    There is no applicable data to publish in respect of this table. See page 83
 449 (p)    Impaired assets and recognised losses related to banking book securitisations, by exposure type    Page 86/Table 63: Outstanding amount of exposures securitised – Asset value and impairment charges
 449 (q)    Exposure and capital requirements for trading book securitisations, separately into traditional     
 449 (r)    Whether the institution has provided financial support to securitisation vehicles    There is no applicable data to publish in respect of this table – no support was provided in 2014. See Note 39 of 2015 Annual Report

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  165


Appendices

Appendix D

CRD IV reference

 

 

Table 74: CRD IV continued

 

CRR ref.

   High-level summary    Compliance reference

Remuneration disclosures

450

   Remuneration    Appendix C contains the remuneration awards made to Barclays’ Material Risk Takers. See the Directors’ remuneration report (DRR) of the 2015 Annual Report for other remuneration disclosures.

Leverage

         

451 (1) (a)

   Leverage ratio, and breakdown of total exposure measure,    Page 26/Table 11: Leverage ratio

451 (1) (b)

   including reconciliation to financial statements, and    Page 26/Table 11: Leverage ratio

451 (1) (c)

   derecognised fiduciary items    Page 26/Table 11: Leverage ratio

451 (1) (d)

   Description of the risk management approach to mitigate    See page 150, management of capital risk.

451 (1) (e)

   excessive leverage, and factors that impacted the leverage ratio during the year.     

451 (2)

   EBA to publish implementation standards for points above.    Barclays follows the implementation standards.

Use of the IRB approach to credit risk

452 (a)

   Permission for use of the IRB approach from authority    Pages 12-13

452 (b)

   Explanation of:     

452 (b) (i)

   Internal rating scales, mapped to external ratings;    Page 45/Table 24: Internal default grade probabilities and mapping to external ratings

452 (b) (ii)

   Use of internal ratings for purposes other than capital requirement calculations;    Page 117 ‘Applications of internal ratings’

452 (b) (iii)

   Management and recognition of credit risk mitigation;     

452 (b) (iv)

   Controls around ratings systems.    Page 118. ‘Management of model risk within Barclays – the control mechanisms for the rating system’

452 (c)

   Description of ratings processes for each IRB asset class, provided separately   

Pages 117-118. Separate descriptions apply to retail and wholesale classes collectively; hence this is not repeated for each separate class.

Pages 119-120/Table 70: IRB credit risk models selected features.

452 (c) (i)

     

452 (c) (ii)

       

452 (c) (iii)

       

452 (c) (iv)

       

452 (c) (v)

         

452 (d)

   Exposure values by IRB exposure class, separately for Advanced and Foundation IRB.    This is shown throughout the report.

452 (e)

   For wholesale exposure classes, disclosed separately by obligor grade:     

452 (e) (i)

   Total exposure, separating loans and undrawn exposures where applicable;    Pages 46-47/Table 25: IRB wholesale obligor grade disclosure for central governments and central banks

452 (e) (ii)

   Exposure-weighted average risk weight;   

Pages 48-49/Table 26: IRB wholesale obligor grade disclosure for institutions

Pages 50-51/Table 27: IRB wholesale obligor grade disclosure for corporates

452 (e) (iii)

   Undrawn commitments and average exposure values by asset class.   

452 (f)

   For retail exposure classes, same disclosures as under 452 (e), by risk grade or EL grade.   

Page 53/Table 29: IRB retail obligor grade disclosure for SME

Page 54/Table 30: IRB retail obligor grade disclosure for secured retail

Page 55/Table 31: IRB retail obligor grade disclosure for revolving retail

Page 56/Table 32: IRB retail obligor grade disclosure for other retail exposures

       
       
         

452 (g)

   Actual specific risk adjustments for the period and explanation of changes.    Page 60/Table 38: Impairment charges, other value adjustments and individual impairment charges for IRB exposures

452 (h)

   Commentary on drivers of losses in preceding period.   

452 (i)

   Disclosure of predicted against actual losses for sufficient period, and historical analysis to help assess the performance of the rating system over a sufficient period.   

Page 61/Table 39: Analysis of expected loss versus actual losses for IRB exposures

Pages 121-123/Table 71: Analysis of expected performance versus actual results

452 (j)

   For all IRB exposure classes:     

452 (j) (i)

   Where applicable, PD and LGD by each country where the bank operates    Appendix A, Page 156/Table 73: PD, LGD, RWA and Exposure by country.

452 (j) (ii)      

     

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  166


Appendices

Appendix D

CRD IV reference

 

 

Table 74: CRD IV continued

CRR ref.

   High-level summary    Compliance reference

Use of credit risk mitigation techniques

453 (a)

   Use of on- and off-balance sheet netting    Pages 125-127

453 (b)

   How collateral valuation is managed    Pages 125-127

453 (c)

   Description of types of collateral used by Barclays    Pages 125-127

453 (d)

   Types of guarantor and credit derivative counterparty, and their creditworthiness    Pages 125-127

453 (e)

   Disclosure of market or credit risk concentrations within risk mitigation exposures    Pages 125-127

453 (f)

   For exposures under either the Standardised or Foundation IRB approach, disclose the exposure value covered by eligible collateral    Page 41/Table 19: Collateral and guarantees for IRB approach

453 (g)

   Exposures covered by guarantees or credit derivatives     

Use of the Advanced Measurement Approaches to operational risk

454

   Description of the use of insurance or other risk transfer mechanisms to mitigate operational risk    Page 146

Use of internal market risk models

455 (a) (i)

   Disclosure of the characteristics of the market risk models.    Page 134/Table 72: Market risk models selected features

455 (a) (ii)

   Disclosure of the methodology and description of all-price risk measure and incremental risk charge.    Pages 133-134

455 (a) (iii)

   Descriptions of stress tests applied to the portfolios.    Page 132

455 (a) (iv)

   Methodology for back-testing and validating the models.    Pages 134-135

455 (b)

   Scope of permission for use of the models.    Page 13/Table 4: Summary of the scope of application of regulatory methodologies for market and operational risk

455 (c)

   Policies and processes to determine which exposures are to be included in the trading book, and to comply with prudential valuation requirements.    Pages 132-133

455 (d)

   High/Low/Mean values over the year of VaR, sVaR, all-price risk measure and incremental risk charge.    Page 75/Table 49: Analysis of regulatory VaR, SVaR, IRC and All Price Risk Measure

455 (d) (i)

       

455 (d) (ii)

        Page 74/Table 48: The daily average, maximum and minimum values of management VaR

455 (d) (iii)

       

455 (e)

   The elements of the own fund calculation.    Page 76/Table 51: Minimum capital requirement for market risk

455 (f)

   Weighted average liquidity horizons of portfolios covered by models.    Disclosed in model discussions on page 133.

455 (g)

   Comparison of end-of-day VaR measures compared with one-day changes in portfolio’s value.    Pages 134-135.

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  167


Appendices

Location of risk disclosures

 

 

Barclays’ risk disclosures are located across the Annual Report and Pillar 3 Report

 

               
 
Annual
Report
  
  
    

 

Pillar 3

        Report

  

  

Material existing and emerging risks

 

                 
Insight into the level of risk across our business and portfolios, the material existing and emerging risks and uncertainties we face and the key areas of management focus.  

§

   Credit risk      120         n/a   
 

§

   Market risk      121         n/a   
 

§

   Funding risk      121         n/a   
 

§

   Operational risk      122         n/a   
 

§

   Conduct risk      124         n/a   
 

§

  

Material existing and emerging risks potentially impacting more than one Principal risk

 

     125         n/a   

Risk management

 

                 
Overview of Barclays’ approach to risk management. A more comprehensive overview together with more specific information on policies that the Group determines to be of particular significance in the current operating environment can be found in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report or at home.barclays  

§

   Risk management strategy      128         97   
 

§

   Governance structure      128         97   
 

§

   Risk governance and assigning responsibilities      130         100   
 

§

   Principal risks and Key risks      131         101   
 

§

   Credit risk management      132         107   
 

§

   Management of credit risk mitigation techniques and counterparty credit risk      n/a         124   
 

§

   Market risk management      134         128   
 

§

   Management of securitisation exposures      n/a         139   
 

§

   Funding risk management      136         147   
 

§

   Capital risk management      136         150   
 

§

   Liquidity risk management      138         148   
 

§

   Operational risk management      139         143   
 

§

  

Conduct risk management

 

     141         152   

Risk performance

 

                 
Credit risk:  

§

   Credit risk overview and summary of performance      145         107   
The risk of suffering financial loss should the Group’s customers, clients or market counterparties fail to fulfil their contractual obligations.  

§

   Analysis of the balance sheet      145         39, 43   
 

§

   Maximum exposure and collateral and other credit enhancement held      146         28, 41   
 

§

   The Group’s approach to manage and represent credit quality      148         42, 45   
 

§

   Loans and advances to customers and banks      150         n/a   
 

§

   Analysis of the concentration of credit risk      151         35, 37   
 

§

   Group exposures to specific countries and industries      152         n/a   
 

§

   Analysis of specific portfolios and asset types      155         n/a   
 

§

   Analysis of loans on concession programmes      164         n/a   
 

§

   Analysis of problem loans      167         57   
 

§

  

Impairment

 

     168         57   

Market risk:

The risk of a reduction to earnings or capital due to volatility of the trading book positions or as a consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity funding pools.

 

§

   Market risk overview, measures in the Group and summary of performance      172         72   
 

§

   Balance sheet view of trading and banking books      173         73   
 

§

   Traded market risk      174         74   
 

§

   Business scenario stresses      175         75   
 

§

   Review of regulatory measures      175         75   
 

§

   Non-traded market risk      176         76   
 

§

   Foreign exchange risk      178         79   
 

§

   Pension risk review      179         80   
 

§

  

Insurance risk review

 

     180         81   
Funding risk – Capital:  

§

   Capital risk overview and summary of performance      182         n/a   
The risk that the Group is unable to maintain appropriate capital ratios.  

§

   Regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements      182         8   
 

§

   Capital resources      183         16   
 

§

  

Leverage ratio requirements

 

     183         26   
Funding risk – Liquidity:  

§

   Liquidity risk overview and summary of performance      188         n/a   
The risk that the firm, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost.  

§

   Liquidity risk stress testing      188         n/a   
 

§

   Liquidity pool      191         n/a   
 

§

   Funding structure and funding relationships      192         n/a   
 

§

   Wholesale funding      193         n/a   
 

§

   Term financing      195         n/a   
 

§

   Encumbrance      195         158   
 

§

   Credit ratings      199         n/a   
 

§

   Liquidity management at Barclays Africa Group Limited      200         n/a   
 

§

  

Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities

 

     200         n/a   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  168


Appendices

Location of risk disclosures

 

 

 

 

               
 
Annual
Report
  
  
    
 
Pillar 3
        Report
  
  

Risk performance continued

 

                 
Operational risk:  

§

   Operational risk overview and summary of performance in the period      206         92   

The risk of direct or indirect impacts resulting from human factors, inadequate or failed internal processes and systems or external events.

 

 

§

   Operational risk profile      206         93, 94   

Conduct risk:

The risk that detriment is caused to our customers, clients, counterparties or Barclays and its employees because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities.

 

 

§

   Conduct risk overview      208         n/a   
 

§

   Reputation risk      208         n/a   
 

§

   Summary of performance      208         n/a   
 

§

   Salz recommendations      209         n/a   
 

§

  

Conduct reputation measure

 

     209         n/a   

 

Supervision and regulation:

The Group’s operations, including its overseas offices, subsidiaries and associates, are subject to a significant body of rules and regulations that are a condition for authorisation to conduct banking and financial services business.

 

§

   Supervision of the Group      210         n/a   
 

§

   Global regulatory developments      210         8   
 

§

   Influence of European legislation      211         n/a   
 

§

   EU developments      211         n/a   
 

§

   Regulation in the UK      212         n/a   
 

§

   Resolution of UK banking groups      212         n/a   
 

§

   Structural reform of banking groups      213         8   
 

§

   Compensation schemes      213         159   
 

§

   Regulation in the US      214         n/a   
 

§

  

Regulation in Africa

 

     215         n/a   

Pillar 3 Report

 

                          
Contains extensive information on risk as well as capital management.  

§

   High level summary of risk and capital profile      n/a         3   
 

§

   Notes on basis of preparation      n/a         5   
 

§

  

Scope of application of Basel rules

 

     n/a         6   

 

Risk and capital position review:

Provides a detailed breakdown of Barclays’ regulatory capital adequacy and how this relates to Barclays’ risk management.

 

§

   Group capital resources, requirements and leverage      n/a         15   
 

§

   Analysis of credit risk      n/a         27   
 

§

   Analysis of counterparty credit risk      n/a         63   
 

§

   Analysis of market risk      n/a         71   
 

§

   Analysis of credit value adjustment      n/a         81   
 

§

   Analysis of securitisation exposures      n/a         82   
 

§

   Analysis of operational risk      n/a         92   

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  169


Appendices

Index of Tables

 

 

 Table           Page  
 Table 1      Barclays PLC balance sheet – statutory versus regulatory view    10  
 Table 2      Regulatory calculation drivers split by IFRS account classification    11  
 Table 3      The scope of the Standardised and IRB approaches for credit and counterparty credit risk    12  
 Table 4      Summary of the scope of application of regulatory methodologies for market and operational risk    13  
 Table 5      Capital resources    16  
 Table 6      Summary of movements in capital resources    17  
 Table 7      Regulatory capital    18-19  
 Table 8      Summary of terms and conditions of capital resources    20-22  
 Table 9      Risk weighted assets by risk type and business    23  
 Table 10      Movements in risk weighted assets    23  
 Table 11      Leverage ratio    26  
 Table 12      Minimum capital requirements and exposure for credit risk    28-29  
 Table 13      Detailed view of exposure at default, post-CRM by business    30-31  
 Table 14      Detailed view of credit risk RWAs by business    32-33  
 Table 15      Banking book reconciliation of IFRS balance sheet and credit risk calculation    34  
 Table 16      Geographic analysis of credit exposure    35-36  
 Table 17      Industry analysis of credit exposure    37-38  
 Table 18      Residual maturity analysis credit exposures    39-40  
 Table 19      Exposures covered by guarantees and credit derivatives    41  
 Table 20      Relationship of long-term external credit ratings to credit quality steps under the Standardised approach    42  
 Table 21      Credit quality steps and risk weights under the Standardised approach    42  
 Table 22      Credit quality step analysis of pre-CRM exposure and capital deductions under the Standardised approach    43  
 Table 23      Credit quality step analysis of post-CRM exposure and capital deductions under the Standardised approach    44  
 Table 24      Internal default grade probabilities and mapping to external ratings    45  
 Table 25      IRB wholesale obligor grade disclosure for central governments and central banks    46-47  
 Table 26      IRB wholesale obligor grade disclosure for institutions    48-49  
 Table 27      IRB wholesale obligor grade disclosure for corporates    50-51  
 Table 28      Corporate exposures subject to the slotting approach    52  
 Table 29      IRB retail obligor grade disclosure for SME    53  
 Table 30      IRB retail obligor grade disclosure for secured retail    54  
 Table 31      IRB retail obligor grade disclosure for revolving retail    55  
 Table 32      IRB retail obligor grade disclosure for other retail exposures    56  
 Table 33      Analysis of impaired and past due exposures and allowance for impairment by exposure type    57  
 Table 34      Geographic analysis of impaired and past due exposures and allowance for impairment    58  
 Table 35      Analysis of movement on impairment and amounts taken directly to profit and loss    58  
 Table 36      Regulatory adjustments to statutory Impairment    59  
 Table 37      Analysis of regulatory impairment allowance by regulatory exposure class    59  
 Table 38      Impairment charges, other value adjustments and individual impairment charges for IRB exposures    60  
 Table 39      Analysis of expected loss versus actual losses for IRB exposures    61  
 Table 40      Fair value of, and gains and losses on equity investments    62  
 Table 41      Exposure at default associated with counterparty credit risk by business    64-65  
 Table 42      Risk weighted assets of counterparty credit risk exposures by business units    66-67  
 Table 43      Counterparty credit exposures analysed by financial contract type    68  
 Table 44      Counterparty credit exposure by approach    69  
 Table 45      Notional exposure associated with credit derivative contracts    69  
 Table 46      Notional value of credit derivative contracts held for hedging purposes    70  
 Table 47      Balance sheet split by trading and banking books    73  
 Table 48      The daily average, maximum and minimum values of management VaR    74  
 Table 49      Analysis of regulatory DVaR, SVaR, IRC and All Price Risk measure    75  
 Table 50      Breakdown of regulatory risk measures by portfolio    75  
 Table 51      Minimum capital requirement for market risk    76  
 Table 52      Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by business unit    77  
 Table 53      Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by currency    77  
 Table 54      Economic Capital for non-traded risk by business unit    77  
 Table 55      Analysis of equity sensitivity    78  
 Table 56      Analysis of volatility of the AFS portfolio in liquidity pool    78  
 Table 57      Functional currency of operations    79  
 Table 58      Analysis of insurance risk    81  
 Table 59      Credit valuation adjustment (CVA) capital charge    81  
 Table 60      Reconciliatoin of exposures and capital requirments relating to securitisations    83  
 Table 61      Securitisation activity during the year    84  
 Table 62      Assets awaiting securitisation    85  
 Table 63      Outstanding amount of exposures securitised – asset value and impairment charges    86  

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  170


Appendices

Index of Tables

 

 

 Table           Page  
 Table 64      Securitisation exposures – by exposure class    87  
 Table 65      Securitisation exposures – by capital approach    88-89  
 Table 66      Re-securitisation exposures – by risk weight band    89-90  
 Table 67      Aggregate amount of securitised positions retained or purchased by geography – banking book    90  
 Table 68      Aggregate amount of securitised positions retained or purchased by geography – trading book    91  
 Table 69      Risk weighted assets for operational risk    93  
 Table 70      IRB credit risk models selected features    119-120  
 Table 71      Analysis of expected performance versus actual results    121-123  
 Table 72      Market risk models selected features    134  
 Table 73      PD, LGD, RWA and Exposure values by country for IRB – all asset classes    156  
 Table 73a      PD, LGD, RWA and Exposure values by country for IRB – central governments and central banks    156  
 Table 73b      PD, LGD, RWA and Exposure values by country for IRB – institutions    156  
 Table 73c      PD, LGD, RWA and Exposure values by country for IRB – corporates    156  
 Table 73d      PD, LGD, RWA and Exposure values by country for IRB – SME retail    157  
 Table 73e      PD, LGD, RWA and Exposure values by country for IRB – secured retail    157  
 Table 73f      PD, LGD, RWA and Exposure values by country for IRB – revolving retail    157  
 Table 73g      PD, LGD, RWA and Exposure values by country for IRB – other retail exposures    157  
 Table 74      CRD IV reference    161-167  

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2015  |  171


Barclays PLC Notice of Annual General Meeting   LOGO
Letter from the Group Chairman  

 

LOGO   

 

This document is important and requires your immediate attention

  
   When considering what action you should take, you are recommended to seek your own personal advice immediately from your stockbroker, bank manager, solicitor, accountant or other professional adviser who is authorised under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000. If you have sold or transferred all your shares in Barclays PLC (the Company) please send this Notice of AGM and the accompanying proxy form to the person you sold or transferred your shares to, or the bank, stockbroker or other agent who arranged the sale or transfer for you, for transmission to the purchaser or transferee.   

 

LOGO

Dear Fellow Shareholder,

This year’s Annual General Meeting (AGM) will be held on Thursday, 28 April 2016 at the Royal Festival Hall, London, at 11.00am. The following pages contain the Notice of AGM, setting out the business that will be proposed and the procedures for your participation and voting. The AGM is a valuable opportunity for the Board to review the performance of the Group with shareholders and is therefore extremely important to Barclays.

This is my first AGM as Barclays Chairman, following the retirement of Sir David Walker at the conclusion of the 2015 AGM. I would like to extend my thanks and appreciation to Sir David for all that he did for Barclays during his tenure.

You will see from the Notice of AGM that this year your Board is recommending the appointment of three Directors who have joined the Board since the last AGM: Diane Schueneman, non-executive Director; Jes Staley, Group Chief Executive; and Sir Gerry Grimstone, Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director. Wendy Lucas-Bull stood down from the Board on 1 March 2016 following the announcement of Barclays’ intention to reduce its shareholding in Barclays Africa Group Ltd to ensure there is no potential conflict of interest between her position on the Board of Barclays and her position as Chairman of Barclays Africa Group Ltd. We are grateful to Wendy for her strong contribution to the Barclays Board over the last three years.

All of the current Directors, with the exception of Frits van Paasschen, who will retire at the conclusion of the AGM, are submitting themselves for re-election, and their biographies can be found in the Notice of AGM. I should also like to thank Frits for his support and diligence on the Board over the past three years.

All of the Directors, with the exception of Jes Staley and Sir Gerry Grimstone, who joined the Board towards the end of the year, were subject to a formal performance appraisal and the Board considers that they will continue to make a valuable contribution to the work of the Board and to Barclays. Each Director brings valuable skills and experience to the Board and its Committees. Further information on each Director is set out on pages 3 to 5 of this document and in the 2015 Annual Report (which is available at home.barclays/annualreport).

If you are unable to attend the AGM to vote in person, please complete and submit your proxy form by following the instructions on page 12. Submitting a proxy form will ensure your vote is recorded but will not prevent you from attending the meeting itself. If you have any questions on the business to be discussed, we would like to hear from you ahead of the meeting. Please send your questions to me, care of the Company Secretary, at Barclays PLC, 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP. My speech and that of the Group Chief Executive, will be available on home.barclays/agm from the day of the meeting.

All resolutions at the AGM will be put to a vote on a poll, rather than being decided by a show of hands. Your Directors believe that this results in a more accurate reflection of the views of shareholders and ensures that their votes are recognised, whether or not they are able to attend the meeting. On a poll, each shareholder has one vote for every share held. The results of the voting on the resolutions will be announced to the London Stock Exchange and published on our website as soon as possible after the conclusion of the meeting.

The Board believes that all of the proposals set out in the Notice of AGM are in the best interests of shareholders as a whole and the Company, and unanimously recommends that you vote in favour of all the resolutions, as the Directors intend to do in respect of their own beneficial holdings.

 

 

LOGO

John McFarlane

Group Chairman

Barclays PLC

10 March 2016

 

 

Barclays PLC. Registered in England. Registered No. 48839. Registered office. 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP


The Board

        

        

 

 

There were several significant changes to the composition of the Board during 2015: John McFarlane joined the Board on 1 January 2015 and Diane Schueneman and Jes Staley joined the Board in June and December 2015 respectively. Sir David Walker and Sir John Sunderland left the Board in April 2015, following the AGM, with Antony Jenkins leaving the Board in July 2015. Finally, in October 2015, Barclays announced that Sir Gerry Grimstone would succeed Sir Michael Rake as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director with effect from 1 January 2016. Sir Michael retired from the Board at the end of 2015.

When making new Board appointments the Directors examine the skills, experience and diversity of the Board, as well as the skills and personal attributes required for key Board positions. These are pre-agreed by the Board and set out in Corporate Governance in Barclays, Barclays’ corporate governance guidelines, which can be viewed at home.barclays/ corporategovernance. The Board also considers the experience that is lost when Directors retire, to ensure that the Board remains able to deliver its strategic aims and to govern the Group appropriately.

An externally facilitated review of the effectiveness of the Board was carried out for 2015 and, having assessed the findings of the review, the Board considers each Director to be fully effective. More information can be found in the 2015 Annual Report. The independence of non-executive Directors is determined annually, using the guidance set out in the UK Corporate Governance Code and behaviours determined by the Board to be essential in order for a Director to be considered independent. The Barclays independence criteria are disclosed in Corporate Governance in Barclays, which is available at home.barclays/corporategovernance. Having considered this guidance, the Board determined that all Barclays non-executive Directors standing for re-election at the 2016 AGM are independent.

Directors standing for appointment

 

LOGO     LOGO     LOGO

 

Diane Schueneman,

   

 

Jes Staley,

   

 

Sir Gerry Grimstone,

Non-executive Director     Group Chief Executive     Deputy Chairman and

 

Resolution: 3

   

 

Resolution: 4

    Senior Independent
        Director
       

 

Resolution: 5

 

Directors standing for reappointment

 

LOGO     LOGO     LOGO

 

Mike Ashley,

   

 

Tim Breedon,

   

 

Crawford Gillies,

Non-executive Director     Non-executive Director     Non-executive Director

Resolution: 6

 

   

Resolution: 7

 

   

Resolution: 8

 

LOGO     LOGO     LOGO

 

Reuben Jeffery III,

   

 

John McFarlane,

   

 

Tushar Morzaria,

Non-executive Director     Chairman     Group Finance Director

Resolution: 9

 

   

Resolution: 10

 

   

Resolution: 11

 

LOGO     LOGO     LOGO

 

Dambisa Moyo,

   

 

Diane de Saint Victor,

   

 

Steve Thieke,

Non-executive Director     Non-executive Director     Non-executive Director
Resolution: 12     Resolution: 13     Resolution: 14
 

 

2  |  Barclays PLC Notice of Meeting 2016    home.barclays/annualreport


Notice of AGM

 

 

Notice is hereby given that the 2016 Annual General Meeting (the AGM) of Barclays PLC (the Company) will be held at the Royal Festival Hall, Southbank Centre, Belvedere Road, London SE1 8XX on Thursday, 28 April 2016 at 11.00am to transact the following business:

Resolutions

The resolutions numbered 1 to 18 and 20 and 24 are proposed as ordinary resolutions, which must each receive more than 50% of the votes cast in order to be passed.

Resolutions numbered 19 and 21 to 23 are proposed as special resolutions, which must each receive at least 75% of the votes cast in order to be passed.

Report and Accounts

1. That the Reports of the Directors and Auditors and the audited accounts of the Company for the year ended 31 December 2015, now laid before the meeting, be received.

We are required by the Companies Act 2006 (the Act) to present to the AGM the Reports of the Directors and Auditors and the audited accounts of the Company for each financial year (in this case for the year ended 31 December 2015) (‘2015 Annual Report’ which is available at home.barclays/investorrelations).

The Company’s Articles of Association permit the Board to pay interim and final dividends. We use this authority rather than seek shareholder approval of the final dividend, as to do so would delay its payment to you. The final dividend for the financial year ended 31 December 2015 will be paid on 5 April 2016.

Directors’ Remuneration Report

2. That the Directors’ Remuneration Report (other than the part containing the abridged Directors’ Remuneration Policy) for the year ended 31 December 2015, now laid before the meeting, be approved.

The Act requires quoted companies to present to their shareholders for approval a Directors’ Remuneration Report. Our Directors’ Remuneration Report for the year ended 31 December 2015 appears on pages 83 to 116 of the 2015 Annual Report, which is available at home.barclays/ investorrelations. A summary remuneration report can be found in the Strategic Report, which is also available online. This shareholder vote is advisory and therefore does not directly affect the remuneration paid to any Director.

Appointment of Directors joining the Board since the last AGM

The Company’s Articles of Association provide that any new Director appointed by the Board during the year may hold office only until the next AGM, when that Director must stand for appointment by the shareholders. Diane Schueneman, Jes Staley and Sir Gerry Grimstone have each joined the Board since the last AGM and are accordingly seeking appointment by shareholders.

3. That Diane Schueneman be appointed a Director of the Company.

Skills and experience: Diane joined Barclays after an extensive career at Merrill Lynch, holding a variety of senior roles. Diane brings a wealth of experience in managing global, cross-discipline business operations, client services and technology in the financial services industry. Diane’s experience is a good addition to the discussions of the Board and the Board Audit and Board Risk Committees.

Independent: Yes

Other current principal external appointments: None

Committee membership: Board Audit Committee; Board Risk Committee

4. That Jes Staley be appointed a Director of the Company.

Skills and experience: Jes has nearly four decades of extensive experience in banking and financial services. He worked for more than 30 years at JP Morgan, initially training as a commercial banker, and later advancing to the leadership of major businesses involving equities, private banking and asset management, and ultimately heading the company’s Global investment bank. Most recently, Jes served as Managing Partner at BlueMountain Capital. These roles have provided him with a vast experience in leadership and he brings a wealth of investment banking knowledge to Barclays’ Board. Jes joined Barclays as Group Chief Executive on 1 December 2015.

Other current principal external appointments: None

Committee membership: None

5. That Sir Gerry Grimstone be appointed a Director of the Company.

Skills and experience: Sir Gerry joined the Board as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director on 1 January 2016 and brings a wealth of investment banking, financial services and commercial experience gained through his senior roles at Schroders and his various former board positions. Sir Gerry has global business experience across the UK, Hong Kong, Middle East and the United States. Sir Gerry has significant experience as a non-executive director and chairman. He is currently the chairman of Standard Life plc, independent non-executive board member of Deloitte LLP and the lead non-executive at the Ministry of Defence.

Independent: Yes

Other current principal external appointments: Financial Services Trade and Investment Board; The Shareholder Executive

Committee membership: Board Reputation Committee (Chairman); Board Nominations Committee

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Notice of Meeting 2016  |  3


Notice of AGM continued

 

 

 

Annual reappointment of Directors

Section B.7.1 of the UK Corporate Governance Code recommends that all Directors of FTSE 350 companies should be subject to annual reappointment by shareholders. The Directors standing for reappointment in light of this provision are listed in resolutions 6 to 14 below.

6. That Mike Ashley be reappointed a Director of the Company.

Skills and experience: Mike has deep knowledge of auditing and associated regulatory issues, having worked at KPMG for over 20 years, where he was a partner. Mike was the lead engagement partner on the audits of large financial services groups including HSBC, Standard Chartered and the Bank of England. While at KPMG, Mike was Head of Quality and Risk Management for KPMG Europe LLP, responsible for the management of professional risks and quality control. He also held the role of KPMG UK’s Ethics Partner.

Independent: Yes

Other current principal external appointments: ICAEW Ethics Standards Committee; European Financial Reporting Advisory Group’s Technical Expert Group; Chairman, Government Internal Audit Agency; Charity Commission; International Ethics Standards Board for Accountants

Committee membership: Board Audit Committee (Chairman); Board Nominations Committee; Board Risk Committee

7. That Tim Breedon be reappointed a Director of the Company.

Skills and experience: Tim joined Barclays after a distinguished career with Legal & General, where, among other roles, he was the group chief executive until June 2012. Tim’s experience as a CEO enables him to provide challenge, advice and support to the Executive on performance and decision-making. Tim brings to the Board extensive financial services experience, knowledge of risk management and UK and EU regulation, as well as an understanding of the key issues for investors.

Independent: Yes

Other current principal external appointments: Marie Curie Cancer Care; Chairman, Apax Global Alpha Limited

Committee membership: Board Risk Committee (Chairman); Board Audit Committee; Board Nominations Committee; Board Remuneration Committee

8. That Crawford Gillies be reappointed a Director of the Company.

Skills and experience: Crawford has extensive business and management experience, gained with Bain & Company and Standard Life plc. These roles have provided him with experience in strategic decision-making and knowledge of company strategy across various sectors and geographical locations. Crawford has also held board and committee chairman positions during his career, notably as chairman of the remuneration committees of Standard Life plc and MITIE Group PLC. Crawford intends to retire from his position at Standard Life plc in 2016.

Independent: Yes

Other current principal external appointments: SSE plc; Control Risks Group Holdings Limited

Committee membership: Board Remuneration Committee (Chairman); Board Audit Committee; Board Nominations Committee

9. That Reuben Jeffery III be reappointed a Director of the Company.

Skills and experience: Reuben has extensive financial services experience, particularly within investment banking and wealth management, through his role as CEO and president of Rockefeller & Co. Inc. and Rockefeller Financial Services Inc. and his former senior roles with Goldman Sachs, including as the managing partner of the Paris office. His various government roles in the US, including as chairman of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission, provides the Board with insight into the US political and regulatory environment.

Independent: Yes

Other current principal external appointments: International Advisory Council of the China Securities Regulatory Commission; Advisory Board of Towerbrook Capital Partners LP; Advisory Board of J. Rothschild Capital Management Limited; Financial Services Volunteer Corps; The Asia Foundation

Committee membership: Board Nominations Committee; Board Risk Committee

10. That John McFarlane be reappointed a Director of the Company.

Skills and experience: John is a former CEO of Australia and New Zealand Banking Group Limited with extensive financial services experience across retail, commercial and investment banking, gained both globally and in the UK. John has a proven track record of implementing cost reduction, cultural transformation and driving through strategic change; most recently demonstrated during his time as Chairman of Aviva plc. He is also an experienced non-executive director and chairman. John became Barclays’ Chairman at the conclusion of the April 2015 AGM. He became Executive Chairman in July 2015 and held this position until 1 December 2015, when he resumed the role of Chairman.

Independent: Yes

Other current principal external appointments: Old Oak Holdings Limited; Westfield Corporation; Chairman, The CityUK

Committee membership: Board Nominations Committee (Chairman)

11. That Tushar Morzaria be reappointed a Director of the Company.

Skills and experience: Tushar joined Barclays in 2013 having spent the previous four years in senior management roles with JP Morgan, most recently as the CFO of its Corporate & Investment Bank. Throughout his time with JP Morgan he gained strategic financial management and regulatory relations experience. Since joining the Board he has been a driving influence on the Group’s strategic cost reduction programme and managing the Group’s capital plan, particularly in response to structural reform.

Other current principal external appointments: None

Committee membership: None

12. That Dambisa Moyo be reappointed a Director of the Company.

Skills and experience: Dambisa is an international economist and commentator on the global economy, having completed a PhD in economics. Dambisa has a background in financial services and a wide knowledge and understanding of African economic, political and social issues, in addition to her experience as a director of companies with complex global operations.

Independent: Yes

Other current principal external appointments: SABMiller Plc; Barrick Gold Corporation; Seagate Technology plc

Committee membership: Board Remuneration Committee; Board Reputation Committee

 

 

4  |  Barclays PLC Notice of Meeting 2016    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

13. That Diane de Saint Victor be reappointed a Director of the Company.

Skills and experience: Diane holds the role of executive director, general counsel and company secretary of ABB Limited, a listed international power and automation technologies company. Diane’s legal background, combined with her knowledge of regulatory and compliance requirements, bring a unique perspective to discussions of the Board and its Committees.

Independent: Yes

Other current principal external appointments: None

Committee membership: Board Audit Committee; Board Reputation Committee

14. That Steve Thieke be reappointed a Director of the Company.

Skills and experience: Steve has significant experience in financial services, in both investment banking with JP Morgan, where amongst other roles he served as the chairman of the risk management committee, and in regulation, through roles with the Federal Reserve Bank of New York and the Financial Services Authority. Steve also has significant board experience, having served in both executive and non-executive director roles in his career.

Independent: Yes

Other current principal external appointments: None

Committee membership: Board Risk Committee

Reappointment of auditors

15. That PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors, be reappointed as auditors of the Company to hold office from the conclusion of this AGM until the conclusion of the next AGM at which accounts are laid before the Company.

The Act requires that auditors are reappointed at each AGM at which accounts are presented. The Board, on the unanimous recommendation of the Board Audit Committee, which has evaluated the effectiveness and independence of the Company’s external auditors, is proposing the reappointment of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP. Barclays conducted a tender of its external audit during 2015 and announced in July 2015 that KPMG LLP had been appointed as Barclays external auditor with effect from the 2017 financial year onwards. 2016 will therefore be the last financial year for which PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP holds office as Barclays’ external auditor.

Auditors’ remuneration

16. That the Board Audit Committee, acting for and on behalf of the Board, be authorised to set the remuneration of the auditors.

The Directors may set the remuneration of the auditors if authorised to do so by the shareholders. The Competition and Markets Authority’s Statutory Audit Services Order, which came into effect from 1 January 2015, clarified certain audit committee responsibilities, including providing that only the audit committee, acting collectively or through its chairman, and for and on behalf of the board, is permitted to negotiate and agree the statutory audit fee. This resolution seeks authority for the Board Audit Committee to set auditor remuneration for 2016. Details of the remuneration paid to the Company’s external auditors for 2015 and details of how the Board monitors the effectiveness and independence of the external auditors can be found in the 2015 Annual Report.

Political donations

17. That, in accordance with sections 366 and 367 of the Companies Act 2006 (the ‘Act’) the Company and any company which, at any time during the period for which this resolution has effect, is a subsidiary of the Company, be and are hereby authorised to:

 

(a)  make donations to political organisations not exceeding £25,000 in total; and

 

(b)  incur political expenditure not exceeding £100,000 in total,

in each case during the period commencing on the date of this resolution and ending on the date of the AGM of the Company to be held in 2017 or on 30 June 2017, whichever is the earlier, provided that the maximum amounts referred to in (a) and (b) may consist of sums in any currency converted into sterling at such rate as the Board may in its absolute discretion determine. For the purposes of this resolution, the terms ‘political donations’, ‘political organisations’ and ‘political expenditure’ shall have the meanings given to them in sections 363 to 365 of the Act.

Barclays does not give any money for political purposes in the UK nor does it make any donations to political organisations or incur political expenditure within or outside the EU. However, the definitions of political donations and political expenditure used in the Act are very wide. As a result, they may cover activities that form part of relationships that are an accepted part of engaging with our stakeholders to ensure that issues and concerns affecting our operations are considered and addressed, but which would not be considered as political donations or political expenditure in the layman’s sense. The activities referred to above are not designed to support any political party nor to influence public support for any political party or political outcome. The authority we are requesting is similar to that given by shareholders at the AGM in 2015 and is a precautionary measure to ensure that the Group does not inadvertently breach the Act.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Notice of Meeting 2016  |  5


Notice of AGM continued

  

  

 

 

General authority to allot shares and equity securities

18. That, in substitution for all existing authorities but without prejudice to any authority granted pursuant to resolution 20 (if passed), the Directors be and are hereby generally and unconditionally authorised pursuant to section 551 of the Act to exercise all the powers of the Company to:

 

(a) allot shares (as defined in section 540 of the Act) in the Company or grant rights to subscribe for, or to convert any security into, shares in the Company up to an aggregate nominal amount of £1,440,982,960, $77,500,000, €40,000,000 and ¥4,000,000,000; and

 

(b) allot equity securities (as defined in section 560 of the Act) up to an aggregate nominal amount of £2,801,965,920 (such amount to be reduced by the aggregate nominal amount of ordinary shares allotted or rights to subscribe for, or to convert any securities into, ordinary shares in the Company granted under paragraph (a) of this resolution 18) in connection with an offer by way of a rights issue:

 

  (i) to ordinary shareholders in proportion (as nearly as may be practicable) to their existing holdings; and

 

  (ii) to holders of other equity securities (as defined in section 560 of the Act) as required by the rights of those securities, or subject to such rights, as the Directors otherwise consider necessary,

and so that the Directors may impose any limits or restrictions and make any arrangements which they consider necessary or appropriate to deal with treasury shares, fractional entitlements or securities represented by depositary receipts, record dates, legal, regulatory or practical problems in, or under the laws of, any territory or the requirements of any regulatory body or stock exchange or any other matter, such authorities to apply (unless previously renewed, varied or revoked by the Company in general meeting) for the period expiring at the end of the AGM of the Company to be held in 2017 or the close of business on 30 June 2017, whichever is the earlier but, in each case, so that the Company may make offers and enter into agreements before the authority expires which would, or might require shares to be allotted or rights to subscribe for, or to convert any security into, shares to be granted after the authority expires and the Directors may allot shares or grant such rights under any such offer or agreement as if the authority had not expired.

Resolution 18 is divided into two parts which, in total, will give the Board authority to allot all of the preference shares (denominated in sterling and other currencies) that were created in 2008 and, in certain circumstances (explained below), ordinary shares up to an amount approximately equal to two-thirds of the Company’s current issued ordinary share capital (excluding shares held in treasury). As at 9 March 2016, the Company did not hold any treasury shares.

Paragraph (a) of the resolution will give the Board a general authority to allot all of the unissued preference shares in the Company and up to a maximum aggregate nominal amount of £1,400,982,960 of ordinary shares, being equivalent to one-third of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital as at 9 March 2016.

Paragraph (b) of the resolution will give authority to the Board to allot up to a further one-third of the current issued ordinary share capital, provided that the allotment is made in connection with a rights issue (an offer made to existing shareholders allowing them to purchase ordinary shares in proportion to their existing holding) in favour of holders of equity securities (which would include ordinary shareholders).

The amount in paragraph (b) would be reduced by the nominal amount of ordinary shares already issued or assigned under the authority conferred by paragraph (a) of this resolution, so that we would not have the power to issue in total more than two-thirds of the current issued ordinary share capital pursuant to the authority granted by this resolution. However, if resolution 20 is passed, we would have the additional authority to allot shares or grant rights to subscribe for, or to convert any security into, shares up to an amount approximately equal to 20% of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital (excluding shares held in treasury) as at 9 March 2016, as further described in resolution 20.

Resolution 18 is in line with guidance issued by the Investment Association (‘IA’). The Directors are also seeking renewed authority under resolution 20 for the issuance of contingent Equity Conversion Notes (ECNs) that automatically convert into or are exchanged for ordinary shares in the Company in prescribed circumstances. This additional authority for ECNs is not contemplated by the guidance issued by the IA, but has been previously discussed with them.

We have no current plans to make use of the authority sought under this resolution 18. The authority is, however, sought to ensure that the Company has maximum flexibility in managing the Group’s capital resources. We seek annual renewal of this authority in accordance with best practice.

This authority would remain in force until the end of the AGM in 2017 or the close of business on 30 June 2017, whichever is the earlier. Where the additional authority described in paragraph (b) of this resolution is used, all Directors would be required to stand for reappointment at the next AGM, although our usual practice is that Directors stand for reappointment annually.

Authority to allot equity securities for cash or to sell treasury shares other than on a pro rata basis to shareholders

19. That, in substitution for all existing powers, but without prejudice to any power granted pursuant to resolution 21 (if passed) and subject to the passing of resolution 18, the Directors be generally empowered pursuant to section 570 and section 573 of the Act to allot equity securities (as defined by section 560 of the Act) for cash, pursuant to the authority granted by resolution 18 and/or where the allotment constitutes an allotment of equity securities by virtue of section 560(3) of the Act, in each case free of the restriction in section 561 of the Act, such power to be limited:

 

(a) to the allotment of equity securities in connection with an offer of equity securities (but in the case of an allotment pursuant to the authority granted by paragraph (b) of resolution 18, such power shall be limited to the allotment of equity securities in connection with an offer by way of a rights issue only):

 

  (i) to ordinary shareholders in proportion (as nearly as may be practicable) to their existing holdings; and

 

  (ii) to holders of other equity securities (as defined in section 560 of the Act), as required by the rights of those securities or, subject to such rights, as the Directors otherwise consider necessary,

 

  and so that the Directors may impose any limits or restrictions and make any arrangements which they consider necessary or appropriate to deal with treasury shares, fractional entitlements or securities represented by depositary receipts, record dates, legal, regulatory or practical problems in, or under the laws of, any territory or the requirements of any regulatory body or stock exchange or any other matter; and
 

 

6  |  Barclays PLC Notice of Meeting 2016    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

(b) to the allotment of equity securities, pursuant to the authority granted by paragraph (a) of resolution 18 and/or an allotment which constitutes an allotment of equity securities by virtue of section 560(3) of the Act (in each case otherwise than in the circumstances set out in paragraph (a) of this resolution) up to a nominal amount of £420,294,888 representing no more than 10% of the issued ordinary share capital as at 9 March 2016; compliance with that limit shall be calculated, in the case of equity securities which are rights to subscribe for, or to convert securities into, ordinary shares (as defined in section 560 of the Act) by reference to the aggregate nominal amount of relevant shares which may be allotted pursuant to such rights,

such powers to apply (unless previously renewed, varied or revoked by the Company in general meeting) until the end of the AGM in 2017 (or, if earlier, until the close of business on 30 June 2017) but so that the Company may make offers and enter into agreements before the power expires which would, or might, require equity securities to be allotted after the power expires and the Directors may allot equity securities under any such offer or agreement as if the power had not expired.

If we allot new equity securities or sell treasury shares for cash (other than in connection with an employee share scheme or our Scrip Dividend Programme), we are required by the Act to first offer the securities to existing shareholders in proportion to their existing holdings (known as pre-emption rights) but we may seek shareholder approval to disapply pre-emption rights or issue equity securities on a non-pre-emptive basis.

The effect of this resolution is to renew the authority given to us in previous years to allot equity securities (which for these purposes includes the sale of treasury shares) on a non-pre-emptive basis to ordinary shareholders by way of a rights issue, for example where legal or practical difficulties in jurisdictions outside the UK may prevent the allocation of shares on a pro rata basis. As permitted by the revised guidance of the Pre-Emption Group issued in March 2015, this resolution would also allow us to allot a limited number of equity securities for cash (up to approximately 10% of the current issued ordinary share capital) without first offering them to existing shareholders, with 5% to be used for general corporate purposes and the additional 5% to be used only in connection with an acquisition or specified capital investment which is announced contemporaneously with the issue, or which has taken place in the preceding six-month period and is disclosed in the announcement of the issue.

In addition, the Company is again seeking authority under resolution 21 for the issuance of ECNs, or shares to be issued upon conversion or exchange of ECNs, without first offering those equity securities to existing shareholders.

The authority in this resolution 19 would remain in force until the end of the AGM in 2017 or the close of business on 30 June 2017, whichever is the earlier.

We seek annual renewal of this authority in accordance with best practice. We have no current plans to make use of the authority contemplated by this resolution 19 but wish to ensure that the Company has maximum flexibility in managing the Group’s capital resources. The Company does not intend to issue more than 7.5% of its issued ordinary share capital on a non-pre-emptive basis in any three-year period, without prior consultation with shareholders, (save as permitted in connection with an acquisition or specified capital investment as described above), in exercise of the authority contemplated by this resolution 19. However, if passed, resolutions 20 and 21 would allow this level to be exceeded for the issuance of ECNs, or conversion or exchange of ECNs.

Additional general authority to allot equity securities in relation to the issuance of contingent Equity Conversion Notes (ECNs)

20. That, in addition to any authority granted pursuant to resolution 18 (if passed), the Directors be and are hereby generally and unconditionally authorised pursuant to section 551 of the Act to exercise all the powers of the Company to allot shares (as defined in section 540 of the Act) in the Company or grant rights to subscribe for or to convert any security into shares in the Company up to an aggregate nominal amount of £825,000,000 in relation to any issue by the Company or any member of the Barclays Group of ECNs that automatically convert into or are exchanged for ordinary shares in the Company in prescribed circumstances where the Directors consider that such an issuance of ECNs would be desirable in connection with, or for the purposes of, complying with or maintaining compliance with the regulatory capital requirements or targets applicable to the Barclays Group from time to time, such authority to apply (unless previously renewed, varied or revoked by the Company in general meeting) until the end of the AGM of the Company to be held in 2017 (or, if earlier, until the close of business on 30 June 2017) but so that the Company may make offers and enter into agreements before the authority expires which would, or might, require shares to be allotted or rights to subscribe for, or to convert any security into, shares to be granted after the authority expires and the Directors may allot shares or grant such rights under any such offer or agreement as if the authority had not expired.

The effect of this resolution 20 is to give the Directors the authority to allot ECNs, or shares issued upon conversion or exchange of ECNs up to an aggregate nominal amount of £825,000,000, representing approximately 20% of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital as at 9 March 2016. As at 9 March 2016, the Company did not hold any shares in treasury. Please see Appendix 1 for more information on the ECNs.

The authority sought in this resolution 20 renews (and is in the same form as) the authority granted by the Company’s shareholders at each AGM since 2013 in relation to ECNs. Appendix 1 explains how we have calculated the size of the authorities we are seeking. This authority is in addition to the authority proposed in resolution 18, which is the usual authority sought on an annual basis in line with guidance issued by the IA. Although this authority is not contemplated by the guidance issued by the IA, it has been discussed previously with the IA.

The authority sought in this resolution 20 will be utilised as considered desirable to comply with or maintain compliance with regulatory capital requirements or targets applicable to the Barclays Group. The authority will remain in force until the end of the AGM in 2017 or the close of business on 30 June 2017, whichever is earlier. The Company is intending to seek a similar authority on an annual basis.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Notice of Meeting 2016  |  7


Notice of AGM continued

    

    

 

 

Authority to allot equity securities for cash other than on a pro rata basis to shareholders in relation to the issuance of contingent Equity Conversion Notes (ECNs)

21. That, in addition to the power granted pursuant to resolution 19 (if passed), and subject to the passing of resolution 20, the Directors be generally empowered pursuant to section 570 of the Act to allot equity securities (as defined in section 560 of the Act) for cash pursuant to the authority granted by resolution 20, free of the restriction in section 561 of the Act, such power to apply (unless previously renewed, varied or revoked by the Company in general meeting) until the end of the AGM of the Company to be held in 2017 (or, if earlier, until the close of business on 30 June 2017) but so that the Company may make offers and enter into agreements before the power expires which would, or might, require equity securities to be allotted after the power expires and the Directors may allot equity securities under any such offer or agreement as if the power had not expired.

The effect of this resolution 21 is to give the Directors authority to allot ECNs, or shares issued upon conversion or exchange of ECNs, without first offering them to existing shareholders. This will allow the Company to manage its capital in the most efficient and economic way for the benefit of shareholders. If passed, this resolution will authorise the Directors to allot shares and grant rights to subscribe for or to convert any security into shares in the Company on a non-pre-emptive basis up to an aggregate nominal amount of £825,000,000, representing approximately 20% of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital as at 9 March 2016, such authority to be exercised in connection with the issue of ECNs. The authority sought in this resolution 21 renews (and is in the same form as) the authority granted by the Company’s shareholders at each AGM since 2013 in relation to ECNs. Appendix 1 contains more information on the ECNs.

The authority sought in this resolution 21 will be utilised as considered desirable to comply with or maintain compliance with regulatory capital requirements or targets applicable to the Barclays Group. The authority will remain in force until the end of the AGM in 2017 or the close of business on 30 June 2017, whichever is earlier. The Company is intending to seek a similar authority on an annual basis.

Purchase of own shares

 

22. That the Company be generally and unconditionally authorised for the purposes of section 701 of the Act to make market purchases (within the meaning of section 693 of the Act) on the London Stock Exchange of up to an aggregate of 1,681,179,552 ordinary shares of 25p each in its capital, and may hold such shares as treasury shares, provided that:

 

(a) the minimum price (exclusive of expenses) which may be paid for each ordinary share is not less than 25p;

 

(b) the maximum price (exclusive of expenses) which may be paid for each ordinary share shall not be more than the higher of:

 

  (i) 105% of the average of the market values of the ordinary shares (as derived from the Daily Official List of the London Stock Exchange) for the five business days immediately preceding the date on which the purchase is made; and

 

  (ii) the higher of the price of the last independent trade and the highest current independent bid on the trading venues where the purchase is carried out; and

 

(c) unless previously renewed, varied or revoked by the Company in general meeting, the authority conferred by this resolution shall expire at the end of the AGM of the Company to be held in 2017 or the close of business on 30 June 2017, whichever is the earlier (except in relation to any purchase of shares the contract for which was concluded before such date and which would or might be executed wholly or partly after such date).

This resolution would enable the Company to buy back its own ordinary shares in the market. We consider it desirable to have the general authority to do this in order to provide maximum flexibility in the management of the Group’s capital resources. However, we would only use the authority if we were satisfied at the time that to do so would be in the interests of shareholders and would lead to an increase in the Group’s earnings per share.

The authority would be restricted to a maximum of 1,681,179,552 ordinary shares. This is not more than 10% of the issued share capital as at 9 March 2016.

Should we decide to purchase some of the Company’s own shares, existing rights to subscribe for shares would represent a marginally increased proportion of the current issued share capital. Details are as follows:

 

§   the total number of ordinary shares that may be issued on the exercise of outstanding options as at 9 March 2016 is 121,684,625, which represents approximately 0.72% of the issued share capital at that date. As at 9 March 2016 there were no warrants over ordinary shares outstanding

 

§   if the Company were to purchase shares up to the maximum permitted by this resolution, the proportion of ordinary shares subject to outstanding options would represent approximately 0.80% of the issued share capital as at 9 March 2016.

Under the Act, the Company may hold any shares bought back in treasury, which may then either be sold for cash, transferred for the purposes of an employees’ share scheme (subject, if necessary, to approval by shareholders at a general meeting) or cancelled. The Company therefore has the choice of either cancelling or holding in treasury any of its shares that it purchases. If the Company buys any of its shares under the authority given by this resolution, we will decide at the time of purchase whether to cancel them immediately or to hold them in treasury. In relation to treasury shares, we would also have regard to any investor guidelines in relation to the purchase of shares intended to be held in treasury or in relation to their holding or resale which may be in force at the time of any such purchase, holding or resale.

General meetings

23. That the Directors be authorised to call general meetings (other than an AGM) on not less than 14 clear days’ notice, such authority to expire at the end of the AGM of the Company to be held in 2017 or the close of business on 30 June 2017, whichever is the earlier.

The Act requires listed companies to call general meetings on at least 21 clear days’ notice unless shareholders have approved the calling of general meetings at shorter notice. Barclays wishes to retain the option of calling general meetings, other than an AGM, on 14 clear days’ notice and the effect of this resolution is to continue to give the Directors the power to call general meetings on a notice period of not less than 14 clear days. However, as Barclays has a global shareholder base, in practice, we would always aim to give a longer notice period to ensure overseas shareholders in particular are able to participate fully. The 14-day notice period would therefore only be used in exceptional circumstances where the flexibility is merited by the business of the meeting and is thought to be to the advantage of shareholders as a whole. If this authority is used, the Company would then expect to explain, in its next Annual Report, the reasons for taking this exceptional action. The resolution is valid until the end of the AGM in 2017 or the close of business on 30 June 2017, whichever is the earlier, and it is our intention to renew the authority at each AGM. The Company offers the facility for all shareholders to vote by electronic means. This is accessible to all shareholders and would be available if the Company was to call a meeting on 14 clear days’ notice. The Company also provides the ability to appoint proxies electronically through CREST and shareholders can vote online at home.barclays/investorrelations/vote

 

 

8  |  Barclays PLC Notice of Meeting 2016    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

Scrip Dividend Programme

24. That the Directors be authorised to exercise the power contained in Article 132 of the Company’s Articles of Association so that, to the extent and on such terms and conditions determined by the Directors, the holders of ordinary shares be permitted to elect to receive new ordinary shares credited as fully paid instead of cash in respect of all or part of any future dividend (including any interim dividend), declared or paid by the Directors or declared by the Company in a general meeting (as the case may be), during the period commencing on the date of this resolution and ending on the conclusion of the third AGM of the Company following the date of this resolution to the extent that the Directors decide, at their discretion, to offer a scrip dividend alternative in respect of such dividend.

Resolution 24 will renew the Directors’ authority to offer a Scrip Dividend Programme (the ‘Programme’) providing ordinary shareholders with the option to receive new fully paid ordinary shares in Barclays in place of their cash dividend.

The Programme enables Barclays shareholders and Sharestore members to increase their shareholding in the Company without incurring costs or stamp duty. It also allows Barclays greater flexibility in managing our capital resources by retaining cash within the business. The Programme has been popular with shareholders since its inception in 2013, with a 21% take up rate as at 31 December 2015.

The Directors will retain discretion to decide whether to offer a scrip dividend alternative in respect of each future dividend. However, it is the Directors’ current intention to offer the Programme for each dividend paid.

The Directors will also retain discretion to withdraw the offer of a scrip dividend alternative should they feel it is in the best interests of the shareholders to do so.

Further details of the Programme can be found at home.barclays/dividends

The Programme was approved at the 2013 AGM for a five-year period. However, in line with investor protection guidelines, the authority contained in this resolution is sought for three years. Unless circumstances change, we would expect to seek an extension of this authority before it expires.

By order of the Board

 

LOGO

Lawrence Dickinson

Company Secretary

10 March 2016

1 Churchill Place

London E14 5HP

Registered in England, Company No. 48839

    

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Notice of Meeting 2016  |  9


Appendix 1

    

 

    

 

Your questions answered on

Equity Conversion Notes (ECNs)

Why is Barclays seeking renewed authority to issue ECNs?

To continue to operate as a bank, Barclays must meet minimum regulatory capital requirements in the countries in which it operates. To maintain an efficient capital structure that protects the interests of ordinary shareholders under the prudential regulatory requirements (introduced under Capital Requirements Directive (‘CRD IV’) and Prudential Regulation Authority (‘PRA’) guidelines from 1 January 2014), Barclays currently anticipates it will need to hold around 2.0% of its Risk-Weighted Assets (RWAs) in the form of Additional Tier 1 Capital (AT1). AT1 must be in the form of Contingent Capital, sometimes called CoCos. The capital issued to meet this requirement can currently be in the form of Permanent Write Down Notes or ECNs and may be issued by the Company or another member of the Barclays Group.

The Company has issued £5.3bn equivalent of ECNs to date at a £1.65 equivalent conversion price (which would, in the circumstances described below, result in the issue of ordinary shares of an aggregate nominal value of £815m). Shareholder approval is once again being sought in resolutions 20 and 21 (in an amount equal to last year’s annual authority) to authorise the issue of further ECNs (and shares to be issued on conversion or exchange of ECNs) and to provide flexibility to Barclays in managing its capital structure efficiently. Barclays has no current intention to use CoCos as part of compensation structures.

What is a ‘Trigger Event’ and what will happen?

Should Barclays’ Fully-Loaded CRD IV Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio fall below 7% (the Trigger Event), the current outstanding ECNs would be converted into, or exchanged for, new Barclays ordinary shares. Permanent Write Down Notes would cease to have any value upon a Trigger Event.

What steps can Barclays take before or on a Trigger Event?

In advance of and after a Trigger Event Barclays’ management can be expected to take certain actions under the Recovery Plan it is required to maintain by its regulators. Should Barclays’ capital ratios fall, Barclays would be required to commence those planned recovery actions to improve its capital position (e.g., by reducing RWAs, through a rights issue of ordinary shares or by seeking financial support from certain investors) well in advance of a Trigger Event. In the case of the launch of a rights issue, Barclays’ ordinary shareholders would be offered the opportunity to acquire new ordinary shares in proportion to their existing Barclays shareholding (subject to legal, regulatory or practical restrictions).

In addition, should a Trigger Event occur (despite taking recovery actions), the Directors intend to give shareholders the opportunity to purchase the ordinary shares issued on conversion or exchange of existing ECNs on a pro rata basis, where practicable and subject to applicable laws and regulations, at the same conversion price as the holders of the ECNs would have acquired the ordinary shares. This mechanism is known as a Conversion Share Offer and has been written into the terms and conditions of the ECNs issued to date. To the extent permitted by law and regulation, Barclays intends to retain a Conversion Share Offer in future issuances of its ECNs.

The circumstances in which a Trigger Event might be expected to occur are considered to be remote given the level of capital Barclays holds in excess of the trigger level and the recovery actions it would take should such a situation seem likely to arise.

Will all ECNs be in the form of AT1 Capital?

Yes. It is not Barclays’ current intention to issue Tier 2 ECNs.

How does AT1 Capital provide a more efficient capital structure?

Barclays is required to meet minimum regulatory capital levels and intends to maintain a circa 1-1.5% CET1 management buffer above these levels. Meeting these levels with a proportion of ATI is expected to be cheaper than issuing the total amount of CET1 only, therefore resulting in a lower weighted-average cost of capital for shareholders. Issuing AT1 also allows Barclays to reduce the risk that it is restricted in its ability to make certain discretionary distributions, including paying dividends to ordinary shareholders.

At what price will ECNs be converted into or exchanged for ordinary shares?

The terms and conditions for ECNs specify a conversion price or a mechanism for setting a conversion price, which is the rate at which the ECNs will be exchanged for ordinary shares. Barclays has £5.3bn equivalent of ECNs currently outstanding, which were issued at a £1.65 equivalent conversion price. The resolutions continue to give the Directors authority to set the specific terms and conditions of the ECNs (including a conversion price or mechanism for setting a conversion price) after considering market conventions and conditions at the time of issuance.

How have you calculated the size of the authorities you are seeking?

These authorities are set at a level to provide maximum flexibility to Barclays in managing its capital structure efficiently given the dynamic regulatory requirements and market appetite for this form of capital instrument.

 

 

10  |  Barclays PLC Notice of Meeting 2016    home.barclays/annualreport


Notes

  

  

 

 

(a) Entitlements under CREST

Pursuant to Regulation 41 of the Uncertificated Securities Regulations 2001, the Company specifies that only those holders of shares registered in the register of members at 6.00pm on Tuesday, 26 April 2016 shall be entitled to attend or vote at the meeting in respect of the number of shares registered in their name at that time. Changes to entries on the register after 6.00pm on Tuesday, 26 April 2016 shall be disregarded in determining the rights of any person to attend or vote at the meeting.

 

(b) Appointing a proxy

A shareholder who is entitled to attend, speak and vote at the meeting is entitled to appoint one or more people (called proxies) to attend, speak and vote on his/her behalf. They need not be Barclays shareholders. If more than one proxy is appointed, each proxy must be appointed to exercise the rights attached to different shares. A proxy will have the same number of votes on a show of hands as if the shareholder who appointed the proxy was at the meeting.

 

(c) Corporate representatives

A corporate shareholder can appoint one or more corporate representatives who may exercise, on its behalf, all its powers as a corporate shareholder provided that no more than one corporate representative exercises powers over the same share.

 

(d) Persons nominated by shareholders

The right to appoint a proxy does not apply to persons whose shares are held on their behalf by another person and who have been nominated to receive communications from the Company in accordance with section 146 of the Act (‘nominated persons’). Nominated persons may have a right under an agreement with the registered shareholder who holds the shares on their behalf to be appointed (or to have someone else appointed) as a proxy. Alternatively, if nominated persons do not have such a right, or do not wish to exercise it, they may have a right under such an agreement to give instructions to the person holding the shares as to the exercise of voting rights.

 

(e) Documents available for inspection

The following documents, which are available for inspection during usual business hours on any weekday (Saturdays, Sundays and public holidays excluded) at the Company’s registered office, 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP, will also be available for inspection at the Royal Festival Hall from 10.30am on Thursday, 28 April 2016 until the end of the meeting: (i) copies of the executive Directors’ service contracts; and (ii) copies of the non-executive Directors’ letters of appointment.

 

(f) Total shares and voting rights

As at 9 March 2016 (being the latest practicable date before publication of this document), the Company’s issued share capital comprised 16,811,795,522 ordinary shares of 25 pence each.

Each ordinary share carries the right to vote at a general meeting of the Company and, therefore, the total number of voting rights in the Company as at 9 March 2016 was 16,811,795,522.

(g) Forward-looking statements

The appendices to the Notice of AGM contain certain forward-looking statements with respect to Barclays’ expectations of the impact of these resolutions on its regulatory capital requirements. Barclays cautions readers that no forward-looking statement is a guarantee of future events and circumstances and that the actual impact of the resolutions could differ materially from its expectations. Any forward-looking statements made herein speak only as of the date they are made. Except as required by the Prudential Regulation Authority, the Financial Conduct Authority, the London Stock Exchange plc (LSE) or applicable law, Barclays expressly disclaims any obligation or undertaking to release publicly any updates or revisions to any forward-looking statements contained herein to reflect any change in Barclays’ expectations with regard thereto. The reader should, however, consult any additional disclosures that Barclays has made or may make in documents it has published or may publish via the Regulatory News Service of the LSE and/or has filed or may file with the US Securities and Exchange Commission.

 

(h) Shareholder information

A copy of this Notice of AGM and other information required by section 311A of the Act can be found at home.barclays/agm

 

(i) Shareholder right to ask a question

Any shareholder attending the meeting has the right to ask questions. The Company must cause to be answered any such question relating to the business being dealt with at the meeting but no such answer need be given if: (i) to do so would interfere unduly with the preparation for the meeting or involve the disclosure of confidential information, (ii) the answer has already been given on a website in the form of an answer to a question, or (iii) it is undesirable in the interests of the Company or good order of the meeting that the question be answered.

 

(j) Members’ statement of audit concerns

Section 527 of the Act allows shareholders who meet the threshold requirements of that section to require the Company to publish a statement on its website setting out any matter relating to: (i) the audit of the accounts to be laid at the meeting (including the auditor’s report and the conduct of the audit); or (ii) any circumstances connected with the auditor ceasing to hold office since the last meeting at which annual accounts and reports were laid in accordance with section 437 of the Act. This is known as a ‘members’ statement of audit concerns’. If such a request is received, the Company cannot require those shareholders requesting publication of the statement to meet its costs of complying with that request. The Company must also forward a copy of the statement to the auditor at the same time that it makes it available on the website. Where a members’ statement of audit concerns is received it will be included in the business of the meeting at which the accounts are laid.

 

(k) Electronic communication

You may not use any electronic address provided in either this Notice of AGM or any related documents (including the Proxy Form) to communicate with the Company for any purposes other than those expressly stated.

 

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Notice of Meeting 2016  |  11


Shareholders’ Questions and Answers

    

    

 

 

 

Voting arrangements

Who is entitled to vote?

Shareholders who want to attend, speak and vote at the AGM must be entered on the Company’s register of members by no later than 6.00pm on Tuesday, 26 April 2016, or if the AGM is adjourned, no later than 6.00pm two days before the time fixed for the adjourned meeting.

How do I vote?

There are four ways in which you can vote:

 

§   you can vote in person at the AGM

 

§   you can appoint a proxy online to vote on your behalf on our website at home.barclays/investorrelations/vote. You will need your Voting ID, Task ID and Shareholder or Sharestore Reference Number, which are shown on your Proxy Form or Shareholder Voting Instruction Card. Alternatively, you can log into or register at Shareview (www.shareview.co.uk). A proxy appointment made electronically will not be valid if sent to any address other than those provided or if received after 11.00am on Tuesday, 26 April 2016

 

§   you can sign and return your Proxy Form appointing the Chairman or another person to vote for you. You should return your form to our Registrar, Equiniti, in the enclosed pre-paid envelope so that it is received by no later than 11.00am on Tuesday, 26 April 2016

 

§   if you are a CREST member, you may choose to use the CREST electronic proxy appointment service in accordance with the procedures set out in the explanatory notes on the Proxy Form.

You will find details below of how to withdraw your proxy if you change your mind. Completion and return of the Proxy Form will not preclude members from attending and voting at the meeting should they wish to do so.

Voting on resolutions at the AGM will be by poll. This means that you will be asked to complete a Poll Card if you attend in person. We believe that a poll is the best way of representing the views of as many shareholders as possible in the voting process.

What if I plan to attend the AGM and vote in person?

If you want to vote in person at the AGM there is no need to complete your Proxy Form or appoint a proxy online using your Shareholder Voting Instruction Card. Attached to the Proxy Form and on the rear of the Shareholder Voting Instruction Card is a Poll Card for use by those attending the AGM. You should bring the Poll Card with you to the meeting.

If my shares are held in Barclays Sharestore how do I vote?

All Sharestore members can choose to attend, speak and vote at the AGM. If you are a Sharestore member and do not want to attend but do want to vote, you can instruct Equiniti Corporate Nominees Limited to appoint a proxy to vote on your behalf on our website at home.barclays/investorrelations/vote. You will need your Voting ID, Task ID and Sharestore Reference Number, which are shown on your Proxy Form. You can also log into or register at Shareview (www.shareview.co.uk). Alternatively, you can return your Proxy Form so that Equiniti Corporate Nominees Limited can appoint whichever person you name on the Proxy Form to attend and vote on your behalf. If you return the Proxy Form but do not insert the name of your proxy then the Chairman of the meeting will vote on your behalf. To be valid, proxy appointments must be received no later than 11.00am on Tuesday, 26 April 2016.

I have chosen not to receive hard copy shareholder documents, how can I vote?

If you have chosen not to receive hard copy shareholder documents and would like to vote, you can appoint a proxy online at Shareview (www.shareview.co.uk). Alternatively, if you would like to vote by appointing a proxy using a Proxy Form, please contact our Registrar.

I have been nominated by a shareholder to enjoy information rights, can I vote?

No. If you are not a shareholder you do not have a right to vote or to appoint a proxy. However, the agreement that you have with the person who nominated you to enjoy information rights may give you the right to be appointed as their proxy, or to have someone else appointed as a proxy for the AGM and to attend, speak and vote on their behalf. If you have any questions you should contact the registered shareholder (the custodian or broker) who looks after your investment on your behalf.

How will my shares be voted if I appoint a proxy?

The person you name on your Proxy Form must vote in accordance with your instructions. If you do not give them any instructions, a proxy may vote or not vote as he or she sees fit on any business of the AGM. Please see the explanatory notes on the reverse of the Proxy Form.

Can I appoint anyone to be a proxy?

Yes. You can appoint your own choice of proxy or you can appoint the Chairman as your proxy. Your proxy does not need to be a Barclays shareholder. To be valid, proxy appointments must be received no later than 11.00am on Tuesday, 26 April 2016.

Can I appoint more than one proxy?

Yes. You may appoint more than one proxy, provided that each proxy is appointed to exercise rights attached to different shares. You may not appoint more than one proxy to exercise rights attached to the same share. To appoint more than one proxy you should photocopy the Proxy Form and indicate in the box that this is one of multiple instructions.

Can I change my mind once I have appointed a proxy?

Yes. If you change your mind, you can send a written statement to that effect to our Registrar. The statement must arrive with our Registrar by 11.00am on Tuesday, 26 April 2016, or you should bring it along to the AGM.

How will the votes be counted?

Each of the resolutions set out in the Notice of AGM will be voted upon on a poll. The passing of resolutions 1 to 18 and 20 and 24 are determined by a majority of votes. Resolutions 19 and 21 to 23 are being proposed as special resolutions and will therefore require a 75% majority of the votes cast for them to be passed.

Equiniti counts the proxy votes received before the AGM and then counts the votes cast at the AGM. An independent third party, Electoral Reform Services, has been appointed by Barclays to monitor the shareholder voting process.

When will the results of the voting be declared?

The preliminary results of voting on the resolutions to be proposed at the AGM will be displayed in the exhibition area shortly after the AGM. The final results will be announced to the London Stock Exchange and will appear on our website at home.barclays/agm

Corporate shareholders

I am a corporate shareholder – what do I need to do to attend the AGM?

Representatives of shareholders that are corporations will have to produce evidence of their proper appointment when attending the AGM. Please contact our Registrar if you need further guidance on this.

 

 

12  |  Barclays PLC Notice of Meeting 2016    home.barclays/annualreport


    

    

    

 

 

 

Questions

Can I ask a question at the AGM?

Yes, however, questions should only be asked on the specific business of the AGM. If you would like to ask a question at the AGM, you can register your question at the Question Registration Points in the Exhibition Area before the AGM starts. You can also register your question once the AGM has started at the Question Registration Point outside the Meeting Room. Any questions raised but not answered at the meeting will be reviewed by the Chairman after the AGM and a reply will be sent out within 14 days. Shareholders who are unable to attend the meeting still have the opportunity to submit a question to the Board by writing to the Company Secretary at Barclays PLC, 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP or by emailing privateshareholderrelations@barclays.com

 

Please try to keep your questions short and relevant to the business of the AGM. We want all shareholders to have the opportunity to ask questions.

Can I ask a question about customer issues?

If you would like to ask a question about a personal customer matter at the AGM you should go to the Customer Relations Point in the Exhibition Area, which is staffed by Senior Customer Relations personnel.

Can I ask a question about my personal shareholding?

If you would like to ask a question about your personal shareholding you should go to the Shareholder Enquiry Point in the Exhibition Area. This is staffed by our Registrar and Barclays Stockbrokers and will be open both before and after the AGM.

General questions

If you have any further questions about the AGM or your shareholding, please contact our Registrar using the contact details below.

 

LOGO   

Go online

For further information about Barclays, you can find our full Annual Report online at home.barclays/annualreport

 

Do you provide this Notice in alternative formats?

Copies of this Notice are available in large print, Braille or on audio CD.

 

If you would like a copy in any of these forms, please contact our Registrar, Equiniti, on:

 

0371 384 2055* (in the UK); or

 

+44 121 415 7004 (from overseas)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 Shareholder information

 If you need help, contact our Registrar

 

  LOGO   

Web

www.shareview.co.uk

       LOGO   

Telephone

0371 384 2055* (in the UK)

+44 121 415 7004 (from overseas)

  LOGO   

Postal address

Equiniti

Aspect House, Spencer Road, Lancing,

West Sussex BN99 6DA United Kingdom

 *Lines open 8:30am to 5:30pm Monday to Friday, excluding public holidays.

 

  

 

home.barclays/annualreport    Barclays PLC Notice of Meeting 2016  |  13


Additional information for shareholders

attending the Annual General Meeting

 

 

 

LOGO   AGM details

 

 

 
     Location   

 

The AGM will be held at the:

 
     Royal Festival Hall  
     Southbank Centre  
     Belvedere Road  
     London SE1 8XX  
 

 

Date

  

 

Thursday, 28 April 2016

 
 

 

Time

  

 

The AGM will start promptly

 
       at 11:00am  
 

 

You should allow at least 20 minutes for security and registration formalities.

 

 
 

 

LOGO   Schedule for the day

 

 

 
     10:00am   

§    Registration desks open

 
    

 

§   Tea and coffee available

 
    

 

§   Q&A registration opens

 
 

 

11:00am

  

 

§   The AGM starts in the Meeting Room

 
 

 

1:00pm (approximately)

 

  

 

§   Light refreshments available

 after the conclusion of the meeting

 

 
 

 

The final poll results are expected to be released to the London Stock Exchange on Thursday, 28 April 2016. They will be available on home.barclays/agm and will be displayed in reception at 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP.

 

    
 

 

Travelling to the AGM

The nearest tube stations are Waterloo on the Bakerloo, Northern, Jubilee and Waterloo & City lines, Embankment on the District and Circle lines and Charing Cross on the Northern and Bakerloo lines. The nearest overground train stations are Waterloo and Charing Cross. Buses stop on Waterloo Bridge, York Road, Belvedere Road and Stamford Street.

 

LOGO

A map showing the location of the venue can be found above or you can find more information at

www.southbankcentre.co.uk/visiting-us/royal-festival-hall

Helpful information

Security

For safety reasons, security checks will be carried out on entry to the Royal Festival Hall. Please note that you will be asked to leave large bags in the cloakroom and small bags may be searched.

For those shareholders without bags, you will be able to use our ‘Fast Track Security’ which will enable you to gain quicker access to the venue.

Cameras, video recorders or tape recorders should not be used during the AGM. Mobile phones and other electronic communication devices should be turned off.

Cloakroom facilities

Cloakroom facilities will be available in the registration area.

Registration

Attendance Cards should be presented to our Registrar’s staff who will be available as you arrive at the venue. Corporate representatives, proxies, guests and Barclays Stockbrokers clients should register at the registration desks, which will be clearly signposted.

Persons with special needs

The Royal Festival Hall is easily accessible by wheelchair users and has lift access. Barclays colleagues will be on hand to guide you to the lifts.

Speech to text and hearing induction loop facilities will be available at the AGM. The AGM will also be signed.

An audio CD containing extracts from the 2015 Strategic Report is available, free of charge, either on request in writing from our Registrar or at the AGM.

First aid

First aid facilities will be available. Please approach any Barclays colleague should you require help at any time.

Refreshments

Tea and coffee will be available before the AGM. Light refreshments will be available after the meeting.

 

 

14  |  Barclays PLC Notice of Meeting 2016    home.barclays/annualreport


 

 

This report is printed on paper made in the UK using FSC® certified fibre. The printer and manufacturing mill are both accredited with the ISO 14001. Environmental Management System Standards and are both FSC® certified. The mill operates a low carbon policy in accordance with the Government Climate Change Agreement (CCA), helping to reduce the carbon footprint of this document.

Registered office:

1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP

Registered in England.

Registered No: 48839

9914385

Designed by FleishmanHillard Fishburn

www.fhflondon.co.uk

 

LOGO

 

    

 


LOGO

BARCLAYS
Barclays PLC
Proxy Form for the Annual General Meeting (AGM)
The AGM will be held at the Royal Festival Hall, Southbank Centre, Belvedere Road, London SE1 8XX on Thursday, 28 April 2016 at 11:00am
Voting ID:
Task ID:
Shareholder Reference Number:
You can vote your Barclays shares online at home.barclays/investorrelations/vote
or
You can vote your Barclays shares by completing and sending this form back in the enclosed pre-paid envelope. Before completing this form, please read the explanatory notes on the reverse.
I/We hereby appoint the Chairman of the meeting, or as my/our proxy to attend, speak and vote on my/our behalf at the Barclays PLC (the Company) AGM to be held on Thursday, 28 April 2016 and at any adjournment of that meeting.
Resolutions
The full wording of the resolutions and biographical details of all Directors standing for appointment and reappointment at the 2016 AGM are in the Notice of Annual General Meeting which has been sent to you with this form. Please write an X in the For, Against or Vote Withheld box for each resolution below. If you do not complete the boxes below, the person you appoint as proxy can decide whether, and how, he or she votes in relation to any matter which is properly put before the meeting.
Important: fold along this line
For Against Vote Withheld
1. To receive the Reports of the Directors and Auditors and the audited accounts for the year ended 31 December 2015.
2. To approve the Directors’ Remuneration Report (other than the part containing the abridged Directors’ Remuneration Policy) for the year ended 31 December 2015.
3. To appoint Diane Schueneman as a Director of the Company.
4. To appoint Jes Staley as a Director of the Company.
5. To appoint Sir Gerry Grimstone as a Director of the Company.
6. To reappoint Mike Ashley as a Director of the Company.
7. To reappoint Tim Breedon as a Director of the Company.
8. To reappoint Crawford Gillies as a Director of the Company.
9. To reappoint Reuben Jeffery III as a Director of the Company.
10. To reappoint John McFarlane as a Director of the Company.
11. To reappoint Tushar Morzaria as a Director of the Company.
12. To reappoint Dambisa Moyo as a Director of the Company.
13. To reappoint Diane de Saint Victor as a Director of the Company.
14. To reappoint Steve Thieke as a Director of the Company.
For Against Vote Withheld
15. To reappoint PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP as Auditors of the Company.
16. To authorise the Board Audit Committee to set the remuneration of the Auditors.
17. To authorise the Company and its subsidiaries to make political donations and incur political expenditure.
18. To authorise the Directors to allot shares and equity securities.
19. To authorise the Directors to allot equity securities for cash or to sell treasury shares other than on a pro rata basis to shareholders.
20. To authorise the Directors to allot equity securities in relation to the issuance of contingent Equity Conversion Notes.
21. To authorise the Directors to allot equity securities for cash other than on a pro rata basis to shareholders in relation to the issuance of contingent Equity Conversion Notes.
22. To authorise the Company to purchase its own shares.
23. To authorise the Directors to call general meetings (other than an AGM) on not less than 14 clear days’ notice.
24. To authorise the Directors to continue to offer a Scrip Dividend Programme.
Please indicate with an X if this Proxy Form is one of multiple instructions being given. Please refer to note 4 overleaf.
Signature(s)
Date
Please note that your votes must be received by our Registrar no later than 11:00am on Tuesday, 26 April 2016.
2674-191-S
Barclays PLC. Registered in England. Registered No. 48839. Registered office: 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP


LOGO

Barclays PLC
Attendance Card
The AGM will be held at the Royal Festival Hall, Southbank Centre, Belvedere Road, London SE1 8XX on Thursday, 28 April 2016 at 11:00am
BARCLAYS
Information for shareholders attending the 2016 AGM
If you plan to attend the AGM, please bring this card with you. Doors open at 10:00am. Please allow at least 20 minutes for registration. You will be given full instructions on what to do with this card at the appropriate time during the meeting.
Clear space
Travelling to the AGM
The nearest tube stations are Waterloo on the Bakerloo, Northern, Jubilee and Waterloo & City lines, Embankment on the District and Circle lines and Charing Cross on the Northern and Bakerloo lines. The nearest overground train stations are Waterloo and Charing Cross. Buses stop on Waterloo Bridge, York Road, Belvedere Road and Stamford Street.
Blackfriars Bridge
Waterloo Bridge
Charing Cross
Upper Ground
Stamford Street
Royal Festival Hall
Waterloo East
The Cut
Waterloo
Westminster Bridge
Waterloo Road
How to ask a question at the AGM
If you intend to ask a question relating to the business of the meeting
You should register your question at one of the Question Registration Points in the Exhibition Area before the meeting starts. You can also register your question once the AGM has started at the Question Registration Point outside the meeting room. Any questions raised but not answered at the meeting will be reviewed personally by the Chairman following the meeting and a reply will be sent to you within 14 days.
If you would like to ask a question about a personal customer matter
You should go to the Customer Relations Point in the Exhibition Area. This is staffed by Senior Customer Relations personnel who will be available before, during and after the meeting.
If you have a question about your personal shareholding
If you would like to ask a question about your personal shareholding you should go to the Shareholder Enquiry Point in the Exhibition Area. This is staffed by our Registrar and Barclays Stockbrokers and will be open both before and after the AGM.
Have you joined Shareview?
An increasing number of Barclays shareholders are joining Shareview.
We send Shareview members regular, up to date information about their
shareholding and Barclays. You can also update your personal details and
bank details as well as vote your Barclays shares online.
To join Shareview, please follow these three easy steps:
Step 1 Go to shareview.co.uk
Step 2 Register for electronic communications
by following the instructions on screen
Step 3 You will be sent an activation code in the
post the next working day
If you have any questions, please contact our Registrar.
Barclays PLC. Registered in England.
Registered No. 48839. Registered office: 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP.


LOGO

Barclays PLC
Poll card for the Annual General Meeting (AGM)
The AGM will be held at the Royal Festival Hall, Southbank Centre, Belvedere Road, London SE1 8XX on Thursday, 28 April 2016 at 11:00am
BARCLAYS
This card should only be completed during the meeting
Holders of ordinary shares as well as proxies and authorised representatives of corporations are entitled to vote.
Please write an X in the For, Against or Vote Withheld box for each resolution below. If you wish to cast your votes partly For, partly Against or partly Vote Withheld on a resolution, you should write the number of votes cast For, Against or Vote Withheld in the appropriate box.
Signature(s)
Date
Resolutions
For Against Vote Withheld
1. To receive the Reports of the Directors and Auditors and the audited accounts for the year ended 31 December 2015.
2. To approve the Directors’ Remuneration Report (other than the part containing the abridged Directors’ Remuneration Policy) for the year ended 31 December 2015.
3. To appoint Diane Schueneman as a Director of the Company.
4. To appoint Jes Staley as a Director of the Company.
5. To appoint Sir Gerry Grimstone as a Director of the Company.
6. To reappoint Mike Ashley as a Director of the Company.
7. To reappoint Tim Breedon as a Director of the Company.
8. To reappoint Crawford Gillies as a Director of the Company.
9. To reappoint Reuben Jeffery III as a Director of the Company.
10. To reappoint John McFarlane as a Director of the Company.
11. To reappoint Tushar Morzaria as a Director of the Company.
12. To reappoint Dambisa Moyo as a Director of the Company.
13. To reappoint Diane de Saint Victor as a Director of the Company.
14. To reappoint Steve Thieke as a Director of the Company.
For Against Vote Withheld
15. To reappoint PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP as Auditors of the Company.
16. To authorise the Board Audit Committee to set the remuneration of the Auditors.
17. To authorise the Company and its subsidiaries to make political donations and incur political expenditure.
18. To authorise the Directors to allot shares and equity securities.
19. To authorise the Directors to allot equity securities for cash or to sell treasury shares other than on a pro rata basis to shareholders.
20. To authorise the Directors to allot equity securities in relation to the issuance of contingent Equity Conversion Notes.
21. To authorise the Directors to allot equity securities for cash other than on a pro rata basis to shareholders in relation to the issuance of contingent Equity Conversion Notes.
22. To authorise the Company to purchase its own shares.
23. To authorise the Directors to call general meetings (other than an AGM) on not less than 14 clear days’ notice.
24. To authorise the Directors to continue to offer a Scrip Dividend Programme.
Barclays PLC. Registered in England. Registered No. 48839. Registered office: 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP


LOGO

Barclays PLC
Explanatory notes
BARCLAYS
1. Voting
If you want to attend and vote at the Barclays AGM, you must be entered on the Company’s register of members by no later than 6:00pm on Tuesday, 26 April 2016, or if the meeting is adjourned, no later than 6:00pm two days before the time fixed for the adjourned meeting.
2. Vote online
You can appoint a proxy to vote your shares online at home.barclays/investorrelations/vote. To log on you will need your Voting ID, Task ID and Shareholder Reference Number which are printed on the front of this form. Alternatively, you can join Shareview (details on your attendance card). Your votes must be registered by no later than 11:00am on Tuesday, 26 April 2016.
3. Proxy
You are entitled to attend, speak and vote at the AGM or you can appoint one or more people (called proxies) to attend, speak and vote on your behalf. A proxy need not be a Barclays shareholder but must attend the meeting in person.
Write the full name of the person you have chosen as your proxy in the box on the Proxy Form unless you wish to appoint the Chairman of the meeting. If no name is inserted, the Chairman of the meeting will be authorised to vote on your behalf.
Unless you complete the Proxy Form to show how you want them to vote, your proxy or proxies can vote, or not vote, as they see fit, on any matter which is put before the meeting.
4. Multiple proxies
You can appoint more than one proxy, but if more than one proxy is appointed, each proxy must be appointed to exercise the rights attached to different shares. To appoint more than one proxy, please photocopy the Proxy Form and indicate the number of shares that you are authorising them to act as your proxy for. Mark the box on the Proxy Form to show that you have appointed more than one proxy.
5. Revoking your proxy
If you complete the Proxy Form to appoint a proxy or proxies, this will not stop you from attending and voting at the meeting if you later find you are able to do so.
6. Authority and timing
To be valid, you must return this Proxy Form, together with a certified copy of the power of attorney or other authority (if any) under which it is executed, to Equiniti, Aspect House, Spencer Road, Lancing, West Sussex BN99 8JF United Kingdom, in the pre-paid envelope provided, so that it is received by no later than 11:00am on Tuesday, 26 April 2016.
7. Joint shareholders
The signature of any one of the joint holders will be enough to appoint either the Chairman or one or more proxies to attend, speak and vote at the meeting.
8. Vote Withheld
The ‘Vote Withheld’ option is given to enable you to abstain on any particular resolution. The ‘Vote Withheld’ is not a vote in law and will not be counted in the calculation of the proportion of votes ‘For’ or ‘Against’ a resolution.
9. Corporate shareholders
In the case of a corporation, this proxy must be given under its common seal or be signed on its behalf by an officer of the company, an attorney for the company or other persons authorised to sign.
If you are attending as a representative of a shareholder that is a corporation, you will need to show our Registrars evidence that you have been properly appointed as a corporate representative to gain entry to the AGM.
10. Euroclear electronic proxy appointment service (CREST)
If you are a user of the CREST system (including a CREST Personal Member), you may appoint one or more proxies or give an instruction to a proxy by having an appropriate CREST message transmitted. To be valid, the CREST message must be received by the receiving agent (ID RA19) no later than 11:00am on Tuesday, 26 April 2016. For this purpose the time of receipt will be taken to be the time (as determined by the timestamp generated by the CREST system) from which the receiving agent is able to retrieve the message. After this time, changes of instructions to proxies appointed through CREST should be communicated to the proxy by other means. If you are a CREST personal member or other CREST sponsored member, you should contact your CREST sponsor for help with appointing proxies via CREST. For further information on CREST procedures, limitations and system timings, please refer to the CREST Manual (available via www.euroclear.com). The Company may treat as invalid a proxy appointment sent by CREST in the circumstances set out in Regulation 35(5)(a) of the Uncertificated Securities Regulations 2001 (as amended).
Contact our Registrar by:
Web Telephone Postal address
www.shareview.co.uk 0371 384 2055* (in the UK) Equiniti
+44 121 415 7004 (from overseas) Aspect House, Spencer Road, Lancing,
West Sussex BN99 6DA United Kingdom
*Lines open 8:30am to 5:30pm Monday to Friday, excluding public holidays.
Barclays PLC. Registered in England. Registered No. 48839. Registered office: 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP.


LOGO

Barclays PLC Sharestore
Proxy Form for the Annual General Meeting (AGM)
The AGM will be held at the Royal Festival Hall, Southbank Centre, Belvedere Road, London SE1 8XX on Thursday, 28 April 2016 at 11:00am
BARCLAYS
Voting ID:
Task ID:
Sharestore Reference Number:
You can vote your Barclays shares online at home.barclays/investorrelations/vote
or
You can vote your Barclays shares by completing and sending this form back in the enclosed pre-paid envelope. Before completing this form, please read the explanatory notes on the reverse.
I/We hereby instruct Equiniti Corporate Nominees Limited to appoint the Chairman of the meeting, or to attend, speak and vote on my/our behalf at the Barclays PLC (the Company) AGM to be held on Thursday, 28 April 2016 and at any adjournment of that meeting.
Resolutions
The full wording of the resolutions and biographical details of all Directors standing for appointment and reappointment at the 2016 AGM are in the Notice of Annual General Meeting which has been sent to you with this form. Please write an X in the For, Against or Vote Withheld box for each resolution below. If you do not complete the boxes below, the person you appoint as proxy can decide whether, and how, he or she votes in relation to any matter which is properly put before the meeting.
Important: fold along this line
For
Against
Vote Withheld
1. To receive the Reports of the Directors and Auditors and the audited accounts for the year ended 31 December 2015.
2. To approve the Directors’ Remuneration Report (other than the part containing the abridged Directors’ Remuneration Policy) for the year ended 31 December 2015.
3. To appoint Diane Schueneman as a Director of the Company.
4. To appoint Jes Staley as a Director of the Company.
5. To appoint Sir Gerry Grimstone as a Director of the Company.
6. To reappoint Mike Ashley as a Director of the Company.
7. To reappoint Tim Breedon as a Director of the Company.
8. To reappoint Crawford Gillies as a Director of the Company.
9. To reappoint Reuben Jeffery III as a Director of the Company.
10. To reappoint John McFarlane as a Director of the Company.
11. To reappoint Tushar Morzaria as a Director of the Company.
12. To reappoint Dambisa Moyo as a Director of the Company.
13. To reappoint Diane de Saint Victor as a Director of the Company.
14. To reappoint Steve Thieke as a Director of the Company.
For
Against
Vote Withheld
15. To reappoint PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP as Auditors of the Company.
16. To authorise the Board Audit Committee to set the remuneration of the Auditors.
17. To authorise the Company and its subsidiaries to make political donations and incur political expenditure.
18. To authorise the Directors to allot shares and equity securities.
19. To authorise the Directors to allot equity securities for cash or to sell treasury shares other than on a pro rata basis to shareholders.
20. To authorise the Directors to allot equity securities in relation to the issuance of contingent Equity Conversion Notes.
21. To authorise the Directors to allot equity securities for cash other than on a pro rata basis to shareholders in relation to the issuance of contingent Equity Conversion Notes.
22. To authorise the Company to purchase its own shares.
23. To authorise the Directors to call general meetings (other than an AGM) on not less than 14 clear days’ notice.
24. To authorise the Directors to continue to offer a Scrip Dividend Programme.
Please indicate with an X if this Proxy Form is one of multiple instructions being given. Please refer to note 4 overleaf.
Signature(s)
Date
Please note that your votes must be received by Equiniti no later than 11:00am on Tuesday, 26 April 2016.
2674-192-S
Equiniti Financial Services Limited. Registered in England and Wales. Registered No. 6208699. Registered office: Aspect House, Spencer Road, Lancing, West Sussex BN99 6DA, United Kingdom. Barclays PLC. Registered in England. Registered No. 48839. Registered office: 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP.


LOGO

Barclays PLC Sharestore
Attendance Card
The AGM will be held at the Royal Festival Hall, Southbank Centre, Belvedere Road, London SE1 8XX on Thursday, 28 April 2016 at 11:00am
BARCLAYS
Information for shareholders attending the 2016 AGM
Clear space
If you plan to attend the AGM, please bring this card with you. Doors open at 10:00am. Please allow at least 20 minutes for registration. You will be given full instructions on what to do with this card at the appropriate time during the meeting.
Travelling to the AGM
The nearest tube stations are Waterloo on the Bakerloo, Northern, Jubilee and Waterloo & City lines, Embankment on the District and Circle lines and Charing Cross on the Northern and Bakerloo lines. The nearest overground train stations are Waterloo and Charing Cross. Buses stop on Waterloo Bridge, York Road, Belvedere Road and Stamford Street.
Blackfriars Bridge
Waterloo Bridge
Charing Cross
Upper Ground
Royal Festival Hall
Stamford Street
Waterloo East
The Cut
Waterloo
Westminster Bridge
Waterloo Road
How to ask a question at the AGM
If you intend to ask a question relating to the business of the meeting
You should register your question at one of the Question Registration Points in the Exhibition Area before the meeting starts. You can also register your question once the AGM has started at the Question Registration Point outside the meeting room. Questions should only be asked on the specific business of the meeting. Any questions raised but not answered at the meeting will be reviewed personally by the Chairman after the AGM and a reply will be sent to you within 14 days.
If you would like to ask a question about a personal customer matter
You should go to the Customer Relations Point in the Exhibition Area. This is staffed by Senior Customer Relations personnel who will be available before, during and after the meeting.
If you have a question about your personal shareholding
If you would like to ask a question about your personal shareholding you should go to the Shareholder Enquiry Point in the Exhibition Area. This is staffed by Equiniti and Barclays Stockbrokers and will be open both before and after the AGM.
Have you joined Shareview?
An increasing number of Barclays shareholders are joining Shareview. We send Shareview members regular, up to date information about their shareholding and Barclays. You can also update your personal details and bank details as well as vote your Barclays shares online.
To join Shareview, please follow these 3 easy steps:
Step 1 Go to shareview.co.uk
Step 2 Register for electronic communications by following the instructions on screen Step 3 You will be sent an activation code in the post the next working day
If you have any questions, please contact Equiniti.
Equiniti Financial Services Limited. Registered in England and Wales. Registered No. 6208699. Registered office: Aspect House, Spencer Road, Lancing, West Sussex BN99 6DA, United Kingdom. Barclays PLC. Registered in England. Registered No. 48839. Registered office: 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP.


LOGO

Barclays PLC Sharestore
Poll card for the Annual General Meeting (AGM)
The AGM will be held at the Royal Festival Hall, Southbank Centre, Belvedere Road, London SE1 8XX on Thursday, 28 April 2016 at 11:00am
BARCLAYS
This card should only be completed during the meeting
Members of Barclays Sharestore, their proxies and authorised representatives of corporations are entitled to vote.
Signature(s)
Please write an X in the For, Against or Vote Withheld box for each resolution below. If you wish to cast your votes partly For, partly Against or partly Vote Withheld on a resolution, you should write the number of votes cast For, Against or Vote Withheld in the appropriate box.
Date
Resolutions
For Against Vote Withheld
1. To receive the Reports of the Directors and Auditors and the audited accounts for the year ended 31 December 2015.
2. To approve the Directors’ Remuneration Report (other than the part containing the abridged Directors’ Remuneration Policy) for the year ended 31 December 2015.
3. To appoint Diane Schueneman as a Director of the Company.
4. To appoint Jes Staley as a Director of the Company.
5. To appoint Sir Gerry Grimstone as a Director of the Company.
6. To reappoint Mike Ashley as a Director of the Company.
7. To reappoint Tim Breedon as a Director of the Company.
8. To reappoint Crawford Gillies as a Director of the Company.
9. To reappoint Reuben Jeffery III as a Director of the Company.
10. To reappoint John McFarlane as a Director of the Company.
11. To reappoint Tushar Morzaria as a Director of the Company.
12. To reappoint Dambisa Moyo as a Director of the Company.
13. To reappoint Diane de Saint Victor as a Director of the Company.
14. To reappoint Steve Thieke as a Director of the Company.
For Against Vote Withheld
15. To reappoint PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP as Auditors of the Company.
16. To authorise the Board Audit Committee to set the remuneration of the Auditors.
17. To authorise the Company and its subsidiaries to make political donations and incur political expenditure.
18. To authorise the Directors to allot shares and equity securities.
19. To authorise the Directors to allot equity securities for cash or to sell treasury shares other than on a pro rata basis to shareholders.
20. To authorise the Directors to allot equity securities in relation to the issuance of contingent Equity Conversion Notes.
21. To authorise the Directors to allot equity securities for cash other than on a pro rata basis to shareholders in relation to the issuance of contingent Equity Conversion Notes.
22. To authorise the Company to purchase its own shares.
23. To authorise the Directors to call general meetings (other than an AGM) on not less than 14 clear days’ notice.
24. To authorise the Directors to continue to offer a Scrip Dividend Programme.
Equiniti Financial Services Limited. Registered in England and Wales. Registered No. 6208699. Registered office: Aspect House, Spencer Road, Lancing, West Sussex BN99 6DA, United Kingdom. Barclays PLC. Registered in England. Registered No. 48839. Registered office: 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP.


LOGO

Barclays PLC Sharestore
Explanatory notes
BARCLAYS
1. Voting
If you want to attend and vote at the Barclays AGM, you must be entered on the Barclays Sharestore register of members by no later than 6:00pm on Tuesday, 26 April 2016, or if the meeting is adjourned, no later than 6:00pm two days before the time fixed for the adjourned meeting.
2. Vote online
You can appoint a proxy to vote your shares online at home.barclays/investorrelations/vote. To log on you will need your Voting ID, Task ID and Sharestore Reference Number which are printed on the front of this form. Alternatively, you can join Shareview (details on your attendance card). Your votes must be registered by no later than 11:00am on Tuesday, 26 April 2016.
3. Proxy
You are entitled to attend, speak and vote at the AGM or you can appoint one or more people (called proxies) to attend, speak and vote on your behalf. A proxy need not be a Barclays shareholder but must attend the meeting in person.
Write the full name of the person you have chosen as your proxy in the box on the Proxy Form unless you wish to appoint the Chairman of the meeting. If no name is inserted, the Chairman of the meeting will be authorised to vote on your behalf.
Unless you complete the Proxy Form to show how you want them to vote, your proxy or proxies can vote, or not vote, as they see fit, on any matter which is put before the meeting.
4. Multiple proxies
You can appoint more than one proxy, but if more than one proxy is appointed, each proxy must be appointed to exercise the rights attached to different shares. To appoint more than one proxy, please photocopy the Proxy Form and indicate the number of shares that you are authorising them to act as your proxy for. Mark the box on the Proxy Form to show that you have appointed more than one proxy.
5. Revoking your proxy
If you complete the Proxy Form to appoint a proxy or proxies, this will not stop you from attending and voting at the meeting if you later find you are able to do so.
6. Authority and timing
To be valid, you must return this Proxy Form, together with a certified copy of the power of attorney or other authority (if any) under which it is executed, to Equiniti, Aspect House, Spencer Road, Lancing, West Sussex BN99 8JF United Kingdom, in the pre-paid envelope provided, so that it is received by no later than 11:00am on Tuesday, 26 April 2016.
7. Joint Sharestore members
The signature of any one of the joint holders will be enough to appoint either the Chairman or one or more proxies to attend, speak and vote at the meeting.
8. Vote Withheld
The ‘Vote Withheld’ option is given to enable you to abstain on any particular resolution. The ‘Vote Withheld’ is not a vote in law and will not be counted in the calculation of the proportion of votes ‘For’ or ‘Against’ a resolution.
9. Corporate Sharestore members
In the case of a corporation, this proxy must be given under its common seal or be signed on its behalf by an officer of the company, an attorney for the company or other persons authorised to sign.
If you are attending as a representative of a shareholder that is a corporation, you will need to show Equiniti evidence that you have been properly appointed as a corporate representative to gain entry to the AGM.
Contact Equiniti by:
Web Telephone Postal address
www.shareview.co.uk 0371 384 2055* (in the UK) Equiniti
+44 121 415 7004 (from overseas) Aspect House, Spencer Road, Lancing,
West Sussex BN99 6DA United Kingdom
*Lines open 8:30am to 5:30pm Monday to Friday, excluding public holidays.
Equiniti Financial Services Limited. Registered in England and Wales. Registered No. 6208699. Registered office: Aspect House, Spencer Road, Lancing, West Sussex BN99 6DA, United Kingdom.
Barclays PLC. Registered in England. Registered No. 48839. Registered office: 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP.